\
I
r^cfcfr- -1-
\m >
\ . q VOLUME VIII.
'ftMA-k GRAPHOPHOHE PATENTS.
858,763 • 908,411.
July 2, 1907 - Beoember 29, 1908,
" • 878,032
Allison, H. H. 874,819
Ames, Burgess & Traynor 888,682 '
" " ■ 891,196
Anderson, G. J. 892,205 :
Arnold, Osoar 892,494 l
Avlsworth. .T. W. nm kka
Aiken, S. I. 875,309
878,032
874,819
888,682
891,196
892,205
~j.iivi.sA., vowu 892,494
Aylsworth, J. W. 871,554
• * 880,707
Babson & Haug 863,135 "
" " 872,783 -
Baldwin, H. 884,062 "
Baldwin, Nathaniel 869,288 -
Beppler, C. A. 881,843 *
Berens, S. 890,754 v
Berliner, H. S. 873,931 "
Blaokman, J. H. 865,674 '
Bornand & Thoens 873,013 v
Boswell, Robert A. 859,165 '
Boulanger & Delaye 897,053 *
Burgess, Ames & Traynor 888,682
• • " 891,196
Capps & Maodonald
865,716
870,569
Carney & Wearer 867,773
Chapman, ¥. A. 888,306 v
" " 901,781
" " 901,782 "
Cheney, 0. K. 879,363
Chisholm, C. I. 881,546
Cook, C. P.
Cook, W. A.
881,547
881,547
Clay, P. ¥. H. 881,664
" * 900,706 '
Cobb, Wm. S. 906,388 "
Conn, C. G. 903,059 "
Cook, C. P. 890,338 '
878,121 *
!
-2-
Delaye & Boulanger
Dennison, W. N.
Deyineau, Louis
M
n
w
N
Dirzuweit , J. P.
Donaldson, Edwin B.
Douglass, Leon P.
* 0
Duncan, G. ¥.
Dyer & Lewis
Bckhardt, Walter L.
Eifel, Joseph
Elfering, John H.
Emerson, V. H.
English, J. C.
Palk, 0. P.
Pischer, A.
Pitspatriok, ¥.
Pord, A.
Posler, I. a.
Garrard, C. G.
Gibbs, S. W.
Gibson, R. L.
Gleason, E. D.
m m
it p
M H
Goldfaden, S.
Graham, Chas. P.
Gross, H.
Haile, L. T.
» «
»
tt
II
II
Haines , J. E. J.
Hall, P. D.
Hardinge, P.
Hart, Vm.
Hartmann, Carl
Haug, Andrew
Haug & Babson
n it
Haug & Royal
897,053
880,369
v"
861,206
K
865,769
-V
905,855
V
865,574
880,016
865,088
V
902,230
v^
875,790
V
904,853
V
903,364
v'
904,187
/
867,259
^
878,513
y
877,184
Y
877,989
y-
898,201
V
893,230
\y
879,755
904,523
y
885,989
V
838,986
V
878,516
V
861,827
^
883,190
\
868,771
-V
896,006
is'
896,007
V
896,008
V
896,009
</
881,792
V
877,327
v>
861,648
V
873,937
y
880,879
y
883,135
y
888,084
r
892,045
V
895,353
^
870,723
s
895,456
yS
867,821
K
907,794
\S
863,174
\S
863,135
872,783
903,375
I
=f^f
f7T«"
Henry, A.
Higham, D.
Higley, J. M.
Hirsohfelder, J. 0,
N ■
Hoffman, A.
Holden, Delos
Holmes, H. P.
Hood, D. J.
Hough, J. 3.
Houlehan & Mayo
Hoyt, Wm. H.
v w
Hunter, Ita. N.
Hyatt, S. B.
902,579 v
876,350 "
877,842 »
886,056 '
892,520
870,961 "
904,959 v
873,860 "
907.362 ^
907.363 "
905,184 -
879,288
867,975 '
897,254 -
875,352 "
904,875 <
Jadwin, C. C.
Jenkins & O'Meel
Johnoon, S. R.
n •
N n
Joly, Henry
Jones, Junius ¥.
Junod, A.
903,575 *
905,220
865,105 "
888,089 «
896,059-
908,411 "
901,910 "
894,956 >
905,082 ^
Kamrath & Eabe
Kandall, A.
Keating, Bernard S\
Keen, Morris
Kerr, J. S.
Kit see, I.
•
M
It
It
«
N
«
N
«
n
«
«
Klenk, Heinrioh
Kooh, Henry
n m
Konigstein, 0.
« w
Kraemer, Thos.
n it
n
n
M
•
II
It
It
It
N
It
H
It
859,180 ~
902,739 ■*'
885,484 "
907,814 >
901,713 "
871,511 *
874,966 '
877,845 k
896,302 "
900,934
903,193 ""
903.199 '
903.200 *
899,491 '
865.398 -
865.399 "
865,399
881,594 ■
893,929 -
881.322 "
U'
881,322
882,785
885,489
885,490 *
887,657 v
890,142 v
891,079 l
899,874 *
-4-
Landon, J. M.
Leeds & Humpf
Leighton, W. B.
Leyin, Samuel
Lewis & Dyer
Lewis, Prank D.
Lieb, John A.
Longfellow, Henry W. , Jr,
Lyke & Wilkes
893,525 v
897,836 K
872,828 v
870,300 -
890,777
904,853 -
904,884 '
907,383 "
907,826 '
860,110
Maodon&ld & C&pns
Macdonald, T. H.
a m
n
9
m
Martelock, Charles
Marten, Albert S.
Martin, Wro. H.
Matthews & Philpot
Mayo & Houlehan
k-MoCallie, J. M.
Mestraud, Arthur C.
Meyers, C. L.
Miller, Walter H.
Mills, Herbert S.
Mobley, X. H.
n *
n n
Moore, A. T.
Korin, George
Moss, S.
Murphy, P. M.
Murray, John P.
layers, P.
Sfcrgind, J. T,
ITies, Harry
ITororose, I. W.
Herman, P. B.
O'N-uol & Jenkins
O'Heill, A. J.
Patterson, Wm. J.
Philpot & Matthews
Pierman, A.N.
n n
Pratt , Allison A.
Prazak, Erail
865
870
862
873
874
877
378
902
899
385
905
393
879
362
380
866
883
876
863
891
899
865
871
889
060
360
860
837
899
900
872
905
874
897
O k- fit
867
891
864
885
716
569
407
763
973 "
207 »
547 y
590 '
B<30 y
263' -
899 "
301
283 »
501
320 '
950
327 '
006^
612 v
356 ;
256 v
344
725
480
383
604
378
833
464
£76
577
^
v
220
985
774
301
597
367
686
178
\S
/
• 5-
Rate &
Kamrath
Rapke ,
Victor H.
Reiners
>, C, A.
Revell,
, Roland
Rodenberger, W. S.
Roeyer,
I J.
■
■
0
t
Rcsenfield, Win. W.
m »
Rosenthal, Louis
Royal & Haug
Rumpf & Leeds
Runge, 1. C.
Samuel , M.
Schroder, Herman
n n
0 It
ft ft
ft ft
Schubert , Wm.
Sohwan, Julius
Schwank, Ghas. W.
Schwartz, II*
Seaman, Henry B.
Shehle, H.
Sherwood, W, I,
Skelly, Thomas V.
Smith, C. A.
Smith, R. 3.
* n
Scistmann, A, 0.
Stinson, J. H.
ft n
St oc Jeer & Welsh
Stuckey, John C.
Taylor, Horace H,
Terhune, L. L.
Thoena & Bornand
Thoma & Thorna
Traynor, Burgess & Ames
« ft ti
850,
,130
K
879,
,797
l?
866,
,219
«--
867,
,8.36
■■
904,
,453
>/
880,
,100
_ —
883,
,970
Y
883,
,971
'
859,
,114
V
879,
,589
V
887,
,429
1
903,
,375:
897,
,836
- & ■
860
,332
•
895,
,046
•
864
,758
t^
884,
,216
V
890
,534
/
891 ,
,378
</
895
,900
V
865
,435
1
893
OCT
*■
893
,792
V
875
,853
t
853
,763
V
872 ,
,586
1/
871
,370
v>
874
,548
\s
871
,000
V
881
,831
*■
906
,319
\S
873
,908
V
837
,978
c
896
,9^0
V
870
,698
(--
869
,'49
K
906
,469
V
896,
,672
873
,013
873
,969
V
893
,303
\
esa
,632
v «M
891
195
Valiquet, L. P.
834,963
•6-
ii a
V
Wange&arm , A. T. E. 872,592
Wearer & Carney 867,773
Wefcer, Peter 873,029
* * 905 033
Welah & Stooker 370^698
Wheeler, J. *. 873,643 "
Wilkes & Lyke 360,110 u
Winne, H. P. 381,644 "
Wlost, G. A. 393,292 /
Wooster, W. W. 876,673 "
Yerion, S. B, 3£6,552
Youns, Wm. W. 876,035
904,110 "
ZoeftL, T. 878,399
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HENRY B. SEAMAN, OF NEW BRIGHTON, NEW YORK.
PHONOGRAPH-HORN.
No. 858,763.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 2, 1907.
Application filed February 17,1906. Renewed June 3, 1907. Serial No. 377,047.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Henry B. Seaman, of New
Brighton, Staten Island, in the county of Richmond
and State of New York, have invented certain Im-
5 provements in Phonograph-Horns, of which the follow-
ing description, in connection with the accompanying
drawings, is a specification, like letters on the draw-
ings designating like parts.
This invention relates to phonograph horns and has
10 for its ohject the provision of a horn which shall be
free from the raucous noises characteristic of such
horns as constructed at the present day, it being un-
derstood that I contemplate the utilization of my inven-
tion in any field to which it may be adapted by the
15 nature of my improvements.
Many efforts have been made to do away with the
detrimental quality above mentioned, the most re-
cent attempt to accomplish this being what is known
as the "Morning Glory" horn, but I have discovered
20 that the raucous quality proceeds not so much from the
shape of the horn as from the uninterrupted reflec-
tion of the sounds from the sides of the horn, which in
the human throat is prevented by the tonsils, teeth, etc.
Accordingly I have devised baffling means to inter-
25 rupt the sound waves in their progress from the re-
producing device through a phonograph horn, and these
means may take, conveniently, the form of a plate or
gate of which I prefer to provide several within the
horn, arranging them also, preferably, so that they
30 will be adjustable at the will of the operator. By this
means I provide a tortuous passage for the sound
waves, and am enabled to modify the quality of the
tone transmitted by the horn, and also to enable its
volume to be controlled by the operator readily.
35 The various features of my invention will be illus-
trated and described fully in the accompanying draw-
ings and specification and set forth in the claims.
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional
view of a phonograph horn, in the construction of which
40 my improvements have been embodied; Fig. 2 is a
vertical longitudinal section on the line x — x, Fig. 1:
Fig. 3 is a front elevation looking from right to left on
Fig. 2; and Fig. 4 shows a modified form of baffle mem-
ber.
45 In the embodiment of my invention selected for
illustration and description as a convenient form to
enable ready and complete understanding of my im-
provements, the part designated by the reference nu-
meral 1 is a phonograph horn which may be, and is
50 illustrated as, of usual form in its general construc-
tion, and may be of brass or other metal although un-
der certain conditions I may prefer td construct the
same of pasteboard, felt, or other non-metallic mate-
rial.
In accordance with my invention I provide baf-
fling means 2 which in Fig. 1 take the form of a series
of gates mounted on wire spindles 3 which project
through bearings 4 in the sides of the horn, the spin-
dles being provided with handles 5 by bending or
otherwise. As the spindles pass through holes 6 in the
gates, which may be of metal or non-metallic mate-
rial as found most suitable under given conditions, the
spindles may readily be withdrawn and reinstated
through holes 7 provided in the sides of the horn to
enable adjustment of the relative position of the
gates, as it will not always be the case that the gates
need be of the exact diameter of the interior of the
horn at the region where each gate is placed.
In Fig. 2 I have shown the gates as adjusted at dif-
ferent angles to each other, in their dotted line posi-
tion, but it will be observed that the gates may be ar-
ranged in parallelism and that the degree of their an-
gle to the longitudinal axis of the horn may be varied
as desired, and other changes in arrangement and
construction may be adopted as found desirable.
Preferably the gates will not occupy the entire diame-
ter of the horn but a segment will be cut off as shown in
Figs. 1 and 2 so that the sound, even if the gates stand
across the horn may find its way out in a tortuous
manner, and modified form, in accordance with my
invention. One gate as that shown at 8 may, if de-
sired, occupy the entire diameter of the horn when
closed, to shut off the sound substantially entirely.
In Fig. 4 a baffle member 9 of modified construc-
tion, is shown, having teeth 10, and a screw turn han-
dle 11, the teeth acting as does the human teeth to
modify the character of the sound emitted so as to do
away with "the horn tone". The gates< may all be
constructed in this modified form.
Having thus fully illustrated and described my in"
vention, it will be understood that I do not limit my"
self to the specific construction or material described;
nor in general otherwise than as set forth in the claims-
What I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat-
ent is: —
1. The combination with a phonograph trumpet of
means to form a tortuous passage within said trumpet
for the sound waves, to diminish the normal reflection of
said waves from the walls of said trumpet, substantially
as described.
2. A horn for phonographs and the like, said horn hav-
ing a toothed baffle member, substantially as described.
3. A horn for phonographs and the like, said horn hav-
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
858,763
ing a plurality of baffle members arranged at different
angles to the longitudinal axis of said born, to form a
tortuous passage for tbe sound waves, substantially as
described.
5 4. A horn for phonographs and the like, said horn hav-
ing a plurality of internal baffle members, arranged to
form a tortuous passage for the sound waves, substantially
as described.
5. A horn for phonographs and the like, said horn hav-
10 ing a plurality of internal baffle members, alternately
shaped on opposite sides to form a tortuous sound pas-
sage in which the normal reflection of sound waves from
the walls of the horn will be diminished, and the quality
of the sound emitted will be improved by blending said
sound waves. 15
6. As an article of manufacture, a toothed baffle mem-
ber to be inserted within a horn for phonographs or the
like, substantially as described.
Signed at New York in the county of New York and
State of New York this fifteenth day of February A. D. 20
1906.
HENRY B. SEAMAN.
Witnesses :
Alexander C. Proudfit,
Harrx H. Walton.
No. 858,763. PATENTED JULY 2, 1907.
H. B. SEAMAN.
PHONOGRAPH HORN.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 17. 1906. BENEWED JUKE 3, 1907.
jn/E4
W-ne-AAes
jm3
THE NOHff/S PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C-
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM W. ROSENFIELD, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
AUTOMATIC PHONOGRAPH.
No. 859,114.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Patented July 2, 1907.
Original application filed August 5, 1904, Serial No. 219,599. Divided and this application filed January 11, 1907.
Serial No. 351,752,
To all whom it. may concern:
Be it known that I, William W. Rosenfield, a
citizen of the United States, residing at New York
city, county of New York, and State of New York,
5 have invented certain new and useful Improvements
in Automatic Phonographs, fully described and repre-
sented in the following specification and the accom-
panying drawings, forming a part of the same.
This invention relates to . automatically operated
10 phonographs, and more particularly to means for rais-
ing the reproducer from the record and for returning
the parts to normal or starting position.
In accordance with the present invention, the return
mechanism of the phonograph is actuated by a motor
1 5 other than that by which the phonograph is given its
reproducing movements, such additional motor being
preferably an electric motor. By providing such ad-
ditional motor for operating the return mechanism,
the motor by which the phonograph is given its repro-
20 ducing movements is relieved of the work of, actuating
the return mechanism and a much quicker return may
be obtained than would otherwise be possible with such
motors as are ordinarily used for operating the phono-
graph.
25 The invention has been made in connection with
and in some of its features is especially adapted for use
with phonographs provided with means for automat-
ically re-winding the motor by which the phonograph
is given its reproducing movements, and more par-
30 ticularly phonographs of this class in which the phono-
graph is actuated by a spring motor which is automat-
ically re-wound by an electric motor. When the
present invention is applied to such phonograph the
automatic return mechanism may be actuated by the
35 electric re-winding motor, the spring motor being thus
relieved of the work of actuating the return mechan-
ism. The invention is not, however, to be limited in
all its features to a construction in which the return
mechanism is actuated by the rewinding motor, since
40 obviously a special motor might be provided for actuat-
ing the return mechanism, and when such special
motor is provided the invention might be applied to
a phonograph not having a re-winding motor as well as
to one having a re-winding motor.
45 A full understanding of the invention can best be
given by a detailed description of a preferred construc-
tion embodying the various features thereof, and such
a description will now be given in connection with
the accompanying drawings which show the invention
50 as applied to a spring motor actuated phonograph.
In said drawings. Figure 1 is an elevation. Fig. 2
is a plan of a spring motor actuated phonograph of
known construction provided with an automatic return
mechanism and with re-winding means constructed in
accordance with the present invention. Fig. 3 is a 55
viewof parts of the operating mechanism looking from
the back of Figs, i and 2. Fig. 4 is a view, partly in
section on line x — x of Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a view, partly
in section on line y — y of Fig. 2, looking toward the
right. Fig. 6 is a view of parts shown in Fig. 5, but 60
in a different position. Fig. 7 is an enlarged view of
parts of the automatic return mechanism, looking to-
ward the left in Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 8 is a detail view
of the friction coupling interposed between the electric
motor and the spring motor, the friction spring of such 6 5
coupling being removed.
Referring first to Figs. 1 and 2, a represents the bed
of the phonograph, b is the reproducer arm which is
carried by a sleeve V movable on the guide-bar b2 and
the free end of which reproducer arm rests on the sup- 70
porting rail a'.
c represents the feed-screw, and c- the feed nut carried
by the sleeve b' and engaging the under side of the feed
screw for causing the reproducing movement of the
reproducer arm. 75
d represents the mandrel, the shaft of which is con-
nected with the shaft of the feed screw c by gears c'.
The mandrel and feed screw shafts are mounted in bear-
ings 2, 3 and 4. The mandrel shaft is driven by a belt
d' running on a pulley d- on said shaft and a pulley e- on 80
a shaft of the train of gears el of the spring motor e by
which the phonograph is operated in reproducing a
record. These parts are of usual and well known con-
struction, and do not require further description.
Secured to the reproducer arm 6 (see especially Fig. 85
7) is a bracket arm bs which carries an arbor / upon
which an eccentric disk g is revoluble. The arbor /
also supports an adjustable sleeve/' clamped thereto
by the set screw shown in Figs. 2 and 7, the office of
which sleeve will be hereinafter described. The ec- 90
centric or cam disk g is provided with a notched hub g',
and has secured to its face a weight 6, and its periphery
is formed with a notch or low portion 7, with a toothed
portion 8 beyond the low portion 7 and extending to a
high portion, with a tail rib 9 beyond the toothed por- 95
tion, and with a portion 10 which is smooth. Pivotally
connected to the bracket arm b3 is a latch h having a
tooth 11 for engaging the notch in the hub g' , said latch
h being weighted or over-balanced by reason of the po-
sition of its pivot h' so that its tooth 11 normally bears 100
against the hub g' . Said arm also has an end 12 on the
other side of the pivot from the tooth 11 for engaging a
cam rod or arm 13 adjustable longitudinally on a sup-
port 14 secured to the bed a of the phonograph. A re-
turn feed screw i is mounted in bearings 15 upon the 105
bed of the phonograph. This screw shaft preferably
has a spiral groove of coarse pitch compared with the
thread of the feed screw c and is provided with teeth be-
/Z.
2
859,114
tween the convolutions of the groove for a portion of its
length. The shaft of the return feed screw carries fast
thereon a sprocket i' .
I represents the shaft from an electric motor, having
5 at its upper end a worm I meshing with a gear m/
mounted free to rotate upon a horizontally extending
shaft m mounted in bearings in the sides of a casing k,
said worm gear mf having a spur gear m2 formed or se-
cured to rotate with it. The shaft m is driven by the
10 rotation of the gear m', through a slip coupling which
will permit the gear to slip on the shaft when a certain
resistance is offered to the rotation of the shaft. A
suitable form of friction coupling for this purpose is
shown. As shown, a collar 18 is mounted fast on the
15 shaft m at one side of the gears m! and m2, and at the
other side of said gears is a collar 17 also fast on the shaft,
while between the collar 17 and the gears is a notched
flanged sleeve c* held against rotation relatively to the
shaft m by a pin c5 and pressed against the face of the
20 gear m' by a spring 19 one end of which bears against
the collar 17 and the other end against the flange of the
sleeve c4. (Figs. 3 and 8). The shaft m is continued by
means of a coupling shown in Figs. 1 and 3, and termi-
nates in a pinion meshing with a gear through which the
2 5 spring motor e may be rewound.
A shaft n is mounted above the shaft m in bearings 16.
Fast on this shaft is a gear m3 meshing with the gear m2;
also fast on this shaft n is a sprocket n', a chain w passing
around the sprocket n' and to and around the sprocket
30 %' on the shaft of the return feed screw for rotating said
shaft. The shaft n also has fast thereon a pinion n2
meshing with a gear o' mounted upon an arbor o which
is secured in a lug of the casing k. A cam disk s of con-
ducting material is mounted to rotate with the gear o'
35 and is insulated from the gear o' and the arbor o by be-
ing mounted on an insulating disk r secured to the gear
o' '. A spring contact arm t for engaging the periphery
of the cam disk s is secured by a binding-post clamp V
to an insulating post s' fast to a post ks rising from the top
40 plate ¥ of the casing k. A contact spring r2 which con-
stantly bears against the face of the cam disk s is also
secured by a binding-post clamp r' to the insulating-
post s' '. To the binding-post clamps t' and r' are con-
nected wires 20 and 21 respectively of the circuit to the
45 electric motor, so that in the operation of the machine
when the contact arm t engages the cam disk s the cir-
cuit will be closed for operating the motor.
The contact arm t is normally held out of contact with
the cam disk s by means of a rocker arm v pivoted at
50 22 to a bracket arm k2. One end of this rocker arm is
provided with an insulating block v2 adapted to move
. beneath the contact arm t when the latter has been
raised by the high point of the cam disk s, and the
rocker arm is under tension of a spring 23 which tends
55 to swing the rocker arm on its pivot to move the block
v2 toward and beneath the end of the contact arm. The
other end of the rocker arm is provided with a foot
piece i/ which lies in the path of movement of the
sleeve f carried by the arbor / in position to be en-
60 gaged thereby as the reproducer arm approaches the
end of its reproducing movement.
The position of the parts as shown in Figs. 1 and 2 is
that assumed by them at the end of the reproducing
movement of the phonograph preparatory to the return
65 of the reproducer arm to an initial or original position
either to repeat the record or to reproduce from another
record. In these figures the position of the rocker-arm
v and the spring contact arm t is as represented in Fig.
5, while the position of these parts during the repro-
duction of the record and before the arbor / and its 70
sleeve f reach the limit of their movement is that rep-
resented in Fig. 6 — that is to say — with the insulating-
block v2 moved beneath and supporting the free end of
the spring arm t, in which position the electric circuit
is broken and the electric motor not running. As 75
shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the extreme advance move-
ment of the reproducer arm and arbor / have brought
the end of the sleeve /' in contact with the foot-piece
v/ and the rocker-arm v has been thereby swung on its
pivot to remove the insulating-block v2 from beneath 80
the end of the spring arm t, allowing the same to drop
into contact with the periphery of the cam disk s so as
to complete the electric circuit through the wire 20,
binding post clamp £', arm t, cam disk s, contact spring
r2, binding post clamp r' and wire 21, thereby starting 85
the electric motor. The insulating block v2 is then
held against the side of the arm t by the action of the
spring 23 until the arm t is again raised by the cam
disk s to permit the block v2 to again move beneath the
arm t. The electric motor being thus started, the rota- 90
tion of the shaft I and worm-wheel V drives the gears
mf and m2, and the shaft m is frictionally driven
through the friction coupling formed by the collar 17
and 18, the sleeve c4 and the spring 19 thereby winding
up the spring motor e. Simultaneously the gear m2 95
causes the rotation of the gear m? and the shaft n,
which through the sprocket n/, the chain w and the
sprocket i' drives the return feed screw i, and the shaft
n through the pinion n2 also rotates the gear o' and the
cam disk s, these parts being so timed and propor- 100
tioned that the cam disk is not given a complete rota-
tion until the return feed screw has been given a rota-
tion more than sufficient to effect the raising of the re-
producer arm and its complete return movement and
lowering again to its operative position. 105
When the return feed screw i begins to rotate the
teeth thereof engage and mesh with the teeth 8 of the
eccentric disk g (see Fig. 7) and the disk is thereby ro-
tated to cause successive portions of its toothed cam pe-
riphery to engage the return feed screw thereby raising 110
the bracket arm b3 and reproducer arm b to raise the
reproducer from the record and move the feed nut from
the feed screw c until the teeth 8 have paid out and the
tail rib 9 of this eccentric disk has settled into the groove
of the return feed screw i. The tooth 11 of the latch h 115
then drops into the notch of the hub g' and holds the
eccentric disk against further turning, and the disk,
the arm b3 and the reproducer arm b are then by the
continued rotation of the return feed screw given a re-
turn movement until the end 12 of the latch h runs 120
under the bent end of the arm 13 whereby the end 12
of the latch is pressed down and the tooth 11 with-
drawn from the notch in the hub g' . The eccentric
disk g is thereby released and resting oh the return feed
screw it is turned thereby to bring successive portions of 125
the portion 10 of its cam periphery in engagement with
the shaft, whereby the bracket arm b3 and the repro-
ducer arm are gradually lowered until the reproducer is
returned to operative position and the feed nut is again
in engagement with the feed screw c. The turning of 13y
859,114
the disk g will continue until its periphery clears the
return feed screw, after which, during any further rota-
tion of the return feed screw and during the next repro-
ducing movement of the reproducer arm, the disk will
5 be held by the weight 6 in position with its low portion
7 opposite the return feed screw and with the shoulder
formed by the first of its teeth 8 bearing against the
return feed screw ready to be engaged by the teeth of
the return feed screw when the latter is rotated for the
10 next return movement. The rotation of the return
feed screw continues until the end of the contact arm t
is raised by the cam disk s to permit the block v2 of the
rocker arm v to move under the end of the contact arm
and until the high point of the cam disk has then moved
1 5 beyond and out of contact with the contact arm , thereby
breaking the circuit and stopping the electric motor.
To insure the full return movement of the repro-
ducer arm, the amount of rotation given to the return
feed screw is preferably, and as before pointed out,
20 more than sufficient to effect the elevation, return and
lowering of the reproducer arm with the longest record
which the machine is adapted to reproduce . The return
feed screw will thus continue to rotate after the repro-
ducer arm has been returned and lowered; and to pre-
25 vent the eccentric disk g, which then rests with the
first of its teeth 8 bearing against the return feed screw,
from being tinned by such further rotation of the return
. feed screw, the portion of the return feed screw against
which the disk g then rests is circumferentially smooth,
3 0 the gear teeth of the return feed screw extending only
for a part of the length of the screw from the other end
thereof.
If the spring motor e is allowed to continue in opera-
tion after the return of the reproducer arm and the
35 feed nut to operative position, the phonograph will be
again actuated thereby for again reproducing the rec-
ord, the electric motor meanwhile remaining at rest
until the reproducer arm nears the end of its reproduc-
ing movement, at which time the sleeve/' will again
40 engage the foot piece v' to swing the rocker arm v to
carry the black t2 from under the contact arm t and
permit the contact arm to spring into contact with the
periphery of the cam disk s, thereby again closing the
circuit for causing the electric motor to operate to re-
45 wind the spring motor and to rotate the return feed
screw for again returning the reproducer arm to its ini-
tial or starting position. Evidently, however, suit-
able means may be provided for stopping the opera-
tion of the spring motor before the return movement
50 of the reproducer arm has been completed, and when
such means is provided the entire mechanism will re-
main at rest after the return movement of the repro-
ducer arm has been completed and until the spring
motor is again put in operation, whereupon the repro-
55 ducing and return movements of the phonograph and
the rewinding of the spring motor will again be effect-
ed in order and repeated until the spring motor is
again stopped.
By adjustment of the sleeve/' and the cam rod 13,
60 the mechanism may be adapted for records of varying
length so that the reproducing devices shall operate
only over the length of the actual record, thus avoid-
ing waste of time and unnecessary movement of the
parts.
65 To insure full rewinding of the spring motor with
the longest record which the machine is adapted to re-
produce, the amount of rotation given to the worm
gear m' at- each operation of the electric motor will
preferably be more than sufficient to rewind the spring
motor to the tension to which it was wound before the 7 0
commencement of the reproducing movement, and the
friction coupling between the worm gear and the re-
winding shaft m is provided for the purpose of per-
mitting continued movement of the worm gear after
the spring motor has been fully rewound, the resist- 75
ance to the rotation of the shaft m being sufficient to
cause the parts of the coupling to slip.
It will be seen that with the construction shown,
the return movement of the reciprocating part of the
phonograph, that is the reproducer arm in the con- 80
struction shown, is effected entirely by the power of
the electric motor and does not add at all to the work
to be performed by and cannot effect the operation of
the spring motor.
It will be understood that the invention is not to be 85
limited to the exact construction and arrangement of
parts shown in the drawings and to which the forego-
ing description has been mainly confined, but that it
includes changes and modifications thereof within the
claims. It will be understood also that features of the 90
invention may be employed independently of other
features thereof, and that the invention or features
' thereof may be applied to other forms of phonographs
from that shown. It will be understood also that the
term "phonograph" is used herein as a broad term to 95
include all sound reproducing machines to which the
invention is or may be found applicable.
Features of invention contained in the construction
shown and not claimed herein are claimed in my origi-
nal application No. 219,599, filed August 5, 1904, of 100
which this application is a division.
I claim as my invention.
1. The combination with a phonograph and a motor for
actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of
means for automatically storing power in said motor, and 105
automatic return mechanism actuated by said means, sub-
stantially as described.
2. The combination with a phonograph and a motor for
actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of a
second motor for storing power in the first motor, and HO
automatic return mechanism actuated by the second motor
for returning the reciprocating member of the phonograph
to normal position, substantially as described.
3. The combination with a phonograph and a motor for
actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of a 115
second motor, automatically operated means for causing
power to be stored in the first motor by the operation of
the second motor after the reproduction of a record, and
automatic return mechanism actuated by the second motor
for returning the reciprocating member of the phonograph 120
to normal position, substantially as described.
i. The combination with a phonograph and a motor for
actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of a
second motor, automatically operated means for causing
power to be stored in the first motor by the operation of 125
the second motor after the reproduction of a record, and
means actuated by the second motor for causing a relative
separating movement between the reproducer of the phono-
graph and the record for the return of the reciprocating
member of the phonograph to normal position, substan- 130
tially as described.
5. The combination with a phonograph and a motor for
actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of a
second motor, a normally non-rotating return feed screw,
means co-operating with the return feed screw for return- 135
ing the reciprocating member of the phonograph to nor-
859,114
20
25
mal position, connections between the first motor and the
return feed screw and the second motor for causing the
return feed screw to be rotated and power to be stored in
the first motor by the operation of the second motor, and
5 means controlled by the movement of the reciprocating
member of the phonograph for causing the second motor
to operate after the reproduction of a record, substantially
as described.
6. The combination with a phonograph and a motor for
10 actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of an
electric motor, connections for storing power in the first
motor by the operation of the electric motor, automatic
return mechanism operated by the electric motor for re-
turning the reciprocating member of the phonograph to
15 normal position, and means controlled by the movement
of the reciprocating member of the phonograph for closing
the circuit to the electric motor after the reproduction of
a record, substantially as described.
7. The combination with a phonograph and a motor for
actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of an
electric motor, a return feed screw, means co-operating
with the return feed screw for returning the reciprocat-
ing member of the phonograph to normal position, and
connections between the first motor and the return feed
screw and the electric motor for causing the return feed
screw to be rotated and power to be stored in the first
motor by the operating of the electric motor, substantially
as described.
8. The combination with a phonograph and a spring
30 motor for actuating the phonograph in reproducing a
record, of a second motor and connections for rewinding
the spring motor, and automatic return mechanism actu-
ated by the second motor for returning the reciprocating
member of the phonograph to normal position, substan-
35 tially as described.
9. The combination with a phonograph and a spring
motor for actuating the phonograph in reproducing a
record, of a second motor and connections for rewinding
the spring motor, and means actuated by the second
40 motor for causing a relative separating movement be-
tween the reproducer of the phonograph and the record
for the return of the reciprocating member of the phono-
graph to normal position, substantially as described.
10. The combination with a phonograph and a motor
45 for actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of
a second motor, and automatic return mechanism actu-
ated by the second motor for returning the reciprocating
member of the phonograph to normal position, substan-
tially as described.
50 11. The combination with a phonograph and a motor
for actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of
a second motor, means actuated by the second motor for
causing a relative separating movement between the re-
producer of the phonograph and the record for the return
55 of the reciprocating member of the phonograph to normal
position, and means controlled by the movement of a part
actuated by the first said motor for causing said means for
separating the reproduce,!' and the record to be actuated
by the second motor, substantially as described.
60 12. The combination with a phonograph having a re-
ciprocating reproducer carrier and with a motor for actu-
ating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of a second
motor, and means actuated by the second motor for auto-
matically raising the reproducer and returning the repro-
65 ducer carrier to normal position, substantially as de-
scribed.
13. The combination with a phonograph having a re-
ciprocating reproducer carrier and with a motor for actu-
ating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of an elec-
70 trie motor, and means actuated by the electric motor for
raising the reproducer and returning the reproducer car-
rier to normal position, substantially as described.
14. The combination with a phonograph and a motor
for actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of
75 electrically operated means independent of said motor for
returning the reciprocating member of said phonograph to
normal position, and means controlled by the movement, of
a part actuated by the first said motor for closing the cir-
cuit for the operation of said electrically operated means,
80 substantially as described.
15. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier and with a motor for actuat-
ing the phonograph in reproducing a record, of a second
motor, automatically operated means for causing power to
be stored in the first motor by the operation of the second 85
motor, and means actuated by the second motor for rais-
ing the reproducer and returning the reproducer carrier to
normal position, substantially as described.
16. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier and with a motor for actuat- 90
ing the phonograph in reproducing a record, of a second
motor, a return feed screw, means for co-operating with
the return feed screw for raising the reproducer and for
returning the reproducer carrier to normal position, and
connections between the first motor and the return feed 95
screw and the second motor for causing the return feed
screw to be rotated and power to be stored in the first
motor by the operation of the second motor, substantially
as described.
17. The combination with a phonograph having a recip- 100
rocating reproducer carrier and with a motor for actuat-
ing the phonograph in reproducing a record, of a second
motor, a normally non-rotating return feed screw, a cam
disk mounted to move with the reproducer carrier in posi-
tion to co-operate with the return feed screw, and connec- 105
tions between the first motor and the return feed screw and
the second motor for-causing the return feed screw to be ro-
tated and power to be stored in the first motor by the op-
eration of the second motor, the rotation of the return
feed screw causing first a turning of the cam disk to cause 110
successive portions of its cam periphery to successively
engage the return feed screw to raise the reproducer and
then a movement of the cam disk longitudinally of the re-
turn feed screw to impart a return- movement to the repro-
ducer carrier, substantially as described. H5
18. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier and with a motor for actuat-
ing the phonograph in reproducing a record, of a second
motor, a normally non-rotating return feed screw having
gear teeth at and near one end, a cam disk mounted to move 120
with the reproducer carrier in position to co-act with the
return feed screw and to turn at substantially right angles
to the line of the return feed screw, said disk having a
portion of its periphery of progressively increasing radius
provided with gear teeth to co-act with the teeth of the 125
return feed screw and having a portion beyond the toothed
portion to co-act with the thread of the return feed 'screw,
connections between the first motor and the return feed
screw and the second motor for causing the return feed
screw to be rotated and power to be stored in the first 130
motor by the operation of the second motor, and means
controlled by the movement of the reproducer carrier for
causing the second motor to operate after the reproduc-
tion of a record, substantially as described.
19. The combination with a phonograph having a recip- 135
rocating reproducer carrier and with a motor for actuat-
ing the phonograph in reproducing a record, of a nor-
mally non-rotating return feed screw having gear teeth at
and near one end thereof, a second motor for driving the
return feed screw, a device for co-operating with the re- 140
turn feed screw for returning the reproducer carrier to
normal position, said device having a part to co-act with
the gear teeth of the return feed screw for raising the
reproducer and being mounted to move with the repro-
ducer carrier in position to co-act with the gear teeth of 145
the return feed screw when the latter is rotated, and
automatically operated means for causing the return feed
screw to be rotated by the second motor during the inter-
val between successive reproductions of a record or rec-
ords, substantially as described. 150
20. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier, of a return feed screw having
gear teeth at and near one end thereof and having it sur-
face at and near the other end circumferentially smooth, a
device for co-operating with the return feed screw for re- 155
turning the reproducer carrier to normal position, said de-
vice having a part to co-act with the gear teeth of the re-
turn feed screw for raising the reproducer and being
mounted to move with the reproducer carrier in position to
co-act with the gear teeth of the return feed screw when 160
_
859,114
3
the latter is rotated, and means for causing the return
feed screw to rotate for the return movement of the repro-
ducer carrier and to remain stationary during the latter
part of the reproducing movement of the reproducer car-
5 ricr, substantially as described.
21. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier, of a return feed screw having
gear teeth at and near one end thereof and having its sur-
face at and near the other end circumferentially smooth, a
10 cam disk mounted to move with the reproducer carrier and
in position to co-act with the return feed screw and
mounted to turn at substantially right angles to the line
of the return feed screw, said disk having a portion of its
periphery of progressively increasing radius provided with
15 gear teeth to eo-act with the gear teeth of the return feed
screw and having a portion beyond the toothed portion
formed to co-act with the thread of the return feed screw
and having a portion of progressively decreasing radius
extending from said thread co-acting portion and having
20 the first tooth of its toothed portion extending radially
beyond the adjacent low portion of its periphery, and
means for rotating the return feed screw for the return
movement of the reproducer carrier and for holding the
same stationary during the reproduction of a record, sub-
25 stantially as described.
22. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier and with a motor for actuating
the phonograph in reproducing a record, of an electric mo-
tor, means actuated by the electric motor for raising the
30 reproducer and returning the reproducer carrier to normal
position, means controlled by the movement of the repro-
ducer carrier for closing the circuit to the electric motor
when the reproducer carrier has reached a certain point in
its reproducing movement, and adjustable means for deter-
35 mining the point in the reproducing movement of the re-
producer carrier at which the circuit to the electric motor
shall he closed, substantially as described.
23. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier and with a motor for actuating
40 the phonograph in reproducing a record, of an electric mo-
tor, connections for storing power in the first motor by the
operation of the electric motor, means actuated by the elec-
tric motor for raising the reproducer and returning the re-
producer carrier to normal position, means controlled by
45 the movement of the reproducer carrier for closing the cir-
cuit to the electric motor when the reproducer carrier has
reached a certain point in its reproducing movement, and
adjustable means for determining the point in the repro-
ducing movement of the reproducer carrier at which the
50 circuit to the electric motor shall be closed, substantially
as described.
24. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier and with a motor for actuating
the phonograph in reproducing a record, of an electric mo-
55 tor, connections for storing power in the first motor by the
operation of the electric motor, return mechanism operated
by the electric motor for returning the reproducer carrier
to normal position, means controlled by the movement of
the reproducer carrier for closing the circuit to the electric
60 motor when the reproducer carrier has reached a certain
point in its reproducing movement, and adjustable means
for determining the point in the reproducing movement of
the reproducer carrier at which the circuit to the electric
motor shall be closed, substantially as described.
65 25. The combination with a phonograph and with a mo-
tor for actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record,
of an electric motor, connections for storing power in the
first motor by the operation of the electric motor, return
mechanism actuated by the electric motor for returning
70 the reciprocating member of the phonograph to normal po-
sition, means controlled by the movement of a part actu-
ated by the first motor for closing the circuit to the electric
motor, and adjustable means for determining the time of
closing of the circuit to the electric motor with relation to
75 the operation of the phonograph, substantially as de-
scribed.
26. The combination with a phonograph, and with a mo-
tor for actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record,
of a second motor for storing power in the first motor, re-
80 turn mechanism actuated by the second motor for return-
ing the reciprocating member of the phonograph to normal
position, means for causing the second motor to operate
after a certain operation of the phonograph, and adjust-
able means for varying the time at which the second motor
in caused to operate with relation to the operation of the 85
phonograph, substantially as described.
27. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier, of a normally non-rotating re-
turn feed screw, a device mounted to move with the repro-
ducer carrier for co-operating with the return feed screw 90
for raising the reproducer and for returning the reproducer
carrier to normal position, means controlled by the move-
ment of the reproducer carrier for causing the return feed
screw to rotate after the reproduction of a record for op-
erating said device to raise the reproducer and return the 95
reproducer carrier .to normal position, adjustable means
for determining the point in the reproducing movement of
the reproducer carrier at which said device is operated by
the return feed screw to raise the reproducer and means
for' causing the reproducer to be lowered again -to opera- 100
tive position at the end of the return movement of the re-
producer carrier, said last mentioned means being adjust-
able for determining the point in the return movement of
the reproducer carrier at which the reproducer shall be
lowered to operative position, substantialy as described. 105
28. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier, of a normally non-rotating re-
turn feed screw, a device mounted to move with the repro-
ducer carrier for co-operating with the return feed screw
for raising the reproducer and for returning the reproducer hq
carrier to normal position, means controlled by the move-
ment of the reproducer carrier for causing the return feed
screw to rotate after the reproduction of a record for oper-
ating said device to raise the reproducer and return the re-
producer carried to normal position, and means for causing H5
the reproducer to be lowered again to operative position at
the end of the return movement of the reproducer carrier,
said last mentioned means being. adjustable for determin-
ing the point in the return movement of the reproducer •
carrier at which the reproducer shall be lowered to oper- 120
ative position, substantially as described.
29. The combination with a phonograph and a motor for
actuating the phonograph in reproducing a record, of an
electric motor, return mechanism actuated by the electric
motor for returning the reciprocating member of the phono- 125
graph to normal position, means controlled by the move-
ment of a part of the phonograph for closing the circuit to
the electric motor, and means controlled by the electric mo-
tor for opening said circuit, substantially as described.
30. The combination with a phonograph having a recip- 13 0
rocating reproducer carrier, of a norinally non-rotating re-
turn feed screw, means for co-operating with the return
feed screw for raising the reproducer and for returning the
reproducer carrier to normal position, and means for caus-
ing the return feed screw to rotate for the return move- 135
ment of the reproducer carrier during the interval between
successive reproductions of a record or records, substan-
tially as described.
31. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier, of a normally non-rotating re- 140
turn feed screw, means for co-operating with the return
feed screw for raising the reproducer and for returning the
reproducer carrier to normal position, and means controlled
by the movement of the reproducer carrier for causing the
return feed screw to rotate for the return movement of the 145
reproducer carrier after the reproduction of a record, sub-
stantially as described.
32. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier, of an intermittently rotating
return feed screw, and means for co-operating with the 150
return feed screw for raising the reproducer and for re-
turning the reproducer carrier to normal position, substan-
tially as described.
33. The combination with a phonograph, of a normally
non-rotating return feed screw, means for co-operating 155
with the return feed screw for returning the reciprocating
member of the phonograph to normal position, and means
for causing the return feed screw to rotate for the return
movement of the reciprocating member of the phonograph,
substantially as described. 160
859,114
34. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier, of a return feed screw having
gear teeth at and near one end thereof, a device mounted
to move with the reproducer carrier and movable at sub-
5 stantially right angles to the line of the return feed screw
and having a thread engaging part for engaging the
thread of the return feed screw to impart a return move-
ment to the reproducer carrier and to support the repro-
ducer carrier during its return movement, and having a
10 part to co-act with the gear teeth of the return feed screw
for moving said device in the direction at substantially
right angles to the line of the return feed screw to raise
the reproducer carrier and to bring the thread engaging
part of said device into engagement with the thread of
15 the return feed screw, said device being supported during
the latter part of the reproducing movement of the repro-
ducer carrier in position to have its gear engaging portion
engaged by the gear teeth of the return feed screw when
the latter is rotated, and means for causing the return
20 feed screw to rotate for the return movement of the re-
producer carrier and to remain stationary during the
latter part of the reproducing movement of the reproducer
carrier, substantially as described.
35. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
25 rocating reproducer carrier, of a return feed screw having
gear teeth at and near one end thereof and having its sur-
face at and near the other end circumferentially smooth, a
device mounted to move with the reproducer carrier and
movable at substantially right angles to the line of the
30 return feed screw and having a thread engaging part for
engaging the thread of the return feed screw to impart a
return movement to the reproducer carrier and to support
the reproducer carrier during its return movement, and
having a part to co-act with the gear teeth of the return
35 feed screw for moving said device in the direction at sub
stantially right angles to the line of the return feed screw
to raise the reproducer carrier and to bring the thread
engaging part of said device into engagement with the
thread of the return feed screw, said device being support-
40 ed during the reproducing movement of the reproducer
carrier with its gear engaging portion resting against the
return feed screw, and means for causing the return feed
screw to rotate for the return movement of the reproducer
carrier and to remain stationary during the latter part of
45 the reproducing movement of the reproducer carrier, sub-
stantially as described.
36. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier, of a return feed screw, a de-
vice mounted to move with the reproducer carrier and
having a part for engaging the return feed screw to im- 50
part a return movement to the reproducer carrier and to
support the reproducer carrier during its return move-
ment, means rotating with the return feed screw and ex-
tending longitudinally thereof at and near one end thereof
for engaging said device to raise the reproducer carrier 55
and to move said device to bring its thread engaging part
into engagement with the thread of the return feed screw,
said device being supported during the latter part of the
reproducing movement of the reproducer carrier in posi-
tion to be engaged by said means rotating with the re- 60
turn feed screw, and means for causing the return feed
screw to rotate for the return movement of the reproducer
carrier and to remain stationary during the latter part of
the reproducing movement of the reproducer carrier, sub-
stantially as described. 65
37. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier, of a return feed screw, a part
mounted to move with the reproducer carrier for co-oper-
ating with the return feed screw for returning the repro-
ducer carrier to normal position, means rotating with the 70
return feed screw to cause the reproducer to be raised and
to cause said part to move into operative engagement with
the return feed screw, and means for causing the return
feed screw to rotate for the return movement of the re-
producer carrier and to remain stationary during the lat- 75
ter part of the reproducing movement of the reproducer
carrier, substantially as described.
38. The combination with a phonograph having a recip-
rocating reproducer carrier, of normally non-rotating ro-
tary means mounted with its axis substantially parallel 80
with the direction of movement of the reproducer carrier,
a lifting device for co-acting with said rotary means
mounted to move with the reproducer carrier and sup-
ported in position to be engaged by said rotary means as
the reproducer reaches the end of its reproducing move- 85
ment, and means for causing said rotary means to rotate
to co-act with said lifting device to raise the reproducer
for its return movement, substantially as described.
In testimony whereof, I have hereunto set my hand, in
the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
WILLIAM W. ROSENFIELD.
Witnesses :
A. White,
A. L. Kent.
No. 859,114.
^
*
PATENTED JULY 2, 1907.
W. W. ROSENFIELD.
AUTOMATIC PHONOGRAPH.
APPLIOATIOI FILED J AH. 11, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
K>
ffic£rce,sse,s
a.
1 THE SORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. D, C
No. 859,114.
PATENTED JULY 2, 1907.
W. W. ROSENFIELD.
AUTOMATIC PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED JAH. 11, 1907. 2 SHEET8-8HBET 2.
n.
THE MORRIS PV.TERS CO., WMSMI HGTOM. O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ROBERT A. BOSWELL, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA.
SOUND-CONVEYING TUBE FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 859,165.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed October 7, 1905. Serial No. 281,765,
Patented July 2, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that Robert A. Boswell, a citizen of
the United States, residing at Washington, in the Dis-
trict of Columbia, have invented a certain new and
5 useful Sound-Conveying Tube for Talking-Machines,
of which the following is a description, reference being
had to the accompanying drawing and to the figures
of reference marked thereon.
This invention relates to sound conveying tubes for
10 talking machines, particularly talking machines of the
disk type, and has for its object to provide a simple,
inexpensive and efficient construction of the joint or
connection between the reproducer arm and the de-
livery or amplifying horn of such sound conveying
15 tubes, by which the necessary movements of both the
reproducer arm and the horn, both horizontal and ver-
tical, may all be effected from substantially the same
point or center.
A further object of the invention is to provide a con-
20 struction of joint or connection between the reproducer
arm and the horn by which these parts may have free-
dom of movement independent of each other, so that
whatever may be the position of the horn the free end
of the reproducer arm may move freely as may be re-
25 quired to permit the stylus to follow the record groove.
A further object of the invention is to provide means
by which the horn may be held in any position in which
it may be placed so as to direct the sound in any de-
sired direction and to provide means by which the free
30 endof the reproducer arm may be held in raised position
when it is desired to lift it from the record to permit the
record to be removed and a new one placed in position.
A further object of the invention is to provide means
by which the free end of the reproducer arm will be pre-
35 vented from sagging if swung to one side off the record.
With the above described objects in view as well as
others hereinafter set forth, the invention consists in
the construction and combination of elements herein-
after described and pointed out in the claims.
40 Referring to the drawings: Figure 1 is a perspective
view of a talking machine having the invention applied
thereto; Fig. 2 is a vertical sectional view through the
joint between the reproducer arm and the horn; Fig. 3
is a view similar to Fig. 2 but showing a slightly modi-
45 fied form of joint; Fig. 4 is a view similar to Fig. 2 but
showing a further modification; Fig. 5 is a view similar
to Fig. 2 showing a further modification; Fig. 6 is a
detail sectional view of the construction shown in Fig.
5, but showing the parts in position to be assembled;
50 Fig. 7 is a view similar to Fig. 2, showing a construction
similar to that shown in Figs. 5 and 6, but with slight
modifications; Fig. 8 is a detail perspective view of the
joint end of the horn shown in Fig. 7; Fig. 9 is a detail
perspective view of joint end of the reproducer arm
55 shown in Figs. 5, 6 and 7; and Fig. 10 is a horizontal
sectional view on line x — x of Fig. 5.
In the drawings, 1 is the casing of a talking machine
containing the usual mechanism for rotating the table
carrying the record disk.
2 is a bracket secured to one side of the casing for 60
supporting the reproducer arm and horn.
3 is the reproducer arm carrying at its free end the
usual sound box 31, and having at its other end the up-
ward curve or elbow 4.
5 is the horn which is of usual form having at the end 6 5
opposite its mouth the downward curve or elbow as
shown.
The bracket 2 is provided at its upper end with a
ring 25, which in the several forms of the invention
hereinafter described serves to support, through in- 70
termediate means, both the reproducer arm and
the horn. This ring may be integral with the bracket
as shown in Figs. 2, 3 and 4, or may be separately
constructed and connected with the bracket as shown
in Figs. 5, 6 and 7 7 75
In the construction shown in Figs. 2, 3 and 4, the
ring 25 is centrally bored to receive a ball 6 which is
held in position by any convenient means as by
screws 7. In the upper and lower faces of the ring
25 are formed recesses 8 and 9 respectively. To the 80
end of the horn 5 is secured an extension 10 preferably
detachably connected to the end of the horn as by
a screw joint 34 — 35, this extension being adapted to
fit and move readily upon the upper surface of the
ball 6 and to be held in place by a ring 11 bearing 85
upon its tipper face.
The curved end or elbow 4 of the reproducer arm
is provided with a flange 37, adapted to fit and move
readily upon the lower surface of the ball 6 and to be
held in place by a ring 12 bearing against its lower 90
surface. The rings 11 and 12 may be held in place as
shown in Figs. 2 and 3, by means of thumb screws
13, or the rings may be screw-threaded as shown at
14, to engage screw threads 15, formed in the recesses
8 and 9. The ball 6 is provided with a central vertical 95
bore 16 which may be substantially cylindrical as
shown in Figs. 2 and 4, or may be tapered as shown
in Fig. 3, so as to form with the reproducer arm and
the horn a passage of gradually increasing diameter
from the sound box to the mouth of the horn. 100
The flange 37 on the end of the reproducer arm is
preferably of greater width on the side opposite the
free end of the reproducer arm as shown at 38 so as
to form a stop adapted to strike the bottom of the re-
cess 9, When the free end of the reproducer arm is 105
off the record disk and thus prevent the free end of
the arm from dropping far enough to injure the stylus
or sound box.
In operation, the ring 12 will be so set as to hold
the flange 37 against the lower surface of the ball 6, 110
but at the same time to permit it to move freely in
either a horizontal direction as may be necessary to
Q
859,165
permit the stylus to follow the record groove, or in a
vertical direction when the free end of the repro-
ducer arm is lifted to permit a record disk to be removed
or replaced. The ring 11 will be firmly pressed upon
5 the upper face of the extension 10 by the thumb
screws or by the engagement of the screw threads
14 — 15, so as to hold the horn in any desired position,
it being possible to shift the position of the horn by
slightly loosening the thumb screws or by unscrewing
10 the ring.
By the construction above described, a simple, in-
expensive form of joint is secured which permits
the reproducer arm to move freely in any direction
and permits the horn to be readily adjusted in any
15 position either horizontally or vertically, and holds it
firmly in adjusted position, whatever the move-
ment of the reproducer arm may be, without materially
varying the form or character of the sound passage
and without interrupting its continuity.
20 In the construction shown in Figs. 5 to 10 inclu-
sive, instead of the ball 6 fixedly held in the ring 25
as in Figs. 1 to 4 inclusive, a hollow ball 32 is provided
having a ring 33 thereon provided with screw threads
34 to engage the screw threads 35 of the end of the
25 horn. This hollow ball 32 fits and is adapted to
move readily in a bowl 31' which is provided at its
upper end with screw threads 30 to engage screw
threads formed on the inner face of a depending
flange 29 of the ring 25. The flange 37 of the end of
30 the reproducer arm fits and is adapted to move freely
on the outer surface of the bowl 31' and is held there-
on by a ring 28 screw-threaded at 27 to engage screw-
threads formed on the inner face of a depending
flange 26 of the ring 25, the inner surface of the ring 28
35 being so shaped as to form between it and the outer
surface of the bowl 32 a recess in which the flange
37 may move freely.
For the purpose of providing means by which the free
end of the reproducer arm may be held in raised posi-
40 tion if desired the wider portion 38 of the flange 37 is
provided on its outer surface with series of indentations
39 adapted to receive the pointed end of a spring pin 40
carried by the ring 28. For the purpose of holding the
horn 5 at any desired angle relative to a horizontal plane,
45 the ring 25 may be provided with a set screw 36 carried
in a suitable lug on the upper face of the ring and adapt-
ed to bear against the outer face of the hollow ball 32 as
shown in Fig. 5 or the hollow ball 32 may be provided
on its outer face as shown in Figs. 7 and 8 with series of
50 indentations 42 with which the pointed end of a spring
pin 41 carried by a lug on the upper face of the ring 25 is
adapted to engage.
In assembling the invention in the form shown in
Figs. 5 to 10 inclusive, the end of the horn 5 is inserted
5 5 in the ring 25 from the upper side and the hollow ball 32
is inserted from below and the screw threads 34 — 35 are
caused to engage. The bowl 31' is then secured in posi-
tion by causing the screwthreads 30 to engage the screw-
threads of the flange 29. The reproducer arm is then
60 placed in position with its flange 37 resting against the
outer surface of the bowl 31' and the ring 28 is then se-
emed in position.
It will be noted that in all of the constructions shown,
one member of the joint, the ball 6, in Figs. 2, 3, 4 and
65 the bowl 31', in Figs. 5 to 10 inclusive, is fixed, and
forms with the members formed on the ends of the repro-
ducer arm and the horn, a ball and socket joint, the fixed
or stationary member in each case having surfaces on
which the members carried at the ends of the repro-
ducer arm and the horn have the free movement in any 70
desired direction which is characteristic of the ball and
socket joint.
It will also be noted that in all of the constructions
shown, the movements of the reproducer arm and horn
on the fixed or stationary member are about a common 75
center both as regards their movements in horizontal
planes as well as in vertical planes. And it will also be
noted that in none of the .constructions shown is the
sound passage obstructed the sound passage in the con-
struction shown in Fig. 3 being tapered regularly front 80
the reproducer arm to the horn.
In the drawings the applicant has illustrated the basic
idea of breaking substantially the center of an amplify-
ing horn, with a flexible joint, so as to allow the free ends
thereof to have a vertical movement as well as a horizon- 8 5
tal movement; in view of which it is to be understood
that the construction of the device may be varied if
desired without hindering the commercial value there-
of; the right being reserved to use said variations and
to use, manufacture and vend, either the connection of 90
the horn, or the connection of the arm separately, if
desired, without departing from the spirit of the inven-
tion, so long as they are embraced within the scope of
the appended claims.
Having thus described the invention what is claimed 95
as new with the protection of Letters Patent is: —
1. In a talking machine a reproducer arm and horn a
ball and socket joint connection therebetween to permit
both the reproducer arm and horn to have a universal
movement. 100
2. In a talking machine, the combination with the re-
producer arm and the horn of a joint connecting the re-
producer arm and the horn, comprising a stationary mem-
ber adapted to form spherical bearings for both the re-
producer arm and the horn. 105
3. In a talking machine, a reproducer arm and horn a
ball and socket joint connection between them, comprising
a stationary spherical member, a member carried by the
reproducer arm cooperating with the stationary member
and a member carried by the horn also cooperating with 110
the stationary member.
4. In a talking machine, the combination with the re-
producer arm and the horn of a flexible joint connecting
the reproducer arm and the horn, comprising a stationary
spherical member having separate bearing surfaces adapt- 115
ed to form spherical bearings for the reproducer arm and
horn respectively.
5. In a talking machine, the combination with the re-
producer arm and the horn of a joint connecting the re-
producer arm and the horn comprising a stationary mem- 120
ber having separate spherical bearing surfaces for the re-
producer arm and the horn respectively and means for
holding the horn against movement on the stationary
member.
6. In a talking machine, the combination with the re- J 25
producer arm and the horn of a joint connecting the re-
producer arm and the horn comprising a stationary mem-
ber having separate spherical bearing surfaces for the re-
producer arm and the horn respectively, a ring supporting
the stationary member and serving as an abutment to 130
limit the vertical movement of the reproducer arm.
7. In a talking machine, the combination with the re-
producer arm and the horn of a joint connecting the re-
producer, arm and the horn, comprising a stationary mem-
ber having spherical bearing surfaces, means carried by the 135
horn adapted to fit one of the bearing surfaces, a flange
on the end of the reproducer arm adapted to fit the other
bearing surface, a ring supporting the stationary member
859,165
and means carried by the ring for engaging the flange of
the reproducer arm to hold the free end of said arm in
raised position.
S. In a talking machine, the combination with the re-
5 producer arm and the horn of a joint connecting the re-
producer arm and the horn, comprising a stationary mem-
ber having spherical bearing surfaces, means carried by
the horn adapted to fit one of the bearing surfaces, a
flange on the end of the reproducer arm adapted to fit the
10 other bearing surface, a ring supporting the stationary
member consisting of a spring pressed pin, and means car-
ried by the ring for engaging the flange of the reproducer
arm to hold the free end of said arm in raised position.
9. In a talking machine, the combination with the re-
15 producer arm and the horn, of a joint connecting the re-
producer arm and horn comprising a stationary member
baying spherical bearing surfaces, means carried by the
horn adapted to fit one of the bearing surfaces, a flange
on the end of the reproducer arm adapted to fit the other
20 bearing surface, and having opposite the free end of the
reproducer arm an extension, and a ring supporting the
stationary member adapted to form an abutment for the
extension of said flange whereby the downward movement
of the free end of the reproducer arm is limited.
25 10. In a talking machine the combination with the re-
producer arm and the horn, of a joint connecting the re-
producer arm and horn, comprising a stationary ball,
means carried by the ends of the reproducer arm, and the
horn respectively, adapted to fit and move on opposite
30 bearing surfaces of the ball and means for holding the
ends of the reproducer arm and horn against said ball.
11. In a talking machine, the combination with the re-
producer arm and the horn, of a joint connecting the re-
producer arm and horn, comprising a stationary ball, hav-
35 ing an opening therethrough, means carried by the ends
of the reproducer arm and the horn respectively adapted
to fit and move on opposite surfaces of said ball, and
means for holding the ends of the reproducer arm and
horn against said ball.
40 12. In a talking machine, the combination with the re-
producer arm and the horn, of a joint connecting the re-
producer arm and the horn comprising a stationary spher-
ical shaped member, means carried by the ends of the re-
producer arm and the horn adapted to fit opposite bear-
45 ing surfaces of the spherical shaped member, and means
for holding the ends of the reproducer arm and horn
against said spherical shaped member.
13. In a talking machine, a reproducer arm and horn,
a joint flexibly connecting the arm and horn about a com-
50 mon center.
14. In a talking machine, a reproducer arm and horn,
and a flexible common center joint connecting between
them, said joint having means to limit the downward
movement of the horn.
55 15. In a talking machine, an amplifying horn and a
flexible ball joint breaking at a point between the ends.
16. In a talking machine, an amplifying horn and a
common center joint breaking at a point between the ends
thereof, so as to allow the free ends to have vertical and
60 horizontal movements.
17. In a talking machine, the combination with the
reproducer arm and horn, of a joint connecting the repro-
ducer arm and the horn comprising a stationary member
having separate spherical bearing surfaces for the repro-
65 ducer arm and the horn respectively and means to prevent
downward movement of the horn.
18. In a talking machine, a reproducer arm and horn
having a joint pivotally connecting them about a common
center so as to permit them vertical and horizontal
70 movements.
10. In a talking machine, a reproducer arm and horn, a
joint pivotally connecting them about a common center,
comprising a stationary member having spherical bearing-
surfaces, means carried by both the arm and horn to move
75 universally upon the spherical bearing surfaces, and said
means of the arm having means to limit the downward
movement thereof.
20. In a talking machine, a reproducer arm and horn, a
joint pivotally connecting them about a common center,
80 comprising a stationary member having spherical bearing-
surfaces, means carried by both the arm and horn to move
universally upon the spherical bearing surfaces, said joint
having means to limit the downward movement of both
the reproducer arm and horn.
21. In a talking- machine, a reproducer arm and horn, a 85
joint connecting them together, comprising a stationary
spherical bearing member and means carried by the horn
to move universally upon said stationary spherical bearing-
member.
22. In a talking machine, a reproducer arm and a horn, 90
a joint connecting them together, comprising a stationary
spherical bearing member, and means carried by the repro-
ducer arm to move universally upon said stationary spher-
ical bearing member.
23. In a talking machine, a reproducer arm and horn, a 05
joint connecting them together, comprising a spherical
bearing member, means carried by the reproducer arm
to move universally upon said spherical bearing member,
and said means having means to - limit the downward
movement of the reproducer arm. -1 qq
24. In a talking machine, a reproducer arm and horn, a
joint connecting them together, comprising a spherical
bearing member, means carried by the horn to move univer-
sally upon said spherical bearing member, and said joint
having means to limit the downwai'd movement of the 105
horn.
25. In a talking- machine, a reproducer arm and horn, a
flexible joint connecting them together, comprising a sta-
tionary bearing member, said arm and horn having means
to move universally upon said stationary bearing member, jiq
26. In a talking machine, a reproducer arm and horn, a
flexible joint connecting them together comprising a sta-
tionary bearing member, said arm and horn having means
to move universally upon said stationary bearing member
and said joint having means to limit the downward move- H5
ments of the arm and horn.
27. In a talking machine, an amplifying horn having a
flexible joint breaking at a point between the ends thereof
comprising a stationary bearing member and the sections
of the said horn on opposite sides of said bearing member ion
having means to move universally upon said stationary
bearing member.
28. In a talking machine, a sound conveying tube having
a flexible joint breaking at a point between the ends
thereof comprising a stationary bearing member, the sec- 125
tions of the said sound conveying tube upon opposite sides
of said bearing member having means to move universally
upon said stationary bearing member and said joint having
means to limit the downward movement of the free ends
of the sound conveying tube. 130
29. In a talking machine, a sound conveying tube having
a joint breaking at a point between the ends thereof, com-
prising a spherical stationary bearing member and the
sections of the said sound conveying tube on opposite sides
of said bearing member having means to move universally 135
upon said spherical stationary bearing member.
30. A talking machine comprising a relatively station-
ary member having separate bearings and a reproducer
arm and horn operatively connected to said bearings, each
to swing horizontally and vertically thereon. 140
31. A talking machine comprising a relatively station-
ary member having separate bearings and a reproducer
arm and horn flexibly connected to said bearings, each to
swing universally thereon.
32. In a flexible amplifying horn, a joint located at a 145
point between the free ends thereof comprising a station-
ary bearing member, said free ends of the horn having
universal movements upon said stationary member.
33. In a flexible jointed amplifying horn, a joint located
between the free ends thereof comprising a stationary 150
spherical bearing member operative to allow for universal
movements of the free ends of the horn, and means to limit
the downward movement of the horn.
34. In a flexible jointed amplifying horn, a joint located
between the free ends thereof comprising a spherical bear- 15 5
ing member so as to allow for universal movements of the
free ends of the horn, and means for holding the free
ends to said spherical bearing member.
35. A talking machine comprising a relatively station-
ary member having a spherical bearing, and a horn flexibly 160
connected to said bearing so as to have a universal
movement.
859,165
10
36. A talking machine comprising a reproducer arm and
horn ; an operative connection therehetween ; each of said
parts having a universal movement about said connection.
37. In a talking machine ; a horn support ; a reproducer
arm and horn connected thereto upon a common center
In have universal movements.
38. A reproducer arm and horn ; comprising a connec-
tion therebetween to permit both the arm and horn to
move universally about said connection upon a common
center.
39. A talking machine comprising a reproducer arm and
horn ; an operative connection therebetween ; each of said
parts having a universal movement about said connection ;
said connection having means to limit the downward move-
ment of the arm and horn.
40. In a talking machine, a reproducer arm and horn ;
and a ball and socket joint therebetween.
In witness whereof, the applicant's signature is hereunto
affixed in the presence of two witnesses.
15
ROBERT A. BOSWELL.
Witnesses :
Robert S. Boswell,
Frank A. Harrison.
No. 859,165. PATENTED JULY 2, 1907.
R. A. BOSWELL.
SOUND CONVEYING TUBE FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 7, 1906.
3 SHEETS-8HEET 1.
THE UORItlS F-ETEHS CO., VASHINGTOH, D. C.
.«
No. 859,165. PATENTED JULY 2, 1907.
R. A. BOSWELL.
SOUND CONVEYING TUBE FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 7, 1906.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
tlttoMW^
THE NORR1S PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C-
No. 859,165. PATENTED JULY 2, 1907.
R. A. BOSWELL.
SOUND CONVEYING TUBE FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 7, 1906.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
|]
3»it>entot
*f2sU>4s£j,
THE NORR\S PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, O. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILHELM RABE AND CARL KAMRATH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNORS TO LANDAY
BROTHERS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., A COPARTNERSHIP.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 859,180.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 5, 1906. Serial No. 310,172.
Patented July 2, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, Wilhelm Rabe and Carl
Kamrath, both subjects of the Emperor of Germany,
residing in the borough of Manhattan, in the city,
5 county, and State of New York, have invented cer-
tain new and useful Improvements in Talking-Ma-
chines, of which the following is a specification.
Our invention relates particularly to machines of
the flat record type and consists in means for adapt-
10 ing such machines to the making and reproducing of
"home" records, and to that end they are here shown,
and are preferably constructed so as to be applicable
to the ordinary machines now in use, and intended
for use only in reproducing commercially made records.
15 Our object has been to produce a mechanism sim-
ple and cheap in construction, convenient and cer-
tain to operate, of great amplitude of movement so as
to be applicable to records of various sizes, accurately
adjustable to the work to be done and smooth and
20 noiseless in action.
In the accompanying drawings, the mechanism is
shown arranged for the production of records of the
graphophone type, wherein the sound waves are re-
corded and reproduced by vertical movements of the
25 stylus, but we do not intend to limit the scope of the
invention to that use.
In said drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view of our im-
proved mechanism with so much of the parts of an or-
dinary talking machine as is necessary to an under-
30 standing of the same. Fig. 2 is a vertical, sectional
elevation thereof taken on the planes indicated by
the dotted lines 2—2, Fig. 1.
At 1, we have shown a disk preferably made of such
material as is suitable for the production . of "home"
35 records, such as wax or wax composition of sufficient
softness.
2 is the centering stud of the turn table of any usual
or preferred construction of talking machine and 3
the horn connecting arm of any usual or preferred con-
40 struction and supported in any preferred way.
4 is a sound box, two of which are provided with
this instrument, in one of which the stylus 5 is of form
and mounting adapting it for recording and in the
other of form and mounting adapting it for reproduc-
45 ing and the two sound boxes are also modified in con-
struction otherwise in customary manner adapting
them to their individual functions. The sound box
has a neck 6, whereby it may be slipped upon a joint
member 7, the connection being such as to prevent
50 horizontal play in the recording sound box, and per-
mit slight horizontal play in the reproducing sound
box. By horizontal is meant play in a plane parallel
to the face of the record. The coupling member 7
is attached as by the trunnion pin 8 to an angle tube 9
in such manner as to permit vertical play of the sound 5'5
box and the angle tube 9 is removably connected to
the horn arm 3 by a bayonet joint as shown at 10.
To regulate the pressure of the stylus upon the record,
we provide a weight 11 adjustable upon a wire or rod 12,
which is fastened to the neck of the sound box or to the 60
coupling member 7. The weight may be moved to-
ward or away from the fulcrum or pivotal point of the
sound box upon the angle tube 9 so as to make the im-
pression of the stylus as light or as heavy as desired.
13 is a wheel or ring, preferably of metal, and having 6 5
the crown spiral 14 and located upon the record 1 con-
centric with its centering stud 2 . It may be removably
attached as by the slight points or projections 15 engag-
ing the soft surface of the record or may be otherwise
fastened as preferred. 70
Engaging the crown spiral, 14 is an arm 16 which is fas-
tened to the angle tube 9 and is preferably bent in the
arc of a circle whose center is the pivotal point of the
horn or arm 3. Preferably also, the arm 16 is made of a
backing strip 16a of metal and a facing strip 16b of vul- 75
canized fiber or other sufficiently hard and non-metallic
material, the backing affording the necessary strength
to the arm and the facing insuring the noiseless engage-
ment of the arm with the crown spiral. On the under
edge of the arm and preferably only on the facing por- 80
tion 16b thereof, which portion projects below the metal
backing for that purpose, are a series of grooves or teeth
17 preferably curved to conform to the curves of the
spiral 14, so as to accurately engage the same.
It will be seen that when the round disk 1 of suitable 85
material is placed in the revolving table of a talking
machine, the crown spiraled wheel and the recording
mechanism put in position, and the table started in ro-
tation, the recording stylus will travel around the disk
in a spiral path caused by the engagement of the sue- 90
cessive teeth of arm 16 with the crown spiral and that a
record may be produced in a well-known manner in the
spiral groove so formed which may be reproduced
merely on substitution of a reproducing sound box for
the recording sound box. The arm 16 and crown spiral 95
guide the sound box positively during both operations
and so preventing the accidental dislodgment of the
stylus from the record groove.
It is apparent that the amplitude of movement of the
arm 16 is considerable and that records of various sizes 100
can be made and that by slightly canting the arm 16 so
that when at the extreme inner position, said arm will
slide above the far side of the crown spiral, still greater
amplitude of movement may be provided for.
The connection provided by the arm 16 and crown 105
spiral is so positive that the mechanism will operate
properly even if the record and machine be not exactly
level.
2
859,180
Having thus described the invention what we claim
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent is: —
1. In a talking machine, the combination of a sound
conveying horn-connection mounted to vibrate in a plane
c parallel with the record-tablet, a sound box suitably con-
nected to said horn-connection, a guiding arm for the
sound box curved in an arc concentric with the pivot
of the horn and having a series of grooves or projections
on its under face, a record-tablet and an annular crown
, „ spiral carried by the record-tablet and engaged by the
grooves or projections on the under face of the guiding
arm, substantially as described.
2. In a talking machine, the combination of a flat
record-tablet, an annular crown-spiral having projections
to engage with the record-tablet to which it is applied, a
sound-conveying born-connection mounted to vibrate in a
plane parallel with the record-tablet, a sound box suitably
connected with the said sound conveying horn-connection
and an arc shaped arm mechanically connected to the
sound box and having a series of grooves or projections
on its under face engaging the crown-spiral and im-
parting to the sound-box radial movement relatively to
the record-tablet by the rotation of the latter, substan-
tially as described.
15
20
3. In a talking machine, the combination of a flat hori- 25
zontal record-tablet rotating on a vertical axis, a sound
conveying horn-connection mounted to vibrate on a verti-
cal axis, a sound-box connected with said horn-connection,
an annular crown-spiral carried by the record-tablet and
a guiding arm mounted on the sound-conveyer and having 30
a series of grooves or projections on its under face engag-
ing with the annular crown-spiral so as to impart move-
ment to the sound-box radial to the record-tablet, by the
rotation of the latter, substantially as described.
4. In a talking machine, the combination of a rotary 35
record-tablet, an annular crown-spiral mounted thereon,
a sound-conveyer mounted to vibrate in a plane parallel
with the record-tablet, a sound-box connected with said
sound conveyer and a guiding arm mounted on the sound-
conveyer having a metallic back and a non-metallic face 40
with a series of projections engaging with the crown-
spiral so as to impart to the sound-box movement radial
to the record-tablet, by the rotation of the latter, substan-
tially as described.
WILHELM RABE.
CARL KAMRATII.
Witnesses :
Habry E. Knight,
James B. Landby.
No. 859,180.
PATENTED JULY 2, 1907.
W. RABE & C. KAMRATH.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 5, 1906.
j^y^.
/£°
'IS
/7 *
o 6 ^U-^-c f
THE NORMS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CLARENCE HAMILTON WILKES AND HOWARD LYKE, OF LITTLE FALLS, NEW YORK.
STARTING AND STOPPING MECHANISM FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
No. 860,110.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 16, 1907.
Application filed October 17, 1906. Serial No. 339,316.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that Clarence Hamilton Wilkes and
Howard Lyke, citizens of the United States, residing
at Little Falls, in the county of Herkimer and State of
5 New York, have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Starting and Stopping Mechanism for
Phonographs, of which the following is a specification.
This invention relates to starting and stopping mech-
anisms for phonographs.
10 It has for an object to provide a means connected to
the starting lever and operated automatically either by
the closing and the opening of the gate or by the shift-
ing of the lock for the gate.
Other and further objects will appear in the follow-
15 ing description and will be more particularly pointed
out in the appended claims.
In the drawings: — Figure 1 is a front elevation of one
embodiment of our invention, and Fig. 2 is a front ele-
vation of another embodiment of our invention.
20 In the embodiment shown in Fig. 1, 1 indicates the
record cylinder, 2 the cylinder frame, 3 the bed plate,
4 the pivoted starting lever, 5 the motor shaft, 5/ the
motor, 6 the brake disk and 7 the hinged gate, all of
which are of any desired construction.
25 Positioned below the front end of the gate 7 when the
gate is in closed position, is the upper beveled end 8 of
a vertically movable plunger or trip 9 which works
through an opening in the bed plate and is pivoted at
its lower end to one arm of a bell crank lever 10 sus-
30 pended from the underside of the bed plate by a hanger
11. The other arm of the bell crank lever is pivotally
connected to a link 12 which in turn is pivotally con-
nected to the starting lever 4. It is apparent that
when the gate is closed it will ride on the upper bev-
3 5 eled end of the plunger 9 and depress the same, which
in turn, through the bell crank lever 10 and link 12,
will shift the starting lever and release the motor shaft.
When the gate is opened to remove the cylinder, the
plunger will rise under the action of a coil spring 13 in-
40 terposed between the bed plate and the headed and
beveled upper end 8 of the plunger 9, thus shifting the
starting lever to stop the motor shaft.
In the embodiment shown in Fig. 2, the known con-
struction of the machine may be the same except that
45 the gate is held closed by a manually operated cam
lock 14 which is also old in the art. To this manually
operated cam lock there is pivoted the upper end of a
plunger 9a which extends through an opening in the
bed plate and is swiveled to one end of a bell crank
lever 10°- hung from the under side of the bed plate by a 50
hanger lla. A link 12a connects the starting lever 4
and the bell crank lever 10a. The starting and the
stopping is in this latter embodiment positively con-
trolled by the gate lock.
It will be noted that all parts of our invention, with 55
the exception of the upper end of the plunger 9 or 9a,
are mounted below the bed plate and are thus out of
the way of the operator.
In both embodiments, a part of the gate either the
gate body or the gate lock controls the plunger and 60
consequently the starting lever, both on opening and
on closing the gate.
Having thus described our invention, what we claim
and desire to secure by Letters Patents, is: —
1. In a starting and stopping mechanism for phono- gg
graphs, the combination with the starting lever, a gate
part, a motor shaft, a brake disk upon the shaft ; of a
plunger controlled by the gate part, a hell-crank lever
connected to the plunger, and a link connecting the bell-
crank and the starting lever to operate the latter with 79
respect to the brake disk upon opening or closing of the
gate.
2. In a starting and stopping mechanism for phono-
graphs, the combination with the bed plate, the starting
lever and a gate part, of means connected to the starting 75
lever below the lied plate and controlled by the gate part.
3. In a starting and stopping mechanism for phono-
graphs, the combination with the bed plate, the starting
lever and the gate part, of a spring actuated plunger op-
erated by the gate part, a bell crank lever hung from the 80
under side of the bed plate and connected to the plunger,
and a link connecting the bell crank lever and the start-
ing lever.
4. In a starting and stopping mechanism for phono-
graphs, the combination with the starting lever, and a 85
gate part, of a plunger controlled by the gate part, a bell
crank lever connected to the plunger, and a link connect-
ing the bell crank lever and the. starting lever.
5. In a phonograph, a motor for operating the phono-
graph, a gate for the phonograph cylinder, means connect- 90
ing the said gate with the motor, whereby the motor is
started and stopped by operating the gate.
In testimony whereof we have signed our names to this
specification in the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
CLARENCE HAMILTON WILKES.
HOWARD LYKE.
Witnesses :
Charlie Nethanay,
Arthur W. Hyde.
No. 860,110.
PATENTED JULY 16, 1907.
0. H. WILKES & H. LYKE.
STARTING AND STOPPING MECHANISM FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 17, 1906.
-^^9:z'
JO6*" .
THE NORRIS PETERS CO.. "WASHINGTON. O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WALTER C. RUNGE, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO INTERNATIONAL ROYAL
PHONE COMPANY, OF BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS, A CORPORATION OF MAINE.
ADJUSTABLE REPRODUCER-ARM FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 860,332.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed August 18, 1906, Serial No. 331,159.
Patented July 16, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Walter C. Runge, a citizen of
the United States, residing in Camden, Camden
county, New Jersey, have invented a new and useful
5 Improvement in Adjustable Reproducer - Arms for
Talking-Machines, of which the following is a speci-
fication.
My invention relates to reproducer arms for talking
machines using different mandrels of various diameters
10 on a mandrel shaft having a fixed position and in which
the reproducer is shifted with respect to the sound
record by adjusting the arm instead of shifting the man-
drel shaft as in previous machines.
One of my objects is to provide mechanism by
1 5 means of which the reproducer can be shifted with re-
spect to the mandrel shaft so that records and mandrels
of different diameters may be used on the same ma-
chine.
Another object is to provide means whereby the re-
20 producer stylus will be automatically placed in proper
position on records of various diameters.
Another object is to provide means for placing the
reproducer into or out of operative engagement with
the record regardless of the diameter of the latter or the
25 position of the arm.
Another object is to provide means for guiding a re-
producing trumpet along the record in such manner
that it will be free to move universally under irregu-
larities in the record but will hold the stylus firmly in
30 the sound groove.
I attain my objects in the manner shown in the ac-
companying drawings of my preferred form of mechan-
ism in which
Figure 1 is a top view of a graphophone provided
35 with my improved adjustable reproducer arm; Fig. 2
a side view of a portion of the structure of Fig. 1; Fig.
3 a side view of a portion of the structure of Fig. 1; with
the raising and lowering device down; Fig. 4 a corre-
sponding view with the raising and lowering device up;
40 Fig. 5 a side view of the arm in conjunction with a rec-
ord of large diameter; Fig. 6 a top view of a slight
modification of the arm in conjunction with a record
of small diameter; Fig. 7 a side view of the structure of
Fig. 6; Fig. 8 a side view of the structure of Figs. 6
45 and 7 in conjunction with a record of large diameter;
Figs. 9 and 10 detail views of a form of manually oper-
ated lever system; Fig. 11 a detail view of a sound box
holder mounted on the arm in place of the trumpet
yoke.
50 Like reference characters designate like parts
throughout.
As shown in the drawings the talking machine is in
the form of the well known graphophone using cylin-
drical records and comprises a base plate 1, a side frame
2 secured thereto, carrying a mandrel shaft 3 revolubly 55
mounted thereon in a fixed position. A feed screw 5
provided with a pinion 6 is carried by the side frame 2
at one end and an end frame 7 at the other. This
feed screw is protected by a slotted or split tube 8 60
surrounding it which tube also acts as a rail for the
carriage to slide on. A gear 4 on the frame 2 meshes
with the pinions 6 and 9 thereby causing the feed screw
and mandrel to revolve in the same direction at pre-
determined relative rates of speed. A slide rod 10 is 65
secured to the frame 2 and 7 in front of the feed screw
and acts as the second rail for the carriage. The man-
drel shaft is adapted to receive mandrels of different
diameters as 11 and 12 which are held in position by a
thumb nut 13. Sound records 14 and 15 are adapted 70
to be placed on these mandrels.
The reproducer arm comprises a carriage made up of
a sleeve 16 provided with a boss or stop 22 and is slid-
ably mounted on the rod 10. A yoke block 17, pro-
vided with a roller 18 on its lower horn, is loosely 75
mounted on the sleeve 16 and straddles the split tube
8, the roller running on the under side thereof. A bell
crank 19 is secured to the yoke 17 and is provided with
a knife edge 20 adapted to engage the feed screw 5
through the slot in the tube 8, being held in engage- 80
ment therewith by a spring 21. A finger piece 23 is
fixed to the sleeve 16 and is partially revoluble there-
with, the recess 24 in the yoke block limiting the mo-
tion. A cam or projection 25 engages the bell crank
19 for the purpose of throwing the knife 20 out of en- 85
gagement with the feed screw 5. It is apparent that
the carriage way comprises two tracks one of which in-
closes the feed screw thereby simplifying and cheap-
ening the construction.
A swinging bracket 26 is also loosely mounted on the 90
sleeve 16 and is limited in its movement by the slot 27
which engages a lock screw 28 on the yoke block 17.
The outer end of the bracket 16 is provided with a
guide 29 hinged thereto. A slide bar 30 reciprocates
in the guide and terminates in a reproducer holder 95
which may be either a pair of elastic fingers 31, 31 or a
sound box holder 32.
A compound lever system connects the end of the
bar 30 to the yoke block 17. This comprises a lever 33
pivoted to the bracket 26 with the long end pivoted to 100
the inner end of the slide bar 30. A link 34 connects
the short end of the lever 33 and the carriage. On rais-
ing or lowering the bracket 26 the slide bar 30 is moved
in or out in the guide 29, the bend therein acting as a
stop to limit the forward motion. 105
To raise or lower a reproducer so its stylus will be
in or out of operative engagement with a record a yoke
35 is hinged to the slide bar 30, the hinge acting as a
stop to limit the rearward motion. A second lever
2
860,332
system is provided to oscillate this yoke and com-
prises a link 36 pivoted to a lug on the yoke, a lever 37
pivoted to the parts 33 and 34 at one end and to the
link 36 at the other and a link 38 pivoted to the lever
5 37 at a point between its ends and to a lug on the fin-
ger piece 23. This second lever system may be re-
placed by a single bent lever 39 connecting the yoke
35 and finger piece 23 which may be extended and
slotted to receive it as shown in Figs. 6, 7 and 8. As
10 shown in Fig. 11 the yoke 35 may engage a sound box
holder 32.
Figs. 9 and 10 show manually operated means for
lengthening or shortening the second lever system.
The two bars 40 and 41 telescope on each other through
15 the tube 42. The bar 41 carries a slotted piece 43
while the lever 44, provided with a pin engaging the
slot, is pivoted to the bar 40. On throwing the lever
44 from one side to the other of the slotted piece the
length of the lever system will be varied. It is appar-
20 ent that when the finger piece is moved up or down
the yoke 35 will be oscillated and the trumpet 45 or
the sound box holder 32 will be raised or lowered,
throwing the stylus into or out of operative contact with
the record.
25 In use on a small record the bracket 26 is pushed
down as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4 6 and 7, bringing the
yoke 35 and elastic fingers 31 over the proper position
on the small record 14, the bracket being locked in
position by the screw 28. To lower the stylus onto the
30 record the finger piece is raised as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3,
6 and 7 turning the yoke 36 down, the cam 25 moving
to allow the knife edge 20 to engage the feed screw 5
which propels the entire reproducer arm across the
machine. At the end of the record the operations are
35 reversed and the arm slid back into its initial position.
If a record of large diameter is to be played the
small mandrel is replaced by a large one and the lock
screw 28 loosened so the bracket 26 can be raised, be-
ing re-locked in its new position. Simultaneously
40 with the raising of the bracket 26 the slide bar 30 is
moved transversely with respect to the mandrel shaft
by the action of the first lever system so that the stylus
will occupy its proper position on the large record.
As the distance between the yoke 35 and the finger
45 piece 23 has increased the effective length of the second
lever system must be increased and this is effected by
the increased throw of the parts 36, 37 and 38 or by
the change in the relative locations of the pivotal
points of the bent lever 39 of Figs. 6, 7 and 8 or by
50 manually lengthening the lever as shown in Figs. 9
and 10. The stylus is raised and lowered on the large
record exactly as it was on the small one and the knife
edge is affected in precisely the same manner. The
elastic fingers 31 serve to guide the trumpet stylus
55 across the record but yield when irregularities occur
permitting the stylus to follow the record groove.
The lock screw fastens the bracket 26 firmly to the
sliding carnage so there is no play or vibration of
the parts when in use. The carriage slides freely
60 along the slide rod 10 and the tube 8, the roller 18 re-
ducing the friction. As the knife edge 20 is held in
contact with the feed screw by the spring 21, irregu-
larities or eccentricities in the carriage movement do
not affect the feeding of the reproducer across the
65 record.
I claim: —
1. A reproducer arm for talking machines comprising a'
carriage slidably mounted on the machine ; a bracket
mounted on the carriage ; a slide bar mounted on the outer
end of the bracket ; means for raising and lowering the 70
bracket ; and means for simultaneously shifting the bar
transversely with respect to the mandrel.
2. An adjustable reproducer arm for talking machines
comprising a carriage mounted on the machine ; a bracket
mounted on the carriage ; a slide bar mounted on the outer 75
end of the bracket ; means for raising and lowering the
bracket ; means for simultaneously shifting the slide bar
transversely with respect to the machine mandrel ; and
means for moving the reproducer into or out of operative
contact with the record. 80
3. An adjustable reproducer arm for talking machines
comprising a carriage mounted on the machine ; a bracket
mounted on the carriage : a slide bar pivotally mounted on
the outer end of the bracket ; a reproducer holder on the
end of the slide bar; a lever fulcrumed on the bracket -one 85
end of which is pivoted to the slide bar ; a link connecting
the other end of the lever and the carriage whereby the
slide bar is moved transversely on the upward or down-
ward movement of the bracket.
4. An adjustable reproducer arm for talking machines 90
comprising a carriage mounted on the machine ; a bracket
mounted on the carriage ; a slide bar pivotally mounted on
the outer end of the bracket ; a reproducer holder on the
end of the slide bar : a first lever fulcrumed to the bracket,
one end of which is pivoted to the slide bar ; a link con- 95
netting the other end of the lever and the carriage whereby
the slide bar is moved transversely with respect to the
mandrel on the upward or downward movement of the
bracket ; a finger piece on the carriage ; a second lever ful-
crumed on the first lever ; a link connecting the finger piece 100
and second lever ; a yoke mounted on the slide bar ; and a
link connecting the second lever and yoke whereby the yoke
is oscillated on a movement of the finger piece.
5. An adjustable reproducer arm for talking machines
comprising a carriage mounted on the machine; a bracket 105
mounted on the carriage ; means for locking the bracket at
any desired point ; a slide bar mounted on the outer end of
the bracket ; means for raising and lowering the bracket ;
means for simultaneously shifting the slide bar trans-
versely with respect to the mandrel ; and means for moving HO
the reproducer into or out of operative contact with the
record.
6. An adjustable reproducer arm for talking machines
comprising a carriage mounted on the machine ; a bracket
mounted on the carriage ; means for locking the bracket at H"
any desired point ; a slide bar pivotally mounted on the
outer end of the bracket ; a reproducer holder on the end
of the slide bar ; a first lever fulcrumed on the bracket, one
end of which is pivoted to the slide bar ; a link connecting
the other end of the lever and the carriage whereby the 120
slide bar is moved transversely with respect to the ma-
chine mandrel on the upward or downward movement of
the bracket ; a finger piece on the carriage ; a second lever
fulcrumed on the first lever ; a link connecting the finger
piece and second lever; a yoke mounted on the slide bar; 125
and a link connecting the yoke and second lever whereby
the yoke is oscillated on a movement of the finger piece.
7. An adjustable reproducer arm for talking machines
comprising a carriage mounted on the machine ; a bracket
mounted on the carriage ; means for locking the bracket at 130
any desired point ; a slide bar mounted on the outer end
of the bracket ; a reproducer holder on the end of the slide
bar ; means for raising or lowering the bracket ; means for
simultaneously shifting the slide bar transversely with
respect to the machine mandrel; means for moving the 135
reproducer into or out of operative contact with the rec-
ord ; and means for propelling the arm across the record.
8. An adjustable reproducer arm for talking machines
comprising a carriage mounted on the machine ; a bracket
mounted on the carriage ; a slide bar pivotally mounted on 140
the outer end of the bracket ; a reproducer holder on the
end of the slide bar ; a first lever fulcrumed to the bracket,
one end of which is pivoted to the slide bar ; a link con-
necting the other end of the lever and the carriage whereby
the slide bar is shifted transversely with respect to the 145
860,332
mandrel on the upward or downward movement of the
bracket ; a finger piece on the carriage; a second lever ful-
crumed on the first lever ; a link connecting- the finger piece
and second lever ; a yoke mounted on the slide bar ; a link
5 connecting the yoke and second lever whereby the yoke is
oscillated on a movement of the ringer piece ; a bell crank
provided with a knife edge pivoted to the carriage and
adapted to engage the machine feed screw ; means for hold-
ing the knife edge in yielding contact with the screw ; and
10 a projection on the finger piece adapted to move the knife
edge out of engagement with the feed screw.
9. In a talking machine an adjustable reproducer sup-
port comprising a carriage mounted on the machine ; a
bracket mounted on the carriage ; a slide bar mounted on
15 the outer end of the bracket; a reproducer holder on the
end of the slide bar a lever fulcrumed to the bracket, one
end of which is pivoted to the slide bar ; a link connecting
the other end of the lever and the carriage whereby the
slide bar is moved transversely with respect to the mandrel
20 on the upward or downward movement of the bracket ; a
finger piece mounted on the carriage a yoke pivotally
mounted on the outer end of the slide bar ; and a lever
system of variable throw connecting said finger piece and
yoke whereby the latter is oscillated by the movement of
25 the finger piece irrespective of the position of the bracket.
10. An adjustable reproducer support for talking ma-
chines comprising a carriage mounted on the machine ; a
bracket mounted on the carriage ; a slide bar pivotally
mounted on the outer end of the bracket ; elastic fingers
30 on the end of the slide bar ; means for raising or lowering
the bracket : and means for simultaneously shifting the
slide bar transversely with respect to the mandrel.
11. An adjustable reproducer arm for talking machines
comprising a carriage mounted on the machine ; a bracket
mounted on the carriage ; a slide bar mounted on the outer 35
end of the bracket ; a reproducer holder on the end of the
slide bar ; stops on the slide bar for limiting the trans-
verse movement ; means for raising and lowering the
bracket ; and means for simultaneously shifting the slide
bar with respect to the machine mandrel. 40
12. In a talking machine the combination of a slide rod
mounted on the machine ; a feed screw revolubly mounted
on the machine parallel to the rod ; a split tube surround-
ing the feed screw, an adjustable reproducer arm slidably
mounted on said slide rod and split tube ; and means car- 45
ried by the arm adapted to engage the feed screw to propel
the carrier across the record.
13. In a talking machine the combination of a slide rod
mounted on the machine ; a feed screw revolubly mounted
on the machine parallel thereto ; a split tube surrounding 50
the feed screw ; a reproducer arm slidably mounted on
said slide rod and tube ; a bell crank provided with a knife
edge mounted on the arm ; means for normally holding the
knife edge in contact with the screw ; and means for dis-
engaging the knife edge therefrom. 55
In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my
name in the presence of two witnesses.
WALTER C. RTJNGE.
Witnesses :
ItOBT. B. KfLLGORB,
Conrad Diehl.
No. 860,332. PATENTED JULY 16, 1907.
W. 0. RUNGE.
ADJUSTABLE REPRODUCER ARM FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED AUG. 18, 1906.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
OYJU A. ffL^fil,
BY
\IEV
ATTORN t
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C
No. 860,332. PATENTED JULY 16, 1907.
W. 0, RUNGE.
ADJUSTABLE REPRODUCER ARM FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLIOATIQ* TILED AITS. 18, 1906.
37
FIG. s-_A\ 1L^ * fo 3U «
17 !
3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
ATTORNEY \
TtTE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 860,332. PATENTED JULY 16, 1907.
W. 0. RUNGE.
ADJUSTABLE REPRODUCER ARM FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED AUG. 18, 1906.
._ 3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
^10
FIG. 6 _35
FIG. 10
WITNESSES
^
43
INVENTOR
QVajU AOL^Lt.
ATTORNEY
THE NOrtniS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, & C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOHN F. MURRAY, OF LINDSEY, OHIO.
GRAPHOPHONE SOUND-BOX.
No. 860,604. Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 16, 1907.
Application filed February 15, 1904, Serial No. 193,604, Renewed June 24, 1907. Serial No. 380,645,
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, John F. Murray, a citizen of
the United States, residing at Lindsey, in the county of
Sandusky and the State of Ohio, have invented a new
5 and useful Improvement in Graphophone Sound-
Boxes, of which the following is a specification.
My invention relates to a reproducer or sound box
having a peculiar shape, and having a double armed
stylus lever, and needle adapted for use with the hard
1 0 disk records.
The object of the invention is to obtain a clear, dis-
tinct and natural tone.
My invention consists of the novel features of con-
struction and combination of parts hereinafter shown
15 and described, particularly pointed out in the claim,
and shown in the accompanying drawings, in which,
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my improved at-
tachment. Fig. 2 is a plan view. Fig. 3 is a side ele-
vation. Fig. 4 is a vertical or longitudinal section.
20 In constructing my improvement I employ a metal
reproducer or sound box A having a mica diaphragm B
and the stylus lever C. An interior annular shoulder
is formed in the sound box which is cylindrical in form
and this shoulder supports the mica disk B between
25 two rubber packing rings B', which are held in place
by a split ring B2. I am aware that this construction of
diaphragm is old and do not claim same. The periph-
ery or rim of the reproducer is cut away as shown at A'
on one side and in this cut out portion is arranged a
30 metal block C from the upper inner edge of which ex-
tends the stylus lever C. This block has a depending
portion C2 vertically slotted and through the slot works
a set screw C3 by means of which the block is held to the
rim of the sound box A, and the slot permits the ad-
35 justment of the block vertically, with respect to the
sound box thereby regulating the pressure with which
the arms of the stylus lever bears on the diaphragm B .
The stylus lever may be integral with or welded to the
block, or otherwise secured and consists of laterally ex-
40 tending arms projecting to each side of the block and at
right angles to same, as shown at C4, the arms are then
bent forward as shown at C5, and have a reduced por-
tion C° which is curved downward to the diaphragm,
the lower ends of the curved portions being formed with
45 circular shoes bent parallel to the diaphragm and se-
cured to same by means of a small amount of wax.
These shoes C7 rest on the diaphragm slightly to one
side of the center of the diaphragm, the shoes being ar- •
ranged on opposite sides of the center of the said dia-
phragm. 50
The sound box A consists of the cylindrical ring-like
portion A- in which is held the diaphragm B , and this
ring portion is connected to the cylindrical, tubular
portion A4 by the truncated conical portion A3, this
intermediate cone-shaped portion forming a reservoir 55
into which the sound waves produced by the vibrations
of the diaphragm are collected and from which they
pass into the contracted or tubular portion A4. It will
be noted from Fig. 2 that the distance between the
shoes C7 is equal to the diameter of the tubular portion 60
A4 less the diameter of the shoes. A socket is formed in
the outer end of the block C in which is placed the
usual steel needle E held in place by a set screw E' in
the usual manner.
It will be noted that while the arms of the stylus le- 65
ver rest upon the diaphragm upon opposite sides of the
center of the diaphragm and therefore contacts with it
at two different points yet both points or shoes of the
stylus lever are connected and integral with a common
arm C4 arranged as previously stated at right angles to 70
the block and both shoes receive uniform impulses and
produce synchronous vibrations. The conical shaped
reservoir C3 collects and passes these vibrations into the
tubular portion and a stronger and more natural tone is
produced than by the usual construction. 7 5
Having thus fully described my invention what I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent is,
In a device of the kind described, the combination with
a sound box provided with a cut out portion' in the rim, of
a block arranged in said cut out portion, a vertically 80
forked depending portion extending from the bottom of
said block, a set screw on the periphery of said rim for en-
gaging the fork, a diaphragm within the sound box, a
U-shaped arm extending from the block above said dia-
phragm, downwardly curved portions upon the ends of the 85
U-shaped block, said curved portions terminating in flat
shoes adapted to rest upon the diaphragm, for the purpose
described.
JNO. F. MURRAY.
Witnesses :
C. G. Bowers,
I. N. OVEBMYER.
No. 860,604. PATENTED JULY 16, 1907.
J. F. MURRAY.
GRAPHOPHONE SOUND BOX.
APPLICATION FILED PEB. 16. 1904. BENEWED JUHE 24, 1807.
^
s?
s
<~2?
m^Lt?
Wt^
II
^3^ n WMs*\
1 ' Zr\
J
II 11 1 ipr^
'I
Wh"3C*
«/?
^y-e
c^7
^^g?
. c5*.
<3faf. -?&.
J3'
s=r*
x&
^Witnesses
o©
Skvuentox
atto*«.«iJL'
»f*E NOtf^lS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, O. C
No. 860,878.
PATENTED JULY 23, 1907.
F. MYERS.
SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED MAT 3, 1906.
4 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
JP&? C3? ^-6 ^d-8
~^&>i^_jZ^^<L4^4. /
">^/<, >•*,
tZZJtizZ&l^yt-^^y
THE ftORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
No. 860,878.
PATENTED JULY 23, 1907.
F. MYERS.
SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLIOATIOH FILED MAT 3, 1906.
4 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
' £s&&-&-l^t*_g^y
THE NORMS
PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.
No. 860,878.
PATENTED JULY 23, 1907.
F. MYERS.
SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED MAY 3, 1906.
4 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
jy6 jy$
a1 j&
JZiq.3.
*s
*>
>«,
\ /x
JL
Mq.6.
J$ <T
^3^?^t*-esns(s£&±
CZs66*a^x-z*y
JSIS PETESS CO., »«3KJ«OT», •>. <=.
No. 860,878.
PATENTED JULY 23, 1907.
F. MYERS.
SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED HAT 3, 1906.
4 SHEETS-SHEET 4.
W#A
J9*
t^dCdf^pt^Y
THE NOKRIS PETERS CO., WASHIHQTON. D. C,
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
FREDERICK MYERS, OF LONDON, ENGLAND.
SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINE.
No. 860,878.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed May 3, 1906. Serial No. 315,060.
Patented July 23, 190?.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Frederick Myers, a citizen of
the United Slates of America, residing at London, in
England, have invented certain new and useful Im-
.") provementa in Sound-Reproducing Machines, of which
the following is a specification.
This invention is for improvements in or relating to
sound-reproducing machines and has particular refer-
ence to those in which disk records are employed.
10 According to this invention the record, instead of
being carried upon a table rotated by the motor, as
heretofore, is supported upon a stationary table, while
the sound-box travels in a circular path over the face
of the record. One advantage of a machine construct -
15 ed in this manner is that it is found to operate efh-
ciently even when tilted considerably out of the nor-
mal level, whereas machines having a rotating record
are rendered irregular in action or even inoperative
under similar conditions. It will be understood that
20 any support employed to carry the record is comprised
by the term "table" hereinafter employed throughout
i Ik- specification. The sound-box is driven by the
motor but is also free to move laterally in a straight line
and preferably in a path strictly radial to the record for
25 the purpose of following the spiral groove therein in the
well known manner. In disk machines at present on
the market, the sound-box is carried on a pivoted arm
and therefore cannot move in a straight line whether
such line be radial or otherwise, but traverses a path
30 const it utitig an arc struck from the pivot of the arm.
A further feature of this invention consists in utiliz-
ing the movement of the sound-box to provide a forced
draft through the intake of the trumpet whereby the
volume of the sound is increased and the quality im-
35 proved.
In the accompanying drawings witch illustrate one
method of carrying out this invention — Figure 1 is a
central vertical section of the machine viewed from the
front: Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the same viewed from
40 the right of Fig. 1; Fig. 3 is a plan of the machine;
Fig. 4 is a perspective view of a detail; Fig. 5 is a rear
elevation of the supporting bracket, and Fig. 6 is a per-
spective view of the sound-box and adjacent pans.
Like letters indicate like parts throughout the draw-
45 in°rs.
The base A of the machine shown is circular except
for a rear lug A1 carrying a bracket Ik The upper sur-
face of the base is dished and for the sake of lightness
it is perforated so that radial arms A- only are left con-
50 nected to a central boss A3. In this boss a centering
pin A4 is secured by a nut A5 and the base is covered
by a piece of baize A1, held at the center by a washer
or flange A7 on the pin A4. The baize is large enough
to extend over the edge A8 of the base and is there se-
65 cured by a ring A9 which is forced over the upper end
of the base and grips the baize so that it is pulled tight
and securely held in place. The upper face of the base
serves as the record table and a record X is indicated in
place thereon. It will thus be seen that the record
table is stationary and consequently the record is sta- 60
tionary, so that the sound-box must be operated to
travel or move in relation thereto.
The upper end of the bracket B has a jaw B1 in which
a motor C of any convenient construction is mounted.
The motor is secured by screws B2 which pass through 65
lugs on the lower member of the jaw B1 and enter the
bottom plate C1 of the motor. The upper plate C2 of the
motor is secured to the upper jaw member B1 by a
screw B3 which in addition to fastening the upper plate,
helps to hold in place an arm B4. The arm has three 70
feet B5 which serve as distance pieces whereby the arm
is lifted above the plate. The screw B3 passes through
one of these feet and other screws B3* are passed through
the other two feet into the plate C2 so that the arm is
rigidly held in place. The forward end of the arm ex- 75
tends beyond tin- motor and is shaped to constitute a
socket B6, split as shown at B7, and provided with a
gripping screw Bs whereby the ends of the socket may
be contracted to tighten it upon a sleeve D carried
therein. The lower end of the sleeve tapers off in the 80
form of a truncated cone, as shown at D1, but the upper
end is of uniform diameter.
Within the upper end of the sleeve a liner D- is mount-
ed having a web D3 at its base. The upper end of the
liner has a lip D4 adapted to engage a corresponding 85
groove in the wall of the sleeve D. The lip projects
slightly from the surface of the liner D- so that the
upper end of the sleeve D springs out slightly as the
liner is forced into place, until the lip comes opposite
the groove in the sleeve, where it is securely held. A 90
conical elbow-socket E takes over the upper end of
the sleeve D and receives the trumpet commonly em-
ployed with these instruments.
Within the lower end of the sleeve D, a vertically ro-
tatable tube F is mounted which const itutes the intake 95
of the trumpet. Its upper end is open to the interior of
the liner D-, and thus the trumpet socket E, and its
lower end communicates with the sound-box as here-
inafter described. The intake F is suspended from
the web D3 in the liner D'-' by a screw F1. The screw 100
is shouldered to rest upon the web and extends
through the same and into a web F- in the upper
end of the intake F. A toothed ring F3 surrounds
the upper end of the intake and is rigidly secured
thereto and gears with a toothed wheel C3 on the mo- 105
tor; the sleeve D is slotted as shown at D5, to admit
the wheel C3. The lower end of the intake F extends
beyond the sleeve D and receives a tubular elbow F4.
This elbow constitutes a horizontal supporting arm for
a sliding arm G1. The sliding arm is carried on the el- 110
bow by a fitting G. shown in perspective in Fig. 4.
This fitting is preferably cast and for convenience may
860,878
bo described as comprising two double sockets G2, G3
and G4, G5, respectively connected together by side
plates G°. The sockets G-, G4, take over the horizontal
portion of the elbow F4 and the sockets G3, G5, have se-
. 5 cured in them a tube G9 which receives and serves as a
guide1 for the sliding arm G1. The arm G1 carries on
that end within the tube an elbow G7, the mouth of
which enters a slot Gs in the horizontal limb of the el-
bow F4; the slot extends along the limb a distance equal
1 0 to the travel of the sliding arm Gl . The sliding arm has
an extension G10 beyond the elbow G7, such portion
constituting a steadying piece for the arm when the lat-
ter is advanced so that the elbow approaches near the
end of the tube G9. The tube G9 is slotted, as shown at
1 5 G*, to allow free movement of the elbow G7 as it trav-
erses the slot Gs.
On the free end of the arm G1 the sound-box H is car-
ried. This may be of any convenient construction and
therefore does not require detailed description in this
20 specification. It is not carried directly on the arm G1,
but is supported from the same by a connection of the
Cardan joint type. This connection comprises a hori-
zontal jaw-piece H2 carried on the end of the arm G1.
In the jaw H2 a vertical jaw-piece H1 is pivoted, and
25 within this jaw-piece is carried a tube H4 adapted to re-
ceive the corresponding tubular socket H5 of the sound-
box. It will be seen that this joint permits free move-
ment of the sound-box as it traverses the groove of the
record and allows it to rest upon the record.
30 The operation of this machine is as follows: — The
motor imparts motion to the wheel C3 which in turn ro-
tates the vertical intake tube F by means of its engage-
ment with the toothed ring F3 thereon. The end of
the intake rotates freely in the cover D6 of the sleeve
35 D and carries round with it the elbow F4. The fitting
G and sliding arm G1 move with the elbow and con-
sequently the sound-box secured to the free end of the
arm G1 will, if left to itself, travel in a circular path.
As is well known in these machines, the groove in the
40 record is spiral and consequently the point of the
sound-box needle must, as it traverses the groove,
move laterally towards the center of the record; this
movement is permitted by the sliding arm G1 and is in
a strictly radial direction, as indicated by the line h7,
45 Fig. 3. It will be noted that'the arm G1 slides in a
path parallel to a radial line drawn from the center of
rotation, but its position is so adjusted that the needle
point traverses the desired radial path. In machines
in which the sound-box is carried on a swinging arm,
50 this strictly radial movement, or any straight line lat-
eral movement, is impossible, and it is found in prac-
tice that the records become injured by the movement
of the needle in a curved instead of a radial path.
A further feature of this invention relates to means
55 whereby the sliding arm is controlled in its endwise
movement, as apart from some such control, the centrif-
ugal action is found to be sufficient to throw the sound-
box out of the groove in the record. The controlling
means comprise a cam device whereby a yielding mem-
G0 ber is displaced as the arm G1 is extended further from
the fitting G, whereby the resistance to outward move-
ment of the arm may be made proportionate to the de-
gree of centrifugal action , whatever position the arm
may occupy. This arrangement is shown clearly in
65 Fig. 2 . A cam J is secured to the arm Gx at a point which
lies beyond the tube G9 even when the arm is in the
withdrawn or central position and on the socket G4 of
the fitting is pivoted a weighted arm J1 carrying a roller
J2. The roller J2 lies in the path of the cam J and as
the arm G1 is drawn outward away from the central po- 70
sition, the roller rides up the cam. It will be seen that
the incline of the cam may be made such as to pro-vide
the desired resistance for the purpose of counteracting
the centrifugal effect. Preferably the control of the
arm G1 is further effected by a spiral spring K mounted 75
within the extension G1" of the arm. One end of the
spiral spring is secured to the elbow G7 and the other
end to a cap Gu by which the end of the tube G9 is
closed. Preferably the spring K is slack when the arm
G1 is at the central position as when the arm nears this 80
position it is found that it has a tendency to run sud-
denly in towards the center so that the needle of the
sound-box leaves the groove of the record. To further
insure that this sudden sliding-in of the arm shall not
take place, a second cam J3 may be mounted on the 85
arm G1. This cam inclines in a direction opposite
to that of the cam J arid also lies in the path of the roller
J2, so that the one weighted arm cooperates with both
cams, but the cam J resists outward movement of the
arm G1, while the cam J3 resists inward movement of 90
the same after the arm has passed a given point. It
will be noted that in the drawings the cam J is shown
as having a constant incline throughout its length so
that it does not offer increasing resistance as the arm is
moved farther outwards. This is because the spring is 95
employed with it and the resistance of the spring in-
creases as it is further extended but if desired the cam
may have an increasingly steep incline as shown by the
cam J3.
Another feature of this invention consists in the utili- 100
zation of the movement of the sound-box to create a
forced draft through the trumpet whereby the volume
of sound may be increased. For this purpose a mouth-
piece or funnel L is mounted in the free end of the el- .
bow F4. The mouth of the funnel faces in thedirec- 105
tion of rotation so that as the sound-box travels, air will
be forced through the funnel and along the elbow F4
up through the intake F and socket E, whence it passes
out through the trumpet.
The sound box H is preferably rotatable upon the 110
part Ii4 of the Cardan joint, and its socket IP is slotted
as shown at H6 to engage the pin II7 on the part H4.
The slot IP is in the form of a bayonet-joint and allows
limited rotation of the sound box. whereby the latter
may be brought into either of the positions indicated. 115
The working position is shown in Fig. 2, but when it
is desired to insert a needle, the sound box may be
turned into the position shown in Fig. 1, so that the
needle-holder is raised. On the socket II5 of the sound-
box is a lug or engaging piece H8 and a. cooperating stop 120
H9 is carried on the part IF of the Cardan joint, but ex-
tends forward to the lug IF. These parts are so dis-
posed that when the sound box is in the position shown
in Fig. 1, the lug IIs bears against the stop H9 whereby
the downward movement of the sound-box about the 125
horizontal pivot of the Cardan joint, is limited. This
gives rigidity to the sound-box when the needle holder
is in the raised position and renders it easier to handle.
Conveniently a cross-bar or finger-piece IF" is secured
across the face of the sound-box, and serves both to 130
860,878
protect the diaphragm and as a grip whereby the sound-
box may be turned.
In order that the same machine may take both large
and small records, the fitting G is made adjustable
ft upon the horizontal portion of the elbow F4. On the
socket G2 is a lug G12 slotted as shown at G13, and a pin
GM fast in the elbow F4 engages this slot. When the
fitting is advanced to the limit of its movement in a
direction towards the center of the machine, the appa-
1 0 rat us is in position for taking large records, but when
drawn back to the limit of its movement in the oppo-
site direction as controlled by the slot G13 and pin G14,
the arm G' is in the position for small records, as will
l>e readily understood.
1 5 The wheel C3 of the motor and toothed ring F3 on the'
top of the intake F arc preferably of fiber or some other
material which is noiseless in operation. As such sub-
stances are not as strong as metal, it is probable that
the teeth would be broken should the arm G' be sud-
20 denly stopped during its rotation without the motor
being braked. For this purpose the wheel C3 is not
carried fast upon its spindle, but is held friction-tight
between a shoulder C4 thereon and a nut C6. The nut
may be slacked or tightened as desired for the purpose
25 of increasing or decreasing the degree of friction be-
tween the wheel and its driving spindle.
For controlling the motor a rod M is slidingly sup-
ported in a lug M' on the arm B4. One end of the rod
is provided with a head M2 whereby it may be handled
30 and the other end is screw-threaded -and engages a
pivoted lug M3 carried by a horizontal arm M4. The
arm M4 is supported on one end of a vertical rock shaft
Ms and at the lower end of this rock shaft is an eccen-
tric brake-piece M°. The brake-piece is in proximity
3 5 to a brake disk M7 forming part of the well known gov-
ernor device indicated at M8. For starting the motor
the rod M is pushed inwards, so that the brake-piece
M6 is withdrawn from the disk M" and for stopping the
motor the rod is moved in the reverse direction. In
40 addition to starting and stopping, however, the speed
at which the motor runs may be controlled by rotating
the rod M whereby it is screwed further in to or out
from the pivoted lug M:!. It will be seen that if when
thus rotated the rod is kept home at its starting posi-
4 5 tion, the arm M4 will still be turned about its vertical
pivot so that the brake-piece M° will be brought nearer
to or further from the disk M7, whereby the governor
will be checked in the well known manner.
A tremolo device may be used with this machine
50 and comprises a disk N having a central socket N'
adapted to take over the head of the screw F' whereby
the intake F is supported. The disk N practically
closes the top of the intake but it has a notch or orifice
N2 at one side. Over the disk fits a bridge-piece N3,
55 but this does not come in contact with the disk and rests
at its outer edges upon a ledge N4 formed in the inte-
rior of the liner D2. The bridge-piece is thus station-
ary, whereas the disk N rotates with the screw F' so
that the orifice N2 appears first at one side of the bridge
60 piece and then at the other, whereby the tremolo ef-
fect is obtained.
The volume of sound passing to the trumpet may be
controlled by a sliding shutter O carried in guides O'
conveniently formed in one with the socket B°. The
65 shutter can be advanced a greater or less distance across
the liner D2, whereby any degree of modulation may be
obtained, as will be readily understood.
The bracket B is adjustably carried upon the lug A/
of the base A. For this purpose the foot of the bracket
is beveled as shown at B'J, and these beveled portions 70
take into a correspondingly undercut groove in a shoe
B1", which rests upon the surface of the lug. The
bracket is held in place by a screw B" extending
through the lug A1 and shoe B10 into the bracket, and
the lug is slotted so that the bracket may be adjusted 75
before the screw is finally tightened. Thus by sliding
the bracket in the shoe B10 and rotating the shoe on the
lug the center of the socket Bu can be readily brought
into alinement with the center of the record table, and
then the screw Bn tightened so that it is rigidly secured 80
in place. The under side of the shoe B10 and the up-
per surface of the lug are preferably roughened to pro-
vide a grip between these two parts.
1. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of a
stationary *' record-table," a sound-box, means for carrying 85
the sound-box round in a circular path above the " record-
table " and in a plane approximately parallel thereto,
means for permitting lateral movement of the sound-box,
a trumpet, and a tubular connection between the sound-
box and the intake of the trumpet the movable part con- 90
nected with the sound box having an air inlet whereby
a forced draft is set up through the intake of the trumpet
as the sound-box travels, substantially as set forth.
2. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of a
stationary " record-table," a sound-box, means for carrying 95
the sound-box round in a circular path above the " record-
table " and in a plane approximately parallel thereto,
means for permitting lateral movement of the sound-box,
a stationary trumpet, a swiveled tubular connection be-
tween the sound-box and the intake of the trumpet, and 100
a flared mouthpiece or funnel carried by the movable part
of the tubular connection and connected with the interior
of such connection and facing in the direction of movement
whereby a forced draft is set up through the intake of the
trumpet as the sound-box travels, substantially as set 105
forth.
3. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of a
stationary " record-table," a sound-box, an arm horizontal
to and above the table and carrying the sound-box, means
for rotating the arm about a vertical axis, and means for 110
supporting the arm while permitting endwise movement
of the same, substantially as set forth.
4. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of a
stationary " record-table," a sound-box, an arm horizontal
to and above the table and carrying the sound-box, means 115
for rotating the arm about a vertical axis, means for sup-
porting the arm while permitting endwise movement of
the same, and means for counterbalancing centrifugal ac-
tion upon the sliding arm.
5. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of a 120
stationary " record-table," a bracket secured thereto and
extending over the same, a tubular arm horizontal to the
table and having a vertical extension whereby it is rota-
la lily carried in the bracket, a second tubular arm parallel
to the first such arm being slidingly supported by the first 125
mentioned arm and communicating with the interior of
the same, means for preventing rotation of this second arm
about its longitudinal axis, a sound-box carried by the
second arm in such manner that the vibrations of the dia-
phragm are imparted to the air in the second tubular arm 130
and thence to that in the first tubular arm. and means for
rotating the latter arm about a vertical axis concentric
with the vertical portion of the same, substantially as set
forth.
(i. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of a 135
stationary " record-table," a bracket secured thereto and
extending over the same, a tubular arm horizontal to the
table and having a vertical extension whereby it is rota-
tably carried in the bracket, a fitting having two parallel
sockets one of which takes over the horizontal portion of 140
860,878
this arm whereby the fitting is carried thereon, a second
tubular arm slidably mounted in the second socket of the
fitting and communicating with the interior of the first
arm, means for preventing rotation of this second arm in
5 its socket, a sound-box carried by the second arm in such
manner that the vibrations of the diaphragm are imparted
to the air in the second tubular arm and thence to that in
the first tubular arm, and means for rotating the latter
arm atfout a vertical axis concentric with the vertical por-
]0 tion of the same, substantially as set forth.
7. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of a
stationary " record-table," a bracket secured thereto and
extending over the same, a tubular arm horizontal to the
table and having a vertical extension whereby it is rota-
15 tably carried in the bracket, a fitting having two parallel
sockets one of which takes over the horizontal portion of
this arm whereby the fitting is carried and can be moved
endwise thereon, a second tubular arm slidably mounted in
the second socket of the fitting and communicating witli
20 the interior of the first arm, means for preventing the
rotation of this second arm in its socket, a sound-box car-
ried by the second arm in such manner that the vibrations
of I he diaphragm are imparted to the air in the second
tubular arm and thence to* that in the first tubular arm,
25 and means for rotating the latter arm about a vertical
axis concentric with the vertical portion of the same, sub-
stantially as set forth.
s. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of a
stationary " record-table," a bracket secured thereto and
30 extending over the same, a tubular arm horizontal to the
table and having a vertical extension whereby it is rota-
tahly carried in the bracket, a fitting having two parallel
sockets one of which takes over the horizontal portion of
this arm whereby the fitting is carried and can be moved
35 endwise thereon, a stop to limit such endwise movement, a
second tubular arm slidably mounted in the second socket
of the fitting and communicating with the interior of the
first arm. means for preventing rotation of this second arm
in its socket, a sound-box carried by the second arm in such
40 manner that the vibrations of the diaphragm are imparted
to the air in the second tubular arm and thence to that in
the first tubular arm and means for rotating the latter arm
about a vertical axis concentric with the vertical portion
of the same, substantially as set forth.
45 0. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of a
stationary " record-table," a bracket secured thereto and
extending over the same, a sleeve secured to the bracket in
a position vertical to the table, an inner vertical tube ro-
tatably mounted within the sleeve and extending below the
50 same where it has a horizontal tubular extension or arm,
a sound box carried by this extension, means for rotating
the inner tube, and means for permitting lateral movement
of the sound-box, substantially as set forth.
10. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of
55 a stationary " record-table," a bracket secured thereto and
extending over the same, a sleeve secured to the bracket
in a position vertical to the table, an inner vertical tube
rotatably mounted within the sleeve and extending below
the same where it has a horizontal tubular extension or
60 arm, a sound-hox carried by this extension, means for ro-
tating the inner tube, means for permitting lateral move-
ment of the sound-box, and a trumpet carried on the upper
end of the vertical sleeve, substantially as set forth.
11. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of
65 a stationary " record-table," a bracket secured thereto and
extending over the same, a sleeve secured to the bracket
in a position vertical to the table, a laterally projecting
support within the sleeve, an inner vertical tube mounted
within the sleeve and extending below the same where it
70 has a horizontal tubular extension or arm, means for ro-
tatably suspending this inner tube from the support within
the sleeve, a sound-box carried by the extension or arm
of the tube, means for rotating the inner tube and menus
for permitting lateral movement of the sound-box, sub-
75 stantially as set forth.
I!'. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of
a stationary "record-table," a bracket secured thereto and
extending over the same, a sleeve secured to the bracket
in a position vertical to the table, a laterally projecting
80 support within the sleeve, an inner vertical tube mounted
within the sleeve and extending below the same where it
has a horizontal tubular extension or arm, a lateral pro-
jection within the inner vertical tube and near the upper
end of the same, means for suspending the inner vertical
tube by its lateral projection from the support within the 85
sleeve such suspending means being situated in line with
the central vertical axis of the tube and permitting ro-
tation of the tube about such axis, a guide on the lower
end of the sleeve where-by the lower end of the inner
tube is maintained in the vertical position, means for 90
rotating the inner tube, a sound-box carried by the ex-
tension or arm of the inner tube, and means for permitting
lateral movement of the sound-box, substantially as se,
forth.
1".. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of 95
a stationary " record-table," a bracket secured thereto and
extending over the same, a sleeve secured to the bracket
in a position vertical to the table, a laterally projecting
support within the sleeve, an inner vertical tube mounted
within the sleeve and extending below the same where it 100
has a horizontal tubular extension or arm, means for
rotatably suspending this inner tube from the support
within the sleeve, a disk carried detaehably by the inner
vertical tube and closing the same except for an orifice
in the disk, a bridge-piece carried by the stationary sleeve 105
and extending across the disk on the outlet side of the
sleeve but in proximity to the disk, a sound-box carried
by the extension or arm of the tube, means for rotating
the inner tube, and means for permitting lateral movement
cf the sound-box substantially as set forth. HO
14. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of
a stationary " record-table," a sound-box. an arm horizontal
to and above the table aud carrying the sound-box, mean:;
for rotating the arm about a vertical axis, a support for
the arm which permits endwise movement of the same ] 15
therein, a cam carried by one of these last mentioned ele-
ments, namely the support and the sliding arm. and a
yielding member -opposed to the cam and carried by that
element which does not carry the cam so that as the arm
advances the yielding member resists such advance but ] 20
is displaced by the cam.
1".. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of
a stationary " record-table," a sound-box, an arm horizontal
to and above the table and carrying the sound-box, means
for rotating the arm about a vertical axis, a support for 125
the arm which permits endwise movement of the same
therein, a cam carried by one of these last mentioned ele-
ments, namely the support and the sliding arm, a yielding
member opposed to the cam and carried by that element
which does not carry the cam so that as the arm is ad- 130
vanced in a direction away from the center of rotation,
the yielding member lesisls to such advance but is dis-
placed by the cam, and a spring connecting the sliding
arm with its support and also opposing outward move-
ment of the iinn, substantially as set forth. 135
10. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of
a stationary " record-table," a sound-box, an arm horizontal
to and above the table and carrying the sound-box. means
for rotating the arm about a vertical axis, a support for the
arm which permits endwise movement of the same therein. 140
a cam carried by one of these last mentioned elements,
namely the support and the sliding arm, a yielding member
opposed to the cum and carried by that element which
does not carry the cam. so that as the arm moves towards
the center of rotation the yielding member resists such 145
movement but is displaced by the cam, and a spring con-
necting the arm and its support and tending to oppose
outward movement of the arm, substantially as set forth.
17. In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of
a stationary " record-table." a sound-box, an arm horizontal 150
to and above the table and carrying the sound-box, the
connection between the arm and sound-box being such
that the latter can be turned upon the arm about a center
co-axial with that of the arm. means for permitting that
end of the arm carrying the sound-box to hinge about a 155
horizontal axis, a stop and a corresponding engaging-piece
one carried by the arm and the other by the sound-box
and so disposed relatively to each other that when the
sound-box is rotated to a given position the engaging piece
and slui) being brought into contact limit the movement 160
of the sound-box about the horizontal hinge referred to,
substantially as set forth.
860,878
JO
18. In a sound-reprodncing machine the combination of
a stationary " record-table," a bracket secured thereto and
extending over the same, a member rotatably mounted in
i he- brackel in a position vertical to the table and having
a horizontal extension or arm, a -sound-box carried by this
extension, means for permitting lateral movement of the
sound-box. a motor carried by the bracket referred to, a
toothed wheel carried by the vertical rotatable member
in the bracket and engaging a toothed wheel of the motor
one "l' these wheels being of material other than metal,
and means for mounting one of the wheels friction-tight
upon its carrying member, substantially as set forth.
1!). In a sound-reproducing machine the combination of
a stationary " record-table," a tubular arm horizontal to and
20
above the table, such arm being so shaped as to constitute 15
■ > tubular passage turned back upon itself, a sound-box
carried at one end of the arm in such manner that the
vibrations of the diaphragm are communicated to the air
within the arm, means for rotating the arm about a
vertical axis, and a vertical stationary trumpet having
a swivel connection witli the arm and in open connection
with the interior of the same, substantially as set forth.
In testimony whereof I have signed my name to this
specification in the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
FREDERICK MYERS.
Witnesses :
A. J. French,
A. M. Hay ward.
1
6^.
No. 861,206.
PATENTED JULY 23, 1907.
L. DEVINEAU.
PHONOGRAPHIC HORN.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 9, 1907.
THE NORMS PETEI9S CO., WASHINGTON. t>. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LOUIS DEVINEAU, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO.
PHONOGRAPHIC HORN.
No. 861,206.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Amplication filed February 9, 1907. Serial No. 356,513.
Patented July 23, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Louis De vineau, a citizen of the
United States, residing at Cleveland, in the county of
Cuyahoga and State of Ohio, have invented a certain
5 new and useful Improvement in Phonographic Horns,
of which the following is a full, clear, and exact de-
scription, reference being had to the accompanying
drawings.
My invention relates to phonographic horns, and has
10 for its object to provide a horn which shall be of such
size as to sufficiently amplify the sounds produced in
the operation of phonographs and at the same time so
construct and proportion the parts of said horn as to
dispense with the necessity of using a special support
15 therefor, the horn being carried and supported entirely
by the tubular portion of the reproducer.
A further object of,the invention is to relieve the
bearings on which the carriage traverses from undue
friction.
20 A still further object of the invention is to produce a
horn of this type which is extremely light and attractive
in appearance and which may be conveniently assem-
bled and disassembled.
I accomplish the above results by the construction
2 5 shown in the drawings forming part hereof, wherein
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a phonograph
of standard construction having my horn applied
thereto; Fig. 2 represents an enlarged detail, partly in
elevation and partly in section, of my horn, a portion
30 of the reproducer being shown in dotted lines; Fig. 3
represents an end elevation of the elbow of the horn;
and Figs. 4, 5, and 6 represent details of the bell of the
horn.
Describing the parts by reference numerals, 1 repre-
35 sents a phonograph, which may be of any approved
construction. The phonograph is associated with the
box or base 2 wherein the mechanism is contained for
rotating the mandrel and driving the carriage.
3 represents the frame within which is mounted the
40 mandrel 4. This frame is provided with a rod 5 and
bearing plate 6 whereon the carnage 7 is supported
which bears the reproducer 8 and horn 9.
10 represents the operating lever by which the repro-
ducer stylus is lifted out of engagement with the cylin-
4 5 drical record and by means of which the carriage is then
shifted as desired.
The reproducer is provided with the ordinary tubu-
lar connection 8a projecting upwardly therefrom to
which the lower end 11 of the elbow 12 of the horn is
50 connected, such connection being made by fitting the
lower end 11 over the tube and tightening up the set
screw 13 carried by said end.
The horn proper comprises two separable elements,
the elbow 12 to which reference has been made and the
55 bell 14. As will appear "by reference to Figs. 1 and 2,
this elbow is provided with a reduced, downwardly and
rearwardly extending end portion 11 adapted to fit over
the tube 8a projecting from the reproducers. From the
upper end of 11, the body of the elbow extends rear-
wardly, gradually increasing in cross-sectional area to 60
the mouth thereof, the smooth portion of the elbow pro-
jecting forwardly and upwardly, as shown, from the
bend 15. The elbow is made of metal and is consider-
ably heavier in proportion to its dimensions than the
bell. When connected to the reproducer, the main 65
body of the elbow extends rearwardly a considerable
distance behind the mandrel 4, being bent upwardly
and rearwardly at 16 and upwardly and forwardly at 15.
The bell 14 is connected to the elbow by having its
lower or reduced end telescoped thereinto and secured 70
in place by a construction which will hereinafter be de-
scribed in detail. This bell is of the flaring type and is
of sufficient extent to adequately amplify the sounds
produced by the phonograph. At the same time, owing
to the rearward projection of the elbow, the front and 75
enlarged end of the bell but slightly overhangs the cor-
responding portion of the phonograph. This not only
provides a compact construction of horn, but, as will
more fully appear hereinafter, secures a distribution of
the weight of the horn in such manner as to reduce to a 80
minimum the friction produced between the carriage
and its bearings.
As previously stated, the elbow 12 is made of metal
while the bell is made of extremely light material.
I have found paper to be admirably adapted for the 85
main body of the bell and, by suitably reinforcing
and strengthening the same with light metal, as alu-
minium, I am enabled to produce a bell which is
not only efficient but extremely light of construction.
The paper of which the body of the bell is constructed 90
is composed of a number of longitudinal segments 17
increasing in width from the bottom to the top there-
of. These segments are connected by means of longi-
tudinal ribs 18, and the mouth of the bell is bound
around by metallic binding 19. The longitudinal 95
ribs 18 and binding 19 are of very light metal, prefer-
ably aluminium. As a simple and effective manner
of connecting the longitudinal edges of adjacent seg-
ments, I may construct the ribs as shown more par-
ticularly in Fig. 6. At equal distances on each side 100
of the longitudinal center of the blank, the metal is
bent back or folded upon itself and each side portion
is again folded, the points of folding being so selected
that the outer edges 20 will be substantially flush
with the edge 21 of the folded metal therebeneath 105
and the inner edges 22 of the parts which are first
folded will be in substantial contact. This can be
accomplished by making the bend at about one-third
the distance from the longitudinal center to the edge,
then by making the next bend at substantially the 110
same distance from the first bend. This forms re-
cesses 23 for the reception of the edges of the opposite
Q
861,206
segments 17. By subjecting the metal to suitable
pressure, a firm joint is made between adjacent seg-
ments and the main body of the bell is reinforced with
but slight increase in weight.
5 The outer ends of the bell segments are bound by
the metal binding 19 to which reference has been made
hereinbefore. This binding is preferably of aluminium
and is made up of a number of individual strips which
embrace opposite sides of the outer edge of each seg-
10 ment and terminate a little short of the longitudinal
seam between such segments. The ribs and binding
segments 19 may then be connected by clips 24,
shown more particularly in Figs 4 and 5 and con-
sisting each of a piece of metal bent upon itself to
15 provide symmetrical branches each having an in-
wardly projecting portion 25, said portions being
adapted to receive therebetween the outer end of a
rib 18. Clips 24 have each a pair of side wings 26
adapted to receive the opposite ends of binding sec-
20 tions 19. By means of suitable rivets 27, 28, clamp
24 is secured to sections 19 and rib 18. This clamp
may also be of aluminium and makes a light and firm
connection between the ribs and the binding sections.
. The bell is provided at the lower end thereof with
25 a light metal fitting which not only clamps together
the lower or reduced ends of the segments of which
it is composed but facilitates the application of the
bell to the elbow. This fitting comprises an inner
band 29 of thin metal and an outer band 30 of the same
30 material, which are riveted together and to the ribs.
The lower end of the inner band is extended consider-
ably beyond the corresponding end of the outer band
to form a neck 31 and said outer band may be con-
nected to said neck, as by soldering.
35 The outer surface of the neck is tapered toward the
end thereof to enable it to be easily inserted within the
flaring inner face of the mouth 32 of the elbow. To en-
able the bell and elbow to be quickly connected and
disconnected, I provide a pin 33 which projects up-
40 wardly from the lower portion of mouth 32, said pin be-
ing adapted to be inserted into a corresponding aperture
34 in the neck 31. Directly opposite pin 33, the mouth
32 is provided with a slot 35 extending inwardly from
the outer edge thereof, the metal being suitably thick-
45 ened at 35a to prevent weakening the mouth by the
provision of the slot and to form a bearing for the head of
a thumb-screw. The corresponding part of neck 31 is
thickened to form a suitable carrier 36 for the thumb-
screw 37. By unscrewing the thumb-screw a suitable
50 distance, the bell may be applied to the elbow by in-
serting pin 33 into aperture 34. Then by swinging the
bell upwardly on said pin as a pivot, the upper portion
of the neck 31 maybe inserted within the corresponding
portion of the elbow mouth and the shank of the screw
55 simultaneously slid into the slot 35. Then by merely
tightening the screw 37, the bell is effectively clamped
in place. In order to remove the bell, it is only neces-
sary to slack up the screw 37, allow the outer end or
mouth of the bell to drop and then lift the lower por-
6 0 tion of neck 31 off the pin 33 .
By giving to my horn the peculiar shape shown and
described and by making the elbow 12 of relatively
heavier material than the bell, I am enabled to bring
the center of gravity of the horn directly over the axis
•55 of the mandrel 4, which is midway between the
bearings, without sacrificing the size of the horn. This
is an important advantage in that it distributes the
weight of the horn evenly between the two carriage
bearings 5 and 6, enabling the carriage with the at-
tached horn to be moved along the frame with a mini- 70
mum of friction. This result is furthered by the fact that
the portions of the horn where the most metal is present
the connection between the bell and the elbow) is at the
rear of the mandrel axis. Furthermore, the short dis-
tance between the center of gravity of the horn and the 7 5
point of connection between the lower end of the elbow
and the tubular extension 8a of the reproducer enables
a large horn to be used with no support other than said
extension. Where the center of gravity of a horn is
in front of the vertical plane midway between the bear- 80
ings there is excessive friction on the slide 6, while if it
were at the rear of that plane not only would the friction
be excessive on the rod 5, but the horn would exert a
tendency to tip the carriage over backward.
By the construction herein described, I have pro- 85
duced a phonographic horn which may be veiy conven-
iently and quickly taken apart for purposes of shipment
and as quickly and conveniently assembled thereafter;
which is light and cheap of construction and efficient in
operation; which is so constructed and proportioned as 90
to enable the carriage to traverse the mandrel with the
development of a minimum amount of friction; and
which requires no supporting means other than the tu-
bular extension of the reproducer.
Having thus described my invention, I claim: 95
1. The combination with the mandrel, carriage, two
supports along which the carriage travels, and the repro-
ducer .supported by the carriage between the supports, of
a horn supported by the reproducer and having an elbow
extending beyond one of the carriage supports, said horn iqq
having its center of gravity in a vertical line passing be-
tween said supports.
2. The combination with the mandrel and reproducer of
a phonograph, of a phonographic horn, comprising an
elbow connected to said reproducer, said elbow extending inc
rearwardly of the mandrel, and a forwardly projecting
bell on said elbow, a carriage in which the reproducer is
mounted and two supports on which the carriage travels,
the complete horn being supported by the reproducer and
having its center of gravity in a vertical line passing be- ;qq
tween the supports for the carriage.
3. A phonographic horn comprising an elbow having a
down-turned end adapted for connection with a repro-
ducer, a tapering body portion extending rearwardly from
said end and an up-turned mouth carried by said body H5
portion, and a bell projecting forwardly from said mouth,
combined with a record rotater and means for supporting
the horn with its center of gravity over the axis of rota-
tion, substantially as specified.
4. A phonographic horn comprising a metallic elbow 120
having a down-turned end adapted for connection with a
reproducer, a tapering body portion extending rearwardly
from said end and an up-turned mouth carried by said
body portion, and a bell of relatively light material de-
tachably secured to said mouth and projecting forwardly 125
therefrom, combined with rotatable means for supporting
the record, and means for supporting the horn with its
center of gravity substantially over the axis of rotation,
substantially as specified.
5. The combination, with the mandrel and reproducer 130
of a phonograph, said reproducer being provided with a
tubular extension, of a horn having its lower end adapted
for application to said tubular extension, said horn having
its center of gravity in a plane substantially coincident
with the axis of the mandrel, whereby the necessity for 135
supporting means other than the tubular extension is dis-
pensed with, substantially as specified.
6. The combination, with the mandrel and reproducer
861,206
of a phonograph, said reproducer having a tubular exten-
sion, of a large horn comprising an elbow and a bell, the
lower end of said elbow being down-turned and adapted
to be fitted to the tubular extension of the reproducer and
5 the body of said elbow projecting rearwardly beyond the
mandrel and the bell projecting forwardly from the elbow,
the center of gravity of the horn being in a vertical plane
passing through the mandrel, whereby the necessity for
any support other than the tubular extension is avoided,
10 substantially as specified.
7. The combination, with means for carrying and
rotating a record, of a sectional horn having a flaring bell
and a contracting elbow separable from each other and
means for supporting the horn with its center of gravity
15 in a plane substantially coincident with the axis of rota-
tion of the record.
8. The combination, with the mandrel, carriage and re-
producer cf a phonograph, of a horn comprising an elbow
secured to the carriage by the reproducer, and a flaring
20 hell connected with the elbow and located over the main
portion of the elbow and over the mandrel, the center of
gravity of the horn being substantially coincident in the
vertical plane through the axis of the mandrel.
9. A phonographic horn comprising a metallic elbow
25 having a down-turned end adapted for connection with
a reproducer, a tapering body portion extending rearwardly
from said end. an up-turned mouth carried by said body
portion, and a bell of relatively light material detachably
secured to said mouth and projecting forwardly therefrom.
combined with a reproducer supporting said horn, a car- 30
riage supporting said reproducer, and two supports on
which the carriage rides, the horn having its center of
gravity in a vertical plane lying substantially midway be-
tween said supports.
10. The combination, with means for carrying and ro- 35
tating a record, of a sectional horn having a flaring bell
and a contacting elbow, separable from each other, a
traveling carriage, two supports therefor, and a reproducer
carried by the carriage and supporting the horn with its
center of gravity in a vertical line between said supports. 40
11. The combination with the mandrel, carriage, two
parallel supports on which the carriage rides, and the
reproducer supported by the carriage, of a horn comprising
an elbow associated with the reproducer and supported by
the carriage, and a flaring bell separably connected with 45
the elbow and located over the main portion of the elbow
and over the mandrel, the vertical line through the center
of gravity of said horn passing between said supports,
whereby the weight of the horn is distributed thereon.
In testimony whereof, I hereunto affix my signature in 50
the presence of two witnesses.
LOUIS DEVINEAU.
Witnesses :
W. L. McGarhell,
J. B. Holl.
\
No, 861,648,
-CiC^r^l.
PATENTED JULY 30, 1907.
H. GROSS.
PHONOGRAPH HORN.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 12. 1908.
£Utottneu3
THE NOHKIS rKTKRS CO., WASMINOTOIt, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HENRY GROSS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO FRANK SHILLER, OF NEW
YORK, N. Y.
PHONOGRAPH-HORN.
No. 861,648.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 12, 1906. Serial No. 311,390.
Patented July 30, 1907.
To all whom it. may concern:
Be it known that I, Henry Gross, a citizen of the
United States, residing at New York, in the county of
New York and State of New York, have invented
5 certain new and useful Improvements in Phonograph-
Horns; and I do declare the following to be a full, clear,
and exact description of the invention, such as will en-
able others skilled in the art to which it appertains to
make and use the same.
10 This invention relates to improvements in collapsi-
ble phonograph horns.
The object of the invention is to provide a phono-
graph horn formed of collapsible telescopic sections
provided with means for holding the sections against
15 disengagement at all points when extended, and against
longitudinal movement in both directions.
With the above and other objects in view, the inven-
tion consists of certain novel features of construction,
combination and arrangement of parts, as will be here-
20 inafter described and claimed.
In the accompanying drawings: — Figure 1 is a side
view of the horn with the parts arranged in position
for use; Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sectional view of the
horn with the parts in the position shown in Fig. 1; and
25 Fig. 3 is a sectional view through the horn, showing the
same collapsed and arranged in the box or case for con-
venient transportation.
Referring more particularly to the drawings, 1 de-
notes the horn as a whole which is formed of a series of
30 frusto-conical telescoping sections 2, the diameter of the
larger end of each of said sections being substantially
the size of or a little larger than the inner small end of
the next adjacent section, thereby permitting said sec-
tions to be drawn outwardly until the walls .adjacent to
35 said outer and inner ends come into engagement, there-
by forming a funnel-shaped horn.
In order to prevent the sections of the horn from col-
lapsing when the same is in use, the engaging edges of
the ends of the sections are provided with screw threads
40 3 which are adapted to be engaged by a slight turn of
said sections after the same have been drawn out to an
operative position.
In order to prevent any possibility of the sections of
the horn from being pulled apart when drawn out, said
HENRY GROSS.
sections are provided with retaining cords, chains or 45
other flexible connections 4, of which there are prefer-
ably four for each section, the same being shown in the
drawings as cords, said cords being arranged at diamet-
rically opposite points on. the inner side of the sections.
The outer ends of each of the cords are secured to the 50
inner sides of the sections near their outer ends in any
suitable manner, while the inner ends of the cords are
connected with the next adjacent section, preferably
by means of eyes or loops 5 secured to the inner sides of
said section, as shown. The inner ends of the cords 55
have formed therein knots, whereby the same are pre-
vented from pulling through said eyes and the sections
of the horn prevented from being entirely separated or
pulled apart.
A phonograph horn constructed as herein shown and 60
described may be readily drawn out to an operative
position or collapsed into a convenient form adapted
to be placed in a suitable box or case 7 by which the
same may be readily carried.
From the foregoing description, taken in connection 65
with the accompanying drawings, the construction and
operation of the invention will be readily understood
without requiring a more extended explanation.
Various changes in the form, proportion and the mi-
nor details of construction may be resorted to without
departing from the principle or sacrificing any of the
advantages of this invention, as defined by the append-
ed claims.
Having thus described my invention, what I claim
as new and desire to secure by Letters-Patent, is: —
A phonograph horn comprising a plurality of frusto-
conical nestable sections, the adjacent sections having a
groove in one and a rib on the other of the meeting ends,
extending therearound to engage and hold the sections
against disengagement at all points when extended and
against longitudinal movement in both directions, each sec-
tion having a plurality of laterally-spaced eyes on its inner
face and flexible members connected with the eyes of the
adjacent section to hold said sections in position ready for
assembling when the horn is collapsed.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my hand in
presence of two subscribing witnesses.
70
75
80
85
Witnesses :
Eric E. Hansson,
Ernst M. Hansson.
No. 861,827.
BATENTED JULY 30, 1907.
C. G. GARRARD.
PHONOGRAPH, GRAPHOPHONE, &o.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 1, 1907.
ttp.2.
Ilp J.
WITNESSES.
o/iJlluufyl. (%AMt.
/NVENTOR.
c^£i'>-
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. I
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHARLES GEORGE GARRARD, OF LONDON, ENGLAND, ASSIGNOR TO EDISON-BELL CON-
SOLIDATED PHONOGRAPH COMPANY LIMITED, OF LONDON, ENGLAND.
PHONOGRAPH, GRAPHO PHONE, &c.
No. 861,827.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed February 1, 1907. Serial No. 355,295.
Patented July 30, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Charles George Garrard, a
subject of His Majesty the King of Great Britain, re-
siding at London, England, have invented a certain
5 new and useful Improvement in Phonographs, Grapho-
phones, and the Like, of which the following is a speci-
fication.
This invention relates to phonographs, grapho-
phoncs and the like and particularly to the driving
10 mechanism thereof with the object of effecting certain
improvements therein.
It has hitherto been the practice to traverse the sty-
lus upon the blank or record by providing the arm
which carries said stylus with a half nut adapted to
15 engage the feeding screw, whereby the revolution of
the latter causes-the half nut to travel from end to end
thereof in the well known manner. The employment
of a half nut however is found to be objectionable on
account of the excessive amount of friction set up be-
20 twecn it and the feeding screw, and the object of the
present invention is to substitute for the half nut a
revoluble device which will engage the threads of the
positively driven feeding screw and revolve while
traveling thereover thereby lessening the friction be-
25 tween the two parts. A convenient means for effecting
this purpose is to mount in any convenient position
upon the stylus-carrying arm and by any suitable
means a revoluble disk or disks having its, or their, pe-
ripheral edge, or edges, shaped or formed so as to engage
30 readily with the threads upon the feeding screw,
whereby when the latter is revolved the disk or disks
will also revolve and at the same time travel lengthwise
of the feeding screw carrying the arm and stylus with it
in the well understood manner.
35 In place of the disk or disks, a roller having one or
more grooves of a pitch corresponding to that of the
screw, may be used, or any other revoluble attach-
ment to the arm may be employed having a like pur-
pose and effect.
40 In the accompanying drawings: — Figure 1 is an end
elevation of so much of a phonograph as is necessary to
illustrate the present invention, and Fig. 2 is a de-
tached view of one form of revoluble device adapted to
engage with the feeding screw.
In said drawings ] is the plain shaft pivotal] y carry- 45
ing the stylus arm 2 on which is the usual diaphragm
3 carrying the stylus while 4 is the positively driven
feeding screw with which is adapted to engage a pair
of disks 5 rotatably mounted on arm 6 which is secured
to arm 2. As seen a pair of disks are employed but it 50
is obvious that a single or several disks may be em-
ployed or a roller having one or more grooves of a pitch
corresponding to the thread of the leading screw may
be equally well employed.
What is claimed is: — 55
1. In phonographs, graphophones and the like, the com-
bination of a positively driven tee ling-screw, a stylus-
carrying' arm to be moved by said feeding-screw, and a
disk rotatably mounted upon said arm and adapted to lie
engaged with and rotated by said feeding-screw during the 60
feeding operation.
■2. In phonographs, graphophones and the like, the com-
bination of a positively driven feeding-screw, a stylus-
carrying arm pivotally mounted adjacent to said feeding-
screw, and a revoluble device carried by said arm adapt- 65
ed to be engaged with and rotated by said feeding-screw
during the feeding operation, and to be disengaged there-
from, whereby said arm may be returned to its starting
position.
3. In phonographs, graphophones and the like, the com- 7 0
bination of a positively driven feeding-screw, a shaft ar-
ranged parallel with said feeding-screw, a stylus-carrying
arm pivotally mounted upon said shaft, and a revoluble
device carried by said arm and adapted to be engaged with
and rotated by said feeding-screw to move said arm in 75
one direction, and to be disengaged from said feeding-
screw, whereby said arm may be returned to its starting
position.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my band in
the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
CHARLES GEORGE GARRARD.
Witnesses :
T'eucv Willis,
Fredrick William Pleasance.
No. 862,407.
PATENTED AUG. 6. 1907-
T. H. MACDONALD.
TALKING MACHINE RECORD.
APPLIOATIOH FILED JULY 9, 1906.
Sn-oet-itot
iff.
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS H. MACDONALD, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT , ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN
GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF
WEST VIRGINIA.
TALKING-MACHINE RECORD.
No. 862,407.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed July 9, 1906. Serial No. 325,413.
Patented Aug. 6, 1907.
To all luhom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas H. Macdonald, of
Bridgeport, Connecticut, have invented a new and use-
ful Improvement in Talking-Machine Records, which
5 improvement is fully set forth in the following specifica-
tion.
This invention has reference to the production of
sound-records of disk form impressed in celluloid .m This
material has long been recognized as having desirable
10 properties for use as a sound-recording material, but it
has not heretofore been employed commercially for the
manufacture of disk records. The reasons for this are
mainly that celluloid is too expensive to be employed
in a sheet of sufficient thickness to give the desired
15 rigidity, ancl although it has long been known that cel-
luloid unites readily under heat and pressure with pa-
per or cardboard, either with or without sizing, such
compound disk quickly warps to such an extent as to
spoil the appearance and usefulness of the sound-
20 record.
I have discovered that a commercially successful cel-
luloid record can be made by inclosing a cardboard
sheet between two sheets of celluloid which are of the
same thickness and quality. The uniformity of thick-
25 ness and quality of the celluloid sheets is essential to
prevent warping.
30
35
40
45
50
placed between two thin sheets of celluloid, one of
these sheets being sliglitly larger m diameter tnan the
other sheet and the cardboard disk. The three sheets
are placed in the press, and compressed between the
heated matrix and die in the usual way, thereby im-
pressing a sound-record in the surface of one of the cel-
luloid sheets. The act of compression unites the three
sheets into a coherent disk, and at the same time the
projecting margin of the wider celluloid disk is drawn
over the edge of the cardboard and against the edge of
the other celluloid disk. The heat and pressure of the
hydraulic press seal the edges of the two celluloid sheets
together. The disk is removed from the press and the
slight surplus material is then removed in a rapidly re-
volving lathe. The result is a sound-record composed
of a cardboard disk hermetically sealed between two
sheets of celluloid.
It is preferred that the under disk of celluloid should
have a roughened surface, such as produced by the use
of a die whose surface is covered by fine lines close to-
gether and crossing at right angles.
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a cross-
section illustrating the record in process of formation,
the thickness of the several sheets being very much ex-
aggerated. Fig. 2 is a plan view of part of the under-
side of a finished record showing the roughened surface.
A represents the core of cardboard, which may or may
not have the surfaces coated with sizing in the usual
way of making a compound sheet of paper and cellu-
loid.
B represents the facing sheet of celluloid and C the
backing sheet of celluloid of the same thickness and
quality as B.
The three sheets are placed between the die D and
matrix E, the latter having on its surface a sound-record
in reverse, and are subjected to heat and heavy pres-
sure in the usual way. By this means the sound-record
is impressed in sheet B, and the three sheets are united
together. Furthermore, the projecting margin of sheet
B (which is slightly larger than sheet C) is drawn over
the edge of the cardboard disk and united firmly to the
edge of sheet C.
The surface of the die D is roughened so as to produce
on the back disk C a roughened surface, such as shown
in Fig. 2 consisting preferably of fine grooves intersect-
ing at right angles. Instead of roughening the rear sur-
face in this manner another sound-record may be im-
pressed thereon.
By this means a sound-record may be produced
whose total thickness is less than a sixteenth of an inch
and exposure. The product of this process is much
lighter than the ordinary disk record, and is not brittle
as is the latter. Further advantages, however, are ab-
sence of extraneous sounds (the surface being a close
approximation to absolute smoothness) and greatly in-
creased durability. The celluloid record will yield
many times the number of reproductions that an ordi-
nary record will give, and it shows, after a very large
number of reproductions, no deterioration of quality.
Moreover, it is not necessary with the new celluloid
record to change the needle after each reproduction.
The needle may be used for a score or more times with-
out detriment.
What is claimed is:
1. A sound-record of disk shape composed of two sheets
of celluloid inclosing between them and united to a sheet
of cardboard, said celluloid sheets being of the same thick-
ness and quality.
2. A sound-record of disk shape, composed of two sheets
of celluloid inclosing between them a sheet of cardboard,
said celluloid sheets being of the same thickness and
quality, and being united at the edges so that the card-
board is entirely inclosed in a celluloid envelop of uni-
form thickness.
3. A sound-record of disk shape composed of two sheets
of celluloid inclosing between them and united to a sheet
55
60
65
70
75
In carrying out the invention a sheet of cardboard is and will not warp under ordinary conditions of service
80
85
90
95
100
862,407
of cardboard, said celluloid sheets being of the same thick-
ness and quality, one sheet having impressed in it a sound-
record, and the other having its surface roughened.
4. The method of making a sound-record by placing a
cardboard disk between two disks of celluloid of the same
thickness and quality, one celluloid disk being of slightly
greater diameter than the cardboard disk, applying heat
and pressure to the three disks, impressing a sound-record
in the outer surface of one celluloid disk, roughening the
outer surface of the other celluloid disk, and sealing the
cardboard entirely between the disks of celluloid.
In testimony whereof I have signed this specification in
the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
10
THOS. H. MACDONALD.
Witnesses :
Bessie J. Boer,
C. A. Gibner.
No. 862,501.
PATENTED AUG. 6, 1907.
J. M. MoCALLIE.
AUDIOMETER.
APPLICATION FILED HAE. 7, 1907.
4 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
WITNESSES
I
inventor:
JOSfF/f M.MSC/1UJE,
THE MORRIS PETERS CO. WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 862,501.
PATENTED AUG. 6, 1907.
J. M. MoCALLIE.
AUDIOMETER.
APPLICATION FILED MAB. 7, 1907.
JTTGzJT
4 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
WITNESSES;
Oft?**,
inventor:
JOSEPH M. M^C/IU/E.
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 862,501.
PATENTED AUG. 6, 1907.
J. M. McOALLIE.
AUDIOMETER.
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 7, 1907.
4 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
30
inventor:
THE NORRSS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, O. C
No. 862.501.
PATENTED AUG. 6, 1907.
J. M. MoCALLIE.
AUDIOMETER.
APPLICATION PILED MAB. 7, 1907.
4 SHEETS-SHEET 4.
FTCr. J£
witnesses:
inventor:
A
THE NOPRIS f*2T&&-<tOY.'WAimiNGTONt O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOSEPH M. McCALLIE, OF TRENTON, NEW JERSEY.
AUDIOMETER.
No. 862,501.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed March 7, 1907, Serial No. 361,033.
Patented Aug. 6, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Joseph M. McCallie, of Tren-
ton, in the county of Mercer and State of New Jersey,
have invented a certain new and useful Audiometer,
5 of which the following is a specification, reference
being had to the accompanying drawings.
My invention relates to an instrument which is
adapted to test the acuteness of human hearing, and,
in its most complete embodiment, to enable c'ompari-
10 son of the results in individual cases with a prede-
termined standard.
An ordinary method of testing hearing of individ-
uals is to employ a sound emitting device, such as a
watch, which is successively placed at more and more
15 remote distances from the person subjected to the
test, until the sound ceases to be audible, applica-
tion being made of the familiar rule that the sound
impressions upon the ear diminish in accordance
with the square of the distance.
20 The object of my invention is to furnish a compact
apparatus not requiring adjustment of the sound
emitting device at different distances from the per-
son subjected to the test and the consequent ascer-
tainment of such distances by measurement, but which,
25 nevertheless, permits the employment of the same
general principle as to the diminution of audibility
and presents the results of a given test immediately
and directly to the observer.
In the accompanying drawings, Figure I, repre-
30 sents a plan view of an apparatus embodying my in-
vention and provided with the flexible tubes, of the
same general character as ordinary stethoscope tubes,
which I prefer to employ in connection therewith.
Fig. II, is a vertical section on a plane of the line
35 II, II, of Fig. I. Fig. Ill, is a horizontal sectional
view on the two planes indicated by the lines III,
III, of Fig. II. Fig. IV, is a vertical section at right
angles to that of Fig. Ill, and on the plane of the line
IV, IV, of Fig. I. Fig. V, is a perspective view of
40 the apparatus. Fig. VI, is a perspective view of the
adjustable slide for affording sound openings of dif-
ferent fixed area, the purpose of which will be ex-
plained hereafter. In Figs. II, IV, and V, the flexi-
ble tubes are omitted for purpose of convenience.
45 Generally speaking, my invention in its fullest em-
bodiment comprises a receptacle adapted to so inclose
a sound emitting object as to prevent the transmis-
sion of sound audible to the human ear, except through
an aperture provided for that purpose; means for pro-
50 gressively varying the area of said aperture and for
indicating the extent thereof at a given movement;
means for employing openings of selected areas for
the purpose of such subsequent variation; and means
whereby either or both ears of the person undergoing
the test may be placed in communication with the 55
source of sound.
Referring to the drawings, 1, indicates the closed
receptacle, preferably of metal, which is conven-
iently made of the approximate cubical form shown.
Upon a portion of the top of the receptacle 1, and GO
preferably integral therewith, is a raised bed plate 2,
through which a vertical passage 3, of circular cross
section, extends. This bed plate may extend later-
ally as shown, to one edge of the receptacle, and sup-
ports a casing 4, whose upper portion 6. is somewhat 65
reduced in size, as indicated.
The upper portion of the casing contains a cylin-
drical valve 7, adapted to turn upon a horizontal axis
and provided with a shaft 12, and hand wheel 13.
This valve is provided with two passages 8, and 9, 70
respectively, which merge into an oblong opening
at one extremity, but diverge from one another so
as to be capable of simultaneous registration respec-
tively with the opening of the outlet nozzles 10, and 11.
A vertical passage 5, is formed through the lower 75
portion of the casing in proper position to communi-
cate with the passage 3, leading from the receptacle 1.
In cross section the passage 5, is oval, its two diamet-
rical dimensions being indicated respectively in Figs.
II, and IV, and its greatest diameter being such as 80
to register with the approximately oval opening in
the valve 7, at the region where the passages 8, and
9, merge together.
Intermediate between the passage 5, and the pas-
sage 3, are two independent controlling elements, 85
which in this instance, are arranged to move at right
angles to one another. The lower of these elements
is the slide 17, shown in perspective in Fig. VI, and
which may conveniently be termed the outlet-slide.
This outlet-slide moves freely in a horizontal channel 90
formed in the bed plate 2, the width of the slide being
such as to completely cover the upper end of the pas-
sage 3. This outlet-slide is provided with a stud 18,
so that it may be shifted by hand into any deshed
position and in this instance, it contains three trian- 95
gular openings 19, 20, and 21 , the altitude of the three
triangles being the same, but the base lines varying,
so that the area of the triangle 19, is one-half that of
the triangle 21, the area of the latter one-half that of
the triangle 20. When the outlet slide is adjusted 100
with any one of these three triangles symmetrically
over the center of the passage 3, the effective area
of the outlet of said passage is of course reduced to
the area of the particular triangle so located. Trans-
verse lines 22, 23, and 24, are so marked upon the 105
outlet-slide as to register with the exterior face of the
862,501
casing 4, when the respective triangles are in the
proper position with reference to the passage, so that
the operator may correctly adjust the slide.
Immediately above the outlet-slide 17, and prefer-
5 ably at right angles thereto is a second slide 26, which
may conveniently be termed the cut-off slide. This
cut-off slide moves freely in an undercut recess 25,
formed in the lower portion of the casing 4, and is pro-
vided with a laterally projecting rack 27, which ex-
10 tends out through the casing 4, and is mounted within
a removable housing comprising the pieces 35, and 36,
which are secured to the laterally extending part of the
bed plate 2, at that region. Said housing affords bear-
ings for the shaft 29, upon which a pinion 28, is mounted
15 in engagement with the rack 27, the shaft 29, being
provided with an external hand wheel 30, whose pe-
riphery is marked with graduations as indicated. The
cut-off slide 26, is of such dimensions and its range of
movement of such extent, as to permit the complete
20 covering of any given opening through the outlet-slide
17, or the complete exposure of said opening when ar-
ranged in communication with the passage 3. The in-
ner end of the cut-off slide 26, is in this instance, rec-
tangular with relation to its sides, in order that it may
25 be symmetrical with relation to the configuration of Hie
openings in the outlet-slide 17, so that as the cut-off
slide 26, is progressively advanced or withdrawn across
that opening which is then beneath it, a definite and
regular reduction or increase in the area of the opening
30 shall be effected.
A radial arm 44, having an index 45, arranged to
overhang the periphery of the hand wheel 30, is mount-
ed in a convenient position for observation from what
may be termed the front of the instrument, that is to
35 say, the side which in Fig. I, is shown at the bottom
of the sheet. The exterior face of the valve 7, is also
marked as indicated in Fig. V, with the radial lines 40,
41, and 42, which correspond with the three required
positions of said valve, a mark 43, upon the exterior of
40 the casing being properly located for registration with
said lines respectively in the several rotative positions
of the valve 7, within the casing 4.
A pedestal 47, may be provided for the sound emit-
ting object 48, which may be a watch, and said pedestal
4 5 may conveniently rest upon a mat of felt 46, or other
substance which is not a good conductor of sound, so
as to deaden the vibrations which might otherwise be
' directly communicated to the base of the instrument.
Referring to Fig. I, a pair of stethoscope tubes 50,
50 and 51, are shown as connected respectively with the
nozzles 10, and 11, said tubes being provided with the
usual tips 52, and 53, for insertion into the cavity of
the external ear.
The operation of the device is as follows: — The out-
55 let-slide 17, is arranged with either one of its openings
over the center of the passage way 3. In the instance
shown, the largest opening 20, is thus indicated. The
cut-off slide 26, is withdrawn, so as to completely ex-
pose the area of said opening, the position when the
60 withdrawal is just complete being indicated by some
predetermined mark, of the graduated scale upon the
hsfiid wheel 30. The valve 7, is adjusted by means of
the hand- wheel 13, into the desired position. In the
instance shown in Fig. IV, this position is one in which ,.
the passages 8, and 9, are both in communication with 65
the passage 5, and respectively in communication with
the nozzles 10, and 11, and stethoscope tubes 50, and
51. The tips of the tubes 50, and 51, are placed in the
ears of the person subjected to the test and the hand
wheel 30, is then turned so as to shift the cut-ofi slide 70
26, progressively across the opening 20, thus symmet-
rically reducing the area of said opening, the move-
ment being continued until the sound just ceases to be
audible by such person. The extent of rotative move-
ment of the hand wheel 30, is then noted by means of 75
the graduated scale, and the acuteness of simultaneous
hearing by both ears may thus be recorded. By re-
verse movement of the hand wheel the cut-off slide
may be actuated from an alternative position, when
the opening is closed, so as to gradually increase the 80
area of the opening until sound is just perceptible.
The valve 7, may be turned into such a position that
only one of the openings 8, or 9, shall be in communica-
tion with the passage 5, and as the sound will then only
be transmitted through the stethoscope tube which is 85
in communication with the passage 5, the hearing of
one ear may be tested independently of the other ear,
the reduction of the area of the opening 20, by means
of the cut-off slide 26, being effected as above. If for
any reason it is desired to employ an opening of less 90
area than the opening 20, for the purpose of compara-
tive test, either of the openings 19, or 20, may be sub-
stituted for said opening by merely shifting the outlet-
slide 17, into one of its positions of proper registration.
In such case the symmetrical reduction or increase of 95
the size of the opening can be effected by means of the
cut-off slide 26, as before.
Any predetermined standard may be adopted as the
basis for the comparisons indicated by the graduated
scale of the hand wheel 30, since of course, the func- 100
tions of the instrument itself are not dependent upon
the nature of the method by which they may be ulti-
mately utilized.
It is of course obvious that the structural details
above described may be varied without affecting the 105
underlying principle of construction and operation, and
also that while the complete embodiment above set
forth is desirable, certain features may be omitted with-
out losing the broader or more general advantages. I
therefore wish it to be understood that I do not limit 110
my claims to said structural details nor to the inclusion
of all the operative features as a whole.
I claim: —
1. In an audiometer, the combination with a receptacle
provided with an aperture: of a sound remitting object 1]5
inclosed in said receptacle ; and means for progressively
and definitely varying the area of said aperture for test-
ing the acuteness of human hearing.
2. In an audiometer, the combination of a receptacle
adapted to inclose a sound emitting object, said receptacle 120
being provided with an aperture : and means for pro-
gressively and definitely varying the area of said aperture
and for indicating the extent thereof at a given movement.
•'!. In an audiometer, the combination of a receptacle
adapted to inclose a sound emitting object : means for pro- 125
viding said receptacle with apertures of selected area : and
means for progressively varying the area of one of said
apertures and for indicating the extent thereof at a given"
movement.
4. In an audiometer, the combination of a receptacle 130
adapted to inclose a sound emitting object ; an outlet slide
862,501
provided with an aperture; and means for progressively
varying the area of said aperture.
5. In an audiometer, the combination of a receptacle
adapted to inclose a sound emitting object; an outlet slide
3 provided with a scries of apertures of selected area and
adapted to be progressed to present one of said apertures
as an outlet for sound from said receptacle ; and means for
progressively varying the area of said presented aperture
ami for indicating the extent thereof at a given movement.
iq 6. In an audiometer, the combination of a receptacle
adapted to inclose a sound emitting object: said receptacle
being provided with an aperture : a cut-off slide for pro-
gressively varying the area of said aperture: and means
whereby either or both ears of a person undergoing the
15 lest may be placed in communication with the source of
sound.
7. In an audiometer, the combination of a receptacle
adapted to inclose a sound emitting object, said receptacle
being provided with an aperture ; a cut-off slide for pro-
20 grcssively varying the area of said aperture: means for
indicating the extent of movement of said slide; tubes
for application to the ears of the person undergoing the
test : and a valve for establishing communication between
said aperture and either or both of said tubes.
05 8. In an audiometer, the combination of a receptacle
adapted to inclose a sound emitting object, said receptacle
being provided with an aperture; a cut-off slide for pro-
gressively varying the area of said aperture; a casing se-
eurcd to said receptacle: a pair of nozzles attached to said
30 casing : a passage in said casing : and a valve for placing
said passage in communication with either or both of said
nozzles.
9. In an audiometer, the combination of a receptacle
adapted to inclose a sound emitting object: an outlet slide
35 provided with an aperture : a casing attached to said recep-
tacle and having a passage adapted to be placed in com-
munication with the interior of said receptacle; a pair of
nozzles in said casing: and a valve in said casing whereby
either or both of said nozzles may be placed in communica-
tion with said passage. 40
10. In an audiometer, the combination of a receptacle
adapted to inclose a sound emitting object, said receptacle
being provided with an aperture ; a casing having a
passage adapted to be placed in communication with said
I aperture ; a cut-'off slide for varying the extent of said 45
aperture : a rack upon said slide ; a shaft ; a pinion upon
said shaft and adapted to mesh with said rack ; means for
turning said shaft ; a pair of nozzles in said casing ; and
a valve for placing said passage in communication with
either or both of said nozzles. 50
11. In an audiometer, the combination with a recepta-
cle : of an object which creates sound waves inclosed with-
in said receptacle ; means for transmitting a definite por-
tion of said sound waves to the ear ; and means for pro-
gressively varying the extent of the portion of the sound 55
waves thus transmitted, for testing the acuteness of
human hearing.
12. The combination with means for creating sound
waves ; of an inclosure containing an aperture for trans-
mitting a definite portion of said sound waves to the ear ; 60
and means for definitely varying the extent of the transmit-
ted sound waves by uniformly progressive modifications of
the area of said aperture, whereby the acuteness of human
hearing may be tested.
In testimony whereof, I have hereunto signed my name, 65
at Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, this twenty-third day of
February. 1907.
JOSEPH M. McCALLIE.
Witnesses :
.Tames H. Bell,
E. L. Fi!LLioi:i'i)\.
No. 863,135.
PATENTED AUG. 13, 1907.
H. B. BABSON & A. HAUG.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED DEO. 15, 1906.
THE HORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HENRY B. BABSON AND ANDREW HAUG, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNORS TO UNIVERSAL
TALKING MACHINE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW YORK.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 863,135.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 13, 1907.
Application filed December 15, 1906. Serial No. 348,026.
To all whom it may concern:
I J5e it known that we, Henry B. Babson and An-
drew Haug, citizens of the United States, residing at
New York, county and State of New York, have in-
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements in Talk-
ing-Machines, of which the following is a specification.
Our invention relates generally to talking machines
and particularly to supporting means for the sound
reproducer thereof.
10 An important feature of our invention consists in
mounting the sound reproducer in suspended relation
on ball or roller bearings so arranged, as to permit free
movement thereof only in planes at right angles to
each other.
15 In the present embodiment of the invention, the
reproducer is preferably mounted upon ball-bearings
and is free to move vertically and horizontally in ac-
cordance with the requirements of the type of machine
to which it is applied.
20 The accompanying drawings will serve to illustrate
mechanism suitable for carrying our invention into
effect. We wish it understood, however, that we do
not limit ourselves to the exact construction and ar-
rangement of parts shown, as various changes may be
25 made therein or other means employed operating in
substantially the same manner to produce practically
the same result.
In the drawings: Figure 1, is a view in side elevation,
partly in section, illustrating the application of our in-
30 vention to a well-known type of talking machine.
Fig. 2, is a horizontal sectional view thereof, on the
line s-, s2, of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3, is a detail view of the
stamped out blank which is shown in Fig. 2, formed
up to serve as a removable ring section of the horn
35 supporting bracket.
Referring now to the drawings: 1, represents the cas-
ing of the machine, 2, the rotating table thereof, 3, the
usual type of disk record upon the table, 4, the sound
box or reproducer, 5, a rigid arm or bracket secured to
40 the casing by screws 6, or otherwise, and 7, the horn,
the small end 8 of which is removably fitted in a sleeve-
like off-set or annular guide 9 of the bracket 5, the ar-
rangement being such as to permit the horn to be
swung around to any position desired.
45 Interposed between and operatively connecting the
reproducer or sound box and the horn, there is a tubular
sound conveyer 10, known generally as a taper arm.
The reproducer is secured to one end of the arm, which
forms a continuation of the sound chamber thereof.
The arm 10, may be cast, drawn, stamped up from sheet 50
metal or otherwise formed and terminates at the end
opposite the reproducer in an elbow 11, which is pro-
vided with a shaped portion 12 fitted in the bore of the
sleeve or annular guide 9 of the horn supporting
bracket. As arranged, the co-acting bearing surfaces 55
of the arm and guide are tangentially disposed rela-
tively to each other, permitting free vertical and hori-
zontal movement of the arm with a minimum amount
of friction. The arm is supported in suspended rela-
tion in the guide upon ball bearings 13, which are dia- 60
metrically disposed and cooperate with the guide to
limit the arm to movement in planes at right angles to
each other or as shown, to vertical and horizontal
movement only, thus maintaining the reproducer in
proper position relatively to the record. The arm is 65
provided with semi-spherical indentations-, or other
suitably formed recesses, slots, or the like, as indicated
at 14, to receive the balls, which. project outwardly
therefrom in opposite directions and enter slots or re- .
cesses 15 of the guide.. The length of the arc through 70
which the arm is movable horizontally is determined
by the length of the slots 15 and may, therefore, be
varied as required,
For convenience in assembling the parts, the annu-
lar guide for the arm is preferably formed as a remov- 75
able ring section 16 of the bracket 5, which latter is
counterbored to receive the same. This ring section
may be blanked out, as shown in Fig. 3 and subse-
quently formed up, or it may be cast or otherwise pro-
duced, and secured in position by screws 17, or other 80
suitable means.
A spring locking device 18, such as that shown or of
any other suitable form, may be employed to yield-
ingly hold the reproducer elevated above and clear of
the record when the machine is not in use. 85
The operation, advantages, etc., of our invention
will be apparent from the foregoing description.
Having thus described our invention, we claim:
1. .A support for a sound reproducer comprising an an-
nular slotted guide, a tubular arm forming a continuation 90
of the reproducer and terminating within the guide, and
balls in the slots serving as bearings upon which the arm
is free to swing vertically and horizontally.
2. A support for a sound reproducer comprising an arm
forming a continuation of the reproducer, and bearings on 95
863,135
10
which the arm is free to swing vertically and horizontally,
said bearings being movable with the arm and free to ro-
tate independently thereof.
3. A support for a sound reproducer comprising an arm
forming a continuation of the reproducer, bearings on
which the arm is free to swing vertically and horizontally,
said bearings being movable with the arm and rotatable
independently thereof, and a locking device for limiting
the movement of the arm.
4. A support for a sound reproducer comprising a sec-
tional annular guide, one member of which is slotted, a
tubular arm forming a continuation of the reproducer and
terminating within the guide, and balls in the slots serving
as bearings on which the arm is free to swing vertically
and horizontally.
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures, in the pres-
ence of two witnesses.
HENRY B. BABSON.
ANDREW HAUG.
Witnesses :
. W. H. PUMPHREY,
M. G. Crawford.
15
No. 863,174.
PATENTED AUG. 13, 1907.
A. HAUG.
SOUND REPRODUCER.
APPLICATION FILED AVQt.Z, 1905.
'Znija.-l.
\9-
S 7n 24- X
)<2A*\XoZ
THE NOBRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ANDREW HAUG, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO UNIVERSAL TALKING MACHINE
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW YORK.
SOUND-REPRODUCER.
No. 863,174.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 13, 1907.
Application filed Augnst 3, 1905. Serial No. 272,451.
To all whom it may concern:
Be il known that I, Andrew Haug, residing at New
York, in the county and State of New York, have in-
vented certain new and useful Improvements in
5 Sound-Reproducers, of which the following is a speci-
li cat ion.
My invention relates generally to talking machines
and particularly to the construction of the sound box
or reproducer used in connection therewith.
10 An important feature of the invention consists in
providing for assembling the various parts of the re-
producer from the front of the casing and in so simpli-
fying the construction, as to enable the average user to
n move parts, make any necessary adjustment or repair
15 and reassemble the same in a ready and convenient
manner without requiring the aid of a skilled workman.
A reproducer constructed in accordance with my
invention is illustrated in the accompanying drawings.
1 wish it understood, however, that I do not limit my-
20 self to the exact form or arrangement of parts shown,
as various changes may be made therein without de-
parting from the spirit and scope of my invention.
In the drawings — Figure 1 is a sectional view of the
reproducer. Fig. 2 is a similar view, taken at right
25 angles to the plane of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a detail plan
\ iew of the split spring ring which locks the diaphragm
in the casing, and Fig. 4 is a sectional view thereof.
Referring now to the drawings, 1 represents a sec-
tional casing of the reproducer or sound box, one mem-
30 her of which is recessed to provide a cylindrical cham-
ber 2 therein and leading outward from the same, there
is the usual tubular extension 3, for connection with
the horn.
A diaphragm 4, mounted in the chamber 2, is held
35 between washers or gaskets 5, 5, preferably of felt, the
peculiar cushioning effect of which is, such as to cause
the ordinary mica diaphragm to reproduce with marked
clearness and greatly improved tone quality, as com-
pared to the results obtained by the use of rubber.
40 Tlie employment of felt gives rise to many other im-
portant advantages. It is comparatively inexpensive,
is r< adily obtained in any quantity desired, may be
kept in stock indefinitely without deteriorating and is
durable and highly effective in use.
4 5 It will be observed, that the wall of the chamber 2
is given a slight taper, being somewhat larger at the
bottom than at the top and fitted to telescope therein,
there is a ring 6, forming the removable section or
member of the casing. The ring 6 is split at 7, and
50 provided with a peripheral groove 8, or otherwise
formed to give it requisite spring action to interlock
with the member 1. The ring is given a taper similar
to that of the wall of chamber 2 and is provided at the
top with an outer flange 9, which seats against the
55 member 1 and an inner flange 10, for a tool hold, when
the ring is to be removed. The lower edge of the ring
is reduced to a V, in cross section and rests upon the
diaphragm or upon the felt gasket, when one is used
upon the outer side thereof. The readiness and con-
venience with which the ring may be sprung into po- 60
sition or removed from the casing, will be at once ap-
parent.
The construction and arrangement of the stylus arm
11, stylus 12, and spring locking device 13 cooperating
therewith, are fully described in detail in my pending 65
application filed August 8, 1905, and serially numbered
272,450 and I will therefore give but a general descrip-
tion herein of the same.
As shown in Fig. 2, the stylus arm 11, is pivotally
mounted between the cone points of two screws 14, 14, 70
and is connected at one end with the diaphragm in
the usual manner. At the opposite end, the arm is
socketed to receive the stylus or needle 12, which is
detachably held therein by a friction device in the
form of a spring 13, provided with a V-opening (not 75
shown) through which the needle projects. The re-
moval of the needle is effected by simply depressing
the spring and to insert a needle, the spring is simi-
larly depressed to bring the V-opening thereof in line
with the socket in the stylus arm. It will be under- 80
stood that the present invention is not limited to the
use of a particular form of stylus arm, locking device
for the stylus etc., that shown being employed herein
merely for purposes of completing an operative illus-
tration. 85
Having therefore described my invention, I claim,
1. A casing for a sound reproducer comprising a mem-
ber recessed to provide a seat for a diaphragm, and a co-
acting resilient member having an exterior bearing relative
to the recess and an annular taper bearing interiorly 90
thereof.
2. A casing for a sound reproducer comprising a mem-
ber recessed to provide a seat for a diaphragm, and a co-
acting resilient member having an annular taper bearing
interiorly of the recess and a stop flange exteriorly 95
thereof.
3. A casing for a sound reproducer comprising a mem-
ber recessed to provide a seat for a diaphragm, and a co-
acting resilient member having a bearing interiorly and
exteriorly of the recess. 100
4. A casing for a sound reproducer comprising a mem-
ber recessed to provide a seat for a diaphragm, and a co-
acting resilient member having an annular bearing interi-
orly and exteriorly of the recess.
5. A casing for a sound reproducer comprising a mem- \0§
tier recessed to provide a seat for a diaphragm, and a co-
acting resilient member arranged in telescoping relation
thereto and having a bearing thereon exteriorly of the
recess.
(>. A casing for a sound reproducer comprising a mem- no
tier recessed to provide a seat for a diaphragm, and a
split spring ring arranged in the recess in telescoping re-
lation and provided exteriorly thereof with an annular
flange.
863,174
10
7. A casing for a sound reproducer comprising a mem-
ber recessed to provide a seat for a diaphragm, and a
splil spring ring arranged in the recess in telescoping re-
in I ion and provided exteriorly thereof with oppositely dis-
posed annular flanges.
8. .V sound reproducer comprising two members ar-
ranged in telescoping relation, one member being self-
maintaining by its own resilience relative to the other
and having a bearing interiorly and exteriorly thereof, a
diaphragm yieldingly held between the members, and' a
stylus operatively connected to the diaphragm.
!). A sound reproducer comprising a recessed member, a
diaphragm mounted in the recess, a second member self-
maintaining by its own resilience in operative relation to
the first member and exerting a yielding pressure upon the lo
diaphragm throughout the circumference thereof, said sec-
ond member being provided exteriorly of the recess with
pressure limiting means, and a stylus connected to the
diaphragm.
In testimony whereof, I affix my signature, in the pres 20
ence of two witnesses.
ANDREW HAUG.
Witnesses :
W. II. PUMPHREY,
M. G. Crawford.
No, 864,686.
PATENTED AUG. 27, 1907.
A. A. PRATT.
MAGAZINE PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JAN. 17, 1906. g SHEETS-SHEET 1.
c^y/.
WITNESSES:
fylltiou j&. Trait
ATTORNEYS
THE NORRIS PKTSX3 CO., WASMKQTQfi. O. f
No, 864,686.
PATENTED AUG. 27, 1907.
A. A. PRATT.
MAGAZINE PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 17, 1906.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 2,
C&LtyrsZ.
WITNESSES:
J&c/ZlO**^^
INVENTOR
BY
s7^c-tsi<*7sis v4zLt)
ATTORNEYS
7H£ NO&RIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 864,686.
PATENTED AUG. 27, 1907.
A. A. PRATT.
MAGAZINE PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 17, 1906.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
WITNESSES:
^^M^t^^^i
INVENTOR
BY
/STsesf^l^O' r(&o
ATTORNEYS
SHE NORRtS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 864,686.
PATENTED AUG. 27, 1907.
A. A. PRATT.
MAGAZINE PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JAN. 17, 1906. g gHEETS_.SHEET 4,
j
WITNESSES:
p^/Oio^^^r-r-
INVENTOR
BY .
ATTORNEYS
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C
No. 864,686.
PATENTED AUG. 27, 1907.
A. A. PRATT.
MAGAZINE PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JAN. 17, 1906.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 5.
^r Z6
WITNESSES:
£4.
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
Hl SOKKIS PITERS CO.. WISHINOTOH. •>. C.
No, 864,686.
PATENTED AUG. 27, 1907.
A. A. PRATT.
MAGAZINE PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 17, 1906.
6 SHEETS— SHEET 6.
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
BY
ATTORNEYS
TH€ NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ALLISON A. PRATT, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO PATENT HOLDING COMPANY, A
CORPORATION OF NEW YORK.
MAGAZINE-PHONOGRAPH.
No. 864,686.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 27, 1907.
Application filed January 17, 1906. Serial No. 296,480.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Allison A. Pratt, a citizen of
the United States, and a. resident of the city of New
York, borough of Manhattan, in the county and State
5 of New York, have invented a new and Improved
Magazine-Phonograph, of which the following is a full,
clear, and exact description.
The object of the invention is to provide a new and
improved magazine phonograph arranged to carry a large
10 number of record rolls, to enable the user to select any
one of the record rolls desired to be played, to provide
a simple mechanism for accurately bringing the select-
ed record roll in playing position, to automatically start
the machine, and to automatically stop the same at the
15 end of the piece.
The invention consists of novel features and parts
and combinations of the same, which will be more
fully described hereinafter and then pointed out in the
claims.
20 A practical embodiment of the invention is repre-
sented in the accompanying drawings forming a part
of this specification, in which similar characters of ref-
erence indicate corresponding parts in all the views.
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the improvement;
25 Fig. 2 is an enlarged front elevationof the improvement,
parts being in section and the casing being removed;
Fig. 3 is an enlarged transverse section of the im-
provement, the parts being in playing position; Fig. 4
is a sectional side elevation of the driving gear for the
30 record rolls and the feed screw for the carriage carrying
the reproducer mechanism; Fig. 5 is a rear sectional
side elevation of the reproducer mechanism, on the line
5 — 5 of Fig. 3; Fig. 6 is a cross section of the same, show-
ing the parts at rest; Fig. 7 is a rear sectional side ele-
35 vation of the same; Fig. 8 is an enlarged transverse sec-
tion of the improvement, on the line 8 — 8 of Fig. 1,
showing more particularly the motor and a coin-con-
trolled mechanism employed in connection with the
improvement; Fig. 9 is an enlarged plan view of the
40 stopping mechanism for the motor ; Fig. 10 is an enlarged
sectional plan view of the coin-controlled mechanism,
the section being on the line 10 — 10 of Fig. 8; Fig. 11 is
an enlarged side elevation, showing the mechanism for
turning the magazine wheel, for returning the carriage
45 of the reproducer mechanism, and for actuating the
starting and stopping lever; Fig. 12 is a plan view of the
driving gear for the carriage feed screw and for the rec-
ord roll driving wheel ; Fig. 13 is an enlarged sectional
plan view of part of the tripping device for the starting
50 and stopping lever; and Fig. 14 is a cross section of the
same.
Within a suitably constructed casing A is arranged a
standard A', from which projects a stud A2 for the hub
B' of a magazine wheel B to turn on, the said magazine
55 wheel B being adapted to carry mandrels C supporting
the usual record rolls D. The magazine wheel B is pro-
vided with spokes B2 extending from the hub B' and
connecting with the rims B3 and B4 spaced apart in a
transverse direction and connected with each other at
intervals by suitable cross bars B5, as plainly shown in 60
Fig. 3. From the rim B3 extend outwardly and radially
arms B6 supporting, at their front faces, numeral disks
E carrying numerals in consecutive order and adapted
to register with an aperture A3 formed in a door A4 at
the front of the casing A, as shown in Fig. 1, so as to 65
display the numeral of a record to be next played when
a coin is introduced, as hereinafter more fully de-
scribed. Outside of the rim B4 and concentric there-
with is arranged a rim B7 supported, at intervals, by
bars B8 attached to the rim B4 and also carrying a con- 70
centric ratchet wheel B9, from the face of which project
spaced centers B10 in transverse alinement with bear-
ings B11 formed on the inner faces of the arms B6, so
that a center B10 and a bearing B11 receive the ends of
a mandrel C for supporting the corresponding record 75
roll D.
As shown in Fig. 3, each mandrel C consists of a
tubular shaft C engaging the center Bln and slidably
containing the point C2 engaging the bearing Bu, a
spring C3 held in the tubular shaft C pressing the inner 80
end of the point C2 to hold the mandrel in engagement
with the center B10 and the bearing B11. By pressing
the point C2 inwardly against the tension of the spring
C3, the mandrel and its record can be readily removed
from the magazine wheel B whenever it is desired to 85
do so and a new record is to be placed in position
thereon. As shown in Fig. 3, a sleeve C4 is mounted
to slide oh the tubular shaft C, and on the outer end
of this sleeve C4 is secured a head C5 engaging one end
of the record roll D, engaged at the other end by a head 90
C6 provided with a sleeve C1 mounted to slide on the
sleeve C4. Thus, by removing the head C5 from one
end of the mandrel C, the record roil D can be removed
and replaced by a new one, after which the head C5
is returned to position, in order to clamp the record 95
roll D between the heads C5 and C6. On the shaft C
of the mandrel C is secured a driving disk C8 adapted
to be moved in peripheral engagement with a driving
wheel F for rotating the mandrel C and the record roll
D thereon at the time the record roll is in playing po- 100
| sition and is engaged by the reproducer mechanism G,
as hereinafter more fully described.
The wheel F, as well as the feed screw G' of the re-
producer mechanism are driven from a motor H ar-
ranged in the casing A and preferably of the spring 105
type having a winding-up shaft H7 adapted to be en-
gaged by a suitable winding key introduced by the
operator through an aperture A5 formed in the casing
A, to allow the operator to wind up the motor H when-
ever it is necessary to do so. 110
864,686
The shaft F' of the driving wheel F is journaled in
a swing frame F2 fulcruined at F3 on a bracket A1 of
the standard A', and the said swing frame F2 is pressed
on by a spring F4. On the said shaft F' is secured a
o gear wheel F5 adapted to mesh with a gear wheel F6
secured on a shaft F? journaled in a bracket A6. By
having the swing frame F2 pressed on by a spring F4,
it is evident that the gear wheel F5 is normally held
in mesh with the gear wheel F6, and at the same time
1 0 the driving wheel F is held firmly in contact with the
driving disk C8 with sufficient force to insure a proper
driving of the disk C8, and consequently of the record
roll D, whenever the wheel F is rotated. On the
shaft F7 is secured a pulley H2 connected by a belt H3
15 with a pulley H4 on the driven shaft of the motor H,
so that when the latter is running, a rotary motion is
transmitted by the pulleys H2, H4 and belt H3 to the
shaft F7, which in turn rotates the driving wheel F
employed for rotating the record roll D, as previously
20 mentioned (see Figs. 2, 3 and 12).
On the feed screw G' of the reproducer mechanism
G is secured a gear wheel G2, in mesh with an inter-
mediate pinion G3 journaled on the bracket A6 and
in mesh with a pinion G4 secured on the shaft F7, so
2 5 that when the latter is rotated by the motor H, as above
mentioned, a rotary motion is transmitted by the pin-
ions G4 and G3 and the gear wheel G2 to the feed screw
G' of the reproducer mechanism G (see Fig. 12).
The reproducer mechanism G is provided with the
30 usual reproducer G5 connected by a flexible tube G6
with a horn G7 secured to the casing A and extending
through the front thereof, as plainly illustrated in Fig.
1, to cause the sounds produced to pass into the room in
which the instrument is located. By reference to Figs.
35 1 and 3, it will be seen that the reproducer mechanism
G is arranged directly above the magazine wheel B, and
consequently but a short flexible tube G6 is required to
make the connection with the horn for transmitting the
sounds from the reproducer G5 in the shortest route pos-
40 sible to the horn G7. The reproducer G5 is mounted on
a carriage G8 mounted to swing and to travel in a trans-
verse direction, the carriage carrying a half nut or point
G9 for engagement with the threads of the feed screw
G', so that when the latter is rotated, the carriage G8
45 with the reproducer G5 thereon is caused to travel from
the rear toward the front of the machine in the direction
of the arrow a' indicated in Fig. 3. A return motion in
the inverse direction of the arrow a' is given to the car-
riage G8 by the following arrangement : The rear end of
50 the carriage G8 is connected with one end of a rope I
extending over a pulley V journaled on the standard
A', the rope then passing over a guide rod I2" attached
to the bracket A6, and then the rope connects with a
link I3 fulcrumed on the upper end of the main lever J
55 fulcrumed at J' on the standard A' a distance below the
stud A2, as plainly shown in Fig. 2. The lower end of
the main lever V is provided with a weight J2 for re-
turning the main lever to a normal position ; and on the
said lever J is fulcrumed a pawl J3 for engaging the teeth
60 of the ratchet wheel B9 to intermittently rotate the
magazine wheel B with a view to bring a record roll D
in proper working position relative to the reproducer
mechanism G. At the same time the carnage G8 is
drawn back into a rear or starting position by the con-
65 nection of the lever J with the carnage by way of the
link I3 and the rope I. The main lever J is under the
control of the operator, and for this purpose the lower
end of the lever J is connected with one end of a rope K
passing over a pulley K' to connect with a transversely-
extending lever K2 (see Figs. 2 and 8) fulcrumed on a 70
bracket K3 carried by the casing A. The forward end
of the lever K2 is engaged by the forked end K4 of a
link K5, pivotally connected with the inner end of a
coin slide L having a guide-way 1/ for the passage of
the coin, the said coin slide L extending with its front 75
end through a guide plate L2 attached to the front of
the casing A. The outer end of the coin slide L is pro-
vided with a suitable handle L3 adapted to be taken
hold of by the operator to push the coin slide L from
the receiving position shown in Fig. 8 into a rearward 80
position, shown in dotted lines in said figure. The rear
end of the coin slide L is hung on links L4, and the coin
slide is preferably made segmental and is provided with
a stop pin Ls adapted to abut against the inner face of
the front of the casing A to limit the outward movement 85
of the coin slide. Now, when the coin slide L is in an
outermost position, as shown in full lines in Fig. 8, then
a coin can be placed in the passage I/, and as the latter
is inclined downwardly and rearward] y, the coin passes
into a coin chute L6 arranged on the inner face of the 90
front of the casing A. The coin dropping down the coin
chute LD comes in contact with a pin N fastened on the
horizontal arm N' of a bell crank lever fulcrumed on a
bracket N2 arranged within the casing A, and the other
arm N3 of this bell crank lever is notched and is adapted 95
to engage the forward end of the lever K2, so as to nor-
mally lock the latter against swinging. The bell crank
lever is also provided with a rearwardly-extending arm
N4 provided with a weight N6, to normally hold the arm •
N3 of the bell crank lever in locked engagement with 100
the lever K2.
It is evident that when the several parts are in the po-
sition shown in Fig. 8, then the coin slide L is in an
outermost position and is held against rearward move-
ment by the locking arm N3 engaging the lever K2; but 105
when a proper coin is introduced by way of the passage
1/ into the chute L6 and the coin drops, then it strikes
the pin N so as to impart a forward swinging motion to
the weighted bell crank lever, to disengage the arm N3
from the lever K2. The coin slide L is now unlocked, 110
and by the operator pushing the same rearwardly
causes the link K5 to impart a swinging motion to the
lever K2, which, by the rope K, imparts a swinging mo-
tion to the main lever J, so that the pawl P thereof
turns the magazine wheel B and at the same time the 115
lever J exerts a pull on the carriage G8, to cause the lat-
ter to travel from its front, inactive position, to a rear-
most, active position. When the operator releases the
coin slide L after having pushed the same inward, then
the weight J2 on the main lever J returns the same to its 1 20
normal position, so that the pawl J3 glides back over the
teeth of the ratchet wheel B9, and at the same time the
link I3 and rope I swing into an inactive position, as
plainly shown in Fig. 2. The coin, in actuating the
bell crank lever by striking the arm N', as previously 125
described, finally passes the pin N and drops down out
of the chute L6 into the casing A, while the released
bell crank lever is brought back when the coin slide L is
pushed in by the action of the link K5, the action of the
weighted arm N4 is to hold it in normal position. When 130
864,686
the main lever J swings back to its normal position, it
exerts a pull on the rope K so as to return the lever K2,
link K" and slide L to allow the arm N3 of the bell crank
lever to again engage the lever K2 for locking the same
5 against further movement until the next coin is intro-
duced and the coin slide L actuated, as above explained.
The main lever J also controls the starting mechanism
for the motor H, and for this purpose the following ar-
rangement is made: On the main lever J, a short dis-
10 tance above the pawl J3, is arranged a swivel bearing 0,
in which is mounted to slide a rod 0' carrying, at its
lower end, a head or collar O2, the rod O1 being connect-
ed at its upper end by a swivel O3 with a starting and
stopping lever P, fulcrumed at P' on the bracket A6.
15 The lever P is provided with a downwardly-extending
arm P2 (see Fig. 2), the lower portion of which is bent at
angles to extend in a nearly horizontal position, and on
this portion is secured a weight P3, and the portion is
engaged by the forked end P4 of a lever P5 (see Fig. 3),
2t) the lever P5 being connected by a link P6 with a bell
crank lever P", fulcrumed in the casing A and connect-
ed by a link Ps (see Fig. 2) with a lever P9 fulcrumed on
the frame of the motor H (see Fig. 9) and adapted to en-
gage the brake wheel B7' forming part of the governor H°
2 5 of the motor H. This governor H° is of the usual spring
arm type, and when the several parts are in the position
as shown in Fig. 9, then the lever P9 is in engagement
with the brake wheel PF, to hold the same against turn-
ing, thus preventing the motor H from running. When
30 the main lever J is caused to swing into the position
shown in dotted lines in Fig. 2 at the time the operator
swings the coin slide L inwardly, as previously ex-
plained, then the lever J, when moving into its posi-
tion, finally engages the swivel bearing 0 with the col-
3 5 lar O2 to exert a pull on the rod O' at the time the lever
J about reaches the end of its stroke. When this takes
place the rod 0' imparts a swinging motion to the lever
P, so that the latter imparts a swinging motion to the
lever P5, which, by the link P6, imparts a swinging mo-
40 tion to the bell crank lever P" and the latter, by the
link P8, imparts a swinging motion to the lever P9, to
move the latter out of engagement with the brake wheel
H5, thus allowing the motor to start and run in the usual
manner.
45 From the foregoing it will be seen that at about the
time the magazine wheel B is turned by the action of
the main lever J and its pawl J3 to bring a desired record
into active position relative to the reproducer mechan-
ism G, then the carriage G8 with the reproducer mech-
50 anism G thereon is moved from a front, inactive posi-
tion, to a rearmost, active position, and at the same
time the motor H is started, to rotate the driving disk
F and consequently the record roll D in active position,
as well as to rotate the feed screw G' for moving the car-
55 riage G8 from the rear, forward, and with the stylus of
the reproducer mechanism G in contact with the
record roll surface.
In order to prevent the starting and stopping lever
P from swinging from a starting and running position
60 back into a stopping position at the time the main lever
J returns on the release of the coin slide L, the follow-
ing arrangement is made, special reference being had
to Figs. 3, 13 and 14. A pin R is adapted to move into
the path of the lever P after the same has been caused
65 to swing bv the action of the main lever J, and this pin
R projects eccentrically from a disk R' mounted to
turn at R2 on a bracket attached to the standard A'.
An arm R3 extends upward from the disk R7, and on
the upper end of this arm R3 is secured a forwardly-ex-
tending rod R4, on which is coiled a spring W' resting 70
with one end on the arm R3 and pressing, at the other
end, on an arm R6 secured to the bracket A6 (see Fig. 3).
The extreme forward end of the rod R4 is provided with
a nut R7 engaged by the upper end of a lever S, swiv-
eled at S' on the bracket A0, and on the lower end of the 7 5
said lever S is secured a spring arm S2 provided with an
inclined terminal S3 adapted to be engaged by the car-
riage G8 at the time the latter moves from the rear In-
ward the front and nears the front end position . When
the carriage G8 engages this inclined arm S:\ it imparts 80
a sidewise swinging movement to the lever S so as to
bring the pin S4 thereof (see Figs. 5 and 7) into the path
of a cam S5 secured on the forward end of the feed screw
G7, and consequently this cam S5 engages the pin S4,
and thereby imparts a transverse swinging movement 85
to the lever S. In doing so, the upper end of the lever
S acts on the nut R7 to pull the rod R4 forward, so that
the arm R3 turns the disk R7 and thereby moves the pin
R away from the starting and stopping lever P. As
soon as this takes place the weight P3 of the starting and 90
stopping lever P causes a return movement of the latter,
so that the lever P9 moves in engagement with the disk
IP, to stop the motor H. Immediately previous to the
cam S5 acting on the pin S4 and lever S, as above ex-
plained, it is necessary to impart a swinging motion to 95
the carriage G8, with a view to move the half nut or
point G9 thereof out of engagement with the threads of
the feed screw G7. For this purpose the carriage G8 is
provided with a friction roller G10 adapted to engage a
cam Gu secured on the feed screw G7 adjacent to the 100
cam S5, so that when the carriage Gs moves into its for-
ward position, then the friction roller Gln is engaged by
the cam Gn, to impart a swinging motion to the car-
riage G8, with a view to lift the point G9 out of engage-
ment with the feed screw G7 at the very time the swing- 105
ing motion is given to the lever S to pull the rod R4 for-
ward, with a view to release the starting and stopping
lever P. When the latter returns to its normal posi-
tion, then the guide bar P10 extending transversely on
the said lever engages the carriage G8 so as to hold the 110
same in a non-active position relative to the feed screw
G7; and when the lever J is again actuated, after the in-
troduction of a second coin, as above explained, then
the carriage G8 slides from the front to its rearmost po-
sition with the carriage G8 traveling along the guide liar 115
P10 and with the point G9 out of engagement with the
threads of the feed screw G7.
In order to prevent the magazine wheel B from being
turned too far by the action of the main lever J, and its
pawl J3, a dog T is hung, at T7, on the starting and stop- 120
ping lever P, and this dog is adapted to engage pins B12
forming rearward extensions of the centers B10 (see
Figs. 3 and 11). The dog T is provided with a cam arm
T2 riding on the fulcrumed end of the pawl J3, to nor-
mally keep the dog T in a raised position; that is, out of 125
the path of the teeth B12, the said cam arm T2 allowing
the dog T to drop down between two pins B12 at the
time the lever J and its pawl J3 nearly reach the end of
their forward stroke and the cam arm T2 leaves the pawl
J3 (see Fig. 11). When the magazine wheel B has been 130
864,680
turned by the main lever J and pawl J3 until a record
roll D has moved in proper position relative to the re-
producer mechanism G, then the dog T engages a pin
B12 and thus holds the magazine wheel B against fur-
5 ther turning (see Fig. 11). When the main lever J
swings back to its normal position, then the cam arm
T- reengages the pawl J:i and lifts the dog T up out of
engagement with the corresponding pin B12.
In order to lock the magazine wheel B during the
10 performance, that is, while the carriage G8 travels from
the rear to the front, a locking arm P" is provided and
fixed on the starting and stopping lever P, the locking
arm P11 being forked at the lower end to engage a pin
B'2 on the magazine wheel B at the time the starting
15 and stopping lever P swings into starting position and
is held therein by the pin R, as previously explained.
When the pin R swings out of engagement with the
starting and stopping lever P at the end of the perform-
ance, and the starting and stopping lever P returns to
20 its normal position by the action of the weight P3, then
the locking arm Pu moves out of engagement with the
pin B12, to allow free rotation of the magazine wheel B.
The downward swinging motion of the dog T is limited
by a pin T3 engaging an elongated slot in an extension
25 P12 of the arm Pu, as illustrated in Figs. 2 and 11.
In order to enable the user of the machine to select
any one of the record rolls D for playing, a wheel U
is in peripheral contact with the ratchet wheel B9, and
the wheel U is located at the bottom of the ratchet
30 wheel and is secured on a transverse shaft IF jour-
naled in suitable bearings arranged on the standard
A7. The forward end of the shaft IF extends through
the front of the casing A, and on the outer end of this
shaft IF is secured a crank arm IP under the control
35 of the operator, for turning the shaft IF and the wheel
II to rotate the magazine wheel B, so as to bring any
one of the numeral disks E into register with the aper-
ture A3, it being understood that the numeral on this
numeral disk indicates the record roll adjacent to or at
40 one side of the reproducer mechanism G. As shown
in Figs. 1 and 2, the numeral 5 is in register with the
aperture A3, and the record roll at this numeral disk E
is now in position relative to the reproducer mechanism
G, so that when the main lever J is caused to swing
45 and the magazine wheel B is turned, then this record
roll moves into active position relative to the reproducer
mechanism G.
It will be noticed that by arranging the lever J and
its pawl J3 relative to the ratchet wheel B9, as shown in
50 Fig. 2, the magazine wheel B can be freely turned for-
ward or backward by the operator manipulating the
crank arm IP as the pawl J3 rides over the teeth of the
ratchet wheel B9 on turning the magazine wheel B as
long as the main lever J is in the normal position and
55 the fulcrum of the pawl J3 is close to the peripheral
face of the ratchet wheel B9. When the main lever
J is swung downward, however, to the position shown
in Fig. 11, then the fulcrum end of the pawl J3 moves
further outward, and the free end of the pawl J3 now
60 readily engages the ratchet tooth and turns the maga-
zine wheel B the desired distance. It is understood
that the action just described is due to the fulcrum J'
of the main lever J being located a distance below the
axis of the magazine wheel B.
65 The operation is as follows: When the several parts
are in the position as illustrated in Figs. 1, 2 and 8,
then the operator can readily turn the magazine wheel
B by manipulating the crank arm IP until the numeral
of a desired record appears in the aperture A3. When
this has been done, the operator lays a coin in the pas- 70
sage 1/ of the coin slide L, and as soon as the coin is
introduced and rolls down into the chute L6 and acts
on the pin N to release the lever K2, as previously
described, then the operator pushes the coin slide L
inwardly so that a swinging motion is given to the le- 75
ver K2, which, by the connection above described,
causes the main lever J to swing in the direction of the
arrow b', so that the pawl J3 finally turns the magazine
wheel B to bring the record roll of the numeral 5 into
active position relative to the reproducer mechanism 80
G. At the same time the carriage G8 is drawn from a
front into a rearward position and the starting and
stopping lever P is actuated to set the motor H run-
ning, as above described. When the lever P is caused
to swing to start the motor H, then the pin R swings 85
in engagement with the lever P, owing to the action of
the spring R5, so that the lever P is locked in the
starting position and the reproducer is lowered so as to
allow the stylus to engage the record. As soon as the
motor H begins to run, the driving wheel F, as well as 90
the feed screw G7, are rotated, so that the record roll
D is turned, and at the same time the carriage G8 for
the reproducer jnechanism G is caused to travel from
the rear toward the front, owing to the point G9 engaging
the rotating feed screw G/. As the stylus of the repro- 95
ducer mechanism G is in contact with the rotating rec-
ord roll D and also moves forward, it is evident that the
usual production of the sounds takes place, the sounds
being transmitted to the horn G7, from which they
can readily pass into the room in which the machine 100
is located. After the stylus has reached the end of
the record roll D, then the carriage G8 moves in engage-
ment with the inclined arm S3 of the lever S, so as to
first impart a sidewise swinging motion to the lever S,
with a view to bring the pin S4 into the path of the 105
cam S5. The latter now imparts a transverse swinging
motion to the lever S so that the said lever pulls on
the spring-pressed rod R4 to move the pin R out of
engagement with the starting and stopping lever P, to
allow the latter to swing into a stopping position, there- 110
by stopping the motor H. Immediately previous to
the cam S5 acting on the pin S4, as described, the fric-
tion roller G10 engages the cam Gu so that a swinging
motion is given to the carriage G8, to move the point
G9 out of engagement with the feed screw G/; and 115
when the starting and stopping lever P swings into
the stopping position, as described, then the guide
bar P10 engages the carriage G8, thus holding the same
in a non-active position; that is, with the point G9 out
of engagement with the feed screw G/. In the mean- 120
time the feed screw G/, as well as the friction wheel F
have come to a standstill, owing to the stopping of the
motor H, so that the several parts come into a non-
active, normal, dormant position, with the carriage G8
remaining in a forward position. 125
It is understood that as soon as the operator releases
the coin slide L, the main lever J and parts connected
therewith swing back to a normal position, owing to the
action of the weight J2, so that the coin slide L, as well
as the main lever J, are back in normal position soon 130
864,686
S
after (he motor H is started, to be ready for the next
performance.
By reference to Fig. 3 it will be seen that the record
roll D and its supporting heads C5 and CG can be moved
5 lengthwise on the mandrel C, so that the starting and
stopping of the reproduction takes place at the proper
time; that is, in practice the record roll D, as well as
the feed screw G', are turning a short while before the
stylus begins to engage the record roll D.
10 It is understood that the pin R and connected parts
form a tripping device for the starting and stopping le-
ver P; that is, as long as the pin R is in engagement
with the lever P the latter is in starting motion and al-
lows the motor H to run; but when the pin R is moved
15 out of engagement with the lever P by the action of the
lever S and cam S5, then the lever P drops into stop-
ping position and stops the motor H, and, by the guide
bar P10, holds the carriage G8 in non-active position
relative to the feed screw G'.
20 From the foregoing it will be seen that the operator,
on manipulating the coin slide L, causes a turning of
the magazine wheel B, a return or rearward motion of
the carriage G8, and a swinging motion of the starting
. and stopping lever P, to swing the latter into starting
25 position. The only function of the coin passed into
the machine by the coin slide L and coin chute L° is
to actuate the weighted bell crank lever, to release the
lever K2 connected with and operated by the coin
slide L.
30 I do not limit myself to the particular constructions
of the' various mechanisms shown and described, as
the same may be varied without deviating from the
spirit of my invention.
Having thus described my invention, I claim as new
35 and desire to secure by Letters Patent: —
1. A magazine phonograph, comprising a magazine
wheel on which the record rolls are mounted to turn, a re-
ciprocating carriage carrying the phonograph reproducer
adapted to contact with the record roll in an active posi-
40 tion at the time, a driving gear for the said record roll
and for the feed screw of the said carriage, a motor for
the said driving gear, a ratchet wheel on the said magazine
wheel, a main lever carrying a pawl for the said ratchet
wheel to rotate the latter and the magazine wheel inter-
45 niittently, to bring a record roll into active position rela-
tive to the said driving gear and the said phonograph re-
producer, a connection between the said main lever and
the said carriage to move the latter into starting position,
and starting means controlled by the said lever and con-
50 nected with the said motor to start the latter.
2. A magazine phonograph, comprising a magazine
wheel on which the record rolls are mounted to turn, a
reciprocating carriage carrying the phonograph reproducer
adapted to contact with the record roll in an active posi-
55 tion at the time, a driving gear for the said record roll and
for the feed screw of the said carriage, a motor for the
said driving gear, a ratchet wheel on the said magazine
wheel, a main lever carrying a pawl for the said ratchet
wheel to rotate the latter and the magazine wheel inter-
60 mittently, to bring a record roll into active position rela-
tive to the said driving gear and the said phonograph re-
producer, a connection between the said main lever and
the said carriage to move the latter into starting position,
starting means controlled by the said lever and connected
65 with the said motor to start the latter, and stopping-
means controlled by the said feed screw for throwing the
carriage out of engagement with its feed screw and for
controlling the said starting means, to throw the latter
out of gear to stop the motor.
70 3. A magazine phonograph provided with a carriage car-
rying the phonograph reproducer, a feed screw for im-
parting a traveling motion to the said carriage in one di-
rection, a cam on the said feed screw for throwing the car-
riage out of engagement with the feed screw, a stopping
mechanism for the feed screw, a tripping mechanism for 75
the said stopping mechanism, and a second cam on the
feed screw for actuating the said tripping mechanism im-
mediately after the carriage is thrown out of engagement
with the feed screw.
4. A magazine phonograph provided with a carriage car- 80
lying the phonograph reproducer, a feed screw for impart-
ing a traveling motion to the said carriage in one direc-
tion, a cam on the said feed screw for throwing the car-
riage out of engagement with the feed screw, a stopping
mechanism for the feed screw provided with a guide bar 85
for the said carriage during the return movement thereof,
a tripping device for the said stopping device having a
spring-pressed tripping lever for the said stopping mech-
anism, a cam lever connected with the tripping lever, and
a second cam on the said feed screw for actuating the said 9C
cam lever.
5. A magazine phonograph provided with a carriage car-
rying the phonograph reproducer, a feed screw for impart-
ing a traveling motion to the said carriage in one direc-
tion, a cam on the said feed screw for throwing the car- 95
riage out of engagement with the feed screw, a weighted
starting and stopping lever, a motor controlled by the
said starting and stopping lever and connected with the
said feed screw to rotate the latter, a guide bar on the
said starting and stopping lever for the return movement 100
of the carriage, a tripping lever for the said starting and
stopping lever and its guide bar, and a second cam on the
said feed screw controlling the said tripping lever imme-
diately after the said carriage is thrown out of engage-
ment with the said feed screw. 105
6. A magazine phonograph provided with a magazine
wheel for carrying the record rolls, comprising a hub,
spokes and a rim, the latter being provided, at one side,
with a ratchet wheel carrying spaced transversely-extend-
ing centers adapted to engage recesses in one end of the HO
mandrels of the record rolls, and radially-disposed rods
having bearings for the other ends of the mandrels ar-
ranged directly opposite the centers on the ratchet wheel.
7. A magazine phonograph provided with a magazine
wheel for carrying the record rolls, a ratchet wheel on 115
the said magazine wheel, a main lever carrying a pawl for
engagement with the said ratchet wheel, a motor, a start-
ing and stopping lever for the same, and a connection be-
tween the said main lever and the said starting and stop-
ping lever to actuate the latter on the main lever nearing 120
the end of its forward stroke.
8. A magazine phonograph provided with a magazine
wheel for carrying the record rolls, a ratchet wheel on the
said magazine wheel, a main lever carrying a pawl for en-
gagement with the said ratchet wheel, a motor, a starting 125
and stopping lever for the same, a connection between the
said main lever and the said starting and stopping lever
to actuate the latter on the main lever nearing the end of
its forward stroke, stop pins on the said magazine wheel,
and a hook arm pivoted on the said starting and stopping 130
lever and adapted to engage the said stop pins.
9. A magazine phonograph provided with a magazine
wheel for carrying the record rolls, a ratchet wheel on the
said magazine wheel, a main lever carrying a pawl for
engagement with the said ratchet wheel, a motor, a start- 135
ing and stopping lever for the same, a connection between
the said main lever and the said starting and stopping-
lever to actuate the latter on the main lever nearing the
end of its forward stroke, stop pins on the said magazine
wheel, a hook arm pivoted on the said starting and stop- 140
ping lever and adapted to engage the said stop pins, and
a cam on the said hook arm engaging the said main lever.
10. A magazine phonograph provided with a magazine
wheel for carrying the record rolls, a ratchet wheel on the
said magazine wheel, a main lever carrying a pawl for 145
engagement with the said ratchet wheel, a motor, a start-
ing and stopping lever for the same, a connection between
the said main lever and the said starting and stopping
lever to actuate the latter on the main lever nearing the
end of its forward stroke, stop pins on the said magazine 150
wheel, a hook arm pivoted on the said starting and stop-
864,686
ping lever and adapted to engage the said stop pins, and
a positive locking arm on the said starting and stopping-
lever for engaging the said stop pins.
11. A magazine phonograph provided with a magazine
5 wheel for carrying the record rolls, a ratchet wheel on the
said magazine wheel having ratchet teeth, cams each
located between adjacent ratchet teeth, and a main lever
mounted to swing and carrying a pawl for engaging the
said ratchet teeth and the said cams.
10 12. A magazine phonograph provided with a magazine
wheel for carrying the record rolls, a ratchet wheel on the
said magazine wheel having ratchet teeth, cams each
located between adjacent ratchet teeth, and a main lever
mounted to swing and carrying a pawl for engaging the
15 said ratchet teeth and the said cams, the fulcrum of the
said main lever being at a point below the axis of the said
magazine wheel.
13. A magazine phonograph provided with a reproducer
. mechanism, a magazine wheel for carrying the record
20 rolls, a ratchet wheel on the said magazine wheel having
ratchet teeth, manually controlled means for turning the
magazine wheel to bring any desired record in position
adjacent to the reproducer mechanism, a main lever con-
trolled by the operator, and having its fulcrum below the
25 axis of the said magazine wheel, a pawl carried by said
lever and adapted to engage the ratchet teeth to turn the
magazine wheel and bring the selected record roll into
active position relative to the reproducer mechanism, the
said pawl when the lever is in normal position being out
30 of operative engagement with the ratchet teeth, and means
for returning the lever to its normal position.
1-1. A magazine phonograph having a friction drive for
the record roll, the said friction drive comprising a fric-
tion disk on the mandrel of the record roll, a friction
wheel, a swing frame in which the friction wheel is jour- 35
naled, a shaft, means for driving the same, a gear wheel
on said shaft in mesh with a gear wheel on the shaft of
the friction wheel, and a spring pressing on said swing
frame and normally holding said gear wheels in mesh and
said friction wheel in contact with said friction disk. 40
15. A magazine phonograph having a magazine wheel
for carrying the record rolls, a ratchet wheel on the said
magazine wheel, a main lever having its fulcrum below
the axis of the said magazine wheel, a pawl fulcrumed on
the upper part of said lever and adapted to engage the 45
ratchet wheel to turn the same and the magazine wheel
when the lever is swung from its normal position, a
weight on the lower end of said lever for returning the
same to a normal position, and means connected with the
lower end of the lever for actuating the same, the said 50
means being under the control of the operator.
16. A magazine phonograph provided with a carriage
carrying the phonograph reproducer, a magazine wheel for
carrying the record rolls, a ratchet wheel on the said
magazine wheel, a main lever carrying a pawl for engage- 55
ment with the said ratchet wheel, a motor, a starting and
stopping lever for the same, a connection between the
said main lever and the carriage to move the latter into
starting position, and a connection between the main lever
and the said stopping and starting lever to actuate the 60
latter.
In testimony whereof I have signed my name to this
specification in the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
ALLISON A. PRATT.
Witnesses :
Thbo. G. Hoster,
JNO. M. RlTTER.
No, 864,758.
PATENTED AUG. 27, 1907.
H. SCHRODER.
GRAMOPHONE.
APPLICATION PILED DEO. 8, 1906.
Wet? cesses:
/yer/77a777? Schroder;
rai ffo««B rerms Co.. washimoton. b. c
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HERMANN SCHRODER, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO H. SCHRODER HORNLESS
PHONOGRAPH MANUFACTURING COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW YORK.
GRAMOPHONE.
No. 864,758.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed December 8, 1906, Serial No, 346,964.
Patented Aug. 27, 1907.
To all whom it mai/ concern:
Bo it known that I, Hermann Schroder, a citizen
of Germany, residing at Newark, in the county of Essex
and State of New Jersey, United States of America,
5 have invented certain new and useful Improvements in
Gramophones, of which the following is a specification.
This invention contemplates certain new and useful
Improvements in that type of talking machine or gram-
ophone in which the megaphone instead of being ar-
1 (. ranged separately and detachably above the supporting
casing of the sound record, is arranged in a permanent
position within the casing so as to be more conveniently
shipped with the casing, to require no adjustment, and
to avoid any damage to a record which is liable to occur
15 with the megaphone detachably supported above it.
The object of my invention is to provide an improved
construction of talking machine of this type, the horn
or megaphone of which is provided with means de-
signed to increase the clearness and mellowness of the
20 reproduced sound and which is composed of compara-
tively few and simple parts that are not liable to get out
of order, but that will operate efficiently so as to allow
the sound box at the end of the tapering arm which car-
ries it to follow easily the grooves or depressions in the
25 sound disk or record while the megaphone is perma-
nently mounted without movement, in a sound box
within the casing of the machine and is effectively con-
nected to the tapering arm carrying the sound box, in
such a manner as to interfere in no wise with the free
30 movement thereof in a lateral direction to reproduce
the record and also to interfere in no wise with the
proper limited movement of the said arm in a vertical
direction for the purpose of removing one disk and re-
placing it by another.
35 With these and other objects in view as will more
fully appear as the description proceeds, the invention
consists in certain constructions, arrangements and
combinations of the parts hereinafter described and
claimed, reference being had to the accompanying
40 drawing in which:
Figure lis a perspective view of my improved gramo-
phone; Fig. 2 is a vertical longitudinal sectional view
of the same upon a slightly larger scale; Fig. 3 is a detail
transverse sectional view, the section being taken ap-
45 proximately on the line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2 and looking in the
direction of the dart; and, Fig. 4 is a detail vertical sec-
tional view on the line 4 — 4 of Fig. 1, looking in the di-
rection of the dart.
Corresponding and like parts are referred to in the fol-
40 lowing description, and indicated in all the views of the
drawings by the same reference characters.
Referring tothe drawings, the letter a designates the
casing of my improved talking machine or gramophone,
and a' the top of said casing, said top being provided
55 with a rear extension constituting a ledge a2.
m designates the box designed to receive the motor
and adapted to revolve the table b which is supported
or journaled upon the top a' of the case a and which is
intended in turn to support the sound disk or record V '.
An opening is formed through the ledge a2 and en- 60
circling this opening is an upright ring e? from which
there extends upwardly a bracket e, the said bracket
and ringe' being preferably integrally connected. The
upper end of the bracket e curves forwardly and is aper-
tured to receive a threaded pin e2 which is held at dif- 65
ferent vertical adjustments therein by means of nuts e3.
The lower end of the pin e2 projects below the for-
wardly extending upper end of the bracket e and into
engagement with the upper end of an inverted U-shaped
band ei which is integrally connected at its lower end to 70
an annulus e5 preferably provided with a curved upper
edge as shown best in Figs. 1 and 2. The annulus e5 fits
within the ring e' and is guided by the said ring, it being
permitted to turn freely in a horizontal plane therein,
and the band or bar e4 also turns with the annulus e5 and 75
is held to move in a true horizontal plane about the con-
tacting end of the pin e2 as an axis. The bar e4 and an-
nulus e5, together constitute a stirrup, which is adapted
to receive an elbow d3 suspended within the stirrup, as
best seen in Fig. 4 by means of two inwardly projecting 80
set screws as seen at e6 which impinge upon it at oppo-
site sides. Hence, it will be seen that the elbow d3 may
be turned freely about the pins ev' in a vertical plane and
may also be turned in a horizontal plane and freely,
with the stirrup in which it is mounted. To limit the 85
rocking movement of the elbow d3 in a vertical plane, I
provide any desired form of stop device. In the pres-
ent instance, I have shown for this purpose spring
latches s which are secured at one end to the bar e4 and
are adapted to contact with recesses or studs s/ on the 90
elbow, as is evident from inspection of Fig. 2.
The elbow d* is adapted to receive in its horizontal
end, the larger end of the tapering arm d which carries
the sound box d' and the stylus d2, these forming by
themselves no part of my invention. 95
h designates the megaphone or horn of my invention,
the same embodying a vertically disposed portion h'
which is fitted at its upper end within the opening
of the ledge a2 and which is adapted to support the
annulus e5, as best seen in Fig. 4. The megaphone 100
also embodies a tapered horizontally disposed portion
K2 which is connected at its lower end to the portion
h', (the latter having its end formed into an elbow to
receive the smaller end of the portion h2), and the
portion li2 of the horn extends completely through the 105
case a, from the rear side to the front and is preferably
flanged outwardly at its larger front end, as best seen
in Fig. 1, the said flange being secured by screws, or
any desired fastening means to the front of the case.
The said portion h2 is located within a compartment 110
864,758
a3 which is produced by the bottom of the case a and
the horizontal partition a4 and to hold the said por-
tion K2 rigidly in place, upper and lower supporting
plates h3 may be provided. The vertically disposed
5 portion h' of the magaphone is located entirely without
the case as shown, although it is practically protected
from injury in shipping by means of the ledge a2, and
this portion of the megaphone is provided with a sound
regulator r which may be set by a handle r' so as to regu-
10 late the opening for the passage of the sound waves
from the diaphragm and the tapering arm to the lower
part Of the horn.
In the lower, enlarged, conical portion h2 of the
horn are arranged thin longitudinal wires w which are
15 supported at their ends by oval wires «/ which are at-
tached to the side-walls of the horn and which serve
for vibrating with the sound-waves as they are con-
ducted from the vertical portion of the horn to the
horizontal portion, said wires exerting a softening in-
20 fluence on the sounds and delivering the same in a
clear and distinct manner at the outgoing end of the
horn.
The advantages of my improved phonograph are that
the horn is not arranged as a separate detachable por-
25 tion of the same, but is arranged in permanent con-
nection with the lower part of the casing, so that the
same can be packed and shipped with the casing, the
phonograph being immediately on unpacking the
shipping box ready for use, all that is necessary being
30 to arrange the sound-record on the rotary table or disk,
regulate the stylus for the same, and adjust the sus-
pension-pivot of the upper hollow tapering arm of the
horn. The lower enlarged part of the horn remains
always stationary in the box, while the upper part
35 with the sound-box follows the motion of the depres-
sions in the sound-record as it is capable of swinging on
the suspension-pivot in lateral direction, while the
vertical motion of the sound-box and its tapering arm
necessary for removing and replacing the sound-record
is permitted by the pivotal connection of the elbow 40
with the holder. The sound-box in the lower part of
the casing for the enlarged part of the horn and the lon-
gitudinal wires in the same improve the softness and
clearness of the sounds which are emanating from the
same and render the sounds more pleasing and agree- 45
able.
Having thus described the invention, what is
claimed as new is:
1. In a talking machine, the combination with a case,
a record table journaled upon said case, a sound box and 50
supporting arm therefor, of a ring mounted upon said
case, a bracket extending upwardly and forwardly from
said ring to a point over the same, a stirrup consisting
of an inverted XT-shaped bar, and an annulus connected to
the lower ends of said bar, the said annulus being fitted 5a
to turn within the said ring, a pivot pin mounted in the
upper end of said bracket and extending through the same
into contact with the said bar, an elbow received within
the stirrup and pivoted to the bar thereof to rock in a
vertical plane, one end of said elbow receiving the said 60
supporting arm for the sound box, a megaphone having a
stationary portion disposed horizontally within the case
and etxending therethrough, said megaphone also embody-
ing a vertically disposed portion extending from one end
of the stationary portion up to the elbow. 65
2. In a talking machine, the combination of a case, a
record table mounted to revolve on said case, a sound-
box and supporting arm therefor, the top of the case
being provided with a rearwardly projecting ledge having
an opening formed therein, of a stationary megaphone 70v
disposed within said case and provided with an elbow ex-
tending outside of the case and up into the ledge, a uni-
versal joint connected between the supporting arm and
said elbow, and a sound regulator mounted in the said
elbow, outside of the ease. 75
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in presence
of two witnesses.
HERMANN SCHRODER. [h. s.]
Witnesses :
Frederick S. Stitt,
W. N. Woodson.
No. 865,088. PATENTED SEPT. 3, 1907.
L. F. DOUGLASS.
MOUNTING FOR THE STYLUS BAR OF TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED MAR. 8, 1906.
^-&.-L
/£ M iS
•^Witnesses
D chiwntot
§8y
/fork
£UtOt-K»*f
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LEON F. DOUGLASS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
MOUNTING FOR THE STYLUS-BAR OF TALKING-MACHINES.
JSIo. 865,088.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed March 8, 1906. Serial No. 304,910.
Patented Sept. 3, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Leon F. Douglass, a citizen of
the United States, and a resident of the city of Phila-
delphia, State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain
5 new and useful Improvements in Mountings for the
Stylus-Bars of Talking-Machines, of which the follow-
ing is a full, clear, and complete disclosure.
One object of my invention is to produce a mounting
for the stylus bar of a sound box of a talking machine, in
10 which the stylus bar may be more delicately, perfectly
and efficiently mounted than heretofore, and the posi-
tion and the tension of the stylus bar with respect to the
diaphragm may be quickly and easily adjusted.
Other objects of my invention will appear below in
1 5 the specification and claims forming a part of this appli-
cation.
Heretofore the sound boxes in which the stylus bar
has been mounted upon a torsional device for giving a
tension thereto, or for holding said stylus bar in posi-
20 tion, the torsional device or spring has been attached
rigidly to the casing of the sound box and to the stylus
bar, and no means have been provided for the axial ad-
justment of the stylus bar so that its pressure or tension
in relation to the diaphragm may be varied, and this
25 lack of adjustability of the torsional mounting for the
stylus bar is a disadvantage which reduces the effi-
ciency and quality of the reproductions by the sound
box.
Briefly, my invention comprises an improved tor-
3 0 sional mounting for a stylus bar which may be easily ad-
j usted by means of suitable holding or clamping devices
located in both the stylus bar and the bearings for the
torsional device.
For a full, clear and exact description of my inven-
35 tion reference may be had to the following specifica-
tion and the accompanying drawings forming a part
thereof, in which
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a sound box having
my improved stylus mounting secured thereto; Fig. 2
40 is a transverse sectional view thereof taken on the line
2 — 2, Fig. 3; Fig. 3 is a sectional view of the mounting
taken on the plane passing through the torsional spring
or wire perpendicular to the plane of the diaphragm;
Fig. 4 is a sectional view through one of the arms of my
4 5 improved mounting taken on the line 4 — 4 Fig. 3 .
Ref erring to the drawings, 1 indicates the usual cylin-
drical casing or ring in which the diaphragm 2 is mount-
ed, said ring being provided with a transverse partition
or back 3, to which is attached the sound conducting
50 tube 4, in any suitable or well known manner. At-
tached to one portion of the periphery of the ring 1 is a
U-shaped block 5, the arms 5' of which are provided
with apertures 6 in alinement, through which passes
the torsional pin, wire or spring 7, upon which the stylus
bar is carried. Said pin, wire or spring smoothly fits 55
within said apertures 6 in said U-shaped block, and is
secured within the same by set screws 8 — 8, the inner
end of which jam or press against said torsional spring.
The stylus bar consists of two main parts, a portion 9
of which is adapted to receive the stylus needle, and the 60
portion 10 of which is connected with the first main por-
tion and also with the diaphragm 2. The portion 9 is
preferably made in the form of an L-shaped block, the
one arm 11 of which is attached to the portion 10 which
connects with the diaphragm, and the other arm of 65
which is provided with a socket 12 and set screw 13, by
which the stylus is secured thereto. Passing through
the said block is a transverse hole 14, within which the
torsional spring or wire 7 smoothly fits, and a set screw
15 carried by said block is adapted to engage said tor- 7 0
sional wire or spring 7 and clamp the stylus bar firmly to
said spring. The inner faces of the arms 5' of the U-
shaped block are accurately squared with respect to the
apertures 6 therein, and the L-shaped block has its ends
also squared to fit smoothly between the arms of said 75
block.
A stylus bar mounted in the manner above described
is very rigidly or firmly held between the arms of the
supporting block, and the torsional spring or wire being
at all times in contact with the holes in the block and 80
stylus bar is so confined that it can' move only tor-
sionally, and any buckling or bending of the torsion
spring is absolutely prevented. Moreover, the tension
or pressure between the stylus bar and the diaphragm
can be accurately adjusted since it is merely necessary 85
to press the inner end of the stylus bar against the dia-
phragm with the required pressure, while either the set
screw 15 or the set screws 8 are loose, and then hold or
secure the stylus bar in such adjusted position by
screwing the set screws down against the torsional 90
spring.
While I have described one embodiment of my inven-
tion I do not desire to be limited to the particular con-
struction of sound box or of stylus bar above shown and
described, since my invention contemplates the mount- 9 5
ing of any stylus bar upon a torsional spring between
shoulders which closely fit against the said stylus bar,
whereby the stylus bar is prevented from moving in any
direction except around said spring as an axis, the
spring being so confined that it can only be flexed tor- 100
sionally.
Having thus described my invention, what I claim
and desire to protect by Letters Patent of the United
States, is: —
1. In a sound bos for talking machines, a stylus bar, a ±q§
support having arms fitting against opposite sides of said
stylus bar and a torsional spring passing through said
stylus bar and said arms.
865,088
2. In a sound box for talking machines a stylus bar, a
support therefor, a torsional spring passing through said
stylus bar and said support and means to prevent the
stylus bar from moving in any direction except about the
5 torsional spring as an axis.
3. In a sound box for talking machines the combination
with a stylus bar of a support therefor, a torsional spring
passing through said support and stylus bar, said support
preventing said stylus bar from moving in any direction
10 except about said spring as an axis.
4. In a sound box for talking machines the combination
with a stylus bar, a support having arms fitting against
opposite sides of said stylus bar, a torsional spring pass-
ing through said stylus bar and said arms and means to
15 adjustably bold said spring in said arms and said stylus
bar to said spring.
5. In a sound box a torsional spring, a stylus bar and a
support engaging opposite sides of said stylus bar, said
torsional spring being incased throughout its entire length
20 by said stylus bar and said support.
6. In a sound box the combination with a stylus bar of
a torsional spring passing through said stylus bar, and a
fixed support for said spring, said support being provided
with faces which snugly fit against the opposite sides of
25 said stylus bar.
7. In a sound box a stylus bar, a mounting for said
stylus bar comprising a U-shaped block having its extremi-
ties engaging opposite sides of said stylus bar, and a tor-
sional spring passing through said block and through said
30 stylus bar and rigidly confined within each of said parts.
8. In a sound box a stylus bar, a support, a torsional
spring comprising a pin rigidly connected to said stylus
bar at its central portion and having its outer ends rigidly
mounted in said support, the torsional portion of said
35 spring being in contact for its entire length with said
stylus bar and support.
9. In a sound box the combination with a stylus bar of
bearings therefor ; a spring passing through said stylus
bar and said bearings, means to secure said spring to said
40 stylus bar and to said bearings, said stylus bar fitting
snugly between said bearings.
Hi. In a sound box for talking machines the combina-
tion with a stylus bar of a support having arms engaging
opposite sides of said stylus bar, a torsional spring com-
prising a wire passing through said arms and said stylus 45
bar, means for holding said wire rigidly within said bear-
ings and means for rigidly holding said stylus bar on said
spring.
11. In a sound box for talking machines a stylus bar
and a support therefor, said stylus bar and support being 5Q
provided with alined openings and a torsional spring
snugly fitting within said openings and means to secure
said spring to said support and to said stylus bar.
12. In a sound box for talking machines a stylus bar, a
support engaging opposite sides of said stylus bar, said 55
stylus bar and support being provided with alined circular
openings, a round torsional spring inserted within said
openings and snugly fitting the same, means to rigidly se-
cure the ends of said spring w-ithin said support and
means to secure said stylus bar to said spring midway be- gQ
tween the ends thereof.
18. In a sound box for talking machines, the combina-
tion of a stylus bar with a recessed stylus bar support, the
said recess and said stylus bar having flat sides engaging
each other, each of said sides being disposed in a plane 55
parallel to the plane of oscillation of the stylus bar and a
torsional spring passing transversely through said sides,
the said spring being in rigid engagement with said bar
and support.
14. In a sound box for talking machines, the combina- 70
fion of a stylus bar with a recessed stylus bar support, the
said recess and said stylus bar having flat sides engaging
each other and disposed in a plane parallel to the plane of
oscillation of the stylus bar, a torsional spring passing
transversely through said sides and means for adjustably 75
engaging said spring with said stylus bar and with said
support.
In witness whereof, I have hereunto set my hand this
seventh day of March, A. I). 1906.
LEON F. DOUGLASS.
Witnesses :
Alston B. Moiilton,
Alexander Park.
No, 865,105. PATENTED SEPT. 3, 1907.
E. R. JOHNSON.
SOUND BOX FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 7, 1903.
J^:4.
J7^.
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
t
E IdridgeftJohnJon
BY
ATTORNEY.
TH£ hcrh:s nrtxs <ro„ viashinotoh. o. c.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ELDRIDGE R. JOHNSON, 6F PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW .JERSEY.
SOUND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 865,105.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 7, 1903. Serial No. 151,453.
Patented Sept. 3, 1907.
To nil whom it may concern:
Be it known that I. Eldridge R. Johnson, a citizen
lo United States, and a resident of the city of Phila-
d< Iphia, State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain
5 new and useful Improvements in Sound-Boxes for
Talking-Machines, of which the following is a full.
clear, and complete disclosure.
My invention relates to sound boxes for talking ma-
chines, and men particularly to novel meansfoi mount-
10 ing the stylus bar of such a sound bar, having for its
object to provide a mounting that will make the box
extremely sensitive to accurately reproduce the re-
corded vibrations, as will be hereinafter fully described
and claimed.
15 For a full, clear and exact description of the par-
ticular construction I have selected to illustrate my in-
vention reference may be had to the following speei-
fication and to the accompanying drawing forming a
pari thereof in which
20 Figure 1, is a sectional elevation of a portion of my
improved sound box showing the stylus bar and its
connection in position therein; Fig. 2 a sectional view
of a slight modification of the means for producing an
elastic tension; Fig. 3, a detail view of the stylus bar
25 and ii* -uspensioir detached from the sound box; Fig.
4 a front elevation of Fig. 3; Fig. 5 a sectional'elevation
modified form of the means for producing a tension
upon the stylus liar; Fig. 6 a front elevation of the
stylus bar and its connecting parts, shown in Fig. 5,
30 deta'ched; Figs. 7, and 8, show means for varying the
tension upon the suspension shown in Figs. 5 and 6 and
Fig. 9. a view showing a portion of the edge of the sound
box.
The numeral 1 indicates the sound box casing which
35 has the usual diaphragm 2 yieldingly mounted therein
and retained in position in any suitable manner such
as by the flange 3 and the perforated disk 4.
The sound box casing 1 is provided at substantially
diametrically opposite points with holes or openings
40 5 and G. The lower opening 6 is somewhat larger than
the opening 5 and is adapted to receive the stylus bar
7 so that the latter may have a slight lateral play therein.
The stylus bar 7 is provided with the usual boss 8
which is adapted to receive the set screw 9 for retain-
45 ing the needle or stylus in position. The stylus bar 7
is also provided with a knife edge or pivot 11 which is
adapted to engage the outer surface of the sound box
and have a bearing thereon. Small cuts or recesses
2(i are provided to receive the knife edge on the sur-
50 face of the sound box adjacent the opening 6. The
stylus bar 7 is also provided with an eye or socket 12
which is adapted to receive one end of the wire or
elastic suspension 13. The other end of wire or sus-
pension 13 passes through the opening 5 in the sound
55 box casing and engages a spring hook 14 which is re-
tained in position upon the ouside of the sound box
casing by means of a screw or similar device 15, the en-
gagement between said wire or suspension 13 and hook
14 being to one and the same side of the bearing of the
bar 7, as the engagement between said suspension 13 GO
and the said bar. The plate or material of which said
hook is formed is provided with an elongated slot 1G
for allowing of an adjustment of the hook in relation to
the screw 15. The hook 14 may be substantially straight
as shown in Fig. 1 or may be bent at an angle and at- 65
tached to the front of the sound box as illustrated in
Figs. 2 and 3.
It will now be seen that the knife edge 11 is forced
into contact with the surface of the sound box by means
of the suspension 13 and the tension placed upon the 70
latter may be varied according to the elasticity and po-
sition of the hook 14 or of the hook 17. The latter is
so designed that the said tension will be such as to pro-
duce the best results in relation to the character of the
sound record and after the pails are placed in position 75
the hook 14 or 17 may be adjusted within certain limits.
In Figs. 5 to 8 inclusive I have illustrated another
form of my improved means for retaining the stylus bar
in position. The stylus bar 18 is provided with knife
edges 11 similar to those above described but instead of 80
having an eye or socket 12 a hole 19' is placed in the
stylus bar 18 substantially in line with the knife edge
11 through which the suspension 20 is adapted to pass.
This suspension 20 consists of a continuous loop of wire
or other strong material which passes through the hole 85
19 and is adapted to engage the hook 21 which passes
through an opening 22 diametrically opposite the open-
ing 6 through which the stylus bar passes, the engage-
ment between said suspension 20 and hook 21 being
also located to one and the same side of the bearing of 90
the bar 18, as the engagement between said suspension
and bar. The opening 22 is preferably square in cross
section and is adapted to carry a square plug 23 which
is attached to the hook 21. A thumb nut 24 permits
a longitudinal adjustment of the hook 21 so that the 95
tension upon the suspension 20 may be varied after
the parts are in position in a manner similar to that
above described in connection with the first form.
The upper end of the stylus bar is, of course, in each
case connected to the diaphragm 2 by means of the 100
wire or similar device 25. In either form the sus-
pensions 13 or 20 are slightly elastic under tension,
or in other words, act as springs and allow of a lateral
vibration of the stylus bars.
It will be seen that by the constructions set forth in 105
the forms above described that the movable parts of
the sound box are very easily assembled efficiently
retained in position and may be veiy accurately adjust-
ed to give the best results in the production or reception
of sound waves. 110
865,105
Having thus described my invention, what I claim j
and desire to protect by Letters Patent in the United
States, is:
1. In a sound recording and reproducing machine, the
5 combination with a sound box casing of a diaphragm, a
stylus bar, a transverse bearing located on the exterior of
the sound box casing, said hearing holding said stylus bar
against longitudinal movement in one direction, the said
stylus bar having an opening adjacent said bearing, an
10 elastic suspension loop passing through said opening, and
means at the opposite side of the casing for adjustably
supporting said loop.
2. In a sound recording and reproducing machine, the
combination with a sound box casing of a diaphragm, a
15 stylus liar having a transverse bearing journaled on the
exterior of the sound box casing, an elastic suspension loop
passing through an opening in said stylus, and a screw
threaded hook at the opposite side of said casing for ad-
justably supporting said loop.
20 ;:>- I" ;1 sound box for talking machines, a casing having
a diaphragm, a stylus liar projecting through an opening in
said casing and having a transverse bearing journaled on
the exterior of said casing, an elastic suspension loop
25
passing through an opening in said stylus bar within the
sound box casing, and between the limbs of which said
stylus bar is situated, a screw threaded hook at the other
end of said loop, the screw threaded portion of said hook-
passing through an opening on outside of the sound box
casing opposite that through which the stylus bar projects.
and an adjusting nut situated on the outside of the casing 30
and engaging said screw threaded portion of the hook.
4. In a sound box recording and reproducing machine,
the combination with a sound box casing of a diaphragm, a
stylus liar, an axial hearing located on the exterior of the
sound box casing, the said hearing holding said stylus bar
against longitudinal movement in one direction, a sus-
pension wire passing through an opening in said stylus
bar adjacent said bearing, said wire tensioning said bear-
ing against said casing, and means at the opposite side of
the casing for adjustably supporting said wire.
In witness whereof, I have hereunto set my hand this
30th day of March, A. L>. 1!)03.
35
40
ELDRIDGE R. JOHNSON.
Witnesses :
Lester L. Bristol,
Rose Chevalier.
\
No. 865,344.
A. T. MOORE.
MULTIPLE GRAMOPHONE.
APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 11, 1903.
PATENTED SEPT. 3, 1907.
WITNESSES:
(\§6j i INVENTOR.
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ALEXANDER T. MOORE, OF NEW ORLEANS, LOUISIANA.
MULTIPLE GRAMOPHONE.
No, 865,344.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Gept. 3, 1907.
Application filed September 11, 1903. Serial No. 172,811.
To all whom it may concern: ■
Be it known that I, Alexander Thomas Moore, a
citizen of the United States of America, residing at
New Orleans, in the parish of Orleans and State of
5 Louisiana, have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Multiple Gramophones, of which the
following is a specification, reference being had therein
to the accompanying drawing.
This invention relates to a multiple gramophone and
10 particularly to a structure employing a plurality of
sound boxes in connection with a single reproducing
disk.
The invention has for an object to provide means
whereby a plurality of sound boxes may be used either
15 independently, or conjointly in connection with a
single horn.
A further object is to provide means whereby the
sound boxes may be thrown in or out of operative posi-
tion relative to the conducting tubes upon which they
20 are supported.
Other and further objects and advantages of the in-
vention will be hereinafter set forth and the novel fea-
tures thereof defined by the appended claims.
In the drawing Figure 1 is a side elevation of the in-
25 vention, and Fig. 2 a top plan thereof.
Like numerals of reference indicate like parts in the
several figures of the drawing.
The numeral 1 designates a casing or box provided
with a driving shaft 2 carrying a disk 3 upon which the
30 record 4 is placed. This casing is also provided with a
bracket arm 15 having a suitable bearing for a conduct-
ing tube 13 which is connected at its end next the disk
with a collecting chamber 12. The outer end of the
tube 13 is formed with a vertical extension having a
35 bearing portion 14 at. its lower end, while at its upper
end a horn 16 maybe applied as shown in Fig. 2. Pro-
jecting laterally from the chamber 12 is a series of tubes
9 each provided with a face plate 8 conforming to the
outline of a sound box 5 with which it contacts when
40 the latter is lowered to bring the needle 6 carried there-
by into contact with the record 4 upon the disk. These
tubes 9 also carry a stop pin 10 to limit the backward
travel of the plates 7 carrying the boxes 5 when the lat-
ter are moved out of operative position. The plate 7 is
45 pivotally mounted upon each tube 9 by the screw 9?
entering the boss 9X upon the tube. Upon the inner
late of each plate 7 a pin 18 is provided and adapted to
seat in a slot 17 provided in the face plate 8. Each
tube 9 is also formed with an apertured nipple 11 to
50 which a horn similar to that shown at 16 may be ap-
plied if desired.
It will be observed from the foregoing that a series of
needles and their sounding boxes may be employed
for engagement with a single record for the purpose of
causing the simultaneous reproduction of the various
parts of the music thus securing a clearer, more accu-
rate and efficient reproduction of the recorded sounds
than can be secured by a single sound box. The con-
struction also permits the conduction of the sounds
from the separate boxes through the chamber into a
single horn.
It will be obvious that changes may be made in the
details of construction and configuration without de-
parting from the spirit of the invention as defined by
the appended claims.
The sound boxes are adapted to engage independent
grooves of the record tablet at different distances from
the center thereof and do not follow each other in the
same groove. This adapts the device for use in con-
nection with a tablet having a series of circumferen-
tially disposed records thereon which may be thus
simultaneously reproduced.
What I claim is: —
1. A device of the class described comprising a disk rec-
ord tablet provided with independent record grooves there-
on, a plurality of sound conveying tubes mounted upon a
single pivot, arid sound boxes carried by said tubes at dif-
ferent distances radially to the axial center of the tablet
to engage independent record grooves on said tablet.
2. A device of the class described comprising a disk rec-
ord tablet, a plurality of parallel sound conveying tubes
mounted upon a single pivot, and sound boxes carried by
said tubes at different distances radially to the axial cen-
ter of the tablet to engage independent record grooves on
said tablet and be thereby simultaneously fed across the
tablet.
3. A device of the class described comprising a disk rec-
ord tablet, a plurality of sound conveying tubes of equal
length, and sound boxes carried by said tubes to engage
said record tablet at points on a radial line at different
distances from its center.
4. In a device of the class described, a plurality of
tubes, plates pivotally mounted thereon, sound boxes car-
ried by the free ends of said plates, and a chamber con-
necting said tubes at one end.
5. In a device of the class described, a plurality of
sound boxes mounted opposite apertures in said tubes, a
chamber connecting said tubes, and a connection nipple
thereon.
G. In a device of the class described, a plurality of
tubes, a sound box mounted opposite an aperture in each
tube, a chamber connecting said tubes at one end, a casing
and driving disk, a bracket from said casing, a horn sup-
ported by said bracket, and a connecting tube from the
horn to said chamber.
7. In a device of the class described, a casing, a bracket
secured thereto, a pivoted tube mounted upon said bracket,
a chamber secured to the end of said tube, parallel con-
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
865,344
ducting tubes projecting' from said chamber, plates pivoted j posed at different distances from the center of the disk to 10
to said conducting tubes, a sounding box carried by each
plate, a stop upon each conducting tube to- limit the travel
of said plate in one direction, and means to support a rec-
ord adjacent to said box.
8. The combination with a sound record disk provided
with independent duplicate records disposed concentric
and relative to each other, of means mounted upon a single
pivot and provided with a plurality of sound boxes dis-
iudependently engage said records and be simultaneously
fed thereby across said tablet.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in presence of
two witnesses.
ALEXANDER T. MOORE.
Witnesses :
J. B. Rosser, Jr.,
Alphonse J. Cuneo.
!
No, 865,398.
H. KOCH.
TALKING MACHINE ATTACHMENT.
APPLICATION TILED JAN. 8, 1906.
PATENTED SEPT. 10, 1907.
lia:S.
T
WITNESSES.
Jc&rZ c^t^U
-f/t INVENTOR
BY
ATTORNEYS
THE NORRIS Pk.TEttl CO . WASHIN',1
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HENRY KOCH, OF RAIIWAY. NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE REGINA COMPANY, OF
RAIIWAY, NEW JERSEY. A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
TALKING-MACHINE ATTACHMENT
No. 865,398.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 10, 1907.
Application filed January 8, 1906. Serial No. 295,022.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Henry Koch, a citizen of the
United States, and a resident of Rahway, county of
Union, and State of New Jersey, have invented cer-
5 tain new and useful Improvements in Talking-Machine
Attachments, of which the following is a specification.
My invention relates to the class of machines com-
monly known as talking machines and has for its ob-
ject to provide machines of this description with a
10 device for readily inserting the stylus into the stylus
holder of the sound-box or reproducer.
My invention will be fully described hereinafter and
the features of novelty will be pointed out in the ap-
pended claims.
15 Reference is to be had to the accompanying draw-
ings in which
Figure 1 is a side view of as much of a talking ma-
chine as is necessary to illustrate my invention and
Fig. 2 is a sectional view thereof on an enlarged scale
20 taken on the line 2—2 of Fig. 1.
A represents the sound conducting tube which car-
ries at its free end the usual reproducer or sound box
B. The other end of said tube A is journaled in a
bracket C which is secured in any convenient manner
25 to the talking machine proper. This bracket C also
carries the customary amplifying horn D which is in
communication with the sound conducting tube A.
The sound box B may be of any ordinary construction
and is provided with the usual stylus arm B' secured
30 to the diaphragm B2 and carrying the stylus holder B3.
E represents a portion of the talking machine to
which is secured in any convenient manner a guiding
member F provided with a slot FC A plunger G is
arranged to slide in said guiding member F and is
35 provided with an operating handle G' which extends
through the slot F' of the member F. This slide or
plunger G is maintained in its lower position by a
spring H one end of which abuts against the guiding
member F and the other end of which engages a
40 washer I carried by the plunger G. The plunger G is
provided with a receptacle or recess J of a tapering
shape, so as to accommodate and hold the stylus K.
L is a holding catch pivoted at M to the stylus holder
B3 and adapted to lock the stylus K in the holder B3.
45 The catch L is provided with a finger piece 1/ and is
held in its locking position by a spring N.
O is a positioning fork attached at a convenient point
to the talking machine E and adapted to engage the
sound-conducting tube A. The fork O may be made
50 separate from or integral with the guiding member F
as desired.
In operation to insert the stylus K in position in
the stylus holder B3, the said stylus K is first placed
in the receptacle J of the plunger G with its point
55 down. The tube A is swung on its pivot in the bracket
C and then raised and placed in the fork O, it being
understood that the tube A is so constructed as to be
capable of swinging in a vertical as well as a horizontal
plane. It is to be further understood that the fork O
is arranged in a plane substantially at right angles 60
with the plane of the sound-box and is so located
that when the tube A is placed therein the stylus
holder B3 will be directly over the receptacle J in the
plunger G. In other words when the tube A is in the
fork O one of the members of said fork will engage the 65
tube A at the rear thereof and the other member of
said fork will engage the tube at the front thereof and
the stylus holder will register with the stylus K in the
plunger G. The plunger G is then pressed upward
through the medium of the handle G' and the stylus 70
K inserted into the holder B3 where it is held by the
holding catch L. The holding catch is beveled at its
lower portion so that the stylus on being pressed upward
will be guided into proper position. It is to be under-
stood that the receptacle J of the plunger G is so pro- 75
portioned that the stylus K will extend just far enough
therefrom for correct positioning in the stylus holder.
To aid in this the slot F7 is also in correct proportion.
After the selection has been played on the machine
and a new stylus is desired the finger piece 1/ of the 80
catch L, is pressed toward the sound box thus releas-
ing the stylus just used and the above operation is re-
peated.
With my device a new stylus may be quickly in-
serted in the stylus holder and the danger of pricking 85
the fingers is done away with. It is to be understood
that instead of the positioning fork O an ordinary stop
may be used, the only requirement being that the
sound conductor or tube A be stopped at a point
where the stylus holder is in registry with the recep- 90
tacle in the plunger G.
Various modifications may be made without depart-
ing from the nature of my invention as denned in the
claims.
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent: 95
1. In a talking machine, the combination of a movable
sound-conducting tube, the sound box carried thereby and
the stylus-holder on the sound box, with a support in per-
manent engagement with said sound-conducting tube, an-
other support adapted for temporary engagement with 100
said sound-conducting tube and a stylus-inserting device
which registers with the stylus-holder when the sound-
conducting tube is in temporary engagement with the
| second-named support.
2. In a talking machine, the combination of the pivot- 105
ally supported sound-conducting tube, the sound-box car-
ried thereby, and the stylus-holder on the sound-box, with
a support for holding said tube in its inactive position,
and a stylus-inserting device which registers with said
holder when the sound-conducting tube rests on said sup- 110
port.
3. In a talking machine, the combination with the mov-
able sound conductor, a sound box carried thereby and a
3
865,398
10
stylus holder on said sound box, of a positioning device ar-
ranged in a plane at an angle to the plane of the sound
box and provided with two members adapted to engage the
sound conductor at the front and rear thereof when the
sound box is in the stylus-receiving position and a stylus
inserting device which registers with the stylus-holder
when the sound box is positioned by said positioning de-
vice.
4. In a talking machine, the combination, with the mov-
able sound-box having a stylus-holder, of a plunger mov-
able toward and from the holder and in registry there-
with in a predetermined position of the sound-box, the said
plunger being provided with a tapering recess or socket
for temporarily holding a stylus.
In testimony whereof, I have hereto subscribed my name
in the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
HENRY KOCH.
Witnesses :
W. C. Pboss,
F. J. Macdonald.
15
No. 865,399.
H. KOCH.
TALKING MACHINE HORN.
APPLICATION FILED MAT 1, 1906.
PATENTED SEPT. 10, 1907.
J#2^u_ <u.yfc/U*juJkAJK'.
ft} ^ INVENTOR
BY
ATTORNEYS
THE HORfttS PETERS CO WASHINGTON, D. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HENRY KOCH, OF RAHWAY, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE REGINA COMPANY, OF
RAHWAY, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
TALKING-MACHINE HORN.
No. 865,399.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed May 1, 1906. Serial No. 314,707.
Patented Sept. 10, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Henry Koch, a citizen of the
United States, and a resident of Rahway, Union county,
State of New Jersey, have invented certain new and
5 useful Improvements in Talking-Machine Horns, of
which the following is a specification.
My invention relates to horns for talking machines
and has for its object to provide a means for pivotally
supporting said horn, which means is adjustable so as to
10 vary the distance between the pivot and the reproducer
or sound box.
My invention will be fully described hereinafter and
the features of novelty will be pointed out in the ap-
pended claims.
J 5 Reference is to be had to the accompanying draw-
ings in which
Figure 1 is an elevation of as much of a talking ma-
chine as is necessary to illustrate my invention; Fig. la
is a section thereof on line la — la of Fig. 1; Fig. 2 is an
20 elevation of another form of my device; Fig. 3 is a horiT
zontal section thereof on the line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2, and Fig.
4 is a horizontal section of still another form of my in-
vention.
Referring to the construction shown in Fig. 1, A is
25 the sound-conduit or amplifying horn which may be of
any usual construction and which carries the customary
reproducer B, having a stylus C in engagement with
the record D. The said record may be supported and
rotated in any convenient manner. The horn A is pro-
30 vided on each side with diametrically opposite sets of
holes E arranged at different distances from the end
which carries the reproducer and adapted to receive
the pointed ends of screws or other pivoting devices F.
These screws F pass through a fork G near the upper
35 ends thereof, said fork straddling a portion of the said
horn. The lower end of the fork G is connected with a
stem H, which enters a bearing I, so that the said fork is
rotatable about a vertical axis, the whole forming a
support for the horn. It will be seen that with this con-
40 struction the distance from the reproducer B to the
pivot screws F may be varied ; this is done for the pur-
pose of regulating the weight or pressure of the repro-
ducer on the record, since with many machines an ar-
rangement is made for using different reproducers
45 which are not alike in weight.
In the form of my invention shown in Figs. 2 and 3 I
provide for a gradual adjustment of the horn pivot in
the following manner. The horn A is provided at each
side with lugs or projections a through which screws b
50 pass loosely. These screws b also pass through screw
threaded blocks c which are pivoted at of to the upper
ends of the fork d having a stem e in engagement with
the bearing/ in the same manner as described with re-
gard to the construction shown in Fig. 1. The screws b
carry pinions g each of which is in mesh with a central 55
pinion h. This pinion h is journaled on a convenient
portion of the horn A and is provided with a milled op-
erating knob i. Thus as this knob i is turned one way
or the other the screws b will be rotated through the
medium of the pinion g and the end of the horn carry- 60
ing the reproducer will be brought nearer to or further
away from the pivot blocks c as desired.
In the construction shown in Fig. 4 the horn A is pro-
vided with outwardly extending frames 1 having slots 2 .
Pivot pins 3 having collars 4 project through these slots 65
2 and are screw-threaded at one end to receive thumb
screws 5. The opposite ends of these pivot pins pro-
ject into suitable openings 6 in the fork 7 which may be
of the same general construction as described hereinbe-
fore. By loosening the thumb-screws 5, the horn may 70
be moved along the pivot pins 3 so as to vary the distance
from the reproducer to said pivot pins. It is of course
to be understood that the collars 4 form part of or are
secured to the pins 3 so that as the thumb-screws are
again screwed up the pins 3 and consequently the horn 7 5
will be secured in the adjusted position.
Various modifications may be made without depart-
ing from the nature of my invention as defined in the
claims.
I claim: 80
1. The combination of a reproducer carrying horn, a
member having a pivot for said horn, the axis of which
pivot intersects the said horn, a supporting member with
which said first named member is connected by a joint
allowing a swinging motion about an axis corresponding to 85
the progressive motion of the horn during operation, pro-
vision being made to permit the position of said horn to be
changed on said first named member to vary the distance
between the reproducer and the pivot of the said horn.
'2. The combination of a reproducer-carrying sound con- 90
duit, a support having a pivot fvi- said conduit, the axis of
which pivot intersects the sound conduit, and means adapt-
ed to permit the position of the said sound conduit to be
changed on said support to vary the distance between the
reproducer and the said support. 95
3. The combination of a reproducer carrying sound con-
duit, a jointed support having a pivot for said sound con-
duit, the axis of which pivot intersects the sound conduit,
and means adapted to permit the position of said sound
conduit to be changed on said support to vary the dis- 100
tance between the reproducer and the support.
In testimony whereof, I have hereunto signed my name
in the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
HENRY KOCH.
Witnesses :
James D. Luther,
F. J. Macdonald.
No. 865,674. PATENTED SEPT. 10, 1907.
J. N. BLACEMAN.
CLEANING ATTACHMENT FOR SOUND RECORDS.
APPLICATION FILED AUG. 22, 1906.
"^Witnesses
9 n venter
i-/osep/7 A/ewcom/? B/acA/ffa/7
V attorneys
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOSEPH NEWCOMB BLACKMAN, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY.
CLEANING ATTACHMENT FOR SOUND-RECORDS.
No. 865,674.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed August 22, 1906. Serial No. 331,578.
Patented Sept. 10, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that Joseph Newcomb Blackman, a
• citizen of the United States, residing at East Orange,
in the county of Essex and State of New Jersey, has
5 invented new and useful Improvements in Cleaning
Attachments for Records of Sound-Reproducing In-
struments, of which the following is a specification.
My invention relates to means for cleaning the records
of sound-reproducing instruments, such as phono-
10 graphs, graphophones, and the like, and is more espe-
cially adapted for disk-record machines.
It has for its purpose to provide a cleaning-implement
adapted to this type of instrument, having means
whereby it may be easily assembled in operative rela-
15 tion to the record-disk and removed therefrom when
desired. In the practical use of such disk-record,
sound-reproducing instruments objection exists that
the reproduction is clouded; that is, it is not as clear and
distinct as it should be, and this difficulty arises be-
20 cause of the fact that the sound grooves are not perfectly
clean, small dust particles collecting therein. Very
slight particles of dust in the grooves detract materially
from the clearness of the sound reproduction, and so far
as I am aware this difficulty has never heretofore been
2 5 taken care of in disk-record instruments.
My invention consists in a cleaner adapted to be sup-
ported in operative relation to the record disk-, as here-
inafter described.
That which I .regard as new will be set forth in the
30 clauses of claim appended to the description.
In the accompanying drawing illustrating that which
I regard as the best known embodiment my inven-
tion— Figure 1 is a perspective view of the cleaning im-
plement; Fig. 2 a side elevation thereof; Fig. 3 a front
35 elevation thereof; Fig. 4 a rear elevation; Fig. 5 illus-
trates the same connected to the sound-box of the in-
strument; Fig. 6 a perspective of a disk-record, sound
reproducing apparatus with the cleaning-implement
inoperative relation to the record; and Fig. 7 a similar
40 view showing the sound-box and the cleaning-imple-
ment attached thereto shifted to inoperative position.
In said drawing the reference numeral 1 designates
the record-support; 2 a standard in which is mounted
the swinging sound-box carrier-arm 3, which is adapted
45 to be swung over the disk-record to support the sound-
box and the needle carried thereby in operative rela-
tion to the disk-record when the instrument is in use,
and to be swung away therefrom to permit the inser-
tion and removal of records. The sound-box 4 has a
50 pivotal connection with the supporter-arm 3 whereby
it may be swung to the position shown in Fig. 7 prior
to swinging the supporter-arm away to permit the in-
troduction or removal of a record, so that in the swing-
ing movement the needle will not traverse the record
and whereby it may be swung down to the position 55
shown in Fig. 6 when the instrument is in operation.
Supported by the sound-box is the cleaning instru-
ment 5 which, preferably, consists of a camel-hair
brush 6, provided with means of attachment to the
sound-box, although the actual material of the cleaner 60
may be various, such as felt or other suitable material.
As shown, the cleaning-implement is attached to the
sound-box and moves in sweeping contact with the
record disk in advance of the reproducing needle 7 and
serves to effectually clean out the sound grooves so that 65
the needle has perfect contact and a clear and distinct
sound reproduction is secured.
The cleaning brush or implement is provided, as
stated, with means whereby it may be secured in op-
erative position to the sound-box. This means, as 70
shown, consists of a base-member 8 extending later-
ally from the top of the brush to bear against the cir-
cumferential face 9 of the rim of the sound-box and
arms 10, 11 at the opposite ends of the base-member
which embrace the sound-box rim, one of which arms is 7 5
provided with an inwardly turned finger 12 to take over
the annular flange 13 of the rim, and the other arm is
provided with a recess 14 to take over the stem of one
of the screws 15 which pass through the sound-box and
the head 16 of which; when screwed home, engages the 80
said arm 11, thus confining the cleaning-implement
securely in place.
The device may be readily attached by simply loos-
ening-up the screw 15 and fitting the inturned end 12 of
the arm 10 over the annular rim-flange 13 of the sound- 85
box and then slipping the slot in the arm 11 over the
screw 15 and turning the screw home. For removal the
operation described is reversed.
It will thus be seen that the cleaning-implement is
provided with a very simple means whereby it may be 90
connected to the sound-box in operative relation to the
disk-record.
The cleaning-implement of my invention serves to
thoroughly clean the grooves and a clear and distinct
reproduction is secured. The device is a simple one 95
and easily attachable and detachable.
Having; thus described the invention, what I claim
is —
1. In a sound-reproducing instrument, a cleaning-imple-
ment comprising cleaning-material and attaching means
consisting of arms adapted to embrace the sound-box, one
of such arms having an inturned end and the other a slot.
100
865,674
2. In a sound reproducing instrument, a cleaning-imple-
ment comprising cleaning-material and attaching means
consisting of arms adapted to embrace the sound-box, one
of such arms having an inturned end and the other a slot,
and a base extending between said arms and adapted to
hear against the sound-box.
3. A cleaning-implement for the records of sound-repro-
ducing instruments comprising cleaning-material and at-
taching means consisting of arms adapted to embrace the
sound-box. one of such arms having an inturned end and
the other a slot, and a base extending between said arms
and adapted to hear against the sound-box.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my hand in
presence of two subscribing witnesses.
JOSEPH NEWCOMB BLACKMAN.
Witnesses :
It. B. Caldwell,
Frank Roberts.
10
No. 865,435.
W. SCHUBERT.
REPRODUCER FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 11, 1906.
PATENTED SEPT. 10, 1907.
£?. ^Ai^CcjixAuUr<^f^
INVENTOR
BY
ATTORNEYS
INK NORMS PETERS CO , WASHINGTON. O. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM SCHUBERT, OF RAHWAY, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE REGINA COMPANY,
OF RAHWAY, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
REPRODUCER FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
No. 865,435.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 10, 1907
Application filed September 11, 1906. Serial No, 334,160.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William Schubert, a citizen of
the United States, and a resident of Rahway, in the
county of Union and State of New Jersey, have in-
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements in Re-
producers for Phonographs, of which the following is
a specification.
My invention relates to reproducers for phonographs
and has for its object to construct devices of this kind
10 in such a manner that the needle or stylus of the re-
producer will always travel along the center of the
grooves of the record.
My invention will be fully described hereinafter and
the features of novelty will be pointed out in the ap-
15 pended claims.
Reference is to be had to the accompanying drawings,
in which
Figure 1 is a plan view of a reproducer with my im-
provement applied thereto; Fig. 2 is a similar view of
20 another form of my invention; and Fig. 3 is a cross sec-
tion on line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2.
A is the body of the reproducer to which is secured
the customary diaphragm B carrying the stylus C
which travels in the grooves of the record D.
25 E is a tube connected with the body A and provided
at its free end with the member F which is pivotally
connected at G with said tube E. This member F is
adapted to receive the customary tube for connection
with the customary feeding arm which leads either
30 to an amplifying horn or to other devices for convey-
ing the sound to the hearer. A screw G/ is connected
with said member G and serves to limit its swinging
movement.
So far I have described the reproducer as usually
35 constructed. With devices of this kind as the repro-
ducer is fed by the usual feed screw the tendency of
the reproducer is to drag behind so that the needle or
stylus engages one side of the grooves thus producing
a grating noise. To overcome this difficulty I intro-
40 duce the spring H (Figs. 2 and 3) one end of which en-
gages a shoulder E' of the tube E and the other end of
wliich abuts against a flange F' of the member F. This
spring is so arranged that it will have a tendency to
press the reproducer in the direction in which said re-
producer travels, thus overcoming the drag thereof 45
and maintaining the stylus in the center of the grooves.
The reproduction of the matter on the record is thus
very clear and free from foreign noises or gratings.
In the form of my invention shown in Fig. 1 I have
used a coil spring N one end of which is secured to a 50
hook e on the member E and the other end of which
is fastened to the screw G'. This spring is located on
the outside of the reproducer and acts in the same way
as the spring H.
Various modifications may be ma.de without depart- 55
ing from the nature of my invention as defined in the
claims.
I claim:
1. A reproducer comprising a plurality of connected sec-
tions, one of which carries the stylus and the other of 60
which is adapted for connection with the feed mechanism,
and means for normally flexing the connection between the
stylus-carrying section relatively to the other section so
that the stylus-carrying section is normally pressed in the
direction of its reproducing movement independently of 65
the other section.
2. A reproducer comprising a plurality of connected sec-
tions, one of which carries the stylus and the other of
which is adapted for connection with the feed mechanism,
and a spring for normally flexing the connection between 70
the stylus-carrying section relatively to the other section
so that the stylus-carrying section is normally pressed in
the direction of its reproducing movement independently
of the other section.
3. A reproducer comprising a plurality of sections one 75
of which carries the stylus and the other of which is
adapted for connection with the feed mechanism and
which is pivotally connected with the stylus-carrying sec-
tion about an axis transverse to the path in which the re-
producer travels, and means for flexing the connection be- 80
tween the sections relatively to each other so that the
stylus-carrying section is normally pressed in the direction
of its reproducing movement independently of the other
section.
In testimony whereof, I have hereunto signed my name 85
in the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
WILLIAM SCHUBERT.
Witnesses :
W.m. J. Frost,
J. B. Purber.
\
No, 865,574. PATENTED SEPT, 10, 1907.
J. F. DIRZUWEIT.
RECORDING AND REPRODUCING SOUNDS.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 29, 1907.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
Fwwm
AA/V
*3j.
WITNESSES:
eft J. OajlAw <m)
J^M^Mrzunvit
Inventor,
By
Attorneys
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. ». C.
No. 865,574. PATENTED SEPT. 10, 1907.
J. F. DIRZUWEIT.
RECORDING AND REPRODUCING SOUNDS.
APPLICATION PILED APE. 29, 1907.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
JET
[67 33
mj ;* 4 w
^M
'39 ft
35
■Arssjj.rj7SSf/s/sss/ss/rss////sM,/s/sAr/SArss/^^^
J9
66
-I
WITNESSES:
eft / (SAjl^UUIk
Bv
'S
IN FEN TOR.
Attorneys
THE morris PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C
No. 865,574. PATENTED SEPT. 10, 1907.
J. F. DIRZUWEIT.
RECORDING AND REPRODUCING SOUNDS.
APPLICATION FILED APR. 29, 1907.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
WITNESSES:
CT*^,
Jnfentor.
By
°? J. (26~&jfoKcuJ A TTORNE YS
the Nomms peters Co.. Washington, d. c.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOHN F. DIRZUWEIT, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
RECORDING AND REPRODUCING SOUNDS.
No. 865,574.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 29, 1907. Serial No, 370,898.
Patented Sept. 10, 1907.
To all whom, it may concern:
Be it known that I, John F. Dirzuwbit, a citizen
of the United Slates, residing at Philadelphia, in the
county of Philadelphia and State of Pennsylvania,
5 have invented a new and useful Improvement in Re-
cording and Reproducing Sounds, of which the follow-
ing is a specification.
This invention has reference to improvements in
recording and reproducing vocal and other sounds.
10 The object of the invention is to produce a photo-
graphic record of sounds by electro-actinic means and
to reproduce the recorded sounds by luminous rays
varied in intensity in accordance with a photographic
record of the sounds and producing by these variations
15 in luminosity electric vibrations which, in turn, set
up air vibrations corresponding to the recorded sounds.
The recording of the sounds is performed photograph-
ically by first setting up electric vibrations in a suit-
able charged circuit and then transforming these elec-
20 trie vibrations into light vibrations, the intensity of
which are varied in accordance with the original
sounds. These variable light vibrations are transmit-
ted to a movable sensitive film in such manner as to
impinge thereon so as to produce, when the film is
25 properly developed, a line the light transmitting prop-
erties of which vary in proportion to the variations of
the original sound waves. Structurally considered,
this portion of the invention comprises a sensitive mi-
crophonic transmitter suited to strong currents. In-
30 eluded in the microphonic circuit is the coarse wire
winding of a suitable transformer and the secondary
circuit of this transformer is included in a circuit
across which is branched a condenser and in which is
included a spark gap and the primary coil of a high
35 tension transformer. The secondary coil of the high
tension transformer is closed through a Tesla tube
which, when active, radiates highly actinic rays.
These rays are gathered by a suitable lens and pro-
jected as a bundle of small area upon a photo-sensitive
40 film otherwise protected against actinic light. With
such a structure electric vibrations are set up by the
sounds uttered against or otherwise reaching the mi-
crophonic transmitter and these electric vibrations are
ultimately transformed into light radiations from the
45 Tesla tube, which light radiations vary in accordance
with the sound waves impinging against the micro-
phone. Consequently, the photo-sensitive film is af-
fected by the light in direct proportion to the intensity
thereof and when the film, after being subjected to the
50 light, is developed there appears thereon a light-ob-
structing line varying in light-obstructing properties in
accordance with the original sounds acting on the mi-
crophone.
The invention comprises in conjunction with the re-
55 cording of sounds, as set forth the reproduction of
sounds from such a photographic record, and this re-
production is made by passing a light-beam through,
the photographic record and thereby obstructing the
light-beam to an extent depending upon the density
of said record and its light-obstructing properties. 60
This light-beam of varying intensity is caused to act
upon a suitable selenium cell which, in turn, controls
a charged electric circuit including a telephonic re-
ceiver. This latter is located in a suitable resonator
or sound-amplifier by which the sound waves produced 65
by the receiving diaphragm are amplified to a suffi-
cient extent to become distinctly audible to a consid-
erable distance.
The invention therefore consists, first, in the record-
ing of sounds photographically by the varying inten- 70
sity of a source of light in accordance with sound waves,
and then in reproducing such record by varying the
light coming from a constant source of light by the in-
terposition of the record in the beam of light, and con-
verting the light variations into sounds through the 75
intermediary of an electric circuit the resistance of
which is varied by the variable light-beam all as set
forth in the claims.
The invention will be fully understood from the
following detailed description taken in connection 80
with the accompanying drawings forming part of this
specification, in which, —
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section of so much of a re-
cording machine constructed in accordance with my
invention as is necessary for the understanding thereof, 85
with electric circuits coacting therewith shown dia-
grammatically; Fig. 2 is a central section, with parts
in elevation, taken through a reproducing machine
constructed in accordance with my invention; and
Fig. 3 is a section through the structure of Fig. 2, at 90
right angles to the section shown in Fig. 2 and also
having parts shown in elevation.
Referring to the drawings, and more particularly to
Fig. 1, there is shown a suitable casing 1 having an up-
per compartment 2 and a lower compartment 3 divided 95
by a horizontal partition 4. In the lower compart-
ment there is suitably mounted a rotatable table or
tablet-carrier 5 upon the surface of which there is se-
cured a photo-sensitive film 6. In the particular in-
stance shown in the drawing this photographic film 6 is 100
in the form of a disk and the carrier 5 is also a disk, and
preferably the carrier disk is made of glass, though it is
possible to make it of some other transparent material.
Obviously, the photographic film may be made in the
form of a long web mounted upon suitable carriers in- 105
stead of being in the form of a disk, but as the produc-
tion of a photographic record of sounds upon a disk or
upon a strip, in itself, forms no part of the present in-
vention, it is not deemed necessary to show the strip in
the drawings 110
865,574
It will, of course, be understood that the sensitive
film 6 is protected within the compartment 3 against
the action of actinic light except as hereinafter de-
scribed. The partition 4 is provided with an opening
5 7 radially disposed with relation to the disk 5, and cov-
ering this opening is a box or shell 8 arranged to
slide along the opening 7 in a radial path with relation
to the disk 5 by means which will be hereinafter de-
scribed with reference to Figs. 2 and 3. The lower end
10 of the box 8 is closed by a diaphragm 9 having a small
central perforation 10, shown greatly exaggerated in
the figure. Within the box 8, above the diaphragm,
is a suitable lens 11 and above the lens 11 is a Tesla
tube 12.
15 Suitably located with reference to the parts just de-
scribed is a microphonic transmitter 13 which should
possess great sensitiveness and be adapted to heavy
currents. This microphonic transmitter 13 is included
in the usual circuit 14 which also includes a battery 15
20 and the coarse wire coil 16 of a transformer 17. These
parts may all be of the usual type used in telephonic
transmission and need no particular description. The
secondary coil 18 of the transformer 17 is included in
another circuit 19, which circuit is bridged by a con-
25 denser 20 of suitable capacity. Beyond the condenser
the circuit 19 includes a spark gap 21 and the primary
coil 22 of a high-tension transformer 23. The secondary
coil 24 of the transformer 23 is included in a circuit 25,
the terminals of which are connected to the terminals
30 of the Tesla tube 12, and for convenience the circuit 25
may include binding posts 26 fast on the casing 1 and a
suitable switch 27, also carried by the casing 1. By
this latter means the tube 12 may be thrown into and
out of action at will and the binding posts 26 permit the
35 location of the major portion of the circuits exterior to
the casing 1.
Now, let it be assumed that the switch 27 is closed
and that the table 5 with the film 6 is being steadily ro-
tated by any suitable source of power such as a spring
40 motor, and that the box 8 is being fed radially across
the film 6 from the outer edge thereof toward the cen-
ter. Under these conditions let it be supposed that
sounds are uttered or otherwise produced in front of the
microphone 13. Variations of current corresponding
45 to the sound vibrations are immediately set up in the
microphone circuit. These variations of current are,
as is well understood, transformed into alternating cur-
rents in the circuit 19 which includes the secondary
circuit 18 of the microphonic transformer 17. The al-
50 ternate charging and discharging of the condenser 20
produces curreuts which pass the spark gap and thus
set up in this condenser circuit electrical oscillations of
great rapidity. This causes in the circuit 25 electrical
oscillations of very high tension and great rapidity
55 which are manifest in the tube 12 in the form of light,
and this particular form of light has great actinic power.
The rays emanating from the tube 12 are gathered by
the lens 11 and transmitted to the diaphragm 10 in the
form of a minute bundle of great intensity where it im-
60 pinges upon the film 6. No attempt has been made in
the drawing to show the proper distances of the tube,
lens, diaphragm and film, but it will be understood that
in practice these parts are all properly proportioned for
the purpose. Now, the actinic rays emanating from
65 the tube 12 are not of constant power but vary in ac-
cordance with the sounds acting on the microphone 13,
and, therefore, these rays act upon the film 6 in propor-
tion to their intensity. The result is that when the
film 6 is developed the resultant line which, as will be
understood, is in the form of a spiral upon said film, is 70
made of deposited silver varying in density in accord-
ance with the actinic strength of the light which has
reached it. It may be noted that in accordance with
this invention the initial light source is varied in ac-.
cordan.ce with the original sound waves. 75
When the sensitive film has been properly exposed
to the light it is removed from the casing 1 under the
proper non-actinic light conditions and either removed
from the support 5, if the latter be opaque, or the sup-
port and film both are removed from the machine if the 80
support be of glass or other transparent material, and
the photographic record of the sounds is developed in
the usual manner. The record as produced is in the
form of a spiral light-obstructing line upon a transpar-
ent base or in a transparent film, the light-obstructing 85
powers of said line varying in accordance with the in-
tensity of the light emanations from the tube 12, which
light emanations vary in accordance with the varia-
tions of the original sound waves. To reproduce such a
sound record I have devised the structure shown in Figs. 9 0
2 and 3, to which reference will now be had. In these
figures there is shown a casing 28 similar to the casing 1
of the structure shown in Fig. 1 with, however, certain
modifications of the interior which will appear further
on. Extending upward through the top 29 of the cas- 95
ing there is an upright shaft 30 mounted at its lower end
in suitable bearings 31 fast on the under side of the top
29 of the casing, and this shaft carries a pulley 32. The
upper end of the shaft 30 is constrained to receive and
retain a transparent, disk-shaped table or support 5 100
having thereon a developed photographic film upon
which a sound record has been produced in the manner
already described. The shaft 30, and sound record
thereon, is rotated by means of a cord or strap 33 pass-
ing over pulleys 34 suitably mounted within the casing 105
and thence to a drive pulley 35 under the control of a
suitable spring motor 36, properly mounted and secured
within the casing 28. The spring of this motor is put
under tension by means of a winding-key 37 exterior
to the casing 28. The motor 36, by suitable gearing, HO
gives rotative movement to a feed-screw 38 upon which
there is mounted a nut 39 which, as is usual in phono-
graphs or similar machines, may be of the half-nut type.
This nut 39 forms part of a carriage 40 which may be
guided upon rods 41. The upper end of the carriage is 115
provided with a socket 42 to receive the end of a bracket
43 held to the carriage by a suitable thumb-nut or set-
screw 44. This bracket 43 extends upward from the
socket 42 and then is bent horizontally and passed
through a slot 45 in one side of the casing 28 below the 120
top 29 thereof and then this bracket, outside of the cas-
ing, is bent upwardly, as shown. To the upper end of
the bracket 43 there is secured an arm 46 by means of a
suitable coupling 47. This arm 46 is suitably bent so
as to first rise from the coupling 47 and then extend 125
horizontally across the top of the machine, and is con-
nected at its other end, remote from the coupling 47, to
a shell 48, shown as bell-shaped but which may be oth-
erwise shaped if so desired. The base of this shell
rests upon a platform 49 elevated by suitable end and 130
865,574
side supports 50 to a suitable distance above the top 29
of the c&sing to form a chamber in which is inclosed the
sound record support 5 with iis film surface (i. For
convenience the support 5, which in this particular in-
5 stance is of glass or other transparent medium, with the
photographic liliu 0 thereon, will hereinafter be re-
ferred lo simply as the sound record tablet.
Since, as will hereinafter appear, the sound record
tablet should be protected from light except that which
10 is transmitted to it in a manner to be described, the
platform 49 may be of opaque material and be provided
with a radial opening along which the shell 48 is made
to travel in a straight line which is radial with reference
to the sound record tablet 5 and which movement of the
15 shell 48 is caused by the feeding of the bracket 43 and
its arm 46 by the nut 39 and feed-screw 38, all as will be
readily understood.
While not so shown in the drawings, it will be under-
stood that a suitable sliding cover or protection will be
20 provided to prevent the entrance of light through the
slot in the platform 49 except where the shell 48 cov-
ers it .
Within the shell 48 there is located a light source 51
which may be, as shown, an incandescent electric
25 lamp. In order to provide current for this lamp, there
may be located in the bottom portion of the casing 28
under a partition 52 supporting the driving mechan-
ism a number of cells 53 of battery which may for con-
venience be of the type known as dry batteries. Con-
30 ductors 54 leading from the batteries may be carried to
the bracket 43, and entering the same, be carried
through said bracket, which may be made hollow for
the purpose, and through the arm 46 and thereby ulti-
mately reach the lamp 51. For the purposes of this
35 portion of the invention the source of light should be
constant, and for all practical purposes a lamp as de-
scribed, fed from batteries in the manner set forth, will
be. sufficient.
The lamp 51 is located at the upper end of the opaque
40 shell 48 and below this lamp there is located a suitable
lens 55 with a perforated diaphragm 56 below the same
and having its opening coincident with the slot through
the platform 49. The parts are so proportioned that the
light from the lamp is gathered by the lens and strikes
4 5 through the tablet 5 and upon a selenium cell 57 se-
cured in the top 29 of the casing 28. This cell 57 is suf-
ficiently long and so located as to extend radially be-
neath the tablet for a distance sufficient to embrace the
radial extent of the longest record which may be pro-
50 duced upon the record tablet. One terminal of this
cell 57 is connected by a conductor 58 to one pole of a
suitable battery 59, the other pole of which is connected
by a conductor 60 to one terminal of the coarse wire
coil of an inductorian 61. The other terminal of the
55 coarse wire coil of the inductorian 61 is connected by a
conductor 62 to the other end of the selenium cell 57.
The fine wire coil of the inductorian 61 is connected by
conductors 63 to the coil of a telephonic receiver 64,
whch may be of any suitable type and is simply indi-
60 cated in the drawings. This telephonic receiver 64 is
located opposite the small end 65 of an amplifying horn
66. which may be suitably supported upon the casing
lint which mounting is not shown in the drawings for
want of room.
65 With a structure such as has been described with ref-
erence to Figs. 2 and 3, the operation of reproducing a
sound record made by the apparatus set forth with ref-
erence to Fig. 1 is as follows: The motor is set in opera-
tion after the tablet 5 has been placed in position,
which latter act nun' lie performed by making the por-
tion of the structure covering the tablet removable.
By coupling the battery 53 to the lamp 51 by a suitable
switch, not shown, or otherwise, the lamp is made to
glow steadily. A light beam is directed by the lens 55
through the tablet 5 and on to the selenium cell 57.
Now, as is well known, the resistance of selenium is
varied by the effect of light directed against it. By
causing the light-beam to be intercepted by the photo-
graphic record upon the tablet 5, the amount of light
reaching the selenium cell is varied in direct proportion
to the density of the photographic sound record in the
iilin 6 of the tablet 5. Consequently, the current flow-
ing through the coarse wire coil of the inductorian 61
is varied in accordance with the variations in the light-
beam transmitted through the record tablet 5. The
result is that the telephonic receiver 64 is likewise af-
fected by the varying imptdses reaching it and the dia-
phragm of this receiver imparts to the surrounding air
vibrations in accordance and commensurate with the
rate and amplitude of vibration of the diaphragm of
the telephonic receiver. Since these vibrations are in
accordance with the sounds originally produced in
front of the microphonic transmitter 13, there are, there-
fore, sounds produced by the action of the receiver
diaphragm upon the air and these sounds pass through
the amplifying horn 66 and are emitted therefrom in
intensified form clearly audible for a distance from the
amplifier 66 corresponding to the loudness of the pro-
duced sounds.
I claim: —
1. The method of recording and reproducing sounds
consisting in forming a photographic record of the sounds
by directing actinic rays emanating from a source thereof
upon a photo-sensitive surface, and varying the amount
of said emanations by and in accordance with the sound
waves, then developing the photo-sensitive surface, then
interposing the sound record so produced in the path of a
constant beam of light, setting up in an electric circuit
electric variations by and in accordance with the varia-
tions of the transmitted light-beam, and producing by said
electric variations air vibrations corresponding to the
original sounds.
2. The method of recording and reproducing sounds
consisting in setting up in an electric circuit electric varia-
tions corresponding to the initial sound waves, producing
thereby corresponding actinic radiations, subjecting a
photo-sensitive surface to said actinic radiations, then de-
veloping said photo-sensitive surface to produce a sound
record, then producing variations in a beam of light of con-
stant intensity by passing the same through said sound
record, then setting up in an electric circuit electric varia-
tions by and in accordance with the variations in intensity
of the transmitted beam of light, and producing by said
including the aforesaid source of actinic rays and in in-
ductive relation to the second circuit.
3. The method of recording sounds consisting in form-
ing a photographic record of the sounds by directing actinic
rays emanating from a source thereof upon a photo-sensi-
tive surface and varying the amount of said emanations
by and in accordance with the sound waves.
4. The method of recording sounds consisting in setting
up in a charged electric circuit variations corresponding
to the sound waves, producing actinic radiations by and
in accordance with said electric variations, and directing
said actinic radiations upon a photo-sensitive surface.
5. The method of recording sounds consisting in pro-
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
135
865,574
ducing in a charged electric circuit current variations
corresponding to the sound waves, producing by said cur-
rent variations groups of electric pulsations corresponding
in frequency and duration to the original sound waves,
5 producing by said groups of electric pulsations actinic
rays varying in duration and intensity in accordance with
the original sound waves, and subjecting a photo-sensitive
surface to said actinic rays.
6. A sound recording apparatus comprising a carrier for
10 a photo-sensitive surface, a source of actinic rays in op-
erative relation to said photo-sensitive surface, an electric
circuit including said source of rays, means for charging
said circuit, and means for producing variations of the
electric current in said circuit by and in accordance with
15 sound waves.
7. A sound recording apparatus comprising a carrier for
a photo-sensitive surface, a source of actinic rays in op-
erative relation to said photo-sensitive surface, a charged
electric circuit, a microphonic transmitter .included there-
20 in, another electric circuit in inductive relation to the
first-named circuit and including a spark gap, a condenser
bridged across the second circuit, and a tertiary circuit
including the aforesaid source of actinic rays and in in-
ductive relation to the sound circuit.
8. A sound recording apparatus comprising a photo-
sensitive surface and a source of actinic rays movable rela-
tive one to the other, and means for exciting said source
of actinic rays by and in accordance with sound waves.
9. A recording apparatus comprising a suitable carrier
for a photo-sensitive surface, a Tesla tube movable with
relation to the photo-sensitive surface, means connected
with said Tesla tube for producing actinic emanations
therefrom by and in accordance with sound waves, and
means for directing said emanations progressively along
said photo-sensitive surface.
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my own, I
have hereto affixed my signature in the presence of two
witnesses.
JOHN P. DIRZUWBIT.
Witnesses :
FltED. P. LlESEE,
OSIAS DKESNET.
25
30
No, 865,716. PATENTED SEPT. 10, 1907.
T. H. MACDONALD & F. L. CAPPS.
SIEVE FOR USE IN MAKING DISK SOUND RECORDS.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 7, 1907.
>\Xv\/i&yz/>,
(WViA
Flg.Z
^^LutA^-^^v^uu^^^^^Art^o shawms
'THE NOKRIS PETERS CO.. WtSHlNCTOH,
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS H. MACDONALD AND FRANK L. CAPPS, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNORS
TO AMERICAN GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORA-
TION OF WEST VIRGINIA.
SIEVE FOR USE IN MAKING DISK SOUND-RECORDS.
l"Jo. 865,716.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed January 7, 1907. Serial No. 351,230.
Patented Sept. 10, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that Thomas H. Macdonald and Frank
L. Capps, citizens of the United States of America,
and residents of Bridgeport, Fairfield county, Connecti-
5 cut, have invented a new and useful Improvement in
Sieves for Use in Making Disk Sound-Records, which
improvement is fully set forth in the following specifi-
cation.
Our invention relates to the production of disk
10 sound-records, particularly records made in accordance
with the Hoyt and Gavin patents of Jan. 2, 1906, No.
808,842, No. 808,843, and No. 809,263. According to
these patents, the body or main portion of the disk
which carries the sound-record is composed of a com-
15 paratively cheap material, while the surface thereof
containing the impressions or other irregularities cor-
responding to the sound-waves is composed of a more
expensive material which is peculiarly adapted to the
purpose. The former material (or equivalents there-
20 for) will hereinafter be designated as "ordinary stock"
or simply "stock ", while the more expensive material
intended for the surface of the record will be designated
as "glaze". It is desirable, of course, to use as little
of the glaze as possible, and at the same time to insure
25 the presence of a sufficient amount; and it is also de-
sirable that this glaze be uniformly distributed through-
out the surface of the record.
The present invention consists of a machine or appa-
ratus for insuring these two purposes, viz.: The em-
30 ployment of just the right amount of glaze, no more
and no less, and the uniform distribution of the glaze.
The invention will be best understood by reference
to the accompanying drawings in which
Figure 1 is a vertical section through our apparatus ;
35 and Fig. 2 is a plan view of the same with the sta-
tionary casing removed.
Upon a table or flat surface A are located two sup-
ports B upon which rests our apparatus, so that the
matrix C may be inserted beneath the apparatus.
40 D represents a metal casing, which may be described
as an inverted pan having a central orifice surrounded
by an upturned flange E.
F is a stationary spacing-sleeve secured firmly in the
central opening, as by screws G that pass through
45 flange E.
H is a shaft having a crank-arm at the top, and jour-
naled in the sleeve F. Below the sleeve F, the shaft
H is flattened so as to fit into a corresponding central
aperture in the plate or disk I; while the extreme end
50 of shaft H is screw-threaded. The disk I bears against
I he lower face of sleeve F, and is clamped in place by
the nut J that is screwed on the end of shaft H. When
shaft H is revolved by means of its crank handle, the
disk I is caused to revolve.
A portion of the disk I (preferably a radial segment 55
thereof) is cut away, and a grating or wire mesh K se-
cured in its place. This will be called the lower grat-
ing. Fast near the lower end of sleeve F is a star wheel
L having concave seats M. On each side, of the grating
K a shouldered stud N rises from near the circuinfer- 60
ence of disk I, so as to furnish bearings for the recipro-
cating sieve O, whose inner end is supported in a man-
ner that will presently be described.
The sieve O is preferably of the same shape as the
cut-away portion of disk I, is located above it, and is 65
provided with a grating or mesh P that will be referred
to as the upper grating. The bottom of sieve O is ex-
tended past the center of disk I, and contains a slot Q
so as to furnish clearance for the sleeve F.
R is a stud rising from the disk I, upon which is piv- 70
oted the elbow lever S. Depending from one member
of lever S is carried a roller T adapted to engage the
seats M of star- wheel L ; while the other member of the
lever is pivotally connected at U to the extension of
sieve O. A spring V, whose outer end is secured to a 75
stud W on the disk I, serves to draw the sieve O radially
inward; while each tooth of star-wheel L (by moving
roller T radially outward) serves to force sieve O ra-
dially outward. Consequently, rotation of disk I, by
means of the crank handle, produces not only a revo- 80
lution of the sieve O upon the axis H, but also gives it
a reciprocating movement, radially inward and out-
ward.
A covered aperture X will be provided in the sta-
tionary casing D, conforming in size and shape to the 85
sieve O, by which the latter may be filled for each
operation. A shield or cover Y for the operating
parts L — S — T — , etc., may likewise be provided, so
as to protect them from the powdered composition
which the apparatus is to distribute. 90
The operation of our apparatus is obvious. A ma-
trix C (which may be heated beforehand) is inserted
face upwards in the space between the supports B,
just beneath our apparatus. A steel disk Z is placed
over the center of the matrix, being centered thereon 95
by the stud c' thereof which enters a central aperture
in disk Z. The purpose of this is to prevent any of
the glaze from being deposited upon the center of the
matrix, where no record-lines are to be produced.
The sieve O is brought underneath the aperture X, 100
and filled with the proper amount of powdered glaze.
The factory manager or expert will have determined
how much glaze is to be used for a record of a given
size, and the sieve O is loaded accordingly. The
865,716
crank of shaft H is then revolved, whereupon the
sieve 0 is caused to reciprocate and discharge its con-
tents in a fairly uniform manner, while at the same
time the sieve and the lower grating are carried
5 around the entire circle. On account of the two
gratings, the distribution of the powdered glaze over
the surface of the matrix C is for all practical pur-
poses absolutely uniform. The heat of the matrix
causes the powdered glaze to adhere somewhat to its
10 surface. Thereafter, though the subsequent steps
form no part of our present invention, the steel disk Z
may be removed, and a lump of ordinary stock placed
upon the matrix C (though the deposit of glaze will
remain interposed between the ordinary stock and
15 the matrix C) and pressure applied in the usual man-
ner, which will spread out the ordinary stock and at
the same time compress it against the glazing already
deposited and produce the finished record.
Of course, instead of taking ordinary stock, an old
20 disk record may be warmed up and placed upon the
matrix and re-pressed, with the same results; or a
disk of some other material (cardboard, celluloid, etc.)
may be employed, the heat and pressure serving to
bind it firmly to the glazing already deposited by our
25 apparatus, and simultaneously produce a finished
sound-record. Moreover, instead of placing a matrix
C beneath the apparatus, we may use an old record
(or a disk of any other suitable material), deposit the
glazing thereon by our apparatus, and then place a
30 matrix face downwards on the glazing and subject to
heat and pressure in the usual manner.
While we have described our invention with some
particularity, we have done so only for the sake of
clearness, since changes may be made in the construc-
35 tion and arrangement of parts, and certain features of
our invention used to the exclusion of others. The
spirit of our invention consists in causing the pow-
dered glaze to be uniformly distributed over the sur-
face to be treated by means of a jogging or shaking
40 motion which progresses over the entire surface; and
preferably we employ two gratings; if, for instance,
the lower grating should be omitted, we have found
that the glazing is liable to be deposited in a series
of "windrows", as it were. Nevertheless, if the lower
45 grating be omitted, or if (instead of the sieve with its
upper grating) a hopper with a slit or restricted aper-
ture at its bottom be employed, in either case the
apparatus will be within the spirit of our invention.
Having thus described our invention, we claim:
50 1- The combination of a lower grating adapted to travel
in a circular path, an upper grating located above the same
and adapted both to travel in the same path and also to
reciprocate radially of said path.
2. The combination of a lower grating adapted to travel
in a circular path, an upper grating located above the 55
same and adapted both to travel in the same path and
also to reciprocate radially of said path, and common
means for actuating both gratings.
3. The combination of a lower grating adapted to travel
in a circular path, an upper grating located above the 60
same and adapted both to travel in the same path and also
to reciprocate radially of said path, and common means
comprising a stationary star-wheel and a lever co-acting
therewith and connected to said upper grating for actuat-
ing both gratings. 65
4. The combination of a stationary sleeve, one or more
projections carried thereby, a revoluble shaft journaled in
said sleeve, a plate secured to said shaft and carrying a
grating, a reciprocating sieve mounted on -said plate
above said grating, and means co-acting with said projec- 70
tions for reciprocating said sieve.
5. The combination of a stationary sleeve, a star-wheel
carried thereby, a revoluble shaft joumaled in said sleeve,
a plate secured to said shaft and having a grating, a re-
ciprocating sieve mounted on said plate above said grating, 75
an elbow-lever on said plate connected to said sieve at one
end and at its other end carrying a device that co-acts
with said star-wheel whereby the sieve is forced outward,
and means for drawing said sieve inward.
6. The combination with a stationary easing and a ver- 80
tical sleeve made fast in the center thereof, a revoluble
shaft journaled in said sleeve and carrying a plate pro-
vided with a grating, a reciprocating sieve mounted on
said plate above said grating, and means actuated by said
shaft for reciprocating said sieve. 85
7. The combination of a stationary casing having an
open bottom and supporting a stationary sleeve in its
center, a revoluble shaft journaled in said sleeve and
carrying a plate provided with a grating, a reciprocating
hopper mounted upon said plate above said grating, an 90
elbow-lever pivoted upon said plate and having one end
secured to the extension of said sieve and carrying on its
other end a roller, a star-wheel fast on said sleeve and
adapted to actuate said roller, and a spring attached to
said sieve and acting in opposition to said star-wheel. 95
8. In a device of the character described, a sieve, means
for carrying said sieve in a circular path, and means for
reciprocating said sieve radially of said path.
9. The combination of a plate having a cut-away por-
tion, reciprocating sieve carried by said plate above J00
said cut-away portion, and common means for rotating
said plate and sieve and for reciprocating the latter.
10. In a device of the character described, a revoluble
plate carrying a grating, a reciprocating hopper carried
by said plate above said grating, and means for revolving 105
the two and reciprocating said hopper.
In testimony whereof we have signed this specification
in the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
THOMAS II. MACDONABD.
FRANK L. GAIT'S,
Witnesses :
John B. McCabe,
A. B. Keodgh.
I
No, 865,769.
PATENTED SEPT. 10, 1907.
L. DEVINEAU.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILEJ) JUNE 18, 190«.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
WITNESSES.
~V
\rk
T^^^^^-^iivX
>-■ r v^
o$.
•^
£
INVENTOR .
*\OV-c«^
\JiAA+iJZjejm^~*
ATTYS.'
THE NORMS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. O. C
No. 865,769.
PATENTED SEPT. 10, 1907.
L. DEVINEAU.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JUNE 18, 1906.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
WITNESSES.
Fm3.
js
)SLyJtt
TNVENTOK.
~fL iSdJC x}<nAXJ tr/AcCC
ATTY5.
THENORRtS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.
No, 865,769.
PATENTED SEPT. 10, 1907.
L. DEVINEAU.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 18, 1906.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
n$
C 7
WITNESSES.
^27
i
INVENTOR.
/Qy i^3*M« ,-<?wr frrtcOf
ATTY5.
TAB NOXR1S PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LOUIS DEVINEAU, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 865,769.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed June 18, 3 906. Serial No, 322,243.
Patented Sept. 10, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Louis Devineau, a citizen of the
United States, residing at Cleveland, in the county of
Cuyahoga and State of Ohio, have invented a certain
5 new and useful Improvement in Phonographs, of which
the following is a full, clear, and exact description,
reference being had to the accompanying drawings.
The object of this invention is to provide mechanism
whereby either disk or cylinder records may be used
10 on the same phonograph.
More particularly the invention comprises an attach-
ment for a cylinder phonograph arranged to properly
rotate disk records.
The invention, including this and other features, is
1 5 hereinafter more fully described and the essential char-
acteristics set out in the claims.
Figure 1 is an end view of a phonograph with my ar-
rangement and with a suitably supported horn; Fig.
2 is a perspective of the driving ring; Fig. 3 is a per-
2 0 spective view of my disk-rotating mechanism detached ;
Fig. 4 is enlarged side view of the supporting pipe for the
reproducer and horn; Fig. 5 is a section showing a valve
in such pipe; Fig. 6 is a section showing a ball joint in
the pipe; Fig. 7 is a vertical section through the disk-
25 carrier and its shaft; Fig. 8 is a bottom plan of the hori-
zontal driving disk.
The same letters of reference designate the same part
in each figure.
Referring to the parts by numerals: 1 represents the
30 box-like base of an ordinary cylinder phonograph on
which is mounted the rotatable mandrel 2, supported
at its free end by the hinged gate 3, and adapted to
carry the ordinary cylinder record.
My mechanism is supported by a standard 4, which
35 has a flange 5, extending under the box 1, and an arm
6, which carries a thumb screw 7, bearing down on the
top of the box. This holds the standard firmly in
place.
Slidingly carried on the standard is a rod 9, at the
40 upper end of which is a head 10. Clamped on this
head by thumb nut 11, is a plate 12, which carries a
sleeve 15. Journaled within this sleeve is a shaft 16,
the upper end of which carries a disk 17, adapted to
support the record 18, while the lower end carries a
45 disk 19, adapted to engage a rubber tire 20, on a ring 21,
surrounding the mandrel and fitting tight thereon. By
this means the disk record 18, is rotated by the mech-
anism which ordinarily rotates the cylinder record on
the mandrel 2. The mandrel is driven by any suitable
50 mechanism within the box as indicated by dotted lines
in Fig. 1, where 22 represents a motor, from which runs
a belt 23, onto a pulley 24, on the shaft of the mandrel.
There are various refinements and adjustments in
the parts referred to which I will now describe. The rod
55 9, is clamped to the standard 4, by a set screw 25, which
allows vertical adjustment as well as swinging on the
rod as an axis. The clamping nut 11, screws onto the
upper end of the rod 9, which extends through a slot 26,
in the plate 12, wherefore this plate may be adjusted in
and out. By this means the disk 19, may be located 60
as desired over the driving ring 20, the speed of rota-
tion of the disk being governed by the distance between
its center and the point of engagement of the ring 20.
The plate 12, is bent near its end into substantially
a U-shape as shown at 27, and the sleeve 15 has a 65
screw thread on its outer side which screws through said
openings in the two portions of the plate 12. This fur-
nishes means for adjusting the sleeve up and down.
Moreover a screw, 29 engaging the two portions of the
plate 12, is adapted to move the free end toward or 70
from the intermediate portion of the plate, thus causing
the thread to bind and taking the place of a jam nut.
The shaft 16, is journaled within the sleeve 15, on
a ball bearing provided by a cup 31, formed at the
lower end of the shaft, and a nut 32, screw threaded on 75
the shaft above the sleeve. Sets of balls 33 and 34, roll
between the cup 31, and the lower end of the sleeve
15, and between the upper end of the sleeve and the
nut 32 respectively. The nut 32, is jammed by having
a portion 36, which is separated by a kerf from the rest 80
of the nut and may be sprung by a nut 38, screwing
through the pdrtion 36, into the body of the nut. The
disk 17, which supports the record has a hub 39, in the
lower face of which is a recess to receive the head of the
screw 38, thus compelling the disk to rotate with the 85
shaft. A piece of felt or other suitable material 40, is
secured to the upper face of the disk 17, and the record
18 rests thereon and is driven by friction.
In order to obtain the proper friction between the
driving ring 20, and the disk 19, I give that disk a 90
spring action by making it of thin metal and cutting
out sector-shaped openings 42, to leave a series of
spokes 43, carrying the disk. This allows the disk
to bear on the ring with sufficient friction, the barrel
15, being screwed downwardly sufficiently to cause the 95
disk 19, to be bent upward slightly on the side engag-
ing the ring 20. The disk 19, is secured by a screw
45, screwing through it and through a washer 46, into
the end of the shaft 16. An annular recess formed
on this washer provides means for clamping the disk 100
47, between the washer and the end of the shaft. This
disk 47, forms a guard over the friction drive prevent-
ing anything accidentally passing between the driving
members or dropping' into the openings 42.
The reproducing mechanism which cooperates with 105
the disk is also carried by the plate 12. At its outer
end this plate has an upturned portion 50, which is
then turned horizontally and downward as at 51. A
tube 52, fits in this horizontal web and is clamped by a
set screw 53, in the downward flange 51. This tube 110
may thus be adjusted up and down. Loosely mounted
in the tube is a rod 53, rigid with which are arms 54 and
865,769
55, the outer ends of which are connected by screws
with lugs on the tube 56, which is formed as an elbow,
as shown. At the lower end of this tube is a portion
57, which is a segment of a sphere, and in this segment
5 is pivoted the partially spherical end 58 of the neck 59
of the sound box. The sound box has a cylindrical
extension 60, from this neck which carries the dia-
phragm 61, with which cooperates the reproducing
needle 62. By reason of the pivot between the heads
10 57 and 58, this reproducing needle can play up and
down, while the journaling of the rod 53 in the tube 52
allows the reproducer to swing laterally under the in-
fluence of the spiral groove on the record disk.
On the upper end of the elbow 56 is formed a par-
15 tially spherical recess 65, in which seats the lower
partially spherical head 66 of an upper elbow 67.
This head is freely held in place by the nut 68, but is
allowed movement to make an easy connection be-
tween the horn and the elbow 56. The horn, desig-
20 nated 70, is supported in any suitable manner, as in-
dicated by the stand 71, which is selected as illus-
trative. On the inner end of the horn is a rubber sec-
tion 73, which connects the horn with the upper end of
the elbow 67.
25 To regulate the degree of sound, I provide a valve
in the passageway from the sound box to the horn.
This valve, as shown in the drawing, consists of a plug
75, seating in the elbow 67, and carrying a knurled
head 76, by which it may be turned, there being a
3 3 large cylindrical passageway through the plug so that
it may leave the bore of the elbow 67, unobstructed, or
reduce it as desired. The friction of the plug with
the walls of the tube is sufficient to hold the plug in
place.
35 To produce proper sound it is necessary not only
that the disk be rotated and the reproducer supported
in engagement therewith, but that such rotation be
easy, and without jerk or irregularity. The repro-
ducer needle must rest lightly and easily thereon and
40 there must be no scratching or scraping of any kind.
These results are obtained by the various adjustments
and refinements in my mechanism as above explained.
Moreover my adjustments allow my mechanism to be
attached to cylindrical phonographs of various sizes.
45 There are a large number of such phonographs in exist-
ence and frequently it is desired to reproduce a record
which does not exist in the cylinder form but does in
the disk form. My mechanism enables the disk rec-
ords to be operated by the cylinder phonograph when-
ever desired. At the same time it may be instantly
removed to allow cylinder records to be used.
Having thus described my invention, I claim: —
1. The combination with the mandrel of a cylinder
phonograph of a friction ring adapted to be carried there-
55 by, a horizontal disk adapted to support the disk record,
a vertical shaft carrying said disk, a second disk at the
lower end of said shaft adapted to engage said ring, and a
bearing for said shaft between the two disks.
2. In a driving mechanism for disk records, the combina-
60 tion of a horizontal disk, a vertical shaft connected there-
with, a spring disk at the lower end of such shaft, and a
rotatable driving member adapted to engage the lower disk.
3. In a driving mechanism for disk records, the combina-
tion of a horizontal record support, a vertical shaft con-
65 nected therewith, a disk at the lower end of such shaft, a
50
bearing for the shaft between the record support and disk,
a rotatable driving member adapted to engage the lower
disk, and a cylinder phonograph having means engaging
the under side of said disk.
4. The combination of a suitable support, of a bracket 70
adjustably carried thereby, a barrel screw-threaded in said
bracket, a shaft journaled in said barrel, a disk supported
on the upper end of said shaft, a driving disk on the lower
end of said shaft, and a cooperative driving member
adapted to engage such lower disk. 75
5. The combination with a suitable support adapted to
be clamped to a phonograph box, a bracket adjustably
carried by the support, a barrel adjustable within the
bracket, a shaft journaled in the barrel, a disk on the
upper end of the shaft, a disk on the lower end of the 80
shaft, a phonograph and a friction member rotatable by
the phonograph and engaging the disk on the lower end of
the shaft.
0. The combination with a suitable support adapted to
be clamped to a phonograph box, a bracket adjustably car- 85
ried by the support, a barrel adjustable within the bracket,
a shaft, journaled on ball bearings in the barrel, a disk
on the upper end of the shaft, a disk on the lower end of
the shaft, a phonograph mandrel, and a friction ring
adapted to tit on said mandrel and engage the disk on the 90
lower end of the shaft.
7. The combination with a bracket, a rod adjustably
carried thereby, a plate supported by said rod and ad-
justed laterally thereon, a barrel carried by said plate, a
shaft located in said barrel and having a ball bearing 95
connection therewith, and means for supporting a record
carried by said shaft.
8. The combinat.on with a suitable support adapted to
be clamped to a phonograph box. of a bracket adjustably
carried by said support, a barrel adjustable within the 100
bracket, a shaft journaled in the barrel, a record support
carried by said shaft above -the barrel, and means con-
nected with said shaft below the barrel for rotating it.
'.). The combination of a suitable support vertically ad-
justable, a horizontally adjustable plate carried by said 105
support, a shaft carr.ed by said plate, a record support
adapted to be driven by said shaft, means for driving
said shaft, a tube, a reproducer carried thereby for co-
operating with the record, a vertically adjustable sup-
port for said tube, said support being carried by said plate. 110
10. The combination with a cylinder phonograph of a
standard adapted to be clamped to the box of the phono-
graph, a bracket adjustably carried by the standard, a
reproducer, an adjustable swivel support therefor carried
by the bracket, a rotatable shaft carried by the bracket, H5
and means at the upper end of said shaft adapted to carry
a record cooperating with the reproducer.
11. The combination, witli a cylinder phonograph having
a mandrel, of a standard adapted to be clamped to the box
of the phonograph, a bracket adjustably carried by the
standard, a reproducer; an adjustable swiveled support
therefor carried by the bracket, a rotatable shaft carried
by the bracket, a disk at the upper end of said shaft
adapted to carry the record cooperating with the repro-
ducer, a disk at the lower end of the shaft, and a friction 125
ring on the mandrel and engaging the last mentioned disk.
12. The combination, with a cylinder-phonograph hav-
ing a mandrel, of a standard adapted to be clamped to the
box of the phonograph, a vertical rod adjustably mounted
in said standard, a cross plate carried by said rod, a 130
sound tube and reproducer, an adjustable swiveled support
therefor carried by the cross plate, an adjustable barrel
carried by the cross plate, a shaft in said barrel, a disk
at the upper end of said shaft adapted to carry the
record cooperating with the reproducer, a disk at the 135
lower end of said shaft, and a friction ring adapted to tit
on the mandrel and engage the last mentioned disk.
In testimony whereof, I hereunto affix my signature in
the presence of two witnesses.
LOUIS DEYTNEAU.
Witnesses :
Albert H. Bates,
Brennan B. West.
i,
No. 866,219. PATENTED SEPT. 17, 1907.
C. A. REINERS.
PHONOGRAPH RECORD MAKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED APE. 17, 1906.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
3-
jFyUf.6.
3 —
J%gr.S.
Attest:
Inventor:
Charles B. Reivers.
Atty-
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C
No, 866,219. PATENTED SEPT. 17, 1907.
C. A. REINERS.
PHONOGRAPH RECORD MAKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED APB. 17, 1906,
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
I%0.3.
iz
<? w
ES^
_. L
L\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\N 5?
^^
2i
24-
Attest:
K^cd.ul^u^Ar
/j^Sf.
Inventor:
Crrrles R. Reu
Att'v.
TMfc NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. O. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHARLES A. REINERS, OP HOBOKEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO EVANS PHONOGRAPH
RECORD COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
PHONOGRAPH-RE CORD-MAKING MACHINE .
No. 866,219.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 17, 1906. Serial No. 312,081.
Patented Sept. 17, 1907.
To all whom it m.ay concern:
Be it known that I, Charles A. Reiners, a citizen
of the United States, residing at Hoboken, New Jersey,
have invented certain new and useful Improvements
5 in Phonograph-Record-Making Machines, of which the
following is a clear, full, and exact description.
The object of this invention is to provide a machine
for producing phonograph records which will insure a
perfect and uniform product, at the expenditure of as
1 0 little labor, time and power as possible.
In carrying out this invention I make use of a frame
or table carrying the usual chamber for holding the
blank within an interiorly configured matrix to which
blank there is first admitted steam or other heated fluid
1 5 under pressure to soften and expand the blank into the
matrix. I prefer to provide means for then exhausting
said steam and for admitting a cooler fluid, preferably
compressed air, to cool and shrink the blank to permit
its removal. This operation is old and well known in
20 the art and needs little explanation.
According to my invention I provide means for de-
termining the length of time to be occupied by the
foregoing cycle of operation, which I prefer to effect by
means of a dash pot cylinder and piston weighted so as
25 to slowly fall by gravity and operatively connected to
the valve means for controlling the said cycle of oper-
ation. I also provide means for proportioning the length
of time in which the various or different fluids have ac-
cess to the matrix chamber during such cycle. I pre-
30 fer to use a cam for this purpose which I prefer to have
operate by a single slide valve stem for connecting said
chamber with steam, exhaust or air pressure. I also
provide means to insure a proper initial position of the
cam and valve before operation of the cam, whatever
35 be the elevation to which the cylinder is raised.
My invention will be pointed out in the claims and
a preferred embodiment thereof at length and specific-
ally pointed out in the following description.
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a side elevation of a ma-
40 chine of my invention; Fig. 2 is a rear elevation of the
same with the cylinder partly in section; Fig. 3 is a cen-
tral longitudinal section of a preferred form of valve;
Fig. 4 is a plan of the same; Fig. 5 is a side elevation
partly in section of the piston; and Fig. 6 is a plan of the
45 same.
As shown in the drawings, the preferred embodiment
of my invention consists of a platform or table 1 mount-
ed on short front legs 2, and upon supporting posts 3 at
the rear which extend for some distance above the ta-
50 ble. The table is provided with an opening a over
which the ordinary matrix 5 and its means for holding a
blank are located, the same being but diagrammatically
shown in these drawings as it forms no novel part of
this invention and may be of any of the well known
55 forms. Beneath the opening a there is secured a valve
casing 7 having a port 6 to the table opening a, a steam
inlet 8 at its forward end, and an air inlet 9 to the rear of
the port 6. An exhaust opening 18 to the casing is
preferably formed opposite the aforesaid port 6 to the
table top. The valve stem 1 2 is provided with a piston 60
slide valve 19 provided with two by-passes 22 and 23
merging into a common port 24 to the exhaust 18 and
the casing 7 is provided with two similar by-passes 20
which at times hereinafter stated will register with the
by-passes of the piston slide valve to open communi- 65
cation from the matrix to the exhaust. The stem 12
carries a second piston 21 near the rear end of the valve
casing, and so disposed with relation to the air inlet
port 9 that air willxbe directed by the left by-pass 20, to
the passage 6 after exhaust is closed upon the inward 70
movement of the valve stem. A bracket 11 having
guide arms extending below and parallel to the stem 12,
serves to guide a vertical arm 13 secured to the end of
the valve stem 12 and to prevent its rotation. This
arm 13 carries a roller 14 at its lower end which is en- 75
gaged by the cam groove 15 of the cam 16 which is
loosely mounted on the cam shaft 25.
The cam groove 15 as shown in Fig. 1 consists of two
extreme portions, one indicated by the space between
dotted lines y and the other indicated by the space 80
within the dotted lines x. In the position shown in
that figure the parts are at rest and ready for operation,
in which case the roller 14 rests between the two parts
y and x resulting in the slide valve occupying a position,
shown in Fig. 3 with the opening 6 open to the exhaust. 85
Upon rotation of the cam by means hereinafter to be
described, roller 14 will be caused to occupy a position
in the part y of the cam groove, when steam will be ad-
mitted to the right-hand by-pass 20, the air and ex-
haust of course being closed at this period. The length 90
of this part y of the cam determines the proportion of
time that steam will be admitted to the matrix during
one revolution of the cam. As the roller 14 leaves the
part y so as to occupy the part z, it moves the slide valve
to the right and either momentarily opens it to the ex- 95
haust or if desired opens it for an appreciable length of
time thereto, and passing on takes up a position within
the part x so that air will be forced into the matrix to
cool the same, the length of said part x determining the
proportion of time during which air or other cooling 100
medium shall be admitted to the matrix.
In order to determine the length of time of one opera-
tion, or the sum of the time of connecting steam, ex-
haust and cooling air, I make use of the following in-
strumentalities. On the cam shaft 25 I mount a 105
sprocket wheel 26 freely rotatable thereon and carrying
on its inner face a pawl 48 bearing against a stop pin 49
and having a spring 50 to hold it thereagainst, while
the cam body 16 is provided with one abutment or
tooth 47, so positioned with relation to the pawl that it 110
866,219
will stop in the position shown in these figures after at
least a complete rotation of the sprocket wheel 26. To
secure rotation of the sprocket wheel in a determined
length of time, I make use of a chain 27 fitting the pe-
5 riphery of the wheel and secured at one end to an eye 28
in the lower end of a vertically movable cylinder 34,
while the other end of the chain 27 I may secure to a
cross head 29 connected by two parallel chains or ropes
30, which pass over overhead pulleys 31, 32 and are
10 secured at 33 to the top of said cylinder 34, so that an
endless chain effect is produced including, in its cir-
cuit the chain 27, the cylinder 34 and the wire rope 30
and cross head 29. The cylinder 34 is preferably
formed with an outlet 40 at its lower end and an outlet
15 41 at its upper end connected by a by-pass 42 having
an adjustable valve 43 herein shown as at the upper
part thereof. A stationary piston 35 secured to a
piston rod 36 passing through a stuffing box 50 at the
top of the cylinder, is firmly bolted in place in the over-
20 head cross beam 4. The piston is formed with a num-
ber of vertical passages through its body, in the upper
face of which are set balls 39 to form a check valve. In
order to raise the cylinder into the position shown, a
windlass 45 is shown having a handle 46 and con-
25 nected by a chain or rope 44 to the cross head 29.
Weights 49 may be provided for the cylinder.
In operation the windlass is wound so as to lower the
cross head 29 and thereby pull the cylinder 34 into the
position shown in Figs. 1 and 2, at the same time rotat-
30 ing the sprocket 26 in a clockwise direction, so that the
pawl 48 will merely pass the tooth 47 without moving
the cam. In raising this cylinder vertically it will be
obvious that the liquid may be readily displaced
through the vertical passages 38 of the plunger and
3 5 thereby prevent any dash pot or retarding action. The
cylinder will be raised as far as desired, which may be
any distance which will have caused the pawl to have
passed the tooth 47. Then the operator, if she has not
already fixed her matrix in position,, will do so before
40 releasing the windlass, but upon releasing the same the
cylinder will start to fall being retarded by the check
valve effect of the piston which makes it necessary for
the liquid as it is displaced from above to below the
piston, to travel through the by-pass 42, the regulating
45 valve 43 of which will have been regulated to deter-
mine the length of time of its fall to its position on top of
the table 1. The distance which the cylinder falls after-
it has once caused the pawl to engage the tooth 47 until
the cylinder is brought up with a dead stop against the
50 table 1, should be equal to the circumference of the
sprocket wheel 25 so that it will be rotated exactly one
revolution. During the first part of the revolution, as
hereinbefore described, the part y of the cam groove 15
will be caused to admit steam to the matrix. Then as
55 the part represented by z takes hold of the roller 14, ex-
haust will be established with the matrix, allowing the
steam to clear out of the same, and as the part x controls
the roller, air or other cooling medium will be admitted
to the matrix, and then the roller brought around to its
60 initial starting position to close both supply ports and
open the matrix to the outside air, when an operation
will have been completed. It will be noted that the
cam proportions the length of time during which the
different media are admitted to the matrix, while the
65 cylinder through its dash pot action determines the
length of time of the cycle of operation which includes
the admission of these different media.
What I claim as my invention is:
1. A machine for producing phonograph records com-
prising a matrix chamber for the reception of the blanks. 70
valved piping to said chamber, a valve, means having con-
nections with a hot fluid supply, with a cooler fluid supply
and with an exhaust, means for controlling the proportion
of time said connections are in communication with the
matrix chamber, in combination with a time determining 75
means adapted to regulate the aggregate length of time
during which aforesaid connections are established.
2. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to 80
regulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank.
3. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to reg- 85
ulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank, said time determining means com-
prising a dash pot cylinder and piston, and connections be-
tween them and the valved means.
4. In combination with the valved means for supplying go
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph re-
producing machines, a time determining means adapted to
regulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank, and means for proportioning the
length of time of application of the individual fluids dur- 95
ing said cycle.
5. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to reg-
ulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro- 100
ducing a finished blank, said time determining means com-
prising a dash pot cylinder and piston, and connections
between them and the valved means, said piston being
stationary and means for moving said dash pot cylinder at
will relatively thereto. 105
6. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to
regulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank, said time determining means com- no
prising a dash pot cylinder and piston, and connections
between them and the valved means, said piston being sta-
tionary and means for moving said dash pot cylinder at
will relatively thereto, a check valve in said cylinder and
a restricted by-pass from end to end of said cylinder. 115
7. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to
regulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank, a common actuating means for 120
said valved means, a movable dash pot cylinder connected
to said actuating means, means for elevating said cylinder,
a stationary piston for the same, whereby the fall of the
cylinder will actuate the valved means.
8. In combination with the valved means for supplying 125
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to
regulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank, a common actuating means for
said valved means, a movable dash pot cylinder connected 130
to said actuating means, means for elevating said cylinder,
a stationary piston for the same, whereby the fall of the
cylinder will actuate the valved means, and means for per-
mitting the raising of the cylinder without actuating the
valved means. 135
9. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to reg-
ulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a 'finished blank, a cam adapted to operate the 140
valved means, a weighted cylinder operatively connected
to said" cam, and a retarding piston therein.
10. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
866,219
a
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to reg-
ulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank, a cam adapted to operate the
valved means, a weighted cylinder operatively connected
5 to said cam, and a retarding piston thereon, means to
raise the piston without operating the cam.
11. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to reg-
10 ulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank, a cam adapted to operate the
valved means, a weighted cylinder operatively connected
to said cam, and a retarding piston therein, said valved
means having a single slide valve stem.
15 12. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variahle fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to reg-
ulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank, a cam adapted to operate the
20 valved means, a weighted cylinder operatively connected
to said cam, and a retarding piston therein, and a by-pass
around said cylinder.
13. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
25 ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to reg-
ulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank, a cam adapted to operate the
valved means, a weighted cylinder operatively connected
to said cam, and a retarding piston therein, a by-pass
30 around said cylinder, and a check valve in the piston.
14. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to reg-
ulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
35 ducing a finished blank, a cam adapted to operate the
valved means, a weighted cylinder operatively connected
to said cam, and a retarding piston therein, a by-pass
around said cylinder, and a regulating cock in said by-
pass.
15. In combination with the valved means for supplying 40
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to reg-
ulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank, a cam adapted to operate the
valved means, a weighted cylinder operatively connected 45
to said cam, and a retarding piston therein, and means
adapted to properly register the cam with the operating
cylinder for its initial position.
1G. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro- 50
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to reg-
ulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank, a cam adapted to operate the
valved means, a weighted cylinder operatively connected
to said cam, and a retarding piston therein, and means 55
adapted to permit the cylinder to overrun its travel with-
out overrunning the initial position of the cam.
17. In combination with the valved means for supplying
variable fluids to the matrix chamber of phonograph repro-
ducing machines, a time determining means adapted to reg- go
ulate the length of time of a cycle of operation for pro-
ducing a finished blank, a cam adapted to operate the
valved means, a weighted cylinder operatively connected
to said cam, and a retarding piston therein, said operative
connection' comprising a sprocket wheel operated by a 65
chain from said cylinder, a pawl carried thereby and a
single tooth carried by the cam whereby the correct ini-
tial position' of the cam is obtained by the revolution of
the wheel.
Signed at New York city this 6th day of April 190G. 70
CHARLES A. REINERS.
Witnesses :
Emerson R. Newell,
F. Waeren Wright.
No. 866,552.
PATENTED SEPT. 17, 1907.
S. B. YERION.
REPEATER FOR PHONOGRAPHS,
APPLICATION PILED OOT. 10, 1906.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
WITNESSES:
I?
INVENTOR
/Jidn/ J-3- Jen'o/z
' ATTORNEY
TH£ NOMftlS PKTtRS C6.r WASHINGTON, D- C.
No. 866,552.
PATENTED SEPT. 17, 1907.
S. B. TERION.
REPEATER FOR PHONOGRAPHS. •
APPLIOATIOH FILED OCT. 10, 1906.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
tf*£* ^
WITNESSES:
K1
H
INVENTOR
lATTAdU
■4~<rK
' ATTORNEY
■HE HORR1S PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
SIDNY B. YERION, OF SEATTLE, WASHINGTON.
REPEATER FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
No, 866,552.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed October 10, 1906. Serial No, 338,260.
Patented Sept. 17, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Sidny B. Yerion, a citizen of the
United States, residing at Seattle, in the county of King
and State of Washington, have invented certain new
5 and useful Improvements in Repeaters for Phonographs,
of which the following is a specification.
This invention relates to phonographs and other talk-
ing machines; and its object is to provide a mechanic-
ally operated attachment to such a machine whereby
10 the music rendered by the reproducer may be auto-
matically repeated either in whole or in part.
With this end in view the invention consists in the
Dovel construction, and combination of devices as will
be hereinafter described and claimed.
15 In the accompanying drawings forming part of this
specification, Figure 1 is a front elevation of a phono-
graph with devices embodying my invention attached;
Fig. 2, a fragmentary plan view of the same with the re-
producer omitted; Fig. 3, an enlarged plan view of a
20 portion of the apparatus; Fig. 4, a front elevation of the
parts shown in Fig. 3 with a part of the frame work
broken away; and Figs. 5, 6 and 7, detail perspective
views of parts of the invention shown detached.
In said drawings, the reference numeral 10 indicates
25 the phonograph frame which is mounted, as ordinary,
upon the box 11 containing the motor for driving the
operative parts thereof through the medium of a belt 12
passing about a pulley 13 upon the spindle 14. This
spindle is journaled in suitable bearings of the frame, is
30 finely screw-threaded, and carries upon an extension a
cylinder 15 for the record 16. The screw serves through
a nut 17 and connecting parts 18 to feed the sound re-
producer 19, containing the diaphragm and a stylus, s )
that the latter will follow the helical indentations of the
35 record, and is prevented from unduly bearing upon the
record by a block 20 slidable on the striaght-edge 21 of
the frame 10. All of the aforesaid parts are, or may be,
of ordinary construction, found in certain classes of pho-
nographs.
40 Detachably connected to the block 20, as by a set
screw 22, is a casing-like structure 23 provided with a
rearwardly protruding finger 24, and a downwardly ex-
tending ear 25 whereto is fulcrumed by screw 26 a bell-
crank 27 having a lateral arm 27', a pendent arm 27",
45 and a lug 27"' disposed oppositely of the first named
arm and arranged to contact with the bottom of the cas-
ing, to limit the swing of the crank in one direction.
The arm 27' carries an anti-friction roller 28 positioned
immediately above said straight-edge 21 and adapted
50 when forced by the action of the bell-crank thereagainst
to elevate the block 20 and so raise the stylus from the
record.
29 is a bell crank fulcrumed by a screw 30 to the un-
der side of the casing with one of its arms, 307, extend-
55 ing rearwardly at the left hand side of the block, while
the other arm, 30", has its outer end pressed normally
against the crank arm 27' through the action of a suit-
able spring, such as 31. When the block, as above
stated, is elevated, then the arm 30" of the crank 29 is
correspondingly raised, and when above the height of 60
the crank-arm 27' is thrust there-above by the force of
said spring, and maintains the block in such raised po-
sition until the crank 29 is tripped, as presently de-
scribed.
Adjacent of the straight-edge 21 and extending longi- 65
tudinally of the frame 10, is a drag-bar 32 which is slid-
ably seated at one end in a support 32', the latter de-
tachably connected to the frame, while the other end is
connected with the motion controller of the repeater ac-
tuating devices. 70
Adjustably seated upon the bar 32 and to the left
hand side of the record cylinder, is an attachment 33,
see Fig. 6, which is secured in predetermined adjusted
positions by means of a set screw 33, and has at its front
a protruding lug 34 positioned so as to interfere with the 7 5
crank-arm 30' when the retrograde travel of the repro-
ducer has caused it to be brought to the terminus of its
reverse course, as controlled by the positioning of said
attachment, and swerving the crank arm 30" from its
engagement with the arm 27' for releasing the block 80
from its poised condition. Another attachment 35 is
slidably seated upon said drag bar to the right hand end
of the record cylinder, and is secured in adjusted posi-
tion by a set screw 36 which, for convenience in manip-
ulating, is employed in an auxiliary attachment 37 to- 85
wards the opposite end of the bar, and these last men-
tioned attachments are operatively coupled together by
a reach-rod 38, as shown in Fig. 1.
The attachment 35 is provided with a forwardfy ex-
tending ear 35' for the purpose of forming an abutment 90
against which the finger 24 of the shell will strike at
the end of the travel to effect the shifting of the bar
32 and cause the operating mechanism to be actuated.
Adjustably connected with the attachments 33 and 35,
respectively, are pointers 39 and 40 which are used in 95
indicating the exact positions at which the attach-
ments are to be located to effect the purposes before
explained; for example, the attachment 33 would be
set so as to present the pointer 39 at the beginning of
the indentations of the record the music of which is 100
intended to be repeated, while the other attachment
35 is set with its pointer 40 at the end of the music.
Referring now to Figs. 1, 3 and 4, showing mechan-
ism for automatically actuating the return movements
of the reproducer and raising and lowering the same 105
clear of and upon the record, 41 is a containing case
adapted to be secured to the box 11 in any suitable
manner, as by a clip 42 introduced between the cover
ir and the adjacent end 11". Within this casing is a
clock-work mechanism consisting of a train of wheels 110
driven from a power spring 43 upon a winding arbor
44, and imparting motion through the gear wheels 45
2
866,552
and 40 to an arbor 47 carrying a worm wheel 48 engag-
ing a worm pinion 49 upon a longitudinal arbor 50,
whereupon is a speed retarding fan 75. The arbor 47
likewise rotates, through wheels 52 and 53, an arbor
5 54, which in turn is geared by wheels 55 and 50 with
an arbor 57. the latter having fixedly mounted thereon
an escapement 58 and a cam 59. A plate 60 recipro-
cally seated upon supports, such as 61, within the c ts-
ing, is provided with a notch 02. and is shifted from
10 side to side by me the aforesaid drag-bar 32 to
permit of the arms of the escapement successively
passing through the slot, and its motion intermittently
arrested by the arms of the escapement being individu-
ally caught by the plate upon either side of the notch.
15 An advantageous connection between the plate (i0 and
the drag bar is the employment of a vertically disposed
rod 03 carried in bearings 04. and provided with bent
ends 05 and 00 which are respectively engaged with
the plate by passing through a notched flange 00'. and
20 -with the bar by forming a crank-pin extremity 00' to
receive an eye 32" of the bar. The arbor 47 has mount-
ed thereon a normally loose spool 67 which upon occa-
sion is coupled therewith by clutch elements 08 and 09
respectively formed on the spool and a peripherally
25 grooved hub 09' splined to the arbor. The hub of the
clutch member 69 is connected to the forked arm 70
of a bell-crank 70' which is fulcrumed to a bracket 71
of the casing, and has its other arm engaged with the
perimeter of said cam 59 which, being elliptical, will
30 in rotating alternately thrust the clutch element 09 out
of mesh with the other element against the action of a
spring 72. and then allow the latter to assert itself to
again couple such elements. 73 is a flexible line hav-
ing one of its ends affixed to the spool and passing
35 through an aperture of a fair-leader 70 has its other end
connected with the pendent arm 27" of the bell-crank
27. whereby, as the line is wound about the spool, it
serves to tilt (he crank arm to elevate the block 20
from the straight edge 21 and by a continued action
40 retracts the reproducer. 74 is a brake-spring pressing
frictionally against said spool to prevent the latter
upon being released by the clutch from turning with
too great a velocity.
The operation of the invention is as follows: The rec-
45 ord being placed upon the cylinder 15 of the phono-
graph, the attachments 33 and 35 would be secured to
the bar 32 so that the respective pointers 39 and 40
would be opposite the ends of the record mark]
The phonograph is now started and the reproducer
50 brought into juxtaposition with the attachment 33 by
pushing it along toward the left by finger pressure ex-
erted against the crank-arm 27", or by moving the bar
32 to the right to actuate the repeating mechanism. In
either case the reproducer is raised sufficiently to per-
5 5 mit the spring-pressed crank-arm 30" to lie engaged with
the arm 21' and holds the reproducer in such elevated
condition until disengaged by the impinging of the arm
30/ against abutment 34, with the resultant lowering, as
before explained, of the feed nut 17 and the reproducer
60 into operative engagement with the screw spindle and
with its stylus upon the record. The striking of the
abutment also forces the drag-bar to be moved to shift
the notch 62 of plate 00 across the plane of the escape-
ment wheel arms, meanwhile allowing this wheel to
6 5 make a partial rotation, and the cam 59 brought to pre-
sent one of the ends of its major diameter against the
crank 70' to disengage the clutch elements, thereby
causing the spool 07 to be loose and offe'r no resistance
to the unwinding of the line 73 as the reproducer is pro-
gressively moved by the phonograph motor in the direc- 7 0
tion indicated by arrow in Fig. 1.
When the reproducer has reached the end of its travel,
as controlled by the adjustment of the attachment 35,
the finger 24 will strike the portion 35' of the latter to
cause the movement of the rod 32 and tripping of the 75
plate 00 to move the mil 02 in position opposite the
paths of the arms 58 of the escapement and thus release
the latter and the cam 59 and permit the clutch to be
coupled and cause the line 73 to be wound about the
spool, which raises the reproducer and drags it into con- 80
i not with the attachment 33, thus effecting the purpose
of the. invention by repeating the music. More spe-
cifically, when the drag- bar is moved toward the right
by the interference of the attachment 35, as above ex-
plained, the pla te 60 is shifted to permit the escapement 8 5
wheel 58 to make a quarter turn, and the cam being cor-
respondingly moved brings an eud of its minor diameter
to oppose the crank 70'. and allows the spring 72 to as-
sert itself to couple the clutch elements and fix the
spool to its arbor, which being now active winds in the 0
line to accomplish the reverse movement of the repro-
ducer. During this step in the operation, one of the es-
capement wheel arms 58' is directed toward the fan and,
being shorter than either of the others does not protrude
within the path of travel of the fan-wings, so that the 95
latter being unrestrained allows the clock-work to oper-
ate and coincidentally regulate the speed thereof. The
clock-work continues to operate until the plate has
again been shifted to afford a quarter turn to the wheel 58
and bring one of the longer arms thereof into the path of 100
the fan. thus stopping the action of the clock-work and
at the same time disengaging the clutch, which occurs
as the reproducer is lowered.
With the present invention, the operation of the re-
turn of the reproducer to make repel it ion of the music is 105
accomplished by an independent motor, is rapid in ac-
tion, and works in an efficient manner and without any
apparent jar or shock.
Having described my invention, what I claim, is —
1. In a device of the class described a reproducer, a \\Q
record, a spring actuated mandrel having a winding
drum, a trip mechanism carried by said reproducer, a
winding cable between said trip mechanism and drum, a
trip mechanism adapted to hold said drum out of action,
spaced abutments in the path of said reproducer, and con- \\5
necting means between said abutments and the trip
mechanism of said drum.
i'. In a device of the class described a reproducer, a
record, a supporting frame, a spring actuated mandrel
carried by said frame, a winding drum operated by said J20
mandrel, escapement device connected to said mandrel, a
movable into the path of said escapement, means op-
erative by said escapement for holding said winding drum
out of action, a trip mechanism carried by said reproducer,
a winding cable between said trip mechanism and drum, \25
spaced abutments in the path of said reproducer, and
connecting means between said abutments and said escape-
ment slop.
:_'.. In a device of the class described a reproducer, a
record, a supporting frame, a spring actuated mandrel 130
carried by said frame, a winding drum operated by said
mandrel, escapement device connected to said mandrel and
including a fan device and a wheel formed with a plu-
rality of spaced radiating arms movable into the path of
866,552
3
said fan, a plate movable transversely of the patb of said
radiating arms and provided with a notch adapted to
permit the arms to pass when the plate is disposed in one
position, means operative by said escapement for holding
5 said winding drum out of action, a trip mechanism car-
ried by said reproducer, a winding cable between said
trip mechanism and drum, spaced aljtitments in the path
of said reproducer, and connecting means between said
abutments and said recessed plate and adapted to actuate
10 the same when the reproducer engages the abutments.
4. In a device of the class described a record, a re-
peating mechanism, a reproducer, a casing connected to
said reproducer and provided with a laterally extending
stop, a movable rod, abutments spaced apart upon said
15 rod. a trip mechanism carried by said shell, a winding
drum carried by said repeating mechanism, a cable con-
nected between said drum and the trip mechanism of said
reproducer, connecting means between said rod and re-
peating mechanism, means whereby said rod is operated
20 by the contact of said shell with one of ^aid abutments,
and means whereby the trip mechanism of said shell is
operated by the contact thereof of the other said abut-
ment and the winding drum set into operation.
5. In a device of the class described a reproducer, a
25 record, a supporting frame, a spring actuated mandrel
carried by said frame, a winding drum having a clutch
member and operated by said mandrel, escapement device
connected operatively with said mandrel and including a
fan device and a mandrel carrying a cam and a wheel
having a plurality of radiating arms adapted to move 30
intermittently into the path of said fan device, a clutch
member movably disposed relative to the clutch member of
said winding drum, a lever between said movable clutch
member and said cam and adapted to be operated by the
movement of the same, a plate movable transversely of 35
the path of the radiating arms of said escapement wheel
and provided with a notch adapted to permit said arms
to pass when the plate is disposed in one position, a shell
connected to said reproducer, a bell-crank swinging verti-
cally from said shell, a bell-crank swinging horizontally 40
from said shell with one arm movable into the path of
one of the arms of said vertically swinging bell-crank, a
movable rod carrying abutments spaced apart and dis-
posed in the path of the reproducer, connecting means be-
tween said rod and said movable recessed plate, and a 45
winding cable between said winding drum and the free end
of said vertical bell-crank lever.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in presence
of two witnesses.
SIDNY B. YERION.
Witnesses :
Pierre Barnes,
Joseph Risse.
No. 866,950.
PATENTED SEPT. 24, 1907.
C. L. METERS.
NEEDLE FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED JULI19. 1907.
J?§^
^tyr^
■fit J- (2cMsuiw
^S^V
a
3*r*
&Q6r
S2*ZfrJ-
-^%A<&
THE NORR15 PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHARLES L. MEYERS, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY.
NEEDLE FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 866,950
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed July 19, 1907. Serial No, 384,535.
Patented Sept. 24, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Charles L. Meyers, a citizen
of the United States, residing in Jersey City, in the
county of Hudson and State of New Jersey, have in-
vented a certain new and useful Improvement in
Needles for Talking-Machines, of which the following
is a specification.
The invention relates to needles used in instru-
ments of the talking machine class for engaging the
10 groove in the record and transmitting sound vibra-
tions induced thereby to the- diaphragm of the re-
producer, and the object of the invention is to pro-
vide a needle which in cooperation with the record
groove and sound-box, will reproduce the record
15 clearly and distinctly, with marked lessening of
"scratch" and increased fidelity to true tonal qualities.
The invention consists in certain details of form,
size, and proportions of parts, by which the above
objects are attained, to be hereinafter described.
20 The accompanying drawings form a part of this
specification and show what is considered to be the
best form of the invention.
Figure 1 is an elevation of a portion of a record and
sound-box showing the improved needle in place.
25 Fig. 2 is an elevation or side view of the needle alone,
on a greatly magnified scale. Fig. 3 is a correspond-
ing end view. Fig. 4 is a section through a portion
of a record, on a still larger scale, showing the point
of the needle in elevation, in a record groove. The
30 line of section being the center line of such groove.
Fig. 5 is a corresponding section and elevation. The
line of section being transverse to the grooves.
Similar letters of reference indicate the same parts
in all the figures.
35 By careful research and experiment I have demon-
strated that certain sizes, proportions, and forms, to-
gether with material of the proper character, are
necessary in the construction of a needle capable of
producing the desired effects in service. The present
40 invention is the result of such investigation and is
based on the discoveries thus made.
A is a record which may be understood to be a
standard disk record made by the Victor Talking-
Machine Company, and having the usual volute
45 groove a therein, and B a standard sound-box having
a tube B1 leading therefrom to a horn, not shown, and
a socket B- for a needle.
The improved needle has a cylindrical body C and
a concavely tapered point C1; the upper end of the
50 body and the lower extremity of the point terminate
in plane faces, marked C2, C3 respectively, parallel
with each other and at a right angle to the axial line
of the needle.
My experiments indicate that the body C of the
55 needle should be sixtyfive one-thousandths (65/1000)
of an inch in diameter; the diameter of the point-face
C3, two one-thousandths (2/1000) of an inch; the maxi-
mum concavity of the curve forming the tapered
point should be four one-thousandths (4/1000) of an
inch; the length of the point two hundred and thirty- 60
five one-thousandths (235/1000) of an inch; the length
of the cylindrical body four hundred and fifty one-
thousandths (450/1000) of an inch, and the total
length six hundred and eightyfive one-thousandths
(685/1000). 65
I have found the best material to be highly carbon-
ized steel of tough fiber, hardened to as great a de-
gree as may be without becoming brittle.
It is believed the reason for the increased efficiency
of the improved needle is largely due to the form of 70
the point and the position it occupies in the groove.
Its concavity insures contact on the sides of the
groove at two points only, and the flat face at the ter-
mination of the point lies always above and out of
contact with the bottom of the groove, thus the area 75
of contact is extremely limited resulting in greatly
lessening the objectionable "scratch" ordinarily very
noticeable. The form of the point permits it to pene-
trate to sufficient depth in the groove to insure per-
fect engagement therewith, and the attenuation of the 80
point permits the latter to follow accurately slight
sinuosities in the lateral bends or convolutions of the
groove, by which the sound vibrations are repro-
duced, thus avoiding "slurring". The flat upper
face C2 tends to increase the area of contact with the 85
socket B2 in which the needle is held, and aids there-
by in transmitting the vibrations.
Whether the above theoretical reasoning be correct
or not, the fact remains that a needle formed as shown
and described produces results far in advance of those 90
produced by any other needle known to me. The
improvement is especially marked in the reproduc-
tion of instrumental music and the tones of the sing-
ing or speaking voice. The clearness of detail, accen-
tuation and the tone qualities of the human voice are 95
distinguishable to the faintest inflection and intona-
tion. In band music the broad tones of the bass
horns are reproduced with softness and true tonal
value, preserving all the effect of their great sound
volumes. On the middle register and high notes 100
there is a clearness of tone and distinctness of sound
identical with actual playing.
The improved needle by reason of its form and
peculiar engagement with the groove, wears but little
and apparently reproduces the last notes of the record 105
as clearly and distinctly as the first, and also acts less
destructively on the record, thus prolonging its term
of usefulness.
I claim: —
1. The talking machine needle described, comprising a 110
body and a concavely tapered point.
866,950
10
2. The talking machine needle described, comprising a
cylindrical body and a concavely tapered point.
3. The talking machine needle described, comprising a
body, a concavely tapered point, and a plane face forming
tin' termination of said point.
4. The talking machine needle described, comprising a
cylindrical body, a concavely tapered point, a plane face
at the end of said body, and a plane face forming the
termination of said point, said faces arranged parallel to
each other and at a right angle to the axial line of said
needle.
5. In a talking machine needle, a cylindrical body hav-
ing a diameter of 65/1000 of an inch, a concavely tapered
point 235/ 1000 of an inch in length and terminating in a
plane face 2/1000 of an inch in diameter and arranged
at a right angle to the axial line of said needle, the con-
cavity of said point being 4/1000 of an inch at the great-
est depth of the curve.
0. The talking machine needle described, comprising a
cylindrical body, a concavely tapered point, and a plane
face forming the termination of the latter, in combination
with a sound-box and record of a talking machine.
In testimony that I claim the invention above set forth
I affix my signature, in presence of two witnesses.
CHARLES L. MEYERS.
Witnesses :
Lewis R. Meyers,
Chables R. Searle.
15
20
No, 867,259. PATENTED OCT. 1, 1907.
J. H. ELFERING.
SOUND BOX FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED NOV. 12, 1904.
Jk.4
Tp.x.
^^^^^vn&t&wv,
Jp£
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY.
THE NORMS fETKHS CO., WASHIfMTml, B. <?■
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOHN H. ELEERING, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE
COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
SOUND-BOX FOB, TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 867,259.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed November 12, 1904, Serial No. 232,392.
Patented Oct. 1, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, John H. Elferinc;, a citizen of
the United Slates, and a resident of the city of Cam-
den, State of New Jersey, have invented certain new
5 and useful Improvements in Sound-Boxes for Talk-
ing-Machines, of which the following is a full, clear,
and complete disclosure.
The object of my invention is to provide such a con-
struction in sound boxes, that the parts of the casing
10 thereof may be easily adjusted to give the correct pres-
sure upon the parts for holding the diaphragm in posi-
tion.
Heretofore, in the construction of sound boxes, it
has been customary in some instances to force the
15 parts of the casing of the sound box together, so that
the same are retained relatively in position by friction.
The difficulty has been experienced in this manner of
assembling the parts of a sound box arising from the
fact that the exact amount of force to produce the req-
20 uisite pressure upon the parts for holding the dia-
phragm, cannot be accurately determined, thereby
causing considerable variation in the efficiency and
quality of reproduction in different sound boxes.
My invention is designed to efficiently overcome
25 these objections.
For a full, clear and exact description of one em-
bodiment of my invention, reference may be had to
the following specification, and to the accompanying
drawing forming a part thereof, in which
30 Figure 1 is an end elevation of a sound box embody-
ing my improvements; Fig. 2 is a central, longitudi-
nal, sectional view thereof, and Fig. 3 is a rear elevation
thereof.
Referring to the drawing, the numeral 1 indicates
35 the inner portion of the sound box casing, which is
preferably provided with an external cylindrical
flange 2. The outer cylindrical portion 3 of the sound
box casing is adapted to fit over said cylindrical flange
2, and is slidably retained thereon. The interior of
40 portions 1 and 3 of the sound box casing are provided
with low flanges 4 and 5, upon which are seated the
usual gaskets G, between which is retained the dia-
phragm 7. The stylus bar 8 is pivotally mounted
upon the portion 3 of the sound box casing in the usual,
45 or any suitable manner, and is connected with the dia-
phragm by the usual connection or wire 9. The cy-
lindrical flange 2 is provided with openings 10, and the
cylindrical portion 3 with screw-threaded openings
11, which are smaller than the openings 10 in the cy-
50 lindrical flange 2. Machine screws 12 pass loosely
through the openings 10 and enter the screw-threaded
openings 11 in the cylindrical portion 3. It will be
noted that the openings 10 are greater in diameter
than the diameter of the screws 12, thereby allowing
a slight range for adjustment of the portions 1 and 3 of 55
the casing relatively.
In assembling the parts of the sound box, the stylus
bar, diaphragm, and gaskets are placed in position
within the cylindrical casing 3, the portion 1 of the
casing is inserted within the cylindrical portion 3, so 60
that its flange 4 abuts against the adjacent gasket (i.
The screws are then inserted in the openings as above
described, and after the requisite pressure has been
given to the parts of the sound box casing to clamp the
diaphragm in position, the screws are set tightly in 65
position, thereby holding the parts of the casings to-
gether with the correct pressure upon the gaskets. In
this manner each sound box is made substantially like
every other sound box and the pressure upon the dia- .
phragin may be relied upon to be the same in each in- 70
stance without resorting to experiments to determine
how firmly or how loosely the diaphragm is held in
position.
I have thus produced a decided advance in the fa-
cdity ease, accuracy, and speed in which sound boxes 75
may be manufactured, in addition to producing the
greater reliability and uniformity in the finished arti-
cle.
Having thus described my invention, it will be ob-
vious that certain changes may be made in the form, 80
arrangement, and proportion of parts, without depart-
ing from the spirit and scope of my invention, but
What I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-
ent of the United States, is: —
1. In a sound box for talking machines, the combina- 35
tion with the diaphragm thereof, of a casing for said
diaphragm composed of two relatively longitudinally slid-
able parts, and means passing through both parts inserted
from the Inside of the inner member for retaining said
parts adjustably in position. 90
2. In a sound box for talking machines, the combina-
tion with the diaphragm thereof, of a casing for said
diaphragm comprising two telescoping parts, and means
passing through both parts inserted from the inside of
the inner member for holding said parts adjustably in 95
their relative positions.
3. In a sound box for talking machines, the combina-
tion with the diaphragm thereof, of a casing for said
diaphragm comprising two longitudinally slidable tele-
scoping parts, and means passing through both parts in- 100
serted from the inside of the inner member for holding
said parts adjustably in their relative positions.
■i. In a sound box for talking machines, the combina-
tion with the diaphragm thereof, of a casing for said
diaphragm comprising two longitudinally slidable tele- 105
scoping parts, the outer one of said parts having screw-
threaded openings therein, the inner one of said parts
having openings therein slightly larger than said screw-
Q
867,259
threaded openings, and screws passing from the inner
member through said openings for retaining the parts of
said casing adjustably in their relative positions.
5. In a sound box for sound recording or reproducing
machines, the combination with the diaphragm thereof,
of a casing comprising a recessed inner member and an
outer telescoping member, the said inner member having
substantially its entire outer surface concealed within
said outer member and means operated from within the
recess of said inner member, passing through both mem- 10
bers for adjustably securing said parts together.
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my hand this
eleventh day of November, A. D., 1904.
JOHN H. ELFERING.
Witnesses :
Edw. W. Vaill, Jr.,
John F. Gkadv.
I
No. 867,597. PATENTED OCT. 8, 1907.
A. N. HERMAN.
FRICTION REPRODUCING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 13, 1905.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
Inventor:
by J?
-XT. 4%+^
Atty.
THE MOWBI3 PXTtR* CO.. WA3HIMCTOM. O. C,
No, 867,597. PATENTED OCT. 8, 1907.
A. N. HERMAN.
FRICTION REPRODUCING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED MAB. 13, 1905.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
1%9>2"
> v
y//'/,y//o&
\/' "J/1
I
%&£S&8,
uu
V
/ //
tf
/,'
ii
n
i,
i.
e-
1>
I,
>>
Attest:
Inventor:
%/yP&-+c »•• *A.*.. *Sr- ''-*-*
»y£.
iz. ^%^-^.
Atty.
the Hommis peters co.. washimqton, o. e.
No. 867,597. PATENTED OCT. 8, 1907.
A. N. PIERMAN.
FRICTION REPRODOCING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 13, 1905.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
fxa.3.
£)<^Ja-x <^z^/^c_
by o
Inventor:
Atty.
THE NORMS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON D. C
No, 867,597. PATENTED OCT. 8, 1907.
A. N. PIERMAN.
FRICTION REPRODUCING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION PILED MAR. 13, 1905.
6 SHEET8-8HEET 4.
V^. <£
/5t£*S ^4ir-6</t
• Atty.
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, O. C
No. 867,597. PATENTED OCT. 8, 1907.
A. N. PIERMAN.
FRICTION REPRODUCING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED MAB. 13, 1906.
6SHEETS-SHEEr6.
f-tp.Z
Attest:
&tVm s#-ireW*
*/L<„.
Inventor,
^ CSu
by o
Atty.
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, O. C.
No. 867,597. PATENTED OCT. 8, 1907.
A. N. PIERMAN.
FRICTION REPRODUCING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 13, 1905.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 6.
o
Attest:
&a*T> <****
Jk**
Inventor:
*Atty.
THE r.ORRis PETERS CO., WASHINQTOH, O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ALEXANDER N. PIERMAN, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT
COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
FRICTION REPRODUCING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
No. 867,597.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed March 13, 1905. Serial No. 249,687.
Patented Oct. 8, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Alexander N. Pierman, a citi-
zen of the United Stales, residing at Newark, in the
county of Essex and State of New Jersey, have invented
5 certain new and useful Improvements in Friction Re-
producing Attachments for Phonographs, of which the
following is a specification.
My invention relates to sound reproducing devices of
the type wherein the diaphragm is vibrated by means
10 of a friction shoe engaging a continuously rotating fric-
tion wheel, the friction between the friction shoe and
friction wheel being varied by varying the pressure of
the friction shoe on the friction wheel, such variation in
pressure being effected either directly or indirectly by
15 the sounds to be reproduced. Devices of this type are
well known and have been suggested for effecting the
reproduction of ordinary ' sounds either directly as in
the case of megaphones or indirectly as in the case of
telephones or phonographs. The suggestion has also
20 been made of actuating the friction block by means of
levers, in order that the friction may be increased and
thereby permit the reproduced sounds to be aug-
mented. Examples of these suggestions are found in
British patents to Hope-Jones No. 15,245 of 1890 and to
25 St George No. 3473 of 1880.
My invention relates to improvements in apparatus
of this type in its application to phonographs and allied
talking machines, and my object is to provide an at-
tachment for the purpose which can be readily applied
30 to a phonograph at small cost and without interfering
with the effective operation of the same.
The invention has particular reference to the means
whereby the friction wheel may be continuously ro-
tated while at the same time the friction wheel and
35 parts cooperating therewith may be progressed longi-
tudinally with respect to the record ; also to the means
for varying the leverage between the reproducing stylus
and the friction shoe and further details of construc-
tion and operation, as will be more fully hereinafter de-
40 scribed and claimed.
In order that the invention may be better understood,
attention is directed to the accompanying drawings
forming a part of this specification and in which —
Figure 1 is a plan view, showing in full lines my im-
45 proved attachment applied to a well known type of Edi-
son phonograph, the latter being illustrated in dotted
lines, Fig. 2 anend elevation of the same, Fig. 3 a sec-
tional view on the line a — a of Fig. 7, Fig. 4 a section
on the line b — b of Fig. 8, Fig. 5 a plan view of the dia-
50 phragm box, Fig. 6 a side elevation of the attachment
showing the reproducer stylus in engagement with the
record, Fig. 7 a side elevation similar to Fig. 6, viewing
the attachment from the opposite side, and, Fig. 8 a
front elevation of the attachment.
In all the above views corresponding parts are repre- 55
sented by the same numerals of reference.
Broadly speaking, the invention consists of two parts,
first, operating mechanism permanently applied to the
talking machine but in no way interfering with the or-
dinary operation thereof when desired; and second, 60
friction reproducing mechanism removably carried by
the arm which sustains the ordinary reproducer, so as to
be readily taken off when the ordinary reproducer is to
be used, said friction reproducing mechanism cooperat-
ing with the operating mechanism, so as to continuously 6 5
rotate the friction wheel as the reproducer progresses
longitudinally with respect to the record .
The phonograph illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2 is of
such common construction and the parts thereof are
so well known to persons skilled in the art, that a de- 70
scription thereof is unnecessary. I arrange at the
front of the instrument a fluted or pinion shaft 1
mounted in suitable bearings 2 — 2 and driven from
the main shaft of the phonograph in any suitable way,
as by gears 3 — 3. Removably carried in the usual 75
supporting arm like the ordinary reproducer, is a
cylindrical casing 4, to the underside of which is piv-
oted the usual floating weight 5. Pivoted on this
floating weight is a small lever 6 carrying the repro-
ducer stylus 7 engaging the record 8. A support 9 80
extends up from the casing 4 and carries a disk 10, op-
posing which is a corresponding disk 11 formed with
a neck 12, to which the usual horn is applied. The
disks 10 and 11 are clamped together by screws 13 to
hold the large diaphragm 14 in place between the 85
washers 15, as will be understood. The support 9
carries a bearing 16, in which is mounted a shaft 17
carrying the friction wheel 18, the latter being made of
some very smooth substance, having a high coefficient
of friction, preferably amber or a composition in which 90
amber is employed. Said friction wheel is preferably
provided with metallic rings 19 for the purpose ol
guiding the friction shoe and maintaining' the same
always in its proper relation to the friction wheel.
The friction shoe 20 partly encircles the friction wheel 95
and is provided with a pivoted extension 21 also en-
gaging the friction wheel. The friction shoe is made
as light as possible to minimize inertia and momentum
and it may be lined with cloth, leather or similar ma-
terial to increase the friction with the friction wheel. 100
A pivoted link 22 connects the extension 21 of the
friction shoe with the diaphragm 14. The friction
shoe 20 is provided with a finger 23 connected to the
pivoted adjusting lever 24 by means of a spring 25.
The lever 24 is mounted on the support 9 and is ad- 105
justed by a screw 26, whereby the tension of the spring
25 may be varied to regulate the initial pressure of the
friction shoe on the friction wheel. Engaging the
867,597
finger 23 is a small bell crank lever 27, whose other
member is formed with a series of holes 28 from any-
one of which extends a link or wire 29 to the stylus
lever 6 whereby the leverage between the reproducer
5 stylus and the friction shoe may be varied as will be
evident.
The bearing 16 carries a support 30 on which is
mounted a spur gear 31 adapted to mesh with the pin-
ion shaft 1, so as to be rotated by the latter. At the
10 same time, the spur gear may move longitudinally of
the pinion shaft as the reproducer stylus tracks the
record. The friction wheel 18 is rotated from the gear
31 in any suitable way, as for example, by a gear 32
on the shaft 17, meshing with said gear wheel 31. It
15 will be evident that in applying my attachment to a
phonograph or other talking machine, the only per-
manent attachment to the talking machine is the pinion
shaft 1 and its driving mechanism, but this does not in
• any way interfere with the operation of the talking
20 machine or detract from theappearance thereof. The
rest of the device is applied to the usual holding arm in
the same way as the ordinary reproducer, and can be
removed as readily. Furthermore, in raising or lower-
ing the holding arm to lift the reproducer stylus from
25 Or engage it with the record, the spur gear 31 will be
simultaneously raised from or lowered into engage-
ment with the pinion shaft 1. In other words, the
friction wheel is not rotated except when the repro-
ducer is in engagement with the record, thereby re-
30 during wear on the parts and preventing the trans-
mission of noises, resulting from the rotation of the
friction wheel. In operation the screw 26 will be ad-
justed so as to secure the desired initial pressure be-
tween the friction shoe 20 and the friction wheel, and
35 a record having been placed on the usual mandrel of
the phonograph, the holding arm will be lowered so
as to engage the reproducing stylus with the record,
and simultaneously engage the spur gear 31 with the
rotating pinion shaft 1. The friction wheel rotating
at a constant speed in the direction of the arrow will 40
obviously exert stress on the diaphragm 14. Conse-
quently as the reproducer sapphire vibrates, the fric-
tion between the friction shoe and wheel will be cor-
respondingly varied, to thereby vibrate the diaphragm
14 with the desired amplification but in accordance '45
with the record.
Having now described my invention, what I claim
as new therein and desire to secure by Letters Patent is:
1. In a friction reproducing attachment for phono-
graphs and allied talking machines, the combination with 50
a pinion shaft mounted in fixed hearings, of friction re-
producing means movable longitudinally of the record to
be reproduced and a gear cooperating with the friction
reproducing means and meshing continuously with said
shaft, as and for the purposes set forth. 55
2. In a friction reproducing attachment for phono-
graphs and allied talking machines, the combination
with a pinion shaft mounted in fixed bearings, of a sup-
port movable longitudinally of the record, a friction
wheel carried by said support, friction reproducing de- 60
vices operated by said wheel and a gear for driving said
wheel and meshing with said shaft, substantially as set
forth.
3. In a phonograph or allied talking machine, the com-
bination with the feed screw, feed nut, guide rod and 65
traveling carriage sleeved thereon, of reproducing means
comprising a friction wheel carried by said carriage,
means carried by the frame for driving said friction
wheel, the arrangement of parts being such that the rais-
ing of the carriage disconnects the friction wheel from 70
its said driving means, substantially as set forth.
4. The combination with a talkiing-machine and a
relay device therefor comprising a reproducer and the
relatively stationary part of the relay-device proper, the
relatively movable part of said relay device, and a de- 75
tachable bracket carrying means for rotating said movable
part.
This specification signed and witnessed this 10th day
of March 1905.
ALEXANDER N. PIERMAN.
Witnesses :
Dei-os ITolden,
Anna R. Klehm.
No. 867,773. PATENTED OCT. 8, 1907.
A. DEE P. WEAVER & J. E. GARNET.
ATTACHMENT FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED MAB, 15, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
ZZ * 1L
O-y
JO 17 to 26 k
v///////////^3a
WITNESSES
i a.3
INVENTORS
ATTORNEYS
TUB NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
I
No. 867,773. PATENTED OCT. 8, 1907.
A. DEE P. WEAVER & J. E. CARNEY.
ATTACHMENT FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 16, 1807.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
TI3-*
3Zr--l
WITNESSES
vatm*
_,„ ■ INVENTORS
<A?/m_£eZierarg: Carney
BY
ATTORNEYS
THE NORftlS METEffS CO., WASHINGTON, O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ALFRED DEE PINCKNEY WEAVER AND JOHN EDWARD CARNEY, OF MONTGOMERY,
ALABAMA; SAID WEAVER ASSIGNOR TO SAID CARNEY.
ATTACHMENT FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 867,773.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed March 15, 1907. Serial No. 362,473.
Patented Oct. 8, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, Alfred dee Pinckney
Weaver and John Edward Carney, both citizens
of the United States, and residents of Montgomery, in
5 the county of Montgomery and State of Alabama, have
invented a new and Improved Attachment for Talk-
ing-Machines, of which the following is a full, clear,
and exact description.
Our invention relates to sound recording and repro-
10 during machines, including phonographs, grapho-
phones, and all other types of so-called talking ma-
chines.
Reference is made to the accompanying drawings,
forming a part of this specification, in which similar
15 characters of reference indicate corresponding parts in
all the figures.
Figure 1 is a fragmentary, horizontal section through
the attachment, showing how it is connected with the
horn and with the recorder or reproducer, as the case
2 ) may be, of the talking machine, and also showing the
porous material for breaking up the resonance of the
air column; Fig. 2 is a central vertical section upon
the line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1, showing more particularly the
internal construction of the attachment and the details
2 5 of the porous material used for destroying the resonance
of the air column; Fig. 3 is a section upon the line 3 — 3
of Fig. 1, looking in the direction of the arrow, and
showing the cylindrical grid used for containing the
porous material, and also for adjusting the device so
30 as to regulate the volume of sounds; Fig. 4 is a plan
view ol a modified form of our attachment and showing
the movable collar used for controlling the degree of
compression of the porous material; Fig. 5 is a central
section through the construction shown in Fig. 4 and
35 showing the material used as a compressible mass of
sponge rubber encircled by a spring for restoring the
mass after compression; Fig. 6 is a vertical cross sec-
tion upon the line 6—6 of Fig. 5 looking in the direction
of the arrow, and showing the concentric arrangement
40 of the mass of sponge rubber, the spring encircling the
mass, and the telescopic tubes encircling the rubber
and spring; and Fig. 7 is a vertical cross section upon
the line 7 — 7 of Fig. 5, looking in the direction of the
arrow and showing the pin for holding the telescopic
45 tubes in various predetermined positions, thereby
regulating the degree of compression of Ihe sponge
material.
A casing 4 is provided with collars 5,6, the collar 5 I
being adapted to engage a tube 7 of the recorder or
50 reproducer, as the case may be, and the collar 6 being-
adapted to fit into the smaller end 8 of a horn 9. A
set screw 7a is revolubly mounted within the collar 5
and is adapted to engage the tube 7 for the purpose of
holding the collar 5 upon the latter. This set screw
55 7" also enables the collar 5 to be adjusted within proper
limits upon the tube 7. The casing 4 is further pro-
vided with a tubular extension 10 into which fits a
screw cap 11 having a slot 12 disposed internally
thereof. The casing 4 is still further provided with a
tubular extension 13 over which fits an annular screw 60
cap 14. Within the casing 4 are sound passages 15,
16 in registry with each other, the passage 16 being
frusto-conical in shape. Revolubly mounted within
the casing 4 is a cylinder 17 provided with oppositely
disposed sound passages 18 arranged in two groups, as 65
indicated in Fig. 3. The cylinder 17, thus provided
with the sound passages 18, constitutes a cylindrical
grid. This grid is provided with a tubular extension
19 and with a reduced portion 20, the latter terminating
in a head 21. This head is provided with lug 22 70
adapted to fit neatly into the slot 12, so as to prevent
rotation of the cylindrical grid 17 when the lug is
inserted within the slot, as indicated in Fig. 1.
A screw 23 passes through an annular screw cap 23a, -
the latter being mounted upon the tubular extension 75
19 of the cylindrical grid. A disk 24 is mounted upon
the outer end of the screw 23 and a pin 25 extends
through the disk 24 and screw 23 for enabling the screw
to be turned at will. A nut lock 26 is mounted upon
the screw 23 and is adapted to engage the screw cap 80
23a so as to prevent movement of the screw 23. A
head 27 is swiveled upon the screw 23 and is adapted
to move within the tubular extension 19, and also
within the cylindrical grid 17, these parts being con-
tinuations of each other. 85
A mass 28, of compressible porous material, prefer-
ably raw cotton fibers, is arranged in the form of a
cylinder and disposed within the cylindrical grid 17,
projecting partly into the tubular extension 19 of the
same. A spiral spring 29, of the so-called "compres- 90
sion type " , is embedded within the porous material
28 and serves to restore the latter to its normal condi-
tion after having been compressed. A mass 30 of
sponge rubber, or other material having interstices, is
mounted centrally within the tubular mass 28 of porous 95
material, and is encircled by the spiral spring 29.
Preferably the spring 29 does not directly engage the
sponge rubber.
The operation of the device shown in Figs. 1, 2 and
3 is as follows: The collar 5 being fixed upon the tube 7 100
of the reproducer or recorder, and being properly ad-
justed, is tightened in position by the set screw 7a.
The horn 9 is next mounted in position by slipping its
smaller end 8 over the collar 6. The degree of com-
pression desired for the sponge rubber 30 and the por- 105
ous, fibrous material 28, is now determined upon, and
the screw 23 is turned accordingly. To this end the
lock nut 26 is first loosened, and after adjustment of the
screw, is tightened. The cylindrical grid 17 is now
turned (see Fig. 3) to any desired angle by aid of the 110
867,773
25
30
screw cap 14. This exposes any desired number of
slots 18. In order to be able to turn the nut lock 26
and to adjust the screw caps 23a and 14, the lug 22 is
inserted within the slot 12, as indicated in Fig. 1.
5 This prevents rotation of the cylindrical grid 17 until
the adjustments are completed. The sounds passing
through the sound passages 15, 16 necessarily pass in a
lateral direction through the cylindrical grid 17 and
through the cylinder 28 of porous material, also through
10 the sponge rubber 30. The resonance of the air column
in occupying the air passage 15, 16 is broken up, as
above described and the intensity of the sound may be
altered and to any desired degree depending upon the
compression exerted by the screw 23. If, now, it be
15 desired to restore the talking machine to its usual con-
. dition; or in other words, to remove the agency used
for breaking up the resonance of the air column, the
cylindrical grid 17 is moved axially outward (toward
the bottom of the sheet according to Figs. 1 and 2).
20 The reduced portion 20 is thus brought into aline-
ment with the air passages 15, 16, and the sound waves
by passing around this reduced portion are not com-
pelled to pass through the cylindrical grid or the com-
pressible media contained by it.
In the form shown in Fig. 4 a collar 31 is provided
with a screw 32 whereby it may be secured upon the
tube of a reproducer or a recorder, as the case may be,
and held in position firmly by the screw 32. An an-
nular neck 33 is threaded internally and is fitted with
an annular collar 34 threaded internally. A cylin-
drical barrel 35 is threaded at one of its ends and fitted
within the collar 34, the other end 36 of this cylindrical
barrel being somewhat reduced. An annular collar
37 encirces the cylindrical barrel 35 and carries a pin
35 38 extending diametrically through this cylindrical
barrel. For this purpose a slot 39 is provided. In
order that the pin 38 may be lodged at any predeter-
mined point along the slot 39, the latter is merged into
indentations 40, as will be understood from Fig. 4.
40 An inner cylinder 41 is telescopically mounted within
the barrel 35. A perforated disk 42 is mounted within
the inner cylinder 41 and secured rigidly thereto.
Another perforated disk 43 is clamped between one end
of the barrel 35 and the collar 34. A mass 44, of sponge
45 rubber, is encircled by a spiral compression spring 45,
the latter being loosely mounted within the inner cyl-
inder 41. In order to compress the mass 44 of sponge
rubber, the collar 38 is pushed to the left, according to
Fig. 6, carrying with it the pin 38 and inner tube 41.
50 This shortens the member of sponge rubber and also
compresses the spring 45. In order to lock the parts
in this position, the collar 37 is next turned slightly to
the right, or to the left, as the case may be, so as to
lodge the pin 38 in a pair of the indentations 40. In
55 order to allow the sponge rubber to expand to any de-
sired extent, the pin 38 is loosened from the indenta-
tions 40, by slightly turning the collar 48, and is re-
moved to the right according to Fig. 5. The horn is
fitted upon the reduced portion 36 of the barrel 35.
60 The general action of the device shown in Figs. 4, 5
and 6 will be substantially the same as that shown in
the other figures; that is to say, the sponge rubber is
compressed or allowed to expand, according to the
degree of porosity which the operator desires to confer
upon it, and which is, therefore, regulated at will.
The resonance of the air column is prevented, as above
described, with reference to Figs. 1, 2 and 3.
Having thus described our invention, we claim as
new and desire to secure by Letters Patent:
1. The combination of a casing, a grid mounted therein,
a mass of porous material connected with said grid for
permitting passage of sound waves therethrough while pre-
venting undue resonance, and means controllable at will
for changing the position of said grid for the purpose of
affecting sounds passing through the same.
2. The combination of a casing, a cylindrical grid
mounted therein, a mass of porous material mounted with-
in said cylindrical grid, means controllable at will for
exerting different degrees of pressure upon said material
for the purpose of governing the porosity thereof, and
means for moving said cylindrical grid for the purpose of
affecting the sounds passing through said material.
3. The combination of a member provided with a sound
passage, a cylindrical grid mounted within said sound
passage, a member of rubber sponge mounted within said
cylindrical grid, a cylinder of cotton fiber encircling said
rubber member, a spring for restoring said rubber member
and said cylinder of cotton fiber after compression of the
same, and means controllable at will for compressing said
rubber member and said cylinder of cotton fiber to a pre-
determined extent.
4. The combination of a longitudinal hollow member
provided with a sound passage, a mass of porous material
mounted within said sound passage and extending trans-
versely of the general axis thereof, and means for com-
pressing said mass of porous material in a direction cross-
ing said axis of said longitudinal hollow member.
5. The combination of a casing, a revoluble cord mount-
ed therein for the purpose of regulating the capacity of
said casing for transmitting sound waves, and a mass of
porous material mounted within said cord and compressi-
ble in a direction crossing the general direction of propa-
gation, of said sound waves.
6. The combination of a casing, a revoluble cord mount-
ed therein and provided with slots serving as sound pas-
sages, and means for turning said cord relatively to said
casing.
7. The combination of a casing provided with a sound
passage, a revoluble cord mounted within said casing and
partially obstructing the same, the axis of said cord
crossing the general direction of propagation of the sound
waves, and means for moving said cord in the general
longitudinal direction of its own axis of rotation, for the
purpose of partially obstructing said sound waves.
8. The combination of a casing provided with a sound
passage, a revoluble cord mounted within said casing and
provided with sound passages, and means for securing
said revoluble cord in a predetermined fixed position.
9. The combination of mechanism provided with a sound
passage, a member of compressible material partially ob-
structing said sound passage, and a spiral spring de-
pressed within said member of compressible material, and
means for compressing said compressible material and said
spiral spring.
10. The combination of a casing provided with a
sound passage extending therethrough, a core of compres-
sible material mounted within said casing and adapted to
partially obstruct the propagation of -the sound waves
therethrough, a central spring disposed concentrically to
said core of compressible material, and means controllable
at will for compressing both said core and said spring, to
any desired extent.
In testimony whereof we have signed our names to this
specification in the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
ALFRED DEE PINCKNEY WEAVER.
JOHN EDWARD CARNEY.
Witnesses :
Doris Pabbe,
D. G. Whittington.
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
120
130
No. 867,821. PATENTED OCT. 8, 1907.
W. HART.
SOUND REPRODUCER FOR GRAPHOPHONES.
APPLICATION FILED MAT 4, 1907.
Fr
i,
t
z\ zo^y^
s~
-Q
X
3C
ten
4 \
w
1S
18 zo
S
<wu
'-ne^po
William Hart
flttor-iieua
r »os*is ranrs co.. umsh/«oto«. d. c
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM HART, OF KIRKS VI LLE, MISSOURI.
SOUND-REPRODUCER FOR GRAPHOPHONES.
No. 867,821.
Specification of Letters Patent,
Application filed Hnj 4, 1907. Serial No, 371,928.
Patented Oct. 8, 1907.
To all wliom it may concern: .
Be it known that I, William Hart, a citizen of the
United States, residing at Kirksville, in the county of
Adair and State of Missouri, have invented certain new
5 and useful Improvements in Sound-Reproducers for
Graphophones; and I do declare the following to be a
full, clear, and exact description of the invention, such
as will enable others skilled in the art to which it apper-
tains to make and use the same.
10 This invention relates to improvements in sound re-
producers for graphophones, and the like.
The object of the invention is to provide a device of
this kind by means of which the volume of sound will
be greatly increased and made more clear and distinct.
15 With this object in view, the invention consists of
certain novel features of construction, combination and
arrangement of parts as will be more fully described
and particularly pointed out in the appended claims.
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is a side
20 view of a sound reproducer constructed in accordance
with the invention; and Fig. 2 is a bottom plan view
of the same.
Referring more particularly to the drawings, 1 de-
notes a portion of the frame of the graphophone to which
25 the reproducer is attached. On the frame 1 is arranged
a sleeve or collar 2 in which is adjustably mounted the
lower reduced end of the horn, or sound transmission
device, 3, said end being secured in the collar 2 by
means of a set screw 4. Pivotally mounted on the lower
30 end of the horn 3 is a diaphragm plate 5, said plate
being provided with an inwardly proj ecting tubular boss
6, which is adapted to be inserted in the lower end of
the horn 3, and is pivotally connected to said end by
pivot studs or pins, 7.
35 On the lower side of one end of the plate 5 is a weight
8, and to the opposite end is secured an upwardly pro-
jecting arm or bar 9, which is adapted to work through
a slot or passage, 10, in the frame 1, as shown. The up-
per end of the arm 9 is bent at right angles, and to said
40 bent end is connected the upper end of a counterbal-
ancing spring 12, the lower end of which is connected
to the frame 1. The spring 12 is here shown as a light
coil spring, the tension of which is exerted to counter-
balance the weight 8 arranged on the opposite end of
45 the diaphragm plate 5. The plate 5 is substantially
triangular in shape and is provided with a plurality
of circular openings, 13, three of which are shown in the
present instance, and is the preferred number employed.
In the openings 13 are arranged diaphragms 14, which
50 may be formed of any suitable material, but which are
preferably formed or thin sheets of aluminium.
On the underside of the plate 5 adjacent to the
weighted end of the same is formed a downwardly pro-
jecting centrally disposed bearing stud, 14', the lower
55 end of which is bifurcated and adapted to receive the
inner end of a record engaging lever 15, said lever being
pivoted in the stud 14' by a pivot pin 16. The lever
15 is reduced in thickness substantially midway be-
tween its ends to form a spring construction for the in-
ner pivoted end of the lever, whereby the point 17 on 60
the outer end of the lever may readily engage and
follow the grooves on the record.
Formed on the upper edge of the inner portion of the
lever 15 is an upwardly projecting bearing point 18
upon which is mounted a thin aluminium transmission 65
disk, 19, by means of which the vibrations or move-
ments of the lever 15, caused by its engagement with
the grooves in the record, are transmitted to the dia-
phragms 14 in the plate 5. The disk 19 is provided on
its upper side adjacent to its outer edge with a series of 70
diaphragm engaging points, 20, which are arranged at
equal distances apart around the disk and in position
to be engaged with the center of each of the dia-
phragms, 14.
By providing the transmission disk 19, the vibra- 11
tions from the record are simultaneously imparted or
transmitted to the three diaphragms, thereby causing
the latter to vibrate and reproduce the sound as one
diaphragm, the sound vibrations thus produced from
the three diaphragms being greatly increased and 80
made more clear and distinct. The sound vibrations
from the diaphragms are conducted through the tubular
boss 6 into the sound transmitting horn, where it is
further amplified and increased in volume.
Connected to the underside of the plate 5, and adapt- 85
ed to bear upon the inner end of the lever 15, is a light
spring 21 which is adapted to hold the lever 15 in posi-
tion to support the transmission disk, 19, in engage-
ment with the diaphragms when the outer end of the
lever is not in engagement with or supported by the 90
record. The spring 12 connected to the arm 9 on the
end of the lever 15 is adapted to counterbalance the
weight 8 at the opposite end of the plate 5 and force the
point 17 on the outer end of the lever 15 downwardly
into engagement with the grooves on the record. 95
From the foregoing description, taken in connection
with the accompanying drawings, the construction and
operation of the invention may be readily understood
without requiring a more extended explanation.
Various changes in the form, proportion and the 100
minor details of construction may be resorted to with-
out departing from the principle or sacrificing any of
the advantages of this invention as defined in the ap-
pended claims.
Having fully described my invention, what I claim 105
as new and desire to secure by Letters-Patent, is:
1. A sound reproducer for graphophones, comprising a
pivotally mounted diaphragm plate, diaphragms arranged
in said plate, a record engaging lever pivotally mounted
on said plate, and a transmission disk supported by said HO
lover and held in engagement with said diaphragms, sub-
stantially as described.
2. A sound reproducer for graphophones, comprising a
867,821
pivotally mounted diaphragm plate, a weight arranged on
one end of said plate, a counterbalancing spring connected
to the opposite end thereof, a plurality of diaphragms ar-
ranged in said plate, a record engaging lever, and a sound
5 transmitting disk supported by said lever and held in
engagement with said diaphragms, substantially as de-
scribed.
:'.. A sound reproducer for graphophones. comprising a
horn, a diaphragm plate pivotally mounted on the lower
10 end of said horn, said plate having formed therein a plu-
rality of diaphragm openings, a plurality of diaphragms
arranged in said openings, a record engaging lever pivot-
ally mounted to the underside of said plate, a sound trans-
mission disk supported by said lever and held thereby in
15 operative engagement with said diaphragms, a record en-
gaging point on the outer end of said lever, and means to
force the latter downwardly to engage said point with the
grooves on the record, substantially as described.
4. A sound reproducer for graphophones, comprising a
20 horn, means to adjustably secure the end thereof in the
frame of the graphophone, a diaphragm plate pivotally
mounted on the lower end of said horn, said plate having
formed therein a plurality of diaphragm openings, dia-
phragms in said openings, a weight secured to one end of
said plate, a counterbalancing spring connected to the
other end thereof, a pivot stud on the underside of said
plate, a spring record engaging lever pivotally mounted in
said stud, a record engaging point on the outer end of
said levev. a bearing pin arranged upon the inner portion
of the lever, a sound transmitting disk supported upon said
bearing pin. diaphragm engaging points on said disk and
adapted to be engaged with the diaphragms in said plate,
and a spring to support said lever and disk when the
former is disengaged from" the record, substantially as
described.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set my hand in
presence of two subscribing witnesses.
25
30
35
,"*
WILLIAM HART.
Witnesses .
H. A. IlAKT.
T. J. Whitzel.
No. 867,836. PATENTED OCT. 8, 1907.
R. REVELL.
TRUMPET OR HORN OF SOUND REPRODUCING INSTRUMENTS.
APPLICATION TILED JULY 21, 1906.
ytcr. 1.
FtCf.d.
Fixy.4.
TT-JT
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
W**JL ffotortLL
ATTORNEYS
TH£ MORRIS PETERS CO.. WA1MINGTON, O. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ROLAND REVELL, OF WEST HAMPSTEAD, LONDON, ENGLAND, ASSIGNOR TO THOMAS
KNIGHT BARNARD, OF STROUD, ENGLAND.
TRUMPET OR HORN OF SOUND-REPRODUCING INSTRUMENTS.
No. 867,836.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed July 21, 1906, Serial No. 327,233.
Patented Oct. 8, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Roland Revell, a subject of
the King of Great Britain and Ireland, residing at
Shirland Lodge, Goldhurst Terrace, West Hampstead,
5 in the county of London, England, composer of music,
have invented certain new and useful Improvements
in Connection with the Trumpets or Horns of Sound-
Reproducing Instruments, of which the following is a
specification.
10 This invention relates to horns for sound repro-
ducing instruments, and particularly to deflectors for
such horns.
The object of my invention is to provide a satisfac-
tory deflector which may be attached at the mouth
15 of the horn and is so constructed as to afford an an-
nular aperture through which the sound issuing from
the horn is deflected practically horizontally in all
directions at once. In connection with the deflector,
I prefer to add also a sounding board which may, for
20 effect, be perforated.
In the accompanying drawings Figure 1 is a verti-
cal section of a horn provided with my deflector with
its accessory sounding board; Fig. 2 is a vertical sec-
tion of a horn showing my deflector without a sound-
25 ing board; Fig. 3 is a vertical section of a modified
form of my deflector; while Fig. 4 is a vertical section
of the same, provided with a sounding board.
At present the full power of sound from sound re-
producing instruments is only heard when a person is
30 in front of the trumpet, or horn, the sound waves
being driven almost in a direct line, or only radiating
to a limited extent, the result being that, if a sound
reproducing instrument employing a trumpet or horn
to increase the volume of sound, be played in a room,
35 and the person listening to the sound be directly in
front of the trumpet, or horn, the power or blast from
the trumpet or horn is generally too great to be pleas-
ant, and if a person be behind, or at the side of, the
trumpet or horn, that person does not hear the full
40 effect of the instrument, in consequence of the sound
waves being driven forward from the front or bell of
the trumpet or horn. The consequence is the vol-
ume of tone is very unequally distributed about the
room. My deflector distributes the sound waves
45 from such instruments more equally and also, to a
great extent, prevents the unpleasant blast which now
exists with the ordinary trumpet or horn.
Referring to the drawings, it will be seen that I
insert or mount inside or over, or both inside and
50 over, the mouth or bell of the trumpet or horn 1, a
bell-shaped cone or other deflector 2, so as to leave
an annular space for the passage of sound waves. The
said bell-shaped cone, or deflector, can be held in
position in or on the trumpet or horn by stays 3, or
other suitable means, which will prevent it from 55
entering too far into, or will support it above, the
mouth of the trumpet or horn. The effect of the said
cone or deflector is to cause the sound waves to pass
equally through the said annular passage and so be
better distributed. 60
Instead of fitting the trumpet or horn to the sound
reproducing instrument in a more or less horizontal
position, as has been hitherto customary, I prefer to
arrange the said trumpet or horn, in a vertical or
nearly vertical, position, with the opening of the bell 65
or large end of the trumpet or horn directed upwards.
The cone or deflector may be solid, or it may be
hollow, and it may be constructed of any suitable
material, such for example as metal, wood, celluloid,
or the like. ' If it be made hollow, it may be provided 70
with an opening, or openings 4, and then it will form
a sound chamber, or act as a soundboard, and im-
prove, or modify, the sound.
In Fig. 2 I have shown a trumpet or horn made
with a horizontally extended lip 5 upon which the 75
struts 3 support the deflector 2, which is made with
a small conical central part directed downwards at
the mouth of the trumpet, or horn 1, the outer part of
the deflector extending parallel with the lip 5.
The same trumpet or horn can, if desired, be iised 80
in recording, or an ordinary trumpet or horn may be
used for that purpose.
I claim as my invention
1. In combination with the trumpet or horn of a sound
reproducing instrument, a sound deflector arranged at the 85
mouth of the horn and secured to the latter and providing
an annular aperture through which the sound is projected
in all directions simultaneously in a plane practically at
right angles to that at which it would normally issue
from the horn. 90
2. In combination with the trumpet or horn of sound
reproducing instruments, a sound deflector arranged at the
mouth of the horn and secured to the latter and providing
an annular aperture through which the sound is projected
practically horizontally in all directions simultaneously. 95
3. In combination with the trumpet or horn for sound
reproducing instruments arranged to discharge the sound
in an approximately vertical direction, a sound deflector
arranged at the mouth of the horn and secured to the lat-
ter and providing an annular aperture through which the 100
sound is projected practically horizontally in all directions
simultaneously.
4. In combination with the trumpet or horn of sound
reproducing instruments, a sound deflector arranged at the
mouth of the horn and secured to the latter and providing 105
an annular aperture through which the saund is projected
in all directions simultaneously in a plane practically at
right angles to that at which it would normally issue from
the horn, and a sounding board cooperating with said de-
flector. 110
5. In combination with the trumpet or horn of sound
reproducing instruments, a sound deflector arranged at the
mouth of the horn and secured to the latter and providing
867,836
10
an annular aperture through which the sound is projected
in all directions simultaneously in a plane practically at
right angles to that at which it would normally issue
from the horn, and a perforated sounding hoard cooper-
ating with said deflector.
6. In combination with the trumpet or horn of a sound
reproducing instrument having a flared lip, a sound de-
flector arranged at the mouth of the horn and having its
deflecting surface substantially parallel to the lip of the
horn, and providing in connection therewith an annular
aperture through which the sound is projected in all di-
rections simultaneously in a plane practically at right
angles to that at which it would normally issue from the
horn.
In testimony whereof I have signed this specification in
the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
ROLAND REVELL.
Witnesses :
Alvesto S. Hogdb,
August Fugger.
15
No, 867,975. PATENTED OCT. 15, 1907.
W. H. HOTT.
METHOD OF MAKING MOLDED FLAT SOUND RECORDS.
APPLICATION PILED OOT. 17, 1906.
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THE NORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. O. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM HELM HOYT, OF WYOMING, NEW JERSEY.
METHOD OF MAKING MOLDED FLAT SOUND-RECORDS.
jtfo. 867,975.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed OctoDei 17, 1906. Serial No, 339,330.
Patented Oct. 15, 1907.
To all whom ii may concern:
Be it known that I, William Helm Hoyt, a citizen
of the United States, and a resident of Wyoming,
county of Essex, and State of New Jersey, have in-
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements in
Methods of Making Molded Flat Sound-Records, of
which the following is a specification.
My invention relates to methods for making molded
articles and particularly molded flat sound records for
10 talking machines and has for its object to cheapen the
cost of manufacture of such articles without impairing
the efficiency or wearing qualities thereof.
Reference is to be had to the accompanying drawing
in which
15 Figure 1 is a vertical section illustrating one of the
steps of my method; Fig. 2 is a vertical section show-
ing the mold employed, at a subsequent stage of the
process, the section being taken on line 2 — 2 of Fig. 3;
Fig. 3 is a plan view of such mold; and Fig. 4 is a
20 cross-section of part of a record made according to my
invention.
In manufacturing records or other articles accord-
ing to my improved method I first take a lot of stock
which I will call A, and which is composed of very
25 cheap material such as refined asphalt urn or resinous
material and form it into disks 1 of the required size
and thickness in any convenient manner, as for in-
stance by means of a suitable machine. Then I take
a second stock which I will call B and which is com-
30 posed of high-grade material and grind it into a very
fine powder. As an example of a material suitable
for this stock B, I will describe a body obtained by
mixing and heating so as to cause them to form a co-
herent mass, the following ingredients:
35 Shellac 40 parts (by weight),
Shoddy 6 "
Asbestos 5 "
Pigment 4 "
Clays 45 "
40 These clays may be a mixture of barytes, china clay,
pipe clay, etc. Thereupon I take a piece 2 of muslin
or canvas or other suitable material and place it on a
heating table 3 which may be of any customary con-
struction. A disk 1 made of the stock A is now taken
45 and one surface of said disk is covered with the pow-
dered B stock, as indicated at 4. Just enough pow-
dered B stock is used to cover the surface of the disk
evenly. I now place the disk made of A stock and
sprinkled with B stock on top of the muslin 2 on the
50 table 3 (heated by a gas burner 3" or otherwise) with
the powdered side upward and cover it with a pan
5 or other suitable article to confine the heat so that
the disk 1 quickly becomes soft or plastic. When the
disk has become sufficiently plastic the powdered B
55 stock and the disk of A stock become one coherent mass.
While in this state, I remove the disk from the heating
table by means of the muslin or other fabric, and place
it on the face of a matrix 6 in a mold 7 with the surface
of the disk to which the powdered B stock was applied
next to matrix face. I now remove the muslin or other 60
fabric which is only used as a convenient means for re-
moving the disk from the heating table, and place a
plate next to the disk. This plate preferably consists
of two members, the lower one of which 8 is of the same
size as the disk, while the upper member 9 is much 65
larger, being guided on pins 7b and 7°. The arrange-
ment is duplicated above the plate 9 in reverse order
the corresponding parts being designated by the same
reference numerals with the addition of the index ":l ".
Pressure is then applied and maintained until the 70
record disks have become cold after which said disks
are removed and are ready for use. The entire mold,
that is, both matrices 6 and 6a as well as the interme-
diate plate 9 and top plate 7a are heated before the
molding operation. I prefer to place some loose ma- 75
terial such as a hot soft lump (10 or 10a) of A stock or
other plastic material on the central portion of the disk
1 before the molding pressure is applied, so that this
lump may spread toward the periphery and in so doing
drive out the air from between the plate 8 or 8a and the 80
disk. In the finished article (Fig. 4) this material
forms a coating 11 on the side of the record disk 1 oppo-
site to that coated with B stock and containing the
record groove impressed by the matrix. Any suitable
construction may be employed for the mold, the draw- 85
ings show it provided with a centering pin 7b and guide
pins 7°.
The grooved face of my improved record which is
subjected to wear is thus composed of high-grade ma-
terial, while the remainder of the record is made of 90
comparatively cheap stock. This results in a record
with the same qualities as if the entire disk were made
of the best materials, while the cost of making such
record is reduced to a minimum.
Two records are made simultaneously with the ar- 95
rangement described, but when it is desired to make
only one record, the parts above the plate 9 are omitted,
and pressure is applied to said plate directly.
Old or worn records of the present kind may be used
as equivalents of the disks 1 made of A stock, such 100
old records being sprinkled with B stock and treated
as above described, thus resulting in a new and better
record. This also effects a big saving as by treating
old records in this manner the necessity for making
disks of A stock is avoided. In either case the disks 105
(whether old records or especially made) form a foun-
dation for the coating of powdered B stock.
Various modifications may be made without depart-
ing from the nature of my invention as defined in the
claims. HO
It will be understood that the relative sizes of va-
rious parts, and particularly those of the sound record
2
867,975
layers, have been considerably exaggerated in the draw-
ings, for the sake of clearness.
I claim
1. The herein described method of making flat molded
5 articles, which consists in applying to the upper surface of
a flat foundation which becomes plastic under the influ-
ence of heat, a layer of powdered material having like
properties, heating the foundation and said layer to cause
them to unite, then placing on the other surface of the
1Q foundation, near the center, some loose material of the
same character, and applying heat and pressure to cause
said loose material to expand and expel the air, and the en-
tire article to be molded.
2. The herein described method of making molded ar-
ticles, which consists in applying to the upper surface of
a foundation which becomes plastic under the influence of
heat, a layer of powdered material having like properties,
exposing both the foundation and the applied powdered
layer to heat to cause them to unite, and thereupon trans-
ferring the entire article to a mold and subjecting it to
pressure therein while hot.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my
name in the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
WILLIAM HELM HOYT.
Witnesses :
John Lotka,
John A. Kbhlenbeck.
15
20
No, 868,612.
PATENTED OCT. 15, 1907.
E. H. MOBLEY.
SOUND CONVEYING DEVICE.
APPLICATION PILED JAN. 8, 1907.
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
'J* &L~~ ^Jtt^Xy
r-js
e\
ATTORNEY
. NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D C,
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EDWIN II. MOBLEY, OF ARDSLEY, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO HAWTHORNE
& SHEBLE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, A CORPO-
RATION OF PENNSYLVANIA.
SOUND-CONVEYING DEVICE.
No. 868,612.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed January 8, 1907, Serial No. 351,344.
Patented Oct. 15, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Edwin H. Mobley, a citizen of
the United States, residing at Ardsley, in the county
of Montgomery- and State of Pennsylvania, have m-
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements in
Sound-Conveying Devices, of which the following is a
specification.
This invention relates to sound-conveying devices
and has reference, more particularly, to means where-
10 by the sound conveyed by the device can be modified
as desired as to tone, magnitude, etc.
The invention is of particular utility in connection
with talking machines both in recording sounds and in
reproducing the sounds recorded although the same
15 may be used in other connections, with highly bene-
ficial results.
It is well known that the best reproductions from
records of sounds of different character can be obtained
only by using mechanism specially adapted for the
20 reproduction of the particular sound, that is, a repro-
ducer which will give the most faithful reproduction
of a record of a vocal selection would give an inferior
reproduction of an orchestral or instrumental solo se-
lection. For this reason, in order to obtain the best
2 5 results it is necessary to have a number of reproducers
and to use one or another according to the character of
the record to be reproduced. Moreover, it has been
found practically impossible to make amplifying
horns and sound-boxes so near alike as to every part as
30 to give reproductions which are the same in tone,
pitch, resonance, etc. Also, in recording sounds, it
frequently happens that certain tones cause what is
known as '"blasting" and a faithful reproduction of
such a tone cannot be obtained:
35 The object of my invention is to provide a sound-
conveying device having adjustable means therein by
which the sounds conveyed by the device can be
modified and their volume, tone or pitch regulated at
will. In this way when the device is used to convey
40 sounds to be recorded to a recording diaphragm and
stylus, the objectionable blasting can be avoided by
an adjustment of the movable parts: also; when the
device is used to convey sounds reproduced, it is un-
necessary to substitute one reproducer for another
45 when changing from a record of one character to one of
another, and the slight differences in sound-boxes and
horns may be readily compensated for so that the most
faithful reproduction of the original sounds can be ob-
tained.
50 In the preferred embodiment of my invention adapt-
ed for use in connection with sound-reproducing means,
I provide a body located within the sound-conveying
tube leading from the reproducer and movable within
the tube so that its position determines the shape of
the interior of the tube, adjusting devices being pro- 55 '
vided whereby this body can be moved to and locked
in the desired position from outside the tube. By
means of such an adjustable modifier not only can the
pitch of the reproduced sound be regulated but also
its character can be changed from one which is rather 60
hollow and resonant to one which is much more sharp.
The preferred embodiment of my invention as used
for reproducing sound from a disk-record is illustrated
in the accompanying drawings in which
Figure 1 is an elevation of a portion of a talking ma- 65
chine, Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section of the tone-arm
thereof, inverted to better illustrate its shape, the sec-
tion being on line 2 — 2 of Fig. 3, and Fig. 3 is a trans-
verse section on line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2.
Referring to the drawings, 1 indicates the motor-box 70
of a talking machine having a motor therein driving a
vertical shaft on which the disk-shaped record 2 is
mounted. Secured to the side of the box is a coupling
member 3 having an opening through the upper por-
tion thereof. A tapering amplifying horn 4 is adapted 75
to be mounted on the upper end of the member 3, its
opening communicating with the opening in the coup-
ling member. Secured on the coupling near the other
end of the opening therethrough is a pin 5 on which is
supported the tone-arm 6. For this purpose the tone- 80
arm has a yoke 7 secured thereto on the arms of which
is horizontally pivoted a cross-head carrying a sleeve 8
adapted to fit over the pin 5. The end of the tone-arm
is arranged to telescope slightly with the coupling
member 3 as shown in Fig. 1. To the other end of the 85
tone-arm is secured the sound-box 9 having a needle
10 bearing in the groove in the record disk.
The construction of the tone-arm may be varied
somewhat depending on the construction of the ma-
chine with which it is used. It is here shown as a cy- 90
lindrical sheet metal tube 11 having one end contract-
ed at 12 to a considerably less diameter, and this small
end bent to a ninety degree curve and having the sound-
box secured to its end. Fitting tightly within the
small end of the tube is a curved tube 13, one end 95
thereof alining with the end of the tube 11 and the
other end extending a considerable distance within the
larger cylindrical portion 11. The tubes 11 and 13 con-
stituting the tone-arm thus form two overlapping sec-
tions, preferably of circular cross-section and one of 100
larger diameter than the other.
Within the section 11 is located the sound-modifying
device consisting of an annular member movable axially
of the section. This device may be formed of a tube
14, a sleeve 15 thereon having integral outwardly- 105
turned flanges at its ends and gaskets 16 on this sleeve.
868,612
To provide for movement of the device, I provide a
slot 17 in the tone-arm and a set-screw 18 extending
through this slot and into a threaded opening in sleeve
15 and tube 14. Preferably a slide 19 is provided be-
5 tween the head of the screw 18 and tube 11 to close and
conceal slot 17.
The interior diameter of the modifying device may
be substantially the same as the exterior diameter of
the tube 13 so that movement of the modifier serves to
10 extend the smaller section of the tone-arm. Or, if de-
sired, the interior of the modifier may be of a diameter
greater than the exterior diameter of tube 13 but of
less diameter than the tube 11 so that the modifier con-
stitutes a third section of the tone-arm, the three sec-
15 tions being of progressively increasing diameter. In
the latter case, the end of tube 14 toward the sound-box
is contracted to closely encircle tube 13. Since the
end of the tube 13 extends into the tube 11 the modi-
fier can be moved over it a short distance to telescope
20 therewith.
By adjusting the modifier along the tone-arm the
character of the sound of the reproduction can be va-
ried as desired, thus making it possible to obtain a re-
production approaching very closely the sound record-
25 ed. The movement of the modifier serves to change
the relative lengths of the two sections of the tone-arm
or to increase or decrease the length of a third section
of a size between the other two sections. By increas-
ing the length of the section 13 the movement of the
30 modifier can be made to insert or eliminate the third
section of intermediate size. With the construction
illustrated, movement of the modifier to the right in
Fig. 1 makes the sound more hollow and movement to
the left makes it more sharp.
3 5 Having described my invention what I claim as new
and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the United
States is:
1. A sound-conveying device comprising a tube having
two sections therein, one of greater size than the other
40 and a tubular sound-modifier located within said tube with
its walls lying close to the walls thereof and movable to in-
crease or decrease the effective length of one of said sec-
tions, substantially as described.
2. A sound-conveying device comprising a tube having
45 two cylindrical sections therein, one of greater diameter
than the other and an annular sound-modifier located
within said tube and movable to increase or decrease the
effective length of one of said sections, substantially as de-
scribed.
50 3. A sound-cpnveying device comprising a tube having
two sections therein, one of grealer size than the other,
and a sound-modifier movable within said larger section
adjacent to the end of the smaller, substantially as de-
scribed.
4. A sound-conveying device comprising a tube having 55
two sections therein, one of greater size than the other,
and a sound-modifier located within said larger section
and movable therein adjacent to the end of the smaller
section to increase or decrease the effective length of the
smaller section, substantially as described. 60
5. A sound-conveying device comprising a tube having
two over-lapping sections therein one of greater size than
the other and an annular sound-modifier movable within
said larger section and adapted to have the end of said
smaller section telescope therewith, substantially as de- 05
scribed.
6. A sound-conveying device comprising a tube having
two sections therein one of greater size than the other, a
sound-modifier located within said tube, and means oper-
ated from outside the tube for moving said device to in- 70
crease and decrease the- effective length of one of said
seel ions, substantially as described.
7. A sound-conveying device comprising a tube having
two cylindrical sections therein one of greater diameter
than the other, an annular sound-modifier located within 7 5
said larger section and a set-screw extending through a
slot in the wall of said larger section and into said modi-
fier, substantially as described.
8. A sound-conveying device comprising a tube having
two overlapping sections therein one of larger diameter 80
than the other, an annular sound-modifier movable within
s:iid larger section adjacent to the end of the smaller sec-
tion and adapted to telescope with the end of the smaller
section, and a set-screw extending through a slot in flic
wall of the larger section and into said modifier, substan- 85
tiaily as described.
9. A sound-conveying device comprising a tube, a tubu-
lar member located wholly within the walls of the tube and
having an imperforate wall, said member being of sub-
stantially uniform, internal and external, effective diaiae- 90
fer, and means for moving said member axially of said tube
from outside the tube, substantially as described.
10. A sound-conveying device comprising a tube, a tubu-
lar member of substantially uniform, internal and ex-
ternal, effective diameter located wholly within the walls 95
of the tube, its walls lying close to the walls of the tube,
and means outside the tube for moving said member
axially of the tube, substantially as described.
11. In a talking machine, a tone-arm, a sound-box s,'
cured to one end thereof, a tubular member fitting snugly 10C
within the tone-arm, and means for moving the member
axially thereof from outside the tone-arm, substantially as
described.
12. In a talking machine, a tone-arm having two por-
tions, one of greater size than the other, a sound box se- 105
cured to the end of the smaller portion, and an annular
member movable axially within the larger portion, sub-
stantially as described.
This specification signed and witnessed this 2 day of
January, 1907.
EDWIN H. MOBLEY.
Witnesses :
II. Meier,
K. Frost.
No. 868,771.
PATENTED OCT. 22, 1907.
R. L. GIBSON.
SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED OOT. 31, 1906.
fe^£^^^^
F/GJ
FIG.Q.
F/G.S
Attest
a?*
Inventor
VENOIRIS PETERS CO , WASHINGTON, DC.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ROBERT L. GIBSON, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINE.
No. 868,771.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed October 31, 1906. Serial No. 341,393.
Patented Oct. 22, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Robert L. Gibson, of the city
and county of Philadelphia, State of Pennsylvania,
have invented an Improvement in Sound-Reproduc-
ing Machines, of which the following is a specification.
My invention has reference to sound reproducing
machines and consists of certain improvements which
are fully set forth in the following specihcation and
shown in the accompanying drawings which form part
thereof.
The object of my invention is to provide a sound
reproducing machine which shall cause a forced cur-
krent of air to be put into sonorous vibration under the
application of a reed or reeds and a control valve
15 which is vibrated by the stylus, in turn put into a
state of vibration by the traveling record tablet.
Heretofore sound has been reproduced by causing a
blast of air to be forced through the amplifier or horn,
and during its passage interrupting the uniformity of
20 its flow by the action of a valve vibrated by the stylus.
The objection experienced by this type of machine
has been that the sonorous sound necessitates a con-
tinuous flow of the air through the valve in large vol-
ume and thereby consumes a large amount of air.
25 As the air has to be forced by a motor, the great quan-
tity of air required to flow through the open valve
structure makes the machine expensive to operate
and costly to make on account of the size and strength
of the motor and blower required.
30 More specifically, my object is to reduce the quan-
tity of air necessary for circulation and thereby reduce
the cost of operation. My object is further to reduce
the cost of the machine and at the same time produce
a more sonorous and pleasing tone to the sounds
35 emitted.
In carrying out my invention, I provide a continu-
ous air passage from a blower to the horn or amplifier,
and in said passage I interpose a reed or reeds free to.
vibrate and also a valve controlled by the record tablet
40 through the stylus, which valve controls the pulsa-
tions of air passing to the reed or reeds in accordance
with the amplitude of the vibration of the stylus.
My invention also comprehends details of construc-
tion which, together with the features above specified,
45 will be better understood by reference to the accom-
panying drawings in which: ■
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of a sound repro-
ducing mechanism embodying my invention; Fig. 2
is a transverse section on line 2 — 2; and Fig. 3 is a
50 plan view of the reed portion removed showing a mul-
tiple reed arrangement.
A is the air tube on which is usually the swinging
tubular arm and connects with the horn or amplifier
in the ordinary way. The end of this arm has a head
55 containing a balanced valve E which is arranged be-
tween the heads F F. The valve disks and heads
have apertures or slots e and / respectively to control
the passage of air.
Between the heads F F is a chamber K in which the
valve oscillates and this is supplied with air under 60
pressure by a pipe leading from any suitable source of
air such as a blower. The chamber L on one side of
one of the heads F communicates with the chamber
M on the opposite side of the other of the heads by the
passageway N or otherwise as desired. 65
The valve has an oblique shaft P journaled in the
head and is provided on the outside with a needle or
style clamp H which holds the needle or point I.
This point of the stylus traverses the groove of the
record tablet J and is thereby vibrated and transmits 70
such vibrations to the valve E which permits greater
or less air to pass through the apertures e f in accord-
ance with the amplitude of the vibrations of the stylus.
The air passes through the valve in puffs of greater
or less strength and is received in the air chamber L 75
of the tube A and from this as a receiver the air flows
through a reed or reeds C to the horn or amplifier (not
shown). The reed structure consists of a perforated
partition or wall D, preferably obliquely across the
tube and the perforations B are covered with the 80
reeds secured at one end. The reeds may be one or
more in number, Fig. 3 indicating several. If desired,
these reeds may be different so that the timbre or
tone may be varied in different instruments which
will impart a more sonorous or rich effect to the sound. 85
The vibration of the reed while giving the richness to
the tone and also sustains the sound, the real cause
for difference hi rate of vibration is the valve, and the
difference in rate of vibration is commensurate with
the vibrations of the stylus. By this construction I 90
am enabled to employ a closely fitting valve and hence
avoid objectionable leak of air and consequently op-
erate the instrument with less power and expense.
I do not restrict myself to the details of construction
herein set out as they may be changed or modified to 95
suit any particular design of machine to which the
improvements are applied.
Having now described my invention, what I claim
as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent is:
1. In a sound reproducing machine, a tube for the pas- 100
sage of a current of air under pressure, combined with a
valve to control the flow of air, a stylus to operate the
valve, and a reed through which the air escapes after
leaving the valve.
2. In a sound reproducing machine, a tube for the pas- 10c"
sage of a current of air under pressure, combined with a
valve to control the flow of air, a stylus to operate the
valve, and a reed structure comprising a plurality of reeds
through which the air escapes after leaving the valve.
3. In a sound reproducing machine, a tube for the pas- 110
sage of a current of air under pressure, combined with a
valve to control the flow of air, a stylus to operate the
valve, and a reed structure comprising a plurality of reeds
of different rates of vibration through which the air es-
capes after leaving the valve. 115
868,771
4. In a sound reproducing machine, a tube through
which a current of air is forced under pressure, a closely
fitting balanced valve, a stylus to move the valve, and a
reed structure through which the air is caused to pass af-
5 ter leaving the valve and before it escapes to the atmos-
phere.
5. In a sound reproducing machine, a tube for the pas-
sage of a current of air under pressure, combined with a
valve to control the flow of air, a stylus to operate the
10 valve, a reed through which the air escapes after leaving
the valve, and an air chamber between the reed and valve.
6. In a sound reproducing machine, a tube through
which a current of air is forced under pressure, a valve
to cause the air to flow in variable blasts, a stylus to con-
15 trol the valve, and means for producing a vibration of the
air after it leaves the valve.
7. In a sound reproducing machine, a tube through
which a current of air is forced under pressure, a valve to
cause the air to flow in variable blasts, a stylus to control
20 rne valve, mechanical means for producing a vibration of
the air after it leaves the valve, and an air chamber be-
tween the valve and mechanical means.
8. The method of reproducing sound which consists in
creating a forced current of air, interrupting said current
of air in the form of blasts in accord with sound articula- 25
tions, and causing said blasts of -air to take on a sonorous
tone by passing in contact with and vibrating a reed.
9. The method of reproducing sound which consists in
creating a forced current of air, interrupting said current
of air in the form of blasts of variable strength and dura- 30
tion in accord with sound articulations, and causing said
blasts of air to take on a sonorous tone by impressing upon
them a predetermined rate of vibration.
10. The method of reproducing sonorous sounds which
consists in producing impulses in a current of air in ac- 35
cordance with the sound articulations to be reproduced and
changing the character of the tone by impressing upon
said impulses of air vibrations of a predetermined fixed
rate.
In testimony of which invention, I hereunto set my 40
hand.
ROBERT L. GIBSON.
Witnesses :
R. M. Kelly,
M. F. Driscoll.
No. 869,288.
PATENTED OCT. 29, 1907.
N. BALDWIN.
SOUND AMPLIFIER.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 21, 1907.
3 8HEETS-SHEET 1.
Witnesses.
Inventor.
By
Cft J. @hJL/?VAA4^
Attorneys
THE MORRIS PETERS CO-, WASHINGTON. D. C
I
No. 869,288.
PATENTED OCT. 29, 1907.
N. BALDWIN.
SOUND AMPLIFIER.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 21, 1907.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
JjjaSg" 58 J92J
'23^ 24;#1?F)
<J? Jf Cif(jl^hujt^-^
Attorneys
r
THE HORRIS PETERS CO.. V/ASHINCTON, D. C.
No. 869,288.
PATENTED OCT. 29, 1907.
N. BALDWIN.
SOUND AMPLIFIER.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 21, 1807.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
5. -Fzg.fi
?3 — CM A
"■m
\-s
—fa
WITNESSES:
By
cov^y
Inventor.
y
Attorneys
HE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASMIHCTOK. 0. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
NATHANIEL BALDWIN, OF HEBER, UTAH.
SOUND-AMPLIFIER.
No. 869,288.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Amilication filed June 21, 1907. Serial No, 380,145.
Patented Oct. 29, 1907.
To all tvhom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Nathaniel Baldwin, a citizen
of the United States, residing at Heber, in the county
of Wasatch and State of Utah, have invented a new and
5 useful Sound-Amplifier, of which the following is a
specification.
This invention has reference to improvements in
sound amplifiers of the type wherein the flow of a
stream of fluid under pressure is modified by and in ac-
10 cordance with sound waves either produced directly
by the original source of sound, or through the inter-
mediary of a record of sounds, or through sound pro-
duced telephonically.
The invention is applicable as a telephone relay,
15 whereby sounds weakly reproduced by a telephone
receiver are greatly magnified or intensified or ampli-
fied and are then caused to act upon a telephonic
transmitter, to be again reproduced by a suitable tele-
phonic receiver at a distant point.
20 The invention is also applicable for the intensified
and magnified reproduction of recorded sounds with-
out appreciable loss of purity or quality of tone and
with greatly increased volume. And the invention is
likewise applicable for the megaphonic production of
25 sounds of largely increased volume over and above the
original source.
The invention is also adapted to the recording of
sounds by greatly augmenting the sounds, which may
then be recorded in the ordinary manner.
30 The invention comprises a valve interposed in the
path of a stream of fluid under pressure, whether the
same be air, or steam, or any other suitable fluid, of
which air may be taken as an example, and this valve
is so mounted as to be balanced in said air stream and
35 thus offer no resistance except that of its own inertia to
the forces tending to move the valve, which forces are
in the form of sound waves whether produced directly
from the original source, or through the intermediary
of a sound record, or by a telephonic receiver. In fact,
40 the valve may be operated by a direct connection to a
suitable armature placed opposite the poles of a prop-
erly constructed telephonic receiver, so that the direct
action of the sound waves may be entirely eliminated.
The invention comprises in addition to such a bal-
45 anced valve other means necessary for the adaptation
of such valve to the several purposes stated, and in
order that the invention may be fully understood
these various structures will be described in detail with
reference to the accompanying drawings, forming a
50 part of this specification, in which, —
Figure 1 is a sectional view through one form of the
structure; Fig. 2 is a similar section, with parts in ele-
vation, through another form of the structure; Fig. 3 is
a view similar to that shown in Fig. 2, but illustrating
a somewhat different type of structure from that shown 55
in Fig. 2; Fig. 4 is a detail view of one of the valves;
Fig. 5 is a horizontal longitudinal section through the
air valve mechanism; Fig. 6 is a cross section through
the same; Figs. 7 and 8 are modified forms of connection
for the air and sound duct leading away from the valve; 60
and Figs. 9 to 14 are modified forms of valves and valve
seats'.
There is shown in Fig. 1 a structure provided with
means for reproducing recorded sounds with greatly
•enlarged volume, but the same structure may be used 65
for other purposes, as will appear further on. There is
shown a casing 1 having one end reduced and terminat-
ing in a threaded nipple 2 where there may be attached
a pipe coming from a source of compressed fluid supply,
such, for instance, as a reservoir of compressed air. 70
While steam and other fluids under pressure may be
used in connection with the present invention, for the
sake of simplicity of description reference will be made
hereinafter only to compressed air, with the under-
standing that such reference is to embrace any suitable 75
fluid under pressure.
The casing 1 is open at the end remote from the nip-
ple 2 and there receives another casing 3 fitting snugly
into the casing 1, to which it may be secured in any
suitable manner. This casing 3 contains a central 80
chamber 4 on opposite walls of which are formed annu-
lar ports 5 — 6 and central to each of these ports another
port 7 . The annulus surrounding the port 7 is supported
by suitable bridge pieces, as shown in Fig. 5. The
walls 8 of the chamber 4 containing the ports, 5, 6 and 7 85
are suitably flattened so that the ports lie in true planes.
That end of the casing 3 facing the nipple end of the
casing 1 is open, as indicated, while the other end be-
tween the outer walls of the casing 3 and the chamber 4
is closed, as indicated at 9. The chamber 4 extends to 90
a point about coincident with the open end of the casing
3 and there is closed by a wall 11, or otherwise, while the
other end of the chamber 4 is continued beyond the end
wall 9 and is ultimately formed into a cylindrical neck
12 for the reception of an amplifying horn 13, which 95
may be of the ordinary type used in sound reproducing
machines. All the corners of the chamber 4 are
rounded so that there may be no sharp angles to give
rise to hissing and other disturbing sounds.
Between the walls 8 — 8 of the chamber 4 is a longi- 100
tudinal deflector plate 14 suitably mounted in the end
wall 15. The purpose of this deflector plate will ap-
pear further on.
On the inner face of the wall 8 through which the
port 5 and its corresponding port 7 extend and surround- 105
ing both of these ports are formed ribs 1 0 terminating in
practically sharp edges, and on the outer face of the wall
8 through which the port G and its corresponding port 7
S
869,288
extend, and surrounding both of these ports, are other
similar ribs 16, likewise terminating in sharp edges.
These ribs 16 have their edges carefully machined to
true planes, and adjacent to these ribs are mounted 1 w< i
5 valves 17 — 18, each composed of a central hub 19 from
which radiate arms 20. The hub 19 carries a disk 21,
ar.d the arms 20 carry at their outer ends an annulus 22.
The disk 21 and the annulus- 22 constitute the valve
faces, while the ribs 16 constitute valve scats. The
1 0 disk 21 is of sufficient size to cover the port 7, while the
annulus 22 is of sufficient size to bridge the distance be-
tween the ribs 16 and the corresponding port 5 or 6.
In order that the valve seats may be properly turned
or machined, the several walls of the chamber 4 may be
15 made of separate pieces, afterward soldered or brazed
together or otherwise joined.
The two valves 17 and 18 are mounted upon a valve
rod 23 extending centrally through the two ports 7 and
a 'so through a small perforation in the plate 14. This
20 red 23 likewise extends through small perforations 24 in
tie outer walls of the cylinder 3. The valve rod 23 is
carried near each end exterior to the cylinder 3 by
springs 25 — 25 fast at one end on the casing ] .
Assuming, now, that the valves 17 and 18 are so ad-
25 justed, in a manner to be hereinafter described, that
they are in proper relation to the ports 5, 6 and 7 and
oi e equally distant from those ports but actually in very
close relation thereto. A stream of air under pressure
entering the casing 1 will flow through the ports 5 and
30 7 upon the valve 17, tending to force the same away
from the corresponding ribs 16. At the same time the
compressed air will tend to force the valve 18 against
the ribs 16 surrounding the ports 6 and 7. There is
therefore created a balance of pressure on these two
35 valves and they will remain in indifferent positions
with relation to the ports 5, 6 and 7 because of the
equalized pressure and their fixed connection through
the rod 23. Now, let it be assumed that the valve rod
23 is moved longitudinally in a direction to close the
4 0 valves; it will be seen that the passage of air through the
ports 5, 6 and 7 will be throttled to an extent commen-
surate with the closure of the valves. Now, again,
suppose that the valve rod 23 is moved in a direction to
move the valves away from their seats; it will, of course,
45 be seen that there is a freer passage for the air through
the ports 5, 6 and 7. During this time, the air pressure
being equally distributed in a manner to tend to actu-
ate the valves in opposite directions, the air pressure
will have no effect whatever upon these valves to either
50 open or close them, and, therefore, any force acting
upon the rod 23 will meet no resistance except the in-
ertia due to the weight of these valves, and this may be
very small . If. now, the valve rod 23 receives impulses
corresponding to sound wave vibrations, the valves 17
55 and 18 will participate in such vibration and will only
offer such resistance as their weight may impose.
When the valves are actuated by sound vibrations
the air stream flowing through the ports 5 6 and 7 will
be varied in accordance with these vibrations with the
60 result that sounds corresponding in the minutest par-
ticular to the vibrations imparted to the valves 17 and
18 will be produced, but with an intensity commen-
surate with the air pressure. Thus it is < uiie pi ssihle
1(.) prcduce frcm weak si urds or sound records where
oo the recorded waves are of little amplitude, or from
greatly attenuated electric impulses received tele-
phonically, a volume of sound exceeding in intensity
the original sound produced.
The casing 1 and casing 3 are supported upon an an-
nulus 26, suitably shaped for the purpose, and this an- 70
nulus may be carried by a ring 27 secured to the annu-
lus by a set or thumb-screw 28 and provided with legs
29 fast to a fixed structure (not shown), or it may be
seated in the carriage of a phonographic reproducing
machine, as will hereinafter appear. Pivotally secured 75
at one end to the annulus 26 is an arm 30. the other end
of which is provided with a perforation 31 for the pas-
sage of a screw 32 engaging a nut formed in the annulus
26. so that the said arm may have a limited play to and
from the annulus but may not move away therefrom to 80
too great an extent. Secured to the arm 30 is a lever 33
connected at one end by a link 34 to the corresponding
end of the valve rod 23. and at the other end carrying a
reproducing stylus or jewel 35 arranged in operative re-
lation to a cylinder 36 from which the record may be re- 85
produced..
Secured to the casing 3 diametrically opposite the an-
nulus 26 is a bracket 37 carrying one end of a spring 38,
the other end of which is attached to a ring 39 in which
is seated a diaphragm 40 attached to the valve rod 23 by 90
a link 41 at the end of the valve rod remote from the
point of connection therewith of the link 34. The con-
nection between the link 41 and rod 23 may be a sol-
dered connection, so that there may be no lost motion
at this point but still the rod and link may be easily dis- 95
connected when desired, by simply melting the solder.
The diaphragm 40 is secured in the ring 39 by a follower
42 screwed into said ring, and this follower 42 is pro-
vided with a neck 43 receiving the small end of a horn
44, similar to the horns used on sound reproducing ma- 100
chines.
If it be desired to utter sounds into the horn 44 and
have the same greatly augmented through the horn 13,
it is then only necessary to introduce compressed air
into the casing 1. when the several operations noted will 105
be performed. If it is simply desirable to produce a
megaphonic effect of sounds uttered into the horn 44,
the cylinder 36 may be omitted and the stylus 35 and
parts connected therewith up to the valve rod 23 are
then disconnected, the link 34 being easily removed 110
from the lower end of the rod 23 into which it is simply
hooked. By this means a person speaking in an ordi-
nary tone of voice may have his speech so magnified as
to be heard at great distances far exceeding the range
( if an ordinary megaphone. 115
In order to provide a delicate adjustment for the
valves 17 and 18 the ring 39 is provided on the side op-
posite the spring 38 with an ear 45 through which ex-
tends a screw-threaded post 46 rising from the casing 1.
Between the ear 45 and the casing 1 the post 46 carries 120
an adjusting nut 47 back of which is a clamp nut 48. and
on the side of the ear 45 away from the nut 47 the post. 46
carries another adjusting nut 49 provided on one side
with a sleeve 50 within which is a spring 51 bearing at
one end against the ear 45 and at the other end against 125
the adjusting nut 49. There is also provided a clamp
nut 52 for the adjusting nut 49. By suitably manipu-
lating the nuts -17 and 49 the ring 39 may he adjus'e:! in
such manner <is to move the valves 17 and 18 to or from
the seats formed by the ribs 16. and this adjustment 130
869,288
may be performed with great delicacy, due to the large
size of the adjusting nuts and the long leverage be-
tween the spring 38 and the ear 45. This is by no
means the only form of adjustment that may be used,
5 for other adjusting means may be provided if found to
be of sufficient delicacy for the purpose.
If the air streams flowing through the ports 5 and 6
and their corresponding ports 7 should enter the cham-
ber 4 in opposite directions, there would be a likelihood
10 of interference and the unbalancing of the two valves by
the incoming air stream striking the back of the valve
17. In order to avoid this the deflector 14 is provided ,
so that these air streams are diverted toward the mouth
of the chamber 4 without any possibility of the stream
15 entering through the port 6 striking the valve 17 and
thus tending to cause the closure of the valves.
Referring now, to Fig. 2. the structure therein shown
is similar in most respects to that shown in Fig. 1. but
the connections for reproducing recorded sounds are
20 omitted and the amplifier 13 is also omitted. In the
structure shown in this figure the chamber 4 communi-
cates directly with a neck 53 carried by the casing of a
microphonic transmitter 54 of known construction, the
neck 53 taking the place of the ordinary mouthpiece of
?5 such microphone. There is this difference, however,
that the neck 53 is smaller than the opening in the cap
of the casing 54, so that there is an annular opening
55 from the interior of the casing of the microphone 54
to the exterior thereof, while bridge pieces 56, suitably
30 disposed, serve to center the neck 53 in the opening 55.
A nut 57 serves to modify the open end of the passage
55 as may be desired.
Now, by screwing into the ring 39 an ordinary tele-
phone receiver with the cap removed therefrom and the
35 telephone-receiver diaphragm connected to the rod 23
by a link 41, electric impulses corresponding to sound
waves coming over the line, even if greatly attenuated,
will be sufficient to actuate the valves 17 and 18 so as to
modify the air current entering the casing 3 and thus
40 cause sounds of greatly magnified intensity to impinge
upon the diaphragm of the transmitter 54, to be thereby
transmitted to great distances. This provides a form of
telephone relay of practical utility. By using a speak-
ing diaphragm 40 with cap 42 and mouthpiece 44, all as
45 shown in Fig. 2, the instrument is adapted to increase
the power of the telephone transmitter, and this is an
important adaptation of the invention.
In Fig. 3 the structure is similar to that shown in
Fig. 1, except that the diaphragm 40 is replaced by an
50 annul us 58 carrying a spring arm 59, radially disposed
and connected by a link 41 to the rod 23. The struc-
ture shown in this figure is particularly adapted for the
reproduction of recorded sounds with greatly augmented
volume, and in this case the annulus 26 may be seated
55 in the carriage of a phonographic reproducing machine.
This carriage is conventionally represented at 60.
There are other adaptations of the invention which
are not shown and need not be specifically mentioned,
it being understood that the invention is adapted to be
60 used in any connection where it is desirable to augment
sounds, either as originally produced, or as transmitted
through the instrumentalities comprised in the inven-
tion, or reproduced from a suitable record.
With the present invention several sound-augment-
65 ing mechanisms may be used in tandem, so that the
augmented sound from one instrumentality may be
caused to act upon the valve of the next one in order
to correspondingly increase its amplitude of vibration,
and so on through as many valves as may be desired.
By this means it is possible to replace steam whistles 70
or other signals by a series of two or three or more valves
operated upon one by the other in order until the final
resultant sound is many times the volume of the origi-
nal sound. For this purpose the chamber 4 of one in-
strument such as shown in Fig. 1 may be connected 75
directly to the neck 43 of the next instrument, and the
chamber 4 of the second instrument to the neck 43 of
the third instrument, and so on, with, if need be, in-
creasing air pressure in the casing 1 of each succeeding
instrument. 80
It may be noted that the sum of the circumferences
of the ribs 16 will be great as compared with the dimen-
sions of the valves; consequently, when a high air pres-
sure is used slight movements of the valves will make
a great change in the amount of air which passes through 85
the ports. There is thus produced a resultant sound'
many times louder than would be produced by the
original sound or the vibrations corresponding to sound
waves.
It is also within the scope of the present invention 90
to use the telephone receiver as described with refer-
ence to Fig. 2, and omit the stylus 35 and the parts di-
rectly coacting therewith, so that impulses telephonic-
ally received may be converted by the action of the
compressed air and the valves, into sounds of greatly 95
augmented volume which may be emitted through the
horn 13 and be distinctly audible to large audiences.
If, in the structure shown in Fig. 2, the telephonic
transmitter 54 be replaced by a phonographic recorder,
a much greater amplitude of vibration, and, conse- 100
quently, a much more pronounced record of the sounds
will be made, or, because of the greater force acting
upon the diaphragm of the reproducer, harder and more
durable substances may be used for the recording face
of the record tablet. 105
While I have described the valves as covering a cen-
tral opening 7 and one concentric opening outside of
the same, which for some results is quite sufficient, or
even the opening 7 alone might be used, still for other
results a number of concentric openings 5 and 6 may be 110
necessary for the best effect. Also, the air pressure
may be varied and the results obtained be correspond- -
ingly changed. Again, I may use various other forms
of valves and valve openings. For instance, in Figs.
9 and 10 is shown a valve opening 61 wherein there are 115
a number of radial extensions of the central opening
and the valve 62 is correspondingly shaped. In Fig.
11 a number of single elongated openings 63 are shown
arranged parallel to each other in a continuous series,
and in Fig. 12 there is shown a number of elongated 120
valves 64 connected by a bar 65 so as to match the open-
ings 63. In Fig. 13 there is a central opening 66 and a
circular series of openings 67 surrounding the same and
equi-distant from the central opening, while a number
of disk valves 68 correspondingly mounted upon a spi- 125
der 69 may be opposed to these valve openings. It
will be understood, of course, that the valves 62, 64 and
68 are connected together in pairs by the rod 23 as in
the other figures of the drawings. From this it will be
seen that the invention is not limited to any special 130
869,288
type of valve, but the valve systems may assume a
great variety of forms in addition to those shown in the
drawings.
In order that the neck 12 may be adapted to all the
5 several structures intended to be carried thereby, it
may be formed as shown in Fig. 7 wherein the inner
surface of the outer end of this neck is tapered, as shown
at 70, and receives a correspondingly socketed bell 71
having a continuation 72 which may carry the micro-
10 phonic element 54, or the horn 13, or any other struc-
ture adapted to this portion of the machine.
In Fig. 8 is shown a somewhat different construction
from that shown in Fig. 7, wherein the neck 12 has an
inner tapered wall 70 and an outer tapered wall 73.
15 Engaging the tapered wall 70 is the beveled end of a
tube 74 which may constitute a portion of the micro-
phone 54 or horn 13 or other part, while a sleeve 75 sur-
rounding the tube 74 and secured thereto in anysuit-
able manner may have a tapered bell portion 76 receiv-
20 ing the tapered wall 73 of the end of the neck 12.
By means of the structures shown in Figs. 7 and 8,
or some similar connection, the air valve structure may
be adapted to receive interchangeably the microphonic
element, or the horn, or a phonographic recorder, or,
25 in fact, any acoustic element that may be adapted to
the machine.
In the drawings there has been no attempt made to
show the parts in accurate proportions, and it will be
understood that the proportions may be varied from
30 those shown in the drawings in accordance with the
uses to which the instrument is to be put.
I claim: —
1. A sound-augmenting device comprising a conduit for
fluid under pressure, two connected valves in said conduit
35 for varying the flow of the fluid therethrough, one sub-
jected to the fluid pressure on one side and the other sub-
jected to an equal fluid pressure on the other side, and
means for moving said valves to vary the" flow of fluid
through the conduit in accordance with sound-wTave vibra-
40 tions.
2. A sound - augmenting device comprising a suitable
conduit for fluid under pressure, annular ports in said
conduit, annular valve seats surrounding said ports, an-
nular, balanced valves in operative relation to said valve
45 seats, and means for moving said valves to and from the
valve seats to vary the flow of fluid through the ports in
accordance with sound-wave vibrations.
3. A sound-augmenting device comprising a two-part
conduit for the passage of fluid under pressure, oppositely
50 located ports constituting the means of communication
from one part of the conduit to the other, two connected
valves, one located in one part of the conduit and the other
in the other part of the conduit in operative relation to
the valve seats, and means for moving said valves in
accordance with sound-wave vibrations.
4. A sound-augmenting device comprising a conduit
adapted to receive fluid under pressure, another conduit
interior to the first-named conduit, annular ports between
the two conduits, valve seats bordering said ports, one
set of seats extending into one conduit and the other set
of seits extending into the other conduit, annular valves
in operative relation to the valve seats, and means for
operating said valves in unison to vary the flow of fluid
through the ports in accordance with sound-wave vibra-
tions.
.">. A sound-augmenting device comprising a conduit for
fluid under pressure, two connected valves in said conduit
for varying the flow of the fluid therethrough and having
opposed faces subjected to equal fluid pressure, elastic
supports for the valves, and means for actuating said
valves in accordance with sound wave vibrations.
6. A sound-augmenting device comprising a conduit for
fluid under pressure, two connected valves in said conduit
for varying the flow of the fluid therethrough and having
opposed faces subjected to equal fluid pressure, elastic
supports for the valves, and adjusting means for regulat-
ing the position of the valves.
7. A sound-augmenting device comprising a conduit for
fluid under pressure, balanced valve mechanism for con-
trolling the flow of fluid through the conduit, elastic
supports for the valve mechanism, adjusting means con-
netted to the valve mechanism, said means being elas-
tically supported at one end and having a screw adjust-
ment at the other end, and means for actuating the valves
in accordance with sound-wave vibrations.
8. In a sound-augmenting device, a two-part conduit for
fluid under pressure, two connected valves having the
same phase of movement and one located in one part of the
conduit and the other in the other part of the conduit and
subjected to the flow of the fluid under pressure on oppo-
site sides, a deflector in the part of the conduit receiving
the fluid from the other part of the conduit and located
to divert the incoming fluid away from the adjacent valve,
and means for actuating the valve mechanism in accord-
ance with sound-wave vibrations.
0. A means for reproducing recorded sounds comprising
a conduit for fluid under pressure, a -balanced valve
mechanism therein for controlling the flow of the fluid
through said conduit, phonographic reproducer mechan-
ism connected with the said valve mechanism and adapted
to be actuated by a sound record, and means connected
with said fluid conduit at the exit end thereof for still
further augmenting the sound produced, by the variation
of the flow of fluid by the valve mechanism.
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my own. I
have hereto affixed my signature in the presence of two
witnesses.
NATHANIEL BALDWIN.
Witnesses :
W.m. Witt,
James Witt.
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
No. 869,749.
PATENTED OCT. 29, 1907.
J. C. STUCKEY.
STOP MECHANISM FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED APE. 24, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
?x
A.
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
BY "
ATTOF
)RNEY
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D, C.
No. 869,749. PATENTED OCT. 29, 1907
J. C. STUCKEY.
STOP MECHANISM FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 24, 1907.
2 SHEETS— SHEET 2.
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
jZwL*/ <2. -ufe^wtv,,
ATTORtQEY
THE.NORBIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOHN C. STUCKEY, OF ELIZABETH, NEW JERSEY.
STOP MECHANISM FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 869,749.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 24, 1907. Serial No. 369,898.
Patented Oct. 29, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, John C. Stuckey, a citizen of
the United States, residing at Elizabeth, in the county
of Union and State of New Jersey, have invented cer-
5 tain new and useful Improvements in Stop Mechan-
ism for Talking-Machines; and I do hereby declare the
following to be a full, clear, and exact description of the
invention, such as will enable others skilled in the art
to which it appertains to make and use the same.refer-
10 ence being had to the accompanying drawing's, and to
figures of reference marked thereon, which form a part
of this specification.
This invention relates to a device to be placed along
side of a talking machine, and preferably along side of
15 a disk machine, and is designed to provide a means for
lifting the needle, with its sound box, from the record
on the completion of the record, and is adapted to be
adjusted before the record is started so that when the
proper time arrives the device will be operated to lift
20 the needle out of engagement with the disk.
Another object of this invention is to provide a device
of this kind that operates a brake so that when the nee-
dle is lifted, the machine is automatically stopped so
that if the operator is absent from the machine when it
25 completes its record, the machine will stop and the
needle is lifted away from the record and there is no
further reproduction of any sounds. This device saves
considerable winding, as the record will not rotate any
more than is necessary to complete the reproduction.
30 There is wear and tear saved on the works of the ma-
chine, and a better exhibition of the machine can be
given with this automatic stoppage of sound on the
mechanism.
The invention is illustrated in the accompanying
35 drawings, in which
Figure 1 is a side view of my improved device show-
ing its relation to a talking machine, and Fig. 2 is a top
view showing a portion of the machine and its relation
to the device. Fig. 3 is a face view of the tripping
40 mechanism that releases the machine to stop the rota-
tion of the disk, and also the means for lifting the sound
box and the needle from the record.
I show, in the drawings, any usual form of talking
machine 10 employing a rotating plate 11 that carries
45 the record disk 12. In conjunction with this machine
is employed a swinging arm 13 pivoted at 14. as is usual
in this class of machines, and the usual sound box 15
is arranged on the end of the swinging arm or tube 13.
As is usually mounted by means of a TJ-shaped tube,
50 is arranged a reproducer 16 having a needle 17 project-
ing therefrom and adapted to rest on the record disk 12.
In machines of this kind the needle is started on the
groove of the record, near the periphery of the record
disk, and it travels inward following the groove, and
55 when it arrives near the center of the machine the rec-
ord stops and the needle then runs on, and there is no
way of stopping the machine except through a manual
manipulation.
In my device, however, when the sound box 15 has
arrived at a point that brings the needle 17 to the end 60
of the record groove, it is adapted to engage a mechan-
ism to stop it. To support the mechanism for stopping
the talking machine, I have devised a suitable base 18
with the "vertical post 19, on which is arranged a block
20 that can be rotatably adjusted or adjusted vertically, 65
and fastened by means of a set-screw 21. Projecting
horizontally from the block 20 is a rod 22 adjustably
secured by means of a set-screw 23, and on the outer
edge of the rod 22 is mounted the tripping mechanism
24. This mechanism consists of two circular plates 25 70
and 26 which has mounted between them on the rod
22, a disk 27. Pivoted at 28, intermediate of its ends,
is a lever, one end of which, 29, has a nose 30 that en-
ters a detent 31 in the periphery of the disk, and the
other end 32 of the lever projects downward therefrom lb
and may be provided with a soft covering 33 which is
preferably made of a ribbed elastic tubing.
The portion 33 of the lever 32 is the part that is en-
gaged by the sound box 15 when it reaches its limit of
movement, this being engaged at the proper time be- 80
cause before the record is started, the mechanism is
shifted by means of the set-screws 21 and 23, so that
by trial it is seen that the needle 17 is exactly at the
end of the reproducing groove. Thus when the proper
time arrives, and the record is in operation, when the 85
needle arrives at the point where the record stops,
the sound box presses over on the portion 33 of the le-
ver 32, the tooth 30 is drawn out of the detent, and the
disk 27 is snapped around by the spring 37 in the di-
rection of the arrows shown on the disk in Fig. 3, and 90
the strip 38, pivoted at 39, is at once drawn upward
along with the hooked portion 40, which in the mean-
time has been placed under a strip 41 fastened to the
reproducer by reason of the reproducer's side move-
ment, and the reproducer is thus in a position to be 95
lifted, and when the above described tripping takes
place, the hook 40, cooperating with the plate 41, lifts
the reproducer so that its needle is clear of the record.
A cut-away portion 36 is supplied on the disk so that
when the disk is in its operated position, aftei lifting 100
the reproducer, in other words before it is set, it allows
the tooth 30 to occupy the position shown in Fig. 3, so
that it does not bear on the outer periphery of the disk
27, and the portion 33 of the lever 32 is in the proper
position for operation, when the apparatus is adjusted 105
before it is started and the tripping will take place
at the proper time. If this cut-away portion were not
present, the nose would rest against the outer periph-
ery of the disk 27, and when the apparatus was set the
portion 33 would be enabled to drop, slightly, by rea- 110
son of the nose entering the detent, and the record
would be stopped before its completion. Projecting
Q
869,749
• from the disk 27 is a stud 35 carrying a soft covering
34, and when this stud is operated, by means of the
disk being tripped, it hits a soft covering 42 on the
end of a rod 43, mounted by means of a block 44 on a
5 pivot 45. This rod 43 is thus violently thrown in one
direction, and the corresponding movement of the rod
46 is caused, and its soft covering or end 47 engages the
end 48 of a lover which is pivoted by means of the
screw 49 and is normally held in position by a spring
10 50, which spring, however, is weak and only sufficient
to prevent the lever from having an absolutely free
movement. The other end of the lever has a nose 51
that is adapted to be thrown into and out of engage-
ment with the bar 52. Thus when the mechanism
15 is tripped, as before described, the end 47 of the rod
46 throws the lever by engaging its end 48, and the nose
51 is thrown out of engagement with the latch plate
52 which is mounted on a shaft 53, and a spring 55
throws the latch plate 52 over along the shaft 53, which
20 shaft also supports the block 54 for holding the pivotal
support 49. Below the shaft 53 and parallel thereto
is a rod 56, and a spring 57. on the rod, bears against
a slotted collar 58 in which the end 59, which is
preferably forked, fits so as to move it in unison
25 therewith, and by means of a coupling 61 and a screw
62, the shaft 03 is thrust forward, and the end 64 fic-
tionally engages the periphery of the rotating plate
11 to stop the machine. The rod 63 is arranged in a
bearing 65 that is secured by suitable screws 66 to the
30 box of the machine 10.
This apparatus provides a quick and noiseless stop-
ping of a talking machine, when the reproduction of a
record is complete, and the reproducing needle is re-
moved from the record at the same instant, not dam-
35 aging the needle and providing for no unnecessary
scratching on a record, the device being set before the
record is started by moving the needle over to the point
where the record stops, and adjusting the tripping lever
against the sound box, and then when a record is
40 started the above described operation causes a prompt
cessation of all sound when the record is through.
Having thus described my invention, what I claim
is: —
1. In combination with a disk talking machine having a
45 swinging sound box and a pivoted reproducer, of a support
having a brake thereon, a tripping mechanism on the sup-
port to be operated by the sound box, means operatively
connected with the tripping mechanism for lifting the re-
producer, the tripping mechanism being adjustable in its
50 relation to a record on the machine, and an operative con-
nection between the tripping mechanism and the brake to
cause the brake to stop the machine when the reproducer
is lifted.
2. In combination with a disk talking machine having a
55 swinging arm with a sound box thereon, and a reproducer
pivoted in the sound box, of a support, a tripping mechan-
ism mounted on the support, a lever connected with the
tripping mechanism and adapted to be engaged by the
sound box, a hook operated by the tripping mechanism for
60 lifting the reproducer, the tripping mechanism being ad-
justable in its relation to a record on the machine, a brake
on the support adapted to stop the machine, and means for
operating the brake when the reproducer is lifted.
3. In combination with a disk talking machine having a
65 swinging arm with a sound box thereon, and having a piv-
oted reproducer, of a support, a tripping mechanism on the
support, means for manually setting the tripping mechan-
ism, the tripping mechanism being adapted to be engaged
by the sound box, a hook adapted to engage the reproducer
to lift it when the tripping mechanism is tripped, a brake, 70
a latch to lock the brake in an inoperative position, and a
releasing means for the brake to cause it to operate, and
means for operating the releasing means when the tripping
mechanism is tripped.
4. In combination with a disk talking machine having a 75
swinging sound box and a pivoted reproducer, of a support,
a tripping mechanism on the support to be operated by the
swinging mechanism, and means connected with the trip-
ping mechanism for lifting the reproducer.
5. In combination with a disk talking machine having a 80
swinging arm with a pivoted reproducer thereon, of a sup-
port, a tripping mechanism on the support, a lever project-
ing from the tripping mechanism and adapted to be engaged
by the swinging arm. a stud for manually setting the trip-
ping mechanism, a hook connected with the tripping mech- 85
anism and to be raised when the mechanism is tripped, a
spring operated brake, a latch, means for locking the brake
in its inoperative position, and an operative connection be-
tween the locking means of the brake and the stud of the
tripping mechanism, whereby the brake is operated when 90
the tripping mechanism is tripped.
6. A device of the kind described comprising a support,
a horizontal rod projecting therefrom, a tripping mechan-
ism on the end of the rod, a lever projecting therefrom, a
lifting hook attached to the tripping mechanism, means for 95
manually setting the tripping mechanism, a spring oper-
ated brake on the support, a latch on the brake, means for
locking the latch in its inoperative position, a lever swing-
ing to unlock the latch and being operated by the tripping
mechanism when it is tripped, in combination with a plate 100
on the reproducer of a talking machine adapted to be at-
tached to the reproducer of the machine and to be lifted by
the lifting hook, and a swinging arm to engage the trip-
ping lever.
7. In a device of the kind described, a support having a 105
rod projecting therefrom with a tripping mechanism on its
end, a tripping lever projecting therefrom, parallel rods
projecting from the support, a latch sliding on the rods,
springs on the rods to actuate the latch in one direction, a
reciprocating brake on the lower rod, a pivoted lever on no
the upper rod and arranged to engage the latch to lock it
in its inoperative position, swinging arms piyoted on the
upper rod of the machine and having one end adapted to
engage the lever, the other pivoted arm being operated by
the tripping mechanism. 115
8. In a device of the kind described, a tripping mechan-
ism comprising a casing, a spring actuated disk therein, a
tripping lever having a tooth to engage the disk, a detent
in the disk to receive the tooth, a stud projecting from the
disk for manually setting the tripping mechanism, and a \ 20
hook suspended from the disk.
9. In a device of the kind described, a tripping mechan-
ism comprising a casing, a spring actuated disk therein
having a detent in its periphery, a tripping lever pivoted
on the casing and having a tooth to enter the detent of the 125
disk, and a hook suspended on the disk.
10. In a device of the kind described, a tripping mechan-
ism comprising a casing, a rotatable disk arranged in the
casing and having a detent in its periphery, a spring to
automatically operate the disk, a tripping lever having a 130
tooth thereon for entering the detent of the disk, a stud
for manually manipulating the disk to set the tripping
mechanism, and a hook suspended from the disk.
11. In a device of the kind described, a support, a hori-
zontal rod projecting therefrom, means for rotatably, per- 135
pendicularly and horizontally adjusting the' rod, and a
tripping mechanism on the end of the rod to be tripped by
and adapted to lift up the reproducer of a talking machine.
In testimony, that I claim the foregoing, I have here-
unto set my hand this 23d day of April 1907.
JOHN C. STUCKEY.
Witnesses :
Wm. H. Camfield,
E. A. Pell.
Uo. 870,300. PATENTED NOV. 5, 1907.
S. LEVIN.
STYLUS FOR SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED MAB. 7, 1907.
Witnesses :
i/y, C^a^^-cl^^
By
'71,
Ini/entor,
A TTORNEYS
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
SAMUEL LEVIN, OF HIGHLAND PAEK, ILLINOIS.
STYLUS FOR SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINES.
No. 870,300.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed March 7, 1907. Serial No. 361,122.
Patented Nov. 5, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Samuel Levin, a citizen of the
United States, residing at Highland Park, in the county
of Lake and State of Illinois, have invented a new and
5 useful Stylus for Sound-Reproducing Machines, of
which the following is a specification.
This invention has reference to improvements in
the reproducing point or stylus for sound-reproducing
machines, and its object is to provide a stylus which will
10 give a mellow and soft-toned reproduction, more par-
ticularly from flat or disk -shaped records wherein the
sound record is represented by a sinuous groove of even
depth. The usual form of stylus used with sound-
reproducing machines of the type wherein flat record
15 tablets of hard, resistant composition are employed, is
that of a steel needle having the point sufficiently
sharp to follow the groove. Such needles not only
wear away themselves but also wear -away the walls of
the sound-groove and in a comparatively short time the
20 finer sound waves, representing the over-tones, are
either destroyed or distorted; and these delicate tones,
which impart to the reproduced sound that character-
istic known as "quality", having been destroyed, the
reproduced tones become harsh and unnatural and dis-
25 agreeable to the ear. Also, the improved stylus ob-
literates the harsh, disagreeable scratching or scraping
noises which are found so obtrusive when the hard
steel needles are employed for the reproduction of
sound from the resisting tablets of hard material.
30 The invention consists essentially in making a stylus
of semi -elastic, non- resonant, homogeneous material
with a cylindrical or nearly cylindrical portion adapted
to fit into the stylus socket provided at the end of the
stylus lever actuated by the diaphragm of the sound-
35 reproducing sound box, and the other or free end of
this stylus is preferably widened and then nan-owed
to a point and suitably curved or bent to make this
part of the stylus elastic yet strong and resisting, and
more particularly resisting in the plane of travel of
40 the stylus when under the impelling action of -the
sound waves.
The invention will be rully understood from the
following detailed description taken in connection
with the accompanying drawings forming part of this
45 specification, in which, —
Figure 1 is a side elevation, upon an enlarged scale,
of a portion of a sound-reproducing sound box with
the improved stylus in place therein; and Fig. 2 is a
perspective view of the stylus upon a larger scale than
50 is shown in Fig. 1.
Referring to the drawings, there is shown a sound
box 1 which may be of any desirable construction such
as is used in connection with sound-reproducing ma- j
chines wherein the flat disk records are employed, and
55 no special description of such sound box is necessary
since in itself it forms no part of the present invention.
The stylus 2 is composed of a piece of horny, homo-
geneous, hard material such as a thin piece of horn or
goose quill or celluloid pr some such substance having
one end bent or curled up into a cylinder or into ap- 60
proximately cylindrical shape, as indicated at 3, and
the other end spread out into a nearly flat shape, as in-
dicated at 4, and then with the sides 5 approaching each
other until they finally merge into a point 6, the whole
structure being similar in appearance to that of the 65
well-known quill pen. The cylindrical portion 3 is of
such size as to fit snugly into the stylus-holding socket of
the sound box and be there retained by the ordinary
clamp screw 8, which latter, engaging the cylindrical
portion 3, will serve to hold the improved stylus firmly 70
in place in the socket 7.
When the parts are in proper position the point 6 will
rest in a sound groove upon the record tablet, which
latter is indicated at 9 in Fig. 1, and the sound waves
will impart motion to the stylus 2 and from thence to 75
the sound box diaphragm in the usual manner. But
because of the peculiar nature of the material used, the
impulses transmitted to the diaphragm are modified in
such manner that the reproduced sound is very mel-
low, soft, distinct and natural, and the tones are very 80
pleasing to the ear and especially adapted for small
rooms, although the reproduction is sufficiently pene-
trating to be heard in the largest auditorium.
The peculiar shape of the stylus makes it sufficiently
stiff to bear the weight of the sound box and the parts 85
carried thereby and it is particularly resistant to
changes in shape in the plane of the vibrations im-
parted to it by the sound record groove.
The peculiar nature of the material from which the
stylus is made, more particularly when it is made of 90
quill, is such that the record groove is not worn per-
ceptibly by the action of the stylus thereon, and, con-
sequently, records reproduced with the improved
stylus are practically unaffected by the reproduction
and will never become worn or defective from such re- 95
production.
It is also found that with a stylus constructed in ac-
cordance with my invention the harsh, grating,
scratching noises so often heard in reproductions from
record tablets where the steel stylus is used, are not 100
heard at all, and this may be due to the absorption of
the sudden, short, violent impulses, which give rise to
these harsh and grating sounds, by the stylus, and the
reproducing diaphragm is therefore not affected by
them. 105
Whatever be the reason, the practical operation of
the stylus has demonstrated that the reproduced
sounds are mellow and sweet and of extreme purity
and are also free from all extraneous sounds which tend
to mar, and, under some circumstances, to even obliter- 110
870,306
10
ate portions of the reproduced sounds from the flat
sound records made of hard, resisting material.
I claim: —
1. A stylus for sound-reproducing machines composed of
a thin piece of horny, homogeneous material having one
end bent into a cylinder of a size to fit the stylus-holding
socket of a sound-box and the other end bent out into an
approximately flat shape with the sides approaching and
merging into a point adapted to the sound groove of a
sound record tablet.
2. A stylus for sound-reproducing machines composed of
a ^thin piece of quill bent at one end into a cylinder of a
size adapted to fit the stylus socket of a sound-box and the
other end formed approximately flat with side walls taper-
ing to a point adapted to engage a sound record groove. 15
3. A stylus for sound-reproducing machines having a
rounded or cylindrical shank and a flat, thin, tapering,
pointed end of substantially equal thickness throughout
and wide in the direction of vibration.
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as my own, I 20
have hereto affixed my signature in the presence of two
witnesses.
SAMUEL LEVIN.
Witnesses :
W. N. Goodkidge,
George Hesler.
No. 870,569. PATENTED NOV. 12, 1907.
T. H. MACDONALD & F. L. CAPPS.
APPARATUS FOR COATING DISKS AND SIMILAR ARTICLES.
APPLICATION FILED FEB, 14, 1907.
'
Clttcz.-nei.j 3.
i'
THE NCR.tIS PETERS CO., WABHtNOTON, D. C.
TJNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS H. MACDONALD AND FRANK L. OAPPS, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNORS
. TO AMERICAN GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORA-
TION OF WEST VIRGINIA.
APPARATUS FOR COATING DISKS AND SIMILAR ARTICLES.
No. 870,569.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 12, 1907.
Application filed February 14, 1907. Serial No, 357,397.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, Thomas H. Macdonald and
Frank L. Capps, both residents of the city of Bridge-
port, Connecticut, have invented a new and useful
5 Improvement in Apparatus for Coating Disks and
Similar Articles, which improvement is fully set forth
in the following specification.
This apparatus is for use in the preparation of disk
sound-records, and comprises a hopper or sieve, a com-
] 0 pound conveyer, a heating-box, a return conveyer, and
suitable actuating mechanism.
The object of the invention is to carry forward the
ideas suggested in the Hoyt & Gaven patents of Janu-
ary 2, 1906, (Nos. 808,842, 808,843, and 809,263), and
15 as more particularly set forth in certain other pending
applications.
The particular' purpose of this apparatus is to place
upon suitable disks of paper or the like the proper
quantity of "glaze" wbich is to constitute the surface
20 of the. disk sound-records.
The invention will be best understood by reference
to the accompanying drawings that represent one em-
bodiment thereof.
In these drawings Figure 1 is a side view partly
25 broken away; and Fig. 2. a plan of a portion of the appa-
ratus. •
1 represents the hopper, 2 the heating-box, and 3 the
return conveyer. At the bottom of the hopper 1 is a
grating 4, having a mesh somewhat larger than is neces-
30 sary to permit the passage of the powdered material.
The latter, indicated at 5, will not flow freely through
the grating, because of its tendency to pack.
6 and 7 represent two metal rods or bais mounted in
the hopper as indicated, the ends of one of them, as 6,
35 extending on each side beyond the walls of the hopper,
so as to be acted upon by the striker 8. There is one of
these strikers 8 on each side of the apparatus. It is
shown as pivoted to the hopper and connected near one
end to a strong spring 9 which tends to hold its other
40 end against the protruding end of the bar 6; while the
revolutions of disk 10, carrying one or more (three)
pins 11, raise this striker from the bar 6, against the
action of its spring 9; and as soon as each pin releases
the striker, its spring causes the latter to strike a sharp
45 blow upon the end of the rod 6.
At 12 is shown an adjusting-nut for regulating the
tension of the spring 9 so as to regulate the force of the
blow.
13 — 13' represent drums or the like carrying a plu-
50 rality of endless chains 14, which latter operate not
only as a conveyer, but also as a ■sieve as will be ex-
plained. The drum 13 is driven by power in any suit-
able manner, which will likewise revolve the disks 10,
as by a sprocket-chain or belt.
15 is a pit located beneath the chains 14, so that all of 55
the powdered material 5 that does not fall upon a paper
disk, will fall through into this pit 15. By arranging '
a trough 16 in front of the pit, from which it may be
separated by a vertically-sliding door 17, the material
that falls through may be scooped up and replaced in 60
the upper hopper 1. A casing incloses conveyer 1-1
and pit 15, to prevent the escape of material in the
form of dust etc.
The heating-box 2 consists of a long tunnel or casing
through which extends a number of steam-coils 18. 65
19 — 19' represent drums carrying the endless belt or
conveyer 20, drum 19 being driven in any convenient
manner, but preferably independent of drum 13. A
number of rollers (one of which is shown at 21 ) may be
employed to support the upper surface of the conveyer. 7C
or the conveyer may run upon the steam-pipes 18.
The drum 13' is placed below and in front of the hop-
per 1, so that an attendant may feed the paper tablets
(preferably coated with resin) upon the portion of con-
veyer 14 which is there exposed by the omission of the 7f
casing at 22. The elrum 19' of the conveyer in the heat-
box is mounted as close as may be to the drum 13 of the
chain-conveyer; and a bridge 23, whese edges are con-
cave to correspond to the two adjacent drums, is
mounted between the two and as close to them as con- 80
venient. A depending partition 24 may be arranged
above bridge 23, leaving between the two only suffi-
cient space for the passage of the successive coated
disks.
At the extreme end of the heat-box, and beyond its 8"
conveyer, is the reversing-plate 25, diagonal as shown,
so as to deliver the heated disks, face downward, to the
return-conveyer 3, which needs no further description
(except to say that its upper portion may be supported
by a number of rollers as 21'). In front of the return 90
conveyer, which is open to the air, and upon which a
cooling breeze may be caused to play (or it may be
otherwise cooled), may be another diagonal reversing-
plate 26, to deposit the successive disks, right side up,
into a basket or tray 27. The plate 25 is arranged 95
diagonally as shown merely because the return-con-
veyer lies underneath the heat-box; if it were desired
to have the return-conveyer to extend in the same
direction beyond the heat-box, of course there would
be no need for arranging this plate 25 diagonally. But 100
if the plate 25 is arranged to reverse the disks, then it is
desirable to have the plate 26 diagonal so as to turn the
disks right side up, though this latter may be dispensed
with.
The operation of our apparatus is as follows: The 105
hopper having been more or less filled with the pow-
dered "glaze", and the proper tension having been im-
parted to the spring 9 (by the nut 12), the attendant
Q
870,569
proceeds to place, one after the other, the (resined)
disks upon the conveyer 14, at the open space 22 in
front of the hopper. As each disk is being carried be-
neath the sieve 4, the striker 8 is striking smartly upon
5 the framework C — 7, and causes a shower of the pow-
dered material to descend. A sufficient amount is de-
posited upon the disks in the course of the travel be-
neath the sieve 4, while the balance of the shower falls
into the pit 15 from which it may be used again to re-
10 plenish the hopper. Meantime, the powdered disks
are being carried over the bridge-piece 23 and deposit-
ed upon the conveyer in the heat-chamber 2. This
chamber should be of considerable length, that the
powdered materia] may be subjected to the heat a suffi-
15 cient length of time, in order that it may become soft
enough to cohere and to adhere to the paper disk.
When the disk reaches the end of this chamber, i( falls
upon the inclined plate 25, and is thereby inverted and
delivered face downward upon the cooling conveyer
20 2; so that, bythe time it is delivered into the tray27, it
may be of about normal temperature. If the powder
falls too freely, the tension of spring 9 is lessened, so
that .the blow struck shall not be so heavy, and less
powder will fall; and vice versa. The length of the
25 heating-box depends somewhat upon the speed of
travel of the conveyers. If they travel very slowly
the heat-box may be comparatively short, since the
powder will be subjected to the heat during a com-
paratively long period of time; but if the apparatus be
30 made to run faster, so as to turn mil more work in a given
time, the heat box should be lengthened accordingly.
The tablets or disks referred to may be of paper or
thin cardboard or other suitable material, and they will
preferably be coated with resin; and the powdered
35 material referred to may consist wholly or in more or
less large proportions of shellac. But the nature of the
disks and of the powdered material form no part of the
present invention, since our apparatus may be em-
ployed for coating any body with any powdered or
40 granular material.
Changes may be made in the construction and ar-
rangement of the parts, and some of the parts of our in-
vention may be used to the exclusion of others, without
[ departing from the spirit of the invention, since we do
not limit ourselves to the precise details set forth, hav- 45
ing described them with some particularity solely for-
the sake of clearness.
Having thus described our invention, we claim-.
1. The combination of a hopper containing a sieve, a
perforated conveyer beneath the same, a striker acting 50
upon said hopper, means tor regulating the force of said
striker, and means for actuating said conveyer and said
striker.
2. The combination with a hopper having a sieve, and a
perforated conveyer beneath the same, of a heat-box con- 55
taining a second conveyer in juxtaposition to the first con-
veyer.
.">. The combination with a hopper having a sieve, and a
perforated, conveyer beneath the same, of a heat-box con-
taining a second conveyer in juxtaposition to the first con- 60
veyer, and a bridge spanning the space between the two
conveyers.
4. The combination of a hopper and a conveyer beneath
the same, a heat-nox having a second conveyer in juxta-
position to the first conveyer, and a cooling conveyer adja- 65
cent to said heat-box.
5. The combination of a hopper and a conveyer beneath
tlic same, a heat-box having a second conveyer in juxta-
position to the first conveyer, a cooling conveyer adjacent
thereto, and means for inverting articles carried by said 70
heating conveyer to deliver them upside down on the cool-
ing conveyer.
0. The combination with a hopper having one or more
transverse bars, a revoluble disk having pins, a lever hav-
ing adjustable spring control and mounted to be actuated 75
by said pins and to strike upon said bar.
7. A hopper having a sieve, a perforated conveyer be-
neath the -same, common means for imparting a blow to
said hopper and for driving said conveyer and means for
adjusting (be force of the blow. 80
n. In a disk-coating apparatus, a hopper having a sieve,
a plurality of endless chains beneath the same and consti-
tuting a perforated conveyer, a casing inclosing said
chains and a pit beneath t lie same, and a trough adjacent
to said pit. 85
In testimony whereof we have signed this specification
in the presence of two subscribing witnesses.
THOMAS H. MACDONAPI).
FRANK L. CAPPS.
Witnesses :
A. P. KBOUGH,
<'. A. GlBNBR.
No. 870,698
PATENTED NOV. 12, 1907.
J. C. STOOKER & D. A. WELSH.
FOLDABLE PHONOGRAPH HORN.
APPLICATION FILED APR. 22, 1907.
22
Imitentors
<rpru</
Attorney^
TH£ NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D1. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JULIUS C. STOCKER, OF PITTSBURG, AND DARRELL A. WELSH, OF MOUNT OLIVER,
PENNSYLVANIA.
FOLDABLE PHONOGRAPH-HORN.
No. 870,698.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 22, 1907. Serial No. 369,497.
Patented Nov. 12, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that Julius C. Stocker and Darrell
A. Welsh, citizens of the United States, residing at
Pittsburg, in the county of Allegheny and State of
5 Pennsylvania, and Mount Oliver, in the county of Alle-
gheny and State of Pennsylvania, respectively, have
invented certain new and useful Improvements in
Fold able Phonograph-Horns, of which the following is
a specification.
10 This invention relates to horns and is particularly
adaptable for graphophones, phonographs and other
musical instruments.
An object of the invention, is to provide a horn, ca-
pable of being collapsed, whereby the same may be
15 carried in the pocket at the time of transporting the
machine to which the horn is to be attached, or upon
shipment or storage of such horn, where it will be seen
that a large number may occupy a small floor space.
A further object of the invention is to provide a col-
20 lapSible horn, made up of telescopic sections, said sec-
tions having means whereby they may be securely
locked to each other when in use, and to provide means
for holding said parts from displacement when the horn
is not in use.
25 Another object is to provide a horn extremely simple
in construction, strong, durable and therefore inex-
pensive to manufacture.
In the drawings: Figure 1 is a side elevation of my
horn collapsed. Fig. 2 is a section therethrough on the
30 line 2 — 2 in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an end view. Fig. 4 is a
side elevation of the horn extended. Fig. 5 is a ver-
tical longitudinal section therethrough. Fig. 6 is a
detail section. Fig. 7 is a modified form.
Referring specifically to the drawings, 10 denotes the
35 horn, which comprises the mouthpiece 11, the sections
12, 13, 14, 15, 16 and the bell 17, all being constructed
to slide one within the other.
To securely lock the sections together after being ex-
tended ready for use, we provide on each section op-
i0 positely disposed, leaf springs 18, which work through
slots 19, formed in their respective sections, and are
adapted to spring behind the ends of said sections.
When it is desired to collapse the horn, the springs
18 on the mouthpiece 11 are first depressed and pushed
45 within the section 12, the springs 18 on the sections 12
are then depressed and the section 12 held within the
section 13; this operation is continued throughout the
remaining sections of the horn.
Hinged to the bell 17, as at 20, is a closure "21 which
is provided opposite the hinge 20 with a clasp 22 adapt- 50
ed to engage the bead 17' of the bell 17, when the horn
is collapsed. At 23 on the inside of the bell 17, and
adjacent the hinge 20 is a spring 24 which serves to
hold the closure 21 in an open position after the clasp
22 has been disengaged from the bead 17'. 55
At 25 is shown a cap which I place on the other end
of the section 17, when the horn is collapsed, thus it
will be seen that when the sections of the horn are col-
lapsed they are held within the bell 17 by the hinged
closure 21 at one end, and the cap 25 at the other. 60
In the modified form of my invention shown in Fig.
7 springs 24, are stamped out of the sections 11, 12, 13,14,
15 and 16, and work through a slot 25 therein.
What is claimed is:
1. A collapsible liorn comprising telescopic sections, the 65
sections having slots formed therein and located to lie
outwardly of the adjacent sections when the horn is ex-
tended, springs connected with said sections and engaged
in the slots, said springs lying normally in position to
engage the adjacent sections to hold the horn in extended 70
position, and being movable through the slots out of said
position, a hinged closure for the outer of said sections a
spring carried by the outer section and arranged to hold
the closure in an elevated position when the sections are
extended, and a removable closure for the opposite end of 75
the outer section.
2. A horn comprising a plurality of telescopic sections,
including a bell section, a removable closure on one end of
bell section, a hinged closure on the other end of said bell
section, a spring carried by said section and bearing 80
against said closure to hold the closure in an elevated
position, and means for holding the closure in operative
position.
3. In a collapsible horn, the combination with telescopic
sections having slots formed therein and located to lie out- 85
wardly of the adjacent sections when the horn is extended,
of springs connected with said sections and engaged in the
slots, said springs lying normally in position to engage the
adjacent sections to hold the horn in extended position, and
being movable through the slots out of such position. 90
In testimony whereof we affix our signatures, in pres-
ence of two witnesses.
JULIUS C. STOCKER.
DARRELL A. WELSH.
Witnesses :
William Espy,
Lddwig Mater.
No. 870,723.
PATENTED NOV. 12, 1907.
F. D. HALL.
TALKING MACHINE NEEDLE.
APPLICATION FILED JULY 9, 1906. -
^fyfid.
IX
^r
^^e^;
^&g.<a
£Z
-2L-,
-^3
^5~
^&.3. y—r
^7-M
ZC
^3
i
^6j
^£3<
-29
1 Z34&6.
\-Zl
^3
zz
HE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
FREDERICK D. HALL, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
TALKING-MACHINE NEEDLE.
No. 870,723.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed July 9, 1906. Serial No. 325,211.
Patented Nov. 12, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Frederick D. Hall, a citizen
of the United States of America, and resident of Chi-
cago, Cook county, Illinois, have invented a certain
5 new and useful Improvement in Talking-Machine
Needles, of which the following is a specification.
My invention relates to improvements in talking
machines, and has for its object the production of a
device by means of which the quality of the tone
] 0 produced is greatly improved.
A further object is the production of a device for
reproducing the sound from the record disk without
materially injuring the disk itself.
'A further object is the production of a practical and
15 inexpensive device for reproducing the sound from
the record disk.
These and such other objects as may hereinafter
more fully appear are attained by my device, embodi-
ments of which are illustrated in the accompanying
20 drawings, in which.
Figure 1 represents a perspective view of a talking
machine showing my device in position. Fig. 2 rep-
resents an enlarged view of the reproducer showing
my reproducing needle in place. Fig. 3 is a cross-
25 section on line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2, looking in the direction
indicated by the arrows. Fig. 4 is a bottom view of
my improved needle. Fig. 5 is a side elevation of
my improved needle. Fig. G is a cross-section on
line 6 — 6 of Fig. 5, looking in the direction indicated
30 by the arrows.
Like numerals of reference indicate like parts in
the various figures of the drawings.
Referring now to the figures, 8 represents the talk-
ing machine case, 9 the horn, 10 the horn support,
35 11 the record disk, 12 the reproducer, and 13 the re-
producer needle. A metallic arm 14 is secured to the
center of the diaphragm 15, and the other end secured
to the frame 16, which frame is secured to the shell
of the reproducer. A block 17 is secured to this frame,
40 in an opening of which is secured the reproducing
needle 13. A set-screw 14 passes through the block
and into the opening, engaging the side of the re-
producing needle, clamping it securely in place.
This needle is composed of vegetable fiber. I have
45 found that a fiber comprising an inner comparatively
soft portion and a hard outer shell or crust is especially
adapted to my purposes. The material by the use of
which I have so far been able to derive the most sat-
isfactory results is a portion of bamboo forming the
50 needle in such a manner that the outer casing of the
bamboo shall form one of the outer sides of the needle.
The needle is constructed in any form desired, such,
for instance, as having a square cross-section as shown
in Fig. 6. The outer hard fiber is shown in this figure
55 as 18, and the inner softer fiber, as 19. In preparing
the needle for use, a portion of the inner fiber is cut
away toward one end, at 20, the needle terminating in
a thin portion 21. This makes an angular chisel-
shaped end consisting entirely of the hard outer shell
of the fiber. This end may be left at right angles to the 60
needle itself, or may be cut to an acute angle, as shown
at 22. I find in practice that such an angle is well
adapted for the purpose of allowing the reproducer to
follow the sound undulations as recorded in the record
disk and thus to faithfully reproduce the sound to 66
the horn. It is obvious that the same result might be
obtained by securely fastening together layers of vege-
table fiber of different density and degrees of hardness,
or by using a fiber or wood in which the harder por-
tions might be on the inside of the piece, in which case 70
cuts would be made on the two opposite sides tapering
toward the middle at the end. So, also, I have shown
the cut between 20 and 21 as curved. Of course, this
cut could be straight, but in practice I find that a
greater resiliency is given the needle and a correspond- 7 5
ing clearness to the tone reproduced by the curved
cut shown. So, also, the cross-section of the fiber,
while it is shown as square, it is evident that it might
be round, in which case, if desired, a portion of the out-
side could be cut off toward the end, leaving a point 80
in the center, the same, for instance, as shown in a
sharpened lead pencil.
AYhile 1 have shown in the drawing and in the ex-
planation above that the harder portion or shell of the
fiber is used as the point of the reproducing needle, it 85
is evident that if desired some other portion of the
fiber itself could be formed into a point for the pur-
pose of reproducing the sound and thereby, by the
use of points of varying degree of hardness and resili-
ency, considerably varying the quality of tone repro- 90
duced.
The main purpose of my invention is the production
of a needle of a vegetable growth, regardless of the
shape or cross-section of the same.
The ordinary record of talking machines of the Vic- 95
tor type consists in a hard rubber disk, the record of
sound being made through the medium of a spiral
groove extending from the outer portion of the disk
toward the center, and continuing as far therein as
necessary. These grooves are V-shaped, and so far 100
as appears to the naked eye, consist in parallel grooves.
When these grooves are looked at through a micro-
scope, it appears that the adjacent coils of the spiral
are in no sense uniform, but the spiral itself is really a
series of sinuous curves. The grooves are of practi- 105
cally a uniform depth, the variation in sound, tone,
timbre, pitch, etc., being caused by the variations in
the contour of the side walls of the groove. This be-
ing the case, it is at once apparent that in order to
accurately reproduce the sound, it is necessary to have 110
870,723
the stylus or reproducing needle follow the exact line
of the sides of the grooves. In the use of the ordinary
metallic steel needle having a sharp point, the opera-
tive point of the needle only bears against the bottom
5 of the groove, and in the event that the record has ex-
treme variation resulting in sharp bends or turns in
the sinuous grooves, the point of the needle is quite
apt, instead of accurately following the groove, to
jump across the groove at these points, causing breaks
10 in the sound. By the use of my device, not only does
the point of the stylus follow the bottom of the groove,
but also the edges of the stylus pass along approxi-
mately the entire surface of the sides of the grooves,
thus accurately and faithfully reproducing the sound.
15 1 have found that the best results are attained by the
use of needles of a square or triangular cross-section,
as these needles more accurately lit the curves in the
ordinary record. In any event, however, the edges of
the needle always bear against the sides of the groove
20 at two or more points, regardless of the fact whether
the point itself travels in the bottom groove or not.
In the use of the talking machine, the reproducing
needle exclusively used is steel, and the needles them-
selves are inexpensive. The needles are very much
2ft harder than the record-disks, and they, of course, wear
the disk to such an extent that after a record has been
played for a few times, the nicer gradations of tone are
lost. It is found in practice that after a record has
been played fifteen or twenty times, it becomes abso-
30 lutely valueless as an expression of fine music, al-
though it may be used an indefinite number of times
by persons who have not a musical ear and cannot
notice the difference in tone. By the use of my im-
proved needle, however, which is of a less degree of
35 hardness than the record itself, it is possible to use the
same record several hundred times without any appre-
ciable difference in the tone of the production. This
fact gives a great value to my device, as the records
of the finest singers and musical productions are quite
40 expensive, and if it becomes necessary to replace them
alter they have been used a few times, it necessitates
a large outlay of money. By the use of my device,
however, which is also inexpensive, the needle after
being used for one record may be thrown away and a
45 new needle put in place, and the record remain in as
good condition as before being played.
I claim only the use of my device as a reproducing
needle or stylus, the device being incapable for use
as a cutting or recording stylus.
50 I claim:
1. A reproducing needle formed from vegetable fiber,
said fiber comprising a laminated structure with layers
of different degrees of hardness.
2. A reproducing needle formed from vegetable fiber,
55 said fiber comprising a laminated structure with layers
of different degrees of hardness, one end of said needle
terminating in an angularly disposed portion.
3. A reproducing needle formed from vegetable fiber
having a thin shell on one side thereof, comprising a
tough outer portion, the balance of said needle compris- 60
ing a portion of a less degree of hardness.
4. A reproducing needle formed from vegetable fiber
having a thin shell on one side thereof, comprising a
tough outer portion, the balance of said needle comprising
a portion of a less degree of hardness, a section of said 65
latter portion being cut away leaving the thin shell form-
ing an angularly disposed point adapted to follow the
undulations in the disk record.
5. A reproducing needle formed from layers of vege-
table fiber of varying degrees of hardness. 70
ij. A reproducing needle formed from layers of vege-
table fiber of varying degrees of hardness, one end of said
needle being cut away to form an angularly disposed point
adapted to follow the undulations of the record disk.
7. A reproducing needle formed from bamboo fiber, the 75
outer shell of said bamboo forming one side of said needle.
8. A reproducing needle formed from bamboo fiber,
the outer shell of said bamboo forming one side of said
needle, a portion of said fiber being cut away longitudi-
nally, forming an angularly disposed point adapted to 80
follow the undulations in the record disk.
9. A reproducing needle formed from the outer shell
of bamboo filler, of a substantially rectangular cross-
section, one end of said needle being cut away longitudi-
nally, and the resulting end being cut transversely, form- 85
ing an angularly disposed point adapted to follow the
undulations of the sound record.
10. A reproducer for talking machines comprising a
needle formed from a vegetable growth and having an
angular cross-section, the operative portion of said needle 90
consisting of the edges formed between adjacent sides and
the end of the needle.
11. A reproducing needle comprising a strip of wood,
of a triangular cross-section, the operative portion of said
needle being the edges formed by the meeting of adjacent 95
sides and the end of the needle.
12. A reproducing needle comprising a wooden pin, of
an angular cross-section cut off at. the end and adapted to
enter within and bear against the sides of the grooves in
a record disk. jQO
13. In a talking machine, the combination with a re-
producer, of a record disk, and a reproducing needle
formed from a vegetable growth and having an angular
cross-section, the operative portion of said needle con-
sisting of the edges formed between adjacent sides and JQ5
the end.
14. In a talking machine, the combination with a re-
producer, of a record disk, and a reproducing needle
formed from wood, of an angular cross-section cut off
at the end and adapted to enter within and bear against \\Q
the sides of the groove in the record disk.
15. In a talking machine, the combination with a re-
producer, of a record disk, and a reproducing needle
formed from bamboo fiber, the outer shell of said bamboo
forming one side of said needle. H5
Signed hy me at Chicago, Cook county, Illinois, this
2nd day of July, 1906.
FREDERICK D. HALL.
Witnesses :
F. H. Dkuky,
Albert J. Sausek.
No. 870,961.
PATENTED NOV. 12, 1907.
A. HOFFMAN.
MULTOGRAM RECORD.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 7, 1907.
"TO-cxl
7 JO
~T5_q-.Z.
7, 22 9 6 71 8 S
WITNESSES
WcJXi-M*
INVENTOR
■jfr/.g-u-stJifaffrttcLTi/
/Ti/tsui'^i^' txj2^o
ATTORNEYS
TftET NORK1S RETERS CO., WASHINGTON. =>. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
AUGUST HOFFMAN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
MULTOGRAM RECORD.
No. 870,961.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed January 7, 1907. Serial Ho. 351,140.
Patented Nov. 12, 1907.
To all whom, it may concern:
Be it known that I, August Hoffman, a citizen of
the United States, and a resident of the city of New
York, borough of Manhattan, in the county and State
5 of New York, have invented a new and Improved
Multogram Record, of which the following is a full,
clear, and exact description.
My invention relates \o records used for talking ma-
chines, my more particular object being to provide a
10 record with a multiplicity of record tracks for the pur-
pose of increasing the amplitude and volume of the
sound vibrations.
My invention further relates to means for separating
the various record tracks from each other, so as to pre-
15 vent a stylus from one of these record tracks moving
into another.
My invention further relates to means for increasing
the physical strength of the record and for protecting
the record track against injury when the record is
20 handled or shipped.
My invention further relates to providing the revolu-
ble record member with improved means, whereby
the operator is made aware of the proper portions of the
revoluble member upon which to place the stylus
25 needles in order to bring into registry the various record
tracks.
Reference is to be had to the accompanying drawings
forming a part of this specification, in which similar
characters of reference indicate corresponding parts
30 in both figures.
Figure 1 is a plan view of a disk-record embodying
my improvements; and Fig. 2 is a central cross-section
through the same, showing the form and disposition
of the annular beads used for strengthening the record
35 and for protecting the record-tracks.
The record is shown at 3 and is provided with a cen-
tral aperture 4 having the form of a key-hole slot. The
stem or spindle of the talking-machine is of a con-
formity mating that of the key-hole slot, and fits neatly
40 thereinto so as to prevent any lost motion as between
the stem or spindle and the disk. A number of an-
nular beads 5, 6, 7, integral with the disk 3, are dis-
posed concentrically thereupon and have, in cross-
section, the forms indicated in Fig. 2.
45 A number of separate record-tracks 8, 9, 10 are
spaced apart and disposed concentrically, each record-
track being inside of a bead 5, 6, 7. These record-
tracks are of the usual spiral form and are exact dupli-
cates of each other in so far as the acoustical effect is
50 concerned. Inside of each record-track 8, 9, 10 is an
annular space 11, 12, 13 which, for the purpose of con-
venience, I designate as an "idle" space.
It will be noted that each bead 5, 6, 7 is provided
with a beveled surface or in other words that its top sur-
face slopes downwardly and inwardly. The purpose 55
of this arrangement is to provide for guiding the several
stylus needles into the proper alinement with the outer
ends of the several record-tracks. The beads 5, 6, 7
thus serve as distinguishing marks whereby the oper-
ator can judge with great exactness the several loca- 60
tions which should be occupied by the stylus needles.
In practice, all that is necessary is for the operator to
place approximately in position the several stylus
needles so that the latter, upon engaging the beveled
surface of the beads 5, 6, 7, glide downwardly and into 65
proper position, to simultaneously engage the outer
ends of the several record-tracks when the disk is set
in motion.
In making the record above described, the record-
tracks 8, 9, 10 are so arranged that the parts thereof 70
representing the same sound are in alinement with
each other. This can be conveniently done by forming
the record-tracks by the action of a number of different
stylus needles acting simultaneously, there being as
many needles as there are record-tracks 8, 9, 10 to be 75
made. If desired, a master record can be made and
other records reproduced therefrom.
In order to use the completed record it is placed upon
the machine, the key-hole slot 4 being fitted over the
stem or spindle of similar shape, as above described, and 80
this stem is set in motion in the usual manner.
A number of stylus needles corresponding to the
number of record-tracks 8, 9, 10 is now brought into
use, each needle resting upon one of these record-tracks.
The needles may be started from the outer ends of the 85
tracks and moved gradually inward. When each nee-
dle finishes its work it is released by its record-track 8,
9 or 10, and then lodges against one or the other of the
annular beads 5, 6, 7; no matter how long the disk now
turns, no needle can do any damage nor can there be 90
any admixture of sounds due to a needle operating
upon the wrong record.
It will be observed that the several record-tracks 8,
9, 10 begin outwardly at the points 14, 15, 16, these
points being substantially in alinement with each other 95
with reference to an imaginary line passing radially
outward from the center of the disk. This is to stop all
of the various records at the same instant and to insure
that various parts of the several records, related acous-
tically to each other, occupy the same position rela- 100
tively to imaginary lines passing radially outward from
the center. It will thus be noted that in all of the rec-
ords the parts which are acoustically related are in
alinement with each other, and this is essential in order
that sounds controlled by the various record -tracks 105
shall be made simultaneously.
As the record-tracks are in registry with each other in
the acoustical sense of the expression, and as the sounds
870,961
10
15
reproduced from each record-track are duplicates of
sounds represented simultaneously from the other rec-
ord-tracks, it follows that the sounds are made consider-
ably louder and clearer. It will also be noted that the
wear and tear attending this increased volume of sound,
upon any part of any record-track, is no greater than
usual. The destruction of any part of the record need
not be any greater than in the ordinary system.
I do not limit myself to the use of a disk, for the rea-
son that any known equivalent therefor may be em-
ployed, without departing from the spirit of my inven-
tion.
Having thus described my invention I claim as new
and desire to secure by Letters Patent:
1. A multogram record, comprising' a revoluble member
provided with a plurality of record tracks in acoustical
registry with each other and further provided with raised
portions disposed intermediate said record tracks.
2. A multogram record, comprising a member provided
with a plurality of record tracks, and further provided 20
with a raised portion disposed intermediate said record
tracks for protecting the latter from injury.
3. A multogram record, comprising a revoluble disk
provided with record tracks, and further provided with
raised portions disposed intermediate said record tracks. 25
4. A multogram record, comprising a revoluble disk pro-
vided with annular beads integral therewith and disposed
concentrically, and further provided with record tracks
disposed intermediate of said annular heads.
5. A multogram record, comprising a revoluble disk pro- 30
vided with a plurality of record tracks disposed con-
centrically, and further provided with an annular head
disposed intermediate said record tracks.
In testimony whereof I have signed my name to this
specification in the presence of two subscribing witnesses. 35
AUGUST HOFFMAN.
Witnesses :
Walton Habbison,
Evehard B. Marshall.
No. 871,000.
PATENTED NOV. 12, 1907.
C. A. SMITH.
SOUND REPRODOCING HEAD.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 28, 1906.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
^^g,S,
40
J&feieJiD&J:'-
Ky rtu^T S&
<&&/
THE NOR* IS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 871,000.
PATENTED NOV. 12,-1907.
C. A.' SMITH,
SOUND REPRODUCING HEAD.
APPLICATION FILED PEB. 28, 1906.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
^p> J0 ?& 2Q
33
32
y?5&.M,,
?>&
/.
THE NORRJS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OEFICE.
CURTIS A. SMITH, OF ELGIN, ILLINOIS.
SOUND-REPRODUCING HEAD.
No. 871,000.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 12, 1907.
Application filed February 28, 1906. Serial No. 303,393.
To all -whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Curtis A. Smith, a citizen of the
United States, residing at Elgin, in the county of Kane
and State of Illinois, have invented certain new and
5 useful Improvements in Sound-Reproducing Heads, of
which the following is a specification.
My present invention relates to improvements in
sound reproducing heads for sound reproducing ma-
chines, and has for its object the production of a head
10 wherein there are means for controlling the volume of
sound delivered to the audience.
A further object of my invention is the production of
a simplified means for providing a fulcrum for said
stylus arm.
15 To the attainment of these various objects my inven-
tion consists of the new and novel structure and com-
bination of parts as will presently appear.
In the drawings: — Figure 1 is a side elevation of the
various parts of my sound head separated but in posi-
20 tion for assembly. Fig. 2 is an elevation of the as-
sembled sound head. Fig. 3 is a top plan view of my
sound head. Fig. 4 is a sectional view of the assembled
sound head, taken on line X X of Fig. 3. Figs. 5, 6, 7
and 8 are detail views showing the construction of my
25 new muting device. Fig. 9 shows the various parts
going into the construction of my new lever or stylus
arm. Fig. 10 is a sectional view showing the various
parts in Fig. 9 assembled to form the stylus arm or le-
ver. Fig. 11 is an enlarged perspective view of one of
30 the members forming the bearing or fulcrum for the
stylus arm or lever: Fig. 12 is a vertical sectional view
through the stylus arm and its bearing assembled with
the head.
The numeral 1 designates the collar which fits snugly
3 5 over the sound conduit of a sound reproducing machine.
2 designates a stop which serves to secure the proper
positioning of the sound head upon the sound conduit.
The numeral 4 designates a plate integral with the
collar 1 which forms the back of my reproducing head.
40 Through the plate 4 are the screw holes 5.
The numerals 6 designate the top plate of my sound
head, and is provided with the round central aperture
7, the annular shoulder 8, the posts or pillars 9, and the
screw holes 10 by means of which through the agency
45 of the screws 1] it is attached to the plate 4. Between
the plates 4 and 6 and contiguous with the annular
shoulder 8 is mounted the split tube 12, the split there-
in being designated by the numeral 13. Extending
into the tube 12 through the split 13 is mounted the
50 diaphragm 14.
In the holes 15 in the pillars 9 are mounted the pieces
16. which I prefer to make of hollow tubes, the inner
ends of which are split at right angles to form the fingers
16a, 16b, 16°, and 16d, the ends of which said fingers, as
55 shown in Fig. 11 at 17, engage the faces of the triangu-
lar projection 18 of the stylus arm or lever 19.
The inner end 36 of the stylus arm or lever 19 is per-
forated, as shown at 20 in Figs. 9 and 10. A like per-
foration 21 is provided in the center of the diaphragm.
The ends of the piece 22, which I make of a flexible 60
fiber, are inserted into the perforations 20 and 21, and
properly secured with wax, cement, or other appro-
priate means, thus binding the diaphragm 14 and the
stylus arm 19 firmly together.
When a proper adjustment is secured between the 65
stylus arm 19 and the diaphragm 14. and between the
stylus arm and the pieces 16, the said pieces 16 are se-
cured and maintained in their proper position by
means of the screws 11 working in the holes 10 as
clearly shown in Fig. 12. 70
My new stylus arm or lever 19 consists of the hub
28 which I make in the form of a cube. Through the
hub 28 and at right angles to each other I provide the
holes 29 and 30. Into the hole 29 is inserted the tube
31 whose ends are each provided with the four triangu- 7 5
lar projections 18, the faces of which contact with and
engage the fingers 16a, 16b, 16° and 16d. In one end
of the hole 30 is introduced the piece 32 which is pro-
vided upon its outer end with the chamber 33 for the
reception of the stylus 34, and the milled headed screw 80
35 for securely clamping the stylus in its chamber. In
the other end of the hole 30 is introduced the inner
end 36 of the stylus arm. When the parts are assem-
bled as above described, they can be readily sweated
together with a little solder. The parts as above de- 8 5 *
scribed can all be made with automatic machinery,
thereby permitting of a considerable economy in
manufacture.
My improved muting device is constructed as fol-
lows: In the collar 1 is slidingly mounted the hollow 90
cylinder 37 having in its wall the conical aperture 38.
Adjacent to the aperture 38 in the wall of the collar
1 is provided the cylindrical aperture 39. In the ap-
erture 39 is mounted the short shaft 40, having the
diminished end 41 projecting beyond the outer sur- 95
face of the collar 1. On the inner end of the shaft 40,
to one side of the center or eccentrically, is mounted
the stud 42 which engages with the aperture 38 in the
cylinder 37. It is obvious that by revolving the shaft
40, the eccentrically mounted stud 42 working in its 100
aperture or bearing 38 will force the cylinder 37 for-
ward and backward in the collar 1. The hollow cylin-
der 37 is so positioned that when it is furthermost in
the collar its outer edge lies flush with the inner sur-
face of the plate 4. Any turn that is given to the shaft 105
40 forces the inner end of the hollow cylinder 37 nearer
to the vibrating diaphragm 14, thereby shutting off
the sound waves rising from the edges of the diaphragm
and reducing the volume of sound delivered to the
audience. For the purpose of maintaining the shaft 110
40 in place, I provide upon the outer surface of the
collar 1 the plate 43 which is attached thereto by
871,000
means of the screw 44. The plate 43 is provided with
the hole 45 of sufficient diameter to accommodate the
diminished end 41 of the shaft 40. The hole 45 is fur-
ther cut away to provide the shoulders 46 and 47.
5 Upon the diminished end 41 of the shaft 40 are the
stop pin 48, which works between the shoulders 46 and
47 and by means of which the revolution of the shaft
40 is limited, and the crank or pin 49 by means of
which the shaft 40 is revolved.
10 Having described my invention, it is evident that I
provide a sound head of new and extremely simple
construction for the more perfect reproduction and
control of sound.
What I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
15 Patent is: —
1. A pivotal support for a stylus arm having a member
provided with a plurality of axially extending parallel
spring fingers and means for engaging the ends of said
member.
20 2. In combination with a sound reproducing head hav-
ing a tube running from the diaphragm chamber, a mute
consisting of a tubular body movably mounted in said
tube and adapted to be moved to project into said dia-
phragm chamber, and means for moving and adjusting
25 said mute at different distances from the vibrating dia-
phragm, said means extending through the walls of said
tube and adapted to be manipulated from the exterior
thereof.
3. In combination with a sound reproducing head, a
30 mute consisting of a tube mounted in the passage for the
escape of the sound, and an eccentric in engagement with
said tube and operable to advance said tube towards and
with draw it from the diaphragm.
4. In combination with a sound reproducing head, a
35 mute consisting of a tube mounted in the opening for the
escape of the sound, a shaft carrying an eccentric, said
tube being operably connected with said eccentric and
means for limiting the revolutions of the shaft.
5. In a sound reproducing head a stylus arm having
angular projections, a spring fulcrum consisting of two 40
pieces whose inner portions are split at right angles, the
inner end of the divisions formed thereby contacting with
and engaging the faces of said angular projections.
6. In sound heads for sound reproducing machines,
pieces carried in adjustable assembly with said sound 45
head the inner portion of said pieces being split in sec-
tions, a stylus arm and projections carried upon each side
of said stylus arm for engaging said sections.
7. A support for stylus arms in sound reproducing ma-
chines, comprising a plurality of axially extending fingers, 50
means for frictionally engaging and bending said fingers
to produce tension and a stylus arm.
8. A fulcrum for stylus arms in sound reproducing ma-
chines consisting of two pieces each with a plurality of
fingers to engage the stylus arm. 55
9. A fulcrum for stylus arms in sound reproducing ma-
chines consisting of two pieces the ends of which are di-
vided into a plurality of fingers, means upon the stylus
arm for engaging said fingers, and means for connecting
said pieces with the sound head. 60
10. A sound box comprising rear and side walls, a dia-
phragm therein, a sound box tube projecting from said rear
wall and a sound modifier consisting of a tube movable
within said sound box tube and adjustable into and out of
close proximity to said diaphragm and means carried by 65
said sound box and exterior thereof to adjust said sound
modifier.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature in presence
of two witnesses.
CURTIS A. SMITH.
Witnesses :
Benj. T. Roodhoose,
E. M. Patterson.
No. 871,370. PATENTED NOV. 19, 1907.
W. I. SHERWOOD.
SOUND REPRODUCING RECORD DISK.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 3, 1907.
ltd./.
c~
,cco^^^^wccv^^Nv^^x^^^^vc^x^c^^^^
tWv^^vs^^^vvVv^Vv'AsssssssS'W.SSS'^
d
Ma. 3.
VM//////M////////////////////SM7Z
ttot
^Witnesses
§8y
Ok.
oin*if
\
rHE NO.taiS PKTERS C i. V A-H>f\GTON, D. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM I. SHERWOOD, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO PHONOGRAPHIC MUSIC CO., OF
BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, A CORPORATION OF NEW YORK.
SOUND-REPRODUCING RECORD-DISK.
No. 871,370.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed January 3, 1907. Serial No, 350,613.
Patented Nov. 19, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William I. Sherwood,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
New York, borough of Manhattan, and
5 State of New York, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Sound-Re-
producing Record-Disks, of which the fol-
lowing is a specification.
My invention relates to improvements in
10 sound reproducing record disks of talking
machines, whether separate from or com-
bined with the turn table of the machine;
»and the objects of the invention are mainly
to provide a serviceable, reliable and charac-
15 teristic record disk, and to improve the ef-
fects intended to be produced.
With these main ends in view, my inven-
tion consists of certain features of construc-
tion and combinations of parts to be herein-
20 after described and then claimed, with ref-
erence to the preferred form of the invention
shown in the accompanying drawings, and in
which
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved
25 record disk, part broken away. Fig. 2 is a
diametrical transverse section thereof. Fig.
3 is a perspective view of the peripheral ring
of the disk detached. Fig. 4 is a transverse
section of a turn table of a talking machine
30 showing my improved disk resting thereon.
Referring to the drawings, the record disk
a of a talking or sound reproducing machine
is shown as having applied to its edge a pe-
ripheral ring or hoop b of material softer
35 than the disk to provide a friction surface.
The material of the ring or hoop b is prefer-
ably rubber, having sufficient softness and
resiliency to enable the ring to act in the
nature of a cushion or pad. The body of
40 the ring or hoop is shown as having a diame-
ter which is greater than the thickness of the
record disk, so that when the ring or hoop is
applied to the edge of the disk, the same will
bulge out or project from and beyond either
45 surface of the disk. The inner periphery
of the ring or hoop b is provided with a con-
tinuous groove c to receive the edge of the
disk a. In this manner the ring or hoop is
confined detachably upon the edge of the
50 disk. The diameter of the elastic ring or
hoop b, when removed from the disk, is pref-
erably such that the distance between dia-
metrically opposite portions of the bottom
of the groove c will be less than the diameter
55 of the disk, so that it is necessary to stretch
the peripheral hoop or band upon and over
the peripheral edge of the disk so as to enter
said edge into the recess.
When a record disk is applied to a talking
machine for the purpose of reproducing 60
sound, it usually rests upon a turn table,
such as d. In the present invention the rec-
ord disk a, b, does not throughout rest upon
the turn table, but the bulging or protruding
side portion of the ring or hoop b supports the 65
record disk from the table.
Quite a number of advantages are inciden-
tal to my improvement, among which may
be enumerated the following. The turn ta-
ble carries the disk around surely and effect- 70
ively by friction between the periphery of
the disk and the table, thus overcoming
slipping of the disk, or any movement of fhe
disk out of time and irrespective of the
speed to which the turn table is governed to 75
run, thus assuring that the piece reproduced,
if it be music, for instance, is at proper pitch.
The side portion of the peripheral ring or
hoop bulging or projecting beyond the plane
of the sound reproducing surface, forms a 80
stop for the stylus, and prevents it from be-
ing thrown by centrifugal force off the disk,
as sometimes occurs, and interrupting the
piece being produced. Also said bulging
side portion of the ring or hoop forms an in- 85
dex or guiding line for starting the stylus.
There is also the advantage of the cushion-
ing effect, winch particularly finds its use-
fulness when the sound reproducer is sud-
denly dropped upon the reproducing surface 90
of the disk.
A great advantage over present record
disks, is that, through my improvement,
disks are protected from each other in tran-
sit, in handling, in racking, etc., which tends 95
to injure the sound reproducing indenta-
tions of the disks, or to scratch the surface
of the disk itself. The bulging side portions
of the ring or hoop furnish a convenient
hand-hold for grasping the record disk, espe- 100
cially in removing it from a rack and sepa-
rating it from adjacent disks.
Record disks may conveniently be pro-
vided with rings or hoops of different colors,
whereby one disk may be readily distin- 105
guished from another, when in a rack or in a
pile.
Obviously the softer edgings of the disks
may be permanently attached or applied,
and they may be applied in a variety of 110
25
871,370
10
ways which will readily suggest themselves
to those skilled in the art.
What I claim as new and of my invention
is:
pi. A sound reproducing record disk hav-
ing a peripheral ring of soft material softer
than the record disk.
2. A sound reproducing record disk hav-
ing a soft peripheral ring removably applied
thereto and being softer than the record
disk.
3. A sound reproducing record disk hav-
ing a soft peripheral ring provided with a re-
cess in its inner periphery receiving the edge
of the disk said ring being softer than the
record disk.
4. A sound reproducing record disk hav-
ing an edging softer than the disk itself.
Signed at New York, N. Y. this 28th day
of December 1906.
WILLIAM I. SHERWOOD.
Witnesses:
Olive B. King,
Geo. L. Wheelock.
15
'
No. 871,511.
PATENTED NOV. 19, 1907.
I. KITSEE.
PRODOCTION OF SOOND RECORDS.
APPLICATION FILED MAT 17. 1907.
/^—issS
JZ*
/£J?y7&£?
3*vue*vtox
NORKIS PETEtS CO.. WASH I XGTOH. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
ISIDOR KITSEE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
PRODUCTION OF SOUND-RECORDS.
No. 871,511.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed May 17. 1907. Serial No. 374.213.
Patented Nov. 19, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:]
Be it known that I, Isidor Kitsee, citizen
of the United States, residing at Philadel-
phia, in the county of Philadelphia and State
of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Production of
Sound-Records, of which the following is a
specification.
My invention relates to the production of
sound records.
Most of the sound-records are to-day pro-
duced by what is called the "cutting-stylus",
and the systems now employed differ from
each other in that one reproduces the sound-
waves by the depth of the cut and the others
reproduce these sourd-waves by removing
an etch-resisting film on a solid plate. In
all these cases a resistance is offered to the
movements of the stylus, and through this
resistance these movements are greatly re-
tarded. The records therefore cannot re-
produce the voice in its natural amplitude.
It is the aim of my invention to obviate these
difficulties.
As it is necessary to illustrate some means,
whereby my invention may be carried out, I
have illustrated in the accompanying draw-
ing a simple arrangement to produce the un-
dulatory line, it being understood that the
details of the arrangement may differ with-
out departing from the scope of my inven-
tion.
In the drawing, Figure 1 is a cross section
of a recording mechanism' attached to the
vibrating diaphragm. Fig. 2 is a plan view
of part of a record.
In Fig. 1 , 1 is the mouth piece ; and 2 the
vibrating diaphragm connected to the guide
3. This guide is yieldingly guided by the
lever 4 supported at 5 by the projection 6.
10 is a reservoir containing the fluid 9; 8 a
valve to open or close the orifice of said reser-
voir; 11 are the means to force the fluid out
of said reservoir; 14 is a flexible connection
connecting the orifice 7 with the reservoir 10 ;
12 is the material adapted to have deposited
thereon the opaque line; and 13 are the re-
cording lines.
In experiments, I found that it is best to
produce the line out of diluted ink of the
variety known in commerce as "india ink"
and generally used for the production of
drawings. For the material on which the
line is deposited, I found that glass answers
the purpose best. It is obvious that the 55
glass plate has to be moved in the usual man-
ner and I have not illustrated the means to
move this plate, because such means are well
known to persons versed in the art.
After the record is produced in the manner 60
aforesaid, the plate is subjected, preferably,
to what is known in the art as the "photo
engraving process", whereby a negative may
be produced in suitable metal and where-
from the copies may then be reproduced in 65
any desired manner.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent is: —
1. The method of reproducing sound 70
waves in permanent records, which consists
in causing a fluid, opaque to the rays of light,
to be deposited in accordance with the vibra-
tions of a diaphragm actuated by said sound
waves on a material transparent to said rays 75
of light.
2. The method of producing sound records,
which consists in causing to be deflected the
flow of a fluid opaque to the rays of light, in
accordance with the vibrations of a dia- 80
phragm, and causing the so deflected opaque
fluid to be deposited on a solid surface trans-
parent to said rays of light.
3. The method of producing sound records,
which consists in causing a material, colored 85
so as to be opaque to the rays of light to be de-
posited on a transparent surface, in accord-
ance with the vibrations of a phonographic
diaphragm, and causing then, to be produced
a photographic copy of said deposited mate- 90
rial.
4. The method of producing sound records
without actual contact of a stylus connected
to the diaphragm, which consists in causing
said stylus to guide the orifice of a reservoir 95
containing an opaque fluid, causing said fluid
to be deposited on the surface of a transparent
material, and causing the so produced record
to be reproduced with the aid of the photo-
gravure process. 100
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
ISIDOR KITSEE. ■
Witnesses :
Mary C. Smith,
Alvah Rittenhouse.
No. 871,554.
PATENTED NOV. 19, 1907.
J. W. AYLSWORTH.
METHOD OF DUPLICATING SOUND RECORDS.
APPLICATION FILED DEO. 6, 1905.
Witnesses :
Inventor
Attorney
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. I
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JONAS W. AYLSWORTH, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT
COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
20
25
30
35
40
45
METHOD OF DUPLICATING SOUND-RECORDS.
No. 871,554.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 19, 1907.
Application filed December 6, 1905, Serial No. 290,540,
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Jonas W. Aylsworth,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
223 Midland avenue, East Orange, county
5 of Essex, and State of New Jersey, have in-
vented a certain new and useful Method of
Duplicating Sound-Records, of which the
following is a specification.
My invention relates to an improved
10 method for duplicating sound records from
matrices or molds by the expansion of a
blank, and is adapted particularly for the
making of records from relatively hard
material, such as hard rubber, celluloid and
15 similar compositions, although, the invention
may be used for making records from wax-like
compositions, such as those now employed
in the art of making duplicate, phonograph
records by a molding operation.
The object of the invention is to provide
a simple and effective method for the pur-
pose.
In order that the invention may be better
understood, attention is directed to the ac-
companying drawing, forming part of this
specification, and in wluch I illustrate a
sectional view of an apparatus suitable for
carrying out my invention.
The matrix or mold 1 is of the common type
now used in the art, being provided on its
interior with a negative impression of the
record to be duplicated and being of any de-
sired thickness. Provision is made for
alternately heating and cooling the matrix
or mold, preferably by surrounding the
same with a coil 2, embedded in a jacket of
lead, or other fusible metal. Steam (satu-
rated or super-heated) for heating the coil,
or water for cooling the same, are admitted
through the pipes 4 and 5 respectively, and
having suitable controlling valves therein,
as shown. The valved outlet 6, permits any
water or condensed steam to be drawn off
from the coil at the bottom thereof. The
matrix or mold is seated on a suitable base
7, and may, if desired, be permanently con-
, nected to the same; said base is carried
by a frame 8 having an upper member or.
arm 9. Engaging the top of the mold is
50 a cap 10 adapted to be firmly clamped in
place in any suitable way, as for example,
by a cam 11, carried by the arm 9. The
cap 10, is provided with a flexible expander
12, made preferably of rubber, adapted to
55 fit within the matrix or mold, and to leave
sufficient space for the reception of the blank
on which the record surface is to be im-
pressed. Connected with the interior of
the expander 12, is a flexible pipe 13, leading
to the chamber 14 of the vacum valve. A 60
pipe 15 connects the interior of the matrix
or mold with the chamber 14. The vacuum
valve 16 is an ordinary three-way valve and
when in the position shown, connects the
vacuum pipe 17 with the pipes 13 and 15 so 65
as to exhaust the air from the mold and from
the interior of the expander 12. When the
vacuum valve is moved 90 degrees clockwise,
it connects the vacuum pipe 17 with the pipe
15 only, and when moved to a further ex- 70
tent of 90 degrees, it cuts off the vacuum
pipe 17 entirely, as will be understood.
The vacuum pipe 17 is connected to any
suitable source of vacuum, preferably an
ordinary exhausting pump. 75
To provide regularity and rapidity of oper-
ation, a ■ reservoir is preferably interposed
between the exhausting pump and the du-
plicating apparatus, so as to permit the
necessary exhaustion to be quickly ob- 80
tained, and also to permit a number of dupli-
cating machines to be connected with the
same reservoir, as will be understood.
A valved pipe 18 connects with the pipe 13
above the vacuum valve and may be open di- 85
rectly to the air or may be connected with a
source of compressed air, as may be neces-
sary when the materials to be duplicated are
but slightly expansible. Another valve 19
below the vacuum valve permits atmos- 90
pheric air to enter the pipe 15. The blank
20 may be made of any suitable material
capable of being softened or rendered plastic
or semi-fluid by heating (such as hard rub-
ber, celluloid, shellac composition, or the or- 95
dinary wax-like materials of which duplicate
phonograph records are now made) and of
any desired thickness. By means of my in-
vention, records can be effectively dupli-
cated on extremely thin blanks, which can 100
be subsequently mounted on any suitable
and permanent support, as for instance, by
making the blank slightly tapered, so as to
engage the support frictionally. Or, in-
stead, the blank may be a composite struc- 105
ture formed of a suitable base of paper, fab-
ric, rubber composition, or similar material
capable of moderate expansion without
rupture, and carrying a coating of a smooth
and sufficiently hard material (such as eel- 110
871,554
luloid or similar substance, capable of being
softened by heat) on its outer surface. Pref-
erably the bottom of the mold is constructed
so as to swing downwardly as shown to per-
5 mit the blank to be introduced, and the
finished record to be withdrawn, suitable
means being provided to rigidly lock the
bottom in its closed position during the du-
plicating operation. The blank 20 is made
10 very slightly smaller than the bore of the
matrix or mold so as to be readily intro-
duced therein surrounding the expander, as
shown. The matrix or mold is now heated
(or it may be heated before the blank is in-
15 troduced) by admitting the steam to the coil
2 or in any other suitable way. This re-
sults in heating the blank so as to soften its
outer face and permit it to readily take an
impression.
20 During the heating of the blank, the vacu-
um valve 16 is operated to exhaust air
from the interior of the expander 12, and
also, from the interior of the mold, so as to
equalize the pressure on the expansible walls
25 of the expander. By thus applying a vacu-
um to the interior of the matrix or mold, I
effectively exhaust any air, or gas, or mois-
ture from between the blank and the record
surface of the matrix, so that when the blank
30 is expanded it will take a perfectly clear and
sharp impression from the record surface.
Furthermore, this exhaustion of the air film
between the blank and matrix is effected
without the necessity of sealing the ends of
35 the blanks in any way and the result is ob-
tained whether the blank is relatively thick
or is very thin. The vacuum valve 16 is now
moved clock-wise 90 degrees, so as to still
maintain the exhaust connection to the pipe
40 15, and the valve of the pipe IS is open to
permit atmospheric air or compressed air to
enter the expander 12, thereby expanding
the flexible walls of the latter and forcing the
blank intimately into engagement with the
45 record surface. When the blanks are formed
of material that is expanded with difficulty,
or that softens only slightly, I preferably use
compressed air in the expander, or super-
heated steam in the coil 2, or both, for effect-
50 ing this operation, but with thin blanks of
celluloid, or similar material, atmospheric
pressure will be sufficient. After the blank
has been thus expanded into engagement
with the matrix and is held closely in such
55 engagement by the inflation of the ex-
pander 12, I turn off the steam in the coil 2
and admit cold water to the same, so as to
rapidly chill the matrix and also the surface
of the record in contact therewith. This
60 chilling takes place while the record is
tightly compressed against the bore of the
matrix, so that the material is set and be-
comes fixed while in such engagement.
This results in a sharper and more perma-
65 nent impression on the resulting duplicate
than would be secured if the setting of the
material was brought about after detach-
ment of the record from the mold. Prefer-
ably, before the record has been cooled en-
tirely throughout, but after its surface has 70
been set and hardened as explained, the
vacuum valve 16 is moved to shut off the
vacuum pipe 17, and the valve 19 is opened
to equalize the pressure on the walls of the
expander 12, the elasticity of whose walls 75
withdraws the expander from the record to
its normal size. The mold with the record
therein is now allowed to cool (or an artificial
cooling operation may be performed) where-
by the record will contract diametrically so 80
as to free itself from the matrix and be
allowed to be removed by swinging the mold
bottom downwardly. This separation of
the finished duplicate from the matrix will
be facilitated if the bore of the matrix is 85
formed with a very slight taper, as is com-
mon in the art.
Although I have referred in the preceding
description to the use of a vacuum, it will be
understood that I use the expression in its 90
topical sense and mean any such condition of
rarefication as can be commercially secured
by a well designed exhausting or vacuum
pump.
Having now described my invention, what 95
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent is as follows : —
1. A process of duplicating sound records
which includes introducing within a hollow
matrix a tubular blank of impressionable 100
material, introducing within the blank a hol-
low flexible expander, exhausting the air
from the matrix and from the expander and
expanding the blank outwardly into engage-
ment with the matrix, substantially as set 105
forth.
2. A process of duplicating sound records
which includes introducing within a hollow
matrix a tubular blank of impressionable
material, introducing within the blank an 110
expander, exhausting the air from the ma-
trix and at the same time preventing the ex-
pansion of the expander, and then expanding
the blank outwardly into engagement with
the matrix by means of the said expander, 115
substantially as set forth.
3. A process of duplicating sound records
which includes introducing within a hollow
matrix a tubular blank of impressionable
material, introducing within the blank a hoi- 120
low flexible expander, exhausting the air
from the matrix and from the expander and
admitting air into the expander to expand
the blank into engagement with the matrix,
substantially as set forth. 125
4. A process of duplicating sound records
which includes introducing within a hollow
matrix a tubular blank of impressionable
material, introducing within the blank a hol-
low flexible expander, exhausting the air 130
871,554
from the matrix and from the expander, and
forcing the air under pressure into the ex-
pander to expand the blank into engagement
with the matrix, substantially^ set forth.
5 5. A process of duplicating sound records
which includes introducing within a hollow
matrix a tubular blank of material which
may be softened by heat, introducing within
the blank a hollow flexible expander, ex-
10 hausting the air from the matrix and from
the expander, heating the matrix to soften
the blank and expanding the blank out-
wardly into engagement with the matrix,
substantially as set forth.
15 6. A process of duplicating sound records
which includes introducing within a hollow
matrix a tubular blank of material which
mar be softened bv heat, introducing within
the blank a hollow flexible expander, ex-
20 hausting the air from the matrix and from
the expander, heating the matrix to soften
the blank, expanding the blank outwardly
into engagement with the matrix, and cool-
ing the matrix so as to set the impression,
substantially as set forth. 25
7. A process of duplicating sound records
which includes introducing within a hollow
matrix a tubular blank of material which
may be softened by heat, introducing within
the blank a hollow flexible expander, ex- 30
hausting the air from the matrix and from
the expander, heating the matrix to soften
the blank, expanding the blank outwardly
into engagement with the matrix, cooling the
matrix so as to set the impression, and finally 35
shrinking the resulting duplicate diametric-
ally to permit its removal, substantially as
set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 29th day of Novr. 1905.
" JONAS W. AYLSWORTH.
Witnesses:
Frank L. Dyer,
Anna R. Kletim.
No. 871,726.
PATENTED NOV. 19, 1907.
G. MORIN.
TELEGRAPHONE SYSTEM.
APPLICATION PILED JAN. 30, 1907.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 871,726.
PATENTED NOV. 19, 1907.
G. MORIN.
TELEGRAPHONE SYSTEM.
APPLICATION FILED JAK. 30, 1907.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
r». NOSNIS petshj „ WASHINGTON. B. C.
No. 871,726.
PATENTED NOV. 19, 1907.
G. MORIN.
TELEGRAPHONE SYSTEM.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 30, 1907.
6 SHEETS— SHEET 3.
^^<ySk~Si r»
'^^^/A^^m^\^m^
^^^^M^^M^^^
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
I
T
No. 871,726.
PATENTED NOV. 19, 1907.
G. MORIN.
TELEGRAPHONE SYSTEM.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 30. 1907.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 4.
D
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
Georgre Jkfoj~i?i
ATTORNEYS
THE NOKKIS P1TSXS CO; WASHINOTOM, D. C.
No. 871,726.
PATENTED NOV. 19, 1907.
G. MORIN.
TELEGRAPHONE SYSTEM.
APPLIOATIOH FILED J AH. 30. 1907.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 6.
&&.Z
-86
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
HE NOfiRrS PETERS CO.. WASMIH070K. B. C
No, 871,726.
PATENTED NOV. 19, 1907.
G. MORIN.
TELEGRAPHONE SYSTEM.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 30, 1907.
6 SHEETS— SHEET 8.
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
GEORGE MORIN, OF HABANA, CUBA.
TELEGRAPHONE SYSTEM.
No. 871,726.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 19, 1907.
Application filed January 30, 1907. Serial No. 354,822.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, George Morin, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Habana, Cuba, have invented a new and
5 Improved Telegraphone System, of which
the following is a full, clear, and exact de-
scription.
My invention relates to telegraphone sys-
tems, my more particular object being to so
10 connect the telegraphone with line wires as
to enable the instrument to be easily con-
trolled from a distance.
My invention further relates to provision
for preventing undue waste of the available
15 record space upon the movable member
bearing the record.
My invention further relates to means
whereby a person may leave a telegraphone
in such condition that during absence of the
20 person the telegraphone will automatically
receive a message intended for the person
and will, under proper conditions, reproduce
this message carefully.
My invention further relates to certain de-
25 tails of construction whereby the general
efficiency of the telegraphone and parts as-
sociated therewith are generally improved.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawings forming a part of this specifi-
30 cation, in. which similar characters of refer-
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the
figures.
Figure 1 is a diagram showing the wiring
of my system, a delicate relay connected
35 with this wiring and adapted to be actuated
by the human voice for the purpose of con-
trolling certain movable parts and thereby
preventing undue waste of the sound record
of the telegraphone, this view also showing
40 means operated electrically from a distance
for starting the telegraphone into action and
for stopping its action upon the expiration
of a predetermined time limit; Fig. 2 is a side
elevation showing a part of the telegraphone
45 mechanism and casing containing the same,
certain parts being broken away. Fig. 3 is
a horizontal section through the casing
showing the telegraphone mechanism in-
cluding a revoluble disk sound record, means
50 for controlling a traveling carriage, and trav-
eling magnetic mechanism co-acting with
tins record; this view further shows the re-
lay above mentioned, and also a part of the
means for starting and stopping the teleg-
55 raphone; Fig. 4 is an enlarged fragmentary
section upon the line 4 — 4 of Fig. 3, looking
in the direction of the arrow and showing the
record disk, the magnetic mechanism co-
acting therewith for recording and repro-
ducing sounds, and mechanism controllable CO
from a distance for stopping and starting the
travel of this magnetic mechanism; Fig. 5 is
a plan partly in section, showing the relay
controllable by the human voice for govern-
ing the motion of the magnets 35 relatively 65
to the center of the disk 22; Fig. 6 is a verti-
cal section upon the line 6 — 6 of Fig. 5, look-
ing in the direction of the arrow and showing
the contact forming a part of the relay 75,
this contact being opened and closed by 70
sound -controlled agency from a distance;
Fig. 7 is a perspective of the armature of the
relay 75, this armature being controllable by
so-called "magnetic drag"; Fig. 8 is an en-
larged fragmentary elevation of the mechan- 75
ism operated electrically from a distance for
stopping and starting the spring motor of the
telegraphone, the casing 10 in this view be-
ing shown in section; and Fig. 9 is an en-
larged fragmentary plan of the worm 71 and 80
worm gear 70 used for turning the screw 59.
(see Fig. 8) incidental to stopping and start-
ing the spring motor of the telegraphone.
A casing 10 is, by aid of hinges 11, mount-
ed upon a base 12. Contained within the 85
casing 10 is a spring motor 13 including va-
rious gear wheels 14, 15, and a winding shaft
16, the latter being provided with an out-
wardly extending portion 1 7 and with a hand
crank 18 whereby the spring motor may be 90
wound in' the usual manner. The spring
motor also includes a bevel gear 19 which
meshes with a bevel pinion 20, the latter be-
ing rigid upon a revoluble shaft 21. A rec-
ord disk is shown at 22 and is of the so-called 95
magnetic type. This disk is mounted firmty
upon the shaft 21 and turns when the latter
rotates. Mounted firmly upon the shaft 21
is a worm gear 23 which meshes with a worm
24. A governor is shown at 25 and is pro- 100
vided with a revoluble disk 26, the governor
and disk being actuated by a shaft 27 inte-
gral with the worm 24. A spring contact 2S
is located just below the disk 26 and is
opened and closed by movements of this 105
disk in the general direction of the axis of the
governor shaft 27. . When the shaft turns,
the governor pulls the disk 26 to the left ac-
cording to the view shown in Fig. 5 and this
closes the contact 28. Hence, whde the teleg- 110
871,726
raphone is in action, the contact 28 is closed,
whereas this contact is opened when the teleg-
raphone is idle.
Mounted rigidly upon the revoluble shaft
5 21 is a bevel gear 29 which meshes with a
bevel gear 30 mounted rigidly upon a revolu-
ble screw shaft 31. A bracket 32 is located
below the screw shaft 31 and is provided
with lugs 32 a disposed upon opposite sides
10 of the screw shaft 31. Practically speaking,
therefore, the bracket 32 has its upper end
bifurcated so as to straddle the screw shaft.
A hardened steel blade 33 (see Fig. 4) is dis-
posed in immediate proximity to the screw
15 shaft 31 and is adapted to engage and dis-
engage the latter, for purposes hereinafter
described.
Mounted upon the bracket 32 (see Fig. 4)
is a horse shoe electro-magnet 34. The
20 telegraphone magnets are shown at 35 and
are connected together by a U-shaped
spring 36. The magnets 35 are provided
centrally with pointed cores 37, the latter
engaging the disk 22 so as to confer there-
25 upon or to receive therefrom magnetic im-
pulses corresponding to sound vibrations.
A limiting stop 38 (see Fig. 3) prevents ex-
cessive travel of the U-shaped spring 36 in
one direction. A stationary bracket 39,
30 having substantially the form of a wedge, is
employed for the purpose of spreading the
U-shaped spring 36 whenever necessary, in
order to adjust the tension or position of the
pointed cores 37 relatively to the disk 22.
35 For this purpose a handle 40 (see Fig. 3) is
provided; the operator merely pulls the
handle outwardly so as to force the U-shaped
spring member 36 astride of the wedge 39
and thus distend the U-shaped member to
40 any desired extent, the distension being con-
tinued until the U-shaped member lodges
against the limiting stop 38. A compara-
tively stiff rod 41 extends lengthwise of the
casing. Mounted upon this rod 41 is a tubu-
45 lar slide 42 connected rigidly with the
bracket 32 (see Figs. 2 and 4). Mounted
upon a screw pivot 43 is a rocker 44 to which
the blade 33, above described, is rigidly se-
cured. This blade is provided with a con-
50 cave edge 45 which is, in effect, a fragmen-
tary threaded nut adapted to engage and
disengage the screw shaft 31, so as to force
the blade 33 and all parts connected with it,
in a general direction parallel with that of
55 the screw shaft.
A leaf spring 46 is mounted upon the
bracket 32 and engages the edge of the
rocker 44. This rocker is provided with a
slot 47 through which passes a screw 48 en-
60 gaging the bracket 32. This allows the
rocker 44 to turn or rock slightly upon the
pivot 43 as a center. In doing this the
rocker brings the edge or thread 45 into and
out of engagement with the screw shaft 31,
65 as above described. Mounted rigidly upon
the lower end of the rocker 44 is an armature
49 adapted to be attracted and released by
the magnet 34. The lower end of the
bracket 32 is connected by a pivot 50 with
the U-shaped member 36. This allows the 70
U-shaped member a little freedom and
widens its adaptability to conform to acci-
dental variations in the shape of the disk 22,
due, for instance, to unavoidable distortion
or buckling of the latter. It also allows 75
ease of movement of the bracket 32 and
tubular slide 42 relatively to the rod 41.
It will readily be seen that whenever the
magnet 34 is energized, the screw shaft 31
being in motion, the bracket 32 and all parts 80
connected therewith, including the magnets
35, must begin to travel toward the center
of the disk and that this travel must' cease
when the magnet 34 is deenergized (see
Fig. 4). It will also be seen that the disk 85
may rotate continuously although the travel
of the magnets 35 may be intermittent.
The disk 26, carried by the governor 25
(see Fig. 1), in addition to opening and clos-
ing the contact 28, serves as a brake disk for 90
stopping and starting the action of the spring
motor. To this end a brake shoe 51 is
mounted upon a brake rod 52, the latter
being rigidly connected with a rocker shaft
53 and provided with a rigid portion 54 ex- 95
tending beneath an adjusting screw 55. By
turning the screw 55, the play of the brake
rod 52 and brake shoe 51 may be controlled
within different limits. A spring 56 tends
to retract the brake rod 52 and to remove the 100
brake shoe 51 from engagement with the
disk 26 whenever the shaft 53 is rocked in
the proper direction for so doing.
Mounted upon the rocker shaft 53 is an-
other brake rod 57 provided with a concave 105
brake shoe 58. Disposed below this brake
shoe 58 and. adapted to engage the same, is
a screw shaft 59 provided with a slot 60 ex-
tending throughout a good portion of its
length. A threaded shoe 61, constituting in 110
effect a fragmentary nut, is adapted to en-
gage and disengage the screw shaft 59. The
shoe 61, together with an armature 62 is
mounted upon a bell crank lever 63, the lat-
ter being movable and provided with a re- 115
tracting spring 64. A magnet 65 is disposed
adjacent to the armature 62, and, when
energized, draws the same. It will be seen
that when the magnet 65 is energized, the
threaded shoe 61 is removed from the screw 120
shaft 59, and that when the magnet 65 is de-
energized, the retracting spring 64 instantly
throws the threaded shoe 61 into engagement
with the screw shaft 59.
A tube 66 (see Fig. 8) is fitted with an ad- 12;
justing screw 67, and for this purpose is pro-
vided internally with threads 68. This tube
is mounted upon a bracket 69. A worm
gear 70 meshes with a worm 71, the latter
being integral with a revoluble shaft 72. 130
871,726
This shaft rotates within a bearing 73 form-
ing a part of a bracket 74 (see Fig. 9). The
upper end of the tube 66 is smooth and the
screw shaft 59, wliile threaded and extending
5 into this tube, does not engage it as a nut
would engage a screw, but simply incloses it
loosely. By this means the screw shaft 59
lias merely a sliding relation to the tube 66,
and may be abruptly raised or lowered with
10 reference to the same. The inner diameter
of the tube 66 at the point represented by
the thread 68 is sufficiently large to enable
the screw shaft 59 to be abruptly raised or
lowered, independently of any rotative
15 movement of the screw shaft.
"When the motor 1.3 is in action, the shaft
72 and worm 71 rotate and cause the worm
gear 70 to return. This gear is provided
with a spline 70a (see Fig. 9) which fits into
20 the slot 60. The relation of the gear 70
to the screw shaft 59 is, owing to the action
of the spline, a little peculiar. When the
gear 70 turns, the spline 70a causes the screw
shaft 59 to turn at the same rate of speed
25 as the gear 70, but at the same time leaves
the screw shaft 59 free to ascend, descend,
or to remain at a given altitude, as the case
may be. If, now, the threaded shoe 61 hap-
pens to be in engagement with the screw
30 shaft 59, the rotation of the latter, of course,
causes it to climb or to rise relatively to the
shoe 61, and if at any time the threaded
shoe 61 be withdrawn by action of the mag-
net 65 upon the armature 62 (see Fig. 7)
35 the screw shaft 59 drops abruptly down-
ward until stopped by the adjusting screw
67. Hence, all that the gear 70 does is to
turn the screw shaft 59 independently of the
altitude thereof, and all that the magnet 65
40 does, acting through the threaded shoe 61,
is to cause the screw shaft 59 to rise gradually
or to fall abruptly as the case may be. If,
now, the magnet 65 be decnergized so that
the threaded shoe 61 rests in engagement
45 with the screw shaft 59, for a predeterminexl
length of time, say five minutes, the screw
shaft 59 rises until it reaches the brake shoe
58 (see Fig. 8).. It thereupon causes the
rocker shaft 53 to turn, and this movement
50 brings the brake shoe 51 against the friction
disk 26, thereby stopping the motor. By
moving the adjusting screws 55, 67, the pre-
cise duration of the movement, before the
motor is stopped, may be varied within cer-
55 tain limits.
In Fig. 5 is shown the "magnetic drag"
relay, controllable electrically from a dis-
tance for the purpose of energizing and de-
energizing the circuit through the magnet
60 34, and by doing this, to exert control over
movements of the telegraphone magnets 35.
The relay magnet is shown at 75 and is
mounted upon a bracket 75a. A revoluble
disk 76 is made of magnetic material and
65 constitutes the armature for the magnet 75.
This disk is" provided with a sleeve 77 inte-
gral therewith and encircling the governor
shaft 27. A hub 78 also encircles the gov-
ernor shaft but is immovable relatively
thereto. A pair of lugs 79, 80, of the shaft, 70
indicated in Fig. 6, are provided. Revolu-
bly mounted upon the lug 79 is an adjusting
contact sci'ew SI. Another screw 82 is
mounted upon and movable in relation to
the lug 80. These lugs 79, 80 are secured 75
rigidly upon a disk 83 of insulating material,
this disk being provided with a radially. dis-
posed slot <S3a, as will ,be understood from
Fig. 6.
A set screw 84 permits removal of the hub 80
78 and yet maintains the hub rigidly in po-
sition when in use. A spring tongue 86,
preferably of platinum, is mounted rigidly
upon the revoluble disk 76 and engages the
hub 78, as will be understood from Fig. 5. 85
The arrangement of these parts is such that
the rotation of the disk 76 may be retarded
slightly and the governor shaft 27 and hub
78 may turn ahead a slight fraction of a revo-
lution, the shaft 27 being loose as compared 90
with the disk 76. In other words, the revo-
lution of the contact spring 86 constitutes
an elastic connection from the disk 76 to the
shaft 27 and parts connected therewith, so
that the relation of the shaft 27 and disk 95
76 is only approximate as to relative posi-
tion. Now, as indicated in Fig. 6, the spring
tongue 86 normally engages the contact
screw 81. If, however, there be a slight
motion of the disk 76, the contact screw 100
81 moves away from the contact spring 86,
and thus breaks connection with the screw.
When, therefore, the magnet 75 is energized,
contact, is broken and when the magnet is de-
energized, the contact is closed, this being 105
just the reverse of the action of the ordinary
telegraphic relay.
By means of screws 85 the disk 83, of in-
sulating material, is at all times maintained
rigid in relation to the hub 78. In fact, all 110
parts immediately connected with the shaft
27 rotate therewith and are rigid in relation
thereto, aside from the flexibility of the coup-
ling between the disk 76 and the shaft, as
above described. 115
Brushes 87, 88 are disposed adjacent to
each other, the brush 88 being in electrical
communication with the hub 78 and con-
tact spring 86, the brush 87 engaging a slip
ring 89, as will understood from Fig. 5. 120
The brushes 87, 88 are the terminals of the
local circuit of the relay, the main circuit
thereof being through the magnet 75. The
action of the relay is quite simple. The
magnet 75 being energized, the disk 76 is 125
drawn toward it and its rotation slightly re-
tarded by its friction against the magnet
cores. The shaft 27, continuing its rotation
in the direction indicated by the arrow in
Fig. 6, causes the contact screw 81 to break 130
871,726
engagement with the contact spring 86.
This leaves open the local circuit; that is,
the circuit through brushes 87, 88.
Referring again to Fig. 1, a telephone may
5 be seen at 90 which is preferably of consid-
erable power. From this telephone line
wires 91, 92 lead to binding posts 93, 94.
Adjacent to these binding posts are others
95, 96, and connected with the two latter
10 are wires 97, 98 and a telephonic receiver 99.
From the binding post 93 a wire 100 leads to
a contact button 101. Another contact
wire 101a is connected by a wire 102 with
the magnet 65. From the latter a wire 103
15 leads to the relay magnet 75 and from this
magnet wires 104, 105, 106, 107 lead down
to binding posts 94, 95. Wires 108, 108a
are connected with the telephone magnets
35. A wire 109 connects the wire 108 with a
20 switch blade 110. A contact button 111 is
disposed in the path of this switch blade.
From the contact button 111 a wire 112
leads upwardly and connects with a wire 113.
The latter leads to a contact spring 114
25 adapted to engage and disengage another
contact spring 115; this last contact spring
115 is connected by a wire 116 with the mag-
net 34 used as above described, for control-
ling the travel of the telegraphone magnets
30 35. From the magnet 34 a wire 117 leads
upwardly to the brush 87. The other brush
88 is connected by a wire 119 with the con-
tact 28. From the latter wires 120, 1 18 lead
to a local battery 121. This battery is con-
35 nected by wires 122, 123 with a pole changer
124; this pole changer has contact buttons
125, 126, 127. The contact buttons 125,
127 are connected with a wire 128, the latter
being in turn connected with wires 112, 113.
40 The contact button 126 is connected by a
wire 129 with wires 105, 125. The switch
blade 110 is provided with an insulated boss
110a for forcing the contact spring 114
against the contact spring 115, as will be un-
45 derstood from the lower left hand corner of
Fig. 1.
The action of my system is as follows : We
will suppose that the mechanism shown in
Fig. 1, with the exception of the telephone 90
50 and line wires 91, 92, represents the outfit of
a subscriber, and that the latter wishes to ab-
sent himself and have the system take down
any message which may be sent during his
absence. He moves the switch bladel 10 into
55 the position indicated, thereby causing it to
close contact between springs 1 14, 115. The
spring motor we will suppose is properly
wound up and it makes no difference
whether it be left running or idle. If it be
60 left running the rotation of the screw shaft 59
raises the latter until it engages the brake
shoe 85, thus causing the rocker shaft 53 to
turn and bring the shoe 51 against the disk
26, thereby preventing further rotation of
65 the motor. This occurs in a few minutes, if
the switch blade 110 is placed in the position
indicated in Fig. 1 and the apparatus in
statu quo until the call is made. Suppose
now that a subscriber at the telephone 90
wishes to make a communication. To all in- 70
tents and purposes he "rings" in the usual
manner. .In other words, he sends an alter-
nating magneto current over a line as if he
were ringing. The following circuit is there-
by completed: magneto of telephone 90, line 75
wire 91, binding post 93, wire 100, contact
button 101, switch blade 110, contact button
101a, wire 102, magnet 65 (I call this for con-
venience the starting magnet) wire 103, re-
lay magnet 75, wires 104, 105, 106, 107, bind- 80
ing post 94, line wire 92, back to generator of
telephone 90. This energizes the starting
magnet 65 and causes it to attract its arma-
ture 62. The screw shaft 59, being now un-
supported, drops down upon the screw 67 85
(see Figs. 1 and 8). The pressure against
the brake shoe 58 being now relieved, the re-
tracting spring 56 causes the withdrawal of
the brake shoe 51 from the disk 26. The
spring motor mechanism now starts, having 90
been previously wound, as above explained.
When the motor mechanism starts, the gov-
ernor 25 is thrown into action. This causes
the disk 26 to move laterally to the right, ac-
cording to the view shown in Fig. 1, and 95
closes the contact 28. The telegraphone is
now in full action, except with reference to
movements of the telegraphone magnets 35
and parts carrying the same. Whether or not
these magnets 35 and parts carrying the same 100
are in motion must depend upon the position •
of the rocker 44 (see Fig. 1) and this must
in turn depend upon whether the circuit
through the magnet 34 is or is not completed,
the completion of this circuit being ulti- 105
mately controlled by the electrical condition
of the relay magnet 75, as above explained.
The calling subscriber now begins to talk and
in so doing he sends talking currents over the
following circuit: telephone 90, line wire 91, 110
binding post 93, wire 100, contact button
101, switch blade 110, contact button 101a,
wire 102, magnet 65, wire 103, relay magnet
75, wires 104, 105, 106, 107, binding post 94,
line wire 92, back to telephone 90. This cir- 115
cuit is identical with the one above traced,
with the exception that at the telephone 90,
it is the talking circuit instead of the ringing
circuit. The talking circuit, however, being
weaker, as usual, than the ringing circuit, is 120
unable to have much effect upon the magnet
65 and consequently is unable to cause this
magnet to withdraw the shoe 61 from en-
gagement with the screw shaft 59. The re-
lay magnet 75 being more sensitive, however, 125
is energized by the talking currents and the
disk 76 is attracted.
Owing to the "magnetic drag", above
described, the disk is retarded and as the
shaft 27 rotates under propulsion from the 130
871,726
S
spring motor, the contact is broken between
the contact spring 86 and the contact screw
81. This opens the local circuit which is
as follows: Battery 121, wire 122, right-
5 hand member of the pole changer 124, con-
tact button 125, wire 128, wire 113, con-
tact springs 114, 115, wire 116, magnet 34,
wire 117, brush 87, slip ring 89, lug 79, con-
tact screw 81, contact spring 86, hub 78,
10 brush 88, wire 119, contact 28 (now closed),
wire 120, wire 118, back to battery 121.
The battery circuit being thus opened, it-
follows that the magnet 34 must release its
armature 49. This causes the rocker 44 to
15 move under impulse from the leaf spring 46
(see Fig. 4) and therefore throws the frag-
mentary nut 45 into engagement with the
screw shaft 31. The bracket 32, tubular
slide 42, and telephone magnets 35 now
20 begin to move toward the center of the
record disk. If the talking subscriber con-
tinues his conversation quite steadily, there
is no interruption of the motion of the teleg-
raphone magnets 35. Slight pauses be-
25 tween the words and at the ends of sentences
are not sufficient to interfere with the action
in the slightest degree, for the reason that
the magnet 34 can not be deenergized until
the circuit is opened between the contact
30 spring 86 and the contact screw 81 (see Fig. l
6) and this can not occur unless the voice-
controlled currents through the line are
stopped for a little period of time, sufficient
to represent the length of time during which
35 the shaft 27 can travel without causing the
electrical connection to break. In any con-
siderable pause in conversation, however,
the electrical connection is broken for the
reason that the contact screw 81 moves
40 away from the contact spring 86. When this
occurs, the local circuit, above traced, is
again completed, the rocker 44 assumes the
position indicated in Fig. 1 , and the mag-
nets 35 are enabled to travel. As soon,
45 however, as the talking subscriber resiimes
his conversation, the magnet 34 is deener-
gized and the magnets 35 continue their
travel. In this way the available surface of
the record disk is saved, there being" no
50 waste due to extensive skips made by the
telegraphone magnets upon the disk. The
apparatus is thus adapted for measured
service.
When the record disk is completed, a
55 larger volume of conversation is recorded
than would be recorded under conditions
where the telegraphone magnets would con-
tinue to travel during intervals while the
sounds were not being produced. During
60 all the time while the record is being made
the screw shaft 59 continues to rise, as above
described until it lodges against the brake
shoe 58, and this action, as above described,
turns the rocker shaft 53 and applies the
65 brake shoe 51, so as to stop the action of the
spring motor. This feature may, if desired,
be employed in connection with measured
service, the idea being that, when a call is
made, the telegraphone will be thrown into
action and its action will continue for a pre- 70
determined period, say five minutes. Sup-
pose now that the absent subscriber returns
and wishes to ascertain what message, if any,
has come while he was away. He turns the
switch blade 110 (see Fig. 1) to the right and 75
into engagement with the contact button
130. This breaks communication between
contact springs 114 and 115, thus opening the
circuit through magnet 34. Before doing
this, however, he adjusts the magnets 35 in 80
the usual manner so as to enable the teleg-
raphone to act as a reproducer. The
switch blade 110 now resting upon the con-
tact button 130, the following circuit is com-
pleted: Switch blade 110, contact button 85
130, wire 131, binding post 96, wire 97, re-
ceiver 99, wire 98, binding post 95, wire 106,
wire 108a, telegraphone magnets 35, wire 108,
wire 109, back to switch blade 110. This
circuit is energized by the magnetic action of 90
the disk upon the magnets 35, and, of course,
the operator is enabled to read from the re-
ceiver 99 the reproduction of the sounds rep-
resenting the message recorded. If, as is
usually the case, the subscriber now wishes 95
to erase the magnetic record from the record
disk 22, he simply turns the switch blade 110
to the left, causing it to engage contact but-
ton 111. This movement breaks connection
between the contact springs 114, 115, and 100
completes the following circuit: Battery 121,
wire 122, right-hand member of pole changer
124, contact button 125, wire 128, wire 112,
contact button 111, switch blade 110, wire
109, wire 108, telegraphone magnets 35, 105
wire 108a, wire 106, wire 105, wire 129, left-
hand member of pole changer 124, and wires
123 and 118, back to battery 121. This
energizes the magnets 35, and by causing
them to act powerfully upon the record disk 110
22, the magnetic impressions upon this disk
for representing sound vibrations are effect-
ively erased. During this operation the
disk 22 rotates and the magnets 35 travel in
the same manner as if the machine were re- 115
producing or recording.
I find it sometimes expedient to reverse
the polarity of the battery 121 for purposes
of removing magnetic impressions from the
disk 22. In order to do this, I simply shift 120
the pole changer 124 to the left, meanwhile
turning the switch blade 110, thus complet-
ing the following circuit: Battery 121, wire
112, right-hand member of pole changer 124,
wire 129, wire 105, wire 106, wire 108a, mag- 125
nets 35, wires 108, 109, switch blade 110,
contact button 111, wires 112, 128, left-hand,
member of pole changer 124, wire 123, wire
118, back to battery 121.
Having thus described my invention, I 130
&
871,726
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent :
1. In a system of the character described,
the combination of a movable recording
5 member, means for actuating the same, mag-
nets movable in relation to the general posi-
tion occupied by said recording member for
the purpose of impressing a record thereupon,
and sound wave controlled mechanism for
10 stopping and starting said last-mentioned
mechanism independently of movements of
said movable recording member.
2. In a system of the character described,
the combination of a movable record-receiv-
15 ing member, mechanism for impressing a
record thereupon, motor mechanism for pro-
pelling said recording member, and electric-
ally operated mechanism controllable at will
by sounds at a distance for stopping and
20 starting, relatively to said recording mem-
ber, said means for impressing said record
thereupon.
3. In a system of the character described,
the combination of a relay, sound wave con-
25 trolled mechanism connected.with said relay
for actuating the same, and means connected
with said relay and controllable thereby for
forming a record surface.
4. In a system of the character described,
30 the combination of a telegraphone provided
with a record member, means for impressing
upon said record member a sound record,
feed mechanism connected with said means
for carrying the position thereof relatively to
35 said record member, and sound wave con-
trolled mechanism connected with said feed
mechanism for stopping and starting the
latter.
5. In a system of the character described,
40 the combination of a telegraphone, means for
actuating the same, and mechanism control-
lable from a distance by sound waves for
throwing said telegraphone into and out of
action at will.
45 6. In a system of the character described,
the combination of a telegraphone, a motor
for actuating the same, a brake for stopping
said telegraphone, sound wave controlled
mechanism for releasing said brake so as to
50 allow said motor to start, and time-controlled
mechanism connected with said motor mech-
anism for stopping said telegraphone after a
predetermined measured service.
7. In a system of the character described,
55 the combination of a telegraphone provided
with a record member, means for actuating
said record member, magnetic mechanism for
impressing upon said record member impres-
sions analogous to sound waves, means con-
60 trollable electrically from a distance by
sound waves for governing the position of
said magnetic mechanism relatively to said
record member, and a telephone connected
with said magnetic member for reproducing
sounds. 65
8. In a system of the character described,
the combination of a telegraphone provided
with feed mechanism, a magnet for stopping
and starting said feed mechanism, a relay
having a local circuit connected with said 70
magnet for energizing the latter, and sound
wave controlled mechanism connected with
said relay for energizing the latter.
9. In a system of the character described,
the combination of a telegraphone provided 75
with a revoluble member and with feed mech-
anism, a magnet for controlling said feed
mechanism independently of said revoluble
member, a relay provided with a local circuit
connected with said magnet, said relay being 80
further provided with a main circuit, and
electric mechanism, controllable by sound
waves, for energizing said relay.
10. In a system of the character described,
the combination of a telegraphone, means for 85
actuating the same from a distance, and
sound wave controlled mechanism connected
with said last-mentioned means for automat-
ically stopping said telegraphone after a pre-
determined measured service. 90
11. In a system of the character described,
the combination of a telegraphone, sound
wave controlled mechanism for throwing
said telegraphone into action, mechanism
controllable by movements of said telegra- 95
phone for stopping the latter after a prede-
termined measured service, and adjusting
mechanism controllable at will for governing
said interval.
12. In a system of the character described, 100
the combination of a feed screw, a bracket
movable in relation thereto, magnets mount-
ed upon said bracket, a rocker mounted upon
said bracket and provided with a surface for
engaging said feed screw, sound wave con- 105
trolled mechanism operated electrically from
a distance for actuating said rocker, and a
record member movable in relation to said
feed mechanism.
13. In a system of the character described, 110
the combination of a feed screw, a bracket
movable in relation thereto, magnets mount-
ed upon said bracket, a rocker mounted upon
said bracket and provided with a surface for
engaging said feed screw, means for actual- 115
ing said rocker, and a record member mov-
able in relation to said feed mechanism.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
GEORGE MORIN.
Witnesses :
Victor Normand,
O. A. Hornsby.
No, 872,399, PATENTED DEC. 3, 1907.
T. ZOEBL.
PITCH INDICATING DEVICE FOR GRAPHOPHONES AND THE LIKE.
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 18, 1907.
<£ur 2
t HOORtS PETERS CO.. WASHI«OTO». O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THEODOR ZOEBL, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
PITCH-INDICATING DEVICE FOR GRAPHOPHONES AND THE LIKE.
No. 872,399.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed March 18, 1907. Serial Ho. 362,826.
Patented Dec. 3, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Theodor Zoebl, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi-
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi-
5 nois, have invented a new and useful Im-
provement in Pitch-Indicating Devices for
Graphophones and the Like, of which the fol-
lowing is a complete specification.
This invention relates to improvements in
10 pitch indicating devices for graphophones
and the like and more particularly to a pitch
indicating device adapted to be adjusted to
meet the varying requirements caused by
wear of the speed regulating device of the
15 machine.
The object of this invention is to provide a
pitch indicating device by means of which
the speed of the record may be regulated to
produce any desired pitch in the reproduc-
20 tion of sounds, and in which it will only be
necessary to primarily adjust the device to a
given tone, as for instance middle C, and
from that tone as a starting point the speed
of the record may be adjusted to give any de-
25 sired pitch.
It is also an object of the invention to pro-
vide a very cheap and simple device which
will not readily get out of adjustment and
which is capable of being attached to any of
30 the ordinary makes of sound reproducing in-
struments.
The invention consists of the matters here-
inafter described in the specification and
more fully pointed out and defined in the ap-
35 pended claims.
In the drawings : Figure 1 is a view, partly
in section and partly in elevation, of a speed
governor of a graphophone and having a
pitch indicating device, embodying my in-
40 vention, attached thereto. Fig. 2 is a front
elevation of the locking collar. Fig. 3 is an
outer face view of the pointer. Fig. 4 is a
side elevation thereof. Fig. 5 is a front view
of the scale disk, and Fig. 6 is a perspective
45 view of a graphophone provided with a de-
vice embodying my invention.
As shown in said drawings : 1 indicates the
governor of a graphophone or other sound re-
producing instrument, and 2 indicates the
50 friction disk thereon, against which bears
one end of the bell crank brake lever 3 which
is pivotally supported adjacent said disk.
The other arm of said lever is engaged by the
inner end of the tubular adjusting rod 4
55 wdxich projects through the wall 42 of the
graphophone and has threaded engagement
in the bearing member 5 supported in any
suitable manner in the graphophone casing.
Said rod is provided with a shoulder 42 near
said bearing and a spring 5' bears at one end 60
against said shoulder and at the other end
against said bearing and acts normally to
prevent the rod from turning. A pin 6 is
carried in said rod and projects from the in-
ner end thereof and engages a spring 6' car- 65
ried on said lever wThich acts to provide a
uniform pressure of the bearing end of the
lever on said disk. All of said parts are of
the usual construction and are shown for the
purpose of more clearly explaining the oper- 70
ation of the pitch indicator. The outer end
of said rod 4 is reduced in size and rigidly en-
gaged thereon is a flanged collar 7, the flange
of which is spaced a sufficient distance from
the wall 4' to permit the rod to be adjusted 75
longitudinally in either direction, and is pro-
vided in its outer face with a plurality of in-
dentations 7' arranged concentrically with
the bore of the collar, as shown more clearly
in Fig. 2. 80
A pointer 8 is provided in one end with an
aperture to receive the rod 4 and on its inner
face, or that adjacent the collar, is a projec-
tion 8' adapted to fit in the indentations in
the flange so that the pointer may be adjust- 85
ed without rotating the rod. Near its oppo-
site end said pointer is provided with a but-
ton or knob 82 by means of which it may be
adjusted. The end of the rod 4, outwardly
from the pointer, is screw threaded and en- 90
gaging thereon is a lock nut 9 and a nut 9' by
means of which the pointer is rigidly locked
in place against the collar.
A scale disk 10, of an}1" preferred material,
is rigidly engaged in any desired manner on 9,5
the wall 4' of the graphophone, but as shown
it is provided with apertures 10' near the
periphery thereof to receive screws or other
attaching means. Said disk, as shown, is
provided with a straight upper margin 102 100
adapted to fit closely beneath the top plate
43 of the graphophone, when in position, so
that no skill is necessary to properly adjust
it. A slot 103, through which the rod pro-
jects, extends downwardly from the edge 102 105
a sufficient distance so that the axis of said
rod coincides with that of the disk. Said
disk, as shown more clearly in Fig. 5, is pro-
vided with a plurality of musical symbols 104
indicating various degrees of pitch and in ac- 110
a
872,399
cor dance with which the pointer is adjusted
to give the proper speed to produce the de-
sired tones.
The operation is as follows: The disk is
5 attached to the wall of the graphophone in
such manner that the rod protrudes through
its slot and the speed of the record is ad-
justed by means of said rod so as to produce
a given tone, for example middle C. The
10 pointer is then turned to middle C on the disk,
and locked in place by means of the lock nut.
Then by turning the rod in either direction
the pointer is moved over the scale to any
other symbol and the adjustment of the rod
15 causes a corresponding increase or decrease
of speed of the record and produces a corre-
spondingly higher or lower tone. The scale
is also provided with a series of numerals
near its periphery corresponding with the
20 various symbols, so that the pitch may be
adjusted according to number if the operator
is not familiar with the musical symbols.
Obviously many variations of the scale on
the disk may be provided and the device
25 may be attached to any of the usual types of
sound reproducing machines and many de-
tails of construction may be varied without
departing from the principles of my inven-
tion.
30 I claim as my invention:
1. In a device of the class described the
combination with a casing 4', of a speed gov-
ernor therein, an adjusting rod 4 for said gov-
ernor extending outwardly from the casing,
35 a circular scale plate 10 engaged on said cas-
ing, having a radial slot 103 therein through
which said rod passes and having a straight
upper edge at the top of said slot adapted to
abut against the top of the casing, a chro-
40 matic scale on said plate, arranged concen-
trically with its axis and having the symbols
104 thereof increasing in distance apart from
the beginning to the end of the seal., a
flanged collar 7 on said rod, having a plural-
45 ity of concentrically arranged indentions in
its outer face, a pointer 8 on said rod hav-
ing a projection 8' adapted to fit in said in-
dentions and a lock nut on said rod adapted
to lock the pointer in adjusted position with
50 respect to said plate.
2. In a device of the class described the
combination with a speed governor of a
graphophone, of an adjusting rod 4 therefor,
a flanged collar 7 rigidly engaged on said rod
and provided with a plurality of indenta- 55
tions 7' in its outer face, a pointer 8 rota-
tively engaged on said rod and provided with
a projection 8' on its inner face adapted to
engage in any of said indentations, a nut 9
on said rod adapted to rigidly hold said 60
pointer against the collar, a set 9 therefor, a
disk 10 having a straight upper edge and a
radial slot extending downwardly therefrom
adapted to receive said rod, a chromatic
scale on said disk arranged concentrically 65
with the rod and the symbols thereof being
arranged at varying distances apart, and
numbers on said disk corresponding with the
symbols.
3. In a device of the class described the 70
combination with a casing, of a speed gov-
ernor therein, a rotary adjusting rod for said
governor and projecting through the wall of
the casing, a flanged collar rigidly engaged
on the outer end of said rod having a plural- 75
ity of indentations therein, a pointer ad-
justably on the rod and provided with a pro-
jection adapted to engage in said indenta-
tions, means for locking the pointer in adjust-
ed position on the rod and a slotted scale disk 80
supported between the pointer and the wall
and having a straight upper edge adapted to
engage'beneath the top of the casing.
4. In a device of the class described the
combination with a casing of a revoluble 85
speed regulating rod projecting therefrom,
a stationary disk slotted to receive said roil
and having a straight upper side adapted to
engage beneath the top of the casing, a plu-
rality of symbols on said disk indicating mu- 90
sical tones, a collar on said rod having a plu-
rality of indentations therein, a pointer on
the rod and having a projection thereon
adapted to engage in said indentations and
lock nuts carried on the rod for locking the 95
pointer in adjusted position.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto sub-
scribed my name in the presence of two wit-
nesses.
THEODOR ZOEBL.
Witnesses :
J. C. GOOSMANN,
A. Prazsky.
No. 872,577.
F. B. NORMAN.
PHONOGRAPH HORN.
APPLIOATIOH FILED APB, 9, 1907.
PATENTED DEC. 3, 1907.
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
sl*~0t**sf& Off. /£o*tU&tt,
ATTORNEY -
: NOR»»3 PITERS CO- WASHtfCTON. I
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
FRANK B. NORMAN, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO SAMUEL I.
KOPATOUSKY, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY. %
PHONOGRAPH-HORN.
No. 872,577.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 9, 1907, Serial No. 367,157,
Patented Dec. 3, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Frank B. Norman, a
citizen of the United States, residing at West
Orange, in the county of Essex and State of
5 New Jersey, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Phonograph-Horns ;
and I do hereby declare the following to be a
full, clear, and exact description of the inven-
tion, such as will enable others skilled in the
10 art to which it appertains to make and use
the same, reference being had to the accom-
panying drawings, and to letters of reference
marked thereon, which form a part of this
specification.
15 This invention relates to a phonograph
horn, and is designed to provide a horn that
is adapted to be folded up, and is made of
separable portions embodying a tapered
sleeve at the small end, arms to be detach-
20 ably secured thereto to form the large end,
and a covering of fabric to be attached on
one end to the tapered sleeve, and adapted
to be buttoned or clasped to the ends of the
rods forming the large end of the horn.
25 The invention is further designed to pro-
vide means for limiting the entrance of the
rods forming the large end of the horn into
the tapered sleeve, and also to provide a cov-
ering for the large end that can be folded up
30 into a small space, this covering usually or
preferably being made of oiled linen, or a
similarly stiffened fabric which will throw
the sound, giving it a tone that is noticeable
from the absence of harshness, and this cov-
35 ering being detachable from both ends, it can
be packed away, when the horn is in its con-
densed shape, with great ease.
The invention is illustrated in the accom-
panying drawings, in which
40 Figure 1 is a view half in section and half
in elevation of the improved horn when it is
assembled. Fig. 2 is an end view of the ta-
pered sleeve looking into the big end thereof.
Fig. 3 is a view of one of the rods, and Fig. 4
45 is a perspective view of the fabric covering
when it is detached from the horn.
In my horn I employ a tapered sleeve 10
which is provided on one end with a portion
1 1 which is adapted to receive the sound for
50 transmission, and near the larger end of the
tapered portion is arranged an annular rib
12. On the end of the tapered sleeve is a
strip 13 brazed, soldered or similarly secured
to the tapered portion 10, and this strip is
55 provided, at suitable points, with the corru-
gations or channels 14, which are bent down
on the inside edge as at 13a, in Fig. 1, to form
a stop, as will be described hereinafter. Into
each of the channels 14 is slid the squared
end 15 of a suitable rod 16, these rods having 60
the curvature desired to give the horn the
necessary shape, and on the end that forms
the flared end of the horn, that is on the
outer end of the rods, are the buttons 17.
These buttons receive the clasp pieces or 65
sockets 18 which are attached to the big end
of the fabric covering 19. These clasp pieces
18 can be replaced by any suitable equiva-
lent, and the fabric covering 19 can be made
either elastic or non-elastic, as desired. The 70
small end of the fabric covering for the horn
is secured on the tapered sleeve between the
annular rib 12 and the mouth piece 11. The
small end of the fabric covering is attached
as at 20, and is prevented from sliding or 75
slipping off by the rib 12, and a suitable wire
or cord 21 can be inserted in the small end of
the fabric covering to make it bind tightly
around the horn, this cord having either a
spring or being elastic, or if desired it can be 80
made non-elastic and can be tied.
When the horn is assembled, the tapered
sleeve is taken and fitted with all the rods 16,
and the fabric covering is then slid onto the
tapered sleeve from its smallest end, or the 85
end having the mouth piece, and when the
small end of the fabric covering tightens up
against the annular rib 12, the large end of
the fabric covering can have the buttons 18
snapped over the studs 17, and the horn is 90
complete.
It will, of course, be understood that the
fabric covering can be printed or similarly
ornamented to make a decorated horn, and
it can be made with sufficient elasticity to it 95
to cause a tight binding. The horn will
keep its shape by reason of the squared ends
of the rods 16 fitting in the channels 14, and
thus being prevented from turning and mar-
ring the symmetry of the horn. 100
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim is: —
1. A phonograph horn comprising a ta-
pered sleeve, rods fitting in the tapered
sleeve in extension thereof and individually 105
detachable, means for preventing the rods
from turning, and a fabric covering having
one end secured to the tapered sleeve, and
the other end secured to the projecting ends
of the rods. 110
Q
872,577
2. A phonograph horn comprising a ta-
pered sleeve on its small end, the larger end
of the horn being made of a fabric, and
stiffening rods inside the fabric and being in-
5 dividually and detachably secured to the
tapered sleeve.
3. A phonograph horn comprising a ta-
pered sleeve on its small end, the large end
of the tapered sleeve having rectangular
10 channels, rods having their ends formed to
fit the channels and placed therein, and a
fabric covering outside of the rods secured
on one end to the tapered sleeve, and having
its other end secured to the rods.
15 4. A phonograph horn comprising a ta-
pered sleeve, an annular rib on the tapered
sleeve near its large end, rods individually
and detachably secured to the large end of
the tapered sleeve, and a fabric covering
20 having one end detachably secured to the
projecting ends of the rods, the small end of
the fabric being secured around the tapered
sleeve beyond the annular rib.
5. A phonograph horn comprising a ta-
25 pered sleeve, rods secured to the tapered
sleeve and projecting from its large end,
means on the ends of the rods for securing a
fabric covering thereto, means for attaching
it to the securing means on the ends of the
30 rods, an annular rib on the tapered sleeve,
and means for binding the small end of the
fabric covering around the tapered sleeve
adjacent to the annular rib.
G. A phonograph horn comprising a ta-
35 pered sleeve, the sleeve on its large end hav-
ing a series of channels of rectangular cross-
section, rods having rectangular ends to fit
the rectangular channels of the sleeve to pre-
vent the rods from turning, an annular rib
40 on the tapered sleeve, a fabric covering,
means for securing the fabric covering
around the tapered sleeve adjacent to the
rib, the rib acting to limit the entrance of
the tapered sleeve into the fabric covering,
45 and means for securing the other end of the
fabric covering to the ends of the rods.
7. A phonograph horn comprising a ta-
pered sleeve provided with a rectangular
means on its large end for receiving a set of
50 rods, rods having rectangular ends to fit into
the rectangular receiving means of the ta-
pered sleeve, means for limiting the move-
55
65
70
75
ment of the rods into the sleeve, and a fabric
covering secured to the projecting ends of
the rods and to the tapered sleeve.
8. A phonograph horn comprising a ta-
pered sleeve, rods secured to the large end
thereof and having an outward spring ac-
tion, and a fabric covering inclosing the rods
and limiting their spread and adapted to be 60
stretched thereby.
9. A phonograph horn comprising a ta-
pered sleeve, rods detachably secured to the
large end thereof, the rods having an out-
ward spring action, and a fabric covering
secured to the ends of the rods and the ta-
pered sleeve and inclosing the rods to limit
their spread.
10. A phonograph horn comprising a
sleeve, a set of rods secured thereto and hav-
ing a spring action tending to spread them,
and a fabric covering detachably secured to
the sleeve and the ends of the rods and in-
closing the rods to limit their spread and to
be stretched thereby.
11. A phonograph horn comprising a
sleeve, a series of bent rods detachably se-
cured to the sleeve, a fabric covering inclos-
ing the rods and stretched by them, co-
operating elements on the ends of the rods
and the fabric covering to detachably secure
them together, and means for attaching the
covering to the sleeve.
12. A phonograph horn comprising a
sleeve, a set of rods adapted to project there- 85
from, and a fabric to form the walls of the
horn, the fabric being detachable from the
sleeve and the rods, and the rods being de-
tachable from the sleeve.
13. A phonograph horn comprising a 90
sleeve, a set of rods projecting therefrom, a
fabric covering for the rods and the end of
the sleeve, and means for detachably secur-
ing the ends of the rods to the fabric cover-
ing, the securing means insuring the spacing 95
of the rods on their ends.
In testimony, that I claim the foregoing,
I have hereunto set my hand this 8th day of
April 1907.
FRANK B. NORMAN.
Witnesses :
Wm. H. Camfield,
E. A. Pell
80
No. 872,586.
'-V
H. SHEBLE.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED DEO. 21, 1906.
PATENTED DEO. 3, 1907.
WITNESSES:
vLtUM
f/d**t*t~*^G/^
* ^&d> 14
INVENTOR
BY,
ATTORNEY
THE MORRIS PETERS CO-, WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HORACE SHEBLE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO HAWTHORNE & SHEBLE
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, A CORPORATION OF
PENNSYLVANIA.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 872,586.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed December 21, 1906. Serial No. 348,910.
Patented Dec. 3, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Horace Sheble, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia
5 and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a
certain new and useful Improvement in
Talking-Machines, of which the following is
a specification.
This invention concerns talking machines
10 and relates, more particularly, to the con-
struction of the sound-conveying and ampli-
fying tube or horn.
The object of the invention is to provide an
improved construction of such sound-con-
15 ve}dng tube, the use of which results in a
more faithful reproduction of the sound
recorded.
In the talking machines heretofore con-
structed, it has been common to provide a
20 sound-conveying tube tapering from end to
end, the small end thereof supporting the
sound-box. I have found that greater fidel-
ity of sound reproduction can be obtained by
so constructing the sound-conveying tube
25 that the interior thereof near the end to
which the sound-box is affixed consists of a
plurality of sections of progressively increas-
ing cross-sectional area. The smallest of
these sections communicates with the cham-
30 ber directly in rear of the diaphragm of the
sound-box and is considerably smaller in
cross-section than that chamber. This sec-
tion is of comparatively short length, as are
the succeeding ones except the last which
35 may be of any desired length, and a tapering
amplifying horn is connected to the end of
this section. If desired, the sectional tube
and horn may be coupled together in a man-
ner permitting relative movement, the sec-
40 tional tube, in this case, corresponding to
the tone-arms now in general use. Prefer-
ably the tube and horn are circular in cross-
section, the sections of the tube being cylin-
ders of small length except the last whose
45 length is determined by the length desired
for the complete tone-arm. The sections of
the tone-arm are so constructed and assem-
bled that the end of each extends a short
distance into the end of the next larger see-
50 tion, so that a series of air chambers or pock-
ets are provided about the ends of the sec-
tions. By reason of this construction, the
diaphragm of the sound-box can vibrate
more freely as the ah- pressure thereon is,
under certain circumstances, considerably 55
reduced.
The preferred embodiment of the inven-
tion is illustrated in the accompanying
drawings, in which
Figure 1 is an elevation of a portion of a 60
talking machine broken away and sectioned
in part; Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section of a
tone-arm on line 2 — 2 of Fig. 3; and Fig. 3 is
a transverse section on line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2.
Referring to the drawings, 1 indicates the 65
motor-box having a motor therein driving
a vertical shaft adapted to carry the disk
sound-record 2. A coupling member 3 is
secured to the box 1, having an opening in
its upper end. Supported on this member 3 70
is a tapering amplifying horn 4, the opening
in its smaller end communicating with the
upper end of the opening through the mem-
ber 3. Adjacent to the other end of this
opening a pin 5 is mounted on the coupling 75
member adapted to support the tone-arm 6.
For this purpose the tone-arm has secured
thereto a yoke 7 having a cross-head pivoted
in the ends of its arms and carrying a sleeve
8 adapted to fit over the pin 5. Over the 80
other end of the tone-arm is mounted the
sound-box 9 having the stylus bearing in the
record-groove.
The tone-arm consists of a plurafily of
sections of progressively increasing diam- 85
eter secured together with the end of each
extending a short distance into the end of
the next larger section. All of the sections
are preferably circular in cross-section, but
this may be varied if desired. The smallest 90
section 10 is preferably a thin metal tube
bent to a ninety degree curve in order to
hold the sound-box in the proper position;
it is comparativeh' short and its cross-sec-
tional area is considerably less than that of 95
the chamber back of the diaphragm of the
sound-box. The end of this section extends
into the next section 11, whose end is con-
tracted to closely encircle the section 10.
The section 11 is of greater diameter than 100
the section 10, but it is also comparatively
short; its end enters the next section 12,
which is of greater diameter and whose end
is contracted to closely encircle the section
11. If desired, a sleeve 13 may be inserted 105
between the ends of the sections 11 and 12
for convenience in assembling the parts.
The section 12 is of much greater length
873,586
than the sections 10 and 11, its length being
such as will give the desired total length for
the complete tone-arm. At its other end,
the section 12 may be formed in any suitable
5 manner to better coact with the coupling
member 3, as shown at 14. The interior of
the tone-arm, thus constructed, consists of a
series' of cylindrical sections of progressively
increasing diameter and all of these sections
10 except the last are of comparatively short
length. By overlapping the sections to
form air chambers or pockets within the
tone-arm, the air pressure on the inner side
of the diaphragm is reduced and the dia-
15 phragm can therefore vibrate more freely.
By this sectional construction and by mak-
ing the smaller sections of comparatively
short length, so that the largest section of
the tone-arm is but a short distance from the
20 sound-box, I find that a very superior re-
production is obtained.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new therein and desire to secure by
Letters Patent is as follows : —
25 1. In a talking machine, a tone-arm con-
sisting of a tube of substantial length pivot-
ally mounted at one end and having a plu-
rality of short tubular sections secured to
the free end thereof, said sections and said
tube being of progressively increasing inter- 30
nal cross-sectional area and the end of each
section extending within the next larger sec-
tion and being separated, from the walls
thereof by space open to the interior of the-
tube, and a sound-box secured to the end of 35
the smallest section, substantially as set
forth.
2. In a talking machine, a tone-arm con-
sisting of a tube of substantial length pivot-
ally mounted at one end and having a plu- 40
rality of short tubular sections secured to
the free end thereof, said sections and said
tube being of progressively increasing diam-
eter, the end of each section extending with-
in the end of the next larger section and be- 45
ing separated from the walls thereof by
space open to the interior of the tube, and
the smallest of said sections being curved in
the direction of its length, and a sound-box
secured to the end of said curved section, 50
substantially as set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 18th day of December, 1906.
HORACE SHEBLE.
Witnesses :
S. O. Edmonds,
W. S. Edmonds.
No. 872,592.
PATENTED DEO. 3, 1907.
A. T. E. WANGEMANN.
TONE PURIFIER.
APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 9, 1905.
f&l.
Fjtff.2.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
^ 4
J&-3.
I&.6.
15
A
Inventor:
. "V-^o . <o. sha^j,
by o
Any.
rum ftorntis piters co.. Washington, d. c.
No. 872,592.
PATENTED DEC. 3, 1907.
A. T. E. WANGEMANN.
TONE PURIFIER.
APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 9, 1905.
*&#
as
3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
■a.
Attest:
&zS*v <#zrtW*
J%0je-^a>a
Inventor .
^ -z. J%~. — . Atty.
's^i
THE NORRIS F-ETEPS CO-,
HIHCTON. D. C,
No. 872,592.
5!
A. T. E. WANGEMANN.
TONE PURIFIER.
APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 9, 1905.
PATENTED DEC. 3, 1907.
Attest:
3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
if Inventor:
by o
Atty
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ADELBERT THEO EDWARD WANGEMANN, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO
NEW JERSEY PATENT COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF
NEW JERSEY.
TONE-PURIFIER.
No. 872,592.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed September 9, 1905. Serial No, 277,801.
Patented Dec. 3, 1907.
10
15
25
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Adelbert Theo Ed-
ward Wangemann, a citizen of the United
States, residing at West Orange, in the county
of Essex and State of New Jersey, have in-
vented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Tone-Purifiers, of which the fol-
lowing is a description.
My invention relates to devices for purify-
ing or improving the quality of tones pro-
duced by an instrument such as an Edison
phonograph or other talking machine, and
may be used also for recording purposes with
such instruments for improving the quality
of the record.
It is well known that in order to produce
natural sounds, practically all the sound
waves produced at a given time should reach
the ear at the same instant. If, for exam-
20 pie, a person is listening to a speaker or
singer in a large hall, the waves will, of
course, travel directly to the listener, but
there will also be a reflection of sound waves
from the walls of the room which reach the
listener somewhat later and a few of these
reflections will reach the listener in ample
time to augment the directly received sound
wave — others will travel and be reflected so
often and be in consequence so weakened
30 that their influence on the spoken word or
the tones of music are nullified ; yet these re-
flected waves have an influence on the un-
derstanding of the more direct sound waves
which reached the listener first. The re-
35 fleeted waves plus the direct waves give to
every such room or space i'ts own tone of res-
onance, its own peculiar character. Now in
the case of phonographic reproduction, my
belief is that the reproducer diaphragm
40 emits from the sound box waves traveling in
almost every direction, so that two principal
classes of waves issue therefrom into the res-
onating horn, namely, those which travel in
a direction parallel or slightly inclined to the
45 axis of the horn, which travel for a consider-
able distance without reflection and which
may be called direct waves, and those whose
direction of travel is considerably inclined
to said axis, which are reflected after travel-
ing a short distance, and which I prefer to
term "cross vibrations". It is obvious that
since the path of travel of the cross vibra-
tion is longer than that of the direct vibra-
tions, they will reach the listener later than
50
the direct and produce an unpleasant effect, 55
a rumbling sound; they interfere constantly
with the succeeding direct waves and cover
up or destroy or counteract the same.
My invention has for its object the provi-
sion of means which furnish an easy outlet 60
for direct waves and hinder or obstruct the
passage of cross vibrations, whereby all, or a
large part of said cross vibrations will be
eliminated or converted into direct waves,
and my invention consists in the features 65
hereinafter set forth and claimed.
Preference is hereby made to the accom-
panying drawing in which
Figure 1 is a plan view of a perforated
sheet of metal which may be used m the con- 70
struction of one form of my invention. Fig.
2 is a plan view of a similar sheet which may
be used in constructing another form of my
invention. Fig. 3 is an end view showing
how the sheet of Fig. 2 may be formed into 75
concentric tubes. Fig. 4 is an elevation of a
tone purifier embodying my invention. Fig.
5 is a detail view of one of the tubes of Fig. 4.
Fig. 6 is a detail view of another tube of Fig.
4. Fig. 7 is a section on fine 7 — 7, Fig. 4. 80
Fig. 8 is a section on line 8, 8 of Fig. 7.
Figs. 9, 10, 11 and 12 are similar to Fig. 4 and
illustrate various modifications. Fig. 13 is a
vertical sectional view showing one form of
my invention as applied to the reproducer 85
and amplifying horn of a phonograph. In
all the views corresponding parts are indi-
cated by the same reference numerals.
My invention in its simplest form com-
prises a single tube which may be formed 90
from the Sheet 1, Fig. 1, or which may be the
tube 1 of Fig. 4, la of Fig. 9, lb of Fig. 10,
lc of Fig. 11, or If of Fig. 12. The walls of
the tube are provided with apertures or per-
forations 2, 2a, 2b, 2C and 2d respectively. 95
This tube should be used in connection with
an amplifying horn, being inserted and held
in the small end of the horn 3, the said horn
being connected by the usual flexible tube 4
to the reproducer 5 of a phonograph or other 100
talking machine or when it is desired to pro-
duce a record to the recorder of a similar in-
strument. The end of the tube which is far-
thest from the reproducer is preferably
closed, although it may be partly open or en- 105
tirely open. I have found, however, that
superior results are secured by the use of a
plurality of tubes of different diameters se~
£
872,692
20
25
cured together concentrically, the walls of
each of the tubes being perforated and the
spaces between the tubes forming channels.
Thus I may use three tubes, 1,6, and 7 (see
5 Figs. 4 to 8). The tube 6 is.placed within
the tube 1 and the tube 7 is placed within the
tube 6, thus forming three channels 8, 9 and
10. In order to secure the best^ results the
channel 8 should be open at the end nearest
10 the reproducer and closed at the opposite end
by a wall 1 1 . The channel 9 should be open
at the end farthest from the reproducer and
closed at the opposite end, as by a wall 12,
and the channel 10 should be open at the end
15 nearest the reproducer and closed at the end
farthest therefrom, as by a wall 13. In each
case adjacent or adjoining channels are
closed at opposite ends. The sound waves
or vibrations cannot pass through the device
from end to end but must either pass through
the walls thereof or be entirely smothered.
The tubes 6 and 7 are provided with aper-
tures 14 and 15 respectively. The apertures
2, 14 and 15 may if desired be uniform in size
and shape and arranged with regularity or
symmetry, but I prefer to make them of di-
verse shapes and sizes and arranged without
regularity or symmetry, as I have obtained
superior results in the latter case.
30 It should be noted that the tube 6 is
shorter than the tube 1 and the tube 7 is
shorter than the tube 6. In some cases only
two tubes can be used, namely, the tubes 16
and 17 of Fig. 3. If desired, the number of
35 concentric tubes may be increased, the tubes
being arranged in each case concentrically
and with adjacent channels closed at oppo-
site ends as previously described. I have
constructed in this . manner tone purifiers
40 consisting of as high as seven tubes and have
secured excellent results therefrom, but for
ordinary purposes three tubes, as shown in
Fig. 8 will suffice.
A multitubular device of the character de-
scribed may be constructed from a single
sheet of metal by cutting it to the proper
shape, perforating the same and then rolling
it into tubes beginning always with the
smallest. Thus in Fig. 2 a sheet consisting
of sections 16, 17 and 18 is perforated as
shown. The section 17 is then rolled into
tubular form and soldered (see Fig. 3). The
section 18 is bent away from the tube 17 and
the section 16 is then rolled or bent h)to tubu-
55 lar form and soldered, the section 18 forming a
web by which the sections are held together.
The channel ends maybe closed as each tube is
formed. Obviously any number of concen-
tric tubes can be produced in this manner.
60 The device of Fig. 9 is similar to that of
Fig. 4, except that the distance of the aper-
tures 2a from the lower end of the tube la is
greater than the distance of the apertures
2 from the lower end of the tube 1. Both
65 devices are, however, so situated with re-
45
50
spect to the amplifying horn 3 that the low-
est aperture occurs at the point where the
horn begins to increase in diameter.
In Fig. 10 the tube lb is composed of two
sections, a cylindrical section lx and a taper- 70
ing or flaring section ly. Within the tube lb
is a similarly shaped tube 6b and within the
tube 6b is a similarly shaped tube 7b. The
channels thus formed are closed at opposite
ends by the walls 12b, llb, and 13b respec- 75
tively.
The device of Fig. 11 consists of a single
tube lc. This tube may be used in connec-
tion with other tubes if desired. That is, it
may replace the tube 1 of Fig. 4. One of the 80
apertures 2C consists of a spiral making one
complete turn about the axis of the tube as
shown.
In Fig. 12 the tube ld is composed of two
sections, a cylindrical section lv and a bulb 85
lz. Within the tube ld is a similarly shaped
tube 6d and within the tube 6d is a similarly
shaped tube 7d. The channel between ld
and 6d is closed by a wall lld; the channel
between 6d and 7d is closed by reason of the 90
two sections being joined together at 12d;
and the channel formed by the tube 7d is
closed by a wall 13d. The devices of Figs. 10
and 12 are adapted by reason of the enlarged
portions ly and lz respectively to engage the 95
tapering portion of the wall of a horn, as in-
dicated in Fig. 12 and may be so used.
As previously stated, the tone purifier
should be held in the small part of the ampli-
fying horn, but this does not mean that the 100
device must be located at the very narrowest
part of the horn as shown in Fig. 13; they
may be held at some distance therefrom, in
any portion of the horn the area of which is
small as compared with the outlet of the 105
horn. Furthermore, two or even more of
the devices may be used in a single horn,
being placed at intervals along its length.
With the tone purifier placed in the am-
plifying horn 3 and connected to the phono- no
graph reproducer 5, 1 have discovered by ex-
periment that the quality of tones given out
by the instrument are greatly superior to the
tones produced when the tone purifier is ab-
sent. My theory of the operation of the de- 115
vice as previously explained is that the cross
vibrations are either eliminated by being
smothered in the tone purifier or are con-
verted into direct waves. Thus I have in-
dicated by the dotted line a the path of a 120
cross vibration which is smothered in the
tone purifier. I have indicated by dotted line
b the path of a cross vibration which is con-
verted into a direct wave by the tone puri-
fier. It will be noted that the relative ar- 125
rangement of parts is such that practically
all the direct waves or vibrations pass
through the tone purifier as indicated by the
line c, indicating the path of such wave, and
I know by experiment, that the volume of 130
872,692
3
sound is not diminished to the slightest de-
gree by the use of the device described. On
the other hand, the character of the woody
tone of clarinets, oboes, of the singing tone of
5 violins, cellos, etc., and the brassy tone of
cornets, etc. are made more natural by the
use of my invention, and as a result in the
reproduction of band playing or orchestral
music, the tone of each instrument is more
10 easily distinguished and more pleasing to the
ear.
My invention is also capable of use in
other forms of phonic apparatus, such as
stethoscopes, telephonic transmitters and re-
15 ceivers, etc. for the purpose of purifying the
tones thereof. The relative lengths and di-
ameters of the tubes may of course be varied
to suit the particular requirements of the in-
struments last named.
20 Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
. Patent, is as follows:
1. As a new article of manufacture, a tone
purifier consisting of a plurality of concentric
25 tubes secured together and forming channels,
adjacent channels being closed at opposite
ends, substantially as set forth.
2. As a new article of manufacture, a tone
purifier consisting of a plurality of hollow
30 members of different diameter secured to-
gether one within another and forming chan-
nels, adjacent channels being closed at oppo-
site ends, substantially as set forth.
3. As a new article of manufacture, a tone
35 purifier consisting of a plurality of concen-
tric tubes secured together, the walls of said
tubes being provided with apertures, sub-
stantially as set forth.
4. As a new article of manufacture, a tone
40 purifier consisting of a pluralit}r of hollow
members of different diameter secured to-
gether one within another, the walls of said
members being provided with apertures, sub-
stantially as set forth.
45 5. In a phonograph or talking machine,
the combination with a reproducer or re-
corder and an amplifying horn, of a tone
purifier situated within the small end of said
horn and comprising a tube, the side walls of
50 Avhich are provided with apertures, substan-
tially as set forth.
6. In a phonograph or talking machine,
the combination with a reproducer or re-
corder and an amplifying horn, of a tone
purifier situated within the small end, of said 55
horn and comprising a tube the side walls of
which are provided with apertures and which
is closed in an axial direction, substantially
at set forth.
7. In a phonograph or talking machine, 60
the combination with a reproducer or re-
corder, and an amplifying horn, of a tone
purifier situated within the small end of said
horn and consisting of a plurality of concen-
tric tubes secured together and forming 65
channels, adjacent channels being closed at
opposite ends, substantially as set forth.
8. In a phonograph or talking machine,
the combination with a reproducer or re-
corder, and an amplifying horn, of a tone 70
purifier situated within the small end of said
horn and consisting of a plurality of concen-
tric tubes secured together and forming
channels, the channel of greatest diameter
being open at the end nearest the reproducer 75
and closed at its opposite end, substantially
asset forth.
9. In a phonograph or talking machine,
the combination with a reproducer or re-
corder, and an amplifying horn, of a tone 80
purifier situated within the small end of said
horn and consisting of a plurality of concen-
tric tubes secured together and forming
channels, adjacent channels being closed at
opposite ends, and the channel of largest di- 85
ameter being open at the end nearest the re-
producer, substantially as set forth.
10. In a phonograph or talking machine,
the combination with a reproducer or re-
corder and an amplifying horn, of a tone 90
purifier situated within the small end of said
horn and consisting of a plurality of concen-
tric tubes secured together and forming-
channels, the walls of one or more of said
tubes being provided with apertures, sub- 95
stantially as set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
tins 31st day of August 1905.
ADELBERT TI1E0 EDWARD WANGEMANN.
Witnesses :
Delos Holden,
Frank L. Dyer.
No. 872,783.
PATENTED DEO. 3, 1907.
H. B. BABSON & A. HATJG.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 7, 1905.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
^^Vl/nesoco
7r
ot-vte
THE MORRIS PETERS
CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.
No. 872,783.
PATENTED DEC. 3, 1907.
H. B. BABSON & A. HAUG.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 7. 1905.
2 SHEETS— SHEET 2
JF^to.^,
ttj.^.
THE NORR1S PETERS CO., WASHl-KrTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HENRY B. BABSON AND ANDREW HAUG, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNORS TO UNIVERSAL
TALKING MACHINE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW YORK.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 872,783.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed February 7, 1905. Serial No. 244,573.
Patented Dec. 3, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, Henry B. Babson
and Andrew Haug, citizens of the United
States of America, and residents of the bor-
i ough of Manhattan, city, county, and State
of New York, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Talking-Machines,
of which the following is a specification.
Our invention relates generally to talking
10 machines and more particularly to support-
ing means for mounting the reproducer in
operative relation to the horn. In certain
types of machines of this class now in gen-
eral use, provision is made for supporting the
15 horn and reproducer independently of each
other, the arrangement being such as to per-
mit the horn to be swung around into any
desired position while the reproducer is
either in or out of operation, without dis-
20 turbing the same and at the same time to
permit free movement of the reproducer
without such motion being transmitted to
the horn. While such an arrangement af-
fords many obvious advantages and has re-
25 ceived general approval, objection is made
to the particular forms of mechanism hereto-
fore employed, owing to the large number of
parts, the care and accuracy required in fit-
ting and assembling the parts to insure
30 proper cooperation and the general compli-
cation involved in the construction which
renders it expensive, difficult to adjust and
altogether unsatisfactory from the point of
view of both the manufacturer and user.
35 The present invention is designed to ob-
viate the objectionable features above point-
ed out in the production of a reproducer sup-
porting arm and mounting therefor employ-
ing a minimum number of parts of a form
40 suitable for being manufactured at a com-
paratively low cost, readily assembled or
disconnected and so arranged as to co-act
efficiently in permitting free movement of
the reproducer and its ready adjustment in or
45 out of operative relation to the sound record.
The accompanying drawings will serve to
illustrate a device suitable for carrying our
invention into effect. YYe wish it under-
stood, however, that we do not limit our-
50 selves to the particular mechanism or ar-
rangement of parts shown, as various other
devices may be employed operating in sub-
stantially the same manner to produce prac-
tically the same result.
55 In the drawings : Figure 1 is a view in side
elevation of a support for a sound repro-
ducer, constructed in accordance with our
invention, the same being shown applied to a
well known type of talking machine. Fig. 2
is a rear view thereof. Fig. 3 is a vertical 60
section on the line s3, s3, of Fig. 1 . Fig. 4 is a
similar view taken on the line s4, s4, of Fig. 3.
Referring now to the drawings, 1 repre-
sents the casing of a well known form of
talking machine, 2 tlie rotating table there- 65
of, 3 the usual disk type of record upon the
table, 4 the sound box or reproducer, 5 a
rigid arm or bracket secured to the casing
by screws 6, 6, or other fastening means, and
7 the horn, the small end 8 of which is re- 70
movably fitted in a sleeve-like off-set 9, of
the bracket 5, permitting the horn to be
swung around in any position desired.
Interposed between and operatively con-
necting the reproducer and hern there is a 75
sound conveyer in the form of a tubular taper
arm 10, which serves to support the reproducer
and at the same time forms a continuation of
the sound chamber thereof. At the end ad-
joining the horn, the taper arm terminates in 80
an elbow 1 1 , which is shown as a casting hav-
ing a portion 12, shaped to fit loosely within
the sleeve-like off -set of the bracket 5, and
thus mounted it is centered relatively to the
smaller end of the horn. The sleeve serves 35
merely as a guide for the taper arm, the
elbow of which unites therewith to form in
effect a ball and socket joint. The arm is
supported by a spring 13, acting through a
pin 14, the rounded end of which enters a 90
groove 15, formed in the under side of the
elbow, as best shown in Fig. 4. The spring and
pin are seated in an opening or socket 16 of t he-
bracket and form a yielding support upon
which the arm is free to move both vertically 95
and horizontally. The yielding action or
tension of the spring may be varied by means
of a screw 17, secured if desired by a lock
nut 17a. Rounded lugs 18, 18, formed at di-
ametrically opposite points upon the elbow 100
and bearing against the lower end of the*
guide sleeve, limit the action of the spring
pin, which tends to force the elbow into the
sleeve, and in addition to maintaining these
parts in definite relation, serve as the ful- 105
crum for the arm in its vertical movement.
In order to protect the reproducer when
not in use, provision is made for locking the
arm 10, at an angle such as is indicated by
dotted lines in Fig. 1, in which position the 110
s
872,783
stylus clears the record. This is effected by
forming a depression 19 at one end of the
groove 15, in the elbow 11, into which de-
pression the pin 14 is forced by the spring
5 and yieldingly held, limiting the movement
of the arm to motion about the same as
an axis and preventing vertical movement
thereof. As a means of further protecting
the reproducer, its horizontal movement
10 across the record is also limited by forming
notches 20, 20, in the lower end of the guide
sleeve, into which the lugs 18, are forced by
the spring 13, yieldingly holding the arm,
when swung around against further move-
15 ment, the object being to prevent persons
not familiar with the machine from placing
the reproducer with the stylus in such posi-
tion as to oppose movement of the record.
If desired, a stop lug 21 may be cast upon
20 the elbow, as indicated in dotted lines in Fig.
1, to serve the same purpose by coacting
with the bracket.
In the operation of the machine, the re-
producer is perfectly free to follow the groove
25 in the record, the yielding support and guides
coacting to permit both vertical and hori-
zontal motion of the arm, with the least pos-
sible friction or resistance opposing such
motion. When moving vertically, the arm
30 rocks on the lugs 18 and the spring pin 14,
riding in the groove 15, yields, as required, to
permit free motion of the shaped portion of
the elbow in the guide sleeve. When mov-
ing horizontally the arm 10, turns upon the
35 spring pin as an axis and the lugs 18 and
shaped portion of the elbow are given ro-
tary motion relatively to the guide. To
lock the reproducer in an elevated position
above and clear of the record, it is only nec-
40 essary to raise the arm 10, until the spring
pin 14, snaps into the depression 19 of the
groove in the elbow. The readjustment of
the reproducer is effected by pressing the
arm. 10 downward until the spring pin yields
45 and reenters the groove proper. The arm 10
may be either removed or secured in position
by merely turning the screw 17 to adjust the
pin 14 relatively to the groove 15.
The advantages of our invention will be
50 apparent from the foregoing description.
Having, therefore, described our invention,
we claim:
1. The combination of a sound repro-
ducer, an arm carrying the reproducer and
55 mounted free to move vertically and horizon-
tally, and means for yieldingly locking the
arm against vertical movement only, said
means serving directly as a support for the
arm.
2. The combination of a sound repro- 60
ducer, an arm mounted free to move verti-
cally and horizontally, and self - engaging
locking means cooperating with the arm to
check its vertical motion only, said locking
means directly engaging the arm as a sup- 65
port therefor.
3. A support for a sound reproducer com-
prising a sound conveyer, and a relatively
fixed support upon which the conveyer rests
and freely moves, said conveyer being shift- 70
able in such relation as to be held thereby in
an inoperative position.
4. The combination of a sound repro-
ducer, a tubular arm forming a continuation
of the reproducer and movable therewith, a 11
yielding support directly engaging the arm
and permitting movement thereof in planes
at right angles to each other, and means for
limiting the arm to movement about the
support as an axis. 80
5. The combination of a sound repro-
ducer, an arm movable therewith, a support
directly engaging the arm and permitting
free movement thereof, and means for caus-
ing the arm when elevated to be yieldingly 85
held by the support.
6. The combination of a sound repro-
ducer, a rigid arm provided with requisite
guides, a movable arm mounted in the guides,
and a pin spring-seated in the rigid arm as a 90
support for the movable arm, said movable
arm having shaped portions adapted to in-
terlock with the pin in certain positions of
adjustment.
7. The combination of a fixed arm pro- 95
vided with requisite guides, a spring pin cen-
tered relatively to the guides, and a tubular
arm terminating at one end in a reproducer
and at the opposite end in an elbow fitted in
the guides and having a groove of varying 100
depth formed therein to cooperate with the
pin.
8. The combination of a fixed arm pro-
vided with an annular guide recessed at di-
ametrically opposite points, a movable arm 105
fitted in the guide and terminating in a sound
reproducer, oppositely disposed bearings
upon the movable arm cooperating with the
recessed guide, and means for supporting the
arms operatively assembled. 110
Signed at New York, N. Y. this 30th day
of January, 1905.
HENRY B. BABSON.
ANDREW HAUG.
Witnesses :
W. H. Pumphrey,
M. G. Crawford.
No. 872,828. PATENTED DEO. 3, 1907.
W. E. LEIGHTQN.
REPRODUCING HORN FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED NOV. 1, X906.
2 SHEETS— SHEET 1.
Wi\
messes:
£L../£&e^<^
sr>. .,, -^- <r- _^ Invenlorj
'■$>*
&^££j&rr%jLy ,
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D, C.
No. 872,828. PATENTED DEC. 3, 1907.
W. E. LEIGHTON.
REPRODUCING HORN FOR TALKING MACHINES..
APPLICATION FILED NOV, 1, 1906.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
*? "\
"Witnesses:
Invenlor:
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM E. LEIGHTON, OF PEMBROKE, MAINE.
REPRODUCING-HORN FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 872,828.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed November 1, 1906. Serial No. 341,642.
Patented Dec. 3, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William E. Leigh-
ton, a citizen of the United States, residing
at Pembroke, in the county of Washington
> and State of Maine, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Reproduc-
ing-Horns for Talking-Machines, of which
the following is a specification.
My invention relates to the horns used on
10 the reproducers of talking machines and has
for its principal object the improvement of
the horn to the end that the tones reproduced
are prolonged and made more clear. This I
accomplish by attaching a number of the
15 strings to the horn which are tuned to the
chromatic scale so that when a tone is made
by the talking machine record the string
tuned to that tone vibrates in sympathy and
also the strings tuned to the harmonics of
20 the tone.
The construction and operation of my in-
vention will be described more in detail here-
inafter and illustrated in the accompanying
drawings in which —
25 Figure 1 is a perspective view of a conven-
tional talking machine with my improved
horn secured thereto, Fig. 2, a central longi-
tudinal sectional view looking at one side of
the inner surface of the horn, Fig. 3, a cross
30 sectional view, and Fig. 4, a detail showing
one of the keys and its mountings.
In the drawings similar reference charac-
ters indicate corresponding parts throughout
the several views.
35 My improved horn is formed of a number
of flat pieces of resonant material, such as
thin pieces of wood, indicated by A, and hav-
ing their edges secured in longitudinal ribs or
strips B to form the horn. In the drawing
40 the horn is shown to have eight sides but
this number may be increased or diminished
as desired without altering the spirit of my
invention.
Secured to the pieces A inside of the horn
45 are cleats C placed diagonally on said pieces
A so that the line of cleats forms a spiral in-
side of the horn.
C indicates other cleats on the outside of
pieces A opposite cleats C.
50 D indicates pegs secured to cleats C and (7.
The outer edges of the pieces A have se-
cured thereto relatively heavy pieces of
ebony or other suitable material E having
chambers F therein opening towards the
front of the horn and a hole G connecting 55
each chamber F with the interior of the horn.
H indicates keys having their stems ex-
tending through chambers F, said keys being
of the kind employed in violins and other
stringed instruments to regulate the tension 60
and the consequent pitch of the strings.
I indicate strings having one end secured
to pegs D and the other end secured to keys
H, being passed through holes G to the key
stems. 65
J indicates strips of metal or other rigid
material secured adjacent to holes G to space
the strings I from the pieces A.
In arranging my horn for use the strings I
are successively tuned to the chromatic scale. 70
When in use the tones produced by the talk-
ing machine record causes the sympathetic
vibration of the strings I tuned to the tonic
and its harmonics thus prolonging and clear-
ing the tone reproduction, while the pieces 75
A, by acting as sounding boards, strengthen
and sweeten the effect produced.
Having thus' described my invention what
I claim is —
1. A horn for conveying sound having a 80
multiplicity of flat sides of resonant material,
cleats secured to said sides, tuning keys revo-
lubly secured, and strings secured to said
cleats and keys and tuned to the chromatic
scale, substantially as shown and described. 85
2. A horn for conveying sound comprising
a multiplicity of longitudinal ribs, thin
pieces of wood secured to said ribs, cleats se-
cured to said pieces of wood, tuning keys
re volubly secured in the outer edge of the 90
horn, and strings secured to said cleats and
keys and tuned to the chromatic scale, sub-
stantially as shown and described.
In testimony whereof I hereto affix my
signature in the presence of two witnesses. 95
WILLIAM E. LEIGHTON.
Witnesses :
S. H. Lincoln,
E. L. Pattangall.
No, 873,013.
PATENTED DEC. 10, 1907.
J. BORNAND & B. THOENS.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JUNE 1, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
■inmniiiiiHiMiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii 1 1 1 1
Wfr
■nassco
rs^iZL, y^A^J***^^, -&t£i*~^
j
THE NORMS PETE»S CO.. WASHINBTON. O. C.
No. 873,013.
PATENTED DEC. 10, 1907.
J. BORNAND & B. THOENS.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JUNE 1, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
7-
iiiiiiiniiii il
Fig.3.
(o)JS 4. g^jjQjU
-■-—-■: - £?^ — r-J
Ft9'4r-
<mt
'■■ncaAe*
; MORRIS PETEWS CO., WASHINGTON. 1> C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOSEPH BORNAND, OF PELHAM, AND BURCHARD THOENS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 873,013.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed June 1, 1907, Serial No. 376,804.
Patented Dec. 10, 1907.
To all whom, it may concern:
Be it known that we, Joseph Bornand, a
citizen of the Republic of Switzerland, re-
siding at Pelhani, m the county of Westches-
ter, State of New York, and Bitrchard
Thoens, a subject of the Emperor of Ger-
many, residing in the city, county, and State
of New York, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Phonographs, of
which the following is a specification.
The invention relates to phonographs or
talking machines in which the sound tube is
stationary and the record is movable.
It resides in the means for mounting the
15 sound tube and for mounting and operating
the record support, so that the record will be
automatically moved by the engagement of
the stylus of the sound reproducer with the
spiral groove in the record. The record sup-
20 port is so mounted and connected with a
fixed source of power that it may be driven
without any interference with its motion in a
straight line beneath the stylus of the re-
producer.
25 In the accompanying drawings — Figure 1
is a side elevation showing the device ; Fig. 2
is a plan of the same device; Fig. 3 is an ele-
vation of a modified form of the device ; and
Fig. 4 is a plan view of this modification.
30. Referring particularly to Figs. 1 and 2, 1
represents a box or casing in which there
may be placed any ordinary form of motor.
A spindle lettered 2 extends through the top
of the casing near one side and is adapted to
35 be driven by the motor within the casing.
Two parallel track-ways 3 are placed on top
of the casing at opposite sides of the spindle
2. These track-ways are inclined to the
horizontal and serve as supports and guides
40 for the rollers 5 of a movable carriage or
frame 4. The frame 4 has a cut away por-
tion which permits it to straddle the spindle
2. In the frame 4 is mounted the spindle 6
which carries at its upper end the circular
45 flat disk 7 which serves as a support for the
record. This plate 7 has on its lower side a
projection 8 which fits over the pin 9, passing
through the spindle 6, and thus the plate is
locked to the spindle and made to rotate
50 therewith. A third spindle 10 is pi vo tally
mounted upon two arms lettered 17 extend-
ing from the spindle 2, and also upon two
pivoted arms 18 extending from the spindle
6. On the spindle 2 and between the arms
17 is mounted a sheave 1 1, and opposite this 55
sheave on the spindle 10 is mounted the
sheave 12. Between the arms 18 a sheave
13 is mounted on the spindle 10, and a cor-
responding sheave 14 is mounted on the
spindle 6. These sheaves are connected by (>0
belts 15 and 16, so that any rotation of the
spindle 2 is imparted to the spindle 6 and to
the record support 7. The sound tube 19
and reproducer 20 are fixedly attached to the
casing 1 by means of the bracket 21 and 65
clamp 22.
In the modification shown in Figs. 3 and 4,
instead of using the inclined track-ways we
have provided a spring 23 connected by a
band 24 to the carriage 4. This spring, like 70
the inclined ways, tends to move the car-
riage in one direction. In this modification
furthermore we have substituted for the
sheaves and connecting belts the meshing
and gear wheels 25, 26, 27 and 28. It will 75
be understood that other forms of connect-
ing gearing or operating means might be
employed instead of the particular forms de-
scribed, without departing from the main
plan of my invention. 80
In operation the flexible connection be-
tween the spindle 6 and spindle 2 which in-
cludes the pivoted arm 17 and 18 permits
the carriage to move freely towards or away
from the spindle 2 without interfering with 85
the rotation of the record support. The
inclined track-ways 3 in Figs. 1 and 2 and
the spring 23 in Figs. 3 and 4 are so adjusted
and proportioned as to almost, but not quite,
overcome the friction and inertia of the car- 90
riage and operating parts, so that very little
force is required to move it in one direction.
When it is desired to use the device to repro-
duce a record, the record is placed on the
support 12 and the stylus of the reproducer 95
20 is placed in the outer turn of the spiral
groove in the record and power is applied to
the spindle 2, so as to rotate the record.
The stylus will follow the spiral groove and
being stationary will, by contact with that 100
groove, move the record and its supporting
parts, including the carriage, transversely
beneath it.
We have found that the character of the
sound produced is much improved by hav- 105
ing the sound tube fixed and stationary in-
stead of having movable parts. We believe
that the movable parts interfere with the
Q
873,013
proper transmission of the sound and we de-
sire to claim broadly this feature of a fixed
and immovable sound tube.
What we claim is:
5 1. The combination of a relatively fixed
reproducer, a rotative record shiftable by
said reproducer in a given direction, and in
a straight line relatively to said reproducer,
and means independent of the reproducer
10 tending to shift said record in the direction
in which it is moved by the reproducer.
2. The combination with a stationary
sound tube, of a carriage free to move lat-
erally in a straight line, beneath the end of
15 said lube, a rotatable record support mount-
ed on said carriage, stationary driving means,
and flexible connections between said driv-
ing means and record support for rotating
said support without interfering with its free
20 lateral motion.
3. The combination with a stationary
sound tube, of a rotatable record support
mounted upon a carriage free to move lat-
erally in a straight line in either direction
25 and means independent of the stylus where-
by the friction and inertia of the carriage
when it is moved in one direction is almost
overcome.
4. The combination with a stationary
30 sound tube, of a rotatable record mounted
upon a laterally movable carriage, rollers
supporting said carriage and inclined track-
ways upon which said rollers move.
5. The combination with a stationary
35 sound tube, of a rotatable record mounted
upon a laterally movable carriage, rollers
supporting said carriage, and track-ways
for the rollers so inclined to the horizontal
as to almost overcome the frictional resist-
40 ance of the carriage to motion in one direc-
tion.
6. In a device of the class described, the com-
bination with a driving spindle of a rotata-
ble record support, the spindle and support
being movable relative to each other, a mov- 45
able spindle connected by link arms to the
driving spindle and the spindle of the record
support, and connections between the spin-
dles whereby the record support is rotated
from the driving spindle. 50
7. In a device of the class described, the
combination with a driving spindle of a
rotatable record support, the spindle and
support being movable relative to each
other, sheaves carried by said spindle and the 55
spindle of the record support, a movable spin-
dle connected to said spindles by pivoted link
arms upon each side of said sheaves, two
sheaves rigidly connected to said movable
spindle between the link arms, and flexible 60
belt connections between said sheaves where-
by the record support is operated from said
driving spindle.
S. The combination with a stationary
sound tube of a rotatable record support, 65
of a laterally movable carriage on which the
record support is mounted, a stationary
driving spindle, link arms connecting the
driving spindle and the spindle of the record
support with a movable spindle, and con- 70
nections between the spindles whereby the
record support is driven in its rotation from
the driving spindle.
In testimony whereof we affix our signa-
tures in presence of two witnesses.
JOSEPH BORNAND.
BURCHARD THOENS.
Witnesses :
R. W. Levy;
L. F. Froelich.
No. 873,643.
PATENTED DEO. 10, 1907.
J. F. WHEELER.
SOUND AMPLIFYING HORN.
APPLICATION PILED MAY 15, 1907.
^Witnesses
^>
woe w tor
S. /MjulQsl^i
a».
otnei^
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JAMES F. WHEELER, OF GRAND VALLEY, COLORADO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO FRANK W.
DE WITT, OF GRAND VALLEY, COLORADO.
SOUND-AMPLIFYING HORN.
No. 873,643.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed May 15, 1907. Serial No. 373,749.
Patented Dec. 10, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, James F. Wheeler, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Grand Valley, in the county of Garfield and
5 State of Colorado, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Sound-
Amplifying Horns, of which the following is
a specification.
My invention relates to horns used in con-
10 nection with phonographs and like instru-
ments, and particularly contemplates the
provision of an improved construction where-
by sound may he amplified and created
more distinct in its passage therethrough.
15 My invention further resides in the fea-
tures of construction hereinafter described
with reference to the accompanying drawing
in which like numerals are used to designate
like parts throughout the several figures,
20 and in which,
Figure 1 is a central longitudinal sectional
view taken through my improved horn.
Fig. 2 is an end view looking forwardly into
the same. Fig. 3 is a rear end elevation,
25 and Fig. 4 is a face view of the blank used to
form the bell end of the horn.
In the practical embodiment of my inven-
tion I provide a horn comprising an elon-
gated, gradually enlarging throat portion 1,
30 cylindrical in form, and provided on its
smaller end with a contracted tube 2, adapt-
ed for attachment to the phonograph or like
instrument. Said throat 1 is further pro-
vided on its large end with a circumferential
35 outstanding flange 3. The horn further
comprises a flaring bell mouth 4, provided
on its inner end with an angularly extending
circumferential flange 5 and provided on its
inner surface with a series of open channels
40 6 and a series of closed sound recoiling pock-
ets 7, said channels and said pockets being
formed within said bell 4 radiating from its
inner end proportionate to its flare, and
arranged in alternating circular series.
45 The bell mouth 4 is preferably constructed
from a blank 8, illustrated in Fig. 4, which
in the forming of said bell, is bent until its
edges 9 are drawn together and suitably se-
cured. The bell 4 is further secured to form
a continuous structure with the throat 1 by 50
means of a two-part sounding drum 10, in
the form of an enlarged encircling ring, semi-
circular in cross section, and attached to
said throat 1 and said bell 4 by means of
their respective flanges 3 and 5. The throat 55
1 and the bell 4 are further connected within
the drum 10, on a plane with their inner sur-
faces, by means or a suitable screening 11,
which cooperates with said drum 10 and the
remainder of the structure in producing the 60
desired amplification and added distinctness
of sound.
Having thus fully described my invention
I claim:
1. In a sound amplifying horn, the combi- 65
nation of the throat portion, adaptable for
attachment to an instrument, a flaring bell
mouth spacedly connected to said throat por-
tion, an enlarged sounding drum spanning
the space between said throat and bell, and 70
sound recoiling devices arranged in said bell
mouth, substantially as described.
2. In a sound amplifying horn, the combi-
nation with the throat portion, adapted for
attachment to an instrument, a flaring bell 75
mouth spacedly connected to said throat por-
tion, an enlarged curved sounding drum
spanning the space between said throat and
said bell and sound recoiling pockets and
sound channels alternately arranged upon 80
the inner surface of said bell mouth, substan-
tially as described.
3. In a sound amplifying horn, the combi-
nation of a gradually enlarging throat por-
tion, adaptable for attachment at one end to 85
an instrument, a flaring bell mouth spacedly
connected to. the other end of said throat por-
tion, an enlarged circular sounding drum
spanning the space between said throat and
said bell, and a plurality of sound recoiling 90
pockets and sound channels formed upon the
inner surface of said bell mouth and radiating
outwardly, substantially as described.
4. In a sound amplifying horn, the combi-
nation of a throat portion gradually increas- 95
ing in diameter, and adaptable for attach-
ment at its smaller end to an instrument, a
flaringbellmouth spacedly connected to said
873,643
throat portion, an enlarged circular sounding
drum, curved in cross section, spanning the
space between said throat portion and said
bell mouth, a circular section of screening
connecting said throat and said bell within
said drum, and a plurality of sound recoiling
pockets, and sound channels alternately ar-
ranged upon the inner surface of said bell
mouth and radiating outwardly, substan-
tially as described. 10
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
JAMES F. WHEELER.
Witnesses :
F. W. De Witt,
W. E. Spercer.
No, 873,763
PATENTED DEC. 17, 1907.
T. H. MACDONALD.
RECORDER AND REPRODUCER.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 8, 1907.
y^
^iX)\KwiM>li>
Jg
*V-»
THE NORMS PETERS CO.,' WASHINGTON, D, C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS H. MACDONALD, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN
GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF
WEST VIRGINIA.
RECORDER AND REPRODUCER.
No. 873,763.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 8, 1907. Serial No, 367,097.
Patented Dec. 17, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas H. Macdon-
ald, a resident of Bridgeport, Connecticut,
have invented a new and useful Improve-
5 ment in Recorders and Reproducers, which
invention is fully set forth in the following
specification.
This invention relates to recorders and
reproducers for talking-machines and has for
10 its object to improve the construction of the
same, and more particularly the construc-
tion of the sound box with relation to the di-
aphragm, and the connection of the sound
tube to the sound box. With this object in
15 view the invention consists of a circular
sound box whose walls support the dia-
phragm, the crown or top of the box being
dished or concave with its center very close
to the diaphragm and its periphery, where it
20 joins the walls, many times farther removed
from the diaphragm, so that at the outer
edge the air space in the sound box is many
times greater than in the center. This is ac-
complished by placing the dished crown of
25 the sound box with its convex side towards
the diaphragm and its concave side on the ex-
terior of the box. The sound tube is con-
nected to the concave side of the sound box
crown by a ball and socket joint, the socket
30 being preferably struck up integrally with
the metal of the crown, and the ball of the
joint being formed integral with the sound
conveying tube.
Within limits the inventive idea may be
35 embodied in a variety of structures, and for
the purpose of illustration there is shown in
the accompanying drawings a recorder which
embodies the invention, in which drawings
Figure 1 is a transverse vertical section of
40 a recorder with the recording style in place
upon a record tablet; and Fig. 2 is a bottom
plan view of the same.
Referring to the drawings, 1 is the dia-
phragm and 2 is the sound box supporting
45 the same at its periphery in the usual or any
suitable way. From the diaphragm the
walls of the sound box rise to a considerable
distance, as shown, and from said walls the
crown or top 3 of the box is dished or con-
50 caved inwards so that at its center it is very
close to the diaphragm, preferably about
l/100th of an inch therefrom. The crown is
provided with a central opening 4, and rising
from around this opening is a spherically
55 formed socket 5 within which loosely rests
the spherically formed end 6 of the sound
tube 7 which is provided with a flange 8 at its
upper end, fitting closely but loosely within
the neck 9 of the frame 10 to which the usual
or any suitable sound conveying element, as 60
a horn, may be attached.
It will be understood that the diaphragm
carries a recording or reproducing style, here
shown as a recording style 11, and that the
sound box is pivoted at 12 to the frame 10. 65
Preferably the entire sound box and the
socket 5 are struck up from a single piece of
sheet metal, while the ball 6 and the other
portions of the sound tube are also struck up
from a single piece of metal, forming a light, 70
cheap and efficient structure.
What is claimed is:
1 . In a recorder or reproducer, a sound box
with a dished or concave crown and a dia-
phragm supported with its central portion in 7t
close proximity to the central portion of said
crown and its periphery relatively far re-
moved from said crown.
2. In a recorder or reproducer, a sound box
having an inwardly dished crown, and a dia- 80
phragm supported by the side walls of said
sound box with the central portion of the dia-
phragm in close proximity to the central por-
tion of said crown and the periphery thereof
relatively far removed from said crown. 85
3. In a recorder or reproducer, a sound box
having side walls and an inwardly dished
crown or top with an opening at or near its
center, a sound tube joined to said crown or
top around said opening, and a diaphragm 90
supported by the side walls of said sound box
with its central portion in close proximity to
the inner side of said dished crown and its
peripheral portion relatively far removed
from said crown. 95
4. In a recorder or reproducer, a sound box
having side walls and an inwardly dished
crown or top with an opening at or near its
center, a sound tube joined to said crown by
a ball and socket joint surrounding said open- 100
ing, and a diaphragm supported by the side
walls of said sound box with its central por-
tion in close proximity to the inner side of
said dished crown at said opening and its
peripheral portion relatively far removed 105
from said crown.
5. In a recorder or reproducer, a sound box
and a diaphragm supported by said sound
box, the crown or top of the said box having
a convex inner surface with an opening 110
s
873,763
through its central portion, the central por-
tion of the crown being in close proximity to
said diaphragm and retreating farther and
farther from the diaphragm as it approaches
5 the side walls of the box.
6. In a recorder or reproducer, a sound box
struck from a single piece of sheet metal and
* having side walls, an inwardly disbed crown
and a spherically formed socket which latter
it) surrounds a central opening in said crown, a
diaphragm supported with its central portion
in close proximity to the said central opening
and its peripheral portion relatively far re-
moved from said crown, and a sound tube
having a spherical portion fitting into said
socket.
In testimony whereof I have signed this
specification in the presence of two subscrib-
15
mg witnesses.
THOMAS H. MACDONALD.
Witnesses :
A. B. Keough,
C. A. GlBNER.
-
No, 873,860.
PATENTED DEC. 17, 1907.
H. F. HOLMES.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JULY 7, 1905.
Jfyj.l.
-Jrtt#.&r
Jfr
THE NOKRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HORACE F. HOLMES, OF CONCORD, NEW HAMPSHIRE.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 873,860.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed July 7. 1905. Serial No, 268,673.
Patented Dec. 17, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Horace F. Holmes, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Con-
cord, in the county of Merrimack and State
of Mew Hampshire, have invented an Im-
provement in r/honographs, of which the fol-
lowing description, in connection with the
accompanying chawing, is a specification,
like letters on the drawings representing hke
10 parts.
This invention relates to phonographs, and
especially to the manner of connecting the
diaphragm to the reproducer or recorder le-
ver, the object of the invention being to pro-
vide a novel connection between these parts
which results in increased smoothness and
distinctness in the sound produced.
The novel features of my invention will be
more fully hereinafter described and then
20 pointed out in the claims.
Figure 1 is a central section through a re-
producer embodying my invention; lig. 2 is
a section on an enlarged scale on the line x — x
25 3 designates the usual cylindrical frame of
the reproducer which supports the dia-
phragm 4, said frame having the inturned
flange 5 on which the diaphragm rests. The
diaphragm is held in place by the mouth-
30 piece supporting-plate 6 which carries the
usual mouth-piece 7, said plate being re-
tained in position by the usual screw-thread-
. ed sleeve 9.
10 designates the usual weighted clapper
35 pivoted to the frame 3, and to which is piv-
oted the reproducer lever 1 1 .
The parts thus far described are such as
are usually found in reproducers and form no
part of my present invention, which relates
40 solely to the manner of connecting the re-
producer lever to the diaphragm.
Instead of cementing a head or attaching
member to the diaphragm, as is- commonly
done, I provide such a head or member 12
45 with a screw-threaded stem 13 which pro-
jects through the diaphragm 4, and on the
upper end of which is secured a clamping-nut
14. This attaching-plate 12 has a perforated
stem 15 depending therefrom to which is se-
' cured a closed link 16, said fink passing 60
j through an eye or aperture 17 in the end of
I the reproducer lever.
I have found from my experiments with a
I construction such as above described that
j where a closed link or loop 16 is used to con- 55
nect the reproducer lever to the diaphragm
instead of the open link or hook member
commonly used, the sound produced has a
much smoother quality and is more distinct.
1 have found that by securing the attach- 60
ing member 12 to the diaphragm, as herein
shown, a better result is attained than when
the head 11 is securely cemented to the un-
derside of the diaphragm.
The closed link 16 may be made in a va- 65
riety of ways, but preferably it is made by
bending a wire into loop-shape and fasten-
ing the ends thereof together, as at 18. It is
not essential to my invention that these ends
should be fastened together, as if the proper 70
material is used the ends will stay in contact
with each other when the loop is bent to
shape without any securing means, the im-
portant thing however is the closed loop as
distinguished from an open loop. 75
Having described my invention what I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent is : —
1 . In a phonograph, the combination with
a frame, of a diaphragm within the frame, 80
means to clamp the diaphragm at its periph-
ery to the frame, a weighted clapper pivoted
to the frame, a reproducer lever pivoted to
the clapper, an attaching plate 12 on the un-
der side of the diaphragm, said attaching 85
plate having a screw-threaded stem extend-
ing through the diaphragm and a perforated
stem 15, a nut .on the screw-threaded stem
for clamping the attaching plate to the dia-
phragm, and a closed loop 16 connecting the 90
reproducer lever and the perforated stem 15,
said loop being made from a single piece of
wire bent to the proper shape and having its
ends secured together.
2. In a phonograph, a diaphragm, means 95
to support the same, a pivoted reproducing
lever, an attaching member on the under-
side of the diaphragm, said attaching mem-
a
878,860
ber having a screw-threaded stem extending
through the diaphragm, a clamping-nut on
said stem above the diaphragm, and a closed
loop connecting said attaching member to
the reproducer-lever said loop being made
from a single piece of wire bent to the proper
shape and having its ends overlapping and
secured together.
In testimony whereof, I have signed my
name to this specification, in the presence of 10
two subscribing witnesses.
HORACE F. HOLMES.
Witnesses :
Sidney S. Upham,
Albert H. Dalrtmple.
i
No. 873,908.
PATENTED DEC. 17, 1907.
A. G. SOISTMANN.
HORN FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED MAT 5, 1906'.
J&XsCgCX^*
^sCC^v' ~ <0~
THE MORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ADOLPH G. SOISTMANN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
HORN FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 873,908.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed May 5, 1906. Serial No. 315,272.
Patented Dec. 17, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Adolph G. Soist-
mann, a citizen of the United States, residing
at Philadelphia, in the county of Philadel-
5 phia and State of Pennsylvania, have in-
vented a new and useful Horn for Talking-
Machines, of which the following is a specifi-
cation.
My invention relates to improvements in
10 horns for talking machines.
My object is to provide an improved
structure combining simplicity of construc-
tion, strength, and lightness in weight, and
tone qualities capable of producing a maxi-
15 mum resonance.
Referring to the drawings: Figure 1 is a
side elevation of my horn. Fig. 2 is a longi-
tudinal vertical section thereof, and Fig. 3 is
a cross section on line 3, 3 of Fig. 2, on an
20 enlarged scale.
Similar numerals refer to similar parts
throughout the several views.
My improved horn comprises a series of
non-metallic tapered sections 4, preferably-
25 of hard wood or fiber. These sections 4 are
each beveled upon each longitudinal edge 5
and 6, as clearly shown in Fig. 3, so that one
bevel of each section may be termed an upper
bevel, and the other an under bevel. These
30 bevels are so disposed that the abutting edges
of adjacent sections will overlap. These
overlapping edges may be glued or other-
wise fastened together to form a continuous
horn shaped structure. Upon this structure,
35 I then wrap a very thin narrow strip or rib-
bon 7 of wood or other suitable material and
glue the same securely to said structure. I
have found for example that a ribbon of
veneering of approximately one quarter of
40 an inch in width, and about one twentieth of
an inch in thickness makes a satisfactory
wrapping. This wrapping extends spirally
from one end of a horn to the other. When
the structure is so formed and wrapped, the
flaring end thereof is secured in the annular 45
channel, 8 of the rim or ring 9. This ring or
rim 9 has its ends provided with long bevels
1 0 and 1 1 , adapted to overlap each other, so
that, when the flaring end of the horn struc-
ture is seated in the channel 8, the ring is 50
slightly contracted, the beveled edges 10 and
11 sliding slightly over each other, so that
the rim 9 will form a tight locking engage-
ment with the flaring end of the body of the
horn structure. 55
By the construction above described,
there is formed, at minimum expense, a
structure having its component parts so inti-
mate and secure, and locked together, as to
constitute a substantially integral whole of 60
i great strength, extremely light in weight,
and having qualities of resonance which
render it an extremely powerful and efficient
horn for the purpose specified.
What I claim is: — 65
1. A horn composed of longitudinally
extending tapered sections forming a struc-
ture contracted at one end and flaring at the
other, and a thin band spirally wound about
said structure. 70
2. A horn composed of longitudinally ex-
tending tapered sections, forming a structure
contracted at one end and flaring at the
other, a thin band spirally wound about said
structure, and a ring member provided with 75
an annular channel to receive the flaring end
of said structure.
3. A horn composed of longitudinally ex-
tending tapered sections, forming a structure
contracted at one end and flaring at the 80
other, and a reinforcing band surrounding
the body of the horn intermediate its two
ends.
ADOLPH G. SOISTMANN.
Witnesses :
Mae Hofmann,
Howard S. Okie.
4.
No. 873,937
PATENTED DEC. 17, 1907.
L. T. HAILE.
SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLIOATION FILED MAT 27, 1907.
2 SHEETS— SHEET 1.
-^%uT.
j7T<p.J?.
hi._
ATTORNEY.
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, O. C.
!
No. 873,937.
PATENTED DEC. 17, 1907
L. T. HAILE.
SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED MAY 27, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2
Jfya.T!
's?0
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY.
TH* NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LUTHER T. HAILE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR OF NINE ONE-HUN-
DREDTHS TO JOSEPH W. SHANNON, ONE-TENTH TO FREDERICK J. GEIGER, AND ONE-
TENTH TO LOGAN W. MULFORD, ALL OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINE.
No 873,937.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed May 27, 1907. Serial No, 375,766.
Patented Dec. 17, 1907.
. To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Luther T. Haile, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
city of Philadelphia, State of Pennsylvania,
have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Sound-Reproducing Machines,
of which the following is a full, clear, and ex-
act description, reference being had to the
accompanying drawings, forming a part of
10 this specification.
My invention relates to sound-reproducing
machines for the reproduction of vocal and
instrumental sound-waves from a "record"
thereof, and has for its object to so amplify
15 and modify the sound-waves so produced as
to restore, in large part if not wholly, their
original tone and timbre, closely simulating
the original sounds recorded; and, as inci-
dental advantages the elimination of the am-
20 plifying and discharging horn and its ad-
junctive parts, commonly employed with
talking machines, and the metallic resonance
resulting therefrom.
To these ends my invention consists of a
25 new instrument comprising the combination,
in or on a containing cabinet, with an inte-
riorly-disposed sound-reproducing machine,
of any known type in which soimd-waves are
recorded on a disk or cylinder record and
30 sought to be reproduced therefrom by a dia-
phragm vibrated by a relatively traversing
stylus and record, of a contiguously-mounted
resonance - chamber, at least one wall of
which is a sounding-board, into the interior
35 of which chamber the sound-waves produced
by the diaphragm of the reproducer are dis-
charged; and means such as a pivotally-
mounted hollow sound-conveying arm on the
free end of which the sound-reproducer of the
40 talking machine is mounted, the other and
pivotally supported end of said arm being
mounted in an apertured wall of said reso-
nance-chamber in such manner as to dis-
charge the sound-waves thereinto. Also in
45 deflecting partition walls in the resonance-
chamber, operating primarily as an amplify-
ing conduit for the sound-waves on their pas-
sage through the resonance - chamber and
during their impingement against the inner
50 face of the sounding-board, and secondarily
to modify their tone by contact of such par-
tition walls with the resonant fibers of the
sounding-board. Also in the provision of
valve mechanism governing the inlet to the
resonance-chamber, as also valve mechanism 55
governing its discharge ports, whereby the
tone production may be regulated, namely,
producing either loud or soft tones, with di-
minuendo or crescendo, at the will of the op-
erator and while the machine is in operation. 60
Also in other detail features of construction
and arrangement of the elements relatively
to the cabinet, in each of the two alternate
forms thereof hereinafter described ; the com-
bined elements being well adapted to be con- 65
tained in a cabinet and constitute a compact,
self-contained and readily transportable ma-
chine or instrument. .
The basic principle of the invention is ex-
emplified in a device wherein sound-waves 70
are reproduced from a "record" thereof by a
contacting stylus vibrating a diaphragm and
discharging the sound-waves so produced
into the interior of a resonance-chamber of
the character recited, whereby they operate 75
to sympathetically vibrate the sounding-
board wall or walls thereof; while a further
basic principle is the deflection modification
and amplification of such sound-waves with-
in the resonance-chamber, exemplified by the 80
provision of outwardly - diverging partition
walls interiorly disposed between the sound-
ing-board wall or walls of such resonance-
chamber.
In the accompanying drawings illustrating 85
my invention in two of its best forms: Fig-
ure 1 is a vertical section, partly in elevation,
wherein the interior of the cabinet is reached
through a hinged closure in one of its side
walls, and wherein the resonance - box is 90
placed over the open top of the cabinet, the
back of the former constituting the top of the
latter and not necessarily having any func-
tion as a sounding-board. Fig. 2 is a section
of the resonance-box, drawn on the line 2 — 2 95
of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an elevation of the piv-
oted sound-conveying arm constructed to op-
erate with the form of device shown in Fig. 1.
Figs. 4, 5 and 6 are elevations in perspective
of the elements comprising the sound-con- 100
veying arm of Fig. 3. Fig. 7 is an elevation
in perspective of another form of the device,
wherein the top of the cabinet is provided
with a lunged lid or door and the resonance-
box mounted on the inner face of the door, 105
in such manner that both the top and back
2
873,937
sides of the resonance-chamber may operate
as sounding-boards; and Fig. 8 is a horizon-
tal sectional view thereof, through the cen-
ter of the resonance-chamber. Fig. 9 is an
5 elevation of a form of the pivotally-mounted
sound-conveying arm constructed to operate
with the form of device shown in Fig. 7 ; and
Figs. 10 to 13 inclusive are elevations in per-
spective of the elements comprising the
10 sound-conveying arm of Fig. 9.
Referring now to said drawings A indicates
an inclosing cabinet, with an outwardly open-
ing door A' in its side wall, in the form shown
in Fig. 1, but with the door A' forming the
15 top covering or lid, in the form shown in Fig.
7; the cabinet, in either case, containing a
sound-reproducing or " talking-machine " of
any usual type, the drawings showing the
gramophone type, indicated in Figs. 1 and 7
20 wherein a motor-containing box is indicated
at m, the turn-table at 10, the "record" at 8,
and the sound-box mechanism, comprising a
diaphragm and a stylus, at 5.
Sound waves produced by the diaphragm
25 of the sound-box 5 are discharged through
the sound-conveying tube 4, which is a taper-
ing tube proceeding directly, and by its
smaller end, from the back of the sound-box
5 to the aperture 14 in the base wall (Fig. 1)
30 or of the adjacent side wall (Fig. 7) of the
resonance-box B ; and it is essentially a piv-
otally-mounted hollow arm to permit of the
usual and required movement of the sound-
box in its radial traverse over the "record".
35 If the hollow arm 4 is constructed with the
usual joint, indicated by dotted hnes at n in
Fig. 1 , then the arm 4 need have but a swing-
ing movement in a horizontal plane, other-
wise it must have also a limited movement
40 vertically in a short arc of a circle. Means
to permit it to have both motions are shown
in the drawings, Figs. 3 to 6 inclusive, in
which Figs. 4, 5 and 6 show the elements and
Fig. 3 the same when assembled; and they
45 are as follows: — A bracket-bearing ring 30,
with ears 31 to attach it to the superposed
box, is provided interiorly with a narrow
ledge 36 and a curved annular wall 37. The
upper end of the hollow arm 4 is provided
50 with an enlarged head, shown in Fig. 5, hav-
ing a curved exterior 34 adapted to register
with the curved wall 37 of the ring, and be-
tween the two is interposed the ring 32 (Fig.
6); while to limit the vertical arc movement
55 of the member 34 in the member 37, the for-
mer is provided with two oppositely-dis-
posed pins 35 entering holes 33 in the ring
member 32, which latter rests on the ledge 37
of the member 30 and fills the space above it
60 and is held firmly in place when the parts are
assembled and secured to the base-wall of
the resonance-box B, as shown in Fig. 3. A
somewhat different form of means providing
for these movements of the sound-conveying
65 arm 4 is required by reason of the mounting
of the resonance-box B on the inner face of
the lid of the cabinet, as shown in Fig. 7, and
these modified means are shown in Fig. 9,
wherein the elements of the pivotal bearing
are shown assembled. These elements are: 70
an annular flange 28 slightly below the upper
end 26 of the hollow arm 4. Upon said flange
rests the lower end 27 of a three-way coup-
ling 24. A retaining ring 29 holds the coup-
ling 24 in place on the flange of the arm 4, be- 75
ing secured by screws 29 a entering holes 27a.
A cylindrical hollow member 19 provided
with a flanged head-end 20 and a peripheral
slot 22 is arranged sleeve-like within the
coupling union 24, the flanged head 20 abut- 80
ting and closing one end of the coupling,
wrhile the other end of the coupling member
24 abuts against the bead 25 on the bracket
21 which is screwed to the wall of the reso-
nance-box B. The device has practically a 85 -
universal joint, and is so designed to enable
the arm 4 to have the requisite movements
before described with reference to the piv-
otal bearing shown in Fig. 3, when the ma-
chine is in operation; but also, when it is de- 90
sired to throw the machine out of action and
close dowm the lid of the cabinet, the arm
can then be swung upwards at a right angle to
the face of the resonance-box and then down-
ward, in a line therewith, resting in the recess 95
6 provided therefor and held supported
therein by a hook 7 or other similar means.
The remaining and chief element of the
new device, consisting of the resonance-box
B and its adjunctive parts, I will nowr de- 100
scribe. In essentials it must provide a hol-
low chamber, preferably rectangular in
planular outline and otherwise resembling
the resonance-box of a guitar or violin, and
have at least one of its sides operating as a 105
sounding-board. It must have one or more
sound-discharge openings. And it should
have vertical partition walls, which are rela-
tively diverging wTalls. Such a box is shown
in Fig. 1 in which the top 2 of the resonance- 110
box is a true sounding-board, shown with a
central sound-discharge opening 3. Other
sound-discharge openings may be provided
therein, and a series of openings 15a in one of
the side walls, governed by an apertured 115
sliding valve 19 actuated by a handle 18,
may be provided. In said form shown in
Fig. 1, the base 9 of the resonance-box is
shown as the top of the cabinet, and is not
necessarily another sounding-board for ob- 120
vious reasons. In the form shown in Fig. 7,
however, the base 9 of the resonance-box B
is a true sounding-board, for it is insulated,
so to speak, from the inner face of the cabinet
lid by a narrowT strip 10 interposed between 125
the four edges of the base 9 and the cabinet
lid. In both forms of resonance-box B there
is provided an inlet port indicated at 14. In
both the sound-waves impinge, so to speak,
against the top sounding-board 2, at a direct 130
873,937
right angle in Fig. 1, and substantially so in
Fig. 7, the sounding-board being thus set in
sympathetic vibration.
Ent ranee of sound-waves to the resonance-
5 chamber is governed by a valve 16 actuated
by a lever-handle 17, and the partial opening
or closing of this port has the effect to con-
trol the degree of loudness or softness of tone
and produces a perfect diminuendo or cres-
10 cendo at the will of the operator and while
the machine is in operation if desired to so
operate it.
An important, indeed an essential fea-
ture, in the construction of the resonance-
15 chamber to produce the complete effect de-
sired is in the provision of the interior parti-
tion walls. Referring first to Fig. 1 as the
simpler form, the pair of partition walls 12,
12, are united in a curve at 12b which is lo-
20 cated adjacent to and inclosing the aperture
14, proceeding thence on gradually diverging
lines which pass on either side of the aperture
3 in the sounding-board 2. Other curved
walls 12a are provided as shown in Fig. 1, as
25 it is believed that such corners in the reso-
nance-chamber should be eliminated; at least
my experience with the machine so con-
structed has been more satisfactory. Such a
partition is provided at 12a in the form
30 shown in Fig. 7, but in that form of reso-
nance-box, the sound-waves from the dia-
phragm enter the sound-chamber through
an aperture 14 cut in one of its side walls,
hence the partition walls 12, 12, are curved
35 to form the sound-passage 12° leading di-
rectly to the aperture 14 which is governed
by a valve 16 as in the other form of machine.
It is to be understood that my invention
is not limited to the employment of either
40 particular external form of resonance box
shown, nor to either particular form of piv-
otal mounting of the hollow sound-convey-
ing arm, nor to the employment in the cabi-
net, of a sound-reproducing machine of a
45 gramophone type, employing a "disk" rec-
ord; but on the contrary, a sound-reproduc-
ing machine of the phonograph or any other
t}^pe, may be substituted, care being taken
to. supply the appropriate form of pivotal
50 bearing for the sound - conveying arm to
adapt it to any particular form or type there-
of selected.
Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
55 Patent: —
1 . A machine for reproducing sounds from
a record thereof and modifying their tone
and timbre, comprising an inclosing cabinet
and the following interiorly contained in-
60 strumentahties in operative combination,
namely, mechanism for reproducing sound-
waves from a sound-record, a resonance-box
one wall of which is a sounding-board adapt-
ed to be vibrated sympathetically by said
sound-waves, and forming a resonance- 65
chamber which is substantially closed other
than by sound-discharge openings, with con-
necting tubular means operatively mounted
to convey said sound-waves from the repro-
ducer to the interior of said resonance-cham- 70
ber.
2. A machine of the character recited,
comprising a containing cabinet, and the
following interiorly - contained elements in
operative combination, namely: mechanism 75
for reproducing sound-waves from a record
thereof, a contiguous resonance - chamber
formed by a box one exterior wall of which
is a sounding-board, the interior of said box
containing outwTardly - diverging partition ?0
walls operating primarily to form an ampli-
fying passage for said sound-waves and sec-
ondarily to modify the tone thereof; with '
means for conducting the sound-waves from
the sound-reproducing mechanism to said 85
amplifying passage in the resonance-cham-
ber.
3. A machine of the character recited com-
prising the following instrumentalities, in op-
erative combination, namely a cabinet with 90
interiorly - contained mechanism for repro-
ducing sound-waves from a sound-record, a
contiguously mounted box providing a reso-
nance-chamber the exterior wall of which is a
sounding-board, a pivotally-mounted hollow 95
sound-conveying arm leading to an aperture
in an oppositely-disposed wall of said box by
which it is mounted in the cabinet, said arm
operating to convey sound-waves from the
sound-reproducer to the interior of the reso- 100
nance-chamber, with valvular means gov-
erning the delivery thereof to said chamber.
4. A machine of the character recited com-
prising the following instrumentalities, in op-
erative combination, namely a machine for 105
mechanically reproducing vibratory sound
waves from a sound-record, a box providing
a resonance-chamber one wall of which is a
sounding-board, and having interior diverg-
ing partition walls, with a pivotally-mounted 110
hollow sound-conveying arm leading said vi-
bratory sound-waves to the diverging pas-
sageway within the resonance-chamber.
5. A machine of the character recited com-
prising the following instrumentalities, in op- 115
era'tive combination, namely a machine for
mechanically reproducing vibratory sound-
waves from a sound-record, a box providing
a resonance-chamber to which said sound-
waves are delivered and having a pair of op- 120
positely-disposed sounding-boards and inte-
rior diverging partition walls, with a pivot-
ally-mounted hollow sound-conveying arm
leading said vibratory sound-waves to the
diverging passageway within the resonance- 125
chamber.
6. A machine of the character recited com-
prising a containing casing, and within it a
873,937
machine for mechanically reproducing vi-
bratory sound-waves from a sound-record, a
superposed resonance-box mounted on and
forming the top of said casing, said box com-
5 prising top and bottom connected walls, the
former of which is a sounding-board, and the
latter of which forms the top of said casing,
with a pivotally-mounted hollow sound-con-
veying arm leading the sound-waves from
10 the sound-reproducer and discharging them
through an aperture in the contiguous wall
of said resonance-box.
7. In a machine of the character recited
comprising a cabinet with interiorly-con-
15 tained mechanism for reproducing sound-
waves from a sound-record, the combination
therewith of superposed means operating as
well to amplify the tone and modify the
timbre of the sound-waves so produced, said
20 means consisting essentially of a resonance-
chamber having its upper and exterior in-
closing wall adapted to operate as a sound-
ing-board, and containing interiorly a pair
of outwardly diverging partition walls con-
25 stitutmg a sound-amplifying passage, with
a vertically-disposed sound-conveying arm
pivotally mounted against an aperture in the
lower and contiguous wall of said box, operat-
ing to convey the sound-waves from the re-
30 producer to said amplifying passage within
the resonance - chamber and against the
sounding-board wall thereof.
8. In a machine of the character recited,
an inclosing cabinet, with a chamber con-
35 taining mechanism for reproducing sound-
waves from a record thereof, a superposed
resonance-box formed by a pair of oppo-
sitely-disposed sides, the upper one of which
is a sounding-board, with connecting up-
40 right side-walls one of which is apertured to
provide sound-discharge openings, with val-
vular means governing the same, a hollow
tapering sound-conveying arm leading from
the sound-reproducing mechanism and piv-
45 otally mounted at its end of largest diameter,
against -an inlet aperture in the basal wall of
said resonance - box, with valvular means
governing the entrance of such sound-waves
therein.
9. A machine of the character recited com- 50
prising an inclosing cabinet with a hinged
lid, interiorly-contained mechanism for re-
producing sound-waves from a sound-record,
a resonance-box mounted on the inner face
of said lid and consisting of a pair of oppo- 55
sitely-disposed sounding-boards with con-
necting side walls, the exterior sounding-
board having a sound - discharge opening
and the other being secured to the face of the
hinged lid, with an edge strip of material 60
interposed between them; a tapering hollow
sound - conveying arm leading the sound-
waves from the reproducer and discharging
them through an aperture in one of the con-
necting side walls of said resonance - box, 65
said arm having pivotal bearings permitting
both vertical and lateral movements thereof
relatively to the resonance - box on which it
is mounted.
10. A machine of the character recited 70
comprising an inclosing cabinet having a
hinged lid, and interiorly contained means
for mechanically reproducing sound-waves
from a sound-record, the combination there-
with of a hollow sound-conveying arm with 75
pivotal bearings permitting both vertical
and lateral movements thereof at jts dis-
charge end, and a superposed box mounted
on the inner face of said hinged lid and con-
stituting a resonance-chamber, with sound-
discharging apertures, and having interior
diverging partition walls; said box com-
prising two oppositely-disposed flat sides,
one of which is a sounding-board, with con-
necting side- walls one of which is apertured 85
to operatively support the delivery end of
said sound-conveying arm.
In testimony whereof, I have hereunto
affixed my signature this 23rd day of May
A. D. 1907.
LUTHER T. HAILE.
Witnesses :
A. M. BlDDLE,
C. A. Dunlap.
80
No. 873,969.
PATENTED DEC. 17, 1907.
0. THOMA, Jr. & W. THOMA.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED MAT 16, 1907.,
2SHEETS-3HEET 1.
*0 C*|
af&u ~&&> SU-tct-ne-u
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASH! .VC.TON , O. C
No. 873,969.
PATENTED DEC. 17, 1907.
C. THOMA, Jh. & W. TH'OMA.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED MAT 16, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
$***
01. £.{~hM^^-
^ -? erf A dwve-ntofr?
\j. §S u ^*t*v £lttot -new
THE NORMS- PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHARLES THOMA, JR., AND WALTER THOMA, OF OARLSTADT, NEW JERSEY.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 873,969.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed May 16. 1907. Serial No, 373.969.
Patented Dec. 17, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, Charles Thoma, Jr.,
and Walter Thoma, citizens of the United
States of America, and residents of Carlstadt,
5 Bergen county, and State of New Jersey,
have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Phonographs, of which the
following is a specification.
The present invention relates to phono-
10 graphs or other sound reproducing machines,
and has more particularly reference to a
multi-record or a repeater phonograph.
In machines of this character, the record,
or the sound reproducing mechanism, is
15 given a reciprocating motion, one with rela-
tion to the other. One moter being utilized
to effect the forward feed or outward excur-
sion during the sound reproducing period,
and another motor, generally a spring or a
20 weight, is utilized to return the parts to their
original position at a greater speed than that
attained during the outward excursion.
The chief object of the present invention is
to produce a multi-record machine operating
25 automatically, and the invention consists of
the hereinafter described features of con-
struction as pointed out in the claims.
In the accompanying drawings the inven-
tion is embodied in a concrete and preferred
30 form, but changes of construction may be
made without departing from the legitimate
and intended scope of the invention.
In the said drawings: — Figure 1 is a plan
view of a phonograph embodying the inven-
35 tion. Fig. 2 is an end elevation looking in
the direction of the arrow 2 in Fig. 1, show-
ing the st}dus disengaged from the record.
Fig. 3 is a vertical sectional view on the line
3 — 3 of Fig. 1 showing the stylus in engage-
40 nient with the record. Fig. 4 is a detail
view of the double reversely threaded re-
peater screw. Fig. 5 is a vertical sectional
view on the line 5 — 5 in Fig. 1 . Fig. 6 is a
sectional detail view of part of the feed
screw.
Similar characters of reference indicate cor-
responding parts in the different views.
1 indicates a frame work of any suitable
construction for properly supporting the
50 parts composing the machine.
2 indicates the main drive shaft carrying
the feed screw 3. Pivotally supported on
the shaft 4 and adapted to slide thereon is a
sound reproducing mechanism 5 connected
55 to the thread follower 6 adapted to engage
45
with the feed screw during the sound repro-
ducing period and having the stylus 7 adapted
to engage with the record.
8 indicates the repeater screw whose
threads are coarser than those of the feed 60
screw. This repeater screw is provided with
one thread 9 extending substantially through-
out its entire length and with a reverse
thread 1 0 extending only a short distance of
its length and provided with a trip 11. 65
Mounted on the bracket 12 of the sound re-
producing mechanism is a link 13 provided
with the boat - shaped thread follower 14
adapted to engage in the threads of the
double reverse threaded repeater screw S. 70
Pivotally connected to the link 13 is an arm
1 4a which has another pivotal support on the
rod 15 located underneath the repeater screw
and on which the said arm is adapted to slide.
Mounted on the drive shaft 2 is a trip 16 75
which is adapted to engage with the nose 17
of the arm 14a when brought into the plane
thereof.
1 8 denotes a shaft on which is mounted the
record carrier 19. This record carrier is com- 80
posed of two hub sections 20 and 21, one of
which is fixed and is provided with a plu-
rality of spindles 22 for supporting records.
The other hub section 21 normally tends to
be forced out of engagement with the spin- 85
dies 22 by reason of the spring 23 but is con-
fined and held in contact with the said spin-
dles \>y reason of the cam nut 24 engaging
with the cam surface 25 on the hub section.
B}T turning the cam nut 24 the spring 23 will 90
be allowed to press the hub section 21 out of
engagement with the spindles 22, and by
turning the arms of 'the said hub section to a
point where the}" will be in between the rec-
ords, the latter can be removed from the 95
spindles and replaced b}* others.
26 indicates a slot in the hub section 21
adapted to receive the pin 27 on the shaft 18
so as to insure the hub section 21 being re-
turned to its proper position circumferen- 100
tially when it is tightened up against the
spindles 22. Loosely mounted on the shaft
18 is a cam collar 28 having the pawl 29 held
in position by the spring 30 and adapted to
engage with the teeth of the ratchet 31 when 105
turned in one direction and to move idly over
the teeth when turned in the other direction.
The ratchet 31 is fixed on the shaft 18 by
means of the pin 32.
36 is a pin carried by the sound reproduc- 110
a
873,969
ing mechanism adapted to engage with the
cam collar 28.
On the end of the drive shaft 2 is a friction
disk 33 held yieldingly in position by means
5 of a spring 34. One end of each of the spin-
dles 22 is provided with a complementary
friction disk 35 adapted to engage with the
feed screw 33 when brought into almement
therewith, the spring 34 allowing the two
10 disks to slip into engagement with each
other.
Motion is imparted to the device by means
of a suitable motor from which power is
transmitted to the pulley 37 on the drive
15 shaft 2, and for the purpose of this disclosure
the said pulley 37 may be considered the
motor. 38 indicates a gear mounted on the
end of the shaft 2 and intermeshing with the
gear 39 on the end of the repeater screw.
20 The operation is as follows: — Assume that
the sound reproducing mechanism is travel-
ing in a forward direction during the sound
reproducing period and that the thread fol-
lower is in engagement with the feed screw 3
25 and the stylus 7 in engagement with the
record 40. As the sound reproducing mech-
anism reaches the limit of its movement in a
forward direction the nose 17 on the arm 14a
will be brought into the plane of the trip 16
30 on the feed screw shaft. This will cause the
link 13 to be swung around its pivot on the
sound reproducing mechanism whereby the
boat shaped follower 14 will be brought into
engagement with the thread 9 of the repeater
35 screw, at the same time causing the said re-
producing mechanism to be turned on the
shaft 4 and lifting the thread follower 6
out of engagement with the feed screw 3 and
the stylus 7 out of engagement with the rec-
10 ord. By this means the sound reproducing
mechanism will be moved back to its initial
position, but at a greater speed than the
speed of its outward excursion. When the
follower 14 reaches the extreme end of the
45 thread 9 it will come into contact with the
surface 41 causing the said follower to be
turned around its swivel point 42 and to en-
gage in the thread 10 of the repeater screw.
By this means the motion is reversed and the
50 sound reproducing mechanism is moved for-
ward again but at a greater speed than the
speed attained during the sound reproducing
period. This forward motion will continue
until the follower 14 encounters the trip 11
55 which will cause the link 13 to swing around
its pivot on the sound reproducing mechan-
ism thereby disengaging the follower from
the shaft 8 and allowing the said reproducing
mechanism to descend and the thread fol-
60 lower 6 to be brought into contact with the
feed screw 3 and the stylus into engagement
with the record. In this way the same
record may be repeated several times. If,
however, the pin 36 is in position on the sound
65 reproducing mechanism it will during the re-
turn movement of the said sound reproducing
mechanism, enter the groove of the cam col-
lar 28, thereby causing the pawl 29 to en-
gage with the ratchet 31 and thus turn the
shaft 18 automatically a sufficient distance 70
to bring another record into engagement
with the end of the shaft 2. The forward
movement of the sound reproducing mechan-
ism will cause the pin 36 to travel in the cam
groove of the collar 28 thereby turning it 75
back again so as to reposition it for the next
return movement, without however, turning
the shaft 18.
43 denotes a guideway on the framework
adapted to support the projection 44 of the 80
sound reproducing mechanism when the sty-
lus is in engagement with the record, so as
to relieve the latter of the weight of the said
reproducing mechanism.
45 is a lever having the cam surface 46 8£
whereby the stylus can be raised out of en-
gagement with the record at will.
What is claimed is : —
1 . In a phonograph, the combination of a
record, a sound reproducing mechanism, and 90
driving means for causing one of the said
members to be reciprocated with relation to
the other, comprising : a feed screw, a thread
follower adapted to engage with the feed
screw during the sound reproducing period, a 95
double reversely threaded repeater screw, a
second thread follower adapted to engage
with the repeater screw, means for causing
the first thread follower to disengage with
the feed screw at the end of the sound repro- 100
ducing period and the second thread follower
to engage with one of the threads of the re-
peater screw thereby returning the parts to
their original position, means for causing the
second thread follower to engage with the 105
other thread of the repeater screw at the end
of the return movement so as to advance the
parts prior to the sound reproducing period,
and means for causing the second thread fol-
lower to disengage with the repeater screw 110
and the first thread follower to engage with
the feed screw at the beginning of the sound
reproducing period.
2. In a phonograph, the combination of a
record, a transversely movable sound repro- 1 1 5
ducing mechanism, a feed screw, a thread
follower, carried by the sound reproducing
mechanism, a feed screw, a thread follower,
carried by the sound reproducing mechanism,
adapted to engage with the feed screw during 1 20
the sound reproducing period a double re-
versely threaded repeater screw, a second
thread follower, carried by the sound repro-
ducing mechanism, adapted to engage with
the repeater screw, means for causing the 125
first thread follower to disengage with the
feed screw at the end of the sound reproduc-
ing period and the second thread follower to
engage with one of the threads of the re-
peater screw thereby returning the sound 130
873,969
reproducing mechanism to its original posi-
tion, means for causing the second thread
follower to engage with the other thread of
the repeater screw at the end of the return
5 movement so as to advance the sound repro-
ducing mechanism prior to the sound repro-
ducing period, and means for causing the
second thread follower to disengage with the
repeater screw and the first thread follower
10 to engage with the feed screw at the beiiin-
ning of the sound reproducing period.
3. In a phonograph, the combination of a
record, a sound reproducing mechanism, and
driving means for causing one of the said
15 members to reciprocate with relation to the
other, comprising: a feed screw, a thread
follower adapted to engage with the feed
screw during the sound reproducing period, a
double reversely threaded repeater screw
20 whose threads are coarser than the threads
of the feed screw, a second thread follower
adapted to engage with the repeater screw,
means for causing the first thread follower to
disengage with the feed screw at the end of
25 the sound reproducing period and the second
thread follower to engage with one of the
threads of the repeater screw thereby return-
ing the parts to their original position at a
greater speed than their speed during the
30 sound reproducing period, means for causing
the second thread follower to engage with
the other thread of the repeater screw at the
end of the return movement so as to advance
the parts prior to the sound reproducing
35 period at a speed greater than their speed
during the sound reproducing period, and
means for causing the second thread follower
to disengage with the repeater screw and the
first thr,eacl follower to engage with the feed
40 screw at the beginning of the sound repro-
ducing period.
4. In a phonograph, the combination of a
record, a transversely movable sound repro-
ducing mechanism, a feed screw, a thread
45 follower carried by the sound reproducing
mechanism, adapted to engage with the feed
screw during the sound reproducing period, a
double reversely threaded repeater screw
whose threads are coarser than the threads
50 of the feed screw, a second thread follower,
carried by the sound reproducing mechan-
ism, adapted to engage with the repeater
screw, means for causing the first thread
follower to disengage with the feed screw at
55 the end of the sound reproducing period and
the second thread follower to engage with
one of the threads of the repeater screw
thereby returning the sound reproducing
mechanism to its original position at a
60 greater speed than its speed during the sound
reproducing period, means for causing the
thread follower to engage with the other
thread of the repeater screw at the end of the
return movement so as to advance the sound
65 reproducing mechanism at a speed greater
than its speed during the sound reproducing
period, and means for causing the second
thread follower to disengage with the re-
peater screw and tite first thread follower to
engage with the feed screw at the beginning 70
of the sound reproducing period.
5. In a phonograph, the combination of a
record, a transversely movable sound repro-
ducing mechanism pivotally supported, a
feed screw, a repeater screw, a stylus, and a 75
thread follower for the feed screw, both car-
ried by the sound reproducing mechanism
and responding to the pivotal motion thereof,
a second thread follower pivotally supported
on the sound reproducing mechanism and 80
adapted to engage with the repeater screw,
means for turning the second thread follower
around its pivot in one direction so as to
cause it to engage with the repeater screw
thereby lifting the sound reproducing mech- 85
anism around its pivotal support and raising
the stylus out of engagement with the record
and the first thread follower out of engage-
ment with the feed screw, and means for
turning the second thread follower around 90
its pivot in the other direction so as to cause
it to disengage with the repeater screw there-
by allowing the sound reproducing mechan-
ism to descend and the first thread follower
to engage with the feed screw, and the stylus 95
to engage with the record.
6. In a phonograph, the combination of a
record, a transversely movable sound repro-
ducing mechanism pivotally supported, a
feed screw, a double reversely threaded re- 100
peater screw, a stylus, and a thread follower
for the feed screw, both carried by the sound
reproducing mechanism and responding to
the pivotal motion thereof, a second thread
follower pivotally supported on the sound re- 105
producing mechanism and adapted to en-
gage with the repeater screw, means for turn-
ing the second thread follower around its
pivot in one direction so as to cause it to en-
gage with one thread of the repeater screw no
thereby lifting the sound reproducing mech-
anism around its pivotal support and raising
the stylus out of engagement with the record
and the first thread follower out of engage-
ment with the feed screw, means for causing 115
the second thread follower to engage with
the other thread of the repeater screw there-
by reversing the motion of the sound repro-
ducing mechanism, and means for turning
the second thread follower around its pivot 120
in the other direction so as to cause it to dis-
engage with tile repeater screw thereby al-
lowing the sound reproducing mechanism to
descend and the first thread follower to en-
gage with the feed screw, and the stylus to 125
engage with the record.
7. In a phonograph, the combination of
a shaft, a record carrier mounted thereon
adapted to support a plurality of records, a
sound reproducing mechanism, means for re- 130
873,969
10
15
ciprocating the sound reproducing mechan-
ism, a cam having a ratchet and pawl con-
nection with the said shaft, and means car-
ried by the sound reproducing mechanism j
for engaging with the said cam to rotate the j
shaft during the return stroke of the sound ]
reproducing mechanism.
8. In a phonograph, a record carrier com-
prising: a shaft, a fixed hub section, a plural-
ity of spindles for supporting records, fixed
on the hub section, a second hub section j
adapted to engage with the free end of the
fixed spindles, a spring for pressing the said I
second hub section away from the spindles,
means for confining the said second hub sec- j
tion against the spindles, which when re- j
leased allows the said spring to move the sec-
ond hub section out of engagement with the
spindles, whereby the said second hub sec-1
tion can be turned out of the plane of the
records so that the latter can be removed
from the spindles.
9. In a phonograph, the combination of a
sound reproducing mechanism, a double re-
versely-threaded screw, and a thread follower
connected to the sound reproducing mech-
anism and adapted to engage with the
threads of the screw to move the sound re-
producing mechanism in both directions.
Signed at New York citv this 7th dav of
May 1907.
CHAKLES THOMA, Jr.
WALTER THOMA.
Witnesses:
Axel V. Beeken,
Geo. A. Marshall.
20
25
30
No, 874,548.
PATENTED DEC. 24, 1907.
T. V. SKELLY.
EECORD HOLDING AND SHIFTING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION PILED MAY 26, 1906.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
M^./ll.Jl^^^^:,
CUttjo
THE NORRIS PETERS CO..WASHINCTON, D. C.
No. 874,548.
PATENTED DEC. 24, 1907.
T. V. SKELLY.
RECORD HOLDING AND SHIFTING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED MAY 25, 1906.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
£&
*6&j&S:
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS V. SKELLY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
RECORD HOLDING AND SHIFTING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
No. 874,548.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed May 25, 1906. Serial No. 318,614.
Patented Dec. 24, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas V. Skelly, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi-
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi-
5 nois, have invented certain new and useful
Improvements in Record Holding and Shift-
ing Attachment for Phonographs, and of
which the following is a full, clear, and exact
specification.
10 The main objects of this invention are to
provide an improved construction for the
record shifting apparatus of magazine phono-
graphs or similar devices in which a plurality
of records are held in a magazine and ar-
15 ranged so that any of the records may be
shifted into operative position with respect
to the phonograph or other machine at the
will of the operator; to provide, in a mechan-
ism of this class, a structure which will insure
23 proper alinement between the phonograph
support and the supports of the magazine
when shifting records from one to the other,
which will prevent the shifting of the maga-
zine when a record is removed therefrom,
25 and which will prevent the operation of the
record shifting apparatus except when the
magazine is properly positioned with rela-
tion to the holder of the machine; and to pro-
vide improved means for causing the shift -
30 ing mechanism to automatically disengage
the record after the same has been properly
placed upon the holder of the machine.
To the attainment of these ends and the
accomplishment of other new and useful ob-
35 jects as will appear, the invention consists
in the features of novelty in the construc-
tion, combination and arrangement of the
several features hereinafter described and
claimed and shown in the accompanying
40 drawings, illustrating an exemplification of
the invention, and in which ;
Figure 1 is a diagrammatic top plan view
of a phonograph having a record holder at-
tached thereto, constructed in accordance
45 with the principles of this invention. Fig. 2
is a sectional view on fine 2 — 2 of Fig. 1.
Fig. 3 is a side elevation of a portion of the
holder shown in Fig. 1, partly in section.
Fig. 4 is a view of a portion of the holder on
50 fine 4 — 4 of Fig. 1. Fig. 5 is a sectional view
on fine 5 — 5 of Fig. 1. Fig. 6 is a detail view
of one of the springs for positioning the
shifter.
Referring to the drawings, and in which
55 the same reference numerals designate simi-
lar parts throughout the several views, the
numeral 10 designates a suitable support
upon which rests a phonograph, indicated
generally by the numeral 11. The phono-
graph is provided with the ordinary record 60
mandrel or support 12 but of a length some-
what longer than the ordinary holder or sup-
port so as to project beyond* the end of the
frame of the machine. The free extremity
of the holder or support 12 stands adjacent 65
and in close proximity to an aperture or open-
ing 13 in a wall or plate 14, which projects
above the support 10. The aperture or
opening 13 is of a size slightly larger than the
external diameter of the records 15 to per- 70
mit the records to easily pass therethrough
in a manner to be "described. A standard or
support 16 is secured adjacent to and spaced
from the wall or plate 14.
A record magazine comprising a disk or 75
wheel 17, provided with a suitable axle 18, is
journaled between the wall or plate 14 and
the standard or support 16, and adjacent the
latter. This disk or wheel 17 is provided
with a plurality of lateral projecting holders 80
or supports 18 secured thereto by one end,
and extending substantially across the space
between the wall or plate 14 and support 16
and terminating adjacent the said plate or
wall 14. Any suitable number of these sup- 85
ports or holders may be employed and are
preferably secured adjacent the periphery of
the disk or wheel, properly spaced from each
other and in such a position that when the
disk or wheel 17 is turned about its axis, any 90
one of these supports or holders 18 may be
brought into direct alinement with the rec-
ord holder or support 12 of the phonograph.
Secured to the outer face of the disk or
wheel 17 is a supplemental disk or plate 19 95
which is provided with a plurality of aper-
tures 20, located preferably adjacent the pe-
riphery thereof and for a purpose to be here-
inafter set forth. Obviously the disks 17
and 19 may be made integral if so desired. 100
Uprights or standards 21 — 22 project
above the support 10 and are located prefer-
ably at the rear of the phonograph 11, and
adjacent each end thereof and secured be-
tween the standards are guide or track rods 105
23. Secured adjacent the outer face of the
standard 21 is a spring 24, the extremity of
which preferably projects above the top
thereof, and said spring is held in position in
any suitable manner prefer ably hx means of 110
a bolt or screwj25.;TLThe upper corners of the
standard 22 are preferably rounded or cut off
s
874,648
as at 26, and secured to the outer face of the
standard is a spring 27. This spring is so
arranged that the corners thereof will extend
or project beyond the corners 26 (as more
5 clearly shown in Fig. 6 of the drawings) . A
rod or bar 28 is provided with depending
arms or brackets 29 through which the guide
or track rods 23 pass, and serve as a means
for supporting and guiding the rod or bar 28.
10 These arms or brackets are located prefer-
ably adjacent one end of said rod or bar 28,
and the other end thereof projects through,
and has a sliding bearing 30 in the support or
standard 16.
1 5 Projecting laterally from the rod or bar 28,
are arms or fingers 31 — 32. The arm 32 is
preferably adjustable with relation to the bar
or rod 28, and is held in its adjusted position
in any suitable manner, such as by means of
20 a bolt or screw 33. The extremities of these
arms 31 — 32 are adapted to stand adjacent
and in close proximity to the record holder
12 of the phonograph 11. Depending from
the bar or rod 28, preferably beyond the arm
25 or finger 31, are lugs or projections 34, which
are adapted to move over the cut off or
rounded corners 26 of the standard 22, and
into engagement with the adjacent corners
of the spring 27, when the rod or bar 28 is
30 withdrawn in a manner to be set forth. A
handle 35 is secured to the end of the bar or
rod 28 and is located preferably on the out-
side of the standard or support 16, and se-
cured to the handle 35 is a rod or bar 36
35 which is preferably arranged parallel with
the rod or bar 28. This rod or bar 36 is
adapted to pass through a bearing 37 in the
standard or support 16, through one of the
apertures 20 in the disk or plate 19, and into
40 a socket or recess 38 (if desired) in the sup-
port 10, when the handle 35 is pushed in, and
in this position the extremity of the rod or
bar 28 stands adjacent the spring 24.
An aperture or opening 39 is provided at
45 any suitable point in the plate or wall 14 and
is located in line with the supports or holders
18. The edges of this opening are covered
or padded as at 40, to prevent injury to the
cylinder when being placed upon or removed
50 from the holders or supports 18 as will be set
forth. A suitable door or closure 41 is pro-
vided for the aperture or opening 39. This
door may be of any suitable construction but
is preferably pivoted to the wall or plate 14 as
55 at 42, and has a suitable fastening device 43.
The operation is as follows: — The shifter
handle 35 is withdrawn so as to bring the two
arms 31 — 32 over the holders or supports 18,
which are secured to the disk or wheel 17,
60 and with one arm adjacent the ends thereof.
The rod or bar 36 is of such a length that
when the handle is withdrawn it will be re-
moved from the apertures 20 in the disk or
plate 19. In withdrawing the handle, the
65 arm 32 will engage the inner face of the disk
or wheel 17, and if permitted to remain
against the end of the cylinder or record will
cause friction and possibly damage the same.
In order to cause the arm to automatically
disengage this face of the disk or wheel, 70
when the handle is released, the lugs 34 and
spring 27 are provided. When the handle is
withdrawn the lugs 34 will pass over the up-
right or standard 22 and against the spring
27, so as to create a tension on the spring. 75
When the handle 35 is released the spring
will assume its normal position and cause a
slight retrograde motion and draw the arm or
finger 32 out of contact with the end of the
record 15. In filling the magazine, the door go
41 is opened, a cylinder placed upon the sup-
port or holder 18 adjacent the opening, and
the disk or wheel rotated to bring an empty
holder or support 18 adjacent the aperture or
opening 39, for the reception of another cyl- 85
inder. This operation is continued until a
cylinder is placed upon each of the supports
or holders 18, after which the door is closed
and fastened, which prevents accidental dis-
placement of the cylinders. The arms or 90
fingers 31 — 32, will permit the cylinders to
pass between them, as the disk or wheel 17
rotates, and the arm 32 may be adjusted ac-
cording to the length of the record or cylin-
der, so that both arms stand adjacent the 95
ends thereof. The disk or wheel 17 may now
be turned so as to bring any desired record,
which may be ascertained in any suitable
manner, adjacent the aperture or opening 13,
and opposite the holder or support 12 of the 100
phonograph. The handle 35 is then shoved
m, which will cause the rod 28 and arms or
fingers 31 — 32 to move over, and adjacent
the holder 12 of the phonograph, carrying
with it the record 15 which now stands be- 105
tween the arms or fingers, causing the same
to slide off of the support or holder 18 and on
to the support or holder 12. When the
record has attained the proper position on
the support or holder 12, the extremity of 110
the rod or bar 28, engages the spring 24 and
exerts a tension thereon, so that when the
handle 35 is released the spring 24 will cause
the rod or bar 28 to move slightly, thereby
causing the arm or finger 32 to move out of 115
engagement with the end of the cylinder.
Just as the record or cylinder lb 5egins to leave
the support or holder 18, the rod or bar 36
passes through one of the apertures 20 in the
disk or wheel 19, thereby locking the maga- 120
zine against rotative movement. The maga-
zine remains locked until the record is with-
drawn from the machine and back onto its
support or holder 18, which will at the same
time withdraw the locking rod 36, to permit 125
free rotation of the disk 17 and records 15.
The apertures 20 are so positioned with re-
spect to the holders or supports 18, that
when one of the supports is in line with the
holder or support 12, one aperture will be in 130
874,548
position to receive the locking rod or bar 36,
but should the two holders 12 and 18 be out
of a direct alinement the end of the rod or bar
would engage the face of the disk or plate 19,
5 and prevent the arm 32 from removing the
records or C3rlinders, thereby producing a
positive means for preventing damage to the
records, when inserting them into the ma-
chine, and a positive lock while in the ma-
10 chine and while withdrawing the same.
After the record has been played it may be
removed from the machine by withdrawing
the handle 35 which will cause the arm or fin-
ger 31 to move the record from the support
15 or holder 12 onto the support IS. The rod
36 is of such a length that the end thereof will
not pass out of the aperture 20 until the record
or cylinder has been entirely withdrawn from
the holder or support 12 and the outer end
20 thereof has passed the wall or plate 14.
It is to be understood that it is not desired
to be limited to the exact details of construc-
tion or the arrangement of the various parts
as numerous changes may be made therein
25 without departing from the spirit of the in-
vention.
What is claimed as new is: —
1. The combination of a phonograph hav-
ing a mandrel for supporting a tubular rec-
30 ord, a magazine adapted to support a plural-
ity of such records and movable to bring suc-
cessive records in alinement with said man-
drel, a shifter movable longitudinally of said
mandrel for shifting a record to and from
35 said mandrel, and means actuated by said
shifter and having interlocking engagement
with said magazine whereby said magazine
will be locked against movement while a rec-
ord is displaced from said magazine by said
40 shifter.
2. The combination of a phonograph hav-
ing a mandrel for supporting a tubular rec-
ord, a magazine adapted to support a plural-
ity of such records and movable to bring suc-
45 cessive records in alinement with said man-
drel, a shifter movable longitudinally of said
mandrel for shifting a record to and from
said mandrel, and means carried by said
shifter and having slidable interlocking en-
S 50 gagement with said magazine whereby said
shifter will be locked against operation ex-
cept when one of the records in said maga-
zine is in alinement with said mandrel.
3. In a device of the class described the
55 combination of a phonograph containing a
record support, a support journaled adjacent
the end of the record support, a plurality of
record holders carried thereb}^ and adapted
to individually aline with the record holder,
60 said holder support being provided with a
plurality of apertures, means for shifting the
record from the holder to the record support,
and means operatively related to the first
said means, and adapted to enter one of the
65 apertures in the holder support to lock the
same against movement when the record is
being shifted.
4. In a device of the class described the
combination of a phonograph, containing a
record support, a plurality of record holders 70
journaled adjacent the end of the support
and adapted to individually aline with the
support, a perforated disk carried by the
holders, a movably supported bar, shifting
fingers thereon adjacent the record support 75
for moving the record from the holder to the
support when the latter is in alinement with
said support, and a locking bar, carried by
said first bar and adapted to enter one of the
perforations in the disk to lock the holders 80
against movement and permit the removal
of the record when the holder and record
supports are in alinement.
5. In a device of the class described the
combination of a phonograph containing a 85
record support, spaced supports adjacent the
end of the record support, one of said spaced
supports being provided with an aperture
adjacent to the end of the record support, a
plurality of record holders journaled be- 90
tween the spaced supports and adapted to
aline with the record support, a perforated
disk carried by the holders, a bar adjacent
the record holder, and passing through the
spaced supports, fingers carried by the bar, 95
and adapted to engage the ends of the rec-
ord, a handle connected to one end of the bar,
and a locking rod connected to the handle
and passing through one of the spaced sup-
ports, said locking rod being adapted to en- 100
ter one of the perforations in the disk to lock
the holders, when the fingers are moved to
shift the record.
6. In a device of the class described the
combination of a phonograph containing a 105
record support, a record holder supported
adjacent the end of the support, means for
engaging the ends of the record for moving
the same from the holder to the support, and
means for causing the first said means to au- 110
tomaticalry disengage the end of the record.
7. In a device of the class described the
combination of a phonograph containing a
record support, a record holder rotatably
supported adjacent the end of the record sup- 115
port, and adapted to ahne the records with
the support, shifting fingers adapted to alter-
nately engage the ends of the record, means
for moving the fingers, to shift the record,
and means for automatically causing the en- 120
gaging finger to move out of contact with the
end of the record.
8. In a device of the class described the
combination of a phonograph containing a
record support, a plurality of record holders, 125
adapted to successive aline with the sup-
port, means for alternately engaging the ends
of the record to shift the same onto or off of the
support, and means yieldingly engaging the
first said means for automatically causing 130
874,548
the same to move out of engagement with
the end of the record.
9. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a phonograph containing a
5 record support, a record holder adjacent the
end of the support, a sliding bar mounted ad-
jacent the support, means carried by the bar
and adapted to engage the ends of the record
for moving the same longitudinally, a projec-
10 tion carried by the rod, and means standing
within the path of movement of the projec-
tion and adapted to be engaged thereby to
cause the first said means to move out of en-
gagement with the end of the record.
15 10. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a phonograph containing a
record support, a record holder adjacent the
end of the support, a sliding bar mounted ad-
jacent the support/ means carried by the bar
20 and adapted to engage the ends of the record
for moving the same longitudinally, a projec-
tion carried by the rod and an elastic means
standing within the path of movement of the
projection and adapted to be engaged there-
25 by to cause the first said means to-automatic-
ally move out of engagement with the end of
the record.
11. In a device of the class described the
combination of a phonograph containing a
30 record support, a record holder adjacent the
end of the support, a longitudinally movable
bar mounted adjacent the support, means
carried by the bar and adapted to automatic-
ally engage the ends of the record for moving
the same, a lug projecting from the bar, a 35
spring standing within the path of movement
of the lug to cause the first said means to dis-
engage the record when the bar is moved in
one direction, and a spring standing within
the path of movement of the end of the bar 40
when moved in the opposite direction to
cause the respective first said means to disen-
gage the end of the record.
12. In a device of the class. described, the
combination of a mandrel, a support adapted 45
to hold a tubular record and movable into
alinement with said mandrel, a shifter mov-
able along said mandrel and support and
adapted to shift a record from one to the
other, and yielding means located in position 50
to be engaged by said shifter in its limiting
positions and adapted to move the same clear
of the record after the record has been shifted
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification, in the presence of 55
two subscribing witnesses, on this 23rd day
of May A. D. 1906.
THOMAS V. SKELLY.
Witnesses :
J. H. Jochttm, Jr.,
C. H. Seem.
I
No. 874,819.
PATENTED DEC. 24, 1907.
H. H. ALLISON.
RECORD NEEDLE.
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 18, 1907.
JttjX
JTiq.Z
1^10.3,
jF^J^,.
9'
■8
9
6
"9
INVENTOR
-?fcurvez/Jf. Allisons
ATTORNEYS
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HARVEY H. ALLISON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
RECORD-NEEDLE.
No. 874,819.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed March 18, 1907. Serial No. 362,937.
Patented Dec. 24, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Beit known that I, Harvey H. Allison, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident of
the city of New York, borough of Brooklyn,
5 in the county of Kings and State of New York,
have invented a new and Improved Record-
Needle, of which the following is a full, clear,
and exact description.
This invention relates to needles used in
10 connection with talking machines, and has
for its object to provide means capable of
producing even, harmonious sounds, free
from the chatter, vibrations and strident
tones commonly produced by the devices
15 now in use.
Such objects I accomplish by the means
illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in
which drawings like characters of reference
indicate like parts throughout the views, and
20 in which
Figure 1 is a perspective view showing a
device embodying my invention applied to
the sounding box of a talking machine; Fig.
2 is a side elevation of the device shown in
25 Fig. 1 detached from the sounding box; Fig.
3 is a side elevation of a device embodying a
modified form of my device; and Fig. 4 is a
cross section taken on the line 4 — 4 of Fig. 3.
As illustrated in the drawings, 1 represents
30 a sounding box of a talking machine of ordi-
nary construction, to which is attached a nee-
dle having a stub shank, adapted to extend
between said sounding box and the record of
a machine. The needle is provided with a
35 head having a point 3 connected with the
shank, by means of arms 4 spaced from each
other so as to form a central aperture 5. The
head of the needle is preferably made wider
than the shank, and provided with longitudi-
nal grooves 6 on opposite sides of the head 40
having an aperture 7 formed in said grooves,
thereby forming oppositely disposed arms 8,
preferably segmental in cross section, as illus-
trated in Fig. 4, so as to form edges 9 on said
arms adjacent to said grooves 6. 45
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent is:
1. In a talking machine, the combination
of a sounding box, and a needle having a 50
shank and a head broader than said shank,
provided with a point, and with arms spaced
apart connecting the point and the shank of
the needle.
2. The combination of a sounding box, and 55
a needle having a shank, and a head provided
with a point, and with arms spaced apart con-
necting the point and the shank of the needle
3. The combination of a sounding box and
a needle having a shank, and a head provided 60
with a point, and with an aperture forming
arms segmental in cross section connecting
said point with the shank of the needle.
4. In a talking machine, the combination
of a sounding box, and a needle having a 65
shank, and a head provided with oppositely
disposed longitudinal grooves, and an aper-
ture extending through said grooves.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of 7*0
two subscribing witnesses.
HARVEY H. ALLISON:
Witnesses :
Robert W. Hardie,
John P. Davis.
No. 874,966. PATENTED DEO. 31, 1907.
I. KITSEE.
METHOD OF MAKING SOUND RECORDS.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 7, 1907.
7
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR.
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ISIDOR KITSEE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
METHOD OF MAKING SOUND-RECORDS.
No. 874,966.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed June 7, 1907. Serial No. 377,753,
Patented Dec. 31, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known tfiat I, Isidor Kitsee, citizen
of the United States, residing at Philadel-
phia, in the county of Philadelphia and State
5 of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Methods of
Making Sound-Kecords, of which the follow-
ing is a specification.
My invention relates to an improvement
10 in method of making sound records. Its
object is, to produce copies of master records
in an efficient and economical manner.
The underlying principle of my invention
resides in, first, producing the master rec-
15 ord; second, producing a reverse therefrom;
and, using both of these records, one as a
male, the other as a female, to produce cop-
ies by compressing a suitable material be-
tween the two records.
20 It is also one of the features of my inven-
tion to enlarge the recording lines on the
master record, as will hereinafter be more
fully described.
In the drawing, Figures 1, 2, 3 and 4 are
25 perspective views of records.
1 is the master record; 2 the recording
lines therefor; 3 the reverse with the record-
ing fines 4; 6 the master record with the
enlarged recording fines 5 ; and 7 is the copy
30 with the recording lines 8.
The mode of operation* is as follows:
I, first, produce the original or master record
of the disk type, in which the undulations of
the line represent the undulations or vibra-
35 tions of the diaphragm. I then produce a
reverse of this original record by suitable
means, such for instance as an electro-plat-
ing process. Both of these records can then
be used, one as a male, the other as a female,
40 and suitable material, such for instance as
thin metal, placed between them, and the
record produced on this metal by the process
of stamping or compressing both of the
records together, a process which is well
45 understood and does not need further de-
scription. But, as the reverse will have the
same proportion as the original record, it is,—
in most cases, — required that the lines of
the original'record should be broadened and
50 especially sfiould be deepened. For this
reason, after the reverse is made therefrom,
I subject the master record to an etching-
process, first, providing the surface with a
material opaque to the etching fluid. This
process deepens the grooves or fines and 55
broadens the same to a certain extent.
Different materials may be used for the
copies, but I have found that aluminium
answers the purpose best, for the reason
that it is light, ductile, and yet presents a 60
certain strength, even if made in very fine
sheets.
It is obvious, that the master record has
to be cleaned from the etching fluid, as well
as the etch-resisting material on the surface, 65
and the reverse record has to be provided
with suitable backing before being employed,
to produce copies. It is also obvious, that
care should be taken in meshing the original
with the reverse, and for that reason, it is 70
preferred that both of them should have
either perforations, or, one. a deep depres-
sion and the other a raised portion in afine-
ment. For this reason, I have provided the
original with a center hole and the raised 75
portion 9, and the reverse has, therefore, the
center hole and the depressed portion 10.
Having now described my invention,
what I claim as new and desire to secure by
Letters Patent is : — 80
1. The method of producing copies of
phonographic records, which consists in,
first, producing a master record, producing
a reverse tfierefrom, enlarging tfie lines of
tfie master record, and producing copies by 85
compressing a material between the master
record and its reverse.
2. The method of producing copies of
phonographic records, which consists in,
first, producing a master record; in, second, 90
taking an electro-plating reverse from said
master record; third, deepening the record-
ing lines of the master record and, fourth,
compressing suitable material between the
two records. 95
3. The process of producing a copy of a
master record, which consists in, first, pro-
ducing a master record and taking a reverse
of said record, then enlarging the lines on
said master record, and then subjecting a 100
suitable metal to pressure between the mas-
ter record and its reverse.
In witness whereof I affix my signature in
presence of two witnesses.
ISIDOR KITSEE.
Witnesses :
Mart C. Smith,
H. C. Yetter.
No, 874,973. PATENTED DEO. 31, 1907.
T. H. MAODONALD.
COMBINED RECORDER AND REPRODUCER FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILEB MAE. 27, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
QJLC.^JLJL
THE NORRIS Pfc
TERS CO.. WASHINGTON, O. C.
No. 874,973. PATENTED DEO. 31, 1907.
T. H. MACDONALD.
COMBINED RECORDER AND REPRODUCER FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 27, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
Snv&ntoz
7HF. NOR ft I 5 F-£TEItS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS H. MACDONALD, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN
GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF
WEST VIRGINIA.
COMBINED RECORDER AND REPRODUCER FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 874,973.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed March 27, 1907. Serial No, 364,849.
Patented Dec. 31, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that 1, Thomas H. Macdon-
ald, of Bridgeport, Connecticut, have invent-
ed a new and useful Combined Recorder and
5 Reproducer for Talking-Machines, which in-
vention is fully set forth in the following speci-
fication.
This invention relates to a combined re-
corder and reproducer for talking machines,
10 and has for its object to provide such a de-
vice which will be readily shifted from the
recording to the reproducing action, or from
either the recording or the reproducing ac-
tion to a position of inactivity, while at the
15 same time providing a device which will be
simple and cheap to manufacture and effi-
cient in operation.
With these objects in view, the invention
consists in a slide and means for operating
20 the same, upon which slide is supported a
diaphragm carrying a recording stylus and a
reproducing stylus, which diaphragm is sup-
ported on the slide by means which, as the
slide is reciprocated, will move the dia-
25 phragm toward or from the record, as the
case may be, while always maintaining the
diaphragm in a plane practically parallel
with the movement of the slide.
Moreover, the invention further consists
30 in the construction of the recorder and re-
producer head whereby the sound-tube or
neck leading to the space to the rear of the
diaphragm is formed integrally with the head
itself, instead of being jointed thereto, as
35 heretofore.
One mechanical expression of the invent-
ive idea is embodied in the accompanying
drawings, in which —
Figure 1 is a central transverse vertical
40 section, showing the parts in the position
which they occupy when the recording stylus
is in contact with the record; Fig. 2 is a like
view with the reproducing stylus in contact
with the record; and Fig. 3 is a similar view
45 with both the recording and reproducing styli
lifted from or out of contact with the record.
Fig^ 4 is a bottom plan view.
Referring to the drawings, 1 is a part of
the carriage of the machine, and 2 is the
50 usual sectional nut by which the carriage is
caused to engage the usual or any suitable
advancing screw, said nut being normally
pressed inward towards the screw by the
spring 3. This nut has two reversely in-
clined cam surfaces 4 and 5 which meet £5
in a centrally located apex, as shown. Sur-
rounding guide-tube 6 which protects the
propelling screw (not shown) is disk 7 hav-
ing on its lower portion two cam faces 8 and
9, and on its upper portion a segment 10 pro- 60
vided with rack-teeth, as clearly shown in
Fig. 1.
Mounted upon the carriage portion 1 is a
slide 11 provided on its under side with a
rack 12 engaged by the segmental rack-teeth 65
10, and secured to disk 7 is a handle 13 pro-
jecting upward through a slot 14 in the top
of the slide, while 15 is an upwardly project-
ing lug permanently secured to the carriage.
The slide projects outward over the record 70
16 and is provided on its upper side with a
horn or sound-tube-receiving neck 17, the
interior of the neck tapering as at 18 along
its upper portion, but being substantially
cylindrical, as at 19, in the lower portion of 75
the neck.
20 is the recorder or reproducer head which
has formed integral therewith the upwardly
projecting neck 21, which is of less diameter
than the cylindrical portion 19, and is pro- 80
vided with a flaring mouth 22 which fits .
loosely within the cylindrical portion 19.
The recorder or reproducer head and the
neck or tube 21 are preferably struck-up
from a single piece of metal, a depending 85
flange 23 being provided within which is
seated the diaphragm 24 held in place by the
usual rubber gaskets or any other suitable
means. Carried on the diaphragm 24 is the
support 25 for the recording stylus 26 and 90
the reproducing stylus 27, which are arranged
one behind the other in a plane transverse to
the axis of the record 16 and substantially in
the line of movement of the slide. The po-
sition of the recording stylus 26 and the re- 95
producing stylus 27 is such that when the
slide is in the position shown in Fig. 1 the re-
cording stylus is in operative relation with
the record 16, the curve of the record, how-
ever, being such that the reproducing stylus 100
27 is out of contact therewith. On the other
hand, when the slide is at its extreme left-
hand position, as shown in Fig. 2, the record-
ing stylus 26 is out of contact with the rec-
ord and the reproducing stylus is in contact 105
therewith. It will. thus be seen that when
874,973
one stylus is in operation the other is sub-
stantially on the tangent to the record at the
point occupied by the other stylus.
In order to remove the respective styli
5 from contact with the record during the time
when the shifting occurs, so as to bring one
or the other of the styli into operative posi-
tion, and also in order to throw both styli out
of operation when desired, means are pro-
10 vided whereby the styli are both lifted
from the record at a point intermediate of
the extreme throw of the slide. In order to
accomplish this end and at the same time
hold the diaphragm at all times parallel with
the face of the slide, the reproducer head 20
is provided with two trunnions 28,28, Fig. 4,
and piece 29 provided with forked arms 30,
30, is pivoted at 31 to slide 11, the outer ends
of forks 30 having bearings within which the
20 trunnions 28, 28 rest. Secured to slide 11 is
a downwardly projecting slotted lug 32, and
projecting through said slot is an arm 33
whose outer end rests on the inclined end of
a lever 34 pivoted at 35 to slide 11. This
25 lever 34 has on its under side a cam 36 which
rests upon an abutment 37 forming a part of
the carriage 1. As here shown, this abut-
ment is in the form of a roller turning upon a
pin 38. The construction of the cam por-
30 tion of the lever 34 is such that when the
slide is in its medial position, as shown in Fig.
3, the cam rests upon the roller and thereby
raises the lever 34, and, by reason of contact
of the lever with the end of arm 33, the dia-
35 phragm is also raised, the free sliding move-
ment of flange 22 of tube 21 readily permit-
ting this action. When the slide lever 13 is
thrown from the up or medial position (see
Fig. 1) to the recording position shown in full
40 lines in Fig. 1, the slide is thrown to the right,
and the lever 34 is also thrown to the right so
as to withdraw the cam 34 from off the abut-
ment roller 37, thereby permitting the lever
to fall and the reproducer head descends by
45 gravity until the recording stylus rests upon
the record. When the slide lever 13 is
tlrrown from the up position at the left, how-
ever, and into the position shown in dotted
lines in Fig. 1, the cam 36 is pushed off of the
50 abutting roller 37 and the lever permitted to
descend with the recording stylus 27 in con-
tact with the record, as shown in Fig. 2.
During these movements the reproducer
head and with it the diaphragm, rises and
55 falls in a horizontal plane, thereby avoiding
any rocking of the diaphragm and tendency
of the recording stylus to gouge into the rec-
ord or the reproducing stylus to unnecessa-
rily press thereon, the first and initial part of
60 the movement being to promptly elevate the
stylus away from the record in a substan-
tially vertical direction.
When the arm 13 is thrown into the me-
dial or up position (Fig. 1) the apex lying
65 between the cam faces 8 and 9 of disk 7 prac-
tically rests upon the apex of the nut that
lies between the cam faces 4 and 5, thereby
pressing the nut against the tension of spring
3 and throwing the nut out of engagement
with the screw, and hence stopping the ma- 70
chine. It will be apparent from an inspec-
tion of Fig. 1 that when the lever 13 is shifted
either from the right or left for throwing; the
recorder or reproducer into action the pres-
siire on the nut will be removed and the 75
same will be again thrown upward so as to
engage the propelling screw.
The stationary upwardly-projecting lug 15
affords a ready means by which the operator
can exactly adjust the throw of the lever 13 80
and by placing the thumb and forefinger
upon the lever 13 and upon the head of the
lug 15 and throwing the lever it can be readily
stopped opposite the lug 15, and, as the
lever 13 is the longer, its projecting end 85
may be readily operated when it is desired
to throw the slide in either direction away
from the up or central position.
What is claimed is:
1. The combination of a diaphragm, a re- 90
cording s ylus and a reproducing stylus at-
tached thereto, a slide supporting said dia-
phragm, and means elevating the diaphragm
relative to the slide at a point intermediate
the extremes of movement of the slide. 95
2. The combination of a diaphragm, a re-
cording stylus and a reproducing stylus con-
nected thereto, a slide, means supporting
said diaphragm on said slide and parallel
therewith, means elevating the diaphragm 100
upon the movement of the slide, and means
maintaining the diaphragm parallel with the
slide during the elevating movement.
3. The combination of a diaphragm, a re-
cording stylus and a reproducing stylus con- 105
nected thereto, a slide supporting said dia-
phragm, and means moving the diaphragm
from and permitting it to move by gravity
towards the record, and means maintaining
the diaphragm substantially parallel with the 110
slide during said movements.
4. The combination of a slide, a diaphragm
supported by said slide, a style carried by
the diaphragm and in contact with the rec-
ord tablet, and means carried by the slide 115
and lifting the diaphragm upon the move-
ment of the slide.
5. The combination of a slide and means
for reciprocating the same, a diaphragm, a
stylus carried thereby and resting by gravity 120
on the record, means lifting the diaphragm
from and permitting it to return by gravity
towards the record while maintaining the
diaphragm at all times substantially parallel
with the slide. 125
6. In a combined recorder and reproducer
the combination of a diaphragm carrying a
recording stylus and a reproducing stylus, a
slide, flexible connections between said slide
and diaphragm, means carried by the slide 130
874,973
3
and acting to raise said diaphragm and per-
mit it to fall on each forward or backward
movement of the slide, and means for recip-
rocating said slide.
5 7. In a combined recorder and reproducer,
the combination of a reciprocatable slide and
means for actuating it, with a diaphragm, a
head or support therefor, a hinge-piece piv-
oted to said slide and said diaphragm-head,
10 means carried by the slide and engaging a
part of said diaphragm-head, and a device
for raising said last-named means and per-
mitting the same to descend by gravity on
each full reciprocation of the slide.
15 8. In a combined recorder and reproducer,
the combination of a slide having a sound-
conveying neck projecting therefrom, a re-
corder or reproducer-head having an inte-
grally formed neck fitting loosely in the neck
20 on the slide, a diaphragm carried by said
slide, a style connected to said diaphragm
and normally resting by gravity on the rec-
ord tablet, and means carried by the slide
and acting on the reciprocation of the slide
25 to raise the diaphragm and permit it to again
descend by gravity.
9. The combination of a carriage, a <dide
mounted thereon, means on the carriage
whereby said slide may be reciprocated by
30 hand, a diaphragm supporting a recording
stylus and a reproducing stylus, a hinge-
piece pivoted to the slide and also to the dia-
phragm at opposite sides thereof, a lever piv-
oted to the slide and engaging the diaphragm-
35 head, and means on the carriage engaging
and elevating said lever at the medial point
of each reciprocation of the slide but permit-
ting said lever to fall when said medial point
is passed.
10. The combination of a carriage, a slide 40
mounted thereon, means on the carriage
whereby said slide may be reciprocated by
hand, a diaphragm supporting a recording
stylus and a reproducing stylus, a hinge-
piece pivoted to the slide and also to the dia- 45
phragm at opposite sides thereof, a cam-lever
fulcrumed on the slide, an abutment on the
carriage and engaged by the cam on the said
lever, the construction of the cam being such
that the lever is elevated at the medial point 50
of the slide's movement and permitted to
fall as the slide is moved to either side of said
medial point.
11. The combination of a slide, a dia-
phragm carrying a recording stylus and a re- 55
producing stylus and supported on said slide,
a carriage for said slide having a spring-
pressed feed-screw nut thereon, and means
simultaneously depressing said nut against
its spring and actuating said slide. 60
12. The combination of a slide having a
tube or neck, a diaphragm-head having a
tubular neck integral therewith and entering
the neck on the slide, a diaphragm carried by
said head, and a recording stylus and a re- 65
producing stylus carried by said diaphragm.
In testimony whereof I have signed this
specification in the presence of two subscrib-
ing witnesses.
THOS. H. MACDONALD.
Witnesses :
A. B. Keough,
C. A. GlBNER.
No. 874,985.
PATENTED DEO. 31, 1907.
A. J. O'NEILL.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED APE. 11. 1907.
GA*9iYyi.4,
T
tjttt.S.
-Ttyl
i%
~Z<3*-
■&
lEfO-S.
■■/*
i5 Inventor:
. vflty* (/
THE NORKIS PET£KS CO., WASHINCION, D. C
I
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ARTHUR J. O'NEILL, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR TO THE ARETINO COMPANY, OF
CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
TALKING-MACHINE .
JSio. 874,985.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 11, 1907. Serial No, 367,541,
Patented Dec. 31, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Arthur J. O'Neill, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of
5 Illinois, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Talking-Machines, of
which the following is a specification.
In the sale of talking machine records, it
. is desirable that the record be shaped with
10 special reference to the machine for which it
is primarily intended in order that the manu-
facturers of machines may control the sale
of records to be used therewith. This
policy enables the manufacturer to sell or
15 rent a talking machine at low cost and
thereafter make a reasonable profit out of
the sale of records therefor. It is obvious,
however, that if the machine is so con-
structed as to permit the use of records of all
20 styles and sizes it will be difficult, if not im-
possible, to control the sale of records to the
user of the talking machine, whereby the
major portion of the talking machine busi-
ness will be lost with the profits incident
25 thereto. It is desirable, however, that
records, peculiarly constructed for use on a
particular machine, be usable on machines
of different makes in order that the sale of
records may be increased to the greatest
30 possible extent.
With this end in view, the object of the
present invention consists in the provision of
a record of distinctive shape which can be
used on talking machines or standard make
35 by the employment of the supplemental
disk or plate, which more especially forms
the subject matter of the present invention.
This enables a record, designed for a par-
ticular machine, to be employed on all ma-
40 chines without permitting standard records
to be used upon the particular machine.
The invention consists in the features of
construction and combination of parts here-
inafter described and claimed.
45 In the drawings, Figure 1 is a perspective
view of a talking machine of standard make ;
Fig. 2 a top or plan view of the turntable,
record, and supplemental disk or plate of the
present invention; Fig. 3 a sectional eleva-
50 tion of the parts shown in Fig. 2; and Figs.
4, 5 and 6 various styles of supplemental
disks or plates of various shapes and sizes.
The talking machine is of standard con-
struction, comprising a box 7, a turntable 8
55 mounted upon a re voluble vertical shaft 9, a
horn 10, and other features which need not
be described. The upper end of the shaft 9
projects above the top of the turntable in the
form of a stud 11. The turntable is of the
usual disk shape formation and is rigidty se- GO
cured to and revoluble with the shaft. In
ordinary talking machine constructions, the
record is in the form of a flat disk of vulcan-
ite, or similar substance, provided with a
hole which closely embraces and surrounds 65
the stud-like end of the shaft, which latter
serves to position and center the record.
The record which is particularly contem-
plated in the present application is one of the
forms shown in Fig. 2 and 3. It is shaped in 70
the form of a ring 12 having an enlarged hole
or opening 13 in the center. A ring-shaped
record of this character is primarily designed
with special reference to a particular style of
talking machine. It is desirable, however, 75
that such a record be usually upon a talking
machine of the style illustrated in the draw-
ings, for which purpose a supplemental disk
or plate 14 is employed, which is provided in
its center with a hole or perforation 15 80
adapted to closely embrace the stud-like end
of the shaft, and the supplemental disk or
plate is so shaped or proportioned as to en-
tirely fill up the opening in the ring-shaped
record, thereby enabling such a record to be 85
properly centered and used on a machine of
ordinary make, like that illustrated. The
supplemental disk 14, as shown in Figs. 2
and 3, is of circular formation, which per-
mits the particular style of record shown to 90
register therewith. It is obvious, however,
that records might be made having hexago-
nal or square openings, in which case supple-
mental disks or plates, as shown in Figs. 4
and 5 respectively, might be employed. 95
Likewise a similar opening in the center
might necessitate the use or a supplemental
disk of small size, like that shown in Fig. 6.
In the use of the present invention, the
purchaser of records designed primarily for 100
use on a particular machine of peculiar for-
mation can be furnished with one or more
supplemental disks of a proper shape to per-
mit the records thus purchased to be used on
any style of talking machine, thereby en- 105
larging the scope or usefulness of the records
without enabling standard records to be used
on the talking machine of particular or pe-
culiar construction.
The use of supplemental disks or plates 110
Li
874,985
and the ring-shaped records has further ad-
vantages in that it minimizes the amount of
vulcanite or similar material which must be
used in the making of records and facilitates
5 the centering of the records on the talking
machine.
What I regard as new and desire to secure
by Letters Patent is:
1. The combination of a phonograph turn
10 table, a stud upwardly extending from the
center of the turn table, a supplemental disk
shaped plate provided in its center with an
opening to receive the stud, the opening be-
ing of suitable size to permit the supplemen-
15 tal plate to be slipped down over the stud to
lie in facial contact with the turn table, the
supplemental plate being removable from the
stud and removably mounted on the turn
table, a ring-shaped flat record having in its
20 center an opening of suitable size to permit
the record to be laid in facial contact with
the turn table and closely surround the disk-
shaped plate, the plate serving to properly
center the record and being of a size and
shape to permit the removal of the record
without disturbing the supplemental plate,
substantially as described.
2. The combination of a talking machine
turntable, a stud upwardly extending from
the turntable, a supplemental disk-shaped
plate provided with an opening adapted to
receive the stud, the supplemental plate be-
ing removable from the stud and removably
mounted on the turntable, and a ring shaped
flat record, having in its center an opening of
suitable size to permit the record to be laid
in facial contact with the turntable, said rec-
ord being removable from said turntable and
said disk while said disk remains upon said
turntable, substantially as described.
ARTHUR J. O'NEILL.
Witnesses :
Ephraim Banning,
Oscar W. Bond.
25
30
35
:
i
I
No. 875,309.
PATENTED DEO. 31, 1907.
E. L. AIKEN.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED OCT. 11, 1907.
J%&->?
jP?0.Z
J?
J&
o
THE NORSIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON," D."«.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EDWARD L. AIKEN, OF ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT COMPANY,
OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 875,309.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed October 11, 1907. Serial No. 396,875.
Patented Dec. 31, 1907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Edward L. Aiken, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Orange, in the county of Essex and State
5 of New Jersey, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Phonographs,
of which the following is a description.
My invention relates to phonographs and
particularly to means for positively prevent-
10 ing the placing of a phonograph blank or
record on the mandrel, or removing it there-
from, when the recorder or reproducer is in
such position that they would be liable to be
injured by such record or blank. Since, in
15 order to properly reproduce or record sounds
on a phonograph it is necessary that the re-
producer stylus or recording stylus shall rest
upon the record, a lifting lever is provided
by means of which the recorder or repro-
20 ducer may be lifted away from the record
surface. If, however, a record or blank were
to be placed upon the mandrel without first
operating the lifting lever to raise the re-
corder or reproducer, whichever happens to
25 be in use, the stylus will be suspended in the
path of the record and there will be danger
of the stylus or its support being broken, or,
if the cylinder is removed from the mandrel
without first raising the recorder or repro-
30 ducer away from the surface of the cylinder,
the cylinder will be scratched in being so re-
moved and injury may be done to the re-
corder or reproducer.
The object of the present invention is to
35 provide a device which shall prevent such
breakage in the placing of a cylinder on the
mandrel and will prevent the removal of the
cylinder from the mandrel unless the recorder
or reproducer is first raised so that the stylus
40 will be lifted above the path of the cy finder
which is being inserted or removed.
I have shown my invention as applied to
the Edison business phonograph, but it is
evident that it is applicable to phonographs
45 and talking machines of other types.
In the drawing which forms a part of this
specification, the same reference numerals
are applied to the same parts throughout.
In the said drawing, Figure 1, is a cross-
50 sectional detail view showing the application
of my invention to an Edison business pho-
nograph; Fig. 2, is a similar view showing a
different position of the lifting lever; Fig. 3,
is a view in perspective of the device for pre-
65 venting the insertion or removal of a cylin-
der, except at the proper time; and Fig. 4,
is a detail view similar to Fig. 2, but taken
on a plane at some distance behind the plane
upon which the view shown in Fig. 2 is taken.
The reference numeral 1 indicates the 60
frame of the machine, and 2 the carriage.
The reproducer 3 and recorder 4 are mounted
upon a spectacle frame upon the carriage in
the well-known manner. The carriage is
actuated by means of a feed nut 5 resting 65
upon the feed screw 6. When in position
for recording or reproducing the carriage is
supported upon the guide rod 7 and a lifting
lever 8 is provided to raise the carriage and
to thereby disengage the feed nut 5 from the 70
feed screw 6. Fig. 1 shows the carriage rest-
ing directly upon the guide rod 7 while Fig.
2 shows the lifting lever 8 pushed backward
so that the carriage is supported upon the
guide rod 7 by means of the recessed portion 75
9 of the said lifting lever. When in this posi-
tion the recorder and reproducer are sup-
ported well above the recording cylinder.
In order to prevent a record cylinder being
placed upon or removed from the mandrel 80
10 when the recorder or reproducer is in the
lowered position shown in Fig. 1, in which
position there would be danger of breaking
the recorder or reproducer, or of scratching
the record, I provide a bar 11 having hook- 85
shaped members 12, which encircle the guide
rod 7 near the ends thereof, and also provided
with a forwardly and downwardly extending
arm 13.
The lifting lever 8 is provided with a finger 90
14 having a beveled end 15, which extends
forward beneath the guide rod 7. This fin-
ger has been heretofore used to prevent the
raising of the carriage and the spectacle
frame more than a prescribed distance, but 95
according to my invention, I cause this finger
to perform an additional function — that of
supporting and actuating the bar 1 1 and the
arm 13 in such manner that the arm 13
stands in the path of the cylinder and op- 100
poses its being placed upon or removed from
the mandrel when the carriage is in its
lowered position, and when the lifting lever
is actuated to raise the carriage so that the
recorder or reproducer is moved away from 105
the path of the cylinder to be inserted, this
finger 14 operates to turn the bar 11 and
raise the arm 13 so that it will no longer
oppose the placing of a cylinder upon or re-
moving it from the mandrel. As the bar 11 110
875,309
and its connected parts do not move longi-
tudinally while the carriage and lifting lever
8 is moved transversely of the record by
means of the feed screw 6, it will be evident
5 that the beveled finger 14 of the lifting lever
8 will engage the bar 11 throughout the en-
tire length of the latter as the carriage is
moved.
Having now described my invention, I
10 claim —
1. In a phonograph, the combination of
means for holding a record tablet, a stylus,
and an arm, each movable toward and from
the tablet holding means, the arm serving to
15 oppose movement of the tablet when moved
toward said tablet holding means, and means
for moving the stylus and arm simulta-
neously, substantially as set forth.
2. In a phonograph, the combination of a
20 mandrel, a movable carriage, a lever for lift-
ing said carriage, and means for preventing
the placing of a record on the mandrel when
the carriage is in its depressed position, the
said means permitting the placing of a record
25 upon the mandrel when the carriage is
raised, substantially as set forth.
3. In a phonograph, the combination of a
mandrel, a carriage, a lifting lever for said
carriage and means under the control of the
30 said lilting lever which prevents the placing
of a record on the mandrel or removing it
therefrom when the carriage is in its de-
pressed position, substantially as set forth.
4. In a phonograph, the combination of a
mandrel, a carriage movable up and down, 35
means normally resting in position to pre-
vent the placing of a cylinder upon the man-
drel and means for lifting the carriage and
moving the first named means away from
the position in the path of the cylinder, sub- 40
stantially as set forth.
5. In a phonograph, the combination of a
mandrel, a carriage movable up and down, a
guide rod for supporting said carriage, means
rotatable upon said guide rod and normally 45
standing in position to prevent the move-
ment of a cylinder upon the mandrel and
means for raising said carriage and moving
said cylinder obstructing means out of the
obstructing position, substantially as set 50
forth.
6. In a phonograph, the combination of a
mandrel, a carriage, a guide rod on which the
carriage rests, a bar extending parallel to
said guide rod and having hook-shaped 55
members encircling said guide rod near the
ends thereof, and provided with a down-
wardly and forwardly extending arm and
means for raising said carriage and turning
said bar with respect to said guide rod, sub- 60
stantially as set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 10 day of October, 1907.
EDWARD L. AIKEN.
Witnesses :
H. H. Dyke,
Charles F. Robson.
L
J
No. 875,352. PATENTED DEO. 31, 1907.
W. N. HUNTER.
SOUND RECORDER FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLIOATIOH FILED JULY 28, 1906.
JTiiZS.
inriii
7ie*Sxse*s
\2wf. &uM*u*JZc^*
THE NORRtS PE
TERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
No. 875,352.
WILLIAM N. HUNTER, OF BLANCHESTER, OHIO.
SOUND-RECORDER FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 31, 1907.
Application filed July 28, 1906. Serial No. 328,172.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William N. Hunter,
a citizen of the United. States, residing at
Blanehester, county of Clinton, and State of
Ohio, have invented certain new and useful
Improvements in Sound-Recorders for Talk-
ing-Machines, Telephones, and the Like, of
which the following is a full, clear, and exact
description, reference being had to the ac-
10 companying drawings, forming part of this
specification.
My invention relates to devices for taking
and receiving the sound waves developed by
a vibrating diaphragm, whether vibrated
15 directly, or by mechanical action, to collect
the waves and deliver the vibrations into a
tubular passageway, and the object of the
invention is to provide a chamber for the
reception of the wave vibrations, with a plu-
20 rality of passageways therefrom into the con-
veying tube, whereby the vibrations may be
collected, condensed, and delivered more
perfectly than with the sound recorders here-
tofore in use.
25 Heretofore it has been customary for talk-
ing machines and the like to provide a cup
shaped chamber in the rear of the diaphragm,
which receives the sound vibrations, and to
deliver these vibrations from the recorder
30 through a single central passageway. I have
ascertained by repeated experiments, how-
ever, that if an annular chamber is provided
and the sound waves conveyed into the tubu-
lar passageway through a plurality of open-
35 ings from this annular chamber, a very much
smoother and better volume of sound is pro-
duced, or conveyed by the apparatus.
While my improved construction can be
employed for the collection and conveyance
40 of sound vibrations dehvered directly into
the recorder, my device is especially adapted
for recorders for talking machines where the
vibrations are developed mechanically, and
for such machines I have found that extra-
45 neous sounds produced by the scratching of
the recording point as it passes over the plate
or cylinder, upon which is impressed the
record to be reproduced are almost com-
pletely cut out, so that a pure and sweet vol-
50 ume of sound is reproduced identical with
the original sound waves delivered to the
apparatus.
In the drawings Figure 1 is a central ver-
tical section of my improved sound recorder.
55 Fig. 2 is a plan view or same. Fig. 3 is a per-
spective view.
In the drawings, in order to illustrate the
construction more effectually, the device as
used in connection with the ordinar}T talking
machines is illustrated as enlarged to about 60
twice its natural size.
1 is a cone shaped casing provided with a
tubular passageway 2, and a central boss 3
to form at the receiving end of the receptacle
an annular chamber 4. 65
5 is the diaphragm of any suitable mate-
rial, which is held in position by the j*ing 6
with its periphery resting on the flange 7,
and with washers interposed between the
diaphragm and the supporting flange and 70
retaining ring. The central boss 3 which
divides the chamber into an annular one is
cone shaped with the truncated apex of the
cone approaching very close to the dia-
phragm, but without touching it. The outer 75
walls 8 of the annular chamber 4 converge
inwardly, so that a narrow base 9 is provided
for the annular chamber. From the base of
this chamber two passageways 10 — 10 are
provided which merge into the tubular pas- 80
sageway 2. These passageways 10 — 10 are
on opposite sides, and the outer wall of the
annular chamber is provided with grooves 11
as indicated in Figs. 1 and 2, which are cut
spirally, as shown, to gather and direct the 85
waves of sound towards the passageways
10—10.
When my apparatus is used as a sound re-
corder for talking machines, the usual ar-
rangement is provided for conveying thevi- 90
brations from the record cylinder, or plate,
to the diaphragm by means of a pin or needle
attached to the center of the diaphragm.
With the foregoing construction, it will be
evident that the central vibration of the dia- 95
phragm is not directly conveyed into the
sound recorder, and that the vibrations are
received therein from the outer portions of
the diaphragm and collected by the grooved
converging walls into the two passageways, 100
which take the vibrations from the sides.
Without endeavoring to express any the-
ory concerning this matter, I have found that
with my construction, as heretofore stated,
that the scratching and other mechanical 105
sounds created by the talking machine ap-
paratus are cut out, and that much purer,
sweeter, and more natural tones are repro-
duced than with sound recorders in which
the vibrations are collected and conveyed 110
centrally by the recorder:*
Having thus described my invention, what
Q
875,352
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent, is :
1. In a sound recorder of the class de-
scribed, a sound box, with diaphragm there-
5 for, and a collecting chamber for the sound
waves of substantial depth, in free communi-
cation with and back of the diaphragm, with
a central raised portion approaching, but not
touching, the diaphragm, and forming an
10 annular collecting chamber, and a tubular
passageway for the conveyance of the sound
waves, with an opening therefrom into the
annular collecting chamber.
2. In a sound recorder of the class de-
15 scribed, a sound box with diaphragm there-
for, and a collecting chamber for the sound
waves of substantial depth, in free communi-
cation with and back of the diaphragm, with
a central raised portion approaching, but not
20 touching, the diaphragm, and forming an an-
nular collecting chamber, and a tubular pas-
sageway for the conveyance of the sound
waves, with a plurality of openings therefrom
into the annular chamber.
25 3. In a sound recorder of the class de-
scribed, a sound box with diaphragm there-
for, a collecting chamber of substantial depth
for the sound waves at the rear of the dia-
phragm, said collecting chamber being pro-
30 videtl with a converging outer wall, and hav-
ing a central boss approaching but not touch-
ing the diaphragm, so as to form an annular
collecting chamber, a tubular passageway
for the conveyance of the sound waves, and
an opening therefrom into the annular col- 35
lecting chamber.
4. In a sound recorder of the class de-
scribed, a sound box with diaphragm there-
for, a collecting chamber for the sound waves
at the rear of the diaphragm, with a central 40
boss approaching but not touching the dia-
phragm, and forming an annular collecting
chamber, said chamber being provided with
converging inner and outer walls, a tubular
passageway for the conveyance of the sound 45
waves, and an opening therefrom into the
annular collecting chamber.
5. In a sound recorder of the class de-
scribed, a sound box having an annular col-
lecting chamber of substantial depth formed 50
therein, a vibratory diaphragm in connection
therewith, said annular chamber being pro-
vided with a converging outer wall grooved
substantially as described, a tubular pas-
sageway for the conveyance of the sound 55
waves, and a plurality of openings therefrom
into the annular collecting chamber.
WILLIAM N. HUNTER.
Witnesses :
Glena Pritchard,
George Broemmer.
¥
No. 875,790.
PATENTED JAN. 7, 1908.
^U
'Heoae:*
itf-
G. W. DUNCAN.
GRAPHOPHONE HORN.
APPLICATION PILED FEB, 18, 1907.
cI-woe-H^cr
[Z-_ W_ ED lj:imczaisl
£ltfotl««ll3
»;S PETERS CO., W<S»l»OTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
GEORGE W. DUNCAN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
GRAPHOPHONE-HORN,
No. 875,790.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Amplication filer) February 18, 1907. Serial No. 358,077.
Patented Jan. 7, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Geokge W. Duncan,
a citizen of the United States, residing at Chi-
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi-
5 nois, have invented certain new and useful
Improvements in Graphophone-Horns; and I
do declare the following to be a full, clear,
and exact description of the invention, such
as will enable others skilled in the art to
10 which it appertains to make and use the
same.
This invention relates to improvements in
graphophone horns.
The object of the invention is to provide a
15 graphophone horn having means whereby
all metallic or screeching soimds will be elimi-
nated so that the sounds passing therefrom
will have a clear natural tone.
With the foregoing and other objects in
20 view, which will appear as the nature of the
invention is better understood, the invention
consists in certain novel features of construc-
tion, combination and arrangement of parts,
as will be hereinafter fully described and
25 claimed.
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is
a side view of a horn arranged in accordance
with the invention; and Fig. 2 is a longitudi-
nal sectional view of the same.
30 Referring more particularly to the draw-
ings, 1 denotes a horn which may be construct-
ed of any suitable material such as sheet
metal, wood pulp or fiber, paper, board, or
other composition. Adapted to be applied
35 to the inner side of the horn is a flexible fining
2 which may be of any suitable construction,
but which is preferably formed of cloth or
other form of textile fabric. The flexible
fining 2 may be applied and secured to the
40 horn in any suitable manner, but is here
shown and is preferably himg loosely within
the horn and lies a suitable distance there-
from to form between the lining and inner
wall of the horn an air space 3. The lining
45 which as before stated is hung loosely in the
horn is of somewhat smaller diameter than
the latter and in its application to the horn is
drawn sufficiently taut to cause it to stand
away from the horn's inner surface, thus to
•50 preserve the air space 3 which is referred to
and as will be readily understood.
The lining 2 is secured at the outer end of
the horn preferably by means of an endless
elastic cord or band 4 which is fastened to
55 the end of the lining; in anv suitable manner,
said end of tfie fining being turned over tfie
outer end of the horn so that the elastic cord
or band will engage the outer side of the lat-
ter adjacent to the end. Secured to the inner
end of the lining is an endless elastic cord or 60
band 5 which when the inner end of the lin-
ing is drawn through the smaller end of the
horn and turned back over said end will en-
gage the outer side of the horn, as clearly
shown in the drawings. The cords 4 and 5 65
when thus engaged with the horn will se-
curely fasten the ends of the lining while the
body portion thereof will stand away from
and out of contact with the inner wall of the
horn, thus providing for the air space 3, as 70
hereinbefore described.
In order that the end of the lining may be
readily drawn through the small end of the
horn, I preferably attach a short cord 6 to
the inner end of the lining and to the free 75
end of -the cord is attached a ball or button.
When applying the lining, the inner end of
the same is let down into the horn until the
ball 7 and cord 6 appear through the smaller
end of the horn. The ball is then grasped 80
and the end of the lining readily drawn
through the smaller end of the horn and se-
cured, as hereinbefore described.
By providing a flexible lining and arrang-
ing the same as herein shown and described, 85
the vibrations of the horn are reduced to such
an extent that the metallic sound usually
heard in connection with phonograph repro-
ductions will be entirely eliminated.
From the foregoing description, taken in 90
connection with the accompanying draw-
ings, the construction and operation of the
invention will be readily understood without
requiring a more extended explanation.
Various changes in the form, proportion 95
and the minor details of construction may
be resorted to without departing from the
spirit or sacrificing any of the advantages of
the invention, as defined by the appended
claims. 100
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters-Patent, is: —
1. A phonograph horn having a flexible
fabric lining arranged loosely therein to pro- 105
vide an air space between the lining and in-
ner wall of the horn, and means for attaching
the ends of the lining to the terminals of the
horn.
2. A flexible fabric lining adapted to be 110
applied loosely within a phonograph horn, a
cord attached to the smaller or inner end of
Q
875,790
said lining, a ball on the end of said cord
whereby said lining may be readily drawn
through the smaller end of the horn, and end-
less elastic fastening cords arranged in the
opposite ends of said lining to secure the
same to the opposite ends of the horn, sub-
stantially as described.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit-
I1GSS6S
GEORGE W. DUNCAN.
Witnesses :
R. W. O'Brian,
D. I. Weisz.
'!
1
u.
_
No. 875,853.
PATENTED JAN. 7, 1908.
M. SCHWARTZ.
SOUND RECORDER AND REPRODUCER.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 8, 1907.
Jfy.l.
Jfy.3.
tfg.Z.
26 A
f&4
Jty.7.
zt
Z7
~29
Jfy.JT,
<£> v-dk^i^JLt/
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
MORRIS SCHWARTZ, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-THIRD TO SOLOMON FLAUM
AND ONE-THIRD TO MAX BORNSTEIN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
SOUND RECORDER AND REPRODUCER.
No. 875,853.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed March 8, 1907. Serial No. 361,314.
Patented Jan. 7. 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Morris Schwartz, a
subject of the Bang of Roumania, residing in
the borough of Manhattan, city, county, and
5 State of New York, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Sound Re-
cording and Reproducing Machines, of which
the following is such a full, clear, and exact
description as will enable any one skilled in
10 the art to which it appertains to make and
use the same, reference being had to the ac-
companying drawings, forming part of this
specification.
The sound recording and reproducing ap-
15 paratus or the so-called talking machines,
heretofore in use, have undulations orinden-
tations produced by the sound waves record-
ed either in the base or bottom of the groove
cut or formed on the record by the stylus,
20 or in the sides of such groove, in which latter
case the groove is sinuous. In many of these
known devices only the movement of the dia-
phragm in one direction, is recorded or re-
produced.
25 My present invention seeks to utilize to
the fullest extent the movement of the dia-
phragm in either direction of its vibration, and
a further object of the present invention is to
record the undulations of the sound waves in
30 both the sides as well as the bottom or base of
the groove, though this is not an essential
feature of certain parts of the invention.
Still other objects are to maintain the dia-
phragm horizontal with the stylus substan-
35 tially parallel therewith; and further to
mount or support the cutting tool or stylus in
suitable bearings in a bracket independent of
the diaphragm from which the stylus re-
ceives its motion through suitable link or
40 other connection.
With these and other objects in view, my
invention consists in the various novel and
peculiar arrangements and combinations of
the several different parts of the apparatus
45 all as hereinafter fully set forth and then
pointed out in the claims.
I have illustrated types of my invention in
the accompanying drawings wherein: —
Figure 1 shows my improved apparatus in
50 vertical central section with the recording or
reproducing stylus bearing upon the cylin-
drical record. Fig. 2 is an enlarged perspec-
tive view of the apparatus together with a
diagram in dotted lines of the sinuous record
55 groove. Figs. 3, 4, 5 and 8 are views of mod-
ified forms of the cutting tool or stylus,
shown as operating in conjunction with a cy-
lindrical record, which is shown in section in
Figs. 3, 4 and 5. Figs. 6 and 7 are end views
of modified forms of the point of the stylus or 60
cutting tool.
Referring to the drawings, in which like
numbers of reference designate like parts
throughout, 1 indicates the ordinary sound
box of a sound recording or reproducing in- 65
strument and 2 is the ordinary diaphragm
thereof which is vibrated by the sound
waves. From the center of the diaphragm 2
extends a' bar or post 3 which is suitably se-
cured thereto and at its outer end this post 70
is provided with knife edge bearings 4 and 5
arranged opposite to each other, so as to en-
gage upon opposite sides an arm or lateral
projection 6 extending from the stylus or
cutting tool 7, the rear end 8 of which lies in 75
a socket bearing 9 formed in a suitable part
of the bracket 10 which is fixed to and de-
pends from the sound box or frame 1. The
body of the bracket 10 extends substantially
parallel with the diaphragm 2 and to a point 80
considerably beyond the post 3, and at its
outer end is provided with an inwardly pro-
jecting part 11 formed with a perforation 12
through which the cylindrical body of the
stylus 7 extends, and tins forms a substan- 85
tial and smooth bearing for the body of the
stylus, the other bearing at the rear end 9 being
in axial alinement with the bearing 12, and
the vibrations of the diaphragm 2 serve to
rock the stylus 7 on its bearings in one direc- 90
tion as the diaphragm moves inwardly and
in an opposite direction as it moves out-
wardly, thus making the stylus respond to
each stroke or movement of the diaphragm.
The outer end of the stylus 7 is bent at 13 95
at an oblique angle, and in the form shown
in Fig. 1 the cutting or operative end 14 of
the stylus is beveled or formed on a plane
oblique to the axial line of the stylus, as more
particularly shown in detail in Figs. 3, 4, 5 100
and 8. The point of the stylus 7 engages the
outer surface of the cylindrical record 15,
which is rotated in the usual way, and in the
construction shown in Fig. 1, the rocking of
the stylus 7 on its axis on its bearings, acts to 105
swing laterally the bent end of the stylus so
as to form a sinuous groove such as is indi-
cated at 16 in dotted lines in Fig._ 2 and
so that the sides of the groove receive the
record and the undulations of the sound 110
s
875,853
waves, at the same time the irregular shape
of the point 14 of the stylus causes it to vary
the depth of the groove, or to produce undu-
lations in the bottom or base thereof, under
5 the rocking movement of the stylus on its
axis, so that the bent end of the stylus to-
gether with the peculiarly formed point of
the stylus produce a compound result and
serve to record the undulations of the sound
10 waves in the sides as well as in the base or
bottom of the groove cut on the record.
In Fig. 2 the point 17 of the stylus 7 is
shown as uniformly tapered or of a conical
shape so that it produces a sinuous groove
15 such as 16 in the record, and this stylus like-
wise responds to the movement of the sinu-
ous sides of the groove in the reproducing.
In Figs. 3, 4, 5 and 8, the stylus 18 is shown
as a straight member instead of being bent as
20 the one shown in Figs. 1 and 2, respectively,
and this straight stylus is adapted to be
mounted in the same bearings as that indi-
cated in Figs. 1 and 2, and to be rocked on
its longitudinal axis in the same manner.
25 This stylus is so adjusted and related to the
other parts, that normally the plane of the
beveled or obliquely cut end 14 stands about
at right angles to the axis of the cylindrical
record, as shown in Fig. 3, in which position
30 it cuts a groove 19 in the cylinder 15 of con-
siderable depth, but when turned on its axis
about one-quarter of a circle it cuts a shal-
lower groove 20, as indicated in Fig. 4 while
when turned through a half circle, as shown
35 in Fig. 5, it cuts a deeper groove than in Fig.
3 as shown at 21. In order to prevent this
straight form of the stylus 18 from being
forcibly turned on its axis by the movement
of the recording cylinder 15, I provide the
40 same with an adjustable weight consisting
of a screw-threaded pin or bar 22 projecting
laterally from the stylus 18 and carrying a
weight 23 provided with a screw-threaded
socket adapted to work on the thread on the
45 bar 22.
In Fig. 6, 1 show an end view of a modified
form of the stylus 24 and which might be de-
scribed as crescent shaped having two cut-
ting points 25 and 26, while in Fig. 7 still
50 another modification of the point of the
stylus is shown in the way of a rectangular
shape 27, and this also provides more than
one cutting point, 28 and 29, the same as the
two opposite edges of the beveled end 14 of
55 the stylus 18. In the form of the stylus in
which the operative end or point is of an ir-
regular shape, that is a shape other than uni-
formly tapered or conical or uniformly
rounded, more than one cutting part or edge
60 is provided, as will be seen by comparing
Figs. 3 to 7, and this is purposely designed to
record the various undulations of the sound
waves. These different forms of the opera-
tive or cutting end of the stylus produce dif-
65 ferent characters of impressions or records
and the same can be made somewhat varied
by changing the shape. of the operative end
of the stylus. When the stylus having this
peculiar form of cutting point is turned on its
longitudinal axis, the irregular shape of the 70
point causes it to go deeper into the material
of the recording surface or to rise further out
of the same according to the degree to which
it is turned or rocked and also according to
the direction. With these different forms 75
of the end of the stylus, the same is made to
cut the material to make the impressions or
records, the position of the stylus being
rapidly changed to vary the cutting by the
vibrations or the diaphragm. It will be go
noted that an important advantage of the
construction herewith shown is found in the
peculiar mounting of the rocking stylus
which relieves the diaphragm of all strain due
to the cutting, at the same time of all move- 85
ments of the diaphragm both above and be-
low the horizontal are recorded.
While I have herewith shown my inven-
tion as used in conjunction with a cylindrical
record, it will, of course, be understood that 90
it may be employed with the other well-
known forms of records which are made in
the shape of flat disks. It will be further
understood that this invention may be used
both to record or to make records as well as 95
to reproduce the same and various modifica-
tions may be made in the apparatus as here-
with set forth without departing from the
spirit of the invention.
It will, of course, be understood that in the 100
accompanying drawings illustrating my in-
ventions in phonographs or in sound record-
ing and reproducing apparatus, the various
indentations or grooves indicated in the rec-
ord are diagrammatic and are accordingly of 105
an exaggerated character, but they serve the
purpose of illustrating the inventions herein
set forth and claimed. It will also be under-
stood that instead of a cylindrical record a
flat record or disk may be used and particu- 110
larly in conjunction with the stylus shown in
Figs. 3 to 8, inclusive.
It will be observed that an important fea-
ture of the construction herewith shown is
that of being able to maintain the dia- 115
phragm in horizontal position and the stylus
itself is parallel with the diaphragm and in
one form the greater part of its length is sub-
stantially horizontal while in the other form
its entire length is always in horizontal 120
plane. This arrangement has obvious ad-
vantages in comparison with the apparatus
in which the diaphragm has to be main-
tained in vertical position or at an angle to
the horizontal. 125
Having thus described my invention what
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat-
ent is : —
1. In a sound recording and reproducing
apparatus, the combination of a diaphragm, 130
875,853
a stylus rocking on its axis and connected
with and actuated by said diaphragm so as
to rock it on its axis, the point of the stylus
being substantially in line with the stylus.
5 (f« 2. In a sound recording and reproducing
apparatus, the combination of a diaphragm,
ajfcstylus rocking on its axis and connected
with and actuated by said diaphragm so as
to rock it on its axis, the point of the stylus
10 being substantially in line with the stylus,
and adapted to move laterally as well as
toward and away from the record and to
vary the groove accordingly.
3. In a sound recording and reproducing
15 apparatus, the combination of a diaphragm,
a stylus rocking on its axis and a lateral pro-
jection on said stylus connected with and
actuated by said diaphragm so as to rock it
on its axis, the point of the stylus being sub-
20 stantially in line with the stylus.
4. In a sound recording and reproducing
apparatus, the combination of a diaphragm,
a stylus rocking on its axis and connected
with and actuated by said diaphragm so as
25 to rock it on its axis, the point of said stylus
being beveled or truncated obliquely to the
axis on which it rocks.
5. In a sound recording and reproducing
apparatus, the combination of a diaphragm,
30 a stylus rocking on its axis and connected
with and actuated by said diaphragm so as
to rock it on its axis, the point of the stylus
being substantially in line with the stylus, an
adjustable weight connected with said stylus
and tending to keep it in normal position. 35
6. In a sound recording and reproducing
apparatus, the combination of a diaphragm,
a substantially straight stylus having the
point thereof cut obliquely to the axis to
form the cutting point and adapted to rock 40
on its axis, connections between the said dia-
phragm and stylus for rocking the latter in
response to the movement of the diaphragm.
7. In a sound recording and reproducing
apparatus, the combination of a diaphragm, 45
a substantially straight stylus having the
point thereof cut obliquely to the axis to
form the cutting point and adapted to rock
on its axis, connections between the said dia-
phragm and stylus for rocking the latter in 50
response to the movement of the diaphragm,
a bearing in which the inner end of said
stylus is mounted, and a second bearing in-
termediate the ends of the stylus, in which
it is adapted to rock. 55
In testimony whereof, I have hereunto set
my hand in the presence of the two subscrib-
ing witnesses.
MORRIS SCHWARTZ.
Witnesses :
Solomon Flaum,
Willis Fowler.
i
(
No. 876,006. PATENTED JAN. 7, 1908.
H. S. MILLS.
PHONOGRAPH AND OTHER SOUND PRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 17, 1907.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
af/z.*
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
i
.
No, 876,006. PATENTED JAN. 7, 1908.
H. S. MILLS.
PHONOGRAPH AND OTHER SOUND PRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 17, 1907.
5 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
(Z \3mmmwkMNms= ^
zo
-CCtc£rLe~5^e*s
r^
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 876,006.
PATENTED JAN. 7, 1908.
H. S, MILLS.
PHONOGRAPH AND OTHER SOUND PRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FIXED JAN. 17, 1907.
5 SHEETF-SHEET 3.
"3
*s
&
Ufcfrz&s
c^y
"W
^ . .
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
No. 876,006.
PATENTED JAN. 7, 1908.
H. S. MILLS.
PHONOGRAPH AND OTHER SOUND PRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 17, 1907.
5 SHEETS-SHEET 4.
JZa-4:
Jj6q£.
^&(Jxyfrrz&yS>5 e+s
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
No. 876,006.
PATENTED JAN. 7, 1908.
H. S. MILLS.
PHONOGRAPH AND OTHER SOUND PRODUCING MACHINE.
' APPLICATION PILED JAN. 17, 1907.
5 SHEETS-SHEET 5.
^&d*
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HERBERT S. MILLS, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
PHONOGRAPH AND OTHER SOTJND-PRODUCING MACHINE.
No. 876,006.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed January 17, 1907. Serial No. 352,672.
Patented Jan. 7, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Herbert S. Mills, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Chicago, in the county of Cook and State of
■ Illinois, have invented a new and useful Im-
?rovement in Phonograph and other Sound-
roducing Machines, of which the following
is a specification.
My invention relates particularly to rao-
10 tor-operated sound-reproducing machines,
although the invention or certain features
thereof may be usefully employed in sound-
producing machines generally.
My primary object is to provide simple and
15 efficient means for minimizing the ill effects
resulting from variations or fluctuations in
speed of the operating motor, such, for in-
stance, as may result from fluctuations in an
electric current, where an electric motor is
20 employed for operating the sound-producing
instrument. In musical instruments, such,
for instance, as a phonograph employed for
reproducing music, the matter of speed regu-
lation in the operation of the instrument is
25 exceedingly important, since fluctuations in
the speed of the record of a phonograph will
result in relative changes of pitch with con-
sequent loss of harmony of tone.
A further object of my invention is to pro-
30 vide means whereby a phonograph may be
caused to operate two or more times before
the technically so-called reproducer thereof
completely traverses the record-bearing mem-
ber and whereby the reproducer will finally,
35 after completely traversing the records, be
returned automatically to its original or
starting position.
In the preferred embodiment of my inven-
tion as applied to phonographs, I employ in
40 connection with a phonograph an electric
motor provided with a controlling-circuit;
a power-transmission torsion spring inter-
posed between the motor and the phono-
graph-record which it actuates and serving
45 to dissipate the variations in speed and trans-
. mit a substantially unfluctuating speed of
rotation to the phonograph record; means
whereby the controlling circuit of the motor
may be interrupted when the reproducer has
£0 reached any desired intermediate point in its
traverse over the record, without the return
of the reproducer to its starting position;
and means whereby the circuit is interrupted
after the reproducer has completed its trav-
55 erse across the record and the reproducer
is then returned automatically to its original
or starting position.
The invention is illustrated in the accom-
panying drawings as applied to a coin-con-
trolled motor- actuated phonograph. 60
In the drawings — Figure 1 represents a
broken front elevational view of a phono-
graph, equipped, operated and controlled in
accordance with my invention; Fig. 2, an
end elevational view of the same with the 65
motor omitted; Fig. 3, a plan view of the
same; Fig. 4, a view of circuit-controlling
mechanism employed and taken in the same
direction as the view shown in Fig. 2, the
switch-lever being in a different position 70
from its position shown in Fig. 2; Fig. 5, a
sectional view in perspective, the section be-
ing taken as indicated at line 5 of Fig. 4,
showing the relation of the switch to the con-
tact points; Fig. 6, a detail section taken as 75
indicated at line 6 of Fig. 1 and illustrating
the manner in which a shiftable cam-
equipped bar employed for actuating the
switch of the circuit-controlling mechanism
is held in a retracted position to permit the 80
return of the reproducer-carriage without
the cam carried thereby encountering the
cams on said cam-shaft; Fig. 7, a front ele-
vational view of certain parts and showing
the position of said parts an instant after the 85
retaining pawl or latch of the reproducer-
elevating lever has been tripped; and Figs.
8 and 9, sections taken as indicated at line
8 of Fig. 3 and showing, respectively, the
non-engaging and engaging positions of the 90
reproducer-carriage with relation to the feed-
screw which actuates said carriage during
the reproducing operation.
In the construction illustrated, A repre-
sents a phonograph comprising the usual 95
parts, namely, a frame A1, record-carrier A2
fitted with a cylindrical record A3, repro-
ducer-carrier A4 bearing a pivoted needle-
holder A5 and equipped with a screw-clutch
or follower A6, reproducer-carrier feed-screw 100
A7 contained within the reproducer-carrier
guide A8 and geared to the shaft of the rec-
ord-carrier A2, governor A9, and brake device
A10; B, an electric motor having a circuit B1
fitted with switch-points B2 and B3 and with 105
a switch B4, as shown in Figs. 2, 4 and 5 ; B5,
a shock-absorbing power-transmission tor-
sion-spring actuated by a wheel B6 connected
by a belt B7 to the motor-shaft; B8, a wheel
attached to and actuated by the power- no
3
876,006
transmission spring B5 and serving to actu-
ate a shaft B9 upon which it is fixed and also
to transmit motion through a belt B10 to the
record-carrier shaft; C, circuit-controlling
5 mechanism actuated by the reproducer and
comprising a cam C1 carried by the repro-
ducer - earner, a shiftable cam - equipped
switch-actuating bar C2 extending parallel
with and located in front of the reproducer-
10 carrier guide, a pair of arms C3 supporting
said bar and supported on pivots C4, one of
said arms constituting with an arm C5 a bell-
crank lever, a spring C6 which tends to hold
the bar C2 in the position in which it is shown
15 in Fig. 2, and a switch-actuating link C7 de-
pending from the free end of the arm C5 of
said bell-crank lever; C8, a switch-locking
lever which normally locks the switch-lever
B4 in the open position indicated in Fig. 2 ;
20 D, a needle-elevating and clutch-disengaging
lever which serves, by rotating the member
A6 to disengage the clutch from the feed-
screw and swing the holder A5 to the position
shown in Fig. 8; D1, a latch, or pawl, which
25 serves to lock the lever D in the position
shown in Fig. 1 ; D2, a latch-unlocking mem-
ber actuated by the member A6 when the re-
producer-carrier reaches the end of its trav-
erse; D3, a cam which serves to hold the
30 clutch-member A6 in the disengaged position
shown in Fig. 8 during the return movement
of the reproducer - carrier; D4, a needle-
holder support upon which the holder A5
rides as the reproducer-carrier, in its return
35 movement, nears its original starting posi-
tion; D5, a bar-latch which serves, by en-
gagement with the member D4, as indicated
by dotted lines in Fig. 6, to lock the cam-
equipped bar C2 in its forward, or retracted,
40 position to permit the cam C1 on the repro-
ducer-carrier to pass the cams on the bar C2
during the return movement of the repro-
ducer-carrier; and D6, a carrier-retracting
weight supported by a cord D7 which passes
45 over a pulley D8 and is attached to the re-
producer-carrier.
The general construction of the phono-
graph illustrated is well understood, and it
will be unnecessary to go into details, except
50 as may be necessary to enable the descrip-
tion of the novel features which have been
added to be understood. The frame A1 has
the usual standard for supporting the
rotary record-carrier, and the usual stand-
55 ards a1 in which the reproducer guide is
mounted and the feed-screw journaled. Mo-
tion is communicated from the shaft a2 of
the record-carrier, by a train of gears a3 to
the feed screw A7. The record A3 is the
60 usual cylindrical wax record, and as here
illustrated the record cylinder has its surface
divided into a plurality of records a4 sepa-
rated by unmarked spaces a5, whereby a
series of records may be reproduced during
65 one complete traverse of the record cylinder
by the reproducer. The circuit-controlling
mechanism is so arranged as to stop the
motor automatically after each short record
a4 has been reproduced. This feature is of
great importance in machines known as 70
" fortune- telling machines/' or, generally,
when the record cylinder is of sufficient size
to contain several records. The reproducer-
carrier A4 is pivotally and slidably mounted
on the guide A8 in the usual manner, the 75
member A8 being slotted on its lower side to
permit the screw-engaging member a8 to
engage the screw. The needle-holder A5
is pivotally supported in the carriage A4 on
pivots a7. The lower front portion of the 80
member A5 is provided with bifurcations, or
arms, a8 joined by a pin a9. The member
A6 has a short arm a10 located between the
bifurcations a8 of the member A5 and adapted
to engage the pin a9; and said member A6 85
has a longer arm a11 adapted to be engaged
by the lever D for the purpose of raising the
member A5 to withdraw the needle from the
record, as shown in Fig. 8, and said arm a11
is adapted to pass beneath the cam D3 and 90
hold the member A5 in an elevated position
during the return movement of the repro-
ducer-carrier. It will be observed, also, that
when the member A6 is in the position shown
in Fig. 8, the carrier is released from the 95
feed-screw. The holder A5 supports a disk
a12 by which the needle or tracer a13 is carried,
and the disk a12 also supports the tube au
which connects with the ear trumpets (not
shown). 100
The motor employed for operating the
machine is preferably an electric motor,
designated B. This motor may be of any
approved type and any suitable circuit-con-
trolling means may be employed. Ordi- 105
narily machines of this character are in-
tended for operation by a current supplied
from a dynamo which serves, at the same
time, for various operative purposes. The
current, therefore, is subject to fluctuation, 110
and I have provided means for overcoming
the ill effects of such fluctuations, which are
peculiarly felt in machines adapted for the
purpose of the present machine. I have shown
the circuit B1 equipped with a batten7- b, but 115
this is merely for illustration. Ordinarily,
the use of batteries is avoided, where possible,
for reasons which will be understood by
those skilled in the art.
By reference to Figs. 4 and 5 it will be 120
seen that the circuit B1 will be completed
when the right-hand end of the switch-lever
B4 is in the elevated position shown in these
figures. The switch-lever is equipped with.
a spring b1 which tends to bring about this 125
condition. The shaft b2 of the motor is
equipped with a stepped pulley b3 for con-
nection with the belt B7. The belt in pass-
ing to the pulley B° passes over an idler b3
carried by an arm 64 which is acted upon by 130
876,006
3
a spring &5. The wheel B6 has its hub fixed
on a shaft b6 which extends through the
coiled spring B5, abuts loosely against the
hub of the wheel B8, and has a bore in its end
5 receiving the adjacent end of the shaft B9.
One end of the spring B5 is attached to a
spoke of the wheel Bs, so that the spring
serves to actuate the wheel B8. The shaft
B9 is connected by gears b8 with the governor
10 A9 of the phonograph, said governor being
of the usual construction.
The circuit - controlling mechanism C
serves to automatically break the circuit
after the motor has operated for a predeter-
15 mined period. As shown in Figs. 2 and 3,
one of the arms C2 is connected by a spring
c with a hook c1 connected with an end stand-
ard a1 of the phonograph frame. This spring
tends to hold the cam-equipped bar C2 in the
20 position shown in Figs. 2 and 3. The cam
C1 attached to the reproducer-carrier A* j.s
provided with an oblique or beveled surface
c2; and the bar C2 is equipped with a series
of intermediate cams c3 and an end-cam c4,
25 these cams having oblique or beveled sur-
faces c5 coacting with the oblique surface ' c2
of the cam C1. The spacing of the interme-
diate cams corresponds with the. spacing of
the several records or paragraphs on the
30 record cylinder, so that the bar C2 will be
actuated to cause an interruption of the mo-
tor circuit after the reproduction of each
record of the record cylinder. The cam: c4
is longer than the cam c3,' that is, projects
35 rearwardly farther than the cam c3, so that
when the cam c4 is encountered the bar jC2
will be moved forward through a greater
distance than when the cams c3 are encoun-
tered, thereby permitting the latch D5 to as-
40 sume the locking position with reference to
the member D4, which is illustrated in dotted
lines in Fig. 6, whereby the cam-equipped
bar C will be held in its forward position
during the return movement of the repro-
45 ducer-carrier, so that the cam C1 Mall plear
the cams of the bar C2.
The arm C5, which is rocked downwardly
when the bar C2 is thrown forwardlyby the
action of the reproducer-carrier, serves to
50 depress the link C7 during this action. Said
link moves in a guide slot c6 in the base-plate
of the frame A1, and is provided beneath said
base-plate with a slot or recess c7 terminating
at its lower end in an abrupt shoulder c8
55 adapted to engage a stud c9 on the front end
of the switch lever B4. Said switch lever is
supjDorted on a pivot c19 carried by a frame-
member c11 depending from said base-plate.
The lower end of the link C7 is confined in a
60 guide c12, and near the lower end of said link
is a slot or recess c13 beneath which is a cam
cu adapted to work on the' front wall of the
guide c12. Connected with the lower end of
thelink C7 and with the frame member c11 is
65 a spring c15. When the link C7 moves down-
wardly, the recess c13 permits the lower end
of said link to be swung, under the action of
the spring c15, so that the abrupt shoulder c8
will engage the stud e9 of the switch lever.
When the arm C5 is suddenly drawn up- 70
wardly under the action of the spring c after '
a cam of the bar C2 has been passed by the
cam C1 of the reproducer-carrier, the switch
lever will be quickly actuated to interrupt
the circuit of the motor; and during the 75
final portion of the upward movement of the
link C7 the cam c14 serves to release the link
from the stud c9, so that the parts will occupy
the position shown in Fig. 2.
The latch lever C8 is supported on a pivot 80
c16 and is provided at its upper end with a
locking shoulder c17 adapted to engage a lat-
eral lug c18 on the rear end of the switch lever
B4. A spring c19 tends to move the upper
end of the lever C8 towards the switch lever 85
B4. The lever C8 occupies substantially a
vertical position, and has a rearwardly
curved lower end c20 which projects into a
coin-chute c21. When the lower end of the
latch lever c29 is swung forwardly, as will 90
happen if a coin is dropped into the chute
c21, the latch will be disengaged from the
locking position shown in Fig. 2, and permit
the spring b1 to elevate the rear end of the
switch lever and complete the electric cir- 95
cuit, as shown in Fig. 4. This position of
the switch lever will be maintained until the
link C7 is again depressed and elevated to
actuate the switch lever and break the
circuit. 100
The lever D which serves to elevate the
needle holder of the reproducer and to dis-
engage the reproducer-carrier from the feed-
screw is supported on a pivot d carried by a
frame-member dl. The lever lies in a plane 105
parallel with the plane of the cam bar (J2;
and, as shown in Figs. 1 and 7, has at its
right-hand end an upwardly extending arm
d2 which is equipped with an arm d3 which
extends from the arm d% towards the left- 110
hand end of the machine. The left-hand end
of the lever D is curved upwardly and to the
left, as indicated at d*. At the right-hand
end of the lever D and at the base of the
standing arm dz is a locking shoulder d& 115
which serves to engage a locking shoulder
d6 with which the pawl D1 is provided. Said
pawl D1 is supported on a pivot d1 and is
normally held in engagement with the lever
D by a spring d8. The upper end of the 120
pawl D1 is provided with a perforate ear d9
which receives a short threaded rod d10
equipped with adjustable nuts dn . The rod d10
moves in a guide du. The left hand end of
the member d10 is in the path of the arm a11 125
of the member A6 of the reproducer, so that
when the reproducer-carrier reaches the final
end of its traverse, the pawl D1 will be actu-
ated to release the lever D and permit the
spring d13 of said lever to depress the right- 130
876,006
hand end of the lever, the arm a11 of the
member A8 passing, in the meantime, be-
neath the arm d3 of the lever D, so that when
the lever D is actuated by its spring, the
5 member A6 will be rotated to release the
reproducer-carrier from the feed-screw and
at the same time raise the needle-holder A5
to withdraw the needle from the record. The
instant this occurs, the weight D6 operates
10 to retract the reproducer-carrier, the arm a11
of the member A6 passing from beneath the
arm d3 of the lever D beneath the cam D3, so
that the reproducer-carrier will be held out
of engagement with the feed-screw and the
15 needle-holder will be held elevated during
the return movement of the reproducer-
carrier. During the return movement of the
reproducer-carrier, the arm a11 will encounter
the cam portion d* of the lever D and restore
20 the lever D to its normal position. Before
the arm a11 passes from beneath the left-hand
end of the cam D3, the stud D4 will be re-
ceived beneath the arms a8 of the needle-
holder so as to support said needle-holder for
25 an instant at the beginning of the next oper-
ation of the machine. In the meantime be-
cause of the loose connection between the
short arm a10 and the needle-holder A5, the
member A6 will return to its normal position,
30 thereby connecting the reproducer -carrier
again with the feed-screw. An instant after
the machine is again set in operation, the
needle-holder will drop off the support D4
and bring the needle again into contact with
35 the record. Inasmuch as the cam bar C2 is
held in a retracted position by the latch D5
during the return movement of the repro-
ducer-carrier, it is necessary to provide
means for releasing the latch from the mem-
40 ber D4 to permit the bar C2 to assume its
normal position. For this purpose the re-
producer-carrier is equipped with a cam du
which engages the free end of the pawl D5
when the reproducer-carrier reaches the lef t-
45 hand end of its traverse and disengages the
pawl from the member D4. The cam du is
shown as a short curved wire projecting to
the left from the carrier A4, as shown in Fig.
3. The pawl B5 is pivoted on the left-hand
50 end of the bar or shaft C2, as shown in Figs.
1 and 3.
I preferably connect the cord D7 with the
weight D6 through the medium of a spring
dlb, and confine the weight in a guide-cylinder
55 d16 in which a certain amount of air cushion-
ing occurs, the whole arrangement being in-
tended to prevent shock to the delicate parts
of the mechanism.
From the foregoing description, the oper-
60 ation will be readily understood. When
it is desired to operate the phonograph, the
lower end of the latch-lever c20 is swung for-
wardly, as by dropping a coin into the chute
c21, thereby unlatching the switch-lever B4,
65 whose spring b' thereupon operates to ele-
vate the rear end of the switch-lever and
make connection between the switch-points
B2, B3, thereby establishing the circuit of
the electric motor. Thereupon,' the motor,
through the medium of the wheel B6, rotates 70
the power-transmission coil-spring B5, there-
by communicating motion to the wheel B8,
and thence through the shaft B9 to the gov-
ernor A9, and through the belt B10 to the
record-carrier, and from the record-carrier 75
through the gear train a3 to the feed-screw
which actuates the reproducer-carrier. A
moment after the reproducer-carrier starts
to the right from the position shown in Fig.
1, the needle-support A5 drops off the sup- 80
porting member D", allowing the needle to
come into contact with the cylinder. Dur-
ing the movement of the reproducer to the
right, the arm a11 of the member A6 travels
above the cam D3. When the cam C1 en- 85
counters the first cam c3 on the bar C2, the
bar C2 is shifted forwardly a sufficient dis-
tance to depress the link C7 so that it will
engage the stud c\ After the cam C1 passes
the first of the cams c3, the bar C2 is suddenly 90
returned under the action of the spring c,
thereby elevating the bar C7 and breaking
the circuit. This action, it is noteworthy,
is accomplished without the release of the
reproducer-carrier from the feed-screw, and 95
the movement of the bar C2 is not sufficient
to permit the pawl D5 to lockingly engage the
member D4 so as to hold the bar C2 in its
forward position. The only effect, there-
fore, is to interrupt the circuit and stop the 100
motor. The circuit may be reestablished
by again actuating the lever c20 to release
the switch-lever. The action just described
is repeated when any one of the intermediate
cams c3 of the bar C2 is encountered and 105
passed by the cam C1 of the reproducer-car-
rier. When the cam C1 encounters the cam
c4 of the bar C2, the bar C2 is shifted a greater
distance, and the pawl D5 is permitted to as-
sume the locking position indicated by the 110
dotted lines in Fig. 6. This is accomplished
an instant before the arm a11 of the member
A6 of the reproducer-carrier encounters the
member d10 and through the medium thereof
actuates the pawl D1 to release the needle- 115
elevating lever D. When the lever D is re-
leased, it operates to turn the member A6 on
its pivot, elevate the needle-holder and re-
lease the reproducer-carrier from the feed-
screw, the weight D6 then operating to re- 120
turn the reproducer-carrier to its starting
position. During this return movement, the
arm a11 passes beneath the cam D3, maintain-
ing the disconnection between the repro-
ducer-carrier and the feed-screw and holding 125
the needle away from the record. In the
return movement, the arm a11 encounters the
cam d* and restores the lever D to its original
position. An instant before the arm a11
passes from beneath the left-hand end of the 130
876,006
cam D3, the supporting member D4 is re-
ceived beneath the arms as of the member
A5, and an instant later the cam du encoun-
ters the free end of the pawl D5 and releases
5 the cam-bar C2, permitting it to assume its
normal position. It is noteworthy that the
lever D aids in restoring the member A" to
the position in which connection with the
feed-screw is made at the instant that the
10 arm a" passes from beneath the left-hand
end of the cam D3.
The foregoing detailed description has
been given for clearness of understanding
only, and no undue limitation is to be under-
15 stood therefrom. It may be stated that the
power-transmission spring B5 may be of any
suitable length and strength to enable it to
successfully perform its function under
varying conditions. It is noted that while
20 the spring rotates bodily during the trans-
mission of power, it also yields throughout
its length, when fluctuations in speed of the
electric motor occur; and, owing to the re-
silience of the spring, the operation of the
25 phonograph is continued in an even manner,
regardless of said fluctuations.
In practice, the governor tends to retard
the operation of the machine in a greater or
lesser degree, depending upon the speed
30 transmitted to the governor, thereby tending
to uniformity of movement of the record and
reproducer of the phonograph. This action
of the governor is supplemented by the re-
silience of the spring B5, which introduces a
35 steadying effect which no governor is delicate
enough and quickly responsive enough to
effect; and it is to be observed, there is also
possibility of slippage of the belt B7 upon its
pulleys, which further supplements said ac-
40 tion, so that there are three.f actors tending to
uniformity of movement of the record and
reproducer. As a matter of practice, there
always is employed an electric motor capable
of developing, on the weakest current sup-
45 plied by the circuit, a speed in excess of that
transmitted to the wheel B", so that' there
always is more or less slippage of the belt B7.
It is noteworthy that my invention enables
the use of storage-batteries to be dispensed
50 with as a source of power for automatic
phonograph-machines, without necessitating
the use of an automatically rewound spring-
motor between the electric motor and the
phonograph. In other words, I am enabled,
55 by my invention, to take the power directly
from an electric-motor operated from a line
current and obtain the most satisfactory re-
sults from the standpoint of reproduction of
music, while at the same time eliminating ex-
60 pensive mechanism and rendering the ma-
chine more simple, more durable, and easier
of operation and maintenance, besides greatly
reducing the cost of the machine. The great
importance of these results will at once be
appreciated by all persons experienced in fi5
the art.
What I regard as new, and desire to secure
by Letters Patent, is —
1 . The combination with a movable sound-
producing member of a sound-producing ma- 70
chine, of an electric motor operating contin-
uously during the reproducing operation, a
member driven by said motor, a power trans-
mission spring connected to said driven mem-
ber, and means connecting said spring to said 75
sound producing member whereby said
sound-producing member is driven by said
motor through said spring, and the variations
in the speed of the motor is absorbed by the
spring, so that the sound-producing member 80
is moved at a constant speed.
2. The combination with a phonograph, of
an electric motor, a power transmission
spring serving to actuate an operative part of
said phonograph, means for transmitting 85
power from said electric motor to said power
transmission spring capable of slippage when
the pull from the motor exceeds a predeter-
mined maximum.
3. The combination with a phonograph, of 90
an electric motor, a power transmission
spring serving to actuate an operative part of
said phonograph, and belt and pulley connec-
tions between said electric motor and said
transmission spring. 95
4. The combination with a phonograph
and an electric motor operating continuously
during the operation of the phonograph and
serving as a source of power therefor, of
power-transmitting and motion regulating 100
means for the phonograph, comprising a gov-
ernor, and a resilient transmission spring ro-
tated by the electric motor and transmitting
power therefrom to the phonograph.
5. The combination with a phonograph 105
and an electric motor serving as a source of
power therefor, of power transmission and
motion regulating means comprising a gov-
ernor, a power transmission spring serving to
actuate the phonograph and governor, and 110
friction transmission means between said
power transmission spring and said electric
motor permitting acceleration of the speed of
the motor without undue acceleration of the
speed of the power transmission spring. 115
6. The combination with a phonograph
having a record-carrier and reproducer-car-
rier, of an electric motor having a circuit, a
power-transmission spring, means for trans-
mitting power from said motor to said power 120
transmission spring, said means being capa-
ble of slippage when the pull from the motor
exceeds a predetermined maximum, means
for transmitting motion from said power-
transmission spring to said record-carrier 125
and reproducer-carrier during operation of
said motor and rotation of said spring, and
automatic circuit-controlling means.
e
876,006
7. The combination with a phonograph
having a record-carrier and a reproducer car-
rier, of an electric motor having a circuit, a
power-transmission spring, means for trans-
5 mitting power from said motor to said power-
transmission spring, said means being capa-
ble of slippage when the pull from the motor
exceeds a predetermined maximum, means
for transmitting motion from said power-
10 transmission spring to said record-carrier
and reproducer-carrier during operation of
said motor and rotation of said spring, a gov-
ernor for the phonograph, and automatic cir-
cuit-controlling means.
15 8. The combination with a phonograph
having a record carrier and reproducer car-
rier, of an electric motor having a circuit, a
power transmission spring, pulle}" and belt
connection between the electric motor and
20 said transmission spring, means for trans-
mitting motion from said power transmission
. spring to said record-carrier and reproducer-
carrier during operation of said motor and
rotation of said spring, and automatic circuit
25 controlling means.
9. The combination with a phonograph
having a record-carrier and a reproducer-car-
rier, of an electric motor having a circuit, a
wheel actuated by said electric motor and
30 having a power-transmission coil-spring ac-
tuated thereby, a wheel actuated by said
coil-spring, means for transmitting motion
from said second-named wheel to the record-
carrier and from the record -carrier to the re-
35 producer-carrier, a governor for the phono-
graph, means for transmitting motion from
said second-named wheel to said governor,
and circuit-controlling means actuated by
the reproducer-carrier.
40 10. The combination with a phonograph
having a record-carrier and reproducer-car-
rier, of an electric motor serving to operate
the phonograph, said motor having a circuit,
circuit-controlling means operative to inter-
45 rupt the circuit a plurality of times during
one complete traverse of the reproducer-car-
rier, and means for automatically returning
the reproducer-carrier to its starting position
after it has completed its traverse.
50 11. The combination with a phonograph
having a record-carrier and reproducer-car-
rier, of an electric motor serving to operate
the phonograph, said motor having a circuit,
circuit-controlling means comprisinga switch-
55 actuating cam-equipped member, and a co-
operating cam on the reproducer-carrier.
12. The combination with a phonograph
having a record-carrier and reproducer-car-
rier, of an electric motor serving to operate
60 the phonograph, said motor having a circuit,
circuit - controlling means comprising a
switch-actuating member equipped with a
plurality of cams, and a cam carried by the
reproducer-carrier and cooperating with said
65 first-named cams.
13. The combination with a phonograph
having a record-carrier and a reproducer-car-
rier, of a motor having a circuit, and a circuit-
controlling means comprising a shiftable
switch-actuating member equipped wTith a 70
plurality of cams, one of said cams project-
ing farther than the others, and a cam car-
ried by the reproducer-carrier and co-acting
with said first-named cams.
14. The combination of a phonograph 75
having a record-carrier and reproducer-car-
rier, a feed-screw, releasable means connect-
ing the reproducer-carrier with said feed-
screw, a motor having a circuit, a switch-ac-
tuating member equipped with a plurality of 80
cams, one of said cams projecting farther
than the others, a cam on the reproducer-
carrier co-acting with said first-named cams,
means for locking said first-named cam-
equipped member in a retracted position to 85
permit return of the reproducer-carrier, and
means for raising the reproducer-needle and
returning the reproducer-carrier to its origi-
nal position.
15. The combination with a phonograph 90
having a record-carrier and a reproducer-
carrier, of a feed-screw for the reproducer-
carrier, releasable connecting means between
the reproducer-carrier and said feed-screw, a
motor having a circuit, circuitrcontrolling 95
means comprising a switch-actuating mem-
ber equipped with a cam, a cam carried by
the reproducer-carrier co-acting with said
first-named cam, and means for raising the
needle-holder of the reproducer and main- 100
taming it in a raised position during the re-
turn movement of the reproducer-carrier.
16. In mechanism of the character de-
scribed, the combination with the repro-
ducer of a phonograph and a feed-screw 105
therefor, of releasable connecting means be-
tween the reproducer-carrier and said feed-
screw, a shiftable bar equipped with a plu-
rality of cams, a cam carried by the repro-
ducer-carrier, a circuit-controlling swritch 110
actuated by said shiftable bar, a lever serv-
ing to raise the needle-holder of the repro-
ducer and disengage the reproducer-carrier
from its feed-screw, and means for returning
the reproducer-carrier to its starting posi- 115
tion.
17. In mechanism of the character de-
scribed, the combination with the repro-
ducer of a phonograph, and a feed-screw
therefor, of a clutch-releasing and needle- 120
holder elevating member, a motor having a
circuit, circuit-controlling means actuated
by the reproducer-carrier, a spring-actuated
lever serving to operate said clutch-releasing
member, a cam serving to hold said clutch- 125
releasing member in the disengaged position
during the return movement of the repro-
ducer-carrier, and means for returning the
reproducer-carrier to its starting position.
18. In mechanism of the character de- 130
876,006
*Z
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
50
55
60
65
scribed, the combination with the clutch-
releasing member of the reproducer-carrier
of a phonograph, of a spring-actuated lever
having a member serving to engage said
clutch-releasing member, and a cam beneath
which said clutch-releasing member passes
during the return movement of the repro-
ducer-carrier.
19. In mechanism of the character de-
scribed, the combination with the clutch-
releasing member of the reproducer-carrier
of a phonograph, of a pivoted spring-actu-
ated lever having a member beneath which
an arm of said clutch-releasing member is
adapted to pass and having at its opposite end
a cam-portion, a stationary cam beneath
which the arm of the clutch-releasing mem-
ber is adapted to pass during the return
movement of the reproducer-carrier, a pawl
normally holding said lever against the ac-
tion of its spring, actuating means for said
pawl operated by the reproducer-carrier,
and means for returning the reproducer-
carrier to its starting position.
20. The combination with the clutch-
releasing member of the reproducer-carrier
of a phonograph, of an actuating lever for
the clutch releasing member which is mount-
ed on the frame of the machine, a locking
pawl serving normally to hold said lever in
an inoperative position, and adjustable actu-
ating means for said locking pawl actuated
by the reproducer carrier.
21. The combination with the clutch re-
leasing member of a reproducer-carrier of a
phonograph, of a lever D having a member
d3 serving to engage an arm of the clutch-
releasing member and having a cam-portion
</', a stationary cam D3 adapted to engage
the arm of the clutch-releasing member after
said arm passes from beneath the member
c73, and a locking pawl D1 for said lever.
22. Tne combination with a phonograph
having a record-carrier, a reproducer-carrier,
a feed-screw and a clutch-releasing and
needle-holder elevating member, of means
for actuating tne record-carrier and the feed-
screw, a lever serving to actuate the clutch-
releasing and needle-holder elevating mem-
ber, a stationary cam serving to engage said
member during the return movement of the
reproducer-carrier, and a needle-holder sup-
port serving to engage the needle-holder as
the reproducer-carrier nears its starting po-
sition.
23. The combination with a phonograph
having a record carrier, a reproducer-carrier,
a feed-screw, a needle-holder, and a clutch-
releasing and needle-holder elevating mem-
ber, of a motor having a circuit, a switch-
actuating member equipped with a plurality
of cams, one of said cams being of greater
extent than the others, a locking pawl for
said cam-equipped member, a cam carried by
the reproducer-carrier, and means for releas-
ing said locking pawl when the reproducer-
carrier returns to its original position, there-
by permitting said cam-equipped member to
assume its normal position.
24. Tne combination with a reproducer- 70
carrier equipped with a cam, of a shiftable
bar equipped with a plurality of cams, a bell-
crank lever actuated by said bar, a switch-
actuating link actuated by said bell-crank
lever, and a switch-lever actuated by said 75
link.
25. The combination with the reproducer-
carrier of a phonograph, of a cam carried by
said carrier, a smftable bar equipped with a
plurality of cams, a link actuated by said bar so
and provided with a shoulder, a switch-lever
provided witn a shoulder adapted to be en-
gaged by said first-named shoulder, a spring
serving to hold said cam-equipped bar in its
normal position, a spring serving to actuate 85
the switch-lever, and a latch-lever for the
switch-lever.
26. The combination with the reproducer-
carrier of a phonograph, of a cam carried
thereby, a shif table bar, a plurality of adjust- 90
able cams mounted on said bar, a switch-
actuating link actuated by said bar, and a
circuit-controlling switch actuated by said
link.
27. The combination with a phonograph 95
having a record-carrier, a reproducer-carrier,
a feed-screw, and a clutch-releasing and
needle-holder elevating member, of a cam
carried by the reproducer-carrier, a bar ex-
tending parallel with the front of the ma- 100
chine in front of the reproducer - carrier, a
cam on said bar, switch - operating means
actuated by said bar, means for actuating
the clutch-releasing member, and a cam for
engaging the clutch-releasing member during 10 5
the return movement of the reproducer-
carrier.
28. The combination with the reproducer-
carrier of a phonograph, of a cam mounted
thereon, a cam-equipped member actuated 110
by said cam, a link actuated thereby and pro-
vided with a shoulder and with a cam, a
switch-lever having a shoulder adapted to
engage said first-named shoulder, a spring
serving to actuate said switch-lever, and a 115
latch-lever for the switch-lever.
29. The combination with a phonograph
having a record-carrier and reproducer-'car-
rier, of a record-bearing member having a
series of records on its surface, a motor, 120
means for stopping the movement of the
record-carrier and reproducer-carrier when
the reproducer -carrier is at a point corre-
sponding with a space between records, and
means for stopping the record-carrier and 125
returning the reproducer-carrier to its original
starting position after the reproduction of
the final record of the series.
30. The combination with a phonograph
having a record-carrier, a reproducer-carrier, 130
876,006
a feed-screw and a clutch-releasing member,
of a record-bearing member having a series
of records on its surface, an electric motor
having a circuit, a circuit-controlling switch,
5 a cam carried by the reproducer-carrier, a
switch-actuating member having a plurality
of cams, the last one of which is of greater
size than the others, trip-mechanism actu-
ated by the reproducer-carrier at the final
10 end of its traverse and serving to actuate the
clutch-releasing member, means for locking
the switch-actuating member in a retracted
position, and means carried by the repro-
ducer-carrier for releasing said switch-actu-
ating member when the reprooucer-carrier 15
returns to its original starting position.
\ HERBERT S. MILLS.
In presence of:
Frank S. Wilder,
J. S. Ryan.
i
!
No. 876,035. PATENTED JAN. 7, 1908,
W. W. YOUNG.
SOUND REPRODUCING AND MODIFYING DEVICE.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 10. 1906.
zz Z3 z : iizz:::z~j\ s vsffs^fl
JT^J-
-e^
z&r.s
-e^-
CsS s s 's s s v;
A
zzzzzzzlz.
ay J
-?T nf&p*^ s's s ssssss ^j&W-~f~
-e^
S
jf&<r. ?T
ft. ft. PPltro-c^/
.%*& yo
GUky&MAifb/
THE NORXIS PETERSCO., WASHtN(7TON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM W. YOUNG, OF SPRINGFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS.
SOUND REPRODUCING AND MODIFYING DEVICE.
No. 876,035.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed January 10, 1906. Serial No. 295,329.
Patented Jan. 7, iyo8.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William W. Young, a
citizen of the United States of America, re-
siding in Springfield, in the county of Hamp-
5 den and State of Massachusetts, have invent-
ed new and useful Improvements in Sound
Reproducing and Modifying Devices or Dia-
phragms for Phonographs and other Talking-
Machines, of which the following is a specin-
10 cation, reference being had to the accompany-
ing drawings and letters of reference marked
thereon.
Heretofore, the sound produced by phono-
graphs, graphophones, talking machines, etc. ,
15 has been indistinct, metallic and resonant so
that the words or other matter heard are not
clear and distinct, the sound waves appear-
ing to be confused and a rumbling, rasping
sound produced instead of the clear, distinct
20 tones and sounds desired.
The object of my invention is to produce a
simple and inexpensive device which may be
readily adjusted in place and which will over-
come the objections heretofore obtaining, and
25 which will result in the giving forth of clear
and distinct sound waves free from confusion
and free from the metallic, resonant and
scratching effect frequently found in ma-
chines of the class referred to.
30 I accomplish the objects of my invention
by the construction herein disclosed.
In the accompanying drawings, in which
like letters of reference indicate like parts,
Figure 1 is a transverse sectional view of one
35 form of my invention in which the simplest
form of air chamber is shown; Fig. 2 is a
similar view of my device showing a dia-
phragm arranged in the air chamber next to
one of the walls thereof; Fig. 3 is a similar
40 view showing a diaphragm centrally ar-
ranged, thus forming two air chambers; Fig.
4 is a like view showing one inner diaphragm
centrally arranged in the air chamber and
one diaphragm located adjacent one outer
45 wall; Fig. 5 is a like view showing a different
shape of the outer casing; Fig. 6 is a like view
showing two interior diaphragms, thus form-
ing three air chambers; Fig. 7 is a like view
showing the outer edge tapering to fit into a
50 taper opening ; Fig. 8 is a perspective view on
a smaller scale of a shell adapted to receive a
device shaped like that shown in Fig. 7 ; Fig.
9 is a plan view of my device constructed as
shown in Figs. 1 to 6, inclusive, and Fig. 10 is
55 a view on a greatly reduced scale of a section
of a sound conduit and a section of a horn
with a diaphragm between. Figs. 1 to 7, in- <
elusive, are on a scale greatly enlarged be-
yond the size of the device as ordinarily made
for the instruments in common use. 60
In detail, A indicates the device as a whole ;
B, the horn extension or smaller end of the
horn; C, the sound conduit extending to the
horn or horn extension; D, a shell adapted to
hold the device A when the same is inserted 65
in a tapering receptacle ; a indicates one outer
wall of the device and b the other outer wall ;
c indicates rings mounted between the two
walls; d and d' indicate inner diaphragms of
celluloid or other suitable material; e inch- 70
cates an annular projection by which the de-
vice is held in position, and/indicates a taper-
ing periphery.
I find that a construction comprising two
pieces of material so arranged with reference 75
to each other as to form an air chamber
therebetween, results in greatly modifying
and clarifying the sounds or tones that issue
from a machine of the character referred to.
In such construction the outer wall or walls . 80
form a diaphragm and the air space there-
between forms an air cushion! I find fur-
ther that the introduction into such space or
chamber of a diaphragm formed of a sheet of
celluloid or other like material will greatly 85
improve the tone, and when so constructed
the device is provided with an air chamber or
cushion either on one or upon both sides of
such introduced diaphragm.
I find that for the outer material the best 90
result is attained by the employment of soft
leather stretched to a reasonable extent and
cemented or otherwise held in position.
When a celluloid film is employed as an inte-
rior diaphragm the best result is attained by 95
' the employment of a sheet of celluloid chem- .
ically treated, such treatment comprising
coating such film or sheet upon one or both
sides with an emulsion of gelatin and then
subjecting the sheet so coated to the action 100
of acetic acid, followed by treatment with
a solution of h}?posulfid of soda. This treat-
ment preserves the celluloid sheet, prevent-
ing subsequent chemical action; also pre-
venting expansion or contraction, thus pre- 105
serving it m its original, normal condition
when inserted hi the device, and insures its
constant normal action.
The device may of course be employed as
an original diaphragm, or as a part of the 110
same, or as a supplementary device, as
herein set out in detail, the principles of
876,035
the air chamber being employed in each in-
stance.
It will, of course, readily be seen that in
some instances a sheet of isinglass, birch-
5 bark, thin metal, glass, or other suitable
material may be employed for the interior or
inserted diaphragm or diaphragms. There
must be employed, however, to give the de-
sired result, one or more air cushions or air
10 diaphragms, so that the action of the sound
waves is transmitted to such interior dia-
phragm by the confined air. As at present
advised, in most instances the . celluloid
sheet treated as above described gives the
15 best result, but in some instruments, and
with some records, I find that where the in-
terior diaphragms are constructed of the
other materials above referred to, a very de-
sirable and improved result is attained.
20 In order to give the best results, my de-
vice should be inserted in the sound conduit
at a point between the reproducing dia-
phragm forming part of the machine and
the smaller end portion of the horn, as for
25 instance, in the machine known as the "Vic-
tor" I find it advisable to introduce the de-
vice in the conduit at the point where the
horn extension B joins the conduit C. I
find also, for convenience in introducing and
30 removing the device, it is desirable in some
instances, especially for use in machines
having no joint, similar to that referred to — ■
the Victor, to construct the device of the
shape shown in Figs. 7 and 8, the periphery
35 of the device being slightly tapering to con-
form to the taper of the horn, and by prefer-
ence the periphery should be covered with a
soft material like leather or other similar
material. I find also that in some instances
40 a very desirable result may be attained by
arranging two interior diaphragms in such
manner that there is an air space, or cushion
therebetween, and that the outer portions or
walls of the device consist of soft leather
45 having one or more openings.
The best result is attained when the outer
walls are made of soft leather held snugly in
position and one or more inner diaphragms
are arranged between the outer walls, the
50 inner diaphragm or diaphragms being made
of materials other than leather.
The shell shown in Fig. 8 is adapted to re-
ceive one of the devices shaped like that
shown in Fig. 7, and I prefer that the smaller
55 end of the same be covered with soft leather
so as to form an air space between the in-
serted device A and the leather covering on
the smaller opening in the ring or shell D, so
that, with different records and different in-
struments, the parts may be used together 60
or detached, thus varying the tones. It will
be seen that several of the devices may be
so arranged as to be built up, one upon the
other, and these being inserted in the horn
or other part of the sound conduit will en- 65
able the user to adapt the devices to in-
struments 'and records of different kinds,
and if it be found that one of the devices
does not give the desired result with a par-
ticular instrument or record, then another 70
may be readily added, and in this way the
user may change the number of devices until
the desired result as to sound and clearness
is attained.
While in machines like the "Victor" I 75
prefer to introduce the device at the joint
as shown in Fig. 10, I may introduce the
same at any other convenient point in the
sound conduit.
I prefer to employ separating rings made 80
of cardboard, but of course various changes
in construction may be made and the same
desirable results be obtained.
Having therefore described my invention,
what I claim and desire to secure by Letters 85
Patent, is —
1. A device of the character described,
comprising outer walls extended or flanged
exteriorly and fastened together at these
points, and one or more imperforate inner 90
diaphragms.
2. In combination with a talking machine,
an independent device of the character
described, adapted to be placed in the sound
conduit of the machine, comprising outer 95
walls extended or flanged exteriorly and
fastened together at these points, and having
one or more air chambers between them.
3. A device of the character described,
having outer walls of leather extended or
flanged exteriorly and fastened together at
these points, and one or more inner dia-
phragms of vibrative material.
4. The combination of a closed shell adapt-
ed to fit into a sound conduit of a talking ma- 105
chine, such shell consisting of pieces of
leather attached to each other at their outer
edges, and one or more sound modifying de-
vices shaped to fit into said shell whereby one
or a plurality of said devices may be em- 110
ployed at will.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
WILLIAM W. YOUNG.
Witnesses :
Allen Webster,
J. M. Sterns.
)0
I
L.
No. 876,350.
D. HIGHAM.
GRAPHOPHONE.
APPIICATIOH PILED APE. 16. 1906
PATENTED JAN. 14, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 876,350.
D. HIGHAM.
GRAPHOPHONE.
APPLICATION FILED APR. 16, 1906
PATENTED JAN. 14, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
T^x^o-l).
J7
~
t"""1""!
-Z7^. 3.
^WitM«aa«d
44a|A«vi
/Owm T?hi
GttOtHfi.^V
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
DANIEL HIGHAM, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT.
GRAPHO PHONE.
No. 876,350.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 16, 1906. Serial No, 312,020
Patented Jan 14, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Daniel Higham, of
Bridgeport, Connecticut,' have invented a
new and useful Improvement in Grapho-
5 phones, which invention is fully set forth in
the following specification.
This invention relates to phonic apparatus
wherein f rictional means are used to amplify
the force of the sonorous vibrations. Ap-
10 paratus of this character are described in my
Patents No. 678,566 of Julv 16, 1901, and
No. 783,750 of February 28, 1905.
The object of the present invention is to
simplify and improve the construction and
15 operation of the apparatus of the general
character specified above.
The main improvement effected by the
present invention consists in dispensing with
the floating weight heretofore employed to
20 keep the stylus in contact with the sound-
record with yielding pressure, and in so con-
structing and arranging the stylus-lever that
the swinging shaft serves both to press the
friction wheel against the friction shoe by
25 gravity and also to press the stylus against
the sound-record by gravity.
The accompanying drawings illustrate the
preferred manner of carrying out the present
invention:
30 Figure 1 is a vertical section through the
center of the diaphragm ; Fig. 2 is a similar
view showing the stylus raised out of contact
with the sound-record; Fig. 3 is a bottom
plan view of the friction devices; Figs. 4 and
35 5 are detail views of said friction devices,
Fig. 4 being a perspective view, and Fig. 5 a
view looking downwards in the direction of
the line 5 — 5 Fig. 1.
The construction illustrated in the draw-
40 ings is in its general feature that now in use.
Diaphragm 6 is mounted on carriage 7
mounted to slide as usual on tube 8, within
which is the feed-screw 9. Friction- wheel 10
is carried by the sliding telescopic shaft 11,
45 of usual construction, which rotates in the
direction of arrow Fig. 1 . This shaft is sup-
ported at one end in bearing 12 in the frame,
and at the other in a swinging arm 14, piv-
oted at 15 to an arm 16 which is fixed to car-
50 riage 7. At the end of shaft 11 is a weight
17. The friction shoe 18 is attached by a
link 19 to the diaphragm 6, and is in contact
with friction- wheel 10, the normal pressure
of the friction devices being thus automatic-
55 ally regulated and adjusted in the manner
| described in my Patent No. 783,750, afore-
) said. As thus far described, the mechanism
does not differ materially from the construc-
tion now in common use.
The reproducing point or stylus 20 is car- 60
ried by a lever 21, which lever is pivoted at
22 to a block 23, which is pivoted on pin 24
to a projection 25 of the arm 16. Stjdus-
lever 21 is connected by a link 27 with fric-
tion-shoe 18. It will thus be seen that the 65
stylus is not carried by a floating weight but
by an arm rigidly attached to the carriage.
The stylus-support as a whole, consisting of
the parts 21 and 23, has two joints, 22 and
24, the axes of which are relatively so dis- 70
posed that the stylus can be moved (turning
on pivot 22) towards and from the sound-
record 30, and can have also a lateral move-
ment (on pivot 24) to compensate for irregu-
larities in the sound-groove. 75
The machine is provided with the usual
lifting lever 31, which serves to engage and
disengage the carriage with the feed-screw
in the well-known manner. This lever is
provided with the usual projection or 80
lug 32, for disengaging the stylus from the
sound-record. Swinging arm 14 which car-
ries the movable bearing of shaft 11 has a
finger 33 extending downwards into the
path of lug 32. Fig. 1 shows the parts in 85
their operative position. When lifting lever
31 is depressed, as shown in Fig. 2, contact
of lug 32 with finger 33 raises arm 14 and
shaft 11. This movement turns lever 21
on its pivot 22 *and disengages the stylus 90
from the sound-record. When the parts
are in their operative position, the stylus is
held against the record by the yielding
pressure of swinging shaft 11 and its
weight 17. 95
It is important that the swiveled block
23, to which the lever 21 is pivoted, should
have an elongated bearing, and should have .
appreciable inertia. If the lever were sim-
pl}T pivoted on a narrow bearing to swing 100
laterally, it would not accurately track the
record. The inertia of the block is sufficient
to prevent the lever 21 from being readily
thrown aside. In order that the lever 21
may pull itself to a central position when 105
the stylus is lowered onto the smooth part
of the record, the line 5 — 5 of the axis of
the tilting block 23 is such that it passes
close to the point 29 at which link 27 is
attached to lever 21. 110
876,350
The construction illustrated and described
tracks the record very accurately, even when
the sound-record rotates against the point
of the stylus (as indicated by arrow 38)
5 contrary to the usual practice.
When the swinging shaft 11 is lifted by
means of lever 31, the face 34 of tilting
block 23 comes in contact with circular
flanges 36, 37 on shaft 11 (see Fig. 5)
10 whereby the block and stylus-lever are
brought to central position before the stylus
is again lowered. The dotted lines of Fig. 5
indicate a tilted position which these parts
may have assumed.
\l What is claimed is:
1. In a phonic apparatus, the combina-
tion of the diaphragm, a carriage therefor,
sound-amplifying friction means on said
carriage, a swinging shaft by which one of
20 the friction members is carried, a stylus
connected with said diaphragm through said
friction means, and pressed against the
sound-record by the weight of said shaft,
said stylus being pivoted to a tilting block.
25 2. In a phonic apparatus, the combina-
tion of the diaphragm, a carriage therefor,
sound-amplifying friction means on said car-
riage, a swinging shaft by which one of the
friction members is carried, a stylus con-
30 nected with said diaphragm through said
friction means, and pressed against the
sound-record by the weight of said shaft,
said stylus being pivoted to a tilting block
having appreciable inertia.
35 3. In a phonic apparatus, the combina-
tion of the diaphragm, a carriage therefor,
• sound-amplifying friction means on said car-
riage, a swinging shaft by which one of the
friction members is carried, a stylus con-
40 nected with said diaphragm through said
friction means, and pressed against the
sound-record by the weight of said shaft,
and means for lifting said shaft and thereby
disengaging said stylus from the sound-
record. 45
4. In a phonic apparatus, the combina-
tion of the diaphragm, a carriage therefor,
sound-amplifying friction means on said car-
riage, a swinging shaft by which one of the
friction members is carried, a stylus con- 50
nected with said diaphragm through said
friction means, and pressed against the
sound-record by the weight of said shaft,
means for lifting said shaft, thereby dis-
engaging the stylus from the sound-record, 55
and means for bringing the stylus, when
raised, to a central position.
5. In a phonic apparatus, the combina-
tion with a diaphragm,, of two co-acting
elements constituting a friction device, a 60
sound record, a rocking member, a stylus
lever pivoted to said rocking member to
swing in a plane substantially parallel with
the axis of the rocking member, a stylus
supported by said lever to contact with 65
said record, connections between one of the
friction elements and said stylus lever, and
connections between the said friction ele-
ment and said diaphragm.
6. In a phonic apparatus, the combina- 70
tion with a diaphragm, of a sound record,
a stylus-lever bearing a stylus coacting with
said record, a friction device one member
of which normally presses the stylus-lever
towards the record, means connecting the 75
other member of the friction device to said
stylus - lever and said diaphragm, and a
rocking member to which said stylus-lever
is fulcrumed.
In testimony whereof I have signed this 80
specification in the presence of two sub-
scribing witnesses.
DANIEL HIGHAM.
Witnesses :
A. B. Keough,
C. A. GlBNER.
^ia
No. 876,673. PATENTED JAN. 14, 1908.
W. W. WOOSTER.
SPEED REGULATOR AND INDICATOR.
APPLICATION TILED APE. 9, 1907.
F'iaS.
™
Wi£ruesse<s:
£»-*5£<#*<
THE NORMS PETERS CO.. WASHINOTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WARREN W. WOOSTER, OF BERLIN, NEW JERSEY.
SPEED REGULATOR AND INDICATOR.
No. 876,673.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 9, 1907. Serial No. 367,286.
Patented Jan. 14, 1908.
To all wlwm it may concern:
Be it known that I, Warren W. Woos-
ter, a citizen of the United States, residing
at Berlin, in the county of Camden, State of
5 New Jersey, have invented a new and use-
ful Speed Regulator and Indicator, of which
the following is a specification.
My invention relates to a new and useful
time indicator for phonographs and the like
10 and consists of means in suitable relation
with the adjusting device of the revoluble
part or parts of the phonograph or other de-
vice for the purpose of predetermining the
velocity or rate of speed at which said part
15 or parts shall revolve.
It further consists of other novel details of
construction, all as will be hereinafter fully
set forth.
Figure 1 represents a side elevation of a
20 portion of a phonograph or like device, show-
ing my time indicator in position. Fig. 2
represents a plan view of the adjusting
screw, a portion of the head being broken
away. Fig. 3 represents a side elevation of
25 a portion of the device sh6wn in Fig. 1, with
a different form of screw employed. Fig. 4
represents a plan view of some of the parts
shownin Fig. 3 . Fig. 5 represents a partial side
elevation and partial sectional view, show-
30 ing a form of screw that may be employed.
Fig. 6 represents a plan view thereof, show-
ing a portion of the head of the said screw
broken away. Fig. 7 represents a front ele-
vation, showing the manner of mounting the
35 scale.
Similar numerals of reference indicate cor-
responding parts in the figures.
Referring to the drawings. In the draw-
ings, I have shown a device for indicating
40 the speed at which the revoluble parts of a
phonograph or a like device are to rotate in
order to give the desired speed to the repro-
ducing parts.
It will be evident that certain changes
45 may be made in the construction shown
which will come within the scope of my in-
vention and I do not, therefore, desire to
be limited in every instance to the exact
construction shown.
50 1 designates a bed plate of the machine,
to which is suitably attached, the hangers
or bearings 2 carrying the governor 3.
In suitable connection with the governor 3
is a lever 4, which is pivotally mounted at a
55 suitable stationary point and has connected
therewith, a spring 5 tending to move the
same upwards, it being understood that the
proper movement of the lever 4 acts upon
the governor 3 to cause the same to rotate
in a slower and faster manner as desired. ^60
In threaded engagement with a suitable
portion of the device is a set screw 6, which
bears upon the end of the lever 4 for ad-
justing the position of the same, said set
screw having a disk or head 8, and a thumb §5
piece 7 thereon, it being understood that as
the set screw 6 is rotated it will move up-
wards or downwards in its support and will s
cause the free end of the lever to be moved
in a corresponding direction and thus con- 70
trol the governor.
9 designates a plate or scale which is pro-
vided with a slot 10 and has the graduations
11 thereon suitably numbered or provided
with indicators in order that readings may 75
be made therefrom.
llx designates ears suitably connected in
the present instance with the bed plate 1
adjacent the set screw 6, it being noted that
the scale or plate 9 is adapted to be carried so
on said ears and that a set screw 12 passing
through said ears and the slot 10 in the plate
is adapted to lock the same in proper posi-
tion, it being understood that by reason of
this construction, the scale or plate can be 85
raised or lowered to a desired adjusted posi-
tion. By reason of the position of the scale,
the disk 8 will register in its movement with
the various graduations of the scale, so that
the position of said set screw and of the 90
lever 4 can be positively determined and
thus the speed of the phonographs regu-
lated.
Upon the upper face of the disk 8, I may
provide graduations or a scale 13, so that the 95
position of the set screw can be made in an
accurate manner and to any degree of fineness .
It will be understood that the scale or
plate 9 can be adjusted depending upon the
phonograph or the like to which it is applied, 100
after which the readings can be made as
above described.
In Figs. 3 and 4, I have shown the set
screw 6 without the head 7, the disk 8 there-
on serving as a means for engaging with the 10 5
hand of the operator to rotate the screw.
In Figs. 5 and 6, I have shown the disk
8 as omitted and I have provided the set
screw 6 with a neck 14 adapted to receive
a collar 15 from which projects the yoke 16, 110
the arms of said yoke being adapted to seat
or receive the scale or plate 9, so that the
876,673
arms of the yoke will register with the grad-
uations of the scale in order that readings
may be accurately taken.
Having thus described my invention, what
5 I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent, is: —
1. In a device of the character described, a
lever, a set screw co-acting with said lever
to adjust the same, a disk on said set screw,
10 graduations on said disk and a scale adja-
cent said screw having graduations thereon
from which readings may be taken de-
pending upon the position of the disk.
2. In a device of the character described, a
15 lever, a set screw directly engaging and co-
acting with said lever, a graduated member
carried by said set screw, a scale independent
of and coacting with said graduated member
and having graduations thereon with which
20 said member registers whereby the speed of
the device can be determined and means for
adjusting said scale parallel with said set
screw.
3. In a device of the character described, a
25 lever, a set screw having its end resting
directly upon and co-acting with said lever,
a disk on said set screw, a head on said set
screw above said disk and of smaller diame-
ter, and a scale adjustably mounted adjacent
said disk from which readings can be taken 30
directly by said disk.
4. In a device of the character described, a
lever, a set screw co-acting with said lever, a
plate having graduations thereon, ears suit-
ably supported, and means for adjustably 35
connecting said scale with said ears whereby
said scale can be adjusted with respect to
the mechanism.
5. In a device of the character described, a
lever, a set screw coacting with said lever, a 40
yoke carried by said set screw and a scale ad-
justably mounted adjacent said set screw
and seated in said yoke.
6. In a device of the character described, a
lever, a bodily movable set screw independ- 45
ent of and bearing on said lever to adjust the
position thereof, a thumb piece or head on
said set screw, an indicating member carried
by said set screw and a scale mounted in
proximity to and parallel with said set screw 50
and at right angles, to said indicating mem-
ber.
WARREN W. WOOSTER.
Witnesses :
John A. Wiedersheim,
C. D. McVay.
No. 876,865.
PATENTED JAN. 14, 1908
R. A. DENOVAN.
PHONOGRAPHIC RECORD CABINET.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 3, 1907.
<_2<£^. c5
®©@@©©@©@©©@©
©©©©©©©©©©©©©
^ivittieaaes
„
876,865
;—•■« f--<
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ROBERT A. DENOVAN, OF DALKEITH, ONTARIO, CANADA.
PHONOGRAPHIC-RECORD CABINET.
No. 876,865.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 3, 1907. Serial No. 366,218.
Patented Jan. 14, 1Q08.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that 1, Robekt A. Denovan,
a subject of the King of Great Britain, resid-
ing at Dalkeith, in the Province of Ontario
5 and Dominion of Canada, have invented new
and useful Improvements in Phonographic-
Record Cabinets, of which the following is a
specification.
This invention relates to improvements in
10 cabinets especially designed for the storage
of phonographic records of the gramophone
disk type, the main object of the invention
being to provide a simple and convenient
construction of cabinet having individual
15 spaces or compartments for a plurality of
disks and means by which any desired one of
the stored disks may be readily projected for
removal.
In the accompanying drawings, — Figure 1
20 is a front elevation of the cabinet with the
door thereof thrown open to expose the disks.
Fig. 2 is a section on the line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1.
Fig. 3 is a top plan view of the cabinet.
Referring to the drawings, wherein like
25 reference characters denote* corresponding
parts throughout the several views, the nu-
meral 1 designates the body of the cabinet,
which is preferably of Tectangular form and
open at the front to provide a doorway
30 giving access thereto, said doorway being
of proper size and form for the insertion
and removal of the records and adapted to
be closed by a hinged door 2.
The interior of the cabinet is divided by
35 horizontal partition 3 to provide a plurality
of compartments 4 and 5, arranged, as
shown, one above the other. At the lower
front portion of each compartment a cross
strip or bar 6 is arranged and is provided
40 with a plurality of upwardly extending par-
titions or standards 7, the standards being
spaced to form & series of storage spaces 8
for the record disks 9. The upper surface
of the strip is beveled or inclined down-
45 wardly and rearwardly at the base of each
chamber 8 to form a shelf 10 against which
the lower edge of the disk rests, thus tending
to cause the disks to move rearward by
gravity, thereby preventing them from be-
50 coining dislodged and dropping out at the
front of the cabinet when the door is opened.
In order to hold each disk from rearward
movement and to project it when desired,
an ejecting device comprising a bell crank
55 lever 11 is provided. The levers in each |
compartment are pivotally mounted at
their angles upon transverse supporting
rods 12, and the upright arm 13 of each
lever is arranged to bear against the rear
edge of the disk 9 and is preferably grooved
to receive the same, said arm extending at
an upward and rearward inclination, while
the other arm 14 of the lever normally pro-
jects downwardly and rearwardly as shown.
The levers hold the several disks from rear-
ward movement in an obvious manner and
are designed to be operated to project the
disks over the inclined shelves 10 partially
through the doorway, so that they may be
conveniently removed.
The levers within the compartments 4 are
arranged on lines between the levers in the
compartment 5, or alternate in arrangement
therewith on vertioal lines, and the levers
in compartment 4 are pivotally connected
by rods 15 with a set of operating levers 16
disposed in the upper portion of said com-
partment, while the levers in the compart-
ment 5 are pivotally connected by rods 17
with a corresponding set of levers 18 located
in the compartment 4 in alternate arrange-
ment with the levers 16, said rods 17 being
vertically movable through openings 19 in
the partition 3. The forward end of the
levers 16 extend in advance , of the levers
18, and said levers are provided with up-
wardly bent arms 16' and 18y projecting
upward through openings in the top of the
cabinet and carrying push buttons 16a and
18a respectively designed to be pressed to
rock the levers for the purpose of transmit-
ting motion to the rods to swing the bell
crank levers for the projection of the record
disks.
For convenience m the use of the cabinet,
storage and removal of the records, the record
holding spaces*in the compartments 4 and 5
are consecutively numbered and the disks
designed to' be st red therein correspondingly
numbered. The rows of push buttons re-
spectively carried by the levers 16 and 18 are
also numbered in like* manner, and the user
of the cabinet by depressing one of the but-
tons may project the numbered disk desig-
nated thereby partially through the door-
way, so that it may be conveniently grasped
and removed. The disks may, of course, be
catalogued by title and number in order that
any particular disk desired may be projected
by manipulating the button designated by
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
I
&
876,865
the catalogue, thus obviating the necessity of
examining each record before the particular
one desired can be found.
The manifold advantages of the cabinet
5 will be readily appreciated, and it will be seen
that the invention provides a simple and
effective construction of means for support-
ing and projecting the record disks at will.
Having thus described the invention, what
10 is claimed as new, is: —
1. A phonographic record cabinet pro-
vided with upper and lower compartments,
each provided with a plurality of record re-
ceptacles, said cabinet being provided with a
15 doorway at the front thereof for said com-
partments, and retaining means at the lower
front portions of the respective receptacles
of the compartments to support and hold the
records from forward movement, ejecting de-
20 vices in the compartments to engage the rec-
ords and hold them in engagement with said
retaining . devices, and Operating means for
said ejecting devices.
2. A phonographic record cabinet pro-
25 vided with upper and lower compartments,
each having a plurality of record cells or re-
ceptacles therein, retaining means for hold-
ing the record disks from forward movement
in said cells, ejecting devices holding the disks
30 from rearward movement and adapted when
operated to force the same forward, op»erating
rods extending upwardly from said devices
to the top of the upper compartment, and
sets of levers connected respectively with the
rods of the ejecting devices in the upper and
lower compartments, said levers having oper-
ating devices at the top of the cabinet ar-
ranged in distinguishing rows.
3. A phonographic record cabinet pro-
40 vided with a record receptacle, retaining
means for normally holding the record disk
from forward movement therein, an ejecting
device at the rear of the receptacle adapted
for holding the disk from rearward move-
ment, and means for operating said ejecting 45
device to project the disk forward.
4. A phonographic record cabinet pro-
vided with a doorway, a plurality of record
receptacles therein having downwardly and
rearwardly inclined shelves to support the 50
records therein, projecting devices engaging
the records to hold them in contact with the
shelves, and means for individually operating
said projecting devices.
5. A phonographic record cabinet pro- 55
vided with a record receptacle, a downwardly
and rearwardly inclined support at the base
of the receptacle, a bell crank lever at the
rear of the receptacle, one arm of which is ar-
ranged to engage the rear edge of a disk oc- 60
cupying the receptacle to hold the same from
downward movement on the inclined sup-
port, and means connected with the other
arm of said lever for rocking the same to pro-
ject the disk forwardly. 65
6. A phonographic record cabinet pro-
vided with record receptacles having in-
clined shelves to hold the records from out-
ward movement, projecting devices in rear of
the receptacles to normally hold the records 70
from rearward movement, and means for
operating the projecting devices.
7. A phonographic record cabinet pro-
vided with a doorway, a downwardly and
rearwardly inclined shelf at the base of the 75
doorway, bell crank levers in rear of the
shelf adapted to engage and hold the records
in contact therewith, standards extending
from the shelf and forming individual hold-
ers for the records, and means for individ- 80
ually operating the bell crank levers to pro-
ject the records.
In testimony whereof, I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
ROBERT A. DENOVAN.
Witnesses :
Elma Mooney,
P. S. Paquvett.
No. 877,184. PATENTED JAN. 21, 1908.
J. C. ENGLISH.
SOUND BOX FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED JULY 6, 1903.
J?ig/
J%g.<3.
J7c?.&
y^^^^^^
V///S///////////S/SS//////2////A
JZ?4<
WITNESSES:
—7
INVENTOR
i^^^^^
BY
/rfvrtexleZ&C,
ielfct
n
ATTORNEY.
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOHN C. ENGLISH, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE
COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
SOUND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
^o. 877,184.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed July 6, 1903. Serial No. 164,276,
Patented Jan. 21, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, John C. English, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of the city of Camden, State of New Jersey,
5 have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Sound-Boxes for Talking-
Machines, of which the following is a full,
complete disclosure.
The object of my invention is to provide
10 cooperating interlocking means for fastening
sound boxes, which are used in connection
with talking machines, to the sound tube or
swinging arm thereof, in such a manner that
the same may be quickly and securely locked
15 together in position, and as readily unlocked,
said means, in addition to performing the
above functions, also forming a guide or stop
for positioning the stylus bar with respect to
the record so that the stylus, which is carried
20 thereby, may form the correct working angle
with the record.
Broadly, my invention consists in provid-
ing a joint connecting the sound box and the
sound conveying tube with parts which
'25 easily interlock to prevent longitudinal sepa-
ration of said members and at the same
time form a stop for limiting the rotary
movement of the sound box upon said tube
and to determine the angle of the stylus bar
30 in relation to the record.
For a full, clear and exact description of
my invention reference may be had to the
following specification and to the accom-
panying drawing forming a part thereof, in
35 which
Figure. 1 is a plan view of the end of the
sound conducting tube with the sound box
in position thereon and showing a part of the
sound box broken away; Fig. 2, a side eleva-
40 tion of the sound box removed from the tube
and showing the part thereof which engages
said tube; Fig. 3, a sectional view taken sub-
stantially on the line 3 — 3 of Fig. 1 ; and Fig.
4, an elevation of the sound box showing the
45 outside thereof, or that opposite to the sound
tube.
Referring to the drawing, the numeral 1
indicates a portion of the sound tube which
is jointed at 2 to a semicircular curved por-
50 tion 3 the end of which terminates substan-
tially in alinement with the portion 1. The
outer end of the curved portion is provided
with an L-shaped slot 4, a part of which is
parallel with the end of said curved portion
55 and the other part of which extends inwardly
from said end. The sound box proper 5 is
made in the usual form but is provided with
a short tube or collar 6 which has a pin or
stud 7 projecting therefrom inwardly. Said
collar is adapted to telescope externally with GO
the curved portion 3 and the pin 7 is adapted
to engage the L-shaped slot 4.
In placing the sound box in position upon
the end of the curved portion or the tube the
pin is made to pass into the slot longitudi- 65
nally of the sound box or tube and then is
turned transversely so as to enter the other
portion of the slot and so that said pin will
abut against the end of said slot. The slot
4 is so located upon the end of the tube that 70
when the pin is m the position just described
the stylus bar 8 will hold the stylus or needle
in the correct position to produce the best
results from the sound record.
It will thus be seen that my improved 75
means for connecting the sound box with the
sound tube not only provides a simple and
efficient joint but also provides means for
holding the sound box in exactly the correct
position in relation to the sound record. 80
This is particularly desirable in a talking
machine because of the fact that the parts
are liable to be assembled by persons who
are not skilled in handling apparatus and
who are therefore careless in making correct 85
adjustments.
Various changes may be made in the form
and arrangement of parts herein set forth,
for instance, the transverse recess may be of
any preferred shape and may be located in 90
either member of the joint and either part
of said joint may be made to telescope within
the other and other changes may be made
without departing from the spirit and scope
of my invention. 95
Having thus described my invention what
I claim to be new and desire to protect by
Letters Patent of the United States is: —
1. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, a support for said sound 100
box and a stylus, of means for attaching said
sound box to its support and for adjusting
the stylus in operative position, comprising
a bayonet joint, the members thereof being
brought into operative engagement by a 105
movement of that part of the sound box
carrying the stylus relative to the support
in the direction in which pressure is brought
upon the stylus when in operative position.
2. In a talking machine, the combination no
S
877,184
with a sound box, a support for said sound
box and a stylus, of means for attaching said
sound box to its support and for adjusting
and holding the stylus in operative position,
5 comprising a tube upon said sound box, an
interior pin or lug mounted on said tube,
and a tube upon said support adapted to en-
ter the tube on said sound box, the tube on
said support being provided with a slot to re-
10 ceive said pin, said pin being brought into
engagement with the end of said slot by a
movement of that part of the sound box car-
rying the stylus, relative to the support, in
the direction in which pressure is brought
15 upon the stylus when in operative position.
3. The combination with a sound box, a
stylus and a sound conveyer by which the
sound box is supported, of cooperating inter-
locking means in the sound box and conveyer
20 operated to secure said parts in interlocked
relation by a movement of said sound box
relatively to said sound conveyer in the di-
rection in which pressure is exerted upon the
sound box, when the latter is in operative
25 position.
4. The combination, with a sound box, a
stylus and a sound conveyer, by which the
sound box is supported, of cooperating inter-
locking means in the sound box and conveyer
30 operated to secure said parts in interlocked
relation by a movement of said sound box
relative to said sound conveyer in the direc-
tion in which pressure is exerted upon the
sound box, when the latter is in operative
35 position, the said interlocking means being
also operative to effect the adjustment of the
stylus in its operative position.
5. The combination, with a sound box, a
45
50
stylus and a sound conveyer, of cooperating
interlocking means carried by said sound box 40
and conveyer, the said interlocking means
being operated to secure said parts in inter-
locked relation and to hold the stylus in oper-
ative position by a movement of said sound
box relative to said conveyer, transversely
to and then in the direction in which pressure
is exerted upon the sound box, when the lat-
ter is in operative position.
6. The combination, with a sound box, a
stylus and a sound conveyer, of means for
securing said sound box to said sound con-
veyer, comprising telescoping members car-
rying interlocking parts operative to secure
said members together, and the said stylus
in operative position by a movement of said 55
sound box, relative to said conveyer in the
direction in which pressure is exerted upon
the sound box when the latter is in operative
position.
7. The combination with a sound box, a 60
stylus and a sound conveyer, of means for
securing said sound box to said conveyer,
comprising telescoping members carrying
interlocking parts operative to secure said
members together, and to hold said stylus G5
in operative position by a movement of the
said sound box relative to said conveyer,
transversely to and then in the direction in
which pressure is exerted upon the sound box.
when the latter is in operative position. 70
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my
hand this second day of July, A. D., 1903.
JOHN C. ENGLISH.
Witnesses :
Chas. K. Bennett,
Lewis H. Van Dusen.
No. 877,207.
T. H. MACDONALD.
GRAPHOPHONE.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 16, 19
PATENTED JAN. 21, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
''THE MORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C
No. 877,207.
T. H. MACDONALD
GRAPHOPHONE.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 16, 1906
7*£dg'
PATENTED JAN. 21, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
y%?. 3-
^Witnesses
THE NORR1S PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS H. MACDONALD, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN
GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF
WEST VIRGINIA.
GRAPHOPHONE.
No. 877,207.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Jan. 21, 1908.
Application filed January 16, 1906. Serial No. 296,366,
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas H. Macdon-
ald, of Bridgeport, Connecticut, have in-
vented a new and useful Improvement in
5 Graphophones, which invention is fully set
forth in the following specification.
This invention relates to talking machines
and more particularly to machines of this
character in which the reproduction of sound
10 is obtained from a disk-shaped or flat record
tablet having a record groove thereon in the
shape of a spiral upon the flat surface of the
tablet, though certain features of the inven-
tion are applicable in connection with other
15 forms of record.
In talking machines of the disk type the
reproducer has heretofore been carried on the
end of a hollow swinging arm, with the stylus
of the reproducer resting in the record groove
20 and the reproducer being moved bodily with
the arm across the face of the record during
the act of reproduction, the reproduced sound
waves being conveyed to a suitable horn
through the hollow arm. Furthermore, it
25 has heretofore been proposed to employ in
talking machines a relay device in the form
of a friction roll and shoe between the stylus
and diaphragm of the reproducer, the undu-
lations of the record groove being utilized to
30 govern the application of power for impart-
ing vibrations to the diaphragm of the repro-
ducer. So far as I am aware relay devices of
this character have only been applied to
machines employing cylindrical records and
35 provided with means for moving the repro-
ducer in a right line past the record during
the act of reproduction.
One of the main objects of the present in-
vention is to provide means whereby a relay
40 device may be introduced between the stylus
and diaphragm of the reproducer in connec-
tion with machines employing the flat or disk
form of record, as distinguished from the
cylindrical record.
45 A further object is to provide a disk ma-
chine wherein the reproducing diaphragm
and its casing shall be fixed in position, thus
doing away with the mechanism heretofore
employed for moving these parts with rela-
50 tion to the record, and particularly doing
away with the hollow reproducer-carrying
arm heretofore universally employed.
With these objects in view the invention
consists of a flat or disk record with inechan-
55 ism for revolving the same in combination
with a reproducing diaphragm remaining in
the same place or location throughout the act
of reproduction, a reproducing stylus in
operative relation with the record, and con-
nections between said stylus and the dia- go
phragm, a suitable relay device, as a friction
roll and shoe, being introduced into or acting
upon said connections.
The invention further consists in a fixed
or permanently located reproducer dia- 65
phragm, a continuously driven friction roll,
a friction shoe bearing on said roll and con-
nected at its respective ends to the dia-
phragm and to a reproducing stylus bearing
upon a flat disk-shaped or other style of 70
record, and means for simultaneously revolv-
ing said record and friction shoe.
The invention further consists in certain
details of construction which will be herein-
after more particularly described and then 75
defined in the claims.
The inventive idea involved may receive a
variety of mechanical expressions, one of
which, for the purpose of illustrating the in-
vention, is shown in the accompanying 80
drawings, but it will be understood that such
drawings are for the purpose of illustration
only, and not for the purpose of defining the
limits of the invention, reference being had
to the claims for this purpose. 85
Referring to the drawings — Figure 1 is a
detail vertical broken section, parts being
shown in elevation; Fig. 2 is a broken plan
view of the parts shown in Fig. 1, portions of
the reproducer head being broken away and 90
the friction roll shown in horizontal section;
Fig. 3 is a detail vertical section showing the
means of connecting the stylus-bearing parts
with the friction shoe.
Referring to the drawings, in which like 95
numerals indicate like parts, 1 is the usual or
any suitable boxing or casing of a disk form
of talking machine, such as the graphophone,
within which boxing or casing, the power
mechanism for operating the parts is in- 100
closed, power being transmitted from shaft 2.
Mounted upon the top of the boxing 1 is a
suitable bracket 3 upon which is the repro-
ducer-head or casing 4 secured to the bracket
in any suitable way, as by screws 5'. Within 105
the reproducer-head 4 there is mounted a
diaphragm 6,' preferably between suitable
gaskets 7. Secured to a shaft 8 extending
vertically through the top of the box is the
tablet-holding table 9, upon which is placed no
877,207
the record tablet 10. Turning in bearing 11
is a shaft 12 having keyed thereto a pulley
13. The inner end of said shaft 12 has an
extension shaft 14 connected thereto by a
5 ball and socket joint 15, Fig. 2, which exten-
sion shaft 14 extends in front of, and prefer-
ably slightly below the face of the diaphragm
6, and has bearing in a swinging arm 16
swinging on a pivot pin 17 carried in a fixed
10 bearing lug or bracket 18 rigidly secured to
the bracket-piece or plate 3. Preferably the
extension shaft 14 passes through an open-
ing (not shown) in the bracket-arm 18, and
preferably also such extension shaft 14 is
15 formed in two parts, the outer portion bear-
ing a weight 19 and a friction roll 20 secured
to and revolving with the shaft. The outer
end of the shaft 14 is secured to the inner end
thereof by a suitable coupling 21 so that the
20 entire shaft 14 and the coupling 21, together
with the weight 19 and the friction shoe 20
are free to swing about the joint 15, being
supported in the swinging-arm 16. A fric-
tion shoe, preferably formed in two parts 22
25 and 23 suitably joined together, is in contact
with the friction roll, one of the parts of the
shoe, as 22, being pivotally connected by the
link 24 to the diaphragm 6, such connection
being preferably secured by means of a but-
30 ton 25 having a shank 20 which extends
through an opening in the diaphragm, to
which shank the link 24 is pivotally con-
nected. The other portion 23 of the friction
shoe has pivotally connected thereto a link
35 27, and a spring 28 acts through the link 27
to hold the shoe member 23 in contact with
the friction roll 20, the tension of the spring
28 being adjustable in any suitable way, as
by means of a screw 29, see Fig. 3. It will
40 be understood that the spring 28 engages the
link 27 as by passing through a hole therein.
Referring to Figs. 1 and 3, 30 is a bracket-
arm extending outwardly, preferably from
the bracket 3, in a horizontal direction, hav-
45 ing the opening 31 therethrough, within
which opening there is loosely moimted a
sleeve 32 having a flange 33 taking bearing
upon the upper surface of the bracket 30.
Depending from the sleeve 32 and on oppo-
50 site sides thereof, are two ears 34. A lever
35 of some considerable weight extends out-
wardly in a substantially horizontal posi-
tion above the face of the record 10 and at
its inner end is provided with forked arms
55 36 — 36, which are secured by trunnions 37 to
the ears 34 — 34 of the sleeve 32, so that the
lever 35 is free to move in a vertical plane
around the trunnions 37, and also may be
turned in a horizontal plane, the sleeve 32
CO turning in the opening 31 in bracket 30.
The lever 35 has depending from the under
side thereof ears or lugs 38, see Fig. 1, and
the stylus bar or lever 39 is connected to said
lugs so as to rock in a vertical plane by a
C5 pivot pin 40, said stylus bar or lever bearing
at its outer end stylus 41 in contact with the
record, and being connected at its other end
by a suitable joint to the link 27, which link,
as will be clearly seen from Fig. 3, extends
downwardly through the sleeve 32. The 70
connecting joint between the link 27 and the
stylus lever 39 is one which leaves the stylus
lever free to turn in a horizontal plane with-
out affecting the link, but it will impart to
the link all of the movements of the stylus 75
lever in a vertical plane. Any suitable joint
may be employed for this purpose, as for ex-
ample the loose screw threaded connection
between the link 27 and a socket 27' pivoted
to the stylus bar as shown in" Fig. 3, though 80
the connection may be a ball and socket in-
stead of a screw-thread connection, if de-
sired.
The revolutions of the power shaft 2 are
imparted to a shaft 43, Fig. 1, by a suitable 85
train of gearing, which shaft 43, on its inner
end, carries a bevel gear 44 meshing with a
corresponding bevel gear on the shaft 8 for
revolving the tablet, while the outer end of
said shaft 43 carries a pulley 45, a belt 46 90
passing over the pulley 45 and the pulley 13,
thereby revolving the shaft 12 and the fric-
tion roll and weight on the extension shaft 14.
Operation: The operator grasps the outer
end of the weight lever 35, swings it so as to 95
place the stylus 41 in the desired position on
the record, and the motor being started the
record 10 and the friction roll 20 are simulta-
neously revolved. As the record is revolved
the stylus is carried across the face of the 100
record by the action of the spiral groove,
thereby carrying with it the weight lever 35
and the stylus bar or lever 39, both of which
are turned in a horizontal plane around the
joint made by the sleeve 32 and the bracket 105
30 for turning link 27. During the revolu-
tions of the record the undulations of the lat-
ter (which, as here shown, are vertical undu-
lations) impart up and down movements to
the stylus end of the stylus lever 39, which 110
vibrations are imparted to the link 27, which
thereby acts to increase and decrease the
friction of the friction shoe upon the friction
roll in proportion to the amplitude of the vi-
brations, the friction roll thereby imparting 115
to the diaphragm 6 corresponding vibrations
but of magnified or increased amplitude.
During this action shaft 14, with the link 18,
is free to swing on pivot 17, thereby avoiding
any undue strain upon the diaphragm 120
through any excess of friction that might
occur, the shaft 14 turning on the universal
joint 15 to permit this swinging movement.
The action of the friction roll and shoe with
its swinging bearing and the weight attached 125
thereto is substantially that occurring in
talking machines above referred to employ-
ing the relay mechanism in connection with
cylindrical tablets.
While the main object in the above de- 130
877,207
&
scribed invention is to provide a sound re-
producing machine of the disk type with the
relay feature consisting of the friction roll
and shoe, there are certain features of the in-
5 vention that are applicable to other forms of
machines than the disk machine, and when-
. ever in the accompanying claims the con-
struction is not specifically limited to disk
machines it is to be understood that other
10 forms of record than the disk form are also in
contemplation.
What' is claimed is : —
1. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of a revolving record, a station-
l;, ary diaphragm, a stylus mounted to turn on
a universal joint independent of said dia-
phragm, connections between said stjdus and
diaphragm, a friction device acting on said
connections, and means simultaneously ac-
20 tuating said record and friction device.
2. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of a record, with a diaphragm,
a stylus mounted to move freely across said
record independent of the diaphragm, con-
25 nections between said stylus and diaphragm,
a friction device acting on said connections,
and means simultaneously actuating said
record and friction device.
3. In a sound reproducing maclune, the
30 combination of a sound record, with a dia-
phragm, a stylus mounted to move across
the face of the record independent of the dia-
phragm, a friction roll, connections between
said stylus and diaphragm, one part of said
35 connections constituting a friction shoe en-
gaging said roll, and means simultaneously
actuating said record and roll.
4. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of a disk-shaped sound record,
40 with a stationary diaphragm, an universally
mounted stylus, a friction roll, connections
between said stylus and diaphragm and hav-
ing frictional engagement with said roll, and
means simultaneously actuating said record
40 and roll.
5. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of a disk-shaped sound record,
with a stationary diaphragm, a stylus mount-
ed to move parallel with the face of said rec-
50 ord and also at right angles thereto, a fric-
tion roll, connections between said stylus
and diaphragm and having frictional bearing
on said roll, and means simultaneously actu-
ating said record and roll.
6. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of a disk-shaped sound record,
with a stylus mounted to swing freely across
the face of the record and follow the record
groove, a stationar}r diaphragm, a connec-
60 tion between said stylus and diaphragm, a
friction device acting on said connections,
and means simultaneously revolving said rec-
ord and friction device.
7. In a sound reproducing maclune, the
j combination of a stationary diaphragm cas-
55
ing or support, a diaphragm mounted there-
in, a flat or disk-shaped sound record, a
stylus mounted to swing across said record,
connections between said stylus and dia-
phragm, an intermediate friction device act- 70
ing on said connections, and means simulta-
neously revolving said record and friction
device.
8. In a sound reproducing maclune, the
combination of a stationary diaphragm cas- 75
ing or support, a diaphragm mounted there-
in, a flat or disk-shaped sound record, an
universally mounted stylus in contact with
said record, connections between said stylus
and diaphragm, an intermediate friction de- so
vice acting on said connections, and means
simultaneously revolving said record and
friction device.
9. In a sound reproducing maclune, the
combination of a stationary diaphragm cas- 85
ing or support, a diaphragm mounted there-
in, a flat or disk-shaped sound record, a
stylus mounted to move across said record,
connections between said stylus and dia-
phragm, a friction shoe constituting part of 90
said connections, a friction roll in contact
with said shoe, and means simultaneously
revolving said record and roll.
10. In a sound reproducing maclune, the
combination of a stationary diaphragm sup- 95
port, a diaphragm mounted therein, a flat or
disk-shaped sound record revoluble in a hori-
zontal plane, a lever mounted to twing in a
plane above said record, a stylus bar ful-
crumed on said lever and carrying a stylus in 100
contact with said record, connections be-
tween said lever and diaphragm, an inter-
mediate friction device acting on said con-
nections, and means simultaneously revolv-
ing said record and friction device. 105
11. In a sound reproducing maclune, the
combination of a record, a stationary dia-
phragm, a stylus-bar or lever, a friction roll,
a friction shoe bearing on said roll, a link
connecting one end of said shoe to the dia- no
phragm, and a link connecting the other end
of said shoe and the stylus-bar or lever, the
joint between said link and said bar or lever
leaving the lever free to turn in a direction
parallel to the record tablet independent of 115
the link but imparting to the link all move-
ments of the lever normal to the record.
12. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of a disk-shaped record, a sta-
tionary diaphragm, a weight-lever mounted 120
on a universal joint, a stylus-bar fulcrumed
on said weight-lever, a stylus carried by said
stylus-bar, connections extending from the
stylus-bar to said diaphragm, a friction shoe
interposed in said connections, a friction roll 125
in contact with said shoe, a swinging shaft
on which said roll is mounted, and means
simultaneously revolving said roll-shaft and
record.
13. In a sound reproducing machine, the 130
8??,207
combination of a sound record, a diaphragm,
a friction device restrained from longitudinal
movement, a reproducing st)dus mounted
with free movement so as to follow the rec-
5 ord, connections between said stylus and the
diaphragm, said connections being in fac-
tional engagement with said friction device,
and means revolving said record and fric-
tion device.
10 14. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of a sound record and means for
revolving the same, a diaphragm, a revolv-
ing friction device restrained from longitu-
dinal movement, a weight mounted to swing
15 in a substantially horizontal plane above the
record, a stylus bar carried by said weight
and having a stylus engaging the record, and
connections between said bar and said dia-
phragm, which connections engage said fric-
20 tion device and also pass through the axis of
said weight.
15. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of a sound record, with a dia-
phragm, a friction roll mounted to swing to
25 and from the diaphragm but restrained from
longitudinal movement, a reproducing stylus
engaging the record, connections from said
stylus to the diaphragm in frictional engage-
ment with said friction roll, and means re-
30 volving said record and roll.
16. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of a sound record and means
for revolving the same, with a stationary dia-
phragm, a revolving friction roll restrained
from longitudinal movement, a weight piv- 35
oted to the framework of the machine so as
to be capable of movement parallel with the
record surface and also to and from the sur-
face, a stylus bar carried by said weight
having a stylus engaging the record, and 40
connections between said stylus bar and said
diaphragm, which connections pass through
the axis of the horizontal movement of said
weight, and make frictional contact with
said friction roll. 45
17. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of a sound record and means
for revolving the same, a stationary dia-
phragm, a revolving friction device mounted
to swing to and from said diaphragm but re- 50
strained from longitudinal movement, a sta-
tionary bracket, a sleeve hung to turn in a
bearing in said bracket, a weight pivoted
to said sleeve, a stylus bar fulcrumed on
said weight and having a stylus engaging 55
the record, and connections between said
stylus and diaphragm, which connections
are in frictional engagement with said fric-
tion device and pass through said sleeve.
In testimony whereof I have signed this 60
specification in the presence of two subscrib-
ing witnesses.
THOMAS H.
Witnesses :
A. B. Keough,
C A. GlBNER.
MACDONALD.
No. 877,327.
PATENTED JAN. 21, 1908.
C. F. GRAHAM.
SOUND PRODUCING MECHANISM.
APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 25, 1905.
Jijig.j!.
-F}X7*&'
CT'JCfr'tz/tewrv, dnvvnto*,
TH* NORf<>* PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHARLES F. GRAHAM, OF NEAR SELLERSBURG, INDIANA.
SOUND-PRODUCING MECHANISM.
No. 877,327.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Jan. 21, 1908.
Application filed September 25, 1905. Serial No. 279,954.
To all whom it may concern:
B it known that I, Charles F. Graham,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
near Sellersburg, in the county of Clark
5 and State of Indiana, have invented a new
and useful Sound-Producing Mechanism, of
which the following is a specification.
The present invention relates more par-
ticularly to diaphragms for sound-producing
10 machines and by the term " sound-produc-
ing" machines, it is intended to include all
of those types wherein diaphragms are em-
ployed for recording sounds or reproducing
sounds already recorded. The principal
15 object is to provide a simple'device that will
accurately produce and record sounds with
clearness and without harsh or mechanical
resonance, will permit' the ready attachment
thereto of the actuating or recording means
20 without the necessity of any additional ad-
hesive, and may be readily manufactured in
any desirable shape.
The preferred embodiment of the inven-
tion is illustrated in the accompanying
25 drawings, wherein:
Figure 1 is a sectional view through a re-
producer, showing the improved diaphragm
m place. Fig. 2 is a perspective view of
said diaphragm.
30 Similar reference numerals designate cor-
responding parts in all the figures of the
drawings.
In the embodiment illustrated, a repro-
ducer box. is employed, comprising threaded
35 telescoped sections 3 and 4, that clamp be-
tween them a diaphragm 5, and a sound-
conducting nipple 6, to which the usual tube
may be attached. The diaphragm is prefer-
ably in the form of a disk that is made of
40 gelatin or other similar mucilaginous ma-
terial. The side that is disposed toward the
nipple 6 has a centrally arranged triangular
flat-sided projection 7, also formed of gela-
tin and attached thereto by the adhesive
45 qualities of the material.
Carried by the boxing is the usual repro-
ducing device, which, in the present embodi-
ment comprises a lever 8 pivoted between its
ends on a swinging support 9, one end of said
50 lever having a stylus 10, the other being con-
nected by a link 11 to a post 12. The post
12 is fastened to the central portion of the
face of the diaphragm disk opposite to that
carrying the projection 7, and the holding
means employed is merely the adhesive prop- 55
erties of the gelatin. In other words, all
that is necessary to attach the post is to
moisten the gelatin and apply said post.
The gelatin soon drying, securely holds said
post in place. 60
Experience has demonstrated that by
means of this diaphragm, tones are produced
that are as loud as the diaphragms ordi-
narily employed and that harsh and me-
chanical sounds are eliminated. The tones, 65
moreover, are melodious and natural as well
as clear and distinct. Furthermore, it is
very easy to attach the parts to the dia-
phragm, as there is no necessity to employ
extraneous adhesives. 70
From the foregoing it is thought that the
construction, operation, and many advan-
tages of the herein described invention will
be apparent to those skilled in the art, with-
out further description, and it will be under- 75
stood that various changes in the size, shape,
proportion, and minor details of construc-
tion may be resorted to without departing
from the spirit or sacrificing any of the ad-
vantages or the invention. 80
Having thus described my invention what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent, is:
1. In sound-producing mechanism, a dia-
phragm comprising a gelatiniform plate, and 85
a centrally disposed gelatiniform projection
having a surface engagement with one face of
the plate, and secured thereto by the adhe-
sive properties, of the material comprising
the plate and projection. 90
2. In sound- producing mechanism, a dia-
phragm comprising a disk composed of gela-
tin, a centrally disposed triangular projec-
tion carried by one lace of the disk, and a re-
producing device having a connection with 95
the other face of the disk.
3. In sound-producing mechanism, a dia-
phragm comprising a gelatiniform plate, and
a reproducing device having a surface con-
nected with the diaphragm by the adhesive 100
properties of the same.
4. In sound-producing mechanism, a dia-
a
677,327
phragm comprising a disk composed of gela-
tin, a centrally disposed triangular projec-
tion carried by one face of the disk, and a re-
producing device including a post having a
surface connection with the diaphragm by
the adhesive properties of the gelatin com-
posing the same.
In testimony, that I claim the foregoing as
my own, I have hereto affixed my signature
in the presence of two witnesses.
CHARLES F. GRAHAM.
Witnesses :
Edward G. Henry.
John K. Graham.
No. 877,842. PATENTED JAN. 28, 1908.
J. M. HIGLEY.
TALKING MACHINE DISK PKOTECTOR.
APPLICATION PILED JULY 2. 1907.
^te?.^.
WITNESSES
INVENTOR;
ATTORNEY
THE NORMS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JESSIE M. HIGLEY, OF NILES, CALIFORNIA.
TALKING-MACHINE-DISK PROTECTOR.
No. 877,842.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed July:2, 1907. Serial No. 381,882,
Patented Jan. 28, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Jessie M. Hjgley,
citizen of United States, residing at Niles, in
the county of Alameda and State of Cali-
5 fornia, have invented new and useful Im-
provements in Talking-Machine-Disk Pro-
tectors, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
My invention relates to a protective device
10 for talking machine disks.
It consists of soft felt or equivalent at-
tachment placed upon the back of the disk,
and in details of construction which will be
more fully explained by reference to the ac-
15 companying drawings, in which —
Figure 1 is a plan view. Fig. 2 is a sec-
tional elevation of my invention.
The records of talking and like machines
which are made upon flat, hard rubber disks,
20 are usually kept in quantity by piling one
upon the top of the other, and careless hand-
ling of these disks often mutilates them to
the extent of sometimes ruining them alto-
gether; and in any event they are soon ren-
25 dered unsatisfactory by such bruises.
It is the object of my invention to provide
a means for protecting such disks without in
any way interfering with their use.
The disk A has the upper surface forming
30 the record. Upon the lower or back surface
I fix narrow rings 2 of cloth, felt or other
equivalent soft material, which has sufficient
thickness to prevent the disk upon which it
is fixed from making a direct contact of the
35 hard portions with the disk below; but at
the same time this protective part is not
thick enough to interfere with the proper
placing of the disk upon the machine.
As the disks are of very considerable di-
40 ameter, it will be manifest that if the ma-
terial used was to be stamped or cut out of
large pieces, there would be a good deal of
waste. I have therefore designed to cut the
material, if used in circular form, into seg-
45 ments which will take but a small width of
material for each segment, and thus econo-
mize the material to the utmost. In the
drawing these segments are shown of such
size that the amount of material used for each
segment will be but little more than the 50
actual width of the segment itself. These
are pasted or otherwise secured so as to form
an annular ring around the periphery, and
if found desirable, a second ring may be
formed around the central portion. 55
With this device it is possible to superpose
any number of these disks without any dan-
ger of marring the surfaces of the lowermost
j ones.
The surface thus carried by the disk may 60
also serve in lieu of the felt disk which is
usually fixed to the revolving table upon
which the disk is carried, and to which the
disk is adherent.
Having thus described my invention, what 65
I claim and desire to secure byJLetters Pat-
ent is —
1 . A record for a talking machine having a
protective medium permanently secured to
its exterior surface and serving to protect 70
superposed records from direct contact with
each other.
2. A record for a talking machine having
an annular ring permanently secured to its
exterior surface and serving to protect super- 75
posed records from direct contact with each
other.
3. A talking machine record of disk-form
having an annular ring fixed to the exterior
thereof and serving to protect the record side 80
of a second disk when two disks are placed
flatwise together, said ring being formed of
separate sections.
4. A talking machine record of disk-form
having permanently attached to its surface 85
opposite to that containing the record a soft
surface of material having a slightly adherent
character.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit- 90
nesses.
JESSIE M. HIGLEY.
Witnesses :
S. H. Nourse,
Frederick E. Maynard.
No. 877,845
PATENTED JAN. 28, 1908.
I. KITSEE.
PHONOGRAPHY.
APPLICATION FILED AUG. 1, 1907.
*<?
Q. 1.
ORIGINAL TRANSPARENT RECORD
Tfo.Z
Sound amplifying he cord
WITNESSES:
**<-*-A^l^^c>~^J=l/
INVENTOR.
THE »«»IS PETIMCO, WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ISIDOR KITSEE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
PHONOGRAPHY.
No. 877,845.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed August 1, 1907. Serial No, 386,676.
Patented Jan. 28, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Isidor Kitsee, citizen
of the United States, residing at Philadel-
phia, in the county of Philadelphia and State
5 of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Phonography,
of which the following is a specification.
My invention relates to an improvement in
phonography.
10 Its object is to increase the efficiency of
phonographic records by producing them in
such manner as to impart thereto capacity
for amplifying the sound in the reproduction
of the sound waves, and thereby overcoming
15 the necessity for employing mechanical de-
vices to obtain such amplification.
The underlying principle of my invention
consists in the enlargement of the original
record and also in the production of copies
20 from said enlargement.
In the drawings, Figure 1 is a plan view
conventionally illustrating an original trans-
parent record. Fig. 2 is a similar view of a
sound amplifying cop}7 of the record dis-
25 closed in Fig. 1.
The mode of procedure is as follows : —
I, first, produce the original record in a
manner, so that the same can be photo-
graphed. I, preferably, produce the original
30 record on a material transparent to the rays
of fight with a material opaque to said TSijs.
A glass plate, or a sheet of tracing cloth, is
well adapted for the purpose in question, and
the fines representing the sound waves may
35 be traced thereon with a colored crayon, or a
free flowing colored liquid.
The so produced original record is then
subjected to an enlargement process with the
aid of photograph}'; that is, an enlarged
40 photographic copy is taken from the original.
I do not need to describe here the method of
taking enlarged photographic copies from
originals, as this process is well understood
b}7 persons versed in the art.
45 The plate on which the enlarged copy is
produced is, preferably, of a material trans-
parent to the rays of light, and as the photo-
graphed phonographic lines are opaque to
the rays of light, it is obvious that this en-
50 larged copy can be used in the same manner
as the original may be used if enlarged copies
were not necessary. From these enlarged
copies, I produce commercial copies, — by pref-
erence,— with the aid of the photo-gravure
process, a process which is well understood 55
by persons practicing the art.
By way of illustration of the hereinde-
scribed invention, I have shown convention-
ally in Fig. 1 an original transparent record,
the numeral 1 designating the body thereof, 60
and 2 the lines representing the sound waves,
while in Fig. 2 is shown a sound amplifying
copy. In the latter the numeral 3 designates
the body of the record and 4 the amplifying
lines. 65
The great advantage of being able to have
commercial copies which reproduce the
sound waves in an enlarged volume and with
greater force is readily appreciated, and with
the above described method, it lies in the 70
power of the person producing the original
and copies to so enlarge the original that any
volume of sound may be produced from the
commercial copy. It will thus be seen that
the present invention enables commercial 75
records to be produced capable of amplify-
ing the sound, or increasing the volume of
sound over the original records, and thus the
necessity for employing mechanical devices
for obtaining such amplification is entirely 80
overcome.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by letters
Patent is : —
1 . The method of producing phonographic 85
records capable of amplifying the sound vol-
ume of the originals, consisting in first obtain-
ing an enlarged photographic copy from the
original record, and then producing commer-
cial copies from said enlarged copy. 90
2. The method of producing phonographic
records capable of amplifying the sound vol-
ume of the originals, consisting in first pro-
ducing the original record upon a transpar-
ent base by outlining the sound waves thereon 95
through the medium of an opaque material,
enlarging photographically the record so
produced, and then producing commercial
copies from the enlargement of the original.
3. The method of producing phonographic 100
records capable of amplifying the sound vol-
ume of the originals, consisting in first pro-
ducing the original record upon a transpar-
ent base by depositing thereon an opaque
material in outline of the sound waves, enlarg- 105
ing photographically the record so produced,
877,845
and then producing commercial copies from
the enlargement of the original.
4. The method of producing phonographic
5 records capable of amplifying the sound vol-
ume of the originals, consisting in first pro-
ducing the original record upon a transpar-
ent base by imparting to the latter an opaque
outline conforming to the sound waves, en-
10 larging photographically the record so pro- j
duced, and then producing commercial cop-
ies from the enlargement of the original.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
ISIDOR KITSEE.
Witnesses :
Edith R. Stilley,
Mary C. Smith
No. 877,989.
J. C. ENGLISH.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 11, 1905
PATENTED FEB. 4, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
<SU.ZU
INVENTOR
John O.ErujfoUJi'
Br
\fn
ATTORNEY.
the Nommis mti.i co.. WASHlqaroN. ft.<
Il
No. 877,989.
J. C. ENGLISH.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 11, 1905
PATENTED FEB. 4, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
INVENTOR .
Joluv C/. Untylisfr
dr
£OwWZ£dlQv
/<fau.$&t
ATTORNEY.
THE NORRIS RETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOHN C. ENGLISH, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 877,989.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed September 11. 1905. Serial No. 277,805.
Patented Feb. 4, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, John C. English, a
citizen of the United States, and resident of
the city of Camden, State of New Jersey,
5 have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Talking-Machines, of which
the following is a full, clear, and complete
disclosure.
One object of my invention is to provide a
10 construction in connection with talking ma-
chines, whereby the plane of the stylus,
which is perpendicular to the record and at
right angles to the axis of the reproducer
sound box, is maintained at all times sub-
15 stantially tangential to the direction of the
rotation of the turn-table and consequently
to the grooves of a disk record.
A further object of my invention is to so
construct the above described means that it
20 performs the additional function of taking of
vibrations from both sides of the diaphragm
to produce thereby a more exact reproduc-
tion of the record.
A further object of my invention is to con-
25 vey the sounds from opposite sides of the
sound box to two independent arms or other
sound augmenting devices whereby the re-
sulting reproduction is louder, clearer and
more faithful to the original sounds or tones
30 recorded than has hitherto been obtained.
A further object of my invention is to
mount each horn or other sound augmenting
devices in such a manner that it may be
turned or swung at different angles with re-
35 spect to the other in order to distribute the
sounds in a manner to produce the best and
most effective residts.
A further object of my invention is to
make the sound tubes, the sound box, and
40 the parts connected thereto of such propor-
tions that the said parts are sufficiently rigid
to resist the tendency to vibrate in sym-
pathy with the vibrations of the air inclosed
thereby, and therefore from imparting their
45 own vibrations and undesirable qualities to
the sound which is being reproduced. In
• other words, the parts are made so heavy
that they do not partake of the vibrations of
the air inclosed, but permit the vibrations
50 from the diaphragm to be transmitted
through the same in a much more perfect
manner than has heretofore been accom-
plished.
Briefly, my invention consists in provid-
55 ing a talking machine with two sound con-
veying tubes of heavy and rigid construc-
tion, each of which is composed of a rigid or
fixed portion secured to the side of a cabinet,
or other fixed part of a talking machine, and
two hinged portions free to be swung up- 60
wardly on horizontal pivots away from the
plane of the record, and also to be swung
about vertical pivots hi a horizontal plane
over the face of the record; the swinging ends
of said sound tubes being pivoted to the op- 55
posite sides of the reproducer or sound box;
whereby the said sound tubes are caused to
convey the vibrations of the diaphragm from
both sides of the sound box to independently
movable horns or any other sound amplify- 70
ing device, and at the same time to maintain
the sound box, and the stylus carried there-
by, in a fixed relation with respect to the
groove of the record as the reproducer or
sound box travels across the same. 75
For a full, clear and exact description of
one embodiment of my invention, reference
may be had to the accompanying drawings
forming a part thereof, in which
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved de- 80
vice, mounted upon a cabinet of a talking
machine. Fig. 2 is a sectional view of the
line 2, 2, Fig. 1 ; Fig. 3 is a section of the line
3, 3, Fig. 1 : Fig. 4 is an elevation view of the
bracket or fixed support of my device. $5
Referring to the drawings, 10 indicates the
cabinet of a talking machine to one side of
which a bracket is rigidly secured. The
bracket (plainly shown in Figs. 1 and 4) con-
sists of a web 11, terminating in a U shaped 90
yoke 12, the upper arms of which are pro-
vided with elbows 13, 13', forming parts of
the sound conveying tubes. The upper ends
of the elbows are provided with shoulders,
14, 14', and upwardly projecting cylindrical 95
I sleeves 15, 15' which are adapted to smoothly
fit the smaller ends 16, 16' of the sound am-
I plifying horns 17, 17'. By means of this
! connection between the horns and the upper
ends 15, 15' of the rigid elbows 13, 13', the 10c
I horns may be independently swung around
i in a horizontal plane to form any desired
1 angle with respect to each other and to dis-
I tribute the sound in a much more perfect
and effective manner than has heretofore 105
been accomplished. The elbows 13, 13' ex-
tend backwardly for a short distance toward
the center of the talking machine, are then
bent as at 18, 18' and terminate in flanges
1*19, 19'. 110
877,989
Within the inner ends of the elbows 13, 13'
are sleeved short tubes 20, 20', rigidly united
by cross-bar 21 and secured within the elbow
by set screws, 22, 22'. Each tube 20, 20' is
5 provided on its upper side with lugs 23, 23'
forming parts of a hinge, to which extensions
24, 24' are secured by lugs 25, 25' and pivot
26, 26'. To the other ends of the extensions
24, 24' are pivoted the tubular horizontally
IQ swinging arms 27, 27', of the sound tubes,
the connection between the said swinging
arms and the extensions being clearly shown
in Fig. 2, in which said extensions 24—24' are
each provided with a hollow, vertically dis-
15 posed cylindrical portion 28, beveled on top
as at 29, while the horizontal swinging arm
27 — 27' each have a similar cylindrical por-
tion 30, the lower edge of which is beveled
to correspond to the beveled edge 29. A
2o screw 31, securely clamps said cylindrical
portions together, but permits the arm 27 to
swing in a horizontal plane around the pin
31, as a pivot, as Figs. 1 and 2 plainly illus-
trate. One end of each horizontal swinging
05 arm 27, 27' is enlarged as at 32, 32', and the
adjacent sides of said enlargement are pro-
vided with openings within which the spher-
ically shaped ends 33, 33', of the connections
34, 34', are secured by vertical pins 35, 35'.
30 The reproducer sound box 36 differs from
the usual construction of the same in that both
the interior cylindrical portion 37, and the
exterior cylindrical portion 38, are provided
with outwardly extending cylindrical sleeves
35 39, 39' respectively, and within said sleeves
the connecting tubes 34, 34' are fitted. The
connection 34' and sleeve 39' are secured to-
gether by a bayonet slot 40, and pin 41, by
means of which the stylus 42 is quickly and
40 accurately adjusted so that its axis forms the
proper or correct angle with the face of the
record. The other connection, 34, is se-
cured to the sleeve 39 by means of a set
screw, 43.
45 In order to permit the extensions 24, 24'
to be swung upwardly on their horizontal
pivots 26, 26' and yet to form a tight connec-
tion between said extensions and the short
tubes when the arms are in their horizontal
50 position, I have provided the short tubes 20,
20' with flanges, the outer surfaces of which
are curved to conform to an arc, the center of
which is in a line through the axis of the piv-
ots 26, 26'. The connection between the
55 short tube 20 and the extension 24 is plainly
shown in Fig. 2, and is identical with that for
the short tube 20' and the extension 24'. In
said Fig. 2, 44 represents the flange on the
short tube 20, and its outer surface 45 from
60 the shoulder 46 to the top of the flange is
curved in a vertical plane to form an arc of a
circle swung from pivot 26. As will be seen,
I have provided the extension 24 with a cor-
responding recess, within which the flange 44
65 fits. The horizontal pivots 26 then permit
the sound box mounted on the inner ends of
the sound conveying tubes to be lifted for
any purpose as for instance, for inserting or
replacing the stylus, while the flanges 44 per-
mit the sound box and inner ends of the 70
sound conveying tubes to oscillate slightly,
without binding and without breaking the
continuity of the sound conveying tube, to
conform to any inequalities or irregularities
of the surface of the record. 75
In order to maintain the plane of the sty-
lus substantially tangential to the groove as
the stylus is swung on an arc over the record,
I have made the pivots at each end of the
tubes substantially at the corners of a par- so
allelogram. In actual practice, however, I
have found that the distance between the
axes of the cylindrical portions 30, 30' should
be slightly less than that between the pivots
35, 35', connecting the outer end of the 85
swinging arms with the connecting tubes 34,
34' and by reason of this shortening of one
side of the parallelogram, the axis of the
sound box or reproducer is not maintained at
all times absolutely parallel to a determined 90
vertical plane as would be the case if said
distances were equal, but the direction of the
said axis is slightly changed as the repro-
ducer travels over the record. By a careful
determination of the relation of the distances 95
between said pivots, the plane of the stylus
is maintained at all times in approximately
perfect relation to the grooves in the record.
In addition, then, to performing the function
of taking the vibrations from both sides of 100
the diaphragm, my sound conveying tubes
also operate to so change the direction of the
axis of the sound box that the stylus is al-
ways in a plane substantially tangential to
the groove of the record, and as a result of 105
the combination of these two features in one
structure the sound is reproduced with
greater intensity and accuracy than has here-
tofore been possible in ordinary forms of con-
struction. It will be. also observed that I no
have made the arms, and connections of a
very firm and rigid construction, and by rea-
son of this and the manner of securing them
together and to the fixed parts of the ma-
chine to mutually strengthen and firmly hold 115
each other, the vibrations produced by the
diaphragm are not transmitted through the
material of the sound tubes, but only through
the air inclosed in the tubes. In other
words, by making the construction of my 120
parts exceedingly rigid and practically non-
vibratory, I have been enabled to limit the
transmission of vibrations to the air inclosed
in the tubes, and the vibrations are not im-
parted to or transmitted through, the con- 125
nected parts of the machine, with the result
that the tones originally recorded upon the
record are reproduced with great accuracy
and purity.
Should it for any reason be found desirable 130
!
!
877,989
to remove the sound box, it is only necessary
to loosen the set screw 43 and turn the sound
box to allow the pin 41 to be withdrawn from
the bayonet joint 40. Thus I have provided
5 the stylus of a double armed talking machine
with the accurate adjustment afforded by the
bay one joint and pin heretofore employed
in connection with single rigid arm sound
tubes.
10 Having thus described one embodiment of
my invention, what I claim and desire to pro-
tect by Letters Patent of the United States,
is: —
1. In a talking machine, the combination
15 with the sound box and stylus, of means for
maintaining the plane of the stylus substan-
tially tangential to the record grooves as the
sound box swings across the record and for
taking vibrations from each side of the
2o sound box.
2. In a talking machine the combination
in a single structure of means for taking the
vibrations from each side of the sound box
and for maintaining the plane of the sty-
25 lus substantially tangential to the record
grooves as the sound box swings across the
record.
3. In a talking machine, the combination
with the sound box and stylus, of means for
30 taking vibrations from each side of a sound
box and maintaining the plane of the sty-
lus substantially tangential to the record
grooves as the sound box swings across the
record, the said parts being of heavy and
35 rigid construction to limit the transmission of
vibrations to the air confined in said tubes.
4. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box and stylus, of pivoted
sound tubes connected with the sides of the
40 sound box for taking vibrations from each
side thereof and for maintaining the plane of
the stylus substantially tangential to the
record grooves as the sound box swings
across the record.
45 5. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box of a plurality of swinging
reproducer arms independently pivoted to
opposite sides of said reproducer and to a
fixed part of the machine.
50 6. In a talking machine, the combination
of a reproducer and a swinging reproducer
arm secured to said reproducer and to a fixed
part of said machine, said reproducer and
arm being of heavy and rigid construction
55 to prevent said parts from vibrating in sym-
pathy with the diaphragm.
7. In a talking machine the combination
with a reproducer, two swinging reproducer
arms independently pivoted at one end to a
60 fixed part of the machine and having their
opposite ends pivoted to the opposite sides
of said reproducer, the said reproducer and
arms being of heavy and rigid construction
to prevent sympathetic vibrations therein.
65 8. In a talking machine, the combination
with a reproducer and a swinging reproducer
arm mounted on a stationary pivot, a second
swinging reproducer arm mounted on a simi-
lar but independent stationary pivot, means
for pivoting the outer ends of said arms to 70
the sides of said reproducer for taking vibra-
tions from each side of said reproducer and
for maintaining the plane Of the stylus sub-
stantially tangential to the record groove as
the reproducer moves across the record. 75
9. In a sound recording or reproducing
machine the combination with a reproducer,
of a sound conveying arm pivoted at one end
to a stationary part of the machine and hav-
ing its other end in communication with and 80
pivoted to one side of said reproducer, a sec-
ond sound conveying arm mounted similarly
to the first mentioned arm and having its
corresponding end communicating with and
pivoted to the opposite side of said repro- 85
ducer, the relative positions between said
pivots and said pivoted ends of said arms
being substantially at the corners of a paral-
lelogram.
10. In a talking machine, the combination 90
with a reproducer having a stylus, of a tube
pivoted to one end of the stationary part of
the machine and having its other end con-
nected with one side of said reproducer; a
second tube mounted similarly to the first 95
tube and having its corresponding end con-
nected with the opposite side of said repro-
ducer, the relative positions between said
pivots and said pivoted ends of said tube be-
ing substantially at the corners of a parallel- 100
ogram, the outer end of which is slightly
greater than the inner end.
11. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, the combination with a reproducer,
of two sound conveying arms having their 105
outer ends respectively communicating with
and pivotally connected to the opposite
sides of said reproducer and having their in-
ner ends mounted to swing on horizontal piv- .
ots, to maintain the stylus in a plane sub- no
stantially tangential to the record groove.
12. In a talking machine the combination
with a reproducer, of two sound conveying
tubes pivoted on opposite sides of said repro-
ducer, and means for oscillating the inner 115
ends of said sound conveying tubes, said
means consisting of a horizontal pivot, a
flange, the outer surface of which is curved
to conform to the arc of a circle struck from
the axis of said pivot and a recess on the 120
movable portion of said tube to cooperate
with said flange.
13. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box having lateral extensions
on each side of the diaphragm, the tubular 125
connections sleeved within said extensions,
one extension being secured to said tubular
connection by a bayonet joint which posi-
tions the stylus, and the other extension be-
ing secured to the other tubular connection 130
877,989
by set-screw, and two horizontal swinging re-
producer arms pivotally connected to said
extensions.
14. In a talking machine, the combination
5 with the reproducer, of sound conveying
tubes connected to the opposite sides of said
reproducer, and a horn connected with each
of said sound conveying tubes each horn be-
ing mounted to swing in a substantially hori-
10 zontal plane independently of the sound con-
veying tubes and each other.
15. In a talking machine, the combination
with a reproducer, of sound conveying tubes,
connected at their inner ends to the opposite
16 sides of said reproducer, and mounted to
maintain the reproducer at all times sub-
stantially tangential to the record groove,
and a horn, mounted on the outer end of each
sound tube, adapted to be swung horizon-
20 tally in any direction.
16. In a talking machine, the combination
with a reproducer, of two sound conveying
tubes, connected to opposite sides of said re-
producer, the said tubes being mounted to
25 maintain the reproducer at all times substan-
tialby tangential to the record groove, the
outer ends of said tubes being provided with
independent horizontally swinging horns.
17. In a talking machine, the combination
30 with the stylus, and a sound box having an
inclosed diaphragm, sleeves extending out-
wardly from said diaphragm, and connec-
tions secured within said sleeves; of means
located on one of said connections for accu-
35 rately determining the position of said
stylus; and a sound tube pivotally secured to
each said connection.
18. In a talking machine, the combination
with the stylus, and a sound box having an
40 inclosed diaphragm, outwardly extending
sleeves, and connections provided with
spherically shaped ends secured within said
sleeves ; of means located on one side of said
connections for accurately determining the
position of said stylus; and swinging sound 45
tubes having their movable ends pivoted to
the spherical ends of said connections, and
their other ends independently pivoted to a
fixed part of the machine.
19. In a sound recording and reproducing 50
machine, the combination with a sound box,
of a plurality of sound conveying arms con-
nected thereto and pivoted to maintain the
stylus in a plane substantially tangential to
the record groove. 55
20. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, the combination with a sound box,
of a pair of sound conveying arms communi-
cating therewith, the said sound box being
mounted to move in a direction transverse to 60
the face of the record.
21. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, the combination with a sound box,
of a pair of sound conveying arms communi-
cating therewith, the said arms being pivoted 65
at their respective extremities to maintain
the plane of the stylus substantially' tangen-
tial to the grooves of the record.
22. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, the combination with a sound box 70
and a stylus, of a plurality of sound convey-
ing arms connected to said sound box, said
sound box being mounted to move in a plane
parallel to the face of the record, and means
tor locking the sound box to one of said 75
arms and at the same time positioning the
stylus at the proper angle to the record.
In testimony whereof, I have signed my
name to the specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
JOHN C. ENGLISH.
Witnesses :
Alston B. Moulton,
Alexander Park.
No. 878,029.
P. WEBER.
PHONOGRAPH HORN.
APPLICATION FILED JURE 29, 1904.
PATENTED FEB. 4, 1908.
Witnesses :
Inventor
*
Attorney
THE NOnmld PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
PETER WEBER, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT
COMPANY, OF ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
PHONOGRAPH-HORN.
No. 878,029.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed June 29, 1904. Serial No, 214,595.
Patented Feb. 4, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Peter Weber, resid-
ing at 571 Park avenue, East Orange, in the
county of Essex and State of New Jersey,
5 have invented a certain new and useful Im-
provement in Phonograph-Horns, of which
the following is a description.
In phonographic reproduction, superior re-
sults are secured with horns of considerable
10 length and diameter, which at the present
time, are about 30 inches long. These horns
are made of sheet metal and great care has
to be taken in transporting them, in order
that they may not become dented or injured.
15 Consequently, in the shipment of a phono-
graph outfit, a larger box is required for the
horn than for the phonograph itself, and this
is a serious practical objection. These horns
are also bulky in the hands of the user, and
20 objectionable for this reason.
The object of my invention is to provide
a collapsible or sectional horn, having sub-
stantially as good acoustical properties as a
continuous horn and which is as rigid as such
25 a horn, but which, owing to its collapsible
or sectional character, is very much less
bulky than a continuous horn, whereby the
objections indicated will be overcome.
In order that the invention may be better
30 understood, attention is directed to the ac-
companying drawing, forming a part of this
specification, in which
Figure 1 is a side elevation of one form of
horn embodying my invention, showing the
35 same made in three sections, Fig. 2 a longi-
tudinal sectional view of the same, and Fig.
3 a side elevation, showing the parts col-
lapsed or folded.
In these views, corresponding parts are
40 represented by the same reference numerals.
Although I show a horn made of three
sections, 1,2, and 3, it will be obvious that
it may be made of a greater or lesser number
of sections. The section 1 is provided with
45 a cylindrical neck 4 receiving the usual rub-
ber tube 5, connecting with a nipple of the
phonograph reproducer, and the section 3
is formed with the bell or flared portion 6, in
the usual way. Otherwise, the sections are
50 formed on substantially the same taper as
shown, in order that they may be nested to-
gether. When extended, the sections are
locked rigidly together by a joint somewhat
similar to a bayonet joint, but differing from
the usual form in that one of the cooperating 55
parts is inclined with respect to a plane per-
pendicular to the axis of the' section as illus-
trated. In forming this joint, the sections 1
and 2 are provided with pins or projections 7
and the sections 2 and 3 are formed with slots 60
8, with which the pins engage, said slots be-
ing wider at their upper ends and curving
downwardly, as shown. Ordinarily, three of
these locks are formed between the adjacent
sections, but obviously four or more may be 65
used. By engaging the pins 7 with the en-
larged portions of the slots 8, and by then
turning the sections relatively to each other,
each pin will be caused to ride down in the
slots, thereby moving the sections longi- 70
tudinally, and since the engaging surfaces of
the sections are tapering, this longitudinal
movement jams them tightly together. I
find in practice, that the sections may, in
fact, be thus locked together to form a struc- 75
ture which is longitudinally as stiff as a con-
tinuous horn, and diametrically stiffer than
a continuous horn, since' at certain portions
of its length the metal is twice as thick as
with a continuous horn. The sections may 80
be unlocked by turning them in the opposite
direction to that by which they are locked,
and then disengaging the pins 7 from the
slots 8. One of the sections, for instance,
the section 2, may be provided with the usual 85
ring 9, for supporting the horn from a suit-
able stand.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new therein, and desire to secure
by Letters Patent is as follows: 90
1. As a new article of manufacture, a horn
comprising a plurality of tapered sections
provided with cooperating projections and
inclined slots having enlarged portions
whereby the sections may be firmly engaged 95
with each other, the taper of the sections and
inclination of the locking shoulders being
such as to produce such engagement by less
than one complete rotation of one section
with respect to the adjacent section, sub- 100
stantially as set forth.
2. In a device of the character described,
a tapering section having an inclined locking
shoulder and a second tapered section having
a projection adapted to press against said in- 105
clined shoulder, the taper of the sections and
inclination of the locking shoulder being such
that the overlap of the two sections is re-
2
878,029
duced by the locking movement, substan-
tially as set forth.
3. As a new article of manufacture, a pho-
nograph horn, made of sections secured to-
gether by joints, consisting of projections en-
gaging inclined slots having enlarged por-
tions, substantially as set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 28th day of June 1904.
PETER WEBER.
Witnesses :
Harry G. Walters,
Mina C. Mac Arthur.
ied
No. 878.032.
PATENTED FEB. 4, 1908.
E. L. AIKEN.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED AUG. 3, 1905.
iyj.
s
i-L-
\ I J /)
^~, & 6
Attest:
Inventor.
by o *
THE NORR1S PETERS CO , WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EDWARD L. AIKEN, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT
COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 878,032.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed August 3, 1905. Serial No. 272,462.
Patented Feb. 4, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Edward L. Aiken, a
citizen of the United States, residing' at East
Orange, in the county of Essex and State of
5 New Jersey, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Phonographs, of
which the following is a description.
My invention relates to phonographs and
more particularly to that type known as the
10 Edison phonograph, wherein the sound rec-
ord is carried on a tapering mandrel the outer
end of which is supported during the opera-
tion of the instrument by a bearing, such as
a pivot pin, carried by an end gate which is
15 pivoted at one end so that when desired it
may be turned on its pivot and expose the
end of the mandrel so that the sound record
may be applied to or removed therefrom.
My invention has for its object the pro-
20 vision of an improved form of locking latch
for holding the end gate in its closed position
and consists in the features hereinafter set
forth and claimed.
Reference is hereby made to the accom-
25 panying drawings in which
Figure 1 is a front elevation showing my
invention applied to a phonograph. Fig. 2
is an end elevation of the same, and Fig. 3
is a detail view partly in section of the lock-
30 ing latch.
The phonograph shown is of the usual type
comprising a frame or body 1 which supports
a rotating tapering mandrel 2 upon which a
cylindrical sound record 3 may be carried,
35 the reproducer (not shown) being carried in
an eye 4 of a traveling carries arm 5, which
is supported and driven in the usual manner.
The end gate 6 is pivoted on a vertical pin 7
carried by the boss 8 projecting from the
40 frame 1, so that it can be turned from the
position shown in Fig. 1 through an arc of 90
degrees or more to completely expose the end
of the mandrel 2 and permit the record 3 to
be withdrawn therefrom. The end gate 6
45 is provided with a pivot pin 9 passing there-
through, and held in place by a screw 10 hav-
ing a collar 11 engaging a slot in the pin 9.
The pin 9 is so placed as to engage the center
of the head of the mandrel to form a pivot
50 bearing therefor. All the parts which I have
thus far described are of well known con-
struction.
In order to hold the end gate firmly in its
closed position, and at the same time to read-
55 ily release the same whenever desired, I pro-
vide a locking latch 12 which turns freely
about a screw 13 which is threaded into the
frame 1, the axis of the screw being parallel
to the axis of the mandrel. Within the body
of the latch 12 is formed a cup 14 which sur- eo
rounds the screw 13 and contains a coil
spring ] 5 whose ends abut against the bot-
tom of the cup and the head of the screw 13.
One end of the latch 12 is enlarged into afin-
ger piece 16 and the opposite end into a 65
short arm 17 for engaging the end gate.
The end gate is provided with a recess 18
into which the arm 17 passes when the finger
piece 12 is moved downward. When the
finger piece is moved upward, the arm 17 70
passes out of engagement with the end gate
and permits the same to be opened. The
inner wall 19 of the arm 17 is formed with an
inclined, rounded or cam surface as shown in
Figs. 1 and 3, whereby as the arm 17 is 75
brought into the position shown in Fig. 2, the
latch 12 is forced outward on its pivot,
thereby placing the spring 14 under com-
pression and holding the end gate 6 against
the frame of the instrument with a pressure 80
due to the strength of the spring 15 and pre-
venting any possible play of the end gate on
its pivot. Obviously the cam surface may,
if desired, be placed upon the end gate in-
stead of the arm 17. 85
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent is as follows :
1 . In a phonograph, the combination with
the frame or body, rotating mandrel and 90
pivoted end gate carrying a bearing for the
outer end of the mandrel and provided with
a recess, of a locking latch, a pin carried by
the frame upon which said latch is pivoted
on an axis substantially parallel to the axis 95
of the mandrel, a spring cooperating with
said pin to press against said latch, and a
projection extending from said latch in po-
sition to engage the recess of said end gate
and hold it in its closed position, one of said 100
engaging parts being provided with a sloping
cam surface for causing the latch to com-
press the spring and thereby hold the end
gate in position under pressure, substantially
as set forth. 10 5
2. In a phonograph, the combination with
the frame or body, rotating mandrel and
pivoted end gate carrying a bearing for the
outer end of the mandrel and provided with
a recess in its lower surface, of a pin carried 110
878,032
by said body and substantially parallel to
the axis of the mandrel, a locking latch
pivoted on said pin, a spring cooperating
with said pin to press against said latch, said
latch having an upwardly extending pro-
jection adapted to engage the recess in the
end gate so as to hold it in its closed position,
and in a downwardly extending finger piece
for operating said latch, substantially as set
forth. 10
This specification signed and witnessed this
1st day of August, 1905.
EDWARD L. AIKEN.
Witnesses :
Delos Holden,
Frank L. Dyer.
;
No. 878,121,
PATENTED FEB. 4, 1908.
W. A. COOK.
FEED MECHANISM FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 3, 1907.
JJ)3
JTrtt/krvtor:
»C NORR1S PCTEHS CO.. WiSHKMOrO". »• C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM A. COOK, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
FEED MECHANISM FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
Sl'o. 878,121.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application fileo June 3, 1907. Serial No. 376,913.
Patented Feb. 4, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be.it known that I, William A. Cook, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
city of New York, borough of Brooklyn, in
5 the county of Kings and State of New York,
have invented a certain new and useful
Improvement in Feed Mechanism for Phono-
graphs, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
10 The invention relates to means for moving
the reproducer in unison with the spiral
groove on the record so that the reproducer-
point shall be maintained in proper relation
thereto.
15 In some forms of machines for reproducing
sounds the reproducer-point or sapphire is
guided only by its engagement in the shal-
low groove in the record, and slight vibra-
tions of the instrument, especially unless it
20 be carefully leveled, cause the sapphire to
leave its place in the groove and thus impair
the rendition of the record. In other ma-
chines expensive and complex mechanism is
employed to avoid this difficulty.
25 The object of the present invention is to
provide simple, inexpensive feeding means
for insuring the engagement of the sapphire
or point with the record-groove, and for
easily and quickly releasing suchfeed mechan-
30 ism for a re-traverse, by the reproducer, of
the same or another record.
The invention consists in certain novel
features and details of construction by which
the above objects are attained, to be here-
35 inafter described.
The accompanying drawings form a part
of this specification and show the invention
as applied to a simple form of phonograph.
Figure 1 is a side elevation of such an
40 instrument equipped with my improvement.
Fig. 2 is a corresponding plan view, partly
in horizontal section. Fig. 3 is a vertical
section, partly in elevation, showing a por-
tion of the feed mechanism and releasing
45 means on a larger scale. Fig. 4 is a corre-
sponding horizontal section and plan view.
Similar letters of reference indicate the
same parts in all the figures.
In the form of sound-reproducing machine
50 illustrated, A is the base of the instrument,
A1 a post thereon at one end of which is
mounted the record-mandrel B provided
with a pulley B1 by whichit is rotated through
a belt B2 from the pulley C1 on a projecting
55 shaft from a spring motor, only partially
shown, inclosed in the casing C and having
a speed-governor C3, winding-shaft C3 and
controlling lever C*. The motor and its
equipments may be of any ordinary or ap-
proved type. At the other end of the base 60
is a horn-pipe post A2 receiving a stand-
ard or pintle D1 at the upper end of which is at-
tached the horn D carrying the reproducer D2
on which is the sapphire D3 adapted to track
in the spiral groove on a cylindrical record 65
M carried on the mandrel B. On the upper
end of the horn-post is a bracket A3 having
lugs A* in which is journaled a worm E
having a pulley E1 by which the worm is
rotated through the medium of a belt E2 70
running on a pulley C5 on the winding-shaft
C3 of the motor. The worm meshes with a
segmental worm-wheel F on the pintle D1
to which the horn is secured and causes the
latter to swing slowly. 75
The pintle D1 is received and guided in a
closely fitting hole drilled vertically in the
horn-post, and its conical lower end is sup-
ported on a step formed by the plane upper
end of a screw G of quick pitch entering the 80
horn-post from below and having a laterally
extending lever G2 on which is an upturned
arm G3 by which the screw G may be par-
tially rotated in the horn-post and, by reason
of its quick pitch, caused to rise therein and 85
lift the pintle D1 and its attachment suffi-
ciently to release the worm-wheel F from
the worm E. Thus conditioned the horn is
free and may be swung unobstructedly in
either direction. 90
In using the machine the screw G is turned
as above described to free the horn and per-
mit the sapphire to be located at the begin-
ning of the record-groove, the screw is then
reversed and the worm-wheel lowered into 95
mesh with the worm. The motor is then
started and through the pulley C5, belt E2,
and pulley E1 imparts a slow rotating move-
ment to the worm, and through the seg-
mental worm-wheel, slowly swings the horn 100
and its reproducer in the direction and at a
rate to follow the spiral groove on the record.
At the termination of the groove the horn is
lifted as before and returned to the starting
position. 105
By carefully proportioning the diameters
of the pulleys C5, E1, pitch of the worm E,
and radius of the segment F, relatively to the
record-rotating pulleys B1 C1, the slow travel
of the reproducer is made to coincide with the no
878,121
advance of the record-groove and the sap-
phire maintained in the latter under all
conditions.
The pulley C5 is described as mounted on
5 the winding-shaft of the motor but it will be
understood that it may be located on any
conveniently disposed shaft thereof, and
that motion may be communicated to the
worm by other means than the belt and pul-
10 leys shown, depending upon the character
and location of the motor relatively to the
other parts of the instrument.
Other forms of disengaging mechanism
may be substituted for the screw G, and the
15 worm and segment varied as required in
adapting the invention for service with
other forms of sound-reproducing machines.
I claim :—
1. In a machine of the character set forth,
20 a reproducer adapted to serve with a record,
a pintle on which said reproducer is mounted,
a worm-wheel on said pintle, a worm mesh-
ing with said worm-wheel, and means for
rotating said worm.
25 2. In a machine of the character set forth,
a reproducer adapted to serve with a record,
a pintle on which said reproducer is mounted,
a worm-wheel on said pintle, a worm mesh-
ing with said worm-wheel, means for rotat-
30 ing said worm, and means for freeing said
pintle from engagement with said worm.
3. In a machine of the character set forth,
a reproducer adapted to serve with a record,
a pintle on which said reproducer is mounted,
35 a Avorm-wheel on said pintle, a worm mesh-
ing with said worm-wheel, means for rotating
said worm, and means for moving said worm-
wheel and worm out of mesh with each other.
4. In a machine of the character set forth,
40 a reproducer adapted to serve with a record,
a pintle on which said reproducer is mounted,
a wTorm-wheel on said pintle, a worm mesh-
ing with said worm-wheel, means for rotat-
ing said worm, and means for moving said
45 pintle axially to engage said worm-wheel and
worm.
5. In a machine of the character set forth,
a reproducer adapted to serve with a record,
a pintle on which said reproducer is mounted,
50 a post in which said pintle is received, a
worm-wheel on said pintle, a worm meshing
with said worm-wheel, means for rotating
said worm, a screw in said post set axially to
said pintle and serving as a step therefor,
and means for turning said screw to lower 55
or raise said pintle and thereby engage or
disengage said worm-wheel and worm.
6. In a machine of the character set forth,
a motor, a record-carrying means rotated by
said motor, a post, a pintle received therein, 60
a horn mounted on said pintle, a reproducer
carried by said horn, a worm-wheel on said
pintle, a worm in mesh with said worm-
wheel, and connections from said motor to
said worm for rotating the latter. 65
7. In a machine of the character set forth,
a motor, a record-carrying means rotated
by said motor, a post, a pintle received there-
in, a horn mounted on said pintle, a repro-
ducer carried by said horn, a worm-wheel 70
on said pintle, a worm in mesh with said
worm-wheel, connections from said motor
to said worm for rotating the latter, and
means for lowering and raising said pintle
to engage and disengage said worm-wheel 7 5
and worm.
8. In' a machine of the character set forth,
a motor, a record-carrying means rotated
by said motor, a post, a pintle received there-
in, a bracket fixed on said post, a horn mount- 80
ed on said pintle, a reproducer carried by
said horn, a worm-wheel on said pintle, a
worm rotatabfy mounted in said bracket and
adapted to mesh with said worm-wheel, a
pulley on said worm, a pulley on a shaft of 85
said motor, a belt running on said pulleys
and serving to rotate said worm, a screw in
said post set axially to said pintle and serving
as a step therefor, and means for turning
said screw to lower or raise said pintle and 90
thereby engage or disengage said worm-
wheel and worm.
In testimony that I claim the invention
above set forth I affix my signature, in pres-
ence of two witnesses.
WILLIAM A. COOK.
Witnesses :
Charles R. Searle,
R. P. Schulze.
;
No. 878,513. PATENTED FEB. 11, 1908.
V. H. EMERSON.
YIELDING MATRIX FOR SOUND RECORDS.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 29, 1905.
ULCAiri
[7 > GlUXAsL4~ry f
7Nf NORRIS PETERS C- ■. WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
VICTOR H. EMERSON, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN GRAPHOPHONE
COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF WEST VIRGINIA.
YIELDING MATRIX FOR SOUND-RECORDS.
No. 878,513.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed June 29, 1905. Serial No. 267,590.
Patented Feb. 11, 1908.
To all wlwm it may concern:
Be it known that I, Victor H. Emerson,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of New York city, New York, have in-vented
5 a new and useful Improvement in Yielding
Matrices for Sound-Records, which improve-
ment is fully set forth in the following speci-
fication.
This invention relates to the production of
10 sound-records by the impressing of a suit-
able matrix into a disk or tablet of suitable
material. Such matrices are electroplates,
formed upon a wax-like original sound-rec-
ord by the ordinary process of electrolysis.
15 These electroplates are comparatively thin
sheets of metal which are backed up by
heavy plates to which they are soldered or
otherwise permanently secured. The sur-
face of such matrix is seldom or never a true
20 geometric plane, so that if a composite tablet
is to be impressed (to produce the sound-
record) some provision must be made to com-
pensate for this want of geometric trueness.
My present invention not only provides this
25 compensation, but also saves the time and
expense of providing the heavy backing for
the matrix, and incidentally permits a num-
ber of matrices to be stored in a smaU space.
My invention consists briefly in providing
30 a yielding substance between the matrix and
the platen, or the plunger, of the press, so as
to produce a yielding matrix which will
press with uniform pressure upon every por-
tion of the surface of the record or disk to
35 which it is applied.
In the drawings annexed hereto to illus-
trate an embodiment of my invention, Fig-
ure 1 is a conventional representation of a
press containing the invention.
40 In the press A is shown a recess containing
a sheet of a body B, which is a sheet of soft
rubber, felt, cloth, or any yielding substance.
Upon this body B rests the electroplate
matrix C (a thin sheet of electro-deposited
45 metal).
D represents the record-tablet, which is to
be impressed against the matrix by the plun-
ger E of the press. Of course, the plunger
or movable part of the press might be the
lower member, or both members might be 50
made to approach and recede from each
other; and, in like manner, the record-tablet
may lie at the bottom with the matrix on
top of that, and the yielding body B upon
top of that; and also the yielding body may 55
be interposed between the tablet B and the
press, but the best results are obtainable by
the construction shown.
Other changes and modifications may be
employed, but the spirit of my invention lies 60
in employing in connection with the thin
electroplate or matrix a yielding body be-
tween the back of said matrix and the press,
so as to dispense with the heavy backing
heretofore made integral with the matrix, 65
and to compensate for any departure from
absolute trueness of either the matrix sur-
face or the record-tablet surface.
Having thus described my invention, I
claim: 70
1. The combination with a press having
two relatively-movable members of a flexible
electro-deposited matrix of a sound-record, a
yielding body at the back of said matrix be-
tween the same and one member of the press, 75
and a tablet of comparatively rigid material
for making a pressed sound-record on the
other side of said matrix and between the
same and the other member of said press.
2. The combination of a thin and compara- 80
tively flexible electro-deposited matrix of a
sound-record and a backing of yielding ma-
terial therefor.
In testimony whereof I have signed this
specification in the presence of two subscrib- 85
ing witnesses.
VICTOR H. EMERSON.
Witnesses :
C. A. L. Massie,
R. L. Scott.
No. 878,516.
PATENTED FEB. 11, 1908.
I. G. FOSLER.
TALKING MACHINE..
APPLICATION FILED JULY 15, 1907.
c c
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
IRA G. FOSLER, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 878,516.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed July 15, 1907, Serial No. 383,804.
Patented Feb. 11, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Ira G. Fosler, a citi-
zen of the United States, residing in Chicago,
in the county of Cook and State of Illinois,
5 have invented a new and useful Improve-
ment in Talking-Machines, of which the fol-
lowing is a specification.
My invention relates to improvements in
talking-machines.
10 In the practical operation of talking-ma-
chines, considerable difficulty and annoy-
ance has heretofore been experienced from
the fact that the machine continues to run
after the sound reproduction on the record
15 has been completed, the "overrunning" of
the record as it is called, not only producing
a disagreeable noise but also tending to wear
away and injure the reproducing stylus.
The object of my invention is to provide
20 a simple, efficient and durable construction
of talking machine which will automatically
stop when the reproducing stylus reaches the
end of the sound record to. be reproduced.
My invention consists in the novel con-
25 struction of parts and devices and in the
novel combinations of parts and devices
herein shown and described by which this
object or result is practically accomplished.
In the accompanying drawing forming a
30 part of this specification, Figure 1 is a front
elevation of a talking machine embodying
my invention. Fig. 2 is a detail vertical
section on line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a
detail elevation showing the parts in a differ-
35 ent position from that illustrated in Fig. 1.
Fig. 4 is a detail plan view partly in hori-
zontal section.
In the drawing, A represents the frame of
the machine, B the reproducer having the
40 customary stylus o traveling in the sound
record groove c of the record C, D the rotary
mandrel or holder to which the record C is
secured, D1 the travehng carriage or sup-
port upon which the reproducer is mounted
45 and D2 the feed-screw for the reproducer
carriage.
E is the stopping and starting lever having
the customary brake arm E1 engaging the
brake wheel E2 of the governor or speed regu-
50 lating device. All these parts may be of any
suitable kind or construction customarily
employed in phonographs, graphophones or
other talking machines. For convenience
in the drawing, I have illustrated the same
55 as being of a well known phonograph con-
struction.
In order to automatically stop the machine
and further rotation of the record C when the
reproducer reaches the end of the sound
record groove c thereon, I connect with the 60
stop lever E of the talking machine an au- "
tomatically movable stop device or slide F
preferably having a slot / to receive the up-
per end of the stop lever E and a slot/1 to
receive the guide pin or projection g on the 65
clamp G, by which, in connection with the
clamp piece g1 and clamp screw g2, the auto-
matic stop device is mounted upon the frame
of the machine or its inclosing box A1. The
stop slide or device F is furnished with a 70
spring f2 engaging an integral lip f3 on the
stop slide at one end, and an upwardly pro-
jecting flange g3 on the fixed clamp G at the
other end. This spring, when the stop slide
is released by the releasing trigger H, serves 75
to automatically retract the stop slide and
operate the stop lever E of the machine.
The stop slide F is further provided with a
set or projection/4 which engages the toe h of
the releasing trigger H, which is pivoted to 80
the upright flange g3 of the clamp G. The
releasing trigger H is preferably not directly
engaged by the travehng carriage but its up-
right arm h1 is furnished with an adjustable
arm h2 which is so engaged by the reproducer 85
carriage to operate the releasing trigger and
release the stop slide when the reproducer
carriage moves to the right to the required
extent or until the reproducer stylus comes
to the end of the sound record groove c in the 90
record C. The releasing trigger is provided
with an adjustable arm h2 so that the auto-
matic stop device may be set to operate at
different positions of the reproducer carriage
as the sound record grooves cover varying 95
lengths of the record C according to the
length of the song or piece of music that may
be recorded thereon. The adjustable arm
h2 is preferably of sector shape and furnished
with a pivot slot h3 at its lower end and a 100
curved slot A4 at its upper end having a
plurality of notches h? therein to engage the
rivet h6 in the upper arm h1 of the releasing
trigger. The adjustable arm is secured to
the releasing trigger at its lower end by a 10 5
rivet Ti1 . By simply slipping the releasing
trigger slightly upward, the upper rivet h6
will be free from the notches hb, and then the
adjustable arm can be swung to either side
into position for the upper rivet A6 to enter 110
another notch h5 in the adjustable arm h2.
_ In operation when the reproducer carriage
878,516
moves to the right as indicated in Fig. 1 of
the drawing, to the required extent, it en-
gages the adjustable arm ~hz of the releasing
trigger and thus releases the spring actuated
5 stop slide F and causes the same to auto-
matically operate the stop lever E and stop
the machine.
The reproducer carriage D1 has a handle or
pin d which engages the adjustable arm ~h%.
10 I claim: —
1. In a talking machine, the combination
with the rotary record holder, reproducer,
reproducer carriage and the stop lever, of an
automatic stop slide having a setting pro-
15 jection, a spring for actuating said stop slide,
a clamp upon which said stop slide recipro-
cates, a releasing trigger having an adjust-
able arm in the path of the reproducer car-
riage to automatically stop the machine and
20 prevent overrunning of the sound record,
said releasing trigger having an upright arm
furnished with upper and lower rivets, and
said adjustable arm having a pivot slot at
its lower end and a curved slot at its upper
25 end furnished with a plurality of adjusting
notches adapted to engage said upper rivet,
substantially as specified.
2. The automatic stop attachment for
talking machines comprising a clamp having
a movable clamp piece and clamp screw and 30
provided with an upturned flange, a stop
slide having a slot at one end to receive the
stop lever of the talking machine, and a slot
at the other end for connection with said
clamp, a spring connecting said stop slide 35
and clamp, a set projection on the stop slide
and a releasing trigger furnished with an ad-
justable arm having a pivot slot and a curved
slot furnished with a plurality of adjusting
notches, substantially as specified. 40
3. The automatic stop attachment for
talking machines comprising a clamp, a stop
slide mounted thereon, and having a set pro-
jection for engagement with the releasing
trigger and a slot to receive the stop lever of 45
the talking machine, a spring connecting said
stop slide and clamp and a releasing trigger
mounted pivotally upon said clamp, said
releasing trigger having an adjustable arm
furnished with a pivot slot at its lower end 50
and a curved slot at its upper end provided
with a plurality of adjusting notches, sub-
stantially as specified.
IRA G. FOSLER.
Witnesses :
H. M. MlTNDAY,
Edmund Adcock.
No. 878,547. PATENTED FEB. 11, 1908.
T. H. MACDONALD.
PRODUCTION OF DISK SOUND RECORDS.
APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 8t 1906.
DIE
BE
lis
MATRIX*^
BODY OF EARTHY OR
[OTHER PLASTIC MATERIAL
I PAPER DISC COATED
WITH SHELLAC COMPOSITION
cUvoewtot
n^/;£c>r*7 ctsS y^i /h <2cao**o cty
QkKUiXM\iS.
THE NORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, O C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS H. MACDONALD, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN
GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF
WEST VIRGINIA.
PRODUCTION OF DISK SOUND-RECORDS.
No. 878,547.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed September 8, 1906. Serial No, 333,812.
Patented Feb. 11, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas H. Macdon-
ald, a citizen of the United States, and a
resident of Bridgeport, Connecticut, have,
5 invented a new and useful Production of
Disk Sound-Records, which improvement is
fully set forth in the following specification.
The present invention relates more particu-
larly to the manufacture of disk sound-rec-
10 ords, and has for its object to cheapen the
production of such records, and at the same
time to improve their quality, especially in re-
spect to strength, durability, and uniformity
of product.
15 Sound-records of the disk type are, and
for many years have been, made of compo-
sitions of heavy earthy material compacted
by means of shellac. Various earthy mate-
rials have been used, in varying proportions,
20 each manufacturer having his own formula,
but shellac is an essential ingredient of all,
and is that which contributes chiefly to the
cost of the composition. Generally, the
shellac is distributed uniformly throughout
25 the mass, its primary purpose being as a
binding material. It has, however, been
discovered that the essential advantage of
the presence of shellac in these compositions
when used for sound-records, is the glazed
30 surface imparted by that material, and for
which no substitute has as yet been found.
The effect of the peculiar surface due to the
presence of shellac is to cause the reproduc-
ing stylus to slide easily and smoothly along
35 the record groove, thus producing good tone
quality and also prolonging the life time of
the record. Without shellac in proper pro-
portion in the surface, the reproduction
would be extremely harsh, and the record
40 would be destroyed after a very few repro-
ductions. As the result of this discovery of
the special function of the shellac it has been
found that sound-records of the best quality
can be produced by confining shellac sub-
45 stantially to the surface of the record tablet,
and employing another material as a binder
in the body of the tablet. The improve-
ment just referred to is described in the Hoyt
and Gaven Patents Nos. 808,842, 808,843,
50 and 809,263, all dated January 2, 1906. The
result is a tablet of practically homogeneous
composition, quite indistinguishable in ap-
pearance from, and exhibiting the same
fracture as, sound-records wherein shellac is
55 used uniformly throughout the tablet. By
this Hoyt and Gaven process a very large
economy is effected in the manufacture of the
sound-records.
In "carrying out the Hoyt and Gaven proc-
ess care must be taken to form a continuous 60
layer of the surfacing material over the infe-
rior body material. Should the latter come
to the surface, even for a very small area, a
soft spot would result, and the sound-record
would be defective. As a precaution against 65
such possibility, and against lack of care on
the part of the workman, the surface layer is
made of greater thickness than is necessary
relative to the depth of the record-groove.
In carrying out the present invention, 70
paper (preferably hard paper) is cut into
disks of proper size, and I may then proceed
either to coat the paper with shellac solution
and dust it with shellac powder, or I may
take the dry paper and dust it with the dry 75
shellac powder and then apply heat. The
''shellac powder" employed may be more or
less pxire shellac, or may consist of shellac
and other ingredients and any desired color-
ing matter, and the term "shellac powder" 80
as hereinafter employed is intended to in-
clude both the pure shellac and shellac with
other ingredients. In either case the result
is an article that somewhat resembles ordi-
nary sand-paper in appearance, the particles 85
or granules of the shellac powder adhering
firmly and closely to the surface of the paper.
These coated paper disks may be prepared
in quantities and delivered to the workmen
when needed for making records. To com- 90
plete the record, the shellac-dusted paper
disk is placed face downward upon the heated
matrix, a sufficient amount of plastic back-
ing-material is placed on the back of the
paper, and the whole is pressed in the usual 95
manner. The finished record shows no sign
of the paper, which is concealed by the sur-
facing of the shellac powder. This shellac
powder may be made of more# or less pure
shellac, or may contain other ingredients 100
such as celluloid, etc., and any desired color-
ing matter. Furthermore, I may apply a
disk of paper at the back of the backing-
material, so that the finished article will have
one or two (if the second sheet of paper be 105
employed) sheets as a binder, which serves
to reinforce and stiffen the record.
Instead of applying the backing to the
shellac-dusted paper while the latter is upon
the matrix and compressing the whole so as 110
Q
878,547
to unite the backing and present the record-
surface simultaneously, the shellac-dusted
paper may be applied to a suitable backing,
and such prepared articles kept in stock and
5 subsequently pressed against a matrix.
Other variations may be made in the proc-
I ess without departing from the essence
thereof; and it is apparent that the process
is not necessarily limited to a composition or
10 powder containing shellac.
The advantage of this process is, first, its
great economy: The amount of powder
necessary to coat the paper is only from one-
half to three-quarters of an ounce, whereas
15 the smallest amount that can be employed
under the present process is about two ounces ;
moreover, in making such records in a fac-
tory employing hundreds of pressmen, there
is inevitably considerable waste, owing to
20 carelessness, but in carrying out my present
invention the preparation of the shellac-
dusted paper would be in a special room and
by men trained to do just that work and
, nothing else. This shows a saving of at least
25 seventy-five per cent, of shellac-powder
which is an element of great expense in the
making of sound-records. The second ad-
vantage is that records can be made more
rapidly in this manner than in the old way.
30 A third advantage is, as already indicated,
that the sheet of paper seems to stiffen the
record and renders it more durable.
In the accompanying drawing is shown
part of a press for pressing disk sound-rec-
35 ords, and also a disk of paper coated with
the record-surface material, and a backing of
earthy (or other suitable plastic) material,
therein, illustrating the method by which
disk sound-records are produced according
40 to the present invention.
The product of the above-described proc-
ess is not claimed herein, being made the
subject-matter of a separate application.
Having thus described my invention, I
45 claim:
1. The process which consists in coating
sheets of paper with plastic material, and
uniting two or more coated sheets to form a
record tablet.
2. The process of manufacturing disk 50
sound-records, which consists of applying
shellac-powder to a disk of paper, applying
the same upon a record-matrix, applying
suitable backing-material upon the back of
the paper, and compressing the same. 55
3. The process of manufacturing disk
sound-records, which consists of applying
shellac-powder to a disk of paper, applying
the same upon a record-matrix, applying
suitable backing-material upon the back of 60
the paper, and compressing the same under
heat.
4. The process of manufacturing disk
sound-records, which consists of applying
a shellac solution to a disk of paper, dusting «5
the same with shellac powder, drying it, and
compressing the same with a suitable backing
against a record-matrix.
5. The process of manufacturing disk
sound-records, which consists of applying 70
a shellac solution to a disk of paper, dusting
the same with shellac powder, drying it, and
compressing the same with a suitable back-
ing against a record-matrix in the presence
of heat. 75
6. The process of manufacturing a disk
sound-record, which consists of applying
shellac powder to a paper disk, heating the
same causing it to adhere, and subsequently
compressing the same with a suitable back- 80
ing against a record-matrix.
7. The process of manufacturing disk
sound-records, which consists of preparing
a shellac dusted paper, applying the same to
a suitable backing, and compressing the 85
whole against a record-matrix.
8. The process of manufacturing disk
sound-records, which consists of preparing a
shellac-dusted paper, applying the same to a
suitable backing, and compressing the whole 90
against a record-matrix under heat.
In testimony whereof I have signed this
specification in the presence of two subscrib-
ing witnesses.
THOMAS H. MACDONALD.
Witnesses :
A. B. Keough,
R. T. Pitt.
No. 878,931.
PATENTED FEB. 11. 1908.
H. S. BERLINER.
METHOD OF MAKING GRAMOPHONE RECORD TABLETS.
APPLICATION TILED NOV. 11, 1907.
Shellac
FIBER
Filler
Pigment
Incorporated
by Heating &y
Kneading-
Solid Mass
Reduced to a
FINE POWDER
by
Grinding.
Powder
Reduced to a
Fluid condition\
by the addition)
of a liquid.
(Alcohol).
Viscous Fluid
Applied to a
Base, or to a
Sub -Base.
'Applied Surface]
^Rendered Plastic)
by
Heating.
^Witnesses
A.&S&ik
Sound-record
pressed into
surface.
3*voe-n.tot
a«o
THE NORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HERBERT S. BERLINER, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA.
METHOD OF MAKING GRAMOPHONE-RECORD TABLETS.
No. 878,931.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Feb. 11, 1908.
Application filed November 11, 1907, Serial No, 401,725.
To all wlwm it may concern:
Be it known that I, Herbert S. Berliner,
a citizen of the United States of America, re-
siding at Washington, in the District of
5 Columbia, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Method of Making
Gramophone-Record Tablets; and I do here-
by declare the following to be a full, clear,
and exact description of the invention, such
10 as will enable others skilled in the art to
which it appertains to make and use the same,
reference being had to the accompanying
drawings, which form a part of this specifi-
cation.
15 This invention has reference to the manu-
facture of gramophone sound-record tablets,
and has for its object to reduce the cost of
production without impairing the durability
or wearing qualities of the record.
20 In carrying my invention into effect, I
first make a mixture of the ingredients or
elements that ultimately form the surface in
which the sound-grooves are impressed, and
such mixture may be made up of barites,
25 silica or other earthy matter, a fiber, as cot-
ton-flock, asbestos, shoddy or fight fibrous
material, with shellac, and when desired
coloring matter may be added.
The above named ingredients or the
30 equivalents thereof are thoroiighly incor-
porated or mixed together b}~ heating and
kneading, the mixture being rolled into
sheets forming a solid mass when cool. This
solidified base composed of granular ma-
35 terial, a fiber, and shellac, is reduced by
grinding to a fine powder, and such grinding
of the hard or solid mass which has a fiber
intermixed therewith produces a fine powder
in which the fiber is thoroughly incorporated.
40 It is important to note that, in order to grind
the fiber into a powder, it must be incor-
porated into a hard cold mass forming a part
thereof, and this is one of the particulars of
my improvement over other methods which
45 enables me to subsequently produce an en-
tirely homogeneous fibrous fluid for coating
the hard base of my record.
Having reduced the fibrous mass to a fine
powder, I next bring it to fluidity by the ad-
50 dition of alcohol, or other fluid solvent of
shellac, the amount of alcohol or liquid that
is added being sufficient to reduce the dry
powder to a viscous fluid, and such fluid is ap-
plied either to one or both sides of a solid base
55 or foundation, for instance, a disk of paste-
board, wood, metal or resinous composition,
or to a sub-base, as a sheet of paper, which
may then be reinforced by a backing, and
when one coat or covering has been applied
and has dried a second coat may be applied, 60
and so on until a surface of the desired thick-
ness is secured. The coat or coatings may
be applied by a brush or roller, and when the
solvent has evaporated, the mixture solidi-
fies and forms a hard coating. Before im- 65
pressing the sound-record into the surface of
the tablet or disk it is heated to render the
sound-record surface plastic, after which the
sound-grooves are impressed therein in the
usual manner, the disk being cooled while 70
under pressure and while in close contact
with the sound-record matrix.
I desire to cover in this application the
method described for producing an entirely
homogeneous fibrous fluid for making a 75
gramophone record surface, and I do not
broadly claim herein the general idea of coat-
ing a disk with a gramophone record com-
position in fluid form, drying the latter and
impressing a record therein. 80
The method or process is illustrated by
the accompanying diagram.
I claim :
1. The method of making gramophone
sound-records, consisting ' in kneading the 85
materials which are to form the record sur-
face, one of the materials being a fiber, the
mixture being effected in the presence of
heat, grinding the resulting mixture when
cooled into a fine powder, mixing the powder 90
with a proper liquid for changing the same
into a viscous fluid, applying one or more
coats of such fluid to one or both sides of a
disk, drying the surface, and impressing a
sound-record into said surface-coated-disk 95
under heat and pressure.
2. The herein described method of making
sound-record tablet surfaces for gramo-
phones, which consists in kneading under
heat the materials, including a fiber, which 100
ultimately form the record-surface, grinding
the' resultant mass after cooling to a fine
powder, reducing the powder to a viscous
fluid by mixing the same with a liquid, ap-
plying one or more coats of said fluid to a 105
base or sub-base, to form when dried and
subsequently softened by heat a surface in
which the sound-grooves are impressed.
3. The herein described method of making
a sound-record surface for gramophone tab- 110
lets consisting in incorporating by heating
and kneading an earthy base, shellac, and
878,931
10
fiber, to form when cool a solid mass, reduc-
ing such mass by grinding to a fine powder,
mixing the powder with alcohol to form a
viscous fluid, covering a base or sub-base
with the mixture and when dry softening the
applied mixture by heat preparatory to im-
pressing the sound-grooves therein.
4. The method for making a surface for
sound-record tablets, which consists in in-
corporating by kneading under heat an
earthy granular base, fiber and shellac, with
or without a pigment, cooling the same to
form a solid mass, grinding the mass to a fine
powder, mixing such powder with a fluid to
reduce the same to fluidity, applying such
mixture to a suitable base or sub-base to
form when dried and subsequently softened
by heat a surface in which the sound-grooves
are impressed.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
HERBERT S. BERLINER.
Witnesses :
David Rothschild,
Josephine Ames.
15
20
No. 879,288.
PATENTED FEB. 18, 1908.
W. C. MAYO & J. HOULEHAN.
ANNUNCIATOR.
APPLICATION PILED MAT 22, 1907. „„„„„,„ „„„„„ ,
4 8HEET8— SHEET 1.
Witnesses
WtilzamdMzm
^ V ^^"Zf " Ty'^-XZjtZ. 4L Inventors
3rfi(si*f»<
By
(^&Z&^~>-%teL ,
<ZA*~
Attorneys
TH£ NQRBIS PETERS CO-, WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 879,288.
PATENTED FEB. 18, 1908.
W. C. MAYO & J. HOULEHAN.
ANNUNCIATOR.
APPLICATION PILED MAY 22, 1907.
4 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
Jfy.2
Witnesses:
WW
By
^9:cs^^u
tx<t^
A TTORNEYS
THE NOHRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 879,288.
PATENTED FEB. 18, 1908-
W. C. MAYO & J. HOULEHAN.
ANNUNCIATOR.
APPLICATION FILED MAT 22, 1907.
i SHEETS-SHEET 3.
**-5r ^'i
M ^JZjS
'^%'ms. ■**
j&^TK
KJ4
WITNESSES: imiJfia&faW\
39
Inventors
By
Ff;aCyhu<uj
Attorneys
THE NORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, O. C.
No. 879,288.
PATENTED FEB. 18, 1908.
W. C. MAYO & J. HOULEHAN.
ANNUNCIATOR.
APPLICATION PILED MAT 22, 1907. „„„„»,„ „„„„„,.
4 SHEETS— SHEET i.
Witnesses.
Inventors
frT.efy^
By
ou*^
Attorneys
THE WO««15 PETEHS CO., WASHtNCTON, O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM C. MAYO AND JOHN HOULEHAN, OF EL PASO, TEXAS, ASSIGNORS OF ONE-THIRD
TO GEORGE E. BRIGGS, OF BARSTOW, TEXAS.
ANNUNCIATOR.
No. 879,288.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed May 22, 1907. Serial No. 375,090.
Patented Feb. 18, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, William C. Mayo
and John Houlehan, citizens of the United
States, residing at El Paso, in the county of
5 El Paso and State of Texas, have invented a
new and useful Annunciator, of which the
following is a specification.
This invention has reference to improve-
ments in annunciators designed more par-
10 ticularly for the phonographic announcing of
stations and other routine information on
cars or trains of any character.
The invention is designed for use in con-
nection with a complete traction system
15 which we have devised, and since in this sys-
tem the operations are mostly automatic in
character, it becomes necessary that all an-
nouncements, such as the names of stations,
calls to meals, and other matters which are
20 usually called out by a train official shall be
made by phonographic means and shall be
so timed and arranged that each passenger
shall surely hear the announcement.
In the system in which these annunciators
25 are designed to be used it is impracticable to
use spring motors for the purpose of driving
the instruments and so connections are made
with the air system of a train whereby the air
pressure, which, in accordance with our gen-
30 eral system is constantly maintained, is em-
ployed to drive the various parts of the an-
nunciator and to actuate the several parts
which are necessary for the fully automatic
operation of the devices comprised in the
35 present invention.
The present invention comprises a sound-
reproducing means utilizing a sound record,
preferably of the cylindrical type although
with slight modifications the same instru-
40 mentalities may be used in connection with
sound records of the disk type. In either
case the sound records should be of material
capable of numerous reproductions, but as
such record materials are found on the mar-
45 ket and sound record tablets have been made
from such materials, it is unnecessary to con-
sider herein the character of the record.
The invention comprises a means under the
control of the air pressure in the system used
50 for braking and other purposes, for setting
up rotary motion of the cylindrical sound
record and feeding the sound-box across the
record to such extent and at such times as
may be necessary to cause the desired an-
55 nouncements to be made.
In order that the announcements may be
made at the proper time, the motor for the
phonographic annunciator may be under the
control of a release mechanism which may be
operated from fixed points along the roadway; 60
and provision is also made for conducting the
reproduced sounds to points adjacent to the
seats occupied by the passengers on the car
so that each passenger may receive an indi-
vidual announcement in spoken words. 65
The invention will be best understood by a
consideration of the practical embodiment
thereof, and, therefore, we will proceed to
describe such practical embodiment in con-
nection wi.th the accompanying drawings 70
forming part of this specification, in which
drawings,
Figure 1 is a plan view, with parts in sec-
tion, of a phonographic reproducer of the
cylindrical record tablet type arranged to 75
operate automatically as many times as de-
sired; Fig. 2 is a skeleton view of the driving
mechanism for the structure shown in Fig. 1 ;
Fig. 3 is a cross section of the cylinder for re-
ceiving air for driving the mechanism; Fig. 4 80
is an elevation, partly in section, of the mech-
anism employed for returning the sound-box
to its initial position after having traversed
the length of a record cylinder; Figs. 5 to 11,
both inclusive, are detail views of various 85
parts of the mechanism; Fig. 12 is a sectional
view, partly in diagram, of a means for silenc-
ing the reproduction without throwing the
mechanism out of action; Fig. 13 is a plan
view of a portion of the same; and Fig. 14 90
is a detail view of a portion of the structure
shown in Fig. 12.
Referring to the drawings, and more par-
ticularly to Fig. 1, there is shown a cylin-
drical record tablet 1 of the ordinary t3^pe 95
upon which there are presumed to be such
announcements as desired, say the announce-
ments of the stations being approached and
their character, and such other announce-
ments as it may be desirable to make. 100
Since our system contemplates the elimi-
nation, to a great extent, of train attendants,
it becomes, of course, imperative that the
announcements be made at the proper times
and in proper sequence and that a single rec- 10 5
ord should contain all the announcements
that are to be made during a trip, and, in re-
verse order, for the return trip where it is not
practicable to change the record at the end
of a run. For this reason the record 1 will, 110
a
879,288
of course, be made of sufficient' size for the
purpose.
The record 1 is mounted upon a mandrel 2
such as is usually emplo3^ed in connection
5 with sound-reproducing machines of the cy-
lindrical record type, and this mandrel is
fast on a shaft 3 journaled in a suitable bear-
ing 4 at one end and in a suitable bearing 5 at
the other end. These bearings may be of
10 the pointed-pin type to reduce friction and to
insure the centering of the shaft. The bear-
ing 4 may be provided with the usual gate
mechanism 6 whereby the bearing may be
removed from the shaft sufficiently to allow
15 the removal and replacing of the record 1
upon the mandrel 2. Since this gate may be
oi the usual type, it is unnecessary to describe
it in detail.
It will be seen that it is necessary that the
20 record tablet should always be placed upon
the mandrel in the same relative position
thereto, and for this purpose there is secured
to the smaller end of the mandrel a slotted
plate 7 by means of a thumb-screw 8,- or, if
25 desired, an ordinary screw, passing through
the slot in the plate 7. One end of this plate
7 is pointed, as indicated at 9, and enters a
notch formed in the end of the record tab-
let 1.
30 There is provided a sound-box 10 which
may be of the ordinary reproducer sound-
box type, and, therefore, needs no descrip-
tion here, but the manner of supporting this
sand-box and of operating the same to bring
35 it into proper relation with the record will
appear further on.
Between the mandrel and the bearing 5
the shaft 3 is provided with a continuous
screw-thread 11, after the manner of the or-
40 dinary reproducing machine using cylin-
drical records, and adapted to this screw-
thread there is a half-nut 12, best shown in
Fig. 8. This half-nut 12 is at the end of an
arm 13 terminating in two parallel fingers 14
45 appropriately spaced apart. The half-nut
12 is composed of a suitabby shaped block
seated between the fingers 14 and provided
with lugs 15 projecting into slots 16 formed
in the free ends of the fingers 14 so that this
50 half-nut may move longitudinally between
the fingers 14 but can have no other move-
ment with relation thereto. It will be un-
derstood, of course, that though the lugs 15
are shown about midway of the half-nut 12
55 they may be otherwise located, and other
means for guiding the half-nut 12 between
the fingers 14 may be provided. Extending
through the arm 13 between the fingers 14
is a screw 17 having an elongated, smooth
60 shank and a short screw extension 18, which
latter enters a suitable nut formed in the
body of the half -nut 12 to such an extent
that the shoulder formed by the junction of
the shank 17 with the screw extension 18
65 abuts against the rear of the half-nut 12.
75
80
85
90
95
Surrounding the shank of the screw 17 be-
tween the half -nut 12 and the inner face of
the arm 13 there is a helical spring 19 tending
to maintain the half-nut in its outermost
position but yielding when the nut engages 70
with the screw-threads 11 on the shaft 3, so
that the nut may be firmly seated on the
screw-threads without danger of being dis-
placed therefrom by the shocks incident to
the movement of the car.
Mounted upon the end of the shaft 3 near
the bearing 5 is a gear pinion 20 by means of
which a rotative movement is imparted to
the shaft 3 in a manner to be described with
relation to Fig. 2 and to which reference will
be made further on.
Parallel with the shaft 3 there is another
shaft 21 which, because of the fact that it
makes but a partial revolution in operation,
will hereinafter be referred to as a rock-shaft.
One end of this rock-shaft is carried by a
pointed bearing 22 consisting of a cylindrical
block housed in a fixed sleeve 23 upon a suit-
able support coming from the base plate of
the machine, which latter is not shown in
the drawings. The block 22 is provided
with a reduced stem 24 extending through
the sleeve 23 and also through a bushing 25
having exterior tlireads fitted to other
threads tapped into the end of the sleeve 23,
and this bushing is held in place by a lock nut
26. Surrounding the stem 24 within the
sleeve 23 and confined between the end of
the block 22 and the inner end of the bush-
ing 25 there is a helical spring 27. Fast on
the rock-shaft 21 adjacent to the bearing 22
is an arm 28 connected by a suitable spring
29 to a bracket 30 fixed on the support of the
sleeve 23 or coming from an}T other adjacent
fixed portion of the machine, and the spring
29 is of sufficient strength to at all times tend
to rock the shaft 21 in a direction to cause
the arm 28 to approach the bracket 30.
About midway of the length of the rock-
shaft 21 it is formed with a piston 31 and the
rock-shaft carries a hollow cylinder 32 in-
closing said piston 31. That end of the cyl-
inder 32 toward the bearing 22 is closed by a
packing gland 33 inclosing suitable packing
34 to render this end of the piston air-tight 115
where it surrounds the shaft 21. The other
end of the piston is closed by a simple screw-
h'ead 35 serving to maintain the cylinder in
concentric relation to the shaft 21. In order
that the cylinder 32 may not turn upon the
shaft 21, although movable longitudinafiy
thereon as will hereinafter appear, the shaft
21 is provided with a spline 36 passing
through a suitable slot in the head 35. This
spline 36 is of sufficient length to permit the
full longitudinal movement desired for the
cylinder 32.
The end of the rock shaft 21 remote from
the end supported by the bearing 22 is formed
into a head 37, the end face of which is curved 130
100
105
110
120
125
879,288
on the arc of a circle, and this end face fits the
similarly curved face of a fixed bearing 38 on
the end of a standard 39 fast on the base or
other fixed part of the machine. The bear-
5 ing 38 is best shown in Figs. 9 and 10. Exr
tending; through the shaft 21 from the head
37 to and through the piston 31 is a conduit
40, and this conduit at the head 37 opens into
a port 41. The bearing 3S is provided with
10 a through port 42 and another port 43 along-
side of the through port 42 but leading radi-
ally, by means of a duct 44, through the
bearing to a coupling head 45 from which
leads a pipe 46 to a source of air supply under
15 pressure, which may be the air pressure sup-
ply for the brake system of the train and for
other purposes. Now, when the rock-shaft
21 is moved about its axis in the manner to
be hereinafter described, the port 41 ^v ill be
20 brought into coincidence with one or the other
of the ports 42 and 43 in the bearing head 38.
The sound reproducer box 10 is secured to
the cylinder 32 by means of an arm 47 so as
to be supported by and move with said cylin-
25 der, and the arm 13 carrying the half-nut 12
is likewise secured to said cylinder to be sup-
ported by and move therewith.
The relation of the several parts is such
that when the rock-shaft 21 is moved under
the action of the spring 29 and the cylinder is
likewise moved with the rock-shaft, the port
41 is brought into coincidence with the port
43 and air under pressure therefore is admit-
ted by the conduit 40 to the side of the piston
31 adjacent to the packing gland 33. The
result is that the reaction of this compressed
air will force the cylinder toward the right as
viewed in Fig. 1 and this movement will con-
tinue until stopped by means to be herein-
after described, which means also cause the
movement of the rock-shaft 21 on its axis in
a direction to bring the sound-box into oper-
ative relation with the beginning of the sound
record 1 and to bring the half -nut 12 into op-
erative relation to the screw-threads 1 1 . This
last movement of the rock-shaft 2 1 brings the
port 41 into coincidence with the port 42 in
the head 38 and as this port 42 is open to the
air the supply of compressed air within the
cylinder, admitted through the conduit 40,
now exhausts through the port 42 and the
cylinder is free to be moved under the action
of the screw-threads 11 and nut 12 in a direc-
tion to cause the reproduction of the sounds
recorded in the tablet 1.
In order to provide for the maintenance of
the half-nut 12 in contact with the screw-
threads 11 and for the maintenance of the
sound-box 10 in operative relation to the rec-
ord groove in the tablet 1, and to disconnect
both the half -nut 12 and the sound-box 10
from their respective parts of the reproduc-
ing mechanism when the end of the record is
reached, and to return the sound-box and
half-nut to the beginning of the record and
70
80
85
90
95
screw-threads respectively and to put them
in operative relation thereto, there is pro-
vided a means which will now be described,
this means being shown in Figs. 1, 4, 5, 6, 7
and 11.
Fast on the cylinder 32 about midway of
its length there is an arm 48 projecting in a
direction opposite from that of the arms 13
and 47, and this arm 48 terminates in a roller
49. In the path of this roller there is a 75
track 50 suitably supported upon posts 51
rising from the base plate or other fixed por-
tion of the machine, and at a higher level and
overlying the track 50 there is another track
52 secured to the track 50 by yokes 53 and to
one of the standards 51 by a yoke 54, the two
tracks thus being parallel but spaced apart,
while, for a purpose which will hereinafter
appear, the track 52 is shorter than the
track 50 and terminates at one end 55 at a
short distance from an upturned end 56 of
the track 50 to form a throat 57 between
these ends of the tracks, while at the other
ends the tracks terminate in the same verti-
cal plane. The upper end of the standard 51
adjacent to the two matched ends of the
track sections 50 and 52 is formed with a
dovetail slot 58 receiving a dovetail tongue
59 on a sliding block 60 movable from a posi-
tion coincident with the top of the track 50
to a point coincident with the top of the
track 52.
It will be observed that the top of the
track 50 is level while the top of the track 52
is inclined, as indicated at 61, and the top
of the block 60 is formed with an upturned
stop lug 62 and the upper end of this block
60 is also inclined, as shown at 63, similar to
the inclined face 61. Now, let it be sup-
posed that the roller 49 is traveling along the 105
inclined track surface 61. In this position
the roller itself is inclined and bears evenly
on said track. The direction of travel of the
roller 49 under the impulse of the screw 11
is toward the left as viewed in Fig. 4, and no
ultimately this roller reaches the throat 57
and" drops down therethrough to the track
50. Since the arm 48 carrying the roller 49
moves through an arc about the axis of the
rock-shaft 21, the drop from the track 52 to 115
the track 50 brings the roller 49 into good
bearing contact with the level surface of the
track 50. In this position of the parts the
cylinder 32 is impelled by the air pressure
toward the right as viewed in Figs. 1 and 4,
and the roller therefore travels toward the
right along the track 50 until it reaches the
right-hand end thereof.
It is necessary now to consider the struc-
tures disposed at the right-hand end of the
tracks 50 and 52. Adjacent to the corre-
sponding standard 51 there is a cylinder 64
having formed on one side a bracket 65 ter-
minating at the upper end in a twin-head 66.
Within the cylinder there is located a piston 130
100
120
125
879,288
67 at the lower end of the piston-rod 68 pass-
ing through a suitable screw-plug 69 at the
upper end of the cylinder, which screw-plug
constitutes a bearing for the piston-rod 68.
' 5 Interposed between the upper face of the pis-
ton 67 and the lower face of the screw-plug
69 there is a helical spring 70, the purpose of
which will presently appear. The upper end
of the piston-rod 68 is passed through a suit-
10 able bearing formed in a bracket 71 fast in
the upper end of the standard 51 at this end
of the structure. The piston-rod 68 is pro-
vided with a side stud 72 engaging in a suit-
able bearmg 73 formed in a lever arm 74 piv-
15 otally supported in one portion of the twin-
head 66. This lever arm is extended beyond
its bearing in the twin-head 66 and is there
provided with an angle arm 75 terminating
in an eye 76 receiving one end of a spring 77
20 to be hereinafter referred to. The other end
of the lever 74 is formed into a head 78 ar-
ranged to engage under the block 60, and a
stop 79 formed on one end of a bracket 80
extending downward from the track 50 is ar-
25 ranged in the path of this block 60 so that
it may descend for only a definite distance
which is sufficient to bring the track surface
63 coincident with the surface of the track
50. The lower end of the cylinder 64 re-
30 ceives the end of a pipe 81 coming from a
valve mechanism to be presently described,
The action of the spring 70 before referred
to is to depress the piston 67 and thereby
carry the lever 74 to its lowermost position
35 until the block 60, which is of sufficient
weight to fall by gravitv, is arrested by the
stop 79.
. Hvotally supported in the twin-head 66 is
another lever 82 having an arm 83 extending
40 away from said head and connected to the
end of the spring 77 remote from the end con-
nected to the arm 75. The other end of the
lever 82 is pivotally connected to a slide 84
mounted at the lower end in a suitable guide-
45 way in the bracket 80 and at the upper end
passing through a suitable guideway in the
corresponding end of the track 50 and adja-
cent to the block 60.
Assuming that the piston 67 is at its lower-
50 most point of travel, the levers 74 and 82 are
also depressed and the block 60 has its track
section 63 coincident with the track 50, and
the slide 84, the upper end 85 of which is
shaped as shown, is also lowered to such an
55 extent that the said end 85 is below the level
of the upper surface of the track 50.
Returning now to the roller 49, which
when last spoken of was supposed to be ap-
proaching the end of the track adjacent to
60 the block 60. This roller, continuing its
travel toward the right, ultimately passes
upon the track section 63 of the block 60,
being stopped by the lug 62. When the
roller has reached this point it has caused, in
65 a manner to be presently described, the air
to be admitted through the pipe 81 to the
lower side of the piston 67 in the cylinder 64.
This air coming from the train service pipe
is under pressure and lifts the piston 67
against the action of the spring 70 and there- 70
by causes the lever 74 to also move upward.
However, the head 78 of the lever 74 is so
related to the block 60 that in the initial po-
sition of the lever 74 the head 78 is some dis-
tance below the lower end of the block 60. 75
Consequently, the lever 74 must move some
little distance before it engages the block 60.
This causes the arm 75 to move away from
the arm 83 and thereby the spring 77 is put
under tension until it overcomes the weight go
of the lever 82 and the slide 84, which latter
is moved up until it reaches the lower side of
the track 52 in which position it is in the path
of the roller 49 and the latter is effectually
prevented from returning to the track 50. 85
By the time this movement has been accom-
plished the head 78 of the lever 74 has come
in contact with the block 60 and then the
continued upward movement of the piston
67 forces the block 60, together with the 90
roller 49 and arm 48, upward until the track
section 63 is coincident with the inclined sur-
face 61 of the track 52, the end of the track
52 preventing the roller 49 from elevating
the track 63 after it has passed the upper end 95
85 of the slide 84.
Now, in order to insure the operation of
the piston 67 there is provided in the bracket
80' a valve mechanism by means of which air
coming from a suitable source of air pressure 100
through a pipe 86 is directed to the pipe 81
and then the air supply is cut off from the
pipe 81 and the air in the cylinder 64 is per-
mitted to escape. For this purpose there is
mounted in the bracket 80 a rotary valve, 105
best shown in Figs. 6 and 7. This valve con-
sists of a fixed seat member 87 and a rotary
member 88 held to the member 87 by means
of a suitable screw 89, and the rotary valve
member 88 is held in a certain normal posi- 110
tion by means of a spring 90 carried by the
screw 89 and engaging said rotary member
88. Fast on the rotary member 88 there is
an arm 91 having an extended bearing sur-
face 92 arranged to engage in a recess 93 in 115
the track 50, but normally held out of this
recess by the spring 90 before referred to, a
stop-screw 94 determining the extent of
travel of the arm 91 away from the recess 93.
The fixed member 87 of the valve is pro- 120
vided with two ports 95 and 96, the port 95
being in communication through a suitable
duct 97 with the air supply pipe 86, while the
port 96 is in communication through a suit-
able duct 98 with the pipe 81 leading to the 125
cylinder 64. In the face of the valve member
88 there is formed an arc-shaped groove 99
and adjacent thereto is a through port 100.
The meeting faces of the two members 87
and 88 of the valve are ground true so as to 130
879,588
make an air-tight joint, and the member 88
is held with its face against the face of the
member 87 by means of the spring 90 which
presses against the movable member 88 and
5 holds it in close contact with the member 87.
One end of this spring may he carried around
a pin or screw 101 on the member SS in such
manner as to hold it in position to close all
the ports, in which position the arm 91 abuts
10 against the pin or screw 94.
When the valve just mentioned is in its
normal position the bearing surface 92 is in
line with the track 50 but extends above the
same in the path of the oncoming roller 49.
> However, in this position of the valve the
ports 95 and 96 are in communication
through the groove 99 and the piston 67 is
therefore acted upon by the compressed air
and the block 60 is in its uppermost position,
20 as shown in Fig. 4. Moreover, the slide 84
is also elevated so that its end 85 is in the
path of the oncoming roller 49. Before,
however, the roller 49 reaches the stop end
85 of the slide 84 it passes upon the bearing
25 surface 92 of the valve member 88 and, de-
pressing this bearing surface 92, causes the
valve member 88 to turn upon its axis to a suffi-
cient extent to carry the groove 99 out of co-
incidence with the port 96 and to bring the
30 exhaust port 100 into coincidence with the
port 96. The air in the cylinder 64 is there-
fore exhausted through the port 100 and the
piston 67 is depressed by the spring 70.
This action causes the levers 74 and 82 to
35 fall and the block 60 also falls until arrested
by the stop member 79. Moreover, the slide
S4 has likewise been depressed until its end
85 is out of the path of the roller 49. Under
these conditions the track section 63 of the
40 block 60 is in line with the top of the track 50
and the roller is free to enter this track sec-
tion 63. Now, however, the roller has
passed off from the bearing surface 92 of the
valve member 88 and this latter member
45 turns on its axis under the impulse of the
spring 90. The first action is to connect the
ports 95 and 96 with the compressed air sup-
ply and compressed air is introduced below
the piston 67. This latter member then
50 rises, first putting the spring 77 under ten-
sion and thereby causing the end 85 of the
slide 84 to be projected into the path of the
roller 49, thus preventing the latter from
again moving on to the track 50. Immedi-
55 ately afterward the end 78 of the lever 74
engages the lower end of the block 60 and
elevates the same, together with the roller 49,
to coincidence with the surface 61 of the
track 52. As before stated, the upward
60 movement of the roller 49 acting through the
arm 48 has caused the cylinder 32 on the
shaft 21 to rock upon the axis of the latter,
thus bring the half-nut 12 into engagement
with the threads 11 and the reproducing
65 stylus of the sound-box 10 into engagement
70
75
85
90
95
with the beginning of the record groove on
the record tablet 1. Now, as the shaft 3 is
rotated in a manner to be described the
sound-box 10 is fed across the record tablet
1 until ultimately the throat 57 at the end of
the track 52 is reached, when the roller 49,
moving thereinto under the action of the
spring 29, causes the sound-box and half-nut
to be raised from the tablet and feed-screw
respectively and the sound-box and feed nut
are again returned so that the sound-box is
.in operative relation with the beginning of
the record tablet in the manner already de-
scribed.
Before passing on to the description of the 80
driving mechanism for the structure just
described, it may be well to note that the
packing 34 for the cylinder 32 need not be
thoroughly air-tight since there is a large ex-
cess of power from the air entering said cylin-
der and some leak at this point is immaterial.
But it is material that there should be as
little friction as possible in the active move-
ment of the cylinder 32 when propelled in
the proper direction to cause the reproduc-
tion of the record under the action of the
screw 1 1 , since now the air pressure no longer
acts directly to furnish the propelling power,
and, therefore, it is advisable to reduce the
resistance at all points where there may be
resistance offered to the operation of the ma-
chine. For tins reason the packing 34 may
be of any suitable substance that will answer
the purpose and a good, loose graphite pack-
ing may be sufficient.
It will be observed that the shaft 21 has its
bearing 22 constantly urged toward the shaft
21 by the spring 27. This serves to main-
tain the contiguous faces of the head 37 and
the bearing 38 in close contact, and as these
faces are carefully ground to an air-tight fit
such fit is maintained by the spring 27 during
the rotative movement of the shaft 21. It
is advisable to retard the movement of the
C3dmder 32 on its return movement to the
position to bring the sound-box to the be-
ginning of the record. When the roller 49
falls through the throat 57 the half-nut 12 is
not immediately lifted out of engagement
with the screw 11 because of the action of the
spring 19 which causes the said half -nut to
remain in contact with the screw 11 until
just an instant before the roller 49 reaches the
bottom of the throat 57 in position to enter
upon its return travel along the track 50.
However, the port 43 has been brought into
coincidence with the port 41 and air pressure
is established in the end of the cylinder 32 be-
yond the piston 31. Ordinarily, the cylinder
32 would move quickly along the shaft 21 but 125
there is quite a body of air confined between
the piston 31 and the head 35 of the cylinder.
This head 35 fits the shaft 21 sufficiently
close to form a good bearing but there is pro-
vided a certain amount of leak. The air 130
100
105
110
115
120
e
879,288
confined within the cylinder 32 between the
piston 31 and the head 35 therefore retards
the movement of the cylinder 32 upon the
shaft 21 after the manner of a dash-pot; and
5 the return movement, therefore, of this cyl-
inder will be only so rapid as the leak of the
confined air past the head 35 will permit. A
more rapid movement may be obtained by a
suitably throttled by-pass for the air through
10 this head 35, but as this is a simple mechan-
ical expedient it is not thought necessary to
show it in the drawings.
No attempt has been made throughout
the drawings, either in those already consid-
15 ered or those to be considered, to show exact
proportions, and it will be understood that
the proportions and even the relations of the
parts may be varied as may be found expe-
dient in the installation of a structure em-
20 bodying the present invention under the
varying conditions that may prevail in prac-
tice.
When the phonographic annunciator is
established upon a car an ordinary amplify-
25 ing horn may be used, but by preference
there will be small sound-directing horns
located adjacent to each seat in the car, and
these horns will be connected to sound con-
duits arranged along the walls of the car in
30 any suitable manner. For instance, the an-
nunciator may be located at any convenient
point and sound-conveying tubes coming
from the sound-box may be located along
each side of the car with the small sound-di-
35 recting horns coupled up in multiple to these
tubes. As this is an evident arrangement
for the purpose, it is not thought necessary
to show it in the drawings.
As before stated, it is not expedient to use
40 a spring motor for the purpose of driving the
mechanism heretofore described and since
in the connection in which the annunciator
is designed to be used air under pressure is
available, and, in fact, is necessary for the
45 operation of certain of the structures already
described, we have devised a motor especially
designed for driving the mechanism con-
nected with the sound-reproducing apparatus
used in our annunciator, this mechanism
50 having a special coaction with the other
parts of the device for the proper operation
of these said other parts in the manner neces-
sary for the accomplishment of the purposes
we have in view. This driving mechanism
55 is shown in Figs. 2 and 3, to which special
reference is now had. In Fig. 2 there is
shown a drive shaft 3 with the pinion 20
mounted thereon, and the mandrel 2 and
cylindrical record 1 are also shown. The
60 pinion 20 is engaged by a gear wheel 102
mounted on an arbor 103 which, in turn,
carries a pinion 104 adjacent to the gear wheel
102. Meshing with the pinion 104 is another
gear wheel 105 mounted, in turn, on an
65 arbor 106, which latter carries a pinion 107
meshing, in turn, with a gear wheel 108
mounted for rotation upon another arbor
109 but not connected thereto except as
hereinafter set forth, and the last-named
shaft carries a pinion 110. Meshing with 70
the pinion 110 there is a rack-bar 111 extend-
ing radially from one side of a shaft 112 pass-
ing at one end through a suitable support 113
fast upon a fixed portion of the machine.
This shaft passes into a cylinder 114 through 75
a suitable packing gland 115, and within the
cylinder the shaft 112 carries a piston 116.
Formed on one side of the cylinder 114 is the
slide-valve box 117, which may be cylin-
drical in shape and formed originally with 80
one end open but shown closed by means of a
screw-plug 118 over which is placed a cap
119 to protect the same and prevent mali-
cious manipulation thereof. The other end
of the valve box 1 17 is provided with a screw- 85
plug 120 extending both to the interior and
exterior of the valve box and covered at its
outer end by a cap 121 . The inner end of the
screw-plug 120 is provided with an axial
stud 122 forming the seat for one end of a 90
helical spring 123, which latter, at the other
end, engages a piston 124, and this spring is
centered on said piston by means of a stud
125. The piston 124 is fast on one end of a
piston-rod 126, the other end of which is sup- 95
ported by a disk 127 fitting the interior of
the slide-valve box 117 sufficiently tight for
guiding purposes. Between the piston 124
and the disk 127 the rod 126 carries a slide-
valve 128 of usual construction, and the 100
latter is constrained to move with the rod
126 by means of collars 129 on said rod at
each end of the slide-valve. The interior of
the slide-valve is hollowed out, as indicated
at 130, to form a passage, similar to the 105
slide-valves found in ordinary steam engines.
The slide-valve box 117 is in communica-
tion through a passage 131 with a source of
compressed air which may be the train sup-
ply coming at seventy pounds pressure, and no
this air supply source may be the same as
that before referred to with reference to the
other figures of the drawings.
That end of the slide-valve box between
the inlet opening 131 and the piston 124 is in 115
communication with the end of the cylinder
114 remote from the end through which the
shaft 112 passes by means of a passage 132
opening into the cylinder 114 and communi-
cating with the slide valve box 117 through 120
a port 133.
The end of the slide-valve box 117 on that
side of the piston 124 engaged by the spring
123 is in communication with the other end
.of the cylinder 114, that is, on that side of 125
the piston 116 connected with the piston-rod
112, by means of a passageway 134, and in
this passageway there is provided a throttle-
valve 135, the purpose of which will herein-
after appear. 130
8?0,28S
At the end of the cylinder 113 through
which the piston-rod passes there is an end
extension 136 in which is formed a chamber
137. The wall 138 of this chamber adjacent
5 to the cylinder 1 14 is provided with a through
passage formed into a valve seat in which
normally rests a valve having a stem 140
supported by an upright 141 on the interior
of the cylinder 114 and this stem 140 extends
10 into the interior of the cylinder 114 for a
sufficient .distance to be engaged by the
piston 116 when it approaches the gland end
of the cylinder 114. The valve 139 has- an
axial extension 142 on the side opposite the
15 stem 140 and this extension is seated in a
suitable socket formed in a. screw-plug 143
in the outer end wall of the chamber 137, and
this screw- plug is protected by a cap 144
similar to those before mentioned. Extend-
20 ing from the inlet opening 131 of the slide-
valve box 117 is a passage 145 leading to the
chamber 137, so that the air pressure within
the chamber 137 is the same as that within
the slide-valve box 117.
25 Referring once more to the gear-train, the
arbor 109 has fast thereon in addition to the
gear 110 a ratchet wheel 146. Of course,
the gear wheel 108 may be fast upon the
arbor 109 and the ratchet 146 and pinion 110
30 may be formed in one piece and secured to-
gether and mounted loosely on the arbor 109.
Pivotally supported on the gear wheel 108
are a number of pawls 147 arranged to en-
gage the teeth on the ratchet wheel 146 and
35 maintained in normal contact therewith by
springs 148. Now, when the piston 116 is
moved toward the gland end of the cylinder
114 in a manner to be hereinafter described,
the rack 111, engaging the pinion 110, will
40 cause the latter to rotate and the said pinion
110, being fast on the ratchet wheel 146
either directly or through the arbor 109, will
impart rotation to said ratchet wheel 146.
Under these conditions, the pawls 147 are in
45 engagement with the teeth on the ratchet
wheel 146, and, therefore, the gear wheel 108
participates in the movement imparted to
the pinion 1 1 0 by the rack 111. As the parts
are viewed in Fig. 2, the movement of the
50 gear 108 is counter-clockwise. The rotation
of the gear wheel 108 imparts motion to the
other gear wheels 105 and 102 in order, and
finally this motion is imparted to the shaft
3 which drives the sound reproducer and the
55 tablet operating in conjunction therewith.
When the piston 116 moves in the opposite
direction, that is, away from the gland end
of the cylinder 114, the rack-bar 111 rotates
the pinion 110 and ratchet wheel 146 in the
60 opposite direction but, as will be readily
understood, the pawls 147 are now inactive
and the gear wheel 108 and the rest of the
gear train remain stationary. It may be
here stated that this motive apparatus is de-
65 signed to cause a sufficient number of rota-
tions of the record cylinder 1 to reproduce all
the recorded sounds thereon from one end to
the other by the movement of the piston 116
on its power stroke once through the length
of the cylinder 114. Now, let it be assumed 70
that the piston 116 is in the cylinder at the
end remote from the gland end. Under
these circumstances, compressed air entering
through the opening 131 into the interior of
the slide-valve box 117, acting against the 75
piston 124, holds the slide-valve 128 in a posi-
tion to clear the port 133. The compressed
air therefore enters back of the piston 116
and urges the same toward the gland end of
the cylinder 114. This movement continues 80
until ultimately the piston 116 reaches the
valve stem 140 when a still further move-
ment of the piston 116 opens the valve 139
against the air pressure in the chamber 137
and puts the said air chamber 137 in com- 85
munication with the piston-rod side of the
piston 116. The pressure on both sides of
the piston now begins to equalize and the
compressed air coming from the chamber 137
also travels through the passage 134 to the 90
spring side of the piston 142 but because of
the throttle valve 135, which maybe properly
adjusted for the purpose, the air pressure on
the spring side of the piston 142 accumulates
but slowly owing to the sluggish passage of 95
the compressed air into the slide-valve box
on the spring side of the piston 124, and the
air on the piston-rod side of the piston 116
has time to come up to full pressure. Now,
when the pressure in the slide-valve box on 100
the spring side of the piston 124 has become
sufficient, the said piston 124 is moved by the
spring 123 to a position to close the port 133
to the air pressure and couple this port to an
exhaust port 149 communicating with the 10 5
external atmosphere. The air pressure on
the piston-rod side of the piston 116 now re-
turns that piston to its normal position, caus-
ing the pinion 110 and ratchet disk 146 to re-
volve idly. The proportions of the parts are 110
such that by the time the piston 116 has
reached its initial position at the rear of the
cylinder 114 the pressure in front of it has
reduced to about or very little above atmos-
pheric pressure. . 115
During the forward motion of the piston
116 the air in front of this piston has leaked
out through the gland 115, the packing of
which is purposely made somewhat loose to
permit this leakage, but this leakage is too 120
small to have' any material effect when the
air pressure is established in front of the
piston, and the same is true with regard to
the piston 124. The piston 116 has been
moved rapidly to the initial position and the 12")
pressure in front of it has rapidly dropped
but the pressure on the spring side of the
piston 124 has not dropped rapidly because
of the throttling action of the valve 135,
which latter is so constructed as to be turned 130
879,288
to any desired position to control its throttling
action. The result of this is that the piston
116 will reach its initial position before the
pressure on the spring side of the piston 124
5 has dropped to such an extent that the
pressure on the other side of this piston is
able to overcome the resistance of the spring
123 and move the slide-valve sufficiently to
again open the port 133 to the compressed
10 air supply. In the meantime, and while the
piston 116 is moving away from the forward
position toward the rearward or initial posi-
tion the drop in pressure on the front side of
the piston 116 has caused the valve 139 to be
15 seated and thus prevent any more compressed
air reaching the front side of the piston from
the chamber 137.
In considering the forward movement of
the piston 116, whereby motion is imparted
20 to the gear train and so to the sound-repro-
ducing mechanism, it is to be noted that in
the practical operation of the invention this
motion is not continuous but intermittent,
and the parts are so proportioned that one
25 forward power stroke of the piston will
occupy the time taken for the entire run of a
car through the entire distance covered by
the announcements contained on the record
cylinder 1. Now, in order to provide for
30 the starting and stopping of the phonographic
reproducer mechanism at the proper times,
wTe have devised the instrumentalities which
we will now proceed to describe.
Secured upon the spokes of the gear wheel
35 105 there is an annulus 150 having on its
periphery a number of spaced teeth 151
equi-distantly disposed. These teeth are
formed on one side with abrupt shoulders
radial to the axis of the gear wheel 105, and
40 on the other side these teeth are approached
by easy curves.
In mesh with the gear wheel 102 is a
pinion 152 mounted on a shaft 153 which
may be termed the governor shaft since this
45 shaft carries an ordinary type of speed
• governor such as is ordinarily used in sound-
reproducing machines or in other such struc-
tures. Since this governor may be of any
approved type and in itself forms no part of
50 the present invention, it has been omitted
from the drawings. On the governor shaft
153 there is mounted a disk 154 against the
periphery of which a suitable brake may be
made to engage. In the drawings this brake
55 is shown in the form of a pad or block 155 of
suitable material, such as leather, projecting
from a suitable seat in a cup 156. This cup
is carried in the end of a screw 157 passing
through a boss 158 formed on the end of an
60 arm 159. A finger 160 is formed on one side
of the boss 158 and serves to guide and
prevent the turning of the cup 156 when
adjusted to or from the disk 154 by the
screw 157.
65 A small set-screw 161 may be used to
clamp the screw 157 in its adjusted positions.
The arm 159 constitutes one/arm of a lever
162 pivoted at 163 to a suitable fixed por-
tion of the framework of the machine. The
lever 162 is under the control of a spring 164, 70
the normal tendency of. which is to move the
brake pad 155 away from the brake disk 154,
and the arm 159 is thinned so that when the
brake pad 155 is in engagement with the
brake disk 154 it presses against the same 75
with a yielding or elastic pressure. The
other end of the lever 162, .that is, the end
remote from the arm 159, carries another
lever 165 by means of a pivotal screw 166.
The shorter arm 167 of the lever 165 is go
appropriately bent and carries a roller 168
in the path of the teeth 151 on the annulus
150. The longer arm of the lever 165 is con-
nected to the longer arm of the lever 162 by
a spring 169, and a stop-screw 170, mounted 85
on a stud 171, limits the extent of movement
of the lever 165 under the action of the spring
169, while a set-screw 172 locks the stop-
screw 170 in any adjusted position.
The lever 165 carries at the end remote 90
from the arm 167 an armature 173 in opera-
tive relation to the core 174 of an electro-
magnet 175. The circuit connections in
which this electro-magnet is included are not
shown in the drawings. It suffices to state, 95
however, that this magnet may be in a suit-
ably charged circuit receiving current from
the power circuit on the car or from indi-
vidual sources of current such as batteries, or
in any suitable manner, and provision is
made to close this circuit at intervals along
the line of travel so that the magnet may be
energized at predetermined points during
the run of a car. In the normal position of
the several parts the roller 168 rests against 105
the outer end of a tooth 151 and the lever 162
is then in such position that the spring 164 is
under tension and the brake pad 155 is in
contact with the periphery of the brake disk
154, thus holding the latter against move-
ment. Now, let it be supposed that a car
has reached a point within a certain distance
of a station and that by any suitable means
the circuit of the magnet 175 has been closed
so that the magnet is energized. The arma-
ture 173 is pulled over toward the magnet
175 and this causes the roller 168 to be pulled
out of the radial line of the tooth with the
end of which it was in engagement. The
spring 164 is now free to act and pulls the le-
ver 162 in a direction to cause the roller 168
to move toward the annulus 150 along the
abrupt shoulder of the respective tooth 151.
The movement of the lever 162 pulls the
brake shoe or pad 155 away from the brake 125
disk 154 and thus releases the gear train.
Now, let it be assumed that the piston 116 is
in its initial position and air pressure is es-
tablished behind it. The gear train now be-
ing unlocked will start its movement under 130
100
110
115
120
879,288
I
the stress of the compressed air behind the
piston 116. In the meantime the magnet
175 has become deenergized. The roller 168
now rides upon the periphery of the annulus
5 150, in which position the brake shoe or pad
155 is free from the disk 154. The move-
ment of the gear train continues until the
next tooth 151 is reached, when the easy
slope of this tooth will engage the roller 168
10 and move the lever 162 around its pivot
against the stress of the spring 164 and ulti-
mately bring the pad or shoe 155 into con-
tact with the disk 154 with sufficient force to
stop the rotation of the gear train. When
15 the next station or point where an announce-
ment is to be made by the phonographic re-
producer is reached the magnet 175 is again
energized and the operation just described is
repeated, the piston 116 advancing an appro-
20 priate distance under the action of the com-
pressed air. And so from time to time the
gear train is released whenever a predeter-
mined point is reached, and the announce-
ments contained on the record cylinder 1 are
25 reproduced. The number of teeth on the
annulus 150 depends on the announcements
to be made, which, of course, will depend
upon the conditions under which the annun-
ciator is established; that is, there may, for
30 example, be ten teeth on the annulus 150 and
the gear carrying it may make ten revolu-
tions during one movement of the piston 116
and one revolution of the gear wheel driven
by said piston and its connections, and thus
35 the number of announcements made may
then be ten times the number of teeth 151.
The construction is such that when all the
announcements to be made have been made
the piston 116 will have made one full power
40 stroke and it will then automatically return
to its initial position. Because of the slow
movement of ' the piston during its power
stroke it will be seen that the air in front of it
easily escapes through the packing in the
45 gland 115 and that this packing, while loose
enough for such purpose, may be sufficiently
tight to prevent undue leakage when the
compressed air enters the cylinder in front of
the piston through the valve 139.
50 From the foregoing it will be seen that in a
system in which our present invention is em-
bodied all announcements are made auto-
matically without danger of confusion; and
being produced from a phonographic record
55 and directed to points close to each passen-
ger, these announcements will be clearly un-
derstood by each passenger on a car or train.
It will also be understood that in the forego-
ing description we have used the terms
GO "phonograph" and "phonographic repro-
ducer" in the broad sense of sound repro-
ducers and that these terms are not to have
lar narrower sense as applied to any particu-
the type of sound-reproducing machines.
65 It sometimes transpires that it is desirable
90
to silence the reproducing parts of the an-
nunciator without, however, stopping the
action of the other parts. For instance,
assume that the structure is mounted upon a
sleeper. When the passengers are asleep it 70
is desirable, of course, that they be not dis-
turbed by the various announcements which
would be made from time to time as the train
passes stations, but at the same time the ap-
paratus as a whole cannot be stopped, for, 75
being automatic in its operation, it would get
out of step. Therefore, we have devised
means whereby the reproducer may be held
out of operative relation with the record
tablet so long as may be desired but will still 80
be advanced along said tablet to the same ex-
tent as though the reproducer was in active
operation. Then when it again becomes de-
sirable to place the reproducer in operative
relation to the tablet it will be in the proper 85
relation thereto and continue the reproduc-
tions at the proper point, as though it had
been in operative relation to the tablet dur-
ing the intervening time.
Referring, now, to Fig. 12, 13 and 14, it
will be seen that the arm 47 is not fast upon
the cylinder 32 in the strictest sense of the
word but is fast upon a collar 176 mounted
upon said cylinder 32 for a very limited ro-
tative movement' about said cylinder. This 95
independent movement, however, is not suf-
ficient to prevent the lifting of the reproducer
head from the record during the return move-
ment to the initial position at the commence-
ment of the record. The collar 176 has on 100
each side short recesses 177 through which
pass screws or studs 178 projecting from the
cylinder 32, so that the collar 176, while con-
fined to one plane, may move about the
cylinder 32 in such plane for a very limited 105
distance, depending upon the length of the
recesses 177.
Projecting from one side of the collar 176
is a stud 179 carrying a roller 180. Upon the
other side of the cylinder 32 opposite the roller 1 10
180 is a horizontal rock -shaft 181 mount-
ed at its ends in journal bearings formed in
standards 182 which may rise from the base
plate supporting the entire structure. Fast
upon the shaft 181 near its ends and adjacent 115
to the journal bearings in the standards 182
are curved arms 183 bent so as to pass down
under the cylinder 32 and thence up, and at
the ends of these arms 183 remote from the
shaft 181 thej carry a track 184 in the path 120
of the roller 180 and of sufficient length to
engage said roller under conditions to be here-
inafter named, during the entire length of
travel of the reproducer % over the record.
Fast upon the shaft 181 is a depending arm 125
185 carrying at its free end an armature 186
in operative relation to the poles of a horse-
shoe electro-magnet 187, the yoke 188 of
which is fast upon a post or bracket 189 se-
cured to the base plate of the machine, which 130
L
io
879,288
base plate, however, is not shown in the draw-
ings. Pivotally secured to the base of the
bracket 189 is another arm 190 extending
upward and suitably bent for the purpose
5 and terminating in a head 191 formed at a
short distance below its upper end with a
notched off-set 192 on one side and at the
extreme upper end with a supporting end
and limiting finger 193. The upper end of
10 the head 191 is shaped to receive and hold
the track 184, and about midway of the
length of this track it is formed with a short,
depending bracket 194 carrying a pin 195
arranged to be caught by the notch of the
15 off-set 192. The arm 190 carries an arma-
ture 196 in operative relation to another
horseshoe magnet 197, the voke 198 of which
is fast upon a standard 199 which may rise
from and be fast to the base plate of the ma-
20 chine. The arm 190 is connected to the post
or standard 189 by a helical spring 200 tend-
ing at all times to draw the armature 196
away from the magnet 197.
There is provided a suitable source of
25 current, indicated at 201, and this source
may be and preferably is the prime current
source of the car, which source forms a part
of our complete traction s}Tstem. Both
magnets 187 and 197 are connected to a con-
30 ductor 202 leading from one side of the cur-
rent source 201. The magnet 187 is con-
nected on its other side by a conductor 203
to one member 204 of a push-button or
switch 205, the other terminal of which is
35 connected by a conductor 206 to the other
side of the current source. The magnet 197
also has the terminal remote from that con-
nected to the current source, connected by a
. conductor 207 to one member 208 of a push-
40 button or switch 209, likewise connected by
the conductor 206 to the current source.
In the normal operation of the structure
the track 184 is out of engagement with the
roller 180 and is then supported by the en-
45 gagement of the pin 195 with the notched
off-set 192 of the arm 190. Under these
conditions, the mechanism will operate to
make the announcements audibly in the
manner already described. Now, let it be
50 supposed that it is desirable to silence the
annunciator without stopping its operation
or putting it out of step. For this purpose
it is only necessary to complete the circuit at
the push-button or switch 205, when the
55 magnet 187 will be energized and its arma-
ture 186 will be attracted. By this means
the arm 185 is drawn toward the magnet 187,
thus causing the shaft 181 to rock in its bear-
ings and the track 184 is thereby lifted until
60 it engages the roller 180 and causes the collar
176 to be rotated about the cylinder 32 to
the extent permitted by the length of the
recesses 177. This movement is sufficient to
lift the reproducer head 10 out of operative
65 relation with the record tablet 1, but does
not interfere in the least with the operation
of the remainder of the structure, so that the
reproducer head is moved from time to time
the same as though it were in engagement
with the record 1. It may be noted that the 70
upper face of the track 184 is slightly beveled,
so that when in engagement with the roller
180 and the latter has been lifted as described ,
it may engage evenly with the bearing sur-
face of the track. 7 5
When the track 184 is lifted the pin 195
participates in the movement and thus is
lifted out of the notched off-set 192 and
moved upward alongside of the head 191
until the upper end thereof is reached, when, so
under the action of the spring 200, the arm
190 is moved to an extent to cause the head
191 to ride under the pin 195 until stopped
by the tooth 193. The track is therefore
locked in the elevated position, so that the 85
push-button 205 can then be safely released
to open the circuit at that point. Suppose,
now, that the time period during which it is
desirable to silence the annunciator has
passed. The push-button or switch 209 is 90
now manipulated to close the circuit from
the current source 201 and then the magnet
197 is energized, thus drawing the armature
196 toward it and with this armature the
arm 190 against the action of the spring 200. 95
This movement of the arm 190 will draw the
head 191 from under the pin 195 and thereby
permit the track 184 to fall by gravity until
the pin 195 is caught by the notch in the
off-set 192 and the track will be held in this 100
lowered position by said off-set. Thus, at
any time desired it is possible to stop the
audible action of the annunciator without
interfering in the least with the continued
action of the rest of the mechanism of such 10 5
annunciator. Therefore, when the annunci-
ator is again put into audible operation the
announcements will begin at the proper point
the same as though the audible parts of the
annunciator had not been put out of action. 110
We claim: —
1. In an annunciator, a phonographic re-
producer, a motor for driving the same, an
escapement for releasing the motor to cause
the phonographic reproducer to reproduce 115
a portion only of the record, means for oper-
ating said escapement at predetermined in-
tervals, and means independent of the driv-
ing motor for the reproducer for automat-
ically returning the reproducer mechanism to 120
the initial position after having completed
the entire reproduction from the record
tablet.
2. An annunciator comprising a phono-
graphic reproducer, a compressed air motor 125
therefor, a train of gear driven by the com-
pressed air motor and in turn driving the
phonographic reproducer mechanism, a
toothed member actuated by said gear train,
a brake mechanism controlling the gear train, 130
879,288
IX
and an escapement mechanism coacting
with the toothed member and the brake for
releasing the motor to a predetermined lim-
ited extent of movement.
3. An annunciator comprising a phono-
graphic reproducer, a reciprocating, com-
pressed-air motive element, a gear train be-
tween the motive element and the phono-
graphic reproducer mechanism, and con-
10 nections between the motive element and
the gear train for imparting motion thereto
in one direction only.
4. An annunciator comprising a phono-
graphic reproducer, a reciprocating, com-
15 pressed-air motive element, a gear train be-
tween the motive element and the phono-
graphic reproducer mechanism, connections
between the motive element and the gear
train for imparting motion thereto in one
20 direction only, and means for automatically
returning the motive element to its initial
position.
5. In an annunciator, a phonographic re-
producer, a gear train connected thereto, a
25 compressed-air motive element having an
active movement in one direction for im-
pelling the gear train and an inactive move-
ment in the other direction, means for auto-
matically directing compressed air to cause
30 the active movement of the motive element
and inactive movement thereof in sequence,
and an escapement for the gear train releas-
ing the same to move at any one time for a
portion only of the extent of travel of the
35 power stroke of the motive element.
6. An annunciator comprising a phono-
graphic reproducer, a gear train connected
therewith, a reciprocating, compressed-air
motive element, connections between the
•10 latter and the gear train active during the
movement of the motive element in one di-
rection only, automatic means for returning
the motive element to its initial position
under the action of compressed air, a toothed
•15 element on the gear train, a brake controlling
the gear train, a spring- actuated lever carry-
ing a brake shoe and coacting with the brake
mechanism and armature lever carried by
the brake lever and having a member in
50 operative relation to the teeth.on the toothed
member, and an electro-magnet for control-
ling the armature.
7. An annunciator comprising a phono-
graphic reproducer, a gear train connected
55 therewith, a motive element for the gear
train comprising a reciprocating member
connected to the gear train during its move-
ment in one direction and inactive to the
gear train during its movement in the other
JO direction, a spring - actuated slide - valve
mechanism operating under differential air
pressure to supply compressed air for the
power stroke of the reciprocating member, a
valve operated by the reciprocating mem-
G5 ber on the completion of its power stroke to
80
admit compressed air to return the recipro-
cating member to its initial position, slug-
gishly acting means for destroying the differ-
ential pressure on the slide-valve operating
means, and an escapement mechanism for 70
the gear train acting intermittently thereon
to cause the starting and stopping of the gear
train a number of times during the power
stroke of the motive element.
8. In an annunciator, a phonographic re- 75
producer mechanism, a gear train connected
to the same, a motive element for driving
the gear train, a brake element connected to
the gear train, a toothed member carried by
the gear train, a brake lever cooperating
with the brake element, an armature lever
carried bj the brake lever and in operative
relation to the toothed member, and an
armature magnet controlling the armature.
9. An annunciator comprising a phono- 85
graphic reproducer, a compressed-air motor
for driving the same, and means independ-
ent of the motor but under the control of
compressed air for returning the reproducer
sound-box to the beginning of the record 90
tablet after having completed its extent of
travel over the latter.
10. In an annunciator, a phonographic re-
producer, a feed-screw and feed-nut therefor,
a sound-box, a reciprocating cylinder carry- 95
ing the sound-box and feed-nut, a rock-shaft
carrying the cylinder, a piston on said rock-
shaft and located within the cylinder, a
spring tending to lift the sound-box and
feed-nut out of operative relation with the 100
record and feed-screw, respectively, auto-
matic means for controlling the relation of
the sound-box and feed-nut to the sound-
record and feed-screw, respectively, and *a
valve mechanism under the control of the 10 5
rock-shaft for admitting compressed air to
the cylinder and exhausting it therefrom.
11. In an annunciator, a phonographic re-
producer, and means for moving the sound-
box and feed-nut into and out of operative 110
relation with the sound-record and feed-
screw, respectively, comprising a rock-shaft,
a cylinder movable longitudinally thereon
and constrained to rotate with said shaft,
means for rocking the shaft on its axis at the 115
beginning and end of the travel of the sound-
box along the record, a piston on said rock-
shaft within the C3Tlinder, and ports con-
trolled by the movement of the rock-shaft
for admitting compressed air to the interior 120
of the cylinder and for exhausting it there-
from.
12. In an annunciator, a phonographic re-
producer, means for returning the reproducer
sound-box to its initial position after having 125
passed over the record, comprising a rock-
shaft, a cylinder movable longitudinally
thereon and constrained to move with said
rock-shaft about the axis of the latter, means
for rocking the said shaft on its axis at the 13°
152
879,288
extremes of travel of the sound-box, a piston
formed on the rock-shaft and housed in said
cylinder, a valve head formed on one end of
the rock-shaft and communicating with the
5 cylinder through said rock-shaft to the re-
mote side of the piston, a ported seat for the
valve head for supplying compressed air to
the interior of the cylinder and exhausting
the same therefrom, and a bearing for the
10 other end of the rock-shaft comprising a lon-
gitudinally movable journal in the shaft and
a spring tending to maintain the valve head
of the rock-shaft in its seat.
13. In an annunciator, a phonographic re-
15 producer, means for disconnecting the sound-
box and the feed-nut from the record and
feed-screw, respectively, at the end of the
reproduction and for returning these parts
to their initial position and again placing
20 them in operative relation, and means for
controlling the sound-box and feed-nut return
means consisting of an arm fast to said re-
turn means, a track in which said arm trav-
els, another track parallel thereto for said
25 arm, and means for moving the arm from
one track to the other comprising an elevator
track section, a compressed air actuating de-
vice therefor, and a valve under the control
of the arm for admitting compressed air to
30 the elevator control means after the arm has
passed thereon.
14. In an annunciator, a phonographic re-
producer, a rock-shaft, a cylinder movable
longitudinally thereon and constrained to
35 move with said rock shaft about its axis,
connections between said cylinder and t he-
sound-box and feed-nut of the phonographic
reproducer, means for admitting compressed
air to cause the cylinder to move longitudi-
40 nalty on said shaft in a direction to return
the sound-box and feed-nut to their initial
positions, an arm on said cylinder, parallel,
tracks for said arm, means for moving said
arm from one track to the other to lift the
45 sound box and feed-nut out of operative re-
lation to the sound-record and feed-screw
respectively, a member for moving the arm
from one track to the other, a valve in the
path of the arm and moving on the track in a
50 direction to return the phonographic mem-
bers to their initial positions, and a com-
pressed-air motive element under the con-
trol of said valve for moving the arm from
the track in the path of which the valve is
55 located to the other track and at the same
time rocking the shaft to bring the repro-
ducer sound-box and feed-nut into operative
relation with the sound-record and feed-
screw, respectively.
60 15. In an annunciator, a phonographic re-
producer, means for driving the same, an
escapement for releasing the driving means
to cause the phonographic reproducer to re-
produce a portion only of the record, means
65 for operating the said escapement at prede-
termined intervals, and means for moving
the sound reproducing portions of the mech-
anism out of action and for returning them
into action without affecting the progressive
operation of the other portions of the mech- 70
anism.
16. In an annunciator, a phonographic re-
producer, means for driving the same, an es-
capement for releasing the driving means to
cause the phonographic reproducer to re- 75
produce a portion only of the record, means
for operating the said escapement at prede-
termined intervals, means for automatically
returning the reproducer mechanism to the
initial position after having reached the end 80
of the record tablet, and means for moving
the reproducer out of operative relation with
the record and for returning it into operative
relation with the record without affecting the
progressive operation of the remainder of the 85
mechanism.
17. An annunciator comprising a phono-
graphic reproducer, a motor for actuating the
reproducer mechanism, an escapement for
the motor intermittently actuated and con- 90
structed to permit the reproduction of a por-
tion only of the record at each action of the
escapement mechanism, means for moving
the reproducer head out of operative relation
with the record without disturbing the action 95
of the rest of the mechanism, and means con-
trolled from a distance for effecting such
movement of the reproducer head.
18. In an annunciator, a phonographic re-
producer, means for setting the same into op- 100
eration intermittently, and electrically- con-
trolled means for moving the reproducer head
out of and into active operation without af-
fecting the progressive operation of the re-
mainder of the mechanism. 105
19. In an annunciator, a phonographic re-
producer, means for intermittently actuating
the same to reproduce a portion only of the
record at any one time, and means for mov-
ing the reproducer head into and out of oper- no
ative relation with the record without affect-
ing the progressive operation of the repro-
ducer actuating mechanism comprising a
mounting for the reproducer head having a
limited free movement, a track for support- 115
ing the reproducer mounting in the inactive
position, a lock for holding said track to
maintain the reproducer in the inactive posi-
tion, and electro-magnetic means for actuat-
ing the track and lock. 120
20. In an annunciator, a phonographic re-
producer, means for intermittently actuating
the same to reproduce a portion only of the
record at any one time, and means for mov-
ing the reproducer head into and out of oper- 125 i
ative relation with the record comprising a
mounting for the reproducer head having a
limited free movement, a track for support-
ing the reproducer mounting in the inactive
position, a lock for holding said track to 130
879,288
13
maintain the reproducer in the inactive posi-
tion, electro-magnetic means for moving the
track into engagement with the reproducer
mounting to move the said reproducer out of
action, electro-magnetic means for operating
the lock for the track, and electric circuits
controlled from a distance and including the
said electro-magnetic operating means.
In testimony that we claim the foregoing
as our own, we have hereto affixed our signa- 10
tures in the presence of two witnesses.
WILLIAM C. MAYO.
JOHN HOULEHAN.
Witnesses :
W. A. Warnock,
John L. Spader.
■
No. 879,363. PATENTED FEB. 18, 1908.
G. K. CHENEY.
DIE PLATE FOR STAMPING UP SOUND RECORDS.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 6, 1903.
IFIG-.1.
IFIG-.2.
t5 -H
■
/Z
XTI(^2
IFI&.5. 9
WITNESSES
^IG.6.
INVENTOR
fih^ti. 6h~*£sS
ATTORNEY
|nI NORMS PETEM CO.. WASHIHGTOH, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
GEORGE K. CHENEY, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO VICTOR
TALKING MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
DIE-PLATE FOR STAMPING UP SOUND-RECORDS.
No. 879,363.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed Jnne 6, 1903. Serial No, 160,436.
Patented Feb. 18, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, George K. Cheney, a
citizen of the United States of America, and
a resident of the borough of Manhattan, city,
5 county, and State of New York, have in-
vented certain new and useful Improvements
in Die-Plates for Stamping Up Sound-Rec-
ords, of which the following is a specification.
My invention relates generally to the pro-
10 duction of commercial sound records and
more particularly to the construction, etc.,
of die plates employed in connection with the
press by which such records are ordinarily
stamped up.
15 The object of the invention is to produce a
pair of cooperating die-plates, by which a
record may be stamped up and finished
ready for the market, in a single operation of
the press, thereby avoiding the necessity of
20 subsequently trimming and polishing the
same, as is now ordinarily required.
A further object of the invention is to pre-
vent premature contact between the die
plates, as the record is being stamped up, in
25 order to obtain the full and continued effect
of the pressure applied upon the material
and thereby produce a sharp, clean-cut im-
pression, smooth and free of surface in-
equalities and having the requisite density
30 throughout the body of the record disk.
One form of apparatus suitable for carry-
ing my invention into effect, is illustrated
in the accompanying sheet of drawings,
throughout the several views of which like
35 numerals indicate corresponding parts.
In these drawings: Figure 1 is a view of
the die-plates assembled. Fig. 2 is a similar
view showing the plates separated. Fig. 3
is a sectional view taken on the line s3 — s3, of
40 Fig. 5. Fig. 4 is a similar view taken on the
fine s* — s*, of Fig. 5. Fig. 5 is a plan view of
the lower plate, and Fig. 6 is a reverse plan
of the upper plate.
Referring now to the drawings, 1 and 2,
45 represent the die-plates, which are caused to
register one with the other by means of
dowels 3, 3, 3, of the lower plate engaging
sockets or openings 4, 4, 4, in the upper plate.
Opposite corners of the plates are cut off as
50 shown, to facilitate their separation for the
removal of the completed record when taken
from the press.
The lower plate is provided with a circular
recess 5, suitable for containing a matrix 6,
which is centered therein on a pin 7. The 5.5
recess is of suitable depth to receive above
the matrix a layer of composition or other
material 8, from which the record is to be
formed.
A groove 9, concentric with and adjoining 60
the recess, serves to receive the surplus ma-
terial which overflows when pressure is ap-
plied and from this groove an outlet 10, is
provided at each side of the plate.
The upper plate has formed centrally 65
thereof a guide opening 1 1 , which is engaged
by the projecting end of the centering pin 7.
In assembling the plates, etc., a small amount
of composition is usually forced into this
opening by the pin in entering the same and 70
unless removed, such material will be
trapped and compressed between the end of
the pin and the head of the press and as no
outlet is provided, an increase in the pres-
sure frequently results in bending or break- 75
ing the plates. In order, therefore, to pre-
vent injury to the pin or plate when in the
press under pressure, the opening 11, is
tapered or flared at its outer end to provide
ample space to accommodate any composition 80
which may be forced upward by the pin in
entering the same. The lower surface of the
upper plate is cut .away or reduced to form a
disk-like plunger 12, which telescopes within
the recess 5, of the lower plate, such telescop- 85
ing action being limited and checked as the
corners of the plates come into contact, so
that the records may be made of substan-
tially uniform thickness.
At each side, the upper plate is undercut 90
to provide additional clearance in the out-
lets from the overflow groove, as indicated
at 13, and it is also provided with a short
stud 14, projecting from its under side,
which serves to form a socket in the record 95
disk, with which a pin on the rotating table
of the reproducing machine engages, to key
the disk to same.
The method of operation is as follows:
The die plates and matrix are first heated, to 100
avoid chilling the composition, and in as-
sembling the same, the matrix is placed in
the circular recess of the lower plate and
covered by a layer of composition, which
has been previously softened or rendered 105
plastic by the application of heat or other-
87?,36g
wise. The upper plate is then added and
so adjusted that the dowels and center pin
of r the lower plate enter or register with
the openings thereof. Thus assembled, the
5 plates are placed in the press and as pressure
is applied, the surplus material is at once
cut away by the plunger of the upper plate
entering the recess of the lower plate and
such surplus falls into the overflow groove,
10 from which more or less of it may escape
through the outlets in the sides, as the pres-
sure is increased. As the plunger portion
enters the recess in the lower plate to a
greater and greater extent, the outlet for the
15 surplus material is made to be a longer and
longer passage, thereby increasing the fric-
tion between said material and the edges of
the portions of the dies referred to. This
action results in a gradual increase in pres-
20 sure of the material above the matrix until
the maximum is reached. Such pressure
being that which will effectually finish the
plate and give the same the requisite density.
Owing to the telescoping action -of the die
25 plates, they are prevented from coming into
contact and checking the pressure prema-
turely and the entire pressure is thus con-
centrated upon the interposed blank or layer
of material, which results in forcing the same
30 into such ultimate contact with the record,
surface of the matrix, as to insure a sharp,
clean-cut impression. As the plates seldom
come in contact under the pressure ordi-
narily required to give the record disk the de-
35 sired density and finish, all risk of breaking
or fracture is avoided. Upon reducing the
pressure, the plates are taken from the press
and forced apart to remove the record disk,
which is completely finished, ready for the
40 market.
The advantages of the invention will be
apparent from the foregoing description.
I do not wish to be understood as limiting
myself to the details of construction, etc.
45 herein shown and described, as various
changes might be made without departing
from the spirit and scope of my invention.
For example, by increasing the depth of the
recess in the lower plate sufficiently and pro-
50 viding the same at suitable points around
the walls thereof with requisite outlets, an
ordinary plunger in part with or attached to
the press might be substituted for the upper
plate. The composition instead of. being
55 placed between the telescoping members by
hand might be fed in automatically either as
disk blanks or in sheet or other form. The
dowels and openings with which they engage
might be dispensed with, by detachably se-
60 curing the telescoping members in proper re-
lation in the press. All- such changes, how-
ever, I consider obvious and immaterial va-
riations of form and not of substance, and
still within the meaning of the present inven-
65 tion.
Having, therefore, described my inven-
tion, I claim:
1. In an apparatus for molding sound rec-
ords, the combination with a recessed die
plate having its surface adjacent to the re- 70
cess depressed to provide a clearance for the
over-flow, a second die plate, a plunger with
vertical walls adapted to telescope with the
recess in the first mentioned die plate, and to
allow the escape of surplus material, said 75
plunger being further provided with an open-
ing, enlarged£at its upper end, through the
central portion thereof, and a pin or projec-
tion located in the recess of the first men-
tioned die plate and adapted to cooperate so
with said opening.
2. In an apparatus for molding disk sound
records, a recessed die plate, a matrix located
in the recess of said plate, the thickness of
said matrix being less than the depth of said 85
recess, a second die plate having a disk-like
projection with vertical walls adapted to
telescope with said recess, one of said die
plates being provided with a centering open-
ing, and a pin or projection located on the 90
other of said die plates and adapted to co-
operate with the said centering opening in
the first mentioned die plate, to form a cen-
tering hole in the record blank.
3. In apparatus for stamping up sound 95
records, the combination of a matrix, a die-
plate recessed to contain the matrix and a
record blank, said die-plate being provided
with a pin projecting through a central aper-
ture of the matrix, and a cooperating die- 100
plate having a central aperture to receive the
projecting end of said pin, such aperture be-
ing enlarged at its upper end.
4. An apparatus for molding sound rec-
ords, comprising a die plate, having a cylin- 105
drical recess therein, surrounded by an annu-
lar channel, the said channel having outlets
at one or more of the sides of the die plate, in
combination with a second die plate, having
a plunger, telescoping the said recess. no
5. An apparatus for molding sound rec-
ords comprising a die plate having a cylin-
drical recess therein surrounded by an annu-
lar channel, the said channel having outlets
at one or more sides of the die plate, in com- 115
bination with a second die plate, covering
said channel and outlets, and having a plun-
ger telescoping said recess, the last men-
tioned die plate having its inner face cut
away to form with the said outlet an enlarged 120
outlet.
6. An apparatus for molding sound rec-
ords, comprising a die plate having a cylin-
drical recess therein and an annular depres-
sion around said recess, in combination with 125
a second die plate having a plunger telescop-
ing said recess, leaving an annular passage of
uniform cross-sectional area around said
plunger for the escape of surplus material.
7. An apparatus for molding sound rec- 130
879,363
3
ords, comprising a die plate having a cylin-
drical recess therein and an annular depres-
sion around said recess in combination with
a second die plate covering said depression
and having its face cut away to form an out-
let therefrom and a plunger projecting from
said last mentioned plate telescoping said re-
cess, leaving an annular passage of uniform
cross-sectional area around said plunger for
the escape of surplus material.
Signed at New York, N. Y. this 4th day of
June 1903.
GEORGE K. CHENEY.
Witnesses :
J. E. Pearson,
W. H. Pumphret.
10
No. 879,589.
W. W. ROSENFIELD.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED AUG. 5, 1904
PATENTED FEB. 18, 1908.
!£ SHEETS— SHEET 1.
Nv^NTDf\
AttY
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 879,589.
W. W. ROSENFIELD.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED AUG. 5, 1904.
PATENTED FEB. 18, 1908.
2 SHEETS— BHEET 2.
e^
j2l
W I TRESSES
A-r-r-V
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM W. ROSENFIELD, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 879,589.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed August 5, 1904. Serial "No. 219,599.
Patented Feb. 18, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William W. Rosen-
field, a citizen of the United States, residing
in the borough of Manhattan, hi the city,
5 county, and State of New York, have invent-
ed an Improvement in Phonographs, of
which the following is a specification.
This invention relates to automatically
operated phonographs.
10 The invention has been made especially
with the idea of adapting a spring motor
actuated phonograph to operate to make
successive productions of a record or records.
To this end I provide means for automatically
15 re- winding the motor by which the phono-
graph is given its reproducing movements,
and means for automatically raising the re-
producer from the record and for returning
the parts to normal or starting position.
20 For re-winding the spring motor, I preferably
provide an electric motor and means where-
by the circuit is closed to such electric motor
to cause the re-winding of the spring motor
preferably after the reproduction of a record,
25 and the electric motor also preferably actu-
ates the automatic return mechanism.
Phonographs operated by spring motors
are now in common use, but other forms of
stored power motors might be employed for
30 directly actuating ' phonographs for their
•reproducing movements, and this invention,
so far as it relates to the feature of automatic-
ally re-winding or otherwise storing power
in an actuating motor of a phonograph, con-
35 sidered broadly, is not to be limited to any
particular form of such motor.
In the drawings Figure 1 is an elevation
and Fig. 2 a plan representing a spring motor
actuated phonograph of well known form
40 provided with rewinding and return mech-
anism in accordance with my present inven-
tion. Fig. 3 is an elevation of parts of the
operating mechanism looking from the back
of Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 4 is a transverse sec-
45 tion and elevation at the dotted line x, x, of
Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is an elevation and partial
section on dotted line y, y of Fig. 2 looking
toward the right. Fig. 6 is an elevation
representing some of the parts shown in Fig.
50 5, but in a different position. Fig. 7 is an
elevation in larger size of the eccentric disk
and the parts associated therewith looking
toward the left in Figs. 1 and 2 ; and Fig. 8 is
an elevation of the friction coupling inter-
55 posed between the shafts of the electric motor
and the motor for directly operating the pho-
nograph with the friction spring omitted.
As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, a represents the
bed of the phonograph; a' the support rail
for the free end of the reproducer -arm b 60
which is carried by a sleeve b' movable on a
guide-bar b2. c represents the feed-screw,
and c2 the feed nut carried by the sleeve V
and engaging the underside of the feed screw
for causing the reproducing movement of the 65
reproducer-arm; d represents the mandrel;
c' gears within a case or housing connecting
the shaft of the mandrel d with the shaft of
the feed-screw c, and 2, 3, 4 are bearings for
the respective ends of the shaft of the man- 70
drel and feed-screw, d' is a pulley on the
mandrel shaft and d2 a belt around the same
and which extends down through the bed a to
a pulley e2 upon a shaft of the train of gears
e' of a spring motor e, by which the mandrel 75
is rotated and the reproducer-arm moved for
the reproduction of a record. These parts
are of usual and well known construction,
and do not require further description.
Secured to the reproducer- arm b (see 80
especially Fig. 7) is a bracket-arm b3 which
carries an arbor / upon which an eccentric
disk g is re voluble. The arbor / also sup-
ports an adjustable sleeve/' clamped thereto
by the set-screw shown in Figs. 1, 2 and 7, 85
the office of which sleeve will be hereinafter
described.
The eccentric or cam disk g is provided
with a notched hub g' , and has secured to its
face a weight-plate 6, and its periphery is 90
formed with a notch or low portion 7, with
a toothed portion 8 beyond the low portion
7 and extending to a high portion, with a
tail-rib 9 beyond the toothed portion, and
with a portion 10 which is smooth. Pivot- 95
ally connected to the bracket-arm b3 is a
latch h having a tooth 11 for engaging the
notch in the hub g' , said latch h being
weighted or over-balanced by reason of the
position of its pivot ~hf so that its tooth 11 100
normally bears against the hub g' . Said
arm also has an end 12 on the other side of
the pivot from the tooth 11 for engaging a
cam rod or arm 13 adjustable longitudinally
on a support 14 secured to the bed a of the 105
phonograph.
A return feed screw i is mounted in bear-
ings 15 upon the bed of the phonograph.
This screw shaft preferably has a spiral
groove of coarse pitch compared with the 110
s
879,589
thread of the feed screw c and is provided
with teeth between the convolutions of the
groove for a portion of its length. The shaft
of the return feed screw carries fast thereon
5 a sprocket %' .
I represents the shaft from an electric
motor, positioned vertically, and having at
its upper end a worm V meshing with a gear
ra' mounted free to rotate upon a shaft ra
10 extending horizontally and having bearings
in the sides of a casing Jc. The gear ra' is
formed with a gear ra2, and these together
are loose upon the shaft m. The shaft to
is driven by the rotation of the gear ra'
15 through a slip coupling which will permit
the gear to slip on the shaft when a certain
resistance is offered to the rotation of the
shaft. Any suitable form of friction coup-
ling, or driving device, may be provided
20 for this purpose. In the preferred form of
friction coupling shown, a collar 18 is
mounted fast on the shaft ra at one side of
the gears ra' and ra2, and at the other side of
said gears is a collar 17 also fast on the shaft,
25 while between the collar 17 and the gears is
a notched flanged sleeve c4 held against rota-
tion relatively to the shaft m by a pin &
passing through the shaft and pressed against
the face of the gear ra' by a helical spring 19
30 one end of which bears against the collar
17 and the other end against the flange of
the sleeve c4. (Figs. 3 and 8). The shaft ra
is continued by means of a coupling shown
in Figs. 1 and 3, and terminates in a pinion
35 meshing with a gear through which the
spring motor e may be rewound.
A shaft n is mounted above the shaft ra
in bearings 16. Fast on this shaft is a gear
ra3 meshing with the gear ra2; also fast on this
40 shaft n is a sprocket n', a chain w passing
around the sprocket n' and to and around
the sprocket i' on the shaft of the return feed
screw for rotating said shaft. The shaft n
also has fast thereon a pinion n2 meshing
45 with a gear o' mounted upon an arbor o
which is secured in a lug of the casing &. A
cam disk s of conducting material is mounted
to rotate with the gear o* and is insulated
from the gear o' and the arbor o by being
50 mounted on an insulating disk r secured to
the gear o' . A spring contact arm t for en-
gaging the periphery of the cam disk s is
secured by a binding-post clamp t' to an
insulating post s' fast to a post Jc3 rising from
55 the top plate ¥ of the casing k. A contact
spring r2 which constantly bears against the
face of the cam disk s is also secured by a
binding-post clamp r' to the insulating-post
s'. To the binding-post clamps t' and r' are
60 connected wires 20 and 21 respectively of
the circuit to the electric motor, so that in
the operation of the machine when the con-
tact arm t engages the cam disk s the circuit
will be closed for operating the motor.
65 The contact arm t is normally held out of
contact with the cam disk s by means of a
rocker arm v pivoted at 22 to a bracket arm
lc2. One end of this rocker arm is provided
with an insulating block v2 adapted to move
beneath the contact arm t when the latter 70
has been raised by the high point of the cam
disk s, and the rocker arm is under tension of
a spring 23 which tends to swing the rocker-
arm on its pivot to move the block v2 toward
and beneath the end of the contact arm. 75
The other end of the rocker arm is provided
with a foot piece v' which lies in the path of
movement of the sleeve /' carried by the
arbor /in position to be engaged thereby as
the reproducer arm approaches the end of its 80
reproducing movement.
The position of the parts as shown in Figs.
1 and 2 is that assumed by them at the end
of the reproducing movement of the phono-
graph preparatory to the return of the re- 85
producer arm to an initial or original posi-
tion either to repeat the record or to repro-
duce from another record. In these figures
the position of the rocker-arm v and the
spring contact-arm t is as represented in Fig. 90
5, while the position of these parts during the
reproduction of the record and before the
arbor / and its sleeve /' reach the limit of
their movement is that represented in Fig. 6 —
that is to say — with the insulating-block 95
v2 moved beneath and supporting the free
end of the spring-arm t in which position the
electric circuit is broken and the electric
motor not running.
As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the extreme ad- 100
vance movement of the reproducer-arm and
arbor / have brought the end of the sleeve
/'•in contact with the foot-piece v' and the
rocker-arm v has been thereby swung on its
pivot to remove the insulating-block v2 from 105
beneath the end of the spring-arm t, allow-
ing the same to drop into contact with the
periphery of the cam-disk s so as to com-
plete the electric circuit through the wire 20,
binding post clamp t', arm t, cam-disk s, con- no
tact spring r2, binding-post clamp r' and
wire 21, thereby starting the electric motor.
The insulating block v2 is then held against
the side of the arm t by the action of the
spring 23 until the arm t is again raised by 115
the cam disk s to permit the block v2 to again
move beneath the ' arm t. The electric
motor being thus started, the rotation of the
shaft I and worm wheel V drives the gears
ra', ra2 together, and the shaft ra is friction- 120
ally driven through the friction coupling
formed by the collars 17 and 18, the sleeve
c4 and the spring 19, thereby winding up the
spring motor e. Simultaneousy the gear
ra2 causes the rotation of the gear m3 and the 125
shaft n, which through he sprocket n' , the
chain w and the sprocket %' drives the return
feed screw i, and the shaft n through the
pinion n2 also rotates the gear 0' and the
cam-disk s, these parts being so timed and 130
879,589
proportioned that the cam-disk is not given
a complete rotation until the return feed
screw has been given a rotation more than
sufficient to effect the raising of the repro-
5 ducer-arm and its complete return movement
and lowering again to its operative position.
When the return feed screw i begins to
rotate, the teeth thereof engage and mesh
with the teeth 8 of the eccentric disk g (see
10 Fig. 7) and the disk is thereby rotated to
cause successive portions of its toothed cam
periphery to engage the return feed screw
thereby raising the bracket arm b3 and repro-
ducer-arm b to raise the reproducer from the
15 record and move the feed nut from the feed
screw c until the teeth 8 have paid out and
the tail-rib 9 of this eccentric-disk has set-
tled into the groove of the return feed screw
i. The tooth 11 of the latch h then drops
20 into the notch of the hub g' and holds the
eccentric disk against further turning, and
the disk, the arm b3 and the reproducer arm
b are then by the continued rotation of the
return feed screw given a return movement
25 until the end 12 of the latch h under-runs the
bent end of the arm 13 whereby the end 12
of the latch is pressed down and the tooth
11 withdrawn from the notch in the hub g' .
The eccentric disk g is thereby released and
30 resting on the return feed screw it is turned
thereby to bring successive portions of the
portion 10 of its cam periphery in engage-
ment with the shaft, whereby the bracket
arm b3 and the reproducer-arm are gradually
35 lowered until the reproducer is returned to
operative position and the feed nut is again
in engagement with the feed screw c. The
turning of the disk g will continue until its
periphery clears the return feed screw, after
40 which, (luring any further rotation of the
return feed screw and during the next re-
producing movement of the reproducer-arm,
the disk will be held by the weight 6 in posi-
tion with its low portions 7 opposite the re-
45 turn feed screw and with the shoulder
formed by the first of its teeth 8 bearing
against the return feed screw ready to be en-
gaged by the teeth of the return feed screw
when the latter is rotated for the next return
50 movement.
The rotation of the return feed screw con-
tinues until the end of the contact arm t is
raised by the cam disk s to permit the block
v2 of the rocker arm v to move under the end
55 of the contact arm and until the high point
of the cam disk has then moved beyond and
out of contact with the contact arm, thereby
breaking the circuit and stopping the elec-
tric motor.
60 To insure the full return movement of the
reproducer arm, the amount of rotation
given to the return feed screw is preferably,
and as before pointed out, more than suffi-
cient to effect the elevation, return and lower-
65 ing of the reproducer arm with the longest
record which the machine is adapted to re-
produce. The return feed screw will thus
continue to rotate after the reproducer arm
has been returned and lowered; and to pre-
vent the eccentric disk g, which then rests 70
with the first of its teeth 8 bearing against
the return feed screw, from being turned by
such further rotation of the return feed
screw, the portion of the return feed screw
against which the disk g then rests is circum- 75
ferentially smooth, the gear teeth of the re-
turn feed screw extending only for a part of
the length of the screw from the other end
thereof.
If the spring motor e is allowed to continue 80
in operation after the return of the repro-
ducer arm and the feed nut to operative
position, the phonograph will be again ac-
tuated thereby for again reproducing the
record, the electric motor meanwhile remain- 85
ing at rest until the reproducer arm nears the
end of its reproducing movement, at which
time the sleeve/' will again engage the foot
piece v' to swing the rocker arm v to carry
the block v2 from under the contact arm t and 90
permit the contact arm to spring into contact
with the periphery of the cam disk s, thereby
again closing the circuit for causing the
electric motor to operate to rewind the spring
motor and to rotate the return feed screw 95
for again returning the reproducer arm to
its initial or starting position. Evidently,
however, suitable means may be provided
for stopping the operation of the spring
motor before the return movement of the re- 100
producer arm has been completed, and when
such means is provided the entire mech-
anism will remain at rest after the return
movement of the reproducer arm has been
completed and until the spring motor is 105
again put in operation, whereupon the re-
producing and return movements of the
phonograph and the rewinding of the spring
motor will again be effected in order and re-
peated until the spring motor is again no
stopped.
By adjustment of the sleeve/' and the cam
rod 13, the extent of operation of the spring
motor before being rewound may be varied,
and the mechanism shown may be adapted 115
for records of varying length so that the re-
producing devices shall operate only over
the length of the actual record, thus avoid-
ing wTaste of time and unnecessary move-
ment of the parts. 120
To insure full rewinding of the spring
motor with the longest record which the ma-
chine is adapted to reproduce, the amount
of rotation given to the worm gear m' at
each operation of the electric motor will 125
preferably be more than sufficient to rewind
the spring motor to the tension to which it
was wound before the commencement of the
reproducing movement, and the friction
coupling between the worm gear and the re- 130
879,589
winding shaft m is provided for the purpose of
permitting continued movement of the worm
gear after the spring motor has been fully re-
wound, the resistance to the rotation of the
5 shaft m being sufficient to cause the parts
of the coupling to slip.
It will be seen that with the construction
shown, the return movement of the recipro-
cating part of the phonograph, that is the
10 reproducer arm in the construction shown,
is effected entirely by the power of the elec-
tric motor and does not add at all to the
work to be performed by and cannot affect
the operation of the spring motor.
15 It will be understood that the invention is
not to be limited to the exact construction
and arrangement of parts shown in the draw-
ings and to which the foregoing description
has been mainly confined, but that it in-
20 eludes changes and modifications thereof
within the claims. It will be understood
also that features of the invention may be
employed independently of other features
thereof, and that the invention or features
25 thereof may be applied to other forms of
phonographs from that shown.
It will be understood also that the trem
"phonograph" is used herein as a broad term
to include all sound reproducing machines to
30 which the invention is or may be found ap-
plicable.
Features of invention disclosed but not
claimed herein are claimed in Patent No.
859,114 granted to me on an application
35 filed as a division of this application, and in
my pending applications No. 243,612 and
No. 385,388.
I claim as my invention
1. The combination with a phonograph
40 and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record , of means for automat-
ically storing power in said motor in the in-
terval between successive reproductions of a
record or records, substantially as described.
45 2. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of means controlled by
the movement of a part of the phonograph
for automatically storing power in said mo-
50 tor, substantially as described.
3. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of a second motor, and
means controlled by the movement of a part
55 of the phonograph to cause power to be
stored in the first motor by the operation of
the second motor, substantially as described.
4. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
60 reproducing a record, of a second motor for
storing power in the first motor, and auto-
matically operated means for causing the
second motor to operate in the interval be-
tween successive reproductions of a record or
65 records, substantially as described. ■
5. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of a second motor for
storing power in the first motor, and means
controlled by the movement of a part of the 70
phonograph for causing the second motor to
operate in the interval between successive
reproductions of a record or records, sub-
stantially as described.
6. The combination with a phonograph 75
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of a second motor and
automatically operated means for causing
power to be stored in the first motor by the
operation of the second motor after the re- 80
production of a record, substantially as de-
scribed.
7. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of a second motor for 85
storing power in the first motor, means con-
trolled by the movement of a part of the
phonograph for causing the second motor to
operate after the reproduction of a record,
and adjustable means for varying the time 90
at which the second motor is caused to oper-
ate with relation to the operation of the pho-
nograph, substantially as described.
8. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in 95
reproducing a record, of a second motor, and
connections between the second motor and
the first motor for storing power in the first
motor by the operation of the second motor,
said connections including means for per- 100
mitting a slipping of the parts after the de-
sired tension has been applied to the first
motor, substantially as described.
9. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in 105
reproducing a record, of a second motor, and
connections between the second motor and
the first motor for storing power in the first
motor by the operation of the second motor,
said connections including a friction driving no
device, substantially as described.
10. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of a second motor,
connections between the second motor and 115
the first motor for storing power in the first
motor by the operation of the second motor,
said connections including a friction driving
device, and means for starting the second
motor and for automatically stopping it after 120
an operation more than sufficient to restore
to the first motor the power exerted by the
first motor in actuating the phonograph for
the reproduction of a record, substantially as
described. 125
11. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of an electric motor,
and automatically operated means for caus-
ing power to be stored in the first motor by 130
879,689
the operation of the electric motor in the
interval between successive reproductions of
a record orrecords, substantially as described.
12. The combination with a phonograph
5 and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of an electric motor,
and means controlled by the movement of a
part of the phonograph to cause power to be
stored in the first motor by the operation of
10 the electric motor, substantially as described.
13. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of an electric motor,
connections for storing power in the first
15 motor by the operation of the electric motor,
and means for automatically closing the cir-
cuit to the electric motor after the reproduc-
tion of a record, substantially as described.
14. The combination with a phonograph
20 and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of an electric motor,
connections for storing power in the first
motor by the operation of the electric motor,
means for automatically closing the circuit
25 to the electric motor after the reproduction
of. a record, and adjustable means for vary-
ing the time of closing the circuit with rela-
tion to the operation of the phonograph, sub-
stantially as described.
30 15. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of an electric motor,
connections for storing power in the first
motor by the operation of the electric motor,
35 and means controlled by the movement of a
part of the phonograph for closing the circuit
to said motor, substantially as described.
16. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
40 reproducing a record, of an electric motor,
connections for storing power in the first
motor by the operation of the electric motor,
means for closing the circuit to the electric
motor, and means for automatically opening
45 said circuit after a predetermined operation,
substantially as described.
17. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of an electric motor,
50 connections for storing power in the first
motor by the operation of the electric motor,
means controlled by the movement of a part
of the phonograph for closing the circuit to
said electric motor, and means for opening
55 said circuit after the shaft of the electric
motor has made a predetermined number
of revolutions, substantially as described.
/ 18. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
60 reproducing a record, of an electric motor,
connections between the electric motor and
the first motor for storing power in the first
motor by the operation of the electric motor,
said connections including means for permit-
65 ting a slipping of the parts after the desired
70
tension has been applied to the first motor,
automatically operating means for closing
the circuit to the electric motor, and means
for opening said circuit after the shaft of the
electric motor has made a number of revolu-
tions greater than is required to store power
in the first motor, substantially as described.
19. The combination with a phonograph
and a spring motor for actuating the phono-
graph in reproducing a record, of an electric 75
motor, connections between the electric mo-
tor and the spring motor for rewinding the
spring motor, said connections including
means for permitting a slipping of the parts
after the desired tension has been applied to g0
the first motor, means for closing the circuit
to the electric motor after the reproduction
of a record, adjustable means for varying the
time of operation of the circuit closing means
for records of different lengths, and means 85
for opening said circuit after the shaft of
the electric motor has made a predetermined
number of revolutions not dependent on the
operation of the spring motor, substantially
as described. 90
20. The combination with a phonograph
and a spring motor for actuating the phono-
graph in reproducing a record, of an electric
motor, and automatically operated means
for causing the spring motor to be rewound 95
by the electric motor after the reproduction
of a record, substantially as described.
21. The combination with a phonograph
and a spring motor for actuating the phono-
graph in reproducing a record, of an electric i00
motor, connections between the electric mo-
tor and the spring motor for rewinding the
spring motor, and means controlled by the
movement of a part of the phonograph for
closing the circuit of the electric motor, sub- 105
stantially as described.
22. The combination with a phonograph
and a spring motor for actuating the phono-
graph in reproducing a record, of an electric
motor, connections. between the electric mo- 110
tor and the spring motor for rewinding the
spring motor, means controlled by the move-
ment of a part of the phonograph for closing
the circuit to the electric motor after the re-
production of a record, and adjustable means n5
for varying the time of closing the circuit
with relation to the operation of the phono-
graph, substantially as described.
23. The combination with a phonograph
having a reciprocating reproducer carrier i2o
and with a spring motor for actuating the
phonograph in reproducing a record, of an
electric motor, connections between the elec-
tric motor and the spring motor for rewind-
ing the spring motor, and means controlled 125
by the movement of the reproducer carrier
for closing the circuit to the electric motor,
substantially as described.
24. The combination with a phonograph
and a spring motor for actuating the phono- 130
6
879,589
graph in reproducing a record, of means con-
trolled by the movement of a part of the pho-
nograph for rewinding the spring motor, sub-
stantially as described.
5 25. The combination with a phonograph
and a spring motor for actuating the phono-
graph in reproducing a record, of a second
motor and connections for rewinding the
spring motor, and means controlled by the
10 movement of a part of the phonograph for
causing the second motor to operate after
the reproduction of a record, substantially as
described.
26. The combination with a phonograph
15 and a spring motor for actuating the phono-
graph in reproducing a record, of a second
motor, connections between the second mo-
tor and the spring motor for rewinding the
spring motor, said connections including
20 means for permitting a slipping of the parts
after the desired tension has been applied to
the spring motor, substantially as described.
27. The combination with a phonograph
and a spring motor for actuating the phono-
25 graph in reproducing a record, of a second
motor, connections between the second motor
and the spring motor for rewinding the spring
motor, said connections including a friction
driving device, substantially as described.
30 28. The combination with a phonograph
having a reciprocating reproducer carrier and
with a motor for actuating the phonograph
in reproducing a record, of a second motor
for storing power in the first motor, and
35 means controlled by the movement of the
reproducer carrier for causing the second
motor to operate after the reproduction of a
record, substantially as described.
29. The combination with a phonograph
40 having a reciprocating reproducer carrier and
with a motor for actuating the phonograph
in reproducing a record, of an electric motor,
connections for storing power in the first
motor by the operation of the electric motor,
45 and means for closing the circuit to the elec-
tric motor when the reproducer carrier of the
phonograph has reached a certain point in
' its reproducing movement, and adjustable
means for determining the point in the repro-
50 ducing movement of the reproducer carrier
at which the circuit to the electric motor
shall be closed, substantially as described.
30. The combination with a phonograph
and a motor for actuating the phonograph in
reproducing a record, of an electric motor, 55
connections for storing power in the first
motor by the operation of the electric motor,
a circuit closing device for closing the circuit
to the electric motor, a member adapted to
be moved by the movement of the repro- 60
ducer carrier of the phonograph as it ap-
proaches the end of its reproducing move-
ment for causing the circuit to be closed by
said circuit closing device, and means oper-
ated by the electric motor for causing the 65
circuit to be opened by said circuit closing
device, substantially as described.
31. The combination with a phonograph
having a reciprocating reproducer carrier and
with a motor for actuating the phonograph 70
in reproducing a record, of an electric motor,
connections between the electric motor and
the first motor for storing power in the first
motor by the operation of the electric motor,
a cam disk of conducting material turned by 75
the electric motor, a spring contact arm bear-
ing against the cam portion of said disk, a
contact device bearing against another por-
tion of said disk, circuit connections with
said contact arm and contact device for com- 80
pleting the circuit to the electric motor
through said disk, a spring latch for entering
beneath the contact arm when the latter has
been raised by the cam disk, and means con-
trolled by the movement of the reproducer 85
carrier for moving said latch to release the
contact arm, substantially as described.
32. The combination with a phonograph
having a record and a reproducer carrier
mounted to travel across the record in the 90
reproducing operation and to be raised from
the record and returned to its starting point,
and a spring motor for actuating the phono-
graph during the reproducing operation, of
automatic means operating in the intervals 95
between the reproducing operations to re-
wind the said motor and return said repro-
ducer carrier to its starting position.
Signed by me this 26 day of July 1904.
WM. W. ROSENFIELD.
Witnesses :
Geo. T. Pinckney,
S. T. Haviland.
No. 879,755,
PATENTED FEB. 18, 1908.
A. FISCHER.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED DEO. 29. 1906.
jlfa.
j3i?6
A
%#3
Inventor.
JIlejcFiscTter:
<0£^u~ Au***-^
the nohh.s pcters Co., Washington, i
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ALEX FISCHER, OF LONDON, ENGLAND.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 879,755.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed December 29, 1906. Serial No. 350,014.
Patented Feb. 18, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Alex Fischer, a sub-
ject of the King of England, residing at 18
Hazlitt road, Kensington, in the county of
London, England, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in or Relating to
Talking-Machines ; and I do hereby declare
the following to be a full, clear, and exact
description of the invention, such as will en-
10 able others skilled in the art to which it apper-
tains to make and use the same.
My invention relates to an improvement
in talking machines, and the object of my
invention is to make a tight, flexible and
15 universal joint between the tone-arm and
trumpet.
The existing tone arms of talking ma-
chines having only a horizontal and vertical
movement on pivots cannot follow the
20 grooves throughout, the movement thus ob-
tained being an angular one along the curves
of the grooves it follows that the stylus (nee-
dle) can only touch the grooves at certain
points.
25 Joints constructed as hereafter described
will allow the movable part of the joint (tone
arm) to move in any direction, that is, up
and down and to any obhque angle and thus
the sound box stylus will travel in the
30 grooves without jerks, not missing any in-
dentations and producing a sustained rich
tone of fine quality and shading.
According to this" invention, at one end of
the two pipes to be connected, I form or fix
35 an annular flange of spherical curvature so
that it forms a concave seating. On the
other pipe I also form or fix an annular flange
of spherical curvature so that it forms a con-
vex flange which fits exactly against the con-
40 cave seating of the other pipe. The concave
seating is of larger spherical section than the
convex flange. The under portion of the
convex flange is concentric with the top part
of the flange and with the faces of the con-
45 cave seating, the three spherical surfaces hav-
ing one common center.
Suitable means are provided for keeping
the convex and concave surfaces of the
flanges in close contact in all positions into
50 which the joint can move. And in order that
this invention may be understood I will pro-
ceed to describe the same with reference to
the drawings accompanying this specifica-
tion, in which: —
55 Figure 1 shows in vertical section the joint
between the tone-arm and trumpet of^j a
talking machine. Fig. 2 is a detail thereof.
Fig. 3 shows a form of the invention in which
the motion is universal; Fig. 4 shows eleva-
tion of a disk phonograph fitted with my im- 60
proved tone arm; Fig. 5 shows elevation of
one means of fitting my improved tone arm
to a cylinder phonograph; Fig. 6 shows
another form of my joint as being also suit-
able for a tone arm of talking machines; Fig. 65
7 shows a construction similar to Fig. 2 with
the addition of lugs hereinafter referred to.
The same letters of reference are employed
to denote the same parts in all the views.
a is a pipe terminating in the usual trum- 70
pet. b is an annular flange formed with or
attached to the pipe a and provided with a
spherical concave surface c forming the seat-
ing, d is another pipe, which is provided
with a flange e. This flange has a convex 75
surface which is of similar spherical curva-
ture to the surface c of the flange b and fits
closely in contact therewith. The flange e is
provided at the back with two short grooves
g as shown in the plan of the back of this 80
flange at Fig. 2 to prevent motion of the arm
in the plane of the paper, h is a ring fur-
nished with an annular groove i, or it is obvi-
ous that I may have the annular groove i on
the under side of the flange e and the two 85
short grooves g on the ring Ji. The ring h
may be attached to the flange b by screwing
or otherwise, j are balls resting in the
grooves g and the annular groove i. It will
be seen that by this arrangement the arm d 90
can have a motion of complete rotation given
to it and every motion except one in the
plane of the paper. In using this joint for
disk or cylinder talking machines I may fix
to such joint either a taper tubular arm or a 95
parallel tubular arm or a tubular arm par-
tially tapered and partially parallel, to form
what is known in the trade as the tone arm.
Fig. 3 shows a form of the invention in
which the motion is universal and not re- 100
stricted in any direction. In this case, the
construction is precisely similar to that
shown in Fig. 1, but the surface Jc at the back
of the flange e on the pipe d is also spherical
but without the grooves g and concentric 105
with the surfaces b and e. It can be kept in
position by the spherical surface of the ring I
(which has no groove e) or by other means
and attached to the flange b by means of
screws or otherwise. If desired the side mo- 110
tion in the plane of the paper can also be pre-
vented by fixing^two^lugs^s opposite^to one
3
879,755
another on the edge of the flange e as shown
in Fig. 7.
m shows the bracket attached to the casing
of the machine which I prefer to fit so as to
5 be capable of horizontal adjustment as
shown. This I may effect by having the arm
portion n of the bracket m provided with a
slot o through which two bolts p may pass
provided with suitable nuts, so that this por-
10 tion n can be adjusted nearer to or further
from the case of the phonograph as may be
found necessary.
With reference to Fig. 5 r shows a bracket
fitted to or formed with the traverse carriage.
15 To the upper end of this bracket r is fitted
the ring h carrying the pipe or tone arm d, in
the upper portion of which is fixed the trum-
pet as shown in Figs. 4 and 5.
What I claim and desire to secure by Let-
20 ters Patent of the United States of America
is: —
1. In a talking machine, the combination
of a tone arm having a flange at its extreme
end, a trumpet having a corresponding flange
25 at its extreme end, and a cap extending from
one flange around the end of the other flange
and supporting it on the opposite side, but
leaving an intermediate space for free move-
ment, substantially as described.
2. In a talking machine, the combination 30
of a tone arm having a convex annular flange
at its extreme end, a trumpet having a simi-
larly shaped, but concave, annular flange at
its extreme end and adapted to fit over said
first named flange, a cap fastened to and ex- 35
tending 'from one flange around the edge of
the other flange and supporting it on the
opposite side, but leaving an intermediate
space for free movement, substantially as
described. 40
3. In a talking machine, the combination
of a tone arm having an annular convex
flange at its extreme end, a trumpet having a
similarly shaped but concave annular flange
at its extreme end, and adapted to fit against 45
said first named flange, a cap fastened to and
extending from one of said flanges around
the edge of the other flange and supporting it
on the opposite side, but leaving an interme-
diate space for free motion, and anti-friction 50
devices between said cap and one of said
flanges, substantially as described.
In testimony whereof, I affix my signature,
in presence of two witnesses.
ALEX FISCHER.
Witnesses :
A. Beowne,
H. D. Jameson.
No. 879,797.
PATENTED FEB. 18, 1908.
V. H. RAPKE.
PHONOGRAPH HORN.
APPLICATION FILED JUHE 15. 1907.
19' 18
%_J9
J8
CfLcjyr2^.
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THB NORitis PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
VICTOR H. RAPKE, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
PHONOGRAPH-HORN.
Wo. 879,797.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed June 15, 1907. Seriai No, 379,119,
Patented Feb. 18, 1908.
To all whom it m,ay concern:
Be it known that I, Victor H. Rapke, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of the city of New York, borough of Manhat-
5 tan, in the county and State of New York,
have invented a new and useful Improve-
ment in Phonograph-Horns, of which the
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip-
tion.
10 The purpose of the invention is to provide
a collapsible phonograph horn or megaphone,
wherein the sections can be completely sep-
arated one from the other, and compactly
nested, and to provide simple means for
15 drawing the sections together, which means
can be quickly and conveniently applied or
removed.
It is a further purpose of the invention to
so construct the horn that the vibrations will
20 not be carried from one section to the other,
and whereby the vibrations will be extremely
light and will in no manner interfere with the
sound waves passing through the horn; and
it is also a purpose of the invention to so con-
25 struct the horn that there will be absolutely
no rattling when the horn is set up and in
use.
The invention consists in the novel con-
struction and combination of the several
30 parts as will be hereinafter fully set forth and
pointed out in the claims.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawings forming a part of this specifica-
tion, in which similar characters of reference
35 indicate corresponding parts in all the figures.
Figure 1 is a longitudinal section through
the improved horn, showing one tie rod sim-
ply fitted thereto and a second tie rod in
clamping engagement therewith ; Fig. 2 is an
40 enlarged section through portions of oppos-
ing body sections of the horn, illustrating the
manner in which one section is fitted to the
other; Fig. 3 is a view similar to that shown
in Fig. 2, but illustrating the form of connec-
45 tion employed between the inner or most
contracted body section and the section next
thereto ; Fig. 4 is an enlarged transverse sec-
tion through a portion of the horn, illustrat-
ing a form of keeper employed for the locking
50 or clamping devices for the body sections of
the horn; Fig. 5 is a longitudinal section
through the body section of the horn, show-
ing the said body sections nested; and Fig. 6
is a sectional side elevation of one of the tie
55 rods, showing a modified construction.
The horn is made up of sections A, any
desired number of sections being employed,
and the said sections are usually of the same
depth except the most contracted or inner-
most section that is designated as A'. When go
the sections or members of the horn are
assembled they lie in close engagement one
with the other, and while various means may
be employed for effecting a connection be-
tween opposing sections of the horn, the 55
means shown in detail in Figs. 2 and 3 are
those that are preferred. It will be dis-
tinctly understood that the sections of the
horn in no manner telescope each other, but
their opposing edges rest flatly and smoothly 70
one against the other, and in holding the sec-
tions of the horn assembled they are drawn
together by clamping devices to be herein-
after described.
Each body section A is provided with a 75
hub 10 at one end and an outwardly extend-
ing flange 11 at the opposite end, the flange
of one section being neatly received in the
hub of an opposing section, but a slightly
different form of connection is provided be- go
tween the inner section A' of the horn and
the next section thereto, and this connection
is illustrated in Fig. 3, and may be used for
all the sections and consists in providing an
angular flange 12 at the outer edge of the 85
forward end portion of the said section A',
against which angular flange 12 the flange 11
of the next section has bearing. The flange
12 of the horn section A' is provided at the
junction of its members with an annular rib 90
or bead 13. The fastening device employed
consists of two or more, usually three, tie
rods B and these tie rods B are made of spring
material of suitable gage, and each rod B is
provided with a hook 14 at each end, as 95
shown in Fig. 1.
After the sections of the horn have been
assembled , one of the hooked ends of the tie
rods are made to engage with the connection
between the forward section A and the sec- 100
tion next thereto, and the opposite ends of
the tie rods are made to engage with the
flange 12 at the head 13 thereon, as is shown
in Fig. 1. The tie rods B are made of such
length that when they have been sprung into 105
the position just described, they are tight
and will hold the sections of the horn together,
but in order that the said sections may
be positively drawn and firmly held in en-
gagement one with the other, the tie rods B no
3
879,797
are sprung inward at their central portions
so as to lie against the exterior of the horn
conforming to its exterior contour, as is also
shown in Fig. 1, and the tie rods are held in
5 this position by passing them beneath keep-
ers 15, usually formed on the exterior of one
of the sections of the horn, and these keepers
15 are preferably in the form of hooks, as is
clearly illustrated in Fig. 4, and where the
10 rods and keepers engage either one or the
other may be insulated so as to prevent the
rods from vibrating or conducting vibrations
from one section to the other.
The tie rods B shown in Fig. 1 are plain,
15 that is to say they are made from one piece
of material, but it is sometimes desirable to
employ the type of rod B' shown in Fig. 6,
wherein the rod is provided with an exterior
thread 17 at each end, one thread being a
20 right-hand thread and the other a left-hand
thread, the threaded end of a tie rod is re-
ceived in a correspondingly threaded sleeve
18, and each of the said sleeves 18 is provided
with a hook 19 at its outer end. The tie
25 rods B' are applied in the same manner as
the tie rods B and are also held to the body
of the horn by keepers 15, but in the form of
the tie rods B' the said rods may be length-
ened or shortened to adapt them to horns of
30 different length.
It is evident that a horn of the character
described can be quickly and conveniently
built up and locked in its set-up position, and
that by simply loosening and removing the
35 tie rods employed the sections of the body of
the horn will separate and can be nested, as
is shown in Fig. 5, and packed in an exceed-
ingly small compass. I desire it to be under-
stood that insulating material may also be
4Q employed when the ends of the rods engage
the sections of the horn.
Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent, —
45 1. A phonograph horn or like device, con-
structed in independent sections, and clamp-
ing devices for drawing the sections together
and holding them in abutting engagement
one with the other.
50 2. A phonograph horn or like device, con-
structed in a series of independent sections,
se arable connections between opposing
edges of the sections, and devices for drawing
the sections together in abutting relation.
3. A phonograph horn or like device, con- 55
structed in a series of independent abutting
sections, separable connections for the sec-
tions, and clamping devices in engagement
with the exterior portion of the end sections
of the horn. 60
4. A phonograph horn or like device, con-
structed^ in a series of independent sections,
tie rods in clamping engagement with the ex-
terior faces of the end sections of the horn,
and keepers for the said rods carried by an in- 65
termediate section of the horn.
5. A phonograph horn or like device, con-
structed in a series of independent sections,
separable connections between opposing sec-
tions, tie rods of a spring material having 70
their end portions in clamping engagement
with the outer faces of the end sections of the
horn, and keepers secured to the exterior of
an intermediate section of the horn, the said
tie rods being sprung beneath the said 75
keepers at points between their ends where-
by to have a drawing action on the sections
of the horn.
6. The combination with a phonograph
horn or like device, constructed in a series of 80
sections, which sections are placed edge to
edge, and separable connections between op-
posing edges of the said sections, of tie rods
constructed of a spring material, the said
rods having a right-hand thread at one end 85
and a left-hand thread at the opposite end,
correspondingly threaded sleeves that re-
ceive the threaded ends of the rods, hooks
located at the outer end portions of the said
sleeves adapted for engagement with the ex- 90
terior of the horn where the outer sections
connect, and with the exterior of the horn
where the inner sections connect, and keepers
secured in the intermediate section of the
horn, beneath which keepers the said tie rods 95
are passed at points between their ends.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
VICTOR H. RAPKE.
Witnesses :
J. Fred Acker,
John P. Davis.
I
No. 880,016.
PATENTED FEB. 25, 1908.
E. B. DONALDSON.
ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED MAS. 28. 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
rtsr.i.
ttpZ,
^Witnesses
/. a,. 1
jg JFzsgr.S,
SvVOCMtot
td<#-Uy./3 S^hl/jCt^
~1 5W^ tt^UutUUL
attoi
»«* ■
THK NOKRIS PhTCRS CO.. WASHINGTON. O. C.
No. 880,016.
PATENTED FEB. 25, 1908.
E. B. DONALDSON.
ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
. APPLICATION FILED MAE. 28, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
^V^^c
2TZJ.5.
Q-
CSDffl
l?
v-
C
rqMiiiiihiiii.iiuibW
/.ffa
z. a. J»
^vp-tf,
Syt.ve.niot.
:&*-&<?: 7
&lus^(b *0n<*Uu^
7 ^WtWCV. tfJM/d&A^tA^IUKj
£Utoxnt1f
THf NORMS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. D. I
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EDWIN B. DONALDSON, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF
TO FREDERICK A. LINGER, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA.
ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
No. 880,016.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed March 28, 1907. Serial No, 365,074,
Patented Feb. 25, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Edwin B. Donaldson,
citizen of the United States of America, re-
siding at Washington, in the District of Co-
5 lumbia, have invented certain new and use-
ful Improvements in Attachments for Pho-
nographs, of which the following is a specifi-
cation.
This invention relates to phonographs and
10 like instruments in which a cylindrical rec-
ord is applied to a cylinder.
An object of the invention is to provide
means for imparting to the record an initial
movement or thrust to disengage the record
15 from the cylinder and project it beyond the
end of the cylinder in order that the opera-
tor may handle the same by applying his
fingers to the internal wall of the cylinder
and obviate any damage to the said record
20 which might result from handling the ex-
terior surface.
A further object of this invention is to pro-
vide a means for connecting the record actu-
ating device to the end gate of the ordinary
25 phonographs, in order to impart the move-
ment of the said end gate to the actuating
mechanism; thus releasing and actuating the
record at a single operation.
A still further object of the invention is to
30 provide an attachment of the character
noted that can be applied to phonographs
now in common use without in any way
changing their construction; the said attach-
ment being simply anchored to parts of ma-
35 chines as they are now made.
Finally an object of the invention is to
provide a device of the character noted that
will possess advantages in points of efficiency
and durability, proving at the same time
40 simple in construction and comparatively in-
expensive.
With the foregoing and other objects in
view, the invention consists in the details of
construction and in the arrangement and
45 combination of parts to be hereinafter more
fully set forth and described.
In describing the invention in detail, ref-
erence will be had to the accompanying
drawings, forming part of this specification
50 in which like characters denote correspond-
ing parts in the several views, in which —
Figure 1 , is a top plan view of a portion of
a phonograph showing the invention applied
thereto. Fig. 2, is a view in elevation of the
rear thereof. Fig. 3, is a view in elevation 55
of the end thereof. Fig. 4, is a rear eleva-
tion showing a modified construction. Fig.
5, illustrates another modification. Fig. 6,
is a perspective view showing the details of
construction of the attachment illustrated 60
in Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 7, is a detail view of a
further modification.
In these drawings A, denotes a base of a
phonograph, B, a cylinder of ordinary con-
struction and C, the end gate of an ordinary 65
phonograph.
The attachment consists of a standard D,
having suitable bearing E, at its end to re-
move a rod F, which is adapted to slide in
said bearing. The standard has a suitable 70
base or foot G, which is clamped or other-
wise secured to part of a phonograph. The
rear end of the rod F, has two curved arms
H, their armed surfaces conforming to the
contour of the surface of the cylinder, and 75
being approximately the thickness of a rec-
ord, although the proportion of the arms is
an immaterial detail.
The outer end of the rod has a pivotally
connected fink I, extending to a point 80
nearly under the retaining lever. A hook
J, is attached to the retaining lever by the
hook j, embracing said retaining lever and
said hook terminates in an angular extension
K, to which the outer end of the fink I, is 85
pivoted.
In the modification shown in Fig. 4, a
phonograph may be provided with a bracket
X, or if desired, the rod which usually forms
a portion of the phonograph may be utilized 90
as a means for suspending the hanger Y,
which hanger terminates in bearings y, in
which the rod W, may slide. In this form
the remainder of the structure, viz: the rod,
record engaging arms, the link and the means 95
for securing the outer end of the link to a
hook which engages the end gate of the
phonograph are the same as those heretofore
described and need not, therefore, be referred
to, in detail. 100
In the modification shown in Fig. 5, the
bracket V, is the same as'that shown in Figs.
1, and 2, except that it is shorter and is
stationed under the record. In this form
the rod T, is slidable in bearings of the 105
bracket and the arms S, embrace the cy Un-
der from the bottom, while the link Pi, has a
hooked extension Q, embracing the end
880,016
gate from the bottom. The hooks may be
secured by the end gate in any convenient
manner, but I have shown them in all of the
forms as provided with a set screw threaded
5 through the outer member of the hook and
adapted to bind against the retaining lever.
In the modification shown in Fig. 7, the
bracket 1 , is similar in all respects to that
heretofore described and the bar 2, is slid-
10 able therein having on its ends the arms 3,
which are to contact with the record. This
modification is designed for use on phono-
graphs not having the end gate and for the
purpose of permitting the manipulation of
15 the said rod the outer end thereof has a right
angular extension 4 forming a thumb piece,
which is engaged by the hand of the operator
for reciprocating the rod in its bearings.
What I claim is :
20 1. An attachment for phonographs con-
sisting of a bar adapted to reciprocate, bear-
ings therefor, curved arms on the end of the
bar shaped to the contour of a cylindrical
record and adapted to abut the end of the
25 record, an end gate, and means for connect-
ing the bar to the end gate to take move-
ment therefrom.
2. In an attachment for phonographs, a bar
adapted to reciprocate with relation to the
30 cylinder of a phonograph, record engaging
means carried by the said bar and suitable
means for connecting the bar to the end
gate of a phonograph whereby the said bar
takes movement from the lever.
3. In an attachment for phonographs, a 35
bar adapted to reciprocate, means for sup-
porting the bar with relation to the record of
a phonograph, record engaging members
carried by the bar adapted to contact with
the inner end of the said record, means for 40
connecting the bar to the end gate of a
phonograph whereby the movement of the
end gate is communicated to the bar.
4. An attachment for phonographs, hav-
ing a cylindrical record, consisting of a recip- 45
rocating member, a bearing therefor, curved
arms on the end of the reciprocating member
adapted to conform to the contour of the
record and contact the ends thereof, where-
by the endwise movement of the record is 50
afforded.
5. An attachment for phonographs having
a cylindrical record, consisting of a reciprocat-
ing rod, a bearing for the rod, curved arms
on the rod adapted to lie back of the end of 55
the record, and means for reciprocating the
rod.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in the presence of two witnesses, this 5th day
of March, 1907.
EDWIN B. DONALDSON.
Witnesses :
J. KOSS COLHOUN,
L. A. Sands.
No. 880,100. PATENTED FEB. 25, 1908.
J. ROEVER.
CARRIAGE FEED FOR PHONOGRAPH MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED JUKE 10, 1907.
&t T %3 \ V^
I I I I \ \\l
WITNESSES:
^fuuajjf ijl
r\ IJgJAENTOR.
III, @.^az£~~*<>^>
A TTORNE Y.
THE NOSRIS PITERS CO.. WASHINGTOH. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JULIUS ROEVER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO NATIONAL PATENT COMPANY, OF NEW
YORK, N. Y., A CORPORATION OF NEW YORK.
CARRIAGE-FEED FOR PHONOGRAPH-MACHINES.
No. 880,100.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed June 10, 1907. Serial No. 378,062.
Patented Feb. 25, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Julius Roever, of the
city of New York, county of Kings, and
State of New York, have invented a new and
I useful Improvement in Carriage-Feeds for
Phonograph-Machines, of which the following
is a full, clear, and exact description.
My invention relates to improvements in
phonographs, and especially to that class of
U phonograph machines in which a feed screw
is used for working a reproducer and its car-
riage backward and forward with relation to
a record. In machines of this type, a screw
having threads of opposite pitch is used, and
15 a blade is generally arranged to follow the
screw and transmit motion to the carriage
with which the blade is connected. Here-
tofore in structures of this kind, there has
been a difficulty because of the fact that the
2 j blade or its connected mechanisms would
some times catch a little, and every little
catch or imperfect movement is transmitted
to the reproducer, or at least affects the easy
movement of the reproducer so that the tone
2o quality of the instrument is injured.
The object of my invention is to remedy
this difficulty and produce an attachment
which will be sufficiently rigid to cause a
positive feed of the reproducer carriage, but
30 which will also be sufficiently elastic and
yielding to adapt itself to any slight imperfec-
tions of the screw or any imperfect move-
ments of any of the mechanism. In other
words, my invention is intended to con-
35 struct the screw connection of the feed so
that it will absolutely follow the thread of the
screw at a uniform rate, and without any
halts in the movement.
With these ends in view, my invention con-
40 sists of certain features of construction and
combinations of parts which will be herein-
after described and claimed.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawing forming a part of this specifica-
45 tion, in which similar reference characters
indicate corresponding parts in all the views.
Figure 1 is a broken plan view of a phono-
graph machine provided with my improve-
ments, and Fig. 2 is a sectional elevation
50 thereof with the feed connection shown
partly in longitudinal section.
I have shown my improvement in connec-
tion with a feed screw 10, which is only
shown threaded for a part of the way, but
55 this screw lies parallel with the record of the
machine, which is not here shown, and has
threads of opposite pitch. The screw shaft
10 is mounted on a horizontal frame 11,
which can be of any approved type, and tins
is supported on a post 12, and the frame 60
affords a support for the sliding carriage 13,
which carries the reproducer 14, and my
invention lies in the connection between this
carriage 13 and the screw shaft 10. The
immediate connection with the screw is by 65
a blade 15, not dissimilar to blades hereto-
fore used on machines of this character, but
the blade is yieldingly supported on a plun-
ger 16, the latter being slotted vertically as
shown at 17, and the blade is also provided 70
with a slot 18 which receives a pin 19, and
thus it will be seen that the blade 15 can
move in the slot 17, while it has also a
bodily movement with the plunger 16, which
latter is held in the casing 20, and is backed 75
by a spring 23, as shown. It wall thus be
seen that I do not rely mereby on the resil-
iency of the blade 15, which should be of
spring material, or even on the resiliency
of the blade and spring 23, but I get a flexi- 80
ble movement of the blade with relation
to its support, which is also spring pressed
and the blade is very sensitive and will
follow the thread of the screw at all times.
The plunger 16 has a shank 21 winch ex- 85
tends through the outer end of the casing 20,
and is screw threaded so as to receive the
nuts 22, by means of which the plunger can
be adjusted and locked and the tension of
the spring 23 regulated. The casing 20 can 90
be connected with the carriage 13 in any
convenient way, but I have shown it se-
cured to a post 24 which is fastened to the
carriage.
The mechanism shown at 25 at the right 95
hand of the carriage is for regulating the
stylus of the reproducer, and has nothing
to do with tins present invention, therefore
it is not described in detail.
It will be seen that the connection be- 100
tween the carriage and the screw is ex-
tremely flexible and yet sufficiently positive,
and it will be understood that the means for
supporting the plunger 16 and connecting
it with the carriage, can be varied consider- 105
ably if desired, without affecting the prin-
ciple of the invention, though I claim the
peculiar support and arrangement of the
plunger.
Having thus fully described my invention, no
s
880,10a
10
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent : —
|- 1. In a machine of the kind described, the
combination with the feed screw and car-
riage, of a spring pressed support on the car-
riage, and a blade yieldingly mounted on the
support and arranged to connect with the
screw.
2. The combination with the feed screw
and carriage, of a support yieldingly con-
nected with the carriage, and a blade mount-
ed on the support so as to have a limited
movement in relation thereto, said blade
being arranged also to engage the thread of
the screw.
3. The combination with the feed screw
and the carriage, of a slotted support yield-
ingly mounted on the carriage, and a blade
to engage the screw, said blade being mount-
ed in the slot of the support and having a 20
limited movement in the said slot. .
4. The combination with the feed screw
and the carriage, of a casing, a spring
pressed plunger mounted in the casing, and
a blade supported on the plunger so as to 25
have a limited movement in relation thereto,
said blade being also arranged to engage the
screw.
JULIUS ROEVER.
Witnesses:
Warren' P. Hutchinson,
Frank L. Stubbs
No. 880,320.
PATENTED FEB. 25, 1908.
A. C. MESTRADD.
REPRODUCER FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION PILES JUNE 18, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
ttq.J..
<Dwuentot
'Arthur C.Mestraud.
S PETSRS CO.. ■MJ»'«"»". D' C
No. 880,320.
PATENTED FEB. 25, 1908.
A. C. MESTRAOD.
REPRODUCER FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION PILED JUHE 18, 1807.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
TJq.3.
JZg.G.
23
y
22-'
ttQ.fr
ZFJq.7.
9
-J—
O
9
2/
P
Swventot
Arthur C.Mestraud.
^Wit»i esses
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C-
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ARTHUR C. MESTRAUD, OF LINCOLN, NEBRASKA, ASSIGNOR TO OSCAR J. JUNGE, OF
LINCOLN, NEBRASKA.
REPRODUCER FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
No. 880,320.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed June 18, 1907. Serial No. 379,617.
Patented Feb. 25, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Arthur C. Mestraud,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Lincoln, in the county of Lancaster and
5 State of Nebraska, have invented new and
useful Improvements in Reproducers for
Phonographs, of which the following is a
specification.
This invention relates to reproducers for
10 phonographs, and one of the principal ob-
jects of the same is to obviate the use of a
counterweighted stylus arm in devices of this
character.
Another object of the invention is to pro-
15 vide a reproducer or sound box in which the
stylus arm is mounted upon a spring, and in
, which means are provided for adjusting the
tension of the spring to regidate the yielding
character of the stylus arm.
20 Still another object of the invention is to
provide a reproducer of simple construction
1 in which weights are entirely dispensed with,
and in which the spring for supporting the
stylus arm may be quickly adjusted to regu-
25 late the bearing of the stylus in the sound
grooves of the record.
These and other objects may be attained by
means of the construction illustrated in the
accompanying drawings, in which:
30 Figure 1 is a central vertical section of a
reproducer or sound box made in accordance
with my invention. Fig. 2 is an underside
plan view of the same. Fig. 3 is a detail side
view of the limit loop for supporting one end
35 of the stylus arm spring. Fig. 4 is a detail
front elevation of the ' spring-holding mem-
bers. Fig. 5 is a sectional view of the same,
taken on the line 5 — 5, of Fig. 4. Fig. 6 is a
perspective view of the stylus arm and the
■10 supporting device therefor. Fig. 7 is a plan
view of the sheet metal blank for holding the
stylus arm spring.
Referring to the drawing for a more par-
ticular description of my invention, the nu-
45 meral 1 designates the intake nipple provided
with an annular flange 2, screw threaded
upon its outer edge, as at 3, to fit the interior
screw threads 4 of the diaphragm ring 5. The
diaphragm 6 is disposed between two circular
50 gaskets 7a which are clamped between the
lower surface of. the annular flange 2, and the
upper surface of the flange on the ring 5, as
shown more particularly in Fig. 1.
The stylus arm or lever 6a is pivotally con-
55 nected upon a pin 7 which passes through the
lever 6a and through a pair of spaced ears 8
60
65
70
75
80
depending from a sheet metal supporting
plate having its edges 9 bent over upon the
body of the plate for holding in connection
therewith a pair of spring wares 10 pro-
vided with spring coils 11. The terminal
ends of the spring wires 10 are mounted be-
tween two bearing members 12, 13, the mem-
ber 12 being supported upon a threaded pin
14 extending through the diaphragm ring
and provided" with a milled nut 15 for de-
tachably connecting the same to said ring.
The lower member 13 is connected to the
member 12 by means of a screw 16, and slots
17 are formed in the members 12 and 13 and
disposed in alinement, as shown in Fig. 4.
The member 13 has a beveled lower wall 18
which permits the two spring members 10 to
lie in an inclined position in the slots 17, and
adjusting screws 19 extend through the
lower wall of the member 13 and are adapted
to bear against the springs 10 for adjusting
the same. The spring holding plate is pro-
vided with side flanges 20 which are bent
over the body of the plate, and forming a re-
duced end 21 which is supported in the limit
loop 22, one end of which is threaded, and
fitted with a milled nut 23 on its upper end,
said threaded member passing through the
diaphragm ring 5, and the opposite member 85
24 of the limit loop extending into a recess in
the lower portion of the diaphragm ring to
provide an adjustment of the limit loop by
means of a single nut. Connected to one end
of the st}dus arm or lever is a wire yoke 25,
the upper end of which is connected to the
button 26 secured centrally to the diaphragm
6, and the lower end of said loop passing
through a hole 27 in the supporting plate.
The operation of my invention may be
briefly described as follows: When it is de-
sired to adjust the tension of the stylus arm
supporting spring, the set screws 19 are
adjusted against the terminal ends of the
springs 10 to raise and lower the stylus arm 100
relatively to the diaphragm to give a greater
or lesser intensity to the reproduction.
From the foregoing it will be obvious that
a reproducer or sound box made in accord-
ance with my invention does not require the 105
use of a weight for the stylus arm, and that
simple means are provided for adjusting the
tension of the stylus and its bearing upon the
record.
Having thus described the invention, what
I claim is :
1. A sound reproducer for phonographs
90
95
110
2
880,320
comprising a diaphragm ring, a diaphragm
seated therein, a pair of springs, a supporting
plate for said springs, a stylus arm pivoted
to said plate and connected to said diaphragm,
5 and adjusting screws for regulating the ten-
sion of said springs.
2. A reproducer for phonographs com-
prising an intake nipple having an annular
flange, a diaphragm ring, a diaphragm seated
10 between said flange and ring, a supporting
plate, springs secured to said plate, means
for supporting said springs at one side of the
diaphragm ring, set screws for adjusting the
tension of said springs, a stylus arm pivot-
15 ally connected to said plate, and a yoke con-
nected to the diaphragm button and to the
stylus arm.
3. In a sound box for phonographs, the
combination of a supporting plate, a pair of
springs connected to said plate, adjusting
devices for said springs, a stylus arm pivoted
to said plate and connected to the diaphragm,
and a limit loop for supporting one end of
the plate, said limit loop having a threaded
shank fitted with a nut, and an unthreaded
member seated in a recess in the diaphragm
ring.
In testimony whereof, I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
ARTHUR C. MESTRAUD.
Witnesses:
O. J. JUNGE,
Willard E. Stewart.
20
25
No. 880,369. PATENTED FEB. 25, 1908.
' W. N. DENNISON.
TILTING TURN TABLE FOR SOUND RECORDING AND
REPRODUCING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED JAN. 24, 1907. % SHEETS-SHEET 1.
^^z^—
4MH-.— Llj^
y^
L
■ lrtml pJuiimi iiMi-nunii-iiii ihwiiiwh'' ■
-^
WITNESSES:
BY
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY.
THE NOttRIS PETZRS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 880,369.
PATENTED FEB. 25, 1908.
W. N. DENNISON.
TILTING TURN TABLE FOR SOUND RECORDING AND
REPRODUCING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 24, 1907
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
J7^^. 3.
J^ &
yo>
J&y. &
WITNESSES.
BY
INVENTOR
{tfi/6.umJ\{Zile/z/?SsS.ost.
/^Z*.
ATTORNEY.
THE NQRRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILBURN N. DENNISON, OF MERCHANTVILLE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
TILTING TURN-TABLE FOR SOUND RECORDING AND REPRODUCING MACHINES.
No. 880,369.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed January 24, 1907. Serial No. 353,775.
Patented Feb. 25, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Wilburn N. Denni-
son, a citizen of the United States, and a resi-
dent of the borough of Merchantville, county
5 of Camden, and State of New Jersey, have
invented certain new and useful Improve-
■ ments in Tilting Turn-Tables for Sound Re-
cording and Reproducing Machines, of
which the following is a full, complete, and
10 exact disclosure.
One object of this invention is to provide a
mounting for a turn-table used with the disk
type of sound recording and reproducing ma-
chines, which wiU permit the turn-table to be
15 tilted out of its normal position upon its driv-
ing spindle without bringing any undue
stress upon the spindle to bend it.
Further objects of my invention are to
■ support the turn-table independently of the
20 spindle by which it is rotated, without hav-
ing any relative motion between the said
parts ; to render this portion of the mechan-
ism of a talking machine absolutely noiseless
and frictionless ; to simplify the construction
25 and to reduce the cost of manufacture.
This invention consists in the novel con-
struction, combination and arrangement of
parts hereinafter described and more partic-
ularly pointed out in the claims and illus-
30 trated in the accompanying drawings, in
which
Figure 1 is a central vertical section of a
device constructed in accordance with this
invention; Fig. 2 is a perspective view of a
35 detail of the device; Fig. 3 is a vertical sec-
tion of the device showing the turn-table in a
tilted position; Fig. 4 is an elevation, partly
in section of a central fragment of the device ;
and Fig. 5 is a bottom view of Fig. 4.
40 Referring to the drawings, the spindle 1
drives the turn-table or record support 2
which is rotatably mounted as usual in the
frame 3 of the machine and is actuated by
any suitable means. The record support 2 is
45 provided with a central aperture 4 and with a
downwardly extending hub 5, provided with
oppositely disposed radial slots 6 in the lower
edge thereof. The said aperture 4 converges
inwardly from both sides of the support. The
50 said shaft 1 is provided with a reduced upper
end 7 which is threaded to receive a nut 8.
The nut 8 is in the form of an elongated cyl-
inder having a screw slot at its upper end and
a flange at its lower end which bears against
55 the shoulder of the shaft and projects into the
end of the aperture in the record support,
and has a diameter greater than the smaller
diameter of the aperture in the support so as
to prevent the record support from being en-
tirely withdrawn from the shaft without the 60
removal of the nut. The nut also furnishes
a bearing for the record when it is placed
upon the record support. The upper end of
the shaft is provided with a pin 9 which ex-
tends through the shaft and projects laterally 65
therefrom and engages in the said slots 6 of
the record support to form a means of rotat-
ing said support. The lower face of the
record support 2 is provided with a down-
wardly facing circular track 10, concentric 70
with the support. Rigidly secured to the
shaft 1 below the record support is the disk
1 1 , which is provided with an upwardly fac-
ing circular bearing 12 engaging against the
said tracks of the record support to carry the 75
same. The upper surface of the disk 11 is
provided with a central recess 13 into which
extends the said hub of the record support.
With this construction in mind it is evident
that the record support 2, when tilted upon go
its bearing, slides longitudinally upon its
driving shaft, and the shape of the central
aperture of the record support is such that no
lateral pressure is brought to bear upon the
driving shaft to bend it. • 85
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-
ent of the United States, is :
1. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support, means for ro- 90
fating the same, and a bearing for said record
support rotated by said means, said record
support being freely tiltable away from and
towards said bearing.
2. In a sound recording and reproducing 95
machine, a record support, means for ro-
tating the same, a bearing for said support
rotated by said means, said record support
being freely movable away from and towards
said bearing. 100
3. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support, means for ro-
tating the same, and a rigid bearing for said
record support, rotated by said means, said
support being freely tiltable away from and 10 5
towards said bearing.
4. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support provided with a
central aperture, a driving spindle therefor
extending through said aperture, and a no
3
880,369
bearing for said record support rotated by
said spindle, said record support being freely
tiltable away from and toward said bearing.
5. In a sound recording and reproducing
5 machine, a record support provided with a
doubly tapering central aperture, a driving
spindle therefor extending through said
aperture and a bearing for said record sup-
port rotated by said spindle, said record sup-
10 port being freely tiltable away from and to-
wards said bearing.
6. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support provided with a
doubly tapering central aperture and a slot
15 extending therefrom, a driving spindle there-
for extending through said aperture, a pro-
jection upon said spindle engaging said slot,
and a bearing for said record support rotated
by said spindle, said record support being
20 freely tiltable upon said bearing.
7. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support provided with a
bearing surface and a central aperture, a
driving spindle therefor extending through
25 said aperture, a disk rigidly fixed upon said
spindle and having an upwardly facing cir-
cular bearing for said track, said record sup-
port being freely tiltable towards and away
from said bearing.
30 8. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support provided wi h a
downwardly facing bearing surface, a down-
wardly extending hub provided with a cen-
tral aperture, a driving spindle therefor ex-
35 tending through said aperture, and a disk
rigidly fixed upon said spindle and having
an upwardly facing bearing and a central
recess in its upper face, said record support
being freely tiltable towards and away from
40 said bearing.
9. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support provided with a
downwardly facing circular bearing surface,
a downwardly extending hub provided with
45 a central aperture and a slot in the lower
edge thereof, a driving spindle therefor ex-
tending through said aperture, a projection
from said spindle engaging in said slot, a
disk rigidly fixed upon said spindle, having
50 an upwardly facing bearing for said bearing
surface, and a central recess in its upper face,
said record support being freely tiltable away
from and towards said bearing.
10. In a sound recording and reproducing
55 machine, a record support provided with a
dowmwardly facing circular bearing surface
a downwardly extending hub provided with
a central aperture and a slot in the lower edge
thereof, a driving spindle therefor extending
60 through said aperture, a projection upon said
spindle engaging in said slot, means upon said
spindle ior limiting the motion of- said record
support long tudinally thereof, a disk rigidly
fixed upon said spindle and having an up-
65 wardly facing circular bearing for said bear-
ing surface and a central recess in its upper
face, said record support being freely tiltable
from and towards said bearing.
11. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support provided with a 70
downwardly extending hub provided with a
central aperture and a slot in the lower end
thereof, a driving spindle therefor extending
through said aperture, a projection upon said
spindle engaging said slot, said spindle hav- 75
ing a reduced upper threaded end, a nut upon
said end bearing against the shoulder of said
spindle and limiting the upward motion of
said record support, a disk rigidly fixed upon
said spindle and having an upwardly facing 80
circular bearing for said record support and
a central recess in its upper face, said record
support being freely tiltable from and toward
said bearing.
12. In a sound recording and reproducing 85
machine, a record support provided with a
downwardly facing circular bearing surface
a downwardly extending hub provided with
a central aperture and a slot in the lower
edge thereof, a driving spindle therefor ex- 90
tending through said aperture, a projection
upon said spindle engaging in said slot, said
spindle having a reduced upper threaded
end, an elongated cylindrical nut upon said
end bearing against the shoulder of said 95
spindle to limit the upward motion of the
record support and to form a means for
retaining a record upon said support, a disk
rigidly fixed upon said spindle and having
an upwardly facing circular bearing for said 100
bearing surface and a central recess in its
upper face, said record support being freely
tiltable from and towards said support.
13. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support provided with a 105
central aperture, a driving spindle therefor
extending through said aperture, a bearing
for said record support rotated by said spin-
dle, and means for limiting the motion of
said record support with respect to said shaft, 110
said means consisting of a nut secured to the
end of said shaft and extending into and pro-
jecting upwardly from said aperture.
14. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support provided with a 115
central aperture, a driving spindle therefor
extending through said aperture, a bearing
for said record support rotated by said spin-
dle and means for limiting the motion of said
record support with respect to said shaft, 120
said record support being freely tiltable with
respect to said shaft, said means consisting
of a nut secured to the end of said shaft and
projecting upwardly from the face of the rec-
ord support and adapted to receive a record 125
thereover.
15. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support provided with a
central aperture, a driving spindle therefor
extending through said aperture, a bearing 130
880,369
for said record support rotated by said spin-
dle, means for limiting the motion of said rec-
ord with respect to said shaft, said means
consisting of a cylindrical nut secured to the
5 end of said shaft and extending into said ap-
erture and projecting above the face of said
support to receive a record freely thereover,
said nut being of greater diameter at its lower
end than the small diameter of the aperture
1 o in the record support.
16. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, the combination "« ith a record sup-
port provided with an aperture, of a spindle
extending into said aperture, and means se-
15 cured to said spindle for limiting the longi-
tudinal motion of said record support with
respect thereto, said record support being
freely tiltable with respect to said spindle.
17. In a sound recording and reproducing
20 machine, the combination with a record sup-
port provided with an aperture, of a spindle
extending into said aperture, and a nut se-
cured to the end of said spindle for limiting
the longitudinal motion of said record sup-
25 port with respect to said spindle, said record
support being freely tiltable with respect to
said spindle.
18. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, the combination with a record sup-
30 port provided witli a central aperture, of a
spindle extending loosely through said aper-
ture, and a nut mounted upon the end of said
spindle and extending into said aperture for
limiting the longitudinal motion of said rec-
35 ord support with respect to said spindle.
19. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support, means for rotat-
ing the same, and a rigid bearing for said rec-
ord support in a plane parallel thereto ro-
40 tated by said means, said record support be-
ing freely tiltable away from and towards
said bearing.
20. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support, means for rotat-
45 ing the same, a rigid bearing for said support
in a plane parallel thereto rotated b}" said
means, said record support being freely mov-
able away from and towards said bearing.
21. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support, means for rotat- 50
ing the same, and a rigid bearing for said rec-
ord support in a plane parallel thereto ro-
tated directly by said means, said support
being freely tiltable away from and towards
said bearing. 55
22. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support provided with a
central aperture, a driving spindle therefor
extending through said aperture, and a rigid
annular bearing for said record support sur- 60
rounding said aperture and rotated directly
by said spindle, said record support being
freely tiltable away from and toward said
bearing.
23. In a sound recording and reproducing 65
machine, a record support provided with a
doubly tapering central aperture, a driving
spindle therefor extending through said ap-
erture and a rigid bearing for said record sup-
port surrounding said aperture and rotated 7 0
direct by said spindle, said record support
being freely tiltable away from and towards
said bearing.
24. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support provided with a 75
doubly tapering central aperture and a slot
extending therefrom, a driving spindle there-
for extending through said aperture, a pro-
jection upon said spindle engaging said slot,
and a rigid bearing for said record support 80
rotated direct by said spindle, said record
support being freely tiltable upon said bear-
ing.
25. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record support, a bearing for said 85
record support, and means for rotating said
record support and said bearing at the same
speed, said support being freely tiltable awray
from and toward said bearing.
In witness w hereof I have hereunto set my 90
hand this 22nd day of January, A. D. 1907.
WILBURN N. DENNISON.
Witnesses :
Harry Cobb Kennedy,
Alston B. Moueton.
ffo. 880,388.
PATENTED FEB. 25, 1908.
F. M. MURPHY.
PHONOGRAPH HORN.
APPLICATION PILED MAB. 11, 1907.
SKg.S.
^IVitii eases
SbtUnu^jL yijU^Q^a*^-^
3m>e*vto*
£Utot««ip
THE NORR'S PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
FRANCIS M. MURPHY, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO THOMAS
FLANAGAN, OF JERSEY CITY, NEW JERSEY.
PHONOGRAPH-HORN.
No. 880,388.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed March 11, 1907. Serial No, 361,855.
Patented Feb. 25, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Francis M. Murphy,
citizen of the United States, residing at
Jersey City, in the county of Hudson and
5 State of New Jersey, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Phono-
graph-Horns, of Avhich the following is a
specification.
This invention relates to horns for talk-
10 ing machines generally, the purpose being
to modify the sound by the application of a
valve controlled air inlet located in the
length of the horn and preferably about at
the juncture of the base or stern with the
15 body of said horn.
In the specific application of the inven-
tion, the horn comprises a body or bell por-
tion and a stem or base, the parts being
separable and the base or stem being tapered
20 and reversely curved in its length, said base
or stem having securing means for positive
attachment thereto of the bell -or body por-
tion of the horn and provided with the valve
controlled air inlet at or near its larger or
25 coupling end.
For a full description of the invention and
the merits thereof and also to acquire a
knowledge of the details of construction and
the means for effecting the result, reference
30 is to be had to the following description and
accompanying drawings.
While the invention may be adapted to
different forms and conditions by changes in
the structure and minor details without de-
35 parting from the spirit or essential features
thereof, still the preferred embodiment is
shown in the accompanying drawings, in
which:
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a phono-
40 graph horn embodying the invention. Fig.
2 is a longitudinal section of a portion of the
stem or base and the contracted end of the
horn body or bell. Fig. 3 is a detail view of
the coupling end of the stem or base showing
45 more clearly the clamp means for securing
the horn thereto. Fig. 4 is a transverse sec-
tional view taken at the junction of the horn
and stem.
Corresponding and like parts are referred
50 to in the following description and indicated
in all the views of the drawings by the same
reference characters.
The numeral 1 indicates the horn proper
which is of beU or flared form, its con-
55 tr acted end terminating in a collar 2. The
base or stem 3 is tapered throughout its
length and may be of any material and for
compactness of arrangement is reversely
curved, its smaller end being designed for at-
tachment to the reproducer of any style of 60
talking or sound reproducing machine. To
insure formation of a tight joint between the
body of the horn and the stem, the latter is
provided with a clamp 4 consisting of a slit
portion of said stem or base and having the 65
portions bordering upon the slit bent to form
ears and adapted to be connected by means
of a set screw 5. Au air chamber 6 is located
at one side of the stem or base at or near its
coupling end and communicates with the in- 70
terior thereof and opens at its rear end exte-
rior to the stem or base to admit air into the
horn. A valve 7 of conical construction is
adapted to close the exterior opening of the
air chamber and is slidably mounted upon a 75
rod 8 arranged within the chamber and may
be moved so as to uncover the same more or
less as may be required to effect the desired
result.
The base or stem practically increases the 80
length of the horn and throws the same at a
greater distance from the reproducer, thereby
obviating the rattle common to sound repro-
ducing machines. The same results may be
obtained by a straight stem or base but in 85
order to reduce the length and economize
space the base or stem is reversely curved.
As a result of the stem or base, the tone
quality of the horn and the volume thereof
is increased. The provision of the air inlet 90
enables the sound to be moderated or in-
creased and by adjustment of the valve, the
sound may be regulated to meet certain re-
quirements. By having the stem or base
detachably connected with the horn, the 95
parts may be separated so as to be more
readily handled and conveniently stored.
Having thus described the invention, what
is claimed as new is :
1. A horn for sound reproducing machines 100
having an air chamber arranged upon one
side thereof, one side of the said chamber
communicating with the interior of the horn
while the opposite side opens exteriorly, and
a valve controlling the exterior opening of 105
the chamber.
2. A horn for sound reproducing machines
having an air chamber arranged upon one
side thereof, one end of the chamber com-
municating with the interior of the horn 110
880,388
10
while the opposite end opens exteriorly there-
of, and a slidably mounted valve for control-
ling the effective size of the exterior opening
of the chamber.
3. A horn for sound reproducing machines
having an air chamber in communication
therewith, a guide rod arranged within the
chamber, and a conical valve slidably mount-
ed upon the guide rod and operating to con-
trol the effective size of the mouth of the air
chamber.
4. In a device of the character described,
the combination of a tubular base, a horn de-
tachably connected to the base, the said base
carrying an air chamber communicating with
the interior of the horn, and a valve control-
ling the effective size of the mouth of the air
chamber.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
FRANCIS M. MURPHY, [l. s.]
Witnesses :
Seth E. Lockxin,
Thos. Flanagan.
15
No' 880,707. PATENTED MAR. 3, 1908.
J. W. ATLSWOBTH.
COMPOSITION FOR MAKING DUPLICATE PHONOGRAPH RECORDS.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 6, 1906.
^
xr. x^L
^9/tiy.
THE MORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JONAS W. AYLSWORTH, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT
COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
COMPOSITION FOR MAKING DUPLICATE PHONOGRAPH-RECORDS.
25
30
No. 880,707.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented March. 3, 1908.
Application filed February 6, 1906. Serial No. 299,630.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Jonas W. Aylsworth,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of East Orange, in the county of Essex and
5 State of New Jersey, have invented a certain
new and useful Composition for Making Du-
plicate Phonograph-Records, of which the fol-
lowing is a specification.
In my Patent No. 782,375, of February 14,
10 1905, I describe an improved composition
for making phonograph records, in which a
hard wax such as carnauba is added to the
usual stearates of soda and alumina for the
purpose of making a hard composition hav-
15 ing the desirable properties pointed out for
use in this particular art, a non-hygroscopic
ingredient, such as ceresin, being also prefer-
ably added and a black pigment being em-
ployed to give to the resulting composition
20 a dark color. The supply of carnauba wax
is relatively limited, and the demand cre-
ated for the same in this art has been so
great as to make the price objectionably
high. In my search for a suitable ingredient
that could be used in these compositions to
replace the carnauba wax, I have discovered
a material which is suitable for this purpose.
Two species of the material in question are
articles of commerce which are on sale in the
United States by the Strohmeyer & Arpe
Company, 64 Pearl street, borough of Man-
hattan, New York city, under the trade
names of "ebonite" and "montan wax" re-
spectively. The former species is a waxlike
35 substance which is blacker and harder than
ozocerite. The latter species is also a wax-
like substance and is of a dark yellowish
brown, somewhat resembling discolored car-
nauba wax. These substances, as I am in-
40 formed and believe, are extracted from cer-
tain kinds of bituminous brown coal, by a
certain process of distillation or solution, the
full details of which are not known to me as
they are kept as trade secrets by the manu-
45 facturers. I do know, however, that the
substances in question can be obtained from
certain kinds of bituminous brown coal ac-
cording to the process of United States Pat-
ent No. 689,381, dated December 24, 1901.
50 The product which is obtained after driving
off the benzin or benzene and which is de-
scribed in lines 44 to 47 page 1, of the patent,
is the same substance as the article known in
commerce as "montan wax." If this sub-
55 stance be now distilled with steam as de-
scribed in the patent, a wax-like material is
distilled off leaving a residue. The patentee
describes the distillation as being continued
until this residue is coked. It is not neces-
sary, however, to carry the distillation to 60
this point, but on the other hand the distil-
lation may be stopped while the residue is in
the form of a black wax-like substance. Such
a residue is the same substance as that which
I have referred to as "ebonite." 65
Both ebonite and montan wax are cheaper
than carnauba and produce equally desirable
compositions. In addition they possess
advantages by which they are actually su-
perior to carnauba wax. In the first place 70
they are both less affected by moisture than
carnauba wax. They have fewer products
of decomposition, so that less opportunity
is offered for forming gas bubbles and in con-
sequence it becomes possible to turn out a 75
higher percentage of records and the latter
are of superior appearance. Furthermore,
when ebonite is used, the use of a black pig-
ment, such as lamp black, is unnecessary,
since the ebonite renders the composition 80
black. This is an important practical ad-
vantage, since when lamp black is used it
settles in the kettles and becomes unevenly
distributed, so that the resulting records are
not uniform, and furthermore, its presence 85
on the surface of the records results m undue
wear on the reproducing stylus. A record
formed of a composition employing ebonite
is, therefore, distinguished from those made
of my previous composition in the respect 90
that its entire mass can be brought to a
molten condition by the application of heat,
whereas with the previous composition,
even when the bulk is in a melted state, the
fine lamp black particles are unaffected. 95
Although ebonite and montan wax are not
quite so hard as carnauba wax, this fact is
actually an advantage, since a larger per-
centage of these substances may be em-
ployed, which is desirable owing to their low 10c
cost.
In forming a composition suitable for the
manufacture of phonograph records con-
taining the material in question, I proceed
along the lines described in my said patent. 105
I have obtained excellent results by the use
of the following formulas: —
(1) To 100 lbs. of stearic acid add 41.9 lbs.
of ebonite and 7.377 lbs. of ceresin and melt
the same in a suitable! iron caldron or other no
880,707
vessel at a temperature of about 240 degrees
Fahr. The stearic acid is the commercial
article which, as is known, is a mixture of
stearic and palmitic acids, although either of
5 these acids could be used alone if it could be
obtained. The stearic acid used melts at
about 136 degrees Fahr. Care should be
taken to see that the stearic acid is sub-
stantially free from oleic acid, as well as
10 from mineral acids, salts, glycerin, and un-
decomposed fats, as tallow, &c. It should
also be free from mucilaginous substances.
When the stearic acid is fully melted, I add
i;o the same a water solution obtained by
15 dissolving in four gallons of water contained
in a suitable steam-jacketed caldron, 22.6
lbs. of sal-soda, 474.74 gramsof caustic soda
of the best commercial grade, and 183.72
grams of metallic aluminium, preferably
20 small pieces of thin sheet aluminium. When
all the metal is dissolved, the solution is fil-
tered while still hot in a filter-press or in any
other way. In adding the alkaline solu-
tion to the melted stearic acid I gradualty
25 raise the temperature of the latter so as to
correspond to the increased melting point
of the mixture. The alkaline solution is
added as rapidly as possible without unduly
running the temperature down or causing
30 excessive boiling or foaming. The solution
can be added quite rapidly at first but to-
ward the end it must be added very slowly.
The addition of the alkaline solution to the
stearic acid results in the production of
35 stearates and palmitates of soda and of
aluminium which are metallic soaps or me-
tallic salts of fatty acids. During the sa-
ponification which thus takes place water
and carbon dioxid are driven off. At the
40 end of the operation the temperature will
have gradually run up to about 360 degrees
Fahr. The temperature Of the mass is then
raised to about 450 degrees Fahr. and main-
tained until all foaming ceases, the use of
45 this high temperature being desirable al-
though not absolutely necessary. The pur-
pose of the ceresin is to make the mixture
non-hygroscopic and also less brittle than it
otherwise would be ; and the ceresin may be
50 replaced, if desired, by other hydro-carbon
waxes, such as paraffin or ozocerite.
The congealing temperature of the prod-
uct may be regulated by adding free stearic
acid thereto. I find that in dealing with
55 temperatures above 290 degrees Fahr. the
addition of 1 % by weight of stearic acid, ef-
fects a drop of about 5 degrees Fahr. in the
congealing-point. Obviously this regula-
tion of the congealing-point of the mixture
60 depends upon the special process which is to
be followed in making duplicates, and where
the congealing temperature is not important
no attention whatever need be paid to its
regulation, the proportion of ingredients
65 stated being suitable for producing phono-
graph records according to the process de-
scribed in Patent No. 683,615 granted Oc-
tober 1, 1901 to Miller and Aylsworth. The
material is now strained preferably through
open muslin and is ready for use. 70
(2) In preparing a combination contain-
ing montan wax instead of ebonite, the proc-
ess followed is exactly the same except as to
the relative proportions of the ingredients
which may be as follows: 100 lbs. of stearic 75
acid, 19 lbs. of montan wax, 19 lbs. of ceresin,
1 lb. of lamp black, to which is added an alka-
line solution obtained by dissolving in five
gallons of water 22 lbs. of sal-soda, 460 grams
of caustic soda and 178 grams of metallic go
aluminium.
Both ebonite and montan wax may be
used in the same composition if desired, in
which case the ingredients may be the sums
of the quantities set forth in the above 85
formulas; that is to say, 200 lbs. of stearic
acid, 41.9 lbs. .of ebonite, 19 lbs. of montan
wax, 26.377 lbs. of ceresin and 1 lb. of lamp
black, to which is added a solution in nine
gallons of water, of 44.6 lbs. of sal-soda934.74 90
grains of caustic soda and 361.72 grams of
metallic aluminium.
Reference is hereby made to the accompa-
nying drawing which shows a phonographic
record tablet with the names of the ingredi- 95
ents of formula 1 inscribed thereon.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent is as follows : —
1. A composition suitable for the manu- 100
facture of phonograph records which con-
tains a wax-like substance extracted from
bituminous coal and harder than paraffin,
substantially as set forth.
2. A composition suitable for the manu- 105
facture of phonograph records which con-
tains the wax-like substance known as ebon-
ite, substantially as set forth.
3. A composition suitable for the manu-
facture of phonograph records which con- no
tains the wax-like substance known as mon-
tan wax, substantially as set forth.
4. A composition suitable for the manu-
facture of phonograph records which con-
tains a metallic soap and a wax-like sub-. 115
stance extracted from bituminous coal and
harder than paraffin, substantially as set
forth.
5. A composition suitable for the manu-
facture of phonograph records, which con- 120
tains a metallic soap and the wax-like sub-
stance known as ebonite, substantially as set
forth.
6. A composition suitable for the manu-
facture of phonograph records, which con- 125
tains a metallic soap and the wax-like sub-
stance known as montan wax, substantially
as set forth.
7. A composition suitable for the manu-
facture of phonograph records which con- 130
I
880,70?
10
15
tains a metallic soap, a hydrocarbon and a
wax-like substance extracted from bitumi-
nous coal and harder than paraffin, substan-
tially as set forth.
8. A composition suitable for the manu-
facture of phonograph records, which con-
tains a metallic soap, a hydrocarbon and the
wax-like substance known as ebonite, sub-
stantially as set forth.
9. A composition suitable for the manu-
facture of pnonograph records, which con-
tains a metallic soap, a hydrocarbon, and the
wax-like substance known as montan wax,
substantially as set forth.
10. A composition suitable for the manu-
facture of pnonograph records, which con-
tains a metallic soap, a wax-like substance
extracted from bituminous coal and harder
than paraffin and a black pigment, substan-
tially as set forth. 20
11: A composition suitable for the manu-
facture of phonograph records, which con-
tains a metallic soap, a hydrocarbon, a wax-
like substance extracted from bituminous
coal and harder than paraffin, and a black 25
pigment, substantially as set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 2nd day of February 1906.
JONAS W. AYLSWORTH.
Witnesses :
Delos Holden,
Frank D. Lewis.
i
I
No. 880,879. PATENTED MAR. 3, 1908.
L. T. HAILE.
GEAMQPHONE OR OTHER SOUND 'REPRODUCING OR RECORDING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED JULY 6, 1906.
^C
^<&
^Z^cgxcL.
^&^&
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY.
THE NOKP.IS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LUTHER T. HAILE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND MESNE
ASSIGNMENTS, OF ONE-FIFTH TO MAURICE N. WEYL AND WILLIAM A. MACKIE, ONE-
FIFTH TO JOSEPH W. SHANNON, ONE-TWENTIETH TO FREDERICK J. GEIGER, AND ONE-
TWENTIETH TO LOGAN W. MULFORD, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
GRAMOPHONE OR OTHER SOUND REPRODUCING OR=RECORDING MACHINE.
No. 880,879.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed July 6, 1906. Serial No. 324,978.
Patented March 3, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Luther T. Haile, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
city of Philadelphia, State of Pennsylvania,
5 have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Gramophones or other Sound
Reproducing or Recording Machines, of
which the following is a full, clear, and ex-
act description, reference being had to the
10 accompanying drawings, forming a part of
this specification.
My improvements have for their general
purposes or objects to cause the instrument
to produce a clearer, louder and more nat-
15 ural and pleasing tone, by means operating
to confine the vibrations which reach the re-
producing diaphragm to those only which are
caused by the original sound waves recorded
on the record; also to wholly prevent the di-
20 rect vibratory contact of needle with dia-
phragm and the consequent transmission of
vibrations caused by scraping of the needle
on the record, due to such direct connection
as such parts are usually constructed, this
25 object being effected by the provision of an
intermediate flexible and preferably elastic
connection between the head of the needle
and diaphragm with means hereinafter de-
scribed to effect such connection; also the
30 provision of simple means to create a tension
thereon for regulating the volume or inten-
sity of the sound.
To these ends my invention comprises the
means hereinafter fully described to accom-
35 plish these several objects, the novel features
being pointed out in the appended claims.
In the accompanying drawings illustrating
my invention, Figure 1 is a sectional view of
the diaphragm and its supporting frame, the
40 record needle and its flexible connection with
the diaphragm being shown in elevation, the
dotted lines indicating its movements. Fig.
2 is a like view showing a needle, hollow for
part of its length below its head, and the
45 cord, forming the flexible connection, passing
through the same; Fig. 3 is a section, partly
in elevation, of a double diaphragm and a
single record needle intermediate the same,
with flexible connection between the needle
50 and each diaphragm, sound passages into
which each diaphragm directly discharges
its sound waves, and a single horn into which
both of said sound passages discharge the
sound waves.
Referring now to said drawings: — The 55
diaphragm 1 is of usual construction and
mounted, as before, in a sound-box or cir-
cular supporting frame 2 having a central
aperture opening into the sound conveying
tube 28; and, as is well known, the dia- 60
phragm is most commonly supported edge-
wise and hence set at right angles to the
sound record to be reproduced. A guide
plate 7 is mounted on the rim of the frame 2,
and has a central aperture as usual, its func- 65
tion being to operatively support the needle
arm 4 carrying the record needle 9. A col-
lar 9a is mounted on the needle below the
guide plate 7. The vibratory movements of
the needle are imparted to the diaphragm ^70
through a flexible connection indicated at 3
in the several views, the dotted lines in Fig. 1
showing the vibratory movements in such
flexible connection imparted thereto by the
needle movements, and transferred through 75
such connection to the diaphragm. This is
the most important feature of the invention,
the object being to convey sound waves only,
the said flexible connection absorbing all
other sound vibrations, or rather ehminating 80
all such vibrations as would necessarily arise
from having the needle arm connected
rigidly, as heretofore, by a curved head or
other non-flexible connection, to the dia-
phragm. For example, the movements of 85
the needle over the record which produce
sound waves corresponding thereto, are "in
and out ' ' or lateral movements ; any vertical
movement of the needle has no such result,
but on the contrary produces vibrations of 90
the diaphragm which are inconsistent there-
with, effecting a "scratchy" sound. Ob-
viously, as indicated by the dotted lines, a
flexible connection between needle arm and
diaphragm checks or absorbs all such vibra- 95
tions and consequent sound waves not de-
sired. This principle of a flexible connec-
tion between the head of the needle arm and
the diaphragm is exemplified in its best form
in Fig. 2 of the drawings illustrating means 100
which embody further novel features of my
invention. In said Fig. 2 it will be observed
the needle arm 4 is shown hollowed out for
the greater part of its length above the guide
2
880,879
plate 7, and at the base of the recess is an
aperture 7a through the wall of the hollow
needle arm. The flexible connection 3 pref-
erably used is an elastic cord, such as a silk
5 thread, or a very flexible wire or catgut
string; the characteristics of such connec-
tion determining the choice of material are
flexibility, elasticity and non-friction al char-
acter. As the latter is not wholly possible,
10 the needle arm is preferably in the form of a
hollow cone, to give strength and lightness,
and the recess therein is bushed with suitable
material, preferably felt or rubber to prevent
friction "of the cord therewith, aside from
15 which such construction serves to protect
the flexible connection from undue wear.
Such flexible cord is secured by any suitable
means to the center of the diaphragm, pass-
ing from thence through the recess in the
20 needle arm and emerging through the aper-
ture 7a, and is wound on the shaft of a
thumb-screw 6. This construction gives an
additional and most important advantage,
namely, a turn of the thumb-screw in either
25 direction will increase or decrease, as the
case may be, the tension of the connecting
cord and the diaphragm, thereby varying at
will the loudness or softness of tone of the
sound waves reproduced through the dia-
30 phragm; the means described for so doing
being so simple as to be readily compre-
hended and used by the amateur operator of
the instrument. This part of my invention,
the chief element of which is the flexible
35 connection described, is a wholly novel de-
parture from any known device of this class,
wherein there are no adequate means to ad-
just the instrument to variations of tone of
sound waves, and wherein there is a rigid
40 connection between the needle arm and the
diaphragm, hence the latter responds, in vi-
brations, to every movement or the needle,
and owing to irregularities or imperfections
commonly in the records, discordant counter
45 vibrations are set up; a defect wholly ob-
viated by my invention described.
The sound-box is operatively supported,
by the sound-conveying arm 28, in such rela-
tion to the disk-record, as usual, that the
50 vibrations of the needle will be in a plane
transverse to that of the plane of the dia-
phragm, as indicated by the dotted lines in
Fig. 1; but a most valuable feature of my
invention is that I can utilize the flexible
55 connection to cause two diaphragms of a
multiple sound - box to vibrate simulta-
neously and in opposite directions to each
other, by merely changing the operative
position of such multiple sound-box and the
60 sound-conveying arm, relatively to the disk-
record, that the sound-grooves in the latter
will vibrate the needle in the usual way but
in a plane parallel with the plane of the
diaphragms instead of transversely thereto.
65 I will now describe a form of my invention
wherein the feature of a double diaphragm,
set face to face and vibrating in opposite
directions, is embodied.
In Fig. 3 is shown a sound box composed
of a pair of diaphragms 1,1, each mounted 70
in a circular frame 2, as before, and facing
each other, said frame being joined and
spaced by a bar 2a at top and by the per-
forated guide plate 7 at base. In the said
space, so formed, between the diaphragms 75
and their frames, a single needle arm and
needle, and adjunctive parts as heretofore
described in relation to Figs. 1 and 2, are
arranged. I prefer however to arrange in
such space a metallic bar 12, perforated to 80
allow the passage of the flexible connections
to the respective diaphragms and serving as
a guiding support for such flexible con-
nections.
The diaphragm frames, shown in Fig. 4 85
constituting the pair of sound boxes have
rearward central openings with which com-
municate, respectively, the separate tubes
10, 10', leading as branches from a single
tube or horn 102. The said frames and the 90
branched horn, for the set of double dia-
phragms will, however, be made the subject
of a separate application for Letters Patent.
Both diaphragms are simultaneously vi-
brated by the same movements of the repro- 95
ducing needle, hence the sound waves pro-
ceeding from the pair of diaphragms and
discharged from the single horn will be not
only much increased in loudness, but by the
adjustment devices heretofore described the 100
quality of the tone may be regulated. In
this form of the device a detail of some
importance may be added if desired, namely,
the flexible cord connection is made in two
parts, one part which passes through and 105
projects above the top of the needle arm 4
is provided with a small loop through which
the other flexible cord connection freely
passes, its ends being secured to the oppo-
sitely-disposed diaphragms. no
It is obvious that the two first described and
leading features of my invention or either of
them may be used, in like manner in machines
of this class for recording sound waves as well
as for reproducing them from a record or tab- 115
let. And it is further to be observed that
in the following claims the word " cord" em-
ployed to designate the "flexible connection"
is not to be construed as limiting that ele-
ment to what is technically a string or cord, 120
but to be inclusive of any equivalent there-
for such as I have recited in the foregoing
specification.
Having thus described my invention I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 125
Patent : —
1. In apparatus of the class recited for
recording or reproducing sound-waves, the
combination with a sound-box containing a
diaphragm, a needle-arm adapted to carry a 130
880,879
a
record needle and having means to guide a
vibrating flexible cord leading therefrom to
the diaphragm, a perforated guide-plate
supporting said elements in operative rela-
5 tion to each other and adapted to traverse
the record tablet radially, and a flexible cord-
like connection between the needle-arm and
the diaphragm operating to transmit the
vibrations of the needle directly to the dia-
10 phragm, with means carried by said guide-
plate operating to increase or decrease the
tension in said flexible connection.
2. In apparatus of the class recited, the
combination with a diaphragm and means to
15 operatively support the same, of a hollow
needle arm, the wall of which is perforated
near its base, and a flexible cord passing
through the interior of the needle arm and
connecting it with the diaphragm.
20 3. In apparatus of the class recited, the
combination with a diaphragm, a stylus or
record needle, and means to support each of
the same independently but in operative
relation, of a hollow needle arm mounted to
25 respond to the vibratory movements of the
needle, and means adapted and operating to
transmit the lateral vibratory movements
only of the needle to the diaphragm, said
means consisting substantially of a flexible
30 cord-like connection secured at one end to
the basal portion of the needle arm and
passing freely through the hollow interior
thereof to the diaphragm to which its op-
posite end is attached.
35 4. In apparatus of the class recited, the
combination with a diaphragm and means
to operatively support the same, of a hollow
neeclle arm, a bushing of anti-friction mate-
rial within the same, and a flexible cord
40 passing through the interior of the needle
arm and connecting it with the diaphragm.
5. In apparatus of the class recited, the
combination with a diaphragm and means
to operatively support the same, a hollow
45 needle arm perforated near its base, a flexi-
ble cord passing through the interior of said
needle arm and connecting it with the dia-
phragm, and means to adjust the tension on |
said flexible connection.
50 6. In an instrument of the class recited, '
the combination with a sound-box containing
a diaphragm, a needle arm, a perforated
guideplate, a bracket mounted thereon, a
thumb-screw working in said bracket, and a
flexible and elastic connection between the 55
diaphragm and the needle arm and extending
to said thumb-screw whereby the tension in
said flexible and elastic connection may be
increased or diminished.
7. In an instrument of the class recited, 60
the combination with two diaphragms facing
each other, means to support them in spaced
relation to each other, a needle arm oper-
atively supported in said space, and a flexi-
ble connection between each of said dia- 65
phragms and the needle arm, whereby said
diaphragms are adapted to vibrate simul-
taneously but in the opposite direction from
each other, and actuated by a single needle
arm impinging upon or engaging with the 70
said flexible connection.
8. In an instrument of the class recited,
the combination with two diaphragms ar-
ranged facing each other, means to support
them in spaced relation, a needle arm oper- 75
atively supported in said space, a flexible
connection between each diaphragm, and a
second flexible connection secured at one end
to the needle arm and having a looped end
through which the first flexible connection 80
freely passes.
9. In an instrument of the class recited,
the combination with two diaphragms ar-
ranged facing each other, means to support
them in spaced relation, a needle arm oper- '85
atively supported in said space, a flexible
connection between each diaphragm, and a
second flexible connection secured at one
end to the needle and having a looped end
through which the first flexible connection 90
freely passes, said loop being lined or covered
with nonresonant material.
In testimony whereof, I have hereunto
affixed my signature this third day of July
A. D. 1906.
LUTHER T. HAILE.
Witnesses :
Henry T. Guixmann,
Joseph W. Shannon.
% 6 • ( ^ o l^
No. 881,322.
PATENTED MAR. 10, 1908.
T. KRAEMER.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED DEO. 14, 1907.
WITNESSES;,
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS KRAEMER, OF PHILADELPHIA. PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO HAWTHORNE &
SHEBLE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, A CORPO-
RATION OF PENNSYLVANIA.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 881,322.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented March 10, 1908.
Application filed. December 14, 1907. Serial No. 406,451.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas Kraemer, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila-
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Talking-
Machines, of which the following is a specifi-
cation.
This invention relates to talking machines
10 and has reference, more particularly, to the
sound-conveying devices of such machines.
The invention is directed to the provision
of an improved construction of sound-con-
veying device for a talking machine having
15 therein means for modifying the sound car-
ried thereby as desired, with respect to tone,
magnitude, etc.
The invention is of particular utility in a
talking machine in which the re-producing
20 mechanism is secured upon the end of a tubu-
lar tone-arm which is pivoted upon a support
fixed in the motor box of the machine and
which connects with an amplifying horn, the
sound modifying devices being located with-
25 in this tubular tone-arm and adjustable from
outside the same for the purpose of effecting
the desired modification in sound.
The preferred embodiment of my inven-
tion is illustrated in the accompanying draw-
30 ings in which
Figure 1 is an elevation of a portion of a
talking machine, Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sec-
tion of the tone-arm thereof and Fig. 3 is a
transverse section of the tone-arm on line
35 3—3 of Fig. 2.
Referring to these drawings, 1 indicates
the motor box of the talking machine having
a motor therein driving a vertical shaft which
carries the turn-table 2 on which the disk
40 sound-record 3 rests. Secured to the side of
the motor box is a coupling member 4 having
an opening through the upper portion thereof.
A tapering, amplifying horn 5 is adapted to
be mounted on the upper end of the member
45 4, its opening communicating with the open-
ing in the coupling member. Secured on
the coupling near the other end of the open-
ing therethrough is a pin 6 on which is sup-
ported the tone-arm 7. For this purpose
50 the tone-arm has a yoke 8 secured thereto, on
the arms of which is horizontally pivoted a
cross-head carrying a sleeve 9 adapted to fit
over the pin 6. The end of the tone-arm is
arranged to telescope slightly with the coup-
ling member 4, as shown in Fig. 1. To the 55
other end of the tone-arm is secured the
sound-box 10 having a stylus 11 which tracks
in the groove in the record disk 3.
The construction of the tone-arm is best
shown in Figs. 2 and 3; it is of tubular form 60
and consists of two cylindrical sections 12
and 13, the former of which is of considerably
greater cross-sectional area than the latter.
The free end of section 12 is contracted, as
shown at 14, and the smaller section 13 is 65
secured within this contracted portion. The
section 13 is curved on an arc of 90 degrees,
so that the action of the sound-box secured
to the end of this section is at a right an°;le to
the axis of the tone-arm. 70
The sound modifying device is located
within the section 12 of the tone-arm and is
adapted to be moved from outside the tone-
arm to carry one end thereof within the end
of the smaller section 13. This device con- 75
sists of a portion 15 which fits snugly within
the section 12, a portion 16 which is of such
size that it may be moved within the end of
the section 13, and a portion 17 connecting
these two portions 15 and 16 which form 80
the end portions of the sound modif}Ting de-
vice and winch are of different sizes.
In the drawings, I have shown the por-
tion 17 as being of conical shape and this is
the shape I prefer to employ. In the por- 85
tion 15 and a reinforcing strip 18 secured
thereto is a threaded opening adapted to
receive the threaded end of a set-screw 19
which extends through an elongated slot 20
in the wall of the section 12 of the tone-arm. 90
Between this screw and the tone-arm is a
shield 2 1 curved so as to lie close upon the sur-
face of the tone-arm; this shield moves back
and forth with the screw 19 and the sound
modifying device and is of such size that in 95
all positions of those parts it closes the slot
20 in the tone-arm.
The end portion 16 of the sound modifying
device is preferably of such size that it will
fit tightly within the' end of the smaller sec- 100
tion 13 of the- tone-arm. In order to secure
such a tight fit, and insure the easy move-
ment of the parts, the section 16 may be
made slightly larger than the interior di-
ameter of the section 13 and may be pro- 105
vided with a plurality of slits 22 extending
I from its end in the direction of its length.
I Small openings 23 may be provided at the
12
881,322
ends of the slits 22. As thus constructed
the machine is operated in the usual manner
and the sound waves emanating from the
diaphragm of the sound-box 10 pass through
5 the small section 13 of the tone-arm, the
sound modifying device and the larger sec-
tion 12 of the tone-arm to the amplifying
horn 5. By means of the screw 19, which is
provided with a knurled head, the sound
10 modifying device may be moved in the
direction of the axis of the tone-arm from
the position in which it is shown in Fig. 2
to a position in which its smaller end ex-
tends within the end of the section 13 of the
15 tone-arm. By moving the sound modifying
device back and forth within the tone-arm
in this way, the sounds reproduced by the
machine may be modified as desired as to
their tone, pitch and resonance, by reason of
20 the coaction of the walls of the sound modi-
fier with the sound waves passing through
the sound conveying tube. It will be seen
that the construction here disclosed is quite
simple and that such a tone - arm may be
25 manufactured at low cost.
In practice I have found that with the de-
vice here disclosed, a considerable degree of
modification of the sounds reproduced may
be effected, the different positions of the
30 modifier resulting in making the sound loud
or soft and hollow or sharp, so that the
character of reproduced sound desired may
be readily obtained.
Having described my invention, what I
35 claim as new therein and desire to secure by
Letters Patent of the United States is :
1. In a talking machine, a sound-convey-
ing tube comprising two sections secured to-
gether one of which is of greater internal
40 cross-sectional area than the other, a sound
modifier lying within said larger section and
having one end movable within said smaller
section, and means connected to said modi-
fier and extending through the wall of the
45 tube for moving the modifier axially of the
tube from outside the same, substantially as
described.
2. In a talking machine, a sound-convey-
ing tube comprising two sections secured to-
50 gether one of which is of greater internal
cross-sectional area than the other, a sound
modifier lying within said larger section and
having an elastic end portion which is mov-
able within said smaller section, and means
for moving said modifier axially of the tube 55
from outside the same, substantially as de-
scribed.
3. In a talking machine, a sound-convey-
ing tube comprising two sections secured to-
gether one of which is of greater internal 60
cross-sectional area than the other, a tubular,
sheet-metal sound-modifier lying within said
larger section and having one end entering
said smaller section and provided with a plu-
rality of lengthwise cuts to make it elastic, 65
and means for moving said modifier axially
of the tube from outside the same, substan-
tially as described.
4. In a talking machine, a sound-convey-
ing tube comprising two sections secured to- 70
gether one of which is of greater internal
cross-sectional area than the other, a tubular
modifier within said tube having a portion
fitting within said larger section, a portion
adapted to move within the end of said 75
smaller section and a portion of conical shape
connecting said portions, and means for mov-
ing said modifier axially of the tube from out-
side the same, substantially as described.
5. In a talking machine, a sound-convey- 80
ing tube comprising two sections secured to-
gether one of which is of greater internal
cross-sectional area than the other, a tubular
modifier within said tube having a portion
fitting within said larger section, an elastic 85
portion adapted to move and to fit tightly
within the end of said smaller section and a
portion of conical shape connecting said por-
tions, and means for moving said modifier
axially of the tube, substantially as described. 90
6. In a talking machine, a tone - arm
formed of two cylindrical sections secured to-
gether one of which is of greater diameter
than the other, a tubular sound-modifier
within said tube having a portion fitting with- 95
in said larger section, a portion adapted to
move within said smaller section and pro-
vided with a plurality of lengthwise cuts to
make it elastic and a portion of conical shape
connecting said portions, and means for mov- 100
ing said modifier axially of the tube from
outside the same, substantially as described.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 9th day of December, 1907.
THOMAS KRAEMER.
Witnesses :
H. Meier,
R. Gross.
No. 88L546.
PATENTED MAE. 10, 1908.
C. L. 0HISH0LM.
SPEAKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED JAK. 6, 1907.
Cfftarfe&jE. £Ms7wlm,
Ini/bntor.
-S-jCk^c^C^^-
^'3'-e#*&*^*£>.
Attorneys
THE NO»R,S PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHARLES L. CHISHOLM, OF MARYSVILLE, NEW BRUNSWICK, CANADA.
SPEAKING-MACHINE .
No. 881,546.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented March 10, 1908.
Application filed January 5, 1907. 5 Serial No. 350,979.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Charles L. Chisholm,
a subject of the King of England, residing at
Marysville, New Brunswick, Canada, have
5 invented a new and useful Speaking-Ma-
chine, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
The invention relates to acoustic instru-
ments, and particularly to recorders and re-
10 producers for phonographs and similar ma-
chines, and the object in view is to provide a
construction and arrangement of diaphragm
and stylus whereby the sound waves or beats
affect the diaphragm on truly concentric
15 lines and the stylus receives an accurate vi-
bration in accordance with the sound or
sounds attacking the diaphragm to avoid the
formation of secondary or false vibrations
due to obstacles in the way of a true and
20 accurate and free vibration of the diaphragm,
and thus avoid the formation of such a record
as in reproduction will result in secondary or
false tones or harmonics. To accomplish
this it has been found necessary in the first
25 place, as more fully explained hereinafter, to
support the diaphragm so that its surfaces
are entirely unobstructed and are free to vi-
brate and to receive the true wave beats of
sound without interference, and to construct
30 and arrange the parts so that the center of
the diaphragm is as free as any other portion
thereof to receive the impulses of the sound
waves, the stylus receiving its motion from
the accurate center of the diaphragm on a
35 point which is substantially, if not theoret-
ically, what is known as a geometrical point
of no appreciable area. Moreover, it has
been found that with the extremely thin and
sensitive diaphragm ordinarily employed in
40 machines of this type and made necessary by
the fact that the attachment of the stylus is
accomplished by wings or disks which ob-
struct and prevent the vibration of the cen-
tral portion of the diaphragm, and, also, by
45 the attachment of the stylus arm to the sur-
face of the diaphragm from the central point
to the periphery thereof, that not only are
the vibrations of the diaphragm broken and
interfered with, but the secondary or reduced
50 vibrations owing to this flexibility or sensi-
tiveness, produce false tones and harmonics,
and the real over tones which are necessary
to give character to the fundamental tones
reaching the diaphragm are lost or are dis-
55 posed in opposition to each other, so as to be
usually changed in character or nullified.
Therefore,, it has been further found that by
leaving the diaphragm entirely unobstructed
from this central point, which, as above indi-
cated, is of practically no appreciable area to 60
its periphery, a very much thicker and more
rigid diaphragm can be employed, and that
the over tones can be reproduced and the
vibrations accurately and truthfully con-
veyed to the record so as to be subsequently 65
reproduced.
In addition to the foregoing it has been
found that the necessary intimate relation or
true contact of the stylus with the center
point of the diaphragm can be effected with- 70
out securing the point of the stylus arm to the
diaphragm at such central point, and that
depending upon the conditions under which
the machine is being used the bearing of the
point upon the center of the diaphragm can 75
be varied to produce greater or less tension,
and with these and other objects, which will
appear as the invention is more fully dis-
closed, the invention consists in a certain
construction, combination and arrangement 80
of parts which will be hereinafter disclosed,
it being understood that various changes in
the form, proportion, and minor details of
construction may be made without depart-
ing from the spirit of the invention, which is 85
set forth in the appended claims.
In the accompanying drawings: — Figure
1 is a sectional view of a recorder constructed
in accordance with the invention. Fig. 2 is
a face view of the same. Fig. 3 is a detail 90
view showing the means for adjusting the
spring tension. Figs. 4, 5 and 6 are diagrams
of diaphragms showing sound wave forma-
tions.
Similar reference characters represent cor- 95
responding parts in the several figures of the
drawings.
In the illustrated embodiment of the in-
vention, the diaphragm 1, which is from four
to ten times the thickness of the diaphragm 100
ordinarily employed in recorders and re-
producers, is peripherally supported in the
frame or head 2, and the stylus, which, for
convenience, may be described as consisting
of the stylus arm 3 and the graver or stylus 10 5
point 4, is attached at the outer extremity of
the arm portion to the surface of the dia-
phragm at, or immediately over the bearing of
this diaphragm upon its support, or, in other
words, at the dead or non- vibratory portion 110
of the diaphragm. The stylus arm is of
yielding spring quality, having a spring
2
881,546
tendency toward the diaphragm with its con-
tact point 5 reduced to bear upon the geo-
metrical center of the diaphragm with the
minimum area of contact.
5 In order that the tension of the stylus arm,
or the spring tendency thereof toward the
diaphragm may be varied, a spring bearing
arm 6 is employed, being supported at its
outer end at the non- vibratory periphery of
10 the diaphragm, and being adjustable by any
suitable means, such as a cam 7, so as to ex-
ert a greater or less pressure upon the stylus
arm with which it contacts, or over which it
extends, and upon which it has a bearing, as
15 indicated in the drawings.
By giving the stylus arm, which at its at-
tached outer end is in a plane substantially
parallel with the surface of the diaphragm,
an upward sweeping curve, it is possible to
20 position the stylus point at the desired angle
with reference to the plane of the surface of
the diaphragm, and hence, to the surface of
the record or blank, so as to produce the best
results, while the bearing point of the arm
25 starting back of the point of the graver or
stylus point, extends forward and has its
bearing upon the exact center of the dia-
phragm, and directly beneath the extremity
of the stylus point. This insures the accu-
30 rate transmission of motion of the center of
the diaphragm to the stylus point, and hence
insures an accurate record. It has been
found in practice that the relatively thick or
heavy diaphragm instead of being less sensi-
35 tive to sound waves is more sensitive than
the disks of smaller gage or less thickness,
owing to the entirely unobstructed areas
thereof, there being no attachment of any
kind at any point on the surface of the dia-
40 phragm within the area of its peripheral sup-
port, and the only object in contact with any
portion of the surface of the diaphragm being
the bearing point of the stylus which, as
above indicated, is made of almost unappre-
45 ciable area. The effect of this construction
is that the diaphragm, while responsive, to
the most sensitive sound waves, does not pro-
long those waves and thus set up secondary
or false vibrations which result in a false rec-
50 ord. The rigidity of the diaphragm is such
that having received an impulse due to an
impinging sound wave, it truthfully answers
to the impulse and then returns to its normal
position. It has been found that whispers
55 can be accurately recorded and as truthfully
reproduced while concerted or orchestra work
can be produced with accuracy and without
the confusion due to harmonics, all of the
more sensitive over tones being accurately
60 recorded, and as accurately reproduced.
In Fig. 4 has been shown a diagram of a
diaphragm in which the stylus arm is secured
on a radial line extending from the center to
the periphery and indicating by the dark
65 broken lines the broken beats resulting from
a nodal condition due to the fact that the
arm acts as a damper and interferes with the
vibrations of that portion of the diaphragm.
In that event the undampered portion or
half is not free to vibrate as when the dia- 70
phragm is entirely unsupported, for the rea-
son that the condition of the dampered por-
tion of the diaphragm serves to obstruct the
movement of all parts of the diaphragm.
In Fig. 5 is shown a diagram indicating the 75
effect of covering a portion of the surface of
the disk at its center with an attaching 'de-
vice for the stylus, and indicating that not-
only is the portion of the disk thus covered
rendered inert and dead so far as sound pro- 80
duction is concerned, but the effect thereof is
that of a damper to interfere with the proper
formation of the waves in the surrounding
portion of the diaphragm.
Fig. 6 illustrates a diaphragm free to vi- 85
brate under normal conditions wherein the
wave lines are perfectly concentric and ex-
tend from the center to the periphery of the
diaphragm.
I claim: — 90
1. In a device of the class described; a
rigid, peripherally supported and otherwise
superficially unobstructed diaphragm, and a
stylus having a bearing upon the center of
the diaphragm circumscribed in area to sub- 95
stantially that of a geometric point, said dia-
phragm being of such thickness as to be un-
deflected to any appreciable extent from its
normal diametric plane by the pressure nec-
essary to maintain the bearing point of the 100
stylus in constant contact with the dia-
phragm.
2. In a device of the class described; a
rigid, peripherally supported and otherwise
superficially unobstructed diaphragm, and a 105
stylus in yielding contact but unattached to
the center of the diaphragm, with the bear-
ing circumscribed in area to that of a geomet-
ric point, the said diaphragm being of a
thickness to resist deflection by the pressure 110
necessary to maintain the stylus in unbroken
contact with the diaphragm.
3. In a device of the class described; a
rigid, peripherally supported and otherwise
superficially unobstructed diaphragm; a sty- 115
lus bearing upon the center of the diaphragm
with the area of contact circumscribed to
substantially that of a geometric point, the
said diaphragm being of a thickness to resist
deflection by the pressure necessary to main- 120
tain the stylus in unbroken contact with the
diaphragm, and a spring arm cooperating
with the stylus to establish a yielding contact
between the stylus bearing point and the
diaphragm. 125
4. In a device of the class described; a pe-
ripherally supported and otherwise super-
ficially unobstructed diaphragm, and a sty-
lus in constant contact with but unattached
to the diaphragm at its center, with the area 130
881,546
3
of contact circumscribed to substantially
that of a geometric point.
5. In a device of the class described; a pe-
ripherally supported and otherwise super-
ficially unobstructed diaphragm; a stylus,
and a bearing for the latter in constant con-
tact with but unattached to the diaphragm
at its center, said bearing being attached to
the stylus back of the stylus point and hav-
ing its point of contact with the diaphragm
in a plane cutting the center of the latter and
the graving point of the stylus, and the area
of contact between the bearing point and the
diaphragm closely approaching a geometric
point.
6. In a device of the class described; a pe-
ripherally supported and otherwise super-
ficially unobstructed diaphragm; a stylus
arm having its supporting end substantially
parallel with the surface of the diaphragm
and curved away therefrom toward its grav-
ing point, and a bearing for the stylus arm
having its contact with the diaphragm at the
center thereof and of an area closely ap-
proaching a geometric point, the said bearing
being connected to the stylus arm between
the graving end thereof and its supporting
end and lying in a plane cutting the center of
the diaphragm arid the graving point of the
stylus.
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as
my own, I have hereto affixed my signature
in the presence of two witnesses.
CHARLES L. CHISHOLM.
Witnesses :
T. E. Hoyle,
Frank S. Appleman.
25
30
Wl, ^t
"B
I !
No. 881,547.
PATENTED MAR. 10, 1908.
0. L. GHISHOLM.
REPRODUCER.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 22, 1907.
Zfy.?.
Xi^.s.
Fjtf.d.
CharMs L. Chishc^nv,
Inventor
Attorneys
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHARLES LOGAN CHISHOLM, OF MARYSVILLE, NEW BRUNSWICK, CANADA.
REPRODUCER.
No. 881,547.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented March 10, 1908.
Application filed April 22, 1907. Serial No. 369,607.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Charles Logan Chis-
holm, a subject of the King of England, re-
siding at Marysville, New Brunswick, Can-
5 ada, have invented a new and useful Repro-
ducer, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
The invention relates to talking machines
particularly of the phonograph type, and
10 more especially to reproducers, and the ob
ject in view is to provide a construction and
arrangement of diaphragm and stylus where-
by the sound waves or beats affect the dia-
phragm on truly concentric lines starting
15 from the precise center of the diaphragm and
the stylus receives an accurate vibration in
accordance with the impressions on the rec-
ord, and conveys them with the least resist-
ance and a minimum number of parts di-
20 rectly to the diaphragm at its center to
avoid false or secondary vibrations in the
diaphragm due to untrue vibrations of the
conveying means, the diaphragm being sup-
ported only at its periphery, being wholly
25 unobstructed on both surfaces, and there be-
ing no attachment to the diaphragm of the
means by which the vibrations of the stylus
are conveyed thereto.
Further objects and advantages of the in-
30 vention will appear in the following descrip-
tion, and it will be understood that various
changes in the form, proportions, and minor
details of construction may be resorted to
without departing from the spirit or sacri-
35 ficing any of the advantages of the invention.
In the drawing : — Figure 1 is a side view of
a reproducer constructed in accordance with
the invention. Fig. 2 is a sectional view of
the same. Fig. 3 is a detail view in perspec-
40 tive of the stylus arm applied in the opera-
tive position to the supporting plate. Fig.
4 is a detail sectional view of the contact end
of the stylus arm showing the preferred em-
bodiment of the invention.
45 Similar numerals of reference are em-
ployed to indicate corresponding parts
throughout the several figures of the draw-
ings.
In the construction illustrated, the inven-
50 tion is shown applied to a reproducer of the
Edison type, consisting of a sound box
formed of a tube plate 10 having a flange 11,
and an interior shoulder or seat 12 upon
which the diaphragm 13 is arranged, and in
55 contact with which it is firmly held at its
periphery by the ring nut 14. The tube 15
which extends from the tube plate and com-
municates interiorly with the sound box is
of the ordinary outwardly enlarged bore and
is designed to be used in connection with a 60
horn of any preferred construction. The
sound box is hingedly connected at 16 with
the counterbalance 17 and is adapted to be
secured in any preferred or the usual manner
to the frame of the machine, not illustrated. 65
The diaphragm within its supported periph-.
ery is wholly unobstructed as to both sur-
faces, and the impressions of the record are
conve}7ed thereto by means of a stylus lever
17' which is pivotally mounted at 18 upon a 70
bracket depending from the supporting-
plate and is provided with an arm 19 which
terminates in a stylus or contact point 20,
and while the arm is illustrated and is pref-
erably constructed of very small diameter, 75
it will be noted that from a point near the
pivot to the contact point it is arranged
almost entirely on a line perpendicular to
that portion of the stylus lever which is be-
tween the pivot and the stylus point, and 80
which may be termed the body portion of
the structure, so that the lever while being
light and sensitive is not strained in use on
a transverse line, but on a substantially lon-
gitudinal line to avoid any tendency of flex- 85
ing. Beneath the body portion of the stylus
lever, and preferably close to the stylus
point, is arranged a yielding cushion 21,
which may be of soft rubber or any other
resilient or spring material, or even a spring, 90
adapted to yield under a very slight pressure
and yet respond promptly to hold the stylus
point in the desired contact and with the
requisite stress against the record.
By this means the impressions of the rec- 95
ord are conveyed directly to the contact
point which is in contact with the diaphragm
by a single member, so that there is no loss
of vibration due to either lost motion or
yielding or springing -of the member itself, 100
and in order to prevent any' possible ' ' screech-
ing" between the contact point of the stylus
lever and the diaphragm the said point of
contact is provided with an interposed layer
of some elastic or semi-elastic substance, 105
indicated at 22. This cushion should be so
thin as to have no appreciable damping ef-
fect and yet prevent screeching between the
diaphragm and the stylus lever. The cush-
ion is film-like in thinness and may be made 110
of gutta percha or any other substance that
will not stick to the diaphragm, and is ap-
881,54?
plied to the end of the stylus lever so that
the area of contact with the diaphragm
amounts to but little more than a geomet-
rical point. It has been found in practice
5 that by means of this single element which
contacts with, but which is not attached in
any way to the diaphragm, the sound waves
are conveyed to the diaphragm with a faith-
fulness which results in an accurate repro-
10 duction without the setting up of those false
vibrations which constitute the disadvan-
tages of reproducers in which the connection
between the stylus lever or arm and the dia-
phragm includes a member attached to and
15 sometimes through the diaphragm, so that
the diaphragm is not only impelled in one
direction by a push appiied to the stylus
connections, but is also pulled so that the
vibrations interfere with each other.
20 I claim: —
1. A reproducer having a peripherally
supported but otherwise superficially unob-
structed diaphragm, and a stylus carrier un-
connected with the diaphragm but having a
25 contact point provided with a film-like cush-
ion in contact but not connected with the
surface of the diaphragm at the center.
2. A reproducer having a peripherally
supported but otherwise superficially unob-
30 structed diaphragm, and a yieldingly-sup-
ported stylus carrier provided with a contact
point provided with a film - like cushion
which is in contact but not connected with
the surface of the diaphragm at its center.
3. A reproducer having a peripherally 35
supported but otherwise superficially unob-
structed diaphragm, and a stylus carrier
mounted for pivotal movement and having
its extremity opposite to the stylus point
constructed to form a contact point for con- 40
tact with the surface of the diaphragm at its
center, and cushioning means under that
portion of the st}rlus carrier which is adja-
cent to the stylus point.
4. A reproducer having a peripherally 45
supported but otherwise superficially unob-
structed diaphragm, and a pivotal stylus
carrier having a substantially non-damping,
cushioned contact point for contact with the
diaphragm at its center. 50
5. A reproducer having a peripherally
supported but otherwise superficially unob-
structed diaphragm, and a pivotally mount-
ed stylus carrier terminating at one end in
a stylus point and at the other end in a con- 55
tact point, a cushion of film-like thinness on
the contact point of the stylus carrier, and a
cushioning device arranged in operative re-
lation with the stylus end of the stylus car-
rier to yieldingly impel the same toward the 60
record.
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as
my own, I have hereto affixed my signature
in the presence of two witnesses.
CHARLES LOGAN CHISHOLM.
Witnesses :
E. B. Edwards,
Louis Maddre.
o ° i i ^ it
No. 881,594.
PATENTED MAR. 10, 1908.
G. KONIGSTEIN.
TALKING MACHINE NEEDLE.
APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 20, 1907.
Fty-2-
WITNESSES
ZctUte/
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY
THE NORMS PETERS CO*. WASHINGTON, U. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
GABOR KONIGSTEIN, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA.
TALKING-MACHINE NEEDLE.
No. 881,594.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented March. 10, 1908.
Application filed September 20, 1907. Serial No. 393,851.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Gabor Konigstein,
citizen of United States, residing in the city
and county of San Francisco and State of
5 California, have invented new and useful
Improvements in Talking-Machine Needles,
of which the following is a specification.
My invention relates to talking machines,
and especially to the needles through which
10 the records upon the disks are transmitted
through the remainder of the apparatus.
It Consists in a novel form of the needle, so
that by changing its position, a loud or soft
tone may be transmitted.
15 Referring to the accompanying drawings
for a more complete explanation of my in-
vention— Figures 1 and 2 show different posi-
tions of the needle with relation to the disk.
In the transmission of audible sounds from
20 disk talking machines, a steel needle is fixed
to the diaphragm or sounder of the transmit-
ter and the point of this needle rests upon the
disk and follows the characteristic lines from
which the audible sounds are transmitted.
25 Needles for this purpose have heretofore been
made substantially straight, and so held with
relation to the record disk that they were
moved smoothly over it ; but they are inca-
pable of producing any changes in the tones
30 to be transmitted.
In my invention the needle has a shank A
which is adapted to be fixed in any suitable
holder connected with the diaphragm and the
transmitter, and the point 2 travels upon the
35 record disk. Intermediate between the ends
of the needle the shank is bent into a curve,
as shown at 3. This curve may be made
longer or shorter, and more or less abrupt in
its bends, as shown in the drawings. When
a needle of this construction is fixed in the 40
holder so that the bend projects transversely
of the line of travel of the disk with relation
to the needle, the tones produced thereby
will be very much softened on account of the
greater length and the elasticity of the needle ; 45
and the same effect will be produced whether
the bend projects in one direction or the other,
transversely of the travel.
If the needle is fixed in its clamp or holder
so that the curve is in the hne of travel of the 50
disk, and with the bend presented in either
direction, the tones will be made louder and
stronger, and thus enabled to regulate the
tones of the instrument to a degree, and pro-
duce such a tone as the character of the 55
voice or music requires.
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat-
ent is —
1. A needle for a disk talking machine, 60
said needle having a portion intermediate of
its ends bent transversely beyond the plane
of the outer sides of the needle to increase the
length and elasticity thereof.
2. A needle for disk talking machines, hav- 65
ing one end adapted to be fixed and connected
with the transmitter, the other end pointed
to follow the lines of the disk, and an inter-
mediate bend winch curves outwardly from
the direct hne of the first two portions of the 70
needle.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set
my hand in presence of two subscribing
GABOR KONIGSTEIN.
Witnesses :
C. A. Penfield,
S. H. NOURSE.
No. 881,644.
PATENTED MAR. 10, 1908.
R. P. WINNE.
PROCESS OF MAKING PHONOGRAMS.
APPLICATION FILED DEO. 4, 1906.
3fy2-?
-JEx^.3.
ZE~%(?. £*
^Tztf.
: O.
eJttuentot '.
CUttotvw^
THE NORfttS PETIRS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
RITTER P. WINNE, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK.
PROCESS OF MAKING PHONOGRAMS.
No. 881,644.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented March 10, 1908.
Application filed December 4, 1906. Serial No. 346,299.
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Hitter P. Winne, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State
of New York, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Processes of
Making Phonograms, of which the following
is a specification.
My present invention pertains to an im-
proved phonogram and method of making
the same, as will be hereinafter set forth in
detail, reference being had to the annexed
drawings, wherein:
Figure 1 is a vertical sectional view of one
form of apparatus employed in carrying out
the process; Fig. 2, a sectional elevation of
the completed phonogram or record; Fig.
3, a similar view of the matrix or mold; Fig.
4, sectional elevations of various members
of the apparatus; and Fig. 5, a like view of
the expanding member employed to force the
outer face of the phonogram blank into con-
tact with the matrix.
The main object of the invention is to
produce a superior celluloid phonogram, and
preferably one in which the backing mem-
ber for the record surface is molded or given
its required and finished form at the same
time the record is impressed upon the record
surface. With the process hereinafter set
forth the record may be made relatively
deep, which is a point of material advantage.
The phonogram in its preferred form may
be said to comprise an outer face or record
surface made of celluloid, and an inner cy-
lindrical backing or body of pasteboard,
which is molded to form in the process of
manufacture.
In carrying out my process, I employ a
cylindrical matrix or mold A having upon
its inner face the reverse of the cord to be
reproduced, such matrix being of the well-
known form. Within the matrix is placed
a cylinder A' of relatively thin celluloid, and
when the backing is to be molded with the
record surface, a cylinder or tube B of paste-
board, the tube making a somewhat neat or
close fit with the celluloid cylinder. Before
the pasteboard is placed in position it is
softened by soaking it in water, or in a sub-
stance, such as a light paste or glue, which
will soften its fibers and permit it to expand
circumferentially without breaking.
Within the pasteboard tube is placed a
cylindrical plug or block C of rubber, and the
parts thus positioned are placed on end upon
a bed or base D from which extends a yoke
or frame E carrying a screw F. Said screw
at its lower end finds its bearing in a socket G
formed in the upper face of a pressure-block 60
H, which is seated upon the upper end of the
expanding plug or rubber cylinder C, the
block likewise extending into a sleeve or col-
lar I which rests upon the matrix and sur-
rounds the upper end of the rubber plug C c,5
which normally projects above the upper end
of the matrix and its contained blank. A
nut J is mounted on the lower end of the
screw and is of service in securing the parts
in their initial adjustment. When the parts 70
are thus positioned, with the pasteboard
backing member softened, heat to the req-
uisite degree to soften the celluloid, is ap-
plied to the matrix and pressure exerted
upon the block H by screw F, and through 75
the block to the rubber plug or expanding
member C. The expansion of the plug is
equal in all directions and wiU force the con-
fined pasteboard tube B directly against the
now soft and plastic celluloid cylinder A', 80
the outer face of the latter being forced
against and into the matrix, and taking an
impression therefrom. After the pressure
and heat have been maintained a sufficient
length of time to effectually reproduce the 85
record upon the celluloid face, the parts are
allowed to cool and the pressure is relieved.
Upon the contraction or the parts, due to
cooling, the celluloid surface will withdraw
from contact with the matrix, and the pho- 90
nogram with its backing or body, may be
taken from the matrix. By reason of the
fact that the backing is pressed or molded to
form at the same time the relatively thin cel-
luloid surface has the record impressed upon 95
it, the record surface is evenly sustained and
backed up throughout, and no shaping or
dressing of the record is requisite. By using
an expanding member of the same diameter
throughout, an equal pressure is exerted 100
upon the various portions of the softened
backing and through it upon the celluloid
body which forms the record surface.
It is evident that in so far as the apparatus
for making the phonogram is concerned, any 105
form may be employed so long as the cylin-
drical rubber expanding member is em-
ployed.
It is of course possible to form the record
without the backing, in which case the cy- no
Hndrical rubber expanding member comes
into direct contact with the interior face of
881,644
the celluloid member. No claim is made
herein to the phonogram per se as that is
reserved for a future application, to be filed
as a division hereof.
5 Having thus described my invention, what
I claim is :
1. The process of forming phonograms,
which consists in placing a cylinder of cellu-
loid in a matrix ; arranging a backing of sof-
10 tened pasteboard within the celluloid cylin-
der; softening the celluloid by the applica-
tion of heat; and finally expanding the same
together with the pasteboard backing to
force the celluloid into intimate contact with
] 5 the matrix.
2. The process of forming phonograms,
which consists in placing a cylinder of cellu-
loid within a matrix; backing said celluloid
with a tube of softened pasteboard; applying
20 heat to the celluloid to soften the same; and
finally applying pressure throughout the en-
tire inner surface of the pasteboard tube
whereby it will be expanded laterally and
thereby force the plastic celluloid into inti-
25 mate contact with the matrix.
3. The process of forming phonograms,
which consists in placing a hollow cylinder of
celluloid in a matrix; placing a cylindrical
member of rubber within the celluloid mem-
ber; heating the matrix and celluloid to a de-
gree sufficient to soften the celluloid; and
finally applying pressure to one end of the
cylindrical member, the other member being
held against a fixed abutment, whereby the
cylindrical member will be spread or ex-
tended evenly throughout and the celluloid
will be forced outwardly into intimate con-
tact with the matrix.
4. The process of forming phonograms,
which consists in placing a cylinder of cellu-
loid in a matrix; arranging a backing of nor-
mally-unyielding material within said cylin-
der; softening the backing and the celluloid;
and finally expanding the backing and the
celluloid to force the latter into intimate con-
tact with the matrix and the backing into a
fixed relation with the celluloid.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
RITTER P. WINNE.
Witnesses :
Edward J. Gallagher,
A. G. Tisdell.
30
35
No. 881,664.
PATENTED MAR. 10, 1908.
F. W. H. GLAY.
SOUND RECORDING APPARATUS.
APPLICATION PILED MAT 22, 1903.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
Witness:
°3
%
"fc
.Inventor,
j&Tt*
«£4<r
sftrf&u,
X»r ROttRts »ETERS CO.. WASHI
NGTON, D. C
No, 881,664.
PATENTED MAR. 10, 1908.
F. W. H. CLAY
SOUND RECORDING APPARATUS.
APPLICATION FILED MAY 22, 1903.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
J^.£
Fiff.6
JTi&5
v^.y^fr^Ju^
JY^.7
p" *•
48
s/////.
57
.--7
g^*^- -- -
43
THE NORMS PKTEItS CO., WASH I HOT9M , O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
FRANCIS W. H. CLAY, OF PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA.
SOUND-RECORDING APPARATUS.
No. 881,664.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented March 10, 1908.
Application filed May 22, 1903, Serial No. 158,311,
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Francis W. H. Clay,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Pittsburg, in the State of Pennsylvania, have
5 invented certain new and useful Sound-Re-
cording Apparatus, of which the following is
a specification.
My invention relates to the art of recording
and reproducing sound vibrations, and is in-
LO tended principally to carry out the process of
photographically recording sound as set forth
in my copending application for patent there-
on, No. 47389, filed Feb. 15, 1901.
The objects of the invention are, to provide
15 apparatus for vibrating a beam of light in
strict consonance with the motions of a
sound-actuated body and to cause the vi-
brating beam to traverse the surface of a sen-
sitized film in a general spiral path so that
20 the said beam of light traces an undulating
path on the film; toprovide a recording ma-
- chine which is easily adjusted to rotate a
plate either uniformly or so as to move it
with varying velocity in order that the mov-
25 ing point under the impinging beam of light
(or other recording means) may travel at an
uniform speed under the said point, whatever
the radius of motion thereon may be ; to pro-
vide improved means for vibrating the beam
30 of light; to provide an improved mechanical
motion for the purposes; to easily and accu-
rately adjust all the apparatus, and to gener-
ally improve the design and operation of a
machine for the above purposes and others.
35 Though the machine is particularly de-
signed for recording, it is as well adapted to
the function of actuating a record for repro-
duction.
The above objects, as well as other advan-
40 tages which will hereinafter appear, I attain
by the constructions and operation as illus-
trated in preferred forms in the accompany-
ing drawings, wherein —
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section
45 through the camera, showing the machine
therein partly in side elevation and partly in
section, and the simplest form of the actu-
ator for the light. Fig. 2 is a partial section
through the tube containing the pivots for
50 the reflector 44 in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a cross
section through the carriage and guide bars
of the table, ta1 en along line x in Fig. 1.
Fig. 4 is a vertical section through the regu-
lator spindle and shifting screw, taken just
55 in front of the bearing block 34 in Fig. 1,
showing also the split nut for the shifting
screw etc. Fig. 5 is the elevation of the gear
27 in Fig. 1. Fig. 6 is a vertical section
through a modified form of the means for
actuating the beam of light, and its housing 60
etc. Fig. 7 is a section of another modifica-
tion of the light-vibrating means and its
housing. Fig. 8 is a diagram illustrating
another arrangement of reflectors for vibrat-
ing the beam of light, explained hereinafter. 65
In Fig. 1, the closed dark box 10 contains
the frame 12, 13, which supports the horizon-
tal guide bars 14, in which (Fig. 3) the sliding
block 15, canying the bearing frame 20, is
mounted and moves to laterally shift the 70
revolving table 18 on which is placed the
recording plate 19. The ends of the guides
14 rest on the uprights 12 and 13 of the
frame and are spaced apart by the blocks 16
and 16a. ' 75
The recording table 18 is journaled in the
block 15 and frame 20 and carries at its lower
end the bevel gear 21 which meshes with
bevel gear 22 fixed on the screw shaft 23.
This latter works in the nut 25 pivoted on 80
the frame 13 and slides freely through the hub
of the gear wheel 27 but turns therewith by
reason of the slot-and-feather engagement as
shown in Fig. 5. The gear wheel 27 may be
driven by gear 28 and this latter revolved by 85
any desired means, as by a coiled spring in
the motor box M. It will be seen that the
revolution of the screw shaft 23 revolves the
table 18 and at the same time, by progress-
ing through the nut 25 the frame 20, block 90
15 and the table are caused to shift laterally.
In some cases it is desirable to move the
table at a uniform rate of revolution; in
this case the long hub 36 of the pinion 37 is
inserted in the bearing shown to the right of 95
it, when the pinion meshes with gear 27, the
brush wheel 33 being then out of contact
with the under side of the table 18 by reason
of the bearing hole for the hub 36 being ec-
centrically placed with respect to the posi- 100
tion of shaft 35 when the brush wheel is in
contact. The pinion 37 is fixed by a set
screw on the shaft 35 and this carries any de-
sired regulator, as the common form 38 as
shown: the friction disk 39 being in con- 105
tact with hook 40 and this adjusted in posi-
tion by the screw 41 from the outside, as will
be plain from the drawing. I prefer how-
ever, for several reasons, to so move the re-
cording surface that the point thereon which 110
22
881,664
40
45
50
55
is directly under the impinging point of the
beam of light (p, Fig. 1), shall move always
at a constant speed, — the table therefore
varying its rate of revolution since the cir-
5 cuinference of each lap of the spiral record
line is different from any other. For this
purpose I provide the brush or friction wheel
33 on the spindle 35; and in the position
shown in the first figure it will be seen that
10 the bearing block 34 for the end of the spin-
dle has flanges (see Fig. 4), moving verti-
cally in slots in the cross bar 16a and is
pressed upward so as to keep the wheel 33 in
contact by means of a spring 53 resting on a
15 shoulder on the adjusting screw 31. The
regulator maintaining a constant rate of rev-
olution of the wheel 33 and this latter being
driven by the table 18, it is evident that the
required motion is attained (it being of
20 course understood that in this action the
pinion 37 is out of mesh with gear 27).
The whole motion may be inverted to re-
volve the table in the opposite direction by
placing the miter gear 21 in the position in-
25 cheated in dotted lines in Fig. 1, — above the
wheel 22.
In order to be able to readily shift the
table laterally, I make the nut 25 in two
parts, normally held together by the spring
30 26 (Fig. 4); this may be opened to release
the shifting screw shaft 23 by insertion of the
wedge 29 on the lever 32, which when pushed
down against its
retaining
spring also re-
moves the wheel 33 from contact with the
35 table, by reason of the forked end 30 which
embraces the screw shank 31 in the bearing
block 34. A spring 53 serves to normally
hold the wedge 29 out of engagement. A
beam of light falling on a sensitized plate on
the table, at the point p (Fig. 1) would thus
trace a simple spiral line thereon. Or, a
graving tool so placed would do the same on
a surface of wax. In order to vibrate a
beam of light in consonance with the waves
in the air due to 'sound, I provide a disk or
diaphragm 43 which may be mounted con-
veniently in a housing 46, 42. To this dia-
phragm near its center is attached a flexible
strut 45 fixed or pivoted on the side of the
reflector 44 — (in this case a camera lucida),
which is held in place to turn pivotally about
the center of the reflecting surface by the
points of the screws 52 (see Fig. 2), the hous-
ing of the glass part being extended around
the same if desired. The fight, striking the
reflector 50 is directed into the telescope 49
through a small opening, and this latter
slides in a casing 48 winch has in its inner
end a lens 51. The beam of light, converged
60 through the lens strikes the reflector 44 and
thence downward comes to a fine focus just
at the surface of the sensitive film on the
plate 19, at the point p, — all as will be plain
from the drawing.
The angular vibration of the reflector 44
65
causes an angular vibration of the impinging
beam on the film radial to the table 18 and
perpendicular to the direction of motion of
the film under the point of incidence; the
lateral linear motion of the point of incidence
is the tangent of the angular motion of the
beam, and of the reflector 44, but the angular
motion of the reflector being the anti-tangent
of the vertical linear motion of the strut 45
and the diaphragm 43, the vibration of the
point of light on the film will evidently be in
precise proportion to the motion of the
sound-actuated diaphragm 43. It will also
be seen that the amplitude of lateral vibra-
tion of the impinging point of the beam of
light will depend simply on the relative lever
arms of the beam and of the strut 45 about
the pivoting points of the reflector 44, — that
is it is variable at will by simply moving the
lens, and the vertical height of the reflector
above the table 18.
The actuator just described, while it is
mathematically exact in its operation, has
the disadvantage, in some cases, of introduc-
ing variable weight on the diaphragm 43. In
order to overcome this, and to vibrate the
recording point of light entirely free from
any variation in the load on the diaphragm
or in the resistance met in the motion, I pro-
vide the form in Fig. 6 : On the diaphragm 43
is fixed a lens 57 in the path of the beam of
light and arranged to converge the rays to a
fine focus at the surface of film 19 at p. The
housing 42, 56, has a telescope 48, 49, as be-
fore, but the rays through the lens 51 come to a
focus at b behind lens 57. The point b is thus
a fixed radiant point and the motion of lens
57 vibrates the beam in exact proportion to
the anti-tangent of the diaphragm's motion;
so that the lateral play of the point p, being
the tangent of the same angle is the same in
proportion. The weight on the diaphragm
in this case is constant and the recording
means mathematically exact at whatever
amplitude we vibrate the beam.
In order to entirely obviate weight on the
vibrating diaphragm the devices of Figs. 7
and 8 may be used. In the former case the
converging rays from lens 51 fall at a very
acute angle on the diaphragm 43 itself, and
this is furnished with a fine reflecting spot c
at its center. As the spot c moves across the
rays of light it meets and reflects rays at
different angles and thence reflects a beam on
the film 19 at p in varying position, as will be
clear to those familiar with the art. The
amplitude varies with the distances from c
to p, and to the lens.
In the diagram of Fig. 8, the rays from lens
51 strike the reflecting surface on the dia-
phragm 43 before focus, and thence they re-
flect to the curved reflector 59, which is
made of a form to present a surface at differ-
ent angles as the rays from 43 meet it at dif-
ferent points due to the vertical motion of
70
75
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
881,664
diaphragm 43. This gains a great exaggera-
tion of the vibrations, without introducing
any weight or other source of inaccuracy.
The operation will now be clear: A sen-
5 sitized plate having been put on the table 18
in the dark and the machine started and the
light let into the opening in telescope 49, the
plate 19 is driven under the point p so that
this latter' s relative travel is spirally over the
10 plate. The sound striking the diaphragm
43, angularly vibrates the beam of light,
radially to the table, and thus the impinging
point of light on the plate 19 traces a lat-
erally undulating line, in a general spiral
15 path over the plate, faithfully recording all
sound waves' affecting the diaphragm. The
plate may then be developed as set forth in
my co-pending application above referred to.
In will be understood that the machine
20 itself, exclusive of the light-actuating means,
may be used to reproduce from groove rec-
ords, by turning the plate under the point p
as before, and providing at this point a needle
point attached to a diaphragm to vibrate it,
25 as in the common gramophones.
Having thus described my invention and
illustrated its use, what I claim and desire to
secure by Letters Patent, is the following :
1. Apparatus for photographically record-
30 ing sound comprising a reflector mounted to
vibrate angularly on a diaphragm, means for
directing a converging beam of light thereon,
a sensitive film and means for moving it
spirally under the focus point of the beam,
35 substantially as described.
2. The combination with means for angu-
larly vibrating a converging beam of light in
consonance with the motions of a sound-actu-
ated body, of a plate carrying a sensitized
40 film thereon and means for moving the film in
a general spiral path under the point of focus'
of the beam and recording the said trace of
light thereon.
3. A sound recording camera comprising a
45 dark box, a supporting table therein, means
for directing a converging beam of light on
the table, and means for revolving the table
and simultaneously shifting it laterally, and
means for vibrating the position of the beam
50 of light in exact accordance with the move-
ments of sound waves.
4. In a recording machine the combina-
tion with a photographic film and means to
vibrate a beam of light in consonance with
55 sound waves of a table supporting said film
under the beam of light, mounted to revolve
in a sliding carriage, a screw shaft and gears
for both revolving the table and laterally
shifting it, a friction wheel driven by the re-
60 volving table and a regulator controlling the
revolution of the shaft of the friction wheel.
5. In a recording machine the combina-
tion with a means for vibrating a beam of
light in consonance with sound waves, of a
65 sensitive film and a table supporting the film
and means for revolving and laterally shift-
ing it, and a regulator actuated by a friction
wheel revolved by contact with the table
whereby the movable point of contact of the
table on the friction wheel travels at a regu-
lar speed.
6. In a recording machine the combina-
tion with a shifting and rotating table, of
mechanism for rotating the table and speed
regulating mechanism to maintain a constant
speed of that point on the table which is mo-
mentarily opposite to a fixed point, a sound-
actuated reflector and means to direct a re-
flected beam of fight on said point, and a
photo-sensitive film for recording the vibra-
tions.
7. The combination with a rotating and
laterally shifting table and means for driving
it, of a governor for regulating the speed,
driven by said table from a fixed position
whereby the table moves its surface opposite
to the fixed point at a constant speed, and
means to vibrate a beam of light in conso-
nance with sound waves over said point.
8. The combination of a rotating and lat-
erally translating table, mechanism to drive
the same and a differential governor driven
by the surface of the table, and means to re-
flect and vibrate a sound-actuated beam of
light on the table.
9. In sound recording apparatus the com-
bination with mechanism for properly mov-
ing a recording surface, of a reflector, a sound
diaphragm carrying means for angularly vi-
brating the reflector, and a telescope for di-
recting a converging beam of fight on the re-
flector.
10. In sound recording apparatus a piv-
otally mounted reflector, a sound diaphragm
carrying means to actuate the reflector, a
lens for throwing a converging beam of light
on the reflector and means for recording the
movements of the beam of hght.
11. In sound recording apparatus the com-
bination of a diaphragm, a telescope for con-
verging a beam of hght and means attached
to the diaphragm for causing the focus point
of the beam of light to move in exact har-
mony with the motions of the diaphragm.
12. In sound recording apparatus the com-
bination of a sound diaphragm, a telescope
and lens for converging a beam of light,
means attached to the diaphragm to vibrate
the beam of light synchronously with vibra-
tions of the diaphragm and capable of adjust-
ing the amplitude of vibration of the focus
point of the beam of light without affecting
the motions or load of the diaphragm.
13. In photographic recording apparatus
the combination of a stationary lens for con-
verging and directing a beam of light, a
sound diaphragm and a fixed means on the
diaphragm for angularly vibrating the beam
of fight with the linear vibrations of the dia-
phragm.
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
881,664
14. In photographic recording apparatus
the combination of a vibrating body having
a reflecting surface, a lens arranged to con-
verge and direct on said surface a beam of
5 light at an acute angle, whereby the linear
vibration of the body angularly vibrates the
beam of light, for the purpose specified.
15. The combination of a sound diaphragm
mounted in a closed housing, a reflecting
10 spot on the diaphragm, a lens to converge a
beam of light and directing it on the dia-
phragm at an acute angle, the area of the re-
flecting spot being of a size to reflect only
part of the rays of light in the beam, sub-
stantially as described.
In testimony whereof I have hereunder
signed my name in the presence of the two
subscribed witnesses.
FRANCIS W. H. CLAY.
Witnesses :
Paxil Stnnestvedt,
Chas. H. Ebert.
15
No. 881,792.
PATENTED MAR. 10, 1908.
S. GOLDFADEN.
STYLUS FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED DEO. 9, 1907.
1
IBP
iS^'
WITNESSES
_^@.m&^~^
INVENTOR
/Siziriuel GoZcZfa&eri;
ATTORNEYS
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
SAMUEL GOLDFADEN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
STYLUS FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 881,792.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented March 10, 1908.
Application filed December 9, 1907. Serial No. 405,794.
To all whom it may concern:
jp- Be it known that I, Samuel Goldfaden, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident of
the city of New York, borough of Brooklyn,
5 in the county of Kings and State of New
York, have invented a new and Improved
Stylus for Talking-Machines, of which the
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip-
tion.
10 My invention relates to talking machines,
and has for its object to provide a stylus
which can be adjusted in numerous different
ways so that it will always have a good point
to trace the record, thereby actuating the
15 diaphragm in such a manner that the sound
waves produced will be even and the sounds
harmonious and clear.
Another object is to provide auxiliary styli
which are secured to the principal stylus,
20 with means to secure one of the auxiliary
styli in an operative position with one of its
several points below the principal stylus.
Still another object is to provide means for
rigidly securing the auxiliary styli to the
25 principal stylus.
In this specification I will describe the pre-
ferred form of the invention but I do not
limit myself thereto, as I consider myself en-
titled to all forms and embodiments of the
30 invention which may be held to fall within
the scope ot the appended claims.
Similar reference characters refer to simi-
lar parts in all the figures, in which
Figure 1 is a front view of the stylus with
35 one of the auxiliary styli secured with its
point below the point of the principal stylus ;
Fig. 2 is a transverse sectional view on line
2 — 2 of Fig. 1 ; Fig. 3 is a sectional view on
line 3 — 3 of Fig. 1 ; Fig. 4 is a sectional view
40 similar to that shown in Fig. 2 but with the
points of the auxiliary styli above the point
of the principal stylus ; Fig. 5 is a front view
of a modification of the invention; and Fig.
6 is a side view of the same.
45 Keferring to the drawings it will be seen
that the shank 1 is that generally used and
that it may be connected with the diaphragm
of the talking machine in the customary
manner. At the lowrer end of the shank
50 there is a cross-bar 2 and below it a triangu-
lar principal stylus 3, having its point ap-
proximately in line with the axis of the shank
1. The auxiliary styli 4 are preferably two
in number, one secured on either side of the
principal stylus 3. There is a hole 5 in the 55
principal stylus and vertical slots 6, in each
of the auxiliary styli. A bolt 7 passes
through the said slots in the auxiliary styli 4
and the hole in the principal stylus 3, and a
nut 8 holds the auxiliary styli with reference 60
to the principal stylus, in a predetermined
position. It will be seen that by means of
the slots 6 the auxiliary styli may be raised
or may be lowered in accordance with the
wishes of the operator. When one of the 65
auxiliary styli is lowered, the bolt will be
found to be approximately in the center of
the auxiliary stylus which is triangular in
form. It is, therefore, possible in this posi-
tion to turn the auxiliary stylus 4 with the 70
result that any of its three points may be
brought in alinement with the axis of the
shank 1.
The sides of the principal stylus 3 and of
the auxiliary styli 4 are beveled, so that the 75
angles formed by the sides will be pointed
and will be adapted to travel in the groove
of the record. At either end of the cross-bar
2, there is a standard 9, with a button 10 se-
cured at its top. Wound around each of 80
these standards 9, there is a spring 11 with
an arm 12 projecting inwardly toward the
shank. The spring is so wound that it has a
tendency to press downwardly and it may
be pushed toward either of the auxiliary 85
styli 4, when it may be pushed thereover so
that the auxiliary stjdi 4 will be held rigidly
with reference to the principal stylus and the
shank 1 . This will prevent any lost motion
between the auxiliary styli 4 and the shank 1 . 90
In the modification shown in Fig. 5 I use
a hard stone for the stylus, thereby making
it unnecessary to provide for the several ad-
justments shown in the principal construc-
tion. In the modified form the stylus 13 is 95
made of hard stone, triangular in form, with
the edges beveled so that each of the three
points may be used to trace the record. The
triangular, hard stone stylus is pivoted at its
center to a body similar to the principal sty- 100
lus in the principal constructon, and it may
be rotated, presenting any one of its three
points in alinement with the shank 1, to be
used on the record. The cross-bar 2 with
a
881,792
the standards 9, and the springs 11 with
their arms 12, are the same as shown in the
principal construction and are used in the
same manner.
5 In the use of the invention, the auxiliary
styli are secured with their points above
the point of the principal stylus 3, and the
point of the principal stylus 3 is used to
trace the record. The stylus may trace the
20 record with either face forward or with
either of its sides in a forward position.
When the point of the principal stylus has
been worn, one of the auxiliary styli is
pushed down so that its point is below the
15 point of the principal stylus. This point
may be used to trace the record with each
of its four different sides in a forward posi-
tion and when this point is roughened the
auxiliary stylus may be rotated on the bolt
20 7 and another point be used in the same
manner. When all the points of one aux-
iliary stylus have been worn, it may be
pushed upwardly and its companion aux-
iliary stylus be used.
25 Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent:
1 . A stylus for talking machines, having a
plurality of points adapted to trace the rec-
30 ord, means to adjust the stylus so that one
point is substituted for another, and means
which bears on the periphery of the stylus
and thereby holds rigid the point which is in
operative position.
35 2. A stylus for talking machines, having a
plurality of points, a body having a shank
adapted to be connected to the diaphragm
of the talking machine, the stylus being
pivoted to the said body, and means which
40 bears on the periphery of the stylus to secure
it in a predetermined position.
3. A stylus for talking machines, having a
plurality of points spaced apart on its periph-
ery, a body having a shank adapted to be
45 connected to the diaphragm of the talking
machine, the stylus being pivoted to the
said body, and means which bears on the
periphery of the stylus to secure it in a pre-
determined position.
50 4. A stylus for talking machines, having
a plurality of points spaced apart on its pe-
riphery, a body having a shank adapted to be
connected to the diaphragm of the talking
machine, the stylus being pivoted to the said
55 body, means to secure the stylus against the
said body, and means which bears on the
periphery of the stylus and holds it rigid.
5. A stylus for talking machines, having a
plurality of points, a body having a shank
60 adapted to be connected to the diaphragm of
the talking machine, a slot in the stylus
means to pivot the stylus to the said body in
a plurality of positions along the said slot,
and means to secure the stylus rigidly to the
05 said body.
6. A stylus for talking machines, having a
plurality of quite distant points in substan-
tially the same plane, a body having a shank
adapted to be connected to the diaphragm of
the talking machine, a slot in the stylus 7()
through which it is pivoted to the said body,
and means bearing on the periphery of the
stylus which secures it rigidly to the said
body.
7. A stylus for talking machines, having a 75
plurality of edges at angles to each other,
said edges being beveled to form sharp points
at the apexes of the said angles.
8. A stylus for talking machines, having a
plurality of points, a body having a shank g0
adapted to be connected to the diaphragm of
the talking machine, the said stylus being
pivoted on a bolt secured to the said body,
and a spring by means of which the stylus
may be held rigidly relative to the said body. 85
9. A stylus for talking machines, having a
body with a hole therein, a plurality of styli,
each having a slot therein, and a bolt which
passes through the hole in the body and the
slots in the styli, by means of which they are 90
secured together.
10. A stylus for talking machines, having
a body with a hole therein, a plurality of
styli each having a slot therein, a bolt which
passes through the hole in the body and the 95
slots in the styli, by means of wihch they are
secured together, and springs on the body
which are adapted to press on the styli and
hold them rigidly.
11. A stylus for talking machines, having 10q
a body with a hole therein, a plurality of
styli, a plurality of points on each of the said
styli, each stylus having a slot therein, a
bolt which passes through the hole in the
body and the slots in the styli by means of 105
which they are all secured together, and
means to hold the styli rigid relative to the
said body.
12. A stylus for talking machines having a
plurality of points, a body having a shank 110
adapted to be connected to the diaphragm of
the talking machine, the stylus engaging the
body, means to adjust the stylus so that one
point can be substituted for another, and
means which bear on the periphery of the 115
stylus to hold it rigid.
13. A stylus for talking machines, a shank
connected therewith, and means to bear on
the stylus at a distance from the shank to
hold it rigid. 12c
14. A stylus for talking machines, trian-
gular in form with its edges beveled to form
sharp points at the apexes of the angles.
15. A stylus for talking machines, trian-
gular in form with its edges beveled to form 125
sharp points at the apexes of the angles, a
shank adapted to be connected to the dia-
phragm of the talking machine, the shank
engaging the stylus, and means bearing on
the stylus to hold it rigid. 130
881,792
10
16. A stylus for talking machines, a shank
adapted to be connected to the diaphragm of
the talking machine, a body having a cross-
bar means for securing the stylus to the
body, and a spring on the cross-bar adapted
to bear on the periphery of the stylus.
17. A stylus for talking machines, a shank
adapted to be connected to the diaphragm of
the talking machine, the body having a
cross-bar, means for securing the stylus to
the body, and springs one on either end of
the cross-bar, the springs bearing at different
points on the periphery of the stylus.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
SAMUEL GOLDFADEN.
Witnesses :
Benjamin P. Fatarsky,
Everard B. Marshall.
15
!, Y5I
.-
No. 881,831.
PATENTED MAR. 10, 1908.
R. B. SMITH.
SOUND REPRODUCER.
APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 17, 1907.
UZr
W/TNESSES
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHtNGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
RICHARD BARTHOLOMEW SMITH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
SOUND-REPRODUCER.
No. 881,831.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented March 10, 1908.
Application filed September 17, 1907. Serial No. 393,309.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Richard Bartholo-
mew Smith, a subject of the King of Great
Britain, and a resident of the city of New
5 York, borough of Manhattan, in the county
and State of New York, have invented a new
and Improved Sound-Reproducer, of which
the following is a full, clear, and exact de-
scription.
10 My invention relates to reproducers, such,
for instance, as are employed in connection
with talking machines, my more particular
object being to provide for greater freedom
of movement of the stylus lever in order to
15 permit a more faithful reproduction of the
vibrations and to avoid undue wear upon the
record and stylus.
More particularly stated, my invention re-
lates to means for permitting the stylus lever
20 to travel freely in a direction lateral to the
general direction of travel of the diaphragm.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawings forming a part of this specifica-
tion, in which similar characters of reference
25 indicate corresponding parts in all the fig-
ures.
Figure 1 is a central vertical section on the
line 1 — 1 of Fig. 2, through a reproducer of
the so-called "Edison type," equipped with
30 my invention, this view showing the dia-
phragm, the stylus lever for actuating the
same, and the means employed for allowing
the stylus lever to turn or rock in a direction
approximately parallel to the diaphragm;
35 Fig. 2 is a rear elevation of the reproducer,
showing how the stylus lever is mounted upon
the rocking disk by aid of a staff pivotally
mounted upon the rocking disk ; Fig. 3 is an
enlarged central section on the line 3 — 3 of
40 Fig. 1, through the rocking disk, showing
more particularly how the staff is supported
thereupon and how the stylus lever is con-
nected with the staff ; Fig. 4 is a perspective
showing one form of swivel carrier for sup-
45 porting the stylus lever; Fig. 5 is a perspec-
tive showing a different form of swivel carrier
for supporting the stylus lever.
The reproducer casing is shown at 6 and is
provided with a sleeve 7 to which the phono-
50 graph horn may be connected. The casing is
provided with an annular portion 8 threaded
internally and mounted within it is a ring 9
threaded externally. A diaphragm 10 is
mounted within the casing 6 and is free to
55 vibrate. A weight 11, having the form of a
plate, is provided with the usual holes 12
whereby it may be partially supported, if de-
sired, by aid of a ribbon or string, when the
apparatus is not in use. A plate 13, integral
with this weight 11 and forming a continua- 60
tion thereof, is connected with the casing 6 at
the bottom thereof by aid of a hinge 14, and
the plate 13 is provided centrally with an
aperture 15. Mounted upon the diaphragm
10 is a cross head 16 which is engaged by a 65
connecting link 18, and the latter extends
through the aperture 15 and engages the
lower end of a stylus lever 1 9 . The upper end
of this stylus lever is provided with a lug
20 which supports a jewel or glass stylus 21 70
for engaging the record cylinder. A staff 22
supports the stylus lever 19, and for this pur-
pose a cylindrical screw 23 is fitted tightly
upon the staff 22, being preferably shrunken
thereto so as to avoid the possibility of its be- 75
coming detached. This cylindrical screw is
provided with an annular head 24 which jams
squarely against the Stylus lever 19. The
screw extends directly through the body of
said lever. go
The staff 22 is supported by screws 25, the
inner ends of which are cupped for the pur-
pose. These screws are provided with heads
26 whereby they may be turned, and are so
arranged that the cups upon the inner ends 85
of the screws fit upon the ends of the staff 22
which are made conical at 27 for this pur-
pose. By turning the screws 26 the play of
the staff 22 may be regulated at will and the
general position occupied by the stylus lever 90
19, relatively to the center of the diaphragm,
may be controlled as desired.
Supporting the screws 25 are two stems 28
each screwed into a rocking disk 29. This
rocking disk is mounted upon a stub shaft 95
30, the latter being provided with a threaded
cylindrical portion 21 extending directly
through the rocking disk. Mounted upon
the stub shaft 30 is an enlarged portion 32
constituting a head for the threaded portion 100
31. The stub shaft 30 is provided at its ends
with reduced bearing portions 33. One of
these reduced bearing portions extends
through a spider 34 integral with the plate
13. This spider is formed by cutting away 105
the plate 34 so as to leave arcuate slots 35.
A bridge 36 is mounted upon the plate 13
and secured thereto by aid of screws 37.
This bridge engages one of the reduced por-
tions 33 of the stub shaft 30 and forms a 110
bearing therefor. The bridge 36 and the
spider 34 being rigid relatively to each other,
a
681,831
and the rocking disk 29 being normally rigid
in relation to the stub shaft 30, it follows
that the rocking disk 29 turns upon the re-
duced bearing portions 33 which are sup-
5 ported by the bridge 36 and spider 34.
The arrangement above described allows
great freedom of movement of the stylus le-
ver 19, this lever being free to turn in practi-
cally any direction occasionally required,
10 and being especially free to turn in a direc-
tion corresponding to a plane lateral to the
general direction of vibration of the dia-
phragm 10.
In the form shown in Fig. 5, the U-shaped
15 bracket 38 takes the place of the rocking
disk 29. A stub shaft 39 is provided with re-
duced ends 40 and with an enlarged annular
portion 41, the latter engaging directly the
surface of the U-shaped bracket. Threaded
20 holes 42 are provided in the U - shaped
bracket for accommodating the screws 25, as
will be understood by contrasting Fig. 5 with
Fig. 3.
One purpose in increasing the greater free-
25 dom of movement allowed to the stylus le-
ver, is to enable the vibratory impulses to be
faithfully transmitted to the diaphragm in
order that the diaphragm may in turn faith-
fully reproduce said impulses. Another pur-
30 pose is to allow the stylus to follow irregu-
larities in the record surface, without the
possibility of mutilating either the stylus or
the record surface, and also without permit-
ting such irregularities to reproduce a false
35 sound. The mounting above described for
the stylus lever 19 is practically that of a uni-
versal joint or of a swivel.
It will be noted that the pivotal mounting
for the stylus lever 19 is disposed in a line
4 0 which, at one point, coincides with the axial
line upon which the disk 29 turns. Such be-
ing the case the rocking of the disk 29 and of
the stylus lever 19 does not change the posi-
tion of the imaginary line around which the
4 5 stylus lever 19 turns as a center when it
rocks in a plane substantially parallel with
the general plane occupied by the plate 1 3 so
that this line always coincides with the im-
aginary line upon which the disk rocks as a
50 center.
Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent:
1 . The combination of a member mounted
55 free to rock upon an axis, and a stylus lever
supported upon said member and free to
rock upon an axis intersected by a prolonga-
tion of the axis of said member, and a dia-
phragm in operative relation to said stylus
CO lever.
2. The combination of a member mounted
free to rock upon an axis, and a longitudinal
stylus lever pivoted upon said member and
free to rock, said lever extending diametric-
ally across the axis of said member, and a 65
diaphragm in operative relation to said sty-
lus lever.
3. The combination of a casing, a vibra-
tory diaphragm mounted therein, a weight
disposed adjacent to said casing and mov- 70
able relatively thereto, a rocking member
mounted upon said weight and free to turn
relatively to the same in a plane nearly par-
allel with the plane of said diaphragm, and a
stylus lever free to rock in a general direction 75
crossing the plane of said diaphragm, the
axis of said stylus lever being intersected by
a prolongation of the axis of said rocking
member.
4. The combination of a vibratory dia- 80
phragm, means for supporting the same, a
weight disposed adjacent to said diaphragm
and free to move independently thereof, a
disk mounted upon said weight and free to
turn relatively thereto in a plane nearly par- 85
allel with the plane of said diaphragm, and a
stylus lever journaled upon said disk and
free to rock in a general direction crossing the
plane of said diaphragm, the axis of said sty-
lus lever being intersected by a prolongation 90
of the axis of said disk.
5. The combination of a supporting mem-
ber mounted to rock upon an axis, a stylus
lever mounted upon said supporting member
and free to rock upon an axis, said lever being 95
so positioned that the axis is intersected by a
prolongation of the axis of said supporting
member, a vibratory diaphragm, and a con-
nection from said vibratory diaphragm to
said stylus lever. 100
6. The combination of a vibratory dia-
phragm, means for supporting the same, a
weight having substantially the form of a flat
plate disposed adjacent to said diaphragm
and pivotally mounted, said plate being pro- 105
vided with a recess, a rocking disk mounted
within said recess and adapted to move in a
plane parallel with said plate, the center of
said rocking disk being disposed above the
center of said diaphragm, a stylus lever jour- 110
naled upon said rocking disk and adapted to
rock in a plane crossing the general plane oc-
cupied by said rocking disk, the axis of said
stylus lever being intersected by a prolonga-
tion of the axis of said rocking disk, and a 115
connection from said stylus lever to said dia-
phragm.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
RICHARD BARTHOLOMEW SMITH.
Witnesses :
Walton Harrison,
Everard B. Marshall.
No. 881,843.
PATENTED MAR. 10, 1908.
C. A. BEPPLER.
PHONOGRAPH HORN.
APPLICATION PILED MAY 13. 1907.
2 SHEETS— SHEET 1.
a.
%Z * INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
BY
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINOTON, D. C.
No. 881,843.
PATENTED MAR. 10, 1908.
C. A. BEPPLER.
PHONOGRAPH HORN.
APPLICATION PILED MAT 13, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D, C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHAKLES ANTON BEPPLER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
PHONOGRAPH-HORN.
No. 881,843.
Specification of Letters Patent. PatentedJMarch 10, 1908.
Application filed May 13, 1907. Serial No. 373,311.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Charles Anton Bepp-
ler, a citizen of the United States, and a
resident of the city of New York, borough of
5 Brooklyn, in the county of Kings and State
of New York, have invented a new and use-
ful Improvement in Phonograph-Horns, of
which the following is a full, clear, and exact
description.
10 The purpose of the invention is to so con-
struct a phonograph horn that the tip can be
adjusted with equal facility to either a disk
or a cylinder record without changing the po-
sition of the body or the bell of the horn.
15 Another purpose of the invention is to
render the horn compact in use, it having an
S-shape or is formed upon the lines of a
compound curve, whereby to bring the tip
below yet not in contact with the flaring por-
20 tion of the bell, and also to construct the
horn in three separable parts, namely, a bell
section, a body section, and a tip section, in
order that the horn may be stored in a mini-
mum of space.
25 Another purpose of the invention is to
render the tip section not only detachable
but adjustable and to provide said tip sec-
tion with a sliding ferrule member capable of
being moved to and from the record, and
30 further, to so construct the bell section that
the surface at and adjacent its outer marginal
Eortion will be substantially flat or of cym-
al formation, whereby to distribute the
sound over a maximum of space.
35 The invention consists in the novel con-
struction and combination of the several
parts as will be hereinafter fully set forth
and pointed out in the claims.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
40 ing drawings forming a part of this specifica-
tion, in which similar characters of reference
indicate corresponding parts in all the fig-
ures.
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the improved
45 horn having its tip set for use in connection
with the cylinder record; Fig. 2 is a sectional
side elevation of the horn showing its tip set
for use in connection with the disk record;
Fig. 3 is a horizontal section taken practi-
50 cally on the line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2 ; Fig. 4 is a ver-
tical section taken substantially on the line
4 — 4 of Fig. 2 ; Fig. 5 is an enlarged sectional
side elevation of the tip section of the horn ;
and Fig. 6 is a detail section through a por-
55 tion of the receiving end of the bell and en-
tering end of the body, illustrating the appli-
cation of a latch device thereto.
The horn consists of a bell section A, a
body section B, and a tip section C. The
contracted rear end of the bell section A is 60
provided with a plain outwardly offset band
10, and in the said band 10 a series of sub-
stantially L-shaped slots 11 is produced, the
slots being usually three in number, the
longer sections of the said slots constituting 65
their circumferential sections and their
shorter or mouth sections are diametrical
sections, and extend through the outer edge
of the band 10.
Each slot 11 is spanned at its mouth por- 70
tion b}T an outwardly arched or yoke shaped
bridge 12, and a spring latch 13 is secured to
the outer face of the band 10 at the forward
side, or what would preferably be the upper-
most slot 11, crossing the said slot just for- 75
ward of the bridge or yoke 12 for said slot,
and near the free end of this latch 13 a head
14 is provided, which head normally extends
down into the longer or circumferential por-
tion of the said uppermost slot at a point op- 80
posite the mouth of the said slot, and the
under face of this projection or head 14 is
preferably more or less beveled.
The body section B is longitudinally taper-
ing, its upper end being of the greatest di- 85
ameter and its lower end of the least diame-
ter. At the upper end of the body section B
a band 15 is formed, capable of sliding en-
gagement with the inner face of the offset
band 10 on the bell section A, and the band 90
15 on the body section B is provided with a
series of pins 16 corresponding in number to
the number of slots in the band member 10
on the bell. In connecting the body section
B with the bell section A, the pins are made 95
to enter the slots 1 1 at their mouth portions,
passing beneath the bridges 12 at such point,
and when the pins are forward of the said
bridges and are in the longer members of the
said slots, the body section is then turned to 100
the outer ends of the said longer portions of
the slots 11, whereupon the head 14 of the
latch 13 will automatically drop behind the
uppermost pin and prevent it from moving
in its slot, thus locking the body section to 10 5
the bell section in a removable manner.
The body section B in addition to being
longitudinally tapering is given a downward
and a forward curvature, the curvature being
preferably more pronounced, as is shown, so 110
881,843
that the lower end of the said body section
will be well within the plane of the outer edge
of the bell section at its bottom portion, since
when the body section is fixed to the bell sec-
5 tion a line drawn through the center of one
would pass through the center of the other.
At the lower reduced end portion b of the
body section B usually two opposing pins 17
are exteriorly secured, and these pins are
10 adapted for use in attaching to the body sec-
tion B a tip section C. This tip section is
likewise longitudinally tapering, being of
greater diameter at its upper or inner end
and of least diameter at its lower or outer
15 end. The tip section C is reversely curved
to the curvature of the body section B, the
curve being in direction of the rear of the
horn, and the said tip section C is not only
removably connected with the body section
20 B but is also adjustably connected there-
with.
To that end at the upper extremity of the
tip section C, a hub 18 is formed, as is illus-
trated best in Fig. 5, and this hub is adapted
25 to receive within it the reduced lower end of
the body section B, and the said hub 18 is
provided with opposing circumferential slots
19, which as illustrated in Fig. 4 preferably
correspond in length to the quarter of the
30 circumference of the said tip section at its
reduced end, and each slot 19 is provided
with an entering or mouth section 20 at its
central portion extending out through the
edge of the hub 18.
35 When the tip section is to be placed upon
the body section, the pins 17 of the body sec-
tion are received in the slots 19 of the tip
section, passing beneath arched members 21,
that constitute bridges for the mouth por-
40 tions of the said slots, and when the pins 1 7
are forward of these bridge members 21, the
tip C is turned so as to bring the pins 17 in
engagement with corresponding end portions
of the slots 19, whereupon the tip C will have
45 a downwardly extending or substantially
vertical position, shown in Fig. 1, which po-
sition it occupies when the horn is to be used
in connection with the cylinder record.
If the horn is to be used in connection with
50 a disk record, the tip C is turned so as
to bring the pins 17 of the body B in engage-
ment with the other end portions of the slots
19 in the tip, whereupon the lower end of the
tip will be carried in to the horizontal posi-
55 tion shown in Fig. 2, bringing its outlet to
face the disk. It will be observed that in
either position of the tip C it is to the rear of
the bottom outer portion of the. bell of the
horn, quite close thereto but separated a con-
60 venient distance therefrom, so as to render
the device when its parts are connected ex-
ceedingly compact, and when . the parts of
the device are separated it can be packed in
a very small compass.
65 Usually adjacent the lower end of the tip C
an exterior band or boss 21a is formed, as is
particularly shown in Fig. 5, and a ferrule 22
is mounted to slide upon the exterior of the
tip at a point below the band or boss 21 a, and
this ferrule 22 is provided with a longitudi- 70
nal slot 23 through which a pin 24 extends
from the said tip, as is also best shown in
Fig. 5, which ferrule enables the tip to be
lengthened or shortened to accommodate it
to the record cylinders or record disks of dif- 75
ferent styles of phonographs.
The outer face of the flaring portion of the
bell section A at its outer edge and at a part
closely adjacent thereto, is provided with a
flattened surface 25, so as to give to this por- so
tion of the bell the shape of the striking face
of cymbals, and such formation tends to dis-
tribute the sound to a much greater degree
than when the said bell is of an ordinary
gradual curvature from its inner portion to 85
its outer edge.
I do not limit myself to the exact con-
struction herein shown and described, as the
details of the invention may be modified or
changed without departing from the spirit 90
thereof. The ferrule 22 is particularly de-
signed to prevent the horn leaving the speaker
of instruments of the cylinder type after
the machine is set in motion, as it adjusts
itself to the speaker. Eyes 27 and 27a are 95
secured to the upper portion of the bell A at
the outer marginal portion anil to the body
B, and said eyes are connected by a length
of chain 28 having connected therewith a
shorter stretch 29 that is connected with the 100
usual stand, whereby the horn is capable of
a free rotary swinging movement, since there
is no coupling between the horn and the
speaker, the horn being simply supported
over the speaker independent thereof. The 105
suspension chain 29 is in a line with the
lower end of the tip C, as is shown by the
broken line 30, so that in hanging the horn
the tendency of the ferrule end of the tip will
be to remain over the speaker. In practice, nu
the bell of the horn occupies a anore upright
position than is illustrated.
Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent, — 115
1. A phonograph horn comprising a bell
section, a body section removably connected
at one end with the rear end portion of the
bell section, means for locking the said sec-
tions together, a tip section having both re- 120
movable and adjustable connection with the
other end of the body section, and a sliding
ferrule mounted upon the end portion of the
tip section.
2. A phonograph horn formed on the line 125
of a compound curve and comprising a bell
section, a downwardly and forwardly curved
body section, a tip section curved reversely
to the curvature of the body section, the
same being in direction of the rear of the 130
881,843
3
horn, and means for removably connecting
the body section to the bell section and for
removably and adjustably connecting the tip
section with the body section.
5 3. A phonograph horn comprising a bell
section having its outer face at the peripheral
portion of its flaring section flattened, a body
section removably connected -with the rear
end portion of the bell section, the body sec-
10 tion being downwardly and forwardly curved
terminating at its lower end at a point be-
neath yet within the horizontal plane of the
lower edge of the flaring portion of the bell
section, a tip section for the body section
15 curved reversely to the curvature of the body
section, and means for adjustably and re-
movably connecting the tip section to the
body section.
4. A phonograph horn comprising a bell
20 section having its outer face at the peripheral
portion of its flaring section flattened, a body
section removably connected with the rear end
portion of the bell section, the body section
being downwardly and forwardly curved,
25 terminating at its lower end at a point be-
neath jet within the horizontal plane of the
lower edge of the flaring portion of the bell
section, a tip" section for the body section,
curved reversely to the curvature of the body
30 section, means for adjustably and removably
connecting the tip section to the body sec-
tion, and a sliding ferrule mounted upon the
lower end portion of the tip section.
5. In a phonograph horn, the combination
35 with a bell section having a series of L-
shaped slots at its rear or contracted end, a
body section having pins at its upper or en-
larged ends adapted to enter the slots in the
bell section, arched bridge members located
40 at the mouth portions of the said grooves,
and a latch for one of the said pins, carried
by the body section and having a head ex-
. tending down into one of the said grooves,
the body section being downwardly and for-
wardly curved, and also being of a longitu- 45
dinally tapering shape in a downward direc-
tion, a tip section curved reversely to the
curvature of the body section, opposing pins
exteriorly located at the lower end of the
body section, a hub formed at the upper or 50
inner end of the tip section, the said hub
being provided with opposing slots of equal
length and mouth portions at the central
portions of the said slots, the slots being
adapted to receive the said pins, a bridge 55
crossing the mouth portions of the slots of
the tip member, and an adjustable ferrule at
the lower end of said tip member.
6. A phonograph horn comprising a bell
section, a body section removably connected 60
with the rear end portion of the bell section,
the body section being downwardly and for-
wardly curved, a tip section for the body
section curved reversely to the curvature of
the body section, means for adjustably and 65
removably connecting the tip section to the
body section, and a sliding ferrule mounted
upon the end portion of the tip section.
7. A phonograph horn comprising a bell
section having an offset band at its rear or 70
contracted end provided with a series of sub-
stantially L-shaped slots, a body section hav-
ing a band at its upper end capable of sliding
engagement with the offset band on the bell
section, the band on the body section being 75
provided with a series of pins adapted to
enter said slots, a latch secured to the offset
hand of the bell section for locking the body
section in place, and a tip section having
removable and adjustable connection with 80
the body section.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
CHARLES ANTON BEPPLER
Witnesses :
Adolph Hachtmann,
Harry Waller.
No. 882,785,
PATENTED MAR. 24, 1908.
T. KRAEMER.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED OOT. 7, 1807.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C
No. 882,785.
J%tj:2}
PATENTED MAR. 24, 1908.
T. KRAEMER.
TALKING MACHINE,
APPLICATION PILED OCT. 7, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS KRAEMER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO HAWTHORNE &
SHEBLE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, A CORPORA-
TION OF PENNSYLVANIA.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 882,785.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented March. 24, 1908.
Application filed October 7, 1907. Serial No. 396,134.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas Kraemer, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Philadelphia, in the county of Philadelphia
5 and State of Pennsylvania, have invented a
certain new and useful Improvement in
Talking-Machines, of which the following is
a specification.
This invention relates to talking machines
10 and has reference more particularly to ma-
chines of the type employing a cylindrical
sound-record, a reproducer movable across
the same, and a tone-arm pivotally mounted
at one end and having its free end connected
15 to the reproducer.
The object of the invention is to effect
certain improvements in the construction of
machines of this type with respect particu-
larly to the devices for supporting the tone-
20 arm and amplify ing-horn upon the box of
the machine and the tubular connection be-
tween the free end of the tone-arm and the
reproducer.
The invention is illustrated in the accom-
25 panying drawings, in which
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of the
machine, Fig. 2 is a top view of a portion of
the same, Fig. 3 is a sectional detail view
showing the tubular connection between the
30 tone-arm and reproducer, and Fig. 4 is a sec-
tional detail view on line 4 — 4 of Fig. 3.
Referring to these drawings, 1 indicates the
motor-box, having a top 2 and inclosing a
suitable motor which is connected in driving
35 relation to the cylindrical record-support 3
which is mounted in suitable bearings above
the top 2. The shaft of the record-support
3 is extended and has a feed-screw 4 formed
thereon. The reproducer - carriage 5 is
40 mounted to slide axially of the record-sup-
port upon a rod 6 mounted parallel to the
support 3 on one side thereof and a bar 7 on
the opposite side thereof. A lever 8 is piv-
oted upon the carriage 5 and coacts with the
45 bar 7 to support the carriage in operative
position or raise it from that position so that
the stylus of the reproducer is out of engage-
ment with the cylindrical record upon the
support 3, the latter position of the parts be-
50 ing shown in Fig. 1.
The reproducer 9 is mounted in an opening
in the carriage 5 and is of the usual or any
suitable construction. The diaphragm of
the reproducer is vibrated by a stylus carried
by the stylus-lever 10, and a short tubular 55
member 11 extends upwardly from the
chamber back of the diaphragm. The car-
riage of the reproducer is provided at its left
end, as shown in Fig. 2, with an arm which
has a half -nut secured to its end in position 60
to coact with the feed-screw 4 so as to move
the reproducer-carriage across the record.
In order to support the amplifying-horn
and the tone-arm, I provide an arm 12 fur-
nished with a hooked portion 13 at one end 65
thereof, this arm. being adapted to extend
across the top 2 of the motor-box with the
hooked portion 13 extending about one edge
of the top. For coaction with the other edge
of the box, an angular plate 14 is provided, 70
which engages at one edge the under side of
the edge of the box and at the other edge the
plate 12. Screws 15 having knurled heads
extend through openings in the end of arm
12 and in plate 14, and these may be tight- 75
ened up to cause the arm and plate to grip
the edge of the box between them, so that
the arm 12 is firmly secured to the top of the
motor-box. A coupling member 16 is. se-
cured to and rises from the arm 12, and at its 80
upper end has an opening formed therein.
The upper end of the coupling member 16 is
formed to receive the small end of an ampli-
fying-horn 17 and support the same in such
manner as to permit turning the horn upon 85
the coupling member to any desired angular
position. Mounted upon the coupling mem-
ber 16 adjacent to one end of the opening
therethrough, is a vertically disposed pin 18.
The tone-arm 19 has a bracket 20 secured 90
thereto, which carries a cross-head mounted
in the bracket on horizontally disposed piv-
ots. This bracket carries a sleeve 21 which
fits over the pin 18 to hold the tone-arm in
position with one end extending a short dis- 95
tance within the opening in the coupling
member 16, in which position the tone-arm
is in communication with the amplifying-
horn 17 through the opening in the coupling
member 16. This method of supporting the 100
tone-arm permits of turning the same in any
direction by the cross-head turning on its
horizontal pivots or the sleeve 21 turning
upon the pin 18, or both.
At its free end, the tone-arm 19 is con- 105
tracted to form a section 22 of comparatively
small diameter, which section is curved to
form a ninety-degree bend. This end of the
Q
882,785
tone-arm is connected to the reproducer by
metallic parts of tubular form so as to carry
the sound from the reproducer to the tone-
arm with as little obstruction to the sound"
5 waves as possible, and this connection has
suitable joints therein, so that the passage
for the sound waves is preserved although
the carriage of the reproducer is moving in a
straight line and the tone-arm is turning
10 about a pivot. This connection is illus-
trated in Figs. 2, 3 and 4. An angular tubu-
lar member 23 has one end split and formed
of such diameter that it will fit closely over
the tubular extension 11 on the reproducer.
15 A clamping-ring 24 having a clamp-screw 25
is secured upon the end of this member, and
when the end of the member is inserted over
the tubular extension 1 1 the screw 25 may be
tightened to contract the split end of mem-
20 ber 23 and cause it to grip the extension 11.
The other end of the member 23 is connected
to the end of the curved tubular extension 22
of the tone-arm by a tubular, metallic, con-
necting member 26. Each end of member
25 26 is curved to form a portion of a sphere, as
shown in Figs. 2 and 3. These curved ends
fit snugly within the ends of the members 22
and 23 and are secured therein by screws 27
threaded into openings in the parts 22 and
30 23 and extending loosely through openings in
the member 26. These openings in member
26 are preferably short slots so that the mem-
ber 26 can not only turn freely about the axes
of pins 27 but also has small ranges of move-
35 ment on axes perpendicular to the axes of
pins 27, while being held in position by the
pins. By reason of the provision for such
movement of member 26 relative to each
of the parts which it connects on a substan-
40 tially horizontal axis, the reproducer - car-
riage is free to be moved about the rod 6 as
a pivot through the small range made neces-
sary by irregularities in the surface of the
sound-record and for moving into and out of
45 operative position.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new therein and desire to secure
by Letters Patent is as follows : —
1. The combination with a talking ma-
50 chine having a motor-box, a holder for a
cylindrical sound-record mounted above the
top of the box, means for rotating the holder,
and a reproducer slidable in a straight line
across the record, of a coupling member
55 rising from the box, a horn supported there-
by, a tone-arm having one end pivotally
connected to said member, and a flexible,
tubular, connection consisting of metallic
tubjL sections pivotally connected between
60 the free end of said tone-arm and said repro-
ducer, substantially as set forth.
2. The combination with a talking ma-
chine having a motor-box, a holder for a
cylindrical sound-record mounted above the
top of the box, means for rotating the holder, 65
and a reproducer slidable in a straight line
across the record, of a coupling member
having an opening therethrough rising from
said box, a horn mounted thereon, a ver-
tically disj)osed_pJn on said coupling mem- 70
ber,~a tone-arm pivotally mounted on said
pin in communication with said horn through
the opening in the coupling member, and a
flexible, tubular connection consisting of
metallic tube sections pivotally connected 75
between the free" end*of said tone-arm and
said reproducer, substantially as set forth.
3. The combination with a talking ma-
chine having a motor-box, a holder for a
cylindrical sound-record mounted above the 80
top of the box, means for rotating the holder,
and a reproducer slidable in a straight line
across the record, of a coupling member
secured to the box and rising therefrom, a
horn supported thereby, a horizontally dis- 85
posed tone-arm pivotally connected to the
coupling member, a flexible tubular con-
nection consisting of metallic tube-section^
pivotally connected between the free end of
the tone-arm and said reproducer, and means 90
for clamping the end of one of said sections to
said reproducer, substantially as set forth.
4. The combination with a talking ma-
chine having a motor-box, a holder for a
cylindrical sound-record mounted above the 95
top of the box, means for rotating the holder,
and a reproducer slidable across the record,
of a coupling member secured to the box and
rising therefrom, a horn supported thereby,
a tone-arm pivotally connected to the coup- 100
ling member, a metallic tubular member
secured to the reproducer, and a second
metallic tubular member pivotally con-
nected at its endj^to one end of the first-
named tubular member and to the free end 105
of said tone-arm, substantially as set forth.
5. The combination with a talking ma-
chine having a motor-box, a holder for a
cylindrical sound-record mounted above the
top of the box, means for rotating the holder, 110
and a reproducer slidable across the record,
of a coupling member secured to the box and
rising therefrom, a horn supported thereby,
a tone-arm pivotally connected to the coup-
ling member, and a metallic tubular con- 115
nection between, the free end of the tone-arm
and the reproducer, said connection having
two universal joints therein, substantially as
set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed 120
this 30 day of Sept., 1907.
THOMAS KRAEMER.
Witnesses :
H. Meier,
H. MUHLSCHLEGEL.
I
No. 883,135.
PATENTED MAR. 24, 1908.
L. T. HAILE.
GRAMOPHONE.
APPLICATION TILED FEB. 21, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
WITNESSES:
J".eJM»^d,
Imuran
/*
ATTORNEY.
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D, C.
No. 883,135.
PATENTED MAR. 24, 1908.
L. T. HAILE.
GRAMOPHONE.
APPLICATION FILED PEB. 21, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
*%9-2-
J?i&.3.
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY.
TH£ rtORRIS
PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LUTHER T. HAILE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR, BY DIRECT AND MESNE
ASSIGNMENTS, OF ONE-FIFTH TO MAURICE N. WEYL AND WILLIAM A. MACKIE, ONE-FIFTH
TO JOSEPH W. SHANNON, ONE-TWENTIETH TO FREDERICK J. GEIGER, AND ONE-TWEN-
TIETH TO LOGAN W. MULFORD, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
GRAMOPHONE.
No. 883,135.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Patented March 24, 1908.
Original application filed July 6, 1906, Serial No, 324,978. Divided and this application filed February 21, 1907.
Serial No. 358,661.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Luther T. Haile, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
city of Philadelphia, State of Pennsylvania,
5 have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Gramophones, of which the
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip-
tion, reference being had to the accompany-
ing drawings, forming a part of this specifi-
10 cation.
The object of my invention, in devices of
the class of sound-reproducing machines, is
to effect a duplication of the sound-vibra-
tions created by a single stylus or needle, by
15 causing it to act on two diaphragms to vi-
brate them simultaneously and in opposite
directions to each other ; then to receive and
collect the sound-waves created by the pul-
sating diaphragms in independent sound-
20 chambers or boxes operating as diaphragm
holders, and finally to discharge such sound-
waves from both chambers through a single
horn having a plurality of branches leading
respectively to said independent sound-
25 chambers.
To these ends my invention, which is a di-
vision of my former and pending application
Serial No. 324,978 filed July 6, 1906, for Let-
ters Patent, consists in the provision of
30 means to mount a pair of diaphragms face to
face, in spaced relation, to cause them to be
simultaneously vibrated, in opposite direc-
tions, by a single stylus or needle opera-
tively interposed between them; said com-
35 bined elements being so disposed relatively
to each other, that the vibratory swing of the
upper end of the needle-holder caused by the
lateral play of the needle in the sound
grooves of the tablet, will be in a plane par-
40 allel with the plane of the faces of the dia-
phragms and will always be maintained sub-
stantially equidistant between them; in-
dependent holders for each diaphragm, con-
structed and adapted to operate as sound-
45 collecting chambers, means to mechanically
connect and operatively support the dia-
phragm holders in spaced relation to each
other and to the interposed needle, and op-
eratively to the record or tablet actuating
50 the needle; and sound-conveying means con-
sisting of a sound-horn having a plurality of
receiving branches operating to independ-
ently receive the sound-waves collected in
each sound-chamber of the diaphragm hold-
ers and merge and discharge them through 55
the single terminal horn.
In the accompanying drawings illustrat-
, ing my invention, Figure 1 is an alevation,
in perspective, of the exterior of the cabinet
of a talking machine, showing the grooved 60
record-tablet in place thereon, and the opera-
tive relation of my device thereto, and show-
ing my multiple sound - box construction
with forked sound-delivery horn. Fig. 2 is a
front view, in vertical section, of the sound- 65
box device, and Fig. 3 is a detached detail
view of the hollow needle arm, guide-plate
therefor, the stylus and connecting collar be-
tween it and the needle-arm, and means to
tension the flexible connection between nee- 70
die and diaphragm.
In all devices of the class of sound-repro-
ducing machines, involving a vertically-
disposed stylus or needle caused to vibrate
by contact with the sound grooves of a flat 75
tablet, and to impart such vibrations to a
connected or combined diaphragm, the said
elements were so arranged relatively in the
combination that the needle vibrated in a
direction at right angles to the plane of the 80
face of the diaphragm. I change that and
combine the parts in such manner that,
without changing the relation of the needle
element to the flat tablet, when they are
brought, as before, into operative relation, 85
the diaphragms will be supported over the
tablet in a plane transverse to that formerly
occupied and hence the needle vibrations
will be in a plane parallel to the faces of the
diaphragms, and hence the reciprocatory 90
pull and release on the flexible connections
between the diaphragms and the needle will
cause them to vibrate in opposite directions
to each other simultaneously.
I will now describe by reference to the 95
drawings, the best form in which I have em-
bodied my invention, and wherein the fea-
ture of a pair of diaphragms, set face to face
and caused to vibrate in opposite directions
to each other, in combination with the other 100
elements above referred to, is embodied.
Each of the two diaphragm holders 2, 2, is
883,135
constructed preferably in annular form but
with sufficient depth to provide a sound-col-
lecting chamber rearward of the diaphragm
mounted therein. These holders are sup-
5 ported edgewise and in spaced relation, with
their respective diaphragms facing each
other; and the wall or each holder, opposite
its diaphragm, is apertured for the purpose
hereinafter described. The holders 2,2, are
10 joined and spaced by a bar 2a at top and by
the perforated plate 7 at base, said plate
operating as a guide for the vibrating needle-
arm. In the space thus formed between the
diaphragms, and their holders, a single
15 stylus or needle, its needle-arm and usual ad-
junctive parts are operatively supported and
arranged. The connection between the top
of the needle-arm and the two diaphragms,
whereby the vibratory movements of the
20 needle, produced by the tablet or record, is
transmitted to the diaphragms, must be
flexible and non-rigid, and also elastic to the
extent of causing pulsations of the dia-
phragms, in response to the vibratory move-
25 ments of the needle, without altering the nor-
mal direction of such pulsating movements,
that is to say in order that the diaphragm,
caused to pulsate by vibrations imparted to
it, shall have normal pulsating movements
30 unrestrained by the character of the con-
nection employed to effect the pulsations.
For this purpose a silk thread is well adapt-
ed, both for its flexibility or non-rigidity and
for its slight but sufficient elasticity; but
35 some other kind of vibration-transmitting
connection which will effect the functions
stated, may be employed. In using a silk
thread connection, I prefer to use a hollow
needle-arm 4, to which is fastened the needle
40 or stylus 9, by collar and screw 9a; and a
reel 6 may be emplo3^ed to wind the end of
the thread and give such slight tension to it
as may be required. A detail of some im-
portance may be added if desired, namely,
45 the cord connection may be made in two
parts, one part which passes through and
projects above the top of the needle arm 4 is
provided with a small loop through which
the other cord connection freely passes, its
50 ends being secured to the oppositely-dis-
posed diaphragms.
I prefer to arrange in the space between
the diaphragms and their holders, a metallic
bar 12, supported by a screw, from the upper
55 connecting plate 2a. The metallic bar 12 is
perforated to allow the passage through it of
the cord connections between the head of the
needle-arm and the opposite diaphragms,
and serves as a guiding support for such cord
60 connections. The diaphragm holders 2, 2,
have central apertures in the rear wall, as
before stated, which communicate directly
with the separate tubes 10, 10' leading, as
branches, from a single tube or horn 102.
65 Both diaphragms are smiultaneously vi-
brated by the same movements of the sound-
reproducing stylus or needle, producing like
sound waves by like pulsations of the two
diaphragms ; the chambered diaphragm hold-
ers are independent sound-boxes discharg- 70
ing into independent sound-conveying tubes
which however, merge into a single tube,
hence the like sound waves created by the
pair of simultaneously - acting diaphragms
and proceeding from the pair of independent 75
sound-boxes and tubes and merged and dis-
charged from the single horn will be not only
much increased in loudness but the quality
of the tone will be improved.
Having thus described my invention, I so
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent : —
1. In an instrument for reproducing
sound-waves from a disk sound-record, the
combination with a pair of oppositely-facing 85
diaphragm holders operating as a multiple
sound-box, each member containing a dia-
phragm, means to support said holders in
spaced relation, with their respective dia-
phragms facing each other, a single needle- 90
arm operatively supported between said dia-
phragms and mounted to respond to the vi-
bratory movements of the needle, a flexible
connection between the needle-arm and each
diaphragm, means to operatively support 95
the multiple sound-box in such relation to
the disk-record that the vibrations of the
needle-arm will be in a plane parallel with the
faces of the diaphragms, and a single tubular
horn diverging into two branches communi- 100
eating independently with the respective
rearward walls of the multiple sound-box.
2. In an instrument for reproducing
sound-waves from a disk sound-record, the
combination with a pair of oppositely-facing 105
diaphragm holders operating as a multiple
sound-box, each member containing a dia-
phragm, means to support said holders in
spaced relation, with their respective dia-
phragms facing each other, a single hollow 110
needle - arm operatively supported between
said diaphragms, a flexible connection pass-
ing through the interior of said needle-arm
and connecting it with each diaphragm, and
means to adjust the tension on said flexible 115
connection, means to operatively support
the multiple sound-box in such relation to
the disk-record that the vibrations of the
needle-arm will be in a plane parallel with the
faces of the diaphragms, and a single tubu- 120
lar horn diverging into two branches commu-
nicating independently with the respective
rearward walls of the multiple sound-box.
3. In an instrument for reproducing
sound-waves, the combination with a pair of 125
oppositely-disposed diaphragm holders oper-
ating as sound-boxes, each containing a dia-
phragm, means to support said holders in
spaced relation with their respective dia-
pnragms facing each other, a stylus or record 130
883,135
needle and a single needle-arm operatively
supported between said diaphragms and
mounted to respond to the vibratory move-
ments of the needle, connecting means be-
5 tween the needle-arm and each of the dia-
phragms, adapted to permit the diaphragms
to vibrate in opposite directions to each
other and operating to transmit the sound
vibrations of the needle to each diaphragm
10 separately but simultaneously, and a single
tubular horn diverging into two tubular
branches communicating independently with
each of the pair of diaphragm holders.
4. In an instrument for reproducing
15 sound-waves, the combination with a pair of
diaphragms facing each other, a pair of
sound boxes in which said diaphragms are
mounted, bars connecting said sound-boxes
with each other, externally, and operating to
20 support them, in spaced relation; one of said
bars being perforated and operating as a
guide-plate for the vibrating needle-arm; a
stylus or record needle and a single needle-
arm mounted to respond to the sound vi-
brations of the needle and operatively sup- 25
ported in the space between said diaphragms,
means between the single needle arm and
each diaphragm adapted to permit the dia-
phragms to vibrate in opposite directions to
each other and operatmg to transmit the 30
sound vibrations of the needle to each dia-
phragm separately but simultaneously, each
of said sound-boxes having an aperture in its
wall opposite the diaphragm, with means
communicating with said apertures to re- 35
ceive and convey the sound-waves.
In testimony whereof, I have hereunto
affixed my signature this sixteenth day of
February A. D. 1907.
LUTHER T. HAILE.
Witnesses :
Ada M. Biddle,
Jas. C. Wobensmith.
No. 883,190.
PATENTED MAR. 31, 1908.
S. W. GIBBS.
PHONOGRAPH STOP.
APPLIOATIOH FILED AUG. 12, 1907. 2 SHEETB_8HEET x.
JFI&.1-
•3*
,£&
^?!'J1~'~-^-
31 V&>~30
7 NORHIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, O. C.
No. 883,190.
S. W. GIBBS.
PHONOGRAPH STOP.
APPLICATION PILED AUG. 12. 1907
PATENTED MAR. 31, 1908.
2 SHEETS— SHEET 2.
J&Q'S
/£«.
J?i&.3.
'sJwv-esryAxre/
rfa*Gfl4J, s&/tfsOTL*ns1ZA**iZsfu
THE NOKMS PETERS CO.,
WASHINGTON, p. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
SYLVESTER W. GIBBS, OF CANTON, OHIO, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO THE GIBBS MANUFAC-
TURING COMPANY, OF CANTON, OHIO, A CORPORATION OF OHIO.
PHONOGRAPH-STOP.
No. 883,190.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented March 31, 1908.
Application filed August 12, 1907. Serial No. 388,172.
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Sylvester W. Gibbs,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Canton, in the county of Stark and State of
Ohio, have invented a new and useful Phono-
graph-Stop, of which the following is a speci-
fication.
The invention relates to an automatic
mechanism for stopping the motor of a
phonograph when the button arm of the re-
producer has traveled to the end of the in-
dentations on the record cylinder; and the
objects of the improvement are to provide a
simple and inexpensive device for the pur-
pose mentioned, which can be readily ap-
plied to an ordinary phonograph without
special preparation or provision being made
therefor, which can be readily adjusted to
conform to the varying lengths of the record
indentations on various cylinders, which is
sensitive but certain in its operation, and
which is automatically set when the starting
lever has been moved into operative position.
These objects are attained by the construc-
tion, mechanism and arrangement illustrated
in connection with two of the ordinary sizes
or styles of phonographs in common use, in
the accompanying drawings, in which —
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a larger
size type of phonograph in common use,
showing the stop mechanism adapted and
applied thereto; Fig. 2, a detached perspec-
tive view of the long controlling-lever which
is adapted for use on the larger phonograph;
Fig. 3, a detached perspective view of the
actuating-spring ; Fig. 4, a detached per-
spective view of the long controlling-lever
trip -bracket with the trip -lever thereon,
showing the spring and handle separated
from the body of the bracket; Fig. 5, a frag-
mentary sectional view showing the trip-
bracket on the controlling-lever; Fig. 6, a
perspective view of a smaller size type of
phonograph in common use, showing the stop
mechanism adapted and applied thereto;
Fig. 7, a detached perspective view of the
short controlling-lever which is adapted for
use on the smaller phonograph; Fig. 8, a de-
tached perspective view of the alternate
actuating-spring; and Fig. 9, a detached per-
spective view of the short-lever trip-bracket,
showing the trip-lever thereon.
Similar numerals refer to similar parts
throughout the drawing.
Referring to the larger phonograph, illus- 55
trated in Sheet 1 of the drawings, the case 1
for the motor mechanism (not shown) and
the frame 2 for the phonograph mechanism,
the main shaft 3, the cylinder 4, the feed-nut
5, the back-rod 6, the speaker-arm 7, its 60
lift-lever 8, the reproducer 9 and the record-
cylinder 10 mounted on the main cylinder,
are of the well known character and form
employed in phonographs of this type, and
do not constitute any part of the present in- 65
vention. The long controlling-lever 1 1 is piv-
oted at a point intermediate its ends to the
connecting-bracket 12 having the flat foot 13
thereon, by means of which the stop mech-
anism is preferably attached to the phono- 70
graph. This attachment is made by loosen-
ing the screws 14 employed for fastening the
phonograph-frame to the case, then slipping
the foot of the connecting-bracket under the
base-plate 15 of the frame, after which the 75
screws 14 are tightened, thus clamping the
foot 13 of the connecting-bracket between
the base-plate of the frame and the cover 16
of the case and securely and rigidly holding
the stop mechanism in proper position. In 80
this type of phonograph the free end of the
starting-lever 17 protrudes upward through •
the slot 18 in the base-plate of the frame, and
the motor mechanism is adapted to be start-
ed by moving the end of this lever outward, 85
that is toward the adjacent end of the frame,
and to be stopped by moving the end of this
lever inward toward the middle portion of
the frame. The actuating-end 19 of the con-
trolling-lever is located back of the starting- 90
lever and on its forward edge are provided
the recess 20 and the shoulder 21, in which
recess and against which shoulder the start-
ing-lever is adapted to rest and to be held
when in its open or operative position. 95
The actuating-spring 22 is preferably in
the form of a coiled spring with the hook 23
on its outer end adapted to engage the start-
ing-lever and the eye 24 on its inner end by
which it is connected with the controlling- 100
lever, as by means of the rivet 25. The bend
26 is preferably provided near the actuating
end of the controlling-lever to bring the re-
spective parts thereof in the proper plane,
and the actuating-spring is preferably passed 105
through the aperture 27 in this bend. It is
evident that the tension of the actuating
spring is slightly diagonal, so that the ac-
a
883,190
tuating end of the controlling-lever is drawn
forward at the same time the starting-lever
is drawn inward, and the starting-lever is
thus securely held in the angle of the shoul-
5 der in the front edge of the controlling-lever.
The trip-bracket 28 is preferably formed of
a flat plate adapted to rest and slide endwise
on the upper side of the trip end of the con-
trolling-lever, with the ears 29 and 30
IQ formed from the body of the plate and bent
downward over the front and back edges of
the controlling-lever. The flattened or leaf
spring 31 is attached to the bracket, as by
means of the rivet-pin 32 passed through
15 the apertures as 33 in the ears thereof and
through the tubular aperture 34 formed in
the spring, and the handle 35 is preferably
provided on the front end of the rivet-pin.
The leaf -spring 31 is adapted to press against
20 the under side of the stop-lever, so that the
trip -bracket can be readily adjusted by
forcefully sliding it longitudinally along the
lever and is then held in any desired position
by the frictional contact of the spring.
25 The rear portion 36 of the trip-bracket ex-
tends under and to the rear of the elevated
track-bar 37, as the same is formed in this
type of phonograph, along which track bar
the foot 38 of the speaker-arm is adapted to
30 travel. The indicating finger 39 is formed or
attached on the rear end or the trip-bracket,
and extends upward behind the track-bar
and in front of the record-cylinder, and the
:>oint 40 of this finger is adapted to be ad-
35 ]usted.by a proper movement of the trip-
bracket to register with the end of the inden-
tations on the record-cylinder, or to any
other point with reference to which it is de-
shed to stop the motor mechanism.
40 For use in the larger phonograph the trip-
lever 41 is preferably formed of strong, stiff
wire, and is pivoted to the trip-bracket at a
point behind the track-bar, whence it ex-
tends forward and preferably outward to an
45 angle or bend, as at 42, normally directly
under the track-bar, whence it extends di-
rectly forward in the path of the depending
lift-lever 8 of the speaker-arm and is doubled
upward and backward upon itself, as at 43,
50 to the upwardly extending end or shoulder
44 which normally abuts against the forward
face of the track-bar. The trip-lever thus
described is the preferred form when made of
wire, but it is evident that this particular
55 construction is not essential for the per-
formance of its proper functions, so long as
the lever is provided with an arm, as 43, in
the path of the lift-lever and a cam-acting
shoulder, as 44, in abutment with the face of
60 the phonograph frame, which arm and shoul-
der are eccentric to the axis of the pivot of
the lever. And it will be understood that,
for the purposes of this invention, the lift-
arm need not be distinguished from the
65 speaker-arm to which it is pivoted, for they
80
95
both travel together and it is immaterial
whether the trip-lever is in the path of the
one or the other.
In use, when the starting-lever is thrown
toward the end of the phonograph into posi- 70
tion for starting the motor mechanism, the
actuating end of the controlling - lever is
drawn forward by the action of the actuat-
ing-spring, so that the starting lever is en-
gaged in the recess and against the shoulder 75
formed in the front edge of the controlling-
lever, and it is likewise held in this position
while the motor mechanism operates the
phonograph mechanism and the reproducer
is moved from the inner towards the outer
end of the record-cylinder. When the de-
pending lift-lever 8 comes in contact with the
arm 43 of the trip-lever, the same is carried
outward, and in so doing the shoulder 44 of
the trip-lever, being in abutment with the 85
forward face of the track-bar, slides along
the same and becomes a movable fulcrum,
about which fulcrum the trip-lever is rotated
and its pivot is carried or thrown forward.
This forward movement of the pivot of the 90
trip-lever throws the trip-bracket wTith the
trip-end of the controlling-lever forward and
the actuating -end of the controlling -lever
backward, so that the shoulder in the front-
edge thereof is moved laterally out of en-
gagement with the starting-lever, and the ac-
tuating-spring then pulls the starting-lever
inward and stops the motor mechanism.
The parts 01 the stop mechanism are so
proportioned and positioned that by adjust-
ing the point of the indicating-finger to reg-
ister with the outer end of the indentations
on the record-cylinder the motor mechanism
will be stopped when the button-arm (not
shown) of the reproducer has traveled to
the same end of the indentations. It is evi-
dent that when the starting-lever is again
thrown outward to the position for starting
the motor mechanism, the stop mechanism
will be automatically set for another action
as before.
Referring to the smaller phonograph illus-
trated in Sheet 2 of the drawings, the short
controlling-lever lla is pivoted intermediate
its ends to the connecting- bracket 12a hav-
ing the foot 13a, which foot is adapted to be
clamped between the base-plate 15a of the
phonograph-frame and the cover 16a of the
motor mechanism as described above for the
larger phonograph. The actuating-end 19a
of the short controlling-lever is likewise' lo-
cated back of the free end of the starting-
lever 17a of the motor mechanism and is pro-
vided with the recess 20a and the shoulder
21a which are adapted to receive and stop
the starting-lever 17a when the same is
thrown outward to the position for starting
the motor mechanism.
The ordinary actuating-spring 22a is pro- ,
vided with the hook 23a adapted to engage 130
100
105
110
115
120
125
883,190
SL
the starting-lever and with the eye 24a in the
other end adapted to connect with the short
controlling-lever preferably at the bend 26a
therein on the remote side of its pivot-post
5 45. The actuating - spring 22 a preferably
passes back of the pivot-post, so that the
tension of the spring will pull the actuating
end of the controlling-lever slightly forward
when pulling the starting-lever inward. It
10 has been found, however, in practice, that
the starting-levers of the so-called smaller
phonographs are not uniform in size or shape,
so that it is not practicable to use the same
form and length of actuating-spring for all
15 machines of this type; and in order to make
a stop mechanism which can be used univer-
sally on the smaller phonograph it is pre-
ferred to use the alternate actuating-spring
22b which is connected at one end with the
20 starting-lever within the case below its pivot
46, and at the other end to the spring post
47 which is formed or attached on the speed-
adjusting-lever 48 in the motor mechanism
as shown in Fig. 6.
25 When the alternate actuating-spring 22b
is employed, the ordinary actuating-spring
22a can be omitted in the stop mechanism for
the smaller phonographs without affecting
the essential operations of the same; for,
30 when using the short controlling-lever, the
spring between the free end of the starting-
lever and the controlling-lever is not so im-
portant because of the comparatively short
distance between the stop-shoulder 21a of
35 the controlling - lever and the pivot -point
thereof. When the ordinary actuating-
spring is not used, the operator readily sets
the stop mechanism for action, by using the
forefinger of the left hand for moving the ac-
40 tuating end of the controlling-lever forward
at the same time the thumb of the same hand
is used for moving the starting-lever out-
ward.
The track-bar 37a in the smaller phono-
45 graph is formed integral with the base-plate
15a of the phonograph-frame 2a throughout
its length, so that there is no space under-
neath the track-bar through which the trip-
bracket and trip - lever can extend. For
50 this reason these parts must be formed and
located entirely on the forward side of the
track-bar. The body of the trip-bracket 28a,
the ears 29a and 30a, the leaf-spring 31a, the
rivet-pin 32 a and the handle 35a are prefer-
55 ably made the same as or similar to the like
parts of the trip-bracket described for use
with the larger phonograph. The indicat-
ing-finger 39a, however, is formed or at-
tached to the bracket, and extends upward on
60 the forward side of the track-arm, and thence
is bent upward and backward to bring its
point 40a adjacent to the record-cylinder;
and the trip-lever 41 a is pivoted on the ver-
tical-extension 36a of the trip-bracket and is
65 provided with the arm 43a which extends
forward in the path of the foot 3Sa of the
speaker-arm 7a, and also with the rearward
shoulder-forming arm 44a which abuts as a
cam the forward face of the track-bar 37a,
the arm and shoulder of the trip-lever being 70
eccentric to the axis of its pivot.
In use, it is evident that when the foot 38 a
of the speaker-arm 7a of the phonograph
mechanism comes in contact with the trip-
arm 43 a, the same will be carried outward 75
with it, thus rotating the trip-lever on its
pivot, and the trip-shoulder 44a which abuts
the face of the track-bar 37 a acts as a ful-
crum and forces the pivot of the trip-lever
forward, so that the trip-bracket and the 80
trip-end of the short controlling-lever are
thrown forward and the motor mechanism of
the phonograph is thereby stopped in the
same manner as described for the long con-
trolling-lever. 85
It will be understood that in both forms of
the stop mechanism which have been de-
scribed, whenever a new record cylinder is
placed on the cylinder of the phonograph, the
trip-bracket is adjusted longitudinally on the 90
controlling-lever, if necessary, so that the
point of the indicating-finger will register
with the end of the indentations on the rec-
ord-cylinder, which adjustment insures that
the motor mechanism will be promptly and 95
surely stopped when the button-arm of the
reproducer reaches the same point.
What I claim as my invention, and desire
to secure by Letters Patent, is —
1. In a phonograph having a frame with a 100
movable speaker-arm and a motor mechan-
ism with a spring-controlled starting-lever; a
stop-mechanism comprising a controlling-
lever pivotally connected with the frame, a
shoulder on one end of the controlling-lever 105
adapted to hold the starting-lever open, a
bracket on the other end of the controlling-
lever, an indicating-finger on the bracket,
and a trip-lever pivoted on the bracket and
having a trip-arm in the path of the speaker-
arm and a cam-acting shoulder abutting the
frame whereby the movement of the speaker-
arm rotates the controlling-lever to disen-
gage its shoulder from the starting-lever.
2. In a phonograph having a frame with a
movable speaker-arm and a motor-mechan-
ism with a spring-controlled starting-lever; a
stop - mechanism comprising a controlling-
lever pivotally connected with the frame, a
shouk er on the controlling-lever adapted to 120
hold the starting-lever open, a bracket on the
controlling-lever, an indicating-finger on the
bracket, and a trip-lever pivoted on the
bracket and having a trip-arm in the path of
the speaker-arm and a cam-acting shoulder 125
abutting the frame whereby the movement
of the speaker-arm rotates the controlling-
lever to disengage its shoulder from the start-
ing-lever.
3. In a phonograph having a frame with a 130
110
115
883,100
movable speaker-arm and a motor mechan-
ism with a spring-controlled starting-lever ; a
stop - mechanism comprising a controlling-
lever pivotally connected with the frame,
5 means for detachably engaging the control-
ling-lever with the starting-lever in its open
position, a bracket on the controlling-lever,
an indicating-finger on the bracket, and a
trip-lever pivoted on the bracket and having
10 a trip -arm in the path of the speaker-arm
and a cam -acting shoulder abutting the
frame whereby the movement of the speaker-
arm rotates the controlling-lever to disen-
gage the starting-lever.
15 4. In a phonograph having a frame with a
movable speaker-arm and a motor-mechan-
ism with a spring-controlled starting-lever ; a
stop - mechanism comprising a controlling-
lever pivotally connected with the frame,
20 means for detachably engaging the control-
ling lever with the starting-lever in its open
position, a bracket on the controlling-lever, a
trip-lever pivoted on the bracket and having
a trip-arm in the path of the speaker-arm and
25 a cam-acting shoulder abutting the frame
whereby the movement of the speaker-arm
rotates the controlling-lever to disengage the
starting-lever.
5. In a phonograph having a frame with a
30 movable speaker-arm and a motor-mechan-
ism with a starting-lever; a stop-mechanism
comprising a controlling-lever pivotally con-
nected with the frame, a shoulder on the con-
trolling-lever adapted to hold the starting-
35 lever in its open-position, a spring acting to
draw the starting-lever into the angle of the
shoulder, and means on the controlling-lever
in the path of the speaker-arm whereby the
movement of the speaker-arm rotates the
controlling-lever to disengage its shoulder 40
from the starting-lever.
6. In a phonograph stop-mechanism, a
controlling - lever pivotally connected with
the phonograph-frame, a trip-lever pivotally
connected with the controlling - lever and 45
having a trip-arm in the path of the phono-
graph speaker-arm and a cam-acting shoul-
der abutting the phonograph-frame.
7. In a phonograph stop-mechanism, a
controlling-lever, a slidable trip-bracket on 50
the lever and a spring on the bracket in fric-
tional contact with the lever.
8. In a phonograph, a case, a frame at-
tached on the case, and a stop-mechanism
bracket having a foot adapted to be entered 55
and clamped between the case and the frame.
9. In a phonograph, a motor-mechanism
having a starting lever, a controlling-lever
connected with the phonograph, a shoulder
on the controlling-lever, and a spring acting 60
to draw the starting lever into the angle of
the shoulder.
10. In a phonograph stop-mechanism, an
oscillatable controlling-lever connected with
the phonograph-frame, an oscillatable trip- 65
lever connected with the controlling-lever
and having a trip arm in the path of the
phonograph speaker-arm and a cam-acting
shoulder abutting the phonograph-frame.
SYLVESTER W. GIBBS.
Witnesses :
Joseph Frease,
Harry Frease.
No. 883,327.
PATENTED MAR. 31, 1908.
W. H. MILLER.
DIAPHRAGM.
APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 24, 1906.
2 SHEETS— SHEET 1.
-J^zgt.Z
-J?#7
'ey.3
&C
J7m/.
• r«r« ITORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. B. C.
No. 883,327.
PATENTED MAR. 31, 1908.
W. H. MILLER.
DIAPHRAGM.
APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 24, 1906.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
J%&.^
JPcp.6
J%&.?
ft^^K
jr&ao
-JT^
zx
JSZpJ*
J%&lZ?
^
z-
4TA
jt&j^
j?$&.j£
V" »■>"*
x^Lc_^_
^*%>.
.THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WALTER H. MILLER, OF ORANGE. NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT
COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
DIAPHRAGM.
No. 883,327.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented March 31, 1908.
Application filed September 24, 1906. Serial No. 335,878.
To all whom, it may concern:
Be it known that I, Walter H. Miller, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Orange, in the county of Essex and State of
5 New Jersey, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Diaphragms, of
which the following is a description.
My invention relates to diaphragms and
more particularly to phonographic dia-
10 phragms such as those used in recorders and
reproducers.
The object of my invention is the produc-
tion of a diaphragm which will produce im-
proved results especially in the reproduc-
15 tion of sound, such as greater loudness and
purer quality.
Reference is hereby made to the accom-
panying drawings of wbich
Figure 1 is a plan view of the preferred
20 form of diaphragm; Fig. 2 is a 'vertical sec-
tion of a phonograph reproducer containing
the diaphragm of Fig. 1 ; Fig. 3 is an enlarged
sectional view illustrating the flexure of the
diaphragm under the influence of the repro-
25 ducer stylus, the amount of flexure being
greatly exaggerated ; Figs. 4 and 5 are respec-
tively a plan and section of a modification
of my invention; Figs. 6 and 7, 8 and 9, 10
and 11, 12 and 13, and 14 and 15 are similar
30 views of other modifications.
The same numerals of reference are used
to designate corresponding parts in the sev-
eral views.
In using all forms of diaphragms shown I
35 propose to connect the reproducer stylus
with the geometrical center of the diaphragm.
The diaphragms are, however, unsymmet-
rical as regards their rigidity or resistance
to flexure, the resistance being greater on
m f m DO
40 one side of a median line than on the other;
that is, the diaphragm is stiffer on one side
of said line than on the other. The effect of
such construction is that the stress applied
by the stylus to the center of the diaphragm
45 produces the greatest amplitude of vibra-
tion at a point at one side of said center, in-
stead of at the center as in symmetrical dia-
phragms. The point at which the greatest
amplitude of vibration occurs I term the
50 acoustical center of the diaphragm.
The unequal rigidity, stiffness or resist-
ance to flexure referred to may be produced
in a variety of ways, as for instance by add-
ing additional material to the diaphragm, or
55 by denting or stamping the material of the
diaphragm as illustrated in the drawing.
The latter is considered preferable as it does
not increase the weight of the diaphragm.
The material used may be sheet metal such
as aluminium, steel, copper, etc. or fiber 60
treated in such a manner as to prevent at-
tack by moisture, and in fact a great variety
of materials may be used.
Referring now more particularly to the
diaphragm of Figs. 1 to 3, the same consists 65
of a circular plate 1, stamped with two
grooves or elevations 2 and 3. The groove 2
which is nearest the center is in the shape of
a circle with a lateral extension 4. The
point of this extension appears to act as a 70
hinge or pivot for that part of the diaphragm
which falls within the outline of the eleva-
tion 2 when stress is applied to the geomet-
rical center of the diaphragm, thus produc-
ing an amplified movement of certain parts 75
of the diaphragm which are diametrically
opposite the extension 4 as indicated in Fig.
3 wherein the point of greatest amplitude or
acoustical center is located at about the
point a. It should be understood that the 80
depth of the grooves 2 and 3 is greatly exag-
gerated in the drawing. These grooves may
be of the width shown but are ordinarily
quite shallow, as for example in a diaphragm
whose diameter is one and five sixteenths 85
inches the groove may be about three one-
hundredths of an inch in depth. The groove
3 is in the form of an incomplete circle the
break in the circle being adjacent the lateral
extension 4. This groove or rib prevents 90
any buckling of the diaphragm. Its ends
should not approach too near the inner rib 2
in order that the diaphragm may not be
weakened; that is, there should be substan-
tially the same amount of material between 95
the ends of the rib 3 and the extension 4 as
between the rib 3 and the circular portion of
the rib 2.
The diaphragm of Figs. 4 and 5 is similar
to that of Fig. 1 except that the rib 3 is dis- 100
pensed with.
The diaphragm of Figs. 6 and 7 is the same
as that of Figs. 4 and 5 except a slight differ-
ence in the shape of the rib 2' and lateral ex-
tension 4'. 105
In the diaphragm of Figs. 8 and 9 the stiff-
ened portion is in the form of a circle 5 hav-
ing a lateral extension 6. In this form the
outline of the stiffened portion is the same
as that of Fig. 4, but the whole body of 110
883,32?
material is struck up instead of merely a
groove.
The diaphragm of Figs. 10 and 11 has a
struck up portion 5' with a lateral exten-
5 sion 6'.
The diaphragm of Figs. 12 and 13 is simi-
lar to that of Figs. 6 and 7 except in the
shape of the extension 42 which projects from
the circular rib 22.
10 The diaphragm of Figs. 14 and 15 is a flat
plate whose section is the form of a wedge as
shown, the thickness gradually increasing
from the right hand side or edge of the dia-
phragm toward the left.
15 Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent is as follows:
1 . A diaphragm having a perforation at its
geometrical center and having an acoustical
20 center at a substantial distance therefrom,
substantially as set forth.
2. In a device of the class described, the
combination with a circular diaphragm
whose acoustical center is at a substantial
25 distance from its geometrical center, of a sty-
lus connected to said diaphragm at its geo-
metrical center, substantially as set forth.
3. In a device of the class described, the
combination with a stylus, of a diaphragm
30 stiffened in such a way that stress applied
to its center by said stylus produces the
greatest amplitude of vibration at a point at
a substantial distance from said center, sub-
stantially as set forth.
35 4. A circular diaphragm provided with a
perforation at its center and stiffened in such
a way that stress applied to its central por-
tion produces the greatest amplitude of vi-
bration at a substantial distance from said
40 central portion, substantially as set forth.
5. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a diaphragm having stiffen-
ing means applied to its central portion and
extending farther from the center of the
45 diaphragm in one direction than in the op-
posite direction and so shaped as to produce
its greatest stiffening effect along a line pass-
ing through said center, and a reproducer
stylus connected to said diaphragm at its
center, substantially as set forth. 50
6. In a device of the class described, the
combination of a diaphragm which has
greater stiffness or resistance to flexure on
one side of a median line than on the other,
and a reproducer stylus connected to the 55
center of said diaphragm, substantially as
set forth.
7. A diaphragm having a central stiffened
portion whose outline is a circle with a lateral
extension, substantially as set forth. 60
8. A diaphragm having a central stiffened
portion in the shape of a circular groove or
rib with a lateral extension, substantially as
set forth.
9. A diaphragm having a central stiff ened 65
portion whose outline is a circle with a lateral
extension, and an incompletely circular stiff-
ened portion surrounding the same, substan-
tially as set forth.
10. A diaphragm having a central stiff- 70
ened portion whose outline is a circle with a
lateral extension, and an incompletely circu-
lar stiffened portion surrounding the same,
the break in said circle being adjacent said
lateral extension, substantially as set forth. 75
11. A diaphragm having a central stiff-
ened portion in the shape of a circular groove
or rib with a lateral extension, and an in-
completely circular groove or rib surround-
ing the same, substantially as set forth. 80
12. A diaphragm having a central stiff-
ened portion in the shape of a circular groove
or rib with a lateral extension, and an in-
completely circular groove or rib surrounding
the same, the break in said circle being ad- 85
jacent said lateral extension, substantially as
set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 22nd day of September 1906.
WALTER H. MILLER.
Witnesses :
Frank L. Dyer,
Delos Holden
No. 883,970. PATENTED APR. 7, 1908.
J. ROEVER.
REGISTERING MECHANISM FOR MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION PILED MAT 29, 1907.
tyoj.1.
S6Q
A- &> iO
inventor:
ATTORNEY.
TWr NORMS PETEtiS CO., WASHJNOTON, D. C.
I
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JULIUS ROEVER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO NATIONAL PATENT COMPANY, OF NEW
YORK, N. Y., A CORPORATION OF NEW YORK.
REGISTERING MECHANISM FOR MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPHS.
No. 883,970.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented April 7, 1908.
Application filed May 29, 1907. Serial No. 376,267.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Julius Roever, of the
city of New York, county of Kings, and State
of New York, have invented a new and useful
5 Improvement in Registering Mechanism for
Multiple Phonographs, of which the following
is a full, clear, and exact description.
My invention relates to improvements in
registering devices and attachments for use
10 in connection with multiple phonographs,
and especially with machines of this class
which are operated by mechanism controlled
by coins. In machines of this class it is de-
sirable, and in fact necessary, that an accu-
15 rate register be made of all coins dropped into
the machine to start the mechanism and play
a record. In machines of this kind, a series
of records are used, and a reproducer, gener-
ally on some kind of carriage, is made to trav-
20 erse the length of a record and then move
back into position to traverse another record.
The object of my invention is to apply a
registering device which shall be operated in
connection with the sliding of the repro-
25 ducer, so that the sliding of the reproducer in
one direction will operate the register. In
this way there can be no cheating the regis-
ter, and the result is more certain than it
would be if the register were applied to some
30 other parts of the machine, and moreover,
the arrangement, as will be noticed by the
description to follow, makes it a very simple
matter to connect up and apply the register.
With these ends in view, my invention con-
35 sists of certain features of construction and
combinations of parts which will be herein-
after described and claimed.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawing forming a part of this specifica-
40 tion, in which similar reference characters in-
dicate corresponding parts in all the views.
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a part of a
machine showing my improvements, and Fig.
2 is a cross sectional elevation of the struc-
45 ture shown in Fig. 1.
In the drawings I have shown merely
enough of the machine to show the applica-
tion of the register and the means for operat-
ing it. The register is used generally in con-
50 nection with a horizontal frame 10, which is
supported on a post 11, or equivalent sup-
port, and extends over the top of a record
wheel 12, in which the records 13 are carried.
A reproducer carriage 14 slides back and
55 forth on the frame 10, so that the reproducer
65
15 may be operated from one of the records,
which connects with the reproducer by a
stylus, as usual. The carriage 14 is operated
as shown by a screw 16, which connects with
a blade 17 carried by the support 18 on the g0
carriage 14, but so far as my invention is con-
cerned it is immaterial how the carriage 14
is operated so long as it or its equivalent
slides back and forth with relation to a
record 13.
The register proper 19 may be of any ap-
proved type, and I have shown a common
form of register which is carried on an arm
20, and this is bent to form a base portion 21
which is secured to the frame. The register 70
is of the kind in which the mechanism is
worked by the oscillating of its shaft 22, and
I have shown this shaft provided with a
flexible crank or arm comprising the part 23,
which is secured to the shaft 22 by a binding 75
screw 24 and the flexible or spring extension
25, which extends downward from the part
23, so as to strike the abutment 26 or 26a as
the case may be. These abutments are
spaced apart directly in the path of the arm go
25, which as will be seen, moves with the re-
producer and its carriage, and the distance
between the abutments is such that when
the reproducer has traversed a record and is
brought to the end of its stroke, the arm 25 85
strikes the abutment 26 and sets the register,
and when the reproducer moves back to go
over another record, the arm strikes the abut-
ment 26a, and the shaft 22 is turned so as to
register one coin. Obviously, the arrange- 90
ment can be reversed, that is, the register
can be operated by contact of the arm with
the abutment 26, instead of with the abut-
ment 26a, and it is equally obvious that the
particular construction of the arm 25 and its 95
connections, can be departed from without
affecting the principle of the invention, which
lies in having the operating arm of the regis-
ter carried with the reproducer so that every
complete stroke of the reproducer is sure to 100
be recorded. The arm 25 should, however,
be flexible, so as to avoid any undue strain on
the register.
Having thus fully described my invention,
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters 105
Patent : —
1. In a machine of the kind described hav-
ing a reproducer arranged to move opposite
a record, the combination with such repro-
ducer of a register movable back and forth no
Q
883,970
10
15
with the reproducer, abutments spaced apart,
and a contact arm connected with the regis-
ter to operate it and arranged to strike it.
2. In a machine of the kind described hav-
ing a reciprocating reproducer, the combina-
tion with such reproducer, of a contact arm
moving with the reproducer, abutments ar-
ranged in the path of the arm to operate it,
and a register operatively connected with
the contact arm.
3. In a machine of the kind described hav-
ing a reciprocating reproducer, the combina-
tion with such reproducer of the register hav-
ing a fixed relation thereto and sliding there-
with, a flexible contact arm to operate the
reproducer, and abutments spaced apart to
engage the contact arm near the ends of the
reproducer stroke.
4. In a machine of the kind described hav-
ing a reciprocating reproducer and carriage, 20
the combination with the carriage of a regis-
ter carried thereby, a contact arm connected
with the register, and fixed abutments spaced
apart so as to engage the contact arm near
the ends of the carriage movement.
JULIUS ROEVER.
Witnesses :
H. A. Wilson,
W. B. Hutchinson.
No. 883,971.
PATENTED APR. 7, 1908.
J. ROEVER.
MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED MAT 29, 1907.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
H Til
WITNESSES:
%J>t~tetk
Q INVENTOR.
ATTORNEY.
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
No. 883,971.
PATENTED APR. 7, 1908.
J. ROEVER.
MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED MAT 29, 1907.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
WITNESSES-.
>
"^J^mk^
<-'inventor.
attorney.
THE NOKRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
No. 883,971.
PATENTED APR. 7, 1908.
J. ROEVER.
MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED MAT 29, 1907.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
INVENTOR.
ATTORNEY.
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
10
15
20
25
30
35
JULIUS ROEVER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO NATIONAL PATENT COMPANY, OF NEW
YORK, N. Y., A CORPORATION OF NEW YORK.
MULTIPLE PHONOGRAPH-MACHINE.
No. 883,971.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented April 7, 1908.
Application filed May 29, 1907. Serial No. 376,270.
50
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Julius Roever, of the
city of New York, county of Kings, and State
of New York, have invented a new and use-
ful Improvement in Multiple Phonograph-
Machines, of which the following is a full,
clear, and exact description.
My invention relates to improvements in
multiple phonographs, and especially to ma-
chines or this class which nave different
trade names, but in which a wheel, carrying
peripherally a quantity of cylindrical rec-
ords, is actuated so as to bring the several
records beneath the stylus of the reproducer,
and in which mechanism is used for carrying
the reproducer along in a direction parallel
with the record which is being played upon.
My invention relates more especially to ma-
chines of this class in which the reproducer
has a constant relation to the record, but the
stylus is lifted out of engagement with the
record or dropped to engagement, as required.
Heretofore m machines of this character
there has been considerable complexity in
the mechanism for actuating the machine for
moving the reproducer along in a direction
parallel with the record, and especially in
the means for lifting the stylus out of engage-
ment with the record and dropping it back to
place. In some cases spring frames of vari-
ous kinds have been used to hold the driving
mechanism in proper relation with the record
to be driven, and a complicated system of
levers has been used to lift and drop the
stylus.
This particular invention is especially in-
tended to overcome some of the difficulties
above named, and produce a simple mechan-
ical mechanism for driving the record, for per-
40 mitting the driving mechanism to be placed
in and out of engagement with the record to
be driven, and for actuating the stylus, that
is to raise and lower it as desired .
My invention also provides for automatic-
45 ally disengaging the driving mechanism of a
record at the same time the stylus is lifted. I
also provide a simple means for dropping the
stylus at the exact point required in any rec-
ord, so that when it is dropped the playing
begins immediately and after the record is
started sufficiently to make the pitch and
time correct.
With these ends in view my invention con-
sists of certain improvements in multiple
55 phonograph construction, which will be here-
inafter described and the novel features
claimed . ,
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawings forming a part of this speci-
fication, in which similar reference characters
indicate corresponding parts in all the views.
Figure 1 is a plan view of the structure em-
bodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a cross sec-
tion on the line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1, and showing
also a segment of the record wheel with a
series of records thereon. Fig. 3 is a longi-
tudinal section partly in elevation of my im-
proved structure, showing a part of the rec-
ord wheel, and in proper relation thereto,
and with the driving mechanism out of en-
gagement with the record to be driven. Fig.
4 is a similar view to Fig. 3, but with the
driving parts in engagement, and Fig. 5 is a
cross section on the line 5 — 5 of Fig. 4.
In the drawings I have shown my inven-
tion supported on a post 10, winch carries a
horizontal frame extending above the top of
the record wheel, to be presently referred to,
said frame comprising the cross bars 11, the
vertical arms 12, and the tie rods 13, which
extend longitudinally, and one of which is
preferably squared as shown at 13a, to pro-
vide for conveniently attaching certain parts
to be hereinafter described. This frame ex-
tends horizontally over the top of the record
wheel 14, which, so far as this particular in-
vention is concerned, can be of any approved
character, and which carries a peripheral
series of individually rotatable records 15 of
the usual kind, these having disks 16 at-
tached, by which they can be numbered and
identified. My invention relates, however,
wholly to the matter carried by the frame
above referred to and described below. This
frame carries driving mechanism which en-
gages a disk 17 on the spindle of each record
15, as the latter is brought to place, and as
shown the disk 17 is driven by the friction
wheel 18, which is carried by a flexible shaft
comprising the sections 19, 20 and 21. The
rigid section 19 has a socket in one end to re-
ceive the spiral section 20, which couples
onto the section 21, and this is mounted in
suitable bearings 22 in two of the cross-bars
1 1 . The flexible driving shaft just described
is driven by a pulley 23, or equivalent driv-
ing means, and the pulley can connect with
any suitable motor or source of power. It
will be observed that to disengage the driv-
ing mechanism it is simply necessary to lift
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
]10
883,971
the friction wheel 18 from the disk 17, and in
this way I obviate the necessity of using
spring frames and other structures such as
have been heretofore used.
5 To provide for lifting the free end of the
flexible shaft, the section 19 extends through
the free end of the swinging arm 24 and this
is pivoted as shown at 25 on the rigid arm 26
of the horizontal frame above referred to.
10 To provide for the necessary freedom of
movement, the hole through the arm 24 is
rather large, and the shaft 19 is centered and
journaled between the anti-friction rollers 27
which are pivoted in the arm 24. The frame
15 carries a reproducer carriage 28, which has a
movement longitudinal of the frame and par-
allel with the several records 15, and the car-
riage can be mounted in any convenient way.
As shown it has ears 29 sliding on a guide rod
20 30, and an ear 31 on the under side sliding on
a guide rod 32, as shown clearly in Fig. 2.
The carriage supports a reproducer 33, which
can be of any approved kind, having the
usual top part 34 to connect with a horn.
25 The reproducer is stationary with relation to
the carriage 28, and it supports a tilting lever
35, which has a stylus 36 to connect with the
record, and which is carried b}7 a plate 43, to
be presently referred to. The carriage 28 is
30 moved backward and forward from a screw
37, which has the regulation thread to move
the carriage forward, and a coarse cross
thread 38 to effect a quick return of the car-
riage. This arrangement is not claimed as
35 new. The screw connects with the driving
shaft by gears 37a and 37b, and the thread of
the screw engages a blade 39, the shank of
which is held in the support 40, which is se-
cured to a post 41 on the carriage 28, and as
40 the blade follows the thread of the screw the
carriage is moved forward or backward, as
the case may be. When the blade reaches
the end of the screw it is guided into engage-
ment with the necessary thread by the cam
45 mechanism 42, and this is not here claimed.
The reproducer stylus is carried by a drop
lever or plate 43, which is pivoted to the car-
riage 28 at one end as shown at 44 in Fig. 2,
and at its free end the plate has an upwardly
50 extending flange 45, to which is secured an
arm 46, which rides on the thin upper edge
of the plate 47, by which the rise and fall of
the plate 43 is regulated. Obviously the
plate 43 can be given any desired configura-
55 tion, so long as its free end has an engage-
ment with the plate 47. The plate 47 has a
vertical movement on the squared part 13 a
of the frame, and to provide for this vertical
movement the plate has slots 48 which re-
60 ceive screws 49, and these enter the part 13 a
just referred to. The plate 47 is narrower at
the middle than at the ends, as shown at 50
in Figs. 3 and 4, and to provide for raising
and lowering the plate it has cams 51 near
65 the ends, which engage the rollers 52 on the
arms 53, and these extend downward frorri
the top plate 54, which slides longitudinally
on the part 13 a. The movement of the top
plate is limited' by screws 56 which extend
through slots 55 in the top plate as shown in yy
Fig. 1. On the top plate, preferably near
the ends, are posts 57 which receive the abut-
ment rods 58, which have upturned ends 59
to engage the striking arm hereinafter re-
ferred to, and the rods 58 can be adjusted 75
and are held in place by the binding screws
60. The bent ends 59 of the rods 58 are
struck by the striking arm 61, which is car-
ried by the post 62 on the carriage 28. It
will be seen that by this action the plate 54 so
is in one instance moved to the right, in
which case the rollers 52 striking the cam 51,
lift the plate 47, and the free end of the plate
43, so as to bring the stylus 36 out of engage-
ment with the record. This occurs when a 85
record has been traversed and a tune has
been played. When, however, the carriage
28 reaches the end of its return stroke, the
arm 61 strikes the opposite or left hand rod
58, the plate 54 moves in the opposite direc- 90
tion, and the plate 47 and the plate 43 are
dropped so as to bring the stylus into en-
gagement with a record. It is desirable to
have the driving mechanism of the record
disengaged at the same time that the stylus 95
is raised from the record, and to this end a
cam 63 in the shape of a bent rod, is secured
to the post 64 by means of the binding screw
65, the said post being on the raised end 54 a
of the plate 54. This bent rod 63 is ar- 100
ranged to extend underneath the arm 24, and
so just as the stylus is lifted, in the manner
already described, the arm 24 is also raised,
and the friction wheel 28 lifted out of en-
gagement with the disk 17. 105
In order that the stylus may drop in the
right place and engage the record after the
latter has started, and also in such a way
that the stylus will not drag along the record,
I use a gage which as shown is in the form of 110
a U shaped clip 66, which is fastened to the
outer side of the part 13 a of the frame by
screws 67, and the clip extends beneath the
part 13 a and then upward parallel with the
plate 47. The inner side of the clip is in- 115
clined as at 68, and when the plate 47 drops
so as to drop the stylus into engagement with
a record, the arm 46 strikes the inclined part
68, and is thereby guided so as to push the
carriage 28 slightly and bring the stylus into 120
the correct place. The gage 66 is longitu-
dinally adjustable in order that the above re-
sult may be best attained, and an easy means
of adjustment is shown in Fig. 3 in dotted
lines, in which the gage has a longitudinal 125
slot 69 to receive the screws 67. Obviously
the gage can be differently made, and the es-
sential thing is simply to have the inclined
surface engage the part 46 and regulate the
dropping position or the stylus 36. 130
883,971
From the foregoing description it will be
seen that I have shown a very practical and
simple means of accomplishing the results at
first referred to, that is to say, the dropping
5 of the plate 47 permits the friction wheel 18
to engage the part 17, and as soon as the disk
is started well, the stylus is dropped into en-
gagement with the record 15. It will also be
noticed that I have good means of lifting and
10 dropping the stylus, and that when the
record has been traversed, the driving parts
are automatically disengaged.
Having thus fully described my invention,
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
15 ters Patent: —
1 . In a machine of the kind described, the
combination with the record wheel and the
records thereon, of a flexible shaft connected
with a source of power and having an opera-
20 tive connection with each record, and means
for breaking the driving connection between
the shaft and the record by flexing the said
flexible shaft.
2. A machine of the kind described, hav-
25 ing a record wheel carrying a series of rec-
ords, a reproducer arranged to travel oppo-
site a record, a flexible driving shaft having
an operative connection with the records,
and automatic means for moving the shaft
30 and breaking the driving connection by the
movement of the reproducer.
3. The combination with the record wheel
and the records thereon, of a flexible driving
shaft operatively connected with the records
35 to drive them, a reproducer arranged to
travel opposite a record, and a cam mechan-
ism actuated by the movement of the repro-
ducer to move the flexible shaft and break
the driving connection.
40 4. The combination with the record wheel
and the records thereon, of a flexible driving
shaft operatively connected with the records,
a movable arm supporting the free end of the
shaft, a reproducer moving opposite the rec-
45 ord, and means actuated by the movement
of the reproducer to move the aforesaid arm
and shaft, thereby breaking the driving con-
nection.
5. The combination with the record wheel
50 and the records thereon, of the flexible driv-
ing shaft operatively connected with the rec-
ords to drive them, a swinging arm support-
ing the free end of the said shaft, a cam mech-
anism to engage and lift the arm, a repro-
55 ducer movable along a record, and means for
operating the cam mechanism by the move-
ment of the reproducer.
6. A machine of the kind described, com-
prising means for supporting a series of rec-
60 ords and a driving disk for each record, a
flexible shaft having an operative connection
with the driving disk, a reproducer movable
opposite a record and having a stylus mov-
able in and out with relation to the record,
65 means for lifting the stylus after it traverses
a record, and means acting in conjunction
with the stylus lifting mechanism to disen-
gage the driving shaft from a record disk.
7. A machine of the kind described, com-
prising a series of records, driving mechan- 70
ism supported opposite the records and
adapted to operatively connect with each
record, a reproducer having a movable sty- '
lus, said reproducer moving opposite a rec-
ord, and means actuated by the movement 75
of the reproducer to engage and disengage
the stylus with the record and at the same
time engage or disengage the driving connec-
tion with the record.
8. A machine of the kind described, com- 80
prising means for carrying a series of records
opposite a supporting frame, driving means
on the frame to engage each record, a repro-
ducer held to slide on the frame, said repro-
ducer having a stylus movable in and out 85
with relation to the record, a plate movable
in and out with relation to the record, said
plate being arranged to lift or drop the sty-
lus, and means for moving the plate by the
movement of the reproducer carriage, said 90
means serving also to control the driving con-
nection with the record.
9. The combination with the movable, se-
ries of records, of the reproducer movable op-
posite each record and having a stylus mov- 95
able in and out with relation to the record, a
slide plate arranged to support the stylus,
and cam mechanism operated by the move-
ment of the reproducer to move the slide
plate in and out. 100
10. The combination with the records ar-
ranged in series, of a reproducer carriage held
to slide opposite the record, a reproducer on
the carriage having a movable stylus to en-
gage the record, a slide plate movable in and 105
out with relation to the record, abutments
struck by the movement of the carriage near
the ends of its stroke, and operative con-
nections between the abutments and the
slide plate. no
11. The combination with the records ar-
ranged in series, each being independently
driven, of a flexible driving shaft adapted to
drive each record, a reproducer movable op-
posite a record and having a stylus movable 115
with relation to the record, abutments actu-
ated by the movement of the reproducer
near the ends of its stroke, means operated
by the abutments to move the stylus in and
out, and means also operated from the abut- 120
ments for moving the flexible shaft and
breaking the driving connection with a
record.
12. The combination with a record and
the carriage sliding opposite the record, of a 125
reproducer on the carriage, said reproducer
having a stylus movable in relation to the
record, a slide plate movable in and out with
relation to the record, said slide plate having
cam surfaces, movable abutments operated 130
883,9^1
by the carriage near the ends of its stroke^
and an operative connection between the
movable abutments and the cam surfaces for
actuating the slide plate.
5: 13. The combination with a record and
its driving disk, of the flexible driving shaft
having a driving connection between itself
and the disk, a reproducer carriage movable
opposite the record, a reproducer on the car-
lo nage, said reproducer having a stylus mov-
able with relation to the record, a plate slid-
able parallel with the movement or the car-
riage; means for moving the slidable plate
near the ends of the carriage stroke-, means
actuated by the movement of the slidable
plate for engaging or disengaging the stylus
with its record, and means also-actuated by
the slidable plate to disengage the driving
shaft from its disk.
JULIUS ROEVER.
Witnesses-:
H. A. Wilson,
W. B. Hutchinson.
15
.'
No. 884,062.
PATENTED APR. 7, 1908.
H. BALDWIN.
PHONOGRAPH REPRODUCER.
APPLICATION PILED DEO. 6, 1807-
J%?.£
-%9J
J&4.
r
£
/O
7
unoenJtbr.'
10
15
20
25
30
35
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HIRAM BALDWIN, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
PHONOGRAPH-REPRODUCER.
No. 884,062.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented April 7, 1908.
Application filed December 6, 1907. Serial No. 405.312.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Hiram Baldwin, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi-
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi-
nois, have invented a new and useful Im-
provement in Phonograph-Reproducers, of
which the following is a specification.
The object of my invention is to provide a
novel needle or stylus as the sound-repro-
ducer of a phonograph or analogous instru-
ment, which shall possess, as attributes, tone-
improving qualities in the way of softness and
freedom from noise from its contact with the
record, and good sound-conductivity.
I have discovered that ivory is a substance
affording in a high degree these attributes in
the needle or stylus of a phonograph ; and my
invention, based on this discovery, consists
in a reproducer-needle composed, as to its
entirety or at least as to its attenuated por-
tion, of ivory.
In the accompanying drawing, Figure 1 is
a broken view showing a reproducer-head
equipped with my improved needle applied
to the ordinary disk-record of a phonograph ;
and Figs. 2, 3 and 4 are perspective views
representing three of the various forms in
which my improved needle may be provided.
The numeral 5 represents a reproducer-
head of ordinary construction, involving a
holder 6 for adjustably supporting a stylus 7
in operative position relative to a rotary
disk-record 8. The stylus or needle consists
of a stem-portion 9 and an attenuated por-
tion 10 formed, preferably in its entirety, of
ivory, in suitable shape, including the shapes
represented; though it is within my inven-
tion to form only the attenuated portion of
ivory. Furthermore I find it to be advan-
tageous, as enhancing the attributes here- 40
inbefore specified, to artificially harden the
ivory of the stylus, particularly as to its at-
tenuated portion, and this I have done by
immersing it, for a brief period — say of an
hour, more or less — in a saturated solution of 45
chromic acid, though chromate of potash
will serve the purpose, and thereupon drying
the ivory.
What I claim as new and desire to secure
by Letters Patent is : 50
1. The combination in a phonograph, with
a reproducer-head, of a needle having its at-
tenuated record-engaging portion composed
of ivorj7.
2. The combination in a phonograph, with 55
a reproducer-head, of a needle having its at-
tenuated record-engaging portion composed
of artificially-hardened ivory.
3. The combination -in a phonograph, with
a reproducer-head, of a needle consisting of a 60
stem-portion at which it is supported on said
head, and an attenuated record-engaging
portion, said needle being composed in its
entirety of ivory.
4. The combination in a phonograph, with 65
a reproducer-head, of a needle consisting of a
stem-portion at which it is supported on said
head, and an attenuated record-engaging
portion, said needle being composed in its
entirety of artificially-hardened ivory.
HIRAM BALDWIN.
In presence of:
W. T. Jones,
Ralph Schaefer.
No. 884,216.
H. SCHRODER.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 2, 1907.
PATENTED APR. 7, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
dnve-ntoz
^IVi hi eases
§6t
Mem
■c>£**v—
THE NQRFIIS PETERS CO., WASHtNOTON. D. C.
No. 884,216.
H. SCHRODER
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED MAR. 2, 1907
PATENTED APR. 7, 1908.
2 SHEETS— SHEET 2.
-&s
&&
^^^^
--</'
^
7-7- 77 ^-' ye
77^
Stvuento*
<5#it»i esses
THE HOKRtS PETEKS CO.. WAS
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HERMANN SCHRODER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 884,216.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented April 7, 1908.
Application filed March 2, 190Y, Serial No. 360,158.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Hermann Schroder,
subject of the German Emperor, residing at
New York, in the county of New York and
5 State of New York, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Phono-
graphs, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
This invention contemplates certain new
10 and useful improvements in phonographs of
that type that employ a record cylinder, and
the invention has for its primary object an
improved construction or actuating means
whereby the needles or stylus is held rela-
15 tively stationary, while the record cylinder
is revolved underneath the same and fed lon-
gitudinally.
With this and other objects in view as will
more fully appear as the description pro-
20 ceeds, the invention consists in certain con-
structions, arrangements and combinations
of parts which I shall hereinafter specifically
describe and then point out the novel fea-
tures in the appended claims.
25 For a full understanding of the invention
and the merits thereof and also to acquire a
knowledge of the details of construction of
the means for effecting the result, reference
is to be had to the following description and
30 accompanying drawings, in which:
Figure 1 is a perspective view of my im-
proved phonograph; Fig. 2 is a top plan
view thereof; Fig. 3 is a transverse sectional
view with parts in side elevation; Fig. 4 is a
35 detail sectional view on the line 4 — 4 of Fig.
3; and, Fig. 5 is a detail perspective view
illustrating a portion of the feed screw and
the carriage mounted thereon.
Corresponding and like parts are referred
40 to in the following description and indicated
in all the views of the drawings by the same
reference characters.
Referring to the drawings, the numeral 1
designates the case or cabinet of my im-
45 proved phonograph, 2 a stand or plate sup-
port, which may be secured to the top of the
case 1 in any desired manner and which is
designed to support parts of the mechanism
hereinafter described, and 3 designates the
50 motor case within which may be placed an
electric, spring, or any other desired type of
motor.
The motor shaft is intended to carry a
sprocket wheel 4 that is connected by means
55 of the chain 5 with the sprocket wheel 6 on
the outer end of the shaft or spindle 7. This
shaft 7 is journaled at one end in a pair of
standards 8 extending upwardly from the
base or support 2, and the shaft is provided
with a longitudinal slot or groove 9. Within 60
this groove fit one or more feathers 10
formed on the preferably tapering holder 1 1
for the record cylinder. By this means, the
said holder may slide longitudinally on the
shaft 7. 65
The shaft or spindle 7 carries at one end a
spur pinion 12 which meshes with a similar
pmion 13 on the end of a feed screw 14. The
said screw is journaled in bearings on the
upright standards 15 and 15a. In order to 70
advance the holder 11 along the shaft 7, as
such shaft revolves, I provide a feed carriage
16 which embodies a clamp nut 17 working
on the revoluble feed screw 14, a pair of
spaced apertured ears 18 and a forwardly 75
extending finger 21, the extremity of which
carries a roller 22 adapted to bear against
the flat end of the cylinder holder 11. The
nut 17 is formed with a hinged section 17a
adapted to be held to the other section by 80
means of a spring latch 17b, so that the car-
riage may be disengaged from the feed screw
14 after it has completed its forward traverse
and be slipped rapidly back to the starting
point. The ears 18 are mounted to slide 85
freely along a guide rod 19 that is supported
at its ends on the standards 20, 20a. It will
be understood that the hinged section 17a of
the nut 17 may be swung downwardly from
the upper section of the nut so as to permit 90
the carriage 16 to be thrown upwardly and
backwardly on the rod 19 as a pivot, to effect
the disengagement of the carriage from the
feed screw 14.
In order to provide for slipping the record 95
on the holder 11, I provide a cross bar 23
which is hinged upon the standard 15a and
which is provided with a spring latch 24
adapted to engage another standard 25a.
This last named standard supports one end 100
of the front guide rod 26 and the other end of
said guide rod is secured in a standard 25.
27 designates a guide arm which is pro-
vided with two spaced fingers 28 adapted to
rest upon the front guide rod 25, said arm 27 105
being secured in any desired manner to or
formed integral with the sound box 29 or
casing for the diaphragm.
30 designates the tapered arm which is se-
cured in the usual manner at one end to the 110
sound box and which is pivoted at its oppo-
site end 31 by means of set screw pivots 32
884,216
within the upper end of the elbow 33. The
tapered arm 30 is thus pivoted to swing in
a vertical plane, and when raised, it may be
held in an elevated position by means of the
5 engagement of a sprmg latch 30 a with a stud
or keeper 33 a on the elbow 33.
The elbow 33 is provided with an angular
flange 34 by which it is supported on a ring
of antifriction balls 35 mounted in a race-
10 way formed in a bracket 36 which preferably
extends or projects rearwardly from the mo-
tor case 3. Below its flange 34, the elbow
33 may be provided with a damper 37, and
at its lower end, the said elbow is provided
15 with a cross bar 38 formed on its lower side
with a socket 39. Within this socket there
fits the upper pointed end of a pivot spindle
40 which is supported at the center of the
cross bar 41 in the upper end of the up-
20 wardly extending rear end of the megaphone
proper 43. The said megaphone and its ex-
tension or elbow 33 by which it is connected
to the tapered arm 30 are all preferably of
wood, and to assist in obtaining a mellow
25 sound, the said megaphone is provided with
a plurality of strings 44 that are preferably
of gut, and that are supported at their ends
by means of pegs 45 by which their tension
may be adjusted. The strings 44 are pref-
30 erably arranged in two sets, upper and lower,
and their pegs are preferably mounted in
cross bars 46.
In the practical operation of my improved
phonograph, the record cylinder is slipped
35 over the holder 11, the latter being at one
end of the shaft 7. As the said shaft is re-
volved, the gearing connection 12 and 13
will effect the revolution of the feed screw
14 and this in turn will cause the carriage 16
40 to be fed along said screw and thereby cause
the advancement or traverse of the holder 1 1
simultaneously with the rotation thereof.
Having thus described the invention, what
is claimed as new is :
45 1. In a phonograph, the combination with
a sound box, and its accessories, of a spindle
extending across the sound box, a support on
which said spindle is mounted to revolve, a
cylinder holder slidable longitudinally on
50 said spindle and revoluble therewith, a feed
screw extending parallel to the spindle and
mounted on said support, means for driving
the spindle and feed screw, a guide rod ex-
tending parallel to the feed screw and in the
55 rear of the latter, and a feed carriage em-
bodying a clamping nut mounted on said
screw and provided with a hinged section,
and means for holding said section closed,
spaced ears provided with apertures receiv-
ing said guide rod and slidable freely thereon, 60
and a forwardly- extending finger adapted to
engage the rear end of the cylinder holder.
2. In a phonograph, the combination with
a sound box, and its accessories, of a spindle
extending across the sound box, a support on 65
which said spindle is mounted to revolve, a
cylinder holder slidable longitudinally on
said spindle and revoluble therewith, a feed
screw extending parallel to the spindle and
mounted on said support, means for driving 70
the spindle and feed screw, a guide rod ex-
tending parallel to the feed screw and in the
rear of the latter, a carriage mounted on said
screw and fed along the same by the revolu-
tion of the screw, said carriage being adapted 75
to engage the rear end of the cylinder, a front
guide rod mounted on said support, and ex-
tending parallel to the first named guide rod,
and an arm projecting forwardly from the
sound box and provided with a finger resting 80
upon and movable freely along the front
guide rod.
3. In a phonograph, the combination of
sound reproducing means, including a ta-
pered arm, of a casing adapted to support 85
said means, a megaphone mounted, within
said casing and provided with an upwardly
extending rear end, a pivot spindle extending
vertically within the said end, and an exten-
sion for said megaphone, said extension be- 90
ing connected at its upper end with said ta-
pered arm and providecf at its lower end with
a cross bar formed in its lower face with a
socket engaged by the upper end of said
pivot spindle. 95 .
4. In a phonograph, the combination with
sound reproducing means, and a tapered
arm, of a casing supporting said means, a
megaphone mounted within said casing and
extending from front to rear and provided 100
with an upwardly extending rear end, an el-
bow with which the rear end of the tapered
arm is pivotally connected, a rearwardly ex-
tending bracket projecting from the casing,
the elbow extending through said bracket 105
and having a revoluble movement therein in
a horizontal plane, the lower end of said el-
bow extending into the upwardly extending
rear end of the megaphone.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 110
in presence of two witnesses.
HERMANN SCHRODER, [l. s.]
Witnesses :
Laura Hottendorf,
Frederick S. Stitt.
No. 884,963. PATENTED APR. 14, 1908.
L. P. VALIQUET.
FEEDING APPARATUS FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED APE. 13, 1906,
2 SHEETS— SHEET 1.
dvuvzwt&z
THE NQP.K1S PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 884,963. PATENTED APR. 14, 1908.
L. P. VALIQUET.
FEEDING APPARATUS FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED APE. 13, 1906.
2 SHEETS— SHEET 2.
3fyA ^fa
THE /"ORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LOUIS P. VALIQUET, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR, BY MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO
HAWTHORNE & SHEBLE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYL-
VANIA, A CORPORATION OF PENNSYLVANIA.
FEEDING APPARATUS FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 884,963.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented April 14, 1908.
Application filed April 13, 1906. Serial No. 311,597.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Louis P. Valiquet, a
citizen of the United States of America, and
a resident of Newark, county of Essex, and
5 State of New Jersey, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Feeding-
Apparatus for Talking - Machines, of which
the following is a specification.
My invention relates to talking machines
10 generally and more specifically consists of an
improved positive feeding mechanism for use
on machines employing disk records and re-
producers mounted upon swinging or uni-
versal joints for use in connection with said
15 disk records.
Heretofore it has been customary to per-
mit such disk records to themselves feed the
reproducer across the record by the action
of the spiral groove in which the sound
20 record is formed, and so dispense with posi-
tive feeding mechanism for reasons of sim-
plicity and economy. I find, however, that
such use of the sound record as a means for
feeding the reproducer is objectionable in
25 some instances, particularly in cases where
through wear or accident the intervening
walls between two adjacent sections of the
spiral become broken down or cut across
which causes the reproducing needle to
30 jump back and continue repeating the sounds
recorded in one length of said spiral and
soon ruin the record by aggravating the de-
fect which first causes this action. At the
same time, an unyielding positive feeding
35 mechanism is not practical for machines of
this type, as the records shrink and expand
under differences of temperature, so that the
same record on different days would not cor-
respond to any fixed rate of feed for the re-
40 producer, and also because such disk records
are often mounted slightly eccentric to the
rotating table so that an unyielding positive
feed mechanism would cause the reproduc-
ing needle to jump from one section of the
45 groove to another. I have invented a feed-
ing apparatus adapted for use on disk record
machines which overcomes all these diffi-
culties and is simple and easy of attachment
to standard mechanism now in use. The
50 best form of apparatus embodying my in-
vention at present known to me is illustrated
in the accompanying two sheets of drawings
in which :
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a talking ma-
chine with my invention applied thereto, 55
parts of the casing being broken away to
show the internal mechanism. Fig. 2 is an
enlarged detail sectional view taken on line
2 — 2 of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a detail showing the
manner in which the supporting rod and 60
traversing arm support and grasp the re-
producer arm, and Fig. 4 is a detail side view
of the cams operating the mechanism.
Throughout the drawings, like reference
figures indicate like parts. 65
1 represents an ordinary talking machine
casing resting upon a stand 2, on which is
mounted an electric motor 3, which has a
worm 4 on its shaft meshing with the worm
gear 5 on the vertical shaft 6.
70
7 is a flexible shaft of any convenient con- ,
struction communicating motion from short
shaft 6 to the coupling 8 inside of the talking
machine casing. This coupling 8 is held in
the larger coupling 9 by set screws 10, 10. 75
The larger coupling 9 terminates in a flange
11 at its upper portion, which is forced
against the disk 12 of felt or other fibrous
material. grasped between it and the flange
13 on the vertical shaft 14 of the talking ma- 80
chine. This felt washer 12 is spring pressed
between the two flanges by means of the
spring 15 which surrounds the shaft 14 and
is confined between the washer 16 on the
lower end thereof and the flange 11. 85
The table 17 and disk record 18 carried
thereby are rotated by the mechanism be-
fore described. .
To the horn 19, which serves as a repro-
ducer carrying arm, I preferably attach a 90
downwardly extending lug 20 of any con-
venient form adapted to engage and be en-
gaged by the horizontally extending sup-
porting rod 21 beneath it, and the vibrating
traversing arm 22, which has a jaw 23 formed 95
for the purpose in its upper end. The sup-
porting rod 21 is carried in the lever 24,
pivoted to the bed plate 25 at 26, and having
a sharp cam 27 formed on its under side,
which cooperates with the quick action cam 100
28, mounted on shaft 29, which is driven by
any suitable train of gearing 30 from shaft
14. The traversing arm 22 is pivoted to
the lug 31 depending from the bed plate 25,
said pivot being shown at 32. This trav- 105
ersing arm has a laterally extending lug
a
884,963
10
15
20
33 which is cut out to form the continuous
cam race 34, as best shown. in Fig. 2. The
cam 35 also on shaft 29 cooperates with this
cam race 34 and said cam race has a notch
36 into which the cam may be introduced
at the proper time for purposes hereinafter
to be explained.
37 is a spiral spring connected to the bed
plate or projection therefrom at one end and
at the other end to the traversing arm 22,
and tending to pull the same in a direction
to feed the sound box and stylus across the
record in a manner to reproduce the sounds
recorded thereon.
38 is an adjustable set screw for limiting
the motion of the traversing arm, ' and 39
is any convenient form of swinging or uni-
versal joint on which the reproducer 40 is
mounted, such reproducer having the stylus
or reproducing needle 41 of the usual form.
Such being the construction of my inven-
tion, its operation is as follows: The motor
being set in operation, its rotation will be
transmitted to the table 17 and record 18
25 carried thereby, any inequalities in its mo-
tion being taken up by the friction slip-joint
formed by the flanges 11 and 13, and the
interposed disk of felt 12. The flexible shaft
7 will compensate for any inaccuracies of
3q adjustment of the talking machine casing 1.
As the driving mechanism operates, it ro-
tates cam shaft 29 with the result that the
cam 28, which at rest is in the position shown
in full lines in Fig. 2, rotates in the direction
35 of the hands of a watch and soon permits
the lever 24 and supporting bar 21 to drop
down to the position shown in dotted lines
in Fig. 2, thereby bringing the stylus 41
into engagement with the sound record 18.
The same rotation of the shaft causes the
cam 35 to slowly traverse the cam race 34,
said cam race having such a profile as will
permit the traversing arm 22 to be slowly
swung to the right by the contraction of the
45 spring 37, and thereby yieldingly feed the
stylus forward across the record by exerting
yielding pressure thereon, the stylus being
restrained against too rapid movement by
the record-groove. When the parts have
50 reached the position shown in dotted lines in
Fig. 2 and the reproduction is completed, the
cam 28 quickly reengages the projection 27
on the under side of the lever 24, quickly
raises said lever and the supporting bar 21
55 so as to disengage the stylus from the
sound record and at the same moment the
cam 35 entering the notch 36 in the cam
race 34 quickly throws the traversing arm
22 to the left into the position shown in full
60 lines so as to retract the reproducer and
bring it again over to the starting point.
The retraction of the reproducer thus strains
spring 37 so that it is restored to potential
relation in readiness to again feed the repro-
65 ducer with yielding pressure across the
40
85
record. The motor may be stopped at this
point to change the record, or if it continues
another reproduction of the same record
will result.
The advantages of my invention include 70
the provision of the reproducer resetting
apparatus and a feeding device operating
by yielding force which while sufficiently
powerful to feed the reproducer independent
of any feeding action of the record, is still 75
sufficiently flexible to permit the reproducer
stylus to adjust itself to any slight inequali-
ties in the record due to expansion or
shrinkage or eccentricity. Also, the em-
ployment of the flexible driving shaft and go
friction slip joint, and the economical fea-
tures of the construction shown. It will be
noticed that the feeding action constitutes
no drain upon the power of the motor during
the reproduction as it is produced by a
spring in which the power is stored, as for
instance, by the motor during the resetting
operation when of course little or no power
is required to rotate the sound record and
there is available a surplus of power to be 90
thus stored up and given out again during
the reproduction of the record. Thus, the
addition of my apparatus to the present
talking machines will not require the use of
any more powerful motor than is now em- 95
ployed in them.
A further and important advantage re-
sulting from the use of the spring for feeding
the reproducer across the record is due to
the fact that the spring holds the end of the 100
stylus of the reproducer always in contact
with one wall or the record-groove, and as
a consequence of this the wear on the walls
of the record-groove due to the contact of
the end of the stylus therewith is consider- 105
ably reduced.
It is evident of course that various
changes could be made in the shape and
arrangement of the cam, cam race, &c. and
any other details of my invention, without 110
departing from the spirit and scope thereof,
so long as the principle of operation above
set forth is preserved. -
Having, therefore, described my inven-
tion, I claim: 115
1. In a talking machine, the combination
with a motor, of a reproducer mounted upon
a swinging bearing, a carrier for said repro-
ducer, mechanism positively connecting the
motor to the carrier and acting to retract the 120
reproducer, and mechanism operated by a
yielding connection independent of the mo-
tor for propelling said reproducer across the
record.
2. In a talking machine having a motor for 125
rotating the record, the combination of a re-
producer mounted on a universal joint, a car-
rier therefor, positively operated cam mech-
anism connected to said carrier which re-
tracts said reproducer, and a spring inde-
884,963
pendent of the motor for propelling said car-
rier in a direction to feed said reproducer
across the record.
3. In a talking machine, the combination
5 of a reproducer mounted upon a swinging
bearing, a carrier therefor, positively oper-
ated mechanism connected to said carrier
which retracts the reproducer, and mechan-
ism operated by a yielding force connected
10 to said carrier and operating to feed said re-
producer across the record, said mechanism
comprising a swinging arm having a lug in
which a continuous cam race is cut, and a
cam carried by a shaft journaled in fixed
15 bearings and engaging said cam race.
4. A feeding and resetting mechanism for
talking machines having loosely mounted re-
producers comprising in combination a hori-
zontally extending vertically movable sup-
20 porting bar, means for raising and lowering
said bar, a traversing arm adapted to engage
the reproducer both when the supporting bar
is raised and lowered, and means for recipro-
cating said arm synchronously with respect
25 to the movements of the supporting bar, said
last-named means including a spring inde-
pendent of the motor of the machine for pro-
pelling the reproducer across the record.
5. A feeding and resetting mechanism for
30 talking machines having loosely mounted re-
producers comprising in combination a hori-
zontally extending vertically movable sup-
porting bar, means for raising and lowering
said bar, a traversing arm adapted to engage
35 the reproducer both when the supporting
bar is raised and lowered, and means for re-
ciprocating said arm synchronously with re-
spect to the movements of the supporting
bar, said means comprising quick action
40 cams which rapidly retract the traversing
arm while the supporting bar is elevated,
and a spring independent of the motor of the
machine for propelling the reproducer across
the record when the supporting bar is low-
45 ered.
6. A feeding and resetting mechanism for
talking machines having loosely mounted re-
producers comprising in combination a hori-
zontally extending vertically movable sup-
50 porting bar, means for raising and lowering
said bar, a traversing arm adapted to engage
the reproducer both when the supporting
bar is raised and lowered, and means for re-
ciprocating said arm synchronously with re-
55 spect to the movements of the supporting
bar, said first mentioned means comprising a
quick action raising and lowering cam, and
said last mentioned means comprising a
quick action retracting and slow feeding cam
60 mounted on the same shaft as the raising and
lowering cam.
7. In a disk record talking machine having
a motor for rotating the disk, the combina-
tion with the reproducer arm of a horizon-
65 tally extending supporting bar beneath the
reproducer arm, a pivoted lever by which it
is carried, a cam below the lever shaped to
quickly raise and drop the same, a horizon-
tally traversing arm adapted to engage said
reproducer arm, a cam lug on said traversing y0
arm, a cam engaging said lug and adapted to
move the arm in a direction to retract the re-
producer, and a spring independent of the
motor normally tending to move the arm in
a direction to feed the reproducer across the 75
record.
8. In a disk record talking machine having
a motor for rotating the disk, the combina-
tion with the reproducer arm of a horizon-
tally extending supporting bar beneath the go
reproducer arm, a pivoted lever by which it is
carried, a cam below the lever shaped to
quickly raise and drop the same, a horizon-
tally traversing arm adapted to engage said
reproducer arm, a cam lug on said traversing 85
arm, a cam engaging said lug and adapted to
move the arm in a direction to retract the re-
producer, and a spring independent of the
motor normally tending to move the arm in
a direction to feed the reproducer across the 90
record, both said cams being mounted on the
same shaft.
9. In a talking machine, the combination
of a holder for a disk sound record and means
for rotating the same and the record thereon, 95
a support, reproducing mechanism including
a stylus carried thereby, and means inde-
pendent of the sound record and its driving
device for yieldingly propelling said repro-
ducing mechanism in a plane substantially 100
parallel with the surface of the sound-record
so that the stylus thereof may track in and
be restrained by the record-groove through-
out the several convolutions thereof.
10. In a talking machine, the combination 105
of a holder for a disk sound record and means
for rotating the same and the record thereon,
a support, reproducing mechanism including
a stylus carried thereby, and means inde-
pendent of the sound record and its rotating no
means for yieldingly propelling said repro-
ducing mechanism across the sound record
so that the stylus thereof may track in and be
restrained by the record-groove throughout
the several convolutions thereof, said means 115
being so arranged that restoring said mech-
anism to its initial position restores said
means to potential position.
11. The combination with a talking ma-
chine of the type in which the record-groove 120
is spirally formed in a disk adapted to rotate
in a horizontal plane and the reproducer is
carried by a device pivoted adjacent to said
disk, of mechanism for rotating said disk,
and means independent of the sound-record 125
and its rotating mechanism for yieldingly
propelling said device about its pivotal axis
to carry the stylus of the reproducer across
the record, said means being so arranged as
to be restrained against excessive movement 130
884,063
by said record and as to be restored to its
potential position in restoring said device to
its initial position.
12. The combination with a talking ma-
5 chine of the type in which the record-groove
is spirally -formed in a rotatable disk and the
reproducer is carried by a pivoted support,
of mechanism for rotating said disk, and
means independent of the record-groove and
10 the disk rotating mechanism for yieldingly
propelling said support about its pivotal axis
so that the stylus of the reproducer may
track in the record-groove throughout the
several convolutions thereof, said stylus be-
15 ing restrained against excessive movement
by said record-groove.
13. A sound-reproducing apparatus, com-
f (rising a rotating disk whose operative sur-
ace lies in a single plane, said disk having a
20 laterally undulating record-groove of sub-
stantially uniform depth formed therein,
mechanism for maintaining the horizontality
of said disk and for rotating the same, a re-
producing stylus, and means independent
of the disk-rotating mechanism for yieldingly 25
pressing and propelling the same, while in en-
gagement with said record-groove, in repro-
ducing direction and in a plane substantially
parallel with the surface of said disk.
14. In a talking machine, the combination 30
with a motor, of a reproducer mounted upon
a swinging bearing, a carrier for said repro-
ducer, mechanism positively connecting the
motor to the carrier and acting to retract the
reproducer, and mechanism operated by a 35
yielding connection independent of the mo-
tor, for propelling said reproducer across the
record in a plane substantially parallel with
the surface of said record so that the stylus
thereof may track in and be restrained by the 40
record groove throughout the several convo-
lutions thereof.
Signed at New York, N. Y. this 10th day
of April 1906.
LOUIS P. VALIQUET.
Witnesses :
Frank O'Connor,
M. G. Crawford.
No. 885,178. PATENTED APR. 21, 1908.
E. PRAZAK.
ATTACHMENT FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED MAT 10, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
WITNESSES
INVENTOR,
HIS ATTORNEY
TMC NOHRll rtTCKS CO.. WASHINOTOM. B. C.
No. 885,178.
PATENTED APR. 21, 1908.
E. PRAZAK.
ATTACHMENT FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED MAY 10, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
Mi <* \
15~i
/2
"iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiim
■
INVENTOR
JCirUl/JPru,zcik,,
BY
H/S ATTORNEY
THE NOXmiS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EMIL PRAZAK. OF ELIZABETH, NEW JERSEY
ATTACHMENT FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 885,178.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented April 21, 1908.
Application filed May 10, 1907. Serial No. 372,865.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known, that I, Emil Prazak, a citizen
of the United States, and. resident of Eliza-
beth, in the county of Union and State of
5 New Jersey, have invented certain new and
useful Attachments for Talking-Machines, of
which the following is a specification.
This invention relates to talking machines
and more particularly to means by which the
10 two common types of these machines,
namely; the machine employing a cylin-
drical record and that using the disk record,
may be combined with little cost, simplicity
of arrangement and almost instantly and a
15 common motor used to rotate either record.
The device comprises a frame with a rotat-
ing platform mounted on roller bearings and
having pulleys carrying a belt or gearing-
driven by the motor of a cylinder record
20 machine as will be more fully described in the
following specification, set forth in the claims
and shown in the drawings where it will be
seen that like reference characters are used
to designate the same parts in the several
25 figures.
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a phono-
graph. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the de-
vice detached. Fig. 3 is a plan view of same.
The device is adapted to be carried by the
30 center of the arbor 5 and the guide rod 6 of
the ordinary phonograph and extensions of
these two parts enter the holes 7 and 8 re-
spectively of the frame 9 fitting easily thereon
when it is desired to convert the machine into
35 a disk operating talking machine or to com-
bine the operation of the two records and
cause them to work simultaneously.
The frame 9 as will be seen in Figs. 2 and 3
has at one end a bracket 10 supporting on
40 ball bearings 11 the circular platform 12
while the latter's shaft 13 is journaled in the
forked arms of the bracket and carries a pul-
ley 14 by which the platform is rotated. The
other end of the frame carries an arm 15 with
45 a socket 16 and pivot 17 for the horn 19.
The frame 9 has secured to it a bracket 20
in which are journaled the pulleys 21 and 22
and which direct the band 23 from the motor
within the box of the phonograph to the pul-
50 ley 14. The motor being of the usual con-
struction it has not been thought necessary
to show same, but it is obvious that a train
of gearing might be substituted, the band is,
however, light and noiseless and readily put
in place when the attachment is secured to 55
the phonograph.
When it is desired to apply my improved
device to the phonograph it is simply slipped
over the extensions of the arbor center and
guide rod and after the belt is adjusted the 60
instrument is ready for operation. In case
the motor is provided with two driving pul-
leys the band 24 for the phonograph need not
be disturbed but whichever instrument it is
desired to put out of operation its band is 65
disconnected.
It is obvious that I do not limit myself to
the exact construction shown nor to the
exact arrangement of parts and if found ad-
visable or desirable various modifications 70
may be resorted to without departing from
the essential features shown and described.
What I claim as new and desire to secure
by Letters Patent is :
1. In an attachment for talking machines, 75
the combination with the arbor center and
guide rod of a phonograph, of a frame with
perforations adapted to fit the ends of the
said arbor and guide rod, a rotating disk, a
pulley on the shaft of the disk and means 80
connected with the motor of the phonograph
for driving the pulley.
2. In an attachment for talking machines,
the combination with a phonograph, of an
arbor center, a guide rod, extensions on the 85
arbor and guide rod, a frame adapted to be
secured to said extension and braced against
the adjacent side of the phonograph, a ro-
tating plate adapted to carry disk records, a
reproducer and an amplifying horn carried 90
by the frame, and means for conveying mo-
tion from the motor of the phonograph to
the rotating plate.
3. In an attachment for talking machines,
the combination with a phonograph having 95
an arbor and a guide rod, of extensions to
the arbor and the guide rod, a frame adapted
to be carried by the extensions, a rotating
plate for the record, a reproducer, an am-
plifying horn, a pulley on the shaft of the 100
plate, a belt connecting the pulley of the
motor of the phonograph, and idlers for di-
recting the passage of the belt.
4. In an attachment for talking machines,
the combination with a phonograph having 105
an arbor and guide rod, of a frame adapted
to be carried by the arbor and guide rod, a
rotating plate for a disk record, a ball bear-
885,178
ing support on the frame for the plate, a re-
producer, an amplifying horn pivoted in the
frame, rotating means on the shaft of the
plate, and means connecting the rotating
means with the motor of the phonograph so
that the record of the same may be operated
simultaneously with the disk record.
Signed at city of Elizabeth in the county
of Union and State of New Jersey this 1st
day of May A. D. 1907.
EMIL PRAZAK.
Witnesses :
Ralph R. Thomas,
Emil Taussig.
No. 885,268.
PATENTED APR. 21, 1908.
A. S. MARTEN.
HORN.
APPLICATION FILED NOV. 17, 1906.
WITNESSES
Fib. 1-
INVENTOR
.ALBERT 5, L/lSKTEn,
fir
ATTORNEY.
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, 0. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ALBERT S. MARTEN, OF EAST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO THE TEA TRAY COMPANY
OF NEWARK, N. J., A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
HORN.
No. 885,268.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented April 21, 1908.
Application filed November 17, 1906. Serial No. 343,786.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Albert S. Marten, a
citizen of the United States, residing at East
Orange, in the county of Essex and State of
5 New Jersey, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Horns, of which the
following is a specification.
The objects of this invention are to secure
in a sound amplifying horn, a ferrule which
10 shall be strong and stiff and at the same time
of finished appearance; to secure a smooth
circumferential surface on both the inside
and the Outside of the ferrule without any
longitudinal seams; to avoid soldering and
15 secure joints which are only pressed or
reamed together, and to obtain other advan-
tages and results as may be brought out in
the following description.
Referring to the accompanying drawings,
20 in which like numerals of reference indicate
corresponding parts in each of the several
figures, Figure 1 is a side elevation of a horn
of my improved construction; Fig. 2 is a
similar view of the small end of the body
25 portion of the horn showing its integral
ferrule part with the inside and outside
sleeves removed; and Fig: 3 is a plan of the
same; Fig. 4 is a central longitudinal section
of the small end of the horn taken as on line
30 x, Fig. 5, and Fig. 5 is a transverse section
through- the ferrule of the horn as on line y,
In said drawings, 1 indicates the body of
the horn made tapering in any usual manner
35 and having a longitudinal seam 2 formed by
overlapping and interlocking the edges of the
metal. This seam as is usual in horns, pro-
jects inwardly in order to provide a smooth
exterior, and at the large end of the body 1,
40 is a bell 3 of any ordinary type. At its
small end, the said body 1 of the horn has an
integral cylindrical ferrule portion 4 swaged
down from the body part, and thus when
completed, connected to said body by a
45 shoulder 5, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3 more
particularly. The longitudinal seam 2 of the
horn body stops short of the said c}7hndrical
ferrule part 4, and for said ferrule part the
edges of the metal simpby abut, as shown at
50 6 in said Figs. 2 and 3. This result is se-
cured by notching the end of the horn body
or cutting away the margins of the metal
sections as will be understood by those
skilled in the art. The longitudinal seam 1
projecting at the interior of the horn there- 55
fore stops at the shoulder 5, and the ferrule
portion 4 is smoothly cylindrical on both
inside and outside. An outer sleeve or lining
7, preferably made of seamless tubing, and
fitting nicely, is then slipped over the said 60
ferrule portion 4, the end edges of said sleeve
being adjacent to the shoulder 5, rolled or
curled outwardly and backwardly as at 8.
The opposite end of the said outer lining 7
preferably terminates somewhat short of the 65
end of the ferrule portion 4. An inside lin-
ing or sleeve 10, also preferably of seamless
tubing, is then fitted tightly within the
ferrule portion 4 of the horn bod}7, and its
outer end edges curled or rolled outwardly 70
forward, as at 11, to abut edgewise against
the outside of the ferrule portion 4 and en-
gage at their forward sides the outer end 9
of the sleeve 7. The inner end 12 of the
inner sleeve 10 is then reamed or pressed 75
outwardly to overreach the shoulder 5 on
the inside of the horn and thus prevent the
said inner sleeve or lining from escaping
outward.
It will be understood that by the above 80
construction, the integral ferrule portion 4
and its inside and outside linings are firmly
bound together, so that a solid strong ferrule
is provided for the horn. There are no ex-
posed unfinished edges, and both the outside 85
and inside of the ferrule is smoothly cylin-
drical with no seam. The ferrule is greatly
reinforced or strengthened so that it is better
able to support the weight of the horn, and
furthermore the ferrule may be made to ap- 90
pear of different metal or finish from the body
of the horn, and thus enhance its appearance.
The roll 8 of the outer sleeve strengthens
and stiffens the horn at the junction of its
ferrule and bod}T portion, just where strength- 95
ening is especially needed, as for instance
i when the horn is supported solely by being
slipped at its ferrule telescopic ally upon the
neck of a speaker or sound-box. Further-
more, it would be impossible to end a straight 100
cut-off sleeve on the curved shoulder joining
the horn body and its ferrule portion, with-
out there being a very obtrusive, unsightly
and even dangerous sharp edge. By means
of the roll 8, however, the end edge of the 105
outer sleeve is turned in or butted against the
885,268
cylindrical part of the sleeve, and a neat,
smooth finish secured which cannot scratch
or be unpleasant to the touch.
Having thus described my invention, what
5 I claim as new is :
1. In a horn, the combination of a flaring
body having a reduced integral ferrule por-
tion forming with said body an annular
shoulder and having a longitudinal joint, an
10 exterior annular enlargement at the extrem-
ity of the ferrule,, and a seamless sleeve upon
the outside of said ferrule portion between
said shoulder and annular enlargement.
2. In a horn, the combination of a flaring
15 body having a reduced integral ferrule por-
tion forming with said body an annular
shoulder and having a longitudinal joint, an
exterior annular enlargement at the extrem-
ity of the ferrule, and a seamless sleeve upon
20 the outside of said ferrule portion between
said shoulder and annular enlargement hav-
ing its end next said shoulder fitted there-
against with the edges rolled outwardly and
returned against itself.
25 3. In a horn, the combination of a flaring
body having a reduced integral ferrule por-
tion forming with said body an annular
shoulder and having a longitudinal joint, an
outward roll at the extremity of said ferrule
30 portion returned against the said ferrule, and
a sleeve upon the outside of said ferrule por-
tion between said shoulder and roll having its
end edges next the said roll abutting there-
against.
35 4. In a horn, the combination of a flaring
body having a reduced integral ferrule por-
tion forming with said body an annular
shoulder and having a longitudinal joint, a
tubular lining inside said ferrule portion hav-
40 ing one end curled outwardly over the end
edges of the ferrule portion and its other end
expanded into the flaring part of the horn,
and an outer sleeve upon the said ferrule por-
tion between the said shoulder and curled
45 end of the said lining.
5. In a horn, the combination of a flaring
bod}r having a reduced integral ferrule por-
tion forming with said body an annular
shoulder and having a longitudinal joint, a
50 tubular lining inside said ferrule portion hav-
ing one end rolled up over the end edges of
the ferrule portion and its other end ex-
panded into the flaring part of the horn, and
an outer sleeve upon the said ferrule portion
55 between the said shoulder and said outward
roll of the lining having its end next said
shoulder fitted thereagainst with the edges
rolled outwardly and returned upon itself.
6. In a horn, the combination of a flaring
CO body having a reduced integral ferrule por-
tion forming with said body an annular
shoulder and having a longitudinal joint, a
tubular lining inside said ferrule portion hav-
ing one end curled outwardly over the end
edges of the ferrule portion and returned to 65
abut at its edges against the outer surface of
said ferrule portion, the other end of said lin-
ing being expanded into the flaring part of
the horn, and a sleeve upon the outside of
said ferrule portion having its edges at one 70
end abutting against the said outward curl of
the lining and its other end portion fitted
against the said shoulder with the edges
rolled outward and returned against itself.
7. In a horn, the combination of a flaring 75
body having a reduced integral ferrule por-
tion forming with said body an annular
shoulder and being longitudinally slit from
said shoulder to its extremity, an inner tu-
bular lining fitting said ferrule portion and 80
having one end curled outwardly over the
extremity of the ferrule portion and its other
end expanded into the flaring part of the
horn, and a sleeve upon the outside of the
ferrule portion between said curl and said 85
shoulder.
8. In a horn, the combination of a flaring-
body having a reduced integral ferrule por-
tion forming with said body an annular
shoulder and being longitudinally slit from 90
said shoulder to its extremity, an inner tubu-
lar lining fitting said ferrule portion and hav-
ing one end curled outwardly over the ex-
tremity of the ferrule portion and its other
end expanded into the flaring part of the 95
horn, and a sleeve upon the outside of the
ferrule portion between said curl and said
shoulder having its end next said shoulder
fitted thereagainst with the edges rolled out-
wardly and returned against itself. 100
9. In a horn, the combination of a flaring
body having a reduced integral ferrule por-
tion forming with said body an annular
shoulder and being longitudinally slit from
said shoulder to its extremity, an inner tu- 105
bular lining fitting said ferrule portion and
having one end curled outwardly over the
extremity of the ferrule portion and returned
to abut edgewise against the outer surface of
said ferrule portion and its other end ex- 110
panded into the flaring part of the horn, and
a sleeve upon the outside of said ferrule por-
tion having its edges at one end abutting
against the said returned portion of the inner
lining and its other end portion fitted against 115
the said shoulder with its end edges rolled
outwardly and returned against itself.
ALBERT S. MARTEN.
In the presence of — ■
Ethel B. Reed,
Frederick Germann, Jr.
No. 885,484.
PATENTED APR. 21, 1908.
B. F. KEATING.
TALKING MACHINE ATTACHMENT.
APPLICATION PILED NOY. 22, 1907.
I <ui*~uinA>L •jUaAu^ty JyuJUMA*
•S^C** (AXC*As*jt£to .
HE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
BERNARD FRANCIS KEATING, OF HAWTHORN, VICTORIA, AUSTRALIA.
TALKING-MACHINE ATTACHMENT.
No. 885,484.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented April 21, 1908.
Application filed November 22, 1907. Serial No. 403,372.
To all wliom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Bernard Francis
Keating, a subject of the King of Great
Britain and Ireland, &c., residing at Haw-
5 thorn, in the State of Victoria, Common-
wealth of Australia, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Talking-
Machine Attachments; and I do hereby de-
clare the following to be a full, clear, and ex-
10 act description of the invention, such as will
enable others skilled in the art to' which it ap-
pertains to make and use the same.
The ordinary sound reproducing or talking-
machine has a motor which is started or
15 stopped by moving by a hand lever — which
puts a governor brake "on" to bring the mo-
tor to rest — , and takes it " off " when the mo-
tor is to be set running. This invention is
applicable to such a lever without interfering
20 with its positioning by hand as heretofore.
In order that at a future time, or in a certain
event, the machine shall reproduce sound
from a "record" mounted on it this inven-
tion provides for the hand lever being located
25 at will intermediately between the ordinary
"on" and "off" extreme positions.
The above will be understood from the ac-
companying drawings in which
Figure 1 is a plan view showing part of a
30 phonograph or graphophone with my attach-
ment. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of Fig. 1.
Fig. 3 is a front view partly in vertical sec-
tion illustrating the position of some of the
parts when the motor is running. Fig. 4
35 shows the parts in Fig. 3 when the hand lever
is in its intermediate position — that is when
the motor is not running. Fig. 5 shows, in
front elevation, the parts in Fig. 2.
In these drawings" 1 shows the top plate of
40 the phonograph or like machine, 2 a lug
thereon, 3 boxing or framing, 4 the hand
lever, shown projecting up through slot 5 in
plate 1 these parts not being new. To lever
4 a spiral spring 6 is connected.
45 7 is the base plate of my attachment,
which has any suitable means for fixing it,
such as screws 8 entering framing or box 3.
Part of this base plate is an arm or lug 18
which supports an electro magnet or coil 9, the.
50 armature of which, 23, is normally raised as
in Fig. 2. The material of base plate 7 is
bent up to form pillar 17, integral with which
is a lug 16 bent to extend parallel to the pil-
. lar, or so as to enable an axle or spindle, 15,
55 to be supported or journaled in the parts 16,
17. This spindle carries a lever having arm
19 connected to spring 6, and an arm 20
which is temporarily held up by a lever 24 as
hereinafter described — see Figs. 4 and 5.
From pillar 17 the material extends to form a 60
back plate 14, on which is mounted a pin 13
on which the armature lever 24 is pivoted.
This lever at one end carries armature 23, and
has an inclined or beveled surface 21 at or
near its other end which normally is de- 65
pressed, resting on a stop 11, which is part
of plate 17, see Figs. 2 and 5. Part 12 situ-
ated over lever 24 and electro magnet 9, is a
protective plate integral with the back 14.
21 on lever 24 is a beveled or inclined sur- 70
face such that arm 20 on pressing said surface
causes that end of the lever to rise, so that
arm 20 passes the lever, upon which the lat-
ter will drop preventing the arm returning
till lever 24 moves. 75
Part 22 integral with pillar 17 is a stop
behind arm 20 so that the latter will be close
behind lever 24 so that if the latter lifts mo-
mentarily "a small movement of arm 20 will
insure its descent. Furthermore this de- so
scent is insured by the gravity of arm 19 or
by the pull of spring 6.
The position of connected parts 4, 6, 19,
20, of Figs. 1, 2, and 5 is seen clearly in firm
lines in Fig. 4; but in Fig. 3 these parts are 85
shown in a different position arrived at partly
by the preliminary setting of lever 4 as dotted
in Fig. 4, and subsequently b}" the movement
of the lever 24 by the closing of a contact 28
in an electrical circuit comprising wires 26, 90
battery 27, and electro magnet 9; the result
being to draw down armature 23 see Fig. 2.
The battery is in some instances located in
the phonograph or machine casing; in others
it is at a distance — part of an electric bell 95
circuit for example. When arm 20 falls it is
arrested by a stop, shown in Fig. 3 as formed
by part 16.
'An aperture 25 in plate 1 Figs. 3 and 4
receives a regulating screw 10 Fig. 1, these 100
parts not being, otherwise shown, and not
incidental to this invention. The said screw
is in use as a regulator of an arm 31 which is
pivoted at 32 to framing 30. Lever 4,
pivoted at 29 to frame 30, has an inner end 105
37, against which bears end 36 of a bent
spring 34 which projects from arm 31 and has
an intermediate upwardly inclined part 35.
The upward tendency of spring 34 is insured
by a spring 33 connecting frame 30 to arm 31. 110
2
885,484
When lever 4 is located as in firm lines in
Fig. 4 the spring 6 is left slack, no pull being
then needed on lever 19, and consequently
no pressure of arm 20 on the back of lever 24.
5 Any movement of armature lever 24 would
then have no effect on lever 4, so that the
phonograph motor would not thereby be
affected. Lever 4 could evidently be moved
by hand at any time at will to start or stop
10 the motor By setting lever 4 however as in
dotted lines Fig. 4 spring 6 is slightly
stretched, causing or insuring slight pressure
of arm 20 on the back of lever 24, and end 37
is brought over part 35 of spring 34, which is
15 however unable to as it ordinarily would do
further swing lever 4 by its pressure, owing
to the resistance of spring 6, and of lever 24
to the movement of arm 20. But when
lever 24 moves, the various parts will take
20 the positions in Fig. 3. This will be so be-
cause the pressure of part 35 of spring 34 on
part 37 of lever 4 then swings that, lever on
its pivot, spring 6 and lever arms 19 and 20
being then free.
25 The various parts illustrated below plate 1
in Figs. 4 and 3 are already used in grapho-
phones; in which to cause the motor to run
it is only necessary to move lever 4 to allow
spring 33 to lift arm 31 into the position of
30 Fig. 3. There is however no provision in
graphophones for setting lever 4 as in dotted
lines in Fig. 4 and releasing the said lever by
attached electrical mechanism as herein de-
scribed, whereby to allow spring 33 to cause
35 spring 34 to swing lever 4 to the position in
Fig. 3.
In the following claims I term for brevity
part 4 a motor controlling hand lever, or
simply a hand lever, parts 19 and 20 an inter-
40 mediate lever as it is between levers 24 and
4, and spring 6 an intermediate spring as it is
between lever 4 and part 19.
Although the illustrations show the form
in which the mechanism is preferably con-
45 structed, there may obviously be sundry
variations made, within the scope of my
claims. For example bevel 21 is not essen-
tial.
What I do claim as my invention and
50 desire to secure by Letters Patent of the
United States is : —
1. In a talking machine, a hand lever for
controlling said machine; an attachment
having an electro magnet and an armature
55 lever; means for making an electric circuit
through the coil of said magnet to operate
the latter lever from a distance; an inter-
mediate lever and spring connection to said
hand lever; and a stop whereby the inter-
mediate lever is held by the armature lever 60
so that the hand lever is retainable in an
intermediate position as set forth, and will
allow the motor to move when the armature
lever is moved as described.
2. In a talking machine an attachment 65
comprising a hand lever for controlling said
machine; a spring 6, connected to said lever;
an intermediate lever 19, 20, controlled by
said spring; an armature lever 24, and a stop
16, also, controlling said lever 19, 20, and a 70
magnet controlling said armature lever, sub-
stantially as described.
3. In a talking machine, an attachment
having an electro magnet for energizing it by
making a contact at a distance from the ma- 75
chine ; a pivoted armature lever for said mag-
net; an intermediate lever adapted to move
and pass the armature lever and have its
return stopped by the latter; a motor con-
trolling hand lever; and a spring connection 80
from the intermediate lever to said motor
controlling hand lever, substantially as de-
scribed.
4. In a talking machine attachment a
base plate 7, provided with a lug 18; a pillar 85
17; a lug 16 and stops 11 and 22, integral
with said pillar; a back plate 14; and a pro-
tective plate 12, integral with said back
plate, substantially as described.
5. In a talking machine an attachment 90
comprising a suitable base plate; an electro
magnet ; an armature lever for the same ; an
electrical circuit to operate the said lever
from a distance; a pivoted lever 19, 20; a
spring 6; a hand lever 4; and a member hav- 95
ing surfaces 35, 36, adapted to control said
hand lever, substantially as described.
6. In a talking machine; a hand lever
capable of occupying two extreme positions
for controlling the same; means for holding 100
said hand lever in a mid position; and means
controllable from a distance for causing said
hand lever to move from its mid to one of its
extreme positions, substantially as described.
In testimony whereof, I affix my signature 105
in presence of two witnesses.
BERNARD FRANCIS KEATING.
Witnesses :
George G. Turri,
Beatrice M. Lowe.
No. 885,489.
PATENTED APR. 21, 1908.
T. KRAEMER.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED NOV. 5, 1807.
^Jyr*
"^ ^p
WITNESSES:
J^lior. 5.
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THE NQRR1S PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS KRAEMER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO HAWTHORNE &
SHEBLE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA. A CORPO-
RATION OF PENNSYLVANIA.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 885,489.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented April 21, 1908.
Application filed November 5, 1907. Serial No. 400,735,
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas Kraemer, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila-
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented a cer-
tain new and useful Improvement in Talking-
Machines, of which the following is a specifi-
cation.
This invention relates to talking-machines
10 of the type employing a pivot ally mounted
sound-tube having a sound-box connected
to one end thereof with its stylus tracking in
the record-groove.
More particularly, the invention relates to
15 such machines of the type employing de-
vices for exerting a yielding pressure upon
the sound-tube tending to turn it about its
pivot to feed the sound-box across the rec-
ord, the sound-tube and -box being re-
20 strained against too rapid movement by the
coaction of the stylus with the wall of the
record-groove.
The object of the invention is to effect cer-
tain improvements in the construction of the
25 devices for exerting this yielding pressure.
In accordance with the invention, these
devices are mounted within the sound-con-
veying tube so that they are concealed from
view, and therefore do not detract from the
30 appearance of the machine. Furthermore,
these devices are so arranged that in mount-
ing the sound-conveying tube upon its sup-
port, the yielding-pressure devices are brought
to potential relation, so that they are in
35 readiness for operation, without any manipu-
lation on the part of the operator.
The preferred embodiment of my inven-
tion is illustrated in the drawings, in which
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of a portion
40 of a talking-machine; Figs. 2 and 3 are detail
views in section on lines 2 — 2 and 3 — 3, re-
spectively, of Fig. 1, and Figs. 4 and 5 are
detail views in elevation and perspective, re-
spectively, hereinafter referred to.
45 Referring to these drawings, 1 indicates
the motor-box of the talking-machine, with-
in which is a motor driving a vertical shaft 2 .
This shaft has a turn-table 3 secured upon its
upper end, on which the disk -record 4 is
50 adapted to lie. A coupling-member 5 is se-
cured to one side of the motor-box and ex-
] tends outwardly and upwardly therefrom.
Through the upper end of this member is an
opening, and the wall about the upper end of
this opening is formed to provide a support 55
for an amplifying-horn 6, the small end of
which communicates with this opening.
Mounted upon the member 5, near the end
of the opening opposite to that with which
horn 6 communicates, is a pin 7 vertically 60
disposed. The tone - arm 8 is pivotally
mounted at one end upon the member 5, and at
its other end carries the sound-box 9, the sty-
lus 10 of which tracks in the record-groove.
The tone-arm 8 has brackets 11 secured 65
thereto, in which a cross-head 12 is mounted
on horizontal pivots, as best shown in Fig. 3.
This cross-head carries a vertically disposed
sleeve 13. The tone-arm is mounted upon
the coupling-member by passing the sleeve 70
13 down over the pin 7, the tone-arm 8 dur-
ing this operation being held at somewhat of
an angle to the horizontal, and the tone-arm
is then lowered to its horizontal position, this
movement carrying its end a short distance 75
into the opening in the coupling-member 5.
This being done, the tone-arm is capable of
movement in any direction, so that the sty-
lus of the sound-box may track faithfully in
the record-groove, the arm turning about the 80
pin 7 as a vertical axis and about the pivots
of the cross-head 12 as a horizontal axis.
A post 14 is mounted upon the coupling-
member 5 a short distance within the end of
the opening therethrough which the tone- 85
arm 8 enters. A short slot may be cut in the
end of the tone-arm 8, through which this
post may extend, as shown in Fig. 1. Se-
cured on the post is a collar 15, to which is
secured one end of a coil-spring 16. The 90
other end of this spring is carried out a short
distance from the axis of post 14 and is pro-
vided with a hooked end portion, as shown at
17. In the drawings, the spring 16 is shown
as of helical form through a portion of its 95
length, and then of constantly increasing
diameter; but variations in this respect may
of course be made. The hooked end 17 of
spring 16 engages the end of the tone-arm 8,
as best shown in Fig. 1, so that the spring 100
tends to turn the tone-arm about the pin 7 as
an axis with a yielding pressure, this pres-
885,489
sure serving to feed the sound-box across the
record as the sound-record 4 is rotated.
When the tone-arm 8 is turned about the
axis of the pivots of cross-head 12, raising the
5 sound-box 9 off the record, the inner end of
the tone-arm 8 will be carried to the left in
Fig. 1 until it releases the hooked end of
spring 16. When tone-arm 8 has been
turned to this extent, its inner end is free of
10 the walls of the opening through coupling-
member 5, and the tone-arm may be raised
to carry sleeve 13 off of pin 7. Itjwill be seen
that in mounting tone-arm 8 upon coupling-
member 5, performing the movements above
15 described in reverse order, the inner end of
tone-arm 8 will engage the hooked end of
spring 16 without any manipulation on the
part of the operator directecf particularly to
causing such engagement, and will put spring
20 16 under tension, so that when the tone-arm
and sound-box are in position for operation,
the spring 16 will be in potential relation.
Furthermore, it will be seen that the spring
for exerting the yielding pressure and the
25 post supporting the same are within the
sound-conveying device, including the tone-
arm and the opening through the support
therefor, so that these parts are concealed
from view.
30 With disk sound-records as commonly
constructed, the record extends from the pe-
riphery of the disk inwardly a distance from
the periphery, and at the center of the disk
are a circular space to receive a label and an
35 opening through which the upper end of the
shaft 2 extends. The spring 16 or other
yielding-pressure device acts on the tone-
arm to turn it about its pivot in order to
carry the stylus of the reproducer across the
40 portion of the disk having the sound-record
formed therein, and at the conclusion of the
reproduction this yielding - pressure device
would, if means were not provided to guard
against it, carry the stylus across the label
45 portion of the disk and into engagement with
the shaft 2, resulting in damaging the stylus
and possibly the reproducer. To prevent
this, I provide a stop device arranged <to ar-
rest the movement of the tone-arm and
50 sound-box about the pivot of the tone-arm
at the conclusion of the reproduction, this
means being adjustable to permit of only a
predetermined amount of movement of the
tone-arm about its pivot. This stop device
55 is illustrated in Figs. 4 and 5 of the drawings.
A collar 18 is provided at the base of the
pin 7 and a set-screw 19 extends through a
threaded opening in this collar so that the
screw may be tightened to secure the collar
60 18 upon the pin 7 in any desired angular po-
sition. In the upper face of collar 18 a notch
20 is cut, into which extends a pin 21 depend-
ing from the cross-head 12 carried by the
brackets 11. As the sound-record is repro-
duced, the pin 21 turns with cross-head 12 65
and tone-arm 8, and at the conclusion of the
reproduction comes into engagement with
the wall of the notch 20, this engagement
precluding any further movement of the
tone-arm about its pivot. The set-screw 19 70
permits of adjusting the collar 18 about the
pin 7, so that the turning movement of the
tone-arm is arrested at the conclusion of the
reproduction in every case, though the sound-
records on the several disks extend inwardly 75
from the peripheries of the disks varying dis-
tances. The collar 18 shown in Fig. 5 has a
notch 20 cut therein, the side walls of which
are vertically disposed. Such a collar would
serve the single purpose of arresting the turn- 80
ing movement of the tone-arm as above de-
scribed. This notch, however, may be so
formed that the coaction of the end of pin 21
with a wall of the notch supplies the yielding
pressure for turning the tone-arrn about its 85
pivot, and this means for supplying the yield-
ing pressure may be used alone or in combi-
nation with the spring 16. Thus, the collar
18 shown in Fig. 4 has one wall of the notch
20 disposed at an incline, and at the begin- 90
ning of the reproduction the end of pin 21 is
at the top or this incline. As the repro-
duction continues, the end of pin 21 rides
down the incline and the tone-arm drops
under the influence of gravity somewhat. 95
Such downward movement can be effected
only by turning the tone-arm about its pivot
and thus yieldingly pressing it in a direction
to carry the stylus across the sound-record.
At the conclusion of the reproduction, the 100
pin 2 1 engages the opposite wall of the notch
20 in the collar 18 and arrests the
movement of the tone-arm.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new therein and desire to secure 105
by Letters Patent is as follows: —
1. In a talking-machine, a sound-convey-
ing device including a pivotally - mounted
tubular member, a sound-box connected to
one end of said member, and means inclosed 110
within said sound-conveying device for ex-
erting pressure on said tubular member to
turn it about its pivot, substantially as set
forth.
2. In a talking-machine, a sound-convey- 115
ing device including a pivotally-mounted
tubular member, a sound-box connected to
one end of said member, and a spring within
said sound-conveying device arranged to ex-
ert pressure on said tubular member to turn 120
it about its pivot and to be restored to po-
tential position in restoring said member to
initial position, substantially as set forth.
3. In a talking-machine, a tubular mem-
ber, a support on which said member is piv- 125
otally mounted, a sound-box connected to
the free end of said member, and means for
exerting pressure. on said member to turn it
turning
885,489
about its pivot, said means being brought
to potential relation in mounting said mem-
ber upon said support, substantially as set
forth.
5 4. In a talking-machine, a tubular mem-
ber, a support on which said member is pivot-
ally mounted, a sound-box connected to the
free end of said member, and a spring en-
gaged and put under tension by said mem-
10 ber in mounting the same upon said support,
substantially as set forth.
5. In a talking-machine, a sound-convey-
ing device including a support having an
opening therethrougb and a tubular member
15 pivotally mounted thereon in communica-
tion with said opening, a sound-box connect-
ed to the free end of said tubular member,
and means inclosed within said sound-con-
veying device for exerting pressure on said
20 tubular member to turn it about its pivot,
said means being brought to potential rela-
tion in mounting said member upon said sup-
port, substantially as set forth.
6. In a talking-machine, a sound-convey-
25 ing device including a support having an
opening therethrough and a tubular member
pivotally mounted thereon in communica-
tion with said opening, a sound-box connect-
ed to the free end of said tubular member,
30 and a spring within said sound-conveying
device exerting pressure on said tubular mem-
ber to turn it about its pivot, said spring
being engaged and put under tension by said
member in mounting the same upon said
35 support, substantially as set forth.
7. In a talking-machine, a support having
an opening therethrough, a tubular tone-arm
pivotally mounted thereon in communica-
tion with said opening, a spring carried by
40 one of said parts and engaging the wall of the
opening through the other to exert pressure
tending to turn said tone-arm about its pivot,
and a sound-box connected to the free end
of the tone-arm, substantially as set forth.
45 S. In a talking-machine, a support having
an opening therethrough, a tubular tone-arm
pivotally mounted thereon in communica-
tion with said opening, a spring carried by
one of said parts and exerting pressure tend-
50 ing to turn said tone-arm about its pivot,
said spring being carried into engagement
with the wall of the opening through the
other of said parts and put under tension
thereby in mounting the tone-arm on the
55 support, and a sound-box connected to the
free end of the tone-arm, substantially as set
forth.
9. In a talking-machine, a coupling-mem-
ber having an opening therethrough, a tone-
60 arm pivotally mounted on said member, its
end entering within said opening, a post
mounted on said member within the opening
therein and adjacent to the end of the tone-
arm, a spring secured to said post and engag-
ing the end of the tone-arm to turn the arm 65
about its pivot and a sound-box connected
to the free end of the tone-arm, substantially
as set forth.
10. In a talking-machine, the combination
of a holder for a sound-record, means for 70
driving the same and the record thereon, a
pivoted sound-conveying device, a repro-
ducer connected .to said device and having a
stylus coacting with the record-groove, means
independent of the sound-record for exerting 75
yielding pressure on said device to move the
reproducer across the sound-record so that
the stylus thereof will track in the record-
groove, means for arresting the movement of
the sound-conveying device, and means for 80
effecting an adjustment of said arresting
means, substantially as set forth.
11. In a talking-machine, the combination
of a holder for a sound-record, means for ro-
tating the same and the record thereon, a 85
support, a sound-conveying device pivoted
thereon, reproducing mechanism including a
stylus connected to said device, means inde-
pendent of the sound-record for exerting
yielding pressure on said device to move said 90
mechanism across the sound-record so that
the stylus thereof will track in the record-
groove, coacting surfaces on said support and
device brought into engagement by the move-
ment of said device about its pivot and serv- 95
ing to arrest such movement, and means for
effecting an adjustment of one of, said sur-
faces, substantially as set forth.
12. In a talking-machine, the combination
of a holder for a sound-record, means for ro- 100
tating the same and the record thereon, a
coupling-member, a vertical pin thereon, a
tone-arm, a sleeve pivoted on the tone-arm
and receiving said pin, a collar having a notch
cut therein adjustably mounted on said pin 105
and a projection on said sleeve entering said
notch, substantially as set forth.
13. In a talking-machine, the combination
of a holder for a soxmd-record, means for ro-
tating the same and the record thereon, a 110
support, a sound-conveying device pivoted
on the support, reproducing mechanism con-
nected to said device and having a stylus
tracking in the record-groove, a collar on the
pivot of said device having a notch cut there- 115
in one wall of which is inclined, means for se-
curing said collar upon said pivot in various
angular positions, and a projection on said
device entering said notch, said projection
being adapted to move down said inclined 120
wall- by gravity to exert yielding pressure on
said sound-conveying device to turn it on its
pivot and to engage another wall of the notch
to arrest said movement, substantially as set
forth. 125
14. In a talking-machine, the combination
of a holder for a sound-record, means for ro-
tating the same and the record thereon, a
885,489
support, a sound-conveying device pivotally I pressure on said device, substantially as set
mounted thereon, reproducing mechanism j forth.
10
connected to said device and having a stylus
tracking in the record-groove, means actu-
ated by movement of said device under the
influence of gravity for exerting yielding-
pressure thereon tending to turn it on its
pivot, and a spring also exerting yielding
This specification signed and witnessed
this 25 dav of October, 1907.
THCBIAS KRAEMER.
Witnesses :
H. Meier,
H. MUHLSCHLEGEL.
No. 885,490.
PATENTED APR. 21, 1908.
T. KRAEMER.
SOUND BOX FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED DEC. 21, 1907.
£]iqrrl.
-£ji>Grr&
13 /*
WITNESSES:
/5
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY '
THE NORRtS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS KRAEMER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO HAWTHORNE &
SHEBLE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA. PENNSYLVANIA, A CORPO-
RATION OF PENNSYLVANIA.
SOUND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 885,490.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Patented April 21, 1908.
Application filed December 21, 1907. Serial No. 407,577.
I
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas Kkaemer, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
city and county of Philadelphia, State of
5 Pennsylvania, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Sound-Boxes
for Talking-Machines, of which the following
is a specification.
This invention relates to talking machines
10 and has reference, more particularly, to
sound-boxes for use therewith.
The invention is directed to the provision
of a sound-box of an improved construction
in the use of which a sound reproduction of
15 superior tone quality is obtained and one
which is, to a large extent, free from foreign
1 sounds. This is accomplished by the em-
ployment of an improved form of diaphragm
in the sound-box, this being a metallic disk
20 having secured thereto a small body of non-
metalhc material which lies between the dia-
phragm and the lever by which the dia-
; phragm is vibrated. The material from
! which this body is formed may be varied as
25: desired and with different materials, repro-
ductions differing in tone quality are ob-
tained. Thus a small disk of heavy paper or
of blotting paper heavily calendered may be
employed, this disk being fixed to the center
30 of the diaphragm. Preferably, the sound-
box is so constructed that the diaphragm
may be readily withdrawn therefrom and a
number of diaphragms having non-metallic
bodies of different materials fixed thereto are
35 provided. The user of the sound-reproduc-
ing apparatus may then select and use the
diaphragm which, under the particular con-
ditions prevailing, will give the most faith-
ful reproduction. Moreover, my improved
40 sound-box is so constructed that it may be
manufactured at low cost and the danger of
breakage or displacement of the parts is re-
duced to a minimum.
The preferred embodiment of my inven-
45 tion is illustrated in the accompanying draw-
ings in which
Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of a sound-
box, Figs. 2 and 3 are views of opposite sides
of the diaphragm and Fig. 4 is a sectional
50 view of the diaphragm, the section fine being
transverse to that of Fig. 1.
Referring to the drawings, the sound-box
is shown as having a main wall 1 , an opening
therethrough with which the sound-conveying
tube is adapted to be connected, and a circu- 55
lar flange 3 at the outer edge of the wall 1
forming the outer wall of the box. Fitting
I closely within wall 3 is a rubber strip or ring
j 4 forming a support for the diaphragm 5,
this ring being retained in position by a cir- 60
cular ridge 6 integral with and rising from
waU 1. The stylus -lever 7 is pivotally
mounted upon wall 3 and at its outer end has
an opening therein to receive a stylus 8, the
latter being held in position by a set-screw 9. 65
In the present instance I have shown the
stylus-lever as provided with notched lugs 10
on opposite sides thereof which receive knife-
edges on a sheet-metal piece 11 secured to
wall 3. The end 12 of this piece is bent over 70
and bears on lever 7,. exerting a spring ten-
sion thereon tending to turn the lever about
the knife-edges as pivots in a direction to
press the inner end of the lever against the
diaphragm. 75
The diaphragm 5 is a sheet-metal disk
preferably pressed so that the central por-
tion is slightly displaced from the plane of
the edge portion. At the center of the disk
5 is secured a small disk 13 of non-metallic £
material as paper, this being held in place by
an annulus 14 of light sheet-metal at oppo-
site edges of which are integral tangs 15 ex-i
tending through openings in disk 5 and I
turned over against the disk as shown in p5
Figs. 3 and 4. The inner end of the stylus-
lever 7 extends through the opening in the
annular casing 14 and bears' on the disk 13.
By this construction, the vibrations of the
stylus and stylus -lever are transmitted 90
through the disk 13 to the diaphragm 5.
This disk is of non-inetallic material and
may be of heavy paper, blotting paper hav-
ing a calendered surface, or rubber of jvary-
ing degrees of hardness. I have found in
practice that the provision of such a non-
metallic disk greatly improves the tone
quality of the sound-reproduction and re-
duces considerably the foreign noises usually
termed "scratching" and "blasting". The 100
diaphragms constructed as shown may be
manufactured at low cost and there is little
liability of displacement of the parts as it
will be seen that the structure is simple and
the number of parts small. The sound-box 105
is so constructed that the diaphragm may be
readily removed, this requiring merely that
the stylus-lever be turned on its pivot against
885,490
the tension of spring 12. A user of a talking
machine may therefore have a plurality of
diaphragms 5 provided with disks 13 differ-
ing in material and may use, for each repro-
5 duction, the diaphragm which will give the
best results.
Having described my invention what I
claim as new therein and desire to secure by
Letters Patent of the United States is:
10 1. A sound-box having a diaphragm, a
thin flat piece of non-metallic material, a
casing therefor securing said piece to the
diaphragm, a stylus-lever pivotally mounted
on a wall of the box and bearing at its inner
15 end on said piece and a stylus secured to the
outer end of the lever, substantially as de-
scribed.
2. A sound-box having a diaphragm, a
thin flat piece of non-metallic material, a
20 casing therefor securing said piece to the
diaphragm, said casing having an opening
therethrough, a stylus-lever pivotally mount-
ed on a wall of the box and having its inner
end extending through the opening in said
casing and bearing on said piece, and a stylus 25
secured to the outer end of the lever, sub-
stantially as described.
3. A sound-box having a diaphragm, a
disk of non-metallic material, an annular
casing overlying the same and having tangs 30
extending through openings in the dia-
phragm and holding the casing and disk
thereto, a stylus-lever pivotally mounted on
a wall of the box and having its inner end
extending through the opening in said casing 35
and bearing on said disk and a stylus secured
to the outer end of said lever, substantially
as described.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 18th day of December, 1907.
THOMAS KRAEMER.
Witnesses :
John A. Zoells, t
D. S. Edmonds.
■S
ft
No. 885,989.
PATENTED APR. 28, 1908.
W. FITZPATRICK.
GRAPHOPHONE NEEDLE.
APPLIOATIOH PILED JTTLY31, 1907.
H"
Fi-E-
fe 3
jffll
^WUn«3ae»
7. df/u-^c-
' /J/7 •
SLttot.nt.ift.
tWk'MORXII PCTER3 CO.. WASH1HOTCH, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM FITZPATRICK, OF LOWELL, MASSACHUSETTS.
GRAPHOPHONE-NEEDLE.
No. 885,989.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented April 28, 1908.
Application filed July 31, 1907. Serial No. 386,437.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William Fitzpatrick,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Lowell, in the county of Middlesex and State
5 of Massachusetts, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Graphophone-
Needles, of which the following is a speci-
fication.
My invention relates to graphophone
10 needles, and has for object the production of
a needle of superior qualities so far as dura-
bility and tone production are concerned.
A further object is to produce a needle of
such construction that the resulting tone may
15 be modified according to the way the needle
is fixed in the reproducer.
To these and other ends which will be ob-
vious to one skilled in the art, my invention
consists of the elements, combinations and
20 arrangements of parts, all as will be here-
inafter fully set forth, and succinctly defined
in the annexed claims.
In the accompanying drawings, in which I
have illustrated various embodiments of the
25 invention: Figure 1 is a perspective of a
needle embodying my invention; Fig. 2 is a
perspective at right angles of the subject
matter of Fig. 1; and Fig. 3 shows in per-
spective a modified form of the invention.
30 Referring to the numerals on the drawing,
1 indicates in a general way a phonograph or
graphophone needle, having a point 2, and a
butt 3, the latter adapted to be held in the
reproducers. Intermediate the point and
35 butt the needle is provided with flattened
portions 4, 5, and 6 alternating with portions
7, 8 and 9 which have not been flattened.
As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, the said flattened
portions are in alinement, and the flat nearest
40 the point is made thinner than the others,
because at the point, and at the butt the
needle is ordinarily most inflexible, while
there is usually some resiliency at the middle.
In Fig. 3 I have shown a modification, in
45 which alternate flats are at angles to each
other. By this construction the needle is
flexible, no matter whether the needle be se-
cured in the reproducer so that a particular
flat is alined with the line of travel of the
point, or at an angle to said line of travel. 50
By the construction shown in the other
figures, if the needle is so held that the flats
lie in a plane transverse to the line of travel
of the point, there will be greater flexibility
in the needle, and the tone will be modified, 55
and free from roughness. If it be desired to
produce a loud, strident tone, the needle is
arranged so that the flats are in line with the
line of travel of the point; the needle is now
less flexible in the direction in which the 60
bending tendency occurs, consequently there
is rougher vibration.
It is to be understood that I do not limit
myself herein to specific forms, materials, or
relations, other than those set out in the 65
claims, except such as may be necessary to
practically embody the invention there de-
fined.
What I claim is : —
1. A phonograph needle provided with a 70
series of flattened portions arranged at inter-
vals between the point and the butt thereof,
one of said flattened portions being thinner
than the others.
2. A phonograph needle provided with a 75
series of flattened portions arranged at inter-
vals between the point and the butt thereof,
the flattened portion nearest the point being
thinner than the others.
3. A phonograph needle provided with a 80
series of flattened portions arranged at inter-
vals between the point and the butt thereof,
alternate flattened portions being arranged
at an angle to each other.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 85
in presence of two witnesses.
WILLIAM FITZPATRICK.
Witnesses :
John J. Devine,
John Kearney.
M°' 8"6'056' PATENTED APE. 28, 1908.
J. 0. HIRSOHFELDER.
GRAPHOPHONE, PHONOGRAPH, AND THE LIKE.
APPLICATION PILED JULY 16, 1907.
.(7%*M<&a
a£
f
elmjentot
fltfot*
m^ot
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOSEPH OAKLAND HIRSCHFELDEE, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA.
GRAPHOPHONE, PHONOGRAPH, AND THE LIKE.
No. 886,056.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented April 28, 1908.
Application filed July 16, 1907. Serial No. 384,014.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Joseph Oakland
Hirschfelder, citizen of the United States,
residing at San Francisco, in the county of
5 San Francisco and State of California, have
invented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Graphophones, Phonographs, and
the Like, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
10 My invention relates to improvements in
the sounding box, sound conducting tubes
and horns employed to conduct sound from
graphophones, phonographs, talking ma-
chines and the like, sound reproducing in-
15 struments, and it has for its object the pro-
vision of means whereby the vibrations of
such parts are prevented or reduced to a
minimum.
In the carrying out of my invention I
20 avoid all vibrating edges in the instrument
by covering or protecting the same so as to
make the whole sound conducting part a
simple tube which gives no secondary or ac-
cessory vibrations, thereby preventing the
25 metallic or harsh effect produced by the
sound waves from such instruments and pre-
serving the natural tone of the vocalization
when such instruments are producing repro-
ductions of the human voice, and the true
30 resonant character of the notes when the
same is used in the reproduction of vocal and
instrumental music.
In the accompanying drawing illustrating
my invention the figure shown is a central
35 longitudinal section through the sound box,
conducting tube, elbow and horn of a sound
reproducing instrument.
1 is the sound box and 2 the sound con-
ducting tube extending therefrom.
40 3 is an elbow tube connecting the outer end
of the tube 2 with the inner end of the horn 4.
5 designates a bracket supporting the horn
sections.
The horn 4 may be made from pasteboard,
45 papier-mache, or metal, but I have found
that the best effect results from the use of
pasteboard as the material therefor.
I line the sound box, the tubes leading
therefrom and the horn with a lining of rub-
ber, felt, cloth or other similar material, 50
, such lining being secured smoothly in place
either by mechanical means or by the use of
paste or other suitable adhesive compound.
This lining may be made as a continuous
tube throughout the connecting sound con- 55
ducting parts, or each one of such parts may
be provided with a separate lining. The ma-
terial must however be placed on the inte-
rior of each of the sound producing parts to
produce the desired result. The sound 60
waves passing through the sound conducting
parts provided with my improvement do not
cause the mechanical vibrations present in
such parts not provided therewith, and free-
dom from the objectionable features herein 65
recited is thus secured.
Having thus described my invention what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent is:
1. A horn for phonographs or similar in- 70
struments, comprising a tapered portion and
an elbow portion both of which parts are
lined throughout with a continuous sound
deadening material consisting of rubber, felt,
or cloth, as set forth. 75
2. The combination with a horn for phono-
graphs or similar instruments, comprising a
tapered portion and an elbow portion, both
of which parts are lined throughout with a
continuous sound deadening 'material, of a 80
sound box to which such horn is adapted to
be connected, said sound box being also lined
with sound deadening material, as set forth.
3. The combination with a horn for phono-
graphs or similar instruments, comprising a 85
tapered portion and an elbow portion, both
of which parts are lined throughout with a
continuous sound deadening material con-
sisting of rubber, felt, cloth, or the like, of a
sound box to which said horn is connected 90
and the interior of which is lined with the
material constituting the lining of the horn.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature-
in presence of two witnesses.
JOSEPH OAKLAND HIRSCHFELDER.
Witnesses :
Daniel Block,
Wilfred Lyman.
No. 887,429. PATENTED MAY 12, 1908.
L. ROSENTHAL.
APPARATUS FOR RECORDING AND REPRODUCING SOUND.
APPLICATION PILED OCT. 10, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
Ficf.l.
<m.
t/w///////////////////;//////////M M////////////////////////M J-V7K*
v//////////////////////////y///m.
"VTct
,TZE55 E.S --
C^C*^ts
s-JLtzn/elt-lLdf^ 7
THE NQRR1S HETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
L
No. 887,429. PATENTED MAY 12, 1908.
L. ROSENTHAL.
APPARATUS FOR RECORDING AND REPRODUCING SOUND.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 10, 1007,
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
Fty.2.
1
■ y\ ' ■iiiiiiiiiiiiiii iriiimiiiiiiii||fljw |
Tiy. 3.
JLtzVe: TL L D F\
THE MORRIS PETCRS CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LOUIS ROSENTHAL, OF FRANKFORT-ON-THE-MAIN , GERMANY.
APPARATUS FOR RECORDING AND REPRODUCING SOUND.
No. 887,429.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 12, 1908.
Application filed October 10, 1907. Serial No. 396,757.
15
/.
20
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Louis Rosenthal, a
subject of the Emperor of Germany, residing
at Frankfort-on-the-Main, Germany, have
invented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Apparatus for Recording and Re-
producing Sound, of which the following is a
specification.
It is a generally felt disadvantage in the
10 known machines or apparatus for recording
and reproducing sounds that the capacity of
the record-disks for recording the sounds is
very limited in proportion to the size of the
disks. This results from the fact that the
length of the spiral path of the stylus on the
rotating disk corresponding to one revolu-
tion of said disk increases with each revolu-
tion of the same so that, since the speed of
rotation of the disk remains the same, con-
tinuously increasing intervals must occur
between the records of the separate sounds in
the spiral grooves in order to maintain uni-
form sequence of the sounds in reproduction.
If this were not so, disks of the size at present
25 in general use could easily receive up to three
times the number of sounds heretofore pos-
sible. Recognizing this disadvantage, it has
been proposed to -d^iyethe^aid disk carrier
through a stationaryTnction disk and to
move the disk carrier laterally by means of
its support in proportion to the relative
advance of the stylus, but tins suggestion
has not been carried out practically because
the apparatus would become too bulky on
35 account of having to provide room for the
two extreme positions of the disk carrier,
an even more cogent reason being that the
lateral motion of the disk carrier causes
loosening in the bearings, which gives rise to
40 vibrations detrimental to sound reproduc-
tion. This latter effect is enhanced by the
direct driving of the disk carrier from the
friction disk which, since it exercises a one-
sided pressure on the disk carrier, is liable to
45 cause wabbling and jamming. By the solu-
tion found in the present invention these dis-
advantages are obviated. The disk carrier
is driven in such a manner as to completely
remove the load therefrom, and its speed of
50 rotation is decreased in proportion to the
advance of the stylus.
The inclosed drawings show in Figure 1 a
side view, Fig 2 top view, Fig. 3 a detail.
The disk carrier a is firmly mounted on
55 shaft b which has an upper bearing c and
runs at the bottom in a step bearing on the
i
30
base d. On the same shaft near d is firmly
mounted a disk e equal in size to the disk
carrier a, and by which shaft b is driven.
Disk e is driven by the friction disk/, coupled 60
with a spur wheel g gearing with a spur wheel
Ic on shaft h which is driven by a clockwork i
in known manner. For the purpose of re-
sisting the pressure exercised by friction roll
/on disk e underneath the latter near its pe- 65
riphery a roll I is arranged, on which disk e
runs.
The simultaneous and uniform advance of
the stylus m is synchronized with that of
friction roll /as follows: — Two guide rods n, 70
o are arranged across the casing of the appa-
ratus for guiding four boxes p, q, r, s. Two
of these p and q are rigidly joined by a rod t
preventing them from turning, whereas r and
s are rotatable but is coupled with the non- 75
rotatable box mounted on the same guide
rod in such manner that all four boxes can
only move together. On the box .9 is mount-
ed the two-armed lever u, v, the arm v of
which carries at its end the friction disk / 80
with the spur wheel g; on the box r is mount-
ed the arm w which is suitably formed to
carry the sound box x with the diaphragm.
The joint piece y connects the arms u, w.
From the shaft b by means of bevel-wheels 85
z, 1, 2, is driven the spur wheel 4, mounted
on the shaft 3. Shaft 3 is screw threaded,
and on it rests the spring-pressed hammer
5, which on rotation of shaft 3 moves
along said shaft like a nut. The hammer 90
5 is pivotally mounted at 6 on the bar t.
The hammer when moving therefore takes
with it all four boxes p, q, r, s and all the
parts mounted thereon including the sound
box and the friction roll/ In order that the 95
spur-wheel fc shall participate in this simul-
taneous movement, there is provided a fork
7 mounted on the box q.
When the whole mechanism has arrived at
its end position, it is released to permit its re- 100
turn by lifting the hammer 5, the diaphragm
and the friction roll/ For this purpose, by
means of the handle 18, a cam 19 is moved
which consists of a transversely extending
rod. At the commencement of this move- 105
ment, the cam presses on the tail of the ham-
mer 5 thereby lifting it from shaft 3. The
further rotation of the cam actuates the arm
u thereby moving simultaneously the sound
box w and the arm v, whereby the diaphragm no
and the friction roll /are lifted. To render
the returning of the mechanism to its origi-
887,429
nal position quick and handy there is pro-
vided a rod 9 having a button 10 serving as a
handle. A hand or pointer 11 likewise
mounted on the rod 9 and moving in front of
5 a scale 12 is arranged for the purpose of en-
abling record disks of the old systems to be
used in my improved apparatus. The rec-
ord disks now in common use require to be
rotated at a definite speed in order to give
10 correct reproduction of the sounds, and
scale 12 indicates the speed at which the disk
carrier rotates at each different position of
the pointer. As in this case the speed of ro-
tation should not be variable, the cam 8
15 must be turned till the hammer 5 is released;
the friction roll/ and the diaphragm however
still remain in the driving position.
What I claim is : —
1. An apparatus for recording and repro-
20 ducing sounds, said apparatus comprising a
rotatably mounted carrier-disk for a record
plate, a motor, a friction-roller co acting with
a plane surface rotating with said disk, a
sound-box, means controlled by the sound-
25 box for positively moving said friction-roller
axially in a direction substantially radial to
said surface, and means for rotatably and
movably connecting said friction roller with
said motor.
30 2. An apparatus for recording and repro-
ducing sounds, said apparatus comprising a
rotatably mounted carrier-disk for a record
plate, a friction-disk fixed to and rotating
with said carrier-disk, an anti-friction roller
35 for supporting said friction-disk, a motor, a
shaft driven by said motor, a friction-roller
driven by said shaft and adjustably con-
nected thereto so as to be capable of moving
in a direction substantially radial to said
40 friction-disk, a sound-box, guides for said
sound-box, gearing connecting said carrier-
disk and said sound-box and a positive con-
nection between said sound-box and said
friction-roller.
45 3. In an apparatus for recording and repro-
ducing sounds, a motor-shaft, a friction-roller
driven by said shaft and adjustable along
the same, guides extending substantially par-
allel to said shaft, boxes or guide-sleeves
50 movable on said guides, a sound-box carried
on said guide-sleeves, a frame mounted on
said guide-sleeves and bearing said friction-
roller, and means for moving said guide-
sleeves along said guides.
55 4. In an apparatus for recording and re-
producing sounds, a motor-shaft, a friction-
roller driven by said shaft and adjustable
along the same, guides extending substan-
tially parallel to said shaft, boxes or guide-
00 sleeves movable on said guides, a sound-
box carried on said guide-sleeves, a frame
mounted on said guide-sleeves and bearing
said friction-roller, a rotatably mounted rec-
ord-carrier disk driven by saicf friction-roller,
a feed-screw, gearing connecting said car- 65
rier-disk and said feed-screw, and a ham-
mer mounted on said guide-sleeves and hav-
ing female sere w-thre ads and detachably
engaging said feed-screw.
5. In an apparatus for recording and re- 70
producing sounds, a motor-shaft, a friction-
roller driven by said shaft and adjustable
along the same, guides extending substan-
tially parallel to said shaft, boxes or guide-
sleeves movable on said guides, a sound- 75
box carried on said guide-sleeves, a frame
mounted on said guide-sleeves and bearing
said friction-roller, a rotatably mounted rec-
ord-carrier disk driven by said friction-roller,
a feed-screw, gearing connecting said car- 80
rier-disk and said feed-screw, a hammer
mounted on said guide-sleeves and having
female screw-threads and detachably engag-
ing said feed-screw, and gearing mounted in
said frame and connecting said friction-roller 85
and said motor-shaft.
6. An apparatus for recording and repro-
ducing sounds, said apparatus comprising
a record-carrier-disk, a rotatably mounted
shaft bearing said carrier-disk, a friction-disk 90
fixed on said shaft, an anti-friction roller sup-
porting said friction-disk, a feed-screw, gear-
ing connecting said carrier-disk and said
feed-screw, guide-ways, a carriage movable
on said guide-ways, a sound-box on said car- 95
riage, a segmental nut on said carriage, means
for bringing said nut into and out of engage-
ment with said feed-screw, a friction-roller
rotatably mounted in said carriage and co-
acting with said friction-disk, a motor, a 100
shaft driven by said motor, and gearing
mounted in said carriage and rotatably con-
necting said motor shaft and said friction-
wheel.
7. In an apparatus for recording and re- 105
producing sound, the combination of a rotary
part comprising the record carrier disk,
means for rotating said part comprising a
friction roller, bearing against said part and
movable radially thereof, the sound-box, 110
operative connecting means between the
friction roller and the sound-box whereby to
effect the movement of the friction roller
radially of said rotary part and means for
rotating the friction roller, substantially as 115
described.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set
my hand in presence of two subscribing
witnesses.
LOUIS ROSENTHAL.
Witnesses :
Henry Hasper,
woldemar haupt.
No. 887,657. PATENTED MAT 12, 1908.
T. KRAEMER.
SOUND BOX FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED JULY 15, 1907.
*tyj.
3/
JC
-f£c?£
•^z'c/ *5~
7%,. 7.
ee
stye
£2'
-JV2U2/mx\y
TVK NORR1S PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS KRAEMER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO HAWTHORNE &
SHEBLE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, A CORPORA-
TION OF PENNSYLVANIA.
SOUND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 887,657.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 12, 1908.
Application filed July 15, 1907. Serial No. 383,720.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas Kraemer, a
citizen of the United States, residing in
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have invented
5 certain Improvements in Sound-Boxes for
Talking-Machines, of which the following is a
specification.
The object of my invention is to so con-
struct a sound box for talking machines that
10 it will comprise but few parts, each of simple
and inexpensive construction. This object I
attain in the manner hereinafter set forth,
reference being had to the accompanying
drawing, in which
15 Figure 1 is a transverse vertical section of
one form of sound box constructed in accord-
ance with my invention; Fig. 2 is a similar
view of another form of sound box embody-
ing the invention; Fig. 3 is a viewT of the
20 sound box shown in Fig. 1, looking in the di-
rection of the arrow x; Fig. 4 is a view of the
sound box shown in Fig. 2 looking in the di-
rection of the arrow y; Fig. 5 is a perspective
view of one of the elements of the sound
25 box shown in Fig. 1 ; Fig. 6 is a perspective
view of the corresponding element of the
sound box shown in Fig. 2, and Fig. 7 is a
view illustrating a modification of my inven-
tion.
30 The casing of the sound box shown in Figs.
1 and 3 comprises a pair of rings 1 and 2 fit-
ting snugly one inside of the other and se-
cured in position by means of transverse
screws or pins 3, the ring 2 having formed in-
35 tegral with it a centrally perforated disk 4, to
which is attached the tube 5 of the sound box
in the ordinary manner. The ring 1 has an
inwardly projecting flange 6, which consti-
tutes a seat for a ring 7 of rubber or other
40 elastic material, and between the latter and
a corresponding ring 9, adapted to an annu-
lar seat 10 on the disk 4, is confined the dia-
phragm 12 of the sound box.
To a boss 13 on one side of the ring 1 is se-
45 cured a plate 14 of steel or other sheet metal,
in which is formed a slot 15 whose bottom
wall presents knife-edged lugs 16 which con-
stitute pivotal bearings for oppositely pro-
jecting trunnions 17 on the stylus lever 19,
50 the inwardly projecting arm of the latter be-
ing bent so as to bear upon the center of the
diaphragm 12, and the outwardly projecting
arm of the lever presenting a socket 20 with
set screw 21 for the reception and retention
of the stylus. 55
The upper portion of the plate 14 is bent
forwardly and terminates in a projecting cen-
tral spring finger 22, which bears upon the
back of the stylus lever 19 and serves to
maintain its inner end positively in contact 60
with the diaphragm 12. The only difference
between the sound box shown in Figs. 2 and
4 and that shown in Figs. 1 and 3 lies in the
conformation of the stylus lever trunnions
and of the plate which serves as the fulcrum 65
and spring for the stylus lever. This plate
is shown at 14a in Figs. 2 and 4, and it has
the knife-edged lugs 16 a formed on the upper
wall of the slot 15a, the fulcrum notches of
the stylus lever 19 a being formed in the upper 70
faces of the trunnions 17a instead of in the
under faces of the same. The bent upper
portion of the plate is dispensed with and the
tension spring 22 a is projected from the
lower edge of the plate 14a and is bent so as 75
to press upwardly upon the outwardly pro-
jecting arm of the stylus lever, as shown in
Fig. 2, with the same effect as that exerted
by the downwardly pressing finger 22 of the
box shown in Fig. 1. 80
Although I prefer to provide the stylus le-
ver with laterally projecting trunnions and
the fulcrum plate with corresponding later-
ally separated fulcrum lugs, I may, in some
cases, modify such construction by forming 85
the fulcrum notch directly in the stylus lever
and mounting the latter upon a wall of the
slot, Fig. 7 illustrating such a modification as
applied to a sound box of the type shown in
Figs. 1 and 3, but it will, of course, be under- 90
stood that like modifications can be made in
the construction of a sound box of the type
shown in Figs. 2 and 4.
I claim: —
1 . The combination of a sound box casing, 95
a plate secured thereto and having a slot
therein, and a stylus lever passing through
said slot and fulcrumed directly upon one of
the walls of the same.
2. The combination of a sound box casing, 100
a plate secured thereto and having a slot
therein, a stylus lever passing through said
slot and fulcrumed upon one of the walls
thereof, and a spring on the plate bearing
887,667
upon but being disconnected from the stylus
lever and serving to maintain said fulcrum
bearing.
3. The combination of a sound box casing,
5 a plate secured thereto, and having a slot
therein, a stylus lever passing through said
slot and fulcrumed upon one of the walls of
the same, and a spring constituting an inte-
gral part of said plate, said spring bearing
10 upon but being disconnected from the stylus
lever and serving to maintain the fulcrum
bearing of the latter.
4. The combination of a sound box casing,
a stylus lever having notched trunnions, a
15 plate slotted for the reception of said trun-
nioned portion of the stylus lever and having
projecting fulcrum lugs for said trunnions,
and a spring constituting an integral part of
said plate, said spring bearing upon the sty-
20 lus lever, and serving to maintain its notched
trunnions in contact with said fulcrum lugs.
5. The combination of the sound box cas-
ing, its diaphragm and stylus lever, a plate
secured to said casing and presenting a ful-
25 crum for said stylus lever, and a spring bear-
ing upon but being disconnected from the
back of the stylus lever and serving to press
the same towards the diaphragm and ful-
crum.
30 6. The combination of the sound box cas-
ing its diaphragm and stylus lever, a plate
secured to said casing and presenting a ful-
crum for said stylus lever, and a spring con-
stituting an integral part of said plate, said
35 spring bearing upon the back of the stylus
lever and serving to press the same towards
the diaphragm and fulcrum.
7. A combined fulcrum and spring plate
for the stylus lever of a sound box, said plate
having a fulcrum for the stylus lever, and a 40
projecting spring tongue for bearing upon
the lever and pressing the same towards said
fulcrum.
8. A combined fulcrum and spring plate
for the stylus lever of a sound box, said plate 45
having a slot for the reception of the stylus
lever, and a projecting spring tongue for
bearing upon the lever and pressing the same
towards one of the walls of the slot.
9. A combined fulcrum and spring plate 50
for the stylus lever of a sound box, said plate
having a slot with laterally separated ful-
crum lugs therein and a spring tongue for
pressing the stylus lever towards said ful-
crum lugs. 55
10. A combined fulcrum and spring plate
for the stylus lever of a sound box, said plate
having a slot whose bottom wall constitutes
a fulcrum for the lever, and a bent top mem-
ber constituting a spring for bearing upon 60
the back of the lever.
1 1 . A combined fulcrum and spring plate
for the stylus lever of a sound box, said plate
having a slot whose bottom wall presents
laterally separated lugs constituting a ful- 65
crum for the lever, and a bent top member
constituting a spring for bearing upon the
back of the lever.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of 70
two subscribing witnesses.
THOMAS KKAEMER.
Witnesses :
Hamilton D. Turner,
Kate A. Beadle.
i
I
I
No. 887,833.
PATENTED MAY 19, 1908.
J. T. MYGIND.
PHONOGRAPH REPRODUCER.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 4, 1907.
Mgr.2. Figr.3. Jh/.4. Figr.S.
TTh
o
o
/ jV S/jT/V T<??^
rry?_
I NOXB1S pm*S CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JORGEN TVEDE MYGIND, OF COPENHAGEN, DENMARK.
PHONOGRAPH-REPRODUCER.
No. 887,833.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 19, 1908.
Application filed June 4, 1907. Serial No. 377,233.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Jorgen Tvede My-
gind, poly technician, subject of Denmark,
residing at Gl. Kongevej No. 13S, Copen-
5 hagen, Denmark, have invented new and
useful Improvements in Phonograph-Repro-
ducers, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
The object of the present invention is to
LO make the connection between pin and sound-
ing membrane of the reproducing-part of
Edison's and similar phonographs specially
light and of easy movement as well as free
from secondary sounds, thereby obtaining a
L5 more delicate and purer reproduction than
when using the usual reproducers of this
kind.
The principal feature of the invention con-
sists in the lever which carries the pin, and
20 which is connected to the membrane through
a link, being arranged in such a manner that
its three points of engagement, viz: the
point of contact between the pin and the
cylinder, the point of action of the connect-
25 ing link, and finally the fixed fulcrum of the
lever, situated between these two movable
points, lie as far as possible in a straight line.
According to the well-known laws of the
lever, the aforesaid arrangement affords the
$0 most favorable conditions for an easy move-
ment, and consequently a more delicate
reproduction may be obtained than by
means of the usual form "of the lever, in
which the three points in question form the
J 5 corners of a triangle. Besides this, the
invention provides for a suitable suspension
of the lever and a certain amount of damp-
ing of the connecting-link, so that the for-
mation of seconda^ sounds at these places
40 is avoided.
The invention is illustrated on the accom-
panying drawing, in which
Figure 1 shows a section through the
reproducer, Fig. 2 a cross section of the lever
45 through the suspension in the fulcrum, Fig. 3
the placing of the three points of engage-
ment of the lever on a straight line, and
-bigs. 4 and 5 each a form of the connecting
link.
50 a Fig. 1, is a membrane of copper or other
suitable material the edge of which is by
means of the screw-threaded clamping ring b
firmly wedged in between soft disks c of india-
rubber, paper or the like.
5 5 d is the external casing to which the funnel
(not shown) is fitted, and which by means of
a hinge e supports the usual p'late-piece/, the
top of which is bent back. The natural pro-
pensity of this to clap down is counteracted
for example by a lug g fitted onto the casing,
engaging a pin h. 60
A fork piece i (see Fig. 1) or two separate
pieces j (see Fig. 2) with bearings serve as
suspension means for the lever Tc, which is,
through the piece Z, connected to the center
of the membrane, and at its opposite end 65
said lever carries the pin m which slides on
the cylinder n.
As mentioned above, and as indicated in
Fig. 3 the three points of engagement are
placed as nearly as possible on a straight line. 70
Hereby is also attained the possibility of ma-
terially decreasing the bulk of the lever.
In order to effect a certain amount of
damping on the connecting link I so as to
avoid deleterious independent motion, it is 75
provided with a lump o of sealing wax or
shellac or the like fused onto it.
For the same reason instead of the usual
suspension of the lever by means of a screw
the suspension means as shown in Fig. 2 is 80
used, which consists in a piece of wire p, bent
to the shape of a crank, which is held in place
by its own tension.
Having now particularly described and
ascertained the nature of this said invention 85
and in what manner the same is to be per-
formed I declare that what I claim is :
1. A reproducing device for phonographs
comprising a casing, a membrane therein, a
forked member on the casing having open- 90
ings therein, a lever, a pin carried by one end
of the lever, a link connecting the other end
to the membrane, and a wire bent as a crank
on which the lever is carried, the ends of said
wire passing through the openings in the 95
forked member, and being held in place by
its own tension.
2. A reproducing device for phonographs
comprising a casing, a membrane therein
having an eye-bolt thereon, a lever pivoted 100
on the casing, a pin carried by one end of the
lever and a bent wire connecting the other
end of the lever to the eye bolt on the rnem-
brane, and a mass fused into the bent wire.
In testimony whereof I have signed my 105
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
JORGEN TVEDE MYGIND.
Witnesses :
P. Hofman-Banz,
Ernest Boutard,
No. 887,978 PATENTED MAY 19, 1908.
J. H. STINSON.
REPEATING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED DEO. 7, 1907.
2 SHEETS— SHEET 1.
ns^vrtu^
QAX&wwip
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 887,978. PATENTED MAY 19, 1908.
J. H. STINSON.
REPEATING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED DEO. 7, 1807.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2
J%7,3 j?#J9
36
j^&j:
T.W«^$
THE MORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
JAMES H. STINSON, OF COOKE, MONTANA.
REPEATING ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
No. 887,978.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 19, 1908.
Application filed December 7, 1907. Serial No. 405,628.
55
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, James H. Stinson, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Cooke, in the county of Park and State of
Montana, have invented a new and useful
Repeating Attachment for Phonographs, of
which the following is a specification.
This invention relates to repeating attach-
ments for phonographs.
The principal object of the invention is to
provide a device of simple construction which
may be readily attached to existing phono-
graphs and like sound reproducing machines
for the purpose of returning the sound box
carriage to the starting point after the com-
pletion of each reproducing operation.
A further object of the invention is to pro-
vide a device of this type that may be quickly
and accurately adjusted for the purpose of
starting the return movement as soon as the
reproduction is completed, so that the repro-
ducing stylus will not be compelled to travel
over a blank portion of the record.
With these and other objects in view, as
will more fully hereinafter appear, the in-
vention consists in certain novel features of
construction and arrangement of parts, here-
inafter fully described, illustrated in the
accompanying drawings, and particularly
pointed out in the appended claims, it being
understood that various changes in the form,
proportions, size and minor details of the
structure may be made without departing
from the spirit or sacrificing any of the ad-
vantages or the invention.
In the accompanying drawings : — Figure 1
is a front elevation of a phonograph provided
with a repeating attachment constructed in
accordance with the invention. Fig. 2 is a
plan view of the same. Fig. 3 is a detail per-
spective view of the attachment complete.
Fig. 4 is a vertical sectional view of a portion
of the same on an enlarged scale. Fig. 5 is a
transverse section on the line 5 — 5 of Fig. 4.
Fig. 6 is a detail transverse section on the line
6 — 6 of Fig. 4. Fig. 7 is a detail perspective
view of the carriage returning nut, detached.
Similar numerals of reference are employed
to indicate corresponding parts throughout
the several figures of the drawings.
In the drawing there is shown a portion of
an Edison phonograph including a frame A,
and a main shaft B, the latter carrying the
record supporting cylinder C and being
threaded for the reception of the half-nut of
the sound box carriage D, all of these parts
being of the usual construction.
Secured to the main frame at a point in
front of the shaft B is a plate 10 having up-
wardly bent ends forming brackets 11 for the go
reception of a pair of pivot screws 12, which
serve as supports for a return screw shaft 13,
this shaft having a quick pitch auger-like
thread, and being provided at one end with
a gear wheel 14, which is in constant mesh 65
with a gear wheel 15 carried by the main
shaft B, and this latter gear may for conven-
ience be connected in any suitable manner
to the power transmitting pulley E of the
main shaft. 70
Mounted on the plate 10 is a slidable plate
17, having at one end an upwardly bent arm
18 that is provided with an approximately
semicircular recess for the reception of a
grooved collar 19 that is loosely mounted on 75
the screw 13, and projecting inward from the
bore of the collar is a pair of pins 20 that fit
the threads of the shaft 13 in such manner
that the collar will be rotated with the shaft
while at the same time longitudinal move- 80
ment of the plate 17 will be readily accom-
plished for the purpose of moving said collar
in the direction of the length of the screw.
The plate 17 has an elongated slot 22 for
the passage of a pair of screws 23, that fit in 85
threaded openings tapped in the main frame,
and between the heads of the screws and the
upper face of the plate are washers 24 which
will exercise sufficient friction on the plate 17
to hold the latter in any position to which it 90
may be adjusted.
On the plate 10 is pivoted a small handled
lever 25, that is connected to the plate 17 by
a link 26, and this lever has a downwardly
projecting boss 27 that is arranged to enter a 95
series of notches or depressions 28 formed in
the main plate 10, these notches or depres-
sions being disposed in an arcuate row struck
from the center of movement of the lever 25,
and when the boss engages with these notches 100
or depressions, the lever will be firmly held,
and movement of the plate 17 prevented.
On the half-nut carrying arm of the sound
box carriage is secured an arm 30 that pro-
jects over and forward of the main shaft, and 105
to the front end of this arm is pivoted a nut
31, having a tooth-like projection 32 that is
arranged to engage with one side of the
thread of the screw 13, while the main por-
tion of the lower face of the nut is slightly 110
887,978
rounded in order that it may ride freely on
top of the thread. To the rear face of this
nut is secured a pendent tongue 33, that en-
gages with the rear of the screw 13, while the
' 5 nut is in operative position, and prevents the
nut moving forward over the screw to inop-
erative position, and said tongue will serve
further as a means for automatically disen-
gaging the nut from the screw in case the
10 latter reaches the end of the thread.
One side of the nut is cut away to form an
inclined shoulder 34, that is arranged to be
engaged by a pin 35 projecting from the face
of the collar 19, this pin serving to lift the nut
25 up into engagement with the screw, the
movement being from the dotted line posi-
tion to the full line position of Fig. 6.
At that end of the plate 10 nearest the gear
14 is a standard 37 on which is pivoted a nut
20 disengaging arm 38, which may be turned to
any position over the screw 13 and locked in
place by a nut 39. The function of this arm
is to engage the nut and move the latter to
inoperative position by the time the record-
25 ing stylus has reached a position over the
starting point of the record, and this arm
may be readily adjusted and locked in place
in accordance with the position of the record
on the cylinder.
30 In operation, the screw 13 is constantly
rotated, so long as the main shaft B is oper-
ated, and during a reproducing operation,
the nut 31 hangs in a position immediately
to the rear of the screw.13, this position being
35 best indicated by the dotted line in Fig. 6.
When the reproduction is completed, the pin
35 will engage the shoulder 34 of nut 31, and
will lift the latter from the dotted line posi-
tion to the full line position of Fig. 6, so that
40 the tooth 32 of the nut will engage the thread
of the screw 13, while the tongue 33 will en-
gage against the rear face of the screw and
will prevent the nut from moving forward to
inoperative position. This movement will,
45 also, be transmitted to the sound box car-
riage through the arm 30, so that the repro-
ducing stylus will be raised from the record.
The screw 13 will then rapidly move the nut
and sound box carriage toward the starting
50 point, and when the movement is completed,
the nut will engage the arm 38 and will be
deflected rearward to a position out of en-
gagement with the screw, allowing the sound
box carriage to descend, placing the repro-
55 ducing stylus in contact with the record
cylinder. As the records are not always of
the same length, and start and end at differ-
ent points from the ends of the record cylin-
der, the arm 38 may be adjusted to effect
60 disengagement of the nut at the starting
point of the record, while the collar 19 may
be quickly adjusted in order to raise the car-
riage and start the return movement imme-
diately after the completion of the record.
65 Should the arm 38 be moved out of oper-
ative position, the depending tongue 33 of the
latter will by engagement with the unthread-
ed portion of the screw 13 move said nut
rearward to inoperative position and prevent
breakage or disarrangement of the parts. 70
I claim: —
1. A phonograph repeating attachment
comprising a screw rotatable continuously
while the phonograph is in operation, a nut
carried by the sound box carriage, means 75
carried by the screw for elevating the nut
into engagement with the thread of said
screw and at the same time raising the sound
box for engagement with the record, means
for adjusting the screw-carried means with so
relation to the length of the record, and
means for determining the different positions
of adjustment of the screw-carried means
and for stopping the adjusting means in such
different positions of adjustment. 35
2. A phonograph repeating attachment
comprising a screw capable of continuous ro-
tation during the operation of the phono-
graph, means carried by the screw for con-
necting the sound box carriers thereto and at 90
the same time disconnecting the sound box
carrier from engagement with the record,
and means for adjusting the elevating means
for the sound box carriage longitudinally on
the screw, said means being supported inde- 95
pendently of the screw.
3. In a repeating attachment for phono-
graphs, a screw connected to the phono-
graph, drive mechanism for continuous ro-
tation while the phonograph is in operation, 100
a sound box carriage, a nut carried thereby
and disengaged from the screw while the
sound box is in reproducing relation to the
record, a collar on the screw rotatable about
the longitudinal axis thereof, means in en- 105
gagement with said collar for adjusting the
latter longitudinally on the screw and for
holding the same in the adjusted positions,
and means on said collar for engaging and
raising the nut into engagement with the
screw and at the same time elevating the
sound box out of operation with the record.
4. In a repeating attachment for phono-
graphs, a continuously revoluble screw, a
sound box carriage, a nut carried thereby 115
and disengaged from the screw during the re-
producing operation, a grooved collar cen-
trally bored for the free passage of the screw,
pins projecting inward from the collar for en-
gagement with the thread of the screw, an 120
adjustable plate having an upwardly bent
end portion recessed to receive the grooved
collar and through which said collar may be
adjusted in the direction of the length of the
screw, and a pin projecting from the screw 125
and arranged to engage and elevate the nut
at the end of each reproducing operation.
5. A repeating attachment for phono-
graphs comprising a screw capable of contin-
uous rotation by the actuating mechanism of 130
110
687,978
U
the phonograph, a collar mounted on said
screw and in continuous engagement there-
with for rotation by said screw, said collar
having means for moving the sound box out
5 of active relation to the record, and means
in constant engagement with said collar for
moving the latter longitudinally upon the
screw and for locking it in adjusted posi-
tions.
10 6. In a repeating attachment for phono-
graphs, a base plate having end standards, a
screw shaft mounted between said standards,
gearing connections between the screw shaft
and the main shaft of the machine, a slotted
15 plate adjustable endwise of the base plate,
guiding screws extending through said slot,
an adjusting lever connected to the slotted
plate and having a projecting boss, the base
plate being provided with an arcuate row of
20 notches or depressions to receive said boss, a
bracket arranged at the end of the slotted
plate and provided with an approximately
semi-circular recess, a grooved collar fitting
within said recess and surrounding the screw,
a pair of pins projecting inward from the col-
lar and engaging the thread of the screw, a
pin projecting from said collar, a sound box
carriage, an arm projecting therefrom, a nut
pivoted to the arm, and having a toothed
portion for engagement with the thread, said
nut having an inclined shoulder movable into
the path of movement of the collar pin, and
a tongue depending from the rear face of the
nut and arranged to engage the rear face of
the screw.
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as
my own, I have hereto affixed my signature
in the presence of two witnesses.
JAMES H. STINSON.
Witnesses :
Jas. M. Walker,
Jno. E. Parker.
25
30
35
!
No. 888,084.
PATENTED MAY 19, 1908.
L. T. HAILE.
SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED NOV. 11, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
Co
JEia.3.
JriJ€y.&.
Zi^.4.
IT-\
\% 16-
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
QM&uA.
Br ,
ATTORNEY.
THE NOftRtS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 888,084.
PATENTED MAY 19, 1908.
L. T. HAILE.
SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED NOV. 11, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
,L~La.S.
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY.
THE NQRRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, u. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LUTHER T. HAILE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINE.
No. 888,084.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 19, 1908.
Application filed November 11, 1907. Serial No. 401,565.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Luther T. Haile, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
city of Philadelphia, State of Pennsylvania,
5 have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Sound - Reproducing Ma-
chines, of which the following is a full, clear,
and exact description, reference being had to
the accompanying drawings, forming a part
10 of this specification.
My invention relates to sound-reproduc-
ing machines of any of the known types, em-
ploying either a cylinder or a disk record
with tubular means to convey sound-waves
15 from the reproducer to a horn or other sound-
discharging means ; and my invented device,
applicable to such machines has for its ob-
ject to modulate the tone of the sounds so
produced, from soft to loud or vice versa,
20 producing diminuendo or crescendo at will,
and while the instrument is playing if de-
sired, and at same time to modify the
quality — in respect of tone and timbre — of
such sounds by causing all or a part of such
£5 soup4-wayes, in motion through the conduit
therefor, to be acted upon by a vibratable
diaphragmatic valve, thus producing a
clearer tone and with better definition, and
also preserving the quality of the softer
30 tones which, in sound-reproducing machines
as commonly constructed, usually differ in
timbre from louder ones, especially when
sound-amplifying means are employed with
the machine.
85 To these ends my invention consists in the
combination with, a conduit through which
sound-waves are conducted and discharged
from a reproducer, in a sound-reproducing
machine, of a vibratable diaphragmatic valve
40 interposed in the path of movement of such
sound-waves ; with actuating means to cause
such valve to wholly or partly close the said
sound-conduit and cause the sound-waves,
p|iseharged through the same from the re^
45 producer, to be acted upon by the vibratable
diaphragm of the valve; also in detail fea-
tures of construction of the valve and its ad-
junctive parts, as hereinafter set forth,
In the accompanying drawings illustrating
50 my invention;— -Figure 1 is a sectional eleva-
tion of enough of one type of talking machine
as is necessary to illustrate my invention.
Fig. 2 is a section on the line a — b, of Fig. 1.
Fig. 3 is a plan view of the valve detached,
55 and Fig. 4 a section of the same on the line
a^—b 0f Fig. 3. Fig. 5 is a sectional elevation
of another form or type of sound-reproduc-
ing machine, showing the application of my
invention thereto. Fig. 6 is a plan view of a
detached part thereof. Fig. 7 an underside 60
plan view of a specific form of the valve, and
Fig. 8 a section thereof on the line a — b of
Fig. 7.
Referring now to said drawings in Fig. 1
thereof, 1 indicates the cabinet of a talking 65
machine, 2 the turn-table, 3 the disk record
thereon, 4 the reproducing diaphragm and
stylus, 5 and 8 the two sections of the tubular
sound-conveying arm, as commonly con-
structed, the sections being operatively 70
united by the journal bearing 7 supported by
the bracket 6, in order that the lower sec-
tion 5 may have a pivotal swing while the
upper section 8 is fixed. In the open end of
this upper section 8 the small end of the 75
megaphone horn 9 is removably mounted,
sleeve-like. At a point about midway in the
length of the fixed section 8 of the sound-con-
veying arm or conduit is mounted my dia-
phragmatic valve hereinafter described, it 80
being supported and actuated therein by the
provision of peripherally-mounted spindles
10, 10, one of which is actuated by a knob 11.
The spindles, where they pass through the
wall of the section 8 of the sound-conduit are 85
bushed by a sleeve 14 of felting or other
sound-insulation to prevent rattling, and I
prefer to add a washer device 12 for a like
purpose.
The valve is constructed of a flat annular 90
ring 15, on which is mounted a disk-like vi-
bratable diaphragm 16; and outside the pe-
riphery of the rim or ring 151 prefer to mount
a rubber ring to make a more or less tight,
joint between it and the wall of the tubular 95
sound-conduit. In Figs. 2 to 4 of the draw-
ings, I have shown a special form and charac-
ter of this valvular vibratable diaphragm,
made of wood, and in two sections 16 and 17
the latter resting on and cemented to the 100
former, and arranged relatively to each other
that the wood fibers of the two will run in
transverse directions as indicated by the.
hatched lines in said Fig. 4. It is not essen-
tial however tQ make the diaphragm 16 of 105
wood, nor to make it double by applying a
superposed diaphragm 17, It may be made
single as shown in Fig- 8,. Sheet 2,. in which 15
represents the annular supporting ring or rim
of the ya^ve, and 16 the vibratable diaphragm, nu
Jn such construction I prefer to mount with-
in the ring 15 * below and without touching
888,084
the under-face of the diaphragm 16, a series
of cross pieces, 19, forming a sort of grid —
see Figs. 7 and 8.
In Fig. 5 I have shown my vibratable dia-
5 phragmatic valve as applied to a form of ma-
chine invented by me and described and
claimed in an application heretofore filed by
me, Serial No. 375,766, in which the sound-
conveying conduit 5 discharges the sound-
10 waves from the reproducer into a resonance-
chamber indicated at 22 through an aperture
33 in the lower wall 22 a thereof (see Fig. 6)
this construction being shown because the
valve, instead of being actuated by rotation
15 on its axis, is fixed for horizontal movement
in a curved sidewise direction, to wholly or
partly cover or uncover the sound-inlet 33
and contiguous discharge end of the sound-
conduit 5. To do that properly I supply the
20 actuating mechanism shown in Fig. 6, con-
sisting of a jointed three-armed lever 26, 28
and 30, working on pivots 27 and 32; and
stop-screws 35, 35, are provided at suitable
places, to so limit the sidewise movement of
25 the valve 16 as to indicate to the operator
when it is wholly over or wholly off the aper-
ture 33 and the end of the sound-conduit 5
mounted therein. In such construction of
the actuating means for the valve, applied to
30 that type of machine, I prefer to bush the
lower face of the valve rim by a damping ma-
terial, such as felt, indicated at 20 in Figs. 6
and 8, to prevent rattling and to make a more
or less close joint between the adjacent face
35 of the valve and the part of which it pla3^s.
It is proper to add that the vibrating valve
seems to give the best results when it is not
made either too large or too small diamet-
rically, and I have found that two inches ex-
40 ternal diameter gives excellent results; and
this, of course, indicates where it should be
located, in the sound-conduit of a talking
machine of the types shown in Fig. 1 of the
drawings and indeed also in the other type of
45 sound-reproducing machine shown in Fig. 5.
It is a most important function of my de-
vice that it may be actuated while the ma-
chine is playing, (and hence while the section
of the sound-conduit, holding the reproducer,
50 is moving, with the latter, radially over the
disk-record, and to that end it is essential, in
the form of machine shown in Fig. 1, that it
be mounted in that section, 8, of the sound-
conduit, which is not movable relatively to
55 the disk-record 3, although obviously, if the
function recited of actuating the valve while
the machine is playing, is not desired, the
vibratable valve may be mounted in the
smaller end of the horn itself.
60 It is also to be noted that when the upper
diaphragm 17 in the duplex construction
shown in Fig. 4 is employed, it may best be
made of graduated thickness; as this insures
a stronger construction and better vibration
65 as well as a more even vibration throughout
the entire structure. The diaphragm may
also be made of prepared calf skin, such as is
used in drum heads; or of mica; or indeed of
any material of which fixed vibratable dia-
phragms are now commonly constructed. Or 70
if desired, in making a duplex structure, as
indicated in Fig. 4, a combination of different
substances may be employed, such as calf-
skin for the main diaphragm 16 and of wood
for the superposed diaphragm 17 ; these vari- 75
ous combinations of substances, the tone-
producing qualities of which are well known,
may be thus employed, to give a variety of
tone quality, as will be obvious to those
skilled in the art. 80
In further statement of the operation of
the device it may be said of the form of valvu-
lar diaphragm shown in Fig. 8 that the
sound-waves, are deflected by the grid strips
19 against the under face of the diaphragm 85
and cause a greater number of sound-waves
to act thereon than would otherwise be the
case, when the valve is partly open in the
sound-conduit, and insures practically an
even quality of tone regardless of the posi- 90
tion, for the time being, of the valve in the
conduit; my experience with it being that
this added feature of construction gives a
clearer and more musical tone and with much
better definition. 95
Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent : —
1. In combination with the sound - dis-
charge passage of a sound-reproducing ma- 100
chine, a vibratable diaphragmatic valve of
approximately equal diameter mounted
therein, with means to actuate it to adjust-
ably control the area of such passage, said
valve consisting essentially of an annular 105
rim, with a diaphragm mounted thereon com-
posed of two layers of vibratable material
such as prepared skin cemented to each
other, adapted to be sympathetically vibrated
by sound-waves discharged against it from 110
the reproducer.
2. In combination with the sound - dis-
charge passage of a sound-reproducing ma-
chine, a vibratable diaphragmatic valve,
which is movably adjustable to control the 115
area of such passage, said valve consisting
essentially of an annular rim, a vibratable
diaphragm of fibrous wood, mounted on said
rim, and a second diaphragm of like charac-
ter arranged with its fibers transversely to 120
those of the first mentioned diaphragm and
cemented to and over the face of the latter.
3. In combination with the sound - dis-
charge passage of a sound-reproducing ma-
chine, a vibratable diaphragmatic valve, 125
which is movably adjustable to control the
area of such passage, said valve consisting
essentially of an annular rim, a series of bars
forming a grid mounted diametrically within
said rim, a vibratable diaphragm, mounted on 1 30
888,084
said rim, and a second diaphragm cemented
to and over the face of the first diaphragm.
4. In combination with the sound-dis-
charge passage of a sound-reproducing ma-
5 chine, a vibratable diaphragmatic valve,
which is movably adjustable to control the
area of such passage, said valve consisting
essentially of an annular rim, a vibratable
diaphragm of approximately equal diameter
10 mounted thereon, and a series of bars forming
a grid mounted diametrically within said an-
nular rim of the valve.
5. In a sound-reproducing machine the
combination with a sound-chamber into
15 which sound-waves are discharged from a
tone-arm carrying a reproducer, of a valvu-
lar diaphragm governing the inlet to said
chamber and composed of a supporting rim
with a vibratable diaphragm mounted there-
20 on, and means to actuate it in a curved side-
wise direction, consisting of a pivotally-con-
nected three-armed lever, pivot pins connect-
ing and operatively supporting said levers,
and stop devices adapted to limit the side-
wise movement thereof. 25
6. In combination with the sound-dis-
charge tubular conduit of a talking machine
and with a communicating sound-passage-
way arranged transversely thereto, of a
vibratable diaphragmatic valve interposed 30
between such conduit and passageway, said
valve consisting of an annular rim, a resilient
ring on the periphery thereof, a vibratable
diaphragm mounted on said run, a damping
material such as felt on the lower face of said 35
annular rim, and means to actuate said valve.
In testimony whereof, I have hereunto
affixed mv signature this ninth day of No-
vember A". D. 1907.
LUTHER T: HAILE.
Witnesses :
A. M. Bitxdle,
Joseph W. Shannon.
No. 888,089. PATENTED MAY 19, 1908.
E. R. JOHNSON.
RECORD FOR TALKING MACHINES. '
APPLICATION PILED AUG. 30, 1904. EENEWED OOT. 12, 1907.
JZx?J?.
-J?tg.3.
WITNESSES:
7
*BV2222ZI£1ZZZZL
If
mi
'.'I'll ' MMMtt
INVENTOR
BY
ATTORNEY.
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ELDRIDGE R. JOHNSON, OF MERION, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
RECORD FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 888,089. Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 19, 1908.
Application filed August 30, 1904, Serial No. 222,687. Renewed October 12, 1907. Serial No. 397,168.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Eldeidge R. Johnson,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Merion, county of Montgomery, State of
5 Pennsylvania, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Records for
Talking-Machines, of which the following is a
full, clear, and complete disclosure of dif-
ferent forms thereof.
10 Heretofore in the manufacture of flat disk
records for talking machines it has been the
practice to stamp out the record disks from a
suitable material by means of a die contain-
ing a matrix upon the surface of which has
15 been engraved or otherwise placed the record
grooves, which grooves in connection with
the sound box are adapted to reproduce the
sounds impressed upon the origmal record.
The record disks formed by so impressing the
20 matrices have usually been of some hard, du-
rable material which softens under the influ-
ence of heat, but which is hard and firm un-
der normal conditions of -temperature. The
material usually employed for making these
25 records has been in the form of flat sheets and
have been of uniform thickness throughout
the entire extent of the disk with the possi-
ble exception of the central portion where the
label has been impressed or countersunk into
30 the material durmg the pressing or forming
of the record. This material, in many in-
stances has been a substance called "dura-
noid" which consists of shellac and certain
other coloring pigments and strengthening
35 ingredients. Other similar materials which
have been used are hard rubber and celluloid.
It will be realized that these compositions are
expensive when used in large quantities, es-
pecially in view of the fact that talking ma-
40 chine records now employed in this art have
been steadily increasing in size.
One object, therefore, of my invention is to
produce a record which ma}' have all the ad-
vantages of a flat disk record of uniform
45 thickness but which will at the- same time be
much lighter and, therefore, less expensive in
original cost and also will be easier to handle
and less expensive in transportation either
by mail, freight or express.
50 A further object of my invention is to pro-
vide a record disk which will be easily and ac-
curately centered upon the talking machine
turntable without the employment of unnec-
essary material at the center of the record
where the radius is too small for the efficient 55
recording of the sound waves.
A further object of my invention is the pro-
duction of a record which will have strength-
ening means of such form as to give a stiff and
firm backing for the reproducing surface in 60
connection with the central opening without
the necessity of employing the amount of
material required in a disk record having a
smooth under surface.
Briefly, my invention comprises a disk rec- 65
ord having the center which is free from the
grooves containing the sound waves cut away
or omitted forming an annular plate or sur-
face in the opening of which a card, label or
centering plate may be carried for the pur- 7 0
pose of fixing the record upon the turntable
in the usual manner.
For a full, clear and exact description of
these forms of my invention reference may
be had to the following specification and to 75
the accompanying drawing forming a part
thereof in which
Figure 1 is a reverse plan view of a talking
machine record having concentric strength-
ening ribs on its under surface and having 80
the center of said record provided with a cen-
tering plate made in accordance with my in-
vention; Fig. 2, a similar view of a record
having both concentric and radial strength-
ening ribs: and Figs. 3 and 4 are transverse 85
sectional views of the records shown in Figs.
1 and 2, and indicating two ways of attaching
the designating label which also serves in
these instances as centering means.
Referring to the drawings, the numeral 1 90
indicates a flat, annular piece of duranoid or
other material used in the manufacture of
records having a central opening 2 therein and
being provided upon the edge of said opening
and upon the outer edge by strengthening 95
flanges 3 and 4. The inner edge or surface of
the annular plate is provided with a lower
flange 5 upon which a disk 6 of metal, paste-
board or similar stiff material is adapted to
rest, said disk being held in position within 100
the said opening upon said flange in any suit-
able manner such as by cementing or being
impressed therein during the forming of the
record. The center of the disk 6 is provided
with an opening 7 which is adapted to receive 105
the central stud or shaft of the turntable
spindle in the usual manner
In
Fig.
2, I have shown in addition, to
888,089
the concentric strengthening ribs, radial
strengthening ribs 7 which give the required
stiffness to the record out to its extreme edge.
Different forms and arrangements of these
5 strengthening ribs have been described and
claimed in a separate application filed here-
with Ser. No. 222,685, dated August 30, 1904.
In Fig. 4, I have shown a construction
similar to that shown in Fig. 3 except that
10 the centering disk or label rests upon a flange
9 which is at the upper portion of the opening
3, the centering disk or label 6 being forced
against the same from the under side of the
record and being retained thereon in the
15 manner above referred to.
Having thus described these forms of my
invention, what I claim and desire to protect
by Letters Patent, is: —
1. In a record for talking machines, the
20 combination of a thin annular record por-
tion, having an internal and an external
flange, and radial ribs extending between
said flanges; of a centering disk, engaging
the inner flange of said annular portion and
25 permanently secured thereto.
2. In a record for talking machines, the
combination of a thin annular record por-
tion, having an internal and an external
flange and radial ribs extending between said
flanges, with a printed label engaging the 30
inner flange of said annular portion and per-
manently secured thereto.
3. In a record for talking machines, a com-
bination of a thin annular record portion
having an internal and external flange, shoul- 35
ders or seats on the inner edges of said flange,
and strengthening ribs extending between
said flanges; with a centering disk, perma-
nently secured to said shoulders or seat.
4. A record for talking machines compris- 40
ing a substantially flat disk having a central
opening therein occupying the space not
taken up by the record grooves, a flange upon
the inner surface of said opening and a plate
of thin durable material retained in position 45
upon said flange having a hole therein for
centering the record upon the turntable, said
plate also being adapted to receive printed
matter in the form of a label or otherwise.
In witness whereof, I have hereunto set my so
hand this 29th day of August, 1904.
ELDRIDGE R. JOHNSON:
Witnesses :
William F. Brennan,
Edw. W. Vaill, Jr.
■
No. 888,306.
PATENTED MAY 19, 1908.
W. A. CHAPMAN.
ATTACHMENT FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED AUG. 5, 1907.
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THE NORR1S PETERS CO.t WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM ALBERT CHAPMAN, OF SMITHVILLE, ARKANSAS.
ATTACHMENT FOB TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 888,306.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 19, 1908.
Application filed August 5. 1907. Serial No. 387,138.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William Albekt
Chapman, a citizen of the United States, and
a resident of Smithville, in the county of
5 Lawrence and State of Arkansas, have in-
vented a new and Improved Attachment for
Talking-Machines, of which the following is a
full, clear, and exact description.
My invention relates to talking machines
10 and admits of general use, but is of peculiar
value in connection with sound reproducers
employed upon disk talking machines.
Among the purposes of my invention are
general improvement of the tones, ameliora-
15 tion of the scratching and metallic harshness
and the development of delicate sounds dif-
ficult of reproduction.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawings forming a part of this specifica-
20 tion, in which similar characters of reference
indicate corresponding parts in all the fig-
ures.
Figure 1 is a fragmentary side elevation, of
a disk talking machine equipped with my in-
25 vention and ready for use; Fig. 2 is an en-
larged rear elevation of the diaphragm box
provided with a needle and with connections
for enabling the latter to transmit vibrations
to the diaphragm; Fig. 3 is a central vertical
30 section through Fig. 2 showing the adjusting
screw for controlling the movement of the
needle and also showing the means for trans-
mitting vibrations from the needle to the
diaphragm ; Fig. 4 is a front elevation of the
35 diaphragm box partly broken away; Fig. 5
is an edge view of the diaphragm showing
means for adjusting the vibrator which is
pivotally mounted upon the diaphragm box;
and Fig. 6 is a perspective of the vibrator and
40 its accompanying mechanism for carndng
the needle.
A horn is shown at 8 and a turntable at 9,
the latter being mounted upon a revoluble
stem 10 and supporting a disk tablet 11. A
45 sleeve 13 is connected with the diaphragm
box, 14, the latter having the form of a flat
receptacle and being provided with a bottom
15. This bottom is provided with a vent
passage 15 a.
50 A diaphragm is shown at 16 and at 17 is
shown a spring ring. Mounted upon this
spring ring are bosses 18 which project into
apertures 19 in the diaphragm box 14. The
spring ring 17 is provided with a slot 20 by
55 aid of which it may be contracted so as to
enter the diaphragm box. Lugs 21 are
mounted rigidly upon the diaphragm box and
disposed parallel with each other. A yoke
22, of substantially U-shape, is journaled
upon the lugs 21 hy aid of screws 23, the lat- 60
ter being conical-pointed and being adjust-
able.
A plate 24 is connected with the yoke 22
and is provided with a slot 25. A screw 26
extends through a lug 27 threaded to fit it 65
and mounted upon the bottom 15 of the dia-
phragm box. Spiral springs 28, 29 encircle
the screw 26. This screw has a slotted head
30 to receive the point of a screw driver. An
arm 31 is mounted integrally upon the yoke 70
22 and is provided with a tap 32 which en-
gages the center of the diaphragm 16. A
sleeve 33 is mounted rigidly upon the plate
24 and is thus rendered integral with the arm
31. The sleeve 33 carries a chuck 34 made 75
in halves, threaded externally, and encircled
by a ring 35, the latter being threaded in-
ternally.
A needle is shown at 36 and is inserted
within the chuck 34. By turning the ring 35 80
in one direction the chuck releases its grip
upon the needle, whereas by turning the ring
35 in the opposite direction, the needle is
gripped tightly.
A rubber gasket or washer 38 is mounted 85
in the sound box. This gasket or washer is
round in cross section and from one-eighth to
three-sixteenths of an inch in diameter, and
is seated in a groove in the wall of the sound
box, said groove being preferably of a depth 90
equal to one-third of the diameter of the
gasket or washer. Upon this gasket or
washer rests the diaphragm 16 and upon said
diaphragm rests a second rubber gasket or
washer 38a of the same shape and diameter 95
as the gasket or washer 38, but the gasket or
washer 38 a is not let into the wall of the
sound box; and upon said second gasket or
washer rests the spring ring 17. It will thus
be seen that through this arrangement the 100
edge of the diaphragm 16 rests on an in-
wardly sloping surface or seat formed by the
first gasket or washer 38, that the second
gasket or washer 38 a bears on the diaphragm
16 inside, this effecting the putting of the 105
diaphragm under a strain or tension, and the
spring ring 17 not only holds the system in
place, but further exerts a spring pressure on
the upper gasket or washer 38 a. This pres-
sure around the rim or near the edge of the 110
diaphragm induces a uniform strain through-
out the diaphragm to the increase of its re-
888,306
siliency or quickness to respond to any im-
pulse. This I consider a novel and most im-
portant feature.
My invention is used as follows: The parts
5 being arranged as above described, the oper-
ator adjusts the tension of the arm 31 against
the diaphragm 16 and in doing this makes
use of the screw 30, as will be understood
from Fig. 3. The needle 36 is now brought
10 into engagement with the sound grooves of
the disk tablet 11 and the disk is caused to
rotate. Vibrations are communicated from
the sound record through the needle 36,
sleeve 33 and arm 31 to the diaphragm 16
15 and the sounds are thus reproduced.
From the mountings of the arm 31 it will
be noted that this arm has a very simple mo-
tion which corresponds to the vibration of
the diaphragm. It is impossible for the arm
20 31 to have any considerable amount of play
and its motion is therefore comparatively
true and positive.
In order to remove the diaphragm 16 the
diaphragm box 14 is taken from the machine
25 and the spring ring 17 pressed inwardly so as
to withdraw the bosses 18 from the apertures
19. The spring ring being taken out, the
diaphragm and rubber washers can readily
be taken out.
30 It will be noted that the axis of vibration
of the arm 31 coincides with the axes of the
screws 23, and therefore lies in a plane cross-
35
ing at a right angle the general longitudinal
direction of the needle 36.
Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent :
1. The combination of a diaphragm, an
arm for actuating the same, a yoke rigidly
connected with said arm, a plate connected 40
with said arm and said yoke, said plate being
provided with a slot, a pin extending through
said slot, a spring encircling said pin and en-
gaging said plate at a point adjacent to said
slot, a mounting for said pin, and mechanism 45
connected with said arm and provided with
means for supporting a needle.
2. The combination of a diaphragm, an
arm engaging said diaphragm for the pur-
pose of actuating the same, a yoke rigidly
connected with said arm, a pivotal support
for said yoke, a plate mounted centrally upon
said yoke and extending therefrom, a spring
engaging said plate, means for adjusting said
spring relatively to said plate, and mechan-
ism connected with said arm for supporting
a needle.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
WILLIAM ALBERT CHAPMAN.
Witnesses :
George W. Brady,
S. A. D. Jones.
50
!>0
No. 888,682. PATENTED MAY 26, 1908.
J. AMES, S. BURGESS & E. TRAYNOR.
APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING CYLINDRICAL RECORDS AND BLANKS
FOR PHONOGRAPHS, GRAPHOPHONES, AND THE LIKE.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 27, 1908.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
wwxwwwwwWAm'yr
t
^
^WA^VA«A^m^^TTTT
>
ft
7-HF NORMS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.
No. 888,682. PATENTED MAY 26, 1908.
J. AMES, S. BURGESS & E. TRAYNOR.
APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING CYLINDRICAL RECORDS AND BLANKS
FOR PHONOGRAPHS, GRAPHOPHONES, AND THE LIKE.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 27, 1908.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
N^>
rSTfc
Jm^kXPu? ;
axtif.
: (MORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 888,682. PATENTED MAT 26, 1908.
J. AMES, S. BURGESS & E. TRAYNOR.
APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING CYLINDRICAL RECORDS AND BLANKS
FOR PHONOGRAPHS, GRAPHOPHONES, AND THE LIKE.
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 27, 1908.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
Tri
1 &&&
Ilgr.4.
j / '^s^/ /
U<77Udj
^/u^^rt^Jj-^^*^-'
aZ§ .
I PITERS CO.. WHSH1HOTON, Z>- C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOHN AMES, OF LONDON, AND STEPHEN BURGESS AND EDWARD TRAYNOR, OF LEYTON-
STONE, ENGLAND.
APPARATUS FOB MANUFACTURING CYLINDRICAL RECORDS AND BLANKS FOR
PHONOGRAPHS, GRAPHOPHONES, AND THE LIKE.
No. 888,682.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 26, 1908.
Application filed March 27, 1908. Serial No. 423,695.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, John Ames, residing
at 77 Tredegar road, Bow, London, factory
manager, and Stephen Burgess and Ed-
5 ward Traynor, both of 89 Melford road,
Leytonstone, England, electrochemical en-
gineers, have invented a certain new and use-
ful Apparatus for Manufacturing Cylindrical
Records and Blanks for Phonographs,
10 Graphophones, and the Like, of which the
following is a specification such as will en-
able others skilled in the art to which it ap-
pertains to make and use the same.
This invention relates to improved de-
15 vices or machines for revolving rotatable,
cylindrical shells or other suitable holders,
carrying molds, of the kind in which records
or the blanks or cylinders for same for phono-
graphs, graphophones and the like are made
20 by pouring into them molten wax, or any
other suitable material of which records or
blanks may be made.
An object of this invention is to provide
novel means for carrying a series of molds
25 and simultaneously rotating them, novel
means being provided for successively mov-
ing the molds out of operative relation with
the rotating means whereby the molds suc-
cessively cease rotation in order that the
30 product may be removed.
With the foregoing and other objects in
view, the invention consists in the details of
construction and in the combination and ar-
rangement of parts to be hereinafter more
35 fully set forth and specifically claimed.
We will now describe our invention with
reference to the accompanying drawings in
which : —
Figures 1 and 2 show respectively side sec-
40 tional and plan views of a machine construct-
ed according to our invention, and Figs. 3
and 4 show details connected with the shells.
The table a supports the revolving wheel
o which has frictional contact with the shells
45 c and rotates them at a high speed. These
shells are mounted on spring controlled sup-
ports or blocks d arranged in the slides I on
the revoluble shell carrying frame n. An
idle wheel e is mounted on the table a in such
50 a position that it engages one at a time the
inner edges of the supports d, which are
shown sloped with flat center portion, and
pushes the support back against the pressure
of the spring s, thus removing the shell from
contact with the wheel b and enabling it to 55
be handled and the record or blank removed.
The shell carrying frame n has a series of
holes Tc, one opposite to each shell into which
a spring and foot-controlled rod / can enter
so as to lock the frame n and prevent it 60
turning.
m are blocks holding the springs s which
can be adjusted by set screws and nuts, or in
other convenient manner.
g is the spring on stop rod/, and j, ?', are 65
rollers guiding the frame n.
The molten wax or equivalent is supplied
from any convenient source and fed into the
mold through the nozzle t. Cold air, water
and the like may be supplied through pipes 70
such as p into the molds to assist the cooling
of the wax.
What we claim and desire to secure by
Letters Patent is: —
1. In a phonograph record molding ma- 75
chine, shells for containing molds, a .shell
carrying frame, slidable supports for the
shells, means for rotating the shell carrying
frame, means engaging the peripheries of
the shells for rotating them and a member 80
stationed in the normal path of travel of
portions of the shell supports adapted to
engage and actuate the said supports as they
are moved into engagement with said mem-
ber by the rotation of the shell carrying 85
frame.
2. In a phonograph record molding ma-
chine, shells for containing molds, a shell
carrying frame, slidable supports for the
shells, means for rotating the shell carrying 90
frame, means for rotating the shells and a
rotary member stationed in the normal path
of travel of portions of the shell supports,
adapted to engage and actuate the said sup-
ports as they are moved into engagement 95
with said member by the rotation of the
shell carrying frame.
3. In a phonograph record molding ma-
chine, shells for containing molds, a frame
on which the shells are mounted, slidable 100
supports for the shells, means for rotating
the shells, a member stationed in the nor-
888,682
mal path of travel of portions of the shell
supports adapted to engage and actuate the
said supports as they are moved into en-
gagement with said member by the rotation
of the shell carrying frame, and means for
automatically returning the shell supports
when the shell carrying frame moves them
out of engagement with said member.
In witness whereof we have hereunto set
our hands in presence of two witnesses.
JOHN AMES.
STEPHEN BURGESS.
EDWARD TRAYNOR.
Witnesses :
Walter
Joseph Lake.
J. Skeeten,
No. 888,986. PATENTED MAY 26, 1908.
A. FORD.
DEVICE FOR REGULATING AND JUSTIFYING REPRODUCED SOUND.
APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 19, 1904.
VJ^^-^,
^Wvtwe^3«3
dAyl
^o^ocL.
3til)enfot:
THE HORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
AZEL FORD, OF WASHINGTON, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA.
DEVICE FOR REGULATING AND JUSTIFYING REPRODUCED SOUND.
No. 888,986.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented May 26, 1908.
Application filed September 19, 1904. Serial No. 225,067.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Azel Ford, a citizen
of the United States, residing at Washington,
in the District of Columbia, have invented
5 new and useful Improvements in a Device
for Regulating and Justifying Reproduced
Sound, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
This invention relates to an improvement
10 in devices to be attached to phonographs,
graphophones, telephones, and other sound-
producing apparatus, and has for its object
\ the elimination of harsh, shrill, scraping, or
lother inharmonious sounds which have been
15 so prolific in apparatus of the aforesaid char-
acter hitherto, whereby the confusion and
dissonance of vocal and instrumental sound
waves, as reproduced hitherto, are prevented,
and harmony and consonance attained.
20 My invention stated in general terms con-
sists of a device interposed in the passage of
the produced and reproduced sound waves
of such a character that the inharmonious
produced sound waves are segregated or
25 destroyed without interference with the re-
produced sound waves whereby the repro-
duced sound-waves are obtained with clear-
ness and accuracy, and consists of a combi-
nation of elements and devices as herein-
30 after clearly set forth, reference being had
! to the accompanying drawing, of which
Figure 1 is a longitudinal transverse sec-
tion of the device with tube connections, en-
larged, showing porous flexible diaphragms
35 having an intervening layer of granular car-
bon and separated by an air cushion and
provided with means for bringing the dia-
phragms closer together by means of the
screw-coupling. Fig. 2 is a like view of the
40 device provided with gauze diaphragms.
Fig. 3 is an end view of one section of the de-
vice ; and Fig. 4 is a view of a detached annu-
lar air cushion. Fig. 5 shows a gauze. dia-
phragm.
45 In the drawings, A and B represent oppo-
site sections of the device adapted to be con-
nected by a screw-thread or coupling, as
shown at C, and by which means they are
confined between the sections by washers
50 a, a' , diaphragms o, V , and an intermediate
annular air cushion D, which are connected
so as to secure the diaphragms a, a' at vari-
able and adjustable distances apart by the
pressure of the screw-threads in co- action
55 with the compressive ' and expansive action
of the air cushion.
In Fig. 1 is represented a granular carbon
layer inclosed between the porous dia-
phragms b, b' , retained between the same by
the annular air cushion D, the outer ends of 60
the section being provided with a means e,f,
for attaching the same to rubber or other
tubes or sound-conveying conduits E, F.
The section A is provided with an annular
extension d whereby it projects over the ad- 65
jacent end of the opposite section B.
Fig. 2 is a like view of the device provided
with woven wire or gauze diaphragms b, V
which are separated from each other by the
annular air cushion D. 70
Fig. 3 is a view of the inner end of section
A of the device.
Fig. 4 is a view of the annular air cushion ;
and Fig. 5 represents a foraminous dia-
phragm. 75
In assembling the device, the wTasher a is
placed within the section A and thereupon is
placed a diaphragm of material selective
to the character of the instrument to which
applied, upon which is placed an annular so
cushion consisting preferably of a hollow
annular ring retaining air under pressure.
Upon this is placed a second diaphragm a'
and a second ring or washer b' , which are
maintained in position by coupling to the 85
section B by means of the screw-thread C.
It will be seen that upon more closely coup-
ling these sections by screwing the same to-
gether the annular cushion is compressed and
the diaphragms brought closer together. The 90
object of this is to provide an adjustable
means for regulating the distances whereby
the diaphragms may be maintained at vary-
ing distances from each other, it having been
found of great advantage to so adjust the 95
diapliragms in order to synchronize them in
accordance with the differing inharmonious
sound waves evolved by various sound-
reproducing devices which inharmonious
sound waves are conveyed to and through 100
the conduits E, F, communicating with the
sound-regulating and justifying diaphragms
a, a'.
My improved apparatus consists of two
bell-mouth devices, preferably composed of 105
hard rubber provided with coupling screw-
threads whereby they may be joined and
provided also with means whereby dia-
phragms of selective sound wave-analyzing
and dissipating properties may be inclosed, 110
and further provided with means whereby
the opposite ends of the coupled device may
888,986
15
20
be attached to a sound-reproducing appa-
ratus in such a manner as to interpose the
included sound wave analytical diaphragm
between the point at which the sound is re-
produced and the point at which the sound
is discharged.
It is well known that in reproduced vocal
and musical and other sounds of phono-
graph, graphophone, gramaphone, etc., the
10 vibrations produced by the indentations and
j projections in the path of the needle of the
sound-reproducing diaphragm are accom-
panied by additional interfering inharmo-
nious sound waves generated or produced by
the factional tendencies of the needle in the
channel guiding the needle over the aforesaid
indentations and projections, which inhar-
monious sound waves have a tendency to
confuse or obscure the harmonious sound
waves desired to be reproduced. It is my
object, therefore, to interpose in the path of
the multiple sound waves, reproduced and
produced as aforesaid, a diaphragm of such
character as to selectively isolate and destroy
25 the inharmonious produced waves by means
of an element capable of synchronously pro-
ducing sound waves of like inharmonious
character whereby the originally produced
inharmonious waves are neutralized at the
30 nodal point of their sound wave communica-
« tion. This effect may be produced by inter-
posing in the passage of the composite sound
waves, vibratory diapliragms or foraminous
nature with sufficiently small apertures to
35 readily take up and destroy the inharmoni-
ous sounds, or may consist of various sub-
stances capable of vibration of any selective
character, such as porous flexible diaphragms
retaining pulverized carbon, or other inhar-
40 monious sound-deadening substance.
By interposing in the path of the repro-
duced sound waves a device of this character,
: I am enabled to analyze or separate there-
from disagreeable and inharmonious sound
45 waves generated frictionally or otherwise
through the imperfect action of the sound
I wave-reproducing devices thereby delivering
the sound in perfect reproduction without
the usual accompanying inharmonious sound
50 waves.
Diaphragms of thin wood, paper, felt,
sponge, and the like maybe employed accord-
ing to the particular character of the sound
waves desired to be deadened or separated
55 in the justification of the particular sound
desired to be reproduced.
It should be noted that the sections A, B,
of my device are conical or bell-shaped
whereby the sound waves are concentrated
60 upon the sound- justifying diaphragms and
the diaphragms may be graduated in thick-
ness or character of substance and circum-
centrically to conform with the direction
upon which particular sound waves are
65 reflected.
Fig. 2 illustrates diagrammatically the
manner in which the sound waves, entering
in concentrated or blended form, are ana-
lyzed and separated from each other, by the
varying reflective surface of the interior of 70
the conical or bell-shaped section B, in par-
allel and concentric form, with reference to
the varying vibratory tension of each sound
wave in the volume, so that the separate,
distinct and individual sound waves, form- 75
ing a part of the composite blend of the
sound wave volume, are circum-centrically
reflected from its selective "cycle point and
delivered upon the sound-justifying dia-
phragm in selective concentric circles, at 80
which point any one or more of the individual
sound waves thus analyzed may be absorbed,
neutralized, or dissipated at its point of loca-
tion, by the effect of the justifying dia-
phragmic device, while the uninterrupted or 85
unobstructed sound waves, which have not
been in interference, p'ass through the com-
posite diaphragm and are delivered concen-
trically upon the concentrating sound reflect-
ive surface of the outlet section A, whereby 90
the remaining or justified sound waves are
reblended in a harmonious volume, by syn-
thesis, and delivered from the device minus
the inharmonious waves as originally com-
municated or conveyed to the apparatus. It 95
will thus be seen that the volume of com-
positely blended sound waves are circum-
centrically separated into distinct and indi-
vidual waves by the conical or bell-shaped
sound reflective surface of the interior of sec- 100
tioil B, which individual sound waves, thus
separated, are delivered upon the sound-jus-
tifying diaphragms in concentric form.
By employing sections interiorly of con-
ical or bell-shaped character the various 105
sound waves entering the section are sepa-
rated, analyzed, or reflected circum-cen-
trically upon the diaphragms so that circum-
centric amplifying or resistant substances of
selective action with reference to the particu- 110
lar sound wave delivered upon the diaphragm
at a particular point may beemploj ed in con-
nection with the diaphragms for t he purpose of
deadening, dest roving, or separating inharmo-
nious sound waves from the sounds desired to 115
be clearly reproduced.
In cases where the inharmonious sound
waves occur in varying degrees as delivered
from the various sound-reproducing ma-
chines, substances of selective deadening ef- 120
feet to the particular inharmonious sound
waves and of yielding nature, such as soft
rubber, may be placed between the dia-
phragms at selected points and caused to
occupy more or less field upon the diaphragm 125
by expansion and contraction of the same
accordingly as pressure is exerted upon or
removed from them through the agency of
the screw-threaded coupling devices.
I do not desire to confine myself to the par- 130
888,986
ticular character of .screw-threaded coupling
devices, but reserve the right to use any
practical means for joining the sections A, B,
and I can also make the diaphragms inde-
5 pendent of the screw-threaded coupling de-
vice and provide other means for adjusting
or controlling the distance between the dia-
»phragms without departing from the spirit
of my invention.
10 I also intend to include as a feature of my
invention the devices as aforesaid provided
with a means for revolving the diaphragms
whereby the position of the selective sound-
interfering substances may be regulated and
15 brought into action at will.
I I have found it of advantage to employ
two separate diaphragms, one of which is
shown in Fig. 4, composed of a multiplicity
of parallel wires or other equivalent and use
20 them collectively either disposed with wires
parallel or across or angular of each other.
I do not desire to confine myself to any
particular character or porous diaphragm or
substance of which composed to be inter-
ns posed in the path of the sound waves between
the point of production and the point of dis-
charge, but reserve the right to employ any
or all forms of porous substances which may
be selectively adapted to the particular char-
30 acter of sound wave desired to be neutralized
or justified, so long as the diaphragms exist in
plurality and are of such porous and adjust-
able character that they may be brought into
co-action or synchronism with the inharmo-
35 nious sound waves accompanying reproduced
sounds, which it is desired to eliminate.
It should be noted that the diaphragms
I employed in my device are of a different and
I distinct character from the non-porous,' fixed
40 and flexible diaphragms employed in tele-
, phone transmitters and receivers, phono-
graphic recorders, sound reproducers and the
; like, in that the diaphragms employed for the
• purposes mentioned have for their object the
45 'reproduction of sound waves or the produc-
tion of devices from, which the sound waves
!may be produced and are dependent upon
'the reception of sound waves at one side of
the diaphragm to produce a vibration of the
50 1 diaphragm from which, by various means,
1 the sound waves are reproduced by the ac-
I tuation of the opposite side of the diaphragm,
while the diaphragms employed by me are of
! such character as to allow the air-canying
55! sound-producing waves to pass through the
! pores or between the interstices thereof in
such a manner that harmonious waves are
| uninterrupted while the inharmonious waves
are abstracted and dissipated. This, as has
60 been hereinbefore described, is accomplished
by adjustably causing the porous or for ami-
nous diaphragms to approach or recede from
each other or the position of the pores, per-
forations or meshes of the diaphragms rota-
65 tably adjusted so that the points through
70
75
80
85
95
which the free passage of the air-carrying
sound waves passes may be regulated with
reference to each other so as to meet the exi-
gencies of the various harmonious and inhar-
monious sound waves with reference to their
separation from each other in a simple and
efficient manner.
My diaphragms aretherefore distinguished
from the flexible sound-reproducing dia-
phragms of the prior art by the fact that they
allow the air-carrying sound waves to pass
through them and are so adjusted with ref-
erence to each other that they practically
constitute a filtering device for incomplete
and disturbing inharmonious or unsynchro-
nized waves from the harmonious or syn-:
chronized waves during their passage there-'
through.
The term "porous" as employed in this I
specification and claims with reference to the
character of the diaphragms has particular
reference to, and is intended to include, dia-
phragms which will allow air-carrying sound!
waves to pass therethrough, be the passages!
pores, perforations, meshes -or spaces of any 90
kind or character so long as air-carrying syn-\
chronized sound waves of harmonious char-!
acter are allowed to pass without materiall
interception.
One of the important features and adapta-
tions of my invention is its utility when em-
ployed in connection with telephonic and
phonographic receivers adapted to commu-
nicate directly with the human ear, so that
the sound waves reproduced in the receiver
may be regulated and adjusted as to pitch
without interference with the timbre of the
sound waves reproduced or transmitted. By
the application of my device, therefore, the
highness or lowness of pitch may be either
lowered or raised, without destroying the
timbre, to a degree that the reproduced
sound waves will be clearly audible, and thus
it regulates sharpness and harshness or low-
ness and inaudibility of the sound waves as
received or reproduced in telephones or pho-
nographs, and renders them readily adjust-
able by raising or lowering the pitch without
interfering with the timbre so that the sound
waves received may be adjusted with those
transmitted and with reference to the tym-
panum of the human ear of various people as
to be clearly distinguishable anil audible
whether the ear of the person receiving the
sound waves be more or less sensitive or
whether the timbre of the voice of the person
transmitting the sound is of high or low pitch .
I For example, the tympanum of one's ear
! may be so constructed with relation to the
! sound waves received by it from a telephone 125
j or phonograph that the pitch of the sound
, received may be so high, sharp or harsh that
I it will result in the sounds transmitted there-
I to not becoming clearly audible, such high,
i sharp or harsh tones emanating from the
100
105
110
115
120
130
888,986
10
25
sound receiver or reproducer being due to the
differing and irregular forms and thickness of.
the sound-reproducing diaphragms, such as
sheets of mica, the vibration of which is actu-
ated by magnetic action in the telephone and
the stylus in the phonograph, regardless of
the actual pitch of the sound originally com-
municated to the sound-reproducing device ;
the pitch in various telephonic receivers dif-
fering from the sound waves originalfy trans-
mitted by reason of their difference in diame-
ter and thickness, resulting in more or less
rapidity of vibration and consequent pitch
without regard to the timbre of the sound as
15 originally transmitted. It can be seen,
therefore, that my device will regulate the
sound-producing vibrations emanating from
the receiver or reproducing diaphragm and
will provide a means whereby the pitch of the
20 sound emitted from various diaphragms may
be justified, regulated or synchronized with
each other and with relation to the particular
sensitiveness of the tympanum of the ear re-
ceiving the sound therefrom.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent is : —
1 . A sound receiving and distributing de-
vice including a plurality of sound justifying
30 diaphragms_containing independent sets of
parallel wires, said diaphragms being capable
of transmitting sound waves of harmonious
character, and of eliminating and subduing
inharmonious sound waves.
2. A sound receiving and distributing de-
vice including a plurality of sound justifying
diaphragms containing parallel wires, said
diaphragms being rotatably movable with
reference to each other, and capable of trans-
mitting sound waves of harmonious charac-
ter, and of eliminating and subduing inhar-
monious sound waves.
3. A sound receiving and distributing de-
vice including a plurality of sound justifying
45 diaphragms containing parallel wires, said
diaphragms being rotatably movable in the
planes in which they lie, and capable of trans-
mitting sound waves of harmonious charac-
ter, and of eliminating and subduing inhar-
50 monious sound waves.
4. A sound receiving and distributing de-
vice including a plurality of sound justifying
diaphragms containing parallel wires, said
diaphragms being rotatably movable in the
55 planes in which they lie, and means for rotat-
ing said diaphragms.
5. A sound receiving and distributing de-
vice including relatively movable porous
justifying diaphragms which are capable of
transmitting sound waves of harmonious
character, and of eliminating or subduing
inharmonious sound waves, combined with
sound deadening substances for inharmoni-
ous sound waves disposed between said dia-
65 phragms and means for adjustably increas-
35
40
60
natmg
or
subduing
waves.
13. In a sound-receiving, justifying and
distributing device, the combination of an
90
95
ing or decreasing the sound deadening
zone.
6. A sound receiving and distributing de-
vice including an adjustable sound justifying
diaphragm provided with a plurality of inde- 70
pendent sets of parallel wires, means for ro-
tating the said diaphragm, and means for
transmitting sound waves of harmonious
character from, and delivering inharmonious
sound waves to the said sound justifying dia- 75
phragm.
7. A sound receiving and distributing de-
vice including sound justifying diaphragms
which are capable of transmitting sound
waves of harmonious character and of elimi- 80
nating or subduing inharmonious sounds,
combined with a resilient element separating
said diaphragms and adjusting means for
compressing said resilient element and thus
varying the distance between the dia- 85
phragms to synchronize the instrument.
8. A sound receiving and distributing de-
vice including relatively movable porous
sound justifying diaphragms which are capa-
ble of transmitting sound waves of harmoni-
ous character, and of eliminating or sub-
duing inharmonious sound waves, combined
with sound deadening substances for inhar-
monious sound waves disposed between said
diaphragms.
9. A sound receiving and distributing de-
vice including relatively movable porous
sound justifying diaphragms which are capa-
ble of transmitting sound waves of harmoni-
ous character, and of eliminating or subduing 100
inharmonious sound waves, combined with
sound deadening substances for inharmoni-
ous sound wave disposed between said dia-
phragms at selected points.
10. A sound receiving and distributing de-
vice including sound justifying diaphragms
having passages for transmitting sound
waves of harmonious character there-
through, said diaphragm being capable of
eliminating or subduing inharmonious sound
waves combined with conical or bell shaped
sections between which said diaphragms are
supported.
11. In a sound receiving, justifying, and
distributing device, the combination of an
analytical member, a synthetical member,
and an intervening sound-justifying member
capable of transmitting sound waves of har-
monious character and of eliminating or sub-
duing inharmonious sound waves.
12. In a sound-receiving, justifying, and
distributing device, the combination of an
analytical member, a synthetical member,
and an intervening adjustable sound-justify-
ing member capable of transmitting sound
waves of harmonious character and of elirni-
inharmonious sound
105
110
115
120
125
130
888,986
analytical member having a flaring sound-
reflective surface, a synthetical member, and
an intervening sound-justifying member ca-
pable of transmitting sound waves of har-
5 monious character and of eliminating or sub-
duing inharmonious sound waves.
14. In a sound-receiving, justifying and
distributing device, the combination of an
analytical member having a flaring sound-
10 reflective surface, a synthetical member, and
an intervening adjustable sound-justifying
member capable of transmitting sound waves
of harmonious character and of eliminating
or subduing inharmonious sound waves.
15. In a sound-receiving, justifying and
distributing device, the combination of an
analytical member, a synthetical member
15
having; a
contracting
sound-reflective sur-
face, and an intervening sound-justifying
20 member capable of transmitting sound waves
of harmonious character and of eliminating
or subduing inharmonious sound waves.
16. In a sound-receiving, justifying and
distributing device, the combination of an
25 analytical member, a synthetical member
having a contracting sound-reflective sur-
face, and an intervening- adjustable sound-
justifying member capable of transmitting
sound waves of harmonious character and of
eliminating or subduing inharmonious sound 30
waves.
17. In a sound-receiving, justifying and
distributing device, the combination of an
analytical member having a flaring sound-
reflective surface, a synthetical member hav- 35
ing a contracting sound-reflective surface,
and an intervening sound-justifying member
capable of transmitting sound waves of har-
monious character and of eliminating or sub-
duing inharmonious sound waves. 40
18. In a sound-receiving, justifying and
distributing device, the combination of an
analytical member having a flaring sound-
reflective surface, a synthetical member hav-
ing a contracting sound-reflective surface, 45
and an intervening adjustable sound-justify-
ing member capable of transmitting sound
waves of harmonious character and of elimi-
nating or subduing inharmonious sound
waves. 50
In testimony whereof I affix my signature,
in presence of two subscribing witnesses.
AZEL FORD. .
Witnesses :
Geo. C. Tabor,
C. R. Adams.
No. 889,480,
S. MOSS.
HORN FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 6, 1908.
PATENTED JUNE 2, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
Witnesses .-
BY
Inventor
Attorney
THE MORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 889,480.
S. MOSS.
HORN FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED APE. 6, 1908.
PATENTED JUNE 2, 1908.
Witnesses .-
^Jti^JLL^ sit*.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
i£ ,j#-
By
Inventor
Attorney
tmk ttrmnis rETsms co„ Washington, d, c.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
STANISLAUS MOSS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO SHEIP & VANDER-
GRIFT, INC., OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
HORN£FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 889,480.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 2, 1908.
Application filed April 6, 1908. Serial No. 425,366.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Stanislaus Moss, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila-
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented an Im-
provement in Horns for Talking-Machines,
of which the following description, in con-
nection with the accompanying drawings, is
a specification, like letters on the drawings
10 representing like parts.
The invention to be hereinafter described
relates to horns for talking machines and
more particularly to that general type of such
devices employed in connection with sound
15 recording and producing instruments, com-
monly known as phonographic horns.
In order that sound waves may be pro-
duced or transmitted with substantial per-
fection, it is essential that the transmitting
20 instrument shall offer no obstruction to the
free vibratory or other sound wave move-
ments, and that its transmitting surface pre-
sent no abrupt or angular change of direction,
either in the line of transmission or transverse
25 thereto. It is of importance also that the
transmitting instrument itself shall not give
forth vibrations calculated to interfere with
the sound waves, all as well understood by
those skilled in the art. These considera-
30 tions are particularly true in the production
and transmission of musical tones, so much
so that even slight interference with the true
sound wave movements, either by abrupt
angular changes in direction of transmission
35 by the horn itself, or discordant vibrations
in the horn material, becomes a matter of
serious objection.
It has been proposed heretofore to con-
struct horns for sound reproducing machines
40 of metal either of a single piece or number of
pieces joined together by a seam extending
longitudinally of the horn. The metallic
vibration interjected by such horns is well
recognized, and the joints or seams offer ob-
45 jectionable interruptions to the sound waves.
It has also been proposed to form horns of
wooden strips laid together in two or more
lajTers or plies to break joints, the strips of
the several plies mutually contributing to
50 hold the strips of the other from separation
attheiredge joints. In such veneer construc-
tion, however, strips forming the inner ply,
along the surface of which the sound waves
travel, are not transversely curved into a
true circle as prescribed by the dimensions 55
of the horn at any point in its axial length,
and, moreover, there is an interruption in
the continuity of the inner horn surface near
the flare of the horn where the outer strips
cover the spaces between the edges of the in- 60
ner strips, with the result that there is an
objectionable interference with the trans-
mitted sound. It has been further proposed
to form phonographic horns of a single ply or
layer of strips by assembling a number of the 65
strips and then subjecting them to endwise
and lateral compression to secure the de-
sired horn contour, but in such construction
the edges of the strips do not present sur-
faces which can be brought into close union 70
and joined, the result being that the strips
separate along their adjacent edges. More-
over, in tills construction the individual
strips do not present true circular curves
throughout the axial length of the horn. 75 1
With these briefly stated considerations
in view the present invention has for its ob-
ject to provide a phonographic or like horn
which shall be free from the objections noted,
and present a structure formed of a single 80
layer of thin wooden strips, which, previous
to being assembled, are permanently bent
longitudinally and transversely to give to
the horn its proper longitudinal shape and
transverse circular form, and wherein also the 85
edges of the strips are beveled to present each
to the adjoining strip, a contacting surface
susceptible of being permanently connected
throughout with no interiorly projecting in-
terruptions to the sound waves either trans- 90
versely or longitudinally, all as will herein-
after more fully appear.
In the drawings: — Figure 1 is a side per-
spective view of a horn embodying the fea-
tures of the present invention; Fig. 2 is a 95
central longitudinal section thereof; Fig. 3
is a detail view of the strengthening hoop
which is secured to the flaring end of the
horn; Fig. 4 is a perspective view of one of
the wooden blanks prior to being bent longi- 100
tudinally and transversely; Fig. 5 is a simi-
lar view of the blank of Fig. 4 after being per-
manently bent longitudinally and trans-
versely, but prior to the bevel formation of
its longitudinal edges; Fig. 6 is a view simi- 105
lar to Fig. 5, showing the previously bent
strip provided with the radially beveled
edges; and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of
889,480
three of these permanently bent strips show-
ing how they are assembled with the radially
beveled edges face to face.
As shown in the drawings, the horn of the
5 present invention is composed of a plurality
of strips 3, preferably formed of thin taper-
ing pieces of wood joined edge to edge, it be-
ing an important feature of the invention
that such strips be previously bent both lon-
10 gitudinally and transversely in response to
the curvature of the horn, and that such
edges be so formed as to present contacting
. surfaces throughout their length when
brought together. In order that this result
15 may be properly secured, the strips are first
produced as flat, tapering pieces of thin
wood 2, Fig. 4, and these individual strips
are then bent in a suitable mold, both longi-
tudinally and transversely. The longitu-
20 dinal bend is determined by the longitudinal
form or flaring character of horn, and the
transverse bend at any point in the length
of the strip is determined by the arc of a cir-
cle, the radius of which is the semi-diameter
25 of the horn at such point, so that throughout
the length of the horn a substantially true
and unobstructed circular interior surface
will be formed. The strips, thus bent, are
indicated at 3, Fig. 5, said bends, lengthwise
30 and transversely of the strips, being made
permanent by the application of heat while in
the mold. After the strip has thus been per-
manently bent, as in Fig. 5, the longitudinal
edges 4, 4, are cut to a bevel on the lines 5,
35 6, Fig. 6, the bevel at any point in the length
of the horn corresponding to the direction of
a radius of the horn at that point. Thus the
angle of the bevel of the edge 4 near the
flared extremity of the horn will be repre-
40 sented, Fig. 5, by the line 5,6, the numeral 5
representing the center of the circle of horn
curvature at that point. Likewise the bevel
of the edge 4 at intermediate points in the
length of the strip 3 will correspond to the
45 lines 7 — 8; 9 — 10; 11 — 12; the numerals 7,
9 and 11 representing the center of horn
curvature at that particular point.
Viewing Fig. 7, it will now be clear that,
since the edges 4, 4, of each of the strips 3 are
SO cut on the same bevel, or line 5 — 6, for in-
stance, at any point, the faces of the edges
4, 4,. of adjoining strips will present flush or
abutting surfaces which may be brought
into full contact throughout the length of the
55 strips notwithstanding the fact that the
strips are curved both longitudinally and
transverseby. The beveled surfaces of the
edges 4, 4, are then glued together, and the
strips themselves being permanently bent,
60 the ghie connection between such edges acts
as a sufficient binder to hold the assembled
strips in position.
At the flaring end of the horn A, Fig. 1 , a
wooden hoop 13 is glued, said hoop being
65 preferably formed of a single strip of wood
having overlapping ends 14, 15, suitably
connected, as by glue or the like. The
smaller end of the horn A, Figs. 1 and 2, is
supplied with a ferrule 16, preferably of
metal, and, as indicated, this ferrule has its
extreme end 17 flush with the transverse
plane of the horn at that end , so that no pro-
jection extends into the interior of the horn
tending to disturb the true sound waves
transmitted.
At some point intermediate its ends the
horn A, Figs. 1 and 2, is preferably encircled
by a textile band or tape 18. This band or
tape 18 is countersunk into the exterior sur-
face of the horn, the strips 3 being provided
with an exterior transverse groove 19, Fig. 2,
so that the band or tape, while serving to in-
crease the security with which the strips are
held together, is prevented from displace-
ment on the incline surface of the horn. Ob-
viously the number of bands or tapes 18 em-
ployed on any particular horn is not mate-
rial, as such number may be varied accord-
ing to the particular circumstances or as the
judgment of the constructor may dictate.
In applying the band or tape 18, it is prefer-
ably moistened or saturated with glue, and
in such condition is stretched and laid in the
groove 19 with its ends overlapping. On
drying, the band or tape will shrink, thus
binding the strips 3, edge to edge perma-
nently, in a manner that will be well under-
stood.
It is sometimes desirable to support the
horn from a point beyond its smaller end by
suspending it from a rod, stand, or the like.
Means are herein provided for this purpose,
such as an eye 20, Figs. 1 and 2, the ends 21,
21, being preferabty passed through the band
or tape 18 before it is applied, and bent as
indicated in Fig. 2, said bent ends 21, 21,
when the tape is in place resting between the
under surface of the tape and the outer wall
of the groove 19. Thus the suspending
means or eye 20 -does not extend through
or into the wTall of the horn, and offers no
objectionable element in the transmission of
sound by the horn. Obviously the band or
tape and suspending eye may be applied in a
variety of ways, but it is preferable, as
found in practice, that the band or tape be
secured in a groove in the horn, and that it
be formed of textile material that will con-
tract or shrink in drying, as thereby the band
or tape not only will not become displaced in
use but will hold the strips 3 more securely
with their radialfy beveled faces in uniform
contact.
From the construction described it will be
noted that a horn is produced of a single
layer of thin wooden strips previously bent
both in a longitudinal and transverse direc-
tion; that the adjacent edges of the strips
are beveled after the strips are' bent, so that
edge faces extending in the direction of the
-
-
100
105
1I<J
115
120 '
125
13,
I
880,480
a
radius of the horn are produced throughout
the length of the strips even though the strips
themselves vary in curvature at different
points; and that the radially beveled edges
5 present contacting faces throughout. Ob-
viously, also, the cross-sectional contour of
the horn at any point will present a substan-
tially true circle, there being no shoulders,
angles, or interruptions to the interior horn
10 surface either transversely or longitudinally.
What is claimed is: —
1 . A horn for talking machines comprising
a conicalfy tapering body composed of a
single layer of individual wooden strips pre-
15 viously bent into permanent shape both
longitudinally and transversely, the longi-
tudinal edges of said strips being beveled
radially of the horn throughout their length
to present adjacent faces coincident through-
20 out, and means to hold said strips in assem-
bled relation edge to edge.
2. A horn for talking machines comprising
a conically tapered body composed of a
single' layer of individual wooden strips pre-
25 viously bent into permanent shape both
longitudinally and transversely and glued
together edge to edge, the longitudinal
edges of said strips being beveled radially of
the horn throughout their length to present
30 plane faces coincident throughout.
3. A horn for talking machines comprising
a conically tapered bod}^ portion composed
of a single layer of individual wooden strips
previously bent into shape both longitu-
35 dinally and transversely, the longitudinal
edges of said strips being beveled radially of
the horn throughout their length to present
contacting plane faces coincident through-
out, the said radial plane faces of adjoining
40 strips being glued together, the exterior sur-
face of the horn being provided with an en-
circling band or tape.
4. A horn for talking machines compris-
ing a single series of tapering wooden strips
45 bent in both a longitudinal and transverse j
direction, and having edge faces coincident
throughout and provided with an exterior
encircling groove, and a textile band or tape
passing around the horn and seated in said
encircling groove. 50
5. A horn for talking machines comprising
a single series of tapering wooden strips bent
in both a longitudinal and transverse direc-
tion and glued together edge to edge said
edges having faces coincident throughout, 55
a band or tape passing around said horn, and
means secured to said band or tape for sup-
porting the horn.
6. A horn for talking machines comprising
a single series of tapering wooden strips bent 60
in both a longitudmal and transverse direc-
tion, and glued together edge to edge, the
said horn having an encircling exterior groove,
a textile band or tape passing around said
horn and seated in said groove, and a sup- 65
porting eye secured to said tape.
7. A horn for talking machines comprising
a single series of tapering wooden strips
previously bent into shape both longitu-
dinally and transversely and having edge 70
faces coincident throughout, and glued to-
gether, and a textile band encircling the horn
intermediate its ends.
8. A horn for talking machines comprising
a single series of wooden strips previously 75
bent longitudinally and transversely and
having beveled edges, the beveled edges of
one strip being glued to the beveled edges of
the next adjoining strips, a ferrule embracing
the strips at the smaller end of the horn and 80
terminating flush with the end of the horn,
and a textile band or strip encircling the horn
intermediate its ends.
In testimony whereof, I have signed my
name to this specification, in the presence of 85
two subscribing witnesses.
STANISLAUS MOSS.
Witnesses :
Richard Zoerner,
F. W. HxjDTWALCKER.
_^^^^^^^a^^^a
No. 890,142.
PATENTED JUNE 9, 1908.
T. KRAEMER.
SOUND BOX FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 7, 1907.
Ityl,
FigrS,
70 \%\\. dm,
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS KRAEMER, OF PHILADELPHIA,
SHEBLE MANUFACTURING COMPANY,
RATION OF PENNSYLVANIA.
PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO HAWTHORNE &
OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, A CORPO-
SOUND-BOX FOB TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 890,142.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 9, 1908.
Application filed October 7, 1907. Serial No. 396,135.
15
20
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas Kraemer, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Phil-
adelphia, in the county of Philadelphia and
5 State of Penns}dvania, have invented a cer-
tain new and useful Improvement in Sound-
Boxes for Talking-Machines, of which the
following is a specification.
This invention relates to sound-boxes for
10 talking machines and has reference more
particularly to the construction of the dia-
phragms for such sound-boxes.
The object of the invention is to effect cer-
tain improvements in the construction of
such diaphragms to the end that a greater
volume of sound is obtained in reproducing
a record and that a more faithful reproduc-
tion is obtained as a result of the elimination
of false sound vibrations.
I have illustrated the preferred embodi-
ment of my invention in the accompanying
drawings, in which
Figure 1 is a front view of a sound-box, Fig.
2 is a central section of the same, and Fig. 3
25 is an enlarged sectional view of the dia-
phragm alone.
Referring to these drawings, the sound-
box is shown as having a main wall 1 , a tubu-
lar extension 2 leading therefrom for con-
30 nection to the sound-conveying tube, and a
circular flange 3 at the outer edge of wall 1
forming the outer wall of the box. Fitting
snugly within wall 3 is a rubber strip or ring
4, circular in cross-section, forming a support
35 for the diaphragm 5, this ring being retained
in position by a circular ridge 6 integral with
and rising from the wall 1 . The stylus-lever
7 is pivotally mounted upon the wall 3, bears
at its inner end upon the central portion of
40 the diaphragm, and at its outer end is pro-
vided with an opening to receive a stylus 8,
the latter being held in its opening by a set-
screw 9. In the present instance, I have
shown the stylus-lever as provided with
45 notched lugs 10 adapted to receive knife-
edges formed on a sheet-metal piece 1 1 which
is secured to wall 1 and whose end forms a
spring 12 tending to rock the stylus-lever on
its knife-edge pivot in the direction to hold
50 its inner end against the diaphragm.
The method of mounting the diaphragm
herein shown with its edge bearing on a rub-
ber ring has proven highly efficient as the
rubber absorbs counter-vibrations and thus
I makes the reproduced sound much more 55
! clear. The diaphragm, which is a disk of
thin sheet-metal, is of a diameter but little
less than the internal diameter of the circular
flange 3 and when in proper position it rests
upon the rubber ring 4 with its outer edge 60
separated from the interior wall of flange 3
by a narrow space entirely around the dia-
phragm. It is difficult, however, to get the
diaphragm in this position every time it is
inserted and to retain it there during long 65
periods of use of the sound-box and if the
diaphragm becomes moved out of this posi-
tion the small amount necessary to carry its
edge into contact with the flange 3, the vibra-
tions of the diaphragm will be transmitted 70
to the sound-box and the reproduced sound
will be much less clear and distinct. I there-
fore provide means for centering the dia-
phragm in position and holding it against
such movement as would cause its edge to 75
engage the wall of the box. This is accom-
plished by providing a circular rib 13 in the
diaphragm concentric with and close to the
outer edge thereof, such that when the dia-
phragm is in position, this rib wall coact with 80
the rubber ring 4 to obstruct movement of
the diaphragm in the plane in which it lies.
In Fig. 2 of the drawings, it will be seen
that the rib 13 is in coaction with the ring 4
and would preclude movement of the dia- 85
phragm in a vertical direction and that when
in this position the edges of the diaphragm
are separated from the wall of the sound-
box. So long as the diaphragm is held in
this position, the danger of transmitting the 90
vibrations thereof to the walls of the sound-
box is eliminated.
In diaphragms for sound-boxes as hereto-
fore constructed, especially those which are
flat disks, the vibrating area is small and 95
therefore the air-pressure behind the dia-
phragm is also small. In accordance with
my invention, I construct the diaphragm in
such manner that the area of vibration
is considerably increased. This is accom- 100
pushed by pressing a comparatively large
portion of the diaphragm at its center out of
the plane thereof so that the central por-
tion of the diaphragm swells out to one side.
This is shown in Figs. 2 and 3, from which it 105
will be seen that the center 14 of the dia-
phragm is displaced from the plane of the
edge portion thereof. The inclined portion
a
890,142
15 joining the center 14 and the edge portion
includes a considerable part of the total area
of the diaphragm and when the stylus-lever
is rocked to and fro on its pivot by the un-
5 dulations of the record-groove, this entire
inclined portion is caused to vibrate so that
a vibrating area is obtained which is consid-
erably larger than that obtained when a flat
disk is employed as a diaphragm. This in-
10 creased area of vibration results in increased
air-pressure behind the diaphragm and both
of these combine to give a considerably in-
creased volume of reproduced sound.
The diaphragm above described may be
15 pressed to the desired shape from a disk of
sheet-metal and may therefore be manufac-
tured at very low cost. A metallic button
16 is preferably secured to the center of the
diaphragm on which the inner end of the
20 stylus-lever bears.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new therein and desire to secure
by Letters Patent is as follows : —
1. The combination of a sound-box having
25 an outer wall, a resilient member within said
wall, and a diaphragm supported on said
member with its edge out of contact with
said wall, said diaphragm having a rib there-
in coacting with said member to prevent
movement of the diaphragm in the plane in 30
which it lies, substantially as set forth.
2. The combination of a sound-box having
an outer wall, a rubber ring within said wall,
a ridge on the sound-box to retain said ring
in position, and a diaphragm supported on 35
said ring with its edge out of contact with
said wall, said diaphragm having a rib there-
in close to its outer edge coacting with said
member to prevent movement of the dia-
phragm in the plane in which it lies, substan- 40
tially as set forth.
3. The combination of a sound-box having
a wall and shaped to provide a surface within
the box adjacent to said wall for supporting
a diaphragm, and a diaphragm supported on 45
said surface, said diaphragm having a rib
therein coacting with a part of the box struc-
ture to preclude movement of the diaphragm
in the plane in which it lies to carry its edge
into engagement with said wall of the box, 50
substantially as set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 30 clay of Septr.,. 1907.
THOMAS KRAEMER.
Witnesses :
H. Meier,
H. MlTHLSCHLEGEL.
No. 890,338. PATENTED JUNE 9, 1908.
C. P. OOOK.
AUTOMATIC STOP FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 12, 1907.
12-
7%t-*
27 & > ji>
27 M w w> \ jg
cJ-M/UC-H-fcot.
THE NOSRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. O
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHARLES P. COOK, OF PLYMOUTH, CONNECTICUT.
AUTOMATIC STOP FOB PHONOGRAPHS.
No. 890,338.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 9, 1908.
Application filed October 12, 1907. Serial No. 397,202.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Charles P. Cook, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Plym-
outh, in the county of Litchfield and State
5 of Connecticut, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Automatic
Stops for Phonographs, of which the follow-
ing is a specification.
This invention relates to talking machines
10 or phonographs, and has particular reference
to devices whereby such machines may be
automatically stopped at the desired time at
the end of the travel of the reproducer.
Among the special objects aimed at in the
15 present invention are to provide a device
of the character above described which is
simple in construction, easy of application
to the machine, and in which the parts are
readily adjustable according to the various
20 types of machines to which it is applicable
and to compensate for variations according
to the various requirements.
For a full understanding of the invention,
including its advantages and mode of oper-
25 ation, reference is to be had to the following
detail description, and to the accompanying
drawings, in which: —
Figure 1 is a general perspective view of a
fragment of a common type of phonograph
30 or talking machine, with the present inven-
tion shown as applied thereto, and Fig. 2 is a
plan view of the attachment.
In the several views of the drawings simi-
lar parts are referred to by like reference
35 characters.
Having particular reference to the draw-
ings by reference characters, the talking ma-
chine or phonograph is represented diagram-
matically at 10, and the same includes a frame
40 or flange 1 1 lying at one side of the record
cylinder. Projecting upwardly through the
casing 12 and at the outer side of the frame
11 is a starting lever 13. The parts thus far
referred to are conventional. A base plate
45 14, made of any suitable material such as
angle metal and having a horizontal and a
vertical flange, is adapted to be detachably
secured as by means of a bracket 15 and a
clamp 16 to the aforesaid frame 11. The
50 horizontal flange 14' of the base plate 14 is
provided with a slot 17 which registers with
the ordinary slot in the top of the casing 12
and through which the aforesaid lever 13
projects vertically.
55 Secured in any substantial manner as by
screws near one endof the base plate 14 is a
vertical bracket 18 having a horizontal pivot
19, and on this pivot is journaled for oscilla-
tion in a vertical plane, a trip lever 20. The
longer end or the body of this lever 20 lies qq
substantially parallel with the record cylin-
der, and the shorter end thereof is upturned
as at 21 and adjustably mounted in the upper
end of the part 21 is a screw 22, lying sub-
stantially parallel with the aforesaid body 65
portion of the trip lever. The longer end of
the trip lever 20 is normally forced down-
wardly by any suitable means and said end
is provided with engagement means such as a
notch 23, the shoulder of which is directed 70
outwardly with respect to the supporting
pivot 19. As a convenient means for forcing
the aforesaid outer end of the trip lever
downwardly, there is employed a leaf spring
24, one end of which is secured to the bracket 75
18 and the free end of which lies in cooper-
ative engagement with the short end 21 of
said lever, forcing the latter upwardly.
A clamp 25 is detachably secured as by
means of a screw 26 to the upper end of the 80
startmg lever 13. Said clamp is herein indi-
cated as being U-shaped and the ends thereof
are bent outwardly away from each other
forming a finger piece 27 and a catch 28, the
latter cooperating with the aforesaid notch 85
23. At the end of the clamp 25 on the oppo-
site side of the starting lever 13 is secured as
by an eyelet 29 a spring 30 whose other end is
secured to some fixed point such as a binding
screw 31 adjacent to the aforesaid bracket 18. 90
Having thus described the mechanical
structure of the invention, its mode of appli-
cation and operation will be appreciated:
The base plate 14 is put in place on top of the
machine with the starting lever 13 passed up- 95
wardly through the slot 17 and is then se-
cured in place by the securing means 15 and
16. The clamp 25 is then secured at its
desired adjustment on the upper end of the
starting lever 13 so that the normal tendency 100
of the spring 30 is to forcibly draw said lever
toward the bracket 18, or to the right as in-
dicated in the drawings. When it is desired
to start the instrument the operator grasps
the finger piece 27 and draws the clamp 25 105
and the starting lever against the tension of
the spring 30 and brings the catch 28 into
locking cooperation with the notch 23 of the
trip lever. At the end of the run of the ma-
chine the lower end 32 of the reproducing 110
arm will engage the end of the screw 22 and
rock the trip lever on its pivot 19, against
890,338
the tension of the spring 24, and will thereby
release the notched end of the said lever from
the catch 28, allowing the force of the spring
30 to promptly and forcibly throw the lever
5 13 to the right and stop the machine. The
screw 22, it will be understood, is adjustable
longitudinally with respect to the path of
movement of the arm 32 to vary the point or
time at which the machine will be auto-
10 matically stopped, according to the type of
machines or the character of the record to be
employed. The plane of the catch 28 is
slightly at an angle to that of the finger piece
27 for the purpose of providing a more effect-
15 ive engagement with the notch 23.
As indicated in the drawings, it is desirable
in the practical operation of the attachment
that a layer of material such as felt, shall be
placed between the flanges of the base plate
20 and the casing of the phonograph, whereby
any tendency of the attachment to cause
rattling would be prevented.
Havmg thus described the invention what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
25 Patent of the United States is: —
1. In an automatic stop mechanism for
phonographs, the combination with a base
plate and means to secure it in place, of an
upright bracket secured to the said base
30 plate, a trip lever journaled in said bracket
for oscillation in a vertical plane, one end of
the trip lever being turned at an angle to the
main part thereof, a screw adjustably mount-
ed in said lever end and lying substantially
35 parallel with said main part, a starting lever
clamp having a catch to cooperate with said
trip lever and a finger piece, resilient means
normaUy tending to rock the trip lever on its
pivot in one direction, and means normally
40 tending to draw the said starting lever clamp
toward said bracket upon oscillation of the
trip lever in the opposite direction, substan-
tially as set forth.
2. In combination with a phonograph hav-
45 ing a frame member, a starting lever, and
reproducer arm, of an automatic stop mech-
anism therefor comprising a base plate,
means to secure the same to said frame mem-
ber, a trip lever pivoted for oscillation, one
end of said lever being notched and the other 50
end being upturned at an angle to the main
portion thereof, a screw mounted in said up-
turned end and lying in the path of said re-
producer arm, a clamp adjustably secured
to said starting lever and having a catch to 55
cooperate with the notch aforesaid to hold
the clamp and its lever in one position, and a
spring attached to said clamp tending nor-
mally to draw said clamp and lever out of
said position upon the occasion of contact of 60
the reproducer arm with the said screw.
3. In an automatic stop mechanism for
phonographs, the combination of a bracket, a
trip lever pivoted thereto, one end of the
said lever having a notch and the other end 65
being turned at an angle to the main body
portion thereof, a U-shaped clamp having at
one end a catch to cooperate with the notch
aforesaid, means to adjustably secure the
clamp to a part to be moved, means to cause 70
the trip lever to oscillate on its pivot, and a
spring attached at one end to the said clamp
and at the other end to the said bracket
whereby on the occasion of the aforesaid os-
cillation of the lever to cause the release of 75
the catch, the clamp is quickly moved.
4. The combination with a phonograph
embodying a reproducer arm and starting
lever, of stop mechanism comprising a clamp
secured to the starting lever, and having an 80
oppositely extending catch and finger piece,
a spring connected with the clamp, and a
trip lever engaging the catch of the clamp, to
hold the spring under tension and the start-
ing lever inoperative, and arranged for ac- 85
tuation by the reproducer arm to release the
clamp and permit stopping of the machine by
the starting lever.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
CHAKLES P. COOK.
Witnesses :
Lena C. McBurney,
Samuel Wheeler.
No. 890,534.
PATENTED JUNE 9, 1908.
H. SCHRODER.
PHONOGRAPH HORN.
APPLICATION FILED MAT 4, 1907.
9m>entoT
/V- &c/i>r-o dte^-i
€lttot*ie-i£»
*THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HERMANN SCHRODER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
PHONOGRAPH-HORN.
25
No. 890,534.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Patented June 9, 1908.
Original application filed March 2, 1907, Serial No. 360,158. Divided and this application filed May 4, 1907.
Serial No. 371,916.
To all wlwm it may concern:
Be it known that I, Hermann Schroder,
citizen of the United States, residing at New
York, in the county of New York and State
of New York, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Phonograph-Horns,
of which the following is a specification.
This invention contemplates certain new
and useful improvements in phonographs
10 and relates particularly to an improved con-
struction of phonograph horn or megaphone
which will result in reproducing a mellow
sound without any of that metallic charac-
teristic or tone quality which is such an ob-
15 jectionable incident of the ordinary metal-
lic horn.
With this and other objects in view as
will more fully appear as the description pro-
ceeds, the invention consists in certain con-
20 structions, arrangements and combinations
of the parts which I shall hereinafter specific-
ally describe and then point out the novel
features in the appended claim.
In the accompanying drawings, I have
illustrated my improved construction of
phonograph horn as embodied in that type
of phonographs where the sound amplifying
means is mounted in a stationary manner
within a casing or cabinet, upon which the
30 disk or cylinder record is mounted.
In the drawings : Figure 1 is a perspective
view of a phonograph embodying the im-
provements of my invention. Fig. 2 is a
longitudinal sectional view.
35 Corresponding and like parts are referred
to in the following description and indicated
in all the views of the drawings by the same
reference characters.
This application discloses an invention
40 which has been divided out of a prior appli-
cation for Letters Patent of the United
States, #360,178, filed March 2, 1907, and
the present invention relates solely to the
construction of sound amplifying means or
45 horns.
In the accompanying drawing I have
shown for the purpose of illustration only,
a cabinet or case 1 upon which a disk record
2 is mounted, 3 designating the taper arm
carrying the sound box or diaphragm and its 50
stylus, and 4 designating the connection
between the taper arm and the sound am-
plifying means mounted within the case.
My improved phonograph horn 5 is prefer-
ably composed of wood and is connected at 55
one end of the case with the extension or con-
nection 4 in any suitable manner, the said
horn preferably extending entirely through
the case 1 and tapered from its front to-
wards its rear end and being elliptical in 60
cross section. Upper and lower cross bars 6,
preferably also of wood, extend across the
horn 5 at the front and rear ends thereof, the
ends of said cross bars being secured to the
body of the horn in any desired manner, and 65
a set of tuning pegs 7 is mounted in each of
said bars 6. Strings 8 extend longitudinally
of the body of the horn and have their ends
secured in the well known way to the tuning
pegs 7, said strings being the ordinary violin 70
strings or strings of any other similar instru-
ment. It is obvious that the strings 8 may
be held at any desired degree of tension, and
that in practical operation they will vibrate
as the sound issues from the horn and produce 7 5
a tone quality which will be mellow and
without the objectionable metallic features
so common with the ordinary phonograph
horns.
Having thus described the invention, what 80
is claimed as new is :
Sound amplifying and modifying means
for phonographs, embodying a tapered body
portion elliptical in cross section, upper and
lower front and rear cross bars secured at 85
their ends only within the said body portion
and otherwise spaced from the walls thereof,
tuning pegs mounted in said cross bars and
strings secured to and stretched between the
said pegs and extending longitudinally of the 90
body portion.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
HERMANN SCHRODER, [l. s.]
Witnesses:
Malweise von der Osten,
Cora Wiesand.
No. 890,754. PATENTED JUNE 16, 1908.
S. BERENS.
REGULATING DEVICE FOR GRAPHOPHONE SOUND BOXES.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 8, 1908.
J¥*g- ^
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
STANISLAUS BERENS, OF LA GRANGE, ILLINOIS, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-FOURTH TO WILLIAM J.
SOPER AND ONE-FOURTH TO PETER J. HISELMAN, BOTH OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
REGULATING DEVICE FOR GRAPHOPHONE SOUND-BOXES.
No. 890,754.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 16, 1908.
Application filed January 8, 1908, Serial No, 409,868.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Stanislaus Berens, a
citizen of the United States, residing at La
Grange, in the county of Cook and State of
i Illinois, have invented certain new and use-
ful Improvements in a Regulating Device for
Graphophone Sound-Boxes, of which the fol-
lowing is a specification.
This invention relates to improvements in
10 means for regulating or modulating the
sounds of graphophones and analogous in-
struments, and has especial relation to the
reproducers or sound-boxes of the same, and
it consists in certain peculiarities of the con-
15 struction, novel arrangement, and operation
of the various parts thereof, as will be here-
inafter more fully set forth and specifically
claimed.
The principal object of the invention is to
20 provide simple and efficient means to be used
in connection with a graphophone sound-box
whereby the vibration of parts thereof may
be adjusted or regulated to the greatest de-
gree of nicety, so as to produce as nearly as
25 possible the natural and distinct articula-
tions of spoken sounds, and to afford more
perfect results in the reproduction of musical
notes, as well as to prevent harsh, grating
and discordant sounds.
30 A further object of the invention is to af-
ford a greater degree of flexibility of the dia-
phragm while maintaining the proper ten-
sion thereof, so that the sounds and notes
may be modified or softened.
35 Another object of the invention is to pro-
vide means to permit of the proper adjust-
ment of the sound-box and stylus which it
carries with respect to the record without in-
terfering with the movement of the sound
40 magnifying horn.
Other objects and advantages of the in-
vention will be disclosed in the subjoined
description and explanation.
In order to enable others skilled in the art
45 to which my invention pertains, to make and
use the same, I will now proceed to describe
it, referring to the accompanying drawing, in
which — ■
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a grapho-
50 phpne, showing a sound-box embodying my
invention thereon and in position ready for
operation; Fig. 2 is a face view of the outer
surface of the sound-box; Fig. 3 is a plan view
partly in section and partly in elevation,
55 showing the means for regulating the tension
of the diaphragm and also the means for se-
curing the same in position within the sound-
box ; Fig. 4 is a f ragmental inner face view of
the sound-box, showing by dotted lines one
of the positions to which it and the stylus co
may be adjusted with respect to the record; —
and — Fig. 5 is a plan view partly in section
of the sound-box, showing a modification in
its construction.
Like numerals of reference, refer to corre- 65
sponding parts throughout the different
views of the drawing.
The reference numeral 10 designates the
frame-plate of the sound-box which is pro-
vided at its center with a" sound receiving 70
tube 11 on which the small end of the horn 12
may be fitted. The frame-plate 10 of the
sound-box is provided at its periphery with
an annular flange 13 which projects out-
wardly or in the opposite direction from the 75
tube 11 and has its inner surface partly
screw-threaded as at 14 (see Fig. 3) to en-
gage the outer screw-threaded surface of an
annular washer 15, which is provided with a
number of openings 16 for. a spanner or other 80
instrument to be used in turning the washer
15 when it is desired to screw the same in
place.
Located on the inner surface of the frame-
plate 10 of the sound-box, and at or near the 85
periphery thereof, is a ring 17, of rubber or
other suitable cushioning material, on which
the diaphragm 18 rests near its periphery.
On the outer surface of the diaphragm and
at or near the flange 13 of the sound-box is 90
another ring 19, of rubber or other suitable
material, which is pressed against the dia-
phragm by means of the washer 15, thus
securely holding the diaphragm in position
within the sound-box frame, and in such a 95
manner as to afford a great vibratory portion
or area thereof, for it will be seen and under-
stood that the rings 17 and 19 between which
the diaphragm is interposed will contact with
only a small portion of the diaphragm near 100
its periphery. The flange 13 of the sound-
box frame is provided on its outer surface
with two spaced apart and transversely aper-
tured arms 20 and 21 to receive the ends of a
rod 22 on which the head 23 which carries the 105
stylus 24 is mounted. The ends of the rod
22 are pointed, as shown in Fig. 2, to fit in
conical-shaped openings in the arm 21 and
in the inner end of an adjusting screw 25,
which is in screw engagement with a suitable no
890,754
opening in the arm 20. The stylus 24 is
fitted in a suitable opening in the head 23,
and may be adjustably held therein by means
of a screw 26 which engages a suitable open-
5 ing in the head.
Extending inwardly from the head 23 to
the center of the diaphragm is the stylus-arm
27, which may be secured at its inner end to
the center of the diaphragm in any suitable
10 manner. As shown in Fig. 3, the stylus-arm
27 is formed with an elbow 28 to which is se-
cured one end of a spiral spring 29, the other
end of which is secured to the inner end of a
screw 30 which is extended through a suit-
15 able opening in the middle portion of a
bracket, of any suitable shape and construc-
tion, 31 which has its ends secured diametric-
ally opposite each other to the washer 15, as
will be understood by reference to Figs. 2, 3
20 and 5 of the drawings. On the outer portion
of the screw 30 is a nut 32 used for regulating
the tension of the spring 29, and through it
and the stylus-rod the tension and flexibility
of the diaphragm. Surrounding the tube
25 11 is a broken ring 33 which has on its ends
outwardly extended lugs 34 in which is trans-
versely located a screw 35 to be used for
clamping the lugs together when it is desired
to firmly secure the ring in position on the
30 tube, or to permit the parts of the ring to
spring apart when it is desired to adjust the
sound-box and stylus, so that the latter may
be arranged at the proper angle with respect
to the record.
35 The ring 33 is provided at a point oppo-
site the lugs 34 with a pin 36, which is adapt-
ed to fit in a suitable opening in the small end
of the horn 12, or arm which, as is well known,
is usually deflected at said end towards the
40 sound-box and is fitted over the tube 11. By
this arrangement it is evident that by loosen-
ing the screw 35 in the lugs 34 the sound-box
may be turned to any suitable angle, as the
ring 33 will loosely support the horn on the
45 tube 11, when it may be again rigidly fixed
thereto by tightening said screw.
In Fig. 5 of the drawing I have shown a
modification in the construction of the de-
vice, which consists in providing the tube 1 1
50 with internal screw-threads to engage an ad-
justing tube 37 which is externally screw-
threaded and is employed to regulate the ten-
sion of a conical-shaped spiral-spring 38,
which has one of its ends secured to the dia-
55 phragm 18 and its other end resting against
or in contact with the inner end of the tube
37, as is clearly shown in Fig. 5 of the draw-
ing. This modified form further consists in
employing a cam-lever 39 which is fulcrumed
60 between two projections 40 on the middle
outer portion of the bracket 31 and engages
a rod 30a, which is extended through an open-
ing in the middle portion of the bracket 31
and has secured to its inner end one end of a
65 spring 29, the other end of which is secured
to the elbow 28 of the stylus-arm as in the
other construction.
While I have shown in Figs. 2 and 3 of the
drawing a screw-rod 30 and nut 32 for regu-
lating the tension of the spring 29, and have 70
shown in Fig. 5 the rod 30a and cam-lever 39
for said purposes, yet it is evident that I may
employ a screw-rod and nut on the construc-
tion shown in Fig. 5, or may employ a cam-
lever and rod in the construction shown in 75
Figs. 2 and 3, without departing from the
spirit of the invention.
From the above description of my im-
provements it will be seen that the improved
sound-box constructed according to my in- go
vention is of an extremely simple and inex-
pensive nature, and is especially well adapt-
ed for use by reason of the great accuracy or
nicety with which the tension of the dia-
phragm may be regulated without deleteri- 35
ously affecting its flexibility, and, of the fact
that the sound-box and stylus may be easily
adjusted to any desired position with respect
to the record without interfering with or
causing the movement of the horn. And, it 90
will also be evident that the device is sus-
ceptible of considerable modification without
material departure from the principles and
spirit of the invention, and for this reason I
do not desire to be understood as limiting 95
myself to the precise form and arrangement
of the several parts of the device as herein set
forth in carrying out my invention in prac-
tice, for example, the adjusting tube 37 and
spring 38 shown in Fig. 5 may or may not be 100
used in conjunction with the spring 29 and
adjusting means therefor shown in Figs. 2
and 3 of the drawing.
Having thus fully described my invention,
what I claim as new, and desire to secure by 105
Letters-Patent, is —
1. The combination with a graphophone
sound-box, of a bracket mounted across one
of its faces, a stylus-arm pivotally mounted
on the box and in engagement with the dia- no
phragm, a spiral-spring connected at one of
its ends to the inner portion of the stylus-arm
and movably connected at its other end to
the bracket, and means to regulate the ten-
sion of the spring. 115
2. The combination with a graphophone
sound-box, of a bracket mounted across one
of its faces, a stylus-arm pivotally mounted
on the box and in engagement with the dia-
phragm, a screw-rod extended through the 120
bracket at about its middle, a spiral-spring
connected at one of its ends to the inner por-
tion of the stylus-arm and at its other end to
one end of the screw-rod, and an adjusting
nut on the other end of said rod. 125
3. The combination with a graphophone
sound-box having a sound-receiving-tube on
one of its faces and provided on its other face
with a diametrically disposed bracket, of a
stylus-arm pivotally mounted on the box 130
890,754
and in engagement with the diaphragm, a
spiral-spring connected at one of its ends to
the inner portion of the stylus-arm and mov-
ably connected at its other end to the bracket,
5 a spiral-spring located in the tube and in en-
gagement with the diaphragm, and means to
regulate the tension of said springs.
4. The combination with a graphophone
sound-box having a sound-receiving-tube on
10 one of its faces and provided on its other face
with a diametrically disposed bracket, of a
stylus-arm pivotally mounted on the box
and in engagement with the diaphragm, a
spiral-spring connected at one of its ends to
15 the inner portion of the stylus-arm and mov-
ably connected at its other end to the bracket,
means to regulate the tension of said spring,
a spiral-spring located in the tube and in en-
gagement at one of its ends with the dia-
20 phragm, and another tube adjustably se-
cured in the sound-receiving-tube to regulate
the tension of the spring in said tube.-
5. The combination with a graphophone
sound-box having a sound-receiving-tube on
25 one of its faces and provided on its other face
with a diametrically disposed bracket, of a
broken ring detachably secured on said tube
and having a projection near its periphery, a
stylus-arm pivotally mounted on the box
30 and in engagement with the diaphragm, a
spiral-spring connected at one of its ends to
the inner portion of the stylus-arm, and
means at the other end of said spring to ad-
just its tension.
6. The combination with a graphophone 35
sound-box having a sound-receiving-tube on
one of its faces, of a diaphragm secured in the
box, means to regulate the flexibility of the
diaphragm, and a broken ring detachably se-
cured on the tube and provided with a pro- 40
jection near its periphery.
7. The combination with a graphophone
sound-box having a sound-receiving-tube on
one of its faces, of a diaphragm secured with-
in the sound-box, a spiral-spring located 45
within the tube and in engagement at one of
its ends with the diaphragm, and an adjust-
ing tube adjustably secured within the sound
receiving-tube to regulate the tension of said
spring. _ 50
8. The combination with a graphophone
sound-box consisting of a frame-plate pro-
vided with an internally screw-threaded an-
nular flange, of a pair of rings located on the
plate within the flange thereof, a diaphragm 55
interposed between said rings, a washer in
screw engagement with the flange of the
frame-plate, a stylus-arm pivotally mounted
on the box and in engagement with the dia-
phragm, a spiral-spring connected at one of 60
its ends to the inner portion of the stylus-
arm, and means at the other end of said
spring to support the same and adjust its ten-
sion.
STANISLAUS BERENS.
Witnesses :
Chas. C. Tillman,
M. A. Nyman.
; !
No. 890,777. * PATENTED JUNE 16, 1908.
S. LEVIN.
STYLUS FOR SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED NOV. 16, 1907.
l.... ...... ...Ai.. ............. >T
,.,.V.W,V
'«WW«ri<wfaffffi
?.
r
6 d
ifl-tKtttot
^Vit»ie»»«9
SfJ Q/jt0^=uu)
fiUtotM.*.^*
THE NO* JUS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
SAMUEL LEVIN, OF HIGHLAND PARK, ILLINOIS.
STYLUS FOR SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINES.
No. 890,777.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 16, 1908.
Application filed November 16, 1907. Serial No. 402,491.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Samuel Levin, a citi-
zen of the United States, residing at High-
land Park, in the county of Lake and State
5 of Illinois, have invented a new and useful
Stylus for Sound-Reproducing Machines, of
which the following is a specification.
This invention has reference to improve-
ments in the reproducing point or stylus for
10 sound-reproducing machines, and its object
is to provide a stylus which will give a mellow
and soft-toned reproduction, more particu-
larly from flat or disk-shaped records wherein
the sound record is represented by a sinuous
15 groove of even depth.
The present invention is an improvement
upon the invention disclosed in my applica-
tion #361, 122, for stylus for sound.-reproduc
ing machines filed March 7, 1907. In the
said application, the stylus is made of a thin
piece of horny, homogeneous material, such
as quill, with one end bent into a cylinder of
a size to fit the stylus holding socket of a
sound box, while the other end is flat, thin
and tapering and is adapted to engage in the
sound record groove.
The present invention utilizes the same
material for the record groove engaging
point, while the body or shank of the stylus
30 is made of metal or other rigid material
closely embracing the quill and extending
comparatively close to the operating point
thereof. This metallic shank is made cylin-
drical through the greater portion of its
35 length to fit the socket in the end of the
stylus lever and at the free end the shank is
flattened to conform to the flattened end of
the working point of the stylus, and also to
operate to transmit the vibrations imparted
40 to the stylus point with less loss of amplitude
than occurs with an all-quill stylus.
The invention will be best understood from
the following detail description, taken in
connection with the accompanying drawing
45 forming part of this specification, in which
drawing,
Figure 1 is a side elevation, upon an en-
larged scale, of a portion of the sound-re-
producing sound box with the improved
50 stylus in place therein. Fig. 2 is a perspec-
tive view of the improved stylus upon a
larger scale than is shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3
is a longitudinal section of the stylus upon a
still larger scale.
Referring to the drawings, there is shown a 55
sound box 1 which may be of any desired con-
struction such as is used in connection with
sound-reproducing machines using flat disk
records, and no special description of such
sound box is necessary, since, in itself, it 60
forms no part of the present invention.
The stylus is formed of two parts, 2, 3.
The part 2 is composed of a piece' of horny,
homogeneous, hard material, such as a thin
piece of horn, or goose quill, celluloid, or 65
some such substance. One end of the part 2
is spread out into a nearly flat shape with the
sides 4 approaching each other until they
finally emerge into a point 5 of such size
as to enter the sound record groove of the 70
well-known sound disk records. Back of the
wide portion 6 of the stylus point or head the
quill may be continued a distance, as indi-
cated at 7. The part 3 of the stylus, which
may be termed the shank of the stylus, is 75
formed of a metallic tube of cylindrical shape
of such external diameter as to fit snugly but
easily into the usual stylus receiving socket
of the stylus carrying lever of the sound box.
This shank extends onto the part 2 as near to 80
the operating end 5 thereof as may be found
practicable. In the drawing, the metal tube
3 is shown as reaching to a point just back of
the widest portion 6 of the part 2, but it is
within the scope of the invention to extend 85
the metal tube still closer to the working end
5. In order that the tube 3 may grasp the
part 2 closely about the flat portion thereof,
that end of the tube contiguous to the work-
ing point of the part 2 is flattened, as shown 90
at 8, so as to grasp the working point 2 both
on the sides and ends in order that there may
be no lost motion between the parts 2 and
3. The extent of projection of the part 7
into the tube 3 is immaterial and may be 95
much less than that shown, as long as the
parts 2 and 3 are firmly united and the part 2
is prevented from any movement in, or inde-
pendent of, the part 3.
By making the part 3 of sufficient rigidity, 100
and by allowing the part 2 to project but
little beyond the outer end of the part 3,
there is produced a stylus having a rigid, un-
yielding shank with, an operating point or
end for engaging the sound groove which will 105
have no wearing or other injurious effects
upon the walls of the groove, and therefore
the life of the record tablets is indefinitely
3
890,777
prolonged. Furthermore, the harsh, grating
noises, so obtrusive when all-metal stylus
points are used, are practically eliminated.
The present invention retains all the ad-
5 vantages of the structure set forth in my
aforesaid application, while adding thereto
the additional advantage of a stiff and un-
yielding shank for the stylus. The structure
of the aforesaid application is well adapted
10 for the so-called "soft tone" reproductions
of sound records, but where louder and more
brilliant reproductions are desired, the stylus
made entirely of quill or like material fails
to produce the desired brilliancy and loud-
15 ness of reproduction. This is due to the
elasticity of the material used and the con-
sequent absorption of a material proportion
of the amplitude of vibration imparted by
the groove to the stylus before the vibrations
20 reach the stylus carrying lever. The metal
sleeve, however, is much less elastic than the
horny substance employed and, consequently,
there is little, if any, loss of amplitude of vi-
bration between the sound record groove and
25 the stylus carrying lever. The result is that
the brilliancy and loudness of the reproduced
sound is practically equal to the reproduc-
tion through an all-metal stylus used for
loud-toned reproductions, while the harsh,
30 grathrg> extraneous noises are practically
eliminated and the wear of the stylus upon
the walls of the record groove is inappreci-
able.
I claim: — ?
1. A stylus for sound-reproducing ma- 35
chines composed of a sound-groove-engaging
portion consisting of a thin piece of horny,
homogeneous material having one end ap-
proximately flat with the sides approaching
and merging into a sound-groove-engaging 40
point, and a shank composed of a cylinder of .
metal-receiving the end of the piece of horny
material remote from the point thereof and
flattened down upon said horny material.
2. A stylus for sound-reproducing ma- 45
chines composed of a thin piece of quill
pointed at one end to engage a sound record
groove, and a cylindrical shank piece, of
metal, receiving the other end of the quill
and flattened to engage the same. 50
3. A stylus for sound-reproducing ma-
chines having a sound record groove-engag-
ing point of horny homogeneous- material
and a shank portion of another material of
more rigid character than the point portion. 55
In testimony that I claim the foregoing as
my own, I have hereto affixed my signature
in the presence of two witnesses.
SAMUEL LEVIN
Witnesses :
Herbert Moon,
Charles F. Grant.
No. 891,079. PATENTED JUNE 16, 1908.
T. KRAEMER.
SOUND BOX FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED JULY 15, 1907.
OtOAA4J at. JynUtJi
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS KRAEMER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO HAWTHORNE &
SHEBLE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, A CORPO-
RATION OF PENNSYLVANIA.
SOUND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 891,079.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 16, 1908.
Application filed July 15, 1907. Serial No. 383,721.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas Kraemer, a
citizen of the United States, residing in Phila-
delphia, Pennsylvania, have invented certain
5 Improvements in Sound-Boxes for Talking-
Machines, of which the following is a specifi-
cation.
The object of my invention is to adapt for
use in connection with a phonograph record
10 of the "hill and valley" type, a sound box of
the character usually employed in connection
with records of tb e " lateral wave ' ' type. This
object I attain in the manner hereinafter set
forth, reference being had to the accompany-
15 ing drawing, in which
Figure 1 is a face view of a sound box con-
structed in accordance with my present in-
vention; Fig. 2 is an elevation of the same
looking in the direction of the arrow x, Fig. 1 ;
20 Fig. 3 is a section on the line a — a, Fig. 1;
Fig. 4 is a section on the line b — b, Fig. 1 , and
Fig. 5 is a view similar to Fig. 1, but illus-
trating a slight modification of the invention.
The cylindrical casing 1 of the sound box
25 is mounted upon the hollow arm 2 as usual,
and has supported within it, in the ordinary
way, the diaphragm 3, the central portion of
this diaphragm being secured to one arm of a
bell crank lever 4 which is pivoted to an over-
30 hanging bracket 5, secured to the casing 1,
the other arm of said lever 4 being connected,
by a link 6, to one arm of the stylus lever 7,
the latter being pivotally mounted upon the
pointed ends of screws 9 which are carried by
35 opposite members of a yoke 10 secured to the
casing 1 , of the sound box. (See Figs. 2 and
4). The other arm of said stylus lever car-
ries the stylus 12 which engages the groove
of the record as shown in Fig. 1 , so that, as the
40 record travels beneath said stylus, the stylus
lever is caused to vibrate by reason of the
"hill and valley" conformation of the base of
the groove,' these, vibrations being in the
same plane as that of the diaphragm 3', but
45 being transformed by the bell crank lever 4
into vibrations at a right angle to the plane
of the diaphragm, thereby causing vibra-
tions of the latter corresponding to the vibra-
tions of the stylus lever. A spring 13 se-
50 cured to the yoke 10 and bearing upon the
stylus lever serves to maintain constant con-
tact of the lever connections and of the bell
crank lever and diaphragm.
Instead of using a link connection between
the two levers as shown in Fig. 3, I may, in 55
some cases, cause the stylus lever to engage
directly with the bell crank lever 4, as shown,
for instance, in Fig. 5, the stylus lever 7a be-
ing suitably bent or deflected for this purpose.
By reason of my invention, a sound box of 60
the type usually employed in connection
with records having "lateral wave" grooves
is readily adapted for use in connection with
records having grooves of the ' ' hill and val-
ley" type. 65
I claim :—
1. The combination of a sound box, a ver-
tically disposed diaphragm therein, a bearing
fixed to said sound box, a bell crank lever
attached to said diaphragm and pivotally 70
mounted in said bearing to vibrate at a right
angle to the plane of the diaphragm, another
bearing fixed to said sound box and carrying
pivots extending parallel with the axis of the
sound box and diaphragm, and a stylus lever 75
carried by said pivots and connected to said
bell crank lever to vibrate in a plane at a
right angle to the axis of the sound box and
diaphragm.
2. The combination of a sound box, a ver- 80
tically disposed diaphragm therein, a bear-
ing fixed to said sound box and projecting
over the diaphragm, a bell crank lever at-
tached to said diaphragm and pivotally
mounted in said projecting bearing to vibrate 85
at a right angle to the plane of the diaphragm,
another bearing fixed to said sound box and
carrying pivots extending parallel with the
axis of the sound box and diaphragm, and a
stylus lever carried by said pivots and con- 90
nected to said bell crank lever to vibrate ver-
tically in a plane at a right angle to the axis
of the sound box and diaphragm.
3. The combination of a sound box, a ver-
tically disposed diaphragm therein, a bear- 95
ing fixed to said sound box, a bell crank lever
attached to said diaphragm and pivotally
mounted in said bearing to vibrate at a right
angle to the plane of the diaphragm, another
bearing fixed to said sound box and carrying 100
pivots extending parallel with the axis of the
sound box and diaphragm, a stylus lever
carried by said pivots and connected to said
bell crank lever to vibrate vertically in a
plane at a right angle to the axis of the sound 105
box and diaphragm, and a spring carried by
Q
891,079
the bearing to which the stylus lever is piv-
oted, said spring acting upon the stylus lever
to lift the same from the groove of the record.
4. The combination of a sound box, a ver-
5 tically disposed diaphragm therein, a bear-
ing fixed to said sound box, a bell crank lever
attached to said diaphragm and pivotally
mounted in said bearing to vibrate at a right
angle to the plane of the diaphragm, another
10 bearing fixed to said sound box and provided
with adjustable screw pivots extending par-
allel with the axis of the sound box and dia-
phragm, and a stylus lever mounted upon
said pivots and connected to said bell crank
15 lever to vibrate vertically in a plane at a
right angle to the axis of the sound box and
diaphragm.
5. The combination of a sound box, a ver-
tically disposed diaphragm therein, a bearing
20 fixed to said sound box and projecting over
said diaphragm, a bell crank lever attached
to said diaphragm and pivotally mounted in
said projecting bearing to vibrate at a right
angle to the plane of the diaphragm, another
bearing fixed to the sound box and provided
with adjustable screw pivots extending par-
allel with the axis of the sound box and dia-
phragm, and a stylus lever mounted upon
said pivots and connected to said bell crank
lever to vibrate vertically in a plane at a
right angle to the axis of the sound box and
diaphragm.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification, in the presence
of two subscribing witnesses.
THOMAS KRAEMER.
Witnesses :
Hamilton D. Turner,
Kate A. Beadle.
25
30
No. 891,196. PATENTED JUNE 16, 1908.
E. TRATNOR, S. BURGESS & J. AMES.
MECHANISM FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF CYLINDRICAL BLANKS AND
RECORDS FOR PHONOGRAPHS, GRAPHOPHONES, AND THE LIKE.
APPLICATION PILED FEB. 24, 1908.
Joiiz.1.
A+t^
attif
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE,
EDWARD TRAYNOR AND STEPHEN BURGESS, OF LEYTONSTONE, AND JOHN AMES, OF
LEYTON, ENGLAND.
MECHANISM FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF CYLINDRICAL BLANKS AND RECORDS FOR
PHONOGRAPHS, GRAPHOPHONES, AND THE LIKE.
No. 891,196.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 16, 1908.
Application filed February 24, 1908. Serial No. 417,477.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, Edward Traynor
and Stephen Burgess, residents of 89 Mel-
ford road, Leytonstone, Essex, England,
5 electrochemical engineers, and John Ames,
factor}7 manager, of 3 Ashville road, Leyton,
Essex, England, all citizens of the United
Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, have
invented a certain new and useful Improved
10 Mechanism for the Manufacture of Cylin-
drical Blanks and Records for Phonographs,
Graphophones, and the Like, of which the
following is a specification, such as will
enable others skilled in the art to which it
15 appertains to make and use the same.
Our invention consists in an apparatus for
spinning cylindrical blanks and records for
phonographs, graphophones and other sound
recording and sound reproducing instru-
20 ments by the use of centrifugal force, and has
for its object the prevention of spiral lines,
splashes, holes and other faults.
In this apparatus a shell is used, tapered in
such a manner as to conveniently accommo-
25 date and center the mold or matrix and also
to prevent the vibration which invariably
produces faulty blanks and records and is
either screwed or clutched on to the base and
furnished with a perforated annular top, or it
30 is permanently attached to the base and
fitted with a perforated cap held in position
by a clutch or screw or in any other conven-
ient manner.
With the foregoing and other objects in
35 view, the invention consists in the details of
construction and hi the arrangement and
combination of parts to be hereinafter more
fully set forth and claimed.
In describing the invention in detail, ref-
40 erence will be had to the accompanying
drawings forming part of this specification
wherein like characters denote correspond-
ing parts in the several views, in which —
Figure 1, shows a sectional elevation of our
45 device; and Fig. 2, shows a view of a plat-
form Tc, with the ball race in vertical position.
In these drawings, a, is a fixed support
with a tubular socket b. A ball race c, is ap-
plied to the top of the support a, and forms a
50 cover for the ball race. The shell e, is pro-
vided with an annular cap/, having a hole in
its center. A mold or matrix g, is applied to
the interior of the shell and the perforated
disk li, is interposed between the cap and the
mold or matrix. Below the mold or matrix 55
g, we place a disk i, forming a temporary
bottom for the mold or matrix. A circular
platform Tc, is secured to the end of a rod I,
_and the rod is encircled by a spring m, which
serves to lift the platform when the cap/, is 60
removed. The rod I, is provided with an
enlargement n, on its end which is designed
to abut the hollow spindle q, said hollow
spindle having a fixed pulley o, and a loose
pulley p, thereon. The shell e, is also se- 65
cured to the upper end of the hollow spindle
so that the said shell is rotated as the hollow
spindle is rotated.
r, is a lower ball race and s, s, are adjusting
nuts. 70
u, is a bench or table through which the
tubular socket b, forming an extension of the
support a, projects, and t, t, are air vents in
the walls of the shell.
The method of using the device is obvious. 75
The matrix being inserted, the hot wax is
poured in while the shell and matrix are rap-
idly rotating. As soon as the wax is properly
set, the cap and top disk are removed, when
the platform rises and the matrix or mold can 80
be withdrawn without injury to the record
or blank.
We are aware that it has already been pro-
posed to make records by pouring molten wax
into a rapidly revolving mold and we do not 85
claim tins principle broadly but only the im-
proved means of carrying same out, includ-
ing the top and bottom disks, the rising plat-
form for removing the mold and the general
mounting of the device. 90
We claim
1. A mechanical device for producing
blanks and records for phonographs, grapho-
phones and the like, consisting or a support,
a shell, a mold within the shell, a disk at the 95
top of the mold, a disk at the bottom of the
mold, a cap for the mold, a platform, a hol-
low spindle for rotating the shell, a rod in the
spindle adapted to project the mold, and a
spring for holding the rod normally projected. 100
2. A mechanical device for producing
blank and records for phonographs, grapho-
phones and the like, consisting or a support, a
shell, a mold within the shell, a hollow spin-
dle connected to the shell, a rod slidable in 105
the hollow spindle and having its end enter-
891,196
ing the shell, a spring for holding the rod nor-
mally projected, and means for rotating the
hollow spindle.
3. A mechanical device for producing
5 blank and records for phonographs, grapho-
phones and the like, consisting of a support, a
shell rotatable thereon, a hollow spindle de-
pending from the shell through the support,
means for rotating the hollow spindle, a rod
1 0 slidable in the hollow spindle adapted to en-
ter the shell, and a spring encircling the rod
and normally projecting the same.
4. A mechanical device for producing
blank and records for phonographs, grapho-
phones and the like consisting of a hollow 15
shell, means for rotating the shell, a mold
within the shell, an apertured disk at the top
of the mold, a disk at the bottom of the mold,
and a cap for the mold.
In witness whereof we have "hereunto set 20
our hands in presence of two witnesses.
EDWARD TRAYNOR.
STEPHEN BURGESS.
JOHN AMES.
Witnesses :
Henry Fairbrotiier,
John Aldridge.
No. 891,356.
PATENTED JUNE 23, 1908.
E. H. MOBLEY.
TURN TABLE FOR GRAMOPHONE MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED OOT. 12, 1906.
FfCr.l
f/g-.z
Aiiesl
t^D Inventor
FI&.4
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D, C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EDWIN H. MOBLEY, OF HILLSIDE, PENNSYLVANIA.
TURN-TABLE FOR GRAMOPHONE-MACHINES.
No. 891,356.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 23, 1908.
Application filed October 12, 1906. Serial No. 338,536.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Edwin H. Mobley, of
Hillside, Montgomery county, State of Penn-
sylvania, have invented an Improvement in
5 Turn-Tables for Gramophone-Machines, of
which the following is a specification.
My invention has reference to turntable
for gramophone machines and consists of
certain improvements which are fully set
10 forth in the following specification and shown
in the accompanying drawings which form
a part thereof.
The object of my invention is to provide a
construction of turntable for talking machines
15 which shall embody accuracy of rotation,
lightness, and cheapness of manufacture.
Heretofore, the turntables of sound repro-
ducing machines of the gramophone type
have been made heavy and of cast iron.
20 The castings frequently warp and give an
irregular surface for the reception of the
sound record tablet and cause a very uneven
travel of the same. This is injurious, in that
the stylus is made to seriously affect the form
25 of the grooves because of the greater duty
thus put upon it. The heavy weight of the
turntable required more spring power to ro-
tate it, and the turntable as a whole was
needlessly costly.
30 My invention overcomes the objections
inherent to the heavy cast iron turntables
above pointed out. Being light, my im-
proved turntable gets up its speed of rota-
tion more quickly at starting to produce the
35 proper rate of vibration to secure the articu-
lation of sound desired and yet, when the
pressure of the sound box and connections
are transmitted to it through the stylus and
record tablet, the "drag," thus obtained,
40 insures its speed remaining steady.
My invention consists of the turntable of
the motor part of a gramophone instrument
when made of sheet metal shaped to main-
tain a flat condition upon its upper surface
45 which acts as a support for the record disk.
More specifically, my invention compre-
hends the sheet metal turntable provided
with a downwardly extending flange on its
outer edge, an annular groove or downwardly
50 extending rib near its outer edge and pref-
erably a series of radial downwardly extend-
ing ribs, said ribs radiating from the neigh-
borhood of the hub.
My invention also embodies details of con-
struction which, together with the features
oo
above specified, will be better understood by
reference to the drawings, in which:
Figure 1 is a plan view of my improved
turntable; Fig. 2 is a transverse section of
the same; Fig. 3 is a cross section on line 60
3 — 3 of Fig. 1 ; Fig.. 4 is an elevation of a por-
tion of a gramophone instrument with my
improved turntable applied, and Fig. 5 is a
plan view of a modification.
A is the disk turntable and is made of 65
metal preferably circular in form, stamped
into shape to brace it in all directions and
at the same time present a flat surface on
top for reception of the record disk. The
disk has its outer edge flanged downward, as 70
at B and the free edge is preferably turned
inward as at C. This adds strength and also
shields the rough edge of the metal from view.
Near the outer flanged edge of the disk
and in the upper surface thereof there is an 75
annular depression D which, while shallow,
acts to hold the plate in a flat condition.
The surface of the plate between the outer
edge and the annular groove D forms a flat
band portion D'. 80
The central portion of the disk is formed
with a hole and also a series of radial grooves
E preferably extending from the hub G to the
annular groove D. I prefer to have the
grooves deeper near the hub than at the 85
outer portion of the disk so that they form
downwardly extending ribs on the under side
which are deeper adjacent to the hub to give
great strength and also to have the grooves
widened as they approach the groove D. 90
G is the hub and may be in the form of a
flanged bushing.
The ribs E give depth to the disk adjacent
to the center and being close together at this
place act excellently to support the bushing. 95
The turntable thus formed has a series of
triangular portions and a circular portion
surrounding them, all of which are in the
same plane and held in such plane by the
flange B and parts D, E. The turntable is 100
then covered with felt or other textile mate-
rial as at S for the reception of the record
tablet, and this covering may be cemented
or otherwise attached. This turntable is
fitted upon the upright spindle I of the motor 105
H. K represents the sound box and stylus
and J is the record tablet supported on the
turntable, in Fig. 4.
The outer edge may be stretched by mak-
ing the flange B in other shapes, such as is 110
2
891,356
well known in metal working so that in using
the term "flange" I do not wish to be under-
stood as confining myself to the identical
form shown.
5 I have shown my improved turntable of
the form I prefer, but I wish it to be under-
stood that the ribs E may be dispensed with
or modified as to length and width without
departing -from the spirit of my invention.
10 It is also evident that while I prefer the edge
C to be bent inward, as shown, this may be
omitted.
Having now described my invention what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
1 5 ters Patent, is :
1. A turntable for a talking machine,
which consists of a disk of sheet metal having
its outer edge provided with a downwardly
extending flange, and its upper surface pro-
20 vided with an annular depressed portion near
the outer edge forming an annular flat band
portion.
2. A turntable for a talking machine,
which consists of a disk of sheet metal having
25 its outer edge provided with a downwardly
extending flange, and its upper surface pro-
vided with an annular depressed portion near
the outer edge forming an annular flat band
portion, and a series of depressed portions
30 extending from the central part toward the
annular depressed portion and forming ribs
on the underside.
3. A turntable for a talking machine,
which consists of a disk of sheet metal having
35 its outer edge provided with a downwardly
extending flange, and its upper surface pro-
vided with an annular depressed portion near
the outer edge forming an annular flat band
portion, and a series of depressed portions ex-
40 tending from the central part toward the an-
nular depressed portion and forming ribs on
the underside, said ribs increasing in width
as they approach said annular depressed por-
tion.
45 4. A turntable for a talking machine,
! which consists of a disk of sheet metal having
i its outer edge provided with a downwardly
extending flange, and its upper surface pro-
vided with an annular depressed portion near
the outer edge forming an annular flat band 50
portion, and a series of radially arranged de-
pressed portions extending from the center
outward forming ribs upon the outer side,
and a central bushing forming a hub for the
support of the turntable. 55
5. A turntable for talking machines made
of sheet metal in disk form and having a
flange B at its outer edge said flange having
the inwardly curved lower edge C, and also
an annular depression D in its upper surface 60
near its outer edge so as to form an annular
surface D' adjacent to the outer edge.
6. A turntable for talking machines made
of sheet metal in disk form and having a
flange B at its outer edge and a series of ra- 65
dial depressed portions extending from the
center outward.
7. A turntable for talking machines made
of sheet metal in disk lorm and having a
flange B at its outer edge and a series of ra- 70
dial depressed portions extending from the
center outward, and forming downwardly ex-
tending ribs upon the underside, said ribs
having greatest depth near the center of the
disk and ribs to form a hub. 7 5
8. A turntable for talking machines con-
sisting of a disk of sheet metal having its
outer edge downwardly flanged and its upper
surface provided with depressed portions to
give it strength, combined with a covering of 80
3aelding material cemented to the surface of
the disk and bridging the depressed portions
thereof.
In testimony of which invention, I have
hereunto set my hand.
EDWIN H. MOBLEY.
Witnesses :
Ernest Howard Hunter,
K. M. Kelly.
No. 891,367.
PATENTED JUNE 23, 1908.
A. N. HERMAN.
SOUND REPRODUCER.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 2, 1907.
J?&i
J%r.f
3 —
z—\
J%p.z
jrs
,nn, 7fi
r~~jnn
^•4gJS\
i_ — I wrrrtnitA.
J6 J^t&.S
30
^tt&.
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ALEXANDER N. PIERMAN, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT
COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
SOUND-REPRODUCER.
No. 891,367.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 23, 1908.
Application filed February 2, 1907. Serial No. 355,388.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Alexander N. Pier-
man, a citizen of the United States, and a
resident of Newark, in the county of Essex
5 and State of New Jersey, have invented cer-
tain new and useful Improvements in Sound-
Reproducers, of which the following is a de-
scription.
My invention relates to sound reproducers
10 of the general type disclosed and claimed in
my applications Serial No. 288,837, filed No-
vember 24, 1905 and Serial No. 307,324, filed
March 22, 1906, and has for its object the
provision of means whereby improved results
15 will be secured.
My invention consists of an improved form
of valve for varying the rate of flow of elastic
fluid through the ports which communicate
with the resonating chamber, and an im-
20 proved form of port for cooperating with the
valve referred to, as will be hereinafter
pointed out and claimed.
Reference is hereby made to the accom-
panying drawing of which
25 Figure 1 is a bottom plan view of a port
plate to which one form of valve is applied;
Figs. 2, 3 and 4 are sections upon lines 2 — 2,
3 — 3 and 4 — 4 respectively of Fig. 1 ; Fig. 5
is a bottom plan view of a port plate pro-
30 vided with a modified form of valve; Fig. 6
is a section on line 6 — 6 of Fig. 5 ; Fig. 7 is a
bottom plan on a smaller scale of a port plate
adapted to be used with either of the valves
illustrated or with any other valve which is
35 adapted to vary the flow of elastic fluid
through the ports in accordance with the vi-
brations of sound waves; Fig. 8 is an en-
larged section on line 8 — 8 of Fig. 7 with a
valve seated upon the ports thereof; Fig. 9
40 is a plan view of a modified form of port
plate; Fig. 10 is a section on line 10 — 10 of
Fig. 9 ; Fig. 1 1 is a vertical section of a pho-
nographic sound reproducer showing the rel-
ative locations of the ported plate, valve, res-
45 onating chamber, stylus, etc., and Fig. 12 is
a section on line 12 — 12 of Fig. 5.
Referring to Fig. 1, the improved valve
comprises a plate 11, the greater portion of
whose length is slotted to form parallel
50 tongues 12, the number of which corresponds
with the number of ports with which the
valve is to cooperate. I have obtained fa-
vorable results by the use of valves having
three tongues of the relative proportions
55 illustrated. The valve 11 when in use will
be secured to a port plate 13 in any suitable
manner, as by means of screws 14 passing
through openings in the plate 1 1 and threaded
in the plate 13. The plate 11 is weakened
along a line adjacent the screws 14 by being qq
cut away to form a transverse groove 15.
The bottom of this groove is cut out through-
out its intermediate portion as shown at 16,
(Figs. 1, 2 and 3) so as to leave two thin nar-
row tongues 17 as the only connection be- 65
tween the main body of the plate 1 1 and that
portion which is held by the screws 14. Se-
cured to the free ends of the tongues 12 is a
transverse bar or bridge 18 which serves to
bind the tongues together and prevent tor- 70
sional movements thereof. It also keeps the
valve plate flat and prevents separate or in-
dividual vibrations of the tongues. The
plate 11 and bar 18 are preferably made of
aluminum and are cemented together by 75
shellac or other suitable material. A flat
spring 19 is secured at one end to the plate
11 by the middle screw 14 and presses with
its free end upon the middle tongue 12. The
point of contact of the free end of the spring 80
may be either at the point shown in the
drawing or the spring may be prolonged so as
to rest upon that portion of the tongue 12
which is at the point of greatest pressure of
the air stream which passes through the ports, 85
or it may even extend close to the free end
of the tongue 12. This spring 19 is centered
with respect to the tongue 12 and the tension
of the spring regulated by the adjusting
screw 20. The tongue 12 is shown as hav- 90
ing a pin hole 21 for receiving the link 22
which connects the tongue 12 with the stylus
lever 23.
The valve shown in Figs. 5 and 6 is some-
what similar to that of Figs. 1 to 4, but differs 95
therefrom in the shape of the transverse
groove 15. In the valve of Fig. 5 the metal
is cut away immediately at the base of the
tongues 12, see Fig. 12, so as to form a groove
32 with a sloping wall 33 which extends close ico
to the ends of the ports through which the
elastic fluid passes. By this means1 the flow
of the fluid is facilitated and there is much
less chance for dirt to find lodgment be-
tween the valve and part plate so as to hold 105
the valve permanently open. In the valve
of Fig. 5, the bar 18 is dispensed with and
the tongues 12 are connected by integral
bridge members 24 which are flush with the
outer surface thereof but whose depth is less no
891,367
than that of said tongues so as to provide
spaces 25 for the escape of air passing through
the ports 26. The port plate 13 of Figs. 1 to
6 is a flat plate having ports 26 cut there-
5 through and the tongues 12 of the valve 11
rest upon the flat surface of the plate 13 ad-
jacent the edges of the ports 26. With this
construction the flow of air depends upon the
width of the tongue 12 as regards the port 26,
10 that is, if the width of the tongue 12 is in-
creased, other conditions being unchanged,
the flow of air will be diminished; and also
if the tongue 12 is not accurately centered
with respect to the port 26 so that the over-
15 lap or bearing surface of the tongue is
greater at one side of the port than the other,
there will be an unequal flow of elastic fluid
at the opposite sides of said tongue because
more air will escape from the side where
2o there is the smaller amount of overlap. Such
irregularities in flow produce defects in the
sound reproduction.
Another reason why inaccurate centering
of the tongues 12 produces defects in repro-
25 duction is because when the valve moves
from an open to or toward a closed position
the air between the tongues 12 and plate 13
acts as a cushion and in case the tongues are
not properly centered, there will be a greater
30 cushioning effect on one side than on the
other which will tend to tilt or twist the
tongue laterally and thereby prevent it from
closing the port. It is therefore highly im-
portant, in constructing a sound reproducer
35 with this type of valve plate, to use the
greatest accuracy as to the width of the
tongues 12 and slots 26 and as to the center-
ing of the said tongues with respect to the
said slots. In order to avoid the necessity
40 for the extreme accurac}T referred to, I prefer
to cut away the portions of the ported plate
which surround the ports 26, as shown in
Figs. 7, 8 and 10, thus forming knife edges 27
surrounding each of the ports 26, upon which
45 edges the tongues 12 are adapted to lie.
These knife edges may be either sharp or
slightly flattened. The cut away portions of
the plate 13 form channels 28 for the escape
of the elastic fluid passing through the ports
50 26. It will be obvious that with this con-
struction the flow of fluid through the ports
26 will be independent of the width or cen-
tering of the tongues 12.
In the plate of Figs. 9 and 10 the central
5 5 portion 30 is of increased thickness and the
ports 31, having walls which converge to-
wards their lower edges, form a series of
funnels i of considerable depth and with their
upper edges in immediate juxtaposition.
60 These funnels amplify the sounds produced
by the variations in flow of elastic fluid there-
through. The lower surface of the plate 29
is shown as being cut away to form channels
28 and knife edges 27 similar to those of Figs.
65 7 and 8.
Fig. 11 shows the preferred arrangement
of parts, when my invention is used for
phonographic reproduction, although it is
obviously capable of being applied to other
classes of sound reproducers such as telephone 70
receivers, etc. The port plate 29 is situated
between a resonating chamber 32 and an
equalizing chamber 33 in which the valve
plate 1 lis located, the same being operated
by a link 22 connected with the stylus lever 75
23 whose pivot 34 is carried by the floating
weight 35 which is pivoted to the body 36.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent, is as follows: so
1 . In a sound reproducer, a valve consist-
ing of a plate weakened along a line of flex-
ure by a groove the bottom of which is cut
.through along part of its length, substantially
as set forth. 85
2. In a sound reproducer, a valve consist-
ing of a plate of elastic material formed with
parallel tongues and a transverse groove
which forms a line of flexure, substantially as
set forth. 90
3. In a sound reproducer, a valve consist-
ing of a plate formed with tongues and a
bridge across the ends thereof remote from
the point of support of the plate, substan-
tially as set forth. 95
4. In a sound reproducer, a flat plate pro-
vided with a port, the surface of said plate
being cut away and sharpened adjacent the
edges of said port to form knife edges, sub-
stantially as set forth. 100
5. In a sound reproducer, the combina-
tion of a flat plate provided with a set of
ports the edges of which project to form
knife edges and a valve consisting of a plate
formed with tongues, said tongues resting 105
against said knife edges to vary the extent of
opening of said ports, substantially as set
forth.
6. In a sound reproducer, a member pro-
vided with a set of funnel shaped ports, and 110
means for varying the flow of elastic fluid
therethrough, substantially as set forth.
7. In a sound reproducer, a plate formed
with funnel shaped ports, the edges of which
are in immediate juxtaposition, substantially 115
as set forth.
8. In a sound reproducer, the combina-
tion of a body formed with resonating and
equalizing chambers and ports connecting
said chambers, said ports being formed with 120
walls which converge from the resonating
chamber toward the equalizing chamber,
forming funnels of greater depth than width,
substantially as set forth.
9. In a sound reproducer, the combina- 125
tion of a plate having a port and a valve
therefor consisting of a plate weakened along
a line of flexure by a groove, said groove ex-
tending close to the edge of said port, sub-
stantially as set forth. 130
891,36?
10. In a sound reproducer, a valve con-
sisting of a plate formed with tongues and a
transverse groove which forms a line of flex-
ure, said groove extending to the base of said
tongues, substantially as set forth.
11. In a sound reproducer, a valve con-
sisting of a plate formed with tongues and a
transverse groove which forms a line of
flexure, said groove extending to the base of
said tongues and increasing gradually in
depth as it leaves said tongues, substantially
as set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 1st day of February 1907.
ALEXANDER N. PIERMAN.
Witnesses :
Delos Holden,
Frank D. Lewis.
10
No. 891,378. PATENTED JUNE 23, 1908.
H. SCHRODER.
FEED MECHANISM FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 17, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
3^
^Wit»i eases
£7
£0
Z6
se>
3-nvcntot-
Mm
Q^^^ff JSLtto*n*iiS
THE NORMS PETEH8 CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.
No. 891,378. PATENTED JUNE 23. 1908-
H. SCHRODER.
FEED MECHANISM FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION PILED OCT. 17, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 5
'Wit'M eases
&fetf*h=~-
_— »-*-*--v-<-a_^^
Swuentot
l^(l ci<s, e«orw«^s
THE NORRIS PETEHS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HERMANN SCHRODER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
FEED MECHANISM FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
No. 891,378.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 23, 1908.
Application filed October 17, 1907. Serial No. 397,922.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Hermann Schroder,
subject of the Emperor of Germany, residing
at New York, in the county of New York and
5 State of New York, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Feed Mech-
anisms for Phonographs, of which the follow-
ing is a specification.
This invention comprehends certain new
10 and useful improvements in disk record
phonographs, and the invention has for its
object an improved construction of mechan-
ism for imparting a horizontal movement to
the taper arm so as to positively feed the
15 needle or stylus transversely in the spiral
groove of the rotating record disk.
The invention consists in certain construc-
tions, arrangements and combinations of the
parts that I shall hereinafter fully describe
20 and then point out the novel features in the
appended claims.
For a full understanding of the invention,
reference is to be had to the following de-
scription and accompanying drawings, in
25 which:
Figure 1 is a rear view of a phonograph
equipped with the improvements of my in-
vention; Fig. 2 is a top plan view thereof;
Fig. 3 is a sectional view, the section being
30 taken across the guide rods of the supporting
frame for the feed shaft, parts of the actuat-
ing mechanism being shown in section; Fig.
4 is a detail longitudinal section of a portion
of the actuating mechanism; Fig. 5 is a detail
35 transverse section across the feed shaft,
showing the feed carriage in elevation ; and,
Fig. 6 is a detail perspective view of the actu-
ating arm.
Corresponding and like parts are referred
40 to in the following description and indicated
in all the views of the drawings by the same
reference characters.
Referring to the drawings, the numeral 1
designates the casing or cabinet of a phono-
45 graph, 2 the turn-table designed to carry the
record disk, and 3 the taper arm carrying
the sound box 4 and mounted to swing hori-
zontally in the usual manner.
A bracket 5 is secured by screws or the
50 like to the top of the cabinet 1 to one side of
and at the rear of the turn-table 2, said
bracket embodying an upper horizontally
disposed arm formed with a depending boss
6. In the boss 6 is a spindle 7 preferably
provided with a milled head 8 and designed 55
to be held at different adjustments in the
boss by a set screw 9. A similar spindle 10
is mounted in the lower plate of the bracket
in alinement with the spindle 7. The spin-
dle 7 fits within a socket in the upper end of a 60
trunnion 11 that is secured to and that pro-
jects upwardly from a cross bar 12. A
downwardly extending trunnion 13 is also
secured to the cross bar 12 and is journaled
at its lower end on the upper end of the spin- 65
die 10 so that the cross bar is held to turn
about a vertical axis. A sleeve 14 surrounds
the trunnion 13 above the bottom plate of
the bracket 5, and a pulley 15 is secured to
said sleeve so as to turn therewith on the 70
spindle. A belt 16 connects the pulley 15
with a similar pulley 17 secured on and mov-
able with the axis of the turn-table 2.
A bevel pinion 18 is secured to the sleeve
14 above the pulley 15 and meshes with a 75
corresponding pinion 19 on one end of the
horizontally extending threaded shaft 20.
This shaft is journaled at one end on a spin-
dle 21 projecting outwardly from the middle
of the cross bar 12, and is journaled at its 80
other end to a corresponding spindle 22 se-
cured to the cross arm 23. The two cross
arms 23 and 12 are connected together at
their ends by the rods 24, as clearly illus-
trated in the drawings, whereby to form a 85
supporting frame.
25 designates a carriage which is formed
with depending studs 26 on which rollers 27
are mounted, said rollers being movable and
engaging the rods 24 so as to accurately guide 90
the carriage in its movement along the sup-
porting frame. The carriage 25 is formed
with an upwardly projecting post 28. The
forked end 29 of a preferably jointed arm 30
loosely straddles the post 28, and the other 95
end of said arm is detachably secured in any
manner in a socket 31 formed in a boss on the
taper arm 3, so that the taper arm will swing
with the arm 30 as the carriage is moved.
In order to effect the proper movement of 100
the carriage within the supporting frame,
the said carriage is formed with an ear 32 car-
rying the stud or pivot for a clamping screw
that embodies two members 33, These two
members are adapted to embrace the screw 105
thread of the shaft 20 are pivotally mounted
on the stud of the ear 32, and the upper ends
of said members 33 are formed with inwardly
891,378
projecting pins 34 encircled by the ends of a
helical expansion spring 35. Either one or
both of the clamping members 33 may be
formed to engage the thread of the shaft 20.
5 In describing the operation of my improved
feed mechanism for the taper arm of phono-
graphs, it is to be understood that the parts
are so proportioned as to effect the proper
horizontal movement of the taper arm rela-
10 tive to the rotary movement of the turn-table
and its record disk. As the turn-table ro-
tates, its pulley 17 will effect the rotation of
the shaft 20 and the latter will feed the car-
riage along the frame and, through the in-
15 strumentality of the swinging arm 30, will
effect the horizontal movement of the taper
arms 3. This will manifestly swing the
sound box and needle transversely to effect
the positive feeding of the needle in the spiral
20 groove of the record. As the arm 30 is
jointed, its free forked end 29 may be raised
whenever desired to remove it from engage-
ment with the post 28 of the carriage 25.
Preferably there is no positive connection
25 between the arm 30 and the post, but the
fork 29 merely straddles the post.
In the normal or operative position of the
parts, the supporting frame consisting of the
cross bars or arms 12 or 23 and the guide rods
30 24 extends across a portion of the record disk,
and it is for this reason that the said frame
is mounted to swing horizontally on the spin-
dles 7 and 10, so that the frame maybe move-
backwardly out of the way and thereby per-
35 mit one disk to be removed and another sub-
stituted therefor. In order to hold the sup-
porting frame in proper operative position, I
provide a spring pressed latch pin 36 mounted
in a sleeve 37 secured to and depending from
40 the upper end of the bracket 5. The lower
end of this pin is adapted to fit in a socket 38
formed in the upper surface of the cross bar
12 near one end of the latter. The upper end
of the latch pin 36 is connected to a finger
45 lever 39 fulcrumed intermediate of its ends
on the bracket 5 as clearly illustrated in the
drawings, so that by pressing down upon the
free end of this lever, the latch pin may be
retracted and the supporting frame per-
50 mitted to move.
From the foregoing description in connec-
tion with the accompanying drawings, it will
be seen that I have provided a very simple,
■ durable and efficient construction of mechan-
55 ism that may be easily applied to a phono-
graph of the type for which the invention is
intended, to positively feed the taper arm
transversely as the disk rotates. In order to
move the carriage backwardly to its initial or
60 starting position, it is only necessary for one
to pinch together the two upper ends of the
clamping members 33 so as to release said
members from the threaded shaft 20 where-
upon the carriage may be slipped back and
65 the operation repeated, the arm 30 obviously
carrying the taper arm 3 back again so that
the stylus will be brought to its proper posi-
tion for the commencement of a selection.
Having thus described the invention, what
is claimed as new is : — 70
1. The combination with a phonograph
embodying a rotary disk record support or
turn-table, a support therefor, and a hori-
zontally movable taper arm, of a bracket se-
cured to said support, a horizontally mov- 75
able frame supported at one end in said
bracket, a revoluble shaft journaled in said
frame, means for holding said frame in a po-
sition extending across the turn-table, a car-
riage movable in said frame, a connection be- 80
tween said carriage and the taper arm,
means for effecting the movement of the car-
riage along the frame upon the rotation of
the shaft and a driving connection between
the turn-table and the shaft. 85
2. The combination in a phonograph with
a disk supporting turn-table and a taper arm,
and a support for the turn-table, of a bracket
secured to said support, a frame held at one
end in said bracket with its other end free 90
and mounted to swing about a vertical axis,
means for holding said frame stationary in a
position extending across the turn-table, a
threaded shaft journaled in said frame, a
driving connection between the turn-table 95
and said shaft, a carriage movable along the
frame, pivoted clamping members connected
to said carriage and engaging the thread of
said shaft, said clamping members being ar-
ranged for manual disengagement from the 100
shaft so that the carriage may be slipped
along the frame, the said carriage being pro-
vided with an upwardly projecting post and
a forked arm connected to the taper arm, the
fork of said arm straddling said post. 105
3. In a phonograph, the combination with
a turn-table and its support and a taper arm,
of a bracket secured to said support, a frame
supported in said bracket and adapted to ex-
tend across the turn-table, a shaft journaled 110
in said frame, a driving connection between
the turn-table and the shaft, a carriage mov-
able along the frame and provided with an
upwardly projecting post, means for mov-
ing the carriage along the frame upon the ro- 115
tation of the shaft, and a jointed arm con-
nected to the taper arm and loosely connect-
ed to the said post.
4. In a phonograph, the combination with
a turn-table and its support, and a taper arm, 120
of a bracket secured to said support, upper
and lower spindles secured in said bracket
and vertically disposed, a cross arm formed
with upper and lower trunnions journaled on
said spindles, a sleeve loosely encircling the 125
lower spindle, a pulley secured to said sleeve
and having a driving connection with the
turn - table, a bevel pinion also secured to
said sleeve, a screw threaded shaft journaled
at one end on the cross bar, a bevel pinion 130
891,378
10
15
secured on said shaft and meshing with the
other pinion, another cross bar in which the
other end of the shaft is journaled, guide rods
connected to the respective cross bars and
forming a frame therewith, a carriage pro-
vided with rollers mounted to run on said
guide rods, a clamping screw carried by said
carriage and meshing with the thread of said
shaft, and an operative connection between
said carriage and the taper arm.
5. In a phonograph, the combination with
a turn-table and its support and a taper arm,
of a bracket secured to said support, feed
mechanism carried by said bracket and in-
cluding a supporting frame comprising end
bars and a carriage adapted to be moved
along the frame and having an operative
connection with the taper arm, said frame
being mounted to swing in a horizontal plane
on said bracket, one of said end bars being
formed with a socket, a sleeve secured to the
bracket, a spring pressed latch pin mounted
in said sleeve and adapted to enter said
socket whereby to hold the frame rigid, and a
finger lever fulcrumed on the bracket and
connected to said latch pin, as and for the
purpose set forth.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
HERMANN SCHRODER, [l. s.]
Witnesses :
Frederick S. Stitt,
W. N. Woodson.
20
25
No. 892,045.
PATENTED JUNE 30, 1908.
L. T. HAILE.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED DEO. 14, 1907.
JF&.l.
WITNESSES:
J^gr,a
QM($j,#L
INVENTOR
°fafa
ATTORNEY.
THE NORRIS PEtEHS CO.. WASNJWGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LUTHER T. HAILE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 892,045.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 30, 1908.
Application filed December 14, 1907. Serial No. 406,415.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Luther T. Haile,
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila-
delphia, State of Pennsylvania, have in-
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements
in Talking- Machines, of which the following
is a full, clear, and exact description, refer-
ence being had to the accompanying draw-
ings, forming a part of this specification.
10 My invention relates to talking machines
and has for its several objects to combine
such a machine with an inclosing cabinet in
which a movable closure therefor, specifically
an upwardly -swinging hinged lid, shall pro-
15 vide the means for supporting the sound-
amplifying horn or sound-discharge cham-
ber, and whereby the latter is wholly con-
cealed when the instrument is not in use and
wholly exposed while the instrument is in
20 operation ; also in the provision of a specific
character of such amplifying horn or sound-
discharge chamber, whereby its usual ob-
jectionable external features are eliminated,
while at same time the tone of the sound-
25 waves discharged through it is improved in
quality; and finally, in so constructing and
combining the elements that the sound-
conveying arm, which is pivotally mounted
and supported thereby on the inlet end
30 of the horn in operative position over the
sound-record and its adjunctive mechan-
ism, when the machine is in operation, may
be, at other times swung out of operative po-
sition and into fixed position on the under-
35 face of the lid of the cabinet, and alongside
the sound-discharge horn or chamber, and
the lid of the cabinet closed over the body
portion thereof which is adapted to contain
interiorly the talking machine proper and its
40 usual adjunctive elements as hereinafter de-
scribed.
To these ends my invention consists of the
combination with a containing box or cabinet
provided with upwardly-swinging hinged lid,
45 preferably constructed with side walls to give
some depth thereto, and with a talking ma-
chine of any known form, save as respects its
sound-conveying arm, mounted interiorly in
said cabinet or box, of an amplifying horn or
50 sound-discharge chamber mounted on the
underface of said hinged lid, and a sound-
conveying arm pivotally mounted by a uni-
versal joint against an inlet aperture in said
amplifjang sound-chamber, and discharging
55 thereto, with its free end carrying the re-
producer of the talking machine in normal
operative position on the sound-record there-
of; and means whereby it may be supported,
on the underface of the closure lid, in opera-
tive position, to enable the lid to be brought 80
into closed position relatively to the open
top of the body of the cabinet; and my in-
vention also comprises other detail features
in the construction of the horn itself as here-
inafter described. 65
In the accompanying drawings illustrating
my new device, Figure 1 is an elevation, in
perspective, of a device exemplifying my in-
vention in its best form as adapted to the
common type of talking machine employing 73
a rotatable disk record and a swinging tubu-
lar sound conduit carcying on its free end a
reproducer contacting with such record, in
operative position, as shown in dotted lines;
such tubular sound conduit and reproducer 75
being shown, in heavy lines, in inoperative
position. Fig. 2 is an end view, looking into
the open mouth of the horn. Fig. 3 is a ver-
tical section of my new and desirable form
of universal joint, whereby the tubular sound 80
conduit is pivotally mounted on the inlet end
of the soumd-amplhying and discharging horn
to enable such tubular sound conduit to have
the required movement relatively to the
other elements of my device; and Figs. 4, 5 85
and 6 are respectively elevations of the parts
thereof, detached.
In all attempts heretofore made, so far as I
am aware, to improve a talking machine by
constructing a special form of sound-ampli- 90
fying and discharging-horn element in lieu of
the usual type of megaphonic horn, or to con-
ceal it in the cabinet, an identifying but ob-
jectionable principle of construction, in all of
them, is the permanent concealment, at all 95
times, of the horn, not only while the instru-
ment is not in use but while it is in operation
and playing.
An identifying principle of construction of
my new device which distinguishes it and 100
differentiates it from those before referred to
is that the sound-amplifying and discharging
horn is concealed only when the instrument is
not in use, and is fully exposed and thus
made capable of exerting its full tonal effect 105
on the sound-waves, when the instrument is
playing, with the additional but primary
advantage that the instrument, when not in
use, can be closed tightly, free from dust,
and presents a compact, easily transported no
Q
892,045
and ornamental cabinet device. Aside from
these advantages due to its intrinsically
novel features of construction, I am enabled
to make and have made, in the machine de-
5 scribed, important improvements in the form
and character of the sound-discharge cham-
ber or horn, which go far to amplify the
sound-waves discharged through it from the
reproducer, and improve their tone and
10 quality.
Referring now to said drawings A repre-
sents a cabinet, with an open interior A' and
a lid B hinged at 2, 2, to one of the upright
walls of the cabinet body, so as to have an
15 upwardly-swinging movement, to open the
box, and a like return movement to bring it
into coincidence with the top surface of the
four walls of the cabinet body and wholly
close the otherwise open top thereof. With-
20 in the interior A' of the cabinet body is
mounted a talking machine or rather such
part thereof which in the drawing is repre-
sented as the gramophone type having a rota-
table disk record 8, with the usual motor to
25 actuate it.
As shown in the drawing, the depth of the
cabinet body is so proportioned relatively to
this part of the talking machine as to bring
the plane of the disk-record slightly below
30 the plane of the top of the cabinet body, and
the lid B is provided with side walls B2 of a
depth to give an interior B' equal to that of
the horn, plus the space occupied by the tu-
bular sound-conduit 4 when the latter is sup-
35 ported in inoperative position as shown by
the heavy lines in Fig. 4. If however the
lid B is made flat, and without side walls, or
without side walls of a sufficient depth for
. the purpose stated, then the cabinet body is
40 to be made of suchrelatively increased depth,
so as to bring the plane of the talking ma-
chine disk 8 correspondingly lower down in
the interior of the cabinet body.
As shown in the drawing, Fig. 1, the horn C
45 is shown longitudinally disposed and fixedly
mounted on the underface of the hinged
cabinet lid B, in the direction of the width of
the latter, which is usually wider than its
planular depth; allowing some little distance
50 between its discharge end C and the side
wall B3 of the cabinet lid, if such side walls be
employed. It may be.made of any material
commonly employed for megaphone horns,
but I much prefer to construct it of wood,
55 and to make the side walls preferably flat,
and relatively rectangular, except at the
rear or inlet end as hereinafter stated; and all
sharp corners should be avoided, as by giving
an interior surface indicated at C in Fig. 2 ;
60 and it may be fastened to the underface of
the box lid by some other means than gluing
one of the walls thereto, but I prefer that
method and means of fastening, especially if
it be set in a grooved depression in the face of
fi5 the cabinet lid. Nor does the horn necessa-
rily consist of four walls, whether flat or oth-
erwise; an essential however is that it must
flare or taper from its inlet towards its dis-
charge end, to amplify the sound-waves pass-
ing through it. 70
A novel feature in respect of the func-
tional effect of my horn is the constructional
form of its inlet end, by which I avoid any
direct impingement of the so and waves
against the wall of the horn and their conse- 75
quent sudden deflection from one direction
of movement to that of another and wholly
different one. To that end it will be ob-
served that the top wall 10 of the horn, the
top wall being that which is opposite the go
inlet port 20, is curved downward at its
rear end to form a rear wall 10 a which ex-
tends to a junction with the basal waU 21 of
the horn (see Fig. 3) at which point a sound-
inlet aperture 20 is provided. 85
The tapering tubular conduit 4 which con-
ducts the sound-waves from the reproducer,
as usual, to the horn, carries on its free end
the usual diaphragm and stylus, and has as
usual a swinging movement in a short hori- 90
zontal arc over the disk record 8 when said
parts are in operative position as shown by
the dotted lines, Fig. 1. To that end the
tubular conduit 4 must have a pivotal bear-
ing; but this pivotal bearing on my device, 95
when employed with the type of disk ma-
chine shown, must be of the nature of a uni-
versal joint, for part of its function is to al-
low the tubular conduit 4 to be first lifted in
one direction from operative position over 100
the disk-record and then swung sidewise, be-
neath the lower wall of the horn, and sup-
ported in located position on the cabinet lid,
such as by a hook 3.
To permit the tubular conduit 4 to have 105
a swinging movement hi a horizontal plane,
and also a limited movement vertically in a
short arc of a circle, and finally a sidewise
movement into locked position; means to
permit these motions are shown in the draw- no
ings, Figs. 3- to 6 inclusive, in which Figs. 4,
5 and 6 show the elements and Fig. 3 the
same when assembled; and they are as fol-
lows:— A bracket bearing-ring 30, with ears
31 to attach it, over the inlet 20 hi the super- 115
posed basal wall 21 of the horn, is provided
ulteriorly with a narrow ledge 36 and a
curved annular wall 37. The upper end of
the tubular conduit 4 is provided with an en-
larged head, shown in Fig. 5, having a curved 120
exterior 34 adapted to register with the
curved wall 37 of the ring, and between the
two is interposed the ring 32 (Fig. 6); while
to limit the vertical arc movement of the
member 34 in the member 37, the former is 125
provided with two oppositely disposed pins
35 entering holes 33 hi the ring member 32,
which latter rests on the ledge 37 of the mem-
ber 30 and fills the space above it and is held
firmly in place when the parts are assem- 130
692,045
bled and the bracket bearing 30 secured to
the base-wall 21 of the horn, as by screws
through its ears 31 as shown in Fig. 3.
It is to be understood that my invention
5 is not limited to the employment of the par-
ticular form of horn shown, nor to the par-
ticular form of pivotal bearing for the tubu-
lar sound-conduit, nor to the employment in
the cabinet, of a sound-reproducing machine
10 of a gramophone type, employing a disk rec-
ord; but on the contrary, a sound-reproduc-
ing machine of the phonograph type, employ-
ing a cylinder record or any other type, may
be substituted, care being taken to supply
15 the appropriate form of pivotal bearing for
the sound-conveying arm to adapt it to any
particular form or type thereof selected.
And it is also to be understood that my in-
vention is not limited to the particular type
20 of hinged lid shown, with side walls, if the
depth of the body of the cabinet be sufficient
to allow space for the horn and its adjunc-
tive parts, above the disk record, when the
cabinet is closed. It is also obvious that
25 some other form of universal joint for the
pivotal mounting of the tubular sound con-
duit, may be employed, but I prefer the par-
ticular novel construction thereof shown
which is of my invention.
30 Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent: —
1. In a talking machine comprising a
cabinet with a hinged lid, a sound-record and
35 actuating mechanism therefor, within the
body of the cabinet, an amplifying horn
mounted on the inner face of the lid, a tubular
sound-conveyer pivotally-supported on the
inlet end of the horn, with reproducing
40 mechanism carried on the free end of said
pivotally-mounted sound-conveyer; said ele-
ments being combined and operating sub-
stantially as set forth.
2. In a talking machine the combination
45 with a containing cabinet having an open
top and a relatively movable closing lid, of
sound - reproducing mechanism mounted
within the body of the cabinet, an amplify-
ing sound-discharge chamber mounted on
50 the inner face of the lid, and a tubular sound-
conveyer with connecting and supporting
devices between its discharge end and the
inlet end of the sound-discharge chamber
operating to permit said tubular sound-con-
55 veyer to be shifted out of operative position
and into inoperative and locked position
against the lid of the cabinet.
3. In a talking machine a cabinet with
hinged lid, an amplifying horn mounted fix-
60 edly on the underface of the lid, a repro-
ducing sound-record with its actuating
mechanism within the cabinet, a tubular
sound-conveying arm carrying on one end a
reproducing diaphragm and stylus, and a
65 universal joint between its opposite end and
the inlet end of the amplifying horn, where-
by said sound-arm is operatively supported.
4. In a talking machine a rectangular con-
taining cabinet comprising a body portion
with a hinged lid having side walls adapted 79
to coincide with the upright walls of the
cabinet body when in closed position, a lon-
gitudinally-disposed tapering horn opera-
tively mounted on the underface of said
hinged lid and within the plane of its side 75
walls, a talking machine interiorly disposed
within the cabinet, with supporting means
operating as a universal joint between the
tubular sound conduit and the inlet end of
the horn whereby said tubular conduit may go
be moved into inoperative position and sup-
ported on the interior face of the cabinet lid
when the instrument is not playing and it
is desired to close the cabinet by means of
its hinged lid. 85
5. A talking machine comprising a con-
taining cabinet with a hinged lid, interiorly-
contained mechanism for reproducing sound-
waves from a sound-record, a sound-ampli-
fying horn operatively mounted on the inner 90
face of said lid and consisting of a tapering
conduit composed of a plurality of walls the
upper one of which is curved in a downwardly
direction at its rearward end to form a clo-
sure thereat, an inlet aperture in the basal 95
wall opposite the curvature in the top wall,
a tubular sound-conduit carrying a dia-
phragm and stylus on its free end, the op-
posite end of said tubular conduit being pro-
vided with a pivotal bearing, whereby it is 100
operatively supported by the horn.
6. A sound reproducing machine compris-
ing a containing casing with an open top, a
lid hinged to one of its upright walls and
adapted to operate as a closure thereof, a 105
sound-reproducing mechanism within said
casing, an amplifying horn fixedly supported
on the inner face of said hinged lid, and carry-
ing a sound-conveyer operatively connecting
the reproducing mechanism with the horn, no
7. In a talking machine the combination
with a containing cabinet having a hinged
lid, of a megaphone which is mounted on
the inner face thereof, a tubular sound con-
duit communicating therewith, a universal 115
joint between the same, means to support
the free end of said tubular conduit, m in-
operative position against the face of the
cabinet lid, and sound-reproducing mech-
anism supported within the body of the cabi- 120
net adapted to operatively co-act with the
tubular sound-conduit when the latter is
swung into normal and operative position.
8. In a talking machine comprising a con-
taining cabinet with a hinged lid, an ampli- 125
fying horn which is mounted on the under-
face of the lid, and consisting of a plurality
of wooden walls, forming a tapering sound-
conduit, the basal wall having at one end
an inlet aperture and the top wall being 130
892,045
curved downwardly opposite said inlet end,
and a talking machine within the cabinet
body having its traversing tubular sound-
conduit pivotally supported at its discharge
end on the basal wall of said horn and over
the inlet aperture thereof.
In testimony whereof, I have hereunto
affixed my signature this twelfth day of De-
cember A. D.-1907.
LUTHER T. HAILE. •
Witnesses :
A. M. BlDDLE,
J. A. Snyder.
No. 892,205. PATENTED JUNE 30, 1908.
G. J. ANDERSON.
DIAPHRAGM FOR RECORDERS OR REPRODUCERS.
APPLICATION FILED OOT. 16, 1907.
V^w^ftx
\v<,. Z.
r-MS. #MAJM» PCTEJK CO., WASH I M«r*N. O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
GUSTAF J. ANDERSON, OF ALLSTON, MASSACHUSETTS.
DIAPHRAGM FOR RECORDERS OR REPRODUCERS.
No. 892,205.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed October 16, 1907. Serial No. 397,802.
Patented June 30, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Gustaf J. Anderson,
citizen of the United States, residing at Alls-
ton, in the county of Suffolk and State of
5 Massachusetts, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Diaphragms for
Recorders and Reproducers ; and I do hereby
declare the following to be a. full, clear, and
exact description of the invention, such as
10 will enable others skilled in the art to which
it appertains to make and use the same.
My invention relates to sound recording
and reproducing instruments such as phono-
graphs and graphophones and more particu-
15 larly to certain improvements in the dia-
phragms of the recorders and reproducers,
the object being to produce a diaphragm
which will be entirely free from the "frying"
or scratching so common in these instruments
20 as now constructed and one which will repro-
duce the sounds clear and resonant and en-
tirely free of the objectionable "frying" or
scratching sounds.
Many attempts have been made to elimi-
25 nate the objectionable "frying" or scratch-
ing sounds in these instruments but as yet no
one seems to have solved the problem and in
consequence what would be in other respects
a perfect machine and a source of much
30 pleasure to the listener is marred by the "fry-
ing ' ' and scratching sounds of the diaphragm.
To the end of producing a sound recording
and reproducing apparatus which shall be
entirely free from the objectionable noises
35 referred to, my invention consists of the dia-
phragm which will now be described and
claimed.
My invention is illustrated in the accom-
panying drawing, in which: —
40 Figure 1 illustrates a transverse sectional
view of a reproducer of a phonograph show-
ing my improved diaphragm therein, and
Fig. 2 shows a plan view of the diaphragm
removed from the reproducer.
Similar reference characters will be used 45
throughout the specification and drawings to
designate corresponding parts.
In the drawing 1 indicates the holder of
the diaphragm, having the cylindrical tube 2,
to receive the horn and supporting the dia- 50
phragm 3, which is provided with a post 4
and the needle carrier 5. The holder is of
the usual and ordinary construction, and ex-
cept as hereinafter described, does not differ
from similar devices of the prior art. 55
My improved diaphragm 3 is made of am-
ber and except for this difference is like those
now in general use. It consists of a thin
disk of the usual shape and thickness, cir-
cular in form; it may be, however, of any 60
shape in outline. I preferably make it of
block amber cut in circular form and then
ground down and dressed to the desired
thickness, but it may be of molded amber.
By the use of amber I have demonstrated by 65
experiment that the objectionable "frying"
and scratching sounds are substantially
eliminated.
Having described my invention I claim as
new and desire to protect by Letters Patent 70
of the United States : —
1. A diaphragm for sound recording and
reproducing instruments comprising a thin
plate or disk of amber.
2. A diaphragm for sound recording and 75
reproducing instruments comprising a thin
plate or disk of molded amber.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature,
in presence of two witnesses.
GUSTAF J. ANDERSON.
Witnesses :
T. Hart Anderson,
Mary F. Kennet.
No. 892,301.
PATENTED JUNE 30, 1908.
B. F. PHILPOT & F. W. MATTHEWS.
PHONOGRAM.
APPLICATION FILES SEPT. 26, 1807.
WITNESSES:
INVENTORS,
BY
ATTORIVJEY '
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D, C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
BRIAN F. PHILPOT, OF SLINGERLANDS, AND FREDERICK W. MATTHEWS, OF NEW YORK,
N. Y., ASSIGNORS TO INDESTRUCTIBLE PHONOGRAPHIC RECORD COMPANY, A CORPORA-
TION OF WEST VIRGINIA.
PHONOGRAM.
No. 892,301.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented June 30, 1908.
Application filed September 25, 1907. Serial No. 394,536.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, Brian F. Philpot
and Frederick W. Matthews, citizens of
the United States, respectively residing at
5 Slingerlands, Albany county, New York, and
New York city, in the county of Kings and
State of New York, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Phono-
grams, of which the following is a speci-
10 ncation.
Our invention relates to improvements in
cylindrical phonograms or sound records for
talking machines and our principal objects
are to cheaply produce such devices having
the sound record on a shell of hard or ' ' inde-
structible" material like celluloid, backed by
a suitable material and provided with bear-
ing rings of relatively low co-efhcient of ex-
pansion on the ends to engage the machine
mandrel. We attain these objects in the
manner illustrated in the accompanying
drawing in which
Figure 1 is a view of one of the bearing
rings; Fig. 2 a view of the other bearing
ring; Fig. 3 a sectional view of our improved
backing with the rings inserted but without
the record shell; Fig. 4 a like view with the
rings secured to the backing which has been
surfaced to receive the shell; and Fig. 5 a
30 view, partly in section of a complete phono-
gram on a machine mandrel.
Any suitable backing material, such as
paper or cardboard is formed into tubes of
proper length and forms the foundation of
35 the phonogram.
A metallic ring 2 having a bearing part 3
adapted to contact with the machine man-
drel and the turned over lip 4 is pushed into
one end of the backing tube 1 with the bear-
40 ing part 3 inside and the lip 4 outside. A
second ring 5 is made with the part 6 to con-
tact with the inside of the tube 1, the in-
wardly extending bearing groove 7 adapted
to contact with the machine mandrel and
45 an upstanding rabbet 8 provided with the
rolled over edge 9 and is placed in the other
end of the tube 1. The tube and rings are
then subjected to the action of internal and
external rolling tools and the inner ends of
50 the bearing rings, the parts marked 3 and 6,
are reamed into the tube as shown in Fig. 4,
the outer lip 4 and rabbet 8 being roUed down
into alinement with the surface of the tube
which at the same time is compressed to a
standard size. This rolling or reaming of 55
the edges prevents withdrawal of the rings.
The record shell 10 carrying the sound record
on its face is made by any of the well known
methods and is preferably of celluloid or like
material provided with the integral end ring 60
11 which may carry any suitable inscription
such as the name of the selection. This
record shell is pushed onto the completed
backing of Fig. 4, the lip 9 preventing cut-
ting, the end of the ring of the shell conceal- 65
ing the metal bearing ring 5, but not contact-
ing with the machine mandrel. The for-
ward end of the shell 10 covers the lip 4 and
presents a neat appearance. By this con-
struction a record is produced which is prac- 70
tically indestructible. As its only contact
with the mandrel is two metal rings it is
easily put on and removed. The record shell
is supported throughout its entire extent and
the quality of the reproduction is improved 75
thereby.
As there is no appreciable contraction of
the metal rings and their internal bearing
diameters are accurately determined in man-
ufacturing aU records will occupy the same 80
space on the mandrel and consequently
records for a given mandrel can be longer
than if material having a high co-efficient of
expansion is used to make the record.
We are aware that metal bearing rings 85
have been inserted in celluloid records or
phonograms but such rings have heretofore
been attached directly to the celluloid.
We are also aware that backed celluloid
phonograms have heretofore been made and 90
we do not claim such structures broadly.
We claim: —
1. A backing for phonograms comprising a
tube of suitable material adapted to receive a
record shell and independent, separated me- 95
tallic bearing rings in the ends of the tube
adapted to contact with the machine man-
drel.
2. A backing for phonograms comprising a
tube of suitable material, a bearing ring m- 100
side of one end having a lip turned against
the outer edge of the tube and its inner edge
forced into the inner face of the tube ; and a
ring in the other end of the tube having its
inner edge forced into the inner face or the 105
tube, a pressed up rib therein adapted to
Q
892,301
10
15
contact with the machine mandrel, a project-
ing rabbet alining with the outer face or the
tube and a turned over outer edge.
3. A phonogram comprising a backing
tube of suitable material, independent, sep-
arated bearing rings in each end adapted to
contact with the machine mandrel and a
shell of celluloid or like material having a
sound record on its face in intimate contact
with the outer face of the backing tube.
4. A phonogram comprising a backing
tube of suitable material, bearing rings in
each end adapted to contact with the ma-
chine mandrel and a shell of celluloid or like
material having a sound record thereon on
the outer face of the tube in intimate contact
therewith, an integral inscription ring on one
end of the shell adapted to conceal one of said
bearing rings.
5. A backing for phonograms comprising a
tube of suitable material adapted to receive a
record shell and a metallic bearing ring in one
end of said tube adapted to contact with the
machine mandrel the backing adapted to
contact with the mandrel at the other end.
In testimony whereof we have affixed our
signatures in presence of two witnesses.
BRIAN F. PHILPOT.
FREDERICK W. MATTHEWS.
Witnesses:
ROBT. B. KlLLGORE,
Conrad Diehl.
20
25
[
No. 892,494.
PATENTED JULY 7, 1908.
0. ARNOLD.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JULY 28, 1906.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
OSCAR ARNOLD, OF NEUSTADT, NEAR COBURG, GERMANY.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 892,494.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 7, 1908.
Application filed July 28, 1906. Serial No. 328,230.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Oscar Arnold, a sub-
ject of the Emperor of Germany, residing at
Neustadt, near Coburg, Germany, have in-
5 vented certain new and useful Improvements
in Phonographs, of which the following is a
full, clear, and exact description.
This invention relates to improvements in
phonographs and has to do more particu-
10 larly with improved devices for operating the
recorder or reproducer support abreast of the
record and also to improvements in braking
mechanism adapted for use in connection
with such machines.
15 One of the objects of the invention is to
provide means for moving the recorder sup-
port abreast of the record and to so construct
said means as to obtain automatic return of
the record or reproducer support to an initial
20 position after the record has been reproduced
or recorded, as the case may be, for the pur-
poses of reproducing or recording a new
record.
A further object is to provide improved
25 braking mechanism for automatically arrest-
ing and permanently braking the recorder or
reproducer support and the driving mechan-
ism at a predetermined point in the operation
thereof.
30 The invention will be more fully described
in connection with the accompanying draw-
ing and will be more particularly pointed out
and ascertained in and by the appended
claims.
35 In the drawing the figure is a view in ele-
vation of a machine embodying the main fea-
tures of my invention.
Like characters of reference designate simi-
lar parts throughout the drawing.
40 The invention will now be described in de-
tail in connection with the specific form illus-
trated but it will be understood that the in-
vention is not to be limited to such specific
showing except for such limitations as the
45 claims import.
As shown the mechanism is mounted upon
a suitable base a provided with a support b
adapted to form a bearing for a recorcl holder
spindle c upon which latter is mounted the
50 record support or holder d. In the specific
showing made the device of my invention is
applied to machines having cylindrical rec-
ords but its application is not limited to this
class of machines. The record holder d is
driven by means which as shown consists of a 55
train of gears connected with a source of
power, said tram comprising a gear/ meshing
with a gear /' and communicating there-
through by gears/2 and/3 with a source of
power which is indicated at 10 and which 60
may consist of the usual clock spring. A
main shaft or driving member/4 is provided
and is adapted to be driven in one direction
for operating parts hereinafter to be de-
scribed and reversely operated for restoring 65
said parts to an initial position. To this end
said shaft may be provided with lugs or phis
/5 adapted to be engaged by a winding crank.
A suitable governor n may be provided and
as shown said governor is mounted upon a 70
shaft n' , having a bearing at one end 11 in a
suitable stationary part and at its other end
in a pendent support 2 secured to the base a.
A sheave m is provided on the record holder
b and a pulley n2 on the shaft n' over which 75
is trained a belt m2 which constitutes the .
specific means herein shown for operatively
connecting the governor with the record
holder. Said shaft n' carries a braking disk
or member 1 adapted to be engaged by means 80
for normally or permanently maintaining the
device in a position of rest, which means as
shown, consists of a spring brake o secured
at one end to the support 2 and engaging at
its free end the braking disk 1. An adjust- 85
ing screw o' having threaded engagement
with the support 2 is adapted for engagement
with the spring o to either hold the latter
permanently out of engagement with the
disk 1 or permit it to permanently engage 90
the same.
A support Tc is provided and adapted for
attachment with either a recorder or repro-
ducer and is provided with means 42 for the
reception of a horn or a speaking trumpet. 95
Said support le is adapted to be operated
abreast of the record to carry the recorder
or reproducer across the face of the same and
is operatively related with the driving means
in such a manner that when the latter is oper- 100
ating to effect a reproduction or recording of
a record the support is moved from an initial
position in one direction until the record has
been reproduced or recorded and when the
driving means is reversely operated the sup- 105
port is automatically restored to an initial
position.
As shown the shaft /4 is provided with a
802,494
threaded extension ~h and the support Tc is
provided with a boss i having threaded en-
gagement with said extension li. When the
winding spring acts through the gear train to
5 operate the record holder and its record the
threaded extension Ji moves the support It
abreast of the record until the latter has been
reproduced. When the winding crank is
applied to the shaft f* and the latter is
10 operated in a reverse direction the parts just
described serve to return the reproducer sup-
port to an initial position.
Next referring to the improved braking
mechanism the same consists of braking
15 means adapted to be operated by the repro-
ducer support to arrest the driving mechan-
ism automatically and further in a device
adapted to cooperate with said means to re-
lease braking engagement and also in mech-
20 anism cooperating with said means to main-
tain it out of braking adjustment until such
a time as the reproducer support has reached
the limit of its movement and it is desired to
bring the device to a position of rest.
25 Specifically the braking means consists of
a bar t mounted in bearings u and provided
with an extension t' preferably disposed at
right angles to the body of the bar t and
adapted at its upper portion to be engaged
30 by a pin w mounted upon the boss i. At its
lower end said extension t' carries a brake
shoe y which is desirably connected with said
extension by means of a spring z. A spring v
mounted upon the base a is adapted to fric-
35 tionally engage the bar t and retard move-
ment thereof in either direction. A plunger
4 provided with a thumb piece 3 is mounted
in the support 2 and is adapted at its free end
to engage the bar t when actuated to force it
40 to the right against the action of spring v and
release engagement between the brake shoe y
and the disk 1 . A spring 6 normally retains
the plunger 4 in the position shown and a pin
5 limits movement of the plunger under the
45 action of the spring 6 so as to prevent the
latter from forcing the plunger out of en-
gagement with the support 2.
In starting the machine and assuming that
the same is wound and the parts are in an
50 initial or starting position the operator will
first press the plunger 4 inwardly a slight
distance to disengage the shoe y from the
disk 1 thereby releasing the governor and
permitting the driving mechanism to operate.
55 It will be understood that the support will
have been previously returned to an initial
position so that the stud w will not interfere
with the movement of the bar t j ust described .
Upon movement of the bar t to the right the
CO spring v, normally engaging the same, will
maintain it in the position to which it has
been moved until the support Tc, which may
be assumed to be now traveling from an
initial or right hand position, to a left hand
65 position has engaged the stud w with the bar
t which engagement will overcome the resist-
ance of the spring v and will force the brake
shoe y into engagement with the disk 1 . It
will be understood that when the machine is
being operated the permanent braking device 70
will be adjusted in a manner to maintain the
spring 0 out of engagement with the disk 1 .
Means are provided for removing the rec-
ord from the record holder without touching
the face of the record and as shown such 75
means consists of a bar o2 which is pro-
vided with an extension s adapted to encircle
the record holder d and lie between the sheave
m and the record. Said bar o2 is provided
with a button r adapted to be grasped by the so
operator and pulled outwardly to release the
record.
Having now described my invention what
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent
of the United States is: 85
1. A talking machine comprising in com-
bination, a spring barrel, a shaft therefor
provided on one end with projections adapted
to.be engaged by a winding crank and hav-
ing a worm formed on its opposite end, a 90
gear train, driven from said shaft, a record
holder driven from said train, a governor
provided with a brake disk, a belt connecting
said governor and record holder, a perma-
nent spring brake engaging said brake disk, 95
an adjusting screw for said spring brake, an
automatic braking device comprising a
spring mounted brake shoe adapted for en-
gagement with said disk and a slidably
mounted support, a spring brake for said 100
support, a nut carried by said worm, a trans-
mitter support mounted on said nut, and a
spring actuated plunger for throwing said
automatic braking device out of engagement
with said brake disk. 105
2. A talking machine comprising in com-
bination, a spring barrel, a shaft therefor
provided on one end with projections adapted
to be engaged by a winding crank and having
a worm formed on its opposite end, a gear 310
train driven from said shaft, a record holder
driven from said train, a governor provided
with a brake disk, a belt connecting said gov-
ernor and record holder, an automatic brak-
ing device comprising a spring mounted 115
brake shoe adapted for engagement with
said disk and a slidably mounted support, a
spring brake for said support, a nut carried
by said worm and provided with a pin
adapted to engage sakl automatic brake sup- 120
port, a transmitter support mounted on said
nut, and a spring actuated plunger for
throwing said automatic braking device out
of engagement with said brake disk.
3. A talking machine comprising in com- 125
bination, a spring barrel, a shaft therefor
provided on one end with projections adapted
to be engaged by a winding crank and hav-
ing a worm formed on its opposite end, a
gear train driven from said shaft, a record isf
892,494
3
holder driven from said train, a governor
provided with a brake disk and driven from
said record holder, an automatic braking de-
vice comprising a spring mounted brake shoe
adapted tor engagement with said disk and a
slidably mounted support, a spring brake for
said support, a nut carried by said worm and
provided with a pin adapted to engage said
automatic brake support, a transmitter sup-
port mounted on said nut, and means' for
throwing said automatic braking device out
of engagement with said brake disk.
4. A talking machine comprising in com-
bination, a spring barrel, a shaft therefor
15 provided on one end with projections adapted
to be engaged by a winding crank and having
a worm formed on its opposite end, a gear
train driven from said shaft, a record holder
driven from said train, a governor driven
20 from said record holder and provided with a
brake disk, a braking device comprising a
brake shoe adapted for engagement with said
disk and a slidably mounted support, a brake
for said support, a nut carried by said worm
25 and provided with a pin adapted to engage
said brake support to throw said shoe into
engagement with said disk, a transmitter
support mounted on said nut, and means for
throwing said braking device out of engage-
30 ment with said disk.
5. A talking machine comprising in com-
bination, a spring barrel, a shaft therefor
provided on one end with projections adapted
to be engaged by a winding crank and hav-
35 ing a worm formed on its opposite end, a
gear train driven from said shaft, a record
holder driven from said train, a governor
driven from said record holder and provided
with a brake disk, a braking device com-
40 prising a brake shoe adapted for engagement
with said disk and a slidably mounted sup-
port, a brake for said support, a nut carried
by said worm and provided with a pin
adapted to engage said brake support to
45 throw said shoe into engagement with said
disk, and a transmitter support mounted on
said nut.
6. A talking machine comprising in com-
bination, a winding shaft provided on one
50 end with a worm, means for driving said
shaft, a gear train driven from said shaft, a
record holder driven from said train, a gov-
ernor driven from said record holder and pro-
vided with a brake disk, a braking device co-
55 operating with said disk, means for holding
the braking device in a non-operating posi-
tion, a transmitter support actuated by said
worm and engaging said braking device to
throw the same into an operating position,
60 and means for throwing said braking device
into a non-operating position.
7. A talking machine comprising in com-
bination, a main shaft provided with a worm,
means for driving said shaft, a gear train
65 driven from said shaft, a record holder driv-
ing from said train, a governor driven from
said record holder provided with a brake
disk, a braking device cooperating with said
disk, yieldingly acting frictional means for
holding said braking device in a non-operat- 70
ing position, and a transmitter support oper-
ated by said worm and engaging said braking
device to throw the same into an operating
position.
8. A talking machine comprising in com- 75
bination, a main shaft provided with a worm,
means for driving said shaft, a record holder
operatively connected with said shaft, a gov-
ernor driven from said record holder and pro-
vided with a brake disk, a braking device co- 80
operating with said disk, a transmitter sup-
port operated by said worm and engaging
said braking device to throw the same into an
operating position, manually operable means
for disengaging said braking device from said 85
disk, and frictionally acting means for main-
taining said braking device in its disengaged
position.
9. A talking machine comprising in com-
bination, a main driving shaft, a record 90
holder operatively connected with said shaft,
a governor driven by said record holder, a
braking device, a transmitter support oper-
ated by said shaft and engaging said braking
device to throw the same into an operating 95
position, manually operable means for throw-
ing said braking device into a non-operating
position, and frictionally acting means for
maintaining said device in a non-operating
position. 100
10. A talking machine comprising in com-
bination, a main shaft adapted to be driven
in one direction for operating parts and in a
reverse direction for restoring parts to an in-
itial position, a record holder driven by said 105
shaft, a transmitter support operatively as-
sociated with said shaft to be driven and re-
stored thereby, and braking mechanism
adapted to be engaged by said transmitter
support to automatically stop the machine. 110
11. A talking machine comprising in com-
bination, a main shaft adapted to be driven
in one direction for operating parts and in a
reverse direction for restoring parts to an in-
itial position, a record holder driven by said 115
shaft, a transmitter support operatively as-
sociated with said shaft to be driven and re-
stored thereby, braking mechanism adapted
to be engaged by said transmitter support to
automatically stop the machine, and means 120
for holding said braking mechanism in a non-
operating position.
12. A talking machine comprising in com-
bination, a main shaft adapted to be driven
in one direction for operating parts and in a 125
reverse direction for restoring parts to an
initial position, a record holder driven by
said shaft, a transmitter support operatively
associated with said shaft to be driven and
restored thereby, braking mechanism adapt- 130
892,494
ed to be engaged by said transmitter sup-
port to automatically stop tbe machine, and
means for throwing said braking mechanism
out of an operating position.
13. A talking machine comprising in com-
bination, a cylindrical record support, and
means for removing the record therefrom
comprising an operating rod or bar provided
with an extension looped about said cylin-
drical support.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
OSCAR ARNOLD.
Witnesses :
Olga Hinze,
Max Schuster.
10
No. 892,520. PATENTED JULY 7, 1908.
J. 0. HIRSCHFELDER.
APPARATUS FOR PHONOGRAPHS AND GRAPHOPHONES.
APPLICATION FILED MAR, 7, 1908.
etVitn eases
£&&A»>
ekfuento*
SLttox.tii.ijS
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOSEPH OAKLAND HIRSCHFELDER, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA.
APPARATUS FOR PHONOGRAPHS AND GRAPHOPHONES.
No. 892,520.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 7, 1908.
Application filed March 7, 1908. Serial No. 420,610.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Joseph Oakland
Hirschfelder, citizen of the United States,
residing at San Francisco, in the county of
San Francisco and State of California, have
invented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Apparatus for Graphophones and
Phonographs, of which the following is a
specification.
10 My invention relates to improvements in
the sound-box, sound-conducting tubes and
horns which are used in connection with
graphophones, phonographs, talking -ma-
chines and the like sound producing instru-
15 ments, and it has for its object the construc-
tion of these several parts in such manner as
to prevent their undue vibration by the sound
waves passing therethrough.
In the accompanying drawing represent-
20 ing a sectional view of a sound-box, a con-
ducting tube and horn of a graphophone or
phonograph there is shown my improved
lining applied to said parts.
1 is the sound box, 2 the conducting tube,
25 3 the elbow, 4 the horn and 5 the bracket or
support.
6 designates the lining applied to the inte-
rior of the before designated parts.
As the result of my experiments I have
30 found that by providing the conducting tube
or elbow of the horn, and the horn with a
lining made in one piece, or by making said
parts in two pieces and providing each with a
separate lining of sound deadening material,
35 I am enabled to avoid all vibrating edges and
to produce a structure free from secondary
or accessory vibrations, thereby softening or
deadening the sound waves, and relieving
the instrument from the metallic or harsh
40 effect of such sounds and thus preserving
the natural tones either of the human voice
or of instrumental music when reproduced
thereby.
In the carrying out of my invention I have
45 found that by lining the sound box, as well
as the sound conducting tube and horn, with
a soft non-sonorous material of a wax-like
nature such as wax, or a composition of
which wax is an ingredient, I accomplish the
50 desired result. The compound may be
heated to a degree of fluidity sufficient to
enable me to supply the same as a coating or
lining of the desired thickness to the interior
of the part, thereby producing a smooth
sound-receiving and sound-conducting body 55
of even thickness.
The lining may be applied in one of a num-
ber of ways. It may be liquefied by heat or
by a solvent and applied by dipping, or by
means of a brush, or by pouring the liquefied 60
material into the interior of the parts and
turning such parts until the lining material
has been evenly distributed over the same
and has solidified thereon. The parts may
be split and the lining applied thereto, and 65
the parts then reassembled. The lining may
also be applied in the form of a sheet of the
material instead of coating the same on the
parts as described.
In the use of apparatus constructed in 70
accordance with my invention I have found
that the sound produced therefrom is free
from unnatural vibrations, is sonorous, and a
faithful reproduction of the record which is
being reproduced, whether the same be that 75
of the human voice in speaking or singing,
or that of musical instrumeuts.
Preferably the coating which I have de-
scribed herein is used in connection with
sound-conducting tubes and horns made of 80
papier-mache, although other material may
be employed for the making of these parts.
While I have described herein the pre-
ferred embodiment of my invention, it will
be understood that various departures may 85
be made therefrom without departing from
the scope thereof.
I claim:
1 . A graphophone, phonograph, or the like
instrument, having its sound receiving and 90
conducting parts coated on the inside with a
non-sonorous material of a wax-like nature
which is adapted to be applied thereto while
in a liquid condition and which will harden
and acfhere to the surface to which it is ap- 95
plied.
2. A graphophone, phonograph, or the like
instrument, having its sound receiving and
conducting parts coated on the inside with
a non-sonorous material of a wax-like nature 100
that is soluble under heat and will adhere when
cold to the surface to which it is applied.
3. The combination with a graphophone,
phonograph, or the like instrument, of a
a
892,520
sound, receiving and conducting apparatus
therefor made from papier-mache and coated
on the inside with a non-sonorous material
of a wax-like nature which is adapted to be
applied thereto while in a liquid condition
and which will harden and adhere to the sur-
face to which it is applied.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
JOSEPH OAKLAND HIRSCHFELDER.
Witnesses :
Daniel Block,
Frank Mandel.
No. 893,230.
PATENTED JULY 14, 1908.
0. F. FALK.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED PEB.ll, 1908.
Fig. 4.
A*r-
*IGn*yJhci#i
WJM&<Z£
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
OSCAR F. FALK, OF BELLEVILLE, NEW JERSEY.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 893,230.
Specification, of Letters Patent. Patented July 14, 1908.
Application filed February 11, 1908. Serial No. 415,346.
10
15
20
25
30
35
<10
45
50
'55
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Oscar F. Falk, re-
siding at Belleville, in the county of Essex
and State of New Jersey, have invented cer-
tain Improvements in Phonographs, of which
the following is a specification.
The present invention relates to an un-
proved automatic stop mechanism for sound
reproducing machines, and is particularly
adapted to machines using a fiat circular
record.
The object of the invention is to provide
adjustable and automatic means for stopping
and holding the turn-table or record support
of a gramophone or other similar device
upon the completion of the reproduction,
whether the impressions of the music, words,
etc., and say on the 125th revolution of the
record or on any other revolution of the
same. If desired the apparatus may be
adjusted so as to stop and hold the turn-
table at any point in the revolution of the
record, automatically, whether the record
be completed or not.
I have chosen to represent the invention
by a construction winch I will now proceed
to describe and claim, although I do not
limit myself to the precise details shown as
they may be much changed without depart-
ing from the spirit of the invention.
Of the drawings which form a part of and
illustrate the invention — Figure 1 is a frag-
mentary plan view of a gramophone table
and turn-table or record-support, to which
is applied the invention. Fig. 2 is a sec-
tional edge view of a portion of the appa-
ratus on line x — x of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an
edge view of Fig. 1 ; and Fig. 4 is a plan view
of a detached part.
In the drawings A represents a portion of
the table of a gramophone, and B a portion
of the turn-table supported upon a shaft
which enters the table and is there provided
with means for rotating the same, not shown,
but all in a manner well understood.
Ordinarily there is provided upon the
table A a stopping and starting device act-
ing as a brake, consisting of a piece/" having
two wings secured to the table by screws 2,
2, bearing a cylindrical portion 23 bored out
at one end to receive the spiral spring 32
through which extends the bolt 26 whose
end projects through the smaller hole in the
portion 23; and the bolt is provided with a
stud 28 adapted to play in the slot 27 ; to the
outer end of the bolt is attached an enlarged
foot piece 25 whose face is covered with
cloth or other Motional material. Upon the
top of the portion 23 is pivoted by a screw
30 a cam lever Jc having an elbow 29 adapt- SO
ed to engage the stud 28 and hold the same
against the pressure of the spiral spring 32.
I employ this device in connection with my
invention and when the spring 32 is com-
pressed, the cam part 29 and the stud form a 65
sort of hair-trigger.
When the turn-table is at rest the lever is
moved away from the stud 28 in the direc-
tion of the arrow, and the foot piece 25 rests
upon the periphery of the turn-table and 73
prevents the same from rotating. This de-
vice has to be moved manually, and conse-
quently the operator is obliged to be on hand
when the record is exhausted and move the
same. 75
My invention consists of automatic and
adjustable means for operating such, or a
similar device to the one described, and con-
sists of a member j having a base 22 adapted
to pass under the wings of /and be secured 80
to the table with the screws 2, 2; and ex-
tending from the outer end of the base 22 is
an upright arm 21 having at its outer end
two lugs 35 to engage the end of a bar a
secured thereto by a bolt I. This bar rests 85
upon a bearing 24 on the arm 21, and ex-
tends over the turn-table and record-disk
D towards its center, where it is integral
with another bar i and preferably at an angle
thereto. 90
Pivoted to the bar a by the screw c is a le-
ver o having a short arm and a long arm; the
short arm e is bent at its end to loop over or
embrace the end of the lever ~k, while the end
of the long arm 3 is curved outward and ter- 95
ruinates in a knife edge. Near the juncture
of the bars a and i is a lever g pivoted to the
bar a by the screw 6 ; one of its arms is nicked
at 4 to engage the end of lever 3, while the
end of the other arm embraces the rod h sup- 100
ported in the bearings 9, 10 and 15 in the bar
%. The rod Ti extending through the bearings
9, 10 and 15, is provided with a collar 20 and
a spiral spring 8 between the bearings 9 and
10 and the end 5 of lever 6 embraces the rod 105
between the collar and spring. The outer
end of the rod ~h has a hole drilled therein
which has an elongated opening on its side
outward, and the end of the rod is slit and
brought to a curved edge, and in this hole is a no
small rod 18 provided on its inner end with a
spur or pointer 13, while its outer end termi-
893,230
nates preferably in a rubber tip 19. The rod
18 is adapted to fit tightly in the rod h and
the split crimped end 17 adds to the resist-
ance of moving the same. Upon each side of
5 the opening 14 upon the bar i are gradua-
tions marked to indicate particular convolu-
tions of the record and the pointer may be set
opposite any one by moving the rod 18 and
its end 19 will intercept the selected convolu-
10 tion which of course corresponds to the revo-
lution of the turn-table. The bar a being
pivoted, it can be turned over and away from
the turn-table if desired.
It will be understood that the drawings are
15 somewhat schematic, and are for the purpose
of illustration.
In all of the devices of this character that I
am aware of when the reproducer or stylus
has run off the record it is allowed to run
20 some distance further, which occasions a pe-
riod of time in which objectional scraping
noises are made, and the purpose of the in-
vention is to avoid this and stop the turn-ta-
ble immediately upon the termination of the
25 record. As is well known, some records are
necessarily of a few revolutions longer than
others, but the maximum distance between
the extremes is not perhaps more than twenty
revolutions. I have, therefore, in the draw-
30 ings shown the device to be adjusted but
a comparatively short distance radially; the
point of the stylus or reproducer is shown
with its path in Fig. 1, and the turn-table is
therefore represented as going towards the
35 stylus.
The figures represent the turn-table B as
moving and therefore the brake 25 is away
therefrom and the rod 18 has its pointer 13
set to the gradation or revolution of the turn-
40 table marked upon the bar i at which the rec-
ord terminates and at which it is wished the
same to be stopped, and consequently the
end of the rod 18 projects from the rod h the
proper distance so when the stylus or repro-
45 ducer reaches the point desired it will strike
the end 19 and force the rod h inward against
the pressure of the spring 8, and turn the le-
ver g in the direction of its arrow and away
from the lever 3, which being unlatched al-
50 lows the spring 32 to operate and force the
stud 28 against the cam 29 of the lever 1c and
open it, as shown in dotted lines in Fig. 4, in
the direction of its arrow, and then bring the
foot piece 25 against the edge of the turn-
55 table and stop its motion.
It will be readily seen that the main fea-
tures are an adjustable means capable of be-
ing placed in the path of the stylus at the
ending of a record, whether it consist of few
60 or many revolutions, combined with a brake
device whereby the rotating turn-table is
brought to a stop.
I claim as my invention : —
1. The combination in a sound-reproduc-
65 hag machine of a turn-table, a disk record
and a spring-projected brake, with a tripping
device, and a reproducer or stylus, means for .
holding the brake retracted and for releasing
the same to engage the turn-table, consisting
of a lever adapted to lock with the brake and 70
with the tripping device, the said device pro-
vided with an adjustable tip whereby the
brake may be operated at any revolution of
the turn-table.
2. The combination in a sound-reproduc- 75
ing machine of a reproducer or stylus a turn-
table, a disk record, a brake adjacent to the
turn-table, means for holding the brake re-
tracted from the turn-table and for releasing
the same, consisting of a main lever one end go
of which engages the brake lever a tripping
device engaged by said main lever and an
adjustable member adapted to be interposed
in the path of the moving stylus.
3. The combination in a sound-reproduc- 85
ing machine of a reproducer or stylus a turn-
table, a disk record, a brake adjacent to the
turn-table, means for holding the brake re-
tracted from the turn-table and for releasing
the same at any revolution thereof, consist- 90
ing of a main lever one end of which engages
the brake lever a tripping device engaged. Dy
said main lever antl an adjustable member
adapted to be interposed in the path of the
moving stylus. 95
4. The combination in a sound-reproduc-
ing machine of a reproducer or stylus a
turn-table; a disk record, a brake adjacent to
the turn-table provided with a locking and
disengaging lever and a spring - operated 100
foot-piece, means for holding the brake re-
tracted from the turn-table and for releasing
the same at any revolution thereof, consist-
ing of a suitably supported main lever one
end of which engages the brake lever, a trip- 10 5
ping device engaged by said main lever and
an adjustable member adapted to be inter-
posed in the path of the moving stylus.
5. The combination in a sound-reproduc-
ing machine of a reproducer or stlyus a 110
turn-table, a disk record, a brake adjacent to
the turn-table, means for holding the brake
retracted from the turn-table and for releas-
ing the same, consisting of a lever extending
over the face of the turn-table, one end of 115
which is adapted to lock the brake, a trip-
ping device engaging the opposite end of said
lever, having an adjustable member adapted
to be interposed in the path of the moving
stylus, and a graduated scale for adjusting 120
the member.
6. The combination in a sound-reproduc-
ing machine of a reproducer or stylus a turn-
table, a disk record, a brake adjacent to the
turn-table having a spring-impelled foot- 125
piece adapted to be retracted from the turn-
table by a cam-lever, means for holding the
cam-lever in a retracted position and for re-
leasing the same, consisting of a suitably sup-
ported and pivoted lever extending over the 130
803,230
3
face of the turn-table, one end of which en-
gages the cam-lever, a tripping device engag-
ing the opposite end of the said lever having
an adjustable member adapted to be set by
5 means of a graduated scale adjacent thereto,
at a determined position, to permit the mov-
ing stylus or reproducer to engage the same
at any predetermined revolution of the turn-
table.
10 7. The combination in a sound-reproduc-
ing machine of a reproducer or stylus a turn-
table, a disk record, a brake having a spring-
impelled foot-piece to engage the turn-table,
a cam-lever adapted to retract the brake
15 from the turn-table, a pivoted lever one end
of which embraces the cam-lever, a latch de-
vice for holding the opposite end of said le-
ver, automatic means for releasing the latch
device consisting of a spring-operated rod
20 having an adjustable tip adapted to be in-
terposed in the path of the moving repro-
ducer or stylus, as set forth.
8. The combination in a sound-reproduc-
ing machine of a reproducer or stylus a turn-
25 table, a disk record, a brake having a spring-
impelled foot-piece to engage the turn-table,
a cam-lever adapted to retract the brake
from the turn-table, a lever one end of which
embraces the cam-lever, a latch device for
30 holding the opposite end of said lever, auto-
matic means for releasing the latch device at
any revolution of the record consisting of a
spring-operated rod having an adjustable
member adapted to be interposed in the path
35 of the reproducer or stylus, as set forth.
9. The combination in a sound-reproduc-
ing machine of a reproducer or stylus a turn-
table, a disk record, a brake adapted to engage
the turn-table, means for releasing the brake
and for stopping the rotation of the turn-
table consisting of a bar attached to the ma-
chine and extending over the face of the
turn-table, a pivoted main lever on the bar,
one end of which is adapted to lock the brake
in a retracted position, a tripping device sup-
ported by the bar engaging the other end of
the lever, composed of a movable rod having
an adjustable tip arranged to be placed in the
path of the moving stylus in a predetermined
position.
10. The combination in a sound-reproduc-
ing machine of a reproducer or stylus a turn
table, a disk record, a brake adapted to en-
gage the turn-table, means for releasing the
brake and for stopping the rotation of the
turn-table consisting of a bar attached to the
machine and extending over the face of the
turn-table, a pivoted main lever on the bar one
end of which is adapted to lock the brake in a
retracted position, a tripping device sup-
ported by the bar engaging the other end of
the lever composed of a spring-retracted rod
having an adjustable tip, a short lever be-
tween the rod and the main lever, the spring-
retracted rod arranged to be placed in the
path of the moving stylus in a predetermined
position.
In testimony whereof, I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses, this 31st day of
January 1908.
40
OSCAR F. FALK.
Witnesses :
W. P. Clark,
L. W. Miller.
45
50
60
!
No. 893,283.
PATENTED JULY 14, 1908.
C. THOMA, Je. & W. THOMA.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 10, 1908.
3 SHEETS— SHEET 1.
CO
to
«o
co
^Witwoaes :
'#. £. ^UUZZy
Char/es Thomu Jr., %• Wct/ier Thomct .
33 ij -#ve*v Q Wot-new*
^Srv-cJe (fdtte&uis VtluU^
No. 893,283.
CO
ho
iH
h
,<n
WU
•HCOCiC^
PATENTED JULY 14, 1908.
0. THOMA, Je. & W. THOMA.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JAN. 10, 1908.
3 SHEETS— SHEET 2.
C/iar/es Tho/na,Jr. %> IVa/ter Thoma
fibred f&UJU* V&*"&( .
No. 893,283.
in
PATENTED JULY 14, 1908.
0. THOMA, Je. & W. THOMA.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JAN. 10, 1908.
, 3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
Char/es Thoma, Jr., %- Walter Thoma.
(fj-n^c/e f{jju2/eu* ct/hjJc^
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHARLES THOMA, JR., AND WALTER THOMA, OF CARLSTADT, NEW JERSEY.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 893,283.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 14, 1908.
Application filed January 10, 1908. Serial No. 410,104. •
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, Charles Thoma, Jr.,
and Walter Thoma, citizens of the United
States, and residents of Carlstadt, in the
G county of Bergen and State of New Jersey,
have invented certain new and useful Phono-
graphs, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
The present invention relates generally to
l o phonographs or other sound reproducing ma-
chines, and has more particularly reference
to a multi-record or repeater phonograph
such as is disclosed in Letters Patent No.
873,969 of December 17, 1907.
] 5 The main object of the invention is the
production of a machine, automatic through-
out, and reliable in its operation.
One of the features of this invention re-
sides in providing a rotatable alinement de-
•; vice mounted independently of the record
carrier and in peripheral engagement there-
with. A suitable locking device is employed
adapted to engage with the alinement de-
vice, and means are provided for releasing
2D the locking means after each sound reproduc-
ing period so that the rotation of the record
carrier will move the alinement device a suffi-
cient distance to position a new record after
which the locking device locks the alinement
device again. In the preferred embodiment
the sound reproducing mechanism is utilized
to release the locking device and to turn the
record carrier.
In order, however, to allow for slight dis-
crepancies, due to lost motion or wear, we
employ an intermediate chiving mechanism
for operating the individual records which
will compensate for discrepancies in size or
positioning of the parts.
The intermediate driving mechanism is
carried on the free end of an arm which is
loosely pivoted at the other end. This inter-
mediate chiving mechanism rests on and is
in engagement with transmission mechanism
4 5 on the driving shaft and is adapted to engage
with transmission mechanism on the records
as they are successively presented thereto.
The intermediate driving mechanism is thus
held yieldingly in engagement with its co-
50 operating members whereby discrepancies
in size and position of the parts are compen-
sated for.
Other features of construction will appear
as the specification proceeds.
55 In the accompanying drawings, the inven-
tion is embodied in a concrete and preferred
form, but changes of construction may of
course be made without departing from the
legitimate and intended scope of the inven-
tion. "
In the said drawings: Figure 1 is a plan
view of a phonograph embodying the inven-
tion. Fig. 2 is an end view of Fig. 1. Fig. S
is a transverse sectional view on the line 3 — 3
of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a detail view of the double t'5
reversely threaded repeater screw. Fig. 5 is
a transverse sectional view on the line 5 — 5 of
Fig. 1. Fig. 6 is a transverse sectional view
on the line 6 — 6 of Fig. 1 . Fig. 7 is a view
similar to Fig. 6 but showing the parts in a 70
different position, and partly broken away.
Fig. 8 is a detail view of the locking device
and releasing means. Fig. 9 is a detail view
of the locking device looking in the direction
of the arrow 9 in Fig. 8. Fig. 10 is a sec- 75
tional detail view on the line 10 — 10 of Fig. 7.
Fig. 11 is a detail view of the intermediate
driving device and adjacent elements. Fig.
12 is a detail view in perspective of the lock-
ing pin which engages with the Geneva stop 80
wheel.
Similar characters of reference indicate
corresponding parts in the different views.
1 indicates an intermittently rotatable
record carrier holding a plurality of records 2 85
which are supported on the spindles 3.
4 denotes the sound reproducing mechan-
ism the main supporting part of which is in
the form of a sleeve 5 sliding on the shaft 6.
As here shown the sound reproducing mech- 90
anism carries two arms 7 and 8, one of which
is provided with the fine thread follower 9,
and the other of which carries a second or
repeater thread follower 10. The record car-
rier is mounted on the shaft 11, while 12 and 95
13 indicate respectively the main drive or
feed screw shaft and the double reversely
threaded repeater screw shaft. Mounted
fast on the shaft 1 1 by means of the key 14 is
a ratchet 15. Surrounding this ratchet is a 100
loose sleeve having the cam groove 16 and
provided with the spring seated pawl 17
adapted to engage with the teeth of the
ratchet when turned in one direction and to
ride idly over the teeth when turned in the 105
other direction.
18 indicates a removable pin on the arm 8
of the sound reproducing mechanism, adapt-
ed to enter the cam groove 16 to turn the
sleeve. 110
Mounted on the arm 8 is a pivoted lever 19
on which is^swiveled,- by^ means of the uni-
893,283
versal joint 20, the thread follower 10. The
thread follower 10 has a tooth 21 which en-
ters the threads of the repeater screw.
Mounted on the lever 19 is a loose tail 22
5 here shown as a bifurcated lever pivoted at
23. The arms 24 of this tail are adapted to
embrace the projection 25 of the follower 10
wlifen the latter is being disengaged from the
repeater screw to prevent the said follower
10 from taking the other thread, and thus re-
versing the motion instead of disengaging.
26 indicates a stop limiting the outward
movement of the lever 19.
27 indicates a nose mounted on the pin 26
15 and having its movement limited by the pin
28, on which latter the lever 19 is mounted.
This nose is allowed a certain amount of lat-
eral play and has an outwardly turned pro-
jection 29 at its lower end.
20 When the sound reproducing mechanism
comes to the end of its forward stroke, the
trip 30 on the repeater screw will engage
with the projection 29 of the nose 27. The
advance of the reproducing mechanism is
25 very gradual owing to the fine threads of the
feed screw, but the trip 30 need only engage
the nose 27 very slightly since the latter will
be turned sidewise owing to the fact that it
is loosely mounted and the trip 30 will there-
30 fore be able to get a good grip under the pro-
jection 29 thereby lifting the arm 8 and the
sound reproducing mechanism. In case the
trip does not engage the nose 27 sufficiently
the latter will merely slip off without disturb-
35 ing the advance of the reproducer and on the
next turn the latter will have moved forward
sufficiently to enable the trip to properly en-
gage the nose 27. When the arm 8 is thus
lifted the thread follower 10 will slide into
40 engagement with the thread 31 of the re-
peater screw; the weight of the parts causing
the lever 19 to turn around its pivot to effect
this. The sound reproducer will now be
moved back and this motion will continue
45 until the thread follower encounters the cam
surface 32 of the repeater screw which will
turn the follower around its swivel and guide
it into the reverse thread 33 a of the screw.
The advance movement of the reproducer is
50 thus commenced. During the return stroke
of reproducer the lower end of the tail 22 will
have been moved inward by the cam 33.
This, however, has no effect on the parts.
Upon the forward stroke of the reproducer,
55 the tail 22 will pass on the other side of the
cam 33 and when the surface 34 is encoun-
tered the lower end of the tail 22 will move
outward thereby causing the arms 24 to en-
gage the projection 25 of the follower 10
60 thereby holding it from turning on its swivel.
The tail can therefore move no further, in-
dependently, and the motion is then con-
tinued around the center 28 with the result
that the follower is moved sidewise off the
65 repeater screw. This causes the arm 8 and
70
80
85
95
the reproducer to descend, whereby the fol-
lower 9 will engage with the feed screw 12.
On the end of the shaft or screw 12 is a gear
35, and on the end of each record is a friction
roll 36.
37 indicates an intermediate chiving mech-
anism mounted on the free end of the arm 38
pivoted at 39 on the bracket 40. This inter-
mediate driving mechanism consists of a
gear 41 adapted to engage with the gear 35 75
on the shaft 12, and a friction roll 42 adapted
to engage with the friction roll 36 as they are
successively brought into contact therewith.
The gear 41 and roll 42 are mounted on the
same stud 43 and move together. The in-
termeshing teeth of the gears 35 and 41
should be long enough to allow the friction
rolls 36 and 42 to be always in engagement
notwithstanding any yielding movement of
the intermediate device due to discrepancies
in size or position of the parts. The weight
of the intermediate driving mechanism will
usually be sufficient to maintain contact, but
if desired a spring 44 may be employed. The
rotatable alinement device and the locking 90
means therefor are constructed as follows:
Mounted on the stud 45 is the Geneva stop
wheel 46 adapted to be turned at intervals by
the projections 47 on the record carrier.
When the carrier is turned, the projection 47
in engagement with the Geneva stop wheel
will turn it part way, and the next projection
47 will turn it the remainder of the distance
until a locking device, to be described, acts to
lock the parts. Each step of the record car- 100
rier is sufficient to bring the next record to
be played into engagement with its driving
means.
48 is a locking pin adapted to engage with
the notches on the Geneva wheel as they are 105
brought into alinement therewith. This
locking pin is carried by the pivoted lever 49.
This lever is adapted to be moved by an-
other lever 50 pivoted at 51 and provided
with the two arms 52 engaging the lever 49.
A spring 53 bears against the lever 50 and
serves to hold the locking pin 48 in engage-
ment with the Geneva stop wheel, or serves
to move the said pin into engagement there-
with when a notch of the said wheel comes
into alinement therewith. Means for re-
leasing the locking device are provided tak-
ing the form of a trip 54, in this instance car-
ried by the sound reproducing mechanism.
This trip is pivoted at 55 and has a stop 56 120
which holds it from moving out of the way
when it encounters the lever 50 on the re-
turn stroke of the sound reproducing mech-
anism. When .this trip engages with the
lever 50 on the return stroke of the repro- 125
ducer the pin 48 will be withdrawn from en-
gagement with the Geneva stop wheel, and
the record carrier is free to turn the said
wheel. On the forward stroke the trip 54
will ride idly over the lever 50. 130
110
115
893,283
The operation is as follows: During the
sound reproducing period, the pin 48 is
locked with the Geneva stop wheel and the
record carrier is prevented from turning.
5 One of the records is rotated by the inter-
mediate driving mechanism, the stylus (not
shown) is in engagement with the record
which is rotated, and the sound reproducing
mechanism is advancing on its forward
10 stroke by the thread follower 9 engaging with
the feed screw shaft 12. As the sound re-
producer comes to the end of its stroke the
trip 30 will engage the nose 27 thereby lifting
the sound reproducing mechanism up, bring-
15 ing the follower 9 out of engagement with the
feed screw shaft 12 and disengaging the sty-
lus from the record being played. By reason
of its own weight the thread follower 10 will
slide into engagement with the thread 31 of
20 the repeater screw and the sound reproduc-
ing mechanism will commence its return
movement. As it travels back the trip 54
will release the locking device, and the pin 18
will enter the cam groove 16 thereby turning
25 the record carrier and bringing another rec-
ord into engagement with its individual
driving means. The locking device will then
lock the Geneva stop wheel and record car-
rier. When the follower 10 reaches the cam
30 surface 32 in the repeater screw the motion
will be reversed and the sound reproducing
mechanism will start forward again. On its
forward stroke the tail 22 will pass on the
outside of the cam 33 and when the surface
35 34 is encountered the tail 22 will clasp the
follower 10 to prevent it from turning, after
which the said follower will slide out of the
thread 33a thereby lowering the sound re-
producing mechanism and causing the fol-
40 lower 9 to engage with the feed screw 12 and
the stylus to engage the record to be played.
If the pin 18 is removed the machine will not
turn the carrier and the record already
played will be repeated. Motion is imparted
45 to the device by means of the pulley 57 on
the main shaft 12. From there the motion
is transferred to the repeater shaft by means
of gears 58 and 59. When in its downward
position, the sound reproducing mechanism
50 is partially supported on the rail 60.
We claim:
1. In a phonograph, an intermittently ro-
tatable record carrier holding a plurality of
records, means for imparting an individual
55 rotation to the records as they are succes-
sively presented thereto, a rotatable aline-
ment device, mounted independently of the
record carrier and in peripheral engagement
therewith, adapted to properly aline the in-
60 dividual records with the means for indi-
vidually rotating them, a locking device
adapted to engage with the alinement de-
vice, means for releasing the locking device,
and means for turning the record carrier.
65 2. In a phonograph, an intermittently ro-
tatable record carrier holding a plurality of
records, means for imparting an individual
rotation to the records as they are succes-
sively presented thereto, a sound reproduc-
ing mechanism, means for reciprocating the y0
sound reproducing mechanism, a rotatable
alinement device, mounted independently of
the record carrier and in peripheral engage-
ment therewith, adapted to properly aline
the individual records with the means for in- 75
dividually rotating them, a locking device
adapted to engage with the alinement device,
means carried by the sound reproducing
mechanism for releasing the locking device,
and means also carried by the sound repro- go
ducing mechanism for turning the record
carrier.
3. In a phonograph, an intermittently ro-
tatable record carrier, a rotatable Geneva
stop wheel mounted independently of the §5
record carrier and in peripheral engagement
therewith, a locking device adapted to en-
gage with the Geneva stop wheel, means for
releasing the locking device, and means for
turning the record carrier. 90
4. In a phonograph, an intermittently ro-
tatable record carrier, a sound reproducing
mechanism, means for reciprocating the
sound reproducing mechanism, a rotatable
Geneva stop wheel mounted independently 95
of the record carrier and in peripheral en-
gagement therewith, a locking device for en-
gaging with the Geneva stop wheel, means
carried by the sound reproducing mechan-
ism for releasing the locking device, and 100
means also carried by the sound reproducing
mechanism for turning the record carrier.
5. In a phonograph, an intermittently ro-
tatable record carrier holding a plurality of
records, means for imparting an individual 105
rotation to the records as they are succes-
sively presented threto, a sound reproducing
mechanism, a locking device, an alinement
device in engagement with the locking de-
vice and operated by the record carrier adapt- 1 1 0
ed to properly aline the individual records
with the means for individually rotating them,
driving connections for reciprocating the
sound reproducing mechanism, and means
for releasing the locking device and for turn- 115
ing the record carrier, both carried by the
sound reproducing mechanism.
6. In a phonograph, an intermittently ro-
tatable record carrier holding a plurality of
records, means for turning said record car- 120
rier, means for imparting an individual rota-
tion to the records as they are successively
presented thereto, an alinement device adapt-
ed to properly aline the individual records
with the means for individually rotating them, 125
means for locking the alinement device,
means for releasing the locking means, a plu-
rality of members on the record carrier, one
of which is in engagement with the aline-
ment device when in its locked position, the 130
^k.
893,283
said member acting to turn the alinement de-
vice a distance, when the record carrier is
actuated and when the locking means are re-
leased, after which it is released from en-
5 gagement therewith, and another of said
members engaging with the alinement de-
vice to turn the same until the locking device
locks the alinement device in position.
7. In a phonograph, an intermittently ro-
] o tatable record carrier, means for turning said
record carrier, a Geneva stop wheel, means for
locking the Geneva stop wheel, means for
releasing the locking means, a plurality of
members on the record carrier, one of which
] 5 is in engagement with the Geneva stop
wheel when in its locked position, the said
member acting to turn the Geneva stop
wheel a distance, when the record carrier is
actuated and when the locking means are
20 released, after which it is released from en-
gagement therewith, and another of said
members engaging with the Geneva stop
wheel to turn the same until the locking de-
vice locks the Geneva stop wheel in position.
25 8. In a phonograph, a driving shaft, an
intermittently rotatable record carrier, indi-
vidually rotatable records mounted, thereon,
transmission mechanism on the shaft and on
the ends of the records, and an intermediate
30 driving mechanism comprising an arm
loosely pivoted at one end and provided
with transmission mechanism at its free end,
the said transmission mechanism on the arm
resting and engaging with the transmission
35 mechanism of the shaft and adapted to en-
gage with the transmission mechanism on
the records as they are successively pre-
sented thereto.
9. In a phonograph, a driving shaft, an
4 0 intermittently rotatable record carrier, indi-
vidually rotatable records mounted thereon,
transmission mechanism on the shaft and on
the ends of the records, and an intermediate
driving mechanism yieldingly supported for
45 transmitting motion from the driving shaft
to the records as they are successively pre-
sented thereto.
10. In a phonograph, a driving shaft, an
intermittently rotatable record carrier, indi-
vidually rotatable records mounted thereon, 50
transmission mechanism on the driving
shaft and on the ends of the records, and an
intermediate driving mechanism in constant
engagement with the transmission mechan-
ism on the shaft and adapted to be engaged 55
by the transmission mechanism on the ends
of the records as they are successively pre-
sented thereto, and means for yieldingly
supporting the said intermediate driving
mechanism so ■ as to compensate for dis- 60
crepaneies in size or position of parts.
11. In a phonograph, an intermittently
rotatable record carrier, a Geneva stop
wheel, means on the carrier for engaging
with the Geneva stop wheel to turn the same, G5
means for locking the Geneva stop wheel,
and means for releasing the locking means.
12. In a phonograph, an intermittently
rotatable record carrier, a Geneva stop
wheel, means on the carrier for engaging 70
with the Geneva stop wheel to turn the same,
means for locking the Geneva stop wheel, a
sound reproducing mechanism adapted to
engage with one of the records of the carrier
while the latter is locked, and means carried 75
by the sound reproducing mechanism for
releasing the locking means.
13. In a phonograph, an intermittently
rotatable record carrier, a Geneva stop
wheel, means on the carrier for engaging 80
with the Geneva stop wheel to turn the same,
means for locking the Geneya stop wheel, a
sound reproducing mechanism adapted to
engage with one of the records of the carrier
while the latter is locked, and means carried 85
by the sound reproducing mechanism for
releasing the locking means, and means also
carried by the sound reproducing mechanism
for turning the record carrier.
Signed at New York city in the county of 90
New York and State of New York this 8th
day of January A. D. 1908.
CHARLES THOMA, Jr.
WALTER THOMA.
Witnesses :
Axel V. Beeken,
Geo. A. Marshall.
No. 893,292. PATENTED JULY 14, 1908.
G. A. WLOST.
FEEDING MECHANISM FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED DEO. 13, 1906.
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR:
&
;/t^
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
GUSTAV ADOLF WLOST, OF SCHRAMBERG, GERMANY, ASSIGNOR TO FIRM OF VEREINIGTE
UHRENFABRIKEN VON GEBRUDER JUNGHANS & THOMAS HALLER, A. G., OF SCHRAM-
BERG, GERMANY.
FEEDING MECHANISM FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 893,292.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 14, 1908.
Application filed December 13, 1906. Serial No. 347,682.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Gustav Adolf
Wlost, a subject of the King of Prussia, re-
siding at Uhlandstrasse 13, in Schramberg,
5 Germany, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Feeding Mechanism
for Talking-Machines, of which the following
is a full, clear, and exact description.
This invention relates to feeding mechan-
10 ism for talking machines wherein the dia-
phragm supporting tube can slide on roller
guides without any articulation in a tube
connected to the sounding trumpet.
In order that with such feeding mechanism
15 the sliding or forward movement of the dia-
phragm tube may take place independently
of the record grooves of the record disks, the
diaphragm tube according to the present in-
vention is moved forwards by means of a
20 slide operated by the driving gear of the ma-
chine, said movement being of course always
such that the feed of the diaphragm and
style conforms with the spiral of record
grooves on the record disk.
25 The accompanying drawing shows a form
of construction of the present transporting
device.
Figure 1 is a side elevation with partial sec-
tion; Fig. 2 is a section on line A — B and
30 Fig. 3 is a section on line C — D of Fig. 1.
The tube a bearing the sounding tx-umpet
in the usual manner is adjustably mounted in
a bracket arm b fastened to the box of the
talking machine. In this tube a extends the
tube c at the outer end of which is secured the
part d supporting the diaphragm. The tube
c slides on rollers e extending on the one hand
through recesses of .the tube a and bearing on
the other hand on the tube c outside the tube
40 a. The tube c bears on its diaphragm sup-
porting end upon a slide which, as shown,
comprises the bracket /provided with rollers
or rotary disks and the guide bar g. The
latter moves within the bracket arm b and is
supported in its forward part by a roller i. 45
It moves between two friction rollers j and Tc,
the latter of which is arranged on a readily
interchangeable shaft I. There is mounted
on this shaft a removable worm wheel m en-
gaging in a worm n set in rotation from the 50
driving gear of the machine. The driving
motion of the worm may be derived from the
driving gear in such a manner that the spin-
dle li receiving the record disk is likewise pro-
vided with a worm p where in the correspond- 55
ingly lengthened shaft a of the worm n en-
gages by means of the worm wheel r. The
gear is proportioned in such a manner that
the feed of the slide and diaphragm support-
ing tube c conforms with the actual spiral 60
of record grooves of the record disk. As
these grooves in the various manufactured
types of disks are sometimes close together
and sometimes wide apart, shaft I and worm
wheel m have been made readily interchange- 65
able in such a manner that the feed of the
diaphragm may be readily adapted to the
actual type of disk by mounting a suitable
worm wheel thereon.
What I claim as my invention, and desire 70
to secure by Patent is :
In a talking machine, the combination of a
diaphragm, and means for moving said dia-
phragm including friction rollers and means
for driving said friction rollers including 75
worm gearing having an intermediate shaft I
and worm wheel m, and means for mounting
such shaft and wheel so that they may be
easily removed.
In witness whereof, I have hereunto signed 80
my name in the presence of two subscribing
witnesses.
GUSTAV ADOLF WLOST.
Witnesses :
Ernst Entenmann,
Wm. Hahn.
No. 893,525.
PATENTED JULY- 14, 1908.
J. M. LANDON.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED APE. 17. 1908.
Ticyl
' '/Asm****/:
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOSEPH MARGULIES LANDON, OF LONDON, ENGLAND.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 893,525.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 14, 1908.
Application filed April 17, 1908. Serial No. 427,761.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Joseph Margulies
Landon, a subject of the King of England,
residing at 20 Central Hill, in the county of
5 London, England, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in or Relating
to Talking-Machines ; and 1 do hereby declare
the following to be a full, clear, and exact de-
scription of the invention, such as will enable
10 others skilled in the art to which it appertains
to make and use the same.
This invention consists in improvements in
or relating to talking machines and refers
particularly to the sound boxes for recording
15 or reproducing.
According to this invention, I provide
spring mechanism of such a character in con-
nection with the sound box that although
the spring is rigidly held in position it is not
20 controlled in such a way as to minimize its
action and render it insensible to the slightest
vibrations of the stylus, while at the same
time the mechanism is not too sensitive so as
to cause over vibration or "blasting".
25 * In carrying out my invention, I fix to the
shell of the sound box one edge of a flat
spring, in such a way that the spring is in the
same plane as the diaphragm; the other edge
of the spring over which the stylus bar is con-
30 nected is left free to move. The flat spring
may be formed of steel, or of any other
springy metal or material, such for instance
as brass, glass, mica or the like. I may con-
nect the sound box thus constructed to the
35 end of the trumpet or to the tone arm or the
like by any suitable means. And in order
that my said invention may be better under-
stood I will now proceed to describe the same
with reference to the drawing accompanying
40 this specification, in which: —
Figure 1 shows front view of a sound box
constructed according to my invention; Fig.
2 shows side view of same.
The same letters of reference are employed
45 to denote the same parts in both the views : —
a shows the shell of the sound box, b shows
the inner end of the stylus bar, which is fixed
to the diaphragm c in any suitable manner.
d shows a flat spring, one edge of which is
fixed in the shell a of the sound box, the other 50
edge being fixed in a stylus holder e. The
end /of the stylus bar is fixed to an extension
g of the stylus holder e.
h shows a screw to screw against the shell a
of the sound box. 55
Tc shows the stylus and m the sound exit
tube.
The form of the device shown in the ac-
companying drawing wherein the stylus Tc,
the flat spring d and the diaphragm c are all 60
in the same plane, is the one which I have
found to answer best in practice, but the de-
tails of carrying out the invention may be
varied somewhat without departing from
the principle thereof. 65
In place of using a regulating screw h I
may use a pin or peg or its equivalent for the
same purpose.
What I claim and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent of the United States of America, 70
is: —
In a sound box, the combination of a suit-
able frame; a diaphragm mounted therein; a
stylus bar connected to said diaphragm; a
flat spring connected directly to said frame 75
and lying in the same plane as the dia-
phragm; a stylus holder with which said
spring is also connected, and provided with
an extension in which one end of said stylus
bar is fixed; and a screw passing through said 80
extension and adapted to contact with the
shell of the sound box, substantially as de-
scribed.
In testimony whereof, I affix my signature,
in presence of two witnesses.
JOSEPH MARGULIES LANDON.
Witnesses :
A. E. VlDAL,
L. SlMMONDS.
No. 893,929. PATENTED JULY 21, 1908.
G. KONIGSTEIN.
AUTOMATIC NEEDLE CLAMP FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 4, 1907.
&t4f.*3
/f 6
4- ^
L02tj&:^
s.
yP2???e&&e<s }
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
GABOR KONIGSTEIN, OF SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA, ASSIGNOR TO D. H. GULICK, OF SAN
FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA.
AUTOMATIC NEEDLE-CLAMP FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 893,929.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented July 21, 1908.
Application filed September 4, 1907. Serial No. 391,331.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Gabor Konigstein,
a citizen of the United States, residing in the
city and county of San Francisco and State
5 of California, have invented new and useful
Improvements in Automatic Needle-Clamps
for Talking-Machines, of which the folio wing-
is a specification.
My invention relates to attachments for
10 talking machines, and especially to an auto-
matic needle clamp. Its object is to provide
a simple, cheap, practical attachment which
can be applied to any talking machine al-
ready in use; and which will permit a needle
15 to be put in or taken out without the use of
thumb-screws, and which will provide for
the seating of the needle in such fashion that
either a soft tone or a loud tone may be ob-
tained from the same needle.
20 The invention consists of the parts and the
construction and combination of parts as
hereinafter more fully described and claimed,
having reference to the accompanying draw-
ings, in which —
25 Figure 1 is an elevation showing the in-
vention applied to an ordinary sound-box
and stylus-bar. Fig. 2 is a sectional view
of the invention, enlarged. Fig. 3 is a sec-
tional view of the same omitting the clamp-
30 ing sleeve. Fig. 4 is an end view of the
sleeve. Fig. 5 is a like view of the clamp.
A is a head of suitable size, shape and ma-
terial, having a stem 2 by which it can be in-
serted into the socket of any ordinary sound-
35 box, and secured therein by the usual set
screw. Manifestly, though, this head could
be made integral with the stylus-arm. This
head carries the spring-jaw members 3 which
normally tend to open outward, but which
40 may be compressed to grip and hold a nee-
dle point, as 4, when the latter is inserted
into the clamp-jaws 3.
The main feature of the invention resides
in the use of the spring-jaws 3, and in suit-
45 able means for compressing them to grip the
needle point, or opening them to release the
needle point; in conjunction with the tone-
qualifying means, hereinafter stated.
The jaws 3 may be secured to the head in a
50 suitable manner and various devices may be
employed to operate the clamp-jaws 3. In
the present instance, I have shown a barrel
member 5 secured to the head A, and adapt-
ed to detachably receive the base ring 6 to
which the spring- jaws are fixed; the barrel 5 55
having a suitable bayonet slot 7 to receive
the lug 8 on the ring 6. The opening and
shutting of the jaws is done by the spring-
actuated sleeve 9. When the sleeve is
pushed in to compress its spring 10, it allows 60
the clamp members 3 to open and release the
needle point. Releasing the hold on the
sleeve 9 allows the spring 10 to act to close
the jaws and grip the needle point.
The clamp-jaws 3 are preferably connected 65
at their inner ends to the cylindrical ring
portion 6 which, as before stated, is detach-
ably connected to the barrel or socket 5 on
the head A so as to permit the ready removal
of the jaws, whereby either a felt washer or a 70
silver washer, as indicated at 1 1 , may be in-
serted into the socket, and against which
washer the needle will seat ; one or the other
of these washers, either felt or metal, being
used, respectively, according as to whether it 75
is desired to play soft or loud. The idea of
using an interchangeable felt or metal washer
is important, because thereby I have, in ad-
dition to my automatic clamp feature, a
simple and convenient means for softening 80
or expanding or amplifying the tones.
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat-
ent is —
An automatic needle clamp for talking 85
machines, consisting of a head having a stem
for attachment to an ordinary sound-box,
said head provided with a barrel portion,
spring clamp members secured to a base ring
which detachably fits the inside of the bar- 90
rel, a spring-actuated sleeve slidable on the
outside of the barrel and operative on the
clamp members to hold the latter normally
closed, a needle point carried by the clamp
members, and a tone- qualifying washer in- 95
serted into the barrel and against which the
back of the needle impinges.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit-
1TGSSGS
GABOR KONIGSTEIN.
Witnesses :
Herman Hahn,
Geo. H. Strong.
No. 894,956.
A. JUNOD. PATENTED AUG. 4, 1908.
SOUND REPRODUCER AND RECORDER.
APPLICATION FILED JULY 15, 1907.
4 SHEETS— SHEET 1,
C%g?.J?.
3 6
?0 ? W
c^?r<£
INVENTOR.-
^*<^£
ATTORNEY
No. 894.956.
A. JUNOD.
SOUND REPRODUCER AND RECORDER.
APPLICATION FILED JULY 15, 1907.
PATENTED AUG. 4, 1908.
4 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
/U
c^y-.y^.
<^&Z//.
^H47.J#.a
o d
\
<<
H
o
'JZWJ
I a
n
3D
33
I,
a£>
'I/hzS.
a
s?6
<&&?:&/.
WITNESSES
-/ L
"^
in
! J?6
I /
-y
»
£5
(^:/J.
INVENTOR.'
BY
ATI
ATTORNEY
;
No. 894,956.
PATENTED AUG. 4, 1908.
A. JUNOD.
SOUND REPRODUCER AND RECORDER.
APPLICATION PILED JULY 15, 1907.
4 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
Of
'^i^Z
c&
j£-
<#'
-/'/
/8
d^^^S.
WITNESSES
INVENTOR:
^Zktfrz' JztTioct;
ATTORNEY
i
No. 894,956.
A. JUNOD. PATENTED AUG. 4, 1908.
SOUND REPRODUCER AND RECORDER.
APPLICATION FILED JULY 15, 1907,
4 SHEETS-SHEET 4.
W./9.
*f.
£0.
&t
^~
^n>
j/
"AT "
6^ Z*
^U^sZJ?.
^j?:J?^.
O o
'8
^ZJ?3
is&&.£>?'
/&—
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ANDRF, JUNOD, OF FRUITVALE, CALIFORNIA.
SOUND REPRODUCER AND RECORDER.
No. 894,956.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 4, 1908.
Application filed July 15, 1907. Serial No. 383,734.
55
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Andre Junod, a citi-
zen of Switzerland, residing at Fruitvale, in
the county of Alameda and State of Califor-
nia, have invented new and useful Improve-
ments in Sound Reproducers and Recorders,
of which the following is a specification.
My invention relates to a sound-reproduc-
ing apparatus, and is especially designed to
be employed in connection with the stylus-
bar of the gramophone, or kindred instru-
ment, for producing an oscdlating anti-fric-
tion bearing for said bar, and in which other
undesirable movements are entirely obliter-
ated.
My invention consists of the parts and the
constructions and arrangements of parts
which will be hereinafter described and
pointed out in the claims.
Figure 1 is a sectional view on line A — A of
Fig. 2, which is a plan view of the apparatus.
Figs. 3 and 5 are perspective views of the
members of the stylus-bar. Fig. 4 is a side
view. Fig. 6 shows the hook attachment.
Fig. 7 is a section on line B — B of Fig. 2.
Figs. 8 — 8a are plan and side view of a modi-
fied form. Fig. 9 shows sections on lines
C— C and D— D Fig. 8. Figs. 10— 10a are
detail views. Figs. 11 — lla show another
form; as also do Figs. 12 — 13 — 14 and 15.
Figs. 16 — 17 — 18 show the knife edged bear-
ings in a plane parallel with the stylus-bar.
Figs. 19 — 20 — 21 are a plan and two edge
views of the bearing and the stylus point
clamp. Figs. 22 to 28, inclusive, are sec-
tions and detads of the same.
It is the object of my invention to provide
an oscdlating anti-frictional bearing for the
stylus-bar of a gramophone, or like instru-
ment, said bearing being so contrived as to
allow an absolutely free movement of the
stylus -bar in unison with the movements
of the diaphragm, to which it is attached,
and to prevent as far as possible any of the
disagreeable rattling and vibratory noises
caused by a loose action in such instruments ;
but it wfil be manifest that my device may be
also employed in any connection where a per-
fect vibratory or oscillating action is re-
quired, with the least possible friction.
As shown in the present invention A and
A' are two rings between which the vibratory
diaphragm 2 is suitably clamped. The sty-
lus 3 which follows the lines of the record-
plate is fixed in one end of the stylus-bar 4,
60
65
75
either by a locking screw or by devices to be
hereafter described, and the other end of the
bar is fixed to the center of the diaphragm 2,
as shown at 4 a, so that it transmits all of the
vibrations and movements caused by the
stylus on the record, through the diaphragm
and the transmitter in the usual manner.
The stylus-bar 4 is bent into a form plainly
shown in Fig. 3, and is fixed to a transverse
bar 5, along the central line of the face of
which is formed a V-shaped ridge 6. 7 is
another bar parallel with and opposed to the
bar 5, and this bar 7 may have formed longi-
tudinally within it, a groove 8 of sufficiently
wider angle than the V - shaped wedge of 70
the bar 5, so that the latter may rest in the
bottom of the V-shaped groove or channel 8
and have sufficient space on either side to
allow it to tilt upon this knife edge without
other movement. The bars 5 and 7 may be
secured together with the parts in the above
position, as shown in Figs. 1, 2, 4 and 8, or
separated as in Figs. 19 to 28. The plane of
these meeting edges is parallel to the plane of
the diaphragm 2, and to the plane of separa- 80
tion of the rings A and A'. The groove or
channel may be omitted from the bar 7 if de-
sired, and the knife edge of 5 rest upon a
plane surface of the part 7.
Holes are made through the bar 7, as
shown at 9, and these holes register with arms
10 which project from one of the plates, as A,
and may be bent at right angles so as to enter
the holes 9 and present fiat surtaces against
which the V-shaped edges 6 contact. Knife
edges are formed on projections or arms 12,
plainly shown in Fig. 2, these arms project-
ing from the periphery of the ring A', and in
the opposite direction from the arms 10.
These arms enter holes 14 which are made in
the bar 5. These knife edges and bearing
surfaces being thus opposed to each other, it
will be seen that there wdl be one set of bear-
ings formed by the arms 12, entering the holes
14, and resting in the V-shaped groove 8 ; and
the other arms 10 in like manner enter the
opposed opening 9 in the bar 7, and rest upon
knife edges 6.
The transverse bars 5 and 7, being bolted
or otherwise secured together, as more plainly 105
shown in Fig. 4, and carrying the stylus-bar,
it will be seen that the tfiting movement of
the latter takes place upon these knife edges,
and that the opposing contacts are of such a
nature as to substantially eliminate any
85
90
95
100
110
Q
894,956
other movements, and the vibration trans-
mitted, from the stylus to the diaphragm,
produces a soft and pleasant tone.
Pivoted between the plates 5 and 7 is an
5 arm 15 having at its outer end an inwardly
turned point 16, and this point may be
turned either into or out of contact with the
periphery of the rings. When thrown into
contact with the rings it increases the volume
10 of the tone, and is very effective for instru-
mental or loud music. When thrown out-
wardly and away from the rings the tone is
correspondingly softer, and fitted for vocal
music.
15 In Figs. 8, 9 and 10 I have shown a device
modified so that in place of the complete V-
shaped groove, I have shown inclined sur-
faces 8 a which form practically opposing in-
clined sides, against one of which the V or
20 wedge-shaped edge of 12 contacts, and
against the other a correspondingly shaped
edge of 13. The relative position of these
inclines is well shown in the sectional views,
Fig. 9, and the perspective views, Figs. 10
25 and 10 a; and it will be seen that when the
bars 5 and 7 are bolted or secured together,
as previously stated, these edges or inclines
will be opposed so as to practically form oppo-
site sides of V-shaped grooves upon the plane
3 o surfaces, at the bottom of which the wedges 1 2
and 13 rest.
In Figs. 11 and 11 a I have shown another
means for accomplishing the same result. In
this case the bar 17 is stamped out so that in
35 the central portion is formed the V-shaped
groove 18, and toward each end are formed
the V-shaped wedges 19 having their convexi-
ties in opposite directions, as shown in the
transverse section Fig. lla, in which the
40 V-shaped wedge 20 is shown fitting the
V-shaped groove 18.
Figs. 12 — 13 — 14 show another modified
form in which the stylus-bar is provided with
a transverse trunnion having central knife
45 edge 25 and a pair of knife edges 26 at its
ends resting in V-slots on the supporting
arms 10 a.
It will be understood that in all the fore-
going forms the general principle is preserved,
50 of elongated, transverse, anti-frictional bear-
ings and that such bearings may include
either knife edges and corresponding grooves,
or knife edges and plane opposing surfaces,
the lines of contact being in any case in the
55 plane of oscillation.
In Figs. 19 to 28, inclusive, the lugs 10 and
12 which are carried upon the rings A and A'
are made enough wider than the lugs as
shown in Figs. 1 to 18, so that the inner edges
60 of one pair overlap the outer edges of the op-
posed pair, and the knife edges of one, and
the opposed grooved surfaces of the other
pair, have a very short bearing, and serve to
bring the opposed rings and lugs to an exact
65 register when they are put together.
i j
The transverse bar 5 has three tongues, a
central one 5a, and two at the ends 5b. The
exterior tongues have knife edges which rest
upon the bearing grooves or surfaces of the
lugs 10, exterior to the lugs 12 of the other 70
ring. The central tongue carries the stylus-
bar 4 which is connected therewith.
5C is a clamp, opposed to the bar 5, and held
in contact with the knife edges of the lugs 12
by a thumb screw 28 connecting the clamp
with the bar 5 upon one side of the knife edge
bearing, and a second thumb screw 29 upon
the other side of said bearing, as plainly
shown in Fig. 22, so that when the screws are
loosened, the clamp may tilt upon the knife sa
edge and open to admit a point or stylus 3,
and the screw 29 serves to clamp it when
placed. The screw 28 is free within the hole
in the inner end of the clamp, and a spring
30 surrounding the shank of the screw acts to 85
open the clamp when the screw 29 is loos-
ened. In order to limit and regulate side
play of the stylus carrying parts, the ends of
the tongues 5b are made outwardly diverg-
ent, as shown in Figs. 19 and 21, and the 90
heads of adjusting screws 31 are brought into
as close contact with these points, as desir-
able to limit the side play.
Having thus described nrf invention, what
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat- 95
ent is —
1. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination with the diaphragm, its sup-
porting rings and stylus bar, of parallel con-
nected bars transverse to the stylus bar, to 100
one of which bars the stylus bar is attached,
said bars having opposed knife edge and co-
acting bearing surfaces, with their line of con-
tact in the planes of the diaphragm, and said
rings having members with opposed bearings 10 5
disposed in line with the first named bear-
ings.
2. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination with the diaphragm, its sup-
porting rings and st3dus bar, of parallel con-
nected bars transverse to the stylus bar, to
one of which bars the stylus bar is attached,
said bars having co-acting knife edge and
opposed bearing surfaces, arms projecting
from the rings and having opposed bearings 115
in line with the first named bearings.
3. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination with a diaphragm, its support-
ing rings and stylus bar, of parallel connected
bars transverse to the stylus bar and pro- 120
vided with holes, and to one of which parallel
bars the stylus bar is fixed, said bars having
knife edge and opposed bearing surfaces re-
spectively, arms projecting from the rings
and bent to pass through the holes in the par- 125
allel connected bars, said bent arms having
knife edge and opposed bearing surfaces in
line with the bearings of the bars.
4. In a sound reproducing apparatus, the
combination with the diaphragm, its' sup- 130
894,956
porting rings, stylus bar, parallel connected,
bearing bars at right angles to the stylus bar,
and arms projecting from the rings, having
opposed bearings in line with those of the
5 bars, of a pivoted arm having an inwardly
turned point adapted to contact with the
rings, or be moved out of contact therewith.
5. In a sound reproducing apparatus, a
diaphragm, supporting rings with projecting
10 lugs bent to form opposing knife edge and co-
acting grooved contacts connected bearing
bars having openings, the inner edges of one
pair of contacts overlapping the outer edges
of the opposed pair to automatically register
15 the connected bars.
6. In a sound reproducing apparatus, a
diaphragm, parallel connected bars having
knife edge bearings, opposed clamping rings,
a stylus bar connected with the diaphragm,
20 and turnable upon said knife edge bearings,
lugs projecting from the rings, and having
opposing groove and knife edge bearings
registering with those of the stylus bar.
7. In a sound-reproducer, the combination
with the diaphragm and its holder, of a sty- 25
lus-bar, a bar upon which the stylus-bar is
carried, extending transversely to the stylus-
bar, said bar having a raised knife edge ex-
tending lengthwise, a second bar having a
corresponding bearing surface upon which 30
the knife edge rests, arms projecting from the
diaphragm holding rings, overlapping and
forming contacts upon the transverse line of
the knife edges.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set 35
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit-
nesses.
ANDRE JUNOD.
Witnesses :
S. H. Nourse,
Frederick E. Maynard.
I
No. 895,046.
PATENTED AUG. 4, 1908.
M. SAMUEL.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 8, 1907.
,1
l'' I'1
I1
>
!
i
|
!
1
1
i
i
;
t
1 1
j
<
1
\\
J
*
\
;
•
;
II'
Ft jo. 4.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
MONTAGU SAMUEL, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 895,046.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 4, 1908.
Application filed June 8, 1907. Serial No. 377,899.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Montagu Samuel, a
subject of the King of Great Britain, residing
at New York, county and State of New York,
5 have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Talking-Machines, of which
the following is a specification.
The object of this invention is, to provide
improved means whereby the delicate mech-
10 anism of sound production, particularly in
disk record machines, is protected and in
which this protection shall serve to deaden
or destroy the sound produced by physical
contact between the disk and stylus.
15 A specific embodiment of my invention is
shown in the accompanying drawings, in
which
Figure 1 shows a side-view of a talking ma-
chine provided, with my improved cover, the
20 latter being shown in section, Fig. 2 is a top-
view of the device when removed from the
talking machine, Fig. 3 is a bottom- view
thereof, and Fig. 4 a rear-view from which
the attachments adapted to inclose the horn
25 support are omitted.
Referring to the drawings, A is the talking
machine body containing the Usual operating
mechanism to rotate the disk.
B is the fixed bracket supporting the
30 swinging horn C and also the swinging sound-
con ve}Ter D.
E is the .disk, F the stylus-carrying repro-
ducer.
G is a substantially square box adapted to
35 fit snugly on top of the talking machine A,
having felt-contacts H. The top of this box
G is provided with a swinging glass-cover I,
hinged at K and provided with a locking de-
vice J. The rear of the box G is apertured at
L to allow for the full swing of the sound-con-
veyer D. Permanently attached to the rear
of the box G is the bracket or support M the
two side arms of which are grooved at N for
the reception of the removable wall angle O.
45 The apertured triangle P fits into the bottom
of the chamber produced by sliding the wall
angle O into the grooves N. The aperture in
the bottom-piece P is felt-lined and so shaped
as to snugly fit the shape of the bracket B at
50 this point. Screws R securely connect the
parts P and O. An apertured top-piece S
rabbeted and felt-lined at the point of con-
tact closes the top of this rear-extension from
the main box G. This top-piece S is pro-
55 vided with an aperture T open at the front-
end, and so shaped as to snugly fit around
the upper part of the bracket B. The main
box or cover G extends rearwardly of the
talking machine to a distance slightby beyond
the furthest front-extension of the bracket B GO
and the box G therefore is provided with the
felt-lined circular cut U adapted to encircle
the remainder of that portion of the bracket
B which is not encircled by the face of the
opening T. G5
In order to apply my talking machine
cover to a machine of the character illus-
trated, I first remove the parts O, P and S,
constituting the rear-extension of the main
cover G. I then place the cover G upon the 70
talking machine, inserting the sound-con-
veyer D through the rear-aperture L. I
then slide the wall angle O into the grooves
N and insert the bottom-piece P therein and
fasten the same by means of the screws Ft. 75
The top-piece S is then placed upon the walls
O and the device is in condition for practical
and efficient use.
The advantages of my invention are,
first, the efficient exclusion of dust from the 80
sound-producing parts of the machine. The
operation can be watched through the glass-
cover I ; by swinging this cover on the hinge
K, access is had to the record to change it
when desired. This cover can be locked 85
when the machine is not to be used. The
various contacts between the attachment
and the usual talking-machine parts being
felt-lined, rattling is prevented and dust as
well as other foreign particles are more com- 90
pletely excluded.
In the drawings I have shown my inven-
tion as applied to a well known existing
form of talking machine, but I do not wish
to be understood as claiming the invention 95
only when applied to that form. By making
the necessary mechanical changes the main
idea can be readily adapted to many other
forms of talking machines.
What I claim and desire to secure by Let- 100
ters Patent is :
1. A talking machine provided with a
body, a bracket projected thereform, a
sound-box and sound-conveyer supported
on said bracket, and a box for inclosing the 105
connected portions of the sound-conve}rer
and bracket, said box comprising a bottom
wall having an aperture for the passage of
the bracket, a top wall having an aperture
to fit the upper end of the bracket and side HO
walls disposed obliquely with reference to the
body.
895,046
2. A talking machine provided with a
body, a bracket projected therefrom, a
sound-box and sound-conveyer supported
by said bracket, a protective casing set on
5 top of the body and inclosing the sound-box
and part of the sound-conveyer, a support
secured to said casing adjacent to the point
where the sound-conveyer passes through
it, a box comprising side walls arranged ob-
1 0 liquely with reference to the casing and having
a sliding connection with said support, and
top and bottom walls apertured for the re-
ception of said bracket.
3. A talking machine provided with a
body, a bracket projected therefrom, a 15
sound-box and sound-conveyer supported
on said bracket, and a box for inclosing the
connected portions of the sound-conveyer
and bracket, said box being apertured at the
bottom for the passage of said bracket, and 20
at the top for the egress of sound.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set
my hand in the presence of two subscribing
witnesses this 6th day of June, 1907.
MONTAGU SAMUEL.
Witnesses :
Eugene Eble,
John A. Kehlenbeck.
No. 895,456. PATENTED AUG, 11, 1908.
F. HARDINGE.
ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHIC MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED DEC. 30, 1905.
Inventor1
S* "Franklin Hardinge
AllarTlEy-
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
FRANKLIN HARDINGE, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHIC MACHINES.
No. 895,456.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 11, 1908.
Application filed December 30, 1905. Serial No. 294,029.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Franklin Hardinge,
citizen of the United States, residing at Chi-
cago, in the county of Cook and State of Illi-
5 nois, have invented a certain new and useful
Improvement in Attachments for Phono-
graphic Machines, of which the following is a
full, clear, concise, and exact description,
reference being had to the accompanying
10 drawings, forming a part of this specifica-
tion.
My invention relates to phonographic ma-
chines, more particularly to that class of
phonographic machines in which the sound
15 waves are recorded upon wax or composition
fashioned into a cylindrical or slightly conical
shape.
As is well known to those familiar with the
art, the majority of phonographic machines
20 are constructed to accommodate what is
known as the standard record. Other ma-
chines are constructed which accommodate
what is known as the intermediate record, a
record of larger diameter; and there are also
25 machines manufactured which accommodate
what is known as concert records, a record of
still larger diameter. It is well known that
phonographic machines at the present time,
are constructed to accommodate but one of
30 these sizes, and it is the object of my inven-
tion to provide improved means whereby
any of these three records of different sizes
may be accommodated, in a single machine.
My invention will be more readily under-
35 stood by reference to the accompanying
drawings, in which,
Figure 1 is an elevation view of my inven-
tion, parts being broken away to more
clearly illustrate the same, Fig. 2 is a section
40 taken on line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1.
I have shown a rotatable carrier, 3, adapt-
ed to carry the standard size record, mount-
ed upon the axial shaft, 4, which is journaled
in the stationary bearing, 5, and the remov-
45 able bearing 6. The shaft, 4, is adapted to
be rotated by any suitable means as is usual
in phonographic machines of this class and
may be accomplished, for instance, by a pul-
ley arrangement, 7, as shown in the drawing.
50 The machine being of standard size, it fol-
lows that the standard size record may be ac-
commodated.
The invention herein consists of an im-
proved device which may be applied di-
ps rectly to the carrier 3, which is slightly ta-
pered, so that when a standard record or the
attachment is applied thereto a snug fit will
be assured. The supporting frame, 8, is com-
posed of the end rings, 9 and 10, which are
bored to fit the carrier, 3, and the connecting 60
bars 11,11 which connect together the rings,
9 and 10, and which, as shown, do not engage
the carrier, 3. It is apparent that with the
parts arranged in this manner, a secure tem-
porary connection may be obtained between 63
the carrier and the attachment. Cast inte-
grally with each of the rings, 9 and 10, are the
bearings, 12, 12, in which are mounted the
shafts, 13, 13. Upon these shafts, 13, are
pivotally mounted the supports, 14, 14, 70
these supports being provided with two dis-
tinct engaging surfaces, 15, and 16, for en-
gagement with the concert and intermediate
records, 17 and 18, respectively. As shown
in the drawings the shaft, 13, is so journaled 75
in the bearings that it is parallel to the sur-
face of the carrier, 3. This construction is
desirable so that when the supports, 14, are
mounted upon the shafts, 13, the precise
taper, as in the carrier, may be maintained in 80
the surfaces, 15 and 16, which is essential for
the proper reception of the intermediate and
concert records. For convenience I will call
the position of the supports when adapted
for the reception of an intermediate record 85
the normal position. This position is shown
in full lines in the drawing, Fig. 2. As
shown in the drawings, I prefer that the sur-
face, 16, of the supports 14, should be an arc
of a circle of the same diameter as the inside 90
diameter of the intermediate record, and the
surface, 15, should be an arc of a circle of the
same diameter as the inside diameter of a
concert record.
When in the normal condition the sup- 95
ports, 14, are held firmly by their own ten-
sion against the studs, 19, 19, on the rings,
9 and 10, and as shown in the drawing, the
surface of the stud is rounded, and the end of
the support is rounded, so that it may easily 100
be snapped into place and brought into ten-
sion and may thereby be securely held in
place. It is thus apparent that with the
attachment in this normal condition an in-
termediate record may be accommodated. 105
When it is desired to accommodate a con-
cert record, the supports, 14, are thrown out
of engagement with the studs, 19, and swung
about the pivot, 13, until the surfaces 20, 20,
are brought into engagement with the seats 110
895,456
15
25
21, 21, upon the rings 9 and 10. These seats,
21, are so disposed that when the surfaces, 20,
are brought into engagement with them the
surfaces, 15, of the supports, 14, will be coin-
5 cident with the inner circumference of the
concert record. In order to securely hold
the supports in this position, which may, for
convenience, be called the abnormal position,
I provide the braces 22, 22, pivoted by means
10 of the screws, 23, 23, upon the connecting
bars or straps, 11, 11, said braces being so dis-
posed, that by turning them about their
pivots they may be brought into engagement
with the studs, 24, 24,* on the supports, 14,
thereby holding the supports, 14, firmly
against their respective seats, and in position
for the reception of a concert record. This
condition is shown in dotted lines in Fig. 2.
It is thus made apparent that by means of
20 my invention a concert record may also be
accommodated.
It is evident from the foregoing description,
that the device can very easily be made ; the
construction being such that it is convenient
to cast the stationary framework and to
stamp the adjustable supports from the sheet
metal.
It is evident that changes and modifica-
tions may be made in the device herein de-
30 scribed by those skilled in the art, without
departing from the spirit or scope of my in-
vention, so I do not, therefore, wish to be
limited to the precise construction herein
shown.
35 I claim as new and desire to secure by
Letters Patent:
1 . In an attachment for phonographic ma-
chines, a frame work conforming to the ro-
tatable carrier of a phonographic machine,
40 supports having a series of engaging sur-
faces and capable of adjustment into different
positions mounted upon said frame work, the
supports being so disposed that they may
carry a phonographic record in each of said
45 positions.
2. In an attachment for phonographic ma-
chines, a frame work adapted to fit the ro-
tatable carrier of a phonographic machine,
supports having a series of engaging surfaces
50 and capable of adjustment into different
positions mounted upon said frame work,
and means whereby said supports may be
firmly held in said positions, said supports
being so disposed that they may carry a
55 phonographic record in each of said positions.
3. In an attachment for phonographic ma-
chines, a frame work adapted to fit the ro-
tatable carrier, of a phonographic machine,
bearings cast integrally with said frame work,
60 and supports having a number of engaging
surfaces and capable of adjustment into dif-
ferent positions mounted upon shafts jour-
naled in said bearings, said supports being so
disposed that they may carry a phonographic
65 record in each of said positions.
4. In an attachment for phonographic ma-
chines, a frame work adapted to fit the ro-
tatable carrier of a phonographic machine,
bearings cast integrally with the frame work,
supports capable of adjustment into differ- 70
ent positions mounted upon shafts journaled
in said bearings, said supports having engag-
ing surfaces when adjusted into any one of
the different positions and means whereby
said supports may be held firmly in the differ- 75
ent positions, said supports forming in each
of said positions a carrier for a phonographic
record.
5. In an attachment for phonographic ma-
chines, a frame work adapted to fit the ro- so
tatable carrier of a standard machine, sup-
ports capable of adjustment into different
positions mounted upon said frame work,
said supports having a series of engaging sur-
faces and means whereby said supports are 85
firmly held in each position, said supports
forming in one position a support for a record
of certain size and when in another position
forming a support for a record of larger size.
6. In an attachment for phonographic ma- 90
chines, a frame work adapted to fit snugly
the rotatable carrier of a standard machine,
bearings cast integrally with said framework,
supports mounted upon shafts journaled in
said bearings, said supports being provided 95
with a plurality of engaging surfaces and
capable of adjustment into different posi-
tions, and means for holding said supports in
said positions, said supports forming when
held in one position a carrier for a phono- 100
graphic record of certain size, and when held
in another position a carrier for a phono-
graphic record of another size.
7. As an article of manufacture, a record
holder for a phonographic machine equipped 105
with a plurality of arched arms adapted to
hold various sized records.
8. As an article of manufacture, a record
holder for a phonographic machine equipped
with sets of arched arms adapted for holding no
different sized cylindrical records.
9. As an article of manufacture, a cylin-
drical supporting frame adapted to slip over
the cylindrical carrier frame of a phonographic
machine, and on said supporting frame 115
pivoted members having arched surfaces for
adapting said frame to receive different sized
cylindrical phonographic records of greater
diameter than the normal record for the
phonographic machine. 120
10. As an article of manufacture, a skele-
ton carrier frame substantially cylindrical
and pivoted arch members adapted in a nor-
mal position to receive a cylindrical phono-
graphic record of one size, said carrier frame 125
being adapted to be expanded to receive and
support a record of greater size.
11. As an article of manufacture, a sup-
porting frame for a cylindrical phonographic
record, mechanism comprising a series of 130
895,456
arched members on said frame adapted in a
normal position to offer seating surfaces for
a record of one size, said mechanism being
adapted to be moved to a position to offer
5 seating surfaces for records of greater size.
12. As an article of manufacture, a skele-
ton supporting frame adapted to slip over
and engage the normal rotatable carrier of a
phonographic machine, mechanism compris-
10 ing a plurality of arched arms on said frame
adapted to assume a normal and alternate
position, said mechanism when in its normal
position offering seating surfaces for receiv-
ing and supporting intermediate sized rec-
15 ords and when in its alternate position offer-
ing seating surfaces for receiving and sup-
porting large cylindrical records.
13. As an article of manufacture, a skele-
ton frame for separable attachment to a
20 phonographic machine, arched wings pivoted
to said skeleton frame, said wings in their
normal position offering seating surfaces for
receiving cylindrical phonographic records of
one size, said wings being adapted to assume
25 an alternate expanded position and in such
position to offer seating surfaces for receiving
cylindrical records of larger size.
14. As an article of manufacture, a skele-
ton frame for separable attachment to a
30 phonographic machine, arched wings pivoted
to said skeleton frame, said wings in their
normal position offering seating surfaces for
receiving cylindrical phonographic records of
one size, said wings being adapted to assume
35 an alternate expanded position and in such
position to offer seating surfaces for receiving
cylindrical records of larger size, said wings
being adapted to be locked when in their
normal and alternate positions.
15. As an article of manufacture, a skele- 40
ton supporting frame adapted for separable
attachment with a phonographic machine,
arched wings on said frame adapted to as-
sume normal and alternate positions, said
wings when in their normal position offering 45
conical seating surfaces for receiving the
tapered interior surfaces of cylindrical pho-
nographic records of one size, said wings when
in their alternate position offering seating
surfaces for engaging the tapered interior 50
surface of records of greater size.
16. As an article of manufacture, a skele-
ton supporting frame having tapered engag-
ing surfaces having frictional engagement
with the tapered surface of a tapered rota- 55
table carrier of a phonographic machine,
arched wings extending from said supporting
frame adapted to assume a normal and an
expanded position, said wings when in their
normal position offering tapered surfaces for 60
engaging the interior tapering surface of
cylindrical records having greater diameter
than the normal records for the machine, and
when in an expanded position offering tapered
seating surfaces for engaging the tapered 65
interior surface of still greater cylindrical
records.
In witness whereof, I hereunto subscribe
my name this 21st day of December A. D.,
1905.
FRANKLIN HARDINGE.
Witnesses :
Charles J. Schmidt,
Leonard W. Novander.
No. 895,853. PATENTED AUG. 11, 1908.
J. H. J. HAINES.
SOUND AMPLIFIER FOR PHONOGRAPHS AND TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED APE. 25, 1908.
Jr/p, ,?.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOHN H. J. HAINES, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
SOUND-AMPLIFIER FOR PHONOGRAPHS AND TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 895,853.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 11, 1908.
Application filed April 25, 1908. Serial No. 429,122.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, John H. J. Haines, a
citizen of the United States, residing at the
city of New York, in the borough of Manhat-
£ tan and State of New York, have invented
certain new and useful Improvements in
Sound-Amplifiers for Phonographs and Talk-
ing-Machines, of which the following is a full,
clear, and exact description.
10 This invention relates to talking machines,
and has special reference to a type of device
for amplifying the reproduction of sound
from a record cylinder or plate, comprising a
friction roll and shoe introduced between the
15 stylus bar and the diaphragm, whereby the
vibrations of the stylus are reproduced in the
diaphragm in an amplified degree.
The object of my invention is to provide a
construction of amplifier which will increase
2C the loudness of the reproduction very con-
siderably without loss of definition or articu-
lation.
A further object of the invention is to pro-
vide means whereby the degree of loudness of
25 the reproduction can be varied at will and by
simple mechanism and manipulation.
In carrying out my invention I utilize a
form of shoe on the friction roll, which en-
compasses riiore^ than one-half of the cir-
30 cumference thereof, and I connect one end of
this shoe with the stylus lever in such a way
that the outward thrusts of the stylus
created by the vertical undulations in the
record groove, drive the shoe into intimate
35 contact with the roll, while the friction roll
and shoe are caused to bodily follow the- sty-
lus in its inward strokes, permitted by the
depressions in the record groove. The un-
dulations in the record groove are made up of
40 crests and depressions of varying depth and
shape, and I have found that by so organiz-
ing my lever system that the crests of the
record groove will act directly to increase the
friction of the shoe, the sharpest and clearest
4E reproduction is obtained. At the same time
the arrangement must be such that when the
stylus enters a depression in the groove, the
friction shoe and roll will follow it, so that
the shoe will receive the full effect of the
50 thrust caused by the next succeeding crest.
This following-up action of the roll and shoe
therefore increases the loudness, but it also
retains the purity or definition because it
overcomes any tendency of the shoe to rattle
5£ or loosen from the roll during the recessions
or inward strokes of the stylus.
My friction roll is carried at the end of a
swinging shaft as usual, and its weight is sup-
plemented by a weighted nut applied to the
end of the shaft in the usual manner, the j0
total weight at the end of the shaft being
predetermined in proportion to the coeffi-
cient of friction between the roll and shoe, so
that when the machine is in operation, the
vibratory system will be floating in stable 35
equilibrium at a certain elevation or distance
from the record tablet where the stylus will
be in operative relation to the record, and
the vibrations due to the rubbing of the shoe
upon the roll will be at a certain constant 70
rate suitable to cooperate with and augment
the vibrations which are to be superposed
thereon by the reproducing stylus. Under
this floating condition, there will be no effect-
ive force applied to the stylus to compel it to 75
follow the undulations of the record groove,
and I therefore add to the vibratory system
a supplemental weight or spring so applied as
to create a tendency of the roll and shoe to
press the stylus against the record surface, SO
thus compelling the stylus to follow the un-
dulations of the record groove and to react
upon the friction shoe. This extra weight
or spring, therefore, supplies the means for
causing the friction roll and shoe to bodily 85
follow the movements of the stylus bar. But
it must be and is so associated with the vi-
bratory s}rstem that the vibrations of the
stylus are not absorbed thereby, but on the
contrary are devoted entirely to varying the 90
grip of the shoe upon the roll.
The invention will be more specifically
described in connection with the accompa-
nying drawing, in which :
Figure 1 is an end elevation of a portion of 95
a talking machine and my improved ampli-
fying attachment, some parts being broken
away. Fig. 2 is a plan of the mechanism at
the end of the swinging shaft. Fig. 3 illus-
trates a modification of the stylus bar. 100
1 is a record tablet in the form of a cyl-
inder.
2 is a frame carrying the speaker compris-
ing essentially a diaphragm 3 and the ampli-
fying devices interposed between the dia- 105
phragm and the record.
4 is a shaft commonly found in this type of
machine, made in two sections connected by
a universal joint, one section being driven
by means of a belt or gearing from the motor 110
of the machine, and which is not illustrated
herein, while the other section which is
895,853
shown, is adapted to swing freely at its outer
end by reason of the universal joint referred
to, but is supported in a crank-arm 5, piv-
oted at 6 in the frame. Near the extremity
5 of shaft 4 and in the same plane with the cen-
ter of the diaphragm 3 is mounted a wheel or
roll 7 of amber or other similar material,
preferably having a grooved periphery which
is embraced by a shoe having an inner sur-
10 face corresponding to the shape of the
groove in the wheel and being of hard rubber
or other similar material adapted to afford a
certain amount of friction when the wheel
and shoe move with respect to each other.
15 This shoe embraces more than one-half of
the circumference of the roll and is prefer-
ably made in two sections 8 and 8' hinged
together at 9. A friction device which thus
embraces more than half of the circumfer-
20 ence of the roll acts more like a strap than a
shoe and affords more friction for a given
amount of pressure than the shorter shoe.
One end of the shoe is connected with the
center of the diaphragm 3 by a link 10, while
25 the other end is connected with the stylus
bar by a link 11. The stylus bar is indi-
cated by 12 and is pivoted at a fixed point 13
in the frame. The stylus 14 works in the
record groove of the record cylinder 1. The
30 stylus lever in Fig. 1 is in the form of a bell-
crank, while in Fig. 3 it is straight. Both
forms are provided with a threaded rod 15
having a finger-piece 16 by which it can be
turned, the extremities of the rod being
• 35 mounted in bearings, and there being a nut
17 working on the rod and itself held from
rotation and guided by a second rod 18.
The nut 17 has an extension to which is
pivotally connected the end of link 11. It
40 will be seen that by turning the threaded rod
15, the angular relation of the link 11 with
respect to the shoe and the axis of the roll
can be changed. Thus, by moving the nut
17 outward, the link more nearly approaches
45 a radial line with respect to the shaft 4, and
the thrusts of the stylus bar towards and
away from the shoe will be more direct and
effective, resulting in louder reproduction,
whereas a movement of the nut 17 inward,
50 will throw the link 11 into a position more
remote from the radius of shaft 4, resulting
in less effective movements of the stylus bar
and correspondingly weaker reproduction.
The extremity of the shaft 4 is threaded to
55 receive a weighted nut 19 such as is com-
monly used on this type of amplifier. The
weight of this nut, together with that of the
other elements at the end of shaft 4, tends to
swing the shaft downward against the shoe.
00 The pivot pin 6 to which the crank arm 5 is
secured, also carries another arm 20 on the
same side of the axis as the arm 5, and which
is provided with a vertical pin 21 over which
may be passed any required number of sec-
05 tions of a weight 22, which weight also serves
to throw the swinging shaft 4 downward.
But it will be seen that this weight 22 presses
upon shaft 4 through the bearing 23 and
while the shaft is given a downward tend-
ency, movements so rapid and short as 70
sound vibrations are not transmitted from
the shaft to the crank arm and weight 22.
For convenience in raising the vibratory sys-
tem to permit of the free movement of the
carriage 2 to change the position of the 75
speaker, the crank arm 5 is provided with ex-
tensions 24 and 25. The former is engaged
by the press lever 26 and lifted, which throws
the latter against the stylus bar and removes
it from the surface of the cylinder. 80
The parts are shown in running or operat-
ing position in Fig. 1 . When the machine is
not running, the shaft 4 is in a slightly lower
position than that shown, but, as soon as it
commences to rotate in the direction of the 55
arrow, the friction between the stationary
shoe 8, 8' and the roll causes the end of the
shaft 4 to rise, the upward movement ceasing
when the friction between the shoe and roll
has been reduced to the predetermined de- 90
gree. This friction thereafter remains con-
stant and represents a certain periodicity or
rate of vibration of the roll, shoe and weight
19, which is communicated to the diaphragm
through the link 10. So long as the speed of 95
rotation and the weight, exclusive of the
weight 22, remain constant, there will be no
tendency of the shaft 4 to either rise of fall
after it once assumes its operating position,
but these parts will remain in a floating con- 100
dition and under a constant rate of vibration.
In this condition there is only a slight tend-
ency of the stylus bar to press its point
against the record, and such vibrations as
would be imparted to the stylus bar by the 105
undulations in the record groove would
merely cause a chattering of the end of the
shoe to which link 11 is connected, against
the periphery of the roll, and the reproduc-
tion would be very much distorted. For this 110
reason the weight 22 is added and made suf-
ficient to impart a decided constant inward
thrust to the point of the stylus directed from
the shaft 4 through the roll, the shoe, the link
11, and the stylus bar. With this equip- 115
ment it will be seen that the elevations or
crests of the undulations in the record groove
will move the stjdus outward and throw the
end of the shoe against the roll, while the
roll, together with the shoe, will fall and fol- 120
low the end of the stylus, into the depressions
of the record groove. The result of this is
that the most effective parts of the record
groove, to wit, the crests, will be used to
create the extra friction which is to be super- 125
posed upon the constant friction between the
shoe and roll, and then communicated to the
diaphragm, and that the shoe, instead of fall-
I ing away from the roll when the stylus enters
i the depressions, thereby causing chattering, 130
I
895,853
i£
will remain in more intimate contact with
the roll, and there will be no lost motion be-
tween the shoe and the roll when the out-
ward thrust of the stylus occurs. This ac-
5 tion is analogous to that which takes place in
a microphone, wherein there is no make and
break of the circuit between the contacts,
but only a variation of pressure; the result is
also similar, for in a make and break tele-
10 phone the speech is garbled by sputtering
and is quite unintelligible, while, with varia-
tion of pressure only, the articulation is per-
fect. So in friction amplifiers, the chattering
which occurs when the vibratory system does
15 not follow the movements of the stylus, is
responsible for foreign noises and imperfect
reproduction, whereas, in my device, with the
mere variation in pressure, the reproduction
is perfectly clear. Therefore, clearness is
20 obtained by the fact that the vibratory sys-
tem follows the movements of the stylus,
and loudness is obtained by the fact that the
friction is produced by the most effective
part of the undulations in the record groove.
25 In most forms of friction roll amplifiers
used heretofore, there has been what is
known as a "floating weight," being a
weighted arm pivoted to some part of the
frame and on which is pivoted the stylus bar.
30 The function of this weight is to keep the
point of the stylus bar in contact with the
record surface, rising and falling to compen-
sate for any eccentricities thereof. Such a
weight necessarily partakes of and absorbs
35 the vibrations of the stylus bar produced by
the record groove, and therefore detracts
from or lessens the amount of vibration that
is delivered from the bar to the shoe. It has
also been proposed to apply this extra weight
40 to the end of the shaft which carries the fric-
tion roll, by making the weight which corre-
sponds to 19 in the present case, propor-
tionately heavier than is required to estab-
lish the constant friction or uniform rate of
45 the shoe upon which the record vibrations
are to be superposed. When the weight is
thus located, the stylus bar is held against
the surface of the record, but the operation is
still defective because this added weight con-
50 tinues to absorb the vibrations of the stylus
bar, making the latter do more work and con-
sequently dampening the vibrations which
are delivered to the diaphragm from the sty-
lus bar. The problem therefore is to so ap-
55 ply this additional weight which keeps the
stylus against the record surface, that the
full effect of the vibrations of the stylus bar
will be delivered, without dampening, to the
friction shoe and diaphragm. This problem
GO is solved by my invention wherein I apply
the extra weight to the crank arm 5, or to
some other element which bears downward
upon shaft 4, and which is preferably sta-
tionary with respect to said shaft. To more
65 fully explain this method of applying this
extra weight, it will be seen that shaft 4 ro-
tates freely in the bearing 23, at the end of
crank-arm 5, and consequently there is no
molecular. Gontact between the crank-arm
and the shaft, but merely a loose, surface yo
contact. Such a loose or imperfect contact
between these two bodies acts as a bar against
the transmission of high vibrations, so that
when such vibrations occur in the shaft, they
will not be transmitted to the crank-arm and 75
weight. It follows from this that while the
extra weight 22 will serve to hold the stylus
bar against the record, it will not interfere
with or dampen the high vibrations imparted
to the stylus bar by the undulations of the 30
record groove, and the full effect of the latter
will be directed against the friction shoe, and
thence transmitted to the diaphragm. In as
much, however, as the end of shaft 4 with the
weight 19, roll 7 and shoe 8, 8', are given a ^5
constant bias towards the record cylinder,
by the extra weight 22, the said shaft 4 with
all of its parts will bodily follow the point of
the stylus into the depressions of the modula-
tory sound groove, the whole vibratory sys- -,,0
tern, exclusive of the extra weight 22, thus
partaking of the sound vibrations. This, as
before pointed out, prevents the shoe 8'
from breaking contact with the surface of the
roll, when the stylus falls into the depressions j5
of the record groove, permitting only the
weakening of the pressure of the shoe at such
times. The same action also makes the
crests of the undulations of the groove more
effective since the thrusts against the shoe 100
caused thereby begin at once at the bases of
the crests. My improvement therefore elimi-
nates all lost motion between the stylus bar
and the friction wheel, and avoids dampen-
ing of the record vibrations, thereby afford- 105
ing a pure and loud reproduction.
What I claim, is: —
1 . In a talking machine, comprising a sty-
lus and a vibratory system through which
the vibrations of the stylus, are transmitted, no
a weight adapted to cause the stylus to fol-
low the undulations of the record groove in
combination with a vibration barrier inter-
posed between the weight and the vibratory
system. 115
2. In a talking machine, the combination
of a record tablet, a diaphragm, a reproduc-
ing stylus, an amplifying friction system in-
terposed between the stylus and a weight for
holding the stylus against the record surface ] 20
of the tablet, and a vibration barrier inter-
posed between the weight and the vibratory
system.
3. In a talking machine, a reproducing
amplifier comprising a swinging friction roll ] 25
and shoe, a weight applied to the roll to give
a predetermined constant rate of vibration
to the shoe, a stylus bar, an extra weight for
causing the stylus to follow the undulations
of the record groove, and a vibration barrier 130
895,853
interposed between the extra weight and the
vibratory system.
4. In a talking machine, an amplifying de-
vice comprising a swinging shaft carrying a
5 friction roll and shoe, a diaphragm connected
with one end of the shoe, and a stylus bar
connected with the other end thereof, the
latter connection being such that the out-
ward thrusts of the stylus bar will increase the
10 friction between the shoe and the roll, a
weight applied to the shaft to create a con- '
stant friction between the roll and shoe, and
means whereby the roll and shoe will follow
up the movements of the stylus bar.
15 5. In a talking machine, an amplifying de-
vice comprising a swinging shaft carrying a
friction roll and shoe, a diaphragm connected
with one end of the shoe, and a stylus bar
connected with the other end thereof, the
20 latter connection being such that the out-
ward thrusts of the stylus bar will increase
the friction between the shoe and the roll, a
weight applied to the shaft to create a con-
stant friction between the roll and the shoe,
25 and an extra weight or its equivalent adapted
to cause the roll and shoe to follow up the
movements of the stylus bar, without itself
absorbing the vibrations of the stylus.
6. In a talking machine, the combination
30 of a rotary swinging shaft carrying a friction
roll, a friction shoe embracing more than half
of the circumference of said roll, a diaphragm
connected to one end of said shoe, a stylus
bar connected to the other end of said shoe,
and adapted to increase the normal friction C5
of the shoe upon the roll by the outward
movements of the stylus, and means for
causing the friction roll and shoe to follow
the inward movements of the stylus.
7. In a talking machine, an amplifying de- io
vice comprising a friction roll, a friction shoe
bearing thereon, a diaphragm connected
with one end of the shoe, a stylus bar, a link
connected with the other end of the shoe and
receiving motion from the stylus bar, and 45
means for adjusting the angular position of
the link with respect to the shoe, for the pur-
pose set forth.
8. In a talking machine, an amplifier
comprising a friction roll and a friction shoe 50
applied thereto, a diaphragm connected with
one end of the shoe, a stylus bar, a link con-
necting the stylus bar with the other end of
the shoe, and means for adjusting the point
of connection between the stylus bar and the 55
link, for the purpose set forth.
9. In a talking machine, friction means
comprising a roll and shoe, a stylus bar carry-
ing a threaded rod, a nut movable along said
rod, and connection between the nut and co
shoe, for the purpose set forth.
In witness whereof, I subscribe my signa-
ture, in the presence of two witnesses.
JOHN H. J. HAINES.
Witnesses :
Waldo M. Chapin, '\
Mary S. Handy.
No. 895,900.
PATENTED AUG. 11, 1908.
H. SCHRODER.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLIOATIOH FILED 0(OT. 17, 1907.
"'j"""""' '*»'»»»»"{»'» »»"»»»'»"»»'V
^3^ ? ^sSSSSSSSsJLs^SSSSSSsA
^\\\<\S\\\\&
dnv€*\toi
lWw<^W^^
9fcWk^
BUotneyS
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HERMANN SCHRODER, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 895,900.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 11, 1908.
Application filed October 17, 1907. Serial No. 397,923.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Hermann Schroder,
subject of the Emperor of Germany, residing
at New York, in the county of New York and
5 State of New York, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Phono-
graphs, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
This invention comprehends certain new
10 and useful improvements in phonographs
and relates particularly to a casing or sound
amplifying means which aims to enhance
the character of the sound, and the inven-
tion consists in certain constructions and
15 arrangements of the parts that I shall here-
inafter fully describe and claim.
For a full understanding of the invention,
reference is to be had to the following de-
scription and accompanying drawings, in
20 which:
Figure 1 is a longitudinal sectional view of
a phonograph embodying the improvements
of my invention; Fig. 2 is a horizontal sec-
tional view thereof; and, Fig. 3 is a detail
25 sectional view illustrating a deflector that is
employed.
Corresponding and like parts are referred
to in the following description and indicated
in all the views of the drawings by the same
30 reference characters.
The cabinet of my improved phonograph
comprises a bottom 1, a back 2, two sides 3,
a front 4; and a lid or cover 5 which may be
hinged to swing upwardly at its front end,
35 as shown. This cabinet may be made of
any desired wood or other material and is
the shell in which my improved sound am-
plifying means are fitted.
The sound amplifying means of my inven-
40 tion is preferably constructed entirely of
rubber, either hard or soft, preferably the
former. Except its top, it is formed of one
casting, preferably, and embodies sides 7
that extend parallel throughout the major
45 portion of their length, a bottom plate 6,
webs 8 between the two sides and diverging
forwardly so as to form with the sides out-
wardly flared sound passages, said webs
being connected together at their front ends
50 by a cross web 9, and curved walls 10 which
form divergent branches from the lower end
of a laterally elongated or elliptical opening
11 at the rear of the casing, a deflector 12
as best seen in Fig. 3, being mounted in said
55 opening, so as to deflect the sound laterally
and forwardly through the branches 10 to
the outwardly flared sound passages with
which the ends of the branches 10 communi-
cate, as best seen in Fig. 2. The flared sound
passages formed by the webs 8 and side walls go
of the all-rubber casting, communicate at
their front ends, it being noted that* the web
9 is set back somewhat from the front of the
cabinet. The front, is, as shown, formed
with a laterally elongated opening register- 65
ing with the front ends of the said passages
to provide for the free issuance of the sound.
The base 13 of the taper arm extends up-
wardly from the opening 11 and above the
upper end of said base portion is a spider 14 70
having a downwardly projecting pivot or
spindle 15 mounted in a bearing on the lower
arm of a bracket 17 screwed or otherwise se-
cured to the back 2 of the cabinet. The base
portion 13 of the taper arm is formed with an 75
opening 16 for the passage of the lower arm
of said bracket. The superposed section of
the taper arm carries a spider 14 or is sup-
ported thereby, and an elbow 19 is secured to
the upper end of the section 18, said elbow 80
being formed with a boss having a socket
which receives the spindle 21 projecting
downwardly from the upper arm of the
bracket 17. These two pivot points are in
vertical alinement, as shown, and provide 85
for the horizontal swinging movement of the
taper arm 20. This arm is mounted to move
up and down in the end of the elbow 19, as
clearly indicated in Fig. 1.
The rubber casting constituting the sound 90
amplifying means is provided with a prefer-
ably rubber lid 6a, as seen in Fig. 1, and above
this lid is a wooden or other platform 22 de-
signed to support the turn-table for the rec-
ord and the motor casing 22 a which is sus- 95
pended therefrom and occupies the open
space provided for it at the middle of the
rubber casting that forms the sound ampli-
fying means, that is, in the space between
the webs 8 and 9 and the front wall of the 100
branches 10. This platform 22 is supported
at its rear corners on the corner post 23 of
the outside casing or cabinet. It is also sup-
ported at its front corners on corresponding
posts 23 a, and the latter are rabbeted to re- 105
ceive the ends of the upper and lower cross
bars 24. Each one of these cross bars has a
number of tuning pegs secured to it, and
sympathetic strings 25 in the nature of
violin or similar strings are connected to the HO
pegs and extend rearwardly or longitudi-
nally through the respective flared sound
<s>
895,900
passages, the rear ends of the strings being
secured on similar pegs mounted in cross-
bars 26 held in the front ends of the branches
10. It is to be noted that there are two
g cross-bars 24, upper and lower, and that the
strings alternately extend from the cross-
bars 26 to the upper and lower cross-bars 24.
The opening in the front 4 of the cabinet is
bounded by a plate 27 which may have a
10 flange extending into the opening so as to
give a neat appearance to the front of the
cabinet.
From the foregoing description in connec-
tion with the accompanying drawings, it will
15 be seen that I have provided a casing or cabi-
net for a phonograph, which is very compact,
the motor casing 22 a being suspended in the
open space betweem the two divergent and
flared outlet passages for the sound, instead
20 of being held in a compartment entirely
above the sound amplifying means, as is
common with this type of phonograph, and
that the arrangement of sympathetic strings,
together with the material out of which the
25 entire sound amplifying means is construct-
ed, will result in the reproduction of the
sound with a resonant and even quality of
tone, without the rasping or harsh effects
which are so objectionable.
30 It is to be understood that with my inven-
tion, the taper arm tapers continuously from
the sound box to the outlet opening in the
front 4 of the cabinet, and that the taper
arm 20 itself, its elbow 19 and portions 18
35 and 13 are all of rubber, as are the parts 6,
6a, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 12.
Having thus described the invention, what
is claimed as new is:
1. A talking machine embodying a taper
40 arm, sound amplifying means comprising a
cabinet, a casting mounted in said cabinet
and consisting of sides, inner webs 8 spaced
from said sides and converging forwardly,
whereby to form two horizontally disposed
45 outlet passages for the sound, curved walls
forming branch passages communicating
with the rear ends of said flared outlet pas-
sages, and a connection between said branch
passages and the taper arm.
50 2. A talking machine embodying a taper
arm, sound amplifying means comprising a
cabinet, a casting of rubber mounted in said
cabinet and consisting of sides, inner webs 8
spaced from said sides and converging for-
55 wardly, whereby to form two horizontally
disposed outlet passages for the sound,
curved walls forming branch passages com-
municating with the rear ends of said flared
outlet passages, a connection between said
60 branch passages and. the taper arm, and a
vertically disposed deflector mounted in said
branch passages.
3. A talking machine embodying a taper
arm, a cabinet, a casing adapted to fit within
G5 the cabinet and consisting of a bottom por-
tion, two sides, forwardly diverging webs
spaced from the respective sides, curved
walls connected at their ends to the sides and
rear ends of the webs, respectively, the outer
edge of said walls, sides and webs sloping or 70
inclined towards the front, a top or lid
adapted to fit down upon the said walls,
webs, and sides and formed with an opening
designed to provide a middle space between
the said walls and webs for the location of 75
a motor casing, and a connection between
said walls at the rear of the cabinet and the.
taper arm.
4. A talking machine embodying a taper
arm, a cabinet, a casing adapted to fit within 80
the cabinet and formed with two vertical
sides, webs spaced from the sides, curved
walls connected at their ends to the rear ends
of the sides and webs, respectively, the space
between the front of said curved walls and 85
the two webs affording accommodation for
the motor casing of the phonograph, and a
connection between said curved walls and
the taper arm.
5. A talking machine embodying a taper 90
arm, a cabinet, a casing fitting within the
cabinet and provided with a middle space
and two outlet passages for the sound on
opposite sides of said space, a connection
between said casing and the taper arm, the 95
said middle space providing for the accom-
modation of a motor casing, corner posts
secured in the cabinet, a platform supported
on said posts, a motor casing suspended from
said platform and mounted in the middle 100
space of the first named casing, the corner
posts at the front of the cabinet being formed
with rabbets, upper and lower cross-bars
having their ends fitted in the rabbets of the
corner posts, the front of the cabinet being 105
formed with an opening across which said
bars extend, a single cross-bar located in
each of the said outlet passages for the sound
and at the rear ends thereof, and sympa-
thetic strings secured to the last named cross- no
bars at one end and alternately to the upper
and lower cross-bars at their front ends.
6. A talking machine embodying a taper
arm, a cabinet, sound amplifying means
mounted in said cabinet and connected at 115
the rear end of the cabinet to the taper arm
and divided and extending forwardly from
the taper arm to provide divergent passages,
said passages merging together at the front '
of the cabinet and the cabinet being formed 120
with an opening at said point, and two series
of sympathetic strings, the respective series
extending from the front opening in the cabi-
net through the front portions of said pas-
sages, and supports for said strings. 125
7. A talking machine embodying a taper
arm, a cabinet, sound amplifying means
mounted in said cabinet and connected at
the rear end of the cabinet to the taper arm
and divided and extending forwardly from 130
895,900
the taper arm to provide divergent passages,
said passages merging together at the front
of the cabinet and the cabinet being formed
with an opening at said point, and two series
5 of sympathetic strings, the respective series
extending from the front opening in the
cabinet through the front portions of said
passages, the strings of each series extending
alternately in downwardly inclined and up-
10 wardly inclined directions, and supports for
said strings.
8. A talking machine embodying a taper
arm, a cabinet, a sound amplifying means
mounted in said cabinet, said sound ampli-
1 5 fying means being connected at the rear end
of the cabinet to the taper arm and being
provided with passages extending for wardly
from the taper arm and spaced from each
other to provide a middle space for the ac-
commodation of a motor casing within the 20
cabinet, the cabinet being formed at its front
with an opening with which the forward ends
of said passages communicate.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
HERMANN SCHRODER, [l. s.]
Witnesses :
Frederick S. Stitt,
W. N. Woodson.
No. 896,006.
PATENTED AUG. 11, 1908.
E. D. GLEASON.
SOUND BOX.
APPLIOATIOH TILED NOV. 14, 1907.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
-&€&.&
*3fL
<3
so
-" INVENTOR
WITNESSES
0 s) s?
BY
/^tZT^S/
ATTORNEY
No. 896,006.
PATENTED AUG. 11, 1908
E. D. GLEASON.
SOUND BOX.
APPLICATION PILED NOV. 14, 1907.
(^ 3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
■
^J^t^.S
j&O
jrj-
vA?
INVENTOR
WITNESSES
W
by
/<M&^
ATTORNEY
No. 896,006.
E. D. GLEASON.
SOUND BOX.
PATENTED AUG. 11, 1908.
APPLICATION PILED NOV. 14, 1907.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
J^.&
J3
GJ
<5£\
JXff.JO.
GO.
<Sj?-
WITNESSES
<%%/i/ai2u*0M/:
INVENTOR
&&/42txZ/7,G/ea<xort
BY
/ <Mhu
ATTORNEY
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EDWARD D. GLEASON, OF MOORES, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE
COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF. NEW JERSEY.
SOUND-BOX.
No. 896,006.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 11, 1908.
Application filed November 14, 1907. Serial No. 402,057.
To all wlwm it may concern:
Be it known that I, Edward D. Gleason,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Moores, Delaware county, and State of
5 Pennsylvania, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Sound-Boxes,
of which the following is a full, clear, and
complete disclosure.
The main objects of this invention are to
10 simplify the construction of the sound box
and to provide an improved stylus bar and
stylus bar mounting.
Other objects will be set forth as the inven-
tion is further explained.
15 In the acccompanying drawings: Figure 1
is a front elevation of a sound box con-
structed in accordance with this invention;
Fig. 2 a longitudinal section on line 2 — 2 of
Fig. 1 ; Fig. 3 a front elevation of a modified
20 form of this invention; Fig. 4 a longitudinal
section on line 4 — 4 of Fig. 3 ; Fig. 5 a front
elevation of a second modification of this in-
vention; Fig. 6 a longitudinal section on line
6 — 6 of Fig. 5; Fig. 7 a front elevation of a
25 third modification of this invention; Fig. 8
a longitudinal section on line 8 — 8 of Fig. 7 ;
Fig. 9 a front elevation of a fourth modifica-
tion of this invention; and Fig. 10 is a longi-
tudinal central section of Fig. 9.
30 Referring to the drawings, particularly to
Figs. 1 and 2, the device comprises a casing 1
having a cylindrical bore 2 provided near the
front edge of the casing with a V shaped
groove 3. The diaphragm 4 is held between
35 two rubber gaskets 5 and 6, the outer one of
which rests within the said groove 3, and the
inner one of which is of smaller diameter
than the outer one and rests in the angle be-
tween the bore of the box and the rear wall
40 thereof.
The stylus bar 7 extends diametrically
across the front of the box, one end of the bar
8 projecting outside of the periphery of the
casing, and being provided with the usual
45 socket 9 for holding the stylus needle 10, the
needle being held in place by the screw 11.
The stylus bar is supported upon knife edges
12 projecting upon opposite sides of the bar
and integral therewith, and extending in a
50 direction parallel to the diaphragm and per-
pendicular the longitudinal axis of the bar.
These knife edges rest within V shaped
grooves 13 in the inner surface of spaced lugs
14, which extend outwardly from the casing
upon each side of the bar, the lugs being 55
either integral with the casing or formed of a
separate piece or pieces secured to the casing.
The bar tapers inwardly from its mounting
to a point opposite the central portion of the
diaphragm from whence it gradually in- 60
creases in diameter toward its opposite end,
which terminates adjacent the inner surface
of a lug 15 projecting outwardly from the
casing, the lug 15 being either integral with
the casing or formed of a separate piece se- 65
cured thereto. A screw 16 having a conical
point 17 is threaded through the lug 15, and
engages a conical socket in the end of the bar
to hold the bar upon its mounting. The
reduced central portion of the bar is phonet- 70
icaUy connected to the diaphragm by means
of a rod 18.
With this construction in mind, it is evi-
dent that when the stylus needle is put into
operative engagement with the sound record 75
that the stylus bar will be flexed at its cen-
tral weakened portion to permit the bar to
oscillate between the knife edge bearing
upon one side of the box, and the conical
screw on the opposite side of the box, thus 80
causing the diaphragm to vibrate in accord-
ance with the sound record. It is also ob-
vious that this form of sound box may be
used for recording as well as for reproducing
sounds. By this construction, a pressure 85
may be put upon the stylus bar longitudi-
nally to tension it, to prevent its too free
vibration and to keep it in engagement with
the sound record. Furthermore the par-
ticular form of casing used in this box is in 90
a single piece, which may be cheaply con-
structed and which permits of the easy in-
sertion or removal of the diaphragm and its
supporting gaskets.
In Figs. 3 and 4 I have shown the first 95
modification of this invention. This form
is like the preceding, except that the stylus
bar 19 is pivoted between screws 20 having
conical hubs fitting in corresponding sockets
in the sides of the bar, the screws 20 being 100
threaded into lugs 21 similar to those already
described. Upon the opposite side of the
casing the bar terminates in a cylindrical
end 22, which passes through a correspond-
Q
896,006
ing aperture in the lug 23 rigid with the
sound box casing 24, as heretofore described,
this end of the bar being held in fixed posi-
tion by means of the screw 25, which is
5 threaded through the outer side of the said
lug. Furthermore, instead of being -weak-
ened centrally, the bar is weakened adjacent
its end at 26 just within the sound box cas-
ing, and from this point an arm or branch 27
10 of the bar extends inwardly in a radial direc-
tion, terminating in an end 28 curved to
meet the central portion of the diaphragm
29, to which it is phonetically connected.
By this construction, the action of the stylus
15 is similar to the combination of two levers,
in which the power is applied to the short
arm of one lever, and is transmitted from the
long arm of the lever to act upon the short
arm of the second lever to produce an in-
20 creased amount of motion at the terminus
of the long arm of the second lever. Thus
any movement of the stylus needle 30, which
is secured as usual to the free end of the
st}dus bar, would result in an amplified
25 movement of the diaphragm; and in repro-
ducing or in recording sounds, the diaphragm
would have a much greater leverage upon
the stylus needle than has heretofore been
provided in sound boxes of this character.
30 In the second modification of this inven-
tion, which is shown in Figs. 5 and 6, the
casing 31 is provided with a cylindrical bore
32 having three V shaped grooves 33, 34 and
35 respectively, the inner of which 34 and 35
35 are provided for the reception of the gaskets
36 and 37 to hold the diaphragm 38 in posi-
tion, and the outer groove 33, which is adja-
cent the front edge of the casing, is provided
to form a seat for the knife edge 39 which
40 supports the stylus bar 40, the knife edge 39
being upon a projection 41 integral with and
in alinement with the central portion of the
bar, which extends diametrically across the
front of the box and is secured at its end op-
45 posite the knife edge in a recess 42 in the
sound box casing by means of a screw 43,
which is threaded into a lug 44 upon the cas-
ing. The central portion of the bar is weak-
ened by lateral recesses at a point opposite
50 the center of the diaphragm and is phonetic-
ally connected to the diaphragm by means
of a rod 45. The portion of the bar adjacent
the knife edge is offset and projects beyond
the periphery of the casing, and is provided
55 with the usual socket carrying a stylus needle
46. The operation of this box is similar to
those already described.
In the fourth modification of this inven-
tion, which is shown in Figs. 7 and 8, the
60 stylus bar 47 is substantially rectangular in
shape and oblong in cross section, and is
weakened centrally by means of a transverse
rectangular groove 48 in the front thereof, the
bar being pivoted between the lugs 49 upon
65 the screws 50 adjacent its free end, which car-
ries the stylus point 51, and being fixed at its
opposite end 52 to the front of the casing by
means of a screw 53 extending into a lug 54
which is secured to the casing by means of
the screw 55. The operation of this box is 70
similar to that of those already described.
In the fifth modification of this invention,
which is shown in Figs. 9 and 10, the stylus
56 is mounted upon the knife edges in the
manner already described and shown in 75
Figs. 1 and 2. The inner end of the bar ter-
minates in a reduced threaded end 57 carrying
a knurled nut 58 and a hollow cap 59 resting
loosely over the threaded end projecting
through the nut, the inner end of the cap en- 30
gaging against the outer surface of the
knurled nut. The upper end of the cap is
provided with a slot 60 through which passes
a tie-rod 61, the ends of the tie-rod being se-
cured upon the opposite sides of the stylus bar 85
to the casing by means of the pins 62, the ends
of the tie-rod being threaded obliquely with
respect to the stylus bar. The portion of the
stylus bar opposite the center of the dia-
phragm is phonetically connected to the dia- 90
phragm by means of the rod 63. By this
construction the stylus bar is held upon its
mounting by means of the tie-rod 61, and
more or less pressure may be applied longi-
tudinally of the rod by means of the knurled 95
nut to hold the bar upon its mounting. Af-
ter the bar has been adjusted upon its mount-
ing, its operation is similar to that already
described.
Although I have shown only a few of the 100
forms in which this invention may be con-
structed, I do not limit myself to any par-
ticular form, as other modifications might be
made in the embodiment of this invention
and in the details of its construction within 105
the scope of the appended claims, without
departing from the spirit of this invention or
sacrificing any of the advantages thereof.
Having thus fully described my invention,
what I claim and desire to protect by Letters no
Patent of the United States is:
1 . In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a stylus bar, a mounting for said bar
facing inwardly of said casing, and means
acting longitudinally of said bar to hold the 115
same upon its mounting.
2. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing of a diaphragm, a stylus bar, means
for phonetically connecting said bar interme-
diate of its ends to said diaphragm, a mount- 120
ing for said bar adjacent one end thereof, and
means secured to said casing and engaging
rigidly against the opposite end of said bar to
restrain said bar upon its mounting.
3. In a sound box, the combination with 125
the casing of a diaphragm, a stylus bar,
means for phonetically connecting said bar
intermediate of its end to said diaphragm, a
mounting for said bar facing inwardly with
respect to said casing, and means acting upon 130
896,006
40
said bar at one end thereof to hold said bar
upon its mounting, said bar being weakened
at a point intermediate of its ends.
4. In a sound box, the combination with a
'5 casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar, means
for phonetically connecting said bar interme-
diate of its ends to said diaphragm, a knife
edge upon which said bar is mounted adja-
cent one end preventing said end from mov-
10 ing longitudinally outwardly, and means at
the opposite end of said bar to restrain the
movement of said bar upon its mounting.
5. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar, means
15 for phonetically connecting said bar interme-
diate of its ends to said diaphragm, a knife
edge upon which said bar is mounted at one
end preventing said end from moving longi-
tudinally outwardly, and means at the oppo-
20 site end, and held in position by said casing,
to restrain the movement of said bar upon
its mounting.
6. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar, means
25 phonetically connecting said bar intermedi-
ate of its ends to said diaphragm, a knife edge
upon which said bar is mounted, and a pin
threaded into said casing and engaging the
end of said bar to hold said bar upon its
30 mounting.
7. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a stylus bar pivoted adjacent one
end to one side of said casing and terminat-
ing at its opposite end adjacent the opposite
35 side of said casing, and means passing
through said casing and engaging the end of
said bar to restrain the same upon its mount-
8. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a flexible stylus bar pivoted to one
side of said casing and terminating adjacent
the opposite side thereof, and means secured
to said opposite side and engaging rigidly
against said bar to restrain the movement
45 thereof.
9. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm, a flexible stylus bar
pivoted to one side of said casing and termi-
nating adjacent the opposite side thereof,
50 means secured to said opposite side and rig-
idly engaging said bar to restrain the move-
ment thereof, and means phonetically con-
necting said bar and said diaphragm.
10. In a sound box, the combination with
55 a casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar pivoted
to one side of said casing and terminating ad-
jacent the opposite side thereof, means se-
cured to said opposite side and rigidly engag-
ing said bar to restrain the movement there-
60 of, said bar having a weakened portion, and
means phonetically connecting the weakened
portion of said bar to said diaphragm.
11. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar, an inwardly facing
65 bearing for said bar upon one side of said cas-
85
ing, and means secured to said casing and
rigidly acting upon the bar adjacent the
other side of said casing to press the bar upon
its bearing.
12. In a sound box, the combination with 70
a casing, of a stylus bar, an inwardly facing
bearing for said bar upon one side of said cas-
ing, said bar extending inwardly and out-
wardly from said bearing and means secured
to said casing and rigidly acting upon the in- 75
ner end of said bar to press said bar upon said
bearing.
13. In a sound box the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar mounted to oscillate
upon an axis fixed with respect to said cas- so
ing, and means secured to said casing and
rigidly engaging said bar at a point spaced
from said axis, and acting in a direction
toward the axis, to restrain the movement of
said bar.
14. In a sound box the combination with
a casing, of a flexible stylus bar mounted to
oscillate upon an axis fixed with respect to
said casing, and means secured to said casing
and rigidly engaging said bar at a point 90
spaced from said axis, and acting in a direc-
tion toward the axis, to restrain the move-
ment of said bar.
15. In a sound box the combination with
a casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar mount- 95
ed to oscillate upon an axis fixed with respect
to said casing, means secured to said casing
and rigidly engaging said bar at a point
spaced from said axis to restrain the move-
ment of said bar, and means phonetically 100
connecting said bar to said diaphragm be-
tween said axis and acting toward the axis
and said point.
16. In a sound box the combination with
a casing, of a diaphragm, a flexible stylus bar 105
mounted to oscillate upon an axis fixed with
respect to said casing, means secured to said
casing and rigidly engaging said bar at a
point spaced from said axis and acting
toward the axis to restrain the movement of no
said bar, and means phonetically connecting
said bar to said diaphragm between said axis
and said point.
17. In a sound box the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar, a mounting therefor, 115
and means independent of said mounting se-
cured to said casing and rigidly engaging said
bar and acting toward said mounting to hold
said bar upon its mounting.
18. In a sound box the combination with 120
a casing, of a stylus bar, a mounting therefor,
and means independent of said mounting se-
cured to said casing and rigidly engaging said
bar and acting toward said mounting to re-
strain the oscillation of said bar. 125
19. In a sound box the combination with
a casing, of a flexible stylus bar, a mounting
therefor, and means independent of said
mounting secured to said casing and rigidly
engaging said bar and acting toward said 130
896,006
mounting to restrain the oscillation of said
bar.
20. In a sound box the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar, a mounting for said
bar facing inwardly of said casing, and means
tending to force said bar outwardly from said
casing to hold said bar upon its mounting.
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand
this 13th day of November A. D., 1907.
EDWARD D. GLEASON.
Witnesses :
A. I. Gardner,
Alexander Park.
No. 896,007.
^t^.J.
PATENTED AUG. 11, 1908.
E. D. GLEASON.
SOUND BOX FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED NOV. 14, 1907.
-J%#.3.
WITNESSES
(fftfj/ada&itcs
INVENTOR
BY
ATTORNEY
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EDWARD D. GLEASON, OFMOORES, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE
COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
SOUND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 896,007.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 11, 1908.
Application filed November 14, 1907. Serial No. 402,058.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Edward D. Gleason,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Moores, Delaware county, Pennsylvania,
g have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Sound -Boxes for Talking-
Machines, of which the following is a full,
clear, and complete disclosure.
This invention relates to improvements in
10 sound boxes for talking machines, and has
for its main object to provide a box having
an improved stylus mounting whereby a
weight may be used to counterbalance the
stylus.
15 Other objects will appear in the following
description.
The invention consists in the novel con-
struction, combination and arrangement of
parts hereinafter set forth and particularly
20 pointed out in the claims and illustrated in
the accompanying drawings, in which
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a sound box
constructed in accordance with this inven-
tion; Fig. 2 a longitudinal section of the
25 same on line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1 ; Fig. 3 a front
elevation of a modified form of this inven-
tion and Fig. 4 a longitudinal section on line
4—4 of Fig. 3.
Referring to the drawings, my improved
30 sound box comprises the usual casing 1, in
the bore of which is supported the usual dia-
phragm 2, which is held in place by means of
gaskets 3, 4, the bore of the sound box being
provided adjacent its outer edge with a V-
35 shaped annular groove 5, to receive the outer
gasket 3, which is sprung into place, the in-
ner gasket 4 resting between the inner cy-
lindrical wall and the rear wall of the box and
holding the diaphragm against the outer
40 gasket.
The stylus bar has, as is usual, a cylin-
drical lower end 6, provided with a longitu-
dinal socket 7 for the reception of the stylus
needle 8, which is held in place by the screw 9.
45 The upper part 10 of the stylus bar is flattened
in a direction longitudinally of the box and
tapered toward the axis of the box where it is
divided into two branches, one of which, 1 1 ,
extends axially of the box and is adapted to
50 form the connection between the stylus bar
and the diaphragm, being phonetically con-
nected at its outer end to the diaphragm by
wax 12 or any other well-known means, and
the other branch 13 extends in the same di-
55 rection as the main portion of the bar, up-
wardly, and projects beyond the outer pe-
riphery of the sound box casing. This por-
tion of the bar is preferably of uniform di-
ameter, and carries a weight 14, which is ad-
justably mounted to be shd longitudinally of eo
the bar, and held in any fixed position by
means of the set screw 15. The lower por-
tion of the stylus bar is pivoted between the
two parallel lugs 16 extending downwardly
from the sound box casing, the lower flat- 65
tened portion of the stylus bar being pro-
vided with a lateral extension 17 carrying
trunnions 18, the ends of which lie between
the said lugs 16 upon the sound box casing,
and being pivotally connected thereto by 70
means of set screws 19 having conical inner
ends which rest in suitable sockets in the ends
of the trunnions. The lugs upon the sound
box casing and the pivots are preferably ar-
ranged , as illustrated, to bring the axis of oscil- 7 5
lation of the stylus bar substantially in the
plane of the diaphragm, and the stylus is thus
free to vibrate in a plane perpendicular to the
diaphragm, the motion of the inner end of the
connecting arm 11 being also substantially 80
perpendicular to the plane of the diaphragm.
The function of the movable weight 14
upon the stylus bar is similar to that of a fly
wheel upon an engine, in that it takes up the
energy transmitted by the movement of the 85
stylus at the beginning of the movement of
the stylus in one direction, giving out the
energy again at the end of the movement of
the stylus to continue the motion of the up-
per end of the stylus bar in its original direc- 90
tion, thus increasing the amplitude of vibra-
tion of the diaphragm. A further function
of the weight is to keep the stylus needle in
close contact with the surface of the record
groove by which it is being moved during its 95
motion in either direction.
In Figs. 3 and 4 I have illustrated a modi-
fied form of this invention, in which the up-
wardly extending arm of the stylus bar shown
in Figs. 1 and 2 is omitted, and an arm 20, 100
for a similar purpose, is extended from the
lower portion of the stylus bar in a direction
substantially parallel to the axis of the sound
box, the weight 21 in this case being slidably
mounted upon the arm 20, and fixed in any 105
desired position by the set screw 22, to act
upon the stylus, as already explained. This
arm 20 is pivoted between lugs 23, extending
downwardly from the sound box casing by
means of the set screws 24 having conical 110
896,007
points fitting into corresponding sockets of
the said arm 20. The axis of oscillation of
the stylus bar in this modified form is pref-
erably arranged in the plane of the dia-
5 phragm to permit the stylus bar to vibrate
in a plane perpendicular to the diaphragm
as heretofore explained for the previous form
of this invention. The omission of the up-
wardly extending arm of the stylus bar ren-
10 ders it unnecessary to have a right-angled
connecting arm between the stylus bar and
the diaphragm, the upper end of the stylus
bar being curved inwardly and phonetically
connected to the diaphragm at 25, as usual.
15 It is obvious that this style of sound box
may be used in connection with either rec-
ords having vertically undulating grooves or
with records having laterally undulating
grooves, and it is furthermore obvious that
20 many changes might be made in the details
of construction of this box beyond what I
have shown and described, within the scope
of the appended claims, without departing
from the spirit of this invention, or sacrific-
25 ing any of the advantages thereof.
Having thus fully described my invention,
what I claim and desire to secure by Letters
Patent of the United States is :
1. In a sound box, the combination with a
30 diaphragm of a stylus bar, an arm phonetic-
ally connected at one end to said diaphragm
and at its other end to said bar, an arm form-
ing part of said bar extending outwardly
from the axis of said box, and a weight
35 slidably connected to the outer end of said
arm.
2. In a sound box, the combination with a
diaphragm of a stylus bar, an arm phonetic-
ally connected at one end to said diaphragm
40 and at its other end to said bar, an arm form-
ing part of said bar extending outwardly
from the axis of said box, and means con-
nected to the outer end of said arm to coun-
terbalance said stylus bar.
45 3. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar pivotally
connected to said casing and phonetically
connected to said diaphragm and a weight
mounted upon said bar to counter balance
50 the same.
4. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar pivoted
to said casing and phonetically connected to
said diaphragm, an arm extending from said
55 bar and integral therewith and a weight upon
said arm.
5. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar pivoted
to said casing and phonetically connected to
said diaphragm, an arm extending from said 60
bar and integral therewith and a weight ad-
justably mounted upon said arm.
6. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar pivoted
to said casing and phonetically connected to 65
said diaphragm, an arm extending from said
bar and integral therewith and a weight slid-
ably mounted upon said arm.
7. In a sound dox, the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar pivoted 70
adjacent one end to said casing, and phonet-
ically connected axially of said casing to said
diaphragm, an arm integral with said bar
extending outwardly from the axis of said
casing, and a weight upon said arm to coun- 75
ter balance said stylus bar.
8. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar pivoted
adjacent one end to said casing, and phonet-
ically connected axially of said casing to said 80
diaphragm, an arm integral with said bar
extending outwardly from the axis of said
casing, and a weight adjustably mounted
upon said arm to counter balance said stylus
bar. 85
9. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a stylus bar having a rearward ex-
tension provided with oppositely extending
trunnions having sockets in the ends thereof,
lugs upon said casing projecting over the 90
ends of said trunnions, and conical bearings
carried by said lugs and engaging in said
sockets to support said bar.
10. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar mounted to oscillate 95
upon said casing, and a weight mounted
upon said bar to counterbalance the same.
11. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a rigid stylus bar mounted to os-
cillate upon said casing, and a weight mount- 100
ed upon said bar to counter-balance the
same.
12. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar mount-
ed to oscillate upon said casing and phonet- 105
ically connected to said diaphragm, and a
weight mounted upon said bar to counter-
balance the same.
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my
hand this 13th day of November, A. D.,1907. no
EDWARD D. GLEASON.
Witnesses :
A. J. Gardner,
Alexander Park.
No. 896,008.
PATENTED AUG. 11, 1908.
E. D. GLEASON.
SOUND BOX.
APPLICATION FILED NOV. 14, 1907.
2 SHEETS— SHEET 1.
JZt$.&
_-&&&
J?tq. J.
INVENTOR
WITNESSES
BY
£cfa/anf&.6'/ea&ost .
/rfVfto fa
ATTORNEY
V
No. 896,008.
PATENTED AUG. 11, 1908.
" E. D. 6LEAS0N.
SOUND BOX.
APPLICATION FILED NOV. 14, 1907.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
JZ&.6.
■3&
4,1
<&o
&J
J?c?. 7.
^<3
WITNESSES
Wj&f&dZZazso:
J?t?. <3.
&s
INVENTOR
j&fa/4nZ27.(?/ea5o/t, .
BY
/<Mu. mA<
ATTORNEY
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EDWARD D. GLEASON, OF MOORES, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE
COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
SOUND-BOX.
No. 896,008.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 11, 1908.
Application filed November 14, 1907. Serial No. 402,059.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Edward D. Gleason,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Moores, Delaware county, and State of
5 Pennsylvania, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Sound-Boxes,
of which the following is a full, clear, and com-
plete disclosure.
The main object of this invention is to pro-
10 vide an improved stylus and mounting.
Other objects will appear in the following
description :
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1 is
a front elevation of a sound box constructed
15 in accordance with this invention; Fig. 2 a
longitudinal section, and Fig. 3 a top plan
view of the same partly in section; Figs. 4
and 5 are a front elevation and a longitudi-
nal section respectively of modified forms of
20 this invention; and Figs. 6, 7, and 8 are a
front elevation, a longitudinal section and a
top plan view respectively of a further modi-
fication in the form of this invention.
Referring to the drawings, particularly to
25 Figs. 1, 2 and 3, the device comprises a cylin-
drical casing 1 having a cylindrical bore 2
provided with a V shaped groove 3 adjacent
the front of the casing. The diaphragm 4 is
held in place between the gaskets 5 and 6, the
30 outer one 5 of which rests in the said V
shaped groove, and the inner one rests in the
angle between the bore of the casing and the
rear wall thereof. The stylus bar 7 is pro-
vided with an arm 8 extending rearwardly
35 and laterally from the bar, the outer end of
the arm being pivoted to a downwardly ex-
tending lug 9 upon the side of the sound box
casing by means of the screw 10 which passes
loosely through the arm and is threaded into
40 the lug. The portion of the arm extending
rearwardly from the stylus rests slidably
against a flattened portion 11 of the casing.
The upper end 1 2 or the stylus bar is turned
toward, and phonetically connected as usual
45 to the diaphragm, and a web or brace 13 is
arranged upon the inner side of the bar be-
tween the upper curved portion and the ad-
joining vertical portion of the bar, to prevent
the bar from yielding to bending stresses.
50 For the purpose of tensioning the bar to
prevent a too free vibration thereof, a plate
spring 14 is provided having its inner end
rigidly secured by means of the screw 15 to
the inner end of the said lug 9 of the sound
55 box casing, the outer end of the spring rest-
ing against the outer end of the swinging arm
8 supporting the stylus bar, whereby the
spring acts to slightly resist the vibration of
the stylus.
The free end of the stylus bar 16 is pro- 60
vided with the usual socket, and the stylus
needle 17 fitting in said socket. For the
purpose of holding the needle in position in
its socket, a plunger 18 is provided fitting
into a socket 19, extending into a boss 20 65
upon the side of the stylus bar, said socket
communicating at its inner end with the
socket which holds the stylus needle. The
inner end of the plunger 18 is pressed against
the upper end of the needle oy means of a 70
spiral spring 21, one end of which is connect-
ed to the outer end of the plunger, and is ex-
tended to form a handle 22, and the other
end of which is rigidly connected to the
stylus bar by means of a screw 23. 75
In this form of my invention, it is obvious
that the stylus bar is mounted to swing as a
whole in a circular path into and out of aline-
ment with an axial plane of the sound box,
but for the short distance which the stylus 80
bar moves the direction of motion ap-
proaches closely a straight line perpendicu-
lar to the diaphragm.
In Figs. 4 and 5 are shown a modification
of this invention, in which the sound box cas- 85
ing 24 is provided with a lug 25 on the rear
side thereof, through which the stylus bar is
pivoted upon an axis at right angles to the
axis of the sound box by means of a screw
26, the stylus bar 27 being provided with a 90
rearward extension 28 substantially parallel
to the axis of the box, and resting slidably
against a flattened portion 29 of the casing,
and having at its inner end a hub 30, which
is rotatably mounted upon the said screw 26 95
to form a swinging support for the stylus bar.
The inner end of the stylus bar is turned to.-
ward the diaphragm as usual, but is not con-
nected to the diaphragm, the inner extremity
of the bar being provided with a plate 31, 100
extending laterally upon opposite sides of the
bar, the inner surface of the plate being sub-
stantially flat and resting against the outer
face of the diaphragm 32. The stylus bar
is provided with the usual needle 33, held by 1 05
the set screw 34, but if preferred, a construc-
tion similar to that shown in Figs. 1, 2 and 3
may be used to hold the needle in place.
It is obvious that in this modified form of
the invention, when the stylus bar is vi- 110
2
896,008
brated by a sound record, the flattened plate
at the upper end of the stylus bar will swing
in a circular direction in a plane at right an-
gles to the diaphragm, and the ends of the
5 pi ate will alternately move toward and away
from the diaphragm, causing the diaphragm
to vibrate accordingly.
A second modification of this invention is
shown in Figs. 6, 7 and 8. In this form the
10 periphery of the sound box casing is pro-
vided with an outwardly extending lug 35 to
the front face of which is pivoted the stylus
bar 36 by means of a screw 37 which passes
loosely through the stylus bar, and is thread-
is ed into the said lug. The screw for pivoting
the bar is substantially perpendicular to the
diaphragm, so that the stylus is thus mount-
ed to swing in a plane substantially parallel
to the diaphragm. The inner end 38 of the
20 stylus bar is flattened in a direction substan-
tially parallel to the diaphragm and tapered
from the pivoted portion of the bar inwardly,
and its extremity is pointed and turned to-
wards the diaphragm, but is not connected
25 to the diaphragm as is usually the case, but
instead rests within the substantially V
shaped groove 39 of a spring cross bar 40,
which extends across the front of the sound
box, the cross bar being rigidly connected at
30 its ends to the sound box casing by means of
screws 41. This spring cross bar is tapered
from its outer ends inwardly to points near
the center of the bar where the bar is en-
larged to form the said V shaped recess for
35 the reception of the inner end of the stylus
bar, the cross bar being tapered inwardly so
as to make it more yielding at its central por-
tion than near its outer ends. The stylus
bar is provided at its outer end with a socket
40 for the reception of the stylus needle 42,
which is held in place by the screw 43, but if
preferred, a construction similar to that
shown in Figs. 1, 2 and 3 may be used in-
stead of the screw 12 to retain the needle.
45 With this construction in mind, it is ob-
vious that when the stylus bar is oscillated in
the usual manner by means of a sound rec-
ord, the inner end of the bar will slide later-
ally over the wedge like faces forming the V
50 shaped groove of the cross bar, and cause the
cross bar to vibrate laterally. By means of
the rod 44 which is connected at one end to
the cross bar, and at its other end to the dia-
phragm 45 the lateral motion of the cross bar
55 is transmitted to the diaphragm to reproduce
the sound waves corresponding to the move-
ments of the stylus bar.
The two sound boxes shown in Figs. 4 to 8
are intended to be carried upon the end of a
60 swinging arm, which will give the stylus
needle a suitable inclination to the record.
For this purpose an arm having an end turned
obliquely away from the record may be used
or the arm may be straight, and the tubular
65 connecting portion of the sound box may be
formed at an oblique angle to the casing ag
indicated by the dotted lines in Figs. 5 and 7
respectively.
Although I have shown only a few of the
forms in which this invention may be em- 70
bodied, it is obvious that other forms might
be devised, and various changes in the details
of the construction of the variousf orms might
be made within the scope of the appended
claims, without departing from the spirit of 75
this invention or sacrificing any of the ad-
vantages thereof.
Having thus fully described my invention,
what I claim and desire to protect by Letters
Patent of the United States is : 80
1. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a stylus bar mounted to swing upon
an axis parallel to itself into and out of longi-
tudinal alinement with an axial plane of said
casing. 85
2. In a sound box, a stylus bar mounted to
oscillate on an axis parallel to the longitudi-
nal axis of said bar.
3. In a sound box, the combination with a
diaphragm, of a stylus bar mounted to oscil- 90
late into and out of longitudinal alinement
with an axial plane of said sound box on an
axis parallel to said diaphragm.
4. In a sound box, the combination with a
diaphragm, of a stylus bar mounted to oscil- 95
late upon an axis parallel to its longitudinal
axis and to said diaphragm.
5. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a stylus bar, and a support for said
bar yieldingly mounted and normally free to 100
slide against said casing in a plane extending
at an angle to the bar.
6. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar, and a
support for said bar yieldingly mounted and 105
normally free to slide against said casing in a
plane transverse to the bar and substantially
perpendicular to the diaphragm.
7. In a sound box, a stylus bar having a
socket, a stylus needle in said socket, a sec- 110
ond socket transverse to said first mentioned
socket communicating therewith, a plunger
in said second socket projecting into said
first mentioned socket, and a spring to press
said plunger inwardly to hold said needle in 115
place, one end of said spring being connected
to said plunger and extending therefrom to
form a handle.
8. In a sound box, the combination with a
stylus bar having a stylus socket and a 120
plunger socket arranged transversely of said
stylus socket and in communication there-
with, the axes of the two sockets being in the
same plane, of a plunger engaging in said
plunger socket and a spring to hold said 12'5
plunger in place to retain a stylus in said
stylus socket, one end of said spring being
connected to said plunger and extended to
form a handle.
9. In a sound box the combination with a 130
896,008
stylus bar having a stylus socket and a
plunger socket arranged transversely of said
stylus socket of a plunger in said plunger
socket and a spring fixed at one end and se-
5 cured adjacent its other end to said plunger,
the latter end of said spring projecting be-
yond said plunger to form a handle therefor.
10. In a sound box, the combination with
a diaphragm of a stylus bar having a stylus
10 socket and mounted to oscillate upon an axis
parallel to the axis of said socket and sub-
stantially in the plane of said diaphragm.
11. In a sound box, the combination with
a diaphragm of a stylus bar having a stylus
15 socket and mounted to oscillate upon an axis
parallel to the axis of said socket to swing the
axis of said socket into and out of longitudi-
nal alinement with an axial plane of the
sound box.
20 12. In a sound box the combination with a
diaphragm of a stylus bar having a stylus
socket and mounted to oscillate upon an axis
parallel to the socket and parallel to the
plane of the diaphragm to bring the axis of
25 said socket into and out of longitudinal aline-
ment with an axial plane of the sound box.
13. In a sound box the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar, phonet-
ically connected to said diaphragm at one end
30 and having a stylus socket at its free end, an
arm connected to said bar and extending lat-
erally therefrom, and a pivot parallel to said
socket and substantially in the plane of the
diaphragm, connecting said arm to said
35 sound box casing.
14. In a sound box the combination with a
casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar phonet-
ically connected to said diaphragm at one
end and having a stylus socket at its free end,
40 an arm connected to said bar and extending
laterally therefrom, and a pivot parallel to
said socket and in the plane of said dia-
phragm, connecting said arm to said sound
box casing.
45 15. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing of a diaphragm, a stylus bar, an arm
secured to said bar and extending rearwardly
and laterally therefrom, and a pivot substan-
tially in longitudinal alinement with the
50 plane of the diaphragm, connecting said arm
to said casing.
16. In a sound box the combination with a
casing of a diaphragm, a stylus bar, an arm
secured to said bar and extending rearwardly
55 and laterally therefrom, and a pivot substan-
tially in longitudinal alinement with the
plane of the diaphragm, connecting said arm
to said casing, the portion of said arm ex-
tending rearwardly from the stylus bar be-
60 ing in sliding contact with said sound box
casing.
17. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing of a diaphragm, a stylus bar, an arm
secured to said bar and extending rearwardly
and laterally therefrom, a pivot substan- 65
tially in longitudinal alinement with the
plane of the diaphragm, connecting said arm
to said casing, and a spring to yieldingly re-
strain the vibration of said stylus.
18. In a sound box, the combination with 70
a casing of a diaphragm, a stylus bar, an arm
secured to said bar and extending rearwardly
and laterally therefrom, and a pivot substan-
tially in longitudinal alinement with the
plane of the diaphragm, connecting said arm 75
to said casing, and a spring engaging against
the end of said arm to yieldingly restrain the
vibration of said stylus.
19. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing of a diaphragm, a stylus bar, an arm 80
secured to said bar and extending rearwardly
and laterally therefrom, a lug upon said cas-
ing, a pivot connecting said arm and said lug,
and a spring secured to said lug and engaging
the end of said arm. 85
20. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing of a diaphragm, a stylus bar, an arm
secured to said bar and extending rearwardly
and laterally therefrom, a lug upon said cas-
ing, a pivot connecting said arm and said lug 90
and a flat spring secured to said lug and en-
gaging the end of said arm, the portion of
said arm extending rearwardly being in slid-
ing contact with said casing and said pivot
being substantially in the plane of said dia- 95
phragm and parallel to said stylus bar.
21. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar, and a transverse arm
rigid at one end with said bar, and in sliding
contact with said casing and pivoted to said 10 0
casing at its opposite end.
22. In a sound box the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar, a transverse arm
rigid at one end with said bar, and in sliding
contact with said casing, and pivoted to said 105
casing at its opposite end, and yielding means
to restrain the oscillation of said stylus bar.
23. In a sound box the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar, a transverse arm
rigid at one end with said bar, and in sliding 110
contact with said casing and pivoted to said
casing at its opposite end, and a spring fixed
to said casing and engaging the end of said
bar to restrain the oscillation of said bar.
24. In a sound box, the combination with 115
a casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar pro-
vided with a stylus socket, and a support for
said bar yieldingly mounted and normally
free to slide against said casing in a plane ex-
tending substantially perpendicular to the 120
longitudinal axis of said socket and to said
diaphragm.
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand
this 13th day of November, A. D. 1907.
EDWARD D. GLEASON.
Witnesses :
A. I. Gardner,
Alexander Park.
No. 896,009.
JZ&.J.
E- D. GLEASON. PAOTTED AFG- "' 19°8'
SOUND BOX FOR TALKING MACHINES
APPLICATION FILED NOV. 14, 1907.
z
<3^\ r
J?&a.
<?J
WITNESSES
BY
INVENTOR
/rtlZu
ATTORNEY
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EDWARD D. GLEASON, OF MOORES, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE
COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
SOUND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 896,009.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 11, 1908.
Application filed November 14, 1907. Serial No. 402,060.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Edward D. Gleason,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Moores, Delaware county, Pennsylvania,
5 have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Sound-Boxes for Talking-
Machines, of which the following is a full,
clear, and complete disclosure.
The main objects of this invention are to
10 provide in a sound box an improved stylus
bar and mounting, and an improved means
of connecting the stylus bar to the dia-
phragm.
Other objects of this invention will appear
15 hi the following description.
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1 is
a front elevation of a sound box constructed
in accordance with this invention; Fig. 2 a
longitudinal section of the same upon the
20 line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1, looking in the direction of
the arrows; Fig. 3 a front elevation of a modi-
fied form of this invention; and Fig. 4 a lon-
gitudinal section upon line 4 — 4 of Fig. 3,
looking in the direction of the arrows.
25 Referring to Figs. 1 and 2 of the drawings,
one embodiment of this invention comprises
a sound box casing 1, having a cylindrical
bore 2 in the face thereof and an annular V-
shaped groove 3 within the bore near the
30 front edge of the box. The diaphragm 4 is
carried within the bore of the box between
hollow annular gaskets 5 and 6, the outer
gasket 5 resting in the said V-shaped groove
3 and the inner gasket 6 being retained be-
35 tween the cylindrical bore of the box and the
rear wall thereof, the outer gasket being nec-
essarily of greater diameter than the inner
gasket whereby the two gaskets bear against
the diaphragm in concentric circles.
40 The stylus bar 7 consists of a straight, flat
rectangular main portion spaced from the
front of the box and terminating in a portion
8 extending at substantially right angles to
the main portion and longitudinally over the
45 outer surface of the sound box casing, being
rigidly secured within a corresponding re-
cess in the outer periphery of the sound box
casing by means of the screw 9. Between
the diaphragm and main portion of the sty-
50 lus bar and axially of the sound box is ar-
ranged a rod 10, which is rigidly connected
to the bar and the inner end of which is
phonetically connected to the diaphragm.
The lower end of the stylus bar projects
55 outside of the periphery of the sound box
and is provided with the socket 1 1 for the re^-
ception of the stylus needle 12, and in order
to hold the needle in place, the bar is split
longitudinally with a kerf 13 which termi-
nates at its upper end in a circular aperture qq
14 extending transversely through the bar.
The bar is also provided adjacent the upper
end of the needle socket with a conical aper-
ture 15 extending transversely through the
bar and in alinement with the sound box (35
casing. A conical pin 16 is secured to the
sound box casing and converges within the
said aperture 15, being normally slightly out
of contact with the sides of the conical aper-
ture and the upper end of the stylus needle 70
when the stylus needle is in operative posi-
tion but when the stylus bar is pressed to-
ward the sound box casing, the conical pin
engages against the sides of the conical aper-
ture and the end of the stylus needle to 75
spread the sides of the stylus socket and to
eject the stylus needle, the ordinary oscilla-
tion of the stylus bar in the form of vibra-
tions corresponding to sound waves, not be-
ing sufficient to bring the end of the needle so
into contact with the sides of the conical
aperture, a special pressure being required
for this purpose.
With this construction in mind, it is obvi-
ous that the stylus bar is mounted to oscillate 85
from its upper end as an axis in a plane perpen-
dicular to the diaphragm for the purpose of
either recording or reproducing sound waves.
In Figs. 3 and 4 showing a modified form
of this invention the stylus bar 17 is similar 90
in shape to that already described but in-
stead of extending across the full front of the
sound box casing 18 and being fastened in
alinement with the stylus needle, its inner
end terminates at a point between the center 95
of the sound box and the edge thereof and is
carried upon lateral extensions constituting
a cross bar 19, extending diametrically over
the front of the box and being rigidly se-
cured at its ends to the sound box casing by 100
means of the screws 20. The ends of the
cross bar are weakened by oppositely dis-
posed lateral kerfs 21 arranged just within
and in close proximity to the inner edges of
the sound box casing whereby the cross bar 105
is made sensitive to the torsional stresses such
as would result from the necessary oscillation
of the stylus bar corresponding to the sound
waves, but remaining substantially rigid with
respect to stresses tending to bend the same. HO
2
896,000
The stylus bar is connected to the dia-
phragm from two points spaced at respec-
tively equal distances above and below the
axial line of the sound box by means of a
5 thread or wire 22 the ends of which are passed
through suitable apertures in the stylus bar
and terminate and are held in place beneath
the heads of screws 23 which are arranged
adjacent to the said apertures the central
10 portion of the thread being phonetically con-
nected by wax 24 or other suitable means to
the center of the diaphragm. I preferably use
a thread of non metallic material for this
purpose, the object being to avoid the harsh
15 unpleasant vibrations which are caused when
a metallic connection is used between the
diaphragm and the stylus.
The lower end of the stylus bar projects
freely over the face of the sound box and pro-
20 jects outside of the periphery thereof, in a
manner similar to that already described for
the stylus shown in Figs. 1 and 2. The lower
portion of this bar 17 is identical in form with
that already described for the previous
25 figures, the bar being split longitudinally by
a kerf 25 terminating at its upper end in a
circular aperture 26 and having a conical
aperture 27 to receive the conical pin 28
which is rigid with a sound box casing, the
30 lower surface of the conical pin being nor-
mally just out of contact with the sides of
the conical aperture and the upper end of the
stylus needle 29, when the needle is in its
operative position in its socket.
35 In the operation of this latter form of
sound box, it is evident that the portion of
the stylus bar in alinement with the stylus
needle will vibrate in a plane perpendicular to
the diaphragm and about its lateral exten-
40 sions as an axis, bringing stresses alternately
upon the upper and lower ends of the thread
connecting the stylus bar to the diaphragm
and producing corresponding vibrations of
the diaphragm.
45 Although I have shown and described only
two forms in which this invention may be
embodied, yet I do not limit myself to these
particular forms as it is evident that various
changes might be made in the details of con-
50 struction within the scope of the appended
claims without departing from the spirit of
this invention.
Having thus fully described my invention,
what I claim and desire to protect by Letters
55 Patent of the United States is: —
1. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing of a diaphragm, a stylus bar mounted
to oscillate with respect to said casing, and
means connecting a point in said diaphragm
60 with points in said stylus bar upon opposite
sides of the axis of oscillation of said stylus
bar.
2. In a sound box, the combination of a
casing with a diaphragm, a stylus bar having
G5 a portion extended upon opposite sides of the
longitudinal axis of said casing mounted to
oscillate with respect thereto and means con-
necting points of said bar upon opposite sides
of the longitudinal axis of said casing to the
central point of said diaphragm. 70
3. In a sound box, the combination of a
casing with a diaphragm, a stylus bar having
a portion extended upon opposite sides of the
longitudinal axis of said casing mounted to
oscillate with respect thereto and non-metal- 7 5
he thread connecting points of said bar upon
opposite sides of the longitudinal axis of said
casing to the central point of said diaphragm.
4. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing of a stylus bar, a stylus needle carried 80
by said bar, and means actuated by the move-
ment of said bar with respect to said casing
for ejecting said needle therefrom.
5. In a sound box, a stylus bar having a
socket in the end thereof for the reception of a 85
stylus needle, said bar being split longitudi-
nally through the sides of said socket where-
by a needle may be yieldingly held in said
socket, and means acting laterally of the bar
for spreading the sides of said socket to re- 90
lease a needle.
6. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing of a stylus bar having a socket in the
end thereof to hold a stylus needle, said bar
being split longitudinally through the sides 95
of said socket and having a transverse aper-
ture adjacent the upper end of said socket,
and a conical pin secured to said casing and
projecting into said aperture to eject the
needle when the stylus is pressed toward said 100
casing.
7. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing of a stylus bar and a mounting for said
bar comprising a transverse bar extending
diametrically of said casing and forming the 105
axis of oscillation of said stylus bar, the op-
posite ends of said transverse bar being rig-
idly secured to said casing. ■
8. In a sound box, the combination witli a
casing of a stylus bar and a mounting for said 1 1 0
bar comprising a transverse bar extending
diametrically of said casing, the opposite
ends of said transverse bar being rigidly se-
cured to said casing and said transverse bar
being weakened at a point adjacent its end, 115
causing said bar to yield readily to torsional
stresses, but to remain substantially rigid
with respect to stresses tending to bend the
same.
9. In a sound box, the combination with a 120
casing, of a stylus bar having means for hold-
ing a needle, and means carried by said cas-
ing and rigid therewith for ejecting a needle
from said bar.
10. In a sound box, the combination with 125
a casing, of a diaphragm, a cross bar extend-
ing diametrically of the casing and secured to
the opposite sides thereof, a stylus bar se-
cured to said cross bar and projecting trans-
versely upon each side thereof, and means 130
866,009
connecting said stylus bar upon opposite
sides of said cross bar to said diaphragm, said
cross bar forming the axis of oscillation of
said stylus bar.
5 11. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar having means for
holding a needle, and a pin carried by said
casing and rigid therewith for ejecting a
needle from said bar.
10 12. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar having means for
holding a stylus, and means actuated by the
movement of said bar with respect to said
casing for ejecting a needle from said bar.
15 13. In a sound box, the combination with
a diaphragm, of a stylus bar mounted to. os-
cillate upon a fixed axis lying in a plane per-
pendicular to said diaphragm and extending
centrally thereof.
20 14. In a sound box the combination with
a diaphragm, of a stylus bar mounted to os-
cillate upon an axis lying in a plane perpen-
dicular to said diaphragm and extending
centrally thereof, and means connecting said
25 bar upon opposite sides of the axis of oscilla-
tion thereof to said diaphragm.
15. The combination with a diaphragm,
of a stylus bar mounted to oscillate with re-
spect thereto, and means connecting said bar
30 upon opposite sides of its axis of oscillation
to said diaphragm.
16. The combination with a diaphragm,
of a stylus bar mounted to oscillate with re-
spect thereto, and means connecting said
35 bar upon opposite sides of its axis of oscilla-
tion to the central portion of said diaphragm.
17. In a sound box, the combination with
a diaphragm, of a stylus bar mounted to os-
cillate upon a fixed axis parallel to said dia-
40 phragm in a plane perpendicular thereto and
extending diametrically thereof.
18. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a diaphragm, a stylus bar mount-
ed upon said casing to oscillate upon an axis
45 parallel to said diaphragm and in a plane
perpendicular thereto extending diametric-
ally thereof.
19. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar having a split socket
50 for holding a stylus needle, means actuated
by the movement of said bar with respect to
said, casing for spreading the sides of the
socket to release the needle.
20. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar having a split socket 55
for holding a stylus needle, a tapering pin
carried by said casing and extending trans-
versely of said socket for spreading the sides
of the socket to release the needle.
21. In a sound box, the combination with 60
a casing, of a stylus bar having a socket to
hold a stylus needle, and a transverse aper-
ture communicating with the socket, of a pin
carried by said casing and engaging in said
transverse aperture to eject a needle from 65
said socket.
22. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a stylus bar having means for
holding a stylus needle, and means carried by
said casing and acting laterally of said bar to 70
eject a needle therefrom.
23. In a sound box, a stylus bar having a
socket in the end thereof for the reception of
a stylus needle, said bar being split longitu-
dinally through the sides of said socket, and 75
means carried by the sound box and acting
transversely of said socket for spreading the
sides of said, socket to release a needle there-
from.
24. The combination with a stylus bar 80
mounted to oscillate, of means fixed with re-
spect to the axis of oscillation of said bar for
ejecting a needle therefrom.
25. The combination with a stylus bar
mounted to oscillate and having a split 85
socket, of means fixed with respect to the
axis of oscillation of said bar for spreading
the sides of said socket to eject a needle
therefrom.
26. The combination with a stylus bar 90
having a split socket, of means actmg later-
ally of said bar and actuated by the move-
ment of the said bar for spreadmg the sides
of said socket to eject a needle therefrom.
In witness whereof I hereunto set my hand 95
this 13th day of November, A. D. 1907.
EDWARD D. GLEASON.
Witnesses :
A. I. Gardner,
Alexander Park.
No. 896,059.
PATENTED AUG. 11, 1908.
E. R. JOHNSON.
RECORD FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED NOT. 12, 1904.
_^?<?'-_y^
/
^^^^^^^^^^^MZZZZZ^^ZZZ^ZZ
-2<£y.3:
WITNESSES:
-J%y.3- -J*2y.£.
INVENTOR
4TTORNET.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ELDRIDGE R. JOHNSON, OF MERION, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
RECORD FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 896,059.
Specification of Letters, Patent.
Patented Aug. 11, 1908.
Original application filed August 16, 1898, Serial No. 688,695. Divided and this application filed November 12, 1904.
Serial No. 232,389.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Eldridge R. John-
son, a citizen of the United States, and a
resident of Merion, count}7- of Montgomery,
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Records
for Talking-Machines, of which the following
is a full, clear, and exact disclosure, the sub-
ject-matter of this invention having been
10 originally set forth in my previous applica-
tion, No. 688,695, filed August 16, 1898, of
which this application is a division.
My invention relates to improvements in
sound records of either the cylindrical or disk
15 type, and has for its object to provide an im-
proved record such that the walls of the
grooves shall be so formed as to reproduce
the sounds of the record in tones more clear
and distinct than has heretofore been pos-
20 sible from records of prior construction.
In forming records upon sound recording
machines for use in talking machines, such as
the gramophone, where the sound waves are
recorded in the form of a groove of even
25 depth having lateral undulations as distin-
guished from an undulatory groove of vary-
ing depth, as in the type of machines of which
the phonograph is an illustration, it is essen-
tial, in order to produce a clear record, that
30 the material be neatly and cleanly cut from
the grooves in the process of recording so
that smooth, well-defined, surf aces be formed
in the walls of a well defined groove.
In the art of making sound records, com-
35 paratively little attention has been paid to
the finishing and the forming of the surfaces
of the walls of the record groove. The ver-
tical groove has heretofore been cut by a
recording tool, which, owing to the character
40 of the groove and the shape of the tool, has
not only had a tendency to tear the material of
the record, or distort the same, so as to form
roughnesses which, in the reproduction of
the record or its duplicate, cause disagree-
45 able sounds, owing to the harsh vibrations of
the diaphragm caused thereby, but also,
among other things, in the vertical type of
record, the resistance on the cutting stylus in
gouging out the material increases in propor-
50 tion to the depth, which objection is over-
come in my cut laterally undulating record
groove, where the resistance to the force ex-
erted by the cutting stylus is uniform and
even.
55 I have discovered by careful experiments
that the best results are obtained in a cut out
laterally undulatory groove of substantially
constant depth in a record tablet, preferably
of wax or other suitable material, and fur-
thermore, when the walls of the groove di- go
verge from the bottom of the same to the
surface of the record, or, more specifically,
when the walls of the groove are formed by
surfaces which in cross section give the lines
of a segment of an ellipse, the groove being 65
widest at its mouth, and gradually diminish-
ing in its width toward the bottom. By this
construction, the material is neatly and ac-
curately cut out, and forms a groove having
smooth and well denned walls ; the recording 70
needle has greater freedom of oscillation, and
by reason of the relative contour of the walls
of the groove with the outline of the needle,
this construction prevents any binding ef-
fect and secures a maximum ease of move- 75
ment of the needle with a minimum of wear
upon the record.
I herein describe particularly my preferred
form of cut groove substantially in the shape
of the segment of an ellipse, though it will be 80
understood, that I do not limit myself to that
particular form of groove, and it is unneces-
sary to further illustrate or describe my
broad invention.
For a full, clear, and exact description of 85
this form of my invention, reference may be
had to the following specification, and to the
accompanying drawing forming a part there-
of, in which
Figure 1 is a sectional view of a record 90
showing a recording tool, in operation in con-
nection therewith, parts of said recording
tool being shown in section; Fig. 2 is a large
cross sectional view of the record showing
the shape of the groove as formed therein; 95
Fig. 3 is a sectional view showing a form of
groove having perpendicular walls in con-
nection with a needle with an outline sub-
stantially like that of the end of the record
groove; Fig. 4 shows a groove of substan- 100
tially the same character as that shown in
Fig. 3, with the stylus point of the ordinary
construction in place therein; Fig. 5 is a plan
view of the record disk showing the grooves
spirally arranged in the surface thereof; Fig. 105
6 illustrates a part of the record showing a
single record groove greatly magnified and
disclosing the undulatory form of the sound
waves.
Referring to the drawings, the numeral 1 110
896,059
15
25
30
indicates the record plate which is used in
the gramophone or talking machine having
a groove 3 formed therein and having walls
of elliptical shape in cross section, as indi-
5 cated at 4 and 5. This groove as shown in
Fig. 2 is widest at its mouth and is formed by
a cutting tool 2 having its cutting* edges
formed by scarfing at an angle to its axis the
end of a substantially conical tool, with the
10 result that the cutting edges of the tool are"
substantially elliptical, but when I use the
words ellipse and elliptical, I mean having
the contour which would result from the
intersection of a plane with a side of a body,
which is substantially conical, at an angle to
the axis of the said body. Figs. 3 and 4
show a groove having perpendicular walls 6
and 7 and a substantially arc-shape bottom.
In Fig. 3 a blunt cylindrical stylus or needle
20 8, having its end substantially in the shape
of a hemisphere, is shown in position in said
groove, and in Fig. 4 the stylus pin 10 is con-
ical in shape, and is that in general use in con-
nection with disk talking machines.
It is clear in both of the previously men-
tioned constructions illustrated in Figs. 3
and 4, that the stylus bar oscillating in the
direction transverse to the length of the
groove, will be prevented from having that
free and untrammeled movement which is
incident to the construction shown in Fig. 2
owing to the fact that in one case the stylus
is closely confined between the vertical walls
of the groove, and in the other case the walls
of the groove at its mouth are liable to be
quickly worn and injured owing to the slight
contact of the stylus with the record at the
mouth of the groove. In contradistinction
to this action of the stylus bar and stylus,
40 my improved groove shown in Fig. 2 imparts
a free positive movement to the stylus and
substantially the whole surface of the groove
may be in contact with the end of the stylus
without causing the same to bind or become
wedged in said groove. The oscillating ef-
fect given to the point of the stylus, while in
position in the groove as it traverses the un-
dulations thereof, is best understood by ref-
erence to the enlarged groove shown in Fig. 6.
It is understood that in reproducing, the
record thus formed may be used for repro-
ducing purposes directly, or a more durable
and indestructible record may be reproduced
by various processes from the original record.
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim and desire to protect by Letters Pat-
ent of the United States, is: —
1. A sound record having a laterally un-
dulatory groove of substantially constant
60 depth made by a tool having edges so sharp-
ened and inclined as to cut the material as
distinguished from tracing or marking said
material.
4. 2. A disk sound record, having a cut lat-
65 erally undulatory groove of substantially
35
45
50
oo
constant depth, the walls of said groove-
diverging from the bottom of the same to the
surface of the record.
7^ 3. The method of producing sound records
consisting in cutting as. distinguished from 70
marking or tracing upon a tablet of suitable
material by means of the lateral vibrations
of a suitable stylus a record groove of appre-
ciable and substantially uniform depth hav-
ing lateral undulations corresponding to the 75
sound waves.
/ 4. A sound record made from a cut later-
ally undulatory groove of substantially con-
stant depth, the walls of said groove diverg-
ing from the bottom of the same to the sur- 80
face of the record tablet.
5. A sound record tablet having a later-
ally undulatory groove of substantially con-
stant depth made by a tool having edges so
sharpened and inclined as to cut out the ma- 85
terial to form the groove as distinguished
from tracing or marking the said material.
6. A disk sound record having a laterally
undulatory groove of substantially constant
depth in which the record groove was formed 90
by cutting out and removing the material in
forming the record groove, the walls of the
said groove diverging from the bottom of the
same to the surface of the record tablet.
7. A sound record made from a cut out 95
laterally undulatory groove of substantially
constant depth, the walls of the said groove
diverging from the bottom of the same to the
surface of the record tablet.
jt S. A disk sound record comprising a spi- 100
rally disposed laterally undulatory groove of
substantially constant depth in which the
record groove was formed by cutting out and
removing the material in forming the record
groove, substantially as described. 105
9. A sound record having a cut out later-
ally undulatory groove of substantially con-
stant depth.
10. A sound record having a cut out later-
ally undulatory groove of substantially con- 110
stant depth, the walls of said groove diverg-
ing from the bottom of the same to the sur-
face of the record.
11. The method of producing sound rec-
ords consisting in cutting out the material in 115
forming the record groove, as distinguished
from marking or tracing, upon a tablet of
suitable material by means of the lateral vi-
brations of a suitable cutting stylus, and
forming a record groove of appreciable and 120
substantially uniform depth having lateral
undulations corresponding to the sound
waves.
12. The method of producing sound rec-
ords consisting in cutting out the material in 125
forming the record groove, as distinguished
from marking or tracing, upon a tablet of
suitable material by means of the lateral vi-
brations of a suitable cutting stylus, and
forming a record groove of appreciable and 130
896,059
substantially uniform depth having lateral
undulations corresponding to the sound
waves, and then reproducing a sound record
from, the original record groove so cut.
5 13. In the art of recording and reproduc-
ing sounds, the method of cutting out a later-
ally undulatory groove of substantially con-
stant depth in a tablet of suitable material
by vibrating laterally a cutting stylus
10 through the medium of sound waves.
Xl4. In the art of recording and reproduc-
ing sounds, the method of cutting out a later-
ally undulatory groove of substantially con-
stant depth in a tablet of suitable material
15 by vibrating laterally a cutting stylus
through the medium of sound waves and
then forming a duplicate thereof.
15. A record tablet for talking machines
having formed therein a laterally undulatory
20 groove of substantially even depth, the walls
of which in cross section are in the shape of
the segment of an ellipse, widest at the mouth
of the groove and gradually diminishing to-
ward the bottom thereof.
25 16. A record tablet for talking machines
having formed therein a laterally undulatory
groove of substantially even depth, the walls
of which in cross section are in the shape of a
segment of an ellipse widest at the mouth of
30 the groove, the depth of said groove being
slightly less than its width.
17. A record tablet for talking machines
having formed therein a spirally disposed lat-
erally undulatory groove of substantially
35 even depth, the "walls of which in cross sec-
tion are in the shape of a segment of an
ellipse, the minor axis of which is substantially
in the plane of the surface of the record.
18. In a sound recording and reproducing
40 device, a record having a laterally undula-
tory groove therein of substantially constant
depth and width, any cross section of which
has the configuration of a segment of an
ellipse, the said segment being symmetrical
45 and of maximum width at the mouth of said
groove.
19. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, a record having a laterally undula-
tory groove therein of substantially constant
depth and width, any cross section of which 50
has a configuration of a segment of an ellipse
whose minor axis is substantially parallel
with the plane passing through the outer edge
of the groove, the said segment being sym-
metrical and of maximum width at the mouth 55
of said groove.
. 20. A sound record of wax or other suit-
able material, having a cut out laterally un-
dulatory groove of substantially constant
depth. 60
21. A sound record of wax or other suit-
able material having a cut out laterally un-
dulatory groove of substantially constant
depth, the walls of said groove diverging
from the bottom of the same to the surface of 65
the record.
22. The method of producing sound rec-
ords consisting in cutting out the material in
forming the record groove, as distinguished
from marking or tracing, upon a tablet of 70
wax or other suitable material by means of
the lateral vibrations of a suitable cutting
stylus, and forming a record groove of appre-
ciable and substantially uniform depth hav-
ing lateral undulations corresponding to the 75
sound waves.
X. 23. The method of producing sound rec-
ords consisting in cutting out the material in
forming the record groove, as distinguished
from marking or tracing, upon a tablet of 80
wax or other suitable material by means of
the lateral vibrations of a suitable cutting
stylus, and forming a record groove of appre-
ciable and substantially uniform depth hav-
ing lateral undulations corresponding to the 85
sound waves, and then reproducing a sound
record from the original record groove so cut.
24. A sound record made from a cut out
laterally undulatory groove of substantially
constant depth.
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my
hand this 10th day of November, 1904.
ELDRIDGE R. JOHNSON.
Witnesses :
John F. Okadt,
Horace Pettit.
90
No. 896,302.
I. KITSEE.
PHONOGRAPHY.
APPLICATION FIXED NOV. 1, 1907.
PATENTED AUG. 18, 1908.
Tta.l
ttc,. &.
3
7t«. 3.
4- — ^^A^||||||, ,,||pv^v^^|
WITNESSES:
ZP?<^ZU>UijS~ Co ^zDc^^^o
j^^/?2^tc-^a^k-
INVENTOR.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ISIDOR KITSEE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
PHONOGRAPHY.
No. 896,302.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 18, 1908.
Application filed November 1, 1907. Serial No. 400,175.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Isidor Kitsee, citizen
of the United States, residing at Philadel-
phia, in the county of Philadelphia and State
5 of Pennsylvania, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Phonography,
of which the following is a specification.
My invention relates to an improvement in
phonography. Its object is to produce a
10 phonographic record with the aid of which
sounds may be reproduced.
In the drawing, Figures 1 and 2 are plan
views of records at different stages and Fig.
3 is a sectional view of the finished record.
15 To produce the final record in accordance
with this, my invention, it is first necessary
to produce the recording lines, due to the
sound waves, in a manner so as to be able to
photograph the same; and in the drawing,
20 Fig. 1 illustrates this step of my invention;
and in this figure, 1 is the material on which
the lines of record are marked and 2 are the
lines of record. I prefer that the material 1
should be transparent and the lines 2 opaque
25 to the rays of light. I have found that trac-
ing cloth is well adapted for the purpose and
a very expedient way of producing the lines
of record is, by simply drawing, with the aid
of a colored fluid, the lines on said cloth; the
30 means to draw said lines being operatively
related to the phonographic diaphragm. I
use this plate or record as a positive to pro-
duce photographically a negative therefrom.
The process of producing a photographic
35 negative is well understood and does not need
to be enlarged upon here. It suffices to say
that those places which are in the positive
opaque to the rays of fight will be produced
in the negative in a manner so as to be trans-
40 parent to the rays of light and vice versa; the
places transparent to the rays of light on the
positive will be opaque to the rays of light on
the negative, provided that the negative is
made and washed in accordiance with the
45 usual process, and Fig. 2 represents such a
negative; in this figure, 3 designates the parts
opaque to the rays of light and 2 the fines of
record now transparent to the rays of light.
To produce a record plate, with the aid of
50 which sounds may be reproduced, I have re-
course to the following arrangement: — I
cover a suitable base, such for instance as a
metallic plate, with a comparatively thick
layer of gelatin, in which a chrome, such for
55 instance as a bi-chromate of potassium, is
dissolved. This plate is carefully screened
from the rays of light. After the plate has
dried, that is, ripened — as I call it — , it is sub-
jected to the rays of fight with the interposi-
tion of the negative. The rays of ligfit will, 60
therefore, only strike those parts of the gela-
tin coating which are not protected by the
opaque material of the negative. In other
words, only such parts of the gelatin coating
will be exposed to the ligfit as correspond to 65
the transparent lines of record on tfie nega-
tive; all other parts of the gelatin coating
being screened from the rays of light by the
opaque parts of said negative. After the
necessary exposure, the gelatin plate is re- 70
moved from the source of light. When a
gelatin, intermixed with a bi-chromate of
potassium, is exposed to the rays of fight,
those parts on which the rays of ligfit fall will
become fiard and dry, whereas, such parts 75
which are screened from the rays of ligfit will
remain in tfieir pliable state. When now a
gelatin so prepared is moistened with luke
warm water, those parts, formerly exposed
to the rays, will remain unaltered, but the 80
parts screened from the rays will take up
part of the water and will thereby swell up.
The plate so manipulated will present a sur-
face comprising raised and depressed parts.
The raised parts are due to the swelling up of 85
the gelatin formerly screened from the light
and the depressed parts represent the gelatin
not raised through the action of the water.
It has been necessary to thus make clear the
action of ligfit on gelatin having intermixed 90
therein a bi-chromate of potassium, so that
the production of the final record should be
well understood by persons versed in the art.
As stated above, the plate of gelatin is,
after due exposure to the light, removed 95
from this source. To produce the necessary
change in this gelatin plate, so as to be able
to use the lines of record for the reproduc-
tion of sound, it is necessary to depress these
lines, or what is the same — to raise the parts 100
intervening, and for this purpose, I subject
the plate to the action of moisture. Fig. 3
represents such final record and in this rec-
ord, 5 is the support plate; 4 the prepared
gelatin and 2 are the lines of record, here 105
shown in intaglio.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent is: —
1. The method of producing phonographic 110
records, which consists in obtaining a posi-
tive of the sound waves, then producing a
806,302
negative therefrom with portions thereof
transparent to rays of light, then exposing a
sensitized gelatinous surface through the
transparent portions of said negative to the
5 action of the light rays, and finally raising
the portions of the sensitized surface not ex-
posed by the negative, whereby the exposed
portions are depressed relatively to the un-
exposed portions.
10 2. The method of producing phonographic
records, which consists in recording the
sound waves in a manner to render, them
susceptible of photographic reproduction,
then producing photographically a negative
15 therefrom, then exposing a sensitized gelat-
inous surface through the transparent por-
tions of said negative to the action of light
rays, and finally raising the portions of the
sensitized surface not exposed by the nega-
20 tive, whereby the exposed portions are de-
pressed relatively to the unexposed portions.
3. The method, of producing phonographic
records, which consists in recording the
sound waves in opaque lines upon a trans-
25 parent body to obtain a positive of said
sound waves, then producing photographic-
ally a negative thereof, then exposing a sen-
sitized gelatinous surface through the trans-
parent portions of said negative to the action
30 of light rays, and finally raising the portions
of the sensitized surface not exposed by the
negative, whereby the exposed portions are
depressed relatively to the unexposed por-
tions.
35 4. The method of producing phonographic
records, which consists in obtaining a posi-
tive of the sound waves, then producing a
negative therefrom with portions thereof
transparent to rays of light, then exposing a
chromated gelatinous surface through the 40
transparent portions of said negative to the
action of the light rays, and finally subjecting
to the action of moisture the portions of the
surface not exposed by the negative, where-
by said portions are raised relatively to the 45
exposed portions.
5. The method of producing phonographic
records, which consists in recording the
sound waves in a manner to render them
susceptible of photographic reproduction, 50
then producing photographically a negative
therefrom, then exposing a chromated gelati-
nous surface through the transparent por-
tions of said negative to the action of light
rays, and finally subjecting to the action of 55
moisture the portions of the surface not ex-
posed by the negative, whereby said portions
are raised relatively to the exposed portions.
6. The method of producing phonographic
records, which consists in recording the 60
sound waves in opaque lines upon a trans-
parent body to obtain a positive of said
sound waves, then producing photographic-
ally a negative thereof, then exposing a
chromated gelatinous surface through the 65
transparent portions of said negative to the
action of light rays, and finally subjecting to
the action of moisture the portions of the
surface not exposed by the negative, where-
by said portions are raised relatively to the 70
exposed portions.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
ISIDOR KITSEE.
Witnesses :
Edith R. Stilley,
Mary C. Smith.
No. 896,672.
PATENTED AUG. 18, 1908.
L. L. TERHIJNE.
HORN.
APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 8, 1006.
^zpX,.
Fuf.3
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LEONARD L. TERHUNE, OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY.
HORN.
No. 896,672.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 18, 1908.
Application filed September 8, 1906. Serial No. 333,815.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Leonard L. Terhune,
a citizen of the United States, residing in the
city of Newark, county of Essex, and State
5 of New Jersey, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Horns ; and I do
hereby declare the following to be a full,
clear, and exact description of the same, such
as will enable others skilled in the art to
10 which it pertains to make and use the same.
The object of my invention is to produce a
horn for use in amplifying the vibrations pro-
duced by the sound box of a phonograph or
like instrument, of such a size that it shall
15 possess greater strength for a given weight of
material used and at the same time, improve
the carrying and amplifying qualities of such
an instrument.
Hitherto, in the manufacture and ship-
20 ment of horns, great difficulty has been ex-
perienced in producing a horn of the requi-
site strength to stand the wear and tear of
rough usage from the thin material which it
is necessary to use in such manufacture. I
25 have found that, by making up the horn of
elements which have short curvature, I am
able to produce a horn from relatively light
material which shall have, not only the requi-
site strength, but improved sound carrying
30 and amplifying qualities.
The configuration of the bell and body of
the horn lends itself admirably to the manu-
facture of the structure from other materials
than sheet-metal, as for example, papier
35 mache or glass, and in case I use either of
the latter named materials, the whole horn,
i. e., body and bell mouth may be pressed to
shape in suitable molds or dies, thereby
forming horns of a single integral piece of
40 material, and the resulting horns' will be
found to possess greater strength and better
sound carrying qualities than if made up of
separate parts from those materials. In
some cases, I may make the corneal body of
45 metal as usual and the bell of glass, papier
mache or other suitable material. In any
case, the petal sections are both longitudi-
nally and laterally arc-shaped.
In the accompanying drawings, forming a
50 part of this specification, Figure 1 is a side
view of a complete horn, embodying my im-
provements. Fig. 2 is a cross-section on line
x — x of Fig. 1, and Fig. 3 is a similar cross-
section of a modified form.
Similar letters of reference refer to like 55
parts throughout the specification and draw-
ings.
The horn illustrated in Fig. 1 may be de-
scribed as composed of the body a of conical
shape having at its smaller end the integral 60
ferrule b, and the bell or flaring part c. The
body a and the ferrule b are of any usual or
preferred construction and are ordinarily
made by shaping a piece of sheet metal into
such form and providing a bead or groove d 65
at its larger end for the reception of a flange
formed upon the smaller end of the bell c.
My improvement resides more particu-
larly in the form, shape and structure of the
bell mouth c, which consists of a plurality of 70
what has come to be known in the art as
"petals", from their well known resemblance
to the petals of a bell shaped flower. The
bell as illustrated in Fig. 2 consists of a plu-
rality of petals curved both longitudinally 75
and in cross-section, and united together at
their adjacent edges by any desired means as
for example, by a lock seam, when the horn
is made up of sheet metal or united integrally
when made of glass, papier mache or other 80
similar material. Each petal is laterally
curved so as to present in cross-section, the
arc of a circle of less radius than the corre-
sponding radius of the bell mouth at that
point. 85
The outer ends of the petals are so shaped
that when they are united to form the bell,
their outer margins all lie in the same plane
as indicated at e, so that when the horn is
rested upon the bell upon the floor or any 90
level surface, each one of the petals will find
a full and complete bearing upon such level
surface, and not, as has hitherto been the
case, rest upon some projecting point or
scallop. In the form illustrated in Fig. 3, the 95
petals instead of being convex outwardly as
shown in Fig. 2, are convex inwardly, while
the outer ends of the petals are shaped so as
to lie in the same plane as disclosed in the
structure illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2. In or- 100
der to lend stiffness to the individual petals,
I may impress upon their surfaces, any scroll
or design / as desired ; this scroll or design is
pressed inwardly from the outer surface of
the horn, and forms what may be termed, a 105
corrugation in each of the petals, and appear-
ing in relief upon the inner side, adds much to
the beauty of the horn. The bell c after be-
896,672
ing formed from its component petals is pro-
vided with a flange or rib at its smaller end,
which is fitted into the grooved bead d and
firmly united to the body a in the usual or
5 any preferred manner. When the bell is
made integral, as of glass, papier mache, etc.,
the flange above referred to is formed upon
its smaller end and fitted into said groove d,
or in case the entire horn is integral as of
10 other materials, than sheet metal, the bell
and body may be separated by a bead the
external shape of which is identical with the
grooved bead d. It will thus be noted that
each one of the petals formed either as illus-
15 trated in Fig. 2 or Fig. 3, produce an arch
shaped structure very rigid because of the
comparative shortness of the lateral curva-
ture of the parts, and thereby, less liable to
distortion through rough usage. I find also,
20 that horns of this character are capable of
producing clearer and less metallic reproduc-
tions, than is the case where the petals are
substantially plain in cross-section.
I claim:
25 1. A horn for amplifying sound, compris-
ing a conical horn body and a flaring. bell
mouth rigidly secured to said body, said bell
mouth composed of a plurality of petal sec-
tions secured together at their longitudinal
edges, each section being independently 30
curved laterally in the arc of a circle of
less radius than the corresponding radius of
the bell mouth and longitudinally curved
throughout its length, said petal sections hav-
ing their outer margins all lying in a plane 35
perpendicular to the axis of the horn.
2. A horn bell composed of a plurality of
petal sections, each section being curved lat-
erally in the arc of a circle of less radius than
the corresponding radius of the bell mouth, 40
said sections being joined together at their
meeting edges with the outer margins of said
petal sections all lying in a plane perpendicu-
lar to the axis of the horn.
This specification signed and witnessed 45
this 25th day of August 1906.
LEONARD L. TERHUNE.
Witnesses :
W. A. Lauruince,
C. A. Alliston.
1
,
S* ^6 9r?
No. 896,950.
PATENTED AUG. 25, 1908.
J. H. STINSON.
REPEATING MECHANISM FOR SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED MAS. 16, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
m
THE NORR.S PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
No. 896,950.
PATENTED AUG. 25, 1908.
J. H. STINSON.
REPEATING MECHANISM FOR SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 16,1908. „„„„„.»„ ,„„m
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
A ^<*
^Witnesses
33.
JDvi-uentor
a«,
otntljS
,»E riotims PETERS CO., VMSHt»OTO«, ». C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JAMES H. STINSON, OF COOKE, MONTANA.
REPEATING MECHANISM FOB SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINES.
No. 896,950.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 25, 1908.
Application filed March 16, 1908. Serial No. 421,311.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, James H. Stinson, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Cooke, in the county of Park and State of
5 Montana, have invented a new and useful
Repeating Mechanism for Sound-Reproduc-
ing Machines, of which the following is a
specification.
This invention relates to machines for the
10 reproduction of sound, commonly known as
phonographs or graphophones, and its object
is to provide an improved means whereby the
needle commonly used in the reproducer will
be caused to return to the point of starting
15 automatically after a piece has been played.
A further object of the invention is to pro-
vide means by which this may be done with-
out injurjT to the record or other parts of the
machine. •
20 The invention consists in certain novel fea-
tures of construction and arrangement of
parts, hereinafter fully described, illustrated
in the accompanying drawing, and specific-
all}7 claimed.
25 In the accompanying drawings: — Figure 1
is a front elevation of the machine construct-
ed in accordance with this invention, the
• parts being in position for the return of the
needle. Fig. 2 is a side elevation of the
30 same. Fig. 3 is a plan view thereof. Fig. 4
is a front elevation showing the parts in the
position assumed when the needle has been
returned and is ready to repeat the piece.
Fig. 5 is a detail of one of the stops used in
35 this device.
Similar numerals of reference are employed
to indicate corresponding parts throughout
the several figures of the drawings.
There is here shown a device attached to
a phonograph of the disk type, although it
will be obvious that by certain changes to be
herein described, this device may be used
equally well for machines of the cylinder
The box containing the driving mechan-
ism is indicated by the numeral 10. At 11 is
shown the driving spindle, provided with the
usual platen 12.
The device in general comprises a trip ar-
ranged for synchronous movement with the
record, a latch engaging the trip, a cam mem-
ber or bar, and a horn supporting member
arranged to be actuated thereby.
The trip and means for synchronously
40
45
50
operating it comprises in the present form 55
certain details now to be described. Held
in any desired position, but preferably be-
tween said platen and the box, is a pulley 13.
Mounted on a slide 14 attached to the side of
the box is a worm wheel 15 whereon is pivot- 60
ally mounted a disk 16 provided with a pin
17 projecting therefrom. The disk 16 is ar-
ranged so that it may be clamped to the
worm wheel 15 in any desired position
around the pivot, thus changing the dis- 65
tance of the pin 17 from the center of the
worm wheel 15, as may be desired. The
worm wheel 15 is mounted on the slide 14 so
as to be adjustable in the direction of the
length thereof. On the slide 14 is formed a 70
bracket 18 supporting a worm shaft 19, pro-
vided with a worm 20, meshing with the
worm wheel 15. Upon the shaft 19 is, also,
mounted a pulley 20 and a cord 21 serves to
connect the pulley 20 with the pulley 13 car- 75
ried on the spindle 11. It will thus be ob-
served that the rotation of the spindle 11
serves to drive through the pulleys and worm
and gear connection the pin 17 in a circular
path around the center of the worm wheel 15. 80
The details of the cam member and horn
supporting member are here shown to con-
sist of certain parts as follows. A slide 21'
is mounted on the casing 10, and in this slide
is held a fulcrum bar 22 adjustable on said 85
slide by any desired means, as the thumb
screw 23. Between the slides 14 and 21 is
mounted the usual horn arm 24 having a
horn supporting member 25 pivoted thereto,
as at 26, said member being, also, arranged 90
to swing at the point 26 in the usual member.
On this bar is supported the horn and repro-
ducer which are not deemed necessary to
be here shown.
At the upper end of the fulcrum bar 22 is 95
provided a pivot 27 from which extends a
cam member 28 arranged to pass beneath
the bar 25. Pivoted at a point near the
outer end of the bar 28 is a swinging latch
29, preferably provided with an upwardly 100
extending arm 30 connected to the outer end
of the bar 28 by a spring as at 3 1 . The lower
end of the swinging latch is provided with a
notch 32, of such size and shape as to receive
the pin 17 when in proper position. Mount- 105
ed upon the bar 25 is an arm 33 carrying a
spring 34 adjustably mounted thereon as at
35. The spring 34 is provided with a later-
896,950
ally extending head 36 arranged in the plane
of the swinging of the latch 29. An adjust-
able stop 37 is, also, mounted upon the bar
28 and a counter-balance spring 38 connects
5 the bar 28 with the slide 21 in such manner
as to relieve the same of the effect of the
weight of the bar 28 and latch lever 29. An
adjustable stop 39 is mounted on the arm 24
and is provided with an enlarged head 40
10 lying in the path of motion of the bar 28.
In the operation of the device, at the be-
ginning of the playing of a record, the parts
will be in about the position shown in Fig. 4.
The needle having been adjusted to the
15 proper starting point, the stop 37 is moved
along the bar 28 until it contacts with the
bar 25 as shown in that figure. The ma-
chine is starting, and as the needle travels
inward on the disk, or lengthwise along the
20 cylinder record, the arm 25 will be moved
in the same direction with the needle. This
will cause the head 36 of the spring 34 to
contact with the latch lever 29 and force the
same in a position intersecting the path of
25 the pin 17. At the same time motion trans-
mitted from the pulley 13 to the worm wheel
15 will cause the same to rotate and the pin
17 to move in a circular path. As the pin
comes into contact with the lever 29, it will
30 slip into the notch 32 and hooking in that
position will raise the bar 28 to the position
shown in Fig. 1. The bar 25 will then slide
along said lever until it contacts with the
stop 37, the action of gravity being assisted
35 by the spring 34. The motion of the pin
continuing, that pin will then slip out of the
slot 32 and release the latch bar 29, the ac-
tion of the spring 31 drawing it away and
permitting the bar 28 to fall and the parts to
40 again assume the position shown in Fig. 4,
thus placing the device in condition to re-
peat the record. It is to be observed that
the pin 17 may be caused to revolve a num-
ber of times before contacting with the latch
45 lever 29 and operating the device, so that it
is not necessary to so exactly proportion the
driving mechanism as to have but one revo-
lution of the wheel 15. It is further to be
observed that the adjustable stop 39 can be
50 arranged so as to prevent the bar 28 from
dropping too hard and thus permitting the
needle to forcibly strike and injure the disk
or other record.
In the use of the device with a machine of
55 the cylinder type, it is simply necessary to
arrange the pulley 13 in a suitable position,
as, for instance, at one end of the cylinder,
in place of underneath the platen 12 and the
cord 21 may be conducted to the pulley 20
60 by any desired arrangement of guide pulleys.
It will be obvious that many minor
changes in the form and construction of this
device may be made without departing from
the principles thereof, and it is not, there-
65 fore, to be confined to the exact form herein
shown and described, but to include all that
properly come within the scope of the inven-
tion.
What is claimed is: —
1. In a device of the character described, 70
the combination with a record support, of a
movable trip, and means for operating the
same synchronously with the record support,
a movable horn support, a cam bar for
moving said support, a latch mounted on 75
said cam bar adapted to move into and out
of the path of said trip arranged to coact
with the trip and move the bar to operating
position and means to move said latch into
the path of the trip. so
2. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a record support, of a
movable trip comprising a revoluble member
provided with a latch contacting device,
means for operating the same synchronously 85
with the record support, a movable horn sup-
port, a cam bar for moving said support, a
latch mounted on said cam bar adapted to
move into and oiit of the path of said trip ar-
ranged to coact with the trip and move the 90
bar to operating position and means to move
said latch into the path of the trip.
3. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a record support, of a
movable trip comprising a revoluble member 95
and a latch contacting device adjustably
mounted thereon, means for operating the
same synchronously with the record support,
a movable horn support, a cam bar for mov-
ing said support, a latch mounted on said 100
cam bar adapted to move into and out of the
path of said trip arranged to coact with the
trip and move the bar to operating position
and means to move said latch into the path •
of the trip. 105
4. In a device of the character described, a
movable trip comprising a revoluble member,
a second member eccentrically and rotata-
bly mounted thereon and arranged to be held
in any desired position, and a latch contact- 110
ing device carried by said second member.
5. In a device of the character described,
the combination of a movable trip comprising
a revoluble member, a second member eccen-
trically and rotatably mounted thereon and 115
arranged to be held in any desired position, and
a latch contacting device, means for operating
the revoluble member synchronously with
the record support, a movable horn support,
a cam bar for moving said support, a latch 120
member mounted on said cam bar arranged
to coact with the trip and move the bar to
operating position.
6. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a record support, of a 125
revoluble trip, means to operate the same
synchronously with the record support com-
prising a driven gear held to revolve with said
trip, a shaft, a driving gear fixed on said shaft,
pulleys on said shaft and record support, and 130
896,950
a belt connecting said pulleys, a movable
horn support, a cam bar for swinging said
support, a latch mounted on said cam bar
adapted to move into and out of the path of
5 said trip arranged to coact with the trip and
move the bar to operating position and means
to move said latch into the path of the trip.
7. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a record support, of a
10 movable trip, means for operating the same
synchronously with the record support, a
movable horn support, a cam bar for moving
said support, means on said cam bar for lim-
iting the motion of said support, a latch on
15 said cam bar adapted to move into and out
of the path of said trip arranged to coact
with the trip and move the bar to operating
position and means to move said latch into
the path of the trip.
20 8. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a record support, of a
movable trip, means for operating the same
synchronously with the record support, a
movable horn support, a cam bar for moving
25 said support, adjustable means on said cam
bar for limiting the motion of said support, a
latch on said cam bar arranged to coact with
the trip and move the bar adapted to move
into and out of the path of said trip to oper-
30 ating position and means to move said latch
into the path of the trip.
9. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a record support, of a
movable trip, means for operating the same
35 synchronously with the record support, a
movable horn support, a cam bar for moving
said support, adjustable means on said cam
bar for limiting the motion of said support,
an adjustable stop to limit the movement of
40 said cam bar, a latch on said cam bar adapt-
ed to move into and out of the path of said
trip arranged to coact with the trip and
move the bar to operating position and
means to move said latch into the path of the
trip. _ 45
10. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a record support, of a
movable trip and means for operating the
same synchronously with the record support,
a movable horn support, a cam bar for mov- 50
ing said support, a latch pivoted on said cam
bar, a spring normally holding said latch out
of the path of said trip, and means to move
said latch into the path of the trip to coact
therewith and move the cam bar to operating 55
position.
11. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a record support, of a
movable trip and means for operating the
same synchronously with the record support, 60
a movable horn support, a cam bar for mov-
ing said support, a latch pivoted on said cam
bar, a spring normally holding said latch out
of the path of said trip, and means mounted
on said support to move said latch into the 65
path of the trip to coact therewith and move
the cam bar to operating position.
12. In a device of the character described,
the combination with a record support, of a
movable trip and means for operating the 70
same synchronously with the record support,
a movable horn support, a cam bar for mov-
ing said support, a latch pivoted on said cam
bar, a spring normally holding said latch out
of the path of said trip, and adjustable means 75
mounted on said horn support to move said
latch into the path of the trip to coact there-
with and move the cam bar to operating po-
sition.
In testimony that I claim 1^he foregoing as 80
my own, I have hereto affixed my signature
in the presence of two witnesses.
JAMES H. STINSON.
Witnesses :
Nels E. Soderholm,
W. A. Brown.
No. 897,053. PATENTED AUG. 25, 1908.
E. C. BOULANGER & J. B. DELATE.
MECHANISM FOE DRIVING THE DIAPHRAGMS OF DISK PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION PILED NOV. 27, 1907.
aA
\-F.
[R ■
V
UK»
J
L
I E
w*
V E r N
Z&'&^/iz <?iS<SG cS , '
<^3^^£^
THF NORMS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ELISE C. BOULANGER AND JEAN BAPTISTE DELAYE, OP PARIS, FRANCE, ASSIGNORS, BY
MESNE ASSIGNMENTS, TO SOCIETE ARTHUR CERF ET CIE., OF PARIS, FRANCE, A CORPO-
RATION OF FRANCE.
- MECHANISM FOR DRIVING THE DIAPHRAGMS OP DISK PHONOGRAPHS.
No. 897,053. Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 25, 1908.
Application filed November 27, 1907, Serial No. 404,047.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, Elise Camus Bou-
langer and. Jean Baptiste Delate, citi-
zens of the French Republic, residing at
5 Paris, France, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Mechanism for
Driving the Diaphragms of Disk Phono-
graphs, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
10 The invention has for its object to produce
the displacement of the sound box of disk
phonographs in an automatic manner, while
dispensing with the costly parts (which are
also difficult to regulate) such as are ordina-
15 rily employed.
The displacement is ordinarily effected by
means of a screw carriage with which there
are engaged at will the jaws of a nut fixed to
the fitting for the trumpet and serving to dis-
20 place it. This disengagement of the sound
box from the disk is effected in the mechan-
ism described, in a special manner; in addi-
tion, an arrangement described permits of
recording or reproducing phonographic post-
25 cards.
Figure 1 is a side elevation of the appara-
tus as a whole. Fig. 2 is a plan view of the
apparatus shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 3 repre-
sents a front elevation of the regulating
30 mechanism. Fig. 4 is a front elevation of
the sound box lifting mechanism.
The apparatus consists of an ordinary
movement M, one of the shafts O of which is
vertical and carries the plate D which at will
35 may receive the disk, or by dispensing with
the screw for fixing the disk, permits of ar-
ranging on the plate a phonographic post-
card for reproduction or recording. With
this object the card is placed upon the plate
40 and is held at the center by means of a flat
ring D' provided with small pins G serving
to center it upon the plate. This disk is
likewise provided with a point Q which en-
ters the card C, and holds it in the normal
45 position necessary to effect its reproduction
or recording.
The trumpet F is mounted on a pillar H
upon which it is able to rotate; this trumpet
carrying a sound box E which in the usual
50 manner is provided with a diaphragm having
a stylus which is placed in contact with the
disk. The movement of the trumpet to
carry the stylus of the diaphragm to and
from engagement with the disk or record is ob-
tained by means of a cam fixed to the sum- 55
mit of the pillar carrying. the trumpet; it
pivots on a shaft in the direction indicated
by the arrow in Fig. 4; this operation re-
sults in causing the upper part of the said
piece to rotate. This part presents the form 60
of a profiled cam, the part B' being eccen-
tric and causing the trumpet F to rise; when
the handle B is turned from right to left, the
center of this cam is concave and enables the
trumpet to be supported in the position ne- 65
cessitated for the efficient operation of the
diaphragm of the sound box. The part L
of the cam is less eccentric in the drawing
but it may present the same form as B',
which would enable the trumpet to be raised 70
whether the handle B is turned to the right
or left.
In Fig. 3 the speed regulating mechanism
and the braking mechanism are shown. The
regulator R is of the ordinary centrifugal 75
ball type and is provided with a disk V
against which the shoe N of the brake may be
caused to bear at will by acting upon the
handle O'. Beneath the shaft of the regula-
tor there is arranged a screw, provided with 80
a plate S against which the disk V strikes and
exerts a braking action so as to modify the
speed of the regulator.
The mechanism for displacing the sound
box which is characteristic of the invention, 85
is as follows : The movement is provided with
a shaft A, which in ordinary running con-
trols the driving screw. This shaft is pro-
longed outside and is provided with a spiral
spring U, which surrounds and is able to ro- 90
tate with the said shaft. At its extermity
this shaft carries a screw threaded portion
provided with a knob U' enabling the inter-
val separating the convolutions of the spring
and consequently their pitch to be modified. 95
A narrow, flexible strip L7 engages on the one
hand between the convolutions and on the
other hand is fixed to the arm H' which is
solid with the pillar H which carries the
trumpet. When the shaft A rotates, its ro- 100
tation produces a corresponding rotation of
the external part carrying the spring U; the
latter rotates and consequently the strip L'
which is engaged between the convolutions
follows the same movement; the result is the 105
pivoting of the pillar H and the displacement
of the trumpet F.
The method of displacement is very sim-
">.
897,053
25
30
pie ; the pitch formed by the convolutions of
the spring may be varied at will and the
rocking movement of the trumpet may be
varied in such a manner as to cause it to cor-
5 respond with the separation of the convo-
lutions recorded or to be recorded. The
spring U may be replaced by a sleeve, exter-
nally screw threaded driven by the shaft A
upon which it would be mounted with easy
10 friction, this sleeve will also be adjustable; as
before, the strip L' engaging between the
convolutions of the screw of the sleeve and
following its movement. The disengage-
ment of the strip L/ from between the convo-
15 lutions and consequently its independence,
is obtained by means of a lever M', which in
rocking about its shaft lifts the strip 1/ by
means of the eccentric part M" with which it
is provided. The result of this method of
20 driving is to permit of recording disks where-
in the interval separating the furrows re-
corded varies, this interval being caused to
vary either by modifying the interval be-
tween the convolutions of the spring or by
changing the pitch of the screw threaded
sleeve.
Having thus described and ascertained the
nature of our invention, and in what manner
the same may be performed, we declare that
what we claim is :
1. A disk phonograph comprising a revo-
luble support adapted to receive the disks, a
diaphragm having a stylus mounted to
traverse a disk on said support and movable
toward or from the center thereof to describe
spiral convolutions thereon, and a feed screw
operatively connected to the revoluble disk
support and the diaphragm and adjustable
with reference to the pitch thereof to cause
40 corresponding variations in the pitch of the
convolutions described by the stylus with
respect to a disk on said support.
2. A disk phonograph comprising a revo-
luble disk support, a diaphragm having a
45 stylus adapted to cooperate with a disk upon
said support and mounted to move toward
or from the center of such disk, and a feed
screw operatively connected to the revoluble
support and cooperating with the diaphragm
50 and having means for adjusting the pitch
thereof to cause the stylus of the latter to de-
scribe convolutions of different pitches upon
the disk rotating with said support.
3. A disk phonograph comprising a revo-
55 luble disk support, a diaphragm mounted to
move toward or from the center of a disk on
said support and having a stylus, a feed screw
operatively connected to the disk support
and to said diaphragm for causing the stylus
60 of the latter to describe convolutions on said
disk as the latter rotates, and means for
varying the pitch of said screw to cause a
corresponding variation in the pitch of the
convolutions described upon the disk by the
65 stylus of the diaphragm.
35
4. A phonograph comprising a revoluble
record support, a diaphragm having a stylus
adapted to cooperate with a record on said
support, and a feed screw having one end
supported and operatively connected to the 70
record support and embodying a convoluted
spring, a part connected to the diaphragm
and cooperating with the convolutions of said
spring for feeding the stylus of the diaphragm
relatively to the record, and means on the 75
opposite or free end of said screw and coop-
erating with such spring to vary the pitch
thereof.
5. A phonograph comprising a revoluble
record support, a diaphragm and stylus 80
mounted to cooperate therewith, and a feed
device rotatably connected to the record
support and comprising a shaft, a helical
spring mounted thereon, a part connected to
the diaphragm and engaging between the 85
convolutions of said spring to feed the dia-
phragm relatively to the record, and a de-
vice adjustable axially of said shaft for com-
pressing or expanding said spring to increase
or decrease the pitch thereof and thereby 90
correspondingly varying the pitch of the
convolutions described by the stylus of the
diaphragm with respect to the record.
6. A phonograph comprising a revoluble
record support, a diaphragm and stylus 95
mounted to cooperate therewith, and a feed
device for the diaphragm comprising a shaft
rotatably connected to the record support, a
helical spring surrounding said shaft and
rotatable therewith, a part connected to the 100
diaphragm and cooperating with the convo-
lutions of said spring for feeding the stylus
of the diaphragm relatively to the record,
and a nut threaded on said shaft and adjust-
able axially thereof for compressing or ex- 105
panding the spring to vary the pitch thereof.
7. A phonograph comprising a revoluble
record support, a diaphragm and stylus
mounted to cooperate therewith, a feed de-
vice comprising a convoluted spring rotata- 110
bly connected to the record support, and a
member movable with the diaphragm and
adjustable to and from operative position
relatively to the convolutions of said spring.
8. A phonograph comprising a revoluble 115
record support, a rotatable standard, a
sound trumpet mounted to rotate with said
standard and provided with a diaphragm
having a stylus to Cooperate with a record on
said support, a feed screw rotatably con- 120
nected to the record support, a member con-
nected to rotate with said standard and
movable to and from operative position
relatively to the feed screw, and a cam
pivoted to said standard and cooperating 125
with said member to disengage the latter
from the screw.
9. A phonograph comprising a revoluble
record support, a rotatable pillar provided
with forked bearing arms at its upper end, a 13
897,053
a
10
15
sound trumpet rotatable with said pillar and
pivotally attached to the bearing arms there-
on so as to swing in a vertical plane, a
diaphragm and stylus on the trumpet mov-
able to and from operative position rela-
tively to a record on said support, and a
cam pivoted on a part of the pillar to turn in
a plane transverse to the axis of the trumpet
and cooperating with the trumpet to sup-
port the latter and the diaphragm in an
operative or an inoperative position.
10. A disk phonograph comprising a rev-
oluble record supporting plate, a ring sur-
rounding the edge of said plate for clamping
a phonographic card thereon, pins for cen-
tering said ring on said plate, the pins being
spaced to receive a phonographic card with-
out perforating the same, and a point ar-
ranged within the card receiving space be-
tween the centering pins and adapted to per-
forate such card to cause the latter to rotate
with said plate.
In testimony whereof we have hereunto
set our hands in presence of two subscribing
witnesses.
ELISE CAMUS BOULANGER.
JEAN BAPTISTE DELATE.
Witnesses :
Dean B. Mason,
Emile Klotz.
20
No. 897,254.
WITNESSES
PATENTED AUG. 25, 1908.
W. H. HOYT.
METHOD OF MAKING SOUND RECORDS.
APPLICATION' PILED MAT 4, 1904.
INVENTOR
BY
ATTORNEYS
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM H. HOYT, OF WYOMING, NEW JERSEY.
METHOD OF MAKING SOUND-RECORDS.
No. 897,254.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Aug. 25, 1908.
Application filed May 4, 1904. Serial No. 206,273.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William H. Hoyt, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Wyoming, county of Essex, and State of
5 New Jersey, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Methods of Making
Sound-Records, of which the following is a
specification.
My invention relates to methods of making
10 sound records, particularly of the flat or disk
type, and has for its object to provide a
method for producing a light, strong and du-
rable record of this character which will be
practically unbreakable and which will not
15 be affected by changes of temperature or
moisture. To this end I make the record of
a suitable body, such as cardboard, and pro-
vide it with a facing of celluloid or like ma-
terial, which is connected with the cardboard
20 by means of an intermediate layer or a
binder, such as shellac, which also prevents
warping of the record.
An apparatus of any suitable construction
may be employed in carrying out my method.
25 for forming or molding the records, the ac-
companying drawing illustrating an ordinary
form of such apparatus.
Figure 1 shows the parts in position before
molding, and Fig. 2 represents them in the
30 position they occupy during molding.
A is the base of the mold, having a central
pin A' projected upwardly therefrom and
adapted to hold the matrix B, upon the up-
per surface of which are formed the grooves
35 which produce the record.
C is the follower or presser-plate for effect-
ing the molding.
According to my invention the record is
made of a body of cardboard, pasteboard,
40 papier mache, or other non-plastic substance,
indicated in the drawing by the letter D.
This body should preferably be somewhat
porous or absorbent. I then apply a thin
coating of a binder such as shellac or a shellac
45 compound to the body D, at least on one side
thereof, but sometimes on both sides. This
coating is indicated at E. Upon the upper
surface of the matrix B I then place a sheet
or disk of suitable plastic material, capable
50 of combining with the shellac or like coating
E under the application of pressure and heat.
This sheet F may consist of celluloid or shel-
lac composition or like gramophone ma-
terial. The cardboard or other body D,
coated as above described on at least one of 55
its surfaces, is then placed on top of the sheet
F, so that the coating E will engage said
sheet. If desired, another sheet F' may be
placed on the top of the body D, in which
case said body should preferably be coated 60
on both surfaces; but if desired, one of the
coatings and the upper sheet F' may be
omitted.
It will be understood that the unfinished
record, that is, the record before molding, 65
consists of at least two separate parts or
disks, one of them being the body D having a
coating E and the other being the sheet F ad-
jacent to said coating. In those cases in
which the sheet F' is used, the record would 70
consist of three pieces before molding.
The molding is accomplished in the usual
way by forcing the plate C toward the ma-
trix, as by hydraulic pressure and under the
application of heat. This causes the irregu- 75
larities of the matrix surface to impress
themselves into the celluloid or other sheet
F, and at the same time the disk F (and also
the disk F', when such is used), are caused to
unite with the coating E. The celluloid or 80
other sheet will also be forced over the edge
of the body D, so as to protect such edge.
This is especially the case when two sheets of
celluloid, F, F', are used, in which case the
body D will be entirely covered by the cellu- 85
loid, and will thus be efficiently protected
against moisture.
The record, made by my improved method,
is exceedingly strong and durable. It may
be bent without cracking or breaking, the 90
impression of the record lines is very accu-
rate, moreover, the record can be made of
great thinness and therefore extremely light.
I claim as my invention, and desire to se-
cure by Letters Patent: 95
1 . The herein described method of making
sound records, which consists in applying a
binder to a non-plastic body, interposing a
sheet of plastic material between said non-
plastic body on the side to which the binder 100
is applied and a matrix, and forcing the body
and sheet toward the matrix under the ap-
plication of heat, to cause the binder and
plastic sheet to unite, and the latter to take
an impression from the matrix. 105
2. The herein described method of making
sound records, which consists in applying a
binder to a porous body, interposing a sheet
897,254
of plastic material between said body on the
side to which the binder is applied and a ma-
trix, and forcing the body and sheet toward
the matrix under the application of heat, to
cause the binder and plastic sheet to unite,
and the latter to take an impression from the
matrix.
In testimony whereof, I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
WILLIAM H. HOYT.
Witnesses :
Daniel Turnet,
Wm. O. Laughno.
No. 897,774. PATENTED SEPT. 1, 1908.
W. J. PATTERSON.
SOUND BOX FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED NOV. 23, 1907.
J^J.
I
^Witnesses
_Fca.&
tf '2L &
I. /?
SttVCMfot
WllmrnJJrb/tkrsoris
3$y
j&Ll^
thc ««»*rrs merrtv co.. Washington, o. c.
50
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM J. PATTERSON, OP COLORADO SPRINGS, COLORADO.
SOUND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 897,774.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 1, 1908.
Application filed November 23, 1907. Serial No. 403,559.
' To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William J. Patter-
son, a citizen of the United States, residing
at Colorado Springs, in the county of El
5 Paso and State of Colorado, have invented
new and useful Improvements in Sound-
Boxes for Talking-Machines, of which the
following is a specification.
This invention relates to improvements in
10 sound-boxes for talking machines, and
particularly to improved means for pivotally
mounting the stylus-carrying bar or lever
upon the box, the object of the invention be-
ing to provide a novel means for mounting
15 the bar by which a free and easy vibratory
action thereof under the pressure of the
stylus is permitted and a delicate and sensi-
tive transmission of the movements of the
needle to the diaphragm insured.
20 A further object is to provide a construc-
tion of mounting for the bar or lever by
which the ready application and removal of
the bar is permitted, and by which the pivot
bearing may be quickly and conveniently
25 adjusted to compensate for wear.
The invention consists of the features of
construction, combination and arrangement
of parts hereinafter fully described and
claimed, reference being had to the accom-
30 panying drawing, in which: —
Figure 1 is a front or face view of a sound-
box embodying my invention. Fig. 2 is a
side elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a sec-
tional elevation on line 3 — 3 of Fig. 1 .
35 Referring to the drawing, the numeral 1
designates a sound-box which may be of con-
ventional or any preferred form, and con-
structed of any suitable material, and 2 de-
notes the diaphragm mounted therein.
40 Disposed upon one side of the sound-box
is a laterally extending block or bracket 3
provided with a pair of spaced flanges or ears
4 disposed at right angles thereto in parallel
relation to each other and projecting slightly
45 beyond the front of the box. This block or
bracket is designed to pivotally support the
stylus-carrying bar or lever 5, which is con-
nected at its inner end in the usual or any
preferred manner with the diaphragm 2, and
carries at its outer end a socket piece 6 to
receive the stylus or needle 7 which is adapt-
ed to be clamped therein by a set screw 8.
The socket piece 6 is formed or provided
upon its under or rear side with a boss or
55 supporting portion 9 having a transverse
opening for the passage of a pivot pin or
shaft 10 removably secured thereto by a
fastening screw or other suitable fastening
1 1 . The ends of this pin, which extend lat-
erally beyond the opposite sides of the boss, 60
form trunnions or pivot members 12 and 13
journaled in the ears 4 to permit pivotal play
of the lever. By this construction the pin
or shaft when worn may be disconnected and
a new one substituted therefor. 65
The extremities of the trunnions or pivot
pins 12 and 13 are tapered or made of conical
form, and the conical end of the pin 13 fits
within a correspondingly shaped bearing re-
cess 14 formed in one of the ears 4, while the 70
conical end of the other bearing pin 12 fits
within a similar bearing recess 15 in a bearing
bushing 16 removably mounted upon the
other ear 4. As shown, the said bushing is in
the form of a screw plug, having a nicked 75
outer end or head by which it may be adjust-
ed by a screw driver or other tool, and said
bushing fits within a screw-threaded receiv-
ing opening 17 in the ear. By this construc-
tion it will be observed that the bearings may 80
be relatively adjusted by turning the screw
to a greater or less extent in and out to secure
a fine fit, thus adapting the arm or lever to be
mounted for an extremely sensitive vibra-
tory action. 85
In applying or removing the stylus-carry-
ing bar from the bracket, which in effect
forms a supporting yoke, the bushing or
screw 16 is turned out to a sufficient extent to
permit the pin 12 to move, into the opening 90
17 far enough to disconnect the pin 13 from
the recess 14, or to admit of its application
within said recess, the opening 17 being of
sufficient diameter to allow the pivot-carry-
ing end of the stylus-bar to be tilted or dis- 95
posed at an angle in the space between the
ears, by which the pivot pins may be readily
engaged with and disengaged from the bear-
ings for the convenient application and re-
moval of the bar. In the application of the 100
bar, after the pin 13 is fitted in position, the
bushing 13 is screwed in until it receives and
bears with the desired pressure against the end
of the pin 12, and it will be apparent that the
degree of pressure may be varied to a nicety, 105
to allow the pivot members to swing with the
proper freedom and without undue looseness.
It will thus be understood that the needle
carrier and the parts thereof are bodily appli-
cable to and removable from the bearing 110
ears, so that a new needle bar and pivot shaft
may be applied whenever occasion requires.
2
897,774
10
Upon loosening the screw 11 and removing
the bushing 16, the shaft 13 is removable lon-
gitudinally through the opening 17, and a
new shaft may be applied in like manner,
thus facilitating the operation of applying a
new shaft when the one in use has become
worn.
It will be seen that the described construc-
tion of parts by which the lever or bar is piv-
otally mounted upon the sound-box not only
allows the bar to be expeditiously applied
and removed, but adajjts the bar to swing
with the required degree of freeness and the
bearings to be adjusted to compensate for
15 wear.
lateral bracket
20 extending at rig
25
Having thus fully described the invention,
what is claimed as new is: —
A sound-box provided at one side with a
laving spaced bearing ears
it angles therefrom parallel
with said side and terminating adjacent the
front of the box, one of said ears having di-
rectly formed therein a conical bearing recess
and the other having formed therein a screw-
threaded opening, an adjustable bearing
bushing inserted in said opening and having
a niched outer end and formed with a conical
bearing recess in its inner end, a stylus-car-
rying bar provided on its rear side with a
boss projecting between the ears and having
a transverse opening, a shaft extending
through said opening and beyond the sides of
the boss and having conical ends journaled in
the respective bearing recesses, and a fasten-
ing detachably securing the shaft to the boss,
the said bar being adapted for tilting move-
ment in the space between the ears when the
bushing is turned outward to a prescribed ex-
tent to permit of the insertion and with-
drawal of said conical ends of the shaft with-
in and from said bearing recesses, whereby
the bar and parts as a whole may be bodily
applied and removed, said shaft also being
insertible and withdrawable longitudinally
through the bearing opening when the bush-
ing is removed.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
WILLIAM J. PATTERSON.
Witnesses :
Howard Marshall Dodd
William Joseph Patterson. Jr.
40
No. 897,836.
PATENTED SEPT. 1, 1908.
E. F. LEEDS & G. RUMPF.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED JAH. 18, 1908.
5 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
■IS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
_
No. 897,836.
PATENTED SEPT. 1, 1908.
E. F. LEEDS & G. PJJMPF.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JAN. 18, 1908.
5 SHEET8-SHEET 2
TH£ NORMS Ptltw CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C
No. 897,836.
PATENTED SEPT. 1, 1908.
E. F. LEEDS & G. FJJMPF.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED JAN, 18, 1908.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
w///#n mhM/M//M//MwOL m///M
po-ca :
bW/7/////^////^^^^^^
£ .
THE MORRIS RCTERS CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C-
No. 897,836.
PATENTED SEPT. 1, 1908.
E. F. LEEDS & G. RUMPF.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED JAN. 18, 1908.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 4.
Oi^-cL S^erryt, /R^y^S cJnt>eVltot<
thc koxsis peters co .. Washington, b. c.
No. 897,836.
PATENTED SEPT. 1, 1908.
E. F. LEEDS & G. RUMPF.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 18, 1908.
6 SHEETS-SHEET 5.
0-CO :
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EDWARD F. LEEDS AND GEORGE RUMPF, OF NEW YORK,
SAID LEEDS.
N. Y.; SAID RUMPF ASSIGNOR TO
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 897,836.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 1, 1908.
Application filed January 18, 1908. Serial No. 411,425.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, Edward F. Leeds
and George Rumpf, citizens of the United
States, residing, respectively, in the county
5 of Kings and in the county of New York, city
and State of New York, have invented new
and useful Improvements in Phonographs, of
which the following is a specification.
This invention relates to phonographs for
10 recording and reproducing sound wherein the
tablet of material suitable for recording
sound, or the tablet having a sound-record
made thereon, revolves and, at the same
time, passes across and is fed to the point of
15 the sound-recording or of the sound repro-
ducing stylus by virtue of suitable mechan-
ism, and has for its object the construction,
in a cheap and practical manner, of a phono-
graph of the kind described embodying the
20 improvements and advantages hereinafter
described with reference to the drawings
wliich form part of this specification.
Referring to the drawings, Figure 1 is a
plan view, and Fig. 2 is an elevation, partly
25 in vertical section, of a phonograph made in
accordance with this invention. Fig. 3 is a
plan view, partly in horizontal section along
the line ab, of a detail of the phonograph
shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a plan view of the
30 mechanism within the box of the phono-
graph shown in Figs. 1 and 2. Fig. 5 is an
elevation, partly in vertical section along the
line cd, of mechanism shown in Fig. 4. Fig.
6 is an elevation, partly in vertical section
35 along the line ez, of mechanism shown in
Fig. 4. Fig. 7 is an elevation, partly in de-
veloping section along the line gz, of a detail
of the mechanism shown in Fig. 4. Fig. 8 is
an elevation of the mechanism shown in Fig.
40 4, viewed from the right side thereof. Fig. 9
is an elevation, partly in vertical section
along the line jz, of a detail of the mechan-
ism shown in Fig. 8. Fig. 10 is a plan view
of that part of the mechanism shown in Fig.
45 8 which is below the line Iz.
Referring to Figs. 1 and 2, A is a box, of
any suitable shape and material, in which the
greater part of the mechanism of the phono-
graph is preferably placed. B is a record-
50 tablet, shown in the form of a disk having a
sound-record made thereon. The record-
tablet B may, however, consist of sound-re-
cording material and be of any suitable shape
or size. C is a suitable support for the
record-tablet B and may, as shown, consist 55
of a disk of metal provided, preferably, with
a covering D of felt or other suitable material
upon its surface next to the tablet B. E is
an arm secured to and extending from, one
side of the box A. The arm E may be pro- 60
vided at its end with a cavity F, having re-
cesses or sockets /and/', as shown in Figs. 2
and 3. G is a bifurcated piece provided with
two pins p and p', entering and fitting re-
spectively into the sockets/ and/', and with 65
a pivot g upon which the bracket II, winch
supports the horn I, turns vertically. J is a
sound-recorder or a sound-reproducer ad-
justed at the small end of the horn I and pro-
vided with a diaphragm and with a stylus s 70
that vibrates vertically, or, as shown, that
vibrates laterally in the recording and repro-
ducing of sound. K is a revoluble shaft ex-
tending up through the top of the box A and
carrying the metal plate C, together with the 75
tablet B. L is an opening, oblong and
slightly curved, as shown by dotted lines in
Fig. 1 , in the top of the box A to permit the
to and fro, lateral or transverse motion of the
revoluble shaft K, which, when it revolves, 80
moves transversely and causes plate C and
tablet B in like manner to revolve and to
move transversely and thus to pass across
the point of the sound-recording or of the
sound-reproducing stylus. As hereinafter 85
shown, the revoluble shaft K moves trans-
versely in the arc of a circle.
The stylus s of the sound-box J is free to
move up and down or vertically by virtue of
the pivot g upon which the bracket H, which 90
carries the horn I, turns. As shown in Figs.
1 and 2 the connection between the small end
of horn I and sound-box J may consist of a
rubber -tube Q, the flexibility of which will
permit stylus s to adjust itself automatically 95
to the thread or groove of a sound-record and
to gravitate to the bottom of the groove; bi-
as shown in Figs. 2 and 3, the pin p need not
quite fill the recess/, so that the part G is ca-
pable of a slight lateral motion by the turn of 100
the pin p' in its socket/', whereby the stylus
s of the sound-box J is capable of such slight
lateral motion as will enable it, in like man-
ner, to adjust itself automatically to the
thread or groove of a sound-record and gravi- 105
tate to the bottom of the groove. Since the
Q
897,836
threads or grooves of a sound-record approxi-
mate 100 to the inch, the lateral motion of
the stylus s, permitted by lateral movement
of the rubber tube Q or of the pin p in the re-
5 cess/, necessary to permit the stylus to ad-
just itself automatically to the record-groove
and to gravitate to the bottom thereof, is so
slight that the stylus is, with regard to lat-
eral motion, practically fixed or stationary.
10 The mechanism by virtue of which tablet
B, resting upon plate C and revolving with
shaft K, is permitted to pass across the point
of stylus s, and in such manner that stylus s
would, if tablet B did not revolve but moved
15 only transversely, describe the arc of a circle
in suitable recording material upon the sur-
face of tablet B, is illustrated in the remain-
ing Figs. 4-10 of the drawings and described
as follows, — 1 is a bed-plate provided with
20 screw-holes 2 at the corners for the passage
of screws to secure the bed-plate to the bot-
tom of box A. 3 is a plate parallel to and
elevated above bed-plate 1 and supported by
three standards 4. In Fig. 8 plate 3 is shown
25 as consisting of a single piece of metal, while
in Figs. 4, 5 and 6 it is shown as consisting
of two pieces, 3 and 3'. 5 is a casing contain-
ing a motor or main spring which is attached
at one end to and winds about a vertical
30 shaft 6. The casing 5 is provided with a
gear-wheel 7 and a worm 8 which revolve
with the casing under the action of the
spring, as is well understood, and, respec-
tively, communicate motion to the two prin-
35 cipal, operative systems or parts of the ma-
chine. Attached to the upper end of shaft 6,
above plate 3, is a wheel 9. The wheel 9 is
provided on its lower side with a cylindrical
piece or sleeve 10 which surrounds shaft 6,
40 passing through plate 3, and engages a pin
11, which passes through shaft 6. The pe-
riphery of wheel 9 is provided with perfora-
tions 12, shown in Fig. 4, or with a crown
gear or ring of vertical cogs instead of the
45 perforations 12. The cogs or perforations 12
on the periphery of wheel 9 are engaged by
gear-wheel 13 which revolves at the end of
shaft 14. The shaft 14 revolves in bearings
in the standards 15 and is provided with one
50 or more projections 16 to engage a key adapt-
ed to enter the hole in the side of the box
shown in Fig. 2 and turn or revolve shaft 14.
When shaft 14 revolves, gear-wheel 13 re-
volves with it and causes the perforated or
55 gear-wheel 9 to revolve, which, being con-
nected with the main spring in the manner
described, winds up the main spring.
In order to prevent the backward unwind-
ing of the mam spring, a stop 17, made of a
60 flat piece of metal or in other suitable man-
ner, is interposed between gear-wheel 13 and
the perforations or cogs of wheel 9. The
stop 17, as shown in the drawings, forms the
end of one arm of a bifurcated, flat piece of
? metal 18 which turns upon a pivot consist- 65
ing, as shown, of a screw 19 entering the top
of shaft 6. A washer 20, of metal or other
suitable material, held down by screw 19,
subjects the stop-piece or bifurcated piece of
metal 18 to sufficient friction to cause it to 70
revolve in either direction in" which wheel 9
revolves.
In winding up the main spring in the man-
ner above described, arm 21 of the bifurcated
piece 18, by coining in contact with gear 7 5
wheel 13, prevents the piece 18 from revolv-
ing or moving beyond a distance sufficient to
carry stop 17 away from between wheel 13
and the perforations or cogs of wheel 9.
Upon ceasing to wind up the main spring, 80
the action of the main spring causes wheel 9
to begin to revolve in the opposite direction,
carrying with it, by virtue of the friction de-
scribed, the bifurcated piece 18, so that stop
17 returns to its position between gear-wheel 85
13 and the perforations or cogs of wheel 9,
where it remains and prevents the backward
unwinding of the main spring.
22 is a vertical shaft upon which two gear-
wheels 23 and 24 revolve together. Gear- 90
wheel 23 meshes with gear-wheel 7 and gear-
wheel 24 meshes with gear-wheel 25, which
revolves together with gear-wheel 26, caus-
ing vertical shaft 27 to revolve at the same
time. Gear-wheel 26 meshes with gear- 95
wheel 28 which causes governor 29, pro-
vided with disk 30, and vertical shaft 31 to
revolve with it.
32 is a piece of leather or other suitable
material carried by an arm 33 of a lever, the 100
arm 33 being raised by the pressure of spring
34 or lowered by the movement of arm 35 or
arm 36 of the lever-piece. Screw 42 in
standard 41 forms the fulcrum for levers
35—33 and 36—33. 105
37 is a screw which turns in its bearing in
standard 41 and may thus be brought to
bear against arm 35 and lower the free end
of arm 33.
38 is a flat piece of metal pivoted about the 110
lower end of standard 41 and provided with
a raised tongue 39 which, when brought in
contact with arm 36, will also lower the free
end of arm 33. The piece 38 moves over a
slightly inclined piece of metal 40 which as- 115
sists tongue 39 in elevating arm 36.
As is well understood, when the end of arm
33 is lowered and the piece of leather or other
material 32 is brought to bear upon disk 30
of the governor 29, the speed of the revolving 120
parts may be regulated as desired, or the mo-
tion of the parts may be stopped altogether.
The screw 37 is used to regulate the machine
so as to secure the desired, proper speed,
while piece 38 is used in the ordinary starting 125
and stopping of the machine in use for the
recording or reproducing of sound.
Shaft 27, revolving as stated with gear-
897,836
a
wheels 25 and 26, extends above plate 3 and
carries at its upper end gear-wheel 43 which
revolves with it and meshes with gear-wheel
44, which in turn meshes with gear-wheel 45
5 carried by the lower end of shaft K. Thus
shaft K revolves by virtue of motion com-
municated from shaft 27 through gear-wheels
43, 44 and 45, and with shaft K plate C and
tablet B revolve as above described.
10 X is a carriage which may, as shown, be
formed of a bent, suitable strip of metal.
The carriage N is pivoted at one end by
means of a collar or sleeve 46 surrounding-
shaft 27 and fitting, revolubly, in the perfo-
15 ration in plate 3 through which the upper
part of shaft 27 passes. The collar 46 is pro-
vided with projecting rings 47 and 48 above
and below plate 3, respectively, in order to
maintain it and parts connected with it in
20 proper position. The lower ring 48 is de-
tachable and held fast by a set-screw 49.
The carriage N carries the pivot for gear-
wheel 44 and bearings for revoluble shaft K.
As clearly shown in Fig. 8, carriage N is so
25 bent or formed that it is elevated above
plate 3 except at the end where it is pivoted.
At the opposite end of the lower part of car-
riage X' and secured beneath it, a sliding-
rest O is provided, adapted to rest upon and
30 slide over the surface of plate 3 and to sup-
port the weight of carriage X and parts car-
ried by it, including revoluble shaft K,
plate C and tablet B. Sliding-rest O may,
if desired, be provided with one or more roll-
35 ers, resting upon the surface of plate 3, to
lessen friction.
Between plate 3 and carriage X is a flat
fan-shaped piece of metal 50 which is pivoted
at one end and held in position in the manner
40 above described for carriage X. The piv-
oted ends of carriage X and of piece 50 are
suitably secured together, as by friction, as
shown or by making carriage X and piece 50
of one piece of metal so that carriage Xand
45 piece 50 revolve or move together. Piece 50
should, preferably, be approximately in the
shape of a sector of a circle and be revoluble
about the center of the circle and should,
near its circumference, be provided with
50 perforations 51, or otherwise adapted as by
cogs, forming a rack, to engage with gear-
wheel 52 carried by one end of shaft 53 and
projecting partially above plate 3 through
perforation 54. The top of gear-wheel 52
55 acts as a laterally-moving feed-piece to com-
municate lateral motion to carriage X and
parts connected and movable therewith.
Shaft 53 carries at its other end gear-wheel
55 which meshes with worm 8. Thus as the
60 main spring, motor or other suitable source
of power causes worm 8 to revolve, motion is
communicated, through gear-wheels 55 and
52 carried by shaft 53 to the revoluble, metal-
piece 50 which carries with it, as it moves,
carriage X and parts carried by and movable 65
with carriage X, all moving in arcs of circles
having centers in shaft 27.
In the construction shown in the drawings
the piece 50 moves from left to right, as
viewed in Fig. 4, when motion is communi- 70
cated thereto from the main spring. In
order to secure the return to the starting
point of piece 50 and parts moving there-
with, carriage X is provided with a handle P
and gear-wheel 52 is so mounted as to permit 75
it to revolve on shaft 53 in one or both direc-
tions when shaft 53 is at rest or in motion
and pressure is applied to a suitable point of
wheel 52 for the purpose. In the construc-
tion shown in the drawings such revolution 80
of wheel 52 is secured by mounting it upon
shaft 53 in such manner that the friction at
the bearing is sufficient to enable shaft 53 to
cause wheel 52 to revolve with it and to im-
part motion to piece 50 and parts connected 85
therewith but not sufficient to prevent the
revolution of wheel 52 upon shaft 53 when
pressure is applied in either direction by
means of handle P which, operated by hand,
communicates lateral motion to carriage X 90
and piece 50 when and as desired.
From the foregoing description, the mode
of operation of the phonograph, forming the
subject matter of this invention, in recording
and reproducing sound, will be readily under- 95
stood. After winding up the main spring in
the manner described, a record-tablet, pro-
vided with a surface of material suitable for
making therein a record of sound, or a rec-
ord-tablet having a sound record already 100
made thereon, is placed upon plate C, shaft
K passing through a hole at the center of the
record-tablet. By means of handle P, shaft
K is moved laterally to right or left with car-
riage X and connected parts in the manner 105
described, until a desired, proper position of
record-tablet B is obtained, which position
may be one where stylus s will, upon being
lowered, rest near the circumference of rec-
ord-tablet B. If the record-tablet carries no
a record made thereon, stylus s wall adjust
itself to the record-groove. Screw 37 and
metal piece 38 being properly adjusted as de-
scribed, wheel 30 is relieved from the pres-
sure of the piece of leather 32 carried by le- 115
ver-arm 33 and the phonograph is set in mo-
tion by the action of the main spring. Rec-
ord-tablet B thereupon revolves with the
revolution of shaft K in the manner described
and is simultaneously moved across and fed 120
to the point of stylus s by reason of the lat-
eral motion communicated to revolving shaft
K through worm 8, shaft 53, wheel 52, car-
riage X and piece 50 with which carriage X is
provided. If the record-tablet B employed 125
was provided with a surface of suitable, re-
cording material when the phonograph was
set in motion and if sound -wraves pass
897,836
through the horn I and impinge upon the dia-
phragm of sound-box J, stylus s will vibrate
laterally or vertically, according to the form
of sound-box employed, as is well under-
5 stood, and will form in the recording mate-
rial, a spiral groove of lateral or vertical un-
dulations, constituting a sound-record. The
spiral-groove constituting the sound-record
may begin near the circumference and end
1 0 near the center of the record-tablet B or may
begin near the center and end near the cir-
cumference thereof or be otherwise formed as
desired. If, on the other hand, the record-
tablet B employed had a sound-record al-
15 ready made thereon when the phonograph
was set in motion, stylus s, upon being low-
ered, will adjust itself to the record-groove
and the lateral or vertical undulations of the
record-groove will cause the stylus to vibrate
20 and communicate its vibrations to the dia-
• phragm of sound-box J and thus reproduce
the sounds originally recorded.
As above stated, shaft K, in addition to
revolving, moves laterally in the arc of a cir-
25 cle while the phonograph is in operation.
The lateral motion in the arc of a circle to be
communicated to revolving shaft K is deter-
mined by the lateral movement necessary to
feed the revolving record-tablet B, provided
30 with a surface of suitable, recording-mate-
rial or having a sound-record made thereon,
to the point of the stylus. In other words,
at all times during one revolution of the re-
cording-tablet B, shaft K is moved laterally
35 in the arc of a circle a distance sufficient to
feed the revolving, spiral record-groove of
a sound-record continuously to the point of
the stylus. This adjustment of the lateral
movement of shaft K and of the spiral line of
40 the record-groove is secured in a phonograph
made according to this invention by the
proper adjustment of the above mentioned
parts, which communicate the lateral mo-
tion referred to from the main spring, and
45 depends mainly, as will be well understood,
upon wheel 55 and upon the relation existing
between the circumferential rack, with which
piece 50 is provided, and wheel 52. The ex-
tent of the required lateral movement of
50 shaft K, during one revolution of record-tab-
let B, being determined with reference to the
distance between adjacent parts or threads
of a spiral record-groove, whether in repro-
ducing sound from a given record or in re-
55 cording sound by making a spiral record-
groove, or, in other words, being determined
by the pitch of the spiral line of the record-
groove, the proper adjustment for the pur-
pose of the necessary parts is readily made,
60 as is well understood. Obviously, any ad-
justment employed in recording records of
sound will be suitable for reproducing sound
from a record made with that adjustment,
but the adjustment should, preferably, be
such that in recording, for example, the sur- C5
face of the recording material upon tablet B
will be fed to stylus s so that in the spiral rec-
ord-groove, when made, there will be ap-
proximately from 85-100 threads to the inch,
measuring along a radius of a disk record- 70
tablet.
The advantages of a phonograph made in
accordance with this invention will be clear
to those skilled in the art to which it apper-
tains. By it there is obtained a practical 75
sound-recording and sound-reproducing ap-
paratus, which can be constructed at small
cost and without difficulty. Moreover, in
the reproduction of sound, by means of a
phonograph embodying this invention, from 80
sound-records, the record-groove passes
across and is fed to the point of the stylus
and the wear of the record caused in phono-
graphs wherein the record-groove propels the
stylus across the face of the record by means 85
of the pressure exerted upon the stylus by the
walls of the record-groove is obviated.
What we claim is ; —
1. In a phonograph, the. combination of a
record-tablet, a revoluble shaft carrying the 90
record-tablet, a pivoted carriage carrying the
revoluble shaft, and a laterally-movable
feed-piece to communicate lateral motion to
the pivoted carriage and cause the revoluble
shaft and record-tablet to be moved in arcs 95
of circles, substantially as described.
.2. In a phonograph, the combination of a
stylus, a record-tablet, a revoluble shaft car-
rying the record-tablet, a pivoted carriage
carrying the revoluble shaft, and a laterally- 100
movable feed-piece to communicate lateral
motion to the pivoted carriage and cause the
revoluble shaft and record-tablet to be moved
in arcs of circles, substantially as described.
3. In a phonograph, the combination of a 105
stylus, a tablet having a sound-record formed
thereon, a revoluble shaft carrying said tab-
let, a pivoted carriage carrying the revoluble
shaft, and a laterally-movable feed-piece to
communicate lateral motion to the pivoted 110
carriage and cause the revoluble shaft and
record-tablet to be moved in arcs of circles,
substantially as described.
4. In a phonograph, the combination of a
record-tablet, a revoluble shaft carrying the 115
record-tablet, a pivoted carriage carrying the
revoluble shaft and provided with rotatable
wheels to revolve the shaft, and a laterally-
movable feed-piece to communicate lateral
motion to the pivoted carriage and cause the 120
revoluble shaft and record-tablet to be moved
in arcs of circles, substantially as described.
5. In a phonograph, the combination of a
revoluble shaft, a pivoted carriage bearing
the shaft, a plate and a sliding-rest attached 125
to the carriage and touching the surface of
the plate, substantially as described.
6. In a phonograph, the combination of a
897,836
revoluble shaft, a pivoted carriage bearing
the shaft and rotatable parts to revolve the
shaft, a plate and a sliding-rest attached to
the carriage and touching the surface of the
5 plate, substantially as described.
7. In a phonograph, the combination of a
revoluble shaft, a pivoted carriage bearing
the shaft, a pivoted piece provided with a
rack, and a revoluble gear-wheel meshing
10 with the rack, substantially as described.
8. In a phonograph, the combination of a
revoluble shaft, a pivoted carriage bearing
the shaft and a revoluble wheel bearing, at
points in the arc of a circle, upon a rack with
15 which the pivoted carriage is provided, sub-
stantially as described.
9. In a phonograph, the combination of a
revoluble shaft, a pivoted carriage bearing
the shaft, a wheel revoluble in both direc-
20 tions bearing upon a rack with which the
pivoted carriage is provided and a handle to
move the carriage upon its pivot, substan-
tially as described.
10. In a phonograph, the combination of a
25 motor, a revoluble, stationary shaft receiv-
ing motion from the motor, a carriage piv-
oted about said shaft, and a revoluble shaft
mounted on the pivoted carriage and receiv-
ing motion from the stationary shaft, sub-
30 stantially as described.
11. In a phonograph, the combination of a
motor, a revoluble, stationary shaft receiv-
ing motion from the motor, a pivoted car-
riage, a revoluble shaft mounted on the piv-
35 oted carriage and receiving motion from the
stationary shaft, and a revoluble wheel re-
ceiving motion from the motor and impart-
ing another motion to the carriage about its
pivot, substantially as described.
40 12. In a phonograph, the combination of a
motor, a worm, a pivoted rack, a shaft pro-
vided with two wheels, one of which is in con-
tact with the worm and the other of which is
in contact with the pivoted rack, and a piv-
45 oted carriage revoluble by the rack, substan-
tially as described.
13. In a phonograph, a pivoted carriage
provided with a revoluble shaft and a sliding-
rest, substantially as described.
50 14. In a phonograph, a pivoted carriage
provided with a revoluble shaft, a sliding-
rest and a handle, substantially as described.
15. In a phonograph, the combination of a
plate, a motor below the plate, a stationary,
55 revoluble shaft receiving motion from the
motor below the plate and passing through
the plate, and a pivoted carriage above the
plate provided with a revoluble shaft receiv-
ing motion from the stationary shaft, sub-
60 stantially as described.
16. In a phonograph, the combination of a
plate and below the plate a worm and shaft
provided with two wheels, one of which is in
contact with the worm, and above the plate a
pivoted carriage provided with a revoluble 65
shaft, and a rack in contact with one of the
wheels carried by said shaft below the plate,
substantially as described.
17. In a phonograph, the combination of a
revoluble shaft, a revoluble record-tablet re- 70
ceiving motion from the shaft, a rack secured
to the shaft, a wheel in contact with the rack
and a stop-piece interposed between the
wheel and rack, substantially as described.
18. In a phonograph, the combination of a 75
revoluble shaft, a revoluble record-tablet re-
ceiving motion from the shaft, a rack carried
b}T the shaft, a wheel in contact with the rack
and a bifurcated stop-piece, one arm of which
is interposed between the wheel and rack and 80
the other arm of which extends to one side of
the wheel, substantially as described.
19. In a phonograph, the combination of a
revoluble shaft, a revoluble record-tablet re-
ceiving motion from the shaft, a rack carried 85
by the shaft, a wheel in contact with the rack
and a stop-piece pivoted about the shaft and
interposed between the wheel and rack, sub-
stantially as described.
20. In a phonograph, the combination of a 90
revoluble shaft, a revoluble record-tablet re-
ceiving motion from the shaft, a rack carried
by the shaft, a wheel in contact with the rack
and a pivoted stop-piece, of which the piv-
oted end is in frictional connection with the 95
rack and revoluble therewith and of which
the free end is interposed between the wheel
and rack, substantially as described.
21. In a phonograph, the combination of a
revoluble shaft, a revoluble record-tablet re- 100
ceiving motion from the shaft, a rack carried
by the shaft, a wheel in contact with the rack
and a pivoted, bifurcated stop-piece, of which
the pivoted end is in frictional connection
with the rack and revoluble therewith and of 105
which one arm is interposed between the wheel
and rack while the other arm extends to one
side of the wheel, substantially as described.
22. In a phonograph, the combination of a
pivoted carriage provided with a revoluble 110
shaft and with a rack, and a wheel engaging
the rack and revoluble by pressure exerted
through the rack, substantially as described.
23. In a phonograph, the combination of a
record-tablet, a revoluble shaft, a pivoted 115
carriage bearing the shaft, a laterally mov-
able feed-piece to communicate lateral mo-
tion to the pivoted carriage and cause the rev-
oluble shaft and record-tablet to be moved
in arcs of circles, a stylus and a mounting for 120
the stylus which permits a slight lateral
movement of the stylus and thereby an ad-
justment of the stylus to a record-groove,
substantially as described.
24. In a phonograph, the combination of a 125
record-tablet, a revoluble shaft, a pivoted
carriage bearing the shaft, a laterally mov-
able feed-piece to communicate lateral mo-
e
897,836
tion to the pivoted carriage and cause the f ev-
oluble shaft and record-tablet to be moved
in arcs of circles, a sound-box provided with
a stylus, and a flexible tube connected with
the sound-box which permits a slight lateral
motion of the stylus and thereby an adjust-
ment of the stylus to a record-groove, sub-
stantially as described.
In witness whereof we have hereunto set
our hands this 15th day of January, 1908. 10
EDWARD F. LEEDS.
GEORGE RUMPF.
Witnesses :
Leo Moeller,
Jos. Isaac.
No. 898,201. PATENTED SEPT. 8, 1908.
J. C. ENGLISH.
SOUND BOX FOR MACHINES FOR RECORDING AND REPRODUCING SOUND.
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 27, 1906.
*^-£&^
^?*l&. <g.
^i&.3. Tj
_Z'
2
^Witn*»»<ti
UJ5^r
5%
elvitjento*
e>
£lttoi>*tei£
J-H£ NORR1S PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOHN C. ENGLISH, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING MACHINE
COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
SOUND-BOX FOR MACHINES FOE, RECORDING AND REPRODUCING SOUND.
No. 898,201.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 8, 1908.
Application filed March 27, 1906. Serial No. 308,224.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, John C. English, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident of
the city of Camden, State of New Jersey,
5 have invented certain new and useful Im-
Srovements in Sound-Boxes for Machines for
lecording and Reproducing Sound, of which
the following is a full, clear, and complete
disclosure.
10 My invention relates to the sound box for
use in machines for recording and reproduc-
ing sound and particularly to the diaphragm
of such sound boxes and to the means for po-
sitioning or adjusting, and for securing the
15 same within the sound box.
The object of my invention is to provide a
diaphragm for a sound box in which no spe-
cial care or skill is required to accurately po-
sition or adjust the diaphragm in its proper
20 position within the sound box and to secure
the diaphragm in such adjusted position
without the use of gaskets or elastic rings or
similar means.
A further object of my invention is to con-
25 struct a diaphragm of such a shape that the
same is not liable to become distorted and
subjected to unevenly distributed strains
when placed within the sound box, but to
stiffen the same both at the edges or periph-
30 ery and also at the center thereof in order to
more accurately and faithfully transmit the
vibrations of sound or speech, and to improve
the quality and quantity of the sound, or
speech reproduced from a recording surface.
35 Further objects of my invention will ap-
pear in the following specification and claims.
In the drawings accompanying this speci-
fication and forming a part thereof, Figure 1
is an end view of a sound box provided with
40 my improved diaphragm; Fig. 2 is a trans-
verse longitudinal section thereof on the line
2 — 2 of Fig. 1 ; Fig. 3 is a similar, sectional
view of a modified form of diaphragm and
Fig. 4 is also a longitudinal sectional view of
45 a modified form of the diaphragm and of the
manner of securing the same within the
sound box.
Similar numerals in the different figures
represent corresponding parts.
50 1 indicates a sound box of any suitable
type provided on its back side with a short
sound conveying tube 2 by which it may be
secured in a suitable manner to the swinging
sound conveying tube of a sound recording
or reproducing machine. 55
3 represents the upper end of a stylus bar
of any suitable description and 4 the connec-
tion between the stylus bar and the dia-
phragm.
The diaphragm 5 consists of a disk 6 pro- 60
vided with an integral cylindrical flange 7 ex-
tending from the periphery of said disk nor-
mal to the plane of the diaphragm. The dia-
phragm may be described as being in the
form of a shallow cup shaped body having 65
cylindrical sides. I may make this dia-
phragm of any suitable metal, such as steel,
phosphor bronze or German silver and I may
form the same either by the use of dies, or by
spinning the edges of a planchet or disk to 70
form the cylindrical flanges. The dia-
phragm so formed is inserted within the in-
ner bore of the sound box so that the edge of
the flange or side of the cup shaped body
rests against the back 1' of said sound box, 75
the outer diameter of the said cylindrical
flange fitting snugly within said sound box
and holding the diaphragm securely in posi-
tion. In order, however, to make sure that
there will be no space between the outer sur- 80
face of the flange 7 and the inner surface of
the sound box which might result in the pro-
duction of undesirable sounds due to the vi-
brations of the flange and its consequent in-
termittent contact with the walls of the 85
sound box, I may place a small quantity of
suitable cement within the sound box and ad-
jacent the back wall 1' thereof before the dia-
phragm is pressed down into position within
the sound box. 90
A diaphragm made, in the manner de-
scribed, is not liable to become distorted or
lose its shape either before or after it is placed
within the sound box, the cylindrical flange
operating to stiffen the edge of the same in 95
addition to forming a sufficient surface by
which the diaphragm may be retained within
the sound box.
By accurately determining the depth of
flange 7, the proper distance between the 100
disk like portion 6 of the diaphragm and the
back V of the sound box may be made uni-
form and of a distance found by actual ex-
periment to be suited for the production of
the best results. No special care need be 105
taken in assembling the sound box to adjust
Q
898,201
the plane of surface of the diaphragm at the
proper distance from the back of the sound
box since the flange 7 of itself by its contact
with the back of the sound box determines the
5 said distance.
The diaphragm may be provided with a
stiffened center by pressing or spinning the
depressed portion 8 at the center thereof.
Said depressed portion preferably extends in
10 a direction away from the end of the stylus
bar in order that the connection 4 may be
made as long as possible to secure elasticity
in the same. Such a diaphragm is shown in
Figs. 2 and 3. I may, moreover, stiffen the
15 center of the diaphragm by pressing or spin-
ning concentric rings 9 in the body of the dia-
phragm, thus rendering the diaphragm in-
sensible to those vibrations which are not
true harmonic curves and are caused by the
20 inaccurate action of the stylus bar and to the
frictional contact between the bottom or
sides of the sound groove and the stylus.
In order to obtain a firmer and more rigid
connection between the flange of the dia-
25 phragm and the sound box, I may provide
the back of the sound box with a circular
channel 10 and within which the flange 7 ac-
curately fits, as plainly shown in Fig. 4, and
a" 'suitable cement may be placed in said
30 groove or on the adjacent surface of the
sound box before the diaphragm is inserted.
I am aware that attempts have been made
to use diaphragms with concentric rings ad-
jacent to the outer periphery for stiffening
35 the outer edge and also that metallic dia-
phragms have been made having concentric
rings above and below the central line or axis
thereof for the purpose of giving amplitude
to the center of the diaphragm and that later
40 in order to produce the best results, it has
been found necessary to stiffen the center of
the diaphragm instead of making the center
highly elastic. I have found, however, that
by providing the diaphragm with a stiffening
45 flange at the periphery thereof and by mak-
ing such flange of a sufficient depth to accu-
rately position the disk like portion of the
diaphragm in the back of the sound box and
for securing and retaining contact between
50 the outer cylindrical surface of the said flange
and the inside of said sound box, that a dia-
phragm so produced, transmits vibrations
more accurately and faithfully than any of
the forms above referred to and moveover,
55 enables me to dispense entirely with the
usual gaskets or retaining rings formed of
rubber or other changeable or perishable ma-
terial. In this way sound boxes may be pro-
duced with substantially uniform recording
60 and reproducing qualities and without parts
which are liable to deteriorate.
While I have described one way in which
my invention may be put into effect, I do not
wish to be confined to the exact form or ar-
65 rangement of parts, since my invention con-
sists broadly of providing any diaphragm
with an integral peripheral stiffening flange.
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to protect by Let-
ters Patent of the United States, is: — 70
1. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, the combination with a sound box,
of a diaphragm provided with an integral cy-
lindrical flange the said diaphragm being re-
tained in said sound box by the engagement 75
between said flange and said sound box and
having the end of said flange engaging the
rear wall of said sound box.
2. In a sound box having a cylindrical
bore, and a circular channel opening into said 80
bore, a diaphragm provided with a cylin-
drical flange at the periphery thereof tightly
fitting within said bore and extending into
said channel.
3. In a sound box having a cylindrical 85
bore, and a circular channel opening into said
bore and concentric therewith, a diaphragm
provided with a cylindrical flange at the pe-
riphery thereof tightly fitting within said
bore and filling said channel. 90
4. In a sound box the combination with
that part of sound box provided with a sound
conveying opening and having a circular
channel concentric therewith, of a dia-
phragm provided with a cylindrical flange 95
fitting tightly within said channel.
5. In a sound box having a groove with
side walls extending longitudinally of the
box, a diaphragm having a flange at its pe-
riphery fitting tightly within said groove. 100
6. In a sound box provided with a bore, a
groove in said bore, a diaphragm having a
flange inclined to the plane of the diaphragm
and fitting tightly within said groove.
7. In a bored sound box provided with a 105
bore, a groove in said bore, a diaphragm hav-
ing a flange inclined to the plane of the dia-
phragm and fitting tightly within said
groove, the inclined side of said flange fitting
tightly within the bore of said box. HO
8. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing having a cylindrical bore therein, said
bore opening in the face of said casing, of a
diaphragm provided with a cylindrical flange
at the periphery thereof snugly fitting within H&
said bore.
9. In a sound box, the combination with a
casing having a cylindrical bore opening in
the face thereof, of a diaphragm provided
with an inwardly extending cylindrical flange l 2 °
at the periphery thereof snugly fitting within
said bore, the inner edge of said flange being
in contact with the back of said casing.
10. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing having a cylindrical bore, of a dia- 125
phragm provided with an inwardly extending
cylindrical flange at the periphery thereof
snugly fitting within said bore, the inner edge
of said flange being in contact with a portion
of said casing.
130
898,20i
11. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing having a bore opening in the face
thereof, of a diaphragm having a flanged
edge fitting snugly within said bore.
5 12. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing having a bore opening in the face
thereof, of a diaphragm having an inwardly
flanged edge snugly fitting within said bore,
the inner edge of said flanged edge being in
10 contact with a portion of said casing.
13. In a sound box, the combination with
a hollow casing, of a diaphragm having a
flanged edge fitting snugly within said cas-
ing, and a stylus bar phonetically connected
15 to said diaphragm, said diaphragm being un-
restrained between said flanged edge and the
point of connection with said stylus bar.
14. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing having a cylindrical bore, of a dia-
20 phragm having a cylindrical flange integral
therewith at the edge thereof fitting snugly
within said bore and a stylus bar phonetic-
ally connected to said diaphragm, said dia-
phragm being unrestrained between said
flanged edge and the point of connection with 25
said stylus bar. ,J|
15. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing having a cylindrical bore, of a dia-
phragm having a cylindrical flange at the pe-
riphery thereof fitting snugly in said bore, 30
said diaphragm being in contact with a por-
tion of said casing extending inwardly from
the cylindrical surface of said bore to posi-
tion said diaphragm.
16. In a sound box, the combination with 35
a casing having a bore opening in the face
thereof, of means carried by said diaphragm
and extending laterally therefrom for hold-
ing said diaphragm snugly in position in said
bore. 40
In witness whereof, I have hereunto set
my hand this twenty-sixth day of March,
A. D. 1906.
JOHN C. ENGLISH.
Witnesses :
Alexander Park,
Alston B. Moulton
898,791.
J. SCHWAN.
SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED AUG. 20, 1907.
Patented Sept. 15, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
WITNESSES
JiffZ
INVESTOR
ATTORNEYS
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
898,791.
J. SCHWAN.
SOUND EEPRODUCING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED AUG. 20, 1907.
Patented Sept. 15, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
J^S
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
Julius /yc7tit^a.?z,
ATTORNEYS
THE NORfflS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JULIUS SCHWAN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINE.
No. 898,791.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 15, 1908.
Application filed August 20, 1907. Serial No. 389,386.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Julius Schwan, a citi-
zen of the United States, and a resident of
the city of New York, borough of the Bronx,
5 in the county and State of New York, have
invented new and useful Improvements in
Sound-Reproducing Machines, of which the
following is a full, clear, and exact descrip-
tion.
10 This invention is an improvement in sound
reproducing machines, relating more espe-
cially to the arrangement of such devices
whereb}r they will at all times occupy a con-
cealed and removed position. With this in
15 view I construct the machine as a permanent
part of a support having a flat top and in the
nature of a table, and movably support the
machine casing below the top. The support
is provided with a number or horns radiating
20 to its border and connecting with the horn of
the machine, which serve to uniformly dis-
tribute the sound waves throughout the
room. By this arrangement it is apparent
that the ordinary use of the support as a
25 table is not impaired, and the machine,
which is to many an unsightly object, is con-
cealed and protected from the dust.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawings forming a part of this specifica-
30 tion, in which similar characters of reference
indicate corresponding parts in all the views.
Figure 1 is a plan or a support in the form
of a library table with the top removed, hav-
ing one embodiment of my improvement
35 applied thereto; Fig. 2 is a cross-section of
the same on the line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1 ; Fig. 3 is a
perspective view of the support shown in Fig.
1, with the top partly broken away showing
the position of the radiating horns; and Fig.
40 4 is a like view of the invention applied to a
round-top support in the form of a dining
table.
In connection with a flat-top support in
the nature of a library table or dining table 5,
45 I make as a permanent part thereof any ordi-
nary or other preferred form of sound repro-
ducing machine, that shown consisting of a
motor 6 which drives the record holder 7
through the intermediary of pulleys 8 and 9,
50 respectively carried by the motor and holder
and connected together by a belt. 10, said
belt and pulleys being arranged at the bot-
tom of the machine casing, which, as shown,
is in the form of a drawer 11 having flanges
55 11 a at its top edges slidable in wise directly
' underneath the flat top. This precise man-
1 ner of movably mounting the drawer is,
however, not material, as it is only essential
to my invention that the drawer be movably
supported directly under the top and closely 60
adjacent thereto.- The machine further in-
cludes a winding stem 12 and a starter 13 for
the motor, as well as a stopping device 14,
all of which pass through the front of the
casing where they are provided with suitable 65
devices for their convenient operation.
The horn 15 of the machine is preferably
directed to the back of the casing and is sup-
ported in any suitable manner in alinement
with the neck of a series of radiating horns 70
16, which are substantially horizontally dis-
posed and lead to the depending marginal
flange 17 of the support, where openings are
provided covered with ornamental perforated
plates 18; this construction obviously oper- 75
ating to substantially uniformly distribute
the sound waves about the room. As shown,
the horn 15 telescopes with the neck of the
radiating horns, which is received within an
opening formed in the rear of the drawer, and 80
is insulated by a ring of rubber or other like
material 19 in order that the resonance of the
horns may not be impaired.
^The arrangement and construction provide
for the convenient access to the machine and 85
its operation without impairing the ordinary
use of the support, and the talking machine,
wdhch is to many an unsightly object, is re-
moved from view as well as protected from
dust. 90
While I have illustrated the preferred con-
struction and arrangement of my invention,
it is apparent that various immaterial
changes may be resorted to within the scope
of the invention as denned in the claims 95
annexed.
Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent :
1. In combination with a support having 100
a flat top, a sound reproducing machine hav-
ing a . casing supported from and movably
mounted directly under said top.
2. In combination with a support having
a top provided with a depending marginal 105
flange, a horn fixed directly beneath said top
leading to an opening in said depending
marginal flange, and a sound reproducing
machine having a casing movably supported
under the top and provided with a horn adapt- no
898,791
ed to telescope with the first mentioned horn
when the casing is disposed hi normal opera-
tive position.
3. In combination with a support having
5 a top provided with a depending marginal
flange having openings therein, radiating
horns laterally disposed directly beneath
said top leading to said openings and having
a common neck, and a sound reproducing
10 machine located under said top having a
horn adapted to telescope with the neck of
said radiating horns when in operative posi-
tion.
4. In combination with a support having
15 a flat extended top provided with a depend-
ing marginal flange having openings therein,
a series of radiating horns fixed directly be-
neath the top of the support and connecting
with said openings, and a sound reproducing
20 machine located directly under the top of
the support at substantially the same eleva-
tion as the said horns and connected there-
with.
5. In combination with a support having
25 a flat top provided with a depending mar-
ginal flange having openings therein, a series
of radiating horns substantially horizontally
disposed and secured directly beneath said
top and leading to said openings, perforated
30 plates covering said openings, and a sound
reproducing machine concealed under the
top of the support at substantially the same
elevation as the radiating horns and connect-
ed therewith.
35 6. In combination with a support having
a flat top, a sound reproducing machine hav-
ing a casing slidably supported from and ar-
ranged directly under said top.
7. In combination .with a support having
40 a flat top provided with a depending mar-
ginal flange, a sound reproducing machine
having a casing slidably supported directly
under said top with one side of the casing
forming a continuation of said flange when
the casing is in operative position. 45
8. In combination with a support having
a flat top provided with a depending mar-
ginal flange, a sound reproducing machine
having a casing located directly under said
top with one side of the casing forming a con- 50
tinuation of said flange when the casing is in
operative position, and means for control-
ling the machine passing through that por-
tion of the casing forming a part of the
flange. 55
9. In combination with a support having
a top, a sound reproducing mechanism hav-
ing a casing supported from and movably
mounted under the top, and including means
for winding, starting and stopping said 60
mechanism passing through the front of the
casing.
10. In combination with a support having
a top, a horn secured directly under said top,
and a sound reproducing machine having a 65
casing movably mounted under said top and
including a horn adapted to telescope with
the first mentioned horn when the casing is
moved to operative position.
11. In combination with a support having 70
a top, a horn secured beneath said top, a
sound reproducing machine having a casing
movably mounted under said top and in-
cluding a horn adapted to telescope with the
first mentioned horn when the casing is in 75
operative position, and means for insulating
that portion of one of said horns which
passes through the casing.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of 80
two subscribing witnesses.
JULIUS SCHWAN.
Witnesses :
W. W. Holt,
John P. Davis.
C. W. SCHWANK.
DISK RECORD ATTACHMENT FOR SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 10, 1908. -
898,792.
Patented Sept. 15, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
8 8 $!*>
>
t)o^
$**H
n0ti
■,&r8
ttffi/.
TUB NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
C. W. SCHWANK.
DISK RECOBD ATTACHMENT FOE SOUND EEPEODUCING MACHINES.
&PPLICATIOH FILED MA.B- 10, 1908.
898,792.
Patented Sept. 15, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
J7iz?#7zfor
THE NORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHARLES W. SCHWANK, OF KANSAS CITY, MISSOURI.
DISK-RECORD ATTACHMENT FOR SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINES.
No. 898,792.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 15, 1908.
Application filed March 10, 1908. Serial No. 420,128.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Charles W. Schwank,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Kansas City, in the county of Jackson and
5 State of Missouri, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Disk - Record
Attachments for Sound - Reproducing In-
struments, of which the following is a speci-
fication.
10 This invention relates to sound reproduc-
ing instruments and more particularly to
disk attachments for cylinder graphophones
or phonographs, and my object is to produce
an ellicient and reliable attachment of this
15 character capable of quick and easy attach-
ment to or removal from any of the approved
sound reproducing instruments.
A further object is to produce an attach-
ment of this character of simple, compact,
20 small, durable and inexpensive construction.
With these objects in view and others as
hereinafter appear, the invention consists in
certain novel and peculiar features of con-
struction and organization as hereinafter
25 described and claimed, and in order that it
may be fully understood reference is to be had
to the accompanying drawings, in which —
• Figure 1, is a top plan view of a grapho-
phone of well known type, equipped with an
30 attachment embodying my invention, the
attachment being shown in section in the
plane of the underside of the disk-record-car-
rying plate. Fig. 2, is an end view of the
same. Fig. 3, is a vertical section taken on
35 the line III — III of Fig. 2. Fig. 4, is a verti-
cal section on the dotted line IV of Fig. 2.
Fig. 5, is a top view of the vertically adjust-
able bridge bar. Fig. 6, is an inverted plan
view of the attachment for the disk-record-
40 carrying plate and track. Fig. 7, is a detail
perspective view of one of the standards
supporting and guiding the bridge bar. Fig.
8, is a detail perspective view of one of the
clamp hooks of the attachment. Fig. 9, is
'5 a section of a part of the horn to illustrate
the construction of the clamp forming part
of the attachment.
In the said drawings, 1 indicates the case
of a cylinder graphophone or other similar
b0 instrument. 2 is the metal frame thereof in
which is journaled the cylinder 3, adapted to
be driven in the usual manner during the
sound reproducing operation.
Referring now to the attachment, 4 indi-
m cates a bar provided with a longitudinal
slot 5, and near its center and at one side of
said slot with an upwardly projecting guide
pin 6.
7 indicates a standard rigidly secured on
bar 4 near one end of the same and provided 60
by preference with a foot 8. 9 indicates a
standard secured upon the opposite end of
bar 4 and provided with a foot 10 projecting
beyond the corresponding end of bar 4 and
equipped at such projecting end with a 65
bifurcation 1 1 for the reception of the clamp-
ing screw 12 hereinafter referred to more
particularly.
The standards 7 and 9 are provided in their
upper ends with bifurcations 13 and are 70
also provided below said bifurcations with
holes 14.
15 and 16 indicate corresponding bars pro-
vided at their outer ends with hooks 17 con-
stituting what are hereinafter termed slidable 75
hook clamps. Each of said slidable hook
clamps is provided with a longitudinal slot
18 and at its inner end with an upwardly pro-
jecting head 19, said head being notched at
each side at its lower end at 20 so as to pro- 80
vide the narrow neck 21 uniting the head
with the body of the clamp, and slidingly
occupying the slot 5 of bar 4. The walls of
the slots 18 in the slidable hook clamps are
preferably beveled as at 22 in order to pro- 85
vide countersinks wherein may be inclosed
the heads of screw bolts 23 extending up
through said slots into bar 4 for the purpose
of providing in conjunction with necks 21,
guides which will insure direct endwise recip- 90
rocation or adjustment of the slidable hook
clamps.
24 indicate adjusting screws mounted in
holes 14 of the standards 7 and 9 and having
their inner ends secured in any well-known 95
or suitable manner to the heads 19 of the
slidable hook clamps so that when said screws
are turned the hook clamps shall be caused
to approach or recede from each other.
25 indicates the top or bridge bar of the 100
device, the same being provided in its oppo-
site edges near its ends with notches 26 to
receive the bifurcated upper ends of stand-
ards 7 and 9, the relation being a sliding one
so that said bridge bar may be moved up- 105
ward and downward to accommodate cylin-
ders 3 of varying diameter or height. The
bridge bar is provided with a hole 27 to re-
ceive the guide pin 6 of bar 4 and at each end
with a threaded hole 28 for the reception of 110
the vertical screws 29, the lower ends of said
screws being swiveled to the foot portions of
£2
898,792
the standards so that when the screws are
turned in one direction or the other the
bridge bar will be raised or lowered.
To prevent any chance of rocking move-
5 ment of the bridge bar, it is provided with a
depending bracket 30 having a guide notch
or opening 31 in sliding engagement with pin
6, the lower arm 32 of the bracket provided
with said notch or opening 31, also forming
10 a rest bearing for the lower end of a vertical
shaft 33 journaled in a hole 34 in the bridge-
bar and in the overhanging arm 35 of an
angle bracket 36 secured to the bridge bar.
The upper end of the shaft is secured cen-
15 trally to a circular plate 37 occupying a plane
just above the top of the cylinder 3 and un-
derlying said plate and interposed between
the same and the cylinder is a circular track
38 arranged concentrically of shaft 33, said
20 track being preferably of spring metal and
yieldingly connected to plate 37 by spring
arms 39, and in order to create and maintain
friction between the circular track and the
cylinder, the former is equipped at its lower
25 side with a rubber or equivalent friction ring
40. Secured upon the plate 37 so as to turn
therewith, in any suitable manner, is an
ordinary disk-record 41, the preferred con-
nection being to provide the plate with a pin
30 42 to extend up through the central hole, not
shown, in the disk-record and to interpose a
circular piece of fabric 43 between the plate
and disk-record so that the former shall be
incapable of turning without imparting like
35 movement to the latter.
44 indicates a speaker of any suitable type
provided with the usual pin 45 for engage-
ment with the disk record. Tins speaker is
connected as shown or in any other suitable
40 manner to the horn 46 supported near its
outer end from a crane 47 in the usual or any
preferred manner. To supply an adjustable
support for the inner end or the horn and the
speaker in order that the latter may properly
45 track on the record as the latter revolves, I
provide the following construction: 48 is a
bar to be slipped at one end between the hook
clamp 15 and the foot 10 of standard 9, said
end being equipped with the clamp screw 12
50 hereinbefore referred to, in order that said
screw may be utilized to clamp bar 48 rigidly
to said foot 10. The bar 48 may be disposed
at any angle to foot 10 and extends upwardly
and forwardly therefrom and terminates in
55 an upwardly projecting arm 49 having an
inturned lip 50 at its upper end and carried
by arm 49 is a clamping screw 51 for engage-
ment with the depending arm 52 of the swing
bar 53, said end being journaled in bar 48
60 and its lip 50 and clamped at the desired
point of adjustment therein by said clamping-
screw. At its free end bar 53 terminates in
an upwardly disposed hook 54 to engage and
support the reduced or inner end of the horn.
65 55 ?? a sleeve journaled to operate horizon-
tally on arm 52 above the lip 50 and pivoted
to work vertically to sleeve 55, is a bar 56,
winch bar is also pivoted to work vertically,
at 57, to the bracket 58 pivotally supporting
a clamp ring 59; said ring comprising two 70
members 60 and 61 hinged together at 62.
The free end of one member pivotally carries
a link 63 having at its opposite end a spring
lever 64. This link is adapted to enter the
bifurcation 65 in the free end of the other 75
spring member, 61, when the spring lever is
operated in the direction indicated by the
arrow Fig. 9, to the position shown, to clamp
the member 61 firmly to the neck of the horn.
In the drawings the speaker is shown in 80
operative relation to the disk, so that as the
cylinder revolves the disk will be driven
through the frictional engagement between
the track and cylinder, the music of the
record being reproduced by the speaker and 85
amplified by the horn in the usual manner.
It will be observed that the progress of the
needle inwardly on the disk-record as custom-
ary, is permitted because of what may be
termed the universal joiut connection be- 90
tween the clamp secured to the horn and the
supporting bar 48, it being further .observed
that any vertical play of the needle neces-
sitated or caused by the grooved disk-record
is accommodated by the movement in a 95
vertical plane of the link bar 56. After the
piece has been reproduced the operator
grasps the speaker or a nearby part of the
horn to lift the needle from the disk record
and then swings the speaker outward until 100
the needle is disposed beyond the periphery
of the disk. To support the speaker in such
inoperative position its reduced or inner end
is disposed in the hook of bar 53 and to guard
against accidental movement said bar may 10 5
be clamped at the desired point of adjust-
ment by clamping screw 51.
To dismantle the attachment, the lever 64
is swung in the opposite direction to that in-
dicated by the arrow, Fig. 9, such movement 110
of the lever withdrawing link 63 from the
bifurcation of spring member 61, to permit
said spring member and its companion mem-
ber 60 to be withdrawn from engagement
with the horn. The clamp screw 12 is then 115
turned to permit bar 48 to be withdrawn
from engagement with foot 10. The horn
and speaker supporting means is then re-
moved. One of the screws 24 is then turned
to move the slidable clamps apart slightly to, 120
permit the attachment proper, to be slid off
the case.
From the above description it will be ap-
parent that I have produced a disk-record
attachment for sound reproducing instru- 125
ments embodying the features of advantage
enumerated as desirable and I wish it to be
understood that I reserve the right to make
all changes properly falling within the spirit
and scope of the appended claims. 130
898,792
Having thus described the invention what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent, is: —
1. An attachment of the character de-
5 scribed, comprising a bar provided with
standards, a bridge bar connecting the
standards, a suitably journaled shaft sup-
ported from the bridge bar and equipped
with a disk-record-carrying plate and a cir-
10 cular track rotatable with said disk and ar-
ranged near one face of and capable of being
pressed into contact with said plate.
2. An attachment of the character de-
scribed, comprising a bar provided with
15 standards, a bridge bar connecting the
standards, means for adjusting said bar on
its standards toward or from the standard-
carrying bar, a suitably journaled shaft sup-
ported from and adjustable with the bridge
20 bar and equipped with a disk-record-carry-
ing plate, and a circular track rotatable with
said shaft.
3. An attachment of the character de-
scribed, comprising a bar provided with
25 standards, a bridge bar connecting the
standards, means for adjusting said bar on
its standards toward or from the standard-
carrying bar, a suitably journaled shaft sup-
ported from and adjustable with the bridge
30 bar and equipped with a disk-record-carrying
plate, and a circular track rotatable with said
shaft, and of resilient material and provided
with a friction face.
4. An attachment of the character de-
35 scribed, comprising a bar provided with
standards, a guide pin between and parallel
with said standards, a bridge bar slidingly
mounted on the standards and said guide pin
and provided with an opening, a bearing
40 bracket secured to and projecting upward
from the bridge bar and overlying the open-
ing thereof, a bracket depending from the
bridge bar and provided with a foot under-
lying the said opening of the bridge bar, hav-
45 ing a guide opening engaging said guide pin,
a shaft journaled in the overlying bracket,
and extending through said opening of the
bridge-bar and resting on the foot of the said
underlying bracket, a disk - record - carrying
50 plate secured to the upper end of said shaft,
and a resilient circular track underlying and
rotatable with said plate.
5. An attachment of the character de-
scribed, comprising a bar provided with
55 standards, a bridge bar connecting the
standards, a suitably journaled shaft sup-
ported from the bridge bar and equipped
with a disk-record-carrying plate, a circidar
track rotatable with said shaft and arranged
60 near one face of and capable of being pressed
into contact with said plate, and means for
securing the standard-carrying bar rigidly to
a stationary part of a sound-reproducing in-
strument.
65 6. An attachment of the character de-
scribed, comprising a bar provided with
standards, a bridge bar connecting the stand-
ards, a suitably journaled shaft supported
from the bridge bar and equipped with a disk-
record-carrying plate, a circular track rota- 70
table with said shaft, and clamps adjustably
connected to the standard-carrying bar for
securing the latter to a stationary part of a
sound-reproducing instrument.
7. An attachment of the character de- 75
scribed, comprising a bar provided with
standards, a bridge bar connecting the stand-
ards, a suitably journaled shaft supported
from the bridge bar and equipped with a disk-
record-carrying plate, a circular track rota- 80
table with said shaft, and a pair of clamping
hooks slidably connected to and underlying
the standard-carrying bar, and screws mount-
ed in the standards of said bar, and engaging
said clamping hooks to adjust them toward 85
or from each other.
8. The combination with a sound repro-
ducing instrument having a driven cylinder,
of an attachment comprising a standard-car-
rying bar overlying the case of said instru- 90
ment, a bridge bar vertically adjustable upon
said standards, a vertical shaft suitably jour-
naled and supported from and vertically ad-
justable with said bridge bar, a disk-record-
carrying plate secured to the upper end of 95
said shaft and at one side of the same over-
lying said cylinder, a circular track rotatable
with and underlying said plate and inter-
posed between the same and the cylinder at
one side of said shaft and exerting a yield- 100
ing downward pressure on said cylinder, a
speaker, and adjustable means bearing a
fixed relation at one end to the standard-car-
rying bar and supporting said speaker with
its needle in operative relation to the disk- 105
record.
9. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument having a driven cylinder,
of an attachment comprising a standard-car-
rying bar overlying the case of said instru- 110
ment, a bridge bar vertically adjustable upon
said standards, a vertical shaft suitably jour-
naled and supported from and vertically ad-
justable on said bridge bar, a disk-record-
carrying plate secured to the upper end of 115
said shaft and at one side of the same over-
lying said cylinder, a circular track rotatable
with and underlying said plate and inter-
posed between the same and the cylinder at
one side of said shaft and exerting a yield- 120
ing downward pressure on said cylinder, a
speaker, adjustable means bearing a fixed re-
lation at one end to the standard-carrying
bar, and supporting said speaker with its
needle in operative relation to the disk rec- 125
ord, and an adjustable bar forming a part of
said means and adapted for supporting the
speaker when in inoperative relation to the
disk-record.
10. The combination with a sound-repro- 130
898,792
ducing instrument embodying a case, a
driven cylinder, a needle-equipped speaker
and a horn connected to said speaker, of an
attachment secured to the case and embody-
5 ing a shaft suitably journaled and disposed
in line with and at right angles to the axis of
the said cylinder and provided at the upper
end with a disk-record carrying plate partly
overlapping the cylinder, and with a circular
10 track underlying but rotatable with said
plate, and also partly overlapping said cylin-
der and exerting a yielding pressure thereon,
a bar secured to and projecting from said at-
tachment and provided at its outer end with
15 a lip, a swing bar journaled for horizontal ro-
tation in said bar and its lip and provided
with a hook at its free end for engagement
with the horn to support the inner end of the
same, and means carried by the lip-equipped
20 bar for securing the hook-equipped bar at the
desired point of adjustment.
11. The combination with a sound-repro-
ducing instrument, embodying a case, a
driven cylinder, a needle-equipped speaker
25 and a horn connected to said speaker, of an
attachment secured to the case and embody-
ing a shaft suitably journaled and disposed
in line with and at right angles to the axis of
said cylinder and provided at the upper end
30 with a disk - record - carrying plate partly
overlapping the cylinder, and with a circular
track underlying but rotatable with said
plate and also partly overlapping said cylin-
der and exerting a yielding pressure thereon,
35 a bar secured to and projecting from said at-
tachment and provided at its outer end with
a lip, a swing bar journaled for horizontal ro-
tation in said bar and its lip and provided with
a hook at its free end for engagement with the
40 horn to support the inner end of the same,
means carried by the lip-equipped bar for se-
curing the hook-equipped bar at the desired
point of adjustment, a sleeve journaled for
horizontal movement on the hook-equipped
bar, a clamp detachably secured to the horn 45
near the speaker, a bracket pivoted to said
clamp for substantially horizontal movement,
and a link bar pivotally connecting the said
sleeve and said bracket and capable of piv-
otal movement in a vertical plane. 50
12. In an attachment of the character de-
scribed, a shaft suitably supported, a disk-
record-carrying plate mounted upon said
shaft and a circular track rotatable with said
disk and arranged near one face and capable 55
of being pressed into contact with said plate.
13. An attachment of the character de-
scribed, comprising means capable of being
secured to a sound reproducing instrument, a
shaft suitably journaled in and carried by 60
said means, a disk - record - carrying plate
mounted on said shaft, and a circular track
rotatable with said shaft and arranged near
one face and capable of being pressed into
contact with said plate. 65
14. The combination with a sound repro-
ducing instrument embodying a case, a
driven cylinder, a needle-equipped speaker
and a horn connected to said speaker, of an
attachment secured to the case, a shaft 70
suitably journaled therein and provided with
a disk-record-carrying plate, and a circular
track engaging the circumferential surface of
the cylinder and rotatable with said shaft
and capable of yielding under the pressure of 75
the cylinder and moving toward the adjacent
face of the said plate.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature,
in the presence of two witnesses.
CHARLES W. SCHWANK.
Witnesses :
Frank R. Glove,
G. Y. Thorpe.
E. H. MOBLET.
SOUND BOX FOE TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED AUG. 17, 1907.
899,256.
Patented Sept. 22, 1908.
-fftgr- y.
■2S
iig,6.
15
19 19
17"-
7
JPxJq.9,
o
-/G*
a'
Q
19
23
/S
ie
Zz
n
*^-zs
2o Zi 2°
-Fly 3.
7&
/s
/s~
c- - m=n— -c
/3 /3
2fxJa_'d*
/3-
JS-
l 1
-/6
/y-
16-
I9SZZ
X,
17-
2Z-0
zz
a
19
17
[Za/.8.
THE NORMS PETERS CO\, WASHINGTON, 0. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EDWIN H. MOBLEY, OF HILLSIDE, PENNSYLVANIA.
SOUND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES,
No. 899,256.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 22, 1908.
Application filed August 17, 1907. Serial No. 389,029.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Edwin H. Mobley, a
citizen of the United States, residing in Hill-
side, Montgomery county, Pennsylvania,
5 have invented certain Improvements in
Sound-Boxes for Talking-Machines, of which
the following is a specification.
My invention relates to that class of sound
boxes which are employed in connection with
10 disk records, one object of my invention
being to facilitate and cheapen the construc-
tion of the stylus lever; another object being
to provide for the ready application to or
removal from the stylus lever of the stylus or
15 needle which engages with the record, and
a still further object being to so pivot said
stylus lever that an extremely sensitive ac-
tion of the same will be insured. These ob-
jects I attain in the manner hereinafter set
20 forth, reference being had to the accom-
panying drawing, in which
Figure 1 is a vertical longitudinal section
of a sound box for talking machines con-
structed in accordance with my present in-
25 vention; Fig. 2 is a transverse section on the
line a — a, Fig. 1 ; Fig. 3 is a transverse sec-
tion on the line b — b, Fig. 1 ; Fig. 4 is a bot-
tom view of part of the stylus lever, partly
in section, on the line c — c, Fig. 3 ; Fig. 5 is
30 a view of the blank from which the stylus
lever is made; Figs. 6 and 7 are views illus-
trating modified forms of stylus lever; Fig.
8 is a view of the blank from which the
stylus lever shown in Fig. 6 is produced, and
35 Fig. 9 is a view of the blank from which the
stylus lever shown in Fig. 7 is made.
Referring in the first instance to Fig. 1 of
the drawing, 1 represents the cup-like casing
of the sound box to which the diaphragm 2
40 is secured in any suitable manner, a screw cap
3 in the present instance serving to confine
the outer portion of the diaphragm against a
suitably located seat on the casing.
Secured to one side of the casing 1 is a
45 block 4 provided with laterally separated
caps 5, and between these caps is disposed
the stylus lever 6, which bears at its inner
end upon the central portion of the dia-
phragm 2 and is so constructed as to carry
50 the needle or stylus 7 which engages with the
groove of the record in such manner that it
will be vibrated in the directions indicated by
the double arrow in Fig. 1, said vibrations
being therefore transmitted through the me-
55 dium of the lever to the diaphragm 2.
The stylus lever is pivoted to the block 4
by means of outwardly extending, upwardly
curved, and pointed pins 9 projecting from
the underside of the lever, as shown in Fig.
2, the pointed ends of these pins being seated 60
in conical recesses formed in the undersides
of the cap plates 5 of the block 4, and being
maintained in contact with said cap plates
by means of a spring 10 contained in the re-
cess 1 1 of said block 4 and disposed in advance 65
of the pivot pins 9, said spring terminating
at the top in an upwardly extending and
axially disposed pin 12 which enters a recess
in the underside of the sytlus lever, as shown
in Fig. 1. 70
The head of the stylus lever is split verti-
cally, as shown in Figs. 1 and 2, and each
member 13 of the split head has formed in
it a semi-circular recess 14, these recesses
combining to form a socket for the reception 75
of the stylus 7, which is so proportioned in
respect to the recesses 14 that when it is in-
serted in the socket formed by the latter it
tends to spring apart the members 13 of the
split head of the lever, and is therefore re- 80
tained in position by the factional hold of
said members upon it.
Each member of the split head of the lever
carries a pin 15, which passes freely through
an opening in the opposite member of the 85
head, whereby inward pressure upon these
pins will serve to effect the spreading apart
of the members 13 of the head, and will thus
permit of the withdrawal of a worn stylus
and the insertion of a fresh one, the release 90
of the pins from pressure permitting the
members of the lever head to again spring
towards each other and clamp the stylus be-
tween them.
While the stylus lever may, if desired, be 95
cast with a solid head in which the various
openings and slots can be formed by boring,
drilling, sawing, milling, or the like, I prefer
to facilitate and cheapen the construction of
the stylus lever by first forging a blank of 100
the character shown in Fig. 5, this blank
comprising a stem 16, with enlarged head 17,
having oppositely projecting pins 19, oppo-
site longitudinal grooves 20, a central lon-
gitudinal incision 21, and openings 22 and 23 105
and a depression or pocket 24 on each side
of the longitudinal center, whereby, when
the expanded head of said forging is folded
or bent upon a central longitudinal line and
the pins 19 bent outward and upward, said 110
pins will constitute the pivot pins 9 of the
i lever, the grooves 20 will form the socket
899,256
for the reception of the stylus, the pockets 24
will form the recess for receiving the upper
end of the spring 10, and the openings 22 and
23 will provide for the proper mounting of
q the spreader pins 15, the central incision 21
insuring the separation of the opposite mem-
bers 13 of the lever head and providing for
the desired elasticity of the same in order
that they may retain the stylus by gripping
20 it between them.
Certain features of my invention can, how-
ever, be embodied in stylus levers differing in
a number of respects from that which I have
just shown and described, one of such stylus
1 5 levers being shown in Fig. 6 and the blank
from which it is made' being shown in Fig. 8.
In this blank the head 17a is at one side of
the stem 16a and is bent on the line x, so as
to bring the grooves 20, and openings 22 and
20 23 into proper relation to one another, the
pins 19 projecting laterally, as shown in Fig.
8, so that they can engage suitable bearings
in a fixed member of the sound box casing.
This lever may, if desired, have an incision
25 at the fold line x, as in the case of the lever
shown in Fig. 1 . Still another form of stylus
lever embodying some of the features of my
invention is shown in Fig. 7, the blank from
which this lever is made being shown in Fig.
30 9. In this case the stem 16b of the blank
has a plain rectangular head 17b, which,
when folded upon a central longitudinal line
and laterally compressed forms a substan-
tially solid head for the lever, as shown in
35 Fig. 6, which head can be recessed on oppo-
site sides for the reception of the pointed
pivot pins 25, bored longitudinally for re-
ceiving the stylus 7, and drilled and threaded
for the reception of a set screw 26, whereby
40 the stylus is confined to the lever, inasmuch
as the latter lacks the elasticity in its oppo-
site members necessary to the retention of
the stylus by a frictional grip of the members
of the lever upon it.
45 The various modifications which I have
illustrated and described, are suggestive of
some of the different lines of development
along which my invention may be carried,
and will be sufficient to indicate, to those
50 skilled in the art, some of the variations of
constructive detail within the scope of my
invention.
I claim: —
1. A sound box having a diaphragm, a
55 stylus lever, a bearing block therefor, up-
turned pins at the bottom of the stylus lever
adapted to inverted bearings on the block,
and a single central spring for retaining said
pins in contact with said bearings.
60 2. A sound box stylus lever having a head
with opposed elastic members, between
which a stylus can be confined by their fric-
tional grip upon it, and means engaging one
of said members and passing freely through
65 the other for separating said opposed mem-
bers of the lever to release the stylus from the
grip of the same.
3. A sound box stylus lever having a head
with opposed elastic members between which
a stylus can be gripped, and pins, each carried 70
by one of said members and projecting
through and beyond the other member, one
in one direction and the other in the opposite
direction, whereby pressure upon the pins will
effect the separation of said elastic members. 75
4. A sound box stylus lever comprising a
stem and an enlarged head, the latter being
folded on a longitudinal line disposed cen-
trally between opposite symmetrical portions
of the head. 80
5. A sound box stylus lever comprising a
stem and an enlarged head, the latter being
folded on a longitudinal line and having an
incision, on the line of fold.
6. A sound box stylus lever comprising a 35
stem and an enlarged head, the latter being
folded on a longitudinal line, and having, on
opposite sides of said longitudinal line,
grooves which, when the head is folded, co-
operate to provide a socket for the reception 90
of the stylus.
7. A sound box stylus lever comprising a
stem and an enlarged head, the latter being
folded on a longitudinal line, and having, on
opposite sides of said longitudinal line, 95
grooves which cooperate to form a socket for
the reception of the sitylus, and openings for
the reception and play of separator pins.
8. A sound box stylus lever comprising a
stem and an enlarged head, the latter being 100
folded on a central longitudinal line, and hav-
ing, on opposite sides of said central longi-
tudinal line, pockets which, when the head is
folded, cooperate to form a recess for the re-
ception of the end of a tension spring. 105
9. A sound box stylus lever comprising a
stem and an enlarged head, the latter being
folded on a longitudinal line, and having, on
opposite sides of said longitudinal line, pro-
jecting pins, which, when the head is folded, no
constitute pivot pins therefor.
10. A sound box stylus lever having a
stem with an enlarged head, a longitudinal
incision, and longitudinal grooves on oppo-
site sides of the latter, which, when the head 115
is folded on a line co-inciding with said in-
cision, will form a socket for the reception of
the stylus.
11. A sound box stylus lever having a
stem with an enlarged head, the latter having 120
a longitudinal incision, longitudinal grooves,
and laterally projecting pins, whereby, when
the head is folded upon a line co-inciding
with said incision, said grooves will form a
socket for the reception of the stylus and the 125
projecting pins, when bent outwardly, will
serve as pivots for the stylus lever.
12. A sound box stylus lever comprising a
stem and an enlarged head, with longitudinal
incision, longitudinal grooves and transverse 130
899,256
10
15
perforations, whereby, when said head is
folded on a line co-inciding with the incision,
said grooves will form a socket for the recep-
tion of the stylus, and said perforations will
be available for the passage and support of
spreader pins.
13. A sound box stylus lever comprising a
stem and an enlarged head, with central
longitudinal incision, longitudinal grooves,
and transverse pockets, whereby, when said
head is folded on a line co-inciding with said
incision, said grooves will form a socket for
the reception of the stylus and said pockets
will constitute a recess for the reception of
the end of a tension spring.
14. A sound box stylus lever comprising a
stem and an enlarged head, with central
incision, longitudinal grooves,
longitudinal
projecting pins, transverse pockets and pairs
of perforations, whereby, when the head is 20
folded on a line co-inciding with the incision,
the longitudinal grooves will form a socket
for the reception of the stylus, the perfora-
tions will provide for the support and passage
of separator pins, the pockets will constitute 25
a recess for the reception of the end of a ten-
sion spring, and the pins, when bent out-
wardly, will serve as pivots for the stylus
lever.
In testimony whereof, I have signed my 30
name to this specification, in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
EDWIN H. MOBLEY.
Witnesses :
Hamilton D. Turner,
Kate A. Beadle.
1
899,464.
H. NIES.
GEAPHOPHONE SOUND BOX.
APPLICATION FILED MAK. 24, 1908.
Patented Sept. 22, 1908.
Q&al
aZcgZ.
zz
/6 /*
d£cp.3F.
<a.
7^uAA^L<f-.
9*fu*nto»
*j/arri/JYzas.
3-ttotnty 5
THE NOftRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HARRY NIES, OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO JAMES H. CORRIGAN,
OF BALTIMORE, MARYLAND.
GRAPHOPHONE SOUND-BOX.
No. 899,464.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 22, 1908.
Application filed March 24, 1908. Serial No. 422,902.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known, that I, Harry Nies, a citizen
of the United States, residing at Baltimore,
State of Maryland, have invented certain
5 new and useful Improvements in Grapho-
phone Sound-Boxes, of which the following
is a specification.
My invention relates to sound boxes for
graphophones and particularly to means for
10 controlling the degree of vibration of the
stylus bar, whereby the pitch of the compo- j
sition being played, may be varied at will. !
By the use of this invention, a graphophone j
record is given a widely increased range. It j
L5 is a well known fact that the key of a piece i
played upon a graphophone varies with the
speed of the record. I accomplish this pur-
pose of varying the key without varying the
speed of the record, by the means hereinafter
20 set forth.
A further object of the invention is to so
construct the parts that the weight of the
sound box will be decreased and a neat and
ornamental structure provided.
25 A further ob j ect of the invention is the pro-
vision of improved means for securing the
inner end of the stylus bar to the diaphragm
without the use of glue or wax.
Further objects and advantages of the in-
30 vention will be set forth in the detailed de- j
scription which now follows :—
In the accompanying drawing Figure 1 is
a side elevation of a graphophone sound box
constructed in accordance with the inven-
35 tion. Fig. 2 is a sectional view upon line
x x of Fig. 1 and looking in the direction indi-
cated by the arrows and Fig. 3 is a detail
view of the connection between the stylus
bar and the diaphragm.
40 Like numerals designate corresponding
parts in all of the figures of the drawing.
Referring to the drawing, the numeral 5
designates the usual tubular member adapted
to be secured to the horn of the graphophone
45 (not shown). A shallow recess 6 is formed
in the face of a plate 7 and the tubular mem-
ber 5 is secured to this plate. A ring 8 is
adapted to be clamped firmly against the
outer edge of the plate 7 by screws 9. The
50 outer edge of the diaphragm 10 lies between
two parking rings 11 and 12. tihfifjp pq^'ng
rinp-s hm'np- nrefftrahlv of plotting r>a,r>p.r
rings being p
£.
1
wnicn I unci retains its nie or elasticity in-
definitely. Upon the contrary, rubber or
55 like resilient packing rings lose their elas-
ticity in the course of time. In securing
the inner end of the stylus bar 13 to the dia-
phragm, I first secure the metallic washers
14 and 15 to the center of the diaphragm by
a rivet 16. I then solder the inner end of 60
the stylus bar to the outer washer as is best
indicated at 17 in Fig. 3. Thus it is unnec-
essary to use either wax or glue to secure the
stylus bar to the diaphragm. A spring
tongue 18 is secured by screws 19 to the ring 65
8. The free end of this spring tongue car-
ries a point 20 which enters a recess 21 formed
in one side of an enlarged portion 22 of the
stylus bar. A set screw 23 is threaded into
the plate 7 and ring 8 and has a pointed end 70
which enters a recess 24 formed in the op-
posite side of this enlarged portion. A re-
cessed head 25 formed upon the outer end
of the stylus bar is adapted to receive the
usual pin 26 beneath which the record 75
travels. A set screw 27 provides means for
holding the pin 26 in position.
The operation of the device is as follows : —
The direction of rotation of the record is that
indicated by the arrow — a — . The enlarged 80
shoulder 22 of the stylus bar being engaged
by. the point 20 and the screw 23, said stylus
bar is caused to maintain the position indi-
cated in Fig. 1. It will be seen, however,
that by screwing up or unscrewing the screw 85
23, the stylus bar will be more or less rigidly
bound between the pointed end of this screw
and the spring tongue 18, and that conse-
quently its degree of vibration may be con-
trolled while the graphophone is running and 90
without removing the horn. I have found
in actual practice that this control of the vi-
bration of the stylus bar enables me to pro-
duce any desired modification of the pitch of
the record. From the foregoing description 9o
it will be seen that simple and efficient means
are herein provided for accomplishing the ob-
jects of the invention, but while the elements
shown and described are well adapted to
serve the purpose for which they are intended , 10°
it is to be understood that the invention is
not limited to the precise construction set
forth but includes within its purview such
changes as may be made within the scope of
the appended claims. 1Go
Having described my invention, what I
claim is : —
1. In a graphophone sound box the combi-
nation with a body portion of a diaphragm,
means for clamping said diaphragm within 11C
2
899,464
said body portion, a stylus bar, means for
connecting the inner end of the stylus bar to
said diaphragm, a spring tongue secured to
the body portion and having a free outer end
5 which lies outside of the stylus bar, a member
carried by said spring tongue and adapted to
engage one side of an enlarged portion of said
stylus bar and a set screw threaded into the
body portion and adapted to engage the
10 other side of said enlarged portion of the
stylus bar.
2. In a graphophone sound box the combi-
nation with a body portion, of a diaphragm,
means for clamping said diaphragm within
15 said body portion, a stylus bar, means for se-
curing the inner end of said stylus bar to said
diaphragm, a spring tongue secured to said
body portion having a free outer end which
engages one side of the stylus bar and a lat-
20 erally movable and manually operable mem-
ber which engages the opposite side of said
stylus bar to bind said stylus bar between
itself and the. free end of the spring tongue to
thereby control the degree of vibration of
25 said stylus bar.
3. In a graphophone sound box, the com-
bination with a body portion, of a diaphragm,
a clamping ring adapted to clamp said dia-
phragm within said body portion, a stylus
30 bar, means for connecting the inner end of
the stylus bar to said diaphragm, a spring
member comprising a base portion which is
secured to the outer face of the clamping
ring, and an off-set tongue member having a
35 resilient free end which lies outside of the
stylus bar, a member carried by said resilient
free end of the spring tongue and adapted to
engage one side of an enlarged portion of said
stylus bar, and a manually operable set
screw working in said body portion and 40
clamping ring and adapted to engage the
other side of said enlarged portion of the
stylus bar to bind said stylus bar between
itself and the resilient free end of the spring
tongue. 45
4. In a graphophone soxvnd box, the com-
bination with a body portion, of a diaphragm,
a clamping ring adapted to clamp said dia-
phragm within said body portion, a stylus
bar, means for connecting the inner end of the 50
stylus bar to said diaphragm, a spring mem-
ber comprising a base portion which is se-
cured to the front vertical face of the clamp-
ing ring and an off-set tongue member hav-
ing a resilient free end which lies outside of 55
the stylus bar, a member carried by said re-
silient free end of the spring tongue adapted
to engage one side of an enlarged portion of
the stylus bar, and a manually operable set
screw working in said body portion and 60
clamping ring and adapted to engage the in-
ner side of said enlarged portion of the stylus
bar to bind said stylus bar between itself and
the resilient free end of the spring tongue.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature, 65
in presence of two witnesses.
HARRY NIES.
Witnesses :
James H. Corkigan,
Thomas G. Hull.
H. KLENK.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 28, 1907.
899,491.
Fig.l
Patented Sept. 22, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
Fig.2
15 E
] f- - ft T»/.*5 P£T£«S CO.r\*A$H WGJQN, O.jfi-
899,491.
H. KLENK.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED FEB. 28, 1907.
Patented Sept. 22, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
11
\ 7
&0]
i
M
%Ur
II
_L
I
11
v
Fig. 6.
\
- - - i^
o
e
o
/
0
0
0
0
: 0
: 0
0
0
: : 0
0
o
o
o
o
.— — 0
.— o
-^
U— — -
13
11
10
ry.
THE HORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. O. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
?
HEINRICH KLENK, OF HANAU, GERMANY, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO HERMANN KREBS,
OF HANAU, GERMANY.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 899,491.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 22, 1908.
Application filed February 28, 1907. Serial No. 359,791.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Heinrich Klenk, a
subject of the Emperor of Germany, and resi-
dent of Hanau-on-the-Main, Germany, have
5 invented a certain new and useful Improve-
ment in Talking Machinery, of which the fol-
lowing is a specification.
This invention relates to a talking machine
which is inclosed in a casing and has for its
10 object to effect an increase in the fullness of
the sound and enrichment of the tone in such
instruments. To this end the casing is pro-
vided with a series of strings which are di-
rectly or indirectly caused to vibrate by the
15 sound waves produced by the talking ma-
chine. They vibrate directly when arranged
in front of the trumpet mouth of the said ma-
chine and are therefore struck by the sound
waves. It suffices however to attach the
20 strings to the casing preferably by inter-
posing one or more resonance boards without
having the trumpet open exactly behind the
sound orifice. In this case the strings are
caused to vibrate by the sounding trumpet
25 setting the surrounding air and the casing
itself and attached resonance boards into
vibration, which vibration is transmitted to
the strings. With such an arrangement it
suffices to provide groups of strings so that
30 each group corresponds to a definite tone, in
order to strengthen the clear tones, for in-
stance those of the piano and violin, whereby
the reproduction of the tones is enriched. A
further increase of the fullness of sound and
35 enrichment of the tone is effected by the ar-
rangement of attuned strings so that for each
note of the talking machine at least one
string is caused to vibrate: while this take's
place with the arrangement of suitable strings
40 or of groups of like strings or with some of
these.
Preferably the invention is so devised that
the casing forms at the same time the reso-
nance board of an attuned stringed instru-
45 ment, the effect being further increased by
interposing a sound post or "voice" between
the trumpet of the talking machine and the
bridge of the strings. Besides the enrich-
ment of the tones in the reproduction of a
50 tune by means of a talking machine con-
nected with an attuned stringed instrument
there is also obtained the possibility of being
able to strike the same tune on the instru-
ment or at least to play some accompani-
55 ments to the same.
In the accompanying drawing which illus-
trates several embodiments of the invention
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a talking ma-
chine inclosed in a casing, the strings being
stretched on the front wall of the casing pro- 60
vided with the sound orifice. Fig. 2 is a
longitudinal section of the construction
shown in Fig. 1 . Fig. 3 is a part longitudinal
section showing a "modification. Figs. 4 to 6
show two further modifications of a talking 65
apparatus inclosed in a casing combined with
a zither.
As shown, the casing is formed like a box
in the lower part of which the talking ma-
chine is fitted, winch consists in the usual 70
actuating mechanism 1, the rotatable record
disk 2, the stylus 3, the sound box 4, and the
movable arm 5. On the arm 5 which is piv-
oted to the ball joint 6 is connected the
trumpet 7. The mouth of this latter is oppo- 75
site the sound orifice of a wall 8 serving as a
resonance board, which forms only a part of
the front wall of the casing. In front of it is
provided another resonance board 8 which
extends to the lowest quadrant of the sound 80
orifice and is secured to a rectangular frame
9. The upper bar of the frame carries the
string-block 10 to which strings 11 are con-
nected, which are led over the bridge 12 of
the board 8a to the hooks 13. The board Sa 85
is kept apart from the board 8 by a distance
piece 14. The trumpet 7 is connected in any
manner, by small ties, or by an annular
flange, with the board 8. The front side of
the upper part of the casing has doors 15, 16. 90
The lower part of the casing in which is the
rotatable record disk is accessible by a hinged
door 17 so as to be able to exchange the
records.
The sound waves produced by the appa- 95
ratus and issuing from the trumpet pass
through the mouth of the same into the air
and thereby cause the strings 11 and the
resonance boards to vibrate by the direct
action of the sound waves. Further, the 100
vibrating trumpet which is secured to the
board 8 transmits its vibrations to the latter
which transmits it through the distance
piece 14 to the resonance board 8a. The
effect of the strings is thus considerably in- 105
creased, and unpleasant accessory sounds
produced in amr case by the talking machine
are rendered inaudible.
The connection of the trumpet 7 with the
board 8 need not take place at the mouth of 110
896,491
the former but may be effected as shown in
Fig. 3 by means of a sound post 19 secured to
the neck of the trumpet.
In the construction shown in Fig. 4 the
5 disk 2 is rotatabl y arranged in known manner
in the casing open at one end. The sound
box 4 is operated therefrom by means of
the stylus, the sound box being connected
to the movable arm 5 and the trumpet 7.
] 0 Above the upper wall 20 of the casing is ar-
ranged a second wall 20a which carries the
string-block 10, the bridge 12 and the hooks
13 for the strings 11. The resonance board
formed by the walls 20 and 20a has the form
15 of a zither (Fig. 6) .
The sound waves produced by means of
the disk through the medium of the stylus
and sound box pass for the greatest part
through the trumpet into the ah. A part
20 however will simultaneously with the vibra-
tions of the trumpet set the entire casing in
vibration, the vibrations being transmitted
to the upper resonance board and so to the
strings. At each note the corresponding
25 string which is attuned thereto vibrates and
strengthens the tone. If the trumpet is as
shown in Fig. 4 secured to the lower wall 20
the vibrations of the trumpet are better
transmitted to the board. Further the
30 strings can be struck to the tune reproduced
by the talking apparatus or an accompani-
ment or at least some primary accord can be
played.
In the construction shown in Figs. 5 and 6
35 the sound waves act on the strings hi the
same manner as in the case of Fig. 4. Only,
the action is further increased by interposing
a sound post 19 between the trumpet 7 and
the bridge 12, which passes through a slot in
4 0 the lower board. In this way a direct trans-
mission of the vibrations of the trumpet to the
strings is effected so that these are consider-
ably assisted, that is the tone is louder and
purer.
4 5 It is obvious that the present invention is
not limited to the combination of a talking
machine inclosed in a casing with a zither,
but that any stringed instrument can be sub-
stituted for the zither. Further, it is not
50 necessary that the stringed instrument be
struck by hand, but this may be effected
mechanically. For example the present in-
vention may be combined with a piano as
indicated in Figs. 1 and 2. For this the cen-
tral part of the casing is divided into three 55
compartments in the middle one of which is
the record disk, and in the outer one are the
piano keys 21. The keys 21 are connected
by the usual mechanism 22, which is only in-
dicated diagrammatically, with the hammer 60
23. The strings 11 form part therefore of
the strings of a piano.
In the reproduction of a tune by means of
this apparatus by striking the keys 21 the
melody can be accompanied or at least a 65
vamp can be played or a mechanical accom-
paniment effected.
It is to be understood that by the term
talking machines I mean to include gramo-
phones, graphophones, phonographs and the 70
like.
Having described my invention what I
claim and desire to secure hj Letters Patent
of the United States is : —
1. The herein described apparatus, com- 75
prising a casing, a talking machine inclosed
therein and strings attached to said casing,
said strings adapted to be vibrated by the
sound waves produced by the talking ma-
chine. 80
2. The herein described apparatus, com-
prising a casing, a talking machine inclosed
in said casing and having a trumpet, and res-
onance strings arranged in front of the trum-
pet, the trumpet and the front wall of the 85
casing serving as a resonance board.
3. The herein described apparatus, com-
prising a casing, a talking machine inclosed
in the casing and having a trumpet, a double
resonance board arranged in front of the 90
trumpet, of which board one member has a
sound orifice opposite the mouth of the trum-
pet, and a bridge and strings and securing de-
vices carried by the other member of the
double resonance board. 95
4. The herein described apparatus, com-
prising, a casing, a talking machine inclosed
in said casing, and strings attached to said
casing, said strings being attuned to the talk-
ing machine. 100
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification hi the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
HEINBICH KLENK.
Witnesses :
Bernhard Raiser,
Jean Grund.
T. KRAEMER.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 7, 1908.
899,874.
Patented Sept. 29, 1908.
uuuuufiuu&uss
uumumuumma
WITNESSES:
ATTORNEY
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
THOMAS KRAEMER, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO HAWTHORNE &
SHEBLE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, A COR-
PORATION OF PENNSYLVANIA.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 899,874.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 29, 1908.
Application filed March 7, 1908. Serial No. 419,658.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Thomas Kbaemee, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Phila-
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and
5 State of Penns}dvania, have invented a cer-
tain new and useful Improvement in Talking-
Machines, of which the following is a specifi-
cation.
This invention relates to talking-machines
10 and has reference particularly to the manner
in which the s6und-boxes of such machines
are connected to the sound-conveying and-
amplifying devices thereof.
As is well known, record-tablets for the
15 mechanical reproduction of recorded sounds,
whether of cylinder, disk or other form, are
of two types depending on the character of
the undulations of the record-groove, these
being termed the vertically undulating and
20 the laterally undulating types. For repro-
ducing sounds from these two types of rec-
ord-tablets, machines differing in construc-
tion have heretofore been required, so that a
person having but one machine could use
25 only records of one of these two types.
The object of my invention is to provide a
talking-machine- so constructed that it may
be used to reproduce sounds from either of
tliese two types of records differing in the
30 character of the sound-undulations of the
record-groove. This is accomplished by pro-
viding a sound-box which is arranged to as-
sume either of two operative positions, in one
of which the stylus of the sound-box will co-
35 operate with a record of the vertically undu-
lating type to reproduce the recorded sounds
and in the other of which it will cooperate
with a record of the laterally undulating type.
Thus, the sound-conveying device of the
40 talking-machine, consisting of either an am-
plifying horn alone or a combined horn and
tone-arm may have a joint therein permitting
movement of the sound-box to either of its
two positions.
45 In the preferred embodiment of the inven-
tion, a tone-arm is employed and a joint is
provided near the free end thereof such that
the sound-box may be moved from one oper-
ative position to a second operative position
50 in which its diaphragm is disposed at a right
angle to the plane of the diaphragm when
the box is in the first position.
One embodiment of the invention is illus-
trated in the accompanying drawings, in
which 55
Figures 1 and 2 are views in elevation of
the tone-arm and sound-box showing the
two positions of the latter, and Fig. 3 is a sec-
tional elevation of the sound-box and a por-
tion of the tone-arm. 60
Referring to these drawings, 1 indicates a
tubular tone-arm of any suitable construc-
tion, this being adapted to be pivotally
mounted at one end on a coupling-member
extending outwardly from the motor-box of 65
a talking-machine. For the purpose of such
pivotal mounting, the tone-arm is here shown
as having a yoke 2 secured thereto in which
is pivoted a cross-head carrying a sleeve 3
adapted to receive a vertically-disposed pin 70
on the coupling-member above mentioned.
The other end of the tone-arm carries the
sound-box 4 having a stylus-lever 5 in which
is secured a stylus 6. The lever 5 is pivotally
mounted on the wall of the box by having 75
notched lugs thereon in which are received
knife-edges on a sheet-metal member 7 se-
cured to the box. Member 7 is bent over at
its end and bears on lever 5 to hold the inner
end of the lever yieldingly against the dia- 80
phragm 8 of the box.
At its outer end, the tone-arm 1 is bent,
preferably in the manner shown, to form a
portion 9 therein the axis of which is in-
clined to the axis of the main portion of the 85
tone-arm. The portion 9 is adapted to re-
ceive a tubular extension 10 on the sound-
box 4, this extension being connected to the
sound-box by a short tubular piece 11 and
having its axis substantially parallel to the 90
diaphragm 8. In the extension 10 is a slot
12 into which enters the end of a pin 13 ex-
tending inwardly from the portion 9, slot 12
being of such size as to permit extension 10
to turn in tube 9 through ninety degrees. 95
The tubular extension 10 fits snugly within
the tubular portion 9 and excessive relative
movement of the parts in the direction of
their axis is precluded by the pin 13. Pref-
erably the parts are so formed that in one 100
or both of the positions of the sound-box,
the end of portion 9 bears upon the piece 1 1
at the junction of the latter with the exten-
sion 10 to assist in holding the sound-box
899,874
and the parts connected thereto steadily in
position. If desired, the slot 12 may be so
formed that it extends in the direction of the
length of tube 10 as well as around the
5 same so that the turning movement of the
sound-box will cause tube 10 to move into
and out of tube 9; such relative movement
of tubes 9 and 10 may be desirable to com-
pensate for the use of styluses of different
10 lengths in the two positions of the sound-
box and the slight change which would
otherwise be made in the distance of the end
of the stylus-lever from the axis of the tone-
arm when the sound-box is moved from one
15 position to the other due to the fact that in
its movement the sound-box turns about an
axis inclined to that of the tone-arm.
Figs. 1 and 2 illustrate the two operative
positions of the sound-box relatively to the
20 tone-arm and in these figures 14 indicates a
disk sound-record having a record-groove of
the laterally undulating type, while 15 in-
dicates a similar record having a groove of
the vertically undulating type. In Fig. 1,
25 it will be seen that the diaphragm of the
sound-box lies in a plane substantially paral-
lel to the axis of the tone-arm in a position
to be vibrated by the coaction of the stylus
with lateral undulations in the record-tablet
30 14; in Fig. 2, however, the diaphragm ex-
tends across the axis of the tone-arm and is
somewhat inclined so that it will be vibrated
by the coaction of its stylus with vertical un-
dulations.
35 The movement of the sound-box about the
pivotal connection thereof to the tone-arm
carries the box to either of two operative po-
sitions, and in both of these positions the
single stylus of the sound-box projects from
40 the box in the same direction, that is, down-
wardly in the structure shown in the draw-
' ings; therefore, a talking-machine equipped
with such a tone-arm and sound-box may be
used with sound-records of the same form,
45 as disk records, but differing as to the char-
acter of the sound undulations, as vertical or
lateral, these disks being mounted upon the
same support as the turn-table of the ma-
chine.
50 Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new therein and desire to secure by
Letters Patent is as follows: —
1. In a talking machine, a sound-box hav-
ing a diaphragm and a tubular connection
55 thereto for carrying sound, said connection
having a joint therein permitting movement
of the sound-box to either of two operative
positions, a single stylus being adapted to vi-
brate the diaphragm in either of said posi-
60 tions and said stylus projecting in substan-
tially the same direction from the sound-box
in both of said positions, substantially as set
forth.
2. In a talking-machine, a sound-convey-
ing tube, and a sound-box pivotally mounted 65
thereon and provided with a single stylus,
said box being movable about the pivotal
axis through ninety degrees to carry it to
either of two operative positions in both of
which said stylus projects in substantially 70
the same direction from the sound-box, sub-
stantially as set forth.
3. In a talking-machine, a sound-convey-
ing tube and a sound-box having a dia-
phragm mounted on said tube and movable 75
from a position in which the diaphragm is
parallel to the axis of the tube to a position
in which the diaphragm extends across said
axis, substantially as set forth.
4. In a talking-machine, a sound-convey- 80
ing tube ,a sound-box having a single stylus,
and two telescoping tubular pieces, one on
said tube and the other on said box, permit-
ting movement of the sound-box relatively
to the tube to either of two operative posi- 85
tions in both of which said stylus projects in
substantially the same direction from the
sound-box, substantially as set forth.
5. In a talking-machine, a sound-convey-
ing tube, a sound-box having a single stylus, 90
two telescoping tubular pieces, one on said
tube and the other on said box, permitting
movement of the sound-box relatively to the
tube to either of two operative positions in
both of which said stylus projects in substan- 95
tially the same direction from the sound-box,
and a pin on one of said pieces entering a slot
in the other, substantially as set forth.
6. In a talking-machine, a sound-convey-
ing tube having a tubular portion at its end 100
turned at .an acute angle to the axis of the
tube, and a sound-box having a stylus pivot-
ally mounted on said portion and adapted to
be turned -about the same to either of two op-
erative positions, substantially as set forth. 105
7. In. a talking-machine, a sound-convey-
ing tube having a tubular portion at its end
turned at an angle to the axis of the tube, and
a sound-box having a stylus and a tubular
piece fixed to the box and telescoping with 110
said portion to permit turning the sound-box
relatively to said tube to either of two opera-
tive positions, in both of which the stylus of
the sound-box projects in substantially the
same direction from the sound-box, substan- 115
tially as set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 26th day of February, 1908.
THOMAS KRAEMER.
Witnesses :
Amil Schnell,
H. MlJHLSCHLEGEL.
C. MARTELOCK.
ATTACHMENT FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED DEO. 31, 1907.
899,880.
Patented Sept. 29, 1908.
G^csc^y.
#^U^w /V^l-W-<r
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THE NORRIS
PETERS CO.. MASHINCTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHARLES MARTELOCK, OF OROVILLE, CALIFORNIA.
ATTACHMENT FOE. TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 899,880.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Sept. 29, 1908.
Application filed December 31, 1907. Serial No. 408,809.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Charles Martelock,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Oroville, in the county of Butte and State
5 of California, have invented a new and Im-
proved Attachment for Talking-Machines, of
which the following is a full, clear, and exact
description.
My invention relates to talking machines,
10 my more particular object being to provide
an attachment for a machine known com-
mercially as the "B. C." graphophone, for
the purpose of increasing the delicacy of ad-
justment between the record and the stylus
15 needle, and also increasing the general effi-
ciency of the apparatus.
Reference is to be had to the accompanying
drawings forming a part of this specification,
in which similar characters of reference indi-
20 cate corresponding parts in all the figures.
Figure 1 is a rear elevation of the grapho-
phone provided with my attachment, this
view showing the stylus needle, the weighted
lever supporting the same, means for tension-
25 mg the lever, and also showing the pawl for
raising the stylus out of engagement with the
sound record; and Fig. 2 is an enlarged side
elevation of the graphophone, parts being in
section, and showing the drag shoe for actu-
30 ating the diaphragm, the friction wheel en-
gaging the drag shoe, the stylus needle and
accompanying parts for tensioning the drag
shoe relatively to the friction wheel, and also
showing the pivotally mounted weight for
35 supporting the stylus needle and its accom-
panying parts. Fig. 3 is a fragmentary per-
spective showing how, at a predetermined
point in the travel of the carriage, the stylus
is raised out of engagement with the record.
40 The casing of the machine is shown at 4
and at 5 is a main driving pulley actuated by
a belt 6. A main driving shaft is shown at 7
and a revoluble mandrel at 8. A sound rec-
ord 9 is mounted upon the mandrel in the
45 usual manner. Mounted upon the main
shaft 7 is a gear wheel 10 which meshes with
another gear wheel 11, and the latter meshes
with a third gear wheel 12. These gear
wheels are mounted in a box 13 integral with
50 the casing, and extending laterally from this
box is a stationary sleeve 14. A tubular
shaft 15 is connected with the gear wheel 12
and extends through the bearing sleeve 14,
and telescopically mounted within the tubu-
55 lar sleeve 15 is another tubular sleeve 16,
and through the. latter extends a revoluble
shaft 17.
Mounted loosely upon the revoluble shaft
17 is a collar 18, and engaging the latter is a
leaf spring 19. Beyond the collar 18 the qq
shaft 17 is provided with a removable cap
18a. A spiral spring 20 engages an eye 21
integral with the collar 18. A lever 22 is
provided with a bend 22a, and is disposed
below the shaft 17, and connected with the 65
bend 22a of the lever 22 is a spiral spring 23.
A pin 24 supports a weight 25 having sub-
stantially a lozenge shape, and the lower end
26 of this weight is pointed, as indicated in
Fig. 2. Integral with the weight 25 and 70
extending horizontally therefrom is an arm
27 provided with slots 28, 29. A pin 30
extends across the slot 29 and supports a
stylus needle 31, the latter being provided
with a jewel 32 made preferably of sapphire. 75
The stylus needle 31 is provided with a
fork 33, and extending through this fork is a
bar 34 connected to the fork by aid of a
pivot pin 35, see Fig. 3. The bar 34 is pro-
vided with an eye 36 and projecting through go
this eye is a spring 37 made preferably of a
single piece of plain wire. This spring is
secured to pins 38 mounted upon a block
39, the latter being held rigidly by aid of
pins 40, 41. The pin 40 serves, moreover, 35 -
as a pivot pin for supporting one end of the
lever 22, as will be understood from Fig. 1.
The sound box is shown at 42 and is pro-
vided with a neck 43 for receiving the horn
of the graphophone. A diaphragm bar 44 90
extends from the diaphragm (not shown)
within the sound box, to the drag shoe 45.
Tins drag shoe is made of soft rubber and
connected with its lower end is another
drag shoe 46 provided with a tongue 47, the 95
latter being secured by a pivot pin 48 to the
drag shoe 45. The drag shoe 46 is pivoted
to the bar 34, as shown in Figs. 2 and 3.
The two drag shoes 45, 46 together consti-
tute a composite semicircular member which 100
partially encircles a friction wheel 49. This
friction wheel is provided with flanges 50
upon opposite sides of the drag shoes for the
purpose of maintaining the latter in true
position. 105
A bracket 51 extends directly outward
from the sound box and a link 52 is mounted
by aid of a pivot pin 52a upon the bracket
51. The link 52 partially supports the
revoluble shaft 17, and interposed between 110
a
899,880
the link 52 and the bracket 51 is a washer
53. The pin 52a is provided with a head 54
having a considerable bearing surface en-
gaging the bracket 51, which bracket is
5 provided with a plate 55 secured by screws
56 directly to the sound box, for the purpose
of supporting the bracket 51. This bracket
is also provided with an opening 57 through
which extends a sleeve 17a encircling the
10 shaft 17 and rotating with it, the purpose
of this sleeve being to form a suitable bear-
ing for supporting the various revoluble
parts carried by the shaft.
Lugs 58, 59 are disposed upon opposite
15 sides of the weight 25 for the purpose of
supporting the latter, the pivot pin 24 ex-
tending from one of these lugs to the other.
A pawl 60 having an L-shape is mounted
upon the framework and partially within
20 the path of travel of the arm 27. At 61 is
shown a supporting sleeve which is provided
at its bottom with a slot 62. A carriage 63
is slidably mounted upon the sleeve 61 and
is provided with a guide 64 carried by a
25 guide arm 64a. A thumb lever 65 is jour-
naled upon the sleeve 61 and is mounted
within a slot 68 of the carriage. A cam 66
is connected integrally with the thumb
lever 65 and when the latter is turned, the
30 cam is brought into engagement with the
weight 26 so as to turn the latter upon the
pivot pin 24 as a center. A feed screw
shown at 67 and extending through the
sleeve 61 operates to propel the carriage 63
35 in the general longitudinal direction of the
feed screw in the manner well understood
in this art.
When the device above described is in" ac-
tion, the carriage 63 travels along the sleeve
40 61 . Whenever the carriage is in proper posi-
tion for the pawl 60 to engage the arm 27, the
stylus needle 31 is raised so that the jewel 32
is out of engagement with the sound record
9. This is to prevent the production of
45 harsh and meaningless sounds due to the ro-
tation of the sound record when blank por-
tions of the record are adjacent to the stylus
needle. The leaf spring 19 pressed at all
times gently against the collar 18 and the
50 tension of the spring 19 against this collar,
taken in connection with the pulling tension
of the spring 20, also upon it, causes the col-
lar 18 to occupy as nearly as practicable an
exact working relation toward the revoluble
55 shaft 17. That is to say, the collar 18 is
maintained in such position relatively to the
shaft 17 as to reduce to a minimum the lost
motion between these parts. The lever 22
being pulled downwardly by the spiral spring
60 23 and this spiral spring being connected
with the weight 25, it follows that the weight
25 must exert a tension upon the spring 23
and consequently upon the spring 20. These
springs 20 and 23, by pulling upon the upper
65 end of the weight 25; tend to lower the arm
27 and thus press the stylus needle gently
toward the sound record, so as to secure a
proper engagement between the record and
the jewel 32. The stylus needle is thus al-
lowed considerable freedom of movement and 70
its adjustment relatively to the sound record
is such that the vitality and purity of the tones
and notes are greatly promoted.
It will be observed that throughout the
device above described the factor of lost 75
motion is reduced to a minimum. The jewel
32 necessarily fits against the sound record
because of the tension upon the stylus needle
31. The spring 37, by pulling downwardly
upon the bar 34, causes its pivotal connec- go
tion with the stylus needle to transmit
movements of the latter without loss of
motion. In other words, there is a posi-
tive connection between the lower end of
the bar 34 and the stylus needle. The shoes 85
46 and 45, by virtue of the frictional tension
produced by the rotating wheel 49, are al-
ways kept taut. The net result is that from
the jewel 32 throughout the entire chain of
parts up to the diaphragm bar 44 there is no 90
loss of motion whatever, and yet all this is
accomplished without necessity for any un-
due pressure upon the sound record. It will
be further noted that the pivotal support for
the stylus needle is itself movable for the 95
reason that the weight 25 is adapted to rock
upon the pivot pin 24. Such being the case,
it follows that the stylus needle 31 has a dou-
ble movement to one swinging movement
upon the pivot pin 30 as a center, and an- 100
other swinging movement upon the pivot
pin 24 as a center, this last-mentioned move-
ment being usually greater than the swinging
movement upon the pin 30. The great free-
dom of movement allowed to the stylus nee- 105
die, I find in practice improves to a great ex-
tent the purity and quantity of the tones
produced.
The operation of my device is as follows:
The motion being communicated by the belt 110
6 through the driving pulley 5, and the vari-
ous gears 10, 11, 12, the mandrel 8 and the
sound record 9 are rotated. At the time
when this occurs, the carriage moves along
the tubular sleeve 61 in the manner well un- 115
derstood in this art, the revoluble shaft 17
moving telescopically in relation to its sup-
ports. The jewel 32 follows the sound
groove and transmits a vibratory movement.
This vibratory movement is not transmitted 120
immediately to the diaphragm, but rather to
the drag shoes 46, 45, in such manner as to
increase and decrease the cohesion thereof
relatively to the wheel 49. As in similar
machines heretofore used, the motion of the 125
diaphragm is in a measure produced by the
rotation of the wheel 49, the vibratory im-
pulses merely controlling the adhesion of the
drag shoes upon the wheel. The movable
parts being in motion as above described the 130
899,880
3
weight 25 and the various springs 20, 23 per-
form the parts allotted to them, and the sty-
lus needle 31 is allowed the greatest liberty in
transmitting vibratory impulses to the shoes,
5 thus ultimately affecting the diaphragm.
Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent:
The combination of a revoluble shaft, a
1 0 friction member mounted thereupon, a collar
mounted loosely upon said revoluble shaft, a
leaf spring engaging said collar, a lever dis-
posed adjacent to said collar, a spring ex-
tending from said lever to said collar, an-
15 other spring connected with said lever, a
rocking member connected with said last-
mentioned spring, a stylus lever pivotally
mounted upon said rocking member and
adapted to be moved by a sound record, a
drag shoe engaging said friction member, and 20
a connection from said stylus lever to said
drag shoe.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
CHARLES MARTELOCK.
Witnesses :
J. A. Tyler,
C. D. Brandt.
900,706.
F. W. H. CLAY.
PEOCESS OF MAKING SOUND EEPEODUCING EEOOEDS.
APPLICATION FILED MAT 23, 1900.
Patented Oct. 13, 1908.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
FyJ-
_Z>
\
f
W//////////////////////////;/////////^
/C
J.
TT-r
-t
7~
B4h
Y/>//;//;///;;;////;;;///////;/;;///////;////^^
Fiy, z
Witnesses :
'*<*«W-|
G,-
~\
fnyento r,
THE NORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. O. C.
900,706.
F. W. H. CLAY.
PEOCESS OF MAKING SOUND REPRODUCING RECORDS.
APPLICATION FILED MAY 23, 1900
Patented Oct. 13, 1908.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
Fig. a
Witnesses
4.
.OA,
A
Fig. 9
Inventor,
THE NORRiS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D.'C.
900,706.
F. W. H. OLAT.
PROCESS OF MAKING SOUND REPRODUCING RECORDS.
APPLICATION FILED MAY 23, 1900.
Patented Oct. 13, 1908.
3 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
Fy.ll
Witnesses :
THE NORRIS PETER', CO., W*SMJMGT*m,-0. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
FRANCIS W. H. CLAY, OF WHITEHALL, KENTUCKY.
PROCESS OF MAKING SOUND-REPRODUCING RECORDS.
No. 900,706.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 13, 1908.
Application filed May 23, 1900. Serial No. 17,773.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Francis W. H. Clay,
a citizen of the United States of America,
residing at Whitehall, in the State of Ken-
5 tucky, have invented a certain new and use-
ful Process for Making Sound-Reproducing
Records, of which the following is a specifi-
cation.
My invention relates to sound recording
10 and reproduction, and has for its object, pri-
marily, to make reproducing records of the
motions of sound waves in a more perfect
form than has heretofore been attained, and
particularly to avoid the rasping imperfec-
15 tions and buzzing sounds incidentally accom-
panying the sound reproduction from all the
present records used by graphophones, gram-
ophones etc.
My object further, is to gain complete con-
20 trol over the loudness and pitch of the re-
produced sounds without diminishing in any
degree the accuracy and quality of tone of
the same.
The said imperfections in the present sound
25 records result from several conditions neces-
sary and inherent in the processes of produc-
ing the records, — notably, 1st., the using of
metallic or crystalline materials for the ree*
ords and for working and duplicating them;
30 2nd., the employment of graving tools, which
are necessarily rough and only approxi-
mately of the form they are intended to
have; 3rd., the mass and inertia of certain
moving parts used in making a trace of the
35 movements of a sound-receiving diaphragm.
To avoid these imperfections, my process
employs amorphous materials in which to
record the sound wave lines and to take an
impression of the same for reproducing pur-
40 poses; and further, I use a light ray as the
recording agency and chemical or other simi-
lar means both for the recording and for the
reduction of the record to a permanent ma-
terial form for use in reproduction. Thus
45 there is no agency employed, between the
sounding diaphragm actuated directly by
sound waves and the final reproducing record
as used in commerce, which involves weight
or inertia to overcome, or which has within
50 itself any necessary source of imperfections,
as in all present methods.
The process which I have invented con-
sists broadly, in vibrating a ray of light
through the agency of a body actuated by
55 sound waves, passing a light sensitive surface
across the field of play of the vibrating ray,
to thereby trace thereon a line corresponding
to sound waves, and then developing the
photographic line into the form of a groove
or raised ridge for reproducing purposes, by go
purely chemical means.
In the photographic arts two general
classes of light-sensitive materials are used,
which are typified, respectively, in the com-
mon silver bromid dry plate and the "bi- Co
chromated gelatin" used in photo-engraving
drawings.
A thin film of gelatinous or albuminous
substance carrying in suspension in its mass
such a salt as silver bromid, is affected by an 70
extremely short exposure to light, so as to
reduce the stability of the salt, when, in the
developing of the substance after exposure,
the portions of the film that are affected by
light become black by a chemical change and 75
supposedly a deposit of metallic silver, — the
unexposed portions remaining transparent
after the "fixing" bath. A mass of gelati-
nous or albuminous substance impregnated
with such a salt as ammonium or potassium 80
bichromate requires a comparatively long
exposure to light before being sensibly af-
fected. The action of the light on the salt in
the presence of the suspending medium is of
a character which has a sort of tanning ac- 85
tion on the medium, rendering it insoluble in
several liquids, such as acetic acid, sulfuric
acid, hot water, etc., which yet readily dis-
solve the same material where it has been
protected from the action of the light. In 90
view of these facts, I employ as a means for
carrying out my process a compound film
composed of a thin top layer of gelatin or
albumen containing silver bromid or a simi-
lar salt and an under layer of gelatin or albu- 95
men or glue containing bichromate of ammo-
nium or potassium or a similar sensitizing
salt. Also, in order to be able to develop the
top layer when it has been exposed without
destroying the under layer I cover the under 100
(bichromate) film with a protecting coat of
collodion or such substance. In the expo-
sure in recording the motion of the light ray
the bichromate film is not affected, owing to
the short duration of time exposed; but the 105
bromid film is affected to render it black on
developing. The latter is then treated to
any of the common developers, when the
path of the light ray thei'eover becomes a
black line, the remaining portions being 110
transparent after the fixing bath. The col-
lodian coat protects the bichromate film both
sa
900,706
from the developer and the fixer, and all
these operations being carried on in the dark,
the bichromate film is still light sensitive,
and now has superposed upon it a protecting
5 black coat where the light ray has played
over it in recording sound waves. The film
is next exposed a comparatively lon» time
(say 5 or 10 minutes) in strong sun or electric
light, and then treated to a bath of the sol-
10 vent developer, which may be, for example,
glacial acetic acid cold. This dissolves away
the upper film of gelatin, the collodion coat-
ing and the unexposed portions of the bi-
chromate gelatin. The sound record is then
15 indicated by the difference in the thickness
or elevation between the parts of the film
which are light struck and those which are
not exposed, and if the unexposed portion be
all dissolved away the resulting sound record
20 takes the form of the edge of the film cut
along the dividing line between exposed and
unexposed parts.
In making sound records in one form here-
inafter to be described, I may proceed by
25 placing the bichromate gelatin directly on
the bromid gelatin after the latter has been
exposed and developed. Thereupon, the
second exposure being made from beneath,
the solvent developer being applied to the
30 outer surface leaves the light struck portion, —
i. e. the portions under the transparent parts
of the bromid film, as raised ridges, super-
posed on the bromid gelatin.
After the sound photograph has been made
35 it may be reproduced in relief in gelatin or
glue or similar substance by printing in the
sun and dissolving out, as is done in photo-
engraving.
The form in which the photographic sur-
40 face is arranged is not material to the proc-
ess. But I prefer, for cheaper records where
accuracy is not the sole consideration, to
make the record in the form of a ridge or a
grooved fine arranged spirally on a flat plate.
45 For more accurate work I make the com-
pound film in the ribbon form, as illustrated
in the accompanying drawing at Figure 7.
For carrying out the process and the ma-
nipulation of the film and of the light ray I
50 have invented the apparatus illustrated in
the accompanying drawings, which drawings
also illustrate the steps of the process. And
the process will be explained in detail in the
description of the structure and use of the
55 apparatus.
Fig. 1 represents my preferred form of ex-
posing box, telescope and actuator, shown in
section. Fig. la is a vertical section, at right
angles to that of Fig. 1, through the actuat-
60 ing diaphragm and its housing, showing the
support of the mirror. Fig. 2 is a plan in-
side the dark box, with a plate in position,
and a cross section of the telescope. Fig. 3
is a vertical section of an exposing box for
65 recording on the ribbon form of the film.
Fig. 4 is a section through another form of
actuator and its telescope. Fig. 5 is a verti-
cal section through the telescope. Fig. 6 is
a partial section of the compound film car-
ried on a plate. Fig. 7 shows two perspec- 70
tive and sectional views of the ribbon form of
the film, in two stages of development. Fig.
8 illustrates the head of the lever arm for
actuating the light ray, and the trace of the
light ray, as arranged when it is desired to 75
produce a groove in the bichromate gelatin.
Fig. 9 illustrates the same as arranged to give
a raised ridge in the bichromate gelatin, to
be used as a patrix die in stamping out dupli-
cates. Fig. 10 shows a flat plate with a 80
sound photograph traced upon it in spiral
form. Fig. 11 is a perspective view in sec-
tion of the disk formed by winding the rib-
bon of Fig. 7. Fig. 12 shows in section, at
two stages of development, the plate form of 85
the double film, and the reproducing plate
stamped out therefrom, below.
Considering the cost of producing dupli-
cate records I prefer the form of the appara-
tus shown in Figs. 1 and 2. 90
A light tight box A contains a motor M
having a contact or brush-wheel 22 on a hori-
zontal shaft which has a fine screw extension,
21. This screw works in a block 20 winch
has a base 23 mortised in and sliding freely in 95
a groove 26 in a horizontal guide-bar 24 sup-
ported as shown at 25. The traveling block
20 has a socket which receives the center pin
20a of a revolving table t. The table t car-
ries the plate B having the sensitive film/' 100
(shown in Fig. 6). The table and plate are
revolved by the brush wheel 22 and are kept
in contact therewith by rollers 19. The box
A has a door D for introducing the sensitive
plate. On top of the box A is stanchion 9 105
with an adjustable arm 8 which carries the
telescope and actuator for the light ray. In
the form of this figure, a sound receiver 1
screws into and forms part of a circular hous-
ing containing a vibrating diaphragm 4, no
which may be of glass or mica, held between
elastic rings. At the center of the dia-
phragm is a thin aluminum strut 5 to actu-
ate a mirror 6. On one side of the lower
opening of the housing is attached a thin flat 115
spring 7 which carries on its outer end a
small surface mirror 6 attached at its middle.
Thus as the diaphragm 4 vibrates under the
influence of sound waves entering the re-
ceiver 1 the mirror receives an angular vibra- 120
tion about its middle as a flexion axis. The
face of the mirror has a black or a white spot,
preferably diamond-shaped, as shown at Fig.
la. (If it is black its image on the plate/'
will make a clear line photographic trace; if 125
silvered, a black line trace, for a purpose
hereinafter set forth. Or, the sectional form
of the ray may be controlled by an opening,
before striking the mirror.)
The diaphragm housing has a tubular ex- 130
900,706
a
tension below which telescopes over a tube 2
which again slides in a tube 3 set in the top
of the box A. All the parts have set screws
for adjusting. Through the side of the tube
5 extends a small tube 18 cariying condensing
lenses 17 which project rays of light on the
center of the mirror 6 and through the lens
16. The sunlight is collected and projected
into the tube by the concave mirror 12 held
10 by a universal joint in the head 14 supported
by the telescope as shown. The ray of light
then is reflected downwards and is focused
by a lens 16 to the fine image on the surface
of the moving sensitive film /'. It will be
15 plain that by arranging the distance from the
mirror to the film /' the movement of the
focus point of the ray of light may be given
any desired amplitude of vibration, while the
lens 16 will reduce the image of the spot on
20 the mirror 6 — that is, the cross section of the
vibrating ray — to any desired degree or size.
Thus both the amplitude of the lateral vibra-
tion on the recording surface and the size
and brilliancv of the recording beam of light
25 are under complete control. As is clear
from the figure, the ray of light will vibrate
to and fro in a line radial to the disk B, while
at the same time the said disk rotating gives
the impinging point of the light ray a result-
30 ant sinuous motion with respect to the cir-
cumference of the plate B and proceeding in
a spiral path over the surface about the cen-
ter of the plate, — the screw 21 dragging the
table and plate laterally under the focus of
35 the telescope as the revolution continues.
An illustration of the course over the plate
is shown at Fig. 10.
The actuator shown at Fig. 4 will some-
times be \ised. The small flat spring 7 sup-
40 ported on the diaphragm housing carries an
arm 27 of light material' as aluminum. At
its inner end it is attached to a flexible strut
5 made fast to the diaphragm 4. At its
outer end, on the longer lever arm, is a flat
45 head 27a with a small hole (preferably dia-
mond shaped) , and this head and arm extend
through a slit in the side of the telescope 43
and play freely between the two disks 28
which are open at the center as shown. The
50 light is collected and concentrated to the de-
sired degree on the vibratory head 27 a by. a
lens 45 in the tube 44, and after passage
through the opening in the head 27 a of the
arm 27 the rays are focused by the lens 47
55 on the surface of the moving sensitive film/'.
The plate B and the film/' are shown hi
partial section at Fig. 6. The bichromate
film/7 is placed on metal or glass and covered
with a collodion film/6 and upon this is placed
60 the bromid film/5. The form of the opening
in the head of the arm 27 is best shown at
Fig. 9, in using which the line left on the
plate is unexposed, while the rest of the sur-
face will have been all subjected to the action
65 of light, (See Fig. 12.)
When developed the film/"' will have a lat-
erally sinuous spiral line left transparent.
On exposure to light again the portions of the
bichromate gelatin under this will be light
struck and become insoluble, so that when 70
the whole is treated to acetic acid the top
film p, the collodion coat /" and the unex-
posed portions of the bottom (bichromate)
film J'1 will dissolve away, leaving the form
shown in section (f7). This is dried and 75
hardened and then used as a patrix die to
stamp into softened celluloid for example, as
at r, leaving the sound record in the form of
a groove spirally arranged on the plate or
disk S. 80
The more accurate form in which to make
the record is by the use of a sensitive ribbon,
instead of the plate film. This is shown at
Fig. 7, and is manipulated by the apparatus
of Fig. 3. The dark box G contains a spool 85
or roller 33 carrying the sensitive ribbon, and
a spool or roller 34 to receive it. The ribbon
passes over a support 32 under the vibrating
ray of light and winds on the spool 34, which
is driven by a brush wheel 36 carried on a 90
pivoted arm 39 and driven by a pulley 37
and cord 38 from the pulley 4i of the motor
M'. The arm 39 is pivoted on the shaft of
the pulley 41 and has, integral with it, a fin-
ger 39a which extends inside the spool 34 and 95
rests on the surface of the ribbon already
wound thereon. It stands parallel and op-
posite to the arm 39, so that as the ribbon
winds on the spool the arm 39 a rises, carrying
also the arm 39 outward, keeping the point 100
of contact of the driving wheel 36 always op-
posite to the last layer of the ribbon and
winding the ribbon on the spool at a constant
rate, whatever may be the diameter of the
coil on the receiving spool. Either form of 105
telescope and actuator may be used with
either form of exposing box and film.
The sensitive ribbon is made similar to the
sensitive film on the plate heretofore de-
scribed, save that it will be more convenient no
in making to coat both sides of the bichromate
film with the collodion and the bromid gelatin.
Referring to Fig. 7 : the thick film /4 is the
bichromate gelatin; it is thinly coated with
collodion, /3, for protection. Outside this is 115
a thin film of the silver bromid gelatin, f1.
Upon exposure and development the trace of
the ray of light (when the form of the actua-
tor head of Fig. 8 is used) results as a fine
black line along the middle of the ribbon, as 120
shown. When re-exposed to effect the bi-
chromate film the latter becomes insoluble
all except the portion protected by the black
medial line, which part readily dissolves in
the solvent developer. Consequently, in the 125
bath of acetic acid the bichromate ribbon is
severed along the line representing the sound
waves by the dissolving away of the protected
gelatin. Now one of the halves of the sev-
ered ribbon is arranged for sound reproduc- 130
900,706
tion as shown in Fig. 1 1 , where the base h is a
flat disk having a hub. Around this the rib-
bon is wound in layers with layers of packing j
of less width than the ribbon, between them,
5 so that the gelatin ribbon J4 stands a little
above the general surface, forming, when
completed, a spiral ridge on the disk h having
its upper edge modulatory to correspond to
the sound waves. When hardened this may
10 be used as a patrix die to stamp into softened
rubber or celluloid for commercial use; or it
may be reproduced in various ways.
It is clear that the packing between the
layers of the gelatin ribbon might as well be
15 made wider, — i. e., higher from the base disk,
than the ribbon itself, so that the whole will
present a spiral groove whose bottom is the
edge of the ribbon, shaped in correspondence
with sound waves.
20 The terms ' ' sound photograph ' ' and ' ' pho-
nophotographic record" used herein will be
understood to indicate the trace of the vi-
brating spot of light over the surface of the
moving bromid film, after development there-
25 on, when the line referred to is either a black
opaque line or else a clear line in the gelatin. — ■
depending on whether the recording spot is
lighted or is black.
Now the sound photograph may be repro-
30 duced in raised or depressed form in several
ways : when it is made as a dark line trace or
"negative " , I may expose under it directly a
common bromid film and make thereby a
''positive" or clear line trace. This being
35 developed in oxallate or other non-metallic
developer, treated to dilute sulfuric acid,
dried thoroughly and then steamed; where-
upon the (clear line) trace will swell and form
a ridge, winch can be baked and hardened
40 and used as a patrix die, from which we may
stamp out duplicates in the groove form.
Again, I may use a clear line photophono-
graphic record and reverse it over a plate
covered with thick bichromated gelatin and
45 after printing thereon dissolve out the unex-
posed portions of the said bichromate gela-
tin, leaving the record again in the form of a
standing ridge. On using this as a patrix
die and stamping out duplicates in celluloid
50 the record will be re-reversed and take the
form of a groove in the duplicate, now again
in obverse and ready for commercial use.
The ways of duplicating, and of reducing
the photophonographic record to a tangible
55 material form for reproducing the sound are
given only to illustrate the breadth of my in-
vention, being parts thereof, and while they
are alternate forms of procedure in my proc-
ess I do not limit myself to any one or to all
60 of them.
The apparatus herein described, which
forms another part of my invention, I have
presented for patent in my application No.
158,311 filed May 22/03, and the same there-
fore forms no part of the invention covered 65
by claims herein, but —
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat-
ent is the following:
1. The process of making sound reproduc- 70
ing records by photographically recording
the movements of a sound-actuated body
and photo-etching the said graphic record to
produce an undulating surface corresponding
in form to the sound waves recorded. 75
2. The process of making sound reproduc-
ing records by vibrating a ray of light in con-
sonance with the movements of sound waves,
moving a light-sensitive film across the field
of play of the said ray and reducing the re- 80
suiting trace of the said ray by chemical
means to material form as an undulating sur-
face in amorphous material.
3. The process of making a reproducing
sound record by moving a ray of light in con- 85
sonance with the vibrations of sound waves,
translating a light-sensitive material across
the field of play of the said ray, developing,
and by chemical means changing the relative
elevation of the material along the said trace 90
on the sensitive surface thereof.
4. The process of making sound reproduc-
ing records consisting in vibrating a ray of
light in consonance with the motions of
sound waves over a moving sensitive sur- 95
face, developing the photographed line thus
formed, exposing under the photograph
amorphous material capable of being ren-
dered insoluble by the action of light and dis-
solving out the unexposed and soluble por- 100
tions of the same, to leave an undulating sur-
face.
5. The process of making sound reproduc-
ing records which consists in exposing suc-
cessive portions of a light-sensitive film to the 105
action of a ray of light vibrated in consonance
with the movement of sound waves, develop-
ing the same to reduce the trace of the ray to
an opaque line, exposing under this film a
second film rendered insoluble where light- 110
struck, and dissolving out the unexposed
portions of the said second film, whereby an
undulating surface in the form of the path of
the light ray is produced in the said second
film. 115
6. The process of making sound reproduc-
ing records by photographing upon a light
sensitive film the movements of a ray of light
vibrated by the agency of a sound wave actu-
ated body, developing the resulting photo- 120
graphic trace, exposing beneath it a film ca-
pable of being rendered insoluble by the ac-
tion of light thereon, dissolving away the un-
exposed portions of the same under the sound
record trace, to form an undulating surface, 125
and reproducing the resulting sound wave
forms by impressing the same into soft ma-
terial such as celluloid.
900,706
7. The process of making sound reproduc-
ing records which consists in vibrating a ray
of light b}' a sound-actuated body, translat-
ing a light-sensitive ribbon under the point
5 of incidence of the said ray to trace an undu-
lating photographic line thereon, exposing
under this record a ribbon of bichromated
gelatin, dissolving away the unexposed por-
tions of the latter, so as to divide the said
10 ribbon into parts having their edges undulat-
ing in the form of sound waves.
8. The process of making sound reproduc-
ing records which consists in exposing suc-
cessive portions of a light-sensitive film to
15 the action of a ray of light vibrated in conso-
nance with the movements of sound waves,
developing the same to produce an opaque
line on the trace of the ray, exposing under
this film a second film rendered insoluble
20 where light-struck, dissolving out the unex-
posed portions of the said second film so that
the form of the edge of the path of the ray of
light is imparted to an undulating surface
representing sound waves, and winding this
25 film about a center so that the said edge is
arranged spirally with the volutions of the
edge approximately in a plane.
9. The process of making sound reproduc-
ing records which consists in vibrating a ray
30 of light by a sound-actuated body, translat-
ing a light-sensitive ribbon under the point
of incidence of the said ray to trace an undu-
lating photographic line thereon, exposing
under this record a ribbon of bichromated
35 gelatin, dissolving away the unexposed por-
tions of the latter to sever the ribbon into
parts having their edges in the form of sound
waves, and winding the ribbon into a disk
with the edge of the ribbon forming a spirally
40 arranged surface with undulations in the
plane vertical to the plane of the disk.
10. The process of making sound-produc-
ing records which consists in vibrating a ray
of light by a sound-actuated body, translat-
45 ing under the point of incidence of said ray a
compound sensitive ribbon composed of a
top layer of silver bromid emulsion and an
under layer of bichromated gelatin the latter
being protected by a skin of collodion, devel-
50 oping the top film, re-exposing to effect the
under film, dissolving away the top film and
the unexposed portions of the under film so
as to sever the under film along the line of
the trace of the light ray, and winding the re-
55 suiting wavy-edged ribbon with alternate
layers of packing, into a disk with the edge
of the ribbon forming a spirally arranged sur-
face on the face plane of the disk, the undula-
tions in the form of sound waves being in a
60 plane vertical to the disk.
11. The process of making sound repro-
ducing records consisting in vibrating a ray
of light falling on a sensitive film in conso-
nance with sound waves, developing the pho-
tograph thus formed, exposing under the 65
photograph a strip of amorphous material
capable of being rendered insoluble by the
action of light, dissolving out the unexposed
and soluble portions of the amorphous ma-
terial, winding the strip thus formed into a 70
spiral with the undulating edge correspond-
ing to the sound waves extending in one di-
rection, and impressing in or upon plastic
material the said undulating spirally ar-
ranged edge of the strip. . 75
12. The process of making sound repro-
ducing records which consists in exposing
successive portions of a light-sensitive film to
the action of a ray of light vibrating in con-
sonance with the motions of sound waves, 80
developing the same to produce an opaque
line, exposing under this film a second film
capable of being rendered insoluble by the
action of light, dissolving away the unex-
posed portions of said second film to form the 85
material under the edge of the path of the
ray of light into an undulating surface hav-
ing the shape of the sound waves, winding
this film about a center so that the said edge
is arranged spirally, lying in approximately a 90
plane, and then impressing the resulting rec-
ord disk into soft material to make commer-
cial records in the form of a plate having a
spirally arranged surface with the undula-
tions in a plane vertical to the plane of the 95
plate.
13. A photophonogram having an undu-
latory operating surface, the undulations
thereof corresponding to sound waves, and
composed of amorphous material rendered 100
practically insoluble in water by the action
of light.
14. A photophonogram having a continu-
ous spirally arranged undulatory operating
surface, the undulations thereof correspond- 105
ing to sound waves, and composed of amor-
phous material rendered insoluble by the
action of light.
15. A surface of amorphous material ren-
dered insoluble by the action of light having 110
cut therein by tracing with a sound actuated
ray of light and a developer a spirally ar-
ranged portion having an undulating surface
corresponding to sound waves.
In testimony whereof, I hereunder sign 115
my name in the presence of two witnesses.
FRANCIS W. H. CLAY.
Witnesses :
Daniel Wilson,
Chas. H. Urban.
900,876.
I. W. N0E0R0SS.
AUTOMATIC PHONOGBAPH APPABATUS.
APPLICATION PILED AUG. 9, 1907.
Patented Oct. 13, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR
"C2^-«-^ Jr. forztr&tl-^-
ATTORNEY
THE NORRfS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. O. C.
900,876.
I. W. NORCROSS.
AUTOMATIC PHONOGBAPH APPARATUS.
APPLICATION PILED AU8. 9, 1907.
Patented Oct. 13, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
ttj.6.
THE NORRIS PETERS CO.
WASHINGTON. O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ISAAC W. NORCROSS, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO ELLSWORTH A. HAW-
THORNE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
AUTOMATIC PHONOGRAPH APPARATUS.
No. 900,876.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 13, 1908.
Application filed August 9, 1907. Serial No. 387,782.
To all wlwm it may concern:
Be it known that I, Isaac W. Norcross, a
citizen of the United States, residing in the
borough of Manhattan, city, county, and
5 State of New York, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Automatic
Phonograph Apparatus, of which the follow-
ing is a specification.
One object of my invention is to insure the
10 starting of the mechanism when a coin is de-
posited in the slot and the stopping of said
mechanism after the reproducer has traveled
to the end of the record and has been re-
turned to the starting point again.
15 A further object is to effect positive en-
gagement of the reproducer carriage with
the feed and return screws and positive re-
tention of such engagement during the entire
time of travel of the reproducer carriage in
20 its forward or backward movements; and a
still further object is to readily regulate the
length of travel of the carriage to accord with
the length of the record with which the de-
vice is equipped.
25 These objects I attain in the manner here-
inafter set forth, reference being had to the
accompanying drawings which show the pre-
ferred embodiment of the invention, and in
which
30 Figure 1 is a perspective view of a portion
of a coin-actuated phonograph; Fig. 2 is a
view of the same, partly in transverse section
and partly in elevation; Fig. 3 is a view
showing, detached from each other and
35 partly broken away, the members of the con-
tact device whereby the electric circuit is
closed or opened ; Fig. 4 is a perspective view
of the rear side of the device for locking the
reproducer carriage in engagement with the
40 feed or return screw; Fig. 5 is a plan view of
a portion of the mechanism, and Fig. 6 is a
perspective view showing the application of
certain features of my invention to a phono-
graph instrument of a somewhat different
45 type from that shown in Fig. 1.
Referring in the first instance to Figs. 1 to
5 of the drawing, 1 represents a support of
any appropriate character to which is se-
cured the bed-plate 2 of the phonograph in-
50 strument, this bed -plate having suitable
standards providing bearings for the spindle
which carries the phonograph record 3.
This spindle is driven by a belt 4 from an
electric motor suitably located and connect-
55 ed by proper gearing to the main feed screw 5
and return screw 6, whereby the reproducer
carriage 7 is caused to move forwardly or
backwardly. The reproducer carriage is
pivotally mounted upon a guide rod 9 and
has an arm 10 which carries a half nut for en- go
gaging the forward feed screw 5 and another
arm 11 provided with a half-nut for engaging
the return screw 6, the half-nut of the arm 10
being in engagement with the feed screw 5
when the reproducer carriage is lowered so 65
that the reproducer stylus will engage with
the record, as shown in Fig. 2, and the half-
nut of the arm 1 1 being in engagement with
the return screw 6 when the reproducer car-
riage, after having completed its forward 70
movement, is lifted so as to free the repro-
ducer stylus from the record preparatory to
the return movement of the carriage.
In front of the record holder is a longitudi-
nal bar 12 upon which the arm 1 1 is support- 75
ed when the front portion of the reproducer
carriage is depressed so as to bring the repro-
ducer stylus into engagement with the rec-
ord, as shown in Fig. 2, and in front of this
bar is a locking device whereby the repro- go
ducer carriage is firmly held in either its
raised or lowered position during its forward
or backward traverse. This locking device
consists of a vertical plate 13 having a base
which is slotted at each end for the reception 85
of confining screws 14 whereby the locking de-
vice can be adjusted longitudinally in respect
to the record, as may be desired. The plate
13 has a flanged upper portion 15 and to the
inner face of said flange is secured a bar 16 90
by means of set screws 17 passing through a
slot 19 in the plate 13, whereby the bar 16
can be adjusted longitudinally in respect to
the flanged top of the plate 13, and can thus
be caused to project to any desired extent be- 95
yond one end of said flange, as shown in
Fig. 1.
When the reproducer carriage is in oper-
ative relation with the record, as shown in
Fig. 2, the forward end of the arm 11 pro- 100
jects beneath the bar 16 ami flange 15 of the
plate 13 and the reproducer is thereby pre-
vented from rising from the record, and at
the same time the half -nut of the arm 10 of
the reproducer carriage is held firmly in en- 105
gagement with the forward feed screw 5, this
condition of affairs continuing until the arm
11 passes beyond the projecting end of the
bar 16, and is therefore free to rise.
Secured to and depending from the rear 110
3
900,876
side of the carriage 7 is an arm 18 (Figs. 2 and
5) and mounted on the support 1 is a bracket
20 canying a leaf spring 28 which extends
into the path of movement of the end of arm
5 18. Bracket 20 is adjustable parallel to the
axis of the record by being provided with a
slot and being secured to the support by a
screw passing through this slot, as shown in
Fig. 5. As the arm 11 nears the projecting
]0 end of bar 16, arm 18 engages spring 28 and
puts the same under tension so that the
spring tends to rock the carriage on rod 9 in
the direction to raise arm 11. Thus, as soon
as arm 11 is free of the end of bar 16, the car-
15 riage will be rocked to free the half -nut of the
arm 10 from engagement with the forward
feed screw 5, and bring the half-nut of the
arm 11 into engagement with the return
screw 6, and during the return movement of
20 the carriage the arm 11 will bear upon the
top of the bar 16 and flange 15, which will
thus serve to support the reproducer car-
riage in its raised position and maintain the
arm 11 in positive engagement with the re-
25 turn screw 6.
The rear end of the bar 16 is beveled, as
shown in Figs. 1 and 4, and if the spring 28
does not lift the arm 1 1 to its full height, the
beveled end of the bar will engage said arm
30 and effect the completion of the movement.
When the arm 11 reaches the end of the
flange 15 on the backward movement of the
reproducer carriage, it drops therefrom,
owing to the preponderance in weight of the
35 overhanging front portion of said carriage,
and the original conditions are thereby re-
stored, the carriage being free from the con-
trol of the return screw and again placed un-
der control of the forward feed screw 5. At
40 this time it becomes necessary to stop the
operation of the motor whereby the record-
carrying spindle is operated, otherwise the
device would operate continuously. The
motor was originally started by dropping a
45 coin through the guide 21, the coin dropping
into a cup 22 and then rolling therefrom
through a funnel 23 into a suitable recep-
tacle. The cup 22 is carried by one arm 24
of a lever pivoted to a standard 25 on the
50 bed-plate of the phonograph and having a
counterweighted ami 26, which projects into
the path of the arm 11 of the reproducer
carriage when the same drops from the end of
the flange 15 of the locking plate 13. When
55 said arm 11 is in its lower position, however,
the lever arm 26 can project above the same,
and this position is assumed by it when the
impact of the coin falling into the cup 22 de-
presses the arm 24 of the lever. By this
60 movement said arm 24 is forced between a
pair of fingers 27 on a plate 29 and a series of
spring fingers 30 forming part of a plate 31
which is pivotally mounted on the upper end
of the plate 29 and is acted upon by a spring
65 32 interposed between the two plates; as
shown in Fig. 3, and tending to push the
plate 31 outwardly so as to press its spring
fingers 30 towards the fingers 27 with a de-
gree of force determined by the adjustment
of a set screw 33, which passes through an 70
opening in the plate 31 and screws into a
threaded opening in the upper portion of the
plate 29.
To the plate 29 is connected a wire 34
forming part of an electric circuit containing 75
the driving motor for the record-carrying
spindle, another wire 35, forming part of said
circuit, being connected to the standard 25.
When, therefore, the lever arm 24 is forced
down between the fingers 27 and the spring 80
fingers 30 an electrical connection is estab-
lished between the wires 34 and 35, and the
electric circuit through the motor is com-
pleted, the frictional hold of the fingers 27
and 30 upon the lever arm 24 being sufficient 85
to retain the parts in this position after the
coin has dropped from the cup 22. When,
however, at the end of the return motion of
the reproducer carriage, the arm 11 drops
from the flanged upper end of the locking 90
plate 13, it strikes the lever arm 26 and de-
presses the same so as to raise the arm 24
free from contact with the fingers 27 and 30,
thereby opening the circuit through the mo-
tor and stopping the operation, of the same 95
until another coin has been deposited in the
cup 22.
The adjustment of the bar 16 in respect to
the flanged upper portion of the locking plate
13 provides for the retention of the repro- 100
ducer carriage in operative relation with the
record throughout any desired length of
travel of said carriage, whereby such extent
of travel can be accurately gaged to suit the
length of the record with which the device is 105
equipped.
In Fig. 5 I have illustrated the circuit open-
ing and closing devices in connection with a
phonograph of somewhat different type from
that illustrated in Figs. 1 to 4. In this no
embodiment of my invention the arm 11 of
the reproducer carriage 7, on the forward
movement of said carriage, when the arm is
depressed, passes beneath an arm 40 on a
vertical shaft 41, which is mounted in suit- 115
able bearings in the cabinet carrying the
phonograph instrument, the lower end of said
arm 41 having two arms 42 and 43, the
former acted upon by a spring 44 and the arm
43 being adapted to act upon a third arm 45 120
of the lever which carries the circuit closing
arm 24 and the counterweighted arm 26.
On the rearward movement of the reproducer
carriage its arm 11 strikes the arm 40 and
turns the shaft 41 so as to cause its arm 43 to 125
strike the arm 45 and thereby lift the arm 24
out of contact with the fingers 27 and 30 of
the circuit closing device, the shaft 41 and
its arms being restored to normal position
by the spring 44 as soon as the arm 40 is free 130
900,876
3
from ronl act with the arm 11 of the repro-
ducer ca triage. In t his figure of the drawing,
Hi represents the motor whereby the record-
carrying spindle of the phonograph is rotated,
5 and the electrical connections comprise the
wire 47 leading from the plate 29 to the mo-
tor, the wire leading from the motor to one
pole of the battery or other current genera-
tor, and the wire 50 leading from the other
10 pole of said generator to the circuit-closing
lever, the circuit being closed in the same
manner as before by the depression of the
lever arm 24 into contact with the fingers 27
and 30 when the coin drops into the receiving
15 cup 22.
I am aware that previous to my invention
phonographs having forward and return feed
screws for the reproducer carriage have been
combined with the electro-magnetic devices
20 for shifting the screw-engaging devices from
one screw to the other when the carriage
reaches the limit of its forward travel, but,
so far as I am aware, I am the first to provide
a mechanical or non-magnetic device for this
25 purpose, or any device for positively locking
each screw-engaging device in engagement
with its screw during the travel of the car-
riage both forwardly and backwardly, or a
device whereby the movement of the car-
30 riage which brings the screw-engaging device
into engagement with the forward feed screw
always effects at the same time the opening
of the circuit in which the driving electro-
motor is contained.
35 Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new therein and desire to secure by
Letters Patent is as follows : —
1. The combination of the reproducer car-
riage of a phonograph, a return screw there-
40 for, a screw engaging device connected to the
carriage, and a rigidly mounted bar for en-
gaging said device and locking the same in
engagement with the return screw.
2. The combination of the traveling re-
45 producer carriage of a phonograph, a screw
for feeding the same forwardly, a screw for
effecting the return movement, screw-engag-
ing devices connected to the carriage, and
means for locking one of said devices in en-
50 gagement with the forward feed during one
movement of the carriage and the other in
engagement with the return screw during the
reverse movement.
3. The combination of the traveling re-
55 producer carriage of a phonograph, a screw
for feeding the same forwardly, a screw-en-
gaging device connected to the carriage, a
supporting bar for the carriage during the
forward movement of the same, and a lock-
GO ing bar between which and said supporting
bar a member of the carriage is confined
throughout such forward movement.
4. The combination of the traveling car-
riage of a phonograph, with a locking bar
65 therefor adjustable as to its length.
5. The combination of the traveling car-
riage of a phonograph, a feed screw therefor,
a screw-engaging device connected to the
carriage, and a locking bar for said screw-en-
gaging device adjustable as to its length. 70
6. The combination of the traveling car-
riage of a phonograph, a screw for feeding
the same forwardly , a return screw, screw-en-
gaging devices connected to the carriage, and
a locking bar, one of whose faces locks said 75
devices during the forward movement of the
carriage and the other during the return
movement.
7. The combination of the traveling car-
riage of a phonograph, a bar on which the go
carriage is pivotally mounted, forward and
return feed screws, screw-engaging devices
connected to the carriage, a locking bar for
holding said devices in engagement with
their respective screws, and automatic means 85
for turning said carriage about the bar on
which it is mounted when the carriage
reaches the end of its movement in one direc-
tion.
8. The combination of the traveling car- 90
riage of a phonograph, a bar on which the
carriage is pivotally mounted, forward and
return feed screws, screw-engaging devices
connected to the carriage, a locking bar ex-
tending in the direction of movement of said 95
carriage for holding said devices in engage-
ment with their respective screws, and auto-
matic and non-magnetic means for turning
said carriage about the bar on which it is
mounted when the carnage reaches the end 100
of its movement in one direction.
9. The combination of the traveling car-
riage of a phonograph, a bar on which the
carriage is pivotally mounted, forward and
return feed screws, screw-engaging devices 105
connected to the carriage, a locking bar ex-
tending in the direction of movement of said
carriage for holding said devices in engage-
ment with their respective screws, and a
spring for turning the carriage about the bar 110
on which it is mounted when the carriage
reaches the end of its movement in one di-
rection.
10. The combination of the traveling car-
riage of a phonograph, a bar on which the 115
carriage is pivotally mounted, forward and
return feed screws^ screw-engaging devices
connected to the carriage, means for holding
one or the other of said devices in engage-
ment with its corresponding screw, a spring, 120
and means actuated by the movement of the
carriage for subjecting said spring to tension,
said spring acting on said carriage to turn it
about the bar on which it is mounted to effect
the shifting of said screw-engaging devices 125
when the latter are released bj^ said, holding
means.
11. The combination of the traveling car-
riage of a phonograph, forward and return
feed screws therefor, screw-engaging devices 130
900,876
connected to said carriage, a bar for locking-
said devices in position during both their
forward and return movements, and a spring
for effecting the shifting of said devices in
5 respect to the feed screws and to the locking-
bar when the carriage reaches the termina-
tion of its movement in one direction.
12. The combination of a traveling re-
producer carriage of a phonograph, forward
10 and return feed screws therefor, screw-
engaging devices connected to the carriage,
a bar having one face for locking one of said
•screw-engaging devices in position during
the forward movement of the carriage and
15 another face for locking the other screw-
engaging device in position during the return
movement of the carriage, said bar having
a beveled end, and a yielding device for
shifting the screw-engaging devices when
20 the carriage reaches the termination of its
forward movement and moving the same
into position to engage the beveled end of
the locking bar.
13. The combination of the traveling re-
25 producer carriage of a phonograph, means
for moving the same forwardly and back-
wardly, means for supporting the carriage
during its movement in one direction per-
mitting it to drop by gravity at the end of
30 such movement, and a motor or circuit-
governing lever actuated by an element of
the reproducer carriage as the same drops
by gravity from said supporting means.
14. The combination of the traveling re-
35 producer carriage of a phonograph, means
for moving the same forwardly and back-
wardly, means for supporting said carriage
during its movement in one direction permit-
ting it to drop by gravity at the end of such
40 movement, a motor or circuit-controlling
lever mounted in position to be struck by a
member of the reproducer carriage as the
same drops by gravity from said supporting
means.
45 15. The combination of the traveling car-
riage of a phonograph, means for moving the
same forwardly and backwardly, an electric
circuit containing the driving motor for the
carriage, a circuit-controlling lever, means
for actuating the same to close the circuit of 50
the motor, and a contact device for said lever
having a plurality of oppositely-facing fin-
gers with which said lever coacts, one set of
said fingers being elastic, said lever being en-
gaged by said carriage and withdrawn from 55
said device thereby as the carriage completes
a forward and return movement.
16. The combination of the traveling car-
riage of a phonograph, means for moving the
the same forwardly and backwardly, an elec- 60
trie circuit containing the driving motor for
the carriage, a circuit - controlling lever,
means for actuating the same to close the cir-
cuit of the motor, and a contact device en-
gaged by said lever and constituting a fric- 65
tional retainer therefor, said contact device
having a plurality of oppositely-facing fin-
gers between which the lever is interposed,
one set of said fingers being elastic and pro-
vided with means for adjusting the pressure 70
of the same upon the lever, said lever being
engaged by said carriage and withdrawn
from said device thereby as the carriage
completes a forward and return movement.
17. The combination of the traveling car- 75
riage of a phonograph, forward and return
feed screws therefor, screw-engaging devices
connected to the carriage, a bar for holding
one or the other of said devices in engagement
with its respective screw, said bar being ad- 80
justable to vary its length, and a spring for
effecting the shifting of said devices when the
carriage reaches the termination of its move-
ment in one direction.
This specification signed and witnessed 85
this 7th day of August, 1907.
ISAAC W. NORCROSS.
Witnesses :
D. S. Edmonds,
Samuel L. Marcus.
I, KITSEE.
PHONOGRAPHY.
APPLICATION FILED JULY 18, 19D7.
900,934.
Patented Oct. 13, 1908.
WITNESSES:
INVENTOR.
THE NORMS RETERS CO.. WASHINGTON D. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ISIDOR KITSEE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
PHONOGRAPHY.
No. 900,934.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 13, 1908.
Application filed July 18, 1907. Serial No. 384,299.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Isidor Kitsee, a citi-
zen of the United States, residing at Phila-
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer-
tain new and useful Improvements in Pho-
nography, of which the following is a specifi-
cation.
My invention relates to an improvement
10 in phonography. Its object is to produce an
original record adapted to have therefrom,
with the aid of photography, produced a
number of copies.
In application Serial No. 374,213, filed
15 May 17th 1907, and in application Serial No.
380,960, filed June 26th 1907, I have de-
scribed means, whereby with the aid of a liq-
uid, colored so as to be opaque to the rays of
light, or with the aid of a solid crayon, phono-
20 graphic lines may be traced or drawn on a
material transparent to the rays of light. I
have found that in both cases an original
record, useful for the purpose of producing
copies therefrom, can be made.
25 I will describe here both processes and the
product resulting therefrom.
In one case, that is, where the liquid is
used, I preferably provide a reservoir con-
taining the necessary liquid with means to
30 cause the liquid to flow out of said reservoir
in a stream fine enough, so as to produce a
line of the necessary thickness, and I connect
the vibrating diaphragm either directly or
indirectly with the means whereby the liquid
35 issues from the reservoir, in a manner so that
the vibrations of the diaphragm will produce
vibrations of said means, thereby producing
the required undulatory line; but it is obvi-
ous that instead of a free-flowing liquid, a
40 pen or ink stylus may be used. In the other
case, that is, where a crayon or pencil is em-
ployed, I connect to the stylus the pencil or
crayon and trace on the transparent mate-
rial the undulating lines in substantially the
45 same manner as in the method aforesaid,
wherein the liquid is used, with the excep-
tion that in this last case the crayon or pen-
cil has to be in contact with the material on
which the lines are to be traced.
50 Different materials may be used for the
purpose of having thereon reproduced the
vibrations of the phonographic diaphragm,
but I have found that glass in the first case
and tracing cloth in the second case answers
the purpose well. 55
The drawing represents in plan view part
of a record made in accordance with my in-
vention.
In this drawing, 1 is the transparent mate-
rial and 2 are the lines marked thereon with 60
a material opaque to the rays of light.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent is : —
1. An original phonographic record con- 65
sisting of a transparent material and sound
waves written thereon with a non-magnetic
material opaque to the rays of light.
2. An original sound record comprising a
material transparent to the rays of light and 70
undulating lines of non-magnetic material
representing sound waves, said lines opaque
to said rays of light.
3. An original phonographic record con-
sisting of a plate or sheet of a material trans- 75
parent to the rays of light and having record-
ed thereon lines with a non-magnetic mate-
rial opaque to said rays of light.
4. As a new article of manufacture, a
phonographic record comprising the lines of 80
record and the sheet or plate on which said
lines are made; the sheet or plate of a mate-
rial transparent to the rays of light and the
lines of record of a non-magnetic material
opaque to the rays of light. 85
5. As a new article of manufacture, a rec-
ord comprising a flexible transparent sheet
having recorded thereon with opaque non-
magnetic material phonographic characters.
6. As a new article of manufacture, a 90
tracing cloth having recorded thereon opaque
laterally undulating phonographic lines of
record.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
ISIDOR KITSEE.
Witnesses :
Edith R. Shilley,
Mary C. Smith.
J. Si KERR.
SOUND BOX.
APPLICATION FILED DEO. 28, 1807.
901,713.
Patented Oct. 20, 1908.
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THE NOdR/S PITERS CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JAMES SMITH KERR, OF VALPARAISO, CHILE.
SOUND-BOX.
No. 901,713.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 20, 1908.
Application filed December 28, 1907. Serial No. 408,388.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, James S. Kerr, a sub-
ject of the King of Great Britain, and a resi-
dent of Valparaiso, Chile, South America,
5 have invented a new and Improved Sound-
Box, of which the following is a full, clear,
and exact description.
This invention relates to sound boxes, and
is particularh' useful in connection with talk-
10 ing-machines and the like.
An object of the invention is to provide a
simple and efficient sound box for talking-
machines and the like, in which practically
the entire quantity of sound waves produced
15 is forced to pass through the sound tube, in
which inharmonious or disturbing vibrations
are avoided, and in which all deadening of
the sound waves is prevented.
A further object of the invention is to pro-
20 vide a device of the character described hav-
ing a diaphragm of particularh* efficient con-
struction which is so formed that practically
all secondary vibrations are obviated, and to
which the stylus bar is connected in such a
25 manner that the use of glue, cement or the
like is avoided.
A still further object of the invention is to
provide a sound box in which the diaphragm
is inclosed in a substantially air-tight cham-
*,0 ber, thereby avoiding the escape of the sound
waves to the outer air with the consequent
diminution of the sound volume produced by
the machine.
The invention consists in the construction
35 and combination of parts to be more fully de-
scribed hereinafter and particularly set forth
in the claims.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawings forming a part of this specifiea-
40 tion, in which similar characters of reference
indicate corresponding parts in all the views,
and in which
Figure 1 is an inverted plan view of a sound
box incorporating my improvements; Fig. 2
45 is a transverse section of the sound box;
Fig. 3 is a section on the line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2 ;
Fig. 4 is a transverse section of a modified
form of the sound box; and Fig. 5 is an ele-
vation showing the modified form of the de-
50 vice.
Before proceeding to a more detailed ex-
planation of my invention it should be un-
derstood that in certain forms of sound boxes
at present in use in connection with talking-
55 machines and the like, a portion only of the
sound vibrations produced by the diaphragm
is used. As a sound box of this type is open
at one side the vibratory effect on the open
side produces a false tone, or at any rate, a
tone not in unison with that which proceeds 60
from the mouth of the horn or other means
by which the sound is conducted to the open
air, and this secondary or outside tone cir-
cling around the reproducing cylinder or
disk and running along the outer side of the 65
horn can be heard disagreeably, and pro-
duces a constant discord in the whole area it
pervades. In one form of my invention the
diaphragm is entirely inclosed in the sound
box which is formed so as to be practically 70
air-tight, and therefore, nearly all of the
vibrations set up necessarily pass through
the opening or openings in the sound box
into the sound tube to conduct the sound to
the horn. In the construction of my sound 75
box I employ such materials only, which do
not tend to deaden the sound. Further-
more, in securing the stylus bar to the dia-
phragm I provide means which obviate the
necessity of using glue, cement or the like, as 80
these substances have been shown to pro-
duce sound losses of no mean size. The con-
struction of the sound box insures the mixing
of the whole sound inside the sound box
thereb}" insuring a blending of the sound 85
prior to its leaving the box, and consequently
the issuance of a pure tone from the horn. I
have found that by perforating the dia-
phragm and providing a substantially cen-
tral opening through the same the purity of 90
the resulting tone is enhanced without dimi-
nution of the tone volume, provided the dia-
phragm is suitably braced. For this pur-
pose I provide bracing members which ex-
tend across the opposite faces of the dia- 95
phragm and which lend to it the necessary
strength to insure sufficient stiffness, while
at the same time obviating secondary or in-
terfering sounds.
Referring more particularly to the draw- 100
ings, I provide a sound box casing 1, which
may be of any preferred or common form
and consists preferably of a cylindrical box
open at one side and having an opening 2
therethrough at the back. It is mounted 105
upon the sound tube 3 at the opening 2 by
means of screws 4, which pass through suit-
able openings in the sound box back and the
laterally extended flange 5 of the sound tube.
Arranged concentrically within the sound 11°
box and adjacent to the sides of the same are
separate annular members or rings 6 and 7,
s
901,713
formed preferably from card-board or the
like. The diaphragm 8, which may be of any
preferred or common form, is arranged be-
tween the rings 6 and 7 and is held in posi-
5 tion by means of screws 9, which pass
through openings in the rings, the diaphragm
and the back of the sound box. The sound
box cover 10, consisting preferably of a
larger disk, is mounted upon the outer ring 7
10 and is also held in position by means of the
screws 9 which pass through suitable periph-
eral openings in the cover.
The diaphragm 8 has a central opening 1 1 ;
and at the faces is provided with transverse
15 bracing strips or members 12 and 13. The
members 12 and 13, at the opposite faces of
the diaphragm extend at right angles with
respect to each other. The central mem-
bers extend over the opening 11 and inter-
20 sect at substantially the center of the dia-
phragm. The bracing members may be
formed from any suitable material such as a
close grained wood or the like and are tapered
at the extremities, being thickest at their
25 middles, thereby insuring sufficient rigidity
at the central portion of the diaphragm. A
washer 14 approximating in thickness that
of the diaphragm, is arranged between the
intersecting central bracing members. In
30 the form of the device shown in Figs. 1 and 2
a threaded stylus rod 15 has arranged there-
upon a tapered block 16 seating against the
washer 14 through an opening of one of the
center bracing members. At the outer face
35 of the diaphragm the threaded stylus rod ex-
tends beyond the tapered block and is ar-
ranged in correspondingly threaded openings
of the washer 14 and the central bracing
member 12 at the opposite side of the dia-
40 phragm 8. In this way the stylus rod is rig-
idly secured to the diaphragm at the central
opening 11 of the same without the use of
glue, cement or the like. The bracing mem-
bers can be mounted upon the diaphragm in
45 any suitable manner which avoids the use of
glue or cement; for instance, by the use of
albumen.
The stylus rod 15 extends through a cen-
tral opening 17 of the cover 10 and passes
50 through a flexible membrane 18 arranged
over the opening and held in position by
means of a ring 19 and a cap 20, which are
mounted upon the cover 10 by means of
screws 21 passing through suitable openings.
55 The cap 20 has a central aperture 22 through
which the stylus bar passes. The latter has
at the end a sapphire or other point 23 which
engages the record. A nut 24 is screwed
upon the stylus bar and holds the flexible
60 membrane firmly between the end of the
tapered block and the nut, thus insuring that
the construction is air-tight. The ring 19
may consist of any suitable gasket material.
In the form of my invention shown in Fig.
65 4 the sound box is not air-tight and is pro-
vided with a single cover 25 corresponding to
the cover 10 and mounted upon the outer
ring 7. The cover 25 has openings 26 there-
through, preferably four in number and ar-
ranged symmetrically between the center of 7q
the cover and the periphery. The cover,
furthermore, has a central opening 27 through
which a threaded bar 28 can project. In
this form the bar 28 does not act as a stylus
but has the stylus bar 29 secured thereto by 75
means of nuts 30. The stylus bar 29 is piv-
oted by means of knife edges 31 at a suitable
bracket 32 mounted near the end of the
sound box and has a device 33 for removably
securing needle points 34 thereto. With the §o
open form of the sound box the diaphragm
has no central opening 11 but is unperf orated.
The braces 12 and 13 are the same however,
as in the perforated diaphragm, the construc-
tion otherwise being unchanged. I have g-3
found the open sound box of this form to be
particularly useful for the production of loud
sounds.
The flexible membrane 20 can be fashioned
from any suitable material such as leather, 90
fabric and the like, and should possess suffi-
cient flexibility and be of such texture that
air cannot readily pass therethrough.
The device 33 for removably securing the
needle points 34 to the sound box, comprises 9.3
a socket 35 which is split and of tapered form.
The socket is exteriorly provided with
threads 36, and has a nut 37 which can be
screwed longitudinally of the socket to jam
the point 34 securely in position. The 100
socket is formed from resilient material such
as spring metal, which tends to maintain the
socket in a normal position.
Having thus described my invention I
claim as new, and desire to secure by Letters 105
Patent : —
1. In a sound box, a diaphragm having an
opening therethrough, and means for con-
necting a stylus bar to said diaphragm at
said opening intermediate and remote from no
the edges of the diaphragm forming said
opening.
2. In a sound box, a diaphragm having an
opening therethrough, and bracing members
rigidly secured to one of the faces of said 115
diaphragm and extending across the same,
said members being contiguous with respect
to said diaphragm throughout their lengths.
3. In a sound box, a diaphragm having an
opening therethrough, and bracing members 120-
rigidly mounted upon said diaphragm and
extending over said opening.
4. In a sound box, a diaphragm having
an opening therethrough, bracing members
rigidly mounted upon said diaphragm and 125
extending over said opening, and means for
securing a stylus bar to one of said members
within said opening.
j 5. In a sound box, a diaphragm having
1 an opening therethrough, bracing members 130
•
901,713
rigidly mounted, upon said diaphragm and
extending over said opening in different di-
rections, a st}dus bar, and means for securing
said stylus bar to said members within said
5 opening.
6. A sound box, having a diaphragm pro-
vided with elongated bracing members se-
cured thereto at opposite faces of the same
and extending across said faces and contigu-
10 ous with respect thereto for the greater part
of the length of each of said members.
7. A sound box, having a diaphragm pro-
vided with elongated bracing members
mounted upon opposite faces of said dia-
15 phragm, said bracing members of the oppo-
site faces being arranged at angles with each
other.
8. A sound box, having a diaphragm pro-
vided with an opening therethrough, bracing
20 members mounted at opposite faces of said
diaphragm and extending over said opening,
a stylus bar, and means carried by said stylus
bar for securing the same to said bracing
members at said opening intermediate the
25 edges thereof.
9. A sound box, having a diaphragm pro-
vided with an opening therethrough, elon-
gated bracing members mounted at the op-
posite faces of said diaphragm and extending
30 over said opening, one of said bracing mem-
bers having an opening therethrough, a
block arranged in said opening of said brac-
ing member and seated against the opposite
bracing member, and a stylus bar having an
35 extension carried by said bracing members
and said block.
10. A sound box having a diaphragm ar-
ranged therewithin and provided with an
opening therethrough, said diaphragm hav-
40 ing oppositely arranged bracing members at
the opposite faces thereof extending over
said opening, one of said bracing members
having an opening, a block arranged in said
opening of said bracing member, a washer
arranged between said bracing members, 45
said washer and said block having threaded
openings, a stylus bar having a threaded ex-
tension arranged in said threaded openings,
and a cover mounted upon said casing and
having an opening provided with a flexible 50
membrane, said stylus bar extension passing
through said flexible membrane.
11. A sound box, comprising a sound-
proof casing, a diaphragm within said casing,
a sound-proof cover upon said casing and 55
having an opening, and a stylus bar secured
to said diaphragm and passing through said
opening and having a flexible sound-proof
connection therewith.
12. A sound box, comprising an air-tight 60
casing, a diaphragm within said casing, an
air-tight cover upon said casing having an
opening therethrough, a flexible membrane
mounted over said opening, a stylus bar
secured to said diaphragm and passing 65
through said membrane, and means for se-
curing said membrane to said stylus bar.
13. A sound box, comprising an air-tight
casing, a diaphragm within said casing, an
air-tight cover upon said casing and having 70
an opening therethrough, flexible air-tight
means for closing said opening, a stylus bar
secured to said diaphragm and passing
through said closing means, and means for
securing said stylus bar to said closing means. 75
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
JAMES SMITH KERR.
Witnesses :
Henry G. Oxley,
David Williams.
'
901,781.
W. A. CHAPMAN.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 9, 1907.
Patented Oct. 20, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
&S-
&5-
WITNESSES
,iiiy'27-
1]
SO
til 1
,11111"'"'
„_T|jJJj"
,|i||! ''
INVENTOR
C~W\^C^O
ATTORNEYS
THE NO/fRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D, C.
901,781.
W. A. CHAPMAN.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED OCT. 9, 1907.
Patented Oct. 20, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2,
JT^.^.
&3-
*# 8
WITNESSES
/X/tT
#£-*W • INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
H
THE MORRIS PETEXS CO.. WASHINGTON. O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM ALBERT CHAPMAN, OF SMITHVILLE, ARKANSAS.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 901,781.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 20, 1908.
Application filed October 9, 1907. Serial No. 396,566.
To all whom it may concern:
Be il known that I, William Albert
Chapman, a citizen of the United States,
and a resident of Smithville, in the county
of Lawrence and State of Arkansas, have
invented a new and Improved Talking-
Machine, of which the following is a full,
clear, and exact description.
This invention relates to talking machines,
and more particularly to the horn and sound
tube attachments of talking machines em-
ploying disk records.
An object of the invention is to provide a
talking machine having means for support-
ing the sound tube so that the latter is free
to swing in two directions, without inter-
rupting the propagation of the sound waves
through the sound tube and the horn which
communicates therewith.
20 A further object of the invention is to
provide a device of the class described in
which the sound tube is mounted free to
swing in two directions; that is, in a hori-
zontal and a vertical plane, and in which
25 the sound tube is resiliently held, when in
an operative position, thereby avoiding the
imposing of excessive weight upon the rec-
ord through the sound box and reproducer.
A still further object of the invention is
sc to provide a device of the class described, in
which the sound tube is connected with the
horn by means of a perfectly fitting joint
which permits of the free relative movement
of the sound tube and the horn, without in-
35 terfering with the propagation of the sound
waves from one to the other, in which the
sound tube is mounted to swing with a mini-
mum of friction, and in which means are
provided for securely holding the sound tube
40 in an inoperative position, away from the
record.
The invention consists in the construction
and combination of parts, to be more fully
described hereinafter and particularly set
J :' forth in the claims.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawings forming a part of this specifi-
cation, in which similar characters of refer-
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the
50 views, and in which
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a talking
machine, showing my invention applied
thereto : Fig. 2 is a rear elevation of the talk-
ing machine, showing a part of the horn
55 broken away. Fig. 3 is an enlarged longi-
tudinal section of a part of the device, show-
ing the sound tube and horn connection;
Fig. 4 is a transverse section on the line I — 1
of Fig. 3 ; Fig. 5 is a transverse section
through the sound tube near the end remote 60
from the record; and Fig. 6 is a transverse
section on the line 6 — 6 of Fig. 3.
Before proceeding to a more detailed ex-
planation of my invention, it should be
understood that the same is particularly G5
useful with talking machines employing
disk records, notwithstanding that it can
also be used with different types of devices
of this character.
Many of the details of construction can 70
be altered without disturbing the underly-
ing principle of the invention, which con-
sists essentially in the maimer of supporting
the sound tube and the horn, the connection
through which these communicate, and the 75 .
manner of mounting the whole upon the
talking machine body. In talking ma-
chines, the sound being reproduced is trans-
mitted from the record through the sound
box to the sound tube, the sound vibrations 80
progressing through the sound tube to the
horn which conducts them to the outer air
and the ears of the hearers. It is essential
that the . sound tube be freely movable, in
order to permit the reproducer to follow the S5
indications upon the records when the ma-
chine is in operation. Furthermore, it must
be possible to displace the entire tube to per-
mit the records to be changed. In conse-
quence, it is necessary to mount the sound 90
tube in such a manner that it can move
freely in at least two directions, without
interrupting the internal communication be-
tween the sound tube and the horn. A flexi-
ble connection can of course be established §5
between these two parts by means, for in-
stance, of rubber tubing or the like, but it
has been found that material of this nature
serves to deaden the sound and is unservice-
able for other reasons. Consequently, the 10°
connection between the sound tube and. the
horn should consist of a rigid walled mem-
ber capable of conducting the sound waves
freely. I provide a connection wdiich is so
jointed that the internal connection between 105
the sound tube and the horn is at all times
substantially uninterrupted, while it in no
way interferes with sound propagation
therethrough. Furthermore, the connection
is substantially air-tight and thereby the ad-
mission of sound waves or air currents from
the outside is obviated. Unless the sound
110
901,781
tube is suitably supported, too much weight
is carried by tbe needle or stylus of the re-
producer when the latter rests upon the
record. For this reason I provide a re-
5 silient support for the sound tube, which
takes the greater part of the weight from
the reproducing parts and thereby prevents
unnecessary wear both of the latter and of
the record.
10 Referring more particularly to the draw-
ings. 1 represents the body of a talking ma-
chine of the disk record type, which has a
revolving table 2 for carrying the record
3. The talking machine has suitable op-
15 erating mechanism (not shown) for rotat-
ing the record in the usual manner. A
standard 4, formed from suitable material
such as cast iron, brass or the like, is mount-
ed at the side of the talking machine body
20 by means of laterally disposed flanges 5 and
screws or bolts 6. At the outer end, the
standard has an upward, substantially ver-
tically disposed post 7, provided with a
groove 8 at one side and, at the rear, with a
25 back 9, for a purpose which will appear
hereinafter. The back is preferably formed
integral with the standard. The standard
intermediate of the extremities has a later-
ally extended part 10, through which is
30 formed a bore or opening 11, the longitudi-
nal direction of which is substantially ver-
tical and parallel to the post 7. Surround-
ing the opening 11. at the upper and lower
ends of the same, the standard has integral
35 annular cups or ball races 12, for a purpose
which will appear hereinafter.
A cradle 13, formed from suitable mate-
rial such as cast-iron, brass or the like, is
mounted to swing upon the standard by
40 means of an integral shaft or spindle 1*4
revolubly arranged in the opening 11. The
loAver end of the spindle is threaded. An an-
nular ball race 15 is arranged upon the spin-
dle and rests against a set of ball bearings 16
45 located between the race 15 and the race 12.
A thumb-nut 17 mounted upon the threaded
end of the spindle, serves to hold the latter
in position within the opening, at the same
time suitably supporting the lower ball bear-
50 ing. A ball race 18, is formed integral with
the cradle at the end of the spindle adjacent
to the same, and co-acts with the race 12 to
form a ball bearing between the cradle and
the standard, a set of balls 19 being provided
55 for the purpose between the races. In this
way the cradle is revolubly or pivotally ar-
ranged upon the standard and is free to
swing in a horizontal plane with a minimum
of friction. The cradle has forks 20 at the
60 opposite sides. Between the forks 20 is ar-
ranged a hollow elbow 21, which is mounted
to swing between the forks by means of an
integral rib 22, extending laterally from the
elbow and pivotally mounted by means of a
65 pin 23, between the upper ends of the forks.
At one side, the cradle 13 has a curved exten-
sion 24, projecting toward the post 7 and
provided with a tongue 25. The extension,
as well as the tongue is curved in the arc of
a circle having a radius equal to the clis- 70
tance between the extension and the pivotal
point of the elbow. The adjacent wall of
the elbow is similarly curved and has flanges
26, which form a groove slidably engaging
the tongue 25. The tongue and the groove 75
hold the elbow securely against lateral dis-
placement, while permitting it to swing freely
about its pivotal point.
At the lower edge, the elbow is fashioned
interiorly to form a shoulder 27. The sound 80
tube 28, has the end remote from the sound
box constricted to fit into the lower end of
the elbow and to form a tight connection
therewith, as is shown most clearly in Fig.
3. The sound tube 28 has the usual sound 85
box 29, with a needle or stylus 30, adapted
to engage the record 3 and reproduce the
sounds which have been recorded upon the
same. Opposite to the extension 24 the cra-
dle has an arm 31, at the end of Avhich is 90
slidably arranged a rod 32. mounted in a
suitable opening of the arm. At the upper
end the rod 32 has a head 33, provided with
branching forks 34. The forks 34 are pref-
erably covered with a cushion material such 95
as sleeves 35, of rubber, and which serve to
support the sound tube. A helical spring 36,
is arranged upon the pin 32 between the arm
31 and the head 33, and resiliently holds the
same in a normal position, thereby resili- 100
ently supporting the sound tube. The lower
end of the pin 32 is threaded and carries a
thumb nut 37, by means of which it is
mounted in position. A spring catch 38,
having a finger 39 at the outer end, is rig- 105
idly mounted by means of a screw or rivet
40,' upon the post 7. The elbow has a recess
41, adapted to co-act with the finger 39 to
hold the elbow and the sound tube in an in-
operative position. When the sound tube is 110
swung upwardly the elbow is pivoted be-
tween the forks' 20, and the recess 41 comes
into engagement with the finger 39 of the
spring catch, and the latter then holds the
parts in an inoperative position. When it is 115
desired to lower the sound tube,' it can be
forced downward until the tension of the
spring catch is overcome and the finger slips
out of engagement with the recess. It will
be understood that the latter is suitably 120
rounded to permit this operation.
An annular connection 42, is adjustably
mounted upon the post 7 by means of a lat-
eral extension 43, provided with a longitu-
dinal recess 44, which is slidably engaged by 125
the post. A set screw 45 engages with the
recess 8 of the post to hold the connection in
position. The rear of the extension 43 seats
against the back 9 of the post and assists in
holding the connection in position. At the 130
601,781
e
lower edge the connection 42 is formed into
a rounded socket by a curved bevel 46 which
conforms with the correspondingly formed
upper edge 47 of the elbow 21. The elbow
5 and the connection form a pivotal joint
which permits the free movement of the
elbow relative to the connection. Thus.
when the sound tube and the elbow are
swung in a horizontal plane, as the repro-
10 ducer follows the indications on the record,
the contact between the elbow and the con-
nection is not interrupted, the curved edge
of the elbow sliding freely within the inte-
riorly beveled lower edge of the connection.
15 At the upper edge, the connection is reamed
out to form a seat 48 for the end 49 of the
phonograph horn 50. The latter is firmly
though removably mounted at the connec-
tion by means of the recessed seat.
20 Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent : —
1. In a device of the class described, in
combination, a standard, a cradle arranged
25 to swing upon said standard, a sound tube
movably mounted upon said cradle and
means carried by said cradle for supporting
said sound tube, said cradle having a guide-
way, said sound tube Inning a part engag-
30 ing slidably at said guideway.
■2. In a device of the class described, in
combination, a standard, a cradle arranged
to swing upon said standard, a sound tube
arranged to swing upon said cradle in a
35 direction at an angle with the direction of
swing of said cradle, and resilient means
carried by said cradle for supporting said
sound tube, said cradle having a guideway,
said sound tube having a part engaging slicl-
40 ably at said guideway.
3. In a device of the class described, in
combination, a standard, a cradle arranged
to swing upon said standard, a sound tube
arranged to swing upon said cradle, an ad-
45 justabie connection mounted upon said
standard and adapted to carry a horn, said
connection communicating with said sound
tube, and resilient means carried by said
cradle for supporting said sound tube.
50 4. In a device of the class described, in
combination, a standard, a cradle pivotally
mounted upon said standard, an elbow
mounted to swing npon said cradle, a con-
nection movably engaging said elbow and
55 communicating interiorly therewith., said
connection being adapted to support a horn,
a sound tube secured to said elbow, and
resilient means carried by said cradle for
supporting said sound tube, said cradle hav-
G0 ing a guide tongue, said elbow having a
guide groove engaging slidably at said
tongue.
.';. In a device of the class described, in
combination, a standard, a cradle pi\otL^lly
65 mounted upon said standard, said cradle
being formed to constitute a guideway. an
elbow mounted to swing upon said cradle
and slidably engaging said guideway, a con-
nection adjustably carried by said standard
and movably engaging said elbow and com- 70
municating interiorly therewith, a horn car-
ried by said connection, a sound tube se-
cured to said elbow and communicating in-
teriorly therewith, and resilient means car-
ried by said cradle for supporting said sound 75
tube.
6. In a device of the class described, in
combination, a standard, a cradle pivotally
mounted upon said standard and having a
guideway, an elbow mounted to swing upon so
said cradle and movably engaging said
guideway, a connection movabiy engaging
said elbow and communicating interiorly
therewith, a horn carried by said connection,
a sound tube secured to said elbow, resilient 85
means carried Iry said cradle for supporting
the said sound tube, and a catch for hold-
ing said elbow in one position.
7. In a device of the class described, in
combination, a standard having a post, a 90
connection adjustably mounted upon said
post and adapted to support a horn, a cradle
arranged to swing upon said standard, an
elbow arranged to swing upon said cradle in
a direction at an angle to the direction of 95
swing of said cradle, said elbow and said
connection communicating interiorby, a sound
tube secured to said elbow and communicat-
ing interiorly therewith, and resilient means
carried by said cradle for supporting said 100
sound tube, said cradle having a curved
naving
groove
a corre-
slidably
guide tongue, said elbow
spondingly curved guide
engaging said tongue.
8. In a device of the class described, in 105
combination, a horn, a sound tube, a standard
having a post presenting a lateral groove
and flanges constituting a back, a connection
slidably arranged upon said post, and means
for engaging said groove and serving to hold 110
said connection in a plurality of positions,
said connection being adapted to communi-
cate with said sound tube and to support
said horn.
9. In a device of the class described, in 115
combination, a standard having a post pre-
senting a lateral groove and a back, an an-
nular connection having a recess slidably ar-
ranged upon said post, means for engaging
said groove and serving to hold said con- 120
nection in a plurality of positions, said con-
nection abutting against said back, a sound
tube, and means for effecting an interior
communication between said connection and
a sound tube, said connection being adapted 125
to support a horn.
10. In a device of the class described, in
combination, a standard, a cradle swiveled
upon said standard and having a guideway
and forks, an elbow pivoted between said 130
901,781
forks and movably engaging said guideway.
said guideway being curved in the arc of a
circle having its center at the pivotal axis of
said elbow, a sound tube communicating
5 with said elbow, resilient means carried by
said cradle for supporting said sound tube,
and a connection movably engaging said el-
bow and adapted to carry a horn.
11. In a device of the class described, in
10 combination, a standard having a post, an
annular connection adjustably mounted
upon said post and presenting a horn seat, a
horn mounted at said horn seat, a cradle
swiveled upon said standard and having a
15 guideway and forks, an elbow pivotally
mounted between said forks and movably
engaging said guideway, a catch carried by
said post and serving to hold said elbow in
one position, said elbow and said connection
20 being adapted movably to engage, a sound
tube secured to said elbow, and resilient
means carried by said cradle for supporting
said sound tube.
12. In a device of the class described, in
combination, a standard having an opening 95
therethrough and adjacent to the ends of
said opening, roller bearing races, a cradle
having a spindle revolubly arranged in said
opening and provided with a roller bearing
race at the end of said spindle adjacent to 30
said cradle, a roller bearing race arranged
upon said spindle near the end remote from
said cradle, an adjustable member to hold
the said last-mentioned race in position, said
adjustable member engaging said last-men- 35
tioned race, an elbow pivotally mounted
upon said cradle, a sound tube secured to
said elbow, resilient means carried by said
cradle for supporting said sound tube, and
a connection movably engaging said elbow 40
and adapted to carry a horn.
In testimony Avhereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
WILLIAM ALBERT CHAPMAX.
Witnesses :
T. L. Xorris,
S. A. D. Jones.
901,782.
W. A, CHAPMAN.
SOUND REPRODUCES.
APPLICATION PILED DEO. 2, 1907.
Patented Oct. 20, 1908.
W/TNESSES
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THE-NORRIS PETER&CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM ALBERT CHAPMAN, OF SMITHVILLE, ARKANSAS.
SOUND-REPRODUCER.
No. 901,782.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 20, 1908.
Application filed December 2, 1907. Serial No. 404,664.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William Albert
Chapman, a citizen of the United States,
and a resident of Smithville, in the county
5 of Lawrence and State of Arkansas, have
invented a new and Improved Sound-Re-
producer, of which the following is a full,
clear, and exact description.
This invention relates to sound repro-
10 ducers, and is particularly useful in connec-
tion with talking machines, and more espe-
cially those employing records of the disk
tyPe'
An object of the invention is to provide a
15 simple, durable and efficient sound repro-
ducer which is constructed to eliminate
harsh, shrill and metallic tones in sound re-
production, and which exactly reproduces
the volume, register and tone shading of the
20 original sound.
A further object of the invention is to pro-
vide a sound reproducer having a diaphragm
which is normally under different balanced
tensions, thereby augmenting the sensitive-
25 ness and rapidity of action of the diaphragm.
A still further object of the invention is
to provide a sound reproducer having a
stylus bar which permits the easy and rapid
insertion and removal of needle points, and
30 which is resiliently controlled, whereby it is
rendered flexible and efficient in action.
The invention consists in the construction
and combination of parts to be more fully
described hereinafter and particularly set
35 forth in the claims.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
ing drawings forming a part of this specifi-
cation, in which similar characters of refer-
ence indicate corresponding parts in all the
40 views, and in which
Figure 1 is a front elevation of the sound
reproducer; Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section
of the device; Fig. 3 is an enlarged trans-
verse section on the line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2 ; Fig.
45 4. is a transverse section on the line 4 — 4
of Fig. 3; and Fig. 5 is an enlarged trans-
verse section on the line 5 — 5 of Fig. 2.
Before proceeding to a more detailed ex-
planation of my invention, it should be un-
50 derstood that in the sound reproducers hith-
erto employed it was generally attempted
by the constructors to provide a reproduc-
ing diaphragm which was normally under
no stress of any kind ; that is, to attain
55 "neutrality" in the diaphragm. It was be-
lieved that a diaphragm of this character
was particularly sensitive in responding to
external forces applied thereto; for in-
stance, the vibrations transmitted to the dia-
phragm through the stylus arm. I have 60
found that the inertia of the neutral dia-
phragm, instead of permitting the instan-
taneous response of the diaphragm to ex-
traneous force applied thereto, prevents the
rapidity of action, which is not only desir- 65
able in sound reproducer diaphragms but is
absolutely essential to their successful opera-
tion. Thus, the inertia of the diaphragm
conduces to the suppression of delicate tones
or sound shadings which are of such im- 70
portance in the accurate and tuneful repro-
duction of sound. Certain of the vibratory
impulses transmitted to the diaphragm and
which the latter should reproduce, are so
slight and of such intense rapidity that the 75
neutral diaphragm is quite incapable of
propagating them further. I provide a dia-
phragm which is normally under opposite
and conflicting tensions, so that in a normal
condition these stresses are balanced. This 80
diaphragm is rendered particularly sensitive
owing to the balanced tensions to which it
is subject, and is responsive to the slightest
and most rapid of vibratory influences. The
diaphragm is under greatest tension at the 85
center, and the tension decreases from the
center toward the periphery. As the ten-
sion stresses to which the diaphragm is sub-
ject are in opposite directions and balance
each other, an impulse from either side of 90
the diaphragm disturbs the balance, and
thereby causes the tension at one side to
overcome that at the other. The conse-
quence is the instantaneous and positive ac-
tion of the diaphragm to reproduce the 95
sound. The vibrations causing the unbal-
ancing of the tension stresses in the dia-
phragm are transmitted from the record to
the diaphragm by means of the stylus bar.
The stylus bar of my sound reproducer is 10°
mounted to rock upon the reproducer cas-
ing. It is free to move in order to transmit
the vibrations from the sound record to the
diaphragm, but is provided with resilient or
cushion restraining means which serve to 105
limit the movement of the stylus bar. The
needle points which are used in disk record
talking machines to transmit the vibrations
from the record to the stylus bar, have to be
replaced at frequent intervals. To permit 110
the needle points to be attached to or re-
moved from the st}dus bar of my invention,
901,782
easily and rapidly, I provide special needle
point retaining means which can be easily
and rapidly operated manually.
Referring more particularly to the draw-
5 ings, 1 represents the casing of the sound
reproducer, which may be fashioned from
any suitable material and is preferably of
circular or cylindrical form. It will be un-
derstood however, that certain of the details
10 of construction of the device, including the
form of the reproducer casing, constitute no
part of my invention and can be altered to
suit individual preference or different con-
ditions. The casing 1 has an outlet 2, by
15 means of which it can be suitably connected
to the sound tube of the talking machine.
The casing has a back and side walls, being-
open at the front. A washer 3, of annular
form in cross-section, is arranged within the
20 casing adjacent to the back thereof. The
diaphragm 4 seats upon the washer 3, and
at the outside of the diaphragm is arranged
a second washer 5, similar to the washer 3.
A split or spring ring 6, is arranged in an
25 annular recess 7 of the casing, and serves to
hold the washers and the diaphragm in posi-
tion within the casing.
The diaphragm comprises similar oppo-
site faces or disks 8, which may be formed
30 from any suitable material for the purpose,
such as mica, or the like. The disks 8 are
spaced near the peripheries by means of an
annular block 9, and at the outer sides have
strengthening rings 10, secured upon the
35 faces thereof near the peripheries, in any
convenient manner. The disks 8 are secured
together near the center in a manner which
will appear more clearly hereinafter, and
are thus placed under tension. The in-curv-
40 ing of the disks is in opposite directions, and
consequently, they are under opposite ten-
sions which normally balance each other. It
will be understood that the annular separa-
tor 9 has the opposite faces beveled to per-
45 mit the in-curving of the disks. The parts
of the diaphragm are securely fastened to-
gether so that they constitute a rigid whole.
At the bottom of the casing are lugs 11,
preferably integral therewith and provided
50 with registering threaded openings there-
through. Correspondingly threaded rocker
pins 12, are arranged in the openings of the
lugs and have nuts 13, by means of which
they can be locked in position, and further
55 have the inwardly projecting extremities 14,
tapered for a purpose which will appear
hereinafter. The stylus bar 15, is laterally
extended and has an opening through the
laterally extended portion, in which is rig-
60 idly mounted a rocker bar 15a. At the ends
of the latter are formed tapered recesses 16
adapted to receive the tapered extremities of
the rocker pins 12. By means of the rocker
pins the pivotal mounting of the stylus bar
65 can be exactly adjusted. A vibrating arm
17, is rigidly carried by the stylus bar and
is preferably intergral therewith. The vi-
brating arm may have any suitable form and
has the end inwardly disposed adjacent, sub-
stantially, to the center of the diaphragm. 70
At the end of the vibrating arm 17 is secured
a face plate 18, adapted to rest adjacent to
the diaphragm, and having a threaded open-
ing therethrough formed to receive a corre-
spondingly threaded screw 19, which serves 75
to secure the diaphragm to the vibrating
arm and to fasten the opposite disks or
plates of the diaphragm to each other. Be-
hind the face plate 18 the vibrating arm has
a recess 20, to permit the projection be3^ond 80
the face plate, of the screw 19. The head of
the screw is substantially equal in diameter
to the width of the face plate, so that the op-
posite disks of the diaphragm are held to-
gether by contacting surfaces of substan- 85
tially equal area.
At the side of the stylus bar 15 remote
from the vibrating arm 17, is formed an arm
21. extending beyond the sound reproducer
casing and having the end provided with a 90
split or slot 22. At the top and bottom of
the arm 21 are formed recesses 23, adapted
to receive resilient cushions 21. The latter
may be of any preferred or common form ;
for instance, as shown in the drawings, they 95
may consist of hollow balls of resilient ma-
terial, such as rubber. A U-shaped bracket
25, is mounted upon the casing and extends
over the end of the arm 21, having recesses
28, normally arranged opposite to the corre- 100
spending recesses 23 and also serving to re-
ceive the cushions 24. It will be understood
that by means of the arm 21, the cushions 24
and the bracket 25, the stylus bar is resili-
ently held in position such that its normal 105
position corresponds to the normal position
of the diaphragm. When the diaphragm is
displaced in one direction or the other, the
stylus bar is correspondingly displaced and
the cushion restraining means of the stylus 110
bar assist the diaphragm in returning to its
normal position. In case it is desired to re-
sist the movement of the stylus bar more
strongly, bands 27 of rubber or the like, can
be arranged in the slot 22 of the arm and 115
passed over the bracket 25, being held in
position by suitable spurs 28 of the latter, as
is shown most clearly in Fig, 5.
The stylus bar 15 has a longitudinal open-
ing or recess 29, adapted to receive the 120
needle point 30, which may be of any pre-
ferred or common form. A transverse
opening 31, is formed within the stylus bar
and intersects the opening 29. A member
32 having a notch or recess 33, is movably 125
arranged within the opening 31, and by the
engagement of the notch 31 with the needle
point, serves to hold the latter firmly in po-
sition. At one end, the member 32 has a
constricted shank 34, projecting through a 130
901,782
constricted opening 35 in the stylus bar. A
helical spring 36, arranged upon the shank
34 holds the member 32 in a normal, inoper-
ative position. The member 32 which con-
5 stitutes the needle point clamp, has further
a constricted end 37 projecting from the
opening 31. A spring ring 38 is arranged
in an annular recess of the opening 31 and
serves to retain the member or clamp within
10 the opening. The shank 34 has a portion
39 of angular section, which is received by a
correspondingly formed portion of the open-
ing 35, and which prevents a rotation of the
member. When it is desired to insert a
15 needle point in position, the member 32 is
moved against the tension of the spring until
the notch 33 is so positioned that the needle
point can be passed through it. By releas-
ing the member, the tension of the spring
20 jams the member against the needle point
and holds the same in position in the re-
cess 2i).
Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
25 Patent :
1. In a sound reproducer, a diaphragm
having opposite, vibrating faces rigid with
each other at a point within their periph-
eries, and an annular spacing member sepa-
30 rating said faces at their peripheries whereby
said faces are rendered concave, said mem-
ber having the opposite sides shaped to con-
form to the curvature of said vibrating faces.
2. In a sound reproducer, a diaphragm
35 having opposite, vibrating faces rigidly se-
cured together at a point within their pe-
ripheries and in direct engagement at this
point, and an annular spacing member be-
tween said faces at the peripheries thereof
40 whereby said faces are oppositely in-curved,
said member having the opposite sides shaped
to conform to the curvature of said vibrat-
ing faces.
3. In a sound reproducer, a diaphragm
45 having opposite, vibrating faces fastened to-
gether near the centers and in direct engage-
ment at the point of fastening, and an annu-
lar spacing member separating said faces at
their peripheries whereby said faces are ren-
50 clered oppositely concave, said member hav-
ing opposite sides beveled to conform to the
concavity of said faces.
4. In a sound reproducer, a diaphragm
having opposite, vibrating faces partly in en-
55 gagement within the peripheries and partly
spaced whereby an air-tight chamber is
formed therebetween, and an annular mem-
ber between said faces and at their periph-
erics, said member having the opposite sides
shaped to conform to the, curvature of said 60
faces.
.">. In a sound reproducer, a diaphragm, a
stylus bar mounted to rock and having a
vibrating arm secured to said diaphragm,
means for adjusting said bar, and pneu- 65
ma tic cushioning means for resisting the
movement of said bar.
G. In a sound reproducer, a diaphragm,
a stylus bar mounted to rock and having a
vibrating arm, said stylus bar having a sec- 70
ond arm, a bracket adapted to embrace said
second arm near the end thereof, and cush-
ioning means between said second arm and
said bracket.
7. In a sound reproducer, a diaphragm, a 75
stylus bar adjustably mounted to rock and
having a vibrating arm secured to said dia-
phragm, said stylus bar having a second
arm, a bracket embracing said second arm
near the end thereof, said bracket and said 80
arm having recesses, and cushioning means
seated in said recesses of said second arm
and said bracket, said second arm being
formed to hold resilient means adapted to be
removably secured to said bracket. 85
8. In a sound reproducer, a stylus bar
having a recess adapted to receive a needle
point, and a second recess transverse of said
first recess, a member carried in said second
recess ancTmovable transversely of said first 90
recess, said member having portions pro-
jecting from said stylus bar at the ends of
said second recess and being provided with
a notch adapted to grip the needle point,
the projecting portions of said member being 95
constricted whereby shoulders are formed,
said second recess having a shoulder, re-
silient means in said second recess between
said shoulder thereof and one of said shoul-
ders of said member, and serving to hold 100
said member in a position such that said
notch is normally displaced with respect to
said recess, and means engaging the other
of said shoulders of said member to limit
the projection of said member from said 105
second recess.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
WILLIAM ALBERT CHAPMAN.
Witnesses :
H. C. Steadman,
G. W. Perkins.
901,910.
J. W. JONES.
GRAPHOPHONE STOP.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 8, 1908.
Patented Oct. 20, 1908.
UdocWldfy Xfatfow tevjlfoeo.
THE NORMS PETETtS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE
JUNIUS WALLACE JONES, OF BATON ROUGE, LOUISIANA.
GRAPHOPHONE-STOP.
No. 901,910.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 20, 1908.
Application filed April 8. 1908. Serial No. 425.890.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Junius Wallace
Jones, a citizen of the United States, resid-
ing at Baton Rouge, Louisiana, have invei t-
5 ed certain new aj d useful Improvements in
Graphophonc-Stops, of which the following
is a specification.
My invention relates to automatic stops
for phonographs and in providing this mech-
10 anism I aim to produce an automatic stop
susceptible of adjustment for use with record
plates of different diameters.
My invention is designed to coact with a
form of trip stop device now in use on what
15 is known as the Victor machine.
It is my object to produce an automatic
stop which will require the addition of the
fewest number of parts and which will be
simple in construction and effective in opera-
20 tion.
The invention consists in the features and
combination and arrangement of parts here-
inafter described and particularly pointed
out in the claims.
25 In the drawings. Figure 1 is a side view of a
turn table of ordinary construction to re-
ceive the record disk, said turn table having
associated therewith the horn, the trip stop
of substantially ordinary form and my im-
30 provements. Fig. 2 is a detail plan view of
the ordinary trip stop in its relation to the
turn table. Fig. 3 is a plan view of a part of
my invention with the elements in one posi-
tion, and Fig. 4 is a similar view to Fig. 3
3 5 with the parts in another position. Fig. 5 is
a plan view of a record of disk form showing
the grooves which are made on all records.
In these drawings, 1 indicates a part of the
casing or frame, 2 the turn table, 3 the needle
40 point or stylus which is carried at the end of
the arm 4 which supports the ordinary horn.
At 5 I show generally a trip stop device some-
what like that used to-day, carried by a
bracket 6 which is clamped to the edge of the
45 table by a set screw 7. This trip device has
a levei' or arm 7' projecting therefrom, which
in ordinary practice may be manipulated by
hand to trip the stop so that it will contact
with the periphery of the turntable and thus
50 stop the rotation of the same. With my
improvement however, I design to operate
this substantially ordinary form of trip stop
lever automatically and for this purpose I
employ an arm 8 attached by a clip 9 to the
|£ arm 4 of the horn, said arm S being of right
angular form with its horizontal portion 9'
extending inwardly so that it will describe a
path as the horn swings laterally of such di-
ameter as will cause it to contact with the
arm 7' of the ordinary trip stop device, and 60
when this contact occurs the trip stop is au-
tomatically operated to bear upon the pe-
riphery of the table 2 and arrest the move-
ment of the same.
The laterally swinging movement of the 65
arm 4 is due, as in ordinary practice, to the
action of the needle point traversing the
groove of the record. The arm 9' is arranged
to strike the trip arm 7' when the needle
reaches the outer edge of the seal of the 70
record. This is accomplished by making a
groove Y extending from the point where the
record or music grooves stop at the circle X, —
to the seal Z Fig. 5. The radii of the seals of
ten and of eight inch records vary, and in 75
order to meet this condition I provide an ad-
justment in my automatic attachement to
suit the size of the record. For this purpose
I provide a spring arm 10 attached to the
side of the arm 9' and adapted to be set in SO
either one of two positions as shown in Figs.
3 and 4 by a pivoted finger piece 11. This
finger piece is pivoted at 12 to the arm 9' so
that when thrown into the position shown in
Fig. 3 it will move the spring 10 away from 35
the arm 9', whereas, if it is placed in the posi-
tion shown in Fig. 4 it will allow the spring or
arm 10 to assume a position close to the side
edge of the arm 9'. In other words, I pro-
vide by this means, in effect, an arm capable 90
of being narrowed or widened to contact
later or earlier with the trip arm 7' according
to the diameter of the record plate. When
the finger piece 11 is in the position of Fig. 4
it allows the needle 3 to reach the seal before 95
the arm 9', or more accurately speaking, the
member 10 carried thereby comes in contact
with the lever 7' of the tripping device, thus
stopping the apparatus for eight inch record.
When, however, the finger piece 11 is in the 100
position shown in Fig. 3, the arm 9' strikes
the trip arm 7' before the needle 3 arrives
within the seal of ten inch records, thus stop-
ping the machine for ten and twelve inch
records. 105
In Fig. 2 I show the lever arm 7' in two
different positions, one being in dotted lines.
When it is in the position M, the turntable
rotates and when it is pressed so that it
jumps to the position X the turntable stops, li J
All that the operator is required to do after
moving the arm 7' to the position M Fig. 2 to
23
901,910
start the graphophone is to set the linger
piece 11 to the position shown in Fig. 3, for
stopping ten or twelve inch records or to set
the ringer piece in the position shown in
c Fig. 4 for stopping eight inch records.
In the foregoing description I have referred
to the trip stop device as similar to that
used on the Victor machine. Specifically,
however, my device differs from that used on
10 the Victor machine in that it is set to a hair
trigger while that on the Victor machine is
not, and my controlling lever works in the
reverse direction from that on the Victor
machine. My device may he used on the
16 Victor or any other machine.
The supporting arm 8, instead of being of
the right angular form shown, may be of any
other desired shape.
I claim as my invention:
20 1. In combination with tiie trip stop de-
vice, an arm attached to the arm of the horn
to contact with the trip stop device, said arm
being adjustable to a plurality of different
predetermined conditions for operating the
25 trip stop earlier or later to suit the records of
different diameters and having means where-
by said adjustment is arrested at said pre-
determined points, substantially as de-
scribed.
2. In combination with the trip stop de- 30
vice, an arm attached to the arm of the horn
and having means whereby its contacting
end may be widened or narrowed to prede-
termined degrees to strike the trip stop de-
vice earlier or later, said means being thrown 35
at once from one position to the other and
there arrested substantially as described.
3. In combination with the trip stop de-
vice, an arm attached to the arm of the horn
having a spring member 10 attached thereto 40
to contact with the trip stop device and a
pivoted finger piece to adjust the spring
member 10 towards or from the side of the
arm on the horn, substantially as described.
In testimony whereof, I affix my signature 45
in presence of two witnesses.
JUNIUS WALLACE JONES.
Witnesses :
H. R. Straube,
L. G. Stirling.
902,280.
L. F. DOUGLASS.
SOUND BOX FOE TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 19, 1903.
Patented Oct. 27, 1908.
JZZp.l
i^y^////////j?z?zzz??i
WITNESSES:
tdunUflfat^-
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY.
THE riORRlS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LEON F. DOUGLASS, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
SOUND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 902,280.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Oct. 27, 1908.
Application filed March 19, 1903. Serial No. 148,478,
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Leon F. Douglass, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of the city of Philadelphia, State of Pennsyl-
5 vania, have invented certain new and useful
Improvements in Sound-Boxes for Talking-
Machines, of which the following is a full,
clear, and complete disclosure.
The object of my invention is to provide
10 an improved construction, in, and relating to,
sound boxes for talking machines, such that
the quality and clearness of the sound pro-
duced thereby will be greatly improved, and
whereby the action of the sound box, as con-
15 cerns the effect of the vibrations of the stylus
or needle caused by the record, will also be
made more nearly perfect.
In the art relating to talking machines,
and the recording and reproduction of sound
20 waves, difficulty has been experienced in
that the coarse and other vibrations of the
sounds which have been recorded have been
too great for the diaphragm of the sound
box when reproduced from a disk record.
25 These sounds composed of vibrations of
greater amplitude also have been accentuated
or made abnormally preeminent, so that the
effect of the more delicate sounds and vibra-
tions has been reduced, and the tone and
30 quality . of the reproduction thereby im-
paired.
The object of my invention, therefore, par-
ticularly relates to such a construction in con-
nection with sound boxes that these harsh
35 undesirable vibrations may be eliminated or
reduced to such an extent that they retain
the requisite intensity to give a pleasing
effect when taken in connection with the
other vibrations of less amplitude and
40 greater frequency. It is evident that the
inertia of the parts of the sound box, and the
support therefor, to which the stylus bar and
diaphragm are connected, have considerable
effect upon the waves produced from the lat-
45 ter. That is, if the parts are held rigidly in
position, the sound produced by the dia-
phragm will correspond exactly to the line
traced by the stylus point, and if there are
vibrations of greater amplitude and less fre-
50 quency, such vibrations will be reproduced
in substantially the same manner that they
are recorded by the recording machine, and
since sounds having waves of different am-
plitude are not all recorded with the same
ease and accuracy, the sounds which are 55
most easily recorded will be accentuated in
the reproduction. This is especially true of
the coarser vibrations of the male voice and
the notes of the larger wind instruments in
bands and orchestras. It is also true of cer- 60
tain vibrations in the reproduction, which
cause a hollow or tubby sound in connection
with the music or words reproduced.
My invention is particularly intended to
overcome the above mentioned defects. 65
I have found that when the sound box of a
talking machine, or its casing, is mounted
upon an elastic cushion or backing, so that
said casing may move independently of the
sound box support, the harsh vibrations 70
which would otherwise be undesirably ac-
centuated in some forms of reproducing ma-
chines and also the tubby sounds, have been
eliminated. This result is occasioned by the
relation between the inertia or mass of the 75
metal of the sound box or its casing, and the
amount of elasticity of the cushion or con-
nection between said metal and the arm or
support for the sound box. That is, when
the stylus or needle follows the finer and 80
more rapid sinuosities of the record groove,
the inertia of the sound box is great enough
to prevent the casing and diaphragm from
moving or oscillating with the needle or
stylus bar; but when the needle traverses the 85
greater or coarser sinuosities, which must
necessarily be of less frequency, the oscillat-
ing force is, therefore, greater, and at the
same time slower and in acting upon the
stylus bar and diaphragm causes the sound 90
box or its casing to oscillate more nearly in
synchronism therewith on a diameter at
right angles to the stylus bar, instead of vi-
brating the diaphragm transversely as a
whole. It will thus be seen that the dia- 95
phragm is not put under such a strain, nor is
the same distorted to such an extent as to
communicate the full force of the vibrations
in the form of sound waves to the sound con-
veying means or amplifying horn. 100
Briefly my invention comprises the pro-
viding of an elastic cushion or connection be-
tween the sound box support or tube, and,
the sound box or its casing, said cushions be-
ing of such a size, consistency, and form, 105
and being held in such a manner that an elas-
tic and yielding mounting is given to the
sound box or the casing thereof, which al-
902,280
lows the same to be oscillated transversely
about a central diameter or axis which is
transverse to the axis of the sound box.
For a full, clear, and exact description of
5 my invention, reference may be had to the
following specification, and to the accom-
panying drawing forming a part thereof, in
which
Figure 1 is an elevation of my improved
10 sound box; Fig. 2, a side elevation thereof,
and Fig. 3, a view showing the essential parts
of the sound box, as concerns this invention,
cut away and partly in section.
In the drawing, the numeral 1 indicates a
15 sound box casing of the usual form, having a
diaphragm 2, a stylus bar 3, and needle or
stylus 4. The numeral 5 represents the
sound box tube or support, which, in this in-
stance, is formed cylindrically to correspond
20 with one arm of the elbow of the usual am-
plifying horn. However, I do not wish to be
limited to this form of support, as the elastic
cushion may be adapted for use with other
types of talking machines, such as that em-
25 ploying the pivoted hollow arm. The sup-
port or sound box tube 5 has at its inner end
a low outwardly extending flange 6. The
numeral 7 represents a perforated disk or
ring having a groove therein to receive the
30 flange 6 of the sound box support 5. This
disk or ring is preferably made of soft rubber
or similar elastic material, which is prefer-
ably molded about the flange 6, and slightly
vulcanized or hardened in that position.
35 The disk 7 may be attached to the back of
plate 8 of the sound box casing in any con-
venient manner, such as by cement or other
adhesive, as represented in Fig. 2, but I have
shown the same also attached thereto by
40 machine screws 9 which enter threaded holes
in the back plate 8 of the sound box, as rep-
resented in Fig. 3. The manner of connect-
ing the disk 7 with the sound box and with
its support, is immaterial, provided that the
45 volume or mass of the elastic material is un-
confined so as to allow the same to be most
easily distorted when the sound box casing
oscillates in accordance with the coarser vi-
brations of the record groove.
50 In this instance the flange 6 should project
as little as possible from the sound box tube,
and the screws for attaching the yielding ma-
terial to the sound box casing should leave a
considerable amount of elastic material in-
55 terposed between said flange and said screws,
so as not to retain the parts in a too rigid
relation. When these conditions are ful-
filled, the movement of the casing and dia-
phragm absorbs and modifies many of the
60 coarser vibrations without interfering with
the quality or clearness of the sounds repro-
duced by the smaller waves, and also elimi-
nates the tubby or hollow effect of reproduc-
tion. It will be noticed that the sound con-
65 veying tube or support is held in position
within the ring only by the low flange 6,
while the screws or cement are the only
means for attaching the flexible ring to the
diaphragm holding portion of the sound box.
It is evident that the heads of the screws 70
may be drawn into the yielding material of
the ring when the casing oscillates, while the
low flange 6 will easily distort the yielding
material surrounding the same. lor this
reason a vibration of the casing does not 75
have to distort or move the whole volume of
the yielding material when the same moves
in relation to the sound conveying tube. In
the construction of sound boxes where rubber
rings or bushings have been interposed be- go
tween metallic rings or tubes, the effect is en-
tirely different from that just referred to.
In such instances, the volume or mass of the
rubber or elastic material is not displaced ex-
cept internally to a minute degree and at dif- 85
ferent independent points, and this displace-
ment takes place in much the same manner
that the particles of air are displaced in the
direction of the travel of sound waves, when
sound is being transmitted through the at- 90
mosphere. That is to say, rubber rings con-
fined between metallic rings simply act as an
insulation for the sound waves of high fre-
quency, which it is desired to prevent from
being transmitted to the support or tube, 95
while the comparatively unconfined cushion
or connection herein set forth in addition to
acting as insulation to have sound waves of
high frequency also prevents the passage of
the coarser vibrations by allowing the sound 100
box to oscillate with the stylus bar and dia-
phragm. Thus it is seen that the uncon-
fined elastic mounting for the cylindrical cas-
ing or the part which carries the diaphragm
and stylus bar, acts in the nature of an elas- 10 5
tic pivoted support which allows the move-
ment of said casing to conform to the coarser
vibrations of the diaphragm and stylus bar,
but, owing to the inertia of the casing per-
mits the finer and more rapid vibrations to no
be transmitted to the diaphragm and thence
to the amplifying horn through the sound
conducting passages.
Among the advantages obtained by this
construction, in addition to those already de- ] 15
scribed, it will be evident that as the needle
4 follows the grooves of the sound record,
said needle will fit the sound grooves with
much more even pressure upon the walls
thereof, by reason of the fact that resistance 120
or rigidity of the sound box is less. This, of
course, results in a much more even wearing
of the needle, and also reduces the wearing of
the walls of the record groove to a great ex-
tent. It has been found that a needle used 125
with a sound box mounted as above described,
will last many times longer than when used
with a sound box mounted in the usual man-
ner, and with much less deterioration of the
sound record, which, of course, permits a 130
902,280
3
greater number of reproductions from such a
record. The needle is also rendered much
less liable to skip or jump certain waves of
the record groove, because of their greater
5 amplitude, which, of course, also aids in pro-
longing the life of the record.
I do not wish to be limited to the exact de-
tails of the form and arrangement of parts in
the embodiment of my invention as herein
10 set forth, for the same may be varied in
many ways, which will still accomplish the
results and advantages set forth, but
Having thus described the nature of my
invention, what I claim and desire to protect
15 by Letters Patent of the United States, is, —
1. In a talking machine the combination
of the part of the sound box carrying the
means for producing sound waves, a support
forming part of the sound box and also rorm-
20 ing a part of the sound conveying devices,
and an interposed yielding member inde-
pendently connected with said part and said
support.
2. In a sound box for talking machines, a
25 disk of india rubber attached to the back
thereof, and a support which enters said disk
and which has a low projection which is em-
bedded therein to hold said disk and sound
box upon said support, the outer surface of
30 said disk being substantially unconfined.
3. In a sound box for talking machines, a
disk of india rubber attached to the back
thereof, a sound box support having a low
flange which is embedded in said disk, the
35 outer surface of said disk being substan-
tially unconfined.
4. In a sound box for talking machines, a
disk of india rubber attached to the back
thereof, and a flanged sound box tube having
40 its end embedded in said disk, the outer sur-
face of said disk being substantially uncon-
fined.
5. In a sound box structure a casing con-
taining a diaphragm, a part of the sound box
4 5 forming means for supporting the same, and
a yielding member interposed between and
independently connected with the said cas-
ing and supporting means.
6. In a sound box structure a casing con-
50 taining a diaphragm, a part of the sound box
forming sound conveying means for sup-
porting the same, and a yielding member in-
terposed between and independently con-
nected with the said casing and supporting
55 means.
7. In a sound box structure a casing con-
taining a diaphragm, a part of the sound box
forming sound conveying means for sup-
porting the same upon a talking machine, and
60 a yielding member interposed between and
independently connected with the said cas-
ing and supporting means.
8. In a sound recording and reproducing
mechanism, the combination with the part of
65 the sound box structure carrying sound pro-
70
85
90
95
ducing means and the part thereof by which
said means are supported, of a yielding mem-
ber connected to the first mentioned means
and independently connected with the last
mentioned means.
9. In a sound recording and reproducing
mechanism, the combination with the part of
the sound box structure carrying sound pro-
ducing means and the part thereof by which
said means are connected with the talking 75
machine, of a yielding member interposed
and independently connected with the said
parts, to enable the same to move relatively
to one another.
10. In a sound recording and reproducing go
mechanism the combination with the part of
the sound box structure carrying sound pro-
ducing means and the part thereof by which
said means are connected with the talking
machine, of an elastic member interposed be-
tween and independently connected with the
said parts to enable the same to move rela-
tively to one another.
11. In a sound box structure, a casing for
the diaphragm, a part of the sound box form-
ing a support therefor of an elastic cushion
for said casing, comprising a member of elas-
tic material which is independently attached
to said casing and to said support, one of
each of the opposite surfaces of which are
substantially unconfined to permit distor-
tion of said material.
12. In a sound box structure a casing, a
part of the sound box forming a support
therefor, an elastic member interposed be-
tween said casing and said support compris-
ing a disk of yielding material, one flat sur-
face of which is held in contact with said cas-
ing, the remaining surfaces being substan-
tially unconfined to permit distortion.
13. In a sound box structure, the combi-
nation with the part carrying the diaphragm
and the part by which the latter is connected
to the sound conducting tube, of an elastic
member interposed between and independ-
ently connected with said parts.
14. In a sound box structure a casing car-
rying the diaphragm, a support therefor, and
a disk of elastic material molded around a
portion of said support for holding the same 115
in connection therewith, one flat surface of
said disk being held in contact with said cas-
ing.
15. In a sound box structure a casing car-
rying the diaphragm, a disk of elastic mate- 120
rial attached to the back thereof, and a part
of the sound box forming a support therefor
embedded in said disk.
16. In a talking machine a sound box
structure comprising a part carrying the 125
sound producing means, a yielding disk con-
tacting with the rear face of said part, and
headed fastening pins rigidly connected with
said part and passing through said disk, the
heads of said pins serving to hold said part 130
100
105
110
902,280
-/n!
and disk in contact said pins being yieldably
supported in said disk.
17. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of a casing containing sound
5 producing means, a sound conducting tube,
an element composed of elastic material in-
terposed between said casing and said tube,
and means for securing said element to said
casing fixedly attached to said casing at one
] o end, and having enlargements at their other
ends in contact with said elastic element.
18. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination of a casing containing sound
producing means, a sound conducting tube,
studs located on said casing and a yielding
material interposed between the heads of
said studs, said casing and said tube, said
heads being in contact with said yielding ma-
terial.
19. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing, of a yielding tubular extension se-
cured to the rear side thereof, and a non-
yielding lining in said yielding tubular exten-
20
sion, the inner edge of said lining being out of
contact with the rear side of said casing.
20. In a sound box, the combination with
a casing of a yielding tubular extension se-
cured to the rear side thereof and a non-
yielding lining in said yielding tubular exten-
sion. 30
21. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a casing containing sound
producing means, a sound conducting tube,
elastic means interposed between said casing
and said tube, and means for securing said 35
elastic means to said casing, fixedly attached
to said casing at one end, and having en-
largements at their other ends in contact
with said elastic means.
In witness whereof, I have hereunto set 40
my hand this 16th clay of March A. D., 1903.
LEON F. DOUGLASS.
Witnesses :
Edw. W. Vaill, Jr.,
Lewis H. Van Dusen.
902,579.
A. HENRY.
GRAMOPHONE.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 21, 1908,
Patented Nov. 3, 1908.
Ufi&?ap$$g
fnvcrttcrr
AliceJ/cnrc/
~)t/ 'v/0hq~m~- r- V^**i£«^5?2<^
-Atfy&
THE NORMS RETCKS-CO., WASHINGTON, 0. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ALICE HENRY, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
GRAMOPHONE.
No. 902,579.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 3, 1908.
Application filed February 21, 1908. Serial No. 417,018.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Alice Henry, a sub-
ject of the King of Great Britain, residing
at 71 Park avenue, in the city of Chicago,
5 county of Cook, and State of Illinois, have
invented a new and useful Improvement in
Gramophones, of which the following is a
specification.
The object of my invention is to provide
10 means whereby the needle point of the pro-
ducer or reproducer can be instantly set
at any desired radial point of the record disk
for the purpose of utilizing all the surface
of the disk where the recording is inter-
im rupted and needle removed from the disk;
and for repeating any particular part of a
record when the instrument is used for
teaching or other purposes.
The manner in which I accomplish m}>'
20 object is described in the following specifi-
cations and illustrated in the accompanying
drawing in which
Figure 1 is a top view of a box inclosing
the mechanism; the record disk mounted
25 thereon; the supporting bracket; the horn
and reproducer and a scale supported above
the disk adjacent to the line of travel of the
needle. Fig. 2 is a detail showing an ad-
justable screw pivoted on the center shaft
30 of the mechanism and supporting one end
of the scale. Fig. 3 is a detail view of an
adjustable screw pivoted in the top of the
box and adapted to support the other end of
the scale.
35 In the drawings A indicates the box con-
taining the motor mechanism.
The dotted line B indicates the end of
the vertical shaft on which the record disk
C is supported and by which it is rotated.
40 D is a scale which is pivofeally supported
at one end on the shaft B, and at the other
end is supported on the box A. In the end
of the scale on the shaft is an adjustable
screw E threaded in the scale and having a
45 hollow end adapted to admit the end of the
shaft B. At the other end of the scale is
an adjustable screw E', the point of which is
insertible in one of the holes F in the box A.
By the adjustment of these screws the height
50 of the scale D above the disk can be regu-
lated. The edges of the scale form part of a
circle, the center of which is the pivotal
point of the bracket and arm supporting
the needle and horn. The face of the scale
is divided by marks adapted to indicate any 55
desired point on the disk at which the op-
erator desires to set the needle.
The needle is indicated by the letter G.
The reproducer by the letter H. The bracket
by I. The arm by the letter J. The piv- 60
otal point by L and the horn by K. All of
these parts except the scale and its adjust-
able screws are referred to simply as usual
parts of the instrument of this kind.
What I claim and desire to secure by Let- 65
ters Patent is:
1. In a gramophone, the combination con-
sisting of a case and aperture therein; a
motor mechanism in said case, a vertical
shaft of said mechanism extending through 70
said case, a bracket and pivotal arm sup-
ported by said case, a reproducer supported
on said arm ; a record disk supported on said
shaft; a scale extending transversely over
said disk, one end of said scale being pivot- 75
ally supported on the end of said shaft and
the other end supported in said aperture in
said case as described.
2. In a gramophone, a case; a reproducer
arm and reproducer support on said case; a 80
motor mechanism in said case having a ver-
tical shaft, a record disk thereon; a scale
plate supported on said shaft and case trans-
versely over said disk, one edge of said disk
being coincident with an imaginary line 85
traversed by a needle in said reproducer, as
described.
3. In a machine of the kind described hav-
ing a case, a reproducer arm and reproducer
supported thereon, and motor mechanism in- 90
closed therein, having a vertical shaft ex-
tending through said case, and record disk
supported thereon, the combination there-
with of a scale supported transversely over
said disk, one edge of said scale being adja- 95
cent to a point of said reproducer when in
contact with said disk; and means at each
end of said scale adapted to hold it in posi-
tion and to regulate its height above said
disk, as described. 100
<lS>
902,579
4. In a gramophone, the combination with
an inclosing case, pivotal arm and repro-
ducer thereon, motor mechanism therein
having a vertical shaft, and record thereon ;
of an index plate supported transversely
over said disk adapted to indicate the posi-
tion of said reproducer on said record, and
means for adjusting the position of said
plate over said record and in relation to said
reproducer, as described.
ALICE HENRY.
Witnesses :
Thomas J. Morgan,
Joseph Staab.
902,590.
T. H. MACDONALD.
DISK GKAPHOPHONE.
APPLICATION PILED FEB. 16, 1907.
Patented Nov. 3, 1908.
3 hucm tot
^Witnesses
-*vtt»iC3sea * /j
CUa/U).
00*11
flttot-tvei^S
THE HORRtS PETERS CO., WASHlNOTOn? Or
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE,
THOMAS H. MACDONALD, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN
GRAPHOPHONE COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF
WEST VIRGINIA.
DISK GRAPHOPHONE.
No. 902,590.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 3, 1908.
Application filed February 16, 1907. Serial No. 357,699.
To all whom it may concern:
. Be it known that I, Thomas H. Macdon-
ald, a citizen of the United States, and a resi-
dent of the city of Bridgeport, State of Con-
5 necticut, have invented a new and useful
Improvement in Disk Graphophones, which
improvement is fully set forth in the follow-
ing specification.
The invention relates to talking-machines
10 employing records of the disk type, and spe-
cifically to that construction known as "tone
arm", in which a bracket attached to the
machine provides a horizontal bearing in
which are independently journaled the horn
15 and the hollow arm that carries the sound-
box.
The invention consists of the construction
and arrangement of parts as hereinafter set
forth and claimed, and in modifications and
20 colorable imitations thereof.
My invention will be best understood by
reference to the accompanying drawing,
which is a side view, partly broken away,
illustrating one embodiment of my invention
25 In this drawing 1 represents a portion of
the box or casing of the graphophone or other
talking-machine, containing the usual motor
etc. 2 is the turn-table, and 3 a disk sound-
record carried thereby. 4 is the bracket se-
30 cured to casing 1 and providing, in its upper
portion 5, a horizontal bearing in which the
horn 6 is journaled or swiveled so as to be
swung horizontally. 7 is the hollow arm or
"tone arm" carrying the sound-box 8 and
35 the stylus 9, and suitably mounted in the
bearing 5, to have vertical as well as hori-
zontal play. The members 6 and 7 are con-
nected to the bracket 4, at the portion 5, in
any suitable manner.
40 The construction thus far described is old
and well-known. It will be observed that,
the hollowT arm 7 being pivoted at 5 to swing
vertically, the weight of the other end of arm
7 and its sound-box 8 is sustained by the
45 point of the stylus 9, that rests upon thesur
face of disk 3. The object of the present in-
vention is to relieve the stylus and disk of a
part of this weight. As one means of ac-
complishing this purpose, I provide two co-
50 acting bearings, one on the bracket 4 and the
other on the arm 7, preferably making one of
them yielding, whereby a portion of the
weight is taken up, and also preferably
making one of them adjustable.
In the drawings, 10 represents an integral 55
offset from bracket 4, in which is mounted
the vertical cylindrical pin 11, preferably of
hard steel. A horizontal barrel 12, prefer-
ably made integral with the arm 7, carries
the spring-pressed bolt 13 that abuts against 60
pin 11. At the other end of the barrel is the
adjusting screw 14, for regulating the ten-
sion of the spring. As indicated by line I — I,
the axis of pin 11 coincides with the axis
upon which arm 7 turns in its horizontal 65
movement; consequently, during every por-
tion of the horizontal movement of the arm
upon this axis, its spring-pressed pin 13 is in
proper engagement against the concentric
cylindrical pin 1 1 . By turning screw 1 4 in or 70
out, the tension of the spring is increased or
lessened, and the weight upon the record 3 at
the point 9 is lessened or increased, as the
case may be.
Of course the spring-pressed member, or 75
other yielding device might be carried upon
the bracket-arm 4, instead of upon the hol-
low arm 7, and the adjusting element might
be upon arm 7 ; or the parts might in other re-
spects be altered in construction or in ar- 80
rangement, without departing from the spirit
of my invention, which consists of pro-
viding means for taking up a portion of the
weight of the hollow arm so as to relieve the
sound-record therefrom; in providing yield- 85
ing means for this purpose, whereby any in-
equalities in the plane surface of the disk
record 3 may be compensated for; and in
making this means adjustable. By thus re-
lieving the record 3 of weight, the hollow arm 90
7 or the sound-box, or both, may be made of
iron or other cheap or convenient metal, in
place of aluminum now commonly employed
for this purpose.
Having thus described my invention, I 95
claim:
1. In a talking-machine, the combination
with a bracket, and the hollow arm secured
in said bracket to carry the sound-box, of a
device carried by said bracket, and a second 100
device carried by said arm and abutting
against said first-named device, whereby a por-
tion of the weight of said arm is sustained, —
said second device being both adjustable
and also yielding when held in any position of 105
adjustment.
2. In a talking-machine, the combination
with a bracket, and the hollow arm secured
902,590
10
15
in said bracket to carry the sound-box, of a
vertical cylindrical pin carried by said
bracket in the axis of the horizontal move-
ment of said hollow arm, a spring-pressed
horizontal pin carried by said hollow arm
and abutting against said vertical pin, and
an adjusting nut for regulating the tension of
the spring.
3. In a talking-machine, the combination
with a bracket and an arm mounted there-
upon and carrying the sound-box, of a con-
vex bearing-surface upon said bracket, and a
yielding device carried on said arm and
abutting against said convex surface.
4. In a talking-machine, the combination
with a bracket, and an arm mounted there-
upon and carrying the sound-box, of a con-
vex bearing-surface upon said bracket con-
centric with the swing of said arm, and an
adjustable device carried upon said arm and
abutting against said convex surface.
5. In a talking-machine, the combination
with a bracket, and an arm mounted there-
upon to swing in a horizontal plane and car-
rying the sound-box, of two abutting bear-
ings carried respectively by the bracket and
arm aforesaid, one of the said bearings being
both adjustable and also yielding when held
in adjusted position.
In testimony whereof I have signed this
specification in the presence of two subscrib-
20
25
ing witnesses.
THOMAS H.
Witnesses :
A. B. Keotjgh,
C. A. GlBNER.
MACDONALD.
A. KANDALL.
PHONOGBAPH STOPPING ATTACHMENT.
APPLICATION FILED AUG. 17, 1908.
902,739.
Patented Nov. 3, 1908.
* A ™-4-
WITNESSES.
FIG. 3.
J& £ t&a£/dU*ts.
inyemtor:
by his attorney:
THE NORMS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D, C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ALFRED RANDALL, OF FERRYVILLE, WISCONSIN.
PHONOGRAPH-STOPPING ATTACHMENT.
No. 902,739.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 3, 1908.
Application filed August 17, 1908. Serial No. 448,837.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Alfred Randall, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Fer-
ryville, in the county of Crawford and State
5 of Wisconsin, have invented a new and use-
ful Phonograph - Stopping Attachment, of
which the following is a specification.
My invention relates to improvements in
phonographs, graphophones and other mu-
10 sical instruments, but will for convenience be
called a phonograph stopping attachment.
The object of the invention is to provide a
phonograph stopping device that will auto-
matically stop the operating mechanism when
15 the end of each record has been reached.
This and other objects I attain by the novel
construction and arrangement of parts illus-
trated in the accompanying drawing, in
which : —
20 Figure 1 is a top view of the well known
cylinder record type of phonograph with my
stopping attachment applied thereto. Fig.
2 is a front elevation of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a
rear elevation of Fig. 1. Fig. 4 is a detail
25 view of the stop-collar which forms one of the
main working parts of the device.
Referring to the drawing by reference nu-
merals, 1 and 2 designate respectively the
base and frame of a phonograph, which are
30 often cast in one piece, the frame being off-
set upwardly about at the middle as best
shown in Figs. 2 and 3.
The main shaft 3 is journaled in the bear-
ings 4 and 5 and carries the cylindrical record
35 holder 6, the screw threaded bar on screw 7
and the pulley 8 driven by belt 9, which is
connected to the motive power (not shown)
underneath the base plate..
Near the rear edge of the frame another
40 shaft 10 extends the entire length of the ma-
chine parallel to shaft 3 and is fastened at
each end to lugs 11 by means of screws 12.
On the shaft 10 slides a sleeve 13 having
secured to one end the reproducer-carrying
45 arm 14 and the reproducer 15 with tube 16 to
which a horn (not shown) may be attached.
Said arm has an extension 17 in front of the
reproducer with a small wheel 18 journaled
therein and resting on the track 19 of the
50 frame. The opposite end of the sleeve has a
transverse arm 20 projecting at right angles
from it and having a threaded member 21
engaging the threads of the screw 7.
All of the above mechanism is common in
55 the phonographs now used and said parts
also constitute the mechanism that is used in
connection with my stopping device, which
will now be described.
Near the offset of the frame I provide in
the front and rear of the phonograph, bear- 60
ings 22, in which is journaled a horizontally
disposed rock shaft 23 having at its front end
a horizontal rocker arm 23 x projecting to-
ward the left of the machine and parallel to
the front of it (as best shown in Figs. 1 and 05
2) . The rear end of said shaft 23 has a short
normally vertical arm 24 (see Fig. 3) to
which is secured by rivets 25, a toothed sec-
tor 26 engaged by a £atch 27 operated by a
finger lever 27x i'ulcrumed at 28x to a hand 70
lever 28, which is I'ulcrumed at 29 to the de-
pending radial arm 29 x of the sector.
The lever 28 has pivoted to it at 30 one end
of a horizontal controlling rod 31, extending
to the left (in Fig. 3) and having its other end 75
bent at an angle and formed into a collar 32
looselv encirclino- the shaft 10 to slide there-
on. In Fig. 3 it is clearly shown that the col-
lar 32 is located at a point opposite to the end
of the wax cylinder 33 (shown in dotted 80
lines). Should the cylinder be shorter or
longer or the pieces to be reproduced are of
different lengths as can be seen by looking at
the sound producing spiral grooves in the
cylinder, the collar 32 is brought to a point 85
opposite the end of the cylinder or piece by
placing the lever 28 with its catch 27 in a
corresponding notch for reasons presently to
be explained.
The front arm 23 x of the rock shaft 23 has 90
its extremity provided with a vertical groove
or notch 34, adapted to engage the common
hand-operated stopping lever 35, which is
pivoted underneath the base. Said stopping
lever when pushed to the left sets the motive 95
power in operation (by means not shown)
and the belt over the pulley 9 turns the shaft
3 and thereby the screw 7 and the cylinder 6.
The screw threads being engaged with the
member 21, cause the sleeve 13 and its parts, 100
including the reproducer 16 etc., to move to-
ward the right (in Figs. 1 and 2) until the end
36 of the sleeve 13 takes against the collar 32.
By the time this takes place the music piece
has come to an end, but the sleeve continues 106
to move thereby pulling on rod 31, which in
turn pulls on lever 28 and arm 24, causing
the shaft 23 to rock in the bearings, and the
front arm 23 x to raise out of contact with the
lever 35, allowing a spring 37, connected with 110
the lever 35 and any suitable place near the
front bearing, to pull the lever 35 to the po-
Q
902,739
10
sition 35x (see Fig. 2) thereby stopping the
motor; and by means of the lever 28, rod 31,
collar 32 and sector 26 the stopping takes
place at the end of either long or short rec-
ords, as already above explained. Swinging
on a pivot 39 in the frame is a bearing 38 nor-
mally supporting the end of the shaft 3.
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim is:
1. In a phonograph and mounted on the
frame thereof, a rock shaft arranged in trans-
verse position to the line of movement of the
reproducer, a vertically disposed rocker arm
on the rock shaft, an operating rod pivotally
connected therewith and having a guided
portion adapted to be engaged by the member
of the machine carrying the reproducer, also
a horizontally disposed rocker arm on said
shaft and adapted to normally hold the
20 starting lever of the machine in operative po-
sition, and a spring arranged to pull the
starting lever into idle position when the
horizontal arm is disengaged therefrom.
2. In a phonograph and mounted on the
15
frame thereof, a rock shaft arranged in trans- 2 5
verse position to the line of movement of the
reproducer, a vertically disposed rocker arm
on the rock shaft, an operating rod pivotally
connected therewith and having a guided
portion adapted to be engaged by the mem- 30
ber of the machine carrying the reproducer,
also a horizontally disposed rocker arm on
said shaft and adapted to normally hold the
starting lever of the machine in operative po-
sition, and a spring arranged to pull the 35
starting lever into idle position when the
horizontal arm is disengaged therefrom, and
adjusting means in the connection between
the vertical rocker arm and the operating rod,
for the variation in the lengths of records 40
played.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature,
in presence of two witnesses.
ALFRED RANDALL.
Witnesses :
Maria Tower,
Mary Tower.
903,059.
C. G. CONN.
SOUND REPRODUCING BELL.
APPLICATION PILED AUG. 2, 1907.
Patented Nov. 3, 1908.
9 woe »i fro*
-^^cLa^^i &Sp^^**- »
si^i\ t»i eases
cStj
ClttotweycS
T«E HORR1S PETERS CO., »« SM I IV070«, O. C.
CTNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
CHARLES G. CONN, OF ELKHART, INDIANA.
SOUND-REPRODUCING BELL.
No. 903,059.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 3, 1908.
Application filed August 2, 1907. Serial No. 386,806.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Charles G. Conn, a
citizen of the United States, residing at Elk-
hart, in the county of Elkhart and State of
5 Indiana, have invented certain new and use-
ful Improvements in Sound - Reproducing
Bells, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
"While I shall describe my invention more
10 particularly with reference to sound repro-
ducing machines, commonly known as gramo-
phones and phonographs, at the same time it
will be understood that my invention is
equally applicable to megaphones and other
sound conveying horns and the like. For
purposes of brevity, I shall in this specifica-
tion and the claims following use the term
"bell" to include the horns usually employed
on sound reproducing machines and, mega-
20 phones.
As is will known, there are three tones,
namely, the upper, the middle and lower
tones of the musical scale, and heretofore the
varied vibrations of the different tones were
25 all taken up in a single chambered bell, with
the result that the vibrations of the higher
tones are practically lost in a chamber of a
size to properly reproduce the lower tone.
The object of my invention is to produce a
30 bell having a series of sound wave chambers,
whereby the full richness of the soimd -waves
from the three tones is preserved and passes
from the bell to the atmosphere; and with
this and minor objects in view, my invention
35 consists of the parts and combination of parts
hereinafter more specifically set forth.
In the drawing, Figure 1 is a front eleva-
tion of the bell embodying my invention.
Fig. 2 is a sectional view on the line II — II,
40 Fig. 1.
The bell embodying my invention con-
sists of the outer horn 1, the inner horn 2,
which is secured to the outer horn at its inner
end by means of fastenings 3; 4 is an inter-
45 mediate horn disposed within the outer horn
1 and between it and the inner horn 2. This
intermediate horn is secured to the inner
horn at its forward end by means of the
loops 5, while at its inner end, it is secured to
the inner horn 2 by means of suitable fasten- 50
iugs 6. As will be seen from the drawing,
the inner horn 2 extends beyond the mouth
of the horn 1, but does not extend to the
rear end of the horn 1. The horn 4 is shown
at its front end flush with the mouth of the 55
horn 1 , while its rear end terminates short of
the rear end of the horn 2. These horns, as
will be seen, are nested and at their rear ends
terminate short of each other. WThen this
bell is attached to a sound reproducing ma- 60
chine or is embodied in a megaphone, the
lower tones pass out through the horn 1,
while the middle tones pass through the horn
4, and the higher tones through the horn 2.
My theory is that where large bells are 65
used for sound reproduction by the ordinary
process, the sound wave chamber in the bell
is too large for the feeble vibrations which
reproduce the higher tones, and if a small
sized bell is used, the sound wave chamber is 70
too small for properly reproducing the lower
tones. With the use of my nested bell,
there is a sound wave chamber for the re-
production of the upper, middle and lower
tones of the musical scale, and all can be re- 75
produced with equal volume and clearness.
The bell can be made of any material suit-
able for that purpose, or of any size found de-
sirable by the manufacturer.
Claims. 80
1. A bell for conveying sound, comprising
coaxially nested horns, terminating at differ-
ent distances from the rear* end of the bell.
2. A bell for conveying sound, comprising
three coaxially nested horns for the upper 85
middle and lower tones of the musical scale,
the largest of said horns extending furthest
to the rear, and the smallest extending fur-
thest to the front of the bell.
CHARLES G. CONN.
In presence of two witnesses —
W7. J. Grovert,
M. E. Middleton.
903,198.
I. KITSEE.
PRODUCING PHONOGRAPHIC RECORDS,
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 6, 1908.
Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
JFiqX.
^JF^o. Z,
Tf9.4r
f<'e-3
WITNESSES:
' INVENTOR
THE ncams PETERS CO., WASHIKCTCN, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ISIDOR KITSEE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
PRODUCING PHONOGRAPHIC RECORDS.
No. 903,198.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
Application filed March 6, 1908. Serial No. 419,576.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Isidor Kitsee, a citi-
zen of the United States, residing at Phila-
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer-
tain new and useful Improvements in Pro-
ducing Phonographic Records, of which the
following is a specification.
My invention relates to an improvement
10 in producing phonographic records. Its ob-
ject is to produce such records in a simple
and efficient manner.
In practicing this, my invention, I prefer
to make use of a vibrating diaphragm with
15 the aid of which a non-conducting material
is deposited on a conducting surface in ac-
cordance with the vibrations of said dia-
phragm produced by the generated sound
waves.
20 In the drawing Figure 1 is a plan view in
conventional form illustrating the conduct-
ing material on which the lines of record
are later on to be marked. Fig. 2 is a simi-
lar view of the same material with the
25 sound record marked thereon. Fig. 3 is a
similar view of the conducting material hav-
ing marked thereon the lines of record and
provided with the electro-plate as later on
to be more fully explained. Fig. 4 is a
30 cross section of a recording mechanism pro-
vided with the preferred means of deposit-
ing the material on the conducting plate.
• 1 is the conducting support; 2 the lines
of record and 3 the electro-deposit on said
35 plate.
In Fig. 4, 5 represents the mouth piece ; 6
the diaphragm ; 7 the stylus attached to the
diaphragm. This stylus is here partially
supported by the movable lever 8 attached.
40 to the bar 9 held in position here by the
support 10. 11 is the reservoir containing
the non-conducting fluid 12. 13 is the fluid
outlet here shown as connected with the res-
ervoir with the interposition of the flexible
45 tube 14. 15 are the means to stop the flow
of the fluid.
The modus operandi of practicing this,
my invention, is as follows: — A metallic
plate, such for instance as a plate of copper,
50 is first prepared in a manner so that the
surface of same is adapted to receive a de-
posit of metal with the aid of an electric
current. For this reason, the plate has to
be free from all grease and foreign sub-
55 stances. A non-conducting material is then
deposited on this plate with the aid of the
vibrating diaphragm of a phonographic
transmitter. As stated above, I prefer that
this material should be deposited without
necessitating the actual contact of the stylus go
with the plate whereon such material has to
be deposited. I, therefore, produce a liq-
uid or fluid in a manner so that the same
should be non-conducting. I have tried dif-
ferent fluids and found that either a solu- 65
tion of shellac in alcohol, or a solution of
rosin in hydrocarbon will answer for all
practical purposes.
I prefer that the stylus, which is supported
by the vibrating diaphragm of a recorder, 70
should be provided with an orifice and
should be in operative relation with a reser-
voir containing the necessary liquid or fluid.
Beneath this orifice, I place the metallic
plate adapted to receive the record. The 75
non-conducting fluid or liquid should issue
from the reservoir in a very thin stream;
and as the stylus with its orifice has to vi-
brate in accordance with the vibrations of
the diaphragm proper, it is obvious that the 80
liquid or fluid will be deposited on the solid
surface in a manner so as to reproduce these
vibrations. After having deposited thereon
the required recording lines, the conducting
plate is subjected to the process of electro- 85
plating. As again stated above, I prefer to
use a copper plate and I also prefer to
electro-plate the same with an additional
copper. The mode of producing such elec-
tro-deposition is well known. The plate is 90
made the cathode in an electrolytic appa-
ratus in which the electrolyte consists of a
solution of sulfate of copper. This anode
is a copper in convenient form. When a
plate, prepared as above, is subjected in such 95
apparatus to the action of the current, the
copper will be deposited only on such parts
of the surface of this plate as are con-
ducting, but such parts as are made non-
conducting, will be left free from the de- ico
posit; and as the lines of record are non-
conducting, it is obvious that these lines will
remain free from the deposit. A plate
therefore, having the lines of record marked
on its surface with a non-conducting mate- 105
rial will, after it is taken from the electro-
lytic apparatus, have all parts of its sur-
face with the exception of such parts which
represent the lines of record, raised. The
height between the lines of record and the no
other parts of the plate will, therefore, be
differentiated and the lines of record them-
3
903,198
selves will look as being in intaglio or de-
pressed as to the other parts of the sur-
face. From such a plate, copies can then be
made in accordance with any of the well
5 known methods.
I have illustrated and described one ap-
paratus with the aid of which the lines of
record may be drawn on the metallic sup-
port, but it is obvious that other appara-
10 tuses may be substituted and I have only
illustrated the one apparatus so as to enable
persons versed in the art to practice my in-
vention.
Having now described my invention, what
15 I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent is: —
1. The method of reproducing sound
waves in permanent records, which consists
in causing a non-conducting material to be
20 deposited on a conducting material in ac-
cordance with the vibrations of a diaphragm
actuated by said sound wav^s, and causing
to be differentiated the height of the lines of
record and the height of the remaining parts
of the surface of the conducting material
through the process of electro-deposition.
2. In the production of sound records, the
method which consists in first recording the
sound waves upon a suitable surface, and
electro-plating upon the parts of the surface
upon which no record has been made.
3. As a new article of manufacture, a
phonographic record comprising a conduct-
ing support, lines of record thereon and a
metallic deposit on all parts of the surface
of said support with the exception of those
parts which are covered by the lines of
record.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
ISIDOR KITSEE.
Witnesses :
Edith E. Stilley,
Mary C. Smith.
25
30
35
I. KITSEE.
PHONOGEAPHY.
APPLICATION FILED MAS. 12, 1908.
903,199.
tt
Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
7*9 -*
WITNESSES:
£^k?us&^
INVENTOR
THE MORRIS PETERS CO: WASHINCIJN, D. C
I
I. EITSEE.
PHONOGRAPHY.
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 12, 1908.
903,199.
Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
{)
— -x 24 25
W/atfiecljes.
%
I
I
14
/3
, :.-—
I
/y
I
23
<mt
d-nvc-nkoz .
nvssay /
7 OKfftS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, O. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ISIDOR KITSEE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
PHONOGRAPHY.
No. 903,199.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
Application filed March 12, 1908. Serial No. 420,713.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Isidor Kitsee, citizen
of the United States, residing at Philadel-
phia, in the county of Philadelphia and
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented cer-
tain new and useful Improvements in Pho-
nography, of which the following is a speci-
fication.
My invention relates to an improvement
10 in phonography. Its object is to produce
original records in a simple and efficient
manner and it is also one of its objects to
produce direct from said original records
copies of same.
15 The first step in practicing my invention
is to produce the original record. I prefer
that the lines of record should be marked
on the support without actual contact of the
stylus or writing means and as it is neces-
20 sary for me to illustrate mechanical means
adapted to produce such lines of record, so
that persons versed in the art may practice
my invention. I have illustrated in the ac-
companying drawing a device with the aid
25 of which records may be produced without
actual contact of the stylus with the material
on which the lines of record are to be pro-
duced, it being obvious that the mechanical
arrangement may differ without departing
30 from the scope of my invention.
In practicing my invention, it is necessary
to produce two identical records and I have,
Therefore, recourse to means whereby iden-
tical lines of record may be simultaneously
35 produced on two independent plates or disks.
In the drawing. Figure 1 is a cross section
of a recording mechanism with my device
attached thereto. Figs. 2, 3, 4 and 5 are per-
spective views of plates having marked
40 thereon the lines of record in their different
stages. Fig. 6 is a vertical transverse sec-
tional view of an electrolytic apparatus em-
ployed in practicing the invention.
In Fig. 1, 1 is the mouth piece of the usual
45 sound-box; 2 the diaphragm: 3 the stylus
attached to the diaphragm. This stylus is
here partially supported by the movable
lever 4 attached to the bar 5 and held in
position by the support 6.
50 So far, the device may be a duplicate of
the usual phonograph but instead of the
stylus being provided with a cutting point,
I substitute therefor means to move there-
with a device whereby proper material may
55 he deposited on the plate or disk without
actual contact with said plate or disk.
7 is a reservoir containing the liquid 15.
8 are the means to regulate the flow of the
liquid from said reservoir and 16 are the
means to provide pressure to said liquid, co
To the outlet of this reservoir is connected
a flexible tube 9 and to this tube is connected
the pipe 10 provided with the two orifices 11
and 12. One of these orifices is of somewhat
larger dimension than the other, so that a 65
broader line can be traced or marked with
one of the orifices than with the other. In
juxtaposition to the orifice 11 is the plate or
disk 13 and in juxtaposition to the orifice 12
is the plate or disk 14. 70
The fluid or liquid should be non-con-
ducting and it is even preferred to make the
same etch-resisting for the purpose as will
hereinafter be described. The liquid should
issue from the reservoir in a very thin 75
stream, and as the orifices have to vibrate in
accordance with the vibrations of the stylus,
due to the vibrations of the diaphragm,
which vibration of the orifices is permitted
by the flexible tube 9, it is obvious that the 80
liquid or fluid will be deposited on the solid
surface in a manner so as to reproduce these
vibrations. In this connection it will be un-
derstood that a relative movement between
the reservoir 7 and the disks 13 and 14 should 85
occur, that the reservoir may conform to the
feed of the sound-box, and to this end the
reservoir 7 should be properly supported in
relation to the sound-box so that proper
movement of the reservoir across the disks 90
13 and 14 may be had.
To practice my invention, it is, as stated
above, necessary to produce two identical
records and in Figs. 2 and 3 I have illus-
trated these records in which the plates or 95
disks are designated by the numerals 13 and
14 and the lines of record by the numerals 17
and 18 respectively. After the production
of the two records, I subject one of these
records to a process whereby the lines of 100
record are left in " intaglio ", that is, de-
pi-essed, and I then subject the second of
said records to a process whereby the lines
of record are produced in " relief ", that is,
raised above the surface. 105
In my experiments, I have found that to
accomplish this purpose in a simple and ef-
ficient manner, it is only necessary to make
one of these records the anode and the second
of these records the cathode in an electro- HO
lytic apparatus with the necessary electrolyte.
In Fig. 6 I have disclosed such electrolytic
2
903, 199
apparatus, the numeral 23 designating the
cell thereof; 24 the anode; 25 the cathode,
and 26 the electrolyte. The disk 13 is illus-
trated in connection with the cathode, and
5 the disk 14 in connection with the anode, and
by reason of this it is apparent that the elec-
trolytic action will cause a metallic deposit
upon the free surface of the disk 13, while
the free surface of the disk 14 will be eaten
10 away.
Tt is necessary that the plate or disk on
which the lines of record are marked should
consist of a conducting material, such as
metal, and if the plates or disks are made of
15 copper, it is best to have as an electrolyte a
diluted copper solution. Care should be
taken to carry only a very small amperage
through the apparatus, so that the force of
the current should not be able to destroy the
20 lines of record on the anode and I have
found one-tenth of an ampere for each square
inch of surface exposed sufficient for prac-
tical purposes.
Through this process, copper is deposited
25 on the free surface of the cathode, raising
this surface and leaving the lines of record
in their original state, whereby these lines
of record are — for all practical purposes —
depressed or in intaglio, and the copper of
30 the free surface of the anode is eaten away
leaving again the lines of record in their
original state, and through the eating away
of the other parts of the surface of the plate,
the lines of record are — for all practical pur-
35 poses — raised above the remaining surface
and are therefore in relief. To produce
copies from such records, it is only necessary to
use one of the records as a " male " and the
second of the records as a " female " and com-
40 pressing the necessary material, such for in-
stance as celluloid, etc., between the two
disks.
To bring the lines of record entirely in
alinement, I have provided the records with
45 means so as to lock the same at the required
place and these means are here shown as 21
and 22 ; one of these means being raised and
the other depressed.
I am well aware that instead of produc-
50 ing the records in relief from a metallic
plate, the same results can be obtained by
the process of etching, hut as some metals
lend themselves far better to the electrolytic
process than to the etching process, it is ob-
55 vious that one or the other may be practiced
in accordance with requirements.
In my experiments, I have found that it is
necessary to have the recording lines of one
record slightly broader than in the second
record, for the reason that one of these rec- 60
ords is then used as a male and the other of
these records is used as a female and the ma-
terials, from which the copy is to be made,
has to be compressed between the two records.
Having now described my invention, what 65
I claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent is : —
1. In phonography, the method, which
consists in causing, through the sound waves,
a diaphragm to vibrate, causing through said 70
vibrations a non-conducting material to be
deposited simultaneously on the surfaces of
two separate conductors, in accordance with
the vibrations of said diaphragm, and caus-
ing then the free surface of one of said con- 75
ductors to be depressed and the free surface
of the second of said conductors to be raised.
2. In phonography, the method of produc-
ing male and female dies from original rec-
ords, which consists in first producing simul- 80
taneously two original records, and then
raising the free surface of one record and
depressing the free surface of the second rec-
ord through the action of the current in an
electrolytic apparatus. 85
3. In phonography, the method, which
consists in first producing simultaneously
identical recording lines on two independent
conductors with a non-conducting material,
and then making said records the anode and 90
cathode, respectively, of an electrolytic ap-
paratus whereby the free surface of one of
said conductors is raised and the free sur-
face of the second of said conductors is de-
pressed. 9 5
4. The method of producing phonographic
records, which consists in simultaneously
forming two independent die records the
lines of one of Avhich are in relief and the
lines of the other depressed to adapt the 100
same as male and female dies, and then com-
pressing a suitable material between said die
records to obtain the requisite copies.
5. In phonography, the method of produc-
ing dies from original records, which consists 105
in making one of said records the anode and
one of said records the cathode in an elec-
trolytic apparatus, and sending currents of
electricity through said apparatus, whereby
the free surface of one of said records is 110
raised and the free surface of the second of
said records is depressed.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
ISIDOR KITSEE.
"Witnesses :
Edith R. Stiixey,
Mary C. Smith.
903,200.
I. KITSEE.
PHONOGRAPHY.
APPLICATION PILED JUHE 11, 1908.
Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
LINES OF" RECORD PRODUCED WITH
NON-CONDUCTING MATERIAL
ON ELECTRO- CONDUCTIVE BASE.
BA5E WITH RECORD THEREON
MADE ANODE OF ELECTROLYTIC
APPARATUS.
BA5E AS ANODE SUBJECTED
TO ELECTROLYTIC ACTION-
BASE WASHEDAPTER ELEC-
TROLYTIC /\CTIOM.
/>6&tzx*^.
9m>evttoi
% £. J'r^uL
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. O..C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ISIDOR KITSEE, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
PHONOGRAPHY.
No. 903,200.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
Application filed June 11, 1908. Serial No.
437,924.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Isidor Kitsee, a citi-
zen of the United States, residing at Phila-
delphia, in the county of Philadelphia and
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Phonogra-
phy, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
My invention relates to an improvement
10 in phonography. Its object is to produce
permanent records in a simple and efficient
manner.
The first step in practicing my invention
is to produce the lines of record with a non-
15 conducting material on a conducting sup-
port.
For the purpose of my invention, it is im-
material if the non-conducting material con-
sists of a fluid or a solid and it is immate-
20 rial if these lines of record are marked on
the support with actual contact of the stylus
or writing means, or without actual contact
of said stylus; but it is necessary that the
support should be conducting and the lines
25 of record non-conducting, and I prefer that
the support should be a metallic plate, such
for instance as a plate of copper, and if a
fluid is used for making the lines of record,
the same may consist of a liquid containing
30 dissolved shellac or other resinous matter,
and it is preferred that this fluid should be
colored so that the lines of record may be
made visible to the eye of the operator.
After the lines of record have been pro-
35 duced and the ink (if such is used) has
dried, the plate with its record lines is made
the anode of an electrolytic apparatus, and
if a copper plate is employed, the electro-
lyte should preferably consist of a diluted
40 solution of sulfate of copper. The cathode
may consist of any suitable material in any
preferred shape. When a current of elec-
tricity is sent through this apparatus, such
parts of the cathode as are left free from
45 the recording lines will be eaten away and
such parts as are covered by the non-con-
ducting lines are left in their original state.
When it is found that the spaces betAveen
the lines are deepened enough, then the
50 plate is taken out and washed, and may be
used to produce copies therefrom.
I am aware, that records have been pro-
duced on metallic plates with a material
adapted to resist the action of an etching-
fluid and that then the plate is subjected to 55
a process whereby the material left free is
eaten out — so to speak — by the acid, but in
practice, it was found that even the im-
proved etching processes are not capable of
producing a clear demarcation between the 60
lines and the etched out material and when
such plates are subjected to microscopic ex-
amination, it is found that the edges of the
line are ragged and the sound produced
from such records is not as clear as desired. 65
Experiments have proven that if instead
of the etching fluid, the action of the current
is made to differentiate the height between
(lie lines of record and the other parts of
the plate, the lines are more clearly defined 70
and do not have the ragged edges as with
the etching process.
Different densities of current may be used,
but I found that it is best to use a very small
amperage, such for instance as one ampere 75
to ten square inches exposed. The smaller
the current, the longer time is required to
produce the necessary result.
In the accompanying drawing is disclosed
a diagram illustrating the steps of the here- 80
in described method.
Having now described my invention, what
1 claim as new and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent is : —
1. The method of producing permanent 85
sound records, which consists in first form-
ing on an electro-conductive base a variable
line of non-conducting material in accord-
ance with the variations of sound waves,
then making said base the anode of an elec- 90
trolytic apparatus, and subjecting the base,
while still the anode of the electrolytic ap-
paratus, to the action of a current of elec-
tricity flowing through said apparatus.
2. The method of producing permanent 95
sound records, which consists in first form-
ing on the surface of a metallic plate a va-
riable line of non-conducting material in ac-
cordance with the variations of sound waves,
and then causing the free surface of said 100
plate to be ionized through the action of an
electric current in an electrolytic apparatus.
3. The method of producing permanent
sound records, which consists in first form-
903,200
ing on an electro-conductive base a variable
line of non-conducting material in accord-
ance with the variations of sound waves, and
then differentiating in height the lines of
record and the free surface of said base
through the ionizing action of an electric
current in an electrolytic apparatus.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of two witnesses.
ISIDOK KITSEE.
Witnesses :
Mary C. Smith,
Edith E. Stilley.
903,364.
W. L. ECKHARDT.
CABINET FOE TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 7, 1907.
Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
nvcntoz
(fcdca^L/
™e«o«»ls pctirs CO.. Washington, o! c
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WALTER L. ECKHARDT, OF BROOKLYN, NEW YORK, ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN GRAPHOPHONE
COMPANY, OF BRIDGEPORT, CONNECTICUT, A CORPORATION OF WEST VIRGINIA.
CABINET FOB TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 903,364.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed June 7, 1907. Serial No. 377,801.
Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Walter L. Eckhardt,
a citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Brooklyn, New York, have invented a
5 new and useful Improvement in Cabinets
for Talking - Machines, which improvement
is fully set forth in the following specifi-
cation.
The present invention relates to cabinets
10 for talking-machines, and particularly those
of the disk type.
The objects of the invention are to pro-
vide a cabinet which shall entirely inclose
the machine and horn and at the same time
15 leave the machine readily accessible for the
purpose of placing records on the turn-
table thereof and removing them therefrom ;
to provide convenient compartments for the
storing of records and other articles; and,
20 generally, to present a cabinet which shall
be a compact and attractive article of furni-
ture.
The invention will be better understood
by reference to the accompanying drawings,
25 wherein —
Figure 1 is a perspective ; and Fig. 2 is a
side elevation.
Referring to the drawing, 1 is the casing
proper the outward form of which is pref-
30 erably that of an ordinary upright piano,
with the usual extension or projecting por-
tion 3 supported in part, if desired, by legs
4, which extension is provided with a lid
5 hinged or otherwise secured to the cabinet.
35 This lid may be secured in its raised or ele-
vated position by brace 6.
Extending horizontally across the cabinet
is a partition 7 which divides both the cas-
ing proper and the extension into upper
40 and lower compartments. The motor (not
shown) for the talking machine is located,
either partly or wholly, in the lower com-
partment of the extension where it is com-
pletely protected from dust and accident,
45 with its winding shaft extending through
an opening in one end wall of said exten-
sion where it is engaged by handle 8 when
it is desired to crank the motor. Projecting
upwardly through said partition is the usual
50 driving shaft 9 for the turn-table 10 on
which the sound-record 11 is mounted. A
sound-conveying tube 12 has a reproducer
13 on one end thereof for engagement with
the sound - record, and is connected at its
55 other extremity by a universal joint to one
end of a horn 14. This horn is suitably
shaped or bent to adapt it to the cabinet,
with its mouth or delivery end opposite an
opening 15 in the front face of the cabinet.
Preferably this opening is in the form of 60
ornamental open fretwork to enhance the
attractiveness of the cabinet, with a sheet
of silk or other thin material arranged
thereover on the inside to exclude dust from
the interior of the cabinet and horn. The 65
horn may be supported or secured in the
desired position in any suitable manner, the
means herein shown being a supporting par-
tition 16 provided with an opening within
which the horn fits snugly. The flange of 70
the horn at its mouth or delivery end may
also be secured to the front wall of the
cabinet.
In the lower part of the cabinet at either
end thereof and beneath partition 7 is pro- 75
vided one or more series of racks 16 in which
the disk sound-records are supported edge-
wise. Access is had to the compartments
both above and below partition 7 through
doors 17. 80
Normally when the machine is not in use,
or when a selection is being rendered, doors
17 and lid 5 are closed, and when a selection
is being rendered the sound issues through
opening 15 in the front of the casing. When 85
desired to replace the record by another, lid
5 is elevated and the turn-table being posi-
tioned well forward in the projecting por-
tion 3, the record may be readily removed
and replaced. The machine is started and 90
stopped by actuating push buttons 18 and
19, respectively.
It will be appreciated that by the present
invention a cabinet is presented which is a
handsome and attractive article of furniture 95
and of the same outward form as the ordi-
nary upright piano; which completely in-
closes the talking-machine and its horn ; and
which affords convenient and compact means
for the storing of sound-records and other 100
accessories.
What is claimed is :
1. A talking-machine cabinet comprising
a suitable box or casing with a laterally pro-
jecting portion, a motor in said projecting 105
tending through said casing and said pro-
jecting portion, a motor in said projecting
portion below said partition, and a turn-
table, sound-conveying tube and horn above
the same. HO
903,364
2. A talking-machine cabinet comprising
a suitable box or casing with a laterally pro-
jecting portion, a horizontal partition ex-
tending through said casing and said pro-
5 jecting portion, a motor in said projecting
portion below said partition, and a turn-
table, sound-conveying tube and horn above
the same with the horn contained in said
box or casing.
10 3. A talking-machine cabinet comprising
a suitable box or casing with a laterally pro-
jecting portion and having an opening or
openings through one wall, a talking-ma-
chine contained in said cabinet and having
15 its motor contained in said extension and
its horn in said main box or casing with the
delivery end of the horn juxtaposed to said
opening or openings.
4. A talking-machine cabinet comprising
CO a suitable box or casing with a laterally pro-
jecting portion, a horizontal partition ex-
tending through said casing and said pro-
jecting portion, racks for sound-records pro-
vided beneath said partition, and an opening
or openings provided in the front face of 25
the box or casing for the passage of the
sound.
5. A talking-machine cabinet comprising
a casing and a front section having a fall
board, said casing and section having the 30
outlines of an upright piano; a horizontal
partition dividing said casing and section
into compartments; an upper compartment
containing a sound-conveying tube, a horn
opening through one wall of said compart- 35
meat, and a turn-table accessible through
said front section ; and a lower compartment
comprising a main record chamber and a
motor chamber in the front section.
In testimony whereof I have signed this 40
specification in the presence of two sub-
scribing witnesses.
WALTER L. ECKHARDT.
Witnesses :
R. L. Scott,
Clarence S. Tay.
903,375.
A. HATJG & B. G. KOYAL.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 11, 1907.
Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
ATTORNEY
THE NORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
903,375.
A. HAUG & B. G. ROYAL.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED JUNE 11, 1907.
-4&
Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
J*x&. 6
WITNESSES
yo
J^ff 7.
INVENTORS
Ge/fiuasg'Gfiapag,
BY
ATTORNEY
THe „o»»,s RtT£„S CO.. WASH,„CTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ANDREW HAUG, OF CALDWELL, AXD BELFORD G. ROYAL, OF CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY,
ASSIGNORS TO UNIVERSAL TALKING MACHINE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, A COR-
PORATION OF NEW YORK.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 903,375.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
Application filed June 11, 1907. Serial No. 378,332.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, Andrew Haug, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Caldwell, count}7- of Essex, State of New
5 Jersey, and Belfoed G. Royal, a citizen of
the United States, and a resident of Camden,
count}' of Camden, State of New Jersey, have
jointly invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Talking-Machines, of which
10 the following is a full, clear, and complete
disclosure.
Our invention relates particularly to im-
provements in that class of talking machines
in which the sound box communicates with
15 the amplifying horn proper through an in-
termediate sound arm, the principal objects
of this invention being to simplify the con-
struction of the arm and of the means con-
necting the arm and the horn, to lessen the
20 cost of manufacture without detracting from
the practical utility of these parts.
Y\ ith this and other objects in view, the
invention consists in the novel construction,
combination and arrangement of parts de-
25 scribed in the following specification and
more particularly pointed out in the ap-
pended claims.
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1
is a side elevation of a talking machine con-
30 structed in accordance with this invention;
Fig. 2 a fragmentary top plan view of the
same; Fig. 3 a fragmentary side elevation
partly in section of the joint between the
arm and the horn; Fig. 4 a horizontal frag-
35 mentary section of the joint; Fig. 5 a ver-
tical transverse section on line 5 — 5 of Fig.
3; Fig. 6 a bottom plan view showing how
the sound box is attached to the taper arm;
Fig. 7 a transverse vertical section on the
40 line 7 — 7 of Fig. 6; Fig. 8 a front elevation
in detail of the elbow and part of its sup-
porting bracket; Fig. 9 a fragmentary side-
elevation partly in vertical section of a modi-
fied form of this invention; and Fig. 10 a
45 transverse section on line 4 — 4 of Fig. 9.
The preferred form of this invention, as
shown in Figs. 1 to 8 inclusive, comprises a
cabinet 1, containing suitable mechanism
for driving the turntable 2 mounted thereon,
50 which supports the usual record 3.
The sound box 4 is secured to a tubular
elbow 5, the outer end of which fits snugly
over the reduced end 7 of the taper arm 8.
The upper end of the taper arm is supported
within the inner end of the elbow 9 to swing 55^
in any direction, by means to be hereinafter
described in detail. The said elbow 9 is
preferably formed integrally with a bracket
10, which supports it from the side of the
cabinet of the machine by means of screws 60
11, and the upper end of the elbow opens into
the lower end of the amphfying horn 12,
which is screw threaded into the elbow.
The means for supporting the taper arm
within the elbow 9 comprises a head 13, fit- 65
ting tightly within the end of the arm adja-
cent the elbow, and provided with a shoulder
14 resting against the edge of the arm, and a
spherical end 15 extending loosely within a
bushing 16, which fits tightly within the end 70
of the said elbow. The said end 15 is round-
ed inwardly from the shoulder 14 to points
adjacent the outer edge of the bushing, form-
ing a neck and is then curved outwardly in a
spherical shape within the said bushing, and 75
the outer edge of said bushing is accordingly
rounded, so as to permit of the necessary
amount of motion of the arm, and at the
same time to keep the space between the arm
and the elbow substantially closed. The 80
head 13 in the end of the arm is provided on
the under side of its spherical portion with a
circular aperture 17 and in the opposite up-
per part of the spherical portion with a longi-
tudinal slot IS, which has broadened ex- 85
tremities 19 to admit of the free movement
of the arm about the pin 20, which passes
through the end of the elbow and its sleeve
and through the said apertures. In order
to obtain a free movement of the arm it is 90
necessary to have the apertures in the under
part of its bushing, somewhat larger than the
pin which forms the pivotal support.
As it is necessary for the sound box to
swmg over but one side of the turntable, the 95
lower end of the elbow 9, supporting the
sound box arm, has been diverted from the
line of the upper end of the elbow, and is ex-
tended in a line to one side of the center of
the turntable, while the upper end of the el- 100
bow is radial with respect to the table, thus
bringing the reproducing horn in a symmet-
rical position with respect to the machine,
and at the same time bringing the lower end
of the elbow to one side thereof, and per- 105
mitting the requisite extent of lateral move-
2
903,375
ment of the swinging taper arm consistent
with a close joint between said arm and el-
bow.
In the modification of this invention
5 shown in Figs. 9 and 10, we have formed the
joint between the arm and the elbow by
means of a spherical head 21, similar to that
already described, fitting tightly within the
end of the taper arm, and provided with dia-
10 metrically opposite longitudinal slots 22, as
before, but supported upon horizontal pins
or pivots 23 loosely within a ring 24, which
has spherical inner and outer surfaces and is
supported upon a vertical pin or pivot 25,
15 extending through the elbow and ring and
passing loosely through the slots of the
inner bushing which supports the taper arm.
This arrangement permits the arm to be
swung horizontally upon the vertical pivot
20 25, carrying the ring with it, and at the
same time it may be swung vertically upon
its horizontal pivots within the ring. Fig. 9
also shows one method of attaching the
lower end of the horn to the upper end of the
25 elbow, by means of the screw threads 26, the
lower end of the horn being accordingly
screw threaded.
The taper arm may be made with or with-
out a longitudinal seam, and the elbow 9 and
30 the elbow 10 may be made in a single integral
casting or in separate parts, as preferred, and
other changes in the details of the construc-
tion may be made without departing from
the spirit of this invention or the scope of its
35 claims.
Having thus fully described our invention,
what we claim and desire to protect by Let-
ters Patent of the United States is:
1. In a talking machine, the combination
40 with a sound box, of an arm supporting the
same, an elbow supporting said arm and an
amplifying horn carried by said elbow, one
arm, of said elbow being vertically out of
alinement with the other arm thereof.
45 2. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of an arm supporting the
same, the outer end of said arm being pro-
vided with oppositely disposed apertures,
and a tubular elbow supporting said arm
50 having a pin passing through said apertures,
one arm of said elbow being vertically out of
alinement with the other arm thereof.
3. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box of an arm supporting the
55 same, the outer end of said arm being pro-
vided with oppositely disposed apertures,
and a tubular elbow supporting said arm
having a pin passing through said apertures,
one of said apertures being longer than the
60 other, one arm of said elbow being vertically
out of alinement with the other arm thereof.
4. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box of an arm supporting the
same, the outer end of said arm being pro-
65 vided with oppositely disposed apertures,
and a tubular support for said arm having a
pin passing through said apertures, one of
said apertures being longer than the other
and being provided with enlarged ends.
5. In a talking machine, the combination 70
with a sound box of an arm supporting said
sound box, and provided with a spherical
head having oppositely disposed apertures,
one of said apertures being longer than the
other and having enlarged ends, and a sup- 75
port for said head comprising an elbow and a
cylindrical bushing fitting tightly therein and
having a pin secured thereto extending
through said apertures in said head.
6. In a talking machine, the combination 80
with a sound box of an arm supporting said
sound box, and provided with a spherical
head having oppositely disposed apertures,
one of said apertures being longer than the
other, and a support for said head compris- 85
ing a tubular connection, a bushing fitting
tightly within one end of said connection,
and a pin passing through said connection
and bushing and through the said apertures
in the head. 90
7. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of an arm supporting tin-
same, the outer end of said arm being pro-
vided with oppositely disposed aperture
and a tubular support for said arm having a 95
pin passing through said apertures, one of
said apertures being vertically above and
longer than the other, and having an en-
larged end.
8. In a talking machine, the combination too
with a sound box, of an arm supporting said
sound box, and provided with a spherical
head having oppositely disposed aperture
one of said apertures being longer than the
other, said head having a shoulder resting 105
against the edge of said arm, said shoulder
being rounded inwardly to meet the spher-
ical portion of the head, a cylindrical support
for said head surrounding the same, the inner
edge of said support being rounded to corre- HO
spond to the curved surface of said shoulder,
and a pin through said cylindrical support
and said apertures in said head to retain the
head in position.
9. In a talking machine, the combination 115
with a sound box, of an arm supporting said
sound box, and provided with a spherical
head having oppositely disposed apertures,
one of said apertures being vertically above
and longer than the other, said head having a 120
shoulder resting against the edge of said arm,
said shoulder being rounded inwardly to
meet the spherical portion of the head, a cy-
lindrical support for said head surrounding
the same, the inner edge of said support be- 125
ing rounded to correspond to the curved sur-
face of said shoulder, and a pin through said
cylindrical support and said apertures in
said head to retain the head in position.
10. In a talking machine a swinging sound 130
903,375
3
arm, and a mounting therefor comprising a
head, means pivoted to the under side of
said head for swinging said arm laterally or
vertically, means upon the upper side of said
5 head for limiting the vertical motion of said
arm, said arm being mounted to swing
through a limited arc on an axis extending
longitudinally of said arm through its point
of support only when said arm is at one ex-
10 tremity of its vertical movement.
11. In a talking machine, the combination
with an elbow of a sound conducting arm
communicating with one arm of said elbow
and a sound amplifier communicating with
1 5 the other arm of said elbow, one arm of said
elbow being vertically out of alinement with
the other arm thereof.
12. In a talking machine the combination
with a record turn-table of an elbow, a sound
20 box arm supported by one arm of said elbow
and limited to swing upon one side of the
center of said table and a straight sound am-
plifier rigidly supported by the other arm of
said elbow, substantially in perpendicular
■2 :• alinement with a diameter of said table.
13. In a talking machine the combination
with a turn-table of an acute tubular elbow,
a swinging sound arm supported by one arm
of said elbow, and a straight amplifier sup-
3< ported by the other arm of said elbow, the
arms of said elbow being perpendicularly out
of alinement with respect to the plane of said
turn-table.
14. In a talking machine, the combination
3f with a turn-table of a fixed tubular elbow
having one arm arranged with its axis sub-
stantially in an axial plane of said turn-table
and having its other arm oblique to said
plane, of a sound amplifier communicating
-I with said first mentioned arm, and a swinging-
sound conveying arm supported by said
oblique arm.
15. In a talking machine the combination
with a swinging tubular member, of a mem-
4f ber supporting the same, one of said mem-
bers being provided with an elongated aper-
ture having an enlarged portion and the
other of said members being provided with a
pin engaging in said aperture.
50 16. In a talking machine the combination
with a tubular arm provided with a head, of a
support for said head comprising a tubular
member, a bushing fitting therein, and a pin
Eassing through said tubular member, said
ushing and said arm.
17. In a talking machine the combination
with a tubular arm provided with a spherical
head, having an inwardly curved neck, of a
support for said head surrounding the same.
18. In a talking machine the combination
. with a tubular arm provided with a spherical
head, having an inwardly curved neck, of a
support for said head surrounding the same,
said support having its inner edge rounded to
65 conform to the curved surface of said neck.
19. In a talking machine, the combination
with a tubular arm of a spherical head having
a shoulder resting against the edge of said
arm, said shoulder being rounded inwardly to
meet the spherical portion of said head, and a 70
support for said head surrounding the same.
20. In a talking machine, the combination
with a tubular arm of a spherical head having
a shoulder resting against the edge of said
arm, said shoulder being rounded inwardly to 7 5
meet the spherical portion of said head, and a
support for said head surrounding the same,
the inner edge of said support being rounded
to correspond to the curved surface of said
shoulder. 80
21. In a talking machine the combination
of a hollow arm provided with oppositely
disposed apertures, one of said apertures be-
ing elongated and provided with an enlarged
portion, a pin passing through said aper- 85
tures, and a support for said pin.
22. In a talking machine, the combination
of two members, one of said members being
pivoted upon one side to the other member,
and being provided upon its opposite side 90
with an elongated opening having an en-
larged end, and the other of said members
being provided with a projection extending
into said openmg.
23. In a talking machine the combination 95
with an arm mounted to swing laterally or
vertically, of means for limiting the vertical
movement of said arm, said arm being mount-
ed to swing through a limited arc about an
axis extending longitudinally of said arm 100
only when said arm is at one end of its verti-
cal movement.
24. In a talking machine, the combination
of two members, one of said members being
rotatably connected upon one side to the 105
other member, and being provided upon its
opposite side with an elongated opening hav-
ing an enlarged end, and the other of said
members being provided with a projection
extending into said opening. 110
25. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of a tubular swinging arm
supporting said box, and provided with a
head, a support for said head comprising a
tubular member, a bushing fitting therein, 115
and a pin passing through said tubular mem-
ber, said bushing and said arxn.
26. In a talking machine, the combination
with a swinging tubular arm, of a sound box
supported by one end thereof and a spherical 120
head upon the other end of said arm having
an inwardly curved neck, and a support for
said head surrounding the same.
In witness whereof we have hereunto set.
our hands this 7th day of June 1907.
ANDREW HAUG.
BELFOUD G. ROYAL.
Witnesses :
Anna Lipshitz,
II. L. DE RlCHEMOND.
903,575.
C. C. JADWIN.
HOEN FOE REPRODUCING NATURAL TONES.
APPLICATION FILED JUNE 20, 1908
Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
<\«
4'
V
^Witnesses
&7\
b, (£s £^L=scE^y*-
Swvcvvtot
)
€lttottt*y (
THE NORMS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
No. 903,575.
CORNELIUS C. JADWIN, OF HONESDALE, PENNSYLVANIA.
HORN FOR REPRODUCING NATURAL TONES.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 10, 1908.
Application filed June 20, 1908. Serial No. 439,574.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Cornelius C. Jadwin,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Honesdale, in the county of Wayne and
5 State of Pennsylvania, have invented a cer-
tain new and useful Horn for Reproducing
Natural Tones, of which the following is a
specification, reference being had therein to
the accompanying drawing.
10 This invention relates to horns for repro-
ducing natural tones the main object of the
invention being to provide an article of the
class described which is applicable to any of
the sound reproducing machines now in com-
15 mon use and adapted to be hinged to the
cabinets containing the instrument to enable
the records to be removed and replaced on
the instrument and the necessary adjust-
ments to be effected.
20 A further object of the invention is to
provide a horn which embodies a pluralitj7
of sound passages combined with a common
throat, and means for varying the volume
of sound waves transmitted to the respective
25 passages to vary the tones finally produced
by the horn.
With the above and other objects in view,
the nature of which will more fully appear
as the description proceeds, the invention
30 consists in the novel construction, combina-
tion and arrangement of parts as herein
fully described, illustrated and claimed.
In the accompanying drawings : — Figure 1
is a vertical sectional view of a sound repro-
35 ducing cabinet, showing a machine mounted
therein and illustrating the improved horn
also shown in longitudinal section. Fig. 2
is a front elevation of the cabinet section
containing the horn. Fig. 3 is a reduced
40 vertical section showing the horn applied to
another type of instrument.
Referring to the drawings, 1 designates
the main body or section of a cabinet in the
upper portion of which is mounted a sound
45 reproducing instrument 2, the instrument
illustrated in Fig. 1 being of the type known
as a graphophone and embodying an arm
supporting bracket 3 a reproducer 4 and a
sound-transmitting conduit 5 leading off
50 from the reproducer.
In order to carry out the present in-
vention, the conduit 5 is supported by the
bracket 3 or an extension 6 thereof and is
provided with an upturned portion 7 having
55 a circumferential flange 8, the purpose of
which will appear.
Mounted on the main section 1 of the cabi-
net is a superimposed section 9 the same
being hinged at 10 to the main section so
that it may be thrown back to give access to 60
the instrument contained in the main section
in order to permit the records to be changed
and the other necessary adjustments to be
effected. The cabinet section 9 is closed on
all sides except at the front which is par- 65
tially closed as shown at 11, the opening 12
in the front being commensurate hi size with
the mouth of the horn, illustrated at 13. The
section 9 comprises in addition to a top wall,
a bottom wall 11 which is provided with an 70
opening 15 which receives the lower end of
the down-turned throat 1G of the horn. This
throat extends substantially in a vertical
plane while the main body of the horn ex-
tends in a substantially horizontal plane as 75
clearly shown in Fig. 1 and in order to effect
a tight joint between the throat 16 and the
upstanding portion 7 of the conduit 5, a
gasket or packing washer 17 of some soft
flexible material such as felt, leather or rub- 80
ber is interposed between the flange 8 and
the bottom 14 of the superimposed cabinet
section, the part 17 being preferably secured
to and carried by the cabinet section 9.
The horn embodies a plurality of sound 85
passages, 18 designating the main passage
and 19 an auxiliary passage which follows
the general direction of the main passage as
shown in Fig. 1 but is of relatively smaller
capacity, being divided off from the main 90
passage by an intervening wall or partition
20 which also divides the throat 16 into a
corresponding number of passages.
21 designates a divider or pallet which is
jointed at its upper end as shown at 22 to 95
the corresponding extremity of the wall or
partition 20 as clearly shown in Fig. 1,
adapting the lower free end of said divider
to be moved back and forth across the throat
16, this being accomplished by means of a 100
suitable handle which is shown as embody-
ing a stem or rod 23 jointed to the divider
at 24 and preferably having a knob or button
25, the construction described enabling the
divider or pallet to be moved or adjusted 1°5
for the purpose of varying the relative vol-
ume of sound passing to the respective pas-
sages 18 and 19.
26 designates an opening or port leading
from the discharge end of the auxiliary pas- 110
sage 19 into the main passage 18 for again
commingling the sound waves previously
903,575
separated by the divider or pallet 21. The
opening 26 is controlled as to size by means
of a damper 27 having a suitable operating
knob or projection 28 and mounted to slide
5 in suitable guides 29 whereby it may be
manually moved across the opening 26 to
vary the size of the opening to suit the na-
ture or character of the sounds coming from
the reproducing instrument.
10 Where the invention is to be used in con-
nection with an Edison phonograph as
shown in Fig. 3, the traveling reproducer 4'
may have the flexible sound conduit 5' con-
nected at one end to a nozzle 30 supported
15 by a bracket 31 connected to one wall of the
main cabinet section 1 as .shown in Fig. 3,
which nozzle will be provided with a flange
8' forming a seat for the gasket or packing
washer 17 above described.
20 32 designates a stop or rest for supporting
the hinged section of the cabinet when
thrown back to give access to the instru-
ment.
By means of the construction above de-
25 scribed, the volume of sound transmitted
through the horn is divided or split up after
the manner of the ordinary human head,
the part 16 corresponding with the throat,
the part 21 representing the pallet, the pas-
30 sage 18 corresponding with the mouth and
the auxiliary passage 19 corresponding with
the nasal passage. As a result the tones are
nicely blended and the disagreeable scratch-
ing noise so common to instruments of this
35 kind is to a very large extent overcome,
while metallic sounds are entirely overcome.
The horn may be used in connection with
the inclosing cabinet section, without the
main lower section, or said horn may be
40 used independently of both cabinet sections.
I claim: —
1. A horn for the purpose specified com-
prising a throat, main and auxiliary sound
passages leading therefrom, and means for
varying the relative capacities of said pas- 45
sages.
2. A horn for the purpose specified com-
prising main and auxiliary passages, a
throat common to both passages, and means
for varying the relative area of communi- 50
cation between said passages and throat.
3. A horn for the purpose specified com-
prising main and auxiliary passages, a
throat common to both passages, and a mov-
able divider for regulating the volume of 55
sound Avaves delivered to the respective pas-
sages.
4. A horn for the purpose specified com-
prising main and auxiliary passages, a
throat common to both passages, a divider 60
for regulating the volume of sound waves
delivered to the respective passages, and
means for adjusting said divider.
5. A horn for the purpose specified com-
prising main and auxiliary passages, a G5
throat common to both passages, an adjust-
able divider for regulating the volume of
sound waves delivered to the respective pas-
sages, and a damper controlling the com-
munication between said passages where 70
they reunite.
6. A horn for the purpose specified com-
prising a cabinet section, a throat, main and
auxiliary sound passages leading from said
throat, means for varying the relative area 75
of communication between said passages and
throat, and means on the horn for effecting
a closed joint between said throat and the
sound-transmitting conduit of a reproducing
instrument, 80
In testimony whereof I affix my signature
in presence of tAvo witnesses.
CORNELIUS C. JADWIN.
Witnesses :
Geo. P. Ross,
Eael Sheravood.
I
904,110.
W. W. YOUNG.
DIAPHRAGM FOR TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED JAN. 16, 1907.
Patented Nov. 17, 1908.
Fig-2.
flo.L
Y ' — -1wp£u5*»i ' 335SZ;
s-^1 ^
fio.3.
Fjg-5-
WITNESSES
INVENTOR
ATTORNEYS
THr. Haunts unu Co.. WAtHifaTon. a. c.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
No. 904,110.
WILLIAM W. YOUNG, OF SPRINGFIELD, MASSACHUSETTS.
DIAPHRAGM FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 17, 1908.
Application filed January 16, 1907. Serial No. 352,527.
I
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William W. Yqung,
a citizen of the United States of America,
residing at Springfield, in the county of
5 Hampden and State of Massachusetts, nave
invented a new and useful Diaphragm for
Talking-Machines, of which the following is
a specification.
My invention relates to improvements in
10 sound reproducing and modifying devices
designed to be employed with phonographs
and other so-called talking-machines, and
consists essentially of a disk of compara-
tively thick fabric and means to support the
15 same in the horn or other sound conduit of
;i machine, together with such other features
as it may be deemed expedient to associate
therewith, all as hereinafter set forth. For
this purpose a felt disk has been found to
20 give as good if not better results than disks
of other materials, such disk being supported
in a flanged ring or collar with a wire-gauze
disk on one or both sides. The wire-gauze
disk or disks not only serve to support the
25 'fabric disk in the collar, but also advan-
tageously modify the tone to some consider-
able extent, as well as the last - mentioned
( disk. Other disks, preferably of stiff gauze
fabric as horsehair, may be added, , if cle-
30 sired, with the same end in view.
The object of my invention is to provide,
in a convenient form for use in connection
\ with talking-machines, a diaphragm which
will soften and mellow the sounds produced
35 by such machines. This device breaks up
<- the sound waves which pass through it, takes
out the metallic ring and the rumbling and
rasping sound often present, and transforms
' the vibrations into clear and distinct tones.
40 I attain this object by the means illustrated
in the accompanying drawings, in which —
Figure 1 is a cross-section of the dia-
phragm, showing the same supported in the
horn of a talking-machine; Fig. 2, a side
45 view of said diaphragm; Fig. 3, an edge
view of the diaphragm as it appears in the
goose-neck of a machine ; Fig. 4, a cross-sec-
tion of a slightly modified form of the de-
vice, and, Fig. 5, a side view of the latter.
50 Similar figures refer to similar parts
throughout the several views.
The device shown in the drawings is made
up of a thick fabric or felt disk 1, a gauze
fabric or horsehair disk 2, two outer wire-
55 gauze disks 3, and a ring or collar 4 provided
with inturned flanges 5 — 5 on both sides and
capable of holding the several disks com-
pactly together and thus making a neat and
convenient diaphragmal member out of the
different parts when considered as a whole. 60
The aforesaid disks may be perforated and
fastened together with an eyelet 6, as shown
in the last two views. The flanged collar 4
and the wire-gauze disks 3 really constitute
a casing or case for the other disks if both 6-5
be used, or for the disk 1 when that is used
alone. The disks 3 have the required amount
of strength or firmness to form the sides of
the case, and at the same time they not only
permit the sound waves to pass through 70
them, but improve the tone of the same.
As already stated the disk 2 may be
omitted, but when used this disk like the
others serves to mellow and improve the tone
of the instrument with which the diaphragm 75
is connected. It is immaterial upon which
side of the diaphragm the disk 2 is placed;
furthermore, such disks may be employed on
both sides if desired. The disk 1 is the most
important one since it is that which pro- 80
duces the greatest effect on sound and will
improve it to a very great extent in the ab-
sence of other mediums for a like purpose.
When the eyelet 6 is employed some of the
volume of sound emanating from the ma-
chine is enabled to pass through the dia-
phragm without being modified to the same
extent as that which passes through the sur-
rounding parts of said diaphragm, or in any
event the modification is different in kind 5
and degree, and the resulting tone is in
many cases as desirable as the tone produced
by the diaphragm which has no eyelet there-
in. The eyelet brings about different re- '
suits, too, for the reason that it binds the 95
several disks together within the field of
their actual operation, that is, inside of the
flanges 5, and so changes their rate of vibra-
tion and the rate of vibration of the volume
of sound passing through the diaphragm. 100
This eyelet may be placed in the center of
the diaphragm, as shown, or at one side of
the center, and more than one may be pro-
vided in a single diaphragm. The eyelet
might be used with a diaphragm made up 105
of fewer parts than are shown; then again
the eyelet might be omitted from the open-
ing which is adapted to receive it and the
disk or disks having such opening therein
employed without it. HO
The diaphragm is placed in any conven-
ient and suitable manner in the horn, the
85
Q
904,110
goose-neck, or other tubular part of a talk-
ing-machine. A portion of a horn is rep-
resented at 7, in Fig. 1, with the diaphragm
supported therein by means of a holder 8
5 provided with a collar 9 to which the collar
4 is pivoted at 10 — 10. This arrangement
enables the diaphragm to be opened by turn-
ing it on the pins 10, for the purpose of in-
creasing the volume of tone.
10 The means of supporting the diaphragm
in this case is not herein claimed for the rea-
son that it forms the subject matter of an
application for United States Letters Patent
filed by me January 9th, 1907, and serially
15 numbered 351,419.
In Fig. 3 a goose-neck 11 appears with
the diaphragm located therein at the upper
end of the elbow.
The omission of one of the wire - gauze
20 disks 3 would not render the device inopera-
tive or unserviceable, and the same is true
of the omission of both of such disks, never-
theless, the presence of both of these disks is
greatly to be preferred for the reason that
25 the value of the diaphragm is then very
much enhanced on account of the better re-
sults obtained therewith, and also from a
commercial standpoint owing to the in-
• creased durability and improved appearance.
30 What I claim as my invention, and desire
to secure by Letters Patent, is —
1. As a new article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm, comprising a fabric disk of substan-
tial thickness, and a confining collar pro-
35 vided with inturned flanges on both sides for
the edges of such disk, such collar with its
disk being adapted to be inserted in and re-
moved from a tubular part of a sound-pro-
ducing or -reproducing instrument or ma-
40 chine.
2. As a new article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm, for talking-machines, comprising a
fabric disk, a gauze disk, and a confining
collar provided with inturned flanges on
45 both sides for the edges of such disks, said
collar and gauze disk forming a case for the
fabric disk.
3. As a new article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm, comprising a perforated fabric disk
50 of substantial thickness, and a confining col-
lar provided with inturned flanges on both
sides for the edges of such disk, said collar
and its disk being adapted to be inserted in
and removed from a tubular part of a sound-
producing or -reproducing instrument or 55
machine.
4. As a new article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm, for talking machines, comprising a
fabric disk, a gauze disk, and a confining
collar provided with inturned flanges on 60
both sides for the edges of such disks, said
disks having alining openings therethrough,
and said collar and gauze disk forming a
case for the fabric disk.
5. As a new article of manufacture, a dia- 65
phragm, comprising a perforated fabric disk
of substantial thickness, an eyelet in the per-
foration in such disk, and a confining collar
for the edges of the disk, said collar with its
disk being adapted to be inserted in and re- 70
moved from a tubular part of a sound-pro-
ducing or -reproducing instrument or ma-
chine.
6. As a new article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm for talking-machines, comprising a 75
fabric disk, a gauze disk, said disks having
alining openings therethrough, an eyelet in
such openings, and a confining collar for the
edges of the disks, said collar and gauze disk
forming a case for the fabric disk. 80
7. The combination, in a diaphragm for
talking-machines, of a case consisting of a
flanged collar and gauze disk sides and a
fabric disk within such case.
.8. As a new article of manufacture, a dia- 85
phragm, for talking-machines, comprising a
fabric disk, gauze disks both sides of said
fabric disk, all of the disks having alining
openings therethrough, and a flanged collar
adapted to receive the disks and to confine 90
them at the edges, said collar and gauze
disks forming a case for the fabric disk.
9. As a new article of manufacture, a dia-
phragm, for talking-machines, comprising a
fabric disk, gauze disks both side^ of said 95
fabric disk, all of the disks having alining
openings therethrough, an eyelet in such
openings, and a flanged collar adapted to re-
ceive the disks and to confine them at the
edges, said collar and gauze disks forming a 100
case for the fabric disk.
WILLIAM W. YOUNG.
Witnesses :
P. H. Martin,
F. A. Cutter.
904,187.
J. EIFEL.
AUTOMATIC CUT-OFF FOR SOUND REPRODUCING MACHINES.
APPLICATION PILED APE. 1, 1907.
Patented Nov. 17, 1908.
4 SHEETS— SHEET 1.
&^3&-
Zb&frz&ss&s :
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. ■
J. EIFEL.
AUTOMATIC CUT-OFF FOB SOUND BEFBODUCING MACHINES.
_. . ,_.. APPLICATION FILED APR. 1, 1907.
904, 1 87 . Patented Nov. 17, 1 908.
4 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
^9^-
/J S3
33 31
33 32
,Hf H0HR1* /^TIRS CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.
J. EIFEL.
AUTOMATIC CUT-OFF FOB SOUND BEPBODUCING MACHINES.
,_. APPLICATION FILED APE. 1, 1907.
904, 1 87 . Patented Nov. 17, 1908.
4 SHEETS-SHEET 3.
J&.7.
THE NORBIS PETMHS CO., WASHINGTON, 0. C.
J. EIFEL.
AUTOMATIC CUT-OFF FOB SOUND BEPBODUCING MACHINES.
^m ^„ APPLICATION FILED APB. 1, 1907.
904,187. Patented Nov. 17, 1908.
4 8HEET8-8HEET 4.
<^ <o. VoximaA/
Q*u ^^tt**.
THE NORMS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOSEPH EIFEL, OF CHICAGO, ILLINOIS.
AUTOMATIC CUT-OFF FOR SOUND-REPRODUCING MACHINES.
No. 904,187.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 1, 1907. Serial No. 365,682.
Patented Nov. 17, 1908.
To all whom it may concern :
Be it known that I, Joseph Eifel, a citizen
of the United States, residing at Chicago, in
the county of Cook and State of Illinois,
5 have invented certain new and useful Im-
provements in Automatic Cut-Offs for
Sound-Reproducing Machines, of which the
following is a specification.
My invention relates to sound reproducing
10 instruments wherein sounds are reproduced
through the medium of a reproducer actu-
ated by a record in motion, and more par-
ticularly to the mechanism employed to con-
trol the starting and stopping of the record,
15 and its objects are; to provide a cheap, safe,
and accurate means for automatically stop-
ping the mechanism at the end of the record,
or at any predetermined point when the com-
plete record is not used; to provide means
20 for actuating the cut-off mechanism which
may be located at any desired point upon the
record itself, or upon the mandrel carrying
the record, and to generally improve the
efficiency and reduce the cost of automatic
25 cut-off devices for sound reproducing ma-
chines. While my device is adaptable to all
forms of sound reproducing machines in
which a moving record is employed to actu-
ate the reproducer, it is particularly well
30 adapted for use in connection with music
boxes or phonographs employing a disk or
cylindrical record, and in order to more
clearly illustrate the above objects and other
advantages which will hereinafter appear,
35 I have shown it in connection with both
types of machines, in the accompanjdng
drawings, wherein —
Figure 1, is a plan view, with parts broken
away, of a disk phonograph having my im-
40 provements applied thereto;
Figure 2 is a vertical section on the line
II — II of Figure 1, through the disk and
mandrel carrying the same, with the repro-
ducer in position thereon, in elevation;
45 Figure 3 is a sectional detail of a portion
of a disk record, showing one form of means
employed to operate the cut-off mechanism ;
Figure 4 is a vertical section on the line
IV — IV of Figure 1, showing one form of
50 stopping mechanism, consisting of a brake
shoe and disk, together with the mechani-m
for operating the same when }t is desired to
start the machine ;
Figure 5 is a similar section on the line
55 V — V of Figure 1, showing the mechanism
employed to automatically operate the cut-
off when the machine is to be stopped ;
Figure G is a section on the line VI — VI
of Figure 1, showing the catch employed to
hold the stopping mechanism open when the 60
machine is in operation ;
Figure 7 is a front elevation of a cylin-
drical machine adapted to cut-off at two
points, with a portion of the reproducer
broken away to show the roller and its lever 65
which serve to operate the cut-off mechanism ;
Figure 8 is a detail perspective view of one
end of a c}dindrical record adapted to oper-
ate the cut-off mechanism together with the
system of levers constituting the latter; 70
Figure 9 is a plan view of the cut-off
mechanism ;
Figure 10 is an end view partly in section,
showing the parts in their running or open
position; 75
Figure 11 is a side elevation of one end of
a record and mandrel, together with the stop
or projection carried upon the end of the
mandrel, and
Figures 12 and 13 are an end and plan 80
view respectively of the mechanism illus-
trated in Figure 1.
The means emploj^ed to actuate the cut-
off mechanism is practically the same in both
types of machines, and consists broadly of a 85
series of levers actuated by a projection 14
located at any desired point upon the record
orjnandrel carrying the same. The cut-off
mechanism itself may be of the type com-
monly employed in such machines, which 90
consists of a brake lever 15 adapted to be
thrown into contact with a brake disk 16 by
means of a spring 17, when it is desired to
stop the machine, as shown in the drawings,
or any other suitable stopping mechanism 95
may be employed. The speed at Avhich the
record is rotated is controlled by a centrif-
ugal governor 18 of the usual type, as is
also the driving means, and the same do not
form part of the present invention which re- 100
lates particularly to the mechanism employed
to control the above described cut-off mech-
anism. This controlling mechanism is de-
signed to be easily attached to any of the
sound reproducing machines now on the 105
market, by making a few minor changes in
the parts used to start and stop such ma-
chines.
In the construction shown in Figures 1 to
6 inclusive, which illustrates the application HO
2
904,187
of ray device to a disk machine, the spring
IT acts upon a rod 1!) in such a manner as
to thrust its inner end against the brake
lever 15 when it is desired to stop the ma-
5 chine. The rod 19 is slidably mounted in
bearings 20 attached to the underside of the
lid of the box, and is provided upon its outer
end with a knob or handle by means of which
it can be withdrawn from contact with the
10 lever 15 when it is desired to start the ma-
chine. The spring 17 surrounds and is at-
tached at one end to the rod 19, and as its
opposite end abuts • against the outer bear-
ing 20, the spring will always be under
15 compression when {he rod is withdrawn and
the machine running, and will act to nor-
mally hold the parts in their locked position.
When the rod 19 is withdrawn it is auto-
matically locked in its release position, and
20 the machine is free to run until a prede-
termined point upon the record has been
reached, when the rod 19 is released and
forced inward against the brake lever 15 by
the expansion of the spring 17, and the ma-
25 chine stopped.
In order to provide for such locking and
releasing of the rod 19. a lever 21 is pivoted
at 22 to the underside of the lid of the box,
and has its short arm, which is bifurcated.
30 connected to the rod by means of a slot and
pin connection 23, as shown in Figures 1 and
5. The opposite long end of the lever 21 is
provided Avith a pin 24 projecting through a
slot formed in the lid of the box as in Figure
35 6, and to the upper end of this pin is se-
cured a flat bar 25 arranged at right angles
to the lever 21 and slidably mounted in a
bearing 26 secured to the upper side of the
lid of the box. The flat bar 25 is provided
40 upon its underside with a projection 27
which engages a lever 28 pivoted at one end.
29, to the lid of the box, in such a manner as
to prevent the lever 21 being swung around
its pivot point 22. until the lever 28 is de-
45 pressed. The lever 28 is normally held in its
raised position by means of a flat spring 30
interposed between it and the lid of the box,
and is depressed to release the lever 21 and
allow the spring 17 to apply the brake
50 through the medium of an approximately
U-shaped lever 31 in a manner to be pres-
ently described. The lever 31 is pivoted at
the forward end of its horizontal portion by
means of a screw 32, to the reproducer arm
55 33, and its forward end beyond said pivot
point depends and is proAdded upon its
lower end with a roller 34 held in close prox-
imity to the record, in the path of the pro-
jection 14 in a manner to be presently de-
60 scribed. A spring 35 is attached to the un-
derside of the arm 31, and bears against a
pin 30 in the arm 33 in a manner to nor-
mally hold the roller 34 adjacent the record,
and the opposite depending portion 37 of
65 the arm 31 free of the lever 28. In order
that the spring 35 may not cause the roller
34 to bear upon the record. I provide an ad-
justing screw 38 upon the arm 33, in line
with the pin 30 to bear against the upper
edge of the lever 31, when the machine is 70
running.
The operation of the device is as follows :
The rod 19 is pulled out, releasing the brake
lever 15 and allowing the machine to start.
Such movement of the rod 19 also compresses 75
the spring 17 and shifts the lever 21, which
is then locked in position by means of the
lever 28 and projection 27 on the rod 25, as
shown in Fig. 0. At the same time the roller
34 is adjacent to the record, and being con- 80
nected to the reproducer arm, follows the
course of the sound groove until it comes into
contact with the projection 14, which causes
the forward end of the lever 31 to rise
against the spring 35 thereby depressing the 85
rear end 37 of the lever 31, which in turn de-
presses the lever 28 and releases the bar 25,
thus allowing the spring 17 to shift the rod
19 into engagement with the brake lever 15.
when the brakes are set and the machine 90
brought to a standstill. From the foregoing-
it will be seen that the machine may be
stopped at any point at which the projection
may be located, or by varying the number of
projections it can be started and stopped as 95
often as desiced, and in the case of a machine
using a cylindrical record, as illustrated in
Figure 7, the final stop may, if desired, be lo-
cated upon the mandrel carrying the record,
instead of on the record itself, in order that 100
the sound groove may extend to the extreme
end of the record. While I prefer to make
the projection on the record, of the form
shown in Figures 3 and 8, wherein the same
is highest at the center and inclines towards 105
each end, any preferred form of projection
may be used, and the projection may be made
a part of the record itself, or in the form of
a plug set in the record, as desired.
In Figures 7 to 13 inclusive. I have shown 110
my device as applied to a phonograph of the
ordinary commercial cylindrical type, and in
this instance the brake lever 15 is directly
connected to the spring 17 at its lower end in
the usual manner, and has its upper end ex- 115
tending through a slot in the lid of the box in
order to form a handle for shifting it to
start or stop the machine. By reference to
Figure 7 it will be seen that it is not neces-
sary to alter the cut-off mechanism in order 120
to apply my device, as it is secured to the top
of the box and connected to the upper end of
the lever 15 by a pivotal screw 39 of the sim-
plest construction. The lever 31 carrying the
roller 34 is pivoted to the reproducer support 125
at 32 as in the disk machine, but the spring
35 is dispensed with, as the force of gravity
will be sufficient to hold the roller 34 in
proper relation to the record ; the movement
of the lever towards the record being con- 13.)
904,187
3
trolled by means of a set screw 38a in the
level- 31 which bears against the top of the
frame supporting the record during the en-
tire movement of the latter.
5 The lever 15 is automatically locked and
released through the medium of a bar 40
connected thereto at one end by means of the
pivot 39, and having its other end slidably
supported in a bearing 41 secured to the top
10 of the box. The bar 40 is also provided
with a notch 4:2 which engages with the lower
arm of a bell crank lever 44 pivotally mount-
ed upon the top of the box and provided with
a transverse extension 44 upon its upper end,
15 said extension being so disposed with rela-
tion to the record that it will be acted upon
by the lower end of the lever 31 when the
roller 34 comes into contact with the projec-
tion 14 in a manner to disengage the lever 43
20 from the notch 42, thereby allowing the
spring 17 to contact and bring the lower end
of the lever 15 into contact with the disk 16,
whereby the machine is stopped.
As shown in Figures 7, 11, 12, and 13, the
25 projection on the end of the mandrel may
consist of a head 14a pivotally connected to
the upper end of a vertical link 14b which
in turn is pivoted at its lower end to the head
of the mandrel in such a manner that it, to-
30 gether with the head 14a, can be swung
within the circumference of the mandrel
when it is desired to adjust or remove a rec-
ord therefrom. The link 14b is held in an
upright or a horizontal position by means of
35 a spring 14d interposed between it and the
head of the mandrel, and a spring 14c se-
cured to the back of the link acts in a similar
manner to hold the head 14a securely in its
operative position. Other advantages of
40 the device will readily occur to those familiar
with the art.
Having thus described my invention and
illustrated its use, what I claim as new and
desire to secure by Letters Patent, is the fol-
45 lowing :
1. The combination with a sound repro-
ducing machine, of a cut-off therefor com-
prising in combination, a brake, yielding
means for normally holding it in braking
50 position, a catch for holding it in release po-
sition, a pivotally mounted tripping lever
mounted to move with the reproducer and
having one end in position to engage the
catch, and means mounted to move with the
55 rotating record support in position to en-
gage the other end of the tripping lever.
■2. The combination with a sound repro-
ducing machine, of a cut-off therefor com-
prising in combination, a brake, yielding
GO means for normally holding it in braking po-
sition, a catch for holding it in release posi-
tion, a pivotally mounted tripping lever
mounted to move with the reproducer and
having one end in position to engage the
65 catch, and a projecting means mounted to
move with the rotating record support in po-
sition to engage the other end of the tripping
lever.
:'>. The combination with a sound repro-
ducing machine, of a cut-off therefor com- 70
prising in combination, a brake, vTielding
means for normally holding it in braking po-
sition, a catch movable in a substantially ver-
tical plane for holding it in release position,
a tripping lever mounted to move with the 75
reproducer and pivotally supported for os-
cillation in a substantially vertical plane
with one end in position to engage and oper-
ate the catch, and means mounted to move
with the rotating record support in position 80
to engage and raise the other end of the trip-
ping lever so that the catch is disengaged.
4. The combination with a sound repro-
ducing machine having a mandrel for sup-
porting a cylinder record, of a cut-off there- 85
for comprising a brake yieldingly held nor-
mally in engaging position, a catch for hold-
ing the brake in inoperative position, a trip-
ping lever pivoted intermediate its ends to
move with the reproducer, and means 90
mounted to move with the mandrel for en-
gaging the tripping lever, the tripping lever
and the catch being provided with elongated
engaging means whereby the catch is adapt-
ed to be engaged by the tripping lever dur- 95
ing a considerable portion of the movement
of the reproducer.
5. The combination with a sound repro-
ducing machine having a mandrel for sup-
porting a cylinder record, of a cut-off there- 100
for comprising a brake yieldingly held nor-
mally in engaging position, a catch for hold-
ing the brake in inoperative position pro-
vided with an elongated bar extending along
the path of travel of the reproducer, a trip- 105
ping lever pivoted intermediate its ends to
move with the reproducer and having one
end in position to engage the elongated bar,
and means mounted to move with the man-
drel for engaging the other end of the trip- no
ping lever.
6. The combination in a sound reproduc-
ing machine, of a cut-off mechanism and an
operating member therefor movably mounted
upon the mandrel of the machine in such 115
manner that it may project above the face of
the record to operate the cut-off mechanism
or may be withdrawn within the circumfer-
ence of the record to permit its removal from
the mandrel. 120
7. The combination in a sound reproduc-
ing machine, of a cut-off mechanism and an
operating member therefor pivotally mount-
ed upon the end of the mandrel of the ma-
chine and adapted in one position to project 125
above the face of the record for operating the
cut off mechanism and in another position to
lie within the circumference of the mandrel
to permit the removal of the record from the
mandrel. 130
904,187
8. The combination in a sound reproduc-
ing machine, of a cut-oft' mechanism and an
operating member therefor comprising a link
pivoted to the end of the mandrel and having
5 a head which can be swung into position ad-
jacent to and projecting above the face of
the record.
!>. The combination in a sound reproduc-
ing machine, of a cut-oft' mechanism and an
10 operating member therefor comprising a link
pivoted to the end of the mandrel and hav-
ing a head which can be swung into position
adjacent to and projecting above the face of
the record and a spring for holding the link
15 in position.
10. The combination in a sound reproduc-
ing machine, of a cut-oft mechanism and an
operating member therefor comprising a link
l-±b pivoted to the end of the mandrel and
provided with the pivoted head 14a.
11. The combination in a sound reproduc-
ing machine, of a cut-off mechanism and an
operating member therefor comprising a link
14b pivoted to the end of the mandrel and
provided with the pivoted head 14a and
spring means for holding the parts in posi-
tion.
In testimony whereof, I have hereunder
signed my name in the presence of the two
subscribing witnesses.
JOSEPH EIFEL.
Witnesses:
Paxil Carpentek,
Jay II. Brown.
20
25
904,453.
W. S. RODENBERGER.
GBAPHOPHONE ATTACHMENT.
APPLICATION PILED JUHE 28, 1907.
Patented Nov. 17, 1908.
V01/6 VO
3«veitt<w
^Witwcodca
%jU~g»
W infield S. Rodenberger
THE HOttRlS ffTEHS CO. WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WINFIELD S. RODENBERGER, OF LINTON, INDIANA.
GRAPHOPHONE ATTACHMENT.
No. 904,453.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 17, 1908.
Application filed June 28, 1907. Serial No. 381,306.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Win field S. Roden-
beruek, a citizen of the United States of
America, residing at Linton, in the county
5 of Greene and State of Indiana, have in-
vented new and useful Improvements in
Graphophone Attachments, of which the
following is a specification.
This invention relates to graphophone at-
10 tachments, and one of the principal objects
of the same is to provide simple, reliable and
efficient means for feeding needles to the
sound box.
Another object of the invention is to pro-
15 vide a magazine containing needles and to
provide means whereby said needles may be
quickly inserted in the stylus holder of the
sound box, and at the same time drive out
the old needle.
20 In the use of graphophones it becomes
necessary to insert a new needle after one or
two reproductions, and these needles being
small, it is quite difficult to feed them in
place properly by hand.
25 My invention has for its object to provide
means for quickly removing the old needle
and inserting a new one in its place.
These and other objects may be attained
by means of the construction illustrated in
30 the accompanying drawing, in which :
Figure 1 is a front elevation of a grapho-
phone sound box or reproducer having my
attachment connected thereto. Fig. 2 is a
perspective view of the supporting bracket
35 for the needle magazine. Fig. 3 is a side
elevation of my attachment. Fig. 4 is a ver-
tical section on the line 4 — 4 of Fig. 1. Fig.
5 is a sectional view of the stylus holder.
Fig. 6 is a detail rear side elevation of the
40 magazine and the plunger.
Referring to the drawing for a more par-
ticular description of my invention, the nu-
meral 1 designates the sound box or repro-
ducer of a graphophone of ordinary con-
45 struction, and 2 is a bracket secured to the
sound box by means of screws passed through
the openings 3 in said bracket. Supporting
arms 4 extend outward and upward from
said bracket 2. It will be understood, of
50 course, that other means may be utilized for
supporting the magazine upon the sound box
or reproducer, depending upon the shape
and manner of attachment of said repro-
ducer.
55 The magazine 5 may consist of a front
plate 6, a sliding back plate 7 and spacing
' strips 8 through which suitable fasteners 9
are passed to hold the parts in relative posi-
tion. Suitable loops 10 are provided upon
the back of the magazine in proper position 60
to receive the arms 4 on the bracket 2 to sup-
port the magazine in proper' position. A
plunger support 11 is connected to the maga-
zine and a plunger rod 12 passes through a
hole in said support and is provided with 05
an encircling spring 13 which holds the
plunger up in the position shown in Fig. 6.
The plunger 12 is provided with a suitable
head or button 14. The end of the plunger
extends through an opening 15 in the upper 70
edge of the magazine in line with the feed
openings 16 at the lower edge of the maga-
zine. A series of needles 17 are placed in
the magazine and are fed toward the feed
opening 16 by means of a spring 18 connect- 75
ed at one end to a stud 19 while the opposite
end is connected to a block 20 fitted to slide
in the magazine. Connected to the block 20
is a knob 21 by means of which the block 20
may be moved backward whenever it is re- 80
quired to refill the magazine.
The stylus or needle holder 22 is provided
with a detent consisting of a spring 23 and
a pin 24 having a beveled end 25 which will
permit the plunger 12 to move past it or the 85
needle 17 to be driven through the opening
26 to drive out the needle 17a. The pin 24
prevents the upward movement of the needle
17a and said needle is prevented from mov-
ing downwardly by means of a spring 27 90
provided with a stud 28 which passes
through an opening 29 in the needle holder
and bears with sufficient friction against the
needle to prevent it from dropping out.
The springs 23 and 27 are held in place by 95
a pin 30.
The operation of my invention may be
briefly described as follows : Whenever it
is desired to force out the old needle and to
replace it by a new one, the plunger 12 is 100
pushed downward which pushes one of the
needles 17 through the opening 26 against
the needle 17a to push the same out of the
needle holder, while the new needle 17 takes
its place, and is held in the same position 105
as was the needle 17a. After each needle has
been inserted the spring 18 moves the slid-
ing block 20 and the column of needles into
position so that one needle always occupies
a position immediately above the feed open- 110
ing 16, as will be understood.
From the foregoing it will be obvious that
904,453
10
an attachment made in accordance with my
invention is comparatively simple in con-
struction; can be attached to any form of
reproducer without material change in the
form of bracket ; that the needles can be fed
instantly without requiring exact fitting as
would be the case by hand, and that the at-
tachment, as a whole, can be produced at
slight cost.
Having thus described the invention, what
I claim is:
The combination of a graphophone repro-
ducer provided with a bracket having up-
wardly extending supporting arms, a maga-
zine for stylus needles provided with loops
or eyes upon its rear surface to engage said
arms, a guideway in said magazine to sup-
port a column of needles, a block fitted to
slide in the guideway, a spring connected to
said block at one end and to a stud on the 20
magazine at the opposite end, a plunger for
forcing one needle at a time out of the
magazine into the needle holder of the re-
producer, a spring detent having a beveled
end disposed within the throat of the needle 25
holder, and a spring having an inwardly
projecting stud to bear against the needle to
prevent it dropping out until forced home
by the plunger.
In testimony whereof, I affix my signature 30
in presence of two witnesses.
WINFIELD S. ROBENBERGER.
"Witnesses:
J. S. Whitley,
CtJMMINQ BeNjSIE.
A. FISCHER.
SOUND BOX FOB TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 3, 1908.
904,523.
Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
Tig30. ligrll
Tigris J ^\ Hg:13.
^M&6
THE HOX*IS PETCBS CO .. WASHINGTON, C. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ALEX FISCHER, OF KENSINGTON, LONDON, ENGLAND.
SOUND-BOX FOR TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 904,523.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
Application filed February 3, 1908. Serial No. 414,070.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Alex Fischer, a sub-
ject of the King of England, residing at 16
Maelise road, Kensington, in the county of
5 London, England, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in the Construc-
tion of Sound-Boxes for Talking-Machines ;
and I do hereby declare the following to be
a full, clear, and exact description of the
10 invention, such as will enable others skilled
in the art to which it appertains to make and
use the same.
This invention relates to improvements in
the construction of sound boxes for talking
15 machines of the disk type.
Hitherto in nearly all sound boxes the
plate carrying the stylus and stylus bar is
placed on knife edges or points and is
pressed against the same by springs or by
20 some other devices. These springs or other
devices also perform the function of holding
the stylus and the stylus bar in position.
Unless these springs or other devices press
the plate against the knife edges etc., tightly,
25 there is jarring, when the sound box is played
and in consequence the reproduction is
bad. But this pressure also makes the stylus
and the stylus bar rigid and, therefore, they
are not free and sensitive enough to react
30 to fine impulses of the stylus produced by
the turning record. To improve this, I
place the spindle carrying the stylus bar on
two sensitive hinges as hereinafter described
or in the known form of simple hinges or on
35 center points which enter center holes in the
plate, and I form an arm on the spindle
which takes between two spiral or other
springs. By these means the spindle will be
quite free to react to the finest impulses, the
40 springs having no other function than to
hold the stylus and the stylus bar in posi-
tion. The reproduction, therefore, becomes
broad in tone, soft and natural and full of
shading. There are, however, other advan-
45 tages as well in this construction. The ten-
sion of the diaphragm can be regulated to
a nicety by pushing the arm backwards or
forwards as it is maintained in position by
means of the springs. Both springs may be
50 screwed tighter or looser according to the
requirement of the record to be played or the
nature of the diaphragm. And in order that
my said invention may be better understood
I will now proceed to describe the same with
reference to the drawings accompanying this 55
specification, in which : —
Figure 1 shows a front elevation of a
sound box constructed according to my im-
proved invention. Fig. 2 is a side view of
the same, partly in section. Fig> 3 is an 60
edge view thereof. Figs. 4 to 13, inclusive,
show modifications and details hereinafter
referred to.
The same letters and numerals of refer-
ence are employed to denote the same parts 65
in all the views.
a shows the shell of the sound box. On
this shell I mount two brackets b, b.
g shows a spindle passing through the
brackets b, b. To the spindle c is connected 70
(or it may be formed therewith) an arm d,
to which the stylus bar e is fixed. Attached
at right angles to the arm d is another arm
/, recessed at each side.
g, g are two other brackets in which are 75
screwed hollow nuts h.
k, k are two compression springs, one end
of each of which passes into the hollow nuts
A, and the other ends bear against the arm /.
Attached to the under part of the spindle 80
c is a needle holder 4.
The spindle c is formed circular or partly
circular in cross section, and the brackets 5, b
are oppositely beveled so that the bearing
surface on the spindle c is reduced to a mini- 85
mum. The spindle c to which the stylus bar
e and the needle holder 4 are attached is in
this way sensitively hinged to the shell a of
the sound box. The tension of the dia-
phragm can be regulated by the action of the 90
springs k and the hollow nuts A on the arm /.
By screwing the front hollow nut in or the
back out, the stylus bar, which is fixed to the
diaphragm, will pull it (the diaphragm), and
thus increase the tension of same. By 95
screwing the back hollow nut in or the front
one out, the stylus bar will be pushed to-
wards the diaphragm and lessen the tension
on same. Screwing the two nuts equally in,
will not alter the position of the stylus bar, 100
but will only stiffen the springs; while
screwing them both out equally, will make
the springs weaker without affecting the po-
sition of the stylus bar in any way.
The brackets marked b through which the 105
ends of the spindle c pass may be made with
a bevel bearing or may be made of a thin ring
or its equivalent so as to give the spindle c a
3
904,523
minimum amount of bearing surface. The
bracket b would then be formed with a hole
of similar shape to the cross section of the
aforesaid spindle c, namely circular or partly
5 circular and in this form I may have either a
bevel bearing or a thin part ring as aforesaid.
Fig. 7 shows cross section of the end of the
spindle, but it may be made of an entire cir-
cle or any part of a circle.
10 Figs. 8 to 13 show several modified
forms of bracket bearings; Figs. 8 and
9 show cross section and side view of
a thin ring bearing; Figs. 10 and 11
show end elevation and side view of a
15 bevel bearing having a hole which may cor-
respond to the cross section of the end of the
spindle c or it may be made circular or partly
circular. Figs. 12 and 13 show two corre-
sponding views to Figs. 10 and 11 but of a
20 thin plate bearing.
Fig. 5 shows front elevation, partly
in section, of a modified form of sound
box using the compression springs. In
this case the spindle c' has two circular
25 ends which work in a bevel guide bearing b.
The spindle c' has at each end recesses into
which compression springs /<•' fit such com-
pression springs being held in position by
screw nuts h held by brackets g attached to
30 the shell a of the sound box. The rest of
the construction ma}' be the same as that at
Figs. 1 to 3, that is springs k may also be
fitted on either side of the spindle c.
It may here be observed that in place of
35 spiral springs such as those marked k flat
springs may in all cases be fitted if preferred
or found desirable.
In sound boxes so constructed the spindle
carrying the stylus bar and needle holder
40 turns, as shown, on a correspondingly
formed guide bearing in the brackets b,
whereas in all other known constructions of
sound boxes the spindle does not turn but
rocks on knife edges, points or the like, in-
45 eluding the known construction where the
spindle is provided with center holes and
turns again on center points in those center
holes.
I do not wish to limit myself to spiral
50 springs, taking between them the small arm
on the spindle, or to the use of hollow nuts,
as these may be varied without departing
from the principle of my invention. I may
also use one tension adjusting spring on one
55 side of the spindle only, instead of two, or
one on each side, as described. I may also
construct a cheaper form of sound box with-
out diaphragm tension adjustment, where the
spindle will be hinged as described, without
60 the brackets g, g hollow nuts h, and springs
k, k and of course without the arm /. I also
do not wish to limit myself to the precise
forms of the brackets b shown or described as
equivalents may be used without departing
65 from the principle of the invention which
consists in having the end of the spindle cy-
lindrical or partly cylindrical turning on
a suitably formed guide bearing offering the
minimum amount of surface.
Referring to Figs. 1 to 3, r shows the back
plate of the sound box. This back plate is pro-
vided with an annular groove s, into which
a rubber washer t (preferably tubular) is
placed, v. a show two small brackets at-
tached to the back r. v is a flanged tube 75 ]
forming the sound exit tube fixed on to the
back of the sound box by center screws w
screwing through the brackets u and into
two center holes x in the flange of the tube v.
In this position the flange of the ring v go
presses tightly against the hollow rubber
ring t, making a flexible sound tight joint,
which will allow the sound box a small turn
around its vertical axis, the center screws
forming the turning axis. On the tube v I gs
form a boss y into which a spring pin z is
fitted, such spring pin being provided with
a flange 2 to limit its action, so that the
bottom of the pin may enter a hole in the
tone arm or trumpet in order to attach the 90
sound box firmly thereto. 5 is a cap screwed
on the boss y to hold the spring in position.
Fig. 4 shows a simplified form of spring
for the pin. Instead of having the spiral
spring and cap 5 screwed to the boss y, I 95
have a rubber ring 3 passing round the tube
0 and over the head of the pin. At its lower
end the spring pin is so formed that the
sound box can only be turned in one direc-
tion, suitable means being employed to pre- 100
vent the spring pin from turning round its
vertical axis. Two holes (preferably oppo-
site one another) are provided on the small
end of the tone arm, on to which the sound
box is pushed. In these holes the pin % 10 5
springs, which will lock the sound box to
the tone arm in the playing position, and
with a half turn the sound box will be
brought in position for changing the needle
easily. The spring pin at its lower end is no
cut on the slant and will allow the sound box
to be turned round in the direction as indi-
cated hy the arrow (Fig. 4) while a turn in
the opposite direction will be impossible.
By turning the sound box the pin held down 115
by the spiral springs and cap or rubber ring
will be pushed up, or slide up and ride on
the top of the sound arm until the hole is
reached again. An annular shallow groove
may be provided on the tone arm connecting 120
the two holes to form a guide for the pin to
prevent the sound box from slipping off
when not locked in the holes.
I may also use on the back of the sound
box instead of the screws w, the brackets u, 125
and the center holes x on the flanged tube v,
other equivalent devices, say, hinging the
flanged tube by simple hinges so as to allow
a slight turn around its vertical axis.
In other respects the shell a and the back 130
904,523
&
of the sound box are of known type, but I
ni ay in some cases construct them as shown
in detail at Fig. 6, in which figure the back
r of the sound box is formed in two portions,
5 the ring portion 6 of which is fixed to the
shell a of the sound box. There is also a
center portion 7 which is screwed or pushed
into the ring portion 6 and screwed therein
or otherwise suitably fixed at any required
10 distance from the diaphragm. This con-
struction will allow variation of the air
space between the diaphragm and the back
of the sound box. I may also form the shell
part a in two portions, making a separate
l 5 ring portion and a ring 8 screwing into same.
This construction also enables the pressure
of the two rubber gaskets which hold the
diaphragm between them to be varied, by
screwing the ring 8 into the shell portion a.
20 What I claim and desire to secure by Let-
ters Patent of the United States of America
is: —
1. In a talking machine, the combination
of a casing, a diaphragm in said casing, a
23 pair of guide bearings rigid with said casing,
a spindle provided with a circular side
mounted in said guide bearings, a stylus bar
attached to the said spindle and to the said
diaphragm, an arm carried by said spindle, a
zo pair of brackets on said casing^ a pair of
springs, one on each side of said arm, located
between said arm and said brackets, in line
with each other and oppositely located, and
a needle holder attached to said spindle, sub-
stantially as described. 35
\>. In a talking machine, the combination
of a casing; a diaphragm in said casing; a
pair of perforated brackets rigid with said
casing; a spindle provided with a flat and a
circular side mounted in said brackets; a 40
stylus bar attached to said spindle and to
said diaphragm; a pair of springs for con-
trolling said bar; a pair of hollow nuts for
controlling said springs ; and a needle holder
also attached to said spindle, substantially 45
as described.
3. In a talking machine, the combination
of a casing; a diaphragm in said casing; a
pair of oppositely beveled perforated brack-
ets rigid with said casing; a spindle pro- 50
vided with a flat and a circular side mounted
in said brackets; a stylus bar attached to
said spindle and to said diaphragm; a sec-
ond pair of brackets on said casing; a pair
of springs for controlling said bar; a pair 55
of hollow nuts for controlling said springs
mounted on -said second pair of brackets;
and a needle holder also attached to said
spindle, substantially as described.
In testimony whereof, I affix my signature, 60
in presence of two witnesses.
ALEX FISCHER.
Witnesses :
Lily Simmonds,
A. Bourne.
F. L. DYER & F. D. LEWIS.
PHONOGRAPH BEPBODUGEB.
APPLICATION FILES JUKI! 6, 1908.
904,853.
Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
Ma
loesses:
i/ite/iibrs:
<^fc*t-u*-v«e )C.
7 Jl<c^^<i JC. /?^. ^fe^U^
THE NORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
FRANK L. DYER, OF MONTCLAIR, AND FRANK D. LEWIS, OF ELIZABETH, NEW JERSEY,
ASSIGNORS TO NEW JERSEY PATENT COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A COR-
PORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
PHONOGRAPH-REPRODUCER.
No. 904,853.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
Application filed June 6, 1908. Serial No. 437,099.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that we, Fkank L. Dyer, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Montclair, in the county of Essex and State
5 of New Jersey, and Frank D. Lewis, a citi-
zen of the United States, and a resident of
Elizabeth, in the county of Union and State
of New Jersey, have invented certain new
and useful Improvements in Phonograph-
10 Eeproducers, of which the following is a de-
scription.
Our invention relates to phonograph re-
producers and has for its object the produc-
tion of a reproducer having two styluses
15 carried by a single lever, said lever being
pivoted to a support which is carried by a
floating weight and capable of being moved
with respect thereto so as to bring either of
said styluses into and out of operative posi-
20 tion with respect to the record surface, and
said styluses being adapted to operate upon
phonograph records of different pitch; for
example, one stylus may be suitable for op-
erating upon records having one hundred
25 turns or threads per inch and the other
stylus may be suitable for records having
two hundred threads per inch. Indicating
means are also provided for designating
which of the styluses is in operative position.
30 In order that the invention may be more
fully understood, reference is made to the
accompanying drawing, of which
Figure 1 is a side elevation, partly in sec-
tion, of a reproducer constructed in accord-
35 ance with our invention, and Fig. 2 is a bot-
tom plan view of the same.
The reproducer shown comprises a body
1, within which the diaphragm 2 is secured
in the usual manner by the clamping ring 3,
40 and the floating weight 4 is pivoted at 5 to
the block 6 carried by the body 1. The float-
ing weight 4 is formed with a central open-
ing 7 and recess 8, within which is situated
the stylus lever support which may be in the
45 form of a flanged sleeve or bushing 9. The
upper end of said bushing is threaded to re-
ceive the nut 10 which presses a spring
washer or dished plate 11 against the upper
surface of the floating weight, so as to hold
50 the support 9 in frictional engagement with
the said weight. The support 9 is formed
with a pair of depending lugs 12 which re-
ceive the pin 13 upon which the stylus lever
14 is pivoted. Said lever 14 is shaped
somewhat like the letter T and at the ex- 55
tremity of each end of the cross-arm is a
socket in which are secured the styluses 15
and 16, the former being adapted to operate
upon a record having two hundred threads
per inch and the latter upon records having 60
one hundred threads per inch. The oppo-
site end of the lever 14 is connected to the
link 17, the upper end of which is connected
to the eye 18 secured to the center of the
diaphragm 2. 65
There is an index finger or plate 19, which
is provided at one end with a pin 20 engag-
ing an opening in the support 9 and with a
holding screw 21 passing through an open-
ing in the plate 19 and is threaded in the 70
flange of the bushing 9. The plate 19 coop-
erates with indicia 22 applied to the lower
surface of the floating weight 4 to designate
which of the styluses 15 and 16 is in operative
position, and it also limits"the angular move- 75
ment of the bushing 9 by cooperation with
the stop pins 23 which extend downward
from the weight 4.
When the parts are in the position of Fig.
2, the stylus 15 is in operative position with 80
respect to the record surface and the index
finger 19 is opposite the numerals " 200 " in-
dicating that the reproducer is in suitable po-
sition for operating upon records having two
hundred threads per inch. In order to con- 85
vert it into a reproducer suitable for records
having one hundred threads per inch it is
necessary only to move the bushing 9 into its
other extreme position, at which time the
finger 19 will be opposite the numerals 90
"100".
Having now described our invention, what
we claim is :
1. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the body and vibratory means 95
carried thereby, the floating weight, a stylus
lever support movable with respect to said
weight, a stylus lever pivoted to said sup-
port and a pair of reproducer styluses of dif-
ferent diameters carried by said stylus lever, 100
substantially as set forth.
2. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the body and vibratory means,
the floating weight, a stylus lever support
capable of angular adjustment with respect 105
to said weight, a stylus lever pivoted to said
904,853
support and a pair of reproducer styluses of
different diameters carried by said lever, sub-
stantially as set forth.
3. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
5 bination of the body and vibratory means,
the floating weight, a stylus lever support
capable of angular adjustment with respect
to said weight, a stylus lever pivoted to said
support and a pair of reproducer styluses of
10 different diameters carried by said lever, said
styluses being applied to the same end of
said lever, the opposite end of said lever be-
ing connected to said vibratory means, sub-
stantially as set forth.
15 4. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the body and vibratory means
carried thereby, the floating weight, a stylus
lever support movable with respect to said
weight, a stylus lever pivoted to said sup-
20 port, a pair of reproducer styluses of differ-
ent diameters carried b}7 said stylus lever,
and indicating means for designating the op-
erative positions of said styluses, substan-
tially as set forth.
25 5. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the body and vibratory means,
the floating weight, a stylus lever support
capable of angular adjustment with respect
to said weight, a stylus lever pivoted to said
30 support, a pair of reproducer styluses of dif-
ferent diameters carried by said lever, said
styluses being applied to the same end of
said lever and the ^opposite end of said lever
being connected to said vibratory means, and
35 indicating means for designating the opera-
tive positions of said styluses, substantially
as set forth.
6. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the floating weight, the fulcrum
40 pivoted to said weight, and a stylus lever
provided with a plurality of styluses and
pivoted to said fulcrum, substantially as set
forth.
7. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the floating weight, a fulcrum 45
carried by said weight, a stylus lever pro-
vided with a plurality of styluses and pivot-
ed to said fulcrum, said fulcrum being piv-
otally mounted upon said weight and fric-
tionally held thereto, substantially as set 50
forth.
8. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the floating weight, a fulcrum
pivoted to said weight, a stylus lever pro-
vided with a pair of styluses and pivoted to 55
said fulcrum, and indicating means for des-
ignating both operative positions of said
stylus lever, substantially as set forth.
9. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the body, floating weight, a sup- 60
port pivoted to said floating weight, a stylus
lever pivoted to said support, and a pair of
st}rluses carried by said lever, substantially
as set forth.
10. In a phonograph reproducer, the com- 65
bination of the body, floating weight, a sup-
port pivoted to said floating weight, a stylus
lever pivoted to said support, a pair of
styluses carried by said lever, and means for
limiting the angular movement of said 70
stylus lever support, substantially as set
forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 5th day of June, 1908.
FRANK L. DYER.
FRANK D. LEWIS.
Witnesses :
H. H. Dyke,
John M. Canfield.
904,875.
E. B. HYATT.
AUTOMATIC STOP ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
APPLICATION FILED AUG. 17, 1907.
Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
jFitf.2.
Fia. 3.
witnesses:
invehtor:
^ ATT>\
THE UVXRis PSTS/TS
CO., WASHINGTON, D. c
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
EDGAR B. HYATT, OF PORTLAND, OREGON.
AUTOMATIC STOP ATTACHMENT FOR PHONOGRAPHS.
No. 904,875.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
Application filed August 17, 1907. Serial No. 389,067.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Eduak B. Hyatt, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of the city of Portland, in the county of
., Multnomah and State of Oregon, have in-
vented a new and useful Improvement in
Automatic Stop Attachments for Phono-
graphs, of which the following is a specifi-
cation, reference being had to the accom-
[o panying drawings as constituting a part
thereof.
This invention has for its object to pro-
vide simple means whereby the motor mech-
anism of a phonograph may be automatic-
ally stopped at the end of the selection being
rendered. To this end my improvement es-
sentially consists of a braking element ar-
ranged to engage with one end of the cylin-
der, and automatically thrown into action
.'0 by contact devices carried by the carriage,
arranged to act at the end of the selection
being rendered. My stopping devices being
furthermore so designed that they can be
readily applied to any standard phonograph
25 of the type in mind.
The details of the construction and mode
of operation of my attachment are readily
understood from an inspection of the draw-
ings, in which.
,°>0 Figure 1 shows a perspective detail of a
phonograph with my attachment applied
thereto as in practice: and Figs. 2 and 3 are
details of construction of my attachment.
The letters designate the parts described.
85 The parts of the phonograph not specific-
ally described are understood to be of the
usual standard make.
On the bed-plate a is journaled the usual
record-cylinder h, the shaft of which has an
4 0 extension a, made with an exterior thread
and constituting the usual feed-shaft ; the
feed-shaft and therewith the cylinder, being
rotated by the usual motor-mechanism of
this class of phonographs which it is not
•15 necessary to illustrate. Arranged parallel
to the feed-shaft c is a rigid shaft d, on
'which pivots and travels the carriage e.
Such carriage being provided with an inte-
gral arm c' having on its extremity a dia-
50 phragm-head, which parts are supposed to
be broken away from the sectional detail in
Fig. 1. Part of the carriage e, as will be
noted, is also broken away to avoid obscur-
ing the attaching means of my device.
55 On the rigid shaft d is rigidly mounted
an arm /, a detail of which is shown in Fig.
3. The same is provided with an eye h.
through which to insert the shaft '/,' il is
made goosy-neck shaped, is provided wiih a
Hat surface /, and an upwardly projecting gg
shoulder or stop-lug /. A perforation is
provided at />■ through which to insert a sei-
screw L by which is rigidly secured to the
arm / a laterally projecting arm m, and at
n is provided a perforation through which qs
to insert a rivet o' whereby to pivotally se-
cure a brake-lever <?, the outer end of which
arm is connected with the extremity of the
arm in by a cod-spring p.
However. I do not confine myself to the 70
details described; for example, the arm in,
could be made an integral part of the arm /
if deemed more convenient.
q is the usual arm rigidly projecting from
the carriage e and having at its extremity a 75
nut engaging with the feed-shaft a. On the
arm q is rigidly secured, by means of an
angle-plate <j, or otherwise, as is convenient,
a plate i\ having an inclined upper edge r' .
The extremity 0- of the lever <> is tapered 80
to facilitate its climbing up on the inclined
edge r'. On the inner end of the lever 0
is provided a box *. in which is secured a
disk of friction material t. the whole con-
stituting a brake-shoe. It will be noted that 85
all of the parts of my attachment may be
readily affixed to the standard make of pho-
nographs of the type illustrated.
The operation of my device is as follows :
Normally the lever 0 will impinge upon and 90
be held by the stop-lug /', thereby holding
the brake-shoe t clear of the head V of the
cylinder b, and allowing the latter to be re-
volved by the motor-mechanism. Supposing
the carriage e to be at the starting place of 95
the phonograph, and to be traveling to the
right, as usual in rendering a selection, to-
wards the end of the selection the plate r
would approach the tapering extremity of
the lever o and finally engage therewith, lift- 10C
ing the same clear of the stop-lug /' and thus
allowing the coil-spring p to act, with the
effect of causing the brake-shoe t to forcibly
bear against the head-end T>' of the cylinder
&, and by so doing causing the consequent 10"
friction to resist and stop the motor-mechan-
ism. Should it be desired to repeat the selec-
tion, or in case the cylinder has been sup-
plied with a new record, the act of moving
the carriage, by means of the usual arm e\ 110
(carrying at its end the diaphragm-head)
back to the starting place, will bring said
904,876
arm e' against the lever <?, and return the
same to its position in front of the stop-lug
}; the lever o being caused to drop into place,
in front of said stop-lug j, by reason of the
5 far end of the coil-spring p being attached to
the arm m, which is in a lower plane, and
therefore causes such coil-spring p to exert a
down pull.
I claim:
10 1. A phonograph stopping attachment
comprising in combination with the record-
cylinder, a carriage and supports therefor, a
projecting piece on the carriage, a brake-ele-
ment arranged to bear upon one end of the
15 record-cylinder, means to normally hold the
brake - element in inactive position, and a
contact device, carried b}7 the carriage, ar-
ranged to release said brake-element at the
end of the selection rendered; said holding
20 means for the brake being arranged to be
thrown into action by contact therewith of
said piece on the carriage by the act of re-
turning the latter to its starting position.
■1. A phonograph stopping attachment
25 comprising in combination with the record-
cylinder, a carriage and supports therefor, a
projecting piece on the carriage, a support-
ing - bracket, a brake consisting of a lever
pivoted on said bracket, extending horizon-
30 tally transversely of the record-cylinder and
the carriage, and a brake-shoe on said lever
arranged to bear upon the end of the record-
cylinder, a coil-spring arranged to operate
the brake-lever to apply the brake-shoe, a
35 stop to hold the brake-lever in inactive posi-
tion, and a contact device, carried by the car-
riage, arranged to engage with the outer end
of the brake-lever and disengage the same
from the stop and allow the brake to be ap-
40 plied at the end of the selection being ren-
dered; said holding means for the brake be-
ing arranged to be thrown into action by
contact therewith of said piece on the car-
riage by the act of returning the latter to its
45 starting position.
3. A phonograph stopping attachment com-
prising in combination with the record-cyl-
inder, a carriage and supports therefor, a
projecting arm on said carriage, a support -
50 ing-bracket having a horizontal flat bearing-
surface and a vertical stop-lug thereon, a
brake-lever pivoted on the bearing-surface
of the bracket, extending transversely of the
record-cylinder and the carriage, and pro-
55 vided with a brake-shoe arranged to bear on
the end of the record-cylinder, a coil-spring
arranged to operate the brake-lever to apply
the brake-shoe, one end of said coil-spring
being attached below the plane of the bear-
ing-surface of the bracket for the purpose 60
specified, an inclined contact-plate carried
on the carriage and arranged to engage with
the outer end of said brake-lever to lift the
same clear of the stop-lug and allow the
brake to be applied at the end of the selec- 65
tion being rendered, and the parts being ar-
ranged to cause the projecting arm of the
carriage to engage with the outer end of the
brake-lever to return the same in front of
said stop-lug by the act of returning the car- 70
riage to its starting position.
4. A phonograph stopping attachment
comprising in combination with the record-
cylinder, a carriage and supports therefor, :i
projecting arm on said carriage, a support- 75
ing-bracket having a horizontal flat bearing-
surface and a vertical stop-lug thereon, a
brake-lever pivoted on the bearing-surface
of the bracket, extending transversely of the
record-cylinder and the carriage, the outer 80
end thereof made tapering and the inner end
provided with a brake-shoe arranged to bear
on the end of the record-cylinder, a coil-
spring arranged to operate the brake-lever
to apply the brake-shoe, one end of said coil- 85
spring being attached below the plane of the
beai-ing-surface of the bracket for the pur-
pose specified, an inclined contact-plate car-
ried on the carriage and arranged to engage
with the outer tapering end of said brake- 90
lever to lift the same clear of the stop-lug
unci allow the brake to be applied at the end
of the selection being rendered, and the parts
being arranged to cause the projecting arm
of the carriage to engage with the outer end 95
of the brake-lever to return the same in front
of said stop-lug b}7 the act of returning the
carriage to its starting position.
5. In a talking machine the combination
with a mandrel and the diaphragm carrying 100
element, of a brake pivotally supported at
the end of the mandrel and adapted to stop
the machine by engaging both the dia-
phragm carrying element and the mandrel.
6. In a talking machine the combination 105
with a mandrel and the diaphragm carrying
element, of a brake pivotally supported at
the end of the mandrel and adapted to be
actuated by the diaphragm carrying element
to engage and stop the mandrel.
EDGAR B. HYATT.
Witnesses :
T. J. Gkisler,
A. D. Geeking.
F. D. LEWIS.
PHONOGRAPH REPRODUCE!.
APPLICATION FILED APE. 15, 1908.
904,884.
Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
JZZJ
emesses:
: NORArs PETEBS CO., WASHINGTON. O. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
FRANK 1). LEWIS, OF ELIZABETH, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT COM-
PANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
PHONOGRAPH-REPRODUCER.
No. 904,884.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed April 15, 1908. Serial No. 427,224.
Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Frank D. Lewis, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident
of Elizabeth, in the county of Union and
5 State of New Jersey, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Phono-
graph-Reproducers, of which the following
is a description.
My invention relates to phonograph re-
10 producers which are provided with a pair of
reproducing styluses adapted to track rec-
ords of different pitch, as, for example, rec-
ords of one -hundred and two -hundred
threads per inch respectively, said styluses
15 being mounted in a support which may be
moved or shifted so as to bring either of
said styluses into and out of operative posi-
tion with respect to the record surface as de-
sired. Such a reproducer is disclosed and
20 broadly claimed in an application filed by
Peter Weber, March 26, 1908, Serial No.
423,383, wherein it is proposed to mount
styluses of this character upon separate
levers which are separately pivoted to a
25 support which is rotatably mounted upon
the floating weight of the reproducer.
According to the present invention, only
one stylus lever is used and the same is piv-
oted directly to the floating weight in the
30 usual manner, and a support for both
styluses is movably mounted on or carried
by one end of said lever.
In order that the invention may be more
fully understood, reference is hereby made
35 to the accompanying drawing of which
Figure 1 is a side elevation, partly in
section, of a phonograph reproducer con-
structed in accordance with my invention;
Fig. 2 is a plan view of the stylus lever of
40 Fig. 1, and Figs. 3 and 4 are side elevations
of modified forms of stylus lever and stylus
support.
The reproducer shown comprises the usual
sound box body 1 and diaphragm 2 clamped
45 therein by the ring 3, the floating weight 4
being pivoted at 5 to the block 6 which is
supported by the engagement of the screw 7
with the body 1. There are one or more lugs
8 depending from the weight 4 and the
50 stylus lever 9 is pivoted at or near its center
to said lugs. One end of said lever 9 is con-
nected by a link 10 to the center of the dia-
phragm ; the other end of the lever 9 is en-
larged and a stylus holder 11 is rotatably
mounted in a circular opening formed there- 55
in. The lower portion of the holder 11 is
formed with a pair of sockets, one of which
receives a stylus 12 suitable for operating
upon an ordinary record of one - hundred
threads per inch, and the other socket re- 60
ceives a stylus 13 adapted to operate upon a
record having two-hundred threads per inch.
There is a pin 14 extending transversely
through the stylus holder to enable the same
to be readily turned through an angle of 65
180°, the movement of the holder in each di-
rection being limited by the engagement of a
stop pin 15 with the body of the lever, the
end of the lever being slotted as shown at 16
to allow a movement of the stop through an 70
angle of 180°. The stjdus support is held in
each of its operative positions by frictional
engagement with the stylus lever which is
produced by the action of a spring washer IT
which surrounds the reduced upper end of 75
the stylus holder and bears against the stylus
lever and a nut or head 18 secured to the said
reduced end.
In the device of Fig. 3, the end of the lever
9 is reduced to form a stud 19 and the stylus 80
holder 11' is rotatable upon said stud, being
held in frictional engagement with the
shoulder 20 of the lever 9 by the spring
washer 17 and nut 18 threaded on the end of
the stud 19. 85
In Fig. 4, the stylus j^>lder ll2 is mounted
upon a stud 21 extending transversely with
respect to the lever 9 and is rotatable thereon
through an angle of 180°, its extreme posi-
tions being determined by the engagement of 90
shoulders 22, formed on the stylus holder,
with the stop 23 carried by the lever 9.
It will be noted that in all of the struc-
tures shown a simple rotary movement of
the stylus holder through an angle of 180°, 95
will convert the reproducer from an instru-
ment suitable for operating upon records
having one-hundred threads per inch to one
for operating upon a two - hundred thread
record and vice versa. 100
Having now described my invention, what
I claim is:
1. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the diaphragm and floating
weight, a lever pivoted to said weight and 105
connected to said diaphragm, and a stylus
holder provided with a pair of styluses and
carried by said lever, said stylus holder be-
s
904,884
10
ing movable so as to bring either of said
styluses into and out of operative position
with respect to the record surface, substan-
tially as set forth.
•2. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the floating weight, diaphragm,
stylus lever pivoted to said weight and con-
nected to said diaphragm, and a stylus holder
provided with a plurality of styluses and
rotatably mounted upon said lever, substan-
tially as set forth.
3. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the floating weight, diaphragm.
stylus lever pivoted to said weight and con-
nected to said diaphragm, and a stylus
holder provided with a plurality of styluses,
rotatabl}7 mounted upon said lever and fric-
tioually held thereto, substantial^ as set
forth.
4. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the floating weight, diaphragm,
stylus lever pivoted to said weight and con-
nected to said diaphragm, a stylus holder
provided with a plurality of styulses and
rotatably mounted upon said stylus, and
means for limiting the angular movement
of said stylus holder in both directions, sub-
stantially as set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 13th dav of April 15)08.
FRANK D. LEWIS.
Witnesses :
Delos Holden,
Anna R. Klehm.
904,959.
D. HOLDEN.
PHONOGRAPH REPRODUCER.
APPLICATION PILED JULY 10, 1908.
Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
00.J
worses:
J4 J6
THE NORMS PETERS CO.. WASH1 XC-rnn
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
DELOS HOLDEN, OF UPPER MONTGLAIR, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT
COMPANY, OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
PHONOGRAPH-REPRODUCER.
No. 904,959.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
Application filed July 10, 1908. Serial No. 442,978.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Delos Holden, a citi-
zen of the United States, and a resident of
Upper Montclair, in the county of Essex
and State of New Jersey, have invented cer-
tain new and useful Improvements in Pho-
nograph-Reproducers, of which the follow-
ing is a description.
My invention relates to phonograph re-
10 producers which are provided with a pair of
reproducing styluses adapted to track rec-
ords of different pitch, as, for example, rec-
ords of one - hundred and two - hundred
threads per inch respectively, said styluses
15 being mounted in a support which may be
moved or shifted so as to bring either of
said styluses into and out of operative posi-
tion with respect to the record surface as de-
sired. Such a reproducer is disclosed and
20 broadly claimed in an application filed bv
Peter Weber, March 26, 1908, Serial No.
423,383, wherein it is proposed to mount
styluses of this character upon separate le-
vers which are separately pivoted to a sup-
25 port which is rotatably mounted upon the
floating weight of the reproducer.
According to the present invention, only
one stylus lever is used, and the same is
pivoted on a horizontal axis to a fulcrum
30 which latter is pivoted on a vertical axis to
the floating weight and both styluses are
carried by said lever, being preferably
mounted on points at opposite sides of the
fulcrum and equidistant therefrom.
35 In order that the invention may be more
fully understood, reference is hereby made
to the accompanying drawing of which Fig-
ure 1 is a side elevation, partly in section, of
a phonograph reproducer constructed in ac-
40 cordance with my invention, and Fig. 2 is a
bottom plan view of the stylus lever, ful-
crumal support therefor and adjacent por-
tion of the floating weight.
The reproducer shown comprises the usual
45 sound box body 1 within which the dia-
phragm is clamped, the floating weight 4 be-
ing pivoted at 5 to the block 6 carried by the
body 1, and movable on a vertical axis with
respect thereto. The weight 4 is formed
50 with a recess 7, and within the same is a cir-
cular block 8 having an integral stud 9 sur-
rounding which is a spring washer 10 adapt-
ed to be compressed by the nut 11, threaded
on said stud so as to draw said block 8 into
frictional engagement with the floating 55
weight, said block being retained in position
by an annular plate 12 secured by screws 13
threaded in the floating weight. The plate
12 is formed with an index finger 14 adapted
to cooperate with indicating numerals 15 ap- 60
plied to the block 8, to designate which of
the styluses is in operative position with re-
spect to the record surface, or in other words
whether the reproducer is in adjustment for
operating upon records having one hundred 65
or two hundred threads per inch.
There is a pair of lugs 16 depending from
the block 8 which receive the horizontal
screw 17 upon which the stylus lever 18 is
pivotally mounted. The said lever is pro- 70
vided with a stylus 19 suitable for operating
upon records having one hundred threads
per inch and a stylus 20 suitable for operat-
ing upon records having two hundred
threads per inch, said styluses being on op- 75
posite sides of the axis or fulcrum of the
said lever and equidistant therefrom. Each
end of the lever 18 is formed with a notched
opening 21 adapted to receive the eye formed
in the end of the link 22, the upper end of 80
which is connected to the diaphragm.
In the position shown in the drawing, the
stylus 19 is in proper position for operating
upon a phonograph record. In order to
bring the stylus 20 into operative position, 85
the end of the link 22 is removed from the
notch 21 of the lever 18, and the block 8 is
rotated through an angle of 180°, bringing
the other notch 21 into proximity to the link
22, which is then engaged with the same. 90
In this position the indicating numerals 200
will be opposite the pointer 14.
Having now described my invention what
I claim is:
1. In a phonograph reproducer, the com- 95
bination of the diaphragm and floating
weight, a fulcrum pivoted to said weight, a
lever pivoted to said fulcrum, a pair of
styluses carried by said lever and means for
interchangeably connecting said lever with 100
said diaphragm at points at opposite sides
of its pivot or fulcrum, substantially as set
forth.
2. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the floating weight, the fulcrum 105
pivoted to said weight, and a stylus lever
Q
004,959
provided with a pair of styluses and pivoted
to said fulcrum at a point between the
styluses, substantially as set forth.
3. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
5 bination of the floating weight, fulcrum car-
ried by said weight, and stylus lever pro-
vided with a pair of styluses and pivoted to
said fulcr,um at a point between the styluses,
said fulcrum being rotatably mounted upon
10 said weight and frictionally held thereto,
substantially as set forth.
4. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the floating weight, fulcrum piv-
oted to said weight, stylus lever provided
15 with a pair of styluses, and pivoted, to said
fulcrum at a point between the styluses, and
indicating means for designating both op-
erative positions of said stylus lever, sub-
stantially as set forth.
5. In a phonograph reproducer, the com- 20
bination of the floating weight, the fulcrum
pivoted to said weight, and a stylus lever
provided with a pair of styluses pivoted to
said fulcrum at a point substantially in a
line with the axis upon which said fulcrum 25
turns, substantially as set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 8th day of July 1908.
DELOS HOLDEN.
Witnesses :
Frank D. Lewis,
H. R. Klehm.
P. WEBER.
PHONOGBAPH BEPEODUCEB.
APPLICATION FILED MAE. 26. 1908.
905.033.
Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
J$9-z'
JT&3
7he «.»» rerj.i «.. muWBKM. o. c
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
PETER WEBER, OF ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, ASSIGNOR TO NEW JERSEY PATENT COMPANY,
OF WEST ORANGE, NEW JERSEY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
PHONOGRAPH-REPRODUCER.
No. 905,033.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
Application filed March 26, 1908. Serial No. 423,383.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Peter Webeb, a citi-
zen of the United States, and a resident of
Orange, in the county of Essex and State of
Xew Jersey, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Phonograph - Re-
producers, of which the following is a de-
scription.
My invention relates to phonograph re-
10 producers and has for its object the produc-
tion of a reproducer having two styluses,
preferably carried by levers which are piv-
oted to a floating weight and said styluses
being adapted to operate upon phonograph
15 records of different pitch, for instance, one
stylus may be suitable for records having
one-hundred turns or threads per inch and
the other stylus suitable for records having
two-hundred threads per inch, both of said
20 styluses, however, being connected to and
adapted to impart vibrations to the same
diaphragm.
In order that the invention may be more
fully understood, reference is made to the
25 accompanying drawing of which —
Figure 1 is a bottom plan view of a pho-
nograph reproducer constructed in accord-
ance with my invention; Fig. 2 is a section
on line 2 — 2 of Fig. 1 ; and Fig. 3 is a detail
SO view, partly in section, showing the index
finger for indicating which of the styluses is
in operative position.
The reproducer shown comprises a body 1
within which the diaphragm 2 is secured
35 by the clamping rings 3, 4 and 5 represent-
ing metallic rings or gaskets, and 6 and 7
paper washers. The floating weight 8 is
pivoted at 9 to the lug 10 which is secured
to the lower end of the screw 11, threaded
40 in the body 1. The floating weight 8 is
formed with a central opening 12 and recess
13 within which is situated the stylus carry-
ing flanged sleeve or bushing" 14. The exte-
rior of said bushing is formed with a pair of
45 flat surfaces 15, and a plate 16, having a cen-
tral opening adapted to fit upon the bush-
ing is placed thereon, after which a spring
washer or dished spring plate 17 is placed
upon the bushing and a clamping nut 18 is
screwed upon the end thereof, so as to secure
the bushing in position. The bushing is ro-
tatable with respect to the weight 8, being
held in position by frictional engagement
therewith and its angular movement in each
direction is limited by the shoulders 19 and
20 formed on said plate 1G in position to en-
gage a stop which is in the form of a screw
21 threaded in the weight 8. Depending
from the lower surface of the bushing 14 are
pairs of lugs 22 and 23 respectively, to
which are pivoted the stylus levers 24 and
25. The outer end of the lever 24 is pro-
vided with a stylus 26 of proper form and
size for operating upon a sound record hav-
ing two hundred threads per inch, and the
outer end of the lever 25 is provided with a
stylus 27 suitable for operating upon a
sound record having one-hundred threads
per inch. The inner end of the lever 25 is
forked and receives the reduced end of the
lever 24, and there is an eye or opening 28
formed in each of said levers through which
passes the lower end of a link 29. The up-
per end of said link passes through the bot-
tom of a cup 30 which is secured to the cen-
ter of the diaphragm, and a ball 31 is se-
cured to or formed upon the end of the link
so as to form with said cup a swivel or ball
and socket joint, which permits the rotation
of the bushing 14 without affecting the con-
nection of the stylus levers with the dia-
phragm.
There is an index finger or pointer 32 se-
cured to the lower surface of the bushing 14
by screws 33, the point of which extends in
proximity to the surface of the floating
weight 8, and upon the latter are placed indi-
cating figures 34, whereby the pointer 32
designates which of the styluses is in proper
position for operating upon a record sur-
face; thus, if the pointer is opposite the
figures 100, as shown in Fig. 1, the stylus 27
is in proper position for operating on rec-
ord a, and when the sleeve 14 is rotated
through an angle of 180° the stylus 26 will
be in operative position and the pointer 32
will be opposite the figures 200.
Having now described my invention, what
I claim is:
1. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the body, a floating weight piv-
oted to said body and a pair of styluses car-
ried by said floating weight, each of which is
movable independently of said weight into
and out of operative position with respect to
the record surface, substantially as set forth.
2. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the diaphragm, floating weight
and a pair of styluses carried by said weight
and connected to said diaphragm, each of
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
905,033
said styluses having an angular movement
independently of said weight into and out
of operative position with respect to the rec-
ord surface, substantially as set forth.
5 3. In a phonograph reproducer, the com- i
bination with the body, floating weight and
stylus carrier pivoted to said floating weight,
of a pair of styluses carried thereby and
movable into and out of operative position
10 with respect to the record surface, substan-
tially as set forth.
4. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination with the diaphragm and floating
weight, of a pair of stylus levers connected
15 to said diaphragm and pivoted upon a sup-
port rot at able upon said floating weight,
substantially as set forth.
5. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination or a body, floating weight, a sup-
20 port mounted on said floating weight, stylus
levers connected to said diaphragm and piv-
oted to said support, said support being mov-
able with respect to said floating weight,
whereby either of said styluses may be
25 brought into and out of operative position
with respect to the record surface, substan-
tially as set forth.
6. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the floating weight, the spring
30 washer 17, the flanged bushing passing
through said weight, means for compressing
said spring washer and clamping said bush-
ing and weight together, a pair of stylus
levers pivoted to said bushing and a link
35 connected to said levers and passing through
the bore of said bushing, substantially as set
forth.
7. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the diaphragm, floating weight.
40 bushing 14, stylus levers pivoted thereto, a
link 29 passing through the bore of said
bushing, and a swivel connection between
said link and said diaphragm, substantially
as set forth.
8. In a phonograph reproducer, the com- 45
bination of the diaphragm, the cup 30 se-
cured thereto, the link 29 having a ball 31
within said cup, a stylus lever connected to
the other end of the said link, a support for
said stylus lever, and a floating weight, said 50
support being rotatable with respect to the
floating weight, substantial^ as set forth.
9. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination with the body, diaphragm, and
floating weight, of a pair of styluses of dif- 55
ferent diameters carried by said weight and
connected to said diaphragm, substantially
as set forth.
10. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination with the body, diaphragm, and 60
floating weight, of a pair of styluses of dif-
ferent diameters carried by said weight and
connected to said diaphragm, and means for
imparting an angular movement to the
styluses to bring either one into and out of 65
operative position with respect to the record
surface, substantially as set forth.
11. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the body, diaphragm and float-
ing weight, of a stylus carrier pivoted to said 70
weight on an axis substantially in alinement
with the center of the diaphragm, substan-
tially as set forth.
12. In a phonograph reproducer, the com-
bination of the body, diaphragm and float- 75
ing weight, of a sleeve carried by and rota-
table with respect to said weight, a stjdus
lever pivoted to said sleeve and a link pass-
ing through said sleeve and connecting said
diaphragm and said stylus lever, substan- 80
dally as set forth.
This specification signed and witnessed
this 24 day of March 1908.
PETER WEBER.
Witnesses :
Frank D. Lewis,
H. H. Dyke.
. Sfc **>
ML
<f>
K
. ,J>. . - • , -.» E X>V
A. JUNOD.
TALKING MACHINE SOUND BOX.
APPLICATION PILED FEB. 27, 1908.
905,082.
Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
'9 tttf.78
WITNESSES
'i^A
I UUUIlUll | | ^L
'6
7/
-2?%?. 6
&
J?£
6 Y3
BY
INVENTOR
ATTORNEY
TUB NOHB,S PITERS CO., UTASHINHTm, a. c.
A. JUNOD.
TALKING MACHINE SOUND BOX.
APPLICATION PILED FEB. 27, 1908.
905,082.
Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
®
;??
->e?*,
X
•p/T \ ' f
wsP^5
i
w >»*
Vv#
1
*?£
J^ttf.ltf.
3%?./3.
/-
WITNESSES J*//ly-/^T
INVENTOR;
™~i^J(?<^WH#
ATTORNEY
THE NORRtS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D- C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
ANDRE JUNOD, OF FRUITVALE, CALIFORNIA.
TALKING-MACHINE SOTTND-BOX.
No. 905,082.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Nov. 24, 1908.
Application filed February 27, 1908. Serial No. 418,070.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Axdre Jttnod, citizen
of the United States, residing at Fruitvale,
in the county of Alameda and State of Cali-
5 fornia, have invented new and useful Im-
provements in Talking - Machine Sound-
Boxes, of which the following is a specifica-
tion.
My invention relates to sound-boxes for
10 talking machines and especially to novel
means for mounting the stylus bar of such
a sound-box in such a manner as to make the
apparatus extremely sensitive, and to accu-
rately reproduce the recorded vibrations.
15 It consists in the combination of parts, and
in details of construction which will be more
fully explained by reference to the accom-
panying drawings, in which —
Figure 1 is a plan view of the reproducer.
20 Fig. 2 is a vertical section of the same, taken
through x — x of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is a view
looking toward the side of the apparatus in
line with the stylus bar. Fig. 4 is a dia-
grammatic view showing the position of the
25 pins and their combination. Figs. 5, 6 and
6a are modifications of the tensioning means.
Fig. 7 is a section transverse to the groove of
one of the bearing studs. Fig. 8 is a sec-
tional view through the bearing points.
30 Fig. 9 is a similar view showing straight
knife edges, and a U-shaped spring. Fig. 10
is a sectional elevation of the same through
the center of the reproducer. Fig. 11 is a
plan view showing the sound-box ring used
35 as a tension lever. Fig. 12 is a sectional ele-
vation of the same on lines y — y of Fig. 11.
Fig. 13 is a diagrammatic view of the stylus
bar. Figs. 14, 15, 16 and 17 are views show-
ing modified forms of bearings for the ring.
40 Various devices have been made in connec-
tion with this class of apparatus for the
proper tensioning of the stylus-bar, and to
provide a construction which will prevent
secondary vibrations ; and it is the object of
45 my invention to provide a compact construc-
tion to employ substantially rigid tensioning
devices which are not subject to give way
under pressure, or become loosened so as to
put the stylus bar out of operation.
50 In my construction, the tensioning or en-
gagement point on the stylus bar, is located
at one side of the fulcrum, and the station-
ary point upon the opposite side.
Kef erring to Fig. 1, 1 is a sound-box cas-
55 ing in which the diaphragm 2 is clamped.
* The plate 3 secured to the casing 1 is pro-
vided with bearing-studs 4 and 5 having on
their cylindrical surfaces V-shaped grooves
a which serve as bearings for the circular
knife edges a' formed in the holes 7 and 8, of 60
the transverse bar 6, as shown in Fig. 3.
The stylus bar 9 is connected with the cen-
ter of the diaphragm 2 in the usual or any
suitable method, and the needle or stylus is
clamped to the outer end of the bar by means 65
of a thumb screw 18 in the boss 14 of the
transverse bar 6. The diameter of the cir-
cular knife edges a' and a' of the bar 6 is
slightly larger than the diameter of the
studs 4 and 5, so that the bar can be easily 70
removed from its bearings. The transverse
bar 6 is provided in its center, and in the
same plane with the knife edges a' and a'
with a conical recess 15, located on the rear
and outside the bearing points of the knife 75
edges a' and a' and the studs 4 and 5. as
plainly shown in Fig. 3. The compression
pin 13 is pressed or forced against the bot-
tom of the recess 15, by means of an adjust-
ing-screw 11, and this is retained in position 80
by means of a set screw 12 adjusted in the
split stud 10 of the plate 3. There are no
springs provided in this construction as it is
intended that the mounting of the stylus
bar and adjusting screw, and the studs 4, 85
5 and 10 on the thin plate 3, will be suffi-
ciently yielding to assure an accurate ad-
justment for an indefinite length of time.
The plate 3 may preferably be made thinner
at an intermediate portion, as plainly shown 90
at 19 Fig. 2, and this will increase the yield-
ing effect.
In Fig. 5 I have shown a spring 17 which
may be used in place of the stud 10 and ad-
justing screw 11. This spring is simply 95
screwed on the side of the sound-box casing,
and its projecting end bears upon the com-
pression pin 13.
In Fig. 6 I have shown the adjusting
screw 11, and the compression pin 13 made 100
in a single piece, and made elastic at the
point a2.
In Fig. 6a I have shown the parts 11 and
13 made separate and connected by means of
a small star or other shaped spring 16; 105
these modifications all serving to produce
the required elasticity. The relative posi-
tion of the pins 13. and the lever formed by
the transverse bar 6 are plainly shown in
Fig. 4, in which 21 is the fulcrum or bearing HO
point of the stylus bar. 22 is the compres-
sion or tension point of the two combined
2
905,082
elements 6 and 13 ; this tension point being
located on one side of the fulcrum of the
bar, and the stationary point 23 upon the
other side of the fulcrum 21. The arc de-
5 scribed by the pin 13 tilting about the fixed
point 23 being of larger radius than the arc
described by the lever or stylus bar 6 tilting
on the other fixed point 21, and the two
parts being connected at the point 22, it
10 will be evident that by each half oscillation
of the stylus bar or lever 6, there will be a
pressure exerted on the point 23, and the
two parts will have a tendency to come into
a position in which the three points 21, 22
15 and 23 will lie in a straight line; and an
elastic mounting for each half oscillation of
the diaphragm is thus provided.
In Fig. 17 I have shown in a diagram-
matic view a further illustration of the oper-
20 ation of this device. Supposing the stylus
bar lever 6 and the compression or tension
pin 13 to be of the same length, the station-
ary point 23, and the fulcrum point 21 will
coincide, and the arcs described by the move-
25 ment of the two parts will also coincide, so
that there will be no tension at all on the
diaphragm for each half oscillation. This
differs from devices in which the tension
points are both on the same side of the ful-
30 crum, since in that case the oscillations of
the parts take place in arcs Avhich are
tangent to each other, and the curves thus
diverging from the common point there will
be an increased tension on each side during
35 the oscillations of the diaphragm.
By reason of the arc described by the stylus
bar in my device being upon the inside of
the arc described by the compression member,
it will be seen that the pressure will be very
40 little increased during each half oscillation,
and the stylus bar will vibrate more freely,
and with a greater amplitude of vibra-
tion of the diaphragm, thus giving a louder
and clearer tone. Another advantage of my
45 device is that great sensibility can be ob-
tained by the use of members of nearly the
same length, and the apparatus thus pro-
vides a very sensitive and elastic mounting
for the stylus bar responsive to minutest
50 sound wave movement, and a greater ampli-
tude of vibrations of the diaphragm, with
a corresponding loud, distinct and natural
tone.
In the modification shown in Fig. 8, the
55 stylus bar and the tension means are placed
in the plane of the diaphragm. The stylus
bar is pressed upon its seats by means of an
adjusting screw and nut as at 25, between
the stationary sound-box casing and the
60 stylus bar. In Fig. 9 I have shown this ad-
justing screw and nut as replaced by a U-
shaped spring 25a having a point pressing
on the stylus bar, and two other points on
a small slide 27 which can be adjusted by
65 means of screws 27a. The tension of the
spring may be adjusted by means of a
screw 26.
In Figs. 11 to 16 inclusive the sound-box
ring is not itself employed as a compression
member, being adjusted on studs 32 upon 70
knife edges 31.
The adjusting screw 25 which engages the
stylus bar can be set in position by means of
screws 25b, the ring being split so as to
loosen the adjusting screws. 75
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim and desire to secure by Letters Pat-
ent is — n
1. In a sound reproducing machine, the
combination with a sound-box casing, a dia- 80
phragm, a stylus bar and a bearing located
exterior to the sound-box casing, of a ten-
sioning device having an engagement point
on the stylus bar located on one side of the
fulcrum of said bar and a stationary point 85
located upon the other side of said fulcrum.
2. In a sound reproducing machine, a
sound-box casing, a diaphragm and stylus
bar, a bearing therefor located exterior to
the sound-box, a tensioning or engagement 90
point located on the stylus bar at one side
of the fulcrum of said bar, and a stationary
point of support upon the opposite side.
3. In a sound reproducing machine, a
sound-box casing, diaphragm and stylus bar, 95
a bearing or fulcrum for said bar, a con-
tact point formed at one side of said ful-
crum, a compression device having one end
in engagement with said contact point, and
a fixed stationary point with which the other 100
end of the compression device is in contact.
4. In a sound reproducing machine, a
sound-box casing, a diaphragm, a stylus bar,
bearings therefor, said bearings consisting ox
cylindrical studs, and corresponding holes of 105
larger diameter, said studs and holes having
co- acting grooves and knife edges, and a
tensioning device consisting of a compres-
sion arm having bearings upon opposite
sides of the stylus bar bearings. 110
5. In a sound reproducing machine, the
sound-box casing, a diaphragm, a stylus bar,
a plate fixed to the sound-box casing, cy-
lindrical knife edge and V-shaped groove
bearings for the stylus bar, said bearings be- 115
ing carried upon the plate, a contact point
in the stylus bar at one side of the bearings,
a fixed point carried upon the opposite edge
of the plate and exterior to the bearings, and
a tensioning bar having its ends engaging 120
respectively the contact points.
6. In a sound reproducing device of the
character described, a sound-box having a
plate fixed transversely to one side and pro-
jecting therefrom, a diaphragm, a stylus bar 125
having one end fixed to the diaphragm, a
transverse bar to which the other end is
fixed, circular co-acting groove and knife
edge bearings carried by the plate, and
upon which the transverse bar is capable of 130
905,082
oscillation, a bearing point upon said bar at
one side of the fulcrum point, an adjustable
point and a support therefor carried upon
the outer edge of the plate and upon the
opposite side of the fulcrum, and a tension-
ing bar having its opposite ends engaging
the two contact points.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit-
nesses.
ANDRfi JUNOD.
Witnesses :
Geo. H. Strong,
Charl.es A. Penfield.
'.-.V '-*«.-. ..--i^-.* "V;
~ \
905,184.
J. E. HOUGH.
PHONOGBAPH.
APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 9, 1907.
Patented Dec. 1, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
mi
«////////?////,.
r/s
WITNESSES^
AJ
INVENTOR.
• if / *
THE NOftRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
J. E. HOUGH.
PHONOGBAPH.
APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 9, 1907.
Patented Dec. 1, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
WITNESSES.
INVENTOR.
^^*W&aZ3> j$*ir
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., -WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JAMES EDWARD HOUGH, OF LONDON, ENGLAND.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 905,184.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 1, 1908.
Application filed September 9, 1907. Serial No. 391,966.
To all ichom it may concern:
Be it known that I, James Edward
Hough, a subject of His Majesty the King
of Great Britain, and a resident of London,
5 England, have invented a certain new and
useful Improvement in Phonographs and
Like Talking-Machines, of which the fol-
lowing is a specification.
In phonographs as now commonly con-
10 structed it is customary to mount the disk
carrying the reproducing stylus in an arm
or frame, one end of which embraces a guid-
ing rod, while the arm also carries a half
nut adapted to engage with the screwed
15 traverser rod, the half nut and the disk
being raised out of or lowered into engage-
ment b}^ a pivoted cam adapted to rest on a
fixed bar of the machine. Various slight
modifications of this well known construc-
20 tion have also been suggested.
According to the present invention, it is
proposed that the guiding rod should be
eccentrically and movably mounted in the
frame or in an eccentrically movable bush-
25 ing so as to act as a species of crank which
can be partially rotated so as to bring the
frame or arm carrying the disk nearer to or
farther from the mandrel on which the rec-
ord is to be placed, or as an equivalent, the
30 eccentric bushing may be interposed between
the rod and the arm, in either case the mo-
tion preferably at the same time bringing
the half nut or other engaging or feeding
device into or removing it from contact with
35 the screwed traverser bar.
Where the frame or arm is supported
upon a guiding rod and arranged in front of
the mandrel, a convenient arrangement is to
have a rearward extension formed rigidly
40 with and projecting substantially diamet-
rically opposite to such arm and embracing
a fixed rod situated in a plane outside of
and below that of the guiding rod and
adapted to take some of the weight of an
45 overhanging horn, where that is employed.*
In the accompanying drawings, illustrat-
ing the invention, in the several figures of
which like parts are similarly designated,
Figure 1 is a front elevation, partly in sec-
50 tion, illustrating a method of carrying out
the invention. Fig. 2 is an end view on the
line s — 2, showing some of the parts omit-
ted, of Fig. 1. Fig. 3 is an end view, show-
ing the different positions the frame can be
55 made to take. Fig. 4 a front view of same.
Figs. 5 and 6 show the eccentric bushing |
applied to the ends of the guiding rod, and
Figs. 7 and 8 show the bushing between
such rod and the carrying arm.
In the drawings, 1 is the usual mandrel, GO
2 the frame or arm carrying the reproducing
or cutting disk and having a backward ex-
tension 3 rigidly fixed thereto and project-
ing substantially diametrically opposite to
said arm, and having its free end 3" bifur- G5
catecl and adapted to embrace a fixed rod 4,
in such manner as to traverse upon said rod
and also being capable of a slight transverse
and rotary or oscillating movement there-
upon to permit the movement of the repro- 70 .
ducer arm. The frame 2 also has fixed
thereto a spring arm 6 upon which is mount-
ed the wheel 7 which engages with traverser
bar 8, arranged below and in substantially
the same plane with the guiding-rod 5. 75
As shown in Figs. 1 to 4, the frame or
arm 2 and its extension 3 are mounted upon
the guiding-rod 5 eccentrically mounted in
the frame of the machine, the trunnions 9
not coinciding with the center of rod 5, and 80
the longest radius of the eccentric rod being
arranged in substantially longitudinal aline-
ment with the reproducer arm and its at-
tached extension, the construction and ar-
rangement being such that when said rod is 85
turned, as by crank 10, the frame or arm
2 is caused to rise or fall, or caused to os-
cillate, the engagement of the bifurcated
end of the extension 3 with the rod 4 serv-
ing as the pivot point or center of such 90
oscillating movement (as shown in dotted
lines, Fig. 3), thus bringing the disk carried
by the reproducer arm nearer to or farther
from the mandrel 1, and at the same time
bringing the engaging or feeding device 7 95
into or removing it from contact with the
traverser bar 8. Thus it will be seen that
the fixed rod 4 and the bifurcated end of
extension 3, forming the pivot during such
movement, will serve to take some of the loo
weight of the reproducer arm and the horn
attached thereto.
In Figs. 5 and 6 the cam motion is im-
parted to the guiding rod 5 by mounting it
in eccentric bushings 11, which can be 105
turned in the frame, while in Figs. 7 and 8,
such bushings are shown on the guiding rod
between it and the arm 2.
It is obvious that the positions in the
frame of the fixed rod, guiding rod and 110
traverser bar may be varied depending upon
whether it is desired to have some or all
©05,184
of them in front of or behind the mandrel
and that the lower rod 4 may be used to
produce the cam motion and rod 5 be the
iixed one, but the construction indicated will
5 be found efficient.
What I claim is : —
1. In phonographs and like talking ma-
chines, a reproducer arm, a guiding rod
therefor eccentrically and movably mounted,
13 an extension rigidly connected to said re-
producer arm and extending substantially
diametrically opposite therefrom and pro-
vided with a bilurcated end, and a fixed rod
adapted to be engaged by the bifurcated
15 end of said extension to form a pivot point
for said reproducer arm, the longest radius
of said eccentrically mounted guiding rod
being arranged in substantially longitudinal
aiinement with the reproducer arm and its
20 attached extension, whereby b}7 the move-
ment of the eccentrically mounted guiding
rod, the reproducer arm is caused to oscil-
late upon said pivot point, substantially as
and for the purposes set forth.
25 2. In machines of the class described, a
reproducer arm, a guiding rod therefor, a
fixed rod arranged in a plane outside of
said guiding rod, an extension rigidly fixed
to and projecting substantially diametric-
30 all}7 opposite to said reproducer arm and
provided with a bifurcated end adapted to
engage said fixed rod and having an oscil-
latory and transverse movement thereon,
and an eccentric on said guiding rod hav-
35 ing its longest radius in substantially longi-
tudinal aiinement with the reproducer arm
and its attached extension and adapted to
oscillate the reproducer arm and its at-
tached extension, to thereby raise and lower
the reproducer arm, substantially as and for
the purpose described.
3. In machines of the class described, a
reproducer arm, a guiding rod therefor, a
fixed rod arranged in a plane outside of said
guiding rod, an extension rigidly fixed to 4,5
and projecting substantially diametrically
opposite to said reproducer arm and pro-
vided with a bifurcated end adapted to en-
gage said fixed rod and having an oscil-
latory and transverse movement thereon, a 50
traverser bar, a feeding device carried by
said reproducer arm and engaging said trav-
erser bar, and an eccentric on said guiding
rod having its longest radius in substan-
tially longitudinal aiinement with the re- 55
producer arm and its attached extension and
adapted to oscillate the reproducer arm and
its attached extension, to thereby raise and
lower the reproducer arm with relation to
the mandrel and to move the feeding device go
into and out of engagement with the trav-
erser bar, substantially as and for the pur-
pose described.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set
my hand in the presence of two subscribing cs
witnesses.
' JAMES EDWARD HOUGH.
Witnesses :
Frederick Fox,
Leonard Weetch.
905,220.
J. E. O'NEEL & E. JENKINS.
TONE MODULATOB FOR GRAPHOPHONES.
APPLICATION PILED MAY 29, 1908.
Patented Dec. 1, 1908.
Hg.3,
//-!!--
8
-/7
12
/f
15
20
ant/
3*vu«uto&<
JesseEO'Nee/
Eugene Jed/ns
€Lttotn*y6-
THE IVORRIS PITS WE CO., WASHtNOTON, D. C. ■
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JESSE E. O'NEEL AND EUGENE JENKINS, OF TILLAMOOK, OREGON.
TONE-MODULATOR FOR GRAPHOPHONES.
No. 905,220.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 1, 1908.
Application filed May 29, 1908. Serial No. 435,774.
To all whom, it may concern:
Be it known that we, Jesse E. O'Neel,
and Eugexe Jexkixs, citizens of the United
States, residing at Tillamook, in the county
5 of Tillamook, State of Oregon, have invent-
ed certain new and useful Improvements in
Tone - Modulators for Graphophones; and
we do hereby declare the following to be a
full, clear, and exact description of the in-
10 vention, such as will enable others skilled in
the art to which it appertains to make and
use the same.
The present invention relates to improve-
ments in tone - modulating devices for
15 graphophones, and it resides, generally, in
the provision of an extremely simple, inex-
pensive, and efficient device adapted for at-
tachment to a sound-box of any ordinary
type and including a pair of oppositely-dis-
20 posed jaws movable into and out of engage-
ment with the vibrating transmitter-bar of
the sound-box, so as to control the ampli-
tude of the vibrations.
The preferred embodiment of the inven-
25 tion is illustrated in the accompanying
drawings, in which corresponding parts are
designated by the same reference numerals
throughout the several views.
Of the said drawings, Figure 1 is a front
30 elevation of the sound-box of a graphophone
with the improved modulator attached there-
to, a portion of the tongue of the clamp be-
ing broken away. Fig. 2 is a rear eleva-
tion of the modulator. Fig. 3 is a section
35 taken vertically through the modulator.
Referring more particularly to the draw-
ings, 1 designates a sound-box of any ordi-
nary construction, 2 the mica diaphragm
thereof, 3 the needle holder, and 4 the vibra-
40 tory transmitter bar which is connected at
its lower end with said holder and at its
upper end with the diaphragm in the usual
manner.
The modulator which is designed for use
45 in connection with the sound box comprises
a supporting strap 5 provided at each end
with a lateral flange 6 having a central per-
foration formed therein through which an
adjusting screw 7 extends, the inner end of
50 each screw impinging against an arcuate
lateral flange formed upon the outer edge
of a slide 8, said slides being movable upon
the ends of the strap with which they are
engaged by means of pairs of ears 9 which
extend across the upper and lower edges of 55
the strap and are bent towards each other
as shown, the movement of the slides in one
direction being limited by the contact of
their upper ears with the shoulders 10 re-
sultant from the formation of the V-shaped 60
bend 11 intermediate the ends of the strap.
The supporting strap further includes an
integral tongue 12 which forms an extension
of the bend 11 and has its major portion
arranged in spaced relation to and parallel 65
•with the front face of the strap. In the
space between the tongue and the strap is
fitted a pair of oppositely-disposed jaws 13
pivoted intermediate their ends as indicated
by the numerals 14, 14, the pivot pins pass- 70
ing through the tongue and through the
strap. Towards their lower ends, the jaws
are connected by means of a pin 15 whose
opposite -ends fit in alining sockets formed in
the inner or mutually-adjacent edges of the 75
jaw, said pin being embraced by a tiny ex-
pansible coil spring 16, the tension of which
normally forces the lower ends of the jaws
away from each other.
The lower ends of the jaws are forced 80
towards each other against the action of the
spring by means of an endwise movable
threaded rod IT which extends through an
opening formed in the laterally -bent upper
j end of the tongue and has its tapered or 85
i wedge-shaped lower end fitted between the
I upper ends of said jaws. The upper end of
>aid rod is provided with a milled head 18,
by means of which it is rotated, the inward
i movement of said rod effected by its rotation 90
in one direction causing its lower end to ad-
; vance between the upper ends of the jaws,
I forcing said ends awaj' from each other, in
consequence of which the lower ends of the
! jaws will approach each other. 95
In attaching the device to the sound-box,
i the slides 8 are tightened against the side
wall thereof, by means of the screws 7. the
I laterally-bent upper end of the transmitter -
| bar passing between the inner edges of the 100
jaws which as above stated, are normally
1 forced away from each other by the coil-
I spring 16. When it is desired to modulate
the sound vibrations, the rod 17 is moved in-
wardly, whereupon the lower ends of the 105
I jaAvs will be forced into contact with the
transmitter bar at opposite sides thereof, the
inward movement of said rod being con-
905,220
tinued, until the requisite pressure is exerted
upon said bar, the tone softening as the ten-
sion upon the bar increases.
The strap and the slides are preferably
5 constructed of brass and the jaws of alu-
minum, the latter metal imparting a pe-
culiarly soft tone to the instrument upon
which it is placed and permitting a more
gradual modulation of the tone.
10 If preferred, each jaw may have secured
to the lower edge thereof a thin facing or
cushion of rubber 20.
It will be apparent from the foregoing,
that the tone regulation is at all times under
15 the control of the operator, the changes in
tone being effected merely by a rotation of
the controlling rod 17 in one direction or the
other, without necessitating the stopping of
the instrument. It will likewise be ap-
20 parent that by reason of the simplicity of
the device, it may be constructed at an ex-
tremely low cost.
What is claimed is:
1. The combination, with the sound-box
25 of a graphophone, and its transmitter - bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box,
and a pair of oppositely-disposed members
carried by the support and movable into and
30 out of engagement with the transmitter-bar.
2. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter - bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box,
35 and a pair of oppositely-disposed members
carried by the support and movable simulta-
neously into and out of engagement with the
transmitter-bar.
3. The combination, with the sound box
40 of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box,
and a pair of oppositely-disposed jaws piv-
oted to the support and movable into and
45 out of engagement with the transmitter-bar.
4. -The combination, with the sound-box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter - bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box,
50 and a pair of oppositely-disposed jaws piv-
oted to the support and movable simulta-
neously into and out of engagement with the
transmitter-bar.
5. The combination, with the sound box
55 of a graphophone, and its transmitter -bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box,
and a pair of transversely-disposed members
carried by the support and arranged upon
80 opposite sides of the transmitter-bar, said
members being movable into and out of en-
gagement with said bar.
6. The combination, with the sound box of
a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar, of a
G ' tone-modulator, comprising a support adapt-
ed for attachment to the sound-box, and a
pair of transversely- disposed members piv-
oted to the support and arranged upon op-
posite sides of the transmitter-bar, said mem-
bers being movable into and out of engage- 70
ment with said bar.
7. The combination, with the sound box of
a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar, of a
tone-modulator, comprising a support adapt-
ed for attachment to the sound-box, and a 75
pair of transversely-disposed members par-
ried by the support and arranged upon op-
posite sides of the transmitter-bar, said mem-
bers being movable simultaneously into and
out of engagement with said bar. 80
8. The combination, with the sound box of
a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar, of a
tone-modulator, comprising a support adapt-
ed for attachment to the sound-box, and de-
vices carried by said support and arranged 85
upon opposite sides of the transmitter-bar,
for engagement with said bar.
9. The combination, with the sound box of
a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar, of a
tone-modulator, comprising a support adapt- 90
ed for attachment to the sound-box, a pair
of jaws carried by the support and arranged
for engagement with the transmitter-bar,
and means for adjusting the tension of said
jaws upon said bar. 95
10. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box, a
pair of jaws pivoted to the support and ar- 100
ranged upon opposite sides of the transmit-
ter-bar, for engagement therewith, and
means for adjusting the tension of said jaws
upon said bar.
11. The combination, with the sound box 105
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box, a
pair of jaws pivoted to the support and ar-
ranged upon opposite sides of the transmit- 11 0
ter-bar, for engagement therewith, and end-
wise-movable means for adjusting the ten-
sion of said jaws upon said bar.
12. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar, 115
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box, a
pair of jaws pivoted to the support and ar-
ranged upon opposite sides of the transmit-
ter-bar, for engagement therewith, and an 120
endwise-movable member carried by said
support and engaged with said jaws, for ad-
justing the tension of said jaws upon said
bar.
13. The combination, with the sound box 125
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box, a
pair of jaws pivoted intermediate their ends
to the support and arranged upon opposite 130
905,220
3
10
15
20
zo
30
35
40
45
50
sides of the transmitter-bar, and an endwise-
movable member having one end thereof ex-
tending between the adjacent ends of said
jaws, for forcing the other ends of the latter
into engagement with said bar.
14. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box, a
pair of jaws pivoted intermediate their ends
to the support and arranged upon opposite
sides of the transmitter-bar, and an endwise-
movable member having a tapered end ex-
tending between the adjacent ends of said
jaws, for forcing the other ends of the latter
into engagement with said bar.
15. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter -bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box, a
pair of jaws pivoted intermediate their ends
to the support and arranged upon opposite
sides of the transmitter-bar, and an endwise-
movable rotatable member having a tapered
end extending between the adjacent ends of
said jaws, for forcing the other ends of the
latter into engagement with said bar.
16. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box, a
pair of jaws pivoted intermediate their ends
to the support and arranged upon opposite
sides of the transmitter-bar ; means for nor-
mally forcing the lower ends of the jaws
away from each other and from the bar ; and
means arranged for engagement with the
upper end of said jaws to force said lower
ends towards each other and into engage-
ment with said bar, against the action of the
first-mentioned means.
17. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box, a
pair of jaws pivoted intermediate their ends
to the support and arranged upon opposite
sides of the transmitter-bar ; means for nor-
mally forcing the lower ends of the jaws
away from each other and from the bar, and
the upper ends thereof towards each other;
and an endwise-movable member having its
lower end fitting between the upper ends of
said jaws, for forcing the same away from
each other and the lower ends thereof to-
wards each other and into engagement with
said bar, against the action of the first-men-
tioned means.
18. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box, a
pair of jaws pivoted intermediate their ends
to the support and arranged upon opposite
sides of the transmitter - bar ; means for
75
normally forcing the lower ends of the jaws
away from each other and from the bar, and
the upper ends thereof towards each other;
and an endwise-movable member having a
tapered lower end fitting between the upper 7q
ends of said jaws, for forcing the same away
from each other and the lower ends thereof
towards each other and into engagement
with said bar, against the action of the first-
mentioned means.
19. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box,
and a pair of oppositely-disposed members 80
carried by the support and movable into
and out of engagement with the transmit-
ter-bar, each member being provided with a
facing of yielding material.
20. The combination, with the sound box 85
of a graphophone, and its transmitter -bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound box,
and a pair of oppositely-disposed members
carried by the support and movable into 90
and out of engagement with the transmit-
ter-bar, each member being provided with a
facing of rubber.
21. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar, 95
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box,
and a pair of oppositely-disposed jaws piv-
oted to the support and movable into and
out of engagement with the transmitter-bar, 100
each jaw being provided with a facing of
yielding material.
22. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support 105
adapted for attachment to the sound-box,
and a pair of oppositely-disposed jaws piv-
oted to the support and movable into and
out of engagement with the transmitter-bar,
each jaw being provided with a facing of no
rubber.
23. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box, 115
and gripping means carried by the support
and arranged for engagement with the trans-
mitter-bar.
24. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar, 120
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box,
gripping means carried by the support and
arranged for engagement with the trans-
mitter-bar ; and means for adjusting the ten- 125
sion of said gripping means upon said bar.
25. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box, 130
4=
905,220
and gripping means carried by the support
and arranged for engagement -with the trans-
mitter-bar, the gripping edges of said means
having a facing of yielding material secured
5 thereto.
2(3. The combination, with the sound box
of a graphophone, and its transmitter-bar,
of a tone-modulator, comprising a support
adapted for attachment to the sound-box,
10 and gripping means carried by the support
and arranged for engagement with the trans-
mitter-bar, the gripping edges of said means
having a facing of rubber secured thereto.
In testimony whereof, we affix our signa-
tures in presence of two witnesses.
JESSE E. O'NEEL. .
EUGENE JENKINS.
Witnesses :
Wesley Rush,
A. W. Severance.
905,855.
. L. H. DEVINEAU.
PHONOGBAPHIC HOEN.
APPLICATION FILED MAB. 16, 1908.
Patented Dec. 8, 1908.
-F'ZG.Z
I^zc?
fVrrjvu'sf^Er^
Jjns&z/virajZ;
Mjt 7<3*/c? &*>«££ MCoC/
THE NORR/S PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, O. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
LOUIS H. DEVINEAU, OF CLEVELAND, OHIO.
PHONOGRAPHIC HORN.
No. 905,855.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 8, 1908.
Application filed March 16, 1908. Serial No. 421,394.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Louis H. Devineau,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
Cleveland, in the county of Cuyahoga and
5 State of Ohio, have invented a certain new
and useful Improvement in Phonographic
Horns, of which the following is a full, clear,
and exact description, reference being had
to the accompanying drawings.
10 My invention relates to phonographic
horns and the means for supporting the same
in cooperation with the phonograph.
The object of the invention is first, the
provision of a support which will distribute
15 the weight of the horn upon the members
which support it, at the same time allowing
the horn to be freely rotated in a horizontal
plane; second, the arrangement of the sup-
porting portion of the horn so that the
20 swivel comes in the line of the center of
gravity of the horn.
Reference should be had to the accom-
panying drawings, in which
Figure 1 is a side elevation of a phono-
25 graph, showing my horn supported in proper
position; Fig. 2 is a plan view of Fig. 1, the
bell of the horn being indicated in dotted
fines; Fig. 3 is a side elevation, partly sec-
tional, of the horn and swiveled section;
30 Fig. 4 is a sectional elevation of the swivel
joint; Fig. 5 is a similar view sectioned
without reference to the nature of the ma-
terial preferred.
The phonograph shown is of ordinary and
35 well known construction, and may be briefly
stated as comprising tfie casing 1, which
contains the operating mechanism and which
is surmounted by a carriage 2 which sup-
ports the reproducer 3. This carriage is
40 mounted upon suitable tracks 4 and 5 along
which it is adapted to travel by reason of its
engagement with the screw threaded shaft 6,
in a manner well known in the art. This
shaft 6 actuates a mandrel 7 which in turn
45 supports the record cylinder. Tfie mandrel
is suitably supported in stationary brackets
mounted upon tfie casing 1.
Tfie fiorn comprises twTo hollow elbows 8
and 9, which are connected by a swivel
50 joint, and a flaring bell carried by the larger
end of the upper elbow. The two elbows
are so swiveled that the upper part 9 may
rotate with respect to the lower part 8 and
yet be inseparably held thereto. The lower
55 part or supporting section 8 is adapted to be
secured upon the reproducer in any con-
venient manner. The ordinary reproducer
is formed with a tubular portion extending
from its upper face, and in the form shown
the lower portion of the member 8 surrounds 60
such tubular projection and is secured in
place thereon by a set screw as indicated at
10. The upper elbow, or turning section 9
of the horn, is given the form shown, the
upper portion being formed with an en- 65
larged flaring bowl which engages the smaller
end of the bell 15 and securely holds it,
The bell is made of ligfit material, as paper,
or aluminum, for example. The lower part
or smaller end of the elbow 9 is formed with 70
an annular rib 11 and a shoulder 12. The
upper end of the member 8 is sleeved over
this smaller end of the member 9 and is
formed with an annular groove or depression
13 which engages the rib 11, while the end 75
of the member 8 abuts against the shoul-
der 12.
The described joint may be made by first
forming the shoulder and rib upon the mem-
ber 9 then placing the upper part of the 80
member 8 over the lower part of the member
9, the member 8 being sufficiently great in
diameter to slip over the ridge 11, and then
applying pressure to the sleeve by means of
suitable dies so as to conform the sleeve 8 to 85
fit around the rib 11 and abut against the
flange 12. It will be seen that the members
8 and 9 are held securely together and yet
relative movement between them is per-
mitted. 90
The support is designed in such manner
that when it is mounted upon the reproducer
the plane of the vertical axis of the swivel
joint will substantially divide the distance
between the points of support of the repro- 95
ducer. In practice, the machines are so con-
structed that the axis of the mandrel shaft
which supports the record C}dinder will also
lie in this same plane. Moreover, the pro-
portions of the bell and elbow 9 are such that 100
the center of gravity of the combined horn
will likewise lie in the plane of the vertical
axis of the swivel joint.
From the above description it is clear that
a single vertical line will pass through the 105
center of gravity of the horn with its elbow,
and will substantially divide the distance be-
tween the points of support of the sound re-
producer and pass substantially through the
axis of the mandrel. Therefore, it follows lit'
that the weight of the horn will be equally
borne by the front and rear rails which sup-
Q
905,856
port the carriage 5. This will prevent un-
equal friction between the frame and the
rails 4 and 5, and thereb}7 secure a more even
and smooth running of the reproducer along
5 the record cylinder. Again, there will be no
bending effect upon the swivel joint, due to
the fact that the center of gravity of the horn
lies in the vertical axis of the joint, therefore
the horn may be turned in any desired direc-
10 tion and have a perfect balance at all times.
The material from which the elbows are
made is non-metallic and may be hard rub-
ber (which is six times lighter than brass or
steel), papier mache, compressed fiber, cellu-
15 loid, or any analogous substance. This al-
lows the easy formation of the swivel joint.
Moreover, I have found that a non-metallic
substance, such as mentioned, practically
does away with the metallic character of the
20 sound which is produced in the ordinary
talking machine.
I claim :
1 . A support for phonographic horns hav-
ing oppositely disposed elbows, said support
25 being swiveled intermediately of said elbows,
combined with a reproducer which supports
said horn.
2. A support for phonographic horns com-
prising two members swivelly joined together
30 and provided with oppositely disposed elbows
at their opposite ends, combined with a re-
producer which supports said horn.
3. In a phonograph, the combination of a
reproducer, and a support mounted thereon
35 having oppositely disposed elbows, a swivel
between said elbows and a horn mounted
upon said support extending upon both sides
of the point of support.
4. In a phonograph, the combination of a
40 reproducer and a laterally extending horn
supported thereby, said horn extending upon
both sides of the point of its support and hav-
ing a swivel in the plane of the center of
gravity of the horn.
45 5. In a phonograph, the combination of a
reproducer and a laterally extending horn
supported thereby, said support comprising
members swivelly connected together, said
horn extending upon both sides of the swivel
joint. 50
6. In a phonograph, a reproducer, a mem-
ber mounted upon said reproducer, a second
member swivelly connected to the first mem-
ber, and a horn supported by the second
member extending laterally upon both sides 55
of the support of the first member.
7. In a phonograph, the combination of a
reproducer, means for supporting said repro-
ducer, and a horn supported upon said re-
producer, said horn being swiveled in a ver- 60
tical plane passing between the points of
suppoit of the reproducer and extending lat-
erally upon both sides of the point of support.
8. In a phonograph, the combination of a
reproducer, a horn supported upon said re- 65
producer, said horn being swiveled about an
axis which passes through the center of grav-
ity of the horn.
9. The combination with a phonograph
reproducer, of a horn having a swivel sub- 70
stantially in the line of the center of gravity
of the horn.
10. In a phonograph, a reproducer, means
for supporting said reproducer, a horn sup-
port carried upon said reproducer, an elbow 75
carried by said support, and a bell carried by
said elbow, said support and elbow being
swiveled together in a vertical plane which
passes through a point between the points of
the support of the reproducer, and also 80
through the center of gravity of the horn.
11. In a phonograph, the combination of
a reproducer, a support mounted upon said
reproducer having oppositely disposed el-
bows, said horn being swiveled intermediately 8 5
of elbows in a plane which passes through the
center of gravity of the horn.
In testimony whereof, I hereunto affix my
signature in the presence of two witnesses.
LOUIS H. DEVINEAU.
Witnesses :
Albert H. Bates,
A. J. Hudson.
W. H. MARTIN.
SOUND BOX.
APPLICATION. PILED FEB. 3, 1908.
905,899.
Patented Dec. 8, 1908.
<J!3^9.^.
i£#&.&
*** i3£q-4*
S «OR»IS F-ETEBS CO., WASHINOTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM H. MARTIN, OF MOBILE, ALABAMA.
SOUND-BOX.
No. 905,899.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 8, 1908.
Application filed February 3, 1908. Serial No. 414,047.
To all wliom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William H. Martin,
a citizen of the United States, residing at
'Mobile, in the county of Mobile and State of
5 Alabama, have invented new and useful Im-
provements in Sound-Boxes, of which the fol-
lowing is a specification.
This invention relates to sound reproduc-
ing boxes for use in connection with grapho-
io phones, gramophones, phonographs or other
sound-recording and reproducing machines,
and is designed, primarily as an improve-
ment upon the form of sound boxes dis-
closed in my application Serial Number
15 336,473, filed September 27, 1906, and is
particularly adapted for use in connection
with graphophones; but it is to be under-
stood that the invention is adapted for any
purposes for which it is found applicable,
20 an d the object thereof is to provide in a
manner as hereinafter set forth a sound box
for graphophones whereby an improved
character of sound is produced, and further-
more whereby the sound can be regulated
85 when occasion so requires, and whereby all
scratching of the stylus on the disk is prac-
ticallv obliterated, being reduced to a mini-
muni.
The invention further aims to provide a
30 sound box for the purpose referred to and in
a manner as hereinafter set forth, which
shall be simple in its construction and ar-
rangement, strong, durable, efficient in its
use, attaining an improved character of
35 sound, with means for regulating the sound,
readily set up with respect to the instrument
and comparatively inexpensive to manu-
facture, and with the reducing of scratching
to a minimum.
40 With the foregoing and other objects in
view, the invention consists of the novel con-
struction, combination and arrangement of
parts hereinafter more specifically described
and illustrated in the accompanying draw-
45 ings, wherein is shown the preferred em-
bodiment of the invention, but it is to be
understood that changes, variations and
modifications can be resorted to which come
within the scope of the claims hereunto ap-
50 pended.
In the drawings, wherein like reference
characters denote corresponding parts
throughout the several views— Figure 1 is a
vertical sectional view of a sound box in ac-
55 cordancewith this invention; Fig. 2 is alike
10
view taken at right angles to Fig. 1 ; Fig. 3 is a
bottom plan; Fig. 4 is a detail; Fig. 5 is a
perspective view showing the supporting
means for the stylus head, the latter having
a stylus bar and stylus attached thereto. 60
Fig. 6 is a side elevation showing a modified
form of stylus bar.
Referring to the drawings by reference
characters, the body portion of the sound
box is formed of two sections, 1,2, the former 65
being dome-shaped, and the latter being cy-
lindrical. The outer end of the section 1 is
cut away to provide an opening 3 and the
inner end of the section 2 has its inner face
cut away to provide a shoulder 4 and a flange 70
5. The latter surrounds the inner end of the
section 1 and abuts against a washer 5a,
mounted upon a shoulder 6 formed integral
with the section 1, and through the shoulder
6 and engaging in the flange 5 extends retain-
ing screws 7 whereby the sections 1, 2 are se-
cured together. Ordinarily the sections 1
and 2 are pressed in together, tightly fitting
for small boxes, but for larger instruments
the security may be doubled by the employ- so
nient of the screws 7 if required.
Interposed between the inner edge of the
section 1 and the shoulder 4 is the thickened
perimeter 8 of a metallic diaphragm 9. The
central portion of the diaphragm 9 is thick- S3
ened, as at 10, whereby the part of the dia-
phragm 9 between the portion 10 and the
perimeter is thin and substantially concavo-
convex in contour. The diaphragm 9 is se-
cured in position between the sections 1, 2 90
through the medium of the tightly fitting of
the sections or the retaining screws 7 when
required and by setting up the diaphragm in
the manner referred to vastly improves the
character of sound produced. 95
Extending through the central portion 10,
as well as being connected thereto is a headed
screw 11, the head thereof abutting against
said portion 10 and having attached thereto
the end 12 of a spring coil 13, the coils of the 100
spring gradually increasing in diameter out-
wardly, that is towards the opening 3 of the
section 1. Mounted upon the central portion
10 of the diaphragm 9 is a block 14 diamond-
shaped in cross section and which is con- 105
nected to the screw 11 and formed with a ver-
tically - extending opening 15 which consti-
tutes a socket. Connected to the block 14 is
a transversely-extending set screw 16, the
inner end thereof projecting into the socket HO
905,899
15 and in alinement with the inner end of the
screw 11, said inner end of the screw 11 also
projecting into the socket 15. The inner
ends of tne screws 11, 16 constitute contacts.
5 The block 14 and screws 11 and 16 associate
with the stylus bar, as will be hereinafter re-
ferred to.
The section 2 has its outer edge cut away to
form a seat 17 against which is mounted a
10 metallic diaphragm 18, the latter being se-
cured in position by the holdfast devices 19,
said devices extending through the dia-
phragm 18 and engaging in the section 2.
The bottom of the section 2 is formed with a
15 transversely - extending pocket 20, which
communicates with a vertically - extending
opening 21. The function of the pocket 20
and opening 21 will be hereinafter referred
to. The section 2 is furthermore provided
20 at each terminus of the pocket 20 with a
semi-cylindrical socket 22, in which is mount-
ed the pins 23 projecting from the section 2
and each constituting a fulcrum for one end
of a flexible suspending means 24 for the sty-
25 lus head. The said flexible suspending
means consists of a narrow strip of resilient
metallic material having each end portion
bent upwardly at an inclination, as at 25 and
through which extends connecting screws 26.
30 These latter engage in the section 2 and are
so set up that the ends of the suspending de-
vice 24 can be adjustably connected to the
section 2. The suspending device 24 is
mounted in the pocket 20 and bears against
35 the fulcrums 23 and said suspending device
24, approximately centrally thereof is pro-
vided with an opening 27 which registers
with the opening 21.
Extending through the opening 27, as well
40 as through the opening 21 and projecting
into the section 2 is the reduced inner end 2S
of a stylus head 29. The reduced inner end
28 of the head 29 forms a shoulder 30 which
abuts against the outer face of the suspend-
45 ing device 24. The head 29 is formed with a
vertically-extending opening 30 a, the inner
portion of which is screw-threaded as at 31
and the head 29 is furthermore provided
with a screw-threaded opening 32 winch in-
50 tersects the opening 30 a. Arranged within
the opening 30 a of the head 29 is a cushion-
ing abutment 33 against which engages a
stylus 34 positioned in the outer end of the
opening 30 a. Engaging in the screw-thread-
55 ed portion 31 of the opening 30 a is the screw-
threaded end of the stylus bar 36, the latter
extending in the socket 15 and between the
inner ends of the screws 1] and 16. The
stylus 34 is secured in the head 29 through
60 the medium of the pointed end 37 of the
binding screw 38, the said pointed end 37
being slightly curved so that it does not come
in contact with the stylus 34 in a perpendicu-
lar manner, but rather to the side edge of the
65 stylus. The object in this is that the en-
gagement between the said pointed end of
the screw with the stylus is gradual and
therefore, the tighter the screw when turned
in the stylus bar head the more firmly the
stylus is held thus avoiding any and all me- 70
tallic sounds either from the looseness of the
stylus or from the looseness of the screw.
Positioned against the stylus head 29 is a re-
silient washer 39. Arranged against the
washer 39 is a metallic washer 40, and bear- 75
ing against the metallic washer 40 is the head
41 of the screw 38, the latter extending
through the two washers. The function of
the resilient washer 39 is to hold the screw at
whatever position it is placed and the func- go
tion of the metallic washer is to prevent the
screw from coming in contact with and wear-
ing the resilient washer. By the arrange-
ment of the screw in a manner as set forth,
the sound emanating from the box can be 85
raised or lowered to any pitch desired. This
is evident owing to the manner in which the
pointed end of the screw can be adjusted
with respect to its engagement with the
stylus. 90
The stylus bar which is referred to by the
reference character 36 embodies a resilient
section 35 and a shouldered section 35 a, the
shouldered section 35 a being formed with a
screw-threaded shank 35b and a flattened 95
extension 35c. The resilient section of the
stylus bar is formed from a fiat strip of spring
metal and is bent upon itself, as clearly
shown in Fig. 1 and with the ends straddling
the extension 35c, the ends of the .extension 100
35 and extension 35c being secured together
by the hold-fast device 35 d. By such an ar-
rangement a space is formed within the, re-
silient section 35. The resilient section 35
of the stylus bar 36 extends in the socket 15 105
and is adapted to be engaged by the screws
11 and 16. The screw-threaded shank of
the section 35a engages with the screw-thread-
ed portion 31 of the wall of the opening 30 a
formed in the head 29. By setting up the 110
resilient section in a manner as described the
said resilient section extends in the socket
15, the flat inner sides thereof contact with
the screws 12 and 16.
Owing to the flexibility of that end of the 115
stylus bar which extends in the socket 15
means is provided whereby natural sound
melody and volume is obtained.
In Fig. 6 of the drawings a modified form
of stylus bar is set up and which consists in 120
separating the inner terminus of the resil-
ient section of the stylus bar so as to pro-
vide said section of two resilient members
indicated by the reference characters 35e
and 35n. Otherwise than that as stated 120
the construction shown in Fig. 6 is the
same as that shown in Fig. 5.
The stylus bar retains the resilient abut-
ment 33 within the stylus head and the free
end of the said stylus bar 36 vibrates be- 130
905,899
3
tween the inner ends of the screws 11 and 16.
The space in which the inner end of the sty-
lus bar vibrates is regulated by the screw 16.
By setting up the suspending device 24 in
a manner referred to, the head 29 being rig-
idly secured to the said device 24, the ten-
sion of the bar can be so regulated owing to
the adjustability of the screws 26, that a
complete elimination of all flatness of sound
10 is had which otherwise would affect the inner
end of the stylus bar.
What I claim is —
1. A sound box comprising a vibratory
diaphragm having a thickened perimeter, a
15 thickened central portion, that part of the
diaphragm between the said central portion
and perimeter being relatively thin and sub-
stantially concavo convex, tne thin portion
of the diaphragm being of greater length than
20 the remaining portion thereof, adjustable
contacts carried by said diaphragm, a stylus
bar having one end vibrating between said
contacts, and a stylus connected with said
bar.
25 2. A sound box comprising a vibratory
diaphragm positioned intermediate the ends
of the box and having a part thereof sub-
stantially concavo-convex in contour, con-
tact points carried by said diaphragm, a
30 vibratory stylus bar having one end vibrat-
ing between said contacts, and a stylus con-
nected with said bar.
3. A sound box comprising a vibratory
diaphragm positioned intermediate the ends
35 of the box and having a part thereof substan-
tially concavo convex in contour, adjustable
contacts carried by said diaphragm, a stylus
bar having one end vibrating between said
contacts and embodying a doubled resilient
40 section, and a stylus connected with said bar.
4. A sound box comprising a body portion
having an opening at one end, a vibratory
diaphragm positioned at a point intermediate
the ends of the body portion, adjustable
45 contacts carried by the diaphragm, a coiled
spring having one end fixed to one of said
contacts, a stylus bar having its inner end
vibrating between said contacts, and a stylus
connected with said bar.
50 5. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a vibratory stylus bar carried thereby and
embodying a doubled resilient section, a
stylus extending in the head, and a vibra-
tory suspending device for said head.
55 6. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a vibratory stylus bar carried thereby and
embodying a doubled resilient section, a
stylus extending in the head, a vibratory
suspending device for said head, and a regu-
60 lating device engaging in the stylus for secur-
ing it within the head.
7. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a vibratory stylus bar carried thereby and
embodying a 'doubled resilient section, a
stylus extending in the head, a vibratory 65
suspending device for said head, a regulating
device engaging in the stylus for securing
it within the head, a vibratory diaphragm,
and a pair of contacts carried thereby and
between which one end of the stylus bar vi- 70
brates.
8. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a vibratory stylus bar carried thereby and
embodying a doubled resilient section, a
stylus extending in the head, a vibratory 75
suspending device for said head, a regulating
device engaging in the stylus head and con-
tacting with the stylus for securing it within
the head, a vibratory diaphragm, and a pair
of adjustable contacts carried thereby and 80
between which one end of the stylus bar vi-
brates.
9. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a resilient suspending device therefor, said
device having angularly - disposed ends, a 85
fulcruming means for said suspending device
at each end thereof, a stylus bar attached to
the inner end of the head, and a stylus at-
tached to the outer end of the head.
10. A sound box comprising a stylus head, 90
a resilient suspending device therefor, said
device having angularly - disposed ends, a
fulcruming means for said suspending de-
vice at each end thereof, a stylus bar at-
tached to the inner end of the head, a stylus 95
attached to the outer end of the head, and a
regulating means carried by the head and
engaging the stylus for securing the latter
within the head:
11. A sound box comprising a stylus head, 100
a resilient suspending device therefor, said
device having angularly - disposed ends, a
duplex fulcruming means for said suspending
device, a stylus bar attached to the inner end
of the head and embodying a doubled resili- 105
ent section, a stylus attached to the outer
end of the head, and a regulating screw ex-
tending in the head and having a curved
pointed end engaging with the stylus for se-
curing it in position. 110
12. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a resilient suspending device therefor, said
device having angularly - disposed ends, a
duplex fulcruming means for said suspending
device, a stylus bar attached to tha inner end 115
of the head and embodying a doubled re-
silient section, a stylus attached to the outer
j end of the head, a regulating screw extend-."
| ing in the head and having a curved pointed
; end engaging with the stylus for securing it 12 ^
in position, and a cushioning means for said
screw.
13. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a duplex fulcrumed resilient suspending de-
vice for said head, a resilient abutment ar- 125
ranged in the head, a stylus bar secured to
theinner portion of the head and engaging
said abutment and having a doubled re-
905,896
silient inner section, and a stylus mounted in
the outer portion of the head and engaging
said abutment.
14. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
5 a duplex fulcrumed resilient suspending de-
vice for said head, a resilient abutment ar-
ranged in the head, a stylus bar secured to
the inner portion of the head and engaging
said abutment and having a doubled re-
10 silient inner section, a stylus mounted in the
outer portion of the head and engaging said
abutment, and adjustable tensioning means
for said suspending device.
15. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
15 a duplex fulcrumed resilient suspending de-
vice for said head, a resilient abutment ar-
ranged in the head, a stylus bar secured to
the inner portion of the head and engaging
said abutment and having a doubled re-
20 silient inner section, a stylus mounted in the
outer portion of the head and engaging said
abutment, adjustable tensioning means for
said suspending device, and a regulating-
means carried by the head and engaging
25 with the stylus for retaining it in position.
16. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a resilient suspending device for said head
said suspension device provided with an
angularly disposed ends, a fulcrum for each
30 of said ends, a resilient abutment arranged
in the head, a stylus bar secured to the inner
portion of the head and engaging said abut-
ment, a stylus mounted in the outer portion
of the head and engaging said abutment, a
35 vibratory diaphragm, and a pair of contacts
between which the free end of said stylus bar
vibrates.
17. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a resilient suspending device for said head
40 said suspension device provided with angu-
larly disposed ends, a fulcrum for each of said
ends, a resilient abutment arranged in the
head, a stylus bar secured to the inner por-
tion of the head and engaging said abutment,
45 a stylus mounted in the outer portion of the
head and engaging said abutment, adjust-
able tensioning means for said device, a vi-
bratory diaphragm, and a pair of contacts
between which the free end of said stylus bar
50 vibrates.
18. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a resilient suspending device for said head
said suspension device provided with angu-
larly disposed ends, a fulcrum for each of said
55 ends, a resilient abutment arranged in the
head, a stylus bar secured to the inner por-
tion of the head and engaging said abutment,
a stylus mounted in the outer portion of the
head and engaging said abutment, adjust-
CO able tensioning means for said suspending
device, a regulating means carried by the
head and engaging with the stylus for re-
taining it in position, a vibratory diaphragm,
and a pair of contacts between which the
65 free end of said stylus bar vibrates.
19. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a resilient suspending device for said head
said suspension device provided with angu-
larly disposed ends, a fulcrum for each of
said ends, a resilient abutment arranged in 70
the head, a stylus bar secured to the inner
portion of the head and engaging said abut-
ment, a stylus mounted in the outer portion
of the head and engaging said abutment, a
vibratory diaphragm, adjustable contacts 75
carried thereby and between which the end
of the stylus bar vibrates, and a coiled spring
having one end fixed to one of said contacts.
20. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a resilient suspending device for said head so
said suspension device provided with angu-
larly disposed ends, a fulcrum for each of
said ends, a resilient abutment arranged in
the head, a stylus bar secured to the inner
portion of the head and engaging said abut- S5
ment, a stylus mounted in the outer portion
of the head and engaging said abutment, ad-
justable tensioning means for said suspend-
ing device, a vibratory diaphragm, adjust-
able contacts carried thereby and between 90
which the free end of the stylus bar vibrates,
and a coiled spring having one end fixed to
one of said contacts.
21. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a resilient suspending device for said head 95
said suspension device provided with angu-
larly disposed ends, a fulcrum for each of
said ends, a resilient abutment arranged in
the head, a stylus bar secured to the inner
portion of the head and engaging said abut- 100
ment, a stylus mounted in the outer portion
of the head and engaging said abutment,
adjustable tensioning means for said sus-
pending device, a regulating means carried
by the head and engaging with the stylus 105
for retaining it in position, a vibratory dia-
phragm, adjustable contacts carried thereby
and between which the free end of the stylus
bar vibrates, and a coiled spring having one
end fixed to one of said contacts. 110
22. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a resilient suspending device for said head
said suspension device provided with angu-
larly disposed ends, a fulcrum for each of
said ends, a resilient abutment arranged in lis
the head, a stylus bar secured to the inner
portion of the head and engaging said abut-
ment, a stylus mounted in the outer portion
of the head and engaging said abutment, a
vibratory diaphragm having a substantially 120
concavo-convex portion, and a pair of con-
tacts carried by the diaphragm and between
which the inner end or said stylus bar vi-
brates.
23. A sound box comprising a stylus head, 125
a resilient suspending device for said head
said suspension device provided with angu-
larly disposed ends, a fulcrum for each of
said ends, a resilient abutment arranged in
the head, a stylus bar secured to the inner 13°
905,899
s
portion of the head and engaging said abut-
ment, a stylus mounted in the outer portion
of the head and engaging said abutment,
adjustable tensioning means for said sus-
5_pending device, a vibratory diaphragm hav-
ing a substantially concavo convex portion,
and a pair of contacts carried by the dia-
phragm and between which the inner end of
said stylus bar vibrates.
10 '24. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a resilient suspending device for said head
said suspension device provided with angu-
larly disposed ends, a fulcrum for each of
said ends, a resilient abutment arranged in
15 the head, a stylus bar secured to the inner
portion of the head and engaging said abut-
ment, a stylus mounted in the outer portion
of the head and engaging said abutment,
adjustable tensioning means for said sus-
20 pending device, a regulating means carried
by the head and engaging with the stylus
for retaining it in position, a vibratory dia-
phragm having a substantially concavo con-
vex portion, and a pair of contacts carried by
25 the diaphragm and between which the inner
end of said stylus bar vibrates.
25. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a resilient suspending device for said head
said suspension device provided with angu-
30 larly disposed ends, a fulcrum for each of
said ends, a resilient abutment arranged in
the head, a stylus bar secured to the inner
portion of the head and engaging said abut-
ment, a stylus mounted in the outer portion
35 of the head and engaging said abutment, a
vibratory diaphragm having a part thereof
substantially concavo convex in contour, ad-
justable contacts carried thereby and be-
tween which the free end of the stylus bar
40 vibrates, and a coiled spring having one end
fixed to one of said contacts.
26. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a resilient suspending device for said head
said suspension device provided with angu-
45 larly disposed ends, a fulcrum for each of
said ends, a resilient abutment arranged in
the head, a stjdus bar secured to the inner
portion of the head and engaging said abut-
ment, a stylus mounted in the outer portion
50 of the head and engaging said abutment, ad-
justable tensioning means for said suspend-
ing device, a vibratory diaphragm having a
part thereof substantially concavo convex in
contour, adjustable contacts carried thereby
55 and between which the free end of the stylus
bar vibrates, and a coiled spring having one
end fixed to one of said contacts.
27. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a fulcrumed resilient suspending device for
CO said head, a resilient abutment arranged in
the head, a stylus bar secured to the inner
portion of the head and engaging said abut-
ment and embodying an inner doubled re-
silient section, a stylus mounted in the outer
65 portion of the head and engaging said abut-
ment, adjustable tensioning means for said
suspending device, a regulating means car-
ried by the head and engaging with the sty-
lus for retaining it in position, a vibratory
diaphragm having a part thereof substan- 7c
tiaily concavo convex in contour, adjustable
contacts carried thereby and between which
the free end of the stylus bar vibrates, and a
coiled spring having one end fixed to one of
said contacts 75
28. A sound box embodying a body por-
tion formed of two sections one being dome-
shaped, a diaphragm fixed to one of said sec-
tions, a diaphragm interposed between said
sections and having a part thereof substan- go
tiaily concavo convex in contour, said con-
cave portion of said diaphragm in cross sec-
tion of greater length than the remaining por-
tion.of the diaphragm, a pair of contacts car-
ried by said last mentioned diaphragm, a 85
coiled spring having one end fixed to one of
said contacts and the other vibrating freely
inside the dome-shaped section of the box,
a stylus bar vibrating between said contacts
and having an inner end capable of being 90
tensioned, a head connected to one end of the
stylus bar, a stylus mounted within said
head, a regulating means for securing the
stylus in position, and a vibratory suspend-
ing device for the stylus head. 95
29. A sound box embodying a body por-
tion formed of two sections, a diaphragm
fixed to one of said sections, a diaphragm in-
terposed between said sections and having a
part thereof substantially concavo convex in 100
contour, a pair of contacts carried by said
last mentioned diaphragm, a coiled spring
having one end fixed to one of said contacts,
a stylus bar embodying a doubled resilient
inner section vibrating between said con- 105
tacts, a head connected to one end of the
stylus bar, a stylus mounted within said
head, a regulating means for securing the
stylus in position, and a fulcrumed and vi-
bratory suspending device for said head. 110
30. A sound box embodying a body por-
tion formed of two sections, a diaphragm
fixed to one of said sections, a diaphragm in-
terposed between said sections and having a
part thereof substantially concavo convex in 115
contour, a pair of contacts carried by said
last mentioned diaphragm, a coiled spring
having one end fixed to one of said contacts
a stylus bar embodying a doubled resilient
inner section vibrating between said con- 120
tacts, a head connected to outer end of the
stylus bar, a stylus mounted within said
head, a regulating means for securing the
stylus in position, a fulcrumed and vibratory
suspending device for said head, and adjust- 12£
able tensioning means for said suspending de-
vice.
31. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a vibratory suspending device therefor, said
device consisting of a rectangular strip of ±30
90S, 899
resilient material having angularly-disposed
ends, a fulcrum for each angular end of said
strip, and adjustable securing means for the
strip.
5 32. A sound box embodying a body por-
tion formed of two sections, a stylus head, a
vibratory suspension device therefor, said de-
vice embodying a strip of resilient material
having its ends angularly disposed and
10 tightly drawn, said device further embody-
ing a fulcruming means for said strip and
means for adjustably securing the strip to the
body portion of the box, a diaphragm inter-
posed between the said sections and having
15 a portion thereof substantially concavo con-
vex in contour, a pair of contacts carried by
said last mentioned diaphragm, an actuating
coil spring positioned within one of the sec-
tions of the box, one end of said spring fixed
20 to one of said contacts and the other end vi-
brating freely, and a stylus bar having a dou-
bled resilient inner end capable of being
placed under tension and vibrating between
said contacts.
25 33. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a pair of contacts, a stylus carried by said
head, a stylus bar secured to the head and
having a resilient inner end capable of being-
placed under tension, said resilient end vi-
30 brating between said contacts.
34. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
a pair of contacts, a stylus carried by said
head, a stylus bar secured to the head and
having a resilient inner end capable of being
35 placed under tension, said resilient end vi-
brating between said contacts, one of said
contacts constituting means for varying the
tension of the resilient end of the stylus bar,
thereby regulating the sounds produced by
40 the box.
35. A sound box comprising a stylus head
carrying a stylus, a stylus bar formed of a
rigid and a resilient section, said rigid sec-
tion provided with means whereby it can be
45 secured to the stylus head, said resilient sec-
tion capable of having its tension varied, and
a pair of contacts associating with the re-
silient section of the stylus bar.
36. A sound box comprising a stylus head,
50 a stylus carried thereby, a stylus bar em-
bodying a rigid and a resilient section, said
resilient section formed of two flat spring
members capable of being placed under ten-
sion, and a contact associating with each of
55 said members, one of said contacts being ad-
justable, whereby the tension of said mem-
bers can be varied thereby regulating the
sound produced by the box.
37. A sound box comprising a stylus head
and vibratory suspending device therefor, a 60
stylus carried by the head, a stylus bar hav-
ing a resilient inner end capable of being
placed under tension, means whereby the
outer end of the stylus bar can be connected
to the stylus head, a pair of contacts asso- 65
ciating with the resilient inner end of the
stylus bar, one of said contacts adjustable
whereby the tension of the inner end of said
stylus bar can be varied thereby regulating
the sound produced by the box. 7 0
38. A sound box embodying a stylus bar
consisting of a rigid and a resilient section,
said resilient section formed of a pair of flat
spring members having one end fixed to the
rigid section, said members capable of being 75
placed under varying degrees of tension.
39. A sound box embodying a stylus bar
consisting of a rigid and a resilient section,
said resilient section formed of a pair of flat
spring members having one end fixed to the 80
rigid section, said members capable of being
placed under varying degrees of tension,
combined with a stylus carried by said head
and a pair of contacts associating with said
members, one of said contacts being adjust- 85
able whereby the tension of said members
can be varied and the sound produced regu-
lated.
40. A sound box comprising a vibratory
diaphragm positioned intermediate the, ends 90
of the box and having a part thereof sub-
stantially concavo convex in contour, a socket
forming member positioned at one side of the
diaphragm, an adjustable contact extending
through the diaphragm and projecting into 95
the socket formed by said member, an actu-
ating coiled spring fixed to one end of said
contact, a contact mounted in said member
and extending in the socket, a stylus head, a
stylus carried thereby, and a stylus bar com- 100
prising a fixed and a resilient section, said
fixed section secured to the stylus head and
said resilient section capable of being placed
under tension, said resilient section oscillat-
ing between said contacts, said adjustable 105
contact providing means whereby the ten-
sion of said resilient section can be varied
and the sounds reproduced regulated.
In testimony whereof I have hereunto set
my hand in presence of two subscribing wit- no
nesses.
WILLIAM H. MARTIN.
Witnesses :
M. J. DtlGGAN.
A. L. MlNYARD.
906,319.
R. B, SMITH.
AUTOMATIC STOP FOB TALKING MACHINES
APPLICATION PILED SEPT. 16, 190.8.
Patented Dec. 8, 1908
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
■ WITNESSES
Tim: 2j- inventor
ATTORNEYS
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
906,319.
R. B. SMITH.
AUTOMATIC STOP FOB TALKING MACHINES.
APPLICATION FILED SEPT. 16, 1908.
Patented Dec. 8, 1908.
2 8HEETS— SHEET 2.
"V
'±a-A.
T!?
Z6 %7ZI<- *f
%r
3f 3f 32r fa %# 16^17
35
1S~
IZr
/
33
*l «
1
^o
£3 Z7 %%r %L
49
30
ST'-*" w
zexw
ik
T£g-B.
JZr
////////////////////// ///////////////J//////'//'/'"/////////"//-
WITNESSES
2^ /faA/U*-*^
7
^5 U6
INVENTOR
HichcurtZJBaj^i/toiorrveiAf/Shiit/t
ATTORNEYS
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON. D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
RICHARD BARTHOLOMEW SMITH, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
AUTOMATIC STOP FOB TALKING-MACHINES.
No. 906,319.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 8, 1908.
Application filed September 16, 1908. Serial No. 453,235.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Richard Bartholo-
mew Smith, a subject of the King of Great
Britain, and a resident of the city of New
5 York, borough of Manhattan, in the county
and State of Xew York, have invented a
new and Improved Automatic Stop for
Talking- Machines, of which the following is
a full, clear, and exact description.
10 My invention relates to talking machines,
my more particular purpose being to enable
a moving member carried by the machine
and having a travel related to the progress
made by the record in play, to act upon and
15 operate one or more brakes for the purpose
of stopping the machine promptly when the
playing of the record is completed.
While for the sake of simplicity I show
my invention as applied to an ordinary talk-
20 ing machine of the Victor type, it will be un-
derstood that I do not limit myself, for the
reason that my invention may be applied to
any other type of talking machine.
Briefly stated, my invention contemplates
25 the use of a brake to be applied directly to
the rotary disk or equivalent member sup-
; porting the record, and a weight controllable
by a movement of the horn and adapted to
be tripped when the horn reaches a point
33 representing the end of the performance,
that is. the finish, of the music or other pro-
duction, so that the brake is applied promptly
as the performance is finished, the point of
stoppage being, to some extent, independent
35 of whether the performance be long or short
for a given size record.
My invention further contemplates an aux-
iliary brake to be operated in connection
with the governor mechanism, for the pur-
40 pose of applying to the latter a braking ac-
tion independent of the braking action ex-
erted upon the disk or its equivalent, and in
this manner to enable the entire machine to
be stopped positively because of the cumu-
45 lative action of two separate brakes related
mechanically to each other.
My invention further comprehends certain
adjustments of parts incidental to carrying
out the purposes above mentioned.
53 In addition, my invention contemplates
various constructional improvements where-
by the general efficiency of the talking ma-
chine, and particularly the brake and gov-
ernor mechanism thereof, is greatly im-
55 proved.
Reference is to be had to the accompany-
] ing drawings forming a part of this specifi-
| cation, in which similar characters of refer-
| ence indicate corresponding parts in all the
figures. 60
Figure 1 is a fragmentary plan of a disk
talking machine equipped with my inven-
tion, this view showing a disk, my improved
brake for gripping the edge thereof and
designated by me as the " main brake ", a 65
gravity-controlled trip for actuating this
brake, and further showing the governor
mechanism together with an auxiliary brake
for stopping movement of the latter, this
auxiliary brake being connected by various 70
movable parts with the main brake and con-
trollable therewith as a unit by the gravity-
controlled trip ; Fig. 2 is a fragmentary side
elevation showing the gravity - controlled
trip and the movable horn of the machine, 75
as adapted to actuate this trip, for the pur-
pose of controlling the brake mechanism;
Fig. 3 is an enlarged fragmentary section
upon the line 3 — 3 of Fig. 2, looking in the
direction of the arrow, showing the gravity- 80
controlled trip used for the purpose of ac-
tuating the brakes: Fig. 4 is a fragmentary
side elevation of the mechanism shown in
Fig. 3 : Fig. 5 is a view somewhat similar
to Fig. 3, but showing a slightty modified 85
form of gravity-controlled trip mechanism ;
and Fig. 6 is a fragmentary section upon
the line 6 — 6 of Fig. 1, looking in the direc-
tion of the arrow, and showing the auxiliary
brake for the governor mechanism. 90
The casing of a talking machine is shown
at 7, the base of the machine at 8, the mov-
able horn at 9. and the reproducer at 10,
the reproducer being carried by the horn.
These parts move in the usual manner over 95
a revoluble disk 11 upon which the disk
record is to be mounted. A plate 12 is pro-
vided with slots 13 (see Fig. 1) and is slid-
ably mounted upon the top of the casing 7
at a point adjacent to the edge thereof. 100
This plate is provided with a downwardly
extending portion 14 which partially over-
hangs the
edge
of the casing, as will be
understood from Fig. 3. This increases the
security of the plate 12 relatively to the cas-
ing 7. Screws 15 extend through the slots
13 and these bind the plate upon the casing.
These screws, however, permit the plate to
be adjusted in the general direction of its
length, as will be understood from Fig. 1.
The plate 12 is provided with bearings 16,
16a which support, a stub shaft 17, the latter
105
110
S
906,319
having a limited movement both axially and
radially. Extending upwardly from the
stub shaft 17 is an arm 18, and extending
into this arm is a screw 19. Extending from
5 the arm 18, and forming practically a con-
tinuation of the same, is a rod 20 having a
threaded portion 21, and mounted upon this
threaded portion is a spherical weight 22
threaded internally for the purpose. This
10 spherical weight, by being rotated upon the
rod 20, is adjusted relatively to the general
length of the latter, and in this way can
exert greater or lesser leverage upon the stub
shaft 17 as a center.
15 An arm 23 extends directly through the
arm 18 and is adjustable relatively to the
latter. The arm 23 is normally held rigid in
relation to the arm 18 by aid of the screw 19.
In order to adjust the position of the arm 23
20 relatively to the arm 18, the screw 19 is
loosened by hand, being tightened after the
adjustment is completed. A bar 24 is sup-
ported by the arm 23, and extending from
this bar is another bar 25. The bars 24, 25
25 are connected together and the bar 24 is con-
nected with the arm 23 by aid of pivot
pins 27.
Star springs 26 are provided for the pur-
pose of producing a gentle friction between
30 the bars 24, 25 and the arm 23. These parts
23, 24, 25 thus together constitute a member
having more or less rigidity, but sufficiently
flexible to be bent into slightly different
positions. A leaf spring 28 engages the
35 stub shaft 17. This leaf spring is connected
by a screw 29 with a brake lever 30, the
latter carrying a brake shoe 31 which may
be pressed into engagement with the edge
of the disk 11. The leaf spring 28 is pro-
40 vided with a portion 32 which presses
against a stop pin 33 carried by the plate 12.
The brake lever 30 is mounted upon the
plate 12 by aid of a pivot pin 34, and for
this purpose is provided with a cylindrical
45 bearing 34a encircling said pin.
The arm 18 carries a lug 35 and pivoted
to the same is a pitman 36. This pitman is
pivoted to an arm 37 which extends through
a slot 38 in the top of the casing 7. The arm
50 37 is connected rigidly with a rocking shaft
39 which is journaled in hangers 40, 41, the
latter being secured to the top of the casing.
A cam 42 is mounted rigidly upon the rock-
ing shaft 39. A screw bolt 43 extends
55 through the top of the casing and is dis-
posed adjacent to the cam 42. A crank arm
44 extends below the screw bolt 43 and the
cam 42. This arm is connected rigidly with
a shaft 45 and constitutes practical^ a con-
60 tinuation of the latter, as will be under-
stood from Fig. 1, so that a vertical move-
ment of the arm or crank 44 necessitates a
slight rocking movement of the shaft 45.
This shaft is supported by hangers 46
65 mounted upon the under side of the casing
top. Depending from this shaft are arms
47 (see Fig. 6) and swiveled upon these
arms is a ring 48 which engages a friction
plate 49, the latter being mounted upon a
shaft 50. This shaft is part of a governor
51 and is journaled in a hanger 52. When-
ever the crank arm 44 is slightly depressed,
so as to rock the shaft 45, the arms 47 (Fig.
6) force the ring 48 into engagement with
the friction disk 49, and this stops rotation
of the governor 51 if the pressure upon the
arm 44 be sufficiently hard, but if the pres-
sure upon said arm be easier, the governor
is simply slowed up without being stopped.
Hence, by turning the screw bolt 43 slowly
and within proper limits, the speed of the
governor 51 may be regulated by hand,
whereas if the cam 42 suddenly thrusts the
crank arm 14 abruptly downward, the pres-
sure of the ring 48 against the friction disk
49 brings the governor to an abrupt stop in
its rotation.
Formed upon the stub shaft 27 is a thread
53. This thread works in the bearing 16
which is so formed as to receive it. When,
therefore, the stub shaft 17 is rocked slightly
by aid of the weight 22, the stub shaft moves
a little in the general direction of its axis,
and by pressing against the leaf spring 28
forces the brake arm 30 toward the disk 11,
so that the shoe 31 engages this disk and
stops its rotation.
In Fig. 5 I show, at 17a, a slightly differ-
ent form of stub shaft. Mounted upon one
end of the latter is an arm 18a, and extend-
ing from this arm is a rod 20a upon which
the spherical weight 22 is mounted, as else-
where described. Mounted also upon the
arm 18a is an arm 26a corresponding to the
arm 23 shown in Fig. 3. The rods 22a, 25
are connected together and mounted upon
the arm 26a in practically the same manner
that the rods 25, 24 are connected together
and mounted upon the arm 23. Similarly,
the arm 18a carries a lug 35a, corresponding
to the lug 35 elsewhere described.
If it be desired to operate the talking ma-
chine without the use of my improved mech-
anism, the spherical weight 22 is placed in
the position indicated in Fig. 3. When in
this position, the Aveight and all parts con-
trollable by it simply remain inactive. Sup-
pose, however, that it be desired at any time
to bring into use my improved mechanism.
The rods 24, 25 are moved relatively to each
other and to the arm 23 so that the rod 25
approaches, to a greater or a lesser degree,
as desired, the rod 20 and the spherical
weight 22. The purpose of moving the rods
24, 25 relatively to the rod 20 and weight
22 is to enable the horn 9, in its travel across
the disk 11, to be brought into engagement
with the rods 24, 25 at the proper instant
relatively to the progress of the performance
of the record being played. For instance,
70
75
80
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
906,319
3
if the performance be very short so that
but little of the surface of the disk con-
tains record matter, the playing is soon
terminated and it is desirable to stop the
5 machine comparatively early. If, however,
the duration of the record is quite long, it
is desirable that the engagement of the horn
9 with the rods 24, 25 shall be delayed. Be-
cause of differences in the length of the per-
10 formance, the horn 9 should sometimes move
nearly to the center of the disk 11, and at
other times need not move so near the cen-
ter of said disk in order to reach a point
representing the termination of theperform-
15 ance for the particular record being played.
The operator, already knowing whether the
record be long or short, and having pre-
viously determined the point at which the
horn 9 should arrive when the performance
20 of the record is completed, adjusts the rods
24, 25 accordingly, and, if need be, also ad-
justs the arm 23 by aid of the screw 19.
The operator having effected these adjust-
ments, or either of them, now raises the rod
25 20 into vertical position, as indicated in Fig.
2. The spherical weight 22 is thus rested
in stable equilibrium, but is very easily over-
thrown. The machine is now wound up
and started in the manner well known in the
30 art. As the playing of the record nears
completion, the horn 9 approaches the rods
24, 25. The rod 25 can be given any desired
angle relatively to the rod 24, and is there-
fore engaged by the horn 9 at any desired
35 angle, as will be understood from Fig. 1.
The horn having finished its travel, the rods
24, 25 and the arm 23 (together constituting
a lever) rock the stub shaft 17 or 17a, and
the Aveight 22 falls to the right, according
40 to Fig, 4. This removes the rods 24, 25 out
of engagement with the horn 9 and the rota-
tion of the stub shaft 17 (or 17a, as the case
may be) causes the spring 28 to move the
brake lever 30 and this forces the shoe 31
45 into engagement with the disk 11, thus ap-
plying the main brake. The movement of
the arm 18 causes the pitman 36 to travel
in the general direction of its length, thus
rocking the arm 37, shaft 39 and cam 42.
50 The cam, upon being thus moved, forces the
adjacent end of the crank arm 44 slightly
downward, thereby rocking the shaft 45 and
applying the auxiliary brake to the governor
mechanism. The machine is thus stopped
55 bj^ action of the main brake, assisted by the
action of the auxiliary brake.
I find that the application of two separate
brakes to different parts of the machine,
such different parts moving at different
60 speeds, enables the machine to be stopped
with a minimum of shock or jar and with
great positiveness. It will be noted that the
machine, if runnning and left alone, will
work in such manner that both brakes are
65 applied automatically and are left in such
condition that the machine can not readily
be started into action by any accidental
cause. The adjustment of the plate 12 rela-
tively to the screws 15 is for purposes of
accommodating the machine to disks of dif- 70
ferent size, and also disks in which the rec-
ord surface may vary as to its distance from
the edge or from the center of the disk.
The brake arm 30 is readily detachable.
To remove this arm, it is simply detached 75
from the pivot pin 34. This being clone, the
auxiliary brake alone is free to act. To use
the main brake alone, the brake arm 30 is
left in position, and the auxiliary brake is
thrown out of action by disconnecting the 80
pitman 36. I therefore use either the main
brake alone, the auxiliary brake alone, or
both brakes together, or neither brake, as de-
sired.
Having thus described my invention, I 85
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent:
1. In a talking machine, the combination
of a revoluble member for carrying a record,
a governor for controlling the speed of said 90
member, a main brake for stopping the
travel of said member, an auxiliary brake
for stopping the travel of said governor, and
means co-acting with the travel of said rev-
oluble member for applying both of said 95
brakes.
2. In a talking machine, the combination
of a revoluble member for supporting a
sound record, a brake for stopping the rota-
tion of said revoluble member, a weight for 100
actuating said brake, and means for adjust-
ing said weight in different positions for the
purpose of controlling the degree of force
exerted by said brake.
3. In a talking machine, the combination 105
of a member for supporting a sound record,
a brake for stopping rotation of said sound
record, a rocking shaft mounted in bearings
and provided with a thread engaging one
of said bearings for the purpose of thrust- no
ing said rocking shaft against said brake, a
weight for actuating said rocking shaft, and
means co-acting with said revoluble member
for releasing said weight.
4. In a talking machine, the combination 115
of a revoluble member for supporting a
sound record, a governor for controlling the
speed of said sound record, a main brake for
stopping the rotation of said revoluble mem-
ber, an auxiliary brake for stopping the ro- 120
tation of said governor, and a connection
from said main brake to said auxiliary
brake for enabling both of said brakes to act
as a unit.
5. In a talking machine, the combination 125
of a revoluble member for supporting a
sound record, a governor for controlling the
speed of said revoluble member, a main
brake for stopping the rotation of said rev-
oluble member, an auxiliary brake for stop- 130
906,310
ping the rotation of said governor, connec-
tions from said main brake to said auxiliary
brake for enabling both of said brakes to act
as a unit, and mechanism co-acting with said
5 revoluble member for actuating said brakes.
6. In a talking machine, the combination
of a revoluble member for supporting a
sound record, a governor, a brake for said
revoluble member, a brake for said governor,
10 mechanism for actuating said brakes simul-
taneously, and means controllable at will for
throwing either of said brakes out of action.
T. In a talking machine, the combination
of a revoluble member for supporting a
15 sound record, a main brake for stopping the
rotation of said revoluble member, an auxil-
iary brake co-acting with said main brake
for quickening the time of stoppage of said
revoluble member, and means controllable at
20 will for throwing either of said brakes out
of action.
8. In a talking machine, the combination
of a main brake, an auxiliary brake, means
controllable at will for throwing either of
25 said brakes out of action, as desired, and a
revoluble member controllable by said brakes
and adapted to support a sound record.
0. In a talking machine, the combination
of a main brake, an auxiliary brake, means
30 controllable at will for throwing said brakes
out of action independently," and mechanism
co-acting with said brakes and adapted to
support a sound record.
10. In a talking machine, the combination
35 of a revoluble member for supporting a
record, a governor for controlling the speed
of said revoluble member, a main brake for
stopping the rotation of said revoluble mem-
ber, an auxiliary brake for stopping the
40 rotation of said governor, connections from
said main brake to said auxiliary brake for
enabling said brakes to act as a unit, a
traveling member co-acting with said rev-
oluble member, and a movable weight con-
45 nected with said brakes for actuating the
same, said weight being delicately poised
in the path of said traveling member in or-
der to be released by movements of the latter
for the purpose of actuating said brakes.
50 11. In a talking machine, the combination
of a revoluble member for supporting a rec-
ord, a horn movable relatively to said rev-
oluble member, a brake, mechanism con-
nected with said brake and controllable by
55 movements of said horn for setting said
brake, said mechanism including a weight
mounted upon said arm, and means for ad-
justing said weight relatively to said arm
for the purpose of controlling the sensitive-
60 ness of said brake.
12. In a talking machine, the combination
with a revoluble member for supporting a
sound record, a traveling member in oper-
ative relation to said revoluble member, a
brake controllable by said traveling mem- 65
ber, means including a weight for actuating
said brake, mechanism for adjusting said
weight in different positions for the pur-
pose of controlling the sensitiveness of the
said brake, and means independent of said 70
weight and controllable at will for further
increasing the sensitiveness of said brake.
13. In a talking machine, the combination
of a revoluble member for supporting a
sound record, a governor for controlling 75
the speed of said revoluble member, mech-
anism adjustable at will for regulating the
speed of said governor, brake mechanism
coacting with said revoluble member and
said governor for stopping the rotation of 80
said revoluble member and said governor,
and means for actuating said brake mech-
anism.
14. In a talking machine, the combination
of a revoluble member for supporting a 85
sound record, brakes for stopping the rota-
tion of said revoluble member, a governor,
a brake for stopping the rotation of said
governor, a traveling member coacting with
the movements of said revoluble member, 90
and mechanism connected with said travel-
ing member for applying both of said brakes.
15. In a talking machine, the combination
of a main brake, an auxiliary brake, a rev-
oluble member for supporting a sound rec- 95
ord, a traveling member coacting with said
revoluble member, and means controllable
by said traveling member and connected
with both of said brakes for setting the lat-
ter when said record is rotated to a pre- loo
determined extent.
16. In a talking machine, the combination
of a revoluble member for supporting a
sound record, a traveling member coacting
with the movement of said revoluble mem- 105
ber, a brake for stopping said revoluble
member, an arm connected to said brake for
actuating the same, a spiral cam mounted
upon said arm and provided with a portion
for engaging said brake, a weight mounted 110
upon said arm and adjustable relatively to
the same, and a member connected Avith said
arm and disposed within the path of travel
of said traveling member for the purpose of
turning said arm and causing said brake to 115
be set.
In testimony whereof I have signed my
name to this specification in the presence of
two subscribing witnesses.
RICHARD BARTHOLOMEW SMITH.
Witnesses :
Walton Harrison.
John P. Davts.
906,388.
W. S. COBB.
SOUND BEGULATOB.
APPLICATION PILED AUG. 19, 1908.
Patented Dec. 8, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
ATTORNEY
THE NOHR1S PETERS CO., WASHINCTON. D. C.
W. S. COBB.
SOUND BEGULATOB.
APPLICATION PILED AUG. 19, 1908.
906,388.
^
i
i i
*
Patented Dec. 8, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
WITNESSES
INVENTOR,
~WUUarrv$. Cobb,
BY <g>
P ATTORNEY
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
WILLIAM S. COBB, OF FLUSHING, NEW YORK.
SOUND-REGULATOR.
No. 906,388.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 8, 1908.
Application filed August 19, 1908. Serial No. 449,269.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, William S. Cobb, a
citizen of the United States, residing at
Flushing, in the county of Queens and State
5 of New York, have invented new and useful
Improvements in Sound-Regulators, of which
the following is a specification.
This invention relates to sound regulators
and is placed in the horn or sound outlet of
10 musical instruments, phonographs or talk-
ing machines for the purpose of reducing
and regulating the volume of sound pro-
duced, and to improve the quality of said
tones produced in the instrument or ma-
15 chine and to eliminate as far as possible, the
objectionable and noisy features produced
in the same, as will be more fully described
in the following specification set forth in
the claims and illustrated in the drawings,
20 where:
Figure 1 is a sectional view of the horn of
a talking machine with the improved regu-
lator located therein. Fig. 2 is a side eleva-
tion of the regulator partly in section. Fig.
25 3 is a front view with certain parts broken
away. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal sectional
view. Fig. 5 shows a modified form. Figs.
6 and 7 are detail views of the latter form.
This regulator may be used in the horn of
30 any phonograph or talking machine or it
may be embodied in or made a part of same
or of the horn elbow. The horn may be dis-
pensed with entirely and the device used
alone instead. It may be constructed of
35 wood or metal but preferably of hard rubber.
The outer shell 10 has tapering sides cor-
responding with the funnel shaped horn
commonly used in talking machines to fit
within the same or to cause the device to
40 act as a plug so it may be fitted in a mu-
sical instrument and in order to secure the
same and effect a perfect closure so that the
sound waves will pass through the regulator
only it is provided with soft rubber rings 11.
45 The outer end of this shell has screw threads
12 while the inner end is turned forward to
form a cylindrical throat 13.
Within the space between the shell 10 and
the throat 13 is an inner shell made up of
50 two substantial cylindrical pieces 14 and 15
the former having a perforated end wall
16 preferably concave while the two pieces
are united at the other end. The front end
of the piece 15 is connected with the shell 10
55 and a ring 17 having a series of holes 18, is
interposed at that point and unites them.
The shell 10 also has at its front end the
perforations 19 and on the front end of the
device is screwed a regulating cap 20 whose
inner face is adapted to fit against the an- 60
nular lip 21 of the piece 15 when the cap is
closed down to its limit on the outer shell.
When this regulator is placed in the horn
of a talking machine or other instrument
the rubber rings 11 effectually close the pas- 65
sage and the only escape for the sound waves
is through the throat 13 and into the cham-
ber 22 of the cylinder 14 from whence a lim-
ited volume escapes through the perfora-
tions 23 in the wall or head 16 and out the 70
opening 24 in the cap 20. In case it is de-
sired to obtain a greater volume the cap is
removed from its seat on the lip 21 by un-
screwing it so that the surplus sound waves
which do not pass through the perforations 75
23 may move through the passages between
the throat 13 and the piece 14 and between
the piece 15 and the shell 10, through the
holes 18 and out of the opening 24.
In the modified form shown in Fig. 5 the 80
shell 25 is similar in construction to that
above described but it carries the horn 26 at
its forward end, the shell being interposed
between the talking machine and the horn
and connected with the latter by a coupling 85
ring 27 threaded for attachment to the two
parts. At the outer end of the shell is a ring
28 with a series of perforations, 29 which
are adapted to coincide with similar per-
forations 30 in the front wall 31 of the shell. 90
The ring 28 is movable about the front end
of the shell, being held thereon by means of
the shoulder 32 of the ring 27, and is shifted
by the knob 33 attached directly and
radially to the ring or with the pin 34 pro- 95
jecting from a lug 35 on the ring and
through the slot 36 in the ring. When it is
desired to reduce the volume of sound waves
passing through this latter form of regu-
lator the ring is shifted on its seat so that 100
the holes 29 are removed from their coinci-
dence with the holes 30, more or less as de-
sired and by shifting the ring so that its
holes are covered by the solid intervals of
the wall 31 the sound waves are entirely 105
shut off, except through the perforations 23.
Both of these methods of shutting off or
reducing the sound waves permit of a very
delicate adjustment of the regulator and the
latter form especially affords access to the 110
<J"5»
906,388
adjusting parts so that musical selections
may be accentuated and emphasized with
little trouble.
It is obvious that other means may be
5 adopted to open or close the perforations in
the front wall of the adjuster without de-
parting from the essential features which
are hereinafter claimed.
What I claim as new and desire to secure
10 by Letters Patent is:
1. In a sound regulator, the combination
with the horn, of a musical instrument or
talking machine, of a plug conforming in
shape with the interior of the horn and com-
15 prising two shells with sound passages be-
tween them and a regulator rotating on the
end of same.
2. In a sound regulator, the combination
with a horn adapted to disseminate sound
20 waves, of a plug with forward and reverse
passages for the sound waves and a rotating
regulator at one end of the plug.
3. In a sound regulator, the combination
with a horn for disseminating sound waves,
25 of a series of shells forming tortuous pas-
sages and having perforations at their for-
ward end, and a rotating end to regulate
the size of the perforations.
4. In a sound regulator, the combination
30 with a horn for distributing sounds, of a
plug made up of shells inclosing winding
passages for the sound waves and open at
the receiving end and having perforations
at the distributing end, and a head adapted
to be screwed on the latter end to limit the 35
size of the perforations.
5. In a sound regulator, the combination
with a sound distributing horn, of a set of
shells inclosing tortuous passages connected
at the front end, open at the rear end and 40
having perforations at the point of connec-
tion, and a head with an opening adapted
to be adjusted on'the shells so as to regulate
the volume of the sound waves leaving the
perforations.
6. In a sound regulator, the combination
with a sound distributing horn, of a shell
with a throat at its inner end, a second shell
within the first and having perforations at
its outer end, a perforated ring uniting the 50
two rings at their outer ends, and means at
the front ends of the shells to open or close
the perforations in the ring.
In testimony whereof I affix my signa-
ture in presence of two witnesses.
WILLIAM S. COBB.
Witnesses :
John M. Moe,
Lester S. Parmentek.
45
H. H. TAYLOE.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION FILED FEB. 26, 1908.
906,469.
Patented Dec. 8, 1908.
,30
K^cg.^
Ijttf&riftTft
vftys-
THE NORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. O.C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HORACE H. TAYLOR, OF SAN JOSE, CALIFORNIA, ASSIGNOR OF ONE-HALF TO HIMSELF, AND
ONE-HALF TO JOSEPH PEARSE, OF OAKLAND, CALIFORNIA.
I
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 906,469.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed February 26, 1908. Serial No. 417,852.
Patented Dec. 8, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I. Horace H. Tatlor, a
citizen of the United States, residing at San
Jose, in the county of Santa Clara, State of
5 California, have invented certain new and
useful Improvements in Talking-Machines,
of which the following is a specification, ref-
erence being had to the accompanying draw-
ings.
10 My invention relates to talking machines,
and has for its object to provide a new and
improved construction by means of which
the sound-box may be more easily and better
applied to and lifted off from the record
15 upon which it rests, and by which the op-
erator is enabled better to insert in the
sound-box the usual needle. Heretofore it
has been customary for the operator to take
hold of the sound-box itself in these opera-
20 tions. While this has no bad effect if care-
fully and properly done, yet injury either to
the fingers of the operator or to the instru-
ment, or to both, very often occurs, — for
example, when it becomes necessary to re-
25 move the sound-box quickly from the record
to prevent injury to the instrument, — in
which cases the needle sometimes causes pain-
ful or even dangerous injuries, or the mica
diaphragm is broken or the sound-box other-
30 wise injured or thrown out of adjustment.
The means I have provided for accom-
plishing the objects mentioned and for avoid-
ing the difficulties heretofore experienced,
are illustrated in the drawings and herein-
35 after specifically described.
That which I believe to be new will be
pointed out in the claims.
In the drawings: — Figure 1 is a side ele-
vation of a talking machine embodying one
40 form of my invention, the sound-box being
shown in two different positions, one in
dotted lines. Fig. 2 is an enlarged detail,
showing a part only of the machine and illus-
trating the manner of applying the handle
45 or thumb-screw by which I am enabled to
accomplish my purpose. Fig. 3 is an en-
larged perspective view of the thumb-screw.
Referring to the several figures of the
drawings, in which corresponding parts are
50 indicated by like reference characters: — 10
indicates a talking machine of the ordinary
type, having applied to it the usual wind-
ing-key 11, and provided with the usual
turn-table 12 and disk-record 13. From the
rear rises an arm 14 carrying a collar 15 in 55
which is mounted so as to turn freely therein
and to be supported thereby the ordinary
horn 10. Also revolubly mounted in and
supported by said collar 15 is a curved tube
17 at the free end of which is secured a 60
sleeve 18 adapted to form a bearing for a U-
tube 19 one end of which is inserted in said
sleeve. The other end of the U-tube 19 car-
ries the usual sound-box 20. It is not be-
lieved that it is necessary to describe these 65
parts further here, inasmuch as they are
well-known and form no part of my inven-
tion.
In the end of the U-tube which enters the
sleeve 18 is secured a thumb-screw 21. As 70
will be readily understood, when it is de-
sired to raise the sound-box from the record,
this can be very effectually done by simply
turning the thumb-screw 21, without any
danger of injuring the fingers or the in- 75
strument no matter how hurriedly such op-
eration may be done. In Fig. 1 I have
shown in dotted lines the relative position of
the parts thus moved when they are resting
on the record and also when raised from the 80
record to apply a different record or to in-
sert a new needle in the sound-box.
What I claim as my invention and desire
to secure by Letters Patent is: —
1. In a talking machine, the combination 85
with a turn-table adapted to carry a record,
a tube adapted to be swung on an axis per-
pendicular to the turn-table, a sleeve on the
end of said tube, a U-tube one end of which
is revolubly mounted in said sleeve, and a 90
sound-box mounted on the free end of said
U-tube and adapted to rest on said record,
of a handle secured to said U-tube and
adapted to hold the same against with-
drawal from said sleeve and by which said 95
sound-box and U-tube may be lifted off
from said record.
2. In a talking machine, the combination
with a turn-table adapted to carry a record,
a tube adapted to be swung on an axis per- 100
906,469
pendicular to the turn-table, a sleeve on the
end of said tube, a U-tube one end of which
is revolubly mounted in said sleeve, and a
sound-box mounted on the free end of said
U-tube and adapted to rest on said record,
of a thumb-screw secured so as to rotate
therewith in the end of the U-tube which is
mounted in said sleeve, whereby the U-tube
is held against withdrawal and by which
said sound-box and U-tube may be lifted off 10
from the record.
HORACE H. TAYLOR.
Witnesses :
Joseph Pearse,
Wesley Dixon.
i
D. J. HOOD.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED OCT. 8, 1904.
907,362.
Patented Dec. 22, 1908.
-Yu^
M/W/////////W^^^^
WITNESSES:
6'
~Y\<0-
\*
INVENTOR.
BY
/Mu.
ATTORNEY.
THE NORMS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON. D, C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
DELAWARE J. HOOD, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 907,362.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 22, 1908.
Application filed October 8, 1904. Serial No. 227,624.
To all wliom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Delaware J. Hood, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident of
the city of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have
5 invented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Talking-Machines, of which the fol-
lowing is a full, clear, and complete dis-
closure, reference being had to the accom-
panying drawings, forming a part of this
10 specification.
The main objects of my invention are to
Erovide an improved mounting for a stylus
ar; to provide improved means for con-
necting a sound box to its mounting; and to
15 provide other improvements, which will ap-
pear in the following specification.
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1
is a fragmentary side elevation of a sound
box and sound conveying arm constructed in
20 accordance with this invention, showing the
same in its operative relation to a record tab-
let; Fig. 2 a similar view partially in section;
Fig. 3 a fragmentary top plan view of the
same partially in section; Fig. 4 a top plan
25 view of the same but showing the sound box
rotated into position for changing needles;
Fig. 5 a transverse section of the stylus bar
mounting taken in the plane of the axis of
oscillation of the bar.
30 Referring to the drawings, the device com-
prises a sound box 1 , of the type used in con-
nection with sound records having lateral
undulations and a hollow sound conveying
swinging arm or tube 2 which is pivoted at
35 its larger or inner end 2' in a well known
manner to swing in a plane parallel to the
disk record 3, of the laterally undulating
groove type, which is Counted to rotate
upon the usual cabinet 3'.
40 For rotatably connecting the sound box
with the swinging arm 2, the end of the arm
2 is provided with a short transverse sleeve
or tube 4 communicating therewith, which is
adapted to telescope over the outer end of a
45 tube or bushing 4' which forms a reduced ex-
tension of the rear side of the sound box cas-
ing. The tube 4' is provided with an open-
ing in one side thereof which registers with
the opening into the end of the arm 2 when
50 the sound box is in its operative position.
A cap 6 is fitted into the outer end of the
tube 4' and projects radially beyond the
sides of the tube forming a flange 7 contact-
ing against the outer ends of both tubes 4 and
4', and a flange 8, upon the inner tube 4' con- 55
tacts against the inner end of the tube 4, and
the inner tube 4' is thus held rotatably in po-
sition in the outer tube 4. By this means
the sound box is mounted to swing in a plane
parallel to the face of the record 3 and to ro- 60
tate on an axis coincident with the longitu-
dinal axis of the tube 4', substantially par-
allel to the face of the record 3 and substan-
tially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis
of the swinging arm 2. 65
The mounting for the stylus bar comprises
a tube 9 projecting radially and rigidly from
the sound box casing and communicating
therewith, and the stylus bar 10 extends
within and axially of the tube 9. The stylus 70
bar is elongated to correspond to the length
of the containing tube 9. The inner end of
the stylus bar is phonetically connected to
the diaphragm 1 1 as usual and the outer end
of the bar is mounted to oscillate upon a tor- 75
sional spring 12 which extends diametrically
of the outer end of the tube 9, the spring be-
ing fixed rigidly both to the bar and to the
tube. The stylus bar has the usual socket
and set screw 13 for holding the stylus needle 80
15 in position.
As in the present embodiment of this in-
vention, the sound box is restrained to swing
in a plane parallel to the face of the record, it
is necessar}^ to have some means for holding 85
the stylus needle yieldingly in contact with
the record groove with sufficient pressure to
produce the best results, j For this purpose
the walls of the tube 9 are made of sufficient
weight to give by gravity the desired turning 90
movement to the sound box when the sound
box is in operative position as shown in Figs.
1 and 2.
It is apparent that the radial tube 9 on the
sound box serves not only as a weight to hold 95
the stylus needle in contact with the record,
but also serves as a protector for the stylus
bar, and also enables an elongated bar to be
used having its axis of oscillation spaced at a
greater distance than usual from the inner 100
end of the bar, thus increasing the amplitude
of vibration of the diaphragm in reproducing.
When it is desired to change needles the
sound box is rotated into the position shown
in Fig. 4, and, obviously, stops 16 may be 105
employed for limiting this movement of the
sound box so that the stylus bar may be re-
tained in a raised inverted position to facili-
*-?2
907,362
tate the operation of changing needles and
also to keep the stylus needle away from the
record when the machine is not in use.
It is evident that in the connection pro-
5 vided by this invention between the sound
box and the swinging sound conveying arm
there would be but little friction between the
moving parts, that the passages are short and
conveniently shaped, and that it would not
10 be necessary to lift any of the weight of the
body of the sound box in changing needles or
in removing the needle from the record.
Although I have described only one form
in which this invention may be embodied, it
15 is obvious that many changes might be made
in the construction herein set forth, within
the scope of the appended claims, to adapt
the invention to different requirements and
different types of talking machines, without
20 departing from the spirit of this invention or
sacrificing any of the advantages thereof.
Having thus described the nature of my
invention, I do not wish to be understood as
being limited to the exact arrangement of
25 parts and form herein shown, for the same
may be varied to suit different requirements
and different types of talking machines, but
what I claim and desire to protect by Letters
Patent of the United States, is, —
30 1. In a sound box for talking machines, a
pivoted sound box casing, a tube connected
to said casing, and a stylus bar passing
through said tube, and having its fulcrum
adjacent the outer end thereof.
35 2. In a sound box for talking machines, an
axially pivoted sound box casing, a tube pro-
jecting radially therefrom, and communicat-
ing with the interior of the sound box, a sty-
lus bar passing through said tube, and having
40 its fulcrum adjacent the outer end thereof.
3. In a sound box for talking machines, an
axially pivoted sound box casing, a weighted
tube attached thereto, and communicating
with the interior thereof, and a stylus bar
45 passing through said tube, and having its
fulcrum adjacent the outer end thereof.
4. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, the combination with a sound box
mounted to oscillate in a vertical plane, of a
50 rigid tube having thickened walls extending
radially therefrom, and a stylus bar passing
through said tube.
5. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, the combination with a sound box
55 mounted to oscillate in the plane of its dia-
phragm, of a weighted tube extending radi-
ally therefrom and a stylus bar passing
through said tube.
6. In a sound recording and reproducing
60 machine, the combination with a sound box
mounted to oscillate in the plane of its dia-
phragm, of a tube having thickened walls
and a stylus bar having its fulcrum at the ex-
tremity of said tube.
65 7. In a talking machine, a sound box hav-
ing a tube projecting from one side thereof,
and a stylus bar fulcrumed on said tube.
8. In a talking machine, a freely rotatable
sound box having a tube projecting from one
side thereof, and a st}dus bar fulcrumed on 70
said tube.
9. In a sound recorder or reproducer, the
combination with a sound box mounted to
rotate upon its longitudinal axis, of a stylus
bar, and means carried by said sound box, 75
and upon which said stylus bar is mounted,
to turn said sound box on its axis.
10. In a sound recorder or reproducer, the
combination with a sound box mounted to
rotate upon its longitudinal axis, of a stylus 80
bar, and a weighted projection carried by
said sound box, and upon which said stylus
bar is mounted, to turn said sound box on its
axis.
11. In a sound recorder or reproducer, the 85
combination with a freely rotatable sound
box, of a tube projecting from one side there-
of and a stylus bar passing through said tube.
12. In a sound recorder or reproducer, the
combination with a sound box, of a tube con- 90
nected thereto and extending radially there-
from, and a stylus bar passing through said
tube and mounted thereon adjacent the
outer end thereof.
13. In a sound recorder or reproducer, the 95
combination with a freely rotatable sound
box, of a stylus bar, and means carried by
said box and upon which said bar is mounted
to turn said box upon its axis.
14. In a sound recorder or reproducer, the 100
combination with a sound box freely rota-
table upon its longitudinal axis, of a stylus
bar, and means carried by said box and upon
which said bar is mounted to turn said box
upon its axis. 105
15. In a sound recorder or reproducer, the
combination with a freely rotatable sound
box, of a tube projecting from one side there-
of, and a stylus bar passing through said tube
and fulcrumed thereto adjacent the outer end 110
thereof.
16. In a sound recorder or reproducer, the
combination with a sound box freely rota-
table upon its lo^itudinal axis, of a rigid
tube projecting from one side thereof, and a 115
stylus bar passing through said tube.
17. In a sound recorder or reproducer, the
combination with a sound box freely rota-
table upon its longitudinal axis, of a tube pro-
jecting from one side thereof, and a stylus 120
bar passing through said tube and fulcrumed
thereto adjacent the outer end thereof.
18. The combination with a sound box, of
a tube projecting from one side thereof, and
a stylus bar in said tube and spaced there- 125
from.
19. The combination with a sound box, of
a tube projecting from one side thereof, and
a stylus bar in said tube and having its axis
of oscillation adjacent the outer end thereof. 130
907,362
20. In a sound conveyer or reproducer, a
sound box rotatable upon its longitudinal
axis having an axial tubular extension closed
at its outer end communicating therewith,
and provided with an aperture in the side of
said extension for lateral communication.
21. In a sound recorder or reproducer, the
combination with a sound box rotatable upon
its longitudinal axis having an axially tubu-
lar extension closed at its outer end and pro-
vided with an aperture in the side thereof, of
means surrounding said extension and com-
municating therewith for holding said sound
box in position.
22. The combination with a sound box, of
a rigid tube projecting from one side thereof,
and a stylus bar in said tube.
23. The. combination with a sound box, of
a rigid tube projecting from one side thereof,
and a stylus bar in said tube and mounted to
oscillate upon an axis adjacent the outer end
of the tube.
In witness whereof I have hereunto set my
hand this 7th day of October, 1904.
DELAWARE J. HOOD.
Witnesses :
John F. Grady,
Edw. W. Vaill, Jr.
15
20
907,363.
D. J. HOOD.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLICATION PILED APE. 24, 1908.
Patented Dec. 22, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 1.
Jizg./?.
vrsxtxt
mmmnbftftm
;SS5S2SSSS'5S-55'Si%Z>S*5S*S«^^
J%#<3.
&I9.&
-/O
WITNESSES
■&
_^0
jZl£.&
'<& — — - ~tl INVENTOR
JJe /aware cf/Zood.
BY
/ifar^
'^etiSf'^
ATTORNMY
THE NORRtS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D.C.
907,363.
D. J. HOOD.
TALKING MACHINE.
APPLIOATIOS PILED APS. 24, 1908.
Patented Dec. 22, 1908.
2 SHEETS-SHEET 2.
ttff. 6.
WITNESSES
m
BY
INVENTOR
/</vyu^
ATTORNEY
THE NORRtS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
DELAWARE J. HOOD, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA, ASSIGNOR TO VICTOR TALKING
MACHINE COMPANY, A CORPORATION OF NEW JERSEY.
TALKING-MACHINE .
No. 907,363. Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 22, 1908.
Original application filed October 8, 1904. Serial No. 227,624. Divided and this application filed April 24, 1908.
Serial No. 428,907.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Delaware J. Hood, a
citizen of the United States, and a resident of
the city of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, have
5 invented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Talking-Machines, of which the fol-
lowing is a full, clear, and complete dis-
closure, reference being had to the accom-
panying drawings, forming a part of this
10 specification, this application being a division
of my application filed October 8, 1904, Se-
rial No. 227,624.
The main objects of my invention are to
provide improved means, of simple, durable
15 construction, for connecting a sound box to a
hollow sound conveying arm, and which will
be easy to operate and effective in action; to
provide improved means for holding the sty-
lus needle in contact with the record ; and to
20 provide other improvements which will ap-
pear in the following specification.
In the accompanying drawings: Figure 1
is a fragmentary side elevation of a sound
box and sound conveying arm constructed in
25 accordance with this invention, showing the
same in its operative relation to a record tab-
let ; Fig. 2 a similar view partially in section ;
Fig. 3 a fragmentary top plan view of the
same partially in section; Fig. 4 a top plan
30 view of the same but showing the sound box
rotated into position for changing needles;
Fig. 5 a transverse section of the stylus bar
mounting taken in the plane of the axis of
oscillation of the bar; and Fig. 6 is a side ele-
35 vation of a talking machine constructed in
accordance with this invention.
Referring to the drawings, the device com-
prises a sound box 1 , of the type used in con-
nection with sound records having lateral un-
40 dulations and a hollow sound conveying
swinging arm or tube 2 which is pivoted at
its larger or inner end 2' in a well known
manner to swing in a plane parallel to the
disk record 3, of the laterally undulating
45 groove type, which is mounted to rotate upon
the usual cabinet 3'.
For rotatably connecting the sound box
with the swinging arm 2, the end of the arm 2
is provided with a short transverse sleeve or
50 tube 4 communicating therewith, which is
adapted to telescope over the outer end of a
tube or bushing 4' which forms a reduced ex-
tension of the rear side of the sound box cas-
ing. The tube 4' is provided with an open-
55
75
80
ing in one side thereof which registers with
the opening into the end of the arm 2 when
the sound box is in its operative position.
A cap 6 is fitted into the outer end of the
tube 4' and projects radially beyond the sides
of the tube forming a flange 7 contacting 60
against the outer ends of both tubes 4 and 4',
and a flange 8, upon the inner tube 4' contacts
against the inner end of the tube 4, and the
inner tube 4' is thus held rotatably in posi-
tion in the outer tube 4. By this means the 65
sound box is mounted to swing in a plane
parallel to the face of the record 3 and to ro-
tate on an axis coincident with the longitudi-
nal axis of the tube 4', substantially parallel
to the face of the record 3 and substantially 70
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
swinging arm 2.
The mounting for the stylus bar comprises
a tube 9 projecting radially and rigidly from
the sound box casing and communicating
therewith, and the stylus bar 10 extends
within and axially of the tube 9 and is spaced
from the inner surface of the tube. The sty-
lus bar is elongated to correspond to the
length of the containing tube 9. The inner
end of the stylus bar is phonetically con-
nected to the diaphragm 1 1 as usual and the
outer end of the bar is mounted to oscillate
upon a torsional spring 12 which extends
diametrically of the outer end of the tube 9,
the spring being fixed rigidly both to the bar
and to the tube. The stylus bar has the
usual socket and set screw 13 for holding the
stylus needle 15 in position.
As in the present embodiment of this in- 90
vention the sound box is restrained to swing
in a plane parallel to the face of the record, it
is necessary to have some means for holding
the stylus needle yieldingly in contact with
the record groove with sufficient pressure to 95
produce the best results. For this purpose
the walls of the tube 9 are made sufficient
weight to give by gravity the desired turning
movement to the sound box when the sound
box is in operative position as shown in Figs. 100
1 and 2.
It is apparent that the radial tube 9 on the
sound box serves not only as a weight to hold
the stylus needle in contact with the record,
but also serves as a protector for the stylus 105
bar, and also enables an elongated bar to be
used having its axis of oscillation spaced at a
greater distance than usual from the inner
85
a
907,363
end of the bar, thus increasing the amplitude
of vibration of the diaphragm in reproducing.
When it is desired to change needles the
sound box is rotated into the position shown
5 in Fig. 4, and, obviously, stops 16 may be
employed for limiting this movement of the
sound box so that the stylus bar may be re-
tained in a raised inverted position to facili-
tate the operation of changing needles and
10 also to keep the stylus needle away from the
record when the machine is not in use.
It is evident that in the connection pro-
vided by this invention between the sound
box and the swinging sound conveying arm
15 there would be but little friction between the
moving parts, that the passages are short and
conveniently shaped, and that it would not
be necessary to lift any of the weight of the
body of the sound box in changing needles or
20 in removing the needle from the record. '
Although I have described only one form
in which this invention may be embodied, it
is obvious that many changes might be made
in the construction herein set forth, within
25 the scope of the appended claims, to adapt
the invention to different requirements and
different types of talking machines, without
departing from the spirit of this invention or
sacrificing any of the advantages thereof.
30 Having thus fully described my invention,
what I claim and desire to protect by Letters
Patent of the United States is:
1. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, the combination with a sound con-
35 veying arm, of a sound box connected there-
to, the said sound box being journaled to os-
cillate about an axis extending longitudinally
and centrally of said sound box, a stylus bar,
and means carried by said sound box and
40 upon which said stylus bar is mounted to
turn said sound box on its axis.
2. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, the combination with a sound con-
veying arm, of a sound box, having a dia-
45 phragm therein , mounted upon said arm, said
sound box being journaled in said arm to oscil-
late about an axis substantially coincident
with the axis of said diaphragm, a stylus bar,
and means carried by said sound box and
50 upon which said stylus bar is mounted, to
turn said sound box on its axis.
3. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine the combination with a sound con-
veying arm terminating in a sleeve, of a
55 sound box journaled to oscillate in said sleeve
about an axis extending longitudinallv and
centrally through said sound box, a stylus
bar, and means carried by said sound box
and upon which said stylus bar is mounted to
60 turn said sound box upon its axis to hold the
free end of said stylus bar yieldingly in posi-
tion.
4. In a talking machine, the combination j
with an axially pivoted sound box casing, of
65 a hollow sound conducting arm, means for
I connecting said sound box casing directly to
| the end of said hollow arm, a weighted pro-
, jection carried by said sound box casing and
j a stylus bar carried by said weighted projec-
I tion said weighted projection forming the 70
means for holding the free end of said stylus
bar yieldingly in position.
5. In a talking machine, the combination
with an axially pivoted sound box casing, of
a hollow sound conducting arm, a joint for 75
connecting said sound box with said hollow
arm so that the axis of said sound box is
transverse to the axis of said arm, a weighted
projection carried by said sound box casing,
and a stylus bar carried by said weighted 80
projection, said weighted projection forming
the means for holding the free end of said
stylus bar yieldingly in position.
6. In a talking machine, the combination
with an axially pivoted sound box casing, of 85
a hollow sound conveying arm terminating
in a transverse sleeve, a bushing carried bv
said sound box casing and adapted to tele-
scope with said sleeve, there being communi-
cation between the interior of said arm and 90
said bushing, means for retaining said bush-
ing in position within said sleeve, a weighted
projection carried by said sound box casing,
and a stylus bar fulcrumed on said projec-
tion, said weighted projection forming the 95
means for holding the free end of said stylus
bar yieldingly in position.
7. In a talking machine, the combination
with an axially pivoted sound box casing, of
a hollow sound conveying arm terminating 100
in a transverse sleeve, a bushing carried by
said sound box casing and adapted to tele-
scope with said sleeve, there being communi-
cation between the interior of said arm and
said bushing, means for retaining said bush- 105
ing in position within said sleeve, a weighted
tube carried by said sound box casing, and a
stylus bar fulcrumed on said tube, said
weighted tube forming the means for holding
the free end of said stylus bar yieldingly in no
position.
8. In a sound recording and reproducing
machine, the combination with a hollow
sound conducting arm, of a sound box hav-
ing a tube projecting from the rear side 115
thereof, the said sound tube being journaled
transversely to the longitudinal axis of and
in lateral communication with said arm and
being freely rotatable about the longitudinal
axis of said tube, a stylus bar, and means 120
carried by said sound box and upon which
said stylus bar is mounted, to turn said
sound box on its axis to bring the free end of
said stylus bar adjacent the record.
9. In a sound recorder or reproducer, the 125
combination with a sound arm, of a sound
box carried thereby and rotatable upon its
longitudinal axis with respect thereto, a
stylus bar, and means carried by said sound
box, and upon which said stylus bar is 130
907,363
&
mounted, to swing said sound box upon its
axis.
10. In a sound recorder or reproducer, the
combination with a sound conveying arm, of
5 a sound box rotatable upon its longitudinal
axis thereon, a weighted projection carried
by said sound box, and a stylus bar mounted
upon said projection.
11. In a talking machine, the combination
10 with a sound conducting arm terminating in
a transverse sleeve of a sound box casing
pivoted to rotate about its longitudinal axis
in said sleeve and communicating with said
sound arm, and means to prevent movement
15 of said casing longitudinal of its axis.
12. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound conducting arm terminating in
a transverse sleeve, of a sound box having an
axial tubular extension rotatably fitting in
20 said sleeve, and communicating with said
arm, and means to prevent movement of
said casing longitudinal of its axis.
13. In a talking machine, the combination
with a hollow sound conducting arm ter-
25 initiating in a transverse tubular portion
open at each end, of a sound box having an
axial tubular extension rotatably fitting in
said transverse tubular portion of the arm,
and communicating with said arm, and a
30 cap closing the inner end of said tubular
extension.
14. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound conveying arm, a sound box, a
stylus and a diaphragm, said sound box be-
35 ing pivoted to swing on said arm on an axis
substantially normal to said diaphragm, of
means extending outwardly from said sound
box to cause said stylus to engage the record
with the required pressure and a stylus bar
40 mounted upon said means.
15. In a talking machine, the combina-
tion with a sound box, of a support therefor,
whereby said box is restrained to swing in a
fixed plane, said box being free to oscillate
45 about its longitudinal axis, and means
carried by the box to hold it yieldingly in
position.
16. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of a support therefor
50 mounted to oscillate in a fixed plane, said
sound box being freely rotatable upon its
longitudinal axis, and a weighted projection
carried by said sound box for holding the
same yieldingly in position.
55 17. In a talking machine, the combina-
tion with a support mounted to swing in a
fixed plane, of a sound box connected thereto,
said sound box being mounted to oscillate
about its longitudinal axis, a stylus bar, and
60 a tube projecting from said box and in which
said stylus bar is mounted to oscillate to
turn said box on its axis.
18. In a talking machine, the combina-
tion with a support, of a sound box connected
65 thereto, the said sound box being mounted to
oscillate about its longitudinal axis, a stylus
bar, and means carried by said sound box
and upon which said stylus bar is mounted
to turn said box on its axis.
19. In a talking machine, the combination 70
with a support, of an axially pivoted sound
box casing carried thereby, a weighted pro-
jection carried by said casing, and a stylus
bar mounted upon said weighted projection,
said projection forming the means for holding 75
the free end of said stylus bar yieldingly in
position.
20. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of a radial arm support
therefor, said sound box being free to oscil- 80
late and to be inverted about its longitudinal
axis, means carried by the box to hold it
yieldingly in operative position, and a stop
carried by said arm to hold the box in in-
operative position. 85
21. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of a radial arm support
therefor, said box being free to oscillate and
to be inverted about its longitudinal axis, a
weight rigid with said box for holding the 90
same yieldingly in operative position, and a
stop carried by said arm to hold the box in
inoperative position.
22. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of a support therefor, said 95
sound box being freely rotatable with respect
thereto, a stjdus bar, and means carried by
said box and upon which said stylus bar is
mounted to hold said box yieldingly in posi-
tion. 100
23. In a talking machine, the combination
with an arm mounted to swing in a fixed
plane, of a sound box carried by said arm
and rotatable with respect thereto, a stylus
bar, and means carried by said box and upon 105
which said stylus bar is mounted to turn said
box on its axis.
24. In a talking machine, the combination
with a sound box, of a support therefor
mounted to swing in a fixed plane, said box 110
being free to oscillate about its longitudinal
axis, a stylus bar carried by said box, a
record support, and means carried by the box
to hold the free end of said bar yieldingly in
position adjacent said record support. 115
25. In a talking machine, the combination
with a hollow support, of a sound box car-
ried thereby, a tube projecting from said
sound box, and a stylus bar in said tube.
26. In a talking machine, the combination 120
with a sound box, of a support therefor
whereby said box is restrained to swing in a
fixed plane, said box being free to oscillate
about its longitudinal axis, a stylus bar car-
ried by said box, a record support, and means 125
carried by the box to hold the free end of
said bar yieldingly in position adjacent said
record support.
27. In a talking machine, the combination
with a hollow support, of a sound box carried 130
4=
907,363
thereby and communicating therewith, said
sound box being freely rotatable upon its
longitudinal axis but being held against
movement longitudinally of said axis with
5 respect to said support.
28. In a talking machine, the combination
with a hollow support, of a sound box car-
ried thereby and communicating therewith,
said sound box being freely rotatable upon
10 its longitudinal axis but being held against
movement longitudinally of said axis with
respect to said support, and the longitudinal
axis of said sound box being transverse to the
longitudinal axis of said support.
15 29. In a talking machine, the combination
with a movable hollow support, of a sound
box carried thereby and movable with respect
thereto, a tube projecting from said sound
box, and a stylus bar in said tube.
30. In a talking machine, the combination
with a hollow sound conducting arm termi-
nating in a transverse tubular portion, of a
sound box carried by said tubular portion
and communicating with said arm, said sound
box being freely rotatable upon its longi-
tudinal axis.
In . witness whereof, I hereunto set my
hand this 23rd day of April 1908.
DELAWARE J. HOOD.
Witnesses :
Alston B. Moulton,
Alexander Park.
25
;
907,383.
J. A. LIEB.
BECOBD DISK FOB TELEGBAPHONES.
APPLICATION FILES MAE. 26, 1907.
Patented Dec. 22, 1908.
'3lV\\MM>SQ,i>
rf&z
JO
0
Sifiu** ^/. 0&r^r ?
ffy.3.
~-jo
?2
THE NORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
JOHN A. LIEB, OF NEW YORK, N. Y., ASSIGNOR TO AMERICAN TELEGRAPHONE COMPANY, A
CORPORATION OF THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA.
RECORD-DISK FOR TELEGRAPHONES.
No. 907,383.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 22, 1908.
Application filed March 25, 1907. Serial No. 364,509.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, John A. Lieb, a citizen
of the United States, residing at the city of
New York, in the borough of Brooklyn and
5 State of New York, have invented certain
new and useful Improvements in Record-
Disks for Telegraphones, of which the follow-
ing is a full, clear, and exact description.
My invention relates to an improvement in
10 the recording disks which are used with the
telegraphone, and in which a magnetic sound
record is made by magnetizing the steel in a
spiral path under the influence of an electro-
magnet in a telephone circuit. For this pur-
15 pose plain steel disks have been used, but it
is necessary with a flat or plane disk to have
a separate and special guiding means for
moving the electromagnet radially over the
face of the disk as the latter rotates. It is
20 evident that in case of wear, or certain im-
perfections in the mechanism, the path
traced in the reproduction may not exactly
accord to that of the recording operation.
Moreover, in case the disk is removed from
25 one machine to be used in another, or in case
it is attempted to use a number of records
with one machine in succession, the placing
and readjustment of the disks may not be
properly made. For these reasons it is de-
30 sirable to have the guiding means on the face
of the disk itself. In carrying out my inven-
tion I secure this result in a very simple and
easy way by spirally winding a steel strip or
wire so as to produce a built-up disk with a
35 flat face. This construction has certain ad-
ditional advantages from the standpoint of
efficiency of reproduction, as will be later
pointed out.
With these objects in view, the invention
40 consists in the features of construction and
combination hereinafter set forth and claimed.
In the drawings : Figure 1 is a front or face
view of a magnetic reproduction disk em-
bodying the principles of my invention; Fig.
45 2 is a sectional view of the same; Fig. 3 is a
detail sectional view of the strip of wire em-
ployed therefor.
Referring to the drawings in which like
parts are designated by the same reference
50 sign, 7 denotes a special form of wire or strip
which will be self supporting when wound in
a spiral coil. A convenient form for this
purpose is that shown in Fig. 3, in which the
wire 7 is convex on one side 8, and concave
55 on the other side 9. The side edges 10 of a
wire or strip of this form come substantially
to an apex or point, although this is, of
course, not essential. With this form of the
invention it is merely necessary to obtain a
supporting core or member 11, and wind the 60
strip 7 spirally thereabout, until a disk of the
required size is produced. This is best done
between guiding plates so as to keep the
alinement perfect. Finally, when the coil or
disk is of the required size, a band 12 of Bab- 65
bitt metal or other material is shrunk about
its peripheral edge so as to tightly clamp all
of the convolutions into a compact or unitary
disk or structure.
With the form of the invention as above 70
described a steel disk is finally produced in
which the face has a continuous guiding
thread or spiral edge due to the wire convo-
lutions. It is evident that this thread or
spiral may be made the guiding means of the 75
recording and reproducing devices in exactly
the same way as the spiral grooves of an or-
dinary graphophone disk are used. The
magnetic record is made in the steel wire in
accordance with the well known telegraphone so
principle. In practice the records obtained
by a built-up disk of this form are very effi-
cient for the purposes of reproduction, since
the successive spirals or convolutions, being
separated from one another by an air gap ex- 85
cept for a slight imperfect contacting line or
area, do not exert a de-magnetizing action
on one another.
What I claim, is: —
1. A record - receiving body for telegra- 90
phones consisting of wire of magnetic mate-
rial wound in spiral form with the adjacent
convolutions interlocking with each other.
2. A record-receiving body for telegra-
phones consisting of a wire or strip having 95
opposite concave and convex sides wound
into a spiral in which the convex side of one
convolution is seated in the concave side of
another.
3. A record-receiving body for telegra- 100
phones consisting of a wire or strip with
sharp edges having opposite concave and
convex sides wound into a spiral in which the
convex side of one convolution is seated in
the concave side of another. 105
4. A record-receiving body for telegra-
phones consisting of a wire or strip with
sharp edges having opposite concave and
convex sides wound into a spiral in which the
convex side of one convolution is seated in 110
2
907,383
the concave side of another, and an outside
clamp holding the convolutions together.
5. A built-up disk for a telegraphone, com-
prising spirally coiled steel wire, the various
convolutions of which interlock with one
another.
6. A built-up disk for a telegraphone, com-
prising spirally coiled steel wire the various
convolutions of which interlock with one
another, and means surrounding the coil for
binding the convolutions into permanent en-
gagement with one another.
In witness whereof, I subscribe my signa-
ture, in the presence of two witnesses.
JOHN A. LIEB.
Witnesses :
Waldo M. Chapin,
May Bird.
10
907,794.
0. HARTMANN.
BES0NAT0B FOB PHONOGBAPHIC BEPEODUOEBS.
APPLICATION PILED MAE. 13. 1908.
Patented Dec. 29, 1908.
THE NORRIS PETERS CO.. WASHINGTON, D. C.
UNITED STATES PATENT GEE;
CARL HARTMANN, OF NEW YORK, N. Y.
RESONATOR FOR PHONOGRAPHIC REPRODUCERS.
No. 907,794.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 29, 1908.
Application filed March 13, 1908. Serial No. 420,930.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Carl Hartmann, a
citizen of the United States of America, re-
siding at Jsew York, in the borough of the
5 Bronx, county and State of iNew York, have
invented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in Kesonators for Phonographic Re-
producers, of which the following is a speci-
iication.
10 This invention relates to an improvement
hi phonographic reproducers by which the
sounds reproduced by the same are ren-
dered clearer and more distinct than hereto-
fore; and the invention consists in adding to
15 the ordinary reproducer-box containing the
diaphragm an extension or resonator which
is closed at the outer end and provided at its
inner end with an auxiliary diaphragm, the
frame of which is tightly fitted into the inner
20 end of the resonator, and which serves for
increasing the sounds reproduced by the
main or reproducing diaphragm.
In the accompanying drawings, Figure 1
represents a perspective view of a phono-
25 graph with my improved reproducer, Fig. 2
is a perspective view of the reproducer,
drawn on a larger scale, and Hg. 3 is a verti-
cal longitudinal section on line 3, 3, Fig. 2.
Similar letters of reference indicate corre-
30 sponding parts.
Referring to the drawings, a represents the
box, b the diaphragm and c the style of a
phonographic reproducer of the usual ap-
proved construction. The style is operated
35 either by a record-disk, cylinder or other
record-tablet. The reproducer-box a is con-
nected by a sound-conducting tube d with
the horn h in the usual manner. The box a
is provided in its rear-wall with an opening
40 o for establishing atmospheric pressure at
the interior of the reproducer-box a. To the
upper part of the rear- wall of the box a is ap-
plied a resonator-box e which is closed at its
outer end and attached by its open inner end
45 to the rear-wall of the box a, the resonator
surrounding an opening o1 in the rear-wall of
the reproducer-box. The resonator-box e
may be made in semicircular or of other
cross-section, and preferably of tapering
50 shape, being widest at its point of connection
with the rear-wall of the reproducer-box a.
The inner end of the resonator-box e is
closed by an auxiliary diaphragm /of mica,
which is supported in a supporting frame/1
having a flange /2, which latter is inserted 55
into the inner end of the resonator e, the rim
of the frame overlapping the opening o1 in
the rear- wall of the box a, while the flange/2
fits tightly into the inner end of the resona-
tor-box e. The auxiliary diaphragm / 60
serves for the purpose of throwing the
sounds produced by the reproducing dia-
phragm in forward direction through the
sound-conducting tube to the horn and of
increasing thereby the sounds to a consider- 65
able extent so as to produce a clearer and
louder reproduction of the same. This is
caused by the fact that as the auxiliary dia-
phragm is located at the rear of the main-
diaphragm with respect to the horn, it acts 70
(in connection with the resonator-box e) in
the nature of a sounding-board by which the
sound-waves are reflected toward the horn.
The vibrations of the reproducing diaphragm
are transmitted to the auxiliary diaphragm 75
and the sound is reflected therefrom in in-
creased volume due to the action of the res-
onator-box. The air in the resonator-box
serves as a cushion for the auxiliary dia-
phragm, so that the same follows the sound- 80
vibrations set up in the reproducing dia-
phragm.
Having thus described my invention, I
claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent: 85
1. In a phonographic reproducer, the com-
bination, with the reproducing box, dia-
phragm and style of the same, said box being
provided with an opening in its rear-wall, of
a resonator-box extending from said opening 90
and closed at its outer end, and an auxiliary
diaphragm located at the inner end of said
resonator-box.
2. In a phonographic reproducer, the com-
bination, with a diaphragm and inclosing re- 95
producer-box, of a resonator-box closed at
the outer end and extending outwardly from
an opening hi the wall of the reproducer-box,
and an auxiliary diaphragm inserted into the
opening of the reproducer-box and closing 100
the inner end of the resonator-box .
3. In a phonographic reproducer, the com-
bination, with a reproducer-box, diaphragm
and reproducing style, of a resonator-box of
tapering shape extending outwardly from an 105
opening in the wall of the reproducer-box,
said resonator-box being closed at the outer
end and open at the inner end, and an aux-
3
907,794
iliary diaphragm the frame of which is lo-
cated in the opening of the reproducer-box
and inner end of the resonator-box.
4. In a phonographic reproducer, the com-
5 bination, with the reproducer-box, dia-
phragm and style, said box being provided
with an air-opening in the lower part and a
larger opening in the upper part of its wall,
of a resonator-box closed at the outer and
10 open at the inner end and extending out-
wardly from said opening, and an auxiliary
diaphragm that is tightly fitted by its frame
into the larger opening of the reproducer-box
and inner end of the resonator-box.
In testimony, that I claim the foregoing as
my invention, I have signed my name in
presence of two subscribing witnesses.
CARL HARTMANN.
Witnesses:
Paul Goepel,
Anton Kopka.
907,814.
M. KEEN.
PHONOGRAPH.
APPLICATION PILED DEO. 21, 1905,
Patented Dec. 29, 1908.
3noewtot
In
QUotuetjJ
fF NQRRtZ nLriZltS CP., ivd^HlNCO*. !• C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
MORRIS KEEN, OF PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA.
PHONOGRAPH.
No. 907,814.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 29, 1908.
Application filed December 21, 1905. Serial No. 292,679.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Morris Keen, a citi-
zen of the United States, residing in the city
and county of Philadelphia, State of Penn-
5 sylvania, have invented a new and useful
Improvement in Phonographs, of which the
following is a specification.
My invention relates to phonographs and
consists of an artificial extension of a portion
10 of the sound conveyer between the repro-
ducer and the horn support, as set forth in
the claims.
It further consists in means for controlla-
bly admitting air to the side of the diaphragm
15 opposite to the admission tube, as set forth
in the claims.
It further consists of novel details of con-
struction, all as will be hereinafter fully set
forth.
20 Figure 1 represents a side elevation of an
attachment to a phonograph, embodying ni}^
invention. Fig. 2 represents a sectional view
on line x — x, Fig. 1. Fig. 3 represents a sec-
tional view on line y — y, Fig. 1. Fig. 4 rep-
25 resents a side elevation of the reproducing
portion with one side thereof removed. Fig.
5 represents a plan view of a portion of the
device on an enlarged scale.
Similar letters of reference indicate corre-
30 sponding parts in the figures.
Kef erring to the drawings : 1 designates an
arm or bracket having the plate 2 thereon
which may be secured to the box of the pho-
nograph or to a suitable support. Carried
35 by the bracket 1 is a collar 3 to which is se-
cured the sleeve 4.
5 designates a thimble which has a portion
6 projecting into the sleeve and which is
rotatable thereon, said thimble being mount-
40 ed on the pivotal point 7 carried by the
bracket 1 and being provided with an exten-
sion 8. Connected with the extension 8, by
means of a screw 9, is a chamber 10, the same
having an opening extending transversely
45 therewith and communicated with the inte-
rior of the thimble 5. A plate 11 partly
closes the outer end of the opening and a
valve 12 is connected with said plate and
serves to regulate or control the outlet open-
50 ing, as will be hereinafter described. Com-
municating with the interior of the chamber
10 is a pipe 13 which at a suitable point is
formed spirally, as best understood from
Figs. 1 and 2, it being noted that said spirals
55 are situated substantially adjacent each
other in order to occupy as small a space as
possible. While the convolutions of the tube
have been shown in a spiral it will be appar-
ent that any form may be used which will
materially increase the length of the re- 60
stricted path of travel of the sound waves
from the origin of the same to their delivery,
this being the object. Supported at the
outer end of said pipe 13 is the phonograph
reproducer or sound box 14. This repro- 65
ducer is formed in any suitable manner and
in the present instance consists of the bod}'
portion 15 to which the end of the pipe 13 is
attached, in any suitable manner and has a
plate 1 6 attached to the body portion, said 70
plate having the openings 17 therein.
18 designates a valve which is pivotally
mounted on the plate 16 and can move
thereon.
The sound box, tube 13 and chamber 10 75
constitute a casing or passage way, closed to
the outside air, except as provided for by my
opening, throughout its entire length from
the diaphragm or point of origin of the sound
waves to the horn which I consider the point 80
of delivery of the sound waves. I find an
opening to the outside air between these
points of origin and delivery quite desirable
for some purposes and at the same time am
able to close it when I wish to prevent com- 85
munication with the outside air. The open-
ing upon the delivery side of the diaphragm
at 12 is to be distinguished from that upon
the opposite side of said diaphragm at 17, the
opening of which changes the space upon that 90
side of the diaphragm from a closed and,
under certain circumstances, a damping
chamber to an open chamber permitting
additional vibration of the diaphragm and
giving an exit for the sound from that side of 95
the diaphragm, this portion of the sound,
however, not being shown as megaphoned,
In so far as it permits more free vibration of
the diaphragm this increases the volume of
the sound from the delivery side of the dia- 100
phragm which is in this case, and usually,
megaphoned.
Within the chamber are the two rubber
tubes 19 between which is held the dia-
phragm 20. l05
The needle holder consists of the block 21
carried by the arm 22, the latter being pivot-
ally mounted with respect to the body por-
tion 15 and the diaphragm 20, the needle or
stylus 23 being removably and adjustably HO
held in said block 21.
24 designates the horn holder which is of
907,814
suitable shape and which is rotatably
mounted upon the sleeve 4.
The operation of the device will be readily
seen. The bracket 1 is firmly secured to the
5 box of the phonograph or to any suitable
point that may be desired, and by reason of
the construction of the horn receptacle on its
support it can be turned in any direction.
The stylus support which consists of the pipe
10 13 in the present instance, can also be ro-
tated in any direction, as will be apparent,
since the same rests upon the pivot 7 and is
supported by the sleeve 4 which is firmly
held in the collar 3. Longitudinal move-
15 ment is also permitted to the stylus in order
that the same can be raised and lowered,
this movement carrying with it the pipe 13
and its convolutions. When the parts are
in position and the stylus is operating the
20 sound is transmitted from the vibrator 20
through the pipe 13 and its various convolu-
tions, finally entering the interior of the
thimble 5 and being discharged through the
horn holder 24 which may or may not con-
25 tain a horn. By reason of this passage
through this pipe 13, the sound is softened
and the scratching and rasping tones which
ordinarily occur in a phonograph are en-
tirely obviated, the result being a soft and
30 melodious tone. In order to adjust the
amount of sound I have provided valve
12 controlling the opening into the thimble
5 and by adjusting this valve, more or less
air from the outside is permitted to enter and
35 be mingled with the sounds from the phono-
graph, the e:Tect being that the sound from
the instrument is not nearly so great and
when the opening; or valve is entirely closed,
the sound is still softer. In addition, by
40 adjusting the valve 18, thus opening or clos-
ing the openings 17, in the plate 16, 1 can still
further adjust the sound from the instru-
ment, the enect of which is evident, as it
often occurs, that it is not desired to have
45 the sound from the instrument too loud as it
may be annoying. By reason of my con-
struction I can regulate this as desired
Where I refer in my claims to a " coil " or to
"coiled " tubes or other passages I wish to be
50 understood as including within the term
"coil" or ' 'coiled" spirals within the same or
approximately the same planes, helices and
any plurality of return bends or loops or
even a single such loop whose purpose is the
55 lengthening of the path of travel of the sound
waves or modification of the waves.
It will be evident that various changes
may be made by those skilled in the art,
which may come within the scope of my in-
60 vention and I do not therefore desire to be
limited in every instance to the exact con-
struction herein shown and described.
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters
Patent, is: 65
1. In a device of the character described, a
diaphragm, a horn holder, and a spirally
coiled casing therebetween.
2. In a device of the character described, a
needle, a reproducer suitably supported, said 70
reproducer having an opening thereinto, a
valve adjustably controlling said opening,
a tube for transmitting the sound, a chamber
in communication with said tube and having
an opening therein and a valve controlling 75
said opening.
3. In a device of the character described, a
stylus, a diaphragm, a transmission tube and
means for controllably admitting air to the
side of the diaphragm opposite to the admis- 80
sion tube in quantity as desired.
4. In a device of the character described, a
diaphragm, a horn holder and a coiled casing
between the diaphragm and the horn holder
to increase the distance traversed by the 85
sound between these two points.
5. A talking machine comprising a repro-
ducer, a fixed horn support, and a sound con-
veyer mounted upon said support, a portion
of said sound conveyer extending from said 90
reproducer toward said support, and another
portion of said sound conveyer being rigid
and artificially lengthened between said
former portion and said support.
6. A talking machine comprising a repro- 95
ducer, a fixed horn support, and a sound con-
veyer mounted upon said support, a portion
of said sound conveyer extending from said
reproducer toward said support, and another
portion of said sound conveyer being pivot- 100
ally movable and artificially lengthened be-
tween said former portion and said support.
7. In a device of the character described, a
needle, a diaphragm and a tube for transmit-
ting the sound therefrom, said tube having a 105
plurality of convolutions therein, through
which the sound waves must pass.
8. In a device of the character described, a
diaphragm, a horn holder, and a spirally
coiled casing therebetween, the coils of which no
lie in the same plane.
9. In a device of the character described, a
diaphragm, a horn holder, and an artificially
extended passage between the horn holder
and diaphragm comprising a plurality of 11?
turns of like general character.
MORRIS KEEN.
Witnesses :
Wm. Caner Wiedersheim,
C. D. McVay.
H. W. LONGFELLOW, Jk.
MAGAZINE GKAPHOPHONE.
APPLICATION PILED JULY 15, 1908.
907,826.
Patented Dec. 29, 1908.
WITNESSES:
/ZrPfyy^f*''
ATTORNEY
. h J ".- C-A(S P£TF.f*:- CO., V/A5MNWON, O. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HENRY W. LONGFELLOW, JR., OF ALLSTON, MASSACHUSETTS.
MAG AZINE-GR APHOPHONE .
No. 907,826.
Specification of Letters Patent.
Application filed July 15, 1908. Serial No. 443,670.
Patented Dec. 29, 1908.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Henby W. Long-
fellow, Jr., a citizen of the United States,
residing at Allston, in the county of Suffolk
5 and State of Massachusetts, have invented
certain new and useful Improvements in
Magazine-Graphophones, of which the fol-
lowing is a specification.
My invention relates to record magazines
10 for graphophones which are adapted to be
used in connection with existing machines
and among my objects are the production of
such magazines cheaply, substantially, and
with a freedom from complications. To pro-
15 vide means whereby the person operating the
machine may select the record desired, place
the same on the mandrel, play it and transfer
it to ' the magazine and to provide means
whereby the magazine is automatically
20 locked in position to permit the free passage
of the records to the mandrel. I accomplish
these objects in the manner illustrated in the
accompanying drawing in which —
Figure 1 is a general view, partly in section,
25 of the magazine attached to a graphophone;
Fig. 2 a like view of the magazine ; and Fig.
3 a fragmentary view showing the outer face
of the magazine.
The graphophone may be of any suitable
30 type and is provided with a single mandrel 1.
Adjacent to the end of the mandrel is a guide
2 in the form of a sleeve, flared at the end as
shown. This guide is located in position to
aline with the mandrel and is of sufficient
35 diameter to permit the passage of a record.
A magazine 3, preferably in the form of a
drum, is revolutly mounted on a shaft 3'.
This magazine has a pluralit3T of pockets, 5,
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12, located equidistant
40 from the shaft and each capable of alining
with the guide 2.
Each record 5', 6', 7', etc. has a carrier 14
secured to it at the end and a push rod 15 is
secured to the carrier, preferably by a uni-
45 versal joint thereon which extends through
an aperture 16 in the end of the drum.
A series of numerals on the face of the
drum serves with the aid of a pointer 17, to
locate each record pocket. A ratchet stop
50 18 locks each pocket opposite the guide 2.
In use the magazine pockets are filled with
records, each record having its own carrier
and pushrod secured thereto. The drum is
revolved until the desired record, as indicated
55 by the numeral, is opposite the guide, the
push rod attached to that record is then
lifted and pushed in, thereby transferring the
record from the magazine pocket through
the guide tube onto the machine mandrel
where it is played in the usual manner. The 60
free end of the push rod lies in the hole in the
end of the drum during the reproduction.
After the record is reproduced the push rod is
pulled out carrying the record off the man-
drel, through the flared-mouth guide and 65
back into its magazine pocket. It is appar-
ent that the magazine cannot be revolved
during reproduction because the push rod is
then connected to both machine and maga-
zine. 70
I am aware that graphophones having a
plurality of mandrels, each carrying a record,
are old and do not claim such structures.
I claim: —
1. The combination of a graphophone hav- 75
ing a single mandrel ; a magazine adapted to
contain a plurality of records; a longitudi-
nally extended, cylindrical guideway pro-
jecting from the frame and alining with said
mandrel and magazine; and means for 80
transferring records from the magazine to
the mandrel.
2. The combination of a graphophone hav-
ing a single mandrel; a magazine adapted to
contain a plurality of records; a longitudi- 85
nally extended, cylindrical guideway pro-
jecting from the frame and alining with
mandrel and magazine; means for transfer-
ring records from the magazine to the man-
drel; and means for locking the magazine 90
against motion during the transfer.
3. The combination of a graphophone hav-
ing a single mandrel; a pocketed magazine
re volubly mounted adjacent to the man-
drel; and a guide alining with the pockets 95
and the mandrel.
4. In a record magazine for graphophones;
a plurality of pockets, each adapted to con-
tain a record, a carrier adapted to be secured
to each of the records; and a push rod at- 100
tached to each carrier.
5. A record magazine for graphophones
comprising a revoluble drum, pockets
therein each of which is adapted to contain a
record; a carrier adapted to be secured to 10 :
each of said records; a push rod; and a uni-
versal joint connecting the push rod and
carrier.
6. A record magazine for graphophones
comprising a revoluble drum; pockets there- IK
in each of which is adapted to contain a
i record; a carrier adapted to be secured to
Q
907,826
each record and extending through an aper-
ture in the drum to a point without; and
means for reciprocating said carriers.
7. A magazine for graphophones com-
prising a revoluble drum adapted to con-
tain a plurality of records; means adapted
to be directly secured to each record for
manually reciprocating it; and means for
holding said drum against movement during
the reciprocation. io
In testimony whereof I have affixed my
signature in presence of two witnesses.
HENRY W. LONGFELLOW, Jr.
Witnesses :
Norman S. Waite,
Annie B. Henstis.
H. JOLY. .
COMPRESSED AIE TALKING MACHINE FOE PHONOGRAPHS, GEAMOPHONES, AND OTHER
SPEAKING MACHINES.
****.*+ M*m APPLICATION TILED DEO. 4, 1808.
908,411. Patented Dec. 29, 1908.
J*16
THE MORRIS PETERS CO., WASHINGT&U, D. C
UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE.
HENRY JOLY, OF PARIS, FRANCE, ASSIGNOR TO COMPAGNIE GENERALE DE PHONOGRAPHES,
CINEMATOGRAPHES ET APPAREILS DE PRECISION, OF PARIS, FRANCE.
COMPRESSED-AIR TALKING-MACHINE FOR PHONOGRAPHS, GRAMOPHONES, AND
OTHER SPEAKING-MACHINES.
No. 908,411.
Specification of Letters Patent. Patented Dec. 29, 1908.
Application filed December 4, 1906. Serial No. 346,242.
To all whom it may concern:
Be it known that I, Henry Joly, citizen
of the French Republic, residing at Paris, in
the Department of the Seine, France, have
5 invented certain new and useful Improve-
ments in a Compressed - Air Talking - Ma-
chine for Phonographs, Gramophones, and
other Speaking-Machines, of which the fol-
lowing is a specification.
10 It is known that it is possible to make use
of the escape of compressed air to enunciate
a phonographic record.
In enabling the above mentioned theorem
to be put into practice, and forming the ob-
15 ject of the present invention, there is em-
ployed a valve having a relatively small
surface and of light enough weight for it to
be arranged in the passage of a compressed
air conductor and which follows exactly the
20 undulations of the phonogram. These parts
have as their object to render undulatory the
current of air which they allow to pass.
On the drawings attached to the present
description, and which are given as exam-
25 pies, Figure 1 is a vertical section on an en-
larged scale of a form of carrying out the
invention with a valve, applied to a phono-
graphic disk or cylinder. Fig. 2 is a plan
of the valve of the above mentioned appa-
30 ratus. Figs. 3 and 4 are respectively front
and side vieAvs of another form of carrying
out the invention applied as in Fig. 1. Figs.
5 and 6 are front and side views of the ar-
rangement, Figs. 3 and 4, applied to a disk
35 or plate.
The compressed air provided from any res-
ervoir passes through a flexible tube to the
mouthpiece 1 and flows into a small box 2,
situated in front of the enunciator proper,
40 and which has for its object to form an air
reserve (a fly wheel as one might say). At
the entrance to this box is arranged a parti-
tion 3 formed of two fine wire gage disks
having cotton between them, which serves to
45 filter the air passing to the enunciator.
From the box 2 the air passes into a sec-
ond box 4, forming the case of the enunci-
ator proper. In this box 4 is arranged a
core 5 around which the air circulates freely
50 and which is hermetically attached to one
end of the said box, by means of a screwed
ring 6. The part of the core 5 opposite to
the ring 6 only leaves between its edge and
the interior surface of the box 4 a very small
annular space 9, through which the com- 55
pres-ed air can escape. This same part of
the core 5 is exactly level with the corre-
sponding part of the box 4 forming the
turned over edge 7, so that these parts are
both situated in the same plane. Against 60
the seat thus formed on each side of the space
9 rests the flat annular surface of a valve
8 made of some light material such as, for
example, aluminium. This valve is guided
in its movements by a pin 10 which it car- 65
ries in its center and which passes through
the center of a cover 11 closing the box 4 on
this side. The air coming into this part of
the box 4 can only pass through a channel
14 made in the center of the core 5, and it 70
then goes directly to the trumpet of the in-
strument.
According to the manner in which the
above arrangement is applied, the valve 8
may either carry directly on the outside ex- 75
tremity of the pin 10 the style 12 which fol-
lows the ridge of the record, or it may
receive its impulse from an intermediate
lever 13 which itself carries the style, as
shown in the methods of carrying out the 80
arrangement, Figs. 3, 4 and 5, 6.
The action is as follows: When the
phonograph is working the mass of the
enunciator being comparatively great, the
entire enunciator cannot follow the vibra- 85
tions inscribed on the disk, but it is not the
same with the valve 8, the weight of which
is very small and which actuated by the
pressure of the air, bears continually with its
pin 10 on the phonographic record, thus 90
forming between it and its seat a passage
having a section proportional to the phono-
graphic variations. It is in this space which
is always varying, that the compressed air
escapes. There is thus a reproduction of the 95
sounds by the jet of compressed air which
escapes through the ordinary trumpet of
the phonograph. The holes in the valve 8
have for their object to avoid the effects of
resistances which the pressure on all the 100
surface of the valve during the escape would
produce; the air expanding quickly on the
two faces of this valve equalizes the pressure
on the two sides.
Figs. 1, 3 and 4 show the arrangement 105
applied to a disk phonograph ; in the method
of attachment, Fig. 1, the style is carried
directly by the valve 8, while in the ar-
2
908,411
rangement 3 and 4 it is carried by the inter-
mediate lever 13. It is evident that the
same system may be applied to cylinder
phonographs or disk phonographs and also
E to the machines called gramophones. In
the latter case, as shown by the Figs. 5 and
6 the box 4 of the enunciator is arranged
horizontally. The sinuosities registered on
the disk are then transferred to the valve
10 by a lever 13. The extremity of this lever
carries the needle 16 used in this class of
machines. A spring 15 equalizes laterally
the pressure of the air and the regulation of
the tension of this spring is effected by
15 means of a screw 17.
Having thus described my invention, what
I claim is:
1. In a talking machine, the combination
with a casing having a receiving chamber
20 provided with an annular seat, of a tubular
core extending into said chamber and hav-
ing a seat concentric with that on the cas-
ing, leaving an annular port between them,
a source of compressed air connected with
said receiving chamber, a light valve seat- 25
ing against said seats on the casing and the
core, and a style connected with said valve.
2. In a talking machine, the combination
with a casing having an internal annular
seat facing towards one end thereof, of a 30
compressed air pipe entering said casing in
the rear of said seat, a tubular core entering
the opposite end of said casing and provided
with an annular seat concentric with the
seat on the casing, leaving an annular port 35
between them, a light loose valve seating
against said seats and exposed to the air
pressure coming through said port, and a
style connected with said valve.
In testimony whereof I affix my signature 40
in presence of two witnesses.
HENEY JOLY.
Witnesses :
Henry Danzer,
Marion Crespin.
o*
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11